L320 Range Rover Sport - 2012 WorkShop 6052pág / Manual de Taller y Servicio

Workshop Service Manual for Range Rover Sport L320 2013 Sec.
1
1: General Information
100: Service Information
100-00: General Information
Description and Operation
About This Manual
About This Manual
Important Safety Instructions
How To Use This Manual
General Service Information
Standard Workshop Practices
Health and Safety Precautions
Solvents, Sealants and Adhesives
Road/Roller Testing
Special Tool Glossary
Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and Safety Precautions
DTC: Adaptive Damping Control Module (ADCM)
DTC: Adaptive Speed Control Module (ASCM)
DTC: Air Suspension Control Module
DTC: Anti-Lock Braking System Control Module (ABS)
DTC: Audio Amplifier Control Module (AAM)
DTC: Auto High Beam Control Module (AHBCM)
DTC: Automatic Temperature Control Module (ATC)
DTC: Central Junction Box (CJB)
DTC: Digital Radio Control Module (DRCM)
DTC: Driver/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM)
DTC: Driver/Passenger Seat Module (DSM/PSM)
DTC: Dynamic Response Control Module (DRM)
DTC: Electric Park Brake Control Module (EPBCM)
DTC: Electric Steering Column Lock Control Module (ESCL)
DTC: Fuel Fired Booster Heater Control Module (FFBH)
DTC: Headlamp Leveling Control Module (HCM)
DTC: Instrument Cluster (IC)
DTC: Integrated Audio Module (IAM) - High Line
DTC: Integrated Control Panel (ICP)
DTC: Integrated Control Panel B (ICPB)
DTC: Keyless Vehicle Module (KVM)
DTC: Occupant Classification Sensor Control Module (OCSCM)
DTC: Parking Aid Control Module (PACM)
DTC: Rear Differential Control Module (RDCM)
DTC: Rear Seat Entertainment Control Module (RSECM)
DTC: Rear View Camera (RVC)
DTC: Restraints Control Module (RCM)
DTC: Satellite Radio Control Module (SRCM)
DTC: Steering Angle Sensor Module (SASM)
DTC: Tailgate Control Module (TGCM)
DTC: Terrain Response Switch Pack (TR)
DTC: (TS)
DTC: Module Name: Transfer Case Control Module
DTC: Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
DTC: Transmission Control Module (TCM)
DTC: TV Control Module (TVCM)
TDV6 3.0L Diesel , DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM)
V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM)
100-01: Identification Codes
Identification Codes
100-02: Jacking and Lifting
Jacking
Lifting
Vehicle Recovery
100-03: Maintenance Schedules
Maintenance Schedules - Gasoline Engines
Maintenance Schedules - Diesel Engines
100-11: Vehicle Transportation Aids and Vehicle Storage
New Vehicle Storage
New Vehicle Storage Form
101: Pre-Delivery Information
101-01: Pre-Delivery Inspection Manual
Preliminary
Vehicle Interior
Vehicle Exterior
Road Test
Quality Assurance Checks
101-02: Showroom Preparation
Showroom Preparation
Published: 11-May-2011
General Information - About This Manual
Introduction
This manual has been written in a format that is designed to meet the needs of technicians worldwide. The objective
is to use common formats and include similar content in each manual.
This manual provides general descriptions for accomplishing diagnosis and testing, service and repair work with
tested and effective techniques. Following them will help to ensure reliability.
Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe, reliable operation of all motor
vehicles as well as the personal safety of the individual carrying out the work.
Anyone who departs from the instructions provided in this manual must first establish that personal safety or vehicle
integrity is not compromised by the choice of method, tools or components.
Warnings, Cautions and Notes in This Manual
WARNING: Warnings are used to indicate that failure to follow a procedure correctly may result in personal
injury.
CAUTION: Cautions are used to indicate that failure to follow a procedure correctly may result in damage to the
vehicle or equipment being used.
NOTE: Notes are used to provide additional essential information required to carry out a complete and
satisfactory repair.
Generic warnings or cautions are in their relevant description and operation procedure within section 100-00. If the
generic warnings or cautions are required for a procedure, there will be a referral to the appropriate description and
operation procedure.
If a warning, caution or note only applies to one step, it is placed at the beginning of the specific step.
Trustmark Authoring Standards (TAS) Removal and Installation Procedures
NOTE: TAS style procedures can be identified by steps that have no accompanying step text and the magenta
color of the electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps or clips.
A TAS removal and installation procedure uses a sequence of color illustrations to indicate the order to be followed
when removing/disassembling or installing/assembling a component.
Many of the TAS procedures will have the installation information within the removal steps. These procedures will
have the following note at the beginning of the procedure:
NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.
Items such as O-ring seals, gaskets, seals, self-locking nuts and bolts are to be discarded and new components
installed unless otherwise stated within the procedure. Coated nuts or bolts are to be reused, unless damaged or
otherwise stated within the procedure.
Specification procedures will contain all technical data that are not part of a repair procedure.
TAS Graphics
Colors used in the graphic are as follows:
Blue - Indicates the target item, item to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled

Green and Brown - Indicates a secondary item that needs to be detached, removed/installed or
disassembled/assembled prior to the target item
Magenta - Indicates electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps or clips
Pale Blue - is for the special tool(s) and general equipment.
There may be multiple steps assigned to one illustration.
Numbered pointers are used to indicate the number of electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts,
clamps or clips.
Items in the illustration can be transparent or use cutouts to show hidden detail(s).
TAS Symbols
Symbols are used inside the graphics and in the text area to enhance the information display. The following
paragraphs describe the various types and categories of symbols.
Prohibition symbols advise on prohibited actions to either avoid damage or health and safety related risks.
Health and Safety symbols recommend the use of particular protection equipment to avoid or at least reduce the risk
or severity of possible injuries.
Warning symbols are used to indicate potential risks resulting from a certain component or area.
Instruction symbols are used to apply sealer, lubricant, weight, tape or cleaning detergent to a component.
Location symbols are used to show the location of a component or system within the vehicle.
Gearshift lever or selector lever position symbols are used to show which gearshift lever or selector lever position is
to be set.
Pointer symbols are used to draw the attention to components and give special instructions such as a required
sequence or number of components. The number of components is reflected by the value inside the luty arrow. A
sequence number is located inside the circle. Numbers inside circles are also used to allocate special information
such as tightening torques or chemicals to a particular component.
Movement arrows are used to show three dimensional or rotational movements. These movements can include
specific values inside the symbol if required.
Standard tool symbols recommend the use of certain standard tools. These tools can include dimension values if
required.
The following graphic illustrates a set of symbols that are used to provide detailed information on where to apply a
material.
Measurement symbols provide detailed information on where to carry out a specific measurement. These symbols
can include specific values if required.
Special Tools and Torque Figure(s)
Special tools will be shown with the tool number in the illustration. The special tool number(s), general equipment,
material(s) and torque figure(s) used for the procedure step will be shown in the text column.
General Information - About This Manual
Notes, Cautions and Warnings
Throughout this manual, important information is highlighted by the use of NOTES, CAUTIONS and WARNINGS.
NOTES give additional information on a topic or procedure, CAUTIONS are given to prevent damage to the vehicle,
and WARNINGS are given to prevent personal injury.
General Information - Important Safety Instructions
Safety Notice
Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe, reliable operation of all motor
vehicles, as well as the safety of the person doing the work. This manual provides general directions for
accomplishing service and repair work with tested effective techniques. Following them will help assure reliability.
There are numerous variations in procedures, techniques, tools, and parts for servicing vehicles, as well as in the
skill of the person doing the work. This manual cannot possibly anticipate all such variations and provide advice or
cautions as to each. Accordingly, anyone who departs from the instructions provided in the manual must first
establish that neither personal safety or vehicle integrity is compromised from choices of methods, tools or parts.
Published: 08-Dec-2012
General Information - How To Use This Manual
How to use This Manual
This manual covers all aspects necessary in order to service the vehicle effectively.
The manual is structured into five main sections, General Information, Chassis, Powertrain, Electrical and Body and
Paint with each section dealing with a specific part of a vehicle system.
Each of the five main sections contain sub-sections dealing with items which form a part of that specific system.
Pages at the start of the manual list all sections available. Each section has a contents list detailing, where
applicable, Specifications, Description and Operation, Diagnosis and Testing, General Procedures and Repair
Procedures.
Where components need to be removed or disassembled in sequence, each operation in the sequence will be
identified numerically and also graphically in an accompanying illustration.
NOTE: Dimensions quoted are to design engineering specifications with service limits quoted, where applicable.
Workshop Manual Organization
The five main sections, together with the areas which they cover are given below:
Section 1 - General Information.

Section 2 - Chassis.
Section 3 - Powertrain.
Section 4 - Electrical.
Section 5 - Body and Paint.
Sub-section numbers appear after the initial section number, for example, Section 412-03 covers air conditioning,
which is part of the electrical section.
In the number given above, the first digit of the number '4' indicates the section i.e. Electrical.
The second and third digits '12' of the number indicate the vehicle system i.e. Air Conditioning.
The last two digits of the number '03' indicate the part of the system covered by the sub-section i.e. Air
Conditioning Compressor.
General Information - General Service Information
Introduction
This manual has been written in a format that is designed to meet the needs of Land Rover technicians worldwide
and to assist them in the efficient repair and maintenance of Land Rover vehicles.
This manual provides descriptions and methods for accomplishing adjustment, service and repair work using tested
and effective procedures. Following these procedures will help ensure product reliability.
Special Tools
The Special Tool(s) Table provided at the beginning of each procedure lists the special tool(s) required to carry out
repair operations within that specific procedure. Wherever possible, illustrations are provided which will assist
technicians in identifying the special tool(s) required and also showing such tool(s) in use.
Special tools may be obtained from the manufacturer, SPX Tools, the addresses of their branches will be found in the
Special Tools Glossary contained within this Section.
Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe and reliable operation of all
motor vehicles as well as ensuring the personal safety of the individual carrying out the work.
This manual cannot possibly anticipate all such variations and provide advice or cautions as to each. Any person
who departs from the instructions provided in this manual must first establish that they compromise neither their
personal safety nor the vehicle integrity by their choice of methods, tools or parts.
Individuals who undertake their own repairs should have some skill or training and limit repairs to components
which could not affect the safety of the vehicle or its passengers. Any repairs required to safety critical items such
as steering, brakes, suspension or supplemental restraint system should be carried out by a Land Rover Dealer.
Repairs to such items should NEVER be attempted by untrained individuals.
Warnings, Cautions and Notes which appear in this manual
As you read through this manual, you will come across Warnings, Cautions and Notes. A Warning, Caution or Note is
placed at the beginning of a series of steps. If the warning, caution or note only applies to one step, it is placed at
the beginning of the specific step after the step number.
Warnings, Cautions and Notes have the following meanings:
Warning: Procedures which must be followed to avoid the possibility of personal injury.
Caution: Calls attention to procedures which must be followed to avoid damage to components.
Note: Gives helpful information.
References
References to the Left Hand (LH) or Right Hand (RH) side given in this manual are made when viewing the vehicle or
unit from the rear.
Fault Diagnostic Equipment
The vehicle is equipped with a number of electronic control systems to provide optimum performance of the
vehicle's systems.
Diagnostic Equipment (T4) is available and must be used where specified. The use of this equipment will assist with
the fault diagnostic abilities of the Dealer workshop. In particular, the equipment can be used to interrogate the
electronic systems for diagnosis of faults which may become evident during the life of the vehicle.
This manual is produced as a reference source to supplement T4.
Features of the equipment include:
a. Fully upgradeable support for the technician
b. Structured diagnostics to accommodate all skill levels
c. Direct print-out of screen information and test results
Testing the vehicle
Operations covered in this manual do not include reference to testing the vehicle after repair. It is essential that
work is inspected and tested after completion and if necessary, a road test of the vehicle is carried out, particularly
where safety related items are concerned.
Repairs and Replacement Parts
Land Rover parts are manufactured to the same exacting standards as the original factory fitted components. For
this reason, it is essential that only genuine Land Rover parts are used during maintenance or repair.
Attention is particularly drawn to the following points concerning repairs and the fitting of replacement parts and
accessories.
Safety features and corrosion prevention treatments embodied in the vehicle may be impaired if other than Land
Rover recommended parts are fitted. In certain territories, legislation prohibits the fitting of parts not to
manufacturer's specification. Torque wrench setting figures, where given, must be adhered to and locking devices,
where specified must be used. If the efficiency of a locking device is impaired during removal it must be replaced.
Owners purchasing accessories whilst travelling abroad must ensure that the accessory and its fitted location on the
vehicle conform to legal requirements.
The terms of the vehicle warranty may be invalidated by the fitting of parts other than those recommended by Land
Rover.
NOTE: The fitting of non-approved Land Rover parts and accessories or the carrying out of non-approved
alterations or conversions may be dangerous. Any of the foregoing could affect the safety of the vehicle and
occupants; also, the terms and conditions of the vehicle warranty may also be invalidated .
All Land Rover recommended parts have the full backing of the vehicle warranty.
Land Rover Dealers are obliged to supply only Land Rover recommended parts.
Specifications
Land Rover are constantly seeking to improve the specification, design and production of their vehicles and
alterations take place accordingly. Whilst every effort is made to ensure the accuracy of this Manual, it should not be
regarded as an infallible guide to current specifications of any particular vehicle.
This Manual does not constitute an offer for sale of any particular vehicle. Land Rover dealers are not agents of Land
Rover and have no authority to bind the manufacturer by any expressed or implied undertaking or representation.
Published: 05-Jul-2013
General Information - Standard Workshop Practices
Vehicle in Workshop
When working on a vehicle in the workshop always make sure that:
Where practicable, the parking brake is applied and the wheels are securely chocked to prevent the vehicle
moving forwards or backwards.
Whenever possible, the ignition key is removed before any work is carried out on the vehicle.
If the engine is to be run, there is adequate ventilation, or an extraction hose is used to remove exhaust
fumes.
There is adequate room to raise the vehicle and remove the wheels, if necessary.
Fender covers are always installed if any work is to be carried out in the engine compartment.
Where practicable, the battery is disconnected if working on the engine, underneath the vehicle, or if the
vehicle is raised.
Prior to disconnecting the battery, refer to the Electrical Section of this manual - Battery
disconnection/connection.For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00 Battery and Charging
System - General Information, Specifications).
CAUTION: When electric arc welding on a vehicle, always disconnect the generator wiring to prevent the
possibility of a surge of current causing damage to the internal components of the generator.
If using welding equipment on the vehicle, a suitable fire extinguisher is readily available.
Towing the Vehicle
WARNING: When towing is necessary, reference must be made to the Jacking, Lifting and Towing Section of
this Manual.
When the vehicle is being towed the ignition switch must be in position II (steering lock released and warning lights
illuminated). Only then will the steering, turn signal lamps, horn and stop lamps be operational. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury. It must be noted that with the engine not running, the power
steering and brake booster will be inoperative therefore, greater effort will be needed to steer the vehicle and apply
the brakes.
Battery - General
Prior to carrying out any procedures which involve disconnecting/ or connecting the battery, refer to
the Electrical Section of this manual - Battery disconnection/connection.For additional information, refer to:
Specifications (414-00 Battery and Charging System - General Information, Specifications).
CAUTIONS:
A discharged battery condition may have been caused by an electrical short circuit. If this condition exists there
will be an apparently live circuit on the vehicle even when all normal circuits are switched off. This can cause arcing
when the jumper cables are connected.
While it is not recommended that the vehicle is jump started, it is recognized that this may occasionally be the
only practical way to mobilize a vehicle. Prior to attempting a jump start, refence must be made to the Electrical
Section of this manual - Jump Starting.
Following jump starting of a disabled vehicle, the discharged battery must be checked for serviceability and
recharged off the vehicle as soon as possible to avoid permanent damage.
Do not rely on the generator to restore a discharged battery. For a generator to recharge a battery, it would take in
excess of eight hours continuous driving with no additional loads placed on the battery.
Always make sure that the jumper cables are adequate for the task.
Always make sure that the slave battery is of the same voltage as the vehicle battery. The batteries must be
connected in parallel.
Always make sure that switchable electric circuits are switched off before connecting jumper cables. This
reduces the risk of arcing occurring when the final connection is made.
General Installation Instructions
Component removal
Whenever possible, clean components and the surrounding area before removal.
Blank off openings exposed by component removal.

Following disconnection, seal fuel, oil or hydraulic lines immediately using suitable blanking plugs or caps.
Seal open ends of exposed oilways using suitable tapered hardwood plugs or conspicuous plastic plugs.
Immediately a component is removed, place it in a suitable container; use a separate container for each
component and its associated parts.
Clean bench and provide marking materials, labels and containers before disassembling components.
Disassembling
Observe scrupulous cleanliness when disassembling components, particularly when brake, fuel, air suspension or
hydraulic system parts are disassembled. A particle of dirt or cloth fragment could cause a serious malfunction if
trapped in these systems.
Blow out all tapped holes, crevices, oilways and fluid passages with dry, compressed air.
WARNING: Suitable eye protection must be worn.
Use suitable marker ink to identify mating parts, do not use a scriber or centre punch as they could initiate
cracks or distortion.
Wire or tape mating parts together where necessary to prevent accidental interchange.
Suitably identify parts which are to be renewed and to those parts requiring further inspection. Keep these
parts separate.
To make sure that the correct replacement part has been obtained, do not discard a part due for renewal
until after comparing it with the new part.
Cleaning components
Always use cleaning agents which are suitable for the work being undertaken and the components being cleaned.
NEVER use gasoline (petrol) as a cleaning agent (degreaser). Always make sure that the component being cleaned
is compatible with the cleaning agent.
Always follow the manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of cleaning agents and make sure that the
environment in which the work is being undertaken is suitable. See Health and Safety Precautions for further
information regarding cleaning.
General inspection of components
All components should be inspected for wear or damage before reassembling.
Always make sure that component to be inspected is clean and free from oil or grease.
When a component is to be checked dimensionally against design specified values, use the appropriate
measuring equipment i.e. micrometers, verniers, surface plates, dial test indicators (DTI).
Always make sure that all measuring equipment is correctly calibrated before use.
Reject a component which is not within specified values/limits or if it appears to be damaged.
A component may be reinstalled if dimensions obtained during checking are at the maximum tolerance limit
and it is in an undamaged condition.
Bearing journal clearances should be checked where necessary using Plastigage.
Gaskets, seals and O-ring seals are to be re-used unless damaged.
Joints and Joint Faces
All gaskets should be installed dry unless stated otherwise. Always apply the specified lubricant to O-rings and
install O-rings using the fingers only.
Use gasket removal spray and/or plastic scrapers to remove traces of old gasket.
CAUTION: DO NOT use metal scrapers or emery cloth as these may damage the sealing surfaces.
Many joints use sealants instead of gaskets as the sealing medium. Where this is the case, the sealant together with
its part number will be found listed in the relevant repair operation and also in the sealants table.
CAUTION: Always remove all traces of the old sealant prior to reassembly. Use plastic scrapers, specified
solvents where available or dry, lint free cloth. DO NOT use metal scrapers or emery cloth as these may damage the
sealing surfaces. Make sure that sealing surfaces are free from oil or grease as sealants will not adhere properly to
contaminated surfaces.
Do not allow sealant to enter tapped holes or oilways.
Locking Devices
Always replace locking devices with one of the same design and of the correct size.
Tab washers
Always release locking tabs before loosening fixings, do not reuse tab washers.
Locknuts
Always use a backing spanner when loosening and tightening locknuts, brake and fuel pipe unions.
Roll pins
Always install new roll pins of the correct size.
Circlips
Always install new circlips ensuring that they are of the correct size for the groove.
Woodruff keys
Woodruff keys may be reused provided there is no indication of wear or distortion.
Remove any burrs from edges of keyways using a fine file.
Split pins
Never attempt to straighten and reuse a split pin, always make sure that replacement pins are of the correct size for
the hole in which they are to be installed.
Screw Threads
Damaged nuts, bolts and screws must always be discarded. Attempting to recut or repair damaged threads
with a tap or die impairs the strength and fit of the threads and is not recommended.
NOTES:
During certain repair operations, it may be necessary to remove traces of thread locking agents using a tap.
Where this is necessary, the instruction to do so will appear in the relevant operation and it is essential that a tap of
the correct size and thread is used.
New Taptite bolts when used cut their own threads on the first application.
Some bolts are coated with a thread locking agent and unless stated otherwise, they must not be reused.
New bolts having the same part number as the original must always be installed. When nuts or bolts are to
be discarded, the repair operation and relevant torque chart will include an instruction to that effect. Do not
use proprietary thread locking agents as they may not meet the specification required. See also Encapsulated
('Patched') Bolts and Screws.
Always make sure that replacement nuts and bolts are at least equal in strength to those that they are
replacing. Castellated nuts must not be loosened to accept a split pin except in recommended cases when this
forms part of an adjustment.
Do not allow oil or grease to enter blind holes, the hydraulic action resulting from tightening the bolt or stud
can split the housing and also give a false torque reading.
Always tighten a nut, bolt or screw to the specified torque figure, damaged or corroded threads can give a
false torque reading.
Nut and bolt loosening and tightening sequences, where given, must ALWAYS be followed. Distortion of
components or faulty sealing of joints will result if the sequences are not followed. Where an instruction is
given to tighten in stages, these stages must be adhered to; do not attempt to combine stages particularly
where certain stages involve tightening by degrees.
To check or re-tighten a fixing to a specified torque, first loosen a quarter of a turn, then retighten to the
specified torque figure.
Unless instructed otherwise, do not lubricate bolt or nut threads prior to installing.
Where it is stated that bolts and screws may be reused, the following procedures must be carried out:
Check that threads are undamaged.

Remove all traces of locking agent from the threads.
CAUTION: DO NOT use a wire brush; take care that threads are not damaged.
Make sure that threads are clean and free from oil or grease.
Apply the specified locking agent to the bolt threads.
Bolt and Nut Identification
An ISO metric bolt or screw made of steel and larger than 6 mm in diameter can be identified by either of the
symbols ISO M or M embossed or indented on top of the bolt head.
In addition to marks identifying the manufacturer, the top of the bolt head is also marked with symbols indicating
the strength grade e.g. 8.8, 10.9, 12.9, 14.9. Alternatively, some bolts and screws have the M and strength grade
symbol stamped on the flats of the hexagon.
Encapsulated ('Patched') bolts and screws
Encapsulated ('patched') bolts and screws have a thread locking agent applied to the threads during manufacture.
Most thread locking agents are colored, the band of color extending for 360 degrees around the thread. Some
locking agents however, are neutral in color and may not be so easily identified apart from a slightly darker area of
thread where the locking agent has been applied. The locking agent is released and activated by the tightening
process and is then chemically cured to provide the locking action.
Self-locking bolts and screws
Unless stated in a specific repair procedure, self-locking bolts and screws i.e. nylon patched or trilobular thread can
be reused provided that resistance is felt when the locking portion enters the female thread.
Nylon patched bolts and screws have a locking agent either applied to, or inserted in the threaded portion. They are
identified by the presence of a colored section of thread extending approximately 180 degrees around the thread or
by a colored plug inserted into the bolt.
Trilobular bolts have a special thread form which creates a slight interference with the thread of the hole or nut into
which it is screwed.
CAUTION: Do Not reuse self-locking fasteners in critical locations e.g. drive plates/flywheel or engine bearings.
Do not install non self-locking fasteners where a self-locking fastener is specified.
Trilobular bolts should not be used as a substitute for patched bolts.
Nut identification
A nut with an ISO metric thread is marked on one face or one of the hexagonal flats with the strength grade symbol
8, 12, 14. Some nuts with the strength grade 4, 5 or 6 are also marked and some have the metric symbol M on the
hexagonal flat opposite the strength grade marking.
A clock face system is sometimes used as an alternative method of indicating the strength grade. The external
chamfers or a face of the nut is marked in a position relative to the appropriate hour mark on a clock face to
indicate the strength grade.
A dot is used to locate the 12 o'clock position and a dash to indicate the strength grade. If the grade is above 12,
two dots identify the 12 o'clock position.
When tightening a slotted or castellated nut, never loosen it to insert a split pin except where specified as part of an
adjustment procedure. If difficulty is experienced in correctly positioning the slot, alternative washers or nuts should
be selected.
Where a nut is tightened to adjust or maintain bearing pre-load, the tightening procedure must be adhered to.
Self-locking nuts
Unless stated otherwise, self-locking nuts once removed must be discarded and new nuts of the same type and
strength grade installed.
Air Suspension
Always make sure that suitable eye protection is worn when working on the air suspension system.
Ball and Roller Bearings
When removing and installing bearings, make sure that the following practices are observed to make sure
component serviceability:
CAUTION: Service tools have been developed for removing the majority of bearings; these must always be
used where specified.
Remove all traces from bearing under inspection by cleaning with a suitable degreasant; maintain absolute
cleanliness throughout operations.
Conduct a visual inspection for markings on rolling elements, raceways, outer surfaces of outer or inner
surfaces of inner rings. Reject any bearings found to be marked since marking in these areas indicates onset
of wear.
Hold inner race of bearing between finger and thumb of one hand and rotate outer race to check that it
revolves absolutely smoothly. Repeat holding outer race and rotating inner race. DO NOT spin the bearing.
Rotate outer ring gently using a reciprocating movement whilst holding inner ring; feel for any check or
obstruction to rotation. Reject bearing if movement is not absolutely smooth.
Check bearing for blueing or signs of overheating.
Lubricate bearing with the specified lubricant.
Inspect bearing surface of shaft and bearing housing for discoloration or other markings which indicate
overheating of bearing or movement between bearing and seating.
Before installing bearing, make sure that shaft and bearing housing are clean and free from burrs.
If one bearing of a pair shows signs of wear, overheating etc., it is advisable to replace bearings as a pair
unless it is suspected that one bearing may have been faulty when installed, was installed incorrectly or the
fault arose due to oil seal failure.
Never reinstall a bearing unless it is in a fully serviceable condition.
When installing a bearing to a shaft, only apply force to the inner ring of the bearing. When installing a
bearing into a housing, only apply force to the outer ring of the bearing.
CAUTION: Service tools have been developed for installing the majority of bearings; these must always be
used where specified.
In the case of grease lubricated bearings, fill the space between the bearing and outer seal with the
recommended grade of grease before installing the seal.
CAUTION: When a waxed oil seal (installed dry) type of oil seal is to be installed, take great care that grease
does not contaminate the running surface of the seal.
Always make suitable reference marks between the components of separable bearings e.g. taper roller
bearings when disassembling to make sure correct location of components when assembling. Never install
new rollers in an outer ring, always install a new bearing assembly.
Brake Pads and Linings
Always install the correct grade and specification of brake pads and linings. When replacing these items, always
replace as complete axle sets.
Brake Hydraulics
Always observe the following recommendations when working on the braking system:
WARNING: Do not intermix brake fluid of different specifications.
Always use two spanners when loosening or tightening brake pipes or hose connections.
Make sure that hoses run in a natural curve and are not kinked or twisted.
Install brake pipes and hoses securely in their retaining clips and make sure that they cannot contact a
potential chafing point.
Containers used for brake fluid must be kept absolutely clean.
Do not store brake fluid in unsealed containers, the fluid will absorb water which will lower the boiling point of
the fluid.
Do not allow brake fluid to be contaminated with other fluids such as mineral oil and do not put brake fluid in
a container which has previously been used for storing other fluids.
Do not reuse brake fluid which has been bled from the system.
Always use brake fluid or a suitable brake cleaning fluid to clean hydraulic components.
Unless stated otherwise, use only clean brake fluid to lubricate hydraulic seals and components.
Always install blanking plugs to hoses, pipes or components immediately after disconnection.
Check thread compatibility of original equipment with replacement components.
Observe absolute cleanliness when working with hydraulic components.
Pipes and Hoses
When removing or installing flexible hydraulic pipes and hoses, make sure that the following procedures are
observed to make sure component serviceability:
Prior to removal, clean area around hose or pipe end which is to be disconnected.
Obtain appropriate blanking plugs or caps before disconnecting hose or pipe end fittings in order that
connections can be plugged immediately following disconnection.
Always install blanking plugs or caps to pipes and unions immediately following disconnection.
Clean hose or pipe and blow through with an air line.
WARNING: Suitable eye protection must be worn.
Check hoses externally for cracks, separation of plies, security of end fittings and external damage; replace
faulty hoses.
Check pipes for signs of corrosion and chafing, replace as necessary.
CAUTION: If pipes are found to be chafed, rectify clips, mounting points etc., to prevent further problems in
service.
When installing hoses, make sure that no unnecesary bends are introduced and that hoses are not kinked,
twisted or positioned close to potential chafing points.
When installing pipes, make sure that pipes are positioned and clipped clear of potential chafing points.
Always replace sealing washers installed to banjo bolts, sealing plugs etc.
Always use a backing spanner when tightening unions and do not overtighten union nuts or banjo bolts.
After any work on hydraulic systems, always check for fluid leaks whilst a second operator applies working
pressure to the brake pedal or operates the system that has been worked on.
Fuel system hoses
All fuel hoses are made up of two laminations, an armored rubber outer sleeve and an inner viton core. Whenever a
hose is removed, make sure that the inner bore is inspected to check that the viton lining has not become separated
from the outer sleeve.
WARNING: Never attempt to repair fuel foses or rectify leaking 'quick-fit' connectors the fuel hose and
connectors must be replaced as an assembly.
Fuel system hose clips
Certain fuel system hose clips are of the 'break-off head' type where a slot in the screw head shears off when the
clip is tightened to a specific torque. These clips may be removed using a screwdriver and must be replaced with
new clips on reassembly. Clips must be tightened until the portion of the slot shears off. Do not attempt to tighten
clips by any other method, do not install any other type of clip.
Cooling system hoses
CAUTION: The following precautions must be observed to make sure that the integrity of the cooling system
hoses and their connection to the system is maintained.
Hose orientation and connection
Correct orientation of cooling system hoses is important to make sure that hoses do not become fatigued or
damaged through contact with adjacent components.
Where orientation marks are provided on the hose and corresponding component, the marks must be aligned when
the hose is installed. Hoses must be installed fully on to their connection points, usually a moulded form on a pipe
provides a positive indicator.
Hose clips
Markings are usually provided on the hose to indicate the correct clip position. If no markings are provided, position
the clip directly behind the retaining lip at the end of the stub pipe. Worm drive clips should be orientated with the
crimped side of the drive housing facing towards the end of the hose or the hose may become pinched between the
clip and the stub pipe retaining lip. Unless otherwise stated, worm drive clips should be tightened to 3 Nm (2 lbf.ft).
Make sure that hose clips do not foul adjacent components.
Oetiker clips may be removed by bending the tag (arrowed) and releasing the free end of the clip. Clips must not be
reused. When installing new clips, make sure clip is positioned on hose before tightening and make sure that when
clip is tightened, the tag is located in the longitudinal slot in the free end of the clip (arrowed in illustration).
Heat protection
Always make sure that heatshields and protective sheathing are in good condition; replace if damage is evident.
Particular care must be taken when routing hoses close to hot engine components such as the exhaust manifolds
and exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) pipes. Hoses will relax and deflect slightly when hot, make sure this movement
is taken into account when routing and securing hoses.
Electrical Precautions
General
The following guidelines are intended to make sure the safety of the operator whilst preventing damage to the
electrical and electronic components of this vehicle.
Equipment
Prior to commencing any test procedure on the vehicle, make sure that the relevant test equipment is working
correctly and that any harness or connectors are in good condition. It is particularly important to check the condition
of all plugs and leads of mains operated equipment.
Polarity
Never reverse connect the vehicle battery and always make sure the correct polarity when connecting test
equipment.
High voltage circuits
Whenever disconnecting live ht circuits, always use insulated pliers and never allow the open end of the ht lead to
contact other components, particularly ECU's.
Vehicles installed with Bi-Xenon headlamp bulbs
WARNING: The following precautions must be observed as failure to comply may result in exposure to ultra-
violet rays, severe electric shock, burns or risk of an explosion.
Safety goggles and gloves must be worn.

Make sure that headlamps are switched off before removing bulbs.
Do not touch the glass portion of the bulb.
On no account should headlamps be switched on with the bulb removed from the headlamp.
Bulb testing may only be carried out with the bulb installed in the headlamp.
Bulbs must be disposed of in accordance with the local authority bye-laws.
Connectors and harnesses
The engine compartment of a vehicle is a particularly hostile environment for electrical components and connectors.
Always observe the following:
Make sure electrically related items are dry and oil free before disconnecting/connecting test equipment.
Make sure that disconnected multiplugs and sensors are protected from any possible oil, coolant or other
liquid contamination. Any such contamination could impair performance or lead to component failure.
Never force connectors apart or pull on the wiring harness.
Always make sure locking tabs are disengaged before disconnecting multiplugs etc. and make sure that
correct orientation is achieved before connection.
Make sure that any protection covers, insulation etc. are replaced if disturbed.
Having confirmed that a component is faulty, carry out the following:
Switch off the ignition and disconnect the battery.

Remove the component and support the disconnected harness.
When replacing electrical components, keep oily hands away from electrical connections and make sure that
locking tabs on connectors are fully engaged.
Battery Disconnection/Connection
Always refer to the Electrical Section of this manual - Battery Connection/Disconnection prior to attempting to
connect or disconnect the battery.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00 Battery and Charging System - General Information,
Specifications).
Fuel Handling Precautions
The following information lists basic precautions which must be observed if fuel is to be handled safely. It also
outlines other areas of risk which must not be ignored. As this information is issued for basic guidance only, consult
your local Fire Department where any doubt as to personal and environmental safety exists - See also Health and
Safety Precautions.
General precautions
Always have the correct type of fire extinguisher containing Foam, CO2, Gas or powder accessible when handling or
draining fuel or dismantling fuel systems. Fire extinguishers must also be located in areas where fuel is stored.
Make sure that suitable warning signs are exhibited.
Keep all sources of ignition well away from areas where fuel is being handled.
Make sure that any leadlamps are flameproof and kept clear of spillage.
WARNINGS:
Do not disassemble or reassemble fuel system components whilst vehicle is over a pit.
No one should be permitted to repair components associated with fuel without first having specialist training.
Always disconnect the vehicle battery before carrying out disassembly, reassembly or draining work on a fuel
system.
Fuel tank and system draining
Draining must be carried out in accordance with the procedures given in the relevant Fuel System section of this
manual.
WARNINGS:
Never drain fuel or work on a fuel system while the vehicle is over a pit. Extraction or draining of fuel must be
carried out in a well ventilated area.
Always attach fuel vapor warning labels to fuel tanks immediately after draining.
Containers used for storing fuel must be clearly marked with the contents and placed in a safe storage area
which meets the requirements of the local authority.
CAUTION: Some fuel lines are now installed with 'quick release' connectors. If a connector is damaged, no
attempt must be made to repair the connector, a new fuel line and connector(s) assembly must be installed.
Always release pipe clips fully before attempting to disconnect fuel pipes.
Fuel tank repairs
CAUTION: No attempt should be made to repair a plastic fuel tank. If the structure of the tank is damaged, a
new tank must be installed.
Oil seals
Never use a seal which has been improperly stored or handled.
Take great care when removing old seals that the sealing surfaces and seal housing are not damaged.
Carefully examine seal before installing to make sure that it is clean and undamaged.
Make sure that the surface on which the seal is to run and also the seal housing is clean and free from burrs
or scratches. Renew the component if the sealing surface cannot be restored.
Special tools and protection sleeves are provided for installing the majority of seals and must be used when
specified.
Many seals are now coated with a protective wax and DO NOT need to be lubricated prior to installing.
Always check the relevant repair procedure which will state if a seal must be installed dry. Never touch these
seals with oily hands as the oil will contaminate the protective coating and affect the sealing properties of the
seal; also, make sure that installing tools and protection sleeves are free from oil and grease. Seals which
must be lubricated prior to installing should have the recommended lubricant applied to the areas specified in
the repair procedure.
Make sure that a seal is installed the correct way round. For example, the lip of the seal must face towards
the lubricant which it is sealing.
When installing an oil seal, make sure that it is positioned square to shaft and housing. Where the seal is to
be installed to a housing prior to installing over a shaft, take care not to allow the weight of an unsupported
shaft to rest on the seal.
Always use the recommended special tool and protection sleeve to install an oil seal. If no tool is specified,
use a suitable mandrel approximately 0.4 mm (0.015 in) smaller than the outside diameter of the seal. Use
adhesive tape on the shaft to protect the sealing lip of the seal.
Press or drift the seal in to the depth of its housing if the housing is shouldered or flush with the face of the
housing where no shoulder is provided. Make sure that the seal is not tilted in the housing when it is
installed.
Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) Precautions
WARNING: Do not install rear facing child seats in the front passenger seat.
The SRS contains components which are potentially hazardous to service personnel if not handled correctly. The
following guidelines and precautions are intended to alert personnel to potential sources of danger and emphasise
the importance of ensuring the integrity of the SRS components installed to the vehicle.
WARNING: The following precautions MUST be adhered to when working on the SRS system:
The correct procedures must always be used when working on SRS components.
Persons working on the SRS system must be fully trained and have been issued with the safety
guidelines.
The airbag modules contain extremely flammable and hazardous compounds. Contact with water,
acids or heavy metals may produce harmful or explosive results. Do not dismantle, incinerate or
bring into contact with electricity before the unit has been deployed.
Always replace a seat belt assembly that has withstood the strain of a severe vehicle impact or if
the webbing shows signs of fraying.
Always disconnect the vehicle battery before carrying out any electric welding on a vehicle
installed with an SRS system.
CAUTION: Do not expose airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners to temperatures exceeding 85° C (185°
F).
It should be noted that these precautions are not restricted to operations performed when servicing the SRS system.
The same care should be exercised when working on ancillary systems and components located in the vicinity of
SRS components; these include but are not limited to:
Steering wheel airbag, rotary coupler.

Passenger front airbag.
Head airbag modules - front and rear.
Seat belt pre-tensioners.
SRS harnesses, link leads and connectors.
Side (thorax) air bags.
Making the system safe
Before working on or in the vicinity of SRS components, make sure the system is rendered safe by performing the
following operations:
Remove the ignition key.

Disconnect battery, earth lead first.
Wait 2 minutes for the SRS power circuit to discharge before commencing work.
NOTE: The SRS uses energy reserve capacitors to keep the system active in the event of electrical supply
failure under crash conditions. It is necessary to allow the capacitors sufficient time to discharge (2 minutes) in
order to avoid the risk of accidental deployment.
Installation
In order to make sure system integrity, it is essential that the SRS system is regularly checked and maintained so
that it is ready for effective operation in the event of a collision. Carefully inspect SRS components before
installation. Do not install a part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or
deformation.
WARNING: The integrity of the SRS systems is critical for safety reasons. Make sure the following precautions
are always adhered to:
Do not install accessories or other objects to trim panels which cover ITS airbags.
Never install used SRS components from another vehicle or attempt to repair an SRS component.
When repairing an SRS system, only use genuine new parts.
Never apply electrical power to an SRS component unless instructed to do so as part of an
approved test procedure.
Special fixings are necessary for installing an airbag module – do not use other fixings and make
sure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.
Always use new fixings when replacing an SRS component.
CAUTIONS:
Take care not to trap airbag modules when installing interior trim components.
Make sure SRS components are not contaminated by oil or grease.
NOTES:
Following seat belt pre-tensioner deployment, the seat belts can still be used as conventional seat belts but
will need to be replaced as soon as possible to make sure full SRS protection.
If the SRS components are to be replaced, the part number/bar code of the new unit must be recorded.
SRS component testing precautions
The SRS components are triggered using relatively low operating currents, always adhere to the following :
WARNING: Never use a multimeter or other general purpose equipment on SRS components. Use only T4 to
diagnose system faults.
WARNING: Do not use electrical test equipment on the SRS harness while it is connected to any of the SRS
components, it may cause accidental deployment and injury.
Handling and storage
Always observe the following precautions when handling SRS components:
Never drop an SRS component. The airbag diagnostic control unit is a particularly shock sensitive device and
must be handled with extreme care. Airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners could deploy if subjected to
a strong shock.
Never wrap your arms around an airbag module. If a module has to be carried, hold it by the cover with the
cover uppermost and the base away from your body.
Never transport airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners in the passenger compartment of a vehicle.
Always use the luggage compartment of the vehicle for carrying airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioner
units.
Never attach anything to an airbag cover or any trim component covering an airbag module. Do not allow
anything to rest on top of an airbag module.
Always keep components cool, dry and free from contamination.
Never apply grease or cleaning solvents to seat belt pre-tensioner units, component failure could result.
Always store an airbag module with the deployment side uppermost. If it is stored deployment side down,
accidental deployment will propel the airbag module with sufficient force to cause serious injury.
Keep new airbag modules in their original packaging until just prior to installing. Place the old module in the
empty packaging for carriage.
WARNINGS:
When handling an inflatable tubular structure (ITS) airbag module, hold by the gas generator housing, DO NOT
hold by the airbag. Do not wrap the thumb around the gas generator while holding. Do not drape airbag over
shoulder or around neck. For seat buckle type pre-tensioners, hold by the piston tube, with the open end of the
piston tube pointing towards the ground and the buckle facing away from your body. Do not cover the end of the
piston tube. DO NOT hold buckle type pre-tensioners by the bracket assembly or cable. Never point the piston tube
towards your body or other people.
Airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners are classed as explosive devices. For overnight and longer term
storage, they must be stored in a secure steel cabinet which has been approved as suitable for the purpose and has
been registered with the local authority.
Store airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners in a designated storage area. If there is no designated
storage area available, store in the locked luggage compartment of the vehicle and inform the workshop supervisor.
CAUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag module making it inoperative. If you
suspect the airbag module has been damaged, install a new module and refer to the deployment/disposal procedures
for disposal of the damaged module.
SRS harness and connectors
Always observe the following precautions with regards to SRS system electrical wiring:
Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring.

Never install electrical equipment such as a mobile telephone, two-way radio or in-car entertainment system
in such a way that it could generate electrical interference in the airbag harness. Seek specialist advice when
installing such equipment.
NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by a special yellow outer sleeve protecting the wires (black with yellow
stripe protective coverings are sometimes used).
WARNING: Always make sure SRS wiring is routed correctly. Be careful to avoid trapping or pinching the SRS
wiring.
WARNING: Do not leave the connectors hanging loose or allow SRS components to hang from their harnesses.
Look for possible chafing points.
Side impact crash sensor inspection
After any degree of side body damage, inspect the side impact crash sensors. Replace a crash sensor if there is any
sign of damage.
CAUTION: Take extra care when painting or carrying out bodywork repairs in the vicinity of the crash sensors.
Avoid direct exposure of the crash sensors or link harnesses to heat guns, welding or spraying equipment. Take care
not to damage sensor or harness when reinstalling components.
Rotary coupler
CAUTION: Always follow the procedure for installing and checking the rotary coupler as instructed in the SRS
repairs section. Comply with all safety and installation procedures to make sure the system functions correctly.
Observe the following precautions:
Do not unlock and rotate the rotary coupler when it is removed from the vehicle.
Do not turn the road wheels when the rotary coupler is removed from the vehicle.
Always make sure the rotary coupler is removed and installed in its central position and with the front road
wheels in the straight ahead position - refer to SRS repair section for the correct removal and installation
procedure.
If a new rotary coupler is being installed, make sure the locking tab holding the coupler's rotational position is
not broken; units with a broken locking tab must not be used.
Airbag location labels
WAITING AIRBAG LOCATION AND DESIGN LABELS - DUE MARCH - NEIL HARRISON 46404
Airbag and pre-tensioner deployment
WARNING: During deployment parts of the airbag module become hot enough to burn you. Wait 30 minutes
after deployment before touching the airbag module.
Deployment procedures and precautions as detailed in this manual should be strictly adhered to. Only personnel
who have undergone the appropriate training should undertake deployment of airbag and pre-tensioner modules.
The following precautions must be complied with:
Only use deployment equipment approved for the intended purpose.

Deployment of airbag / pre-tensioner modules must be performed in a well ventilated area which has been
designated for the purpose.
Make sure airbag / pre-tensioner modules are not damaged or ruptured before attempting to deploy.
Where local legislation exists, notify the relevant authorities of intention to deploy airbag and pretensioner
units.
When deploying airbag pre-tensioner units, make sure that all personnel are at least 15 metres (45 feet)
away from the deployment zone.
Make sure deployment tool is connected correctly, in compliance with the instructions detailed in the SRS
section of this manual. In particular, make sure deployment tool is NOT connected to battery supply before
connecting to airbag module connector.
When deploying seat belt pre-tensioners, make sure pre-tensioner unit is secured correctly to the seat.
When removing deployed airbag modules and pre-tensioner units, wear protective clothing. Use gloves and
seal deployed units in a plastic bag.
Following deployment of any component of the SRS system within the vehicle, all SRS components must be
replaced. DO NOT reuse or salvage any parts of the SRS system.
Do not lean over an airbag module when connecting deployment equipment.
If a vehicle is to be scrapped, undeployed airbag modules and pre-tensioner units must be manually deployed. In
this case airbags can be deployed in the vehicle. Before deployment, make sure the airbag module is secure within
its correct mounting position. Deployment of the driver's airbag in the vehicle may damage the steering wheel; if the
vehicle is not being scrapped, deploy the module outside of the vehicle.
SRS Component Replacement Policy
CAUTIONS:
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) will log a crash fault after every impact which is severe enough to cause
airbag deployment. It is possible to have three crashes/impacts logged after one event where, for
example, a front, side and rollover has occurred. After the third fault is logged, the SRS warning lamp
will be illuminated and the RCM must be installed. After any airbag deployment a new RCM must be
installed.
The SRS side impact sensor must be replaced if there are any signs of physical damage or if the restraints
control module (RCM) is registering a fault.
The following information details the policy for replacement of SRS components as a result of a vehicle accident.
Impacts which do not deploy the airbags or pre-tensioners
Check for structural damage in the area of the impact paying particular attention to bumper armatures, longitudinals
and bracketry.
Impacts which deploy the airbags or pre-tensioners
The replacement and inspection policy is dependent on the type and severity of the crash condition. The following
guidelines are the minimum that should be exercised as a result of the deployment of specific SRS components.
Check for structural damage in the area of impact paying particular attention to bumper armatures,
longitudinals and bracketry.
Front Airbag Deployment - Driver and Passenger
CAUTION: If the front airbags are deployed, the following components must be replaced:
Driver airbag module

Passenger airbag module
Fly leads (where applicable) connecting front airbag modules to SRS harness
Front seat belt buckle pre-tensioner
Rear seat belt pre-tensioners - if installed
Driver's seat belt retractor - if installed
Rotary coupler
Any front impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
Restraints control module (RCM) if the three crashes/impacts have been stored
Additionally, the following items must be inspected for damage and replaced as necessary:
Front passenger's seat belt retractor and webbing, tongue latching function, 'D' loop and body anchorage
point
Rear seat belt buckles, webbing, buckle covers, body anchorage points and tongue latching function
Fascia moulding adjacent to passenger airbag module
Steering wheel
Front seat frames and head restraints
Steering column - if adjustment is lost or if there are signs of collapse
Seat belt height adjusters
Rear seat belts
Side Air Bags
CAUTION: If the side (thorax) air bags are deployed, the following components must be replaced on the side of
the vehicle on which the deployment occurred:
Side (thorax) airbag

Any side impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
Restraints Control Module (RCM) if the three crashes/impacts have been stored
Front seat belts, retractors and webbing, tongue latching function, 'D' loop and body anchorage points
Rear seat belt buckles, webbing, buckle covers, tongue latching function, and body anchorage points
Front seat frame and head restraints
Door trim casing
Rear seat belts
Head airbag modules
CAUTION: If the head airbag modules are deployed, the following components must be replaced on the side of
the vehicle on which the deployment occurred:
Head airbag modules

Link lead between airbag gas generator and restraints control module (RCM) harness
Airbag retaining clips
Internal trim finisher
Front seat belt buckle pre-tensioners
Any side impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
Headlining
Component mounting brackets
Adjacent trim components
Rear impacts
CAUTION: If the seat belt pre-tensioners are deployed during a rear impact, the following components must be
replaced:
Seat belt pre-tensioners

Front and rear seat belt retractors used during the impact

Air Conditioning System Precautions
The air conditioning system contains fluids and components which could be potentially hazardous to the service
engineer or the environment if not serviced and handled correctly. The following guidelines are intended to alert the
service engineer to potential sources of danger and emphasise the importance of ensuring the integrity of the Air
Conditioning operating conditions and components installed to the vehicle.
Where necessary, additional specific precautions are detailed in the relevant sections of this Manual and also in the
Health and Safety Section. These precautions must be referred to prior to commencing repair operations.
The refrigerant used in the air conditioning system is HFC-134a (Hydrofluorocarbon) R134a.
WARNINGS:
Servicing must only be carried out by personnel familiar with both the vehicle system and the charging and
testing equipment. All operations must be carried out in a well ventilated area away from open flame and heat
sources.
R134a is a hazardous liquid and when handled incorrectly can cause serious injury. Suitable protective clothing,
consisting of face protection, heat proof gloves, rubber boots and rubber apron or waterproof overalls, must be worn
when carrying out operations on the air conditioning system.
Remedial actions
WARNING: Due to its low evaporating temperature, R134a must be handled with care. R134a splashed on any
part of the body will cause immediate freezing of that area. Also, refrigerant cylinders and replenishment trolleys
when discharging will freeze skin to them if contact is made.
If an accident involving R134a should occur, conduct the following remedial actions:
If liquid R134a enters the eye, do not rub it. Gently run large quantities of eye wash over affected eye to
raise the temperature. If an eye wash is not available, cool, clean water may be used to flush the eye. After
rinsing, cover the eye with a clean pad and seek immediate medical attention.
If liquid R134a is splashed onto the skin, run large quantities of water over the affected area to raise the
temperature. Implement the same action if the skin comes in contact with discharging cylinders. Wrap the
contaminated body parts in blankets (or similar materials) and seek immediate medical attention.
If the debilitating effects of inhalation of R134a vapour are suspected, seek fresh air. If the affected person is
unconscious, move them away from the contaminated area to fresh air and apply artificial respiration and/or
oxygen and seek immediate medical attention.
Service precautions
Observe the following precautions when handling components used in the air conditioning system:
Air conditioning units must not be lifted by their hoses, pipes or capillary lines.
Hoses and lines must not be subjected to any twist or stress; the efficiency of the system will be impaired by
kinks or restrictions. Make sure that hoses are correctly positioned before tightening couplings, and make sure
that all clips and supports are utilised.
Flexible hoses should not be positioned closer than 100 mm (4.0 in) to the exhaust manifold unless protected
by heat shielding.
Completed assemblies must be checked for refrigeration lines touching metal panels. Any direct contact of
components and panels may transmit noise and so must be eliminated.
The appropriate torque wrench must be used when tightening refrigerant connections to the stipulated value.
An additional spanner must be used to hold the union to prevent twisting of the pipe when tightening
connections.
Before connecting any hose or pipe, make sure that refrigerant oil is applied to the seat of the new O-rings,
BUT NOT to the threads of the connection.
All protective plugs or caps must remain in place in the component until immediately prior to connection.
Make sure components are at room temperature before uncapping/unplugging, to prevent condensation of
moisture from the air that enters it.
When disconnecting, immediately plug or cap all air conditioning pipes to prevent ingress of dirt and moisture
into the system.
Components must not remain uncapped/unplugged, if a system has been left uncapped/unplugged for 20
minutes or longer, a new receiver/drier must be installed.
The receiver/drier contains desiccant which absorbs moisture. It must be positively sealed at all times. A
receiver/drier that has been left uncapped for longer than 20 minutes must not be used; install a new unit.
The receiver/drier should be the last component connected to the system to make sure optimum dehydration
and maximum moisture protection of the system.
Use alcohol and a clean lint-free cloth to clean dirty connections.
Make sure that all new parts installed are marked for use with R134a.
When a major repair has been completed, a leak test should be conducted; refer to the Repairs Section of
this manual for the correct procedure.
Refrigerant oil
CAUTION: Refrigerant oil easily absorbs water and must not be stored for long periods. Do not pour unused
refrigerant oil back into the container. Always use an approved refrigerant oil.
When replacing components in the air conditioning system, drain the refrigerant oil from the component being
replaced into a graduated container. On assembly, add the quantity of refrigerant oil drained to the new component -
See Air Conditioning Compressor Replacement in this Section.
Compressor
A new compressor is sealed and pressurised with Nitrogen gas. When installing a new compressor, slowly release
the sealing cap; gas pressure should be heard to vent as the seal is broken.
CAUTION: A new compressor should always be sealed and could be pressurised with nitrogen gas. To avoid
possible oil loss, release the sealing cap(s) slowly. Do not remove the cap(s) until immediately prior to connecting
the air conditioning pipes to the compressor.
Rapid refrigerant discharge
If the air conditioning system is involved in accident damage and the system is punctured, the refrigerant will
discharge rapidly. The rapid discharge of refrigerant will also result in the loss of most of the oil from the system.
The compressor must be removed and all the remaining oil in the compressor drained and refilled as instructed in
the air conditioning section of this manual.
Precautions for refrigerant recovery, recycling and recharging
When the air conditioning system is recharged, any existing refrigerant is first recovered from the system and
recycled. The system is then charged with the required weight of refrigerant and volume of refrigerant oil.
WARNING: Refrigerant must always be recycled before reuse to make sure that the purity of the refrigerant is
high enough for safe use in the air conditioning system. Recycling should always be carried out with equipment
which is design certified by Underwriter Laboratory Inc. for compliance with SAE J1991. Other equipment may not
recycle refrigerant to the required level of purity.
CAUTIONS:
A R134a Refrigerant Recovery Recycling Recharging Station must not be used with any other type of
refrigerant. Refrigerant R134a from domestic and commercial sources must not be used in motor vehicle air
conditioning systems.
The system must be evacuated immediately before recharging commences. Delay between evacuation and
recharging is not permitted.
Air Conditioning Compressor Replacement
A new compressor is supplied filled with a full charge (X cm³) of refrigerant oil.
A calculated quantity of oil must be drained from the new compressor before installing. To calculate the quantity of
oil to be drained:
Remove the drain plug from the old compressor.

Invert the compressor and gravity drain the oil into a calibrated measuring cylinder. Rotate the compressor
clutch to make sure the compressor is completely drained.
Note the quantity of oil drained (Y cm³).
Calculate the quantity of oil to be drained from the new compressor using the following formula:X cm³ — (Y
cm³ + 20 cm³) = Q cm³
Remove the drain plug from the new compressor and drain Q cm3 of oil. install and tighten the compressor
drain plug.
Vehicle Weights
Item kg lb
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
Petrol engine vehicles naturally aspirated 3070 6768
Petrol engine vehicles supercharged 3125 6889
Diesel engine vehicles 3070 6768
Maximum weight of unbraked trailer:
On-road 750 1650
Off-road 750 1650
Maximum towable weight (mass) - Trailers with overrun brakes
On-road 3500 7700
Off-road 1000 2205
Maximum roof rack load (Including the mass of the roof rack):
On-road 75 110
Off-road 75 110
Vehicle Dimensions
Item mm in
Length - including number plate plinth - All models 4798 188.9
Width - All models:
Mirrors extended 2170 85.4
Mirrors folded 1983 78.1
Maximum height - At standard ride height - All models:
With roof rack and rails 1784 70.2
With roof antenna module 1812 71.3
With sunroof open 1817 71.5
Wheelbase - All models 2745 108
Front overhang - All models 880 45.8
Rear overhang - All models 1163 44.5
Track - All models:
Front 1605 63.2
Rear 1612 63.5
Underbody Clearences:
Standard ride height - Running clearance to exhaust - Minimum - Kerb weight 172 6.8
Standard ride height - Ground to front undertray clearance 188 7.4
Standard ride height - Ground to rear differential casing clearance 200 7.9
Off-road height - Running clearance to exhaust - Minimum - Kerb weight 227 8.9
Off-road height - Ground to front undertray clearance 243 9.6
Off-road height - Ground to rear differential casing clearance 255 10
Suspension articulation - All models:
Front 255 10.03
Rear 310 12.2
Departure angle - Towbar NOT installed:
Standard ride height with full size spare wheel 24.1° 24.1°
Standard ride height with space saver wheel 26° 26°
Off-road height with full size spare wheel 27.4° 27.4°
Off-road height with full space saver wheel 29° 29°
Departure angle - Towbar installed - NOT NAS vehicles:
Standard ride height 15.1° 15.1°
Off-road ride height 17.8° 17.8°
Departure angle - Towbar installed - NAS vehicles:
Off-road ride height 16.9° 16.9°
Departure angle - Adjustable height towbar installed:
Off-road ride height 16° 16°
Wading depth:
Off-road height 700 27.5
Approach angle:
Ramp angle:
Standard ride height 20° 20°
General Information - Health and Safety Precautions
Introduction
Modern vehicles contain many materials and liquids which if not handled with care can be hazardous to both
personal health and the environment. Also, many of the procedures associated with vehicle maintenance and repair
involve physical hazards or other risks to health.
This subsection lists some of these hazardous operations and the materials and equipment associated with them.
Precautions necessary to avoid these hazards are identified.
The list is not exhaustive and all operations and procedures and the handling of materials, should be carried out
with health and safety in mind.
Before using any product the Materials Safety Data Sheet supplied by the manufacturer or supplier should be
consulted.
WARNING: Many liquids and other substances used in motor vehicles are poisonous and should under no
circumstances be consumed and should, as far as possible, be kept from contact with the skin. These liquids and
substances include acid, anti-freeze, brake fluid, fuel, windscreen washer additives, lubricants, refrigerants and
various adhesives.
Acids and Alkalis
For example - alkalis such as caustic soda used in cleaning materials; acids such as sulphuric acid used in batteries.
Both alkalis and acids are irritant and corrosive to the skin, eyes, nose and throat. They cause burns and can
destroy ordinary protective clothing.
Avoid splashes to the skin, eyes and clothing. Wear suitable protective impervious apron, gloves and goggles. Do
not breath mists.
Make sure access to eye wash bottles, shower and soap are readily available for splashing accidents.
Display Eye Hazard sign.
Air Bags
Highly flammable, explosive – observe No Smoking policy.
Used within the vehicle as safety restraints.
The inflator contains a high-energy propellant which, when ignited, produces a VERY HOT GAS (2500°C).
The gas inflator (generator) used in air bags is Sodium Azide. This material is hermetically sealed in each air bag
module and is completely consumed during deployment. No attempt should be made to open an air bag inflator as
this will lead to the risk of exposure to Sodium Azide. If a gas generator is ruptured, full protective clothing should
be worn when dealing with the spillage.
After normal deployment, gloves and safety goggles should be worn during the handling process.
Deployed air bags should be disposed of in a plastic bag in accordance with local regulations at an approved
chemical waste site.
Following any direct contact with Sodium Azide:
Wash affected areas thoroughly with water.

SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ASSISTANCE.
Air Bags - Do's
Do store modules in an upright position.

Do keep modules dry.
Do carry modules with the cover side pointing away from the body.
Do place modules with their cover side upwards.
Do carefully inspect modules for damage.
Do stand to one side when connecting modules.
Do make sure all test equipment is properly calibrated and maintained.
Do wash hands after handling deployed air bags.
Air Bags - Do Not
Do Not store highly flammable material together with modules or gas generators.
Do Not store gas generators at temperatures exceeding 80°C.
Do Not store modules upside down.
Do Not attempt to open a gas generator housing.
Do Not expose gas generators to open flame or sources of heat.
Do Not place anything on top of a module cover.
Do Not use damaged modules.
Do Not touch a fired module or gas generator for at least 10 minutes after firing.
Do Not use any electrical probes on the wiring circuit.
Air Suspension
Whenever work is being undertaken on the air suspension system, suitable eye protection must be worn.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Highly flammable, combustible – observe No Smoking policy.
Skin contact may result in frostbite.
Instructions given by the manufacturer must be followed. Avoid naked lights, wear suitable protective gloves and
goggles.
If refrigerant comes into contact with the skin or eyes, rinse the affected areas with water immediately. Eyes should
also be rinsed with an appropriate irrigation solution such as a solution of 9% Sodium Chloride and Purified Water.
DO NOT RUB THE EYES AND SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Do Not
Do Not expose refrigerant bottles to sunlight or heat.

Do Not expose refrigerant bottles to frost.
Do Not drop refrigerant bottles.
Do Not vent refrigerant to atmosphere under any circumstance.
Do Not mix refrigerants.
Adhesives and Sealants
Many adhesives and sealants are highly flammable – OBSERVE NO SMOKING POLICY. These items, should be stored
in flameproof cabinets in No Smoking areas. Cleanliness and tidiness in use should be observed, for example
disposable paper covering benches. All adhesives and sealants should be dispensed from applicators where possible;
containers, including secondary containers, should be labelled appropriately.
Anaerobic, Cyanoacrylate (super-glues) and other Acrylic Adhesives
Many are irritant, sensitizing or harmful to the skin and respiratory tract. Some are eye irritants.
Skin and eye contact should be avoided and the manufacturer's instructions followed.
Cyanoacrylate adhesives (super-glues) MUST NOT contact the skin or eyes. If skin or eye tissue is bonded, cover
with a clean moist pad and SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION. Do not attempt to pull skin tissue apart.
Use in well ventilated areas as vapors can cause irritation to the nose and eyes.
For two-pack systems see Resin-based and Isocyanate Adhesives/Sealers.
Solvent-based Adhesives/Sealers - See Solvents
Follow manufacturers instructions.
Water-based Adhesives/Sealers
Those based on polymer emulsions and rubber/latex may contain small amounts of volatile, toxic and harmful
chemicals. Skin and eye contact should be avoided and adequate ventilation provided during use.
Hot Melt Adhesives
In the solid state, they are safe. In the molten state they may cause burns and health hazards may arise from the
inhalation of toxic fumes.
Use appropriate protective clothing and a thermostatically controlled heater with a thermal cut-out and adequate
extraction.
Resin-based Adhesives/Sealers, for example Epoxide and Formaldehyde Resin-based
Mixing should be carried out in well ventilated areas as harmful or toxic volatile chemicals may be released.
Skin contact with uncured resins and hardeners can result in irritation, dermatitis, and absorption of toxic or harmful
chemicals through the skin. Splashes can damage the eyes.
Provide adequate ventilation and avoid skin and eye contact.
Isocyanate (Polyurethane) Adhesives/Sealers
See also Resin-based Adhesives
Individuals suffering from asthma or respiratory allergies should not work with or near these materials as sensitivity
reactions can occur.
Over exposure is irritating to the eyes and respiratory system. Excessive concentrations may produce effects on the
nervous system including drowsiness. In extreme cases, loss of consciousness may result. Long term exposure to
vapour concentrations may result in adverse health effects.
Prolonged contact with the skin may lead to skin irritation and in some cases, dermatitis.
Splashes entering the eye will cause discomfort and possible damage.
Any spraying should preferably be carried out in ventilated booths which incorporate facilities for removing vapors
and spray droplets from the breathing zone.
Wear appropriate gloves, eye and respiratory protection.
Antifreeze
May be flammable when undiluted.
Vapors may be given off from coolant antifreeze when heated. Avoid breathing these vapors.
Antifreeze may be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities. Antifreeze, if swallowed, can be fatal;
SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
Battery Acids
See also Alkalis and Acids.
Gases released during battery charging are explosive. Always remove the battery from the vehicle prior to charging.
Never use naked flames or allow sparks near charging or recently charged batteries. NEVER add acid to a battery,
the chemical reaction produced will be violent and explosive. In cases of eye contact, wash affected area with
copious amounts of water and SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
Make sure there is adequate ventilation during battery charging, observe NO SMOKING POLICY.
Brake Pads and Linings
Always fit the correct grade and specification of brake pads and linings. When renewing pads and linings, always
replace as complete axle sets.
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Splashes to the skin and eyes are irritating and in the long term can be damaging, avoid prolonged skin contact. In
cases of eye contact, wash affected area with copious amounts of water and SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL
ATTENTION.
Chemical Materials
All chemical materials should always be used with caution and stored and handled with care. They may be toxic,
harmful, corrosive, irritant or highly flammable and give rise to hazardous fumes and dusts.
The effects of excessive exposure to chemicals may be immediate or delayed; briefly experienced or permanent;
cumulative; superficial; life threatening; or may reduce life expectancy.
Chemical Materials - Do's
Do carefully read and observe hazard and precaution warnings given on material containers (labels) and in
any accompanying leaflets, posters or other instructions. Material health and safety data sheets can be
obtained from manufacturers.
Do remove chemical materials from the skin and clothing as soon as practicable after soiling. Change heavily
soiled clothing and have it cleaned.
Do organise work practices and protective clothing to avoid soiling of the skin and eyes.
Do avoid breathing vapors, aerosols, dusts or fumes; inadequate container labelling; fire and explosion
hazards.
Do wash before job breaks, before eating, smoking, drinking or using toilet facilities when handling chemical
materials.
Do keep work areas clean, uncluttered and free of spills.
Do store chemical materials according to national and local regulations.
Do keep chemical materials out of the reach of children.
Chemical Materials - Do Not
Do Not mix chemical materials except under the manufacturers instructions; some chemicals can form other
toxic or harmful chemicals, give off toxic or harmful fumes or become explosive when mixed together.
Do Not spray chemical materials, particularly those based on solvents, in confined spaces, for example when
people are inside a vehicle.
Do Not apply heat or flame to chemical materials except under the manufacturers instructions. Some are
highly flammable and some may release toxic or harmful fumes.
Do Not leave containers open. Fumes given off can build up to toxic, harmful or explosive concentrations.
Some fumes are heavier than air and will accumulate in confined areas such as pits.
Do Not transfer chemical materials to unlabelled containers.
Do Not clean hands or clothing with chemicals. Chemicals, particularly solvents and fuels, will dry skin and
may cause irritation leading to dermatitis or be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities.
Do Not use emptied containers for other materials except when they have been cleaned under supervised
conditions.
Do Not sniff or smell chemical materials, even brief exposure to high concentrations of fumes can be toxic or
harmful.
Corrosion Protection Materials
Some corrosion protection materials are highly flammable – observe NO SMOKING POLICY.
These materials are varied and the manufacturers instructions must always be followed. The materials may contain
solvents, resins or petroleum products. Skin and eye contact should be avoided. They should only be sprayed in
conditions of adequate ventilation and not in confined spaces.
Dust
Dust or powder produced during repair operations may be irritant, harmful or toxic. Avoid breathing dusts from
powdery chemical materials or those arising from dry abrasion operations. Wear respiratory protection if ventilation
is inadequate.
Fine dusts of combustible material can present an explosion hazard. Avoid explosive limits and sources of ignition.
Electrical Equipment
Electric shock can result from the use of faulty electrical equipment or from the misuse of equipment in good
condition.
Make sure that electrical equipment is maintained in good condition and frequently tested. Faulty equipment should
be labelled and preferably removed from the work station.
Make sure that flexes, cables, plugs and sockets are not frayed, kinked, cut, cracked or otherwise damaged. If using
cable reel extension equipment, ALWAYS ensure that the cable is fully unwound from the reel.
Make sure that electrical equipment and flexes do not come into contact with water.
Make sure that electrical equipment is protected by the correct rated fuse.
Never misuse electrical equipment and never use equipment which is in any way faulty. The results could be fatal.
Make sure that the cables of mobile electrical equipment cannot get trapped and damaged, such as in a vehicle
hoist.
Make sure that the designated electrical workers are trained in basic First Aid.
In cases of electrocution:
Switch off the power supply before approaching the victim.

If this is not possible, DO NOT TOUCH THE VICTIM but push or drag the person from the source of
electricity using dry, non-conductive material.
Commence resuscitation if trained to do so.
Exhaust Fumes
These contain asphyxiating, harmful and toxic chemicals and particles such as carbon oxides, nitrogen oxides,
aldehydes, lead and aromatic hydrocarbons. Engines should be run only under conditions of adequate exhaust
extraction or general ventilation and not in confined spaces.
Gasoline (Petrol) engine
There may not be adequate warning of odour or of irritation before toxic or harmful effects arise. These may be
immediate or delayed.
Gas Oil (Diesel engine)
Soot, discomfort and irritation usually give adequate warning of hazardous fume concentrations.
Fibre Insulation
The fibrous nature of surfaces and cut edges can cause skin irritation. This is usually a physical and not a chemical
effect.
Precautions should be taken to avoid excessive skin contact through careful organization of work practices and the
use of gloves.
Fire
Many of the materials found on or associated with the repair of vehicles are highly flammable. Some give off toxic or
harmful fumes if burnt; others such as fluoroelastomers when burnt or damaged by excessive heat can break down
and produce highly corrosive hydrofluoric acid - See Fluoroelastomers.
Should any material be in a burnt or overheated condition, handle with extreme caution and wear protective clothing
when handling such items. Dispose of such material in accordance with local regulations.
Decontaminate and dispose of protective clothing immediately after use.
Observe strict fire safety when storing and handling flammable materials or solvents, particularly near electrical
equipment or welding processes.
Make sure, before using electrical or welding equipment, that there is no fire hazard present.
Have a suitable fire extinguisher available when using welding or heating equipment.
First Aid
Apart from meeting any legal requirements it is desirable for someone in the workshop to be trained in First Aid
procedures.
Splashes in the eye should be flushed carefully with clean water for at least ten minutes.
Soiled skin should be washed with soap and water.
In case of cold burns, from alternative fuels, place affected area in cool to cold water.
Individuals affected by inhalation of gases and fumes should be removed to fresh air immediately. If effects persist,
consult a doctor.
If liquids are swallowed inadvertently, consult a doctor giving him the information on the container or label. Do not
induce vomiting unless this action is indicated on the label.
Fluoroelastomers (Synthetic Rubber)
Many 'O' rings, seals, hoses, flexible pipes and other similar which appear to be manufactured from natural rubber
are, in fact, made of synthetic materials called Fluoroelastomers.
Under normal operating conditions, these materials are safe and do not constitute a health hazard. However, if the
materials are damaged by burning or exposure to excessive heat, they can break down and produce highly corrosive
hydrofluoric acid.
WARNING: Contact with hydrofluoric acid can cause serious burns on contact with the skin. If skin contact does
occur, carry out the following steps immediately:
Remove any contaminated clothing.
SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION
Irrigate affected area of skin with copious amounts of cold water or limewater for 15 to 60 minutes.
Foams - Polyurethane
Used in sound and noise insulation. Cured foams used in seat and trim cushioning.
Unreacted components are irritating and may be harmful to the skin and eyes. Wear gloves and goggles.
Individuals with chronic respiratory diseases, asthma, bronchial medical problems, or histories of allergic diseases
should not work in or near uncured materials.
The components, vapors or spray mists can cause direct irritation, sensitivity reactions and may be toxic or harmful.
Vapors and spray mists must not be inhaled. These materials must be applied with adequate ventilation and
respiratory protection. Do not remove the respirator immediately after spraying, wait until the vapour/mists have
cleared.
Burning of the uncured components and the cured foams can generate toxic and harmful fumes. Smoking, naked
flames or the use of electrical equipment during foaming operations and until vapors/mists have cleared should not
be allowed. Any heat cutting of cured foams or partially cured foams should be carried out in areas having suitable
fume extraction equipment.
Fuels
Avoid skin contact with fuel where possible. Should contact occur, wash the affected skin with soap and water.
Gasoline (Petrol)
Highly flammable - OBSERVE NO SMOKING POLICY.
Swallowing gasoline (petrol) can result in mouth and throat irritation and absorption from the stomach can result in
drowsiness and unconsciousness. Small amounts can be fatal to children. Inhalation into the lungs, through
vomiting, is a very serious hazard.
Gasoline (petrol) dries the skin and can cause irritation and prolonged or repeated contact may cause dermatitis; if
it is allowed to enter the eyes, it will cause severe smarting. Wash affected area with copious amounts of water and
Gasoline (petrol) may contain appreciable quantities of benzene, which is toxic upon inhalation and the
concentration of vapors must be kept very low. High concentrations will cause eye, nose and throat irritation,
nausea, headache, depression and symptoms of drunkenness. Very high concentrations will result in rapid loss of
consciousness.
Make sure there is adequate ventilation when handling and using gasoline (petrol). Great care must be taken to
avoid the serious consequences of inhalation in the event of vapour build up arising from spillages in confined
spaces.
Special precautions apply to cleaning and maintenance operations on gasoline (petrol) storage tanks.
Gasoline (petrol) should not be used as a cleaning agent. It must not be siphoned by mouth.
Gas-oil (Diesel Fuel)
Combustible.
Prolonged skin contact with high boiling point gas oils (diesel fuel) may cause serious skin disorders including skin
cancer.
Inhalation into the lungs will cause internal bleeding - SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
If swallowed, DO NOT induce vomiting - SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
Kerosene (Paraffin)
Used also as heating fuel, solvent and cleaning agent.
Flammable - OBSERVE NO SMOKING POLICY.
Irritation of the mouth and throat may result from swallowing. The main hazard from swallowing arises if liquid
aspiration into the lungs occurs.
Liquid contact dries the skin and can cause irritation or dermatitis. Splashes in the eye may be slightly irritating.
In normal circumstances the low volatility does not give rise to harmful vapors. Exposure to mists and vapors from
kerosene at elevated temperature should be avoided (mists may arise in dewaxing). Avoid skin and eye contact and
make sure there is adequate ventilation.
If swallowed, DO NOT induce vomiting - SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
Gas Cylinders
Gases such as oxygen, acetylene, argon and propane are normally stored in cylinders at pressures of up to 138 bar
(13800 kPa) (2000 lbf/in²) and great care should be taken in handling these cylinders to avoid mechanical damage
to them or to the valve gear attached. The contents of each cylinder should be clearly identified by appropriate
markings.
Cylinders should be stored in well ventilated enclosures, and protected from ice and snow or direct sunlight. Fuel
gases, for example acetylene and propane should not be stored in close proximity to oxygen cylinders.
Care should be exercised to prevent leaks from gas cylinders and lines and also to avoid sources of ignition.
Only trained personnel should undertake work involving gas cylinders.
General Workshop Tools and Equipment
It is essential that all tools and equipment are maintained in good condition and the correct safety equipment is used
where required.
Never use tools or equipment for any purpose other than that for which they were designed. Never overload
equipment such as hoists, jacks, axle and chassis stands or lifting slings. Damage caused by overloading is not
always immediately apparent and may result in a fatal failure the next time that the equipment is used.
Do not use damaged or defective tools or equipment, particularly high speed equipment such as grinding wheels. A
damaged grinding wheel can disintegrate without warning and cause serious injury.
Wear suitable eye protection when using grinding, chiselling or sand blasting equipment.
Wear a suitable breathing mask when using abrasive blasting equipment or using spraying equipment.
Make sure there is adequate ventilation to control dusts, mists and fumes.
High Pressure Air, Lubrication and Oil Test Equipment
Always keep high pressure equipment in good condition, and regularly maintained, particularly at joints and unions.
Never direct a high pressure nozzle, for example diesel injector, at the skin as the fluid may penetrate to the
underlying tissue and cause serious injury.
Jacking
Always refer to the Jacking and Lifting section of this manual prior to raising the vehicle off the ground.
When vehicle is to be raised by means of a jack, ensure that it is standing on level ground, that parking brake is
applied and wheels are chocked. ALWAYS use the recommended jacking points and ensure that vehicle jack has
sufficient load capacity for the weight of the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a jack. Always support the vehicle on safety
stands.
Ensure that hoists have sufficient load capacity for the weight of the vehicle.
Legal Aspects
There are many laws and regulations relating to health and safety in the use and disposal of materials and
equipment in a workshop.
For a safe working environment and to avoid environmental pollution, workshops should be familiar, in detail, with
the many health and safety laws and regulations within their country, published by both national and local
authorities.
Lubricants and Greases
Avoid all prolonged and repeated contact with mineral oils. All lubricants and greases may be irritating to the eyes
and skin.
Used Engine Oil
Prolonged and repeated contact with engine oil will result in the removal of natural fats from the skin, leading to
dryness, irritation and dermatitis. In addition, used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin cancer. Adequate means of skin protection and washing facilities must be provided.
Do not employ used engine oils as lubricants or for any application where appreciable skin contact is likely to occur.
Health Protection Precautions
Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils.
Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable.
Do not put oily rags into pockets.
Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil.
Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly.
First Aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds.
Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin.
Wash with soap and water to make sure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help).
Preparations containing lanoline replace the natural skin oils which have been removed.
Do not use gasoline (petrol), kerosene (paraffin), diesel fuel (gas oil), thinners or solvents for cleaning skin.
If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay.
Where practicable, degrease components prior to handling.
Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example chemical goggles or face
shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided.
Environmental Precautions
This section provides general information which can help to reduce the environmental impacts from the activities
carried out in workshops.
Emissions to air
Many of the activities that are carried out in workshops emit gases and fumes which can contribute to global
warming, depletion of the ozone layer and/or the formation of photochemical smog at ground level. By considering
how the workshop activities are carried out, these gases and fumes can be minimised, thus reducing the impact on
the environment.
Exhaust fumes
Running car engines is an essential part of workshop activities and exhaust fumes need to be ventilated to
atmosphere. However, the amount of time engines are running and the position of the vehicle should be carefully
considered at all times, to reduce the release of poisonous gases and minimise the inconvenience to people living
nearby.
Solvents
Some of the cleaning agents used are solvent based and will evaporate rapidly to atmosphere if used carelessly, or
if containers are left unsealed. All containers must be firmly closed when not required and solvent should be used
sparingly. Wherever possible, solvents having a low toxicity and flammability should be selected. Always follow the
instructions supplied by the solvent manufacturer. Similarly, many paints are solvent based and the spray should be
used in such a way as to reduce emissions to a minimum.
Refrigerant
It is illegal to release any refrigerant into the atmosphere. Discharge and replacement of these materials from air
conditioning units should only be carried out using the appropriate equipment.
Discharges to water
Most workshops will have two systems for discharging waste water - storm drains and foul drains. Storm drains
should only receive clean water i.e. rainwater. Foul drains will accept many of the normal waste water i.e. washing
water, detergents and domestic type waste BUT NOT oil, petrol, solvent, acids, hydraulic fluid, antifreeze and similar
fluids. If in doubt, always consult the local authority or water company.
Spillages
Every precaution must be taken to prevent spillage of oil, fuel, solvents etc., reaching the drains. All handling of
such materials must take place well away from drains and preferably in an area with a suitable containing wall to
prevent discharge into drains or watercourses. If a spillage occurs, it must be soaked up immediately using a spill kit
where provided.
Checklist
Spillage prevention:
Store liquids in a secure area.
Make sure that taps on liquid containers are secure and cannot be accidentally turned on.
Protect bulk storage tanks from vandalism by locking the valves.
Transfer liquids from one container to another in an area away from open drains.
Ensure lids are replaced securely on containers.
Have spill kits available near to points of storage and liquid handling areas.
Spill Kits
Special materials are available to absorb a number of different substances. They can be in granular form, ready to
use and are supplied in suitable containers. Disposal of used spill absorbing material is dealt with in Waste
management.
Land contamination
Oils, fuels and solvents etc. can contaminate any soil with which they come into contact. Such materials MUST never
be disposed of by pouring on to soil and every precaution must be taken to avoid spillage reaching soil. Waste
materials stored on open ground could either leak or have contaminating substances washed off them that would
contaminate the land. Always store these materials in suitable skips or similarly robust containers.
Legal compliance
Some sites may have a discharge consent for effluent discharge to the foul drain for a car wash etc. It is essential
to know the types of effluent which are allowed to be discharged into the drain and to check the results of any
monitoring carried out by the Water Company.
Where paint spraying operations are carried out it may be necessary to apply to the Local Authority for an air
emissions licence to operate the plant. If such a licence is necessary, additional precautions will be necessary to
comply with the requirements and the results of any air quality monitoring must be checked regularly.
Checklist
Always adhere to the following:
Know what legal consents and licences apply to the operations.
Check that the emissions and discharges comply with legal requirements.
Waste Management
Pollution can be reduced by careful handling, storage and disposal of all waste materials that occur on sites.
Legislation makes it illegal to dispose of waste materials other than to licensed waste carriers and disposal sites.
This means that it is necessary to not only know what the waste materials are but also to have the necessary
documentation and licences.
Handling and storage of waste
Ensure that waste materials are not poured down the drain or on to soil and are stored in such a way that they do
not escape on to land or soil.
All waste must be segregated into individual types e.g. oils, metals, batteries, scrap components etc. This will
prevent any reaction between different materials and assist in disposal.
Disposal of waste
Dispose of waste in accordance with the following guidelines:
Fuel, hydraulic fluid, anti-freeze and oil: Keep separate and dispose of to specialist contractors.
Refrigerant: Collect in specialist equipment and reuse.
Detergents: Safe to pour down the foul drain if diluted.
Paint, thinners: Keep separate and dispose of to specialist contractor.
Components: Return to supplier for refurbishment or disassemble and reuse any suitable parts. Dispose of
remainder in ordinary waste.
Small parts: Reuse any suitable parts, dispose of the remainder in ordinary waste.
Metals: Can be sold if separate from general waste.
Tyres: Keep separate and dispose of to specialist contractor. DO NOT attempt to dispose of tyres by burning.
Components/materials containing asbestos: Keep separate and dispose of to specialist contractor.
Oil and fuel wastes (e.g. rags, used spill kit material): Keep separate and dispose of to specialist
contractors.
Air filters: Keep separate and dispose of to specialist contractors.
Rubber/plastics: Dispose of in ordinary waste.
Hoses: Dispose of in ordinary waste.
Batteries: Keep separate and dispose of to specialist contractors.
Air bags - DANGER EXPLOSIVES: Keep separate and dispose of to specialist contractors.
Electrical components: Return to supplier for refurbishment or disassemble and reuse any suitable
components. Dispose of remainder in ordinary waste.
Catalytic converters: May be sold if kept separate from general waste.
Packaging: Compact/recycle as much as possible and dispose of in ordinary waste.
Office/paper waste: Recycle paper and toner and ink cartridges, dispose of remainder in ordinary waste.
Noise
Car alarm testing, panel beating, running engines, using air tools etc. are operations which invariably produce a
large amount of noise. The location of such activities and also the time of day must be carefully considered having
regard to the proximity of houses schools etc.
Some operations may produce high noise levels which could, in time, damage hearing. In these cases, suitable ear
protection must be worn.
Solder
Solders are mixtures of metals such that the melting point of the mixture is below that of the constituent metals
(normally lead and tin). Solder application does not normally give rise to toxic lead fumes, provided a gas/air flame
is used. Oxy-acetylene flames should not be used, as they are much hotter and will cause lead fumes to be
produced.
Some fumes may be produced by the application of any flame to surfaces coated with grease, and inhalation of
these should be avoided.
Removal of excess solder should be undertaken with care, to make sure that fine lead dust is not produced, which
can give toxic effects if inhaled. Respiratory protection may be necessary.
Solder spillage and filings should be collected and removed promptly to prevent general air contamination by lead.
High standards of personal hygiene are necessary in order to avoid ingestion of lead or inhalation of solder dust
from clothing.
Solvents
For example acetone, white spirit, toluene, xylene, trichloroethane.
Used in cleaning and dewaxing materials, paints, plastics, resins and thinners.
Some may be highly flammable or flammable.
Skin contact will degrease the skin and may result in irritation and dermatitis following repeated or prolonged
contact. Some can be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities.
Splashes in the eye may cause severe irritation and could lead to loss of vision.
Brief exposure of high concentrations of vapors or mists will cause eye and throat irritation, drowsiness, dizziness,
headaches and, in the worst circumstances, unconsciousness.
Repeated or prolonged exposure to excessive but lower concentrations of vapors or mists, for which there might not
be adequate warning indications, can cause more serious toxic or harmful effects.
Aspiration into the lungs, for example through vomiting, is the most serious consequence of swallowing.
Avoid splashes to the skin, eyes and clothing. Wear protective gloves, goggles and clothing if necessary.
Make sure there is good ventilation when in use, avoid breathing fumes, vapors and spray mists and keep containers
tightly sealed. Do not use in confined spaces.
When spraying materials containing solvents, for example paints, adhesives, and metal coatings, use extraction
ventilation or personal respiratory protection in the absence of adequate general ventilation.
Do not apply heat or flame except under specific and detailed manufacturers instructions.
Suspended Loads
CAUTION: Never improvise lifting tackle.
There is always a danger when loads are lifted or suspended. Never work under an unsupported, suspended or
raised load, for example a suspended engine.
Always make sure that lifting equipment such as jacks, hoists, axle stands and slings are adequate and suitable for
the job, in good condition and regularly maintained.
Viton
In common with many other manufacturers vehicles, some components installed to Land Rover vehicles have seals,
'O' rings or gaskets which contain a material known as 'Viton'.
Viton is a fluoroelastomer, that is a synthetic rubber type which contains Fluorine. Although Viton is the most well
known fluoroelastomer, there are others, including Fluorel and Tecmoflon.
When used under design conditions fluoroelastomers are perfectly safe. If, however, they are exposed to
temperatures in excess of 400°C, the material will not burn, but will decompose, and one of the products formed is
hydrofluoric acid.
This acid is extremely corrosive and may be absorbed directly, through contact, into the general body system.
WHERE CASES OF SKIN CONTACT OCCUR, SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL HELP.
O-rings, seals or gaskets which have been exposed to very high temperatures will appear charred or as a black
sticky substance.
DO NOT, under any circumstances touch them or the attached components.
Enquiries should be made to determine whether Viton or any other fluoroelastomer has been used in the affected O-
ring, seal or gasket. If they are of natural rubber or nitrile there is no hazard. If in doubt, be cautious as the
material may be Viton or any fluoroelastomer.
If Viton or any other fluoroelastomers have been used, the affected area should be decontaminated before the
commencement of work.
Disposable heavy duty plastic gloves should be worn at all times, and the affected area washed down using wire
wool and a limewater (calcium hydroxide) solution to neutralise the acid before disposing of the decomposed Viton
residue and final cleaning of the area. After use, the plastic gloves should be discarded carefully and safely.
Welding
Welding processes include Resistance Welding (Spot Welding), Arc Welding and Gas Welding.
Resistance Welding
This process may cause particles of molten metal to be emitted at a high velocity, and the eyes and skin must be
protected.
Arc Welding
This process emits a high level of ultra-violet radiation which may cause arc-eye and skin burns to the operator and
to other persons nearby. Gas-shielded welding processes are particularly hazardous in this respect. Personal
protection must be worn, and screens used to shield other people.
CONTACT LENS WEARERS ARE ADVISED TO REVERT TO ORDINARY SPECTACLES WHEN ARC WELDING as the arc
spectrum is believed to emit microwaves which dry out the fluid between the lens and the eye. This may result in
blindness when the lens is removed from the eye.
Metal spatter will also occur, and appropriate eye and skin protection is necessary.
The heat of the welding arc will produce fumes and gases from the metals being welded, the rods and from any
applied coatings or contamination on the surfaces being worked on. These gases and fumes may be toxic and
inhalation of these should be avoided. The use of extraction ventilation to remove the fumes from the working area
may be necessary particularly in cases where the general ventilation is poor, or where considerable welding work is
anticipated. In extreme cases or confined spaces where adequate ventilation cannot be provided, air-fed respirators
may be necessary.
CAUTION: Some of the components installed to the vehicle e.g. the interior cross beam and underbonnet cross
member are manufactured from magnesium alloy. On no account should any welding operations be attempted on
these components.
Gas Welding (and Cutting)
Oxy-acetylene torches may be used for welding and cutting, and special care must be taken to prevent leakage of
these gases, with consequent risk of fire and explosion.
The process will produce metal spatter and eye and skin protection is necessary.
The flame is bright, and eye protection should be used, but the ultra-violet emission is much less than that from arc
welding, and lighter filters may be used.
The process itself produces few toxic fumes, but such fumes and gases may be produced from coatings on the work,
particularly during cutting away of damaged body parts, and inhalation of the fumes should be avoided.
In brazing, toxic fumes may be produced from the metals in the brazing rod, and a severe hazard may arise if
brazing rods containing cadmium are used. In this event particular care must be taken to avoid inhalation of fumes
and expert advice may be required.
SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN BEFORE ANY WELDING OR CUTTING TAKES PLACE ON VESSELS
WHICH HAVE CONTAINED COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS, FOR EXAMPLE BOILING OR STEAMING OUT OF
FUEL TANKS.
Warning Symbols on Vehicles
Decals showing warning symbols will be found on various vehicle components.
These decals must not be removed. The warnings are for the attention of owners/operators and persons carrying out
service or repair operations on the vehicle.
General Information - Solvents, Sealants and Adhesives
Solvents
WARNING: Always handle all solvents, sealers and adhesives with extreme care. Some contain chemicals or
give off fumes which can be dangerous to health. Always follow the manufacturers instructions. If in doubt about
any substance, particularly a solvent, DO NOT use it.
CAUTION: If in doubt about the suitability of any proprietary solvent or sealer for a particular application,
contact the manufacturer of the product for information.
The Health and Safety Precautions subsection refers to some commonly used chemicals and materials, hazards
associated with their use, and safety measures to be taken. Some of these chemicals may be included as an
ingredient in a sealer or adhesive.
Sealers
Certain procedures in this manual involve the use of sealants during installation of components. Where a sealant is
required, the application, together with the Land Rover part number is given in the General Specification at the start
of each section and an instruction that a sealant must be used appears in the relevant repair procedure.
It is essential that the sealant(s) specified for a particular procedure are used, DO NOT use any other sealant.
Always remove traces of old sealant using a plastic scraper or suitable solvent, never use emery cloth or metal
scrapers.
Adhesives
Whenever a procedure involves the use of an adhesive, the adhesive specified must be used and the manufacturer's
instructions regarding application together with any health and safety precautions must be followed.
General Information - Road/Roller Testing
Road or rolling road testing may be carried out for various reasons and a procedure detailing pre-test checks,
through engine starting and stopping, pre-driving checks, on-test checks to final checks on completion of the test
are given.
Unless complete vehicle performance is being checked, the full road test procedure need not be carried out. Instead,
those items particularly relevant to the system(s) being checked can be extracted.
Pre-Test Checks
WARNING: If the brake system hydraulic fluid level is low, pedal travel is excessive or a hydraulic leak is found,
do not attempt to road test the vehicle until the reason for the low fluid level, excessive pedal travel or hydraulic
leak is found and rectified.
It is suggested that pre-test and functional tests of those systems/circuits which affect the safe and legal operations
of the vehicle, such as brakes, lights and steering, should always be carried out before the road or rolling road test.
Engine oil level

Engine coolant level
Tires, for correct pressure, compatible types and tread patterns, and wear within limits.
There is sufficient fuel in the tank to complete the test.
Check all around the engine, transmission and under the vehicle for oil, coolant, hydraulic and fuel leaks.
Make a note of any apparent leaks and wipe off the surrounding areas to make it easier to identify the
extent of the leak on completion of the test.
Starting the Engine
NOTE: On initial drive away from cold and within the first 1.5 km (1 mile), do not depress accelerator pedal
beyond half travel until the vehicle has attained a minimum speed of 25 km/h (15 miles/h). Never operate at high
engine speed or with the accelerator pedal at full travel whilst the engine is cold.
With the ignition switched off, check:
The parking brake is applied.

Automatic gearbox: The selector lever is in 'P' - Park
Transfer case: 'H' - High is selected
All instrument gauges read zero.
With the ignition switched on, check:
Ignition controlled warning lights come on.

Engine temperature gauge registers a reading compatible with the engine temperature.
Fuel gauge registers a reading appropriate to the fuel level in the tank.
The operation of the parking brake warning light and fluid level warning indicator light.
On Road Test Check:
CAUTION: At commencement of road testing, check the brake operation while still travelling at low speed
before continuing with the test. If the brakes pull to one side, or appear to be otherwise faulty, do not continue with
the road test until the fault has been found and rectified.
The parking brake releases completely.

Gear changing is smooth, and there are no abnormal noises or vibrations from the gearbox.
The engine power output is satisfactory, acceleration is smooth and accelerator pedal operation is not stiff or
heavy, and engine speed returns to idle correctly.
There is no excessive or abnormally colored smoke from the engine under normal driving, heavy load or
overrun conditions.
Steering operation is smooth, accurate, not excessively heavy or with excessive free play or vibration. Does
not pull to one side and self centres smoothly after cornering.
All instruments register the correct readings and operate correctly.
Switches and controls operate smoothly and positively, warning or indicator lights operate correctly and the
direction indicator control self cancels when the steering is returned to the straight ahead position.
Heating and ventilation systems work correctly and effectively.
Brakes operate efficiently.
Brake Testing
Avoid brake testing on busy roads where it can cause inconvenience or danger to other road users.
CAUTION: Brake testing which includes heavy brake applications should not be carried out with new brake
pads/discs until the components have bedded-in. New brake friction components will not reach full efficiency until
the bedding-in process is complete. Note that when new parking brake shoes or rear brake discs have been
installed, it is essential that the 'bedding-in' procedure given in Section 206-05 - Parking Brake Removal and
Installation is carried out.
Test the brakes at several speeds within the normal operating range using both light and heavy pedal pressure. Note
any tendency to snatch, pull or drag, and any undue delay in application or release.
Allow the vehicle to coast and note any tendency to pull to one side, or evidence that the brakes are binding.
After stopping the vehicle (not immediately after a period of heavy braking), carefully check the brake temperature.
A disc which feels appreciably hotter than the others, could indicate that the pads on that disc are binding.
After completion of the test, check for:
Oil, coolant, hydraulic, air and fuel leaks.

Abnormal temperature of any moving components or assemblies, e.g. wheel hubs, transmission etc., which
might indicate over tightness or lack of lubrication.
Rolling Road Testing
Four-Wheel Rolling Road
CAUTION: When utilising a four-wheel rolling road for testing, ensure all relevant health and safety
requirements are adhered to.
Provided that front and rear rollers are rotating at identical speeds and that normal workshop safety standards are
applied, there is no speed restriction during testing except any that may apply to the tires.
Ensure that the parking brake is released prior to engaging roller driving mechanism.
Two-Wheel Rolling Road
CAUTION: On no account should an attempt be made to carry out any form of testing on a two-wheel rolling
road.
Published: 10-Feb-2014
General Information - Special Tool Glossary
Service Tools
Special service tools have been developed to facilitate removal, dismantling and assembly of mechanical components
in a cost effective and time efficient manner. The use of such special tools also helps prevent the potential for
damage to components.
Some operations described in this manual cannot be carried out properly without the aid of the relevant service
tools.
See the following list for regional special tool points of contact:
Europe and European countries not in the following list.
Tel: 0049 (0) 6182 959 497
Fax: 0049 (0) 6182 959 226
e-mail: CSS2@bosch-automotive.com
Non-European Export
Tel: 0049 (0) 6182 959 491
Fax: 0049 (0) 6182 959 246
Overseas orders for the following countries should be placed with the local distributor.
United Kingdom
Tel: 0044 (0)1327 303400
Fax: 0044 (0)1327 303499
e-mail: CSS.UK@bosch-automotive.com
Scandinavia and the Baltics
Tel: 0049 (0) 6182 959 495
Fax: 0049 (0) 6182 959 228
Spain and Portugal
Tel: 0034 949 208329
Fax: 0034 949 208327
e-mail: CSS.iberica@bosch-automotive.com
North America
Tel: 001 866 628 5508
Fax: 001 800 578 7375 or 001 586 578 7375
Australia
Tel: 0061 3 9544 6222
Fax: 0061 3 9544 5222
e-mail: customerservice.au@service-solutions.com
Japan and East Asia
Tel: 0081 3 5436 3615
Fax: 0081 3 5436 3622
e-mail: jp.customerservices@service-solutions.com
Italy
Tel: 0039 0521 338170
Fax: 0039 0521 837370
e-mail: CSS.Italy@bosch-automotive.com
Belgium, Netherlands and Luxembourg

Tel: 0031 4645 72716
Fax: 0031 4645 72711
e-mail: CSS.Benelux@bosch-automotive.com
China
Tel: 0086 21 2218 2668
Fax: 0086 21 2218 2677
e-mail: karen.zhai@cn-bosch.com
India
Tel: 0091 20 6725 4823
Fax: 0091 96 2393 1332
e-mail: semi.singh@in.bosch.com
Mexico - LAM Region
Tel: 0052 55 2595 1630
Fax: 0052 55 2595 1639
e-mail: herramientas@service-solutions.com
Brazil
Tel: 0055 (11) 5853 7487
Fax: 0055 (11) 5853 7489
e-mail: ferramentas@service-solutions.com
France
Tel: 0033 2 52 84 00 40
Fax: 0033 2 43 60 43 62
e-mail: css-france@bosch-automotive.com
Korea
Tel: 0082 31 457 9520
Fax: 0082 31 427 9522
e-mail: sungmin.kim@kr.bosch.com / hongyoung.choi@kr.bosch.com

General Information - Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and
Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Fuel may not give adequate warning before toxic or harmful effects arise.
Exposure to fuel can be harmful and can cause severe health damage or death.
Extreme care must be exercised when handling hot fluids. Always wash off spilled fluids from affected areas of
skin immediately.
Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may ignite when working on fuel systems. Do not allow
naked flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near fuel related components.
Fuel must not be used as a cleaning agent.
Keep fuel containers tightly closed, out of direct sunlight and in a cool area. Keep away from heat sources,
ignition sources and oxidizing agents.
SKIN CONTACT: Excessive or prolonged skin contact with diesel fuel may cause serious skin disorders including
skin cancer.
SKIN CONTACT: Fuel is mildly irritating to the skin and may cause dermatitis due to defatting effect. Remove
contaminated clothing. Wash affected areas of skin with soap and water. Seek medical attention for any persistent
skin irritation or abnormality. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse.
EYE CONTACT: Fuel is mildly irritating to the eyes. Flush with plenty of running water, blinking as often as
possible. Do not force the eyelid open. Seek medical attention for any persistent eye irritation or abnormality.
SWALLOWED: Fuel is moderately toxic and tends to foam on vomiting. If drawn into the lungs, inflammation
may develop. Do not induce vomiting. If spontaneous vomiting occurs place the victim in a forward position to
reduce the risk of fuel being drawn into the lungs. Give nothing by mouth. If breathing but unconscious, place in the
recovery position. If breathing has stopped, apply artificial respiration. Seek immediate medical attention.
INHALED: Fuel is toxic to the respiratory and other body systems. Exposure may result in various symptoms
including drowsiness, unconsciousness or severe health damage. Move a victim to fresh air. Keep a victim warm and
at rest. If unconscious, place in the recovery position. If not breathing, apply artificial respiration. Give cardiac
massage if necessary. Seek immediate medical attention.
CAUTIONS:
Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is essential that
absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components.
Make sure that the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as
possible.
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC:
Adaptive Damping Control Module (ADCM)
Adaptive Damping Control Module (SUMB)
CAUTION: Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules
does not guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
If the control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to
the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in
operation, prior to the installation of a new module/component.
Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only 5-digit codes. Match the 5 digits from the
scan tool to the first 5 digits of the 7-digit code listed to identify the fault (the last 2 digits give extra information
read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.
Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion.
If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an intermittent concern
may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Suspension Control Module, for
additional Diagnosis and Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Ride and Handling Optimization (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization,
Diagnosis and Testing).
DTC Description Possible Cause Action

C101D- Left Front Left front Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left front
12 Vertical vertical vertical accelerometer circuit for short to power or another
Acceleration accelerometer circuit. Repair circuit, clear the DTC and retest the system
Sensor - Circuit circuit short to
short to battery power
C101D- Left Front Left front Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front
14 Vertical vertical vertical accelerometer circuit for short to ground, open
Acceleration accelerometer circuit. If no fault found on wiring suspect accelerometer.
Sensor - Circuit circuit short to Replace accelerometer, clear DTC and retest the system
short to ground ground or open
or open circuit
Left front
vertical
accelerometer
fault
C101D- Left Front Left front With vehicle parked on a level surface, read left front
22 Vertical vertical vertical accelerometer voltage and check it lies in range 1.9
Acceleration accelerometer to 2.1 volts. If not OK then check electrical wiring for
Sensor - Signal signal amplitude shorts, loose connections and repair as required. If wiring
amplitude > above OK then suspect faulty accelerometer/incorrectly installed
maximum maximum accelerometer. Check the accelerometer is correctly
Left front mounted, secure or renew accelerometer as required. Clear
vertical DTC and retest system
accelerometer
insecurely
mounted
Left front
vertical
accelerometer
signal circuit
short to another
circuit
Left front
vertical
accelerometer
internal fault
C101D- Left Front Left front Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left front
26 Vertical vertical vertical accelerometer signal circuit for faults, if circuit is
Acceleration accelerometer correct suspect faulty accelerometer. Replace the
Sensor - Signal signal rate of accelerometer, clear the DTC and retest the system
rate of change change below
below threshold threshold
Left front
vertical
accelerometer
signal circuit
short to another
circuit
Left front
vertical
accelerometer
internal fault
C101D- Left Front Left front Check left front vertical accelerometer for location and
78 Vertical vertical security, if correct suspect faulty accelerometer. Replace the
Acceleration accelerometer accelerometer/bracket as required, clear the DTC and retest
Sensor - alignment or the system
Alignment or adjustment
adjustment incorrect
incorrect Left front
vertical
accelerometer
bracket bent
Left front
vertical
accelerometer
damaged
C101E- Right Front Right front Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right front
Sensor - Circuit circuit short to Replace accelerometer, clear DTC and retest the system
short to ground ground or open
or open circuit
Right front
vertical
accelerometer
fault
C101E- Right Front Right front With vehicle parked on a level surface, read right front
Acceleration accelerometer to 2.1 volts. If not OK then check electrical wiring for
Sensor - Signal signal amplitude shorts, loose connections and repair as required. If wiring
amplitude > above OK then suspect faulty accelerometer/incorrectly installed
Right front mounted, secure or renew accelerometer as required. Clear
accelerometer
insecurely
mounted
Right front
vertical
accelerometer
signal circuit
short to another
circuit
Right front
vertical
accelerometer
internal fault
Sensor - Signal signal circuit accelerometer, clear the DTC and retest the system
rate of change short to another
below threshold circuit
Right front
vertical
accelerometer
internal fault
C101E- Right Front Right front Check the right front vertical accelerometer for location and
78 Vertical vertical security. If correct, suspect a faulty accelerometer. Replace
Acceleration accelerometer the accelerometer/bracket as required, clear the DTC and
Sensor - alignment or retest the system
incorrect Right front
vertical
accelerometer
bracket bent
Right front
vertical
accelerometer
damaged
C1024- System Loss of power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power and
00 Temporarily to adaptive ground circuits to adaptive damping system control module
Disabled Due To damping system for intermittent or poor connection. Repair wiring circuits as
Power control module required, clear DTC and retest the system
Interruption whilst driving
During Driving -
No sub type
information
C102C- Right Rear Right rear Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right rear
Sensor - Circuit circuit short to Renew accelerometer, clear DTC and retest the system
short to ground ground, open
or open circuit
Right rear
vertical
accelerometer
fault
C102C- Right Rear Right rear With vehicle parked on a level surface, read right rear
Acceleration accelerometer - to 2.1 volts. If not OK then check electrical wiring for
Sensor - Signal Signal shorts, loose connections and repair as required. If wiring
amplitude > amplitude > OK then suspect faulty accelerometer/incorrectly installed
Right rear mounted, secure or renew accelerometer as required. Clear
accelerometer
insecurely
mounted
Right rear
vertical
accelerometer
signal circuit
short to another
circuit
Right rear
vertical
accelerometer
internal fault
Right rear
vertical
accelerometer
signal circuit
short to another
circuit
Right rear
vertical
accelerometer
internal fault
C102C- Right Rear Right rear Check right rear vertical accelerometer for location and
78 Vertical vertical security, if correct suspect faulty accelerometer. Replace the
incorrect Right rear
vertical
accelerometer
bracket bent
Right rear
vertical
accelerometer
damaged
C1030- Left Rear Left rear Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left rear
12 Vertical vertical vertical accelerometer circuit. Repair circuit, clear the DTC
Acceleration accelerometer and retest the system
14 Vertical vertical vertical accelerometer circuit. If no fault found, suspect
Acceleration accelerometer accelerometer. Renew accelerometer, clear DTC and retest
Sensor - Circuit circuit short to the system
short to ground ground, open
or open circuit circuit
Left rear
vertical
accelerometer
fault
C1030- Left Rear Left rear With vehicle parked on a level surface, check the left rear
22 Vertical vertical vertical accelerometer voltage is between 1.9 to 2.1 volts. If
Acceleration accelerometer not, check the electrical circuit for short circuit or loose
Sensor - Signal signal amplitude connections and repair as required. If no circuit fault is
amplitude > greater than found, suspect faulty accelerometer/incorrectly installed
Left rear mounted, secure or renew accelerometer as required, clear
accelerometer
insecurely
mounted
Left rear
vertical
accelerometer
signal circuit
short circuit
Left rear
vertical
accelerometer
internal fault
26 Vertical vertical vertical accelerometer signal circuit for faults. If circuit is
Acceleration accelerometer correct suspect the accelerometer. Renew the
Left rear
vertical
accelerometer
signal circuit
short circuit
Left rear
vertical
accelerometer
internal fault
C1030- Left Rear Left rear Check the left rear vertical accelerometer for location and
78 Vertical vertical security. If correct, suspect faulty accelerometer. Renew the
incorrect Left rear
vertical
accelerometer
bracket bent
Left rear
vertical
accelerometer
damaged
C110C- Left Front General Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front left
01 Damper electrical failure damper solenoid circuit. If no faults are evident suspect a
Solenoid - Left front faulty adaptive damping system control module
General damper
electrical failure solenoid circuit
fault
C110C- Left Front Front left Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front left
14 Damper damper damper solenoid circuit for short to ground or open circuit.
Solenoid - solenoid circuit Check for corrosion, backed out terminals and poor crimping
Circuit short to short to of terminals
ground or open ground, open
circuit or high
circuit
resistance
Front left
damper
solenoid failure
C110C- Left Front Left front Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front left
18 Damper damper damper solenoid circuit resistance (nominal = 2 - 3.5 Ohms)
Solenoid - solenoid circuit
Circuit current current below
Front left
damper
actuator open
circuit at
startup
C110C- Left Front Front left Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front left
Circuit current current above
above threshold threshold
1D Damper damper damper solenoid circuit. Check and install a new front left
Solenoid - solenoid circuit damper as required
Circuit current current out of
out of range range
Front left
damper
solenoid circuit
short to
ground/power,
open circuit
Front left
damper
solenoid failure
Solenoid - solenoid signal
Signal plausibility
plausibility failure
failure Front left
damper
solenoid
measured
current control
loop failed
Front left
damper
solenoid open
circuit
C110D- Right Front General Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front right
Solenoid - Right front faulty control module
General damper
fault
C110D- Right Front Right front Where available, carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
14 Damper damper this DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Solenoid - solenoid circuit system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to short to right front damper solenoid circuit for short to ground, open
ground or open ground, open circuit. Check and install a new damper as required
circuit
Right front
damper failure
C110D- Right Front Right front Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front right
Front right
damper
actuator open
circuit at
startup
C110D- Right Front Front right Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front right
C110D- Right Front Right front Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front right
1D Damper damper damper solenoid circuit for short to ground, power or open
Solenoid - solenoid circuit circuit. Check and install a new front right shock actuator as
Circuit current current out of required
out of range range
Front right
damper
solenoid circuit
short to
ground/power,
open circuit
Front right
damper
solenoid failure
C110D- Right Front Front right Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front right
64 Damper damper damper solenoid circuit resistance. Damper solenoid circuit
Solenoid - solenoid should lie in range of 2 to 3.5 ohms
Signal measured
plausibility current control
failure loop failed
Front right
damper
solenoid open
circuit
C110E- Left Rear General Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check rear left
Solenoid - Left rear faulty adaptive damping system control module
General damper
fault
C110E- Left Rear Rear left Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check rear left
14 Damper damper damper solenoid circuit for short to ground or open circuit.
Solenoid - solenoid circuit Check for corrosion, backed out terminals and poor crimping
Circuit short to short to of terminals
circuit or high
circuit
resistance
Rear left
damper
solenoid failure
C110E- Left Rear Left rear Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check rear left
Rear left
damper
actuator open
circuit at
startup
C110E- Left Rear Rear left Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check rear left
1D Damper damper damper solenoid circuit for short to ground, power or open
Solenoid - solenoid circuit circuit. Check and install a new damper as required
out of range range
Rear left
damper
solenoid circuit
short to
ground/power,
open circuit
Rear left
damper
solenoid failure
Signal plausibility
failure Rear left
damper
solenoid
measured
current control
loop failed
Rear left
damper
solenoid open
circuit
C110F- Right Rear General Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check rear right
Solenoid - Right rear faulty adaptive damping system control module
General damper
fault
C110F- Right Rear Rear right Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check rear right
14 Damper damper damper solenoid circuit. Check for corrosion, backed out
Solenoid - solenoid circuit terminals and poor crimping of terminals
Circuit short to short to
circuit or high
circuit
Resistance
Rear right
damper
solenoid failure
C110F- Right Rear Right rear Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check rear right
Rear right
damper
actuator open
circuit at
startup
C110F- Right Rear Rear right Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check rear right
1D Damper damper damper solenoid circuit. Check and install a new right left
Solenoid - solenoid circuit damper as required
out of range range
Rear right
damper
solenoid circuit
short to
ground/power,
open circuit
Rear right
damper
solenoid failure
Signal plausibility
failure Rear right
damper
solenoid
measured
current control
loop failed
Rear right
damper
solenoid open
circuit
C1A03- Left Front Height Left front height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front left
12 Sensor - Circuit sensor circuit height sensor circuit. If circuit correct suspect sensor
short to battery short to power internal fault, renew as required
Left front height
sensor circuit
shorted to
another cable
Left front height
sensor internal
fault
C1A03- Left Front Height Wiring to left Disconnect electrical connector to height sensor and inspect
14 Sensor - Circuit front height connector pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or
short to ground sensor (signal) water ingress. If no corrosion found, disconnect harness at
or open open circuit adaptive damping system control module:
Wiring to left - A. Check for short circuits between any of the three
front height terminals and vehicle ground
sensor partial - B. Check for electrical continuity between the two
short to ground connectors for each of the three terminals.
Wiring to left Reconnect electrical connector at control module only
front height - C. Check voltages at terminals within height sensor
sensor short to connector (sensor not connected): voltage to sensor
other cable ground connection should be ~0V, voltage to sensor
Left front height signal connection should be ~0V, voltage to sensor
sensor internal supply connection should be ~5V. All voltages should
electrical fault be within ± 0.15V
C1A03- Left Front Height Left front height

21 Sensor - Signal sensor signal NOTE: If any height sensor fixings were slackened or found to
amplitude < amplitude below be loose or if a height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height
minimum minimum MUST be re-calibrated.
Left front height
sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. Confirm that the correct
not connected height sensor part number is installed, as specified in the
Left front height service parts database. To check height sensor: Disconnect
sensor or electrical connector to height sensor and inspect connecter
bracket loose pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or water ingress.
Left front height If no corrosion is found, disconnect harness at adaptive
sensor bracket damping system control module then: A. Check for short
bent circuits between any of the three terminals and vehicle
Incorrect height ground. B. Check for electrical continuity between the two
calibration connectors for each of the three terminals. Reconnect
Left front height electrical connector at control module only. C. Check
sensor linkage voltages at terminals within height sensor connector (sensor
toggled not connected). • Voltage to sensor ground connection
Left front height should be ~0V, voltage to sensor signal connection should
sensor water be ~0V, voltage to sensor supply connection should be ~5V
ingress All voltages should be within ± 0.15V. To check sensor
Wiring to left operation on the vehicle: Check for water ingress around
front height the height sensors, electrical connectors or shaft end. Check
sensor partial for excessive movement in the shaft in all directions. Raise
short to ground vehicle (ideally on wheels-free ramp) until suspension on
Wiring to left corner under investigation is at full extension to gain access
front height to height sensor. Access may be improved by removing
sensor short to road-wheel. Carefully disconnect the height sensor link from
other cable the upper suspension arm. Monitor the height sensor signal
Left front height voltage output for the height sensor under investigation.
sensor electrical Position the sensor arm so it is in the mid position and
fault confirm that the voltage is around 2.5 volts. Move the
Left front height sensor arm over the range ±40° around the mid position
sensor linkage and confirm that the voltage changes smoothly between
bent around 0.2 volts and 4.8 volts. If voltages are incorrect or
Incorrect height do not change smoothly then renew the height sensor.
sensor installed NOTE: For angles of movement beyond ±40°, the sensor
signal will remain at a voltage of ~0.15V or ~4.85V,
depending on position of sensor lever. This is normal. When
investigation is complete, install the height sensor link to
the upper arm. If any fixings to the height sensor body or
mounting bracket were slackened, found to be loose or if a
height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be
re-calibrated. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
manual for the calibration procedure

amplitude > amplitude be loose or if a height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height
maximum above MUST be re-calibrated.
maximum
Left front height Inspect for damage or loose fixings. Confirm that the correct
sensor linkage height sensor part number is installed, as specified in the
not connected service parts database. To check height sensor: Disconnect
Left front height electrical connector to height sensor and inspect connecter
sensor or pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or water ingress.
bracket loose If no corrosion is found, disconnect harness at adaptive
Left front height damping system control module then: A. Check for short
sensor bracket circuits between any of the three terminals and vehicle
bent ground. B. Check for electrical continuity between the two
Incorrect height connectors for each of the three terminals. Reconnect
calibration electrical connector at control module only. C. Check
Left front height voltages at terminals within height sensor connector (sensor
sensor linkage not connected). • Voltage to sensor ground connection
toggled should be ~0V, voltage to sensor signal connection should
Left front height be ~0V, voltage to sensor supply connection should be ~5V
sensor water All voltages should be within ± 0.15V. To check sensor
ingress operation on the vehicle: Check for water ingress around
Wiring to left the height sensors, electrical connectors or shaft end. Check
front height for excessive movement in the shaft in all directions. Raise
sensor partial vehicle (ideally on wheels-free ramp) until suspension on
short to ground corner under investigation is at full extension to gain access
Wiring to left to height sensor. Access may be improved by removing
front height road-wheel. Carefully disconnect the height sensor link from
sensor short to the upper suspension arm. Monitor the height sensor signal
other cable voltage output for the height sensor under investigation.
Left front height Position the sensor arm so it is in the mid position and
sensor electrical confirm that the voltage is around 2.5 volts. Move the
fault sensor arm over the range ±40° around the mid position
Left front height and confirm that the voltage changes smoothly between
sensor linkage around 0.2 volts and 4.8 volts. If voltages are incorrect or
bent do not change smoothly then renew the sensor. NOTE: For
Incorrect height angles of movement beyond ±40°, the sensor signal will
sensor installed remain at a voltage of ~0.15V or ~4.85V, depending on
position of sensor lever. This is normal. When investigation
is complete, install the height sensor link to the upper arm.
If any fixings to the height sensor body or mounting bracket
were slackened, found to be loose or if a height sensor was
changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be re-calibrated.
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual for
the calibration procedure
C1A03- Left Front Height Incorrect left

76 Sensor - Wrong front height NOTE: If any height sensor fixings were slackened or found to
mounting sensor be loose or if a height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height
position mounting MUST be re-calibrated.
position
Check for correct height sensor installation and orientation.
Rectify as necessary

78 Sensor - sensor NOTE: If any height sensor fixings were slackened or found to
Alignment or alignment or be loose or if a height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height
adjustment adjustment MUST be re-calibrated.
incorrect incorrect
Refer to the workshop manual and perform the height
sensor calibration procedure. Clear the DTC and retest the
system
C1A04- Right Front Right front Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front right
12 Height Sensor - height sensor height sensor circuit. If circuit correct suspect a height
Circuit short to circuit short to sensor internal fault, renew as required
battery power
Right front
height sensor
circuit shorted
to another cable
Right front
height sensor
internal fault
C1A04- Right Front Wiring to right Disconnect electrical connector to height sensor and inspect
14 Height Sensor - front height connector pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or
Circuit short to sensor (signal) water ingress. If no corrosion found, disconnect harness at
ground or open open circuit adaptive damping system control module:
Wiring to right - A. Check for short circuits between any of the three
front height terminals and vehicle ground
Wiring to right Reconnect electrical connector at control module only
front height - C. Check voltages at terminals within height sensor
Right front signal connection should be ~0V, voltage to sensor
height sensor supply connection should be ~5V. All voltages should
internal be within ± 0.15V
electrical fault
C1A04- Right Front Right front

21 Height Sensor - height sensor NOTE: If any height sensor fixings were slackened or found to
Signal amplitude signal amplitude be loose or if a height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height
< minimum below minimum MUST be re-calibrated.
Right front
height sensor Inspect for damage or loose fixings. Confirm that the correct
linkage not height sensor part number is installed, as specified in the
connected service parts database. To check height sensor: Disconnect
Right front electrical connector to height sensor and inspect connecter
height sensor or pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or water ingress.
Right front damping system control module then: A. Check for short
height sensor circuits between any of the three terminals and vehicle
bracket bent ground. B. Check for electrical continuity between the two
Right front voltages at terminals within height sensor connector (sensor
height sensor not connected). • Voltage to sensor ground connection
linkage toggled should be ~0V, voltage to sensor signal connection should
Right front be ~0V, voltage to sensor supply connection should be ~5V
height sensor All voltages should be within ± 0.15V. To check sensor
water ingress operation on the vehicle: Check for water ingress around
Wiring to right the height sensors, electrical connectors or shaft end. Check
front height for excessive movement in the shaft in all directions. Raise
Wiring to right to height sensor. Access may be improved by removing
front height road-wheel. Carefully disconnect the height sensor link from
Right front Position the sensor arm so it is in the mid position and
height sensor confirm that the voltage is around 2.5 volts. Move the
electrical fault sensor arm over the range ±40° around the mid position
Right front and confirm that the voltage changes smoothly between
height sensor around 0.2 volts and 4.8 volts. If voltages are incorrect or
linkage bent do not change smoothly then renew the sensor. NOTE: For

> maximum above MUST be re-calibrated.
maximum
Right front Inspect for damage or loose fixings. Confirm that the correct
height sensor height sensor part number is installed, as specified in the
linkage not service parts database. To check height sensor: Disconnect
connected electrical connector to height sensor and inspect connecter
Right front pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or water ingress.
height sensor or If no corrosion is found, disconnect harness at adaptive
bracket loose damping system control module then: A. Check for short
Right front circuits between any of the three terminals and vehicle
height sensor ground. B. Check for electrical continuity between the two
bracket bent connectors for each of the three terminals. Reconnect
Incorrect height electrical connector at control module only. C. Check
calibration voltages at terminals within height sensor connector (sensor
Right front not connected). • Voltage to sensor ground connection
height sensor should be ~0V, voltage to sensor signal connection should
linkage toggled be ~0V, voltage to sensor supply connection should be ~5V
Right front All voltages should be within ± 0.15V. To check sensor
height sensor operation on the vehicle: Check for water ingress around
water ingress the height sensors, electrical connectors or shaft end. Check
Wiring to right for excessive movement in the shaft in all directions. Raise
front height vehicle (ideally on wheels-free ramp) until suspension on
sensor partial corner under investigation is at full extension to gain access
short to ground to height sensor. Access may be improved by removing
Wiring to right road-wheel. Carefully disconnect the height sensor link from
front height the upper suspension arm. Monitor the height sensor signal
sensor short to voltage output for the height sensor under investigation.
other cable Position the sensor arm so it is in the mid position and
Right front confirm that the voltage is around 2.5 volts. Move the
height sensor sensor arm over the range ±40° around the mid position
electrical fault and confirm that the voltage changes smoothly between
Right front around 0.2 volts and 4.8 volts. If voltages are incorrect or
height sensor do not change smoothly then renew the sensor. NOTE: For
linkage bent angles of movement beyond ±40°, the sensor signal will
Incorrect height remain at a voltage of ~0.15V or ~4.85V, depending on
sensor installed position of sensor lever. This is normal. When investigation
C1A04- Right Front Incorrect right

76 Height Sensor - front height NOTE: If any height sensor fixings were slackened or found to
Wrong mounting sensor be loose or if a height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height
position
Check for correct sensor installation and orientation. Rectify
as necessary

incorrect incorrect
system
C1A05- Left Rear Height Left rear height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check rear left
12 Sensor - Circuit sensor circuit height sensor circuit. If circuit correct suspect a sensor
short to battery short to power internal fault, renew as required
Left rear height
sensor circuit
shorted to
another cable
Left rear height
sensor internal
fault
C1A05- Left Rear Height Wiring to left Disconnect electrical connector to height sensor and inspect
14 Sensor - Circuit rear height connector pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or
short to ground sensor (signal) water ingress. If no corrosion found, disconnect harness at
or open open circuit adaptive damping system control module:
Wiring to left - A. Check for short circuits between any of the three
rear height terminals and vehicle ground
Wiring to left Reconnect electrical connector at control module only
rear height - C. Check voltages at terminals within height sensor
Left rear height signal connection should be ~0V, voltage to sensor
sensor internal supply connection should be ~5V. All voltages should
electrical fault be within ± 0.15V
C1A05- Left Rear Height Left rear height

amplitude < amplitude below be loose or if a height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height
minimum minimum MUST be re-calibrated.
Left rear height
sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. Confirm that the correct
not connected height sensor part number is installed, as specified in the
Left rear height service parts database. To check height sensor: Disconnect
sensor or electrical connector to height sensor and inspect connecter
bracket loose pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or water ingress.
Left rear height If no corrosion is found, disconnect harness at adaptive
sensor bracket damping system control module then: A. Check for short
bent circuits between any of the three terminals and vehicle
Incorrect height ground. B. Check for electrical continuity between the two
calibration connectors for each of the three terminals. Reconnect
Left rear height electrical connector at control module only. C. Check
sensor linkage voltages at terminals within height sensor connector (sensor
toggled not connected). • Voltage to sensor ground connection
Left rear height should be ~0V, voltage to sensor signal connection should
sensor water be ~0V, voltage to sensor supply connection should be ~5V
ingress All voltages should be within ± 0.15V. To check sensor
Wiring to left operation on the vehicle: Check for water ingress around
rear height the height sensors, electrical connectors or shaft end. Check
sensor partial for excessive movement in the shaft in all directions. Raise
short to ground vehicle (ideally on wheels-free ramp) until suspension on
Wiring to left corner under investigation is at full extension to gain access
rear height to height sensor. Access may be improved by removing
sensor short to road-wheel. Carefully disconnect the height sensor link from
other cable the upper suspension arm. Monitor the height sensor signal
Left rear height voltage output for the height sensor under investigation.
sensor electrical Position the sensor arm so it is in the mid position and
fault confirm that the voltage is around 2.5 volts. Move the
Left rear height sensor arm over the range ±40° around the mid position
sensor linkage and confirm that the voltage changes smoothly between
bent around 0.2 volts and 4.8 volts. If voltages are incorrect or
Incorrect left do not change smoothly then renew the sensor. NOTE: For
rear height angles of movement beyond ±40°, the sensor signal will

amplitude > amplitude be loose or if a height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height
maximum above MUST be re-calibrated.
maximum
Left rear height Inspect for damage or loose fixings. Confirm that the correct
sensor linkage height sensor part number is installed, as specified in the
not connected service parts database. To check height sensor: Disconnect
Left rear height electrical connector to height sensor and inspect connecter
sensor or pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or water ingress.
Left rear height damping system control module then: A. Check for short
sensor bracket circuits between any of the three terminals and vehicle
bent ground. B. Check for electrical continuity between the two
Left rear height voltages at terminals within height sensor connector (sensor
sensor linkage not connected). • Voltage to sensor ground connection
toggled should be ~0V, voltage to sensor signal connection should
Left rear height be ~0V, voltage to sensor supply connection should be ~5V
sensor water All voltages should be within ± 0.15V. To check sensor
ingress operation on the vehicle: Check for water ingress around
Wiring to left the height sensors, electrical connectors or shaft end. Check
rear height for excessive movement in the shaft in all directions. Raise
Wiring to left to height sensor. Access may be improved by removing
rear height road-wheel. Carefully disconnect the height sensor link from
Left rear height Position the sensor arm so it is in the mid position and
sensor electrical confirm that the voltage is around 2.5 volts. Move the
fault sensor arm over the range ±40° around the mid position
Left rear height and confirm that the voltage changes smoothly between
sensor linkage around 0.2 volts and 4.8 volts. If voltages are incorrect or
bent do not change smoothly then renew the sensor. NOTE: For
C1A05- Left Rear Height Incorrect left

76 Sensor - Wrong rear height NOTE: If any height sensor fixings were slackened or found to
mounting sensor be loose or if a height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height
position

78 Sensor - sensor NOTE: If any height sensor fixings were slackened or found to
incorrect incorrect
system
C1A06- Right Rear Right rear Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear
12 Height Sensor - height sensor right height sensor circuit. If circuit correct suspect a height
Circuit short to circuit short to sensor internal fault, renew as required
battery power
Right rear
height sensor
circuit shorted
to another cable
Right rear
height sensor
internal fault
C1A06- Right Rear Wiring to right Disconnect electrical connector to height sensor and inspect
14 Height Sensor - rear height connector pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or
Circuit short to sensor (signal) water ingress. If no corrosion found, disconnect harness at
ground or open open circuit adaptive damping system control module:
Wiring to right - A. Check for short circuits between any of the three
rear height terminals and vehicle ground
Wiring to right Reconnect electrical connector at control module only
rear height - C. Check voltages at terminals within height sensor
Right rear signal connection should be ~0V, voltage to sensor
height sensor supply connection should be ~5V. All voltages should
internal be within ± 0.15V
electrical fault
C1A06- Right Rear Right rear

< minimum below minimum MUST be re-calibrated.
Right rear
height sensor Inspect for damage or loose fixings. Confirm that the correct
linkage not height sensor part number is installed, as specified in the
connected service parts database. To check height sensor: Disconnect
Right rear electrical connector to height sensor and inspect connecter
height sensor or pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or water ingress.
Right rear damping system control module then: A. Check for short
height sensor circuits between any of the three terminals and vehicle
bracket bent ground. B. Check for electrical continuity between the two
Right rear voltages at terminals within height sensor connector (sensor
height sensor not connected). • Voltage to sensor ground connection
linkage toggled should be ~0V, voltage to sensor signal connection should
Right rear be ~0V, voltage to sensor supply connection should be ~5V
height sensor All voltages should be within ± 0.15V. To check sensor
water ingress operation on the vehicle: Check for water ingress around
Wiring to right the height sensors, electrical connectors or shaft end. Check
rear height for excessive movement in the shaft in all directions. Raise
Wiring to right to height sensor. Access may be improved by removing
rear height road-wheel. Carefully disconnect the height sensor link from
Right rear Position the sensor arm so it is in the mid position and
height sensor confirm that the voltage is around 2.5 volts. Move the
electrical fault sensor arm over the range ±40° around the mid position
Right rear and confirm that the voltage changes smoothly between
height sensor around 0.2 volts and 4.8 volts. If voltages are incorrect or
linkage bent do not change smoothly then renew the sensor. NOTE: For

22 Height Sensor - height sensor - NOTE: If any height sensor fixings were slackened or found to
Signal amplitude Signal be loose or if a height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height
> maximum amplitude MUST be re-calibrated.
above
maximum Inspect for damage or loose fixings. Confirm that the correct
Right rear height sensor part number is installed, as specified in the
height sensor service parts database. To check height sensor: Disconnect
linkage not electrical connector to height sensor and inspect connecter
connected pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or water ingress.
Right rear If no corrosion is found, disconnect harness at adaptive
height sensor or damping system control module then: A. Check for short
bracket loose circuits between any of the three terminals and vehicle
Right rear ground. B. Check for electrical continuity between the two
height sensor connectors for each of the three terminals. Reconnect
bracket bent electrical connector at control module only. C. Check
Incorrect height voltages at terminals within height sensor connector (sensor
calibration not connected). • Voltage to sensor ground connection
Right rear should be ~0V, voltage to sensor signal connection should
height sensor be ~0V, voltage to sensor supply connection should be ~5V
linkage toggled All voltages should be within ± 0.15V. To check sensor
Right rear operation on the vehicle: Check for water ingress around
height sensor the height sensors, electrical connectors or shaft end. Check
water ingress for excessive movement in the shaft in all directions. Raise
Wiring to right vehicle (ideally on wheels-free ramp) until suspension on
rear height corner under investigation is at full extension to gain access
sensor partial to height sensor. Access may be improved by removing
short to ground road-wheel. Carefully disconnect the height sensor link from
Wiring to right the upper suspension arm. Monitor the height sensor signal
rear height voltage output for the height sensor under investigation.
sensor short to Position the sensor arm so it is in the mid position and
other cable confirm that the voltage is around 2.5 volts. Move the
Right rear sensor arm over the range ±40° around the mid position
height sensor and confirm that the voltage changes smoothly between
electrical fault around 0.2 volts and 4.8 volts. If voltages are incorrect or
Right rear do not change smoothly then renew the sensor. NOTE: For
height sensor angles of movement beyond ±40°, the sensor signal will
linkage bent remain at a voltage of ~0.15V or ~4.85V, depending on
Incorrect height position of sensor lever. This is normal. When investigation
sensor installed is complete, install the height sensor link to the upper arm.
C1A06- Right Rear Incorrect right

76 Height Sensor - rear height NOTE: If any height sensor fixings were slackened or found to
Wrong mounting sensor be loose or if a height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height
position
incorrect incorrect
system
C1B14- Sensor Supply Sensor supply Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the height
1C Voltage A - voltage A out of sensor supply circuit. Check all height sensors. Check the
Circuit voltage range adaptive damping system control module sensor supply
out of range Any height output voltage. Measured voltage should be between 4.995
sensor supply volts and 4.85 volts
partial short to
other circuit or
ground
Any height
sensor internal
failure
Internal control
module failure
C1B15- Sensor Supply Sensor supply Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
1C Voltage B - voltage B out of accelerometer supply for circuit fault. Check all vertical
Circuit voltage range accelerometers. Check adaptive damping system control
out of range Any vertical module sensor supply output voltage. Measured voltage
accelerometer should be between 4.995 volts and 4.85 volts
supply partial
short to other
circuit or
ground.
Any vertical
accelerometer
internal failure
Internal control
module failure
U0001- High speed CAN Bus off Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
88 Communication and ground connections to the adaptive damping system
Bus - Bus off control module. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
U0100- Lost No sub type Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
00 Communication information and ground connections to the engine control module. Using
With ECM/PCM the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a
A - No sub type CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
information diagrams and check the CAN network between the engine
control module and the adaptive damping system control
module
00 Communication information and ground connections to the transmission control module.
with TCM - No Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
sub type complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
information electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
between the transmission control module and the adaptive
damping system control module
00 Communication information and ground connections to the transfer case control module.
With Transfer Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Case Control complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Module - No sub electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
type information between the transfer case control module and the adaptive
00 Communication information and ground connections to the transmission control switch.
With Gear Shift Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Control Module complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
A - No sub type electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
information between the transmission control switch and the adaptive
00 Communication information and ground connections to the anti-lock brake system
With Anti-Lock control module. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Brake System system, complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
(ABS) Control electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
Module - No sub between the anti-lock brake system control module and the
type information adaptive damping system control module
00 Communication information and ground connections to the steering angle sensor
With Steering module. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Angle Sensor system, complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Module - No sub electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
type information between the steering angle sensor module and the adaptive
00 Communication information and ground connections to the air suspension control
With Suspension module. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Control Module system, complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
A - No sub type electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
information between the air suspension control module and the adaptive
00 Communication information and ground connections to the central junction box. Using
With Body the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a
Control Module - CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
No sub type diagrams and check the CAN network between the central
information junction box and the adaptive damping system control
module
00 Communication information and ground connections to the central junction box. Using
With Body the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a
Control Module CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
B - No sub type diagrams and check the CAN network between the central
information junction box and the adaptive damping system control
module
00 Communication information and ground connections to the instrument cluster. Using the
With Instrument manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
Panel Cluster network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
(IPC) Control diagrams and check the CAN network between the
Module - No sub instrument cluster and the adaptive damping system control
type information module
U0300- Internal Control No sub type Check the central junction box vehicle configuration file.
00 Module Software information Ensure the part number of adaptive damping system control
Incompatibility - module is correct
No sub type
information
U0401- Invalid Data Event Check the engine control module for related DTCs and refer
68 Received from information to the relevant DTC index
ECM/PCM A -
Event
information
U0402- Invalid Data Event Check the transmission control module for related DTCs and
68 Received from information refer to the relevant DTC index
TCM - Event
information
U0403- Invalid Data Event Check the transfer case control module for related DTCs and
68 Received From information refer to the relevant DTC index
Transfer Case
Control Module -
Event
information
U0404- Invalid Data Event Check the transmission control switch for related DTCs and
68 Received from information refer to the relevant DTC index
Gear Shift
Control Module
A - Event
information
U0415- Invalid Data Event Check the anti-lock brake system control module for related
68 Received From information DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)
Control Module -
Event
information
U0421- Invalid Data Event Check the air suspension control module for related DTCs
68 Received from information and refer to the relevant DTC index
Suspension
Control Module
A - Event
information
U0422- Invalid Data Event Check the central junction box for related DTCs and refer to
68 Received From information the relevant DTC index
Body Control
Module - Event
information
U0428- Invalid Data Event Check the steering angle sensor module for related DTCs
68 Received From information and refer to the relevant DTC index
Steering Angle
Sensor Module
(SASM) - Event
information
U0443- Invalid Data Event Check the central junction box for related DTCs and refer to
68 Received From information the relevant DTC index
Body Control
Module B -
Event
information
U1A14- CAN CAN network Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
00 Initialization harness short and ground connections to the adaptive damping system
Failure - No sub circuit or control module. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
type information disconnected system, complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
between the central junction box and the adaptive damping
system control module
U2100- Initial Car Configure the adaptive damping system control module
00 Configuration configuration using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system. Clear
Not Complete - data not loaded DTC and retest
No sub type (new central
information junction box
installed to
vehicle and not
initialized)
U2101- Control Module Car Carry out the new module software installation procedure
00 Configuration configuration using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system. Clear
Incompatible - data DTC and retest
No sub type transmitted
information over CAN does
not match
adaptive
damping system
control module
internal
configuration
U3000- Control module General Check integrity of electrical connectors and pins to the
01 - General electrical failure adaptive damping system control module. Refer to the
electrical failure electrical circuit diagrams and check the power and ground
circuits to the adaptive damping system control module.
Check the damper negative circuits for short to ground.
Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew the
adaptive damping system control module
U3000- Control Module - Module internal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
04 System internal failure and ground circuits to the adaptive damping system control
failures module. Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
renew the adaptive damping system control module
43 Special memory failure and ground circuits to the adaptive damping system control
failure module. Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
45 Program failure and ground circuits to the adaptive damping system control
memory failure module. Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
U3000- Control Module - Module internal If this DTC is logged contact your local in market support
47 Watchdog/safety watchdog/safety
microcontroller micro controller
failure failure
U3000- Control Module - Adaptive Install the latest software via the new module installation
52 Not activated damping system procedure using the manufacturers approved diagnostic
control module system
has been
replaced and
not
programmed
U3000- Control Module - Adaptive Install the latest software via the new module installation
54 Missing damping system procedure using the manufacturers approved diagnostic
calibration control module system
has been
replaced and no
software is
installed
U3003- Battery Voltage Circuit voltage Check the battery is in good condition and fully charged,
1C - Circuit voltage out of range refer to the battery care manual. Refer to the starting and
out of range (supply voltage charging section of the workshop manual and check the
at adaptive performance of the charging system. Refer to the electrical
damping control circuit diagrams and check power and ground circuit to
module below adaptive damping system control module
10.5V or above
18V for 30
seconds)
U3003- Battery Voltage Signal compare Check the battery is in good condition and fully charged,
62 - Signal failure refer to the battery care manual. Refer to the starting and
compare failure High resistance charging section of the workshop manual and check the
connections performance of the charging system. Refer to the electrical
Adaptive circuit diagrams and check power and ground circuit to
damping system adaptive damping system control module
control module
internal failure
Published: 28-Nov-2013
Adaptive Speed Control Module (ASCM)
Adaptive Speed Control Module (ASCM)
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
CAUTION: When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adaptor
kit, part number 3548-1358-00
When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter accurate to three decimal places
and with a current calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the digital
multimeter leads into account
If diagnostic trouble codes are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an
intermittent concern may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Adaptive Speed Control Module
(ASCM), for additional Diagnosis and Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Speed Control (310-03A Speed Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Diagnosis and
Testing).
DTC Description Possible Causes Action

B1A84- Car Configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
81 Data - Invalid serial NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, check and up-date the car configuration
data received control is disabled and file as necessary. Clear the DTCs and retest
instrument pack displays
warning message "cruise not
available"
Incorrect car
configuration file
parameters in the
central junction box
C1A67- Forward Looking Refer to the relevant section of the workshop

54 Sensor - Missing NOTE: Adaptive cruise manual and carry out adaptive speed control
calibration control is disabled and sensor alignment procedure
instrument pack displays Investigate for signs of mild impact damage
warning message "cruise not around radar and mounting bracket
available"
The radar may be

horizontally
misaligned. This DTC
will clear when the
speed control sensor
is correctly aligned
C1A67- Forward Looking Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

87 Sensor - Missing NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
message control is disabled and persists, install a new adaptive speed control
instrument pack displays module
available"
Adaptive speed
control module
internal
communication error
between DSP and
Host

96 Sensor - NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Component internal control is disabled and persists, install a new adaptive speed control
failure instrument pack displays module
available"
Adaptive speed
control module
internal
communication error
between DSP and
Host
C1A67- Forward Looking Check and clear any obstructions from the sensor.
97 Sensor - NOTE: Adaptive cruise This DTC will be cleared automatically when
Component or control is disabled and environmental conditions allow
system operation instrument pack displays Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
obstructed or warning message "radar system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
blocked sensor blocked" persists, refer to the relevant section of the
workshop manual and adjust the adaptive speed
Adaptive speed control module alignment
control module
obstructed by snow,
heavy rain or paint
protection covering
The adaptive speed
control module
misaligned

98 Sensor - NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, clear the DTCs and retest
Component or control is disabled and Consider the atmospheric conditions before
system over instrument pack displays suspecting the component
temperature warning message "cruise not This fault will be cleared automatically when
available" environmental conditions allow
Adaptive speed
control module sensor
is over temperature
P174E- Output Shaft Speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

29 / ABS Wheel Speed NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, check the anti-lock brake system control
Correlation - Signal control is disabled and module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
invalid instrument pack displays DTC index
warning message "cruise not Clear the DTCs and retest
available"
Speed signals mis-

match
U0001- High Speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

88 Communication Bus NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
- Bus off control is disabled and Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
instrument pack displays high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
warning message "cruise not ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
available" resistance
High speed CAN bus

circuit short circuit to
ground, short circuit
to power, open circuit,
high resistance
U0100- Lost Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 Communication NOTE: Adaptive cruise engine control module power and ground circuits
With ECM/PCM "A" control is disabled and for open circuit, high resistance
- No sub type instrument pack displays Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information warning message "cruise not system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
available" Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
Engine control module ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
power or ground resistance
circuit open circuit,
high resistance
High speed CAN bus
high resistance
00 Communication NOTE: Adaptive cruise transmission control module power and ground
with TCM - No sub control is disabled and circuits for open circuit, high resistance
type information instrument pack displays Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
warning message "cruise not system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
available" Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
Transmission control ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
module power or resistance
ground circuit open
circuit, high resistance
High speed CAN bus
high resistance
00 Communication NOTE: Adaptive cruise transmission control switch power and ground
With Gear Shift control will function as circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Control Module A - normal Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
No sub type system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
information Transmission control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
switch power or high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
ground circuit open ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
circuit, high resistance resistance
High speed CAN bus
high resistance
00 Communication NOTE: Adaptive cruise anti-lock brake system control module power and
With Anti-Lock control is disabled and ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Brake System instrument pack displays Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
(ABS) Control warning message "cruise not system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Module - No sub available" Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
type information high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
Anti-lock brake ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
system control module resistance
power or ground
high resistance
High speed CAN bus
high resistance
00 Communication NOTE: Adaptive cruise electric park brake control module power and
With Park Brake control is disabled and ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Control Module - No instrument pack displays Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
sub type warning message "cruise not system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
information available" Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
Electric park brake ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
control module power resistance
or ground circuit open
High speed CAN bus
high resistance
00 Communication NOTE: Adaptive cruise instrument cluster power and ground circuits for
With Instrument control is disabled and open circuit, high resistance
Panel Cluster (IPC) instrument pack displays Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Control Module - No warning message "cruise not system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
sub type available" Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
information high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
Instrument cluster ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
power or ground resistance
high resistance
High speed CAN bus
high resistance
U0300- Internal Control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

00 Module Software NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, check and up-date the car configuration
Incompatibility - No control is disabled and file as necessary
sub type instrument pack displays
information warning message "cruise not
available"
Car configuration
signal not received
Car configuration file
incorrect
U0300- Internal Control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

55 Module Software NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, check and up-date the car configuration
Incompatibility - control is disabled and file as necessary
Not configured instrument pack displays
available"
Car configuration
signal not received
incorrect
U0401- Invalid Data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

00 Received From NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, check the engine control module for
ECM/PCM - No sub control is disabled and related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
type information instrument pack displays
available"
Missing/invalid data
from the engine
control module
- The engine
control module
did not respond
correctly to the
adaptive cruise
control cancel
request
- The engine
control module
did not respond
correctly to the
adaptive cruise
control auto
brake cancel
request

ECM/PCM - Signal control is disabled and related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
incorrect after instrument pack displays
event warning message "cruise not
available"
from the engine
control module
- The engine
control module
did not respond
correctly to the
adaptive cruise
control resume
active request

ECM/PCM - Invalid control is disabled and related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
serial data received instrument pack displays
available"
from the engine
control module
- The engine
control module
has inhibited
the adaptive
cruise control

53 Received From NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, check the anti-lock brake system control
Anti-Lock Brake control is disabled and module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
System (ABS) instrument pack displays DTC index
Control Module - warning message "cruise not
Deactivated available"
from the anti-lock
brake system control
module

81 Received From NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, check the anti-lock brake system control
Anti-Lock Brake control is disabled and module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
System Control instrument pack displays DTC index
Module - Invalid warning message "cruise not
serial data received available"
from the anti-lock
module

67 Received From Park NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, check the electric park brake control
Brake Control control is disabled and module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Module - Signal instrument pack displays DTC index
incorrect after warning message "cruise not
event available"
from the electric park
brake control module
- The parking
brake module
did not respond
correctly to the
adaptive cruise
control EPB
apply request

81 Received From Park NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, check the electric park brake control
Brake Control control is disabled and module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Module - Invalid instrument pack displays DTC index
serial data received warning message "cruise not
available"
from the electric park
brake control module
- The parking
brake module
has inhibited
the adaptive
cruise control

68 Received From NOTE: Instrument pack system, check the anti-lock brake system control
Brake System displays warning message module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Control Module - "forward alert not available" DTC index
Event information
from the anti-lock
module
- The anti-lock
brake system
control module
has inhibited
intelligent
emergency
braking /
advanced
emergency
brake assist
functions

81 Received from NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, check the air suspension control module
Suspension Control control is disabled and for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Module A - Invalid instrument pack displays index
serial data received warning message "cruise not
available"
from the air
suspension control
module
- The air
suspension
control module
has inhibited
the adaptive
cruise control

81 Received From NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, check the instrument cluster for related
Instrument Panel control is disabled and DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Control Module - instrument pack displays
Invalid serial data warning message "cruise not
received available"
from the instrument
cluster
- The instrument
cluster has
inhibited the
adaptive cruise
control
Central junction box
missing or not
updated CAN message
U1A00- Private Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

88 Communication NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Network - Bus off control is disabled and persists, contact dealer technical support. Under
instrument pack displays no circumstance should any parts be replaced to
warning message "cruise not overcome this issue
available"
Speed control module

indicates bus off, on
private CAN bus
U1A14- CAN Initialization Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

49 Failure - Internal NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
electronic failure control is disabled and Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
instrument pack displays high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
warning message "cruise not ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
available" resistance. Clear the DTCs and retest
High speed CAN bus

high resistance
U2101- Control Module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

00 Configuration NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, check and up-date the car configuration
Incompatible - No control is disabled and file as necessary
sub type instrument pack displays
information warning message "cruise not
available"

mis-match
U3000- Control Module - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

41 General checksum NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure control is disabled and persists, install a new adaptive speed control
available"

internal micro
controller error

42 General memory NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
available"
Adaptive speed
control module
internal failure
- RAM test error

44 data - Memory NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
available"
Adaptive speed
control module
internal failure
- DSP RAM test
error

49 Internal electronic NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
available"
Adaptive speed
control module
internal failure
- Clock error

63 Circuit/component NOTE: Instrument pack system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
protection time-out displays warning message persists, contact dealer technical support
"forward alert not available"
Adaptive speed
control module
internal protection has
been activated

96 Component internal NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure control is disabled and persists, contact dealer technical support
instrument pack displays
available"

hardware ID mismatch
U3003- Battery Voltage - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
16 Circuit voltage NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, check datalogger signal - ECU Power
below threshold control is disabled and Supply Voltage (0xD112). Refer to the electrical
instrument pack displays circuit diagrams and test the adaptive speed
warning message "cruise not control module power and ground circuits for open
available" circuit, high resistance
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
Adaptive speed manual and test the battery and charging system
control module power
or ground circuit open
Battery/charging
system fault

17 Circuit voltage NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, check datalogger signal - ECU Power
above threshold control is disabled and Supply Voltage (0xD112). Refer to the relevant
instrument pack displays section of the workshop manual and test the
warning message "cruise not battery and charging system
available"
Battery/charging
system fault

62 Signal compare NOTE: Adaptive cruise system, check datalogger signal - ECU Power
failure control is disabled and Supply Voltage (0xD112) - and compare it to
instrument pack displays battery voltage
available"
Mis-match between
the voltage at the
adaptive speed control
module and the
voltage value
broadcast on the CAN
bus
Published: 06-Aug-2012
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Air
Suspension Control Module
Air Suspension Control Module
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Ride Levelling Module, for
For additional information, refer to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Diagnosis
and Testing).

B1A84- Car System not configured Configure the car configuration file using the
55 Configuration - Data does not approved diagnostic system. Ensure the air
Data - Not match that suspension control module software is the correct
configured expected for version (available from the TOPIx web-site). Clear
specification the DTC and test for normal operation
Incorrect software
version loaded
C112F- Air Spring Corner valve stuck open Where possible, refer to the guided diagnostic
72 Valve - (fully or partially) routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
Actuator stuck Vehicle driven while system. Complete corner valve checks. If
open system in "Tight necessary, clear tight tolerance mode. Clear the
Tolerance" mode DTC and retest
C1130- Air Spring Air Air spring leak Visually inspect the system for air leakage. Where
66 Supply - Signal Leak in air harness to air possible, refer to the guided diagnostic routine for
has too many spring this DTC on the approved diagnostic system
transitions / Corner valve leak to
events gallery
Air supply unit assembly
fault
Vehicle driven while
system in "Tight
Tolerance" mode
C1130- Air Spring Air Detached or burst air Visually inspect the system for an excessive air
7A Supply - Fluid pipe leak. Check the height sensor linkage(s) for
leak or seal Leaking air spring or pipe damage/restrictions. Visually inspect the air harness
failure to air spring (large leak) for evidence of melting, crushing, kinking or
Loose pipe connection collapsing. Where possible, refer to the guided
Insufficient pressure from diagnostic routine for this DTC on the approved
air supply unit diagnostic system
Height sensor fault
C1131- Air Supply - Loose or burst air pipe Visually inspect the system for air leakage. Check
92 Performance or Detached air pipe the reservoir valve block pipes for correct routing
incorrect Leaking pipe from and installation
operation reservoir valve block to
air supply unit or either
axle valve block
Insufficient pressure from
air supply unit
Reservoir valve block
piped incorrectly
C1A01- LED - Circuit Switch pack LED circuit

19 current above current above threshold NOTE: Circuit - LED_NEG -
threshold LED cathode (negative)
connection shorted to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
positive the circuit between the air suspension control
One or more LEDs short module and switch pack for short circuit to battery.
circuit Repair as necessary. Clear the DTC and test for
normal operation. If the DTC is still logged suspect
the switch pack
C1A03- Left Front Height sensor Check the sensor connector for damage. Refer to
1C Height Sensor disconnected the electrical circuit diagrams and check the sensor
- Circuit Height sensor harness circuit for continuity or short circuit. Check sensor
voltage out of wiring short circuit to signal changes when sensor is rotated. If any
range ground, power or high height sensor fixings are slackened or found to be
resistance loose, or a height sensor has been changed, the
Height sensor fault vehicle ride height must be re-calibrated. Calibrate
the system using the approved diagnostic system
C1A03- Left Front Sensor signal rate of Check height sensor linkage is connected and not
26 Height Sensor change below threshold, damaged. Visually inspect the height sensor for
- Signal rate of signal voltage stuck security, damage and correct
change below Height sensor linkage orientation/installation. Check the sensor connector
threshold disconnected for damage. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Height sensor fault and check the sensor circuit for continuity or short
Height sensor harness circuit. Repair/renew as necessary. Where possible,
wiring short circuit to refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this DTC
ground, power or high on the approved diagnostic system
resistance
C1A03- Left Front Left-hand front height Check the sensor connector for damage. Refer to
27 Height Sensor sensor signal rate of the electrical circuit diagrams and check the sensor
- Signal rate of change above threshold circuit for continuity or short circuit. Visually inspect
change above Height sensor harness the height sensor for security, damage and correct
threshold wiring short circuit to orientation/installation. Repair/renew as necessary.
ground, power or Where possible, refer to the guided diagnostic
intermittent connection routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
Height sensor fault system
C1A03- Left Front Left-hand front height Calibrate the system using the approved diagnostic
29 Height Sensor sensor signal invalid system
- Signal invalid Incorrect height
calibration process
C1A03- Left Front Sensor alignment or Check height sensor linkage is connected and not
78 Height Sensor adjustment incorrect; damaged. Visually inspect the height sensor for
- Alignment or signal out of range security, damage and correct
adjustment Height sensor linkage not orientation/installation. Check the sensor connector
incorrect connected for damage. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Height sensor linkage and check the sensor circuit for continuity or short
toggled circuit. Repair/renew as necessary. Where possible,
Height sensor loose refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this DTC
Height sensor bracket on the approved diagnostic system. If any height
bent sensor fixings are slackened or found to be loose,
Incorrect height or a height sensor has been changed, the vehicle
calibration ride height must be re-calibrated. Calibrate the
Wiring to height sensor system using the approved diagnostic system
short to ground
Wiring to height sensor
short to other cable
Height sensor electrical
fault
C1A03- Left Front Left-hand front height

92 Height Sensor sensor height NOTE: If any height sensor fixings are slackened or
- Performance performance not as found to be loose, or a height sensor has been changed,
or incorrect expected/signal changing the vehicle ride height must be re-calibrated.
operation slower than expected
Axle valve block pipes Check that the vehicle is free of obstructions. Check
connected incorrectly the height sensor for correct installation and torque
Height sensor incorrectly of fixings. If necessary, calibrate the system using
installed the approved diagnostic system. Where available,
Blocked/damaged or refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this DTC
crushed gallery pipe on the approved diagnostic system. Check for an air
Blocked/damaged or spring leak. Check the air harness for evidence of
crushed air spring pipe melting, crushing, kinking or collapsing. Check the
Corner valve stuck closed front and rear valve block pipes for correct routing
(mechanically) and installation. Refer to the approved diagnostic
Reservoir valve stuck system for corner, reservoir and exhaust valve
open (mechanically) checks. Check the corner valve for leaks
C1A04- Right Front Right-hand front height Check the sensor connector for damage. Refer to
1C Height Sensor sensor signal voltage out the electrical circuit diagrams and check the sensor
- Circuit of range circuit for continuity or short circuit. Check sensor
voltage out of Height sensor signal changes when sensor is rotated. If any
range disconnected height sensor fixings are slackened or found to be
Height sensor harness loose, or a height sensor has been changed, the
wiring short circuit to vehicle ride height must be re-calibrated. Calibrate
ground, short circuit to the system using the approved diagnostic system
power or high resistance
Height sensor fault
C1A04- Right Front Right-hand front height Check height sensor linkage is connected and not
26 Height Sensor sensor signal rate of damaged. Visually inspect the wiring harness and
- Signal rate of change below connectors for water ingress. Where possible, refer
change below threshold/signal voltage to the guided diagnostic routine for this DTC on the
threshold stuck approved diagnostic system
Height sensor linkage
disconnected
Height sensor fault
Height sensor harness
wiring short circuit to
ground, short circuit to
power or short to each
other
C1A04- Right Front Right-hand front height Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors
27 Height Sensor sensor signal rate of for damage or water ingress. Visually inspect the
- Signal rate of change above threshold height sensor for security, damage and correct
change above Height sensor harness orientation/installation. Repair/renew as necessary.
threshold wiring short circuit to Where possible, refer to the guided diagnostic
ground, short circuit to routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
power or high resistance system
Height sensor fault
C1A04- Right Front Right-hand front height Calibrate the system using the approved diagnostic
calibration process
C1A04- Right Front Sensor alignment or Check height sensor linkage is connected and not
short to ground
fault
C1A04- Right Front Right-hand front height

92 Height Sensor sensor height changing NOTE: If any height sensor fixings are slackened or
- Performance slower than expected found to be loose, or a height sensor has been changed,
or incorrect Axle valve block pipes the vehicle ride height must be re-calibrated.
operation incorrectly installed
(unions reversed) Check that the vehicle is free of obstructions. Check
Height sensor incorrectly the height sensor for correct installation and torque
installed of fixings. If necessary, calibrate the system using
A gallery pipe is the approved diagnostic system. Where available,
blocked/damaged/crushed refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this DTC
An air spring pipe is on the approved diagnostic system. Check for an air
blocked/damaged/crushed spring leak. Check the air harness for evidence of
Corner valve stuck closed melting, crushing, kinking or collapsing. Check the
Reservoir valve stuck front and rear valve block pipes for correct routing
open (mechanically) and installation. Check the reservoir valve block
pipes for correct routing and installation. Refer to
the approved diagnostic system for corner,
reservoir and exhaust valve checks. Check the
corner valve for leaks
C1A05- Left Rear Right-hand front height Check the sensor connector for damage. Refer to
Height sensor fault
C1A05- Left Rear Left-hand rear height Check height sensor linkage is connected and not
26 Height Sensor sensor signal voltage damaged. Visually inspect the wiring harness and
- Signal rate of stuck whilst vehicle is connectors for water ingress. Where available, refer
change below driven to the guided diagnostic routine for this DTC on the
threshold Height sensor linkage approved diagnostic system
disconnected
Height sensor fault
C1A05- Left Rear Left-hand rear height Check height sensor linkage is connected and not
- Signal rate of change above threshold connectors for water ingress. Where available, refer
change above Height sensor harness to the guided diagnostic routine for this DTC on the
threshold wiring short circuit to approved diagnostic system
disconnected
Height sensor failure
C1A05- Left Rear Left-hand rear height Calibrate the system using the approved diagnostic
calibration process
C1A05- Left Rear Sensor alignment or Check height sensor linkage is connected and not
short to ground
fault
C1A05- Left Rear Left-hand rear height

operation connected incorrectly
Height sensor incorrectly Check that the vehicle is free of obstructions. Check
installed the height sensor for correct installation and torque
A gallery pipe is of fixings. If necessary, calibrate the system using
blocked/damaged/crushed the approved diagnostic system. Where available,
An air spring pipe is refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this DTC
blocked/damaged/crushed on the approved diagnostic system. Check for an air
Corner valve stuck closed spring leak. Check the air harness for evidence of
(mechanically) melting, crushing, kinking or collapsing. Check the
Reservoir valve stuck front and rear valve block pipes for correct routing
open (mechanically) and installation. Check the reservoir valve block
pipes for correct routing and installation. Refer to
C1A06- Right Rear Right-hand front height Check the sensor connector for damage. Refer to
Height sensor fault
C1A06- Right Rear Right-hand rear height Check height sensor linkage is connected and not
26 Height Sensor sensor signal voltage damaged. Visually inspect the wiring harness and
- Signal rate of stuck whilst vehicle is connectors for water ingress. Where possible, refer
change below driven to the guided diagnostic routine for this DTC on the
threshold Height sensor linkage approved diagnostic system
disconnected
Height sensor fault
C1A06- Right Rear Right- hand rear height Check height sensor linkage is connected and not
- Signal rate of change above threshold connectors for water ingress. Where possible, refer
change above Height sensor harness to the guided diagnostic routine for this DTC on the
threshold wiring short circuit to approved diagnostic system
disconnected
Height sensor fault
C1A06- Right Rear Right-hand rear height Calibrate the system using the approved diagnostic
calibration process
C1A06- Right Rear Sensor alignment or Check height sensor linkage is connected and not
short to ground
fault
C1A06- Right Rear Right-hand rear height

operation incorrectly installed
(unions reversed) Check that the vehicle is free of obstructions. Check
Height sensor incorrectly the height sensor for correct installation and torque
installed of fixings. If necessary, calibrate the system using
A gallery pipe is the approved diagnostic system. Where available,
blocked/damaged/crushed refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this DTC
An air spring pipe is on the approved diagnostic system. Check for an air
blocked/damaged/crushed spring leak. Check the air harness for evidence of
Corner valve stuck shut melting, crushing, kinking or collapsing. Check the
(mechanically) front and rear valve block pipes for correct routing
Reservoir valve stuck and installation. Check the reservoir valve block
open (mechanically) pipes for correct routing and installation. Refer to
C1A07- Cross Follow the process detailed in the relevant special

62 Articulation - service message. Check the condition and security
NOTE: This DTC may be set
Signal compare by a fault relating to any of the of the height sensor bracket(s). Check the height
failure height sensors. It will only set if sensor for correct installation and fixings torque. If
fault is present and vehicle any height sensor fixings are slackened or found to
speed is greater than 55kph be loose, or a height sensor has been changed, the
(35mph) for more than 25 vehicle ride height must be re-calibrated. Calibrate
seconds. the system using the approved diagnostic system
Incorrect height
calibration, e.g. height
sensor removed and re-
installed or renewed
without re-calibrating
damaged/bent (after
calibration)
loose/disconnected
Height sensor bracket
damaged/bent
Height sensor fault
C1A08- Pressure Pressure sensor supply Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
1C Sensor Supply voltage out of range routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
- Circuit Pressure sensor harness system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
voltage out of wiring short circuit to check the pressure sensor circuit. Renew the sensor
range ground, short circuit to if faulty
Pressure sensor failure
Wiring to pressure sensor
C1A10- Pressure Signal plausibility failure Check the air spring pipes from the front and rear
64 Fluctuates Axle valve block pipes valve blocks are connected to the correct ports.
When System connected incorrectly Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
Inactive - Pneumatic parts routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
Signal disconnected while system. Check for leaks. Refer to the electrical
plausibility system active circuit diagrams and check the pressure sensor
failure Corner valve stuck open circuit. Renew the sensor if faulty
(mechanically)
Pressure sensor harness
Pressure sensor fault
(calibration drift)
Pressure gallery leak
Exhaust valve fault
C1A13- Pressure Does Signal plausibility failure Check the pipes from the reservoir valve block are
64 Not Decrease Reservoir valve block connected to the correct ports. Where available,
When Venting pipes incorrectly installed refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this DTC
Gallery - Signal (unions reversed) on the approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
plausibility Exhaust valve stuck electrical circuit diagrams and check the pressure
failure closed sensor circuit. Renew the sensor if faulty
Exhaust valve does not
hold minimum retention
pressure
Gallery pipe
blocked/damaged
Air suspension exhaust
silencer blocked/restricted
Axle valve block pipes
connected incorrectly
Pressure sensor fault
C1A18- Pressure Signal plausibility failure Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
64 Increase Too Reservoir valve stuck routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
Rapid When closed (mechanically) system. Renew the sensor if faulty
Filling Reservoir pipe
Reservoir - blocked/damaged
Signal Reservoir port
plausibility blocked/restricted
failure Pressure sensor fault
C1A20- Pressure Signal plausibility failure Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
64 Increase Too Gallery pipe air leak routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
Slow When Air supply unit fault system. Check the Air suspension intake pipe and
Filling Reservoir pipe air leak silencer for blockage/restriction
Reservoir - Reservoir air leak
Signal Intake filter
plausibility blocked/restricted
failure Intake pipe
blocked/restricted
Air suspension intake
silencer blocked/restricted
Corner valve stuck open
C1A24- No Signal plausibility failure

64 Temperature Air supply unit cylinder NOTE: Circuit - COMP_TEMP_SIG - COMP_TEMP_GND
Increase When head temperature sensor -
Compressor disconnected
Requested - Air supply unit cylinder Check the security of the air supply unit cylinder
Signal head temperature sensor head temperature sensor and electrical connection.
plausibility detached from cylinder Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
failure head routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
Air supply unit cylinder system
head temperature sensor
fault
C1A24- No Signal plausibility failure

67 Temperature Air supply unit cylinder NOTE: Circuit - COMP_TEMP_SIG - COMP_TEMP_GND
Increase When head temperature sensor -
Compressor disconnected
Requested - Air supply unit cylinder Check the security of the air supply unit cylinder
Signal incorrect head temperature sensor head temperature sensor and electrical connection.
after event fault Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
Air supply unit routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
disconnected system
Air supply unit ground
circuit high resistance
Air supply unit fault
C1A27- Compressor - Air supply unit voltage

12 Circuit short to present when air supply NOTE: Circuit - COMP_V -
battery unit not requested
Air supply unit relay fault Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
Air supply unit harness routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
wiring short circuit to system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
power check the air supply unit power supply circuit.
Air supply unit motor Check the security and integrity of the air supply
connector disconnected unit ground connection. Check the operation of the
Air supply unit ground air supply unit relay. Repair/renew as necessary
terminal loose
C1A27- Compressor - Air supply unit circuit

14 Circuit short to short to ground or open NOTE: Circuit - COMP_V -
ground or open circuit
Air supply relay/air supply Check/renew fuses as necessary. Where available,
unit fusible link (Fuse refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this DTC
10E) in battery junction on the approved diagnostic system. Check the
box failed/not installed operation of the air supply unit relay. Repair/renew
Air supply unit relay as necessary
failure
C1A27- Compressor - Air supply unit relay Refer to DTC C1A27-12 which will be set first
29 Signal invalid control voltage signal
invalid
C1A28- Wrong Number Switch pack disconnected

64 of LEDs Air suspension control NOTE: Circuit - LED_NEG - HIGH_LED - STD_HT_LED
Illuminated - module supply (BATTERY) - CRAWL_LED - ACCESS_HT_LED - RAISING_LED -
Signal fuse (26E) in battery LOWERING LED -
plausibility junction box failed
failure LED circuit short circuit to Check/renew fuse as necessary. Refer to the
power electrical circuit diagrams and check LED circuits for
One or more LEDs short short to ground, power or open circuit. Repair as
circuit to each other necessary. Check for high resistance between air
Switch pack failure suspension control module and center console
Switch pack harness switch pack. Check for one or more LEDs short
wiring short circuit to circuit to each other. Clear the DTC and test for
ground, short circuit to normal operation. If no fault was found with the
power or high resistance above circuit tests and the DTC is persists, suspect
center console switch pack
C1A29- Switch Ride height change switch

92 Activation Too performance or incorrect NOTE: Circuit - LOWER_SW - RAISE_SW -
Long - operation
Performance or Switch pressed for more Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
incorrect than 255 seconds routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
operation Switch pack harness system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
wiring short circuit to check circuits for short to ground, power, or
ground, short circuit to between harness. Check for high resistance
power between air suspension control module and center
Switch pack failure console switch pack. Check switch pack for
mechanical damage, stuck contacts. Clear the DTC
and test for normal operation. If no fault was found
with the above circuit tests and the DTC is persists,
suspect center console switch pack
C1A30- Both Switches Signal plausibility failure

64 Pressed At Air suspension control NOTE: Circuit - LOWER_SW - RAISE_SW -
Same Time - module supply (BATTERY)
Signal fuse (26E) in battery Check/renew fuse as necessary. Where available,
plausibility junction box failed refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this DTC
failure Switch pack harness on the approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
wiring short circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check circuits for
ground short to ground, power, or between harness. Check
Switch pack failure for high resistance between air suspension control
module and center console switch pack. Check
switch pack for mechanical damage, stuck contacts.
Clear the DTC and test for normal operation. If no
fault was found with the above circuit tests and the
DTC is persists, suspect center console switch pack
C1A31- Left Front Left-hand front corner

01 Corner Valve - valve general electrical NOTE: Circuit - FL_CV_POS - FL_CV_NEG -
General failure
electrical Front valve block Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
failure disconnected routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
Front valve block circuit system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short circuit to ground, check valve circuit. Renew the valve block assembly
open circuit or high if faulty. Clear the DTC and retest
resistance
Left-hand front corner
valve failure
C1A32- Right Front Right-hand front corner

01 Corner Valve - valve general electrical NOTE: Circuit - FR_CV_POS - FR_CV_NEG -
General failure
electrical Front valve block Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
Front valve block circuit system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short circuit to ground, check valve circuit. Renew the valve block
open circuit or high assembly. Clear the DTC and retest
resistance
Right-hand front corner
valve failure
C1A33- Left Rear Left-hand rear corner

01 Corner Valve - valve, general electrical NOTE: Circuit - RL_CV_POS - RL_CV_NEG -
General failure
electrical Rear valve block Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
Rear valve block circuit system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short circuit to ground, check valve circuit. Renew the valve block assembly
open circuit or high if faulty. Clear the DTC and retest
resistance
Left-hand rear corner
valve failure
C1A34- Right Rear Right-hand rear corner

01 Corner Valve - valve general electrical NOTE: Circuit - RR_CV_POS - RR_CV_NEG -
General failure
electrical Rear valve block circuit Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
failure short circuit to ground, routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
open circuit or high system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
resistance check valve circuit. Renew the valve block assembly
Rear valve block if faulty. Clear the DTC and retest
disconnected
Right-hand rear corner
valve failure
C1A35- Reservoir Reservoir valve general

01 Valve - General electrical failure NOTE: Circuit - RES_V_POS - RES_V_NEG -
electrical Reservoir valve block
failure harness wiring short Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
circuit to ground or open routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
circuit system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Reservoir valve block check valve circuit. Renew the valve block assembly
disconnected if faulty. Clear the DTC and retest
Reservoir valve block
failure
C1A36- Exhaust Valve Exhaust valve general

01 - General electrical failure NOTE: Circuit - EXH_V_POS - EXH_V_NEG -
electrical Exhaust valve harness
failure wiring short circuit to Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
ground or open circuit routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
Exhaust valve system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
disconnected check valve circuit. If exhaust valve is faulty, renew
Exhaust valve failure the air supply unit. Clear the DTC and retest
C1A37- Front Cross- Front cross-link valve

01 Link Valve - general electrical failure NOTE: Circuit - F_XV_POS - F_XV_NEG -
General Front valve block harness
electrical wiring short circuit to Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
failure ground or open circuit routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
Front valve block system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
disconnected check valve circuit. Renew the valve block assembly
Front cross-link valve if faulty. Clear the DTC and retest
failure
C1A38- Rear Cross- Rear cross-link valve

01 Link Valve - general electrical failure NOTE: Circuit - R_XV_POS - R_XV_NEG -
General Rear valve block harness
electrical wiring short circuit to Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
failure ground or open circuit routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
Rear valve block system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
disconnected check valve circuit. Renew the valve block assembly
Rear cross-link valve if faulty. Clear the DTC and retest
failure
C1A68- Left Front Left-hand front height

1C Height Sensor sensor supply circuit NOTE: If a height sensor is changed, the vehicle ride
Supply - Circuit voltage out of range height must be re-calibrated.
voltage out of Height sensor harness
range wiring short circuit to Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
ground or power routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
Height sensor failure system. Check the height sensor connector for
damage and security. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check height sensor circuit. Renew
the sensor if faulty. Clear the DTC and retest
C1A69- Right Front Right-hand front height

C1A70- Left Rear Left-hand rear height

ground, short circuit to routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
power or high resistance system. Check the height sensor connector for
Height sensor failure damage and security. Refer to the electrical circuit
C1A71- Right Rear Right-hand rear height

C1A99- Pressure Pressure sensor circuit

1C Sensor - voltage out of range NOTE: Circuit - PRESSURE_5V - PRESSURE_SIG -
Circuit voltage Sensor disconnected PRESSURE_GND -
out of range Pressure sensor circuit
short circuit to ground or Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
to each other routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
Pressure sensor fault system. Check the sensor connector for damage
and security. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check height sensor circuit. Renew the sensor if
faulty. Clear the DTC and retest
C1B18- Module Power Signal compare failure Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
62 Supplies - Inconsistent battery and routine for this code on the approved diagnostic
Signal compare ignition voltages received system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
failure by air suspension control check the power supply circuits to the module.
module Check the module connector for security and
Air suspension control integrity
module supply circuit(s)
short circuit to ground
Air suspension control
module supply circuit(s)
high resistance
C1B21- Compressor Air supply unit brush card

1C Brush Card temperature sensor NOTE: Circuit - MOT_TEMP_SIG - MOT_TEMP_GND -
Temperature circuit voltage out of
Sensor - range Where available, refer to the guided diagnostic
Circuit voltage Air supply unit brush card routine for this code on the approved diagnostic
out of range temperature sensor system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
harness wiring short check the air supply unit temperature circuit
circuit to ground, short between the air supply unit and the module. Renew
circuit to power or high the air supply unit if temperature sensor faulty
resistance
Air supply unit brush card
temperature sensor
failure
U0073- Control Module CAN bus connections Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
88 Communication short circuit to each other the power and ground connections to the ride
Bus 'A' Off - levelling module. Using the manufacturer approved
Bus off diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the CAN network
U0100- Lost CAN bus fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Communication the power and ground connections to the engine
With ECM/PCM control module. Using the manufacturer approved
"A" - No sub diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
type integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
information diagrams and check the CAN network between the
engine control module and the air suspension
control module
00 Communication the power and ground connections to the
With TCM - No transmission control module. Using the
sub type manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete
information a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
between the transmission control module and the
air suspension control module
00 Communication the power and ground connections to the transfer
With Transfer case control module. Using the manufacturer
Case Control approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
Module - No network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
sub type diagrams and check the CAN network between the
information transfer case control module and the air suspension
control module
00 Communication the power and ground connections to the vehicle
With Vehicle dynamics control module. Using the manufacturer
Dynamics approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
Control Module network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
- No sub type diagrams and check the CAN network between the
information anti-lock brake system control module and the air
suspension control module
00 Communication the power and ground connections to the steering
With Steering angle sensor module. Using the manufacturer
Angle Sensor approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
Module - No network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
information steering angle sensor module and the air
00 Communication the power and ground connections to the park
With Park brake module. Using the manufacturer approved
Brake Control diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
Module - No integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
information electric park brake control module and the air
00 Communication the power and ground connections to the active roll
With Active control module. Using the manufacturer approved
Roll Control diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
Module - No integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
information dynamic response control module and the air
00 Communication the power and ground connections to the
With differential control module. Using the manufacturer
Differential approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
- Rear - No sub diagrams and check the CAN network between the
type rear differential control module and the air
information suspension control module
00 Communication the power and ground connections to the all terrain
with All Terrain control module. Using the manufacturer approved
Control Module diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
- No sub type integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
terrain response switchpack and the air suspension
control module
00 Communication the power and ground connections to the body
With Body control module. Using the manufacturer approved
Control Module diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
- No sub type integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
central junction box and the air suspension control
module
U0300- Internal Incorrect software loaded Configure the air suspension control module and
55 Control Module CAN wiring to central instrument cluster as necessary using the approved
Software junction box high diagnostic system
Incompatibility resistance
- Not Incorrect instrument
configured cluster CAN configuration
U0416- Invalid Data Invalid data received Check the anti-lock brake system control module
68 Received From from anti-lock brake for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Vehicle system control module index
Dynamics
Control Module
- Event
information
U0417- Invalid Data Invalid data received Check the electric park brake control module for
68 Received From from electric park brake related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Park Brake control module
Control Module
- Event
information
U0428- Invalid Data Invalid data received Check the steering angle sensor module for related
68 Received From from steering angle DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Steering Angle sensor module
Sensor Module
- Event
information
U1A14- CAN Internal electronic failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
49 Initialization the power and ground connections to the module.
failure- Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Internal system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
electronic Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
failure the CAN network
U2000- Motor Motor signal incorrect

67 Temperature - after event NOTE: Circuit - MOT_TEMP_SIG - MOT_TEMP_GND -
Signal incorrect Air supply unit brush card
after event temperature sensor not Where possible, refer to the guided diagnostic
connected electrically routine for this DTC on the approved diagnostic
Air supply unit brush card system. Check the air supply unit connector for
temperature sensor security and integrity. Check the air supply unit
failure ground connection. Renew the air supply unit if
Air supply unit temperature sensor faulty
disconnected
Air supply unit ground
connection disconnected
U2007- Valve(s) - Valve circuit short circuit Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors
11 Circuit short to to ground when system is between the air suspension control module and the
ground inactive control valves for water ingress. Refer to the
Water ingress to wiring electrical circuit diagrams and check the valve
harness or connectors circuits
Valve harness wiring
short circuit to ground or
high resistance
U2007- Valve(s) - Valve signal incorrect Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors
67 Signal incorrect after event between the air suspension control module and the
after event Valve positive control valves for water ingress. Where possible,
connections shorted to refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this DTC
power or ground on the approved diagnostic system
Electrical leakage
between permanent
battery volts and any
valve positive connection
U210A- Temperature Air supply unit cylinder

16 Sensor - head temperature sensor NOTE: Circuit - COMP_TEMP_SIG - COMP_TEMP_GND
Circuit voltage circuit voltage below -
below threshold
threshold Temperature sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit short to ground or the air supply unit temperature circuit between the
short to other cable air supply unit and the control module. Renew the
air supply unit assembly
U3000- Control Module System programming This DTC is not a fault but is logged when the air
05 - System failures, air suspension suspension has been set in tight tolerance mode.
programming control module has been Use the manufacturers approved diagnostic
failures set in tight tolerance equipment to set system into normal (customer)
mode using diagnostic mode
tester
U3000- Control Module Circuit voltage out of This may not be a fault. Check the battery state of
1C - Circuit range charge and check for other DTCs that would
voltage out of Vehicle battery voltage determine a flat battery condition. Clear the DTC
range has been too low to and retest. If the DTC persists, visually inspect the
operate the air wiring harness and connectors between the air
suspension system suspension control module and the control valves
Valve positive circuit for water ingress. Refer to the electrical circuit
intermittent short to diagrams and check the valve circuits
ground
U3000- Control Module Circuit current out of Check the rear valve block connector for security
1D - Circuit range and integrity (rear axle valve block is used as part
current out of Rear valve block of power-up diagnostic check). Refer to the
range disconnected electrical circuit diagrams and check the valve
Any valve positive short circuits
circuit to ground (more
than 20A flowing)
U3000- Control Module Valve signal incorrect Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors
49 - Internal after event between the air suspension control module and the
electronic Valve circuit isolation control valves for water ingress. Where possible,
failure switch test failed refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this DTC
Valve positive on the approved diagnostic system. Clear the DTC
connections shorted to and retest. If the problem persists, renew the air
power or ground suspension control module
Electrical leakage
between permanent
battery volts and any
valve positive connection
Internal electronic failure
U3000- Control Module Not activated, vehicle has This DTC is not a fault, use the manufacturers
52 - Not activated been set in manufacturing approved diagnostic equipment to set system into
mode using diagnostic normal (customer) mode
tester
U3000- Control Module Deactivated; the system This DTC is not a fault. Clear deflation routine using
53 - Deactivated has been deflated using manufacturers approved diagnostic equipment
the diagnostic deflation
routine
U3000- Control Module Missing calibration; This DTC is not a fault, use the manufacturers
54 - Missing module has not been approved diagnostic equipment to calibrate the ride
calibration calibrated (height height
sensors)
U3000- Control Module Not configured; system This DTC is not a fault, use the manufacturers
55 - Not set in calibration mode approved diagnostic equipment to calibrate the ride
configured using diagnostic tester height
U3002- Vehicle Signal compare failure Program the relevant module using the approved
62 Identification Air suspension control diagnostic system and calibrate the ride height
Number - module has been
Signal compare swapped from another
failure vehicle (NOTE Air
suspension requires re-
calibration)
Instrument pack has been
changed and not re-
coded
U300D- Ignition Input General electrical failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
01 On/Start - Ignition fuse the power supply fuse and circuit to the air
General failed/missing suspension control module
electrical No wake-up signal to
failure module
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Anti-
Lock Braking System Control Module (ABS)
Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the ABS module, for additional
Diagnosis and Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control (206-09A Anti-Lock Control - Traction
Control, Diagnosis and Testing).

C0030- Left Front Tone Signal frequency Check front left wheel speed sensor ring for missing teeth
38 Wheel - Signal incorrect or damage. After rectification, either clear the DTCs and
frequency Damaged ABS cycle the ignition or cycle the ignition and drive the vehicle
incorrect sensor ring above 15kph to ensure the lamps extinguish. When cycling
the ignition, allow sufficient time for the 'P' symbol
illumination to extinguish on the gear shifter (if installed)
before returning the ignition state to on
C0031- Left Front Sensor short Check the sensor lead and connector for damage. If
14 Wheel Speed circuit to ground damaged, renew the sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
Sensor - or open circuit diagrams and check the circuit between the wheel speed
Circuit short to Sensor fault sensor and the anti-lock brake system control module. After
ground or open rectification, either clear the DTCs and cycle the ignition or
cycle the ignition and drive the vehicle above 15kph to
ensure the lamps extinguish. When cycling the ignition,
allow sufficient time for the 'P' symbol illumination to
extinguish on the gear shifter (if installed) before returning
the ignition state to on
C0031- Left Front Sensor short Check the sensor lead and connector for damage. If
Sensor - Signal Sensor fault diagrams and check the circuit between the wheel speed
shape / sensor and the anti-lock brake system control module. After
waveform rectification, either clear the DTCs and cycle the ignition or
failure cycle the ignition and drive the vehicle above 15kph to
C0031- Left Front Sensor circuit Check the sensor lead and connector for damage. If
2F Wheel Speed fault damaged, renew the sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
erratic sensor and the anti-lock brake system control module. After
rectification, either clear the DTCs and cycle the ignition or
C0031- Left Front No sensor signal Check the sensor lead and connector for damage. If
31 Wheel Speed Sensor fault damaged, renew the sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
Sensor - No diagrams and check the circuit between the wheel speed
signal sensor and the anti-lock brake system control module. After
C0031- Left Front Sensor signal Check the sensor lead and connector for damage. If
62 Wheel Speed compare failure damaged, renew the sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
compare failure sensor and the anti-lock brake system control module. After
C0031- Left Front Sensor signal Check the sensor lead and connector for damage. If
64 Wheel Speed plausibility failure damaged, renew the sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
plausibility sensor and the anti-lock brake system control module. After
failure rectification, either clear the DTCs and cycle the ignition or
C0033- Right Front Signal frequency Check the sensor lead and connector for damage. If
38 Tone Wheel - incorrect damaged, renew the sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
Signal Damaged wheel diagrams and check the circuit between the wheel speed
frequency speed sensor ring sensor and the anti-lock brake system control module. After
incorrect rectification, either clear the DTCs and cycle the ignition or
C0034- Right Front Sensor short Check the sensor lead and connector for damage. If
Sensor - or open diagrams and check the circuit between the wheel speed
C0034- Right Front Sensor signal Check the sensor lead and connector for damage. If
25 Wheel Speed shape / waveform damaged, renew the sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
Sensor - Signal failure diagrams and check the circuit between the wheel speed
shape / Sensor short sensor and the anti-lock brake system control module. After
waveform circuit to ground rectification, either clear the DTCs and cycle the ignition or
failure Sensor fault cycle the ignition and drive the vehicle above 15kph to
2F Wheel Speed erratic damaged, renew the sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
C0034- Right Front No sensor signal Check the sensor lead and connector for damage. If
C0036- Left Rear Tone Signal frequency Check the sensor lead and connector for damage. If
38 Wheel - Signal incorrect damaged, renew the sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
frequency Damaged wheel diagrams and check the circuit between the wheel speed
incorrect speed sensor ring sensor and the anti-lock brake system control module. After
C0037- Left Rear Sensor short Check the sensor lead and connector for damage. If
C0037- Left Rear Sensor signal Check the sensor lead and connector for damage. If
C0037- Left Rear No sensor signal Check the sensor lead and connector for damage. If
C0039- Right Rear Signal frequency Check the sensor lead and connector for damage. If
38 Tone Wheel - incorrect damaged, renew the sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
Signal Damaged wheel diagrams and check the circuit between the wheel speed
frequency speed sensor ring sensor and the anti-lock brake system control module. After
incorrect rectification, either clear the DTCs and cycle the ignition or
C003A- Right Rear Sensor short Check the sensor lead and connector for damage. If
C003A- Right Rear Sensor signal Check the sensor lead and connector for damage. If
C003A- Right Rear Sensor signal heck the sensor lead and connector for damage. If
C003A- Right Rear No sensor signal Check the sensor lead and connector for damage. If
C0051- Steering Wheel Signal bias level Check for a correctly installed steering angle sensor. Refer
28 Position Sensor out of range/zero to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the circuit
- Signal bias adjustment failure between the wheel speed sensors and the anti-lock brake
level out of Incorrect angle system control module to ensure the sensors on one axle
range / zero sensor installed are correctly wired to the correct control module left or
adjustment Wheel speed right pin outs. Renew the steering angle sensor. After
failure sensor wiring rectification, either clear the DTCs and cycle the ignition or
incorrectly wired cycle the ignition and drive the vehicle (not always in a
across one axle straight line) for at least 9 seconds to ensure the lamps
Steering angle extinguish. When cycling the ignition, allow sufficient time
sensor fault for the 'P' symbol illumination to extinguish on the gear
shifter (if installed) before returning the ignition state to on
C0051- Steering Wheel Sensor signal Check for other DTCs that may aid diagnosis, especially in
67 Position Sensor incorrect after the steering angle sensor module. Renew the steering angle
- Signal event sensor. Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
incorrect after Steering angle renew the anti-lock brake system control module
event sensor fault
Control module
software error
C0062- Longitudinal Sensor signal bias Check installation and mounting of sensor cluster. Clear the
28 Acceleration level out of DTC and retest, if problem persists renew the sensor. After
Sensor - Signal range/zero rectification, either clear the DTCs and cycle the ignition or
bias level out adjustment failure cycle the ignition and drive the vehicle above 15kph to
of range / zero Incorrectly ensure the lamps extinguish. When cycling the ignition,
adjustment installed sensor allow sufficient time for the 'P' symbol illumination to
failure extinguish on the gear shifter (if installed) before returning
C0062- Longitudinal Sensor missing Ensure the correct sensor has been installed. Check
54 Acceleration calibration mounting, connector and fuse of the sensor. Configure the
Sensor - Incorrect sensor sensor cluster using the manufacturers approved diagnostic
Missing installed system
calibration Incorrectly
configured sensor
C0062- Longitudinal Sensor signal Clear the DTC and retest. Check mounting, connector and
64 Acceleration plausibility failure fuse of the sensor. Configure the sensor cluster using the
Sensor - Signal Incorrectly manufacturers approved diagnostic system
plausibility installed sensor
failure
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor circuit The most likely cause of the fault is an open circuit on the
14 Sensor - short to ground or harness. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to open the circuit between the sensor and the anti-lock brake
ground or open Sensor fault system control module. Repair as necessary. Clear the DTC
and retest. If the problem persists, renew the sensor
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
1C Sensor - voltage out of sensor power supply circuit
Circuit voltage range
out of range
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
27 Sensor - Signal power supply fuse sensor power supply fuse. Check the yaw rate sensor
rate of change failure connector condition. Ensure the sensor is correctly secured.
above Sensor insecurely If problem persists, renew the sensor. If the problem still
threshold mounted persists, renew the anti-lock brake system control module
Sensor fault
Control module
software error
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor signal bias Ensure the sensor is correctly secured. If problem persists,
28 Sensor - Signal level out of renew the sensor
bias level out range/zero
of range / zero adjustment failure
adjustment Sensor insecurely
failure mounted
Sensor fault
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor general Renew the sensor. If the problem persists, renew the anti-
41 Sensor - checksum failure lock brake system control module
General Sensor fault
checksum Control module
failure fault
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor internal Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
49 Sensor - electronic failure the sensor
Internal
electronic
failure
C0063- Yaw Rate Incorrect sensor Clear the DTC and retest. If the fault still exists renew the
4A Sensor - installed yaw rate sensor with the suitable sensor cluster and repeat
Incorrect test cycle
component
installed
C0063- Yaw Rate
64 Sensor - Signal NOTE: This DTC is NOTE: This DTC can be set if the vehicle is being tested on
plausibility set when the sensor chassis dyno rollers.
failure value is not within the
expected range Ensure the sensor is correctly secured. Check that the
compared to the steering steering angle sensor is correctly calibrated using the
angle senor. manufacturers recommended diagnostic system. If problem
persists, renew the sensor. After rectification, either clear
Sensor signal the DTCs and cycle the ignition or cycle the ignition and
plausibility failure drive the vehicle above 80kph (not always in a straight
Sensor insecurely line) to ensure the lamps extinguish. When cycling the
mounted ignition, allow sufficient time for the 'P' symbol illumination
to extinguish on the gear shifter (if installed) before
returning the ignition state to on
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor signal Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
86 Sensor - Signal invalid the sensor
invalid Incorrectly
configured sensor
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor incorrect Ensure the correct sensor has been installed. Clear the DTC
95 Sensor - assembly/internal and retest. If the problem persists, renew the sensor. If the
Incorrect sensor fault problem persists, renew the anti-lock brake system control
assembly module
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
96 Sensor - supply sensor power supply and ground connections to the sensor.
Component intermittent Check the sensor connecter and anti-lock brake system
internal failure connection control module for security and integrity (water ingress of
Sensor ground damaged pins). If the problem persists, renew the yaw rate
intermittent sensor. Calibrate the new sensor using the manufacturers
connection approved diagnostic system. If the fault returns after an
Sensor internal ignition cycle, renew the control module
failure
C0064- Roll Rate Sensor signal Ensure the sensor is correctly installed/secured. Clear DTC
64 Sensor - Signal plausibility failure and retest. If problem persists, renew the sensor
plausibility Sensor insecurely
failure mounted
C006A- Multi-axis Sensor missing Check that the correct sensor has been installed. Configure
54 Acceleration calibration the sensor cluster using the manufacturers approved
Sensor - Serial number of diagnostic system. If calibration fails several times, renew
Missing yaw rate sensor the control module
calibration saved in stored in
control module
memory does not
match serial
number of sensor
Incorrect sensor
installed
Installed sensor
not correctly
calibrated
C0072- Brake Excessive use of This DTC is for information only. Clear the DTC
4B Temperature brakes
Too High - Excessive use of
Over traction control
temperature system
C101F- Generic Valve Anti-lock brake Renew the anti-lock brake system control module
49 Failure - system modulator
Internal internal fault
electronic
failure
C1109- Vehicle Check the switch operation. Refer to the electrical circuit
24 Dynamics NOTE: If the diagrams and check the dynamic stability control switch
Control Switch dynamic stability control and circuits. Check and install a new dynamic stability
- Signal stuck switch is pressed for control switch as required
high longer than 1 minute, the
switch is deemed to be
malfunctioning.
Signal stuck high

- dynamic stability
control switch
operation fault
C1A77- Valve Relay Circuit voltage Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
16 Supply Circuit - below threshold harness connection and fuse to the valve relay circuits
Circuit voltage Fuse
below Harness/connector
threshold damaged
C1A90- Wheel Speed Wheel speed Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the wheel
12 Sensor Supply sensor supply speed sensor power supply line circuits between the
- Circuit short circuit short sensors and the anti-lock brake system control module
to battery circuit to power
C1A95- Wheel Speed The incorrect Check the correct wheel speed sensors are installed. Clear
4A Sensor - wheel speed the DTC and retest
Incorrect sensor has been
component installed
installed
C1A95- Wheel Speed Signal plausibility Check for correct wheel/tire sizes. Check the wheel speed
64 Sensor - Signal failure sensors and circuits for damage. Remove the sensor and
plausibility Wheel speed visually inspect the sensor ring on the constant velocity
failure sensor fault (any) joint for missing or damaged teeth. If the sensor ring is
Sensor ring damaged, renew the constant velocity joint. Use an
damaged, oscilloscope to examine the signals from all wheel speed
incorrect or sensors for abnormal high frequencies (modulation and
defective peak signals). Renew sensors as necessary. After
Harness fault rectification, either clear the DTCs and cycle the ignition or
Incorrect cycle the ignition and drive the vehicle above 15kph for at
wheel/tire least 30 seconds to ensure the lamps extinguish. When
assembly size cycling the ignition, allow sufficient time for the 'P' symbol
illumination to extinguish on the gear shifter (if installed)
before returning the ignition state to on
C1A96- Brake Light Signal plausibility Check the Stop lamp function. Ensure the brake pedal
64 Switch - Signal failure switch is correctly installed and configured. Refer to the
plausibility Stop lamp switch electrical circuit diagrams and check the brake pedal switch
failure fault circuit, rectify as necessary. Check the engine control
Harness/connector module for DTCs. After rectification, either clear the DTCs
issue and cycle the ignition or cycle the ignition and drive the
vehicle above 15kph with at least one brake pedal press to
C1A97- Lateral Signal stuck high Renew the combined lateral acceleration/yaw rate sensor
24 Accelerometer Yaw rate/lateral
- Signal stuck acceleration
high sensor internal
error
C1A98- Yaw Rate Yaw rate sensor Information only, regard as normal operation. Clear the
2F Sensor - Signal signal fault for 2 DTC, cycle the ignition and retest. If the fault reoccurs,
erratic minutes renew the combined lateral acceleration/yaw rate sensor.
When cycling the ignition, allow sufficient time for the 'P'
symbol illumination to extinguish on the gear shifter (if
installed) before returning the ignition state to on
C1A98- Yaw Rate Incorrect Check the combined lateral acceleration/yaw rate sensor
96 Sensor - assembly installation and orientation. Check mounting, connector and
Component Sensor installation fuse of the sensor. Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem
internal failure incorrect persists, renew the combined lateral acceleration/yaw rate
Yaw rate/lateral sensor
acceleration
sensor internal
error
C1B00- Steering Angle Sensor signal Check steering angle sensor module for DTCs. Check the
29 Sensor - Signal invalid steering angle sensor installation and orientation. Clear the
invalid Sensor installation DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew the sensor
incorrect
steering angle
sensor fault
C1B00- Steering Angle Sensor internal Check steering angle sensor module for DTCs. Renew the
49 Sensor - electronic failure sensor
Internal
electronic
failure
C1B00- Steering Angle Sensor signal Check steering angle sensor module for DTCs. Check the
64 Sensor - Signal plausibility failure steering angle sensor installation and orientation. Check the
plausibility Sensor installation yaw rate sensor installation and orientation. Clear the DTC
failure incorrect and retest. If the problem persists, renew the steering
steering angle angle sensor module
sensor fault
Yaw rate sensor
installation
incorrect
C1B00- Steering Angle Sensor Check steering angle sensor module for DTCs. Check the
92 Sensor - performance or steering angle sensor installation and orientation. Check the
Performance or incorrect yaw rate sensor installation and orientation. Clear the DTC
incorrect operation and retest. If the problem persists, renew the steering
operation Sensor installation angle sensor
incorrect
steering angle
sensor fault
C1B02- Return Pump - Return pump Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
16 Circuit voltage circuit voltage circuit, fuses and the connection to the anti-lock brake
below below threshold system control module. Rectify as necessary. After
threshold Harness damaged rectification, either clear the DTCs and cycle the ignition or
Defective fuse cycle the ignition and drive the vehicle above 15kph to
C1B02- Return Pump - Anti-lock brake Renew the anti-lock brake system modulator
49 Internal system control
electronic module internal
failure electronic failure
C1B22- Hill Descent Check the switch operation. Refer to the electrical circuit
24 Switch - Signal NOTE: If the hill diagrams and check the switch and circuit for short to
stuck high decent control switch is power
pressed for longer than 1
minute, the switch is
deemed to be
malfunctioning.
Signal stuck high

Harness/connector
issue
C2009- Front Axle Sensor location Swap the front wheel speed sensor locations. Clear the DTC
64 Wheel Speed swapped and retest. In order to clear the DTC/warning lamp after
Sensors fault is rectified, the vehicle must be driven above 15km/h
Swapped -
Signal
plausibility
failure
C200A- Rear Axle Sensor location Swap the rear wheel speed sensor locations. Clear the DTC
64 Wheel Speed swapped and retest. In order to clear the DTC/warning lamp after
Sensors fault is rectified, the vehicle must be driven above 15km/h
Swapped -
Signal
plausibility
failure
U0001- High Speed CAN bus off Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
88 CAN and ground connections to the module. Using the
Communication manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
Bus - Bus off network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
U0074- Control Module CAN Bus off Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
88 Communication and ground connections to the module. Using the
Bus "B" Off - manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
Bus off network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Communication information and ground connections to the module. Using the
With ECM/PCM manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
"A" - No sub network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
type diagrams and check the CAN network between the engine
information control module and the anti-lock brake system control
module
With TCM - No manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
sub type network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
transmission control module and the anti-lock brake system
control module
With Transfer manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
Case Control network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Module - No diagrams and check the CAN network between the transfer
sub type case control module and the anti-lock brake system control
information module
With Gear Shift manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
A - No sub diagrams and check the CAN network between the gear
type shift control module and the anti-lock brake system control
information module
With Cruise manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
- No sub type diagrams and check the CAN network between the cruise
information control module and the anti-lock brake system control
module
With Yaw Rate manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
Sensor Module network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
- No sub type diagrams and check the CAN network between the yaw rate
information sensor control module and the anti-lock brake system
control module
With Steering manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
Angle Sensor network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Module - No diagrams and check the CAN network between the steering
sub type angle sensor module and the anti-lock brake system control
information module
With Park manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
Brake Control network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Module - No diagrams and check the CAN network between the park
sub type brake control module and the anti-lock brake system
information control module
With manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
Suspension network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Control Module diagrams and check the CAN network between the
"A" - No sub suspension control module and the anti-lock brake system
type control module
information
With Active manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
Roll Control network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Module - No diagrams and check the CAN network between the dynamic
sub type response control module and the anti-lock brake system
With manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
Differential network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Control Module diagrams and check the CAN network between the rear
- Rear - No sub differential control module and the anti-lock brake system
type control module
information
With All manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
Terrain Control network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Module - No diagrams and check the CAN network between the all
sub type terrain control module and the anti-lock brake system
With Body manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
- No sub type diagrams and check the CAN network between the central
information junction box and the anti-lock brake system control module
U0300- Internal Control module Ensure the correct module is installed

00 Control Module has been installed
Software to the incorrect
Incompatibility vehicle
- No sub type
information
U0401- Invalid Data Invalid data Check the engine control module for related DTCs and refer
68 Received from received to the relevant DTC index
ECM/PCM A -
Event
information
U0402- Invalid Data Invalid data Check the transmission control module for related DTCs
68 Received from received and refer to the relevant DTC index
TCM - Event
information
U0403- Invalid Data Invalid data Check the transfer case control module for related DTCs
68 Received From received and refer to the relevant DTC index
Transfer Case
Control Module
- Event
information
U0404- Invalid Data Event information Check the transmission control switch for related DTCs and
68 Received From - transmission refer to the relevant DTC index
Gear Shift control switch
Control Module related concern
A - event
information
U0405- Invalid Data Invalid data Check the speed control module for related DTCs and refer
68 Received From received to the relevant DTC index
Cruise Control
Module - Event
information
U0417- Invalid Data Invalid data Check the park brake control module for related DTCs and
68 Received From received refer to the relevant DTC index
Park Brake
Control Module
- Event
information
U0421- Invalid Data Invalid data Check the air suspension control module for related DTCs
68 Received from received and refer to the relevant DTC index
Suspension
Control Module
A - Event
information
U0428- Invalid Data Invalid data Check the steering angle sensor control module for related
68 Received From received DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Steering Angle
Sensor Module
- Event
information
U0437- Invalid Data Invalid data Check the rear differential control module for related DTCs
68 Received From received and refer to the relevant DTC index
Differential
Control
Module-Rear -
Event
information
U0439- Invalid Data Invalid data Check the all terrain control module for related DTCs and
68 Received From received refer to the relevant DTC index
All Terrain
Control Module
- Event
information
U1A14- CAN Incorrect control Check that the correct anti-lock brake system control
00 Initialisation module installed module has been installed. Refer to the electrical circuit
Failure - No to vehicle diagrams and check the power and ground connections to
sub type the module. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information system, complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
U2101- Control Module Car configuration Check that the correct anti-lock brake system control
00 Configuration file incorrectly module has been installed. Configure the car configuration
Incompatible - configured file using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
No sub type
information
U2101- Control Module Vehicle variant Check that the correct anti-lock brake system control
68 Configuration code distributed module has been installed. Configure the car configuration
Incompatible - via CAN is not file using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
Event matching the code
information stored in the
central junction
box memory
Anti-lock brake
system control
module has been
installed from
another vehicle
(codes do not
match expected)
New anti-lock
brake system
control module
has been installed
and at first use
code did not
match (becomes
historic after first
use)
U3000- Control Module Incorrect control Check that the correct anti-lock brake system control
00 - No sub type module installed module module has been installed. Refer to the electrical
information to vehicle circuit diagrams and check the power and ground circuits to
the component. Configure the module(s) using the
manufacturers approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
network communications section of the workshop manual
U3000- Control Module Program memory Clear the DTC and retest. Repeat for several times. If the
45 - Program failure (software problem persists, renew the anti-lock brake system control
memory failure error) module
U3000- Control Module Internal electronic Renew the anti-lock brake system control module
49 - Internal failure
electronic
failure
U3000- Control Module Module over Allow the unit to cool, clear the DTC and retest. If the
4B - Over temperature has problem persists, as a last resort renew the anti-lock brake
temperature been detected system control module. Consider environmental conditions
Excessive anti- before suspecting the module
lock brake system
interaction has
been invoked,
possibly by
diagnostic
equipment
U3000- Control Module Deactivated This is not a fault. Anti-lock brake system control module
53 - De-activated during software temporarily deactivated following programming session.
download to other Please cycle the ignition to clear
modules on
vehicle
U3000- Control Module Stability assist Check for other related DTCs. Check the wheel speed
68 - Event operation is in sensors, combined yaw rate/lat acceleration sensor and
information progress and this steering angle sensor module
has been
continuing for an
unfeasible length
of time
U3000- Control Module Car configuration Configure the car configuration file using the manufacturers
87 - Missing file missing approved diagnostic system
message message
U3002- Vehicle Invalid vehicle Configure the car configuration file using the manufacturers
81 Identification identification approved diagnostic system
Number - number
Invalid serial
data received
U3003- Battery Voltage Signal compare Check the battery condition and state of charge. Check the
62 - Signal failure vehicle charging system. Refer to the relevant workshop
compare failure manual section
U3006- Control Module Anti-lock brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
16 Input Power system control module power and ground circuits. Check the battery
"A" - Circuit module circuit condition and state of charge. Check the vehicle charging
voltage below voltage below system. Refer to the relevant workshop manual section
threshold threshold
Battery voltage
low
Battery ground
cable: high
resistance
Battery
connections
loose/corroded
Battery current
drain
U3006- Control Module Anti-lock brake Check the battery condition and state of charge. Check the
17 Input Power system control vehicle charging system. Refer to the relevant workshop
"A" - Circuit module circuit manual section
voltage above voltage above
threshold threshold
Charging system
fault
U3006- Control Module Anti-lock brake Check the battery condition and state of charge. Check the
1C Input Power system control vehicle charging system. Check the connecter security to
"A" - Circuit module circuit the module. Refer to the relevant workshop manual section
voltage out of voltage out of
range range, a
momentary low
voltage occurred
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Audio
Amplifier Control Module (AAM)
Audio Amplifier Module (AAM)
CAUTIONS:
Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not
guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor
vehicle.
When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adaptor kit, part
number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:
Where an 'on demand self-test' is referred to, this can be accessed via the 'diagnostic trouble code monitor'
tab on the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Audio Amplifier Module, for
For additional information, refer to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00 Information and Entertainment
System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).

B128A- Speaker #13 Wiring
11 - Circuit harness fault NOTE: Only applies to vehicles fitted with premium audio system
short to Speaker fault
ground Audio Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check left co-axial surround
amplifier speaker circuits for short to ground. Check speaker for short
fault circuit, open circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio
amplifier module

battery Audio Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check left co-axial surround
amplifier speaker circuits for short to power. Check speaker for short circuit,
fault open circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier
module

open Speaker fault
Audio Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check left co-axial surround
amplifier speaker circuits for open circuit. Check speaker for short circuit,
module
1A - Circuit harness fault NOTE: Only applies to vehicles fitted with premium audio system
resistance Speaker fault
below Audio Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check left co-axial surround
threshold amplifier speaker circuits for short circuit. Check speaker for short circuit,
module

1E - Circuit harness fault NOTE: Only applies to vehicles fitted with premium audio system
out of range Audio Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check left co-axial surround
amplifier speaker circuits for open circuit, high resistance, or short circuit.
fault Check speaker for short circuit, open circuit. If no harness or
speaker fault suspect audio amplifier module
B128B- Speaker #14 Wiring

ground Audio Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check right co-axial surround
amplifier speaker circuits for short to ground. Check speaker for short
fault circuit, open circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio
amplifier module

battery Audio Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check right co-axial surround
amplifier speaker circuits for short to power. Check speaker for short circuit,
module

open Speaker fault
Audio Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check right co-axial surround
amplifier speaker circuits for open circuit. Check speaker for short circuit,
module

below Audio Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check right co-axial surround
threshold amplifier speaker circuits for short circuit. Check speaker for short circuit,
module

out of range Audio Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check right co-axial surround
amplifier speaker circuits for open circuit, high resistance, or short circuit.
fault Check speaker for short circuit, open circuit. If no harness or
speaker fault suspect audio amplifier module
B128C- Speaker #15 Wiring

ground Audio Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check front center speaker
amplifier circuits for short to ground. Check speaker for short circuit, open
fault circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier
module

battery Audio Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check front center speaker
amplifier circuits for short to power. Check speaker for short circuit, open
module

open Speaker fault
Audio Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check front center speaker
amplifier circuits for open circuit. Check speaker for short circuit, open
module
below Audio Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check front center speaker
threshold amplifier circuits for short circuit. Check speaker for short circuit, open
module

out of range Audio Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check front center speaker
amplifier circuits for open circuit, high resistance, or short circuit. Check
fault speaker for short circuit, open circuit. If no harness or speaker
fault suspect audio amplifier module
B1A01- Speaker #1 - Wiring Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check left front tweeter circuits
11 Circuit short harness fault for short to ground. Check speaker for short circuit, open circuit.
to ground Speaker fault If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier module
Audio
amplifier
fault
12 Circuit short harness fault for short to power. Check speaker for short circuit, open circuit. If
to battery Speaker fault no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier module
Audio
amplifier
fault
13 Circuit open harness fault for open circuit. Check speaker for short circuit, open circuit. If no
Speaker fault harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier module
Audio
amplifier
fault
1A Circuit harness fault for short circuit. Check speaker for short circuit, open circuit. If no
resistance Speaker fault harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier module
below Audio
threshold amplifier
fault
1E Circuit harness fault for open circuit, high resistance or short circuit. Check speaker for
resistance Speaker fault short circuit, open circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect
out of range Audio audio amplifier module
amplifier
fault
B1A02- Speaker #2 - Wiring Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check left front sub-woofer
11 Circuit short harness fault circuits for short to ground. Check speaker for short circuit, open
to ground Speaker fault circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier
Audio module
amplifier
fault
12 Circuit short harness fault circuits for short to power. Check speaker for short circuit, open
to battery Speaker fault circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier
Audio module
amplifier
fault
13 Circuit open harness fault circuits for open circuit. Check speaker for short circuit, open
Speaker fault circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier
Audio module
amplifier
fault
1A Circuit harness fault circuits for short circuit. Check speaker for short circuit, open
resistance Speaker fault circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier
below Audio module
threshold amplifier
fault
1E Circuit harness fault circuits for open circuit, high resistance, or short circuit. Check
resistance Speaker fault speaker for short circuit, open circuit. If no harness or speaker
out of range Audio fault suspect audio amplifier module
amplifier
fault
B1A03- Speaker #3 - Wiring Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check right front tweeter
Audio module
amplifier
fault
Audio module
amplifier
fault
Audio module
amplifier
fault
below Audio module
threshold amplifier
fault
1E Circuit harness fault circuits for open circuit, high resistance or short circuit. Check
amplifier
fault
B1A04- Speaker #4 - Wiring Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check right front sub-woofer
Audio module
amplifier
fault
Audio module
amplifier
fault
Audio module
amplifier
fault
below Audio module
threshold amplifier
fault
amplifier
fault
B1A05- Speaker #5 - Wiring Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check left rear tweeter speaker
Audio module
amplifier
fault
Audio module
amplifier
fault
Audio module
amplifier
fault
below Audio module
threshold amplifier
fault
amplifier
fault
B1A06- Speaker #6 - Wiring Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check left rear sub-woofer
Audio module
amplifier
fault
Audio module
amplifier
fault
Audio module
amplifier
fault
below Audio module
threshold amplifier
fault
amplifier
fault
B1A07- Speaker #7 - Wiring Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check right rear tweeter
11 Circuit short harness fault speaker circuits for short to ground. Check speaker for short
to ground Speaker fault circuit, open circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio
Audio amplifier module
amplifier
fault
12 Circuit short harness fault speaker circuits for short to power. Check speaker for short circuit,
to battery Speaker fault open circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier
Audio module
amplifier
fault
13 Circuit open harness fault speaker circuits for open circuit. Check speaker for short circuit,
Speaker fault open circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier
Audio module
amplifier
fault
1A Circuit harness fault speaker circuits for short circuit. Check speaker for short circuit,
resistance Speaker fault open circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier
below Audio module
threshold amplifier
fault
1E Circuit harness fault speaker circuits for open circuit, high resistance, or short circuit.
resistance Speaker fault Check speaker for short circuit, open circuit. If no harness or
out of range Audio speaker fault suspect audio amplifier module
amplifier
fault
B1A08- Speaker #8 - Wiring Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check right rear sub-woofer
Audio module
amplifier
fault
Audio module
amplifier
fault
Audio module
amplifier
fault
below Audio module
threshold amplifier
fault
amplifier
fault
B1A09- Speaker #9 - Wiring Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check left front mid range
11 Circuit short harness fault speaker circuits for short to ground. Check speaker for short
to ground Speaker fault circuit, open circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio
Audio amplifier module
amplifier
fault
12 Circuit short harness fault speaker circuits for short to power. Check speaker for short circuit,
to battery Speaker fault open circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier
Audio module
amplifier
fault
13 Circuit open harness fault speaker circuits for open circuit. Check speaker for short circuit,
Speaker fault open circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier
Audio module
amplifier
fault
1A Circuit harness fault speaker circuits for short circuit. Check speaker for short circuit,
below Audio module
threshold amplifier
fault
1E Circuit harness fault speaker circuits for open circuit, high resistance, or short circuit.
amplifier
fault
B1A10- Speaker #10 Wiring Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check right front mid range
11 - Circuit harness fault speaker circuits for short to ground. Check speaker for short
short to Speaker fault circuit, open circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio
ground Audio amplifier module
amplifier
fault
12 - Circuit harness fault speaker circuits for short to power. Check speaker for short circuit,
short to Speaker fault open circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier
battery Audio module
amplifier
fault
13 - Circuit harness fault speaker circuits for open circuit. Check speaker for short circuit,
open Speaker fault open circuit. If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier
Audio module
amplifier
fault
1A - Circuit harness fault speaker circuits for short circuit. Check speaker for short circuit,
below Audio module
threshold amplifier
fault
1E - Circuit harness fault speaker circuits for open circuit, high resistance, or short circuit.
amplifier
fault
B1A11- Speaker #11 Wiring Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check left sub-woofer circuits
11 - Circuit harness fault for short to ground. Check speaker for short circuit, open circuit.
short to Speaker fault If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier module
ground Audio
amplifier
fault
12 - Circuit harness fault for short to power. Check speaker for short circuit, open circuit. If
short to Speaker fault no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier module
battery Audio
amplifier
fault
13 - Circuit harness fault for open circuit. Check speaker for short circuit, open circuit. If no
open Speaker fault harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier module
Audio
amplifier
fault
1A - Circuit harness fault for short circuit. Check speaker for short circuit, open circuit. If no
below Audio
threshold amplifier
fault
1E - Circuit harness fault for open circuit, high resistance, or short circuit. Check speaker for
amplifier
fault
B1A12- Speaker #12 Wiring Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check right sub-woofer circuits
11 - Circuit harness fault for short to ground. Check speaker for short circuit, open circuit.
short to Speaker fault If no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier module
ground Audio
amplifier
fault
12 - Circuit harness fault for short to power. Check speaker for short circuit, open circuit. If
short to Speaker fault no harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier module
battery Audio
amplifier
fault
13 - Circuit harness fault for open circuit. Check speaker for short circuit, open circuit. If no
open Speaker fault harness or speaker fault suspect audio amplifier module
Audio
amplifier
fault
1A - Circuit harness fault for short circuit. Check speaker for short circuit, open circuit. If no
below Audio
threshold amplifier
fault
1E - Circuit harness fault for open circuit, high resistance, or short circuit. Check speaker for
amplifier
fault
B1297- Digital Wiring

01 Headphone harness fault NOTE: Applies to vehicles with digital wireless headphones installed
Module - Infra-red only
General headphone
electrical transmitter Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check data signal circuits
failure module fault between the audio amplifier and the infra-red transmitter module
Audio for short circuit. Confirm power and ground supplies are present at
amplifier the module. Repair wiring harness as required. Clear DTC and
fault retest system. If fault resets suspect:
- 1. Infra-red transmitter module
- 2. Audio amplifier module
B1297- Digital Wiring

13 Headphone harness fault NOTE: Applies to vehicles with digital wireless headphones installed
Module - Infra-red only
Circuit open headphone
transmitter Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check data signal circuits
module fault between the audio amplifier and the infra-red transmitter module
Audio for open circuit. Confirm power and ground supplies are present at
amplifier the module. Repair wiring harness as required. Clear DTC and
fault retest system. If fault resets suspect:
- 1. Infra-red transmitter module
- 2. Audio amplifier module
U2300- Central Configuration Check/amend the car configuration file using the manufacturer
54 Configuration missing approved diagnostic system
- Missing
calibration
U2300- Central Vehicle Check the vehicle is configured correctly using the manufacturer
56 Configuration configuration approved diagnostic system
- Invalid / file error
incomplete
configuration
U2300- Central Configuration Check the components installed to the vehicle are correct (not
64 Configuration file error substituted from another vehicle). Install the original or a new
- Signal Substituted component as required. This DTC will occur once if a new module
plausibility component is installed. Clear the DTC, cycle the ignition state to off. Lock the
failure New (blank) vehicle (to ensure the infotainment system has reset). Unlock the
component vehicle, cycle the ignition state to on. Retest the system
U3000- Control Configuration The local configuration file has not been programmed into the
55 Module - Not file error audio amplifier. Programme the audio amplifier with the correct
configured file using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. This DTC
will occur once if a new module is installed. Clear the DTC, cycle
the ignition state to off. Lock the vehicle (to ensure the
infotainment system has reset). Unlock the vehicle, cycle the
ignition state to on. Retest the system
U3000- Control Audio Check power and ground supplies to the audio amplifier module. If
96 Module - amplifier no fault found suspect internal fault within audio amplifier module.
Component internal fault Clear DTCs and run amplifier on demand self test
internal
failure
U3000- Control Audio Check for possible causes of the amplifier overheating. Check that
98 Module - amplifier the amplifier module ventilation is not obstructed (rear right
Component cooling vents quarter of luggage compartment). Check for speaker circuit related
or system obstructed DTCs. Check for internal electronic failure related DTCs
over Speaker
temperature circuit fault
Internal
electronic
failure
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Auto
High Beam Control Module (AHBCM)
Headlamp Control Module B (HCM2)
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Headlamp Control Module B,
for additional Diagnosis and Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Autolamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1286- Interior mirror - Circuit Rear view mirror circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
16 voltage below threshold short circuit to ground and check rear view mirror supply
voltage circuit for short circuit to
ground
Check voltage between pin 1 and pin 3
of the rear view mirror connector. The
voltage should to be above 8.5 volt for
normal condition
Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, clear DTC and retest
If DTC is set permanent and voltage is
above 8.5 volt. Check and install new
rear view mirror as required
B1286- Interior mirror - Circuit High voltage detected at rear Refer to the workshop manual and the
17 voltage above threshold view (battery voltage > 16.5 battery care manual, inspect the vehicle
volts) battery and ensure it is fully charged
and serviceable before performing
further tests
Check the vehicle charging system
performance to ensure the voltage
regulation is correct
diagnostic system, clear DTC and retest
B1286- Interior mirror - Data Rear view mirror internal Check and install new rear view mirror
44 memory failure failure as required
B1286- Interior mirror - Rear view mirror internal Check and install new rear view mirror
47 Watchdog/safety micro failure as required
controller failure
B1286- Interior mirror - Rear view mirror internal Check and install new rear view mirror
49 Internal electronic failure as required
failure
B1286- Interior mirror – Rear view mirror operation Allow the vehicle rear view temperature
60 Reserved by document temperature below limit to increase, the rear view mirror will
self recover after temperature reaches
normal conditions
B1286- Interior mirror - Rear view mirror increased Increased sensitivity mode is cancelled
78 Alignment or sensitivity mode has been when the ignition is cycled
adjustment incorrect activated Clear the DTC and re-test
B1286- Interior mirror - Rear view mirror internal Using the manufacturer approved
96 Component internal failure diagnostic system, clear DTC and retest
failure Check and install new rear view mirror
as required
B1286- Interior mirror - Rear view mirror temporary Check to see if anything is blocking the
97 Component or system disabled field of view of the interior mirror
operation obstructed or Rear view mirror camera has camera
blocked detected a partial or total Using the manufacturer approved
blockage of the field of view diagnostic system, clear DTC and retest
The rear view mirror will self recover
after failure condition has been rectified
B1286- Interior mirror - Rear view mirror temporary Rear view mirror will self recover after
98 Component or system disabled because of the temperature reaches normal
over temperature operation temperature above condition
limit
B12AC- Electrochromic door Electrochromic door mirror Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
11 mirror - Circuit short to output circuit short circuit to check both door mirrors circuit for short
ground ground circuit to ground
B12AC- Electrochromic door Electrochromic door mirror Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
12 mirror - Circuit short to output circuit short circuit to check both door mirrors circuit for short
battery power circuit to power
B12EB- Camera horizontal Rear view mirror camera Check accuracy of mirror attachment
78 alignment - Alignment misaligned in the horizontal and windscreen button
or adjustment incorrect direction. Windscreen button Check and install new rear view mirror
and mirror attachment as required
alignment incorrect
Rear view mirror internal
failure
B12EC- Camera vertical Rear view mirror camera Check accuracy of mirror attachment
78 alignment - Alignment misaligned in the horizontal and windscreen button
or adjustment incorrect direction. Windscreen button Check and install new rear view mirror
and mirror attachment as required
alignment incorrect
failure
B134A- Target aim verification - Rear view mirror camera Check accuracy of mirror attachment
78 camera horizontal misaligned in the horizontal and windscreen button
alignment - Alignment direction. Windscreen button Check and install new rear view mirror
or adjustment incorrect and mirror attachment as required
alignment incorrect
failure
B134B- Target aim vertical - Rear view mirror camera Check accuracy of mirror attachment
78 camera horizontal misaligned in the horizontal and windscreen button
alignment - Alignment direction. Windscreen button Check and install new rear view mirror
or adjustment incorrect and mirror attachment as required
alignment incorrect
failure
U0010- Medium speed CAN Medium speed CAN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
88 communication bus - circuit fault and check the power and ground
Bus off connections to the module
diagnostic system, complete a CAN
network integrity test
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the CAN network
U0140- Lost communication Lost communication with Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
00 with body control central junction box and check the power and ground
module - No sub type connections to the module
information Using the manufacturer approved
network integrity test
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the CAN network between
the interior mirror and central junction
box
U0300- Internal control module Rear view mirror is not Using the manufacturer approved
00 software incompatibility configured correctly diagnostic system check and install
- No sub type latest relevant level of software to the
information rear view mirror
U201A- Control module main Rear view mirror is not Using the manufacturer approved
57 calibration data - configured correctly diagnostic system check and install
Invalid/incomplete latest relevant level of software to the
software component rear view mirror
diagnostic system check and up-date
the car configuration file as required.
Clear the DTC and re-test
U2100- Initial configuration not Rear view mirror is not Using the manufacturer approved
00 complete - No sub type configured correctly diagnostic system check and up-date
information the car configuration file as required.
U2101- Control module Rear view mirror is not Using the manufacturer approved
00 configuration configured correctly diagnostic system check and up-date
incompatible - No sub the car configuration file as required.
type information Clear the DTC and re-test
Published: 11-Jun-2012
Automatic Temperature Control Module (ATC)
Automatic Temperature Control Module (ATC)
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Climate Control Module, for
For additional information, refer to: Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information,

P0530- A/C Refrigerant Refrigerant Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
11 Pressure pressure sensor refrigerant pressure sensor circuit for short to ground
Sensor A circuit short to Install a new refrigerant pressure sensor as necessary
Circuit - Circuit ground Install a new automatic temperature control module as
short to ground Refrigerant necessary
pressure sensor
failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
P0530- A/C Refrigerant Refrigerant Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
15 Pressure pressure sensor refrigerant pressure sensor circuit for short to power, open
Sensor A circuit short to circuit
Circuit - Circuit power, open Install a new refrigerant pressure sensor as necessary
short to battery circuit Install a new automatic temperature control module as
or open Refrigerant necessary
pressure sensor
failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
P0645- A/C Clutch Compressor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
11 Relay Control clutch relay compressor clutch relay control circuit for short to ground
Circuit - Circuit control circuit
short to ground short to ground
C1B14- Sensor Supply Fresh/recirculated Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
13 Voltage A - air motor circuit fresh/recirculated air motor circuit for short to ground,
Circuit open short to ground, open circuit
open circuit Install a new fresh/recirculated air motor as necessary
Fresh/recirculated Install a new automatic temperature control module as
air motor failure necessary
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
C1B15- Sensor Supply Fresh/recirculated Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
13 Voltage B - air motor position fresh/recirculated air motor position sensor circuit for open
Circuit open sensor circuit circuit
open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
Evaporator evaporator temperature sensor circuit for open circuit
temperature Install a new automatic temperature control module as
sensor circuit necessary
open circuit
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1030- Left Front Seat Left front seat Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the left
01 Heater - heater circuit front seat heater circuit for short to ground, short to
General short to ground, power, open circuit
electrical failure short to power, Install a new left front seat heater element as necessary
open circuit Install a new left front seat heater control module as
Left front seat necessary
heater element(s) Install a new automatic temperature control module as
failure necessary
Left front seat
heater thermistor
failure
Left front seat
heater control
module failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1030- Left Front Seat Left front seat Install a new left front seat heater element as necessary
4B Heater - Over heater thermistor Install a new left front seat heater control module as
temperature failure necessary
Left front seat Install a new automatic temperature control module as
heater control necessary
module failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
87 Heater - heater LIN circuit front seat heater LIN circuit for short to ground, short to
Missing short to ground, power, open circuit
message short to power, Install a new left front seat heater control module as
open circuit necessary
Left front seat Install a new automatic temperature control module as
module failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1032- Right Front Right front seat Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the right
01 Seat Heater - heater circuit front seat heater circuit for short to ground, short to
General short to ground, power, open circuit
electrical failure short to power, Install a new right front seat heater element as necessary
open circuit Install a new right front seat heater control module as
Right front seat necessary
heater element(s) Install a new automatic temperature control module as
failure necessary
Right front seat
heater thermistor
failure
Right front seat
heater control
module failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1032- Right Front Right front seat Install a new right front seat heater element as necessary
4B Seat Heater - heater thermistor Install a new right front seat heater control module as
Over failure necessary
temperature Right front seat Install a new automatic temperature control module as
module failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
87 Seat Heater - heater LIN circuit front seat heater LIN circuit for short to ground, short to
Missing short to ground, power, open circuit
message short to power, Install a new right front seat heater control module as
open circuit necessary
Right front seat Install a new automatic temperature control module as
module failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
01 Heater Element heater circuit front seat heater circuit for short to ground, short to
- General short to ground, power, open circuit
electrical failure short to power, Install a new left front seat heater element as necessary
heater element Install a new automatic temperature control module as
failure necessary
Left front seat
heater control
module failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
01 Seat Heater heater circuit front seat heater circuit for short to ground, short to
Element - short to ground, power, open circuit
General short to power, Install a new right front seat heater element as necessary
electrical failure open circuit Install a new right front seat heater control module as
heater element Install a new automatic temperature control module as
failure necessary
Right front seat
heater control
module failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
01 Heater Sensor heater circuit front seat heater circuit for short to ground, short to
- General short to ground, power, open circuit
electrical failure short to power, Install a new left front seat heater as necessary
heater sensor Install a new automatic temperature control module as
failure necessary
Left front seat
heater control
module failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B103A- Right Front Right front seat Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the right
01 Seat Heater heater circuit front seat heater circuit for short to ground, short to
Sensor - short to ground, power, open circuit
General short to power, Install a new right front seat heater as necessary
electrical failure open circuit Install a new right front seat heater control module as
heater sensor Install a new automatic temperature control module as
failure necessary
Right front seat
heater control
module failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1081- Left Foreign object Check and remove any obstruction in the left temperature
00 Temperature obstructing left blend door
Damper Motor - temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the left
No sub type blend door temperature blend motor circuit for short to ground, short
information Left temperature to power, open circuit
blend motor Install a new left temperature blend door as necessary
circuit short to Install a new left temperature blend motor as necessary
ground, short to
power, open
circuit
Left temperature
blend door
damaged
Left temperature
blend motor
failure
B1081- Left Left temperature Install a new left temperature blend motor as necessary
49 Temperature blend motor
Damper Motor - failure
Internal
electronic
failure
B1082- Right Foreign object Check and remove any obstruction in the right temperature
00 Temperature obstructing right blend door
Damper Motor - temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the right
No sub type blend door temperature blend motor circuit for short to ground, short
information Right to power, open circuit
temperature Install a new right temperature blend door as necessary
blend motor Install a new right temperature blend motor as necessary
circuit short to
ground, short to
power, open
circuit
Right
temperature
blend door
damaged
Right
temperature
blend motor
failure
B1082- Right Right Install a new right temperature blend motor as necessary
49 Temperature temperature
Damper Motor - blend motor
Internal failure
electronic
failure
B1083- Recirculation Foreign object Check and remove any obstruction in the recirculation door
01 Damper Motor - obstructing Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
General recirculation door recirculation motor circuit for short to power, open circuit
electrical failure Recirculation Install a new recirculation door as necessary
motor circuit Install a new recirculation motor as necessary
short to ground, Install a new automatic temperature control module as
short to power, necessary
open circuit
Recirculation door
damaged
Recirculation
motor failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1085- Defroster Foreign object Check and remove any obstruction in the demist
00 Damper Motor - obstructing distribution door
No sub type demist Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the demist
information distribution door distribution motor circuit for short to ground, short to
Demist power, open circuit
distribution motor Install a new demist distribution door as necessary
circuit short to Install a new demist distribution motor as necessary
ground, short to
power, open
circuit
Demist
distribution door
damaged
Demist
distribution motor
failure
B1085- Defroster Demist Install a new demist distribution motor as necessary

49 Damper Motor - distribution motor
Internal failure
electronic
failure
B1086- Air Distribution Foreign object Check and remove any obstruction in the face/feet
00 Damper Motor - obstructing distribution door
No sub type face/feet Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
information distribution door face/feet distribution motor circuit for short to ground,
Face/feet short to power, open circuit
distribution motor Install a new face/feet distribution door as necessary
circuit short to Install a new face/feet distribution motor as necessary
ground, short to
power, open
circuit
Face/feet
distribution door
damaged
Face/feet
distribution motor
failure
B1086- Air Distribution Face/feet Install a new face/feet distribution motor as necessary
49 Damper Motor - distribution motor
Internal failure
electronic
failure
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - LIN bus A circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the LIN bus
88 Bus off short to ground, A circuit for short to ground, short to power, high
short to power, resistance, open circuit
high resistance, Install new actuators as necessary
open circuit Install a new automatic temperature control module as
All LIN bus A necessary
actuators failed
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1088- LIN Bus "B" - LIN bus B circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the LIN bus
88 Bus off short to ground, B circuit for short to ground, short to power, high
short to power, resistance, open circuit
high resistance, Install new actuators as necessary
open circuit Install a new automatic temperature control module as
All LIN bus B necessary
actuators failed
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B10BE- Solar Sensor - Sunload sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the sunload
11 Circuit short to circuit short to sensor circuit for short to ground
ground ground Install a new sunload sensor as necessary
Sunload sensor Install a new automatic temperature control module as
failure necessary
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B11EE- A/C Refrigerant Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
01 Compressor - solenoid valve refrigerant solenoid valve circuit for short to ground, short
General circuit short to to each other
electrical failure ground, short to Install a new refrigerant solenoid valve as necessary
each other Install a new automatic temperature control module as
Refrigerant necessary
solenoid valve
failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B11F0- Air Intake Recirculation Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
11 Damper motor circuit recirculation motor circuit for short to ground
Position Sensor short to ground Install a new recirculation motor as necessary
- Circuit short Recirculation Install a new automatic temperature control module as
to ground motor failure necessary
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B11F0- Air Intake Recirculation Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
15 Damper motor circuit recirculation motor circuit for short to power, open circuit
Position Sensor short to power, Install a new recirculation motor as necessary
- Circuit short open circuit Install a new automatic temperature control module as
to battery or Recirculation necessary
open motor failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B11FF- A/C Refrigerant Insufficient Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
84 Pressure - refrigerant in datalogger. test and review Climate control system / Air
Signal below system conditioning / External ambient temperature. If the external
allowable range Refrigerant ambient temperature is < 5°C, this DTC should be ignored
pressure sensor and cleared. If the external ambient temperature shows >
failure 5°C, test the refrigerant system using a suitable charging
Automatic station
temperature Install a new refrigerant pressure sensor as necessary
control module Install a new automatic temperature control module as
failure necessary
B11FF- A/C Refrigerant Excessive Test the refrigerant system using a suitable charging
85 Pressure - refrigerant in station
Signal above system Test the condenser and pipework for damage or restriction
allowable range Blockage in air Test the air conditioning fan for correct operation
conditioning Install a new refrigerant pressure sensor as necessary
system pipework Install a new automatic temperature control module as
or condenser necessary
Air conditioning
fan inoperative
Refrigerant
pressure sensor
failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B12B2- AUX Heater Auxiliary heater Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the auxiliary
11 Coolant coolant diverter heater coolant diverter valve circuit for short to ground
Diverter Valve - valve circuit short Install a new auxiliary heater coolant diverter valve as
Circuit short to to ground necessary
ground Auxiliary heater Install a new automatic temperature control module as
coolant diverter necessary
valve failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1A59- Sensor 5 Volt Sensor 5 volt Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the sensor
11 Supply - Circuit supply circuit 5V supply circuit for short to ground
short to ground short to ground Install a new refrigerant pressure sensor as necessary
Refrigerant Install a new fresh/recirculated air motor as necessary
pressure sensor Install a new automatic temperature control module as
failure necessary
Fresh/recirculated
air motor failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1A59- Sensor 5 Volt Sensor 5 volt Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the sensor
13 Supply - Circuit supply circuit 5V supply circuit for open circuit
open open circuit Install a new refrigerant pressure sensor as necessary
Refrigerant Install a new automatic temperature control module as
pressure sensor necessary
failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1A60- Pollution Pollution sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
11 Sensor - circuit short to pollution sensor circuit for short to ground
Hydrocarbon - ground Install a new pollution sensor as necessary
Circuit short to Pollution sensor Install a new automatic temperature control module as
ground failure necessary
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1A61- Cabin In-vehicle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the in-
11 Temperature temperature vehicle temperature sensor circuit for short to ground
Sensor - Circuit sensor circuit Install a new in-vehicle temperature sensor as necessary
short to ground short to ground Install a new automatic temperature control module as
In-vehicle necessary
temperature
sensor failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1A61- Cabin In-vehicle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the in-
15 Temperature temperature vehicle temperature sensor circuit for short to power, open
Sensor - Circuit sensor circuit circuit
short to battery short to power, Install a new in-vehicle temperature sensor as necessary
or open open circuit Install a new automatic temperature control module as
In-vehicle necessary
temperature
sensor failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1A63- Right Solar Sunload sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the sunload
11 Sensor - Circuit (right circuit) sensor (right circuit) for short circuit to ground
short to ground short circuit to Install a new sunload sensor as necessary
ground Install a new automatic temperature control module as
Sunload sensor necessary
failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1A64- Left Solar Sunload sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the sunload
11 Sensor - Circuit (left circuit) short sensor (left circuit) for short to ground
short to ground circuit to ground Install a new sunload sensor as necessary
Sunload sensor Install a new automatic temperature control module as
failure necessary
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1A67- Sensor Ground Sensor(s) ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the sensor
13 - Circuit open circuit open circuit for open circuit. DTCs B1A61-15, B1A59-13 and
circuit P0530-15 will also be logged
Automatic Install a new automatic temperature control module as
temperature necessary
control module
failure
B1A69- Humidity Humidity sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
11 Sensor - Circuit circuit short to humidity sensor circuit for short to ground
short to ground ground Install a new combined in-vehicle temperature & humidity
Humidity sensor sensor as necessary
failure Install a new automatic temperature control module as
Automatic necessary
temperature
control module
failure
B1A69- Humidity Humidity sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
15 Sensor - Circuit circuit short to humidity sensor circuit for short to power, open circuit
short to battery power, open Install a new combined in-vehicle temperature & humidity
or open circuit sensor as necessary
Humidity sensor Install a new automatic temperature control module as
failure necessary
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1B62- Pollution Pollution sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
11 Sensor - NOx - circuit short to pollution sensor circuit for short to ground
Circuit short to ground Install a new pollution sensor as necessary
ground Pollution sensor Install a new automatic temperature control module as
failure necessary
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1B71- Evaporator Evaporator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
11 Temperature temperature evaporator temperature sensor circuit for short to ground
Sensor - Circuit sensor circuit Install a new evaporator temperature sensor as necessary
short to ground short to ground Install a new automatic temperature control module as
Evaporator necessary
temperature
sensor failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1B71- Evaporator Evaporator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
15 Temperature temperature evaporator temperature sensor circuit for short to power,
Sensor - Circuit sensor circuit open circuit
short to battery short to power, Install a new evaporator temperature sensor as necessary
or open open circuit Install a new automatic temperature control module as
Evaporator necessary
temperature
sensor failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1B72- LIN Bus #1 LIN bus A circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the LIN bus
11 Power Supply short to ground A circuit for short to ground
Circuit - Circuit Face/feet Install a new face/feet distribution motor as necessary
short to ground distribution motor Install a new demist distribution motor as necessary
failure Install a new left temperature blend motor as necessary
Demist Install a new right temperature blend motor as necessary
distribution motor Install a new automatic temperature control module as
failure necessary
Left temperature
blend motor
failure
Right
temperature
blend motor
failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1B73- LIN Bus #2 LIN bus B circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the LIN bus
11 Power Supply short to ground B circuit for short to ground
Circuit - Circuit Rear air Install a new rear air distribution motor as necessary
short to ground distribution motor Install a new automatic temperature control module as
failure necessary
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1B7B- Left Rear Air LIN bus B circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the LIN bus
00 Blend Actuator short to ground, B circuit for short to ground, short to power, open circuit
- No sub type power, open Check and remove any obstruction in the rear temperature
information circuit blend door
Foreign object Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
obstructing rear temperature distribution motor circuit for short to ground,
temperature short to power, open circuit
blend door Install a new rear blend distribution door as necessary
Rear temperature Install a new rear temperature blend motor as necessary
distribution motor
circuit short to
ground, short to
power, open
circuit
Rear temperature
blend door
damaged
Rear temperature
blend motor
failure
B1B7B- Left Rear Air Rear temperature Install a new rear temperature blend motor as necessary
49 Blend Actuator blend motor
- Internal failure
electronic
failure
B1B7D- Rear Air LIN bus B circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the LIN bus
00 Distribution short to ground, B circuit for short to ground, short to power, open circuit
Actuator - No power, open Check and remove any obstruction in rear air distribution
sub type circuit door
information Foreign object Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear air
obstructing rear distribution motor circuit for short to ground, short to
air distribution power, open circuit
door Install a new rear air distribution door as necessary
Rear air Install a new rear air distribution motor as necessary
distribution motor
circuit short to
ground, short to
power, open
circuit
Rear air
distribution door
damaged
Rear air
distribution motor
failure
B1B7D- Rear Air Rear air Install a new rear distribution motor as necessary
49 Distribution distribution motor
Actuator - failure
Internal
electronic
failure
B1B81- Rear Rear evaporator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
11 Evaporator temperature evaporator temperature sensor circuit for short to ground
Temperature sensor circuit Install a new rear evaporator temperature sensor as
Sensor - Circuit short to ground necessary
short to ground Rear evaporator Install a new automatic temperature control module as
sensor failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1B81- Rear Rear evaporator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
15 Evaporator temperature evaporator temperature sensor circuit for short to power,
Temperature sensor circuit open circuit
Sensor - Circuit short to power, Install a new rear evaporator temperature sensor as
short to battery open circuit necessary
or open Rear evaporator Install a new automatic temperature control module as
sensor failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
B1C0A- Rear Control LIN bus B circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the LIN bus
88 panel - Bus off short to ground, B circuit for short to ground, short to power, open circuit
short to power, Install a new rear air distribution motor as necessary
open circuit Install a new rear temperature blend motor as necessary
Rear air Install a new automatic temperature control module as
distribution motor necessary
failure
Rear temperature
blend motor
failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
U0010- Medium Speed CAN circuit short Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
88 CAN to ground, short complete a CAN network integrity test
Communication to power, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN
Bus - Bus off circuit network
U0140- Lost Lost Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power
87 Communication communication and ground connections to the central junction box. Using
With Body with the central the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a
Control Module junction box CAN network integrity test
- Missing CAN circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN
message to ground, short network
to power, open Install a new central junction box as necessary
circuit Install a new automatic temperature control module as
Central junction necessary
box failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
87 Communication communication and ground connections to the fuel fired booster heater.
With Auxiliary with the fuel fired Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Heater Control booster heater complete a CAN network integrity test
Module - CAN circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN
Missing to ground, short network
message to power, open Install a new fuel fired booster heater as necessary
circuit Install a new central junction box as necessary
Fuel fired booster Install a new automatic temperature control module as
heater failure necessary
Central junction
box failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
87 Communication communication and ground connections to the integrated control panel.
With Front with the Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Controls integrated control complete a CAN network integrity test
Interface panel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN
Module "A" - CAN circuit short network
Missing to ground, short Install a new integrated control panel as necessary
message to power, open Install a new central junction box as necessary
circuit Install a new automatic temperature control module as
Integrated necessary
control panel
failure
Central junction
box failure
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
U0300- Internal Control Central junction Re-configure the central junction box using the
00 Module box not manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear DTC and
Software configured re-test
Incompatibility Automatic Re-configure the automatic temperature control module
- No sub type temperature using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
information control module Install a new automatic temperature control module as
not configured necessary
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
U0422- Invalid Data Car configuration Check that the car configuration file is correct
86 Received From file incorrect Re-configure the central junction box using the
Body Control Central junction manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Module - Signal box not Clear the automatic temperature control module DTC and
invalid configured re-test
Automatic Install a new central junction box as necessary
temperature
control module
not configured
Central junction
box failure
U0425- Invalid Data Fuel fired booster Re-configure the fuel fired booster heater using the
86 Received From heater not manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear DTC and
Auxiliary configured re-test
Heater Control Fuel fired booster Install a new fuel fired booster heater as necessary
Module - Signal heater failure
invalid
U0557- Invalid Data Integrated Re-configure the integrated control panel using the
86 Received From control panel not manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear DTC and
Front Controls configured re-test
Interface Integrated Install a new integrated control panel as necessary
Module "A" - control panel
Signal invalid failure
U1A14- CAN CAN network Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 Initialisation fault complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
failure- Internal Automatic electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN network
electronic temperature Install a new automatic temperature control module as
failure control module necessary
failure
U3000- Control Module Car configuration Check that the car configuration file is correct
55 - Not file incorrect Check that the VIN is correct. Re-configure the central
configured Central junction junction box using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
box not system, clear DTC and re-test
configured Re-configure the automatic temperature control module
Central junction using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
box failure Install a new central junction box as necessary
U3000- Control Module CAN link between Test the instrument cluster for related DTCs and refer to
87 - Missing the instrument the relevant DTC index
message cluster and the Install a new automatic temperature control module as
automatic necessary
temperature
control module
fault
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
U3002- Vehicle Central junction Test the central junction box for related DTCs and refer to
81 Identification box not the relevant DTC index
Number - configured Re-configure the central junction box using the
Invalid serial Automatic manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear DTC and
data received temperature re-test
control module Install a new automatic temperature control module as
not configured necessary
Automatic
temperature
control module
failure
Published: 24-Jan-2014
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Central
Junction Box (CJB)
Central Junction Box (CJB)
the donor vehicle
NOTES:
the warranty policy and procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in
operation, prior to the installation of a new module/component
read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system)
Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests
Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion
Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSMs which may be valid for the
specific customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as required
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Central Junction Box (CJB), for
For additional information, refer to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis
and Testing).

B1009- Ignition Authorization Central junction box Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 - Not programmed software system, re-configure the central junction box
invalid/incomplete with the latest level software
B1009- Ignition Authorization Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

62 - Signal compare NOTE: This DTC is only system, re-configure the central junction box
failure likely to occur following with the latest level software
component replacement Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
applications failing prior to system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
completion Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short
Central junction box circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
fault circuit, high resistance
Medium speed CAN
bus circuit short circuit
to ground, short
circuit to power, open
B1009- Ignition Authorization Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

63 - Circuit/component NOTE: Only diagnose system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
protection time-out this DTC if the customer has Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
reporting a starting fault the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short
circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Medium speed CAN circuit, high resistance
to ground, short
Instrument cluster
internal failure
internal failure
Battery voltage too
low
B1009- Ignition Authorization Medium speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
81 - Invalid serial data bus circuit short circuit system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
received to ground, short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
circuit to power, open the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short
circuit, high resistance circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Instrument cluster circuit, high resistance
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check the instrument cluster for related
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
B100D- Column Lock Electric steering Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 Authorization - Not column lock control system, re-configure the electric steering column
programmed module software lock control module with the latest level software
invalid/incomplete
B100D- Column Lock Medium speed CAN

64 Authorization - Signal bus circuit short circuit NOTE: Prior to clearing this DTC, carry out the
plausibility failure to ground, short Vehicle Functional Reset application using the
circuit to power, open manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short
circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
B100D- Column Lock Medium speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
67 Authorization - Signal bus circuit short circuit system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
incorrect after event to ground, short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
B100D- Column Lock

81 Authorization - NOTE: This DTC is only NOTE: Prior to clearing this DTC, carry out the
Invalid serial data likely to occur following Vehicle Functional Reset application using the
received component replacement manufacturer approved diagnostic system
applications failing prior to
completion Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, re-configure the central junction box
Encrypted data with the latest level software. If the fault
exchange between persists, perform a CAN network integrity test.
instrument cluster and Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
the central junction the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short
box does not match circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
B100D- Column Lock Medium speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
87 Authorization - bus circuit short circuit system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Missing message to ground, short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
B100D- Column Lock Side load on steering

96 Authorization - (for example, wheel NOTE: Prior to clearing this DTC, carry out the
Component internal touching kerb) Vehicle Functional Reset application using the
failure Electric steering manufacturer approved diagnostic system
column lock power or
ground circuit open Check that there is no side load on the steering
circuit, high resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Medium speed CAN the electric steering column lock power and
bus circuit short circuit ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
to ground, short Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit to power, open system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Electric steering the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short
column lock internal circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
failure circuit, high resistance
If the fault persists, install a new electric
steering column lock
B1024- Start Control Unit - Central junction box Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
83 Value of signal internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
protection calculation persists, install a new central junction box
incorrect
B1024- Start Control Unit - Central junction box Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
87 Missing message internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new central junction box
B1026- Steering Column Lock Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference the electric steering column lock circuit for short
ground POWER circuit to ground
Electric steering
column lock circuit
B102B- Passive Key - Signal Central junction box Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
67 incorrect after event fault system, re-configure the central junction box
Medium speed CAN with the latest level software
bus circuit short circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
to ground, short system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
circuit to power, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
circuit, high resistance the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short
Keyless vehicle circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
module fault circuit, high resistance
system, check the keyless vehicle module for
related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
B102B- Passive Key - Missing Confirm placement of

87 message the smart key within NOTE: The action below is only required if this
the vehicle DTC and DTC B1B01-87 have been stored, or vehicle
Keyless vehicle start issue has been reported
module power or
ground circuit open Check whereabouts of keys, including spare and
circuit, high resistance confirm correct functionality
Medium speed CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
bus circuit short circuit the keyless vehicle module power and ground
to ground, short circuits for open circuit, high resistance
circuit to power, open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit, high resistance system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Smart key battery Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
low/battery contact the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short
issue circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Interference from circuit, high resistance
spurious RF signal Install a new smart key battery as necessary
Serial data circuit Check vehicle surroundings for possible sources
short circuit to of interference, move vehicle and retest
ground, short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
to power, open circuit, the serial data circuit for short circuit to ground,
high resistance short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
B1046- Front Fog Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
23 Control Switch - NOTE: This DTC will set the front fog lamp switch circuit for short circuit
Signal stuck low if the switch is active for to ground
more than 60 seconds Test the operation of the front fog lamp switch.
Install a new front fog lamp switch as necessary
Front fog lamp switch
ground
Front fog lamp switch
stuck active
B1047- Rear Fog Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
23 Control Switch - NOTE: This DTC will set the rear fog lamp switch circuit for short circuit
Signal stuck low if the switch is active for to ground
more than 60 seconds Test the operation of the rear fog lamp switch.
Install a new rear fog lamp switch as necessary
Rear fog lamp switch
ground
Rear fog lamp switch
stuck active
B1051- Front Washer Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
23 - Signal stuck low NOTE: This DTC will set the front washer switch circuit for short circuit to
if the switch is active for ground
more than 60 seconds Test the operation of the front washer switch.
Install a new front washer switch as necessary
Front washer switch
ground
Front washer switch
stuck active
B1052- Rear Washer Switch - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
23 Signal stuck low NOTE: This DTC will set the rear washer switch circuit for short circuit to
if the switch is active for ground
more than 60 seconds Test the operation of the rear washer switch.
Install a new rear washer switch as necessary
Rear washer switch
ground
Rear washer switch
stuck active
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Signal Clock power or ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
86 invalid circuit open circuit, the clock power and ground circuits for open
high resistance circuit, high resistance
Steering wheel left Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
switchpack power or the steering wheel left switchpack power and
ground circuit open ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
LIN bus A circuit short the LIN bus A circuit for short circuit to ground,
circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
short circuit to power, resistance
open circuit, high
resistance
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Bus off LIN bus A circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
88 circuit to ground, the LIN bus A circuit for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
open circuit, high resistance
resistance
- Analogue clock
- Steering wheel
left switchpack
B1088- LIN Bus "B" - Signal Rain/light sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
86 invalid power or ground the rain/light sensor power and ground circuits
circuit open circuit, for open circuit, high resistance
high resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Battery back-up the battery back-up sounder power and ground
sounder power or circuits for open circuit, high resistance
ground circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
circuit, high resistance the volumetric sensor power and ground circuits
Volumetric sensor for open circuit, high resistance
power or ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
circuit open circuit, the LIN bus B circuit for short circuit to ground,
high resistance short circuit to power, open circuit, high
LIN bus A circuit short resistance
circuit to ground,
short circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
B1088- LIN Bus "B" - Bus off LIN bus B circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
88 circuit to ground, the LIN bus B circuit for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
- Rain/light
sensor
- Battery back-
up sounder
- Volumetric
sensor
B108B- Start Button Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 "A" - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference the stop/start switch circuit 1 for short circuit to
ground SW1 ground
Stop/start switch
circuit 1 short circuit
to ground
12 "A" - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference the stop/start switch circuit 1 for short circuit to
battery SW1 power
Stop/start switch
to power
13 "A" - Circuit open NOTE: Circuit reference the stop/start switch circuit 1 for open circuit,
SW1 high resistance
Stop/start switch
circuit 1 open circuit,
high resistance
B108B- Start Button Circuit NOTES: Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
23 "A" - Signal stuck low the stop/start switch circuit 1 for short circuit to
ground
Circuit reference SW1 Test the operation of the stop/start switch.
Install a new stop/start switch as necessary
This DTC will set if the

switch is active for more than
30 seconds
Stop/start switch
to ground
Stop/start switch
stuck active
B108C- Start Button Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 "B" - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference the stop/start switch circuit 2 for short circuit to
ground SW2 ground
Stop/start switch
to ground
12 "B" - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference the stop/start switch circuit 2 for short circuit to
battery SW2 power
Stop/start switch
to power
13 "B" - Circuit open NOTE: Circuit reference the stop/start switch circuit 2 for open circuit,
SW2 high resistance
Stop/start switch
circuit 2 open circuit,
high resistance
B108C- Start Button Circuit NOTES: Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
23 "B" - Signal stuck low the stop/start switch circuit 2 for short circuit to
ground
Circuit reference SW2 Test the operation of the stop/start switch.
Install a new stop/start switch as necessary
This DTC will set if the

switch is active for more than
30 seconds
Stop/start switch
to ground
Stop/start switch
stuck active
B1095- Wiper On/Off Relay - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference the wiper on/off relay circuit for short circuit to
ground FR WIPER ON/OFF ground
Wiper on/off relay

ground
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference the wiper on/off relay circuit for short circuit to
battery FR WIPER ON/OFF power
Wiper on/off relay

power
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit reference the wiper on/off relay circuit for open circuit,
FR WIPER ON/OFF high resistance
Wiper on/off relay

high resistance
B1096- Wiper High/Low Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference the wiper fast/slow relay circuit for short circuit
ground FR WIPER SLOW/FAST to ground
Wiper fast/slow relay

ground
12 - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference the wiper fast/slow relay circuit for short circuit
battery FR WIPER SLOW/FAST to power

power
13 - Circuit open NOTE: Circuit reference the wiper fast/slow relay circuit for open circuit,
FR WIPER SLOW/FAST high resistance

high resistance
B1097- Heated Windshield Heated windshield Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Relay - Circuit short relay circuit short the heated windshield relay circuit for short
to ground circuit to ground circuit to ground
12 Relay - Circuit short relay circuit short the heated windshield relay circuit for short
to battery circuit to power circuit to power
13 Relay - Circuit open relay circuit open the heated windshield relay circuit for open
circuit, high resistance circuit, high resistance
B109E- Remote Keyless Entry Keyless vehicle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 - Not programmed module not configured system, re-configure the keyless vehicle module
correctly with the latest level software
B10A2- Crash Input - No Invalid crash signal Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
31 signal received from system, check the restraints control module for
restraints control related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
module
B10A2- Crash Input - Signal Invalid crash signal Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
38 frequency incorrect received from system, check the restraints control module for
restraints control related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
module
B10AB- Remote Keyless Entry Keyless vehicle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 Synchronization - Not module not configured system, re-configure the keyless vehicle module
programmed correctly with the latest level software
B10AD- Rain Sensor - Rain/light sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
09 Component failures power or ground the rain/light sensor power and ground circuits
high resistance Check that the rain/light sensor is not obscured
Rain/light sensor Check the rain/light sensor installation
obscured Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Rain/light sensor system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
incorrectly installed persists, install a new rain/light sensor
Rain/light sensor
internal failure
B10AD- Rain Sensor - Value Rain/light sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
83 of signal protection power or ground the rain/light sensor power and ground circuits
calculation incorrect circuit open circuit, for open circuit, high resistance
high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Rain/light sensor system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
internal failure persists, install a new rain/light sensor
B10AD- Rain Sensor - Missing Rain/light sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
87 message power or ground the rain/light sensor power and ground circuits
high resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
LIN bus B circuit short the LIN bus B circuit for short circuit to ground,
open circuit, high
resistance
B10AD- Rain Sensor - Rain/light sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
96 Component internal internal failure system, clear the DTC. If the fault persists,
failure install a new rain/light sensor
B10E5- PCM Wake-Up Signal Engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 - Circuit short to wake-up signal circuit the engine control module wake-up signal circuit
ground short circuit to ground for short circuit to ground
B10F2- Sunroof Control - Roof opening panel Test the roof opening panel for smooth
4B Over temperature movement restricted operation. If the fault persists, install a new roof
by debris or damage opening panel control module
Roof opening panel Install a new roof opening panel motor as
temperature sensor necessary
not
calibrated/defective
B10F2- Sunroof Control - Roof opening panel Remove the roof opening panel motor and
74 Actuator slipping control motor slipping inspect the cables and mechanism. Test the roof
due to mechanical opening panel for smooth operation and
failure obstructions that would cause the motor to slip.
Install a new roof opening panel motor as
necessary
B10F2- Sunroof Control - No Roof opening panel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
93 operation control module power the roof opening panel control module power and
or ground circuit open ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
LIN bus 3 circuit short the LIN bus 3 circuit for short circuit to ground,
open circuit, high
resistance
B10F2- Sunroof Control - Allow the roof opening panel motor to cool.
9A Component or NOTE: This DTC may be Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system operating set if the roof opening panel system, clear the DTCs and retest
conditions is operated excessively
Roof opening panel

motor time out
B10F8- Accessory Socket 'A' Accessory relay A Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Relay - Circuit short circuit short circuit to the accessory relay A circuit for short circuit to
to ground ground ground
12 Relay - Circuit short circuit short circuit to the accessory relay A circuit for short circuit to
to battery power power
13 Relay - Circuit open circuit open circuit, the accessory relay A circuit for open circuit,
high resistance high resistance
B10F9- Accessory Socket 'B' Accessory relay B Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Relay - Circuit short circuit short circuit to the accessory relay B circuit for short circuit to
12 Relay - Circuit short circuit short circuit to the accessory relay B circuit for short circuit to
to battery power power
13 Relay - Circuit open circuit open circuit, the accessory relay B circuit for open circuit,
B1102- Trailer Stop Lamp - Trailer stop lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Circuit short to circuit short circuit to the trailer stop lamp circuit for short circuit to
ground ground ground
B1115- High Mounted Stop High mounted stop Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Lamp Control - lamp circuit short the high mounted stop lamp circuit for short
Circuit short to circuit to ground circuit to ground
ground
B112B- Steering Wheel An internal memory Check the steering wheel switchpack functions
83 Module - Value of checksum error in the to localize the failure. Using the manufacturer
signal protection steering wheel approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
calculation incorrect switchpack has been retest. If the fault persists, install a new steering
detected by the wheel left switchpack
B112B- Steering Wheel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
87 Module - Missing NOTE: Circuit reference the steering wheel left switchpack power and
message LIN 1 ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Steering wheel left the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
switchpack power or short circuit to power, open circuit, high
ground circuit open resistance
circuit, high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
LIN bus circuit short system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
circuit to ground, persists, install a new steering wheel left
short circuit to power, switchpack
open circuit, high
resistance
Steering wheel left
switchpack internal
failure
B112B- Steering Wheel Steering wheel left Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
96 Module - Component switchpack internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
internal failure failure persists, install a new steering wheel left
switchpack
B112C- Interior Motion Volumetric sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
83 Sensor - Value of internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
signal protection persists, install a new volumetric sensor
calculation incorrect
B112C- Interior Motion Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
87 Sensor - Missing NOTE: Circuit reference the volumetric sensor power and ground circuits
message BBS LIN for open circuit, high resistance
Volumetric sensor the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
power or ground short circuit to power, open circuit, high
circuit open circuit, resistance
LIN bus circuit short system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
circuit to ground, persists, install a new volumetric sensor
open circuit, high
resistance
Volumetric sensor
internal failure
B112C- Interior Motion Volumetric sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
96 Sensor - Component internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
internal failure persists, install a new volumetric sensor
B113E- External Boot/Trunk Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
23 Release Switch - NOTE: This DTC will set the upper tailgate release switch circuit for short
Signal stuck low if the switch is active for circuit to ground
more than 60 seconds Test the operation of the upper tailgate release
switch. Install a new upper tailgate release
Upper tailgate release switch as necessary
switch circuit short
circuit to ground
Upper tailgate release
switch stuck active
B1140- Engine Crank Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Authorization - Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference the engine crank signal circuit for short circuit to
short to ground CRANK ground
Engine crank signal

ground
B1140- Engine Crank Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Authorization - Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference the engine crank signal circuit for short circuit to
short to battery or CRANK power, open circuit, high resistance
open
Engine crank signal
power, open circuit,
high resistance
B1146- Passive Sounder Passive sounder circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Supply - Circuit short short circuit to ground the passive sounder circuit for short circuit to
to ground ground
B1146- Passive Sounder Passive sounder circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Supply - Circuit short short circuit to power, the passive sounder circuit for short circuit to
to battery or open open circuit, high battery, open circuit, high resistance
resistance
B1182- Tire Pressure No action, no No action required

51 Monitoring System - customer symptom
Not programmed
B11D1- LIN Bus "C" - Signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
86 invalid NOTE: Circuit reference the roof opening panel control module LIN bus
LIN3 circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit, high resistance
Roof opening panel
control module LIN
to ground, short
B11D1- LIN Bus "C" - Bus off Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
88 NOTE: Circuit reference the roof opening panel control module LIN bus
LIN3 circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
Roof opening panel
control module LIN
to ground, short
B11D9- Vehicle Battery - Battery monitoring Install a new battery monitoring system control
92 Performance or system control module module as necessary
incorrect operation internal failure
B11DB- Battery Monitoring Battery monitoring Install a new battery monitoring system control
49 Module - Internal system control module module as necessary
electronic failure internal failure
B11DB- Battery Monitoring Battery monitoring Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
83 Module - Value of system control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
signal protection internal failure persists, install a new battery monitoring system
calculation incorrect control module
B11DB- Battery Monitoring Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
87 Module - Missing NOTE: This DTC is the battery monitoring system control module
message inhibited if the car power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
configuration file is correct resistance
Battery monitoring the battery monitoring system control module
system control module LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
power or ground circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
high resistance system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Battery monitoring persists, install a new battery monitoring system
system control module control module
LIN bus circuit short
circuit to ground,
open circuit, high
resistance
Battery monitoring
system control module
internal failure
B123A- Left Front Turn Left front turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Indicator - Circuit indicator circuit short the left front turn signal indicator circuit for
short to ground circuit to ground short circuit to ground
B123A- Left Front Turn Left front turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Indicator - Circuit indicator circuit short the left front turn signal indicator circuit for
short to battery or circuit to battery, short circuit to battery, open circuit, high
open open circuit, high resistance
resistance
B123B- Right Front Turn Right front turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Indicator - Circuit indicator circuit short the right front turn signal indicator circuit for
B123B- Right Front Turn Right front turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Indicator - Circuit indicator circuit short the right front turn signal indicator circuit for
resistance
B1247- Left Rear Turn Left rear turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Indicator - Circuit indicator circuit short the left rear turn signal indicator circuit for short
short to ground circuit to ground circuit to ground
B1247- Left Rear Turn Left rear turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Indicator - Circuit indicator circuit short the left rear turn signal indicator circuit for short
short to battery or circuit to battery, circuit to battery, open circuit, high resistance
open open circuit, high
resistance
B1248- Right Rear Turn Right rear turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Indicator - Circuit indicator circuit short the right rear turn signal indicator circuit for
B1248- Right Rear Turn Right rear turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Indicator - Circuit indicator circuit short the right rear turn signal indicator circuit for
resistance
B124A- Right Daytime Right daytime running Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Running Light - light circuit short the right daytime running light circuit for short
Circuit short to circuit to ground circuit to ground
ground
B124A- Right Daytime Right daytime running Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Running Light - light circuit short the right daytime running light circuit for short
Circuit short to power circuit to power, open circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
or open circuit circuit, high resistance
B124B- Left Daytime Running Left daytime running Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Light - Circuit short light circuit short the left daytime running light circuit for short
to ground circuit to ground circuit to ground
B124B- Left Daytime Running Left daytime running Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Light - Circuit short light circuit short the left daytime running light circuit for short
to power or open circuit to power, open circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit circuit, high resistance
B1298- Steering Column Steering column Test the operation of the steering column adjust
73 Adjust Up Switch - adjust switch internal switch. Install a new steering column adjust
Actuator stuck closed failure switch as necessary
- Tilt up switch
stuck active
B1299- Steering Column Steering column Test the operation of the steering column adjust
73 Adjust Down Switch - adjust switch internal switch. Install a new steering column adjust
- Tilt down
switch stuck
active
B129A- LIN Bus "D" - Signal Immobilizer antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
86 invalid unit LIN bus circuit the immobilizer antenna unit LIN bus circuit for
short circuit to short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
ground, short circuit open circuit, high resistance
high resistance
B129A- LIN Bus "D" - Bus off Immobilizer antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
88 unit LIN bus circuit the immobilizer antenna unit LIN bus circuit for
short circuit to short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
high resistance
B12A1- Steering Column Steering column Test the operation of the steering column adjust
73 Adjust Out Switch - adjust switch internal switch. Install a new steering column adjust
- Reach out
switch stuck
active
B12A2- Steering Column Steering column Test the operation of the steering column adjust
73 Adjust In Switch - adjust switch internal switch. Install a new steering column adjust
- Reach in switch
stuck active
B12A3- Steering Column Steering column Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Adjust Motor Drive A adjust motor drive A the steering column adjust motor drive A circuit
- Circuit short to circuit short circuit to for short circuit to ground
ground ground
B12A3- Steering Column Steering column Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
15 Adjust Motor Drive A adjust motor drive A the circuit between the steering column adjust
- Circuit short to circuit short to power motor and the central junction box. If no circuit
battery or open or open circuit faults are evident, suspect the steering column
Motor fault adjust motor
B12A4- Steering Column Steering column Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Adjust Motor Drive B adjust motor drive B the circuit between the steering column adjust
- Circuit short to circuit short to ground motor and the central junction box. If no circuit
ground Motor fault faults are evident, suspect the steering column
adjust motor
B12A4- Steering Column Steering column Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Adjust Motor Drive B adjust motor drive B the steering column adjust motor drive B circuit
- Circuit short to circuit short circuit to for short circuit to power, open circuit, high
battery or open power, open circuit, resistance
high resistance
B12C9- LIN Bus "E" - Signal Battery monitoring Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
86 invalid system control module the battery monitoring system control module
LIN bus circuit short LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to ground, circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
open circuit, high
resistance
B12C9- LIN Bus "E" - Bus off Battery monitoring Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
88 system control module the battery monitoring system control module
LIN bus circuit short LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
open circuit, high
resistance
B12E8- Liftgate/Tailgate Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test

23 Control/Release NOTE: This DTC will set the lower tailgate release switch circuit for short
Switch - Signal stuck if the switch is active for circuit to ground
low more than 60 seconds Test the operation of the lower tailgate release
switch. Install a new lower tailgate release
Lower tailgate release switch as necessary
circuit to ground
Lower tailgate release
switch stuck active
B12EE- Tailgate/Trunk Upper tailgate release Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Release - Circuit actuator circuit short the upper tailgate release actuator circuit for
B12EE- Tailgate/Trunk Upper tailgate release Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Release - Circuit actuator circuit short the upper tailgate release actuator circuit for
short to battery or circuit to power, open short circuit to power, open circuit, high
open circuit, high resistance resistance
B12F3- Secondary Tailgate Lower tailgate release Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Release - Circuit actuators circuit short the lower tailgate release actuators circuit for
B12F3- Secondary Tailgate Lower tailgate release Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Release - Circuit actuators circuit short the lower tailgate release actuators circuit for
short to battery or circuit to power, open short circuit to power, open circuit, high
B12F4- Vehicle Speed Output Vehicle speed signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
12 - Circuit short to circuit short circuit to the vehicle speed signal circuit for short circuit
battery power to power
B12F5- Fridge Relay Control Fridge relay circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
12 - Circuit short to short circuit to power the fridge relay circuit for short circuit to power
battery
B12FA- Power Steering
11 Solenoid Control A - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC does NOT apply to L319
Circuit short to Solenoid valve + Discovery
ground
Servotronic valve Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
circuit short circuit to the servotronic valve circuit for short circuit to
ground ground
B12FA- Power Steering

13 Solenoid Control A - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC does NOT apply to L319
Circuit open Solenoid valve + Discovery

circuit open circuit, the servotronic valve circuit for open circuit,
B12FB- Power Steering

12 Solenoid Control B - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC does NOT apply to L319
Circuit short to Solenoid valve - Discovery
battery
circuit short circuit to the servotronic valve circuit for short circuit to
power power
B12FB- Power Steering NOTES:

14 Solenoid Control B - NOTE: Circuit reference
Circuit short to Solenoid valve -
ground or open This DTC does NOT apply to L319 Discovery
Servotronic valve
ground, open circuit, This DTC will not be logged during an on demand
high resistance self-test routine. The DTC is only logged if the fault is
(customer may noted continuously for over two seconds, during the on
complain of heavy demand self-test routine the output from the
steering or variable servotronic valve is only monitored for a one second
steering effort duration
required)
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the servotronic valve circuit for short circuit to
ground, open circuit, high resistance (note, the
fault may be an intermittent one). Repair circuit
as required, clear DTC and retest
B12FB- Power Steering

1F Solenoid Control B - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC does NOT apply to L319
Circuit intermittent Solenoid valve - Discovery
Servotronic valve Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check

circuit - Short circuit the servotronic valve circuit for short circuit to
to ground, short ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
circuit to power, open resistance (note, the fault may be an
circuit, high resistance intermittent one). Repair circuit as required,
(customer may clear DTC and retest
complain of heavy
steering or variable
steering effort
required)
B130B- Right Rear Fog Lamp Rear right fog lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 - Circuit short to circuit short circuit to the rear right fog lamp circuit for short circuit to
B130B- Right Rear Fog Lamp Rear right fog lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 - Circuit short to circuit short circuit to the rear right fog lamp circuit for short circuit to
battery or open battery, open circuit, battery, open circuit, high resistance
high resistance
B130E- Left Rear Fog Lamp - Rear left fog lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Circuit short to circuit short circuit to the rear left fog lamp circuit for short circuit to
B130E- Left Rear Fog Lamp - Rear left fog lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Circuit short to circuit short circuit to the rear left fog lamp circuit for short circuit to
high resistance
B1311- Clock Module - Value Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
83 of signal protection NOTE: Circuit reference the clock power and ground circuits for open
calculation incorrect LIN1 circuit, high resistance
Clock power or ground the clock LIN bus circuit for short circuit to
circuit open circuit, ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
high resistance resistance
Clock LIN bus circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short circuit to system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
ground, short circuit persists, install a new clock
high resistance
Clock internal failure
B1311- Clock Module - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
87 Missing message NOTE: Circuit reference the clock power and ground circuits for open
LIN1 circuit, high resistance
Clock power or ground the clock LIN bus circuit for short circuit to
circuit open circuit, ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
high resistance resistance
Clock LIN bus circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short circuit to system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
ground, short circuit persists, install a new clock
high resistance
Clock internal failure
B1311- Clock Module - Clock internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
96 Component internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure persists, install a new clock
B134E- Switch Illumination Switch illumination Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Adjustment Control - adjustment circuit the switch illumination adjustment circuit for
Circuit short to short circuit to ground short circuit to ground
ground
Circuit short to short circuit to power short circuit to power
battery
Circuit open open circuit, high open circuit, high resistance
resistance
B134F- Headlamp Flash Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
23 Switch - Signal stuck NOTE: This DTC will set the headlamp flash switch circuit for short circuit
low if the switch is active for to ground
more than 60 seconds Test the operation of the headlamp flash switch.
Install a new headlamp flash switch as
Headlamp flash switch necessary
ground
Headlamp flash switch
stuck active
B136A- Heated Washer Heated washer jet Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Jet/Nozzle Output circuit short circuit to the heated washer jet circuit for short circuit to
Control - Circuit short ground ground
to ground
12 Jet/Nozzle Output circuit short circuit to the heated washer jet circuit for short circuit to
Control - Circuit short power power
to battery
13 Jet/Nozzle Output circuit open circuit, the heated washer jet circuit for open circuit,
Control - Circuit open high resistance high resistance
B136B- Suspension Control Air suspension control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Module Wake-up module wake-up the air suspension control module wake-up
Signal - Circuit short signal circuit short signal circuit for short circuit to ground
to ground circuit to ground
B136B- Suspension Control Air suspension control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Module Wake-up module wake-up the air suspension control module wake-up
Signal - Circuit short signal circuit short signal circuit for short circuit to battery, open
to battery or open circuit to battery, circuit, high resistance
open circuit, high
resistance
B1A75- Fuel sender No.1 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference the fuel level sensor A circuit for short circuit to
ground ACTIVE ground
Fuel level sensor A

ground
15 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference the fuel level sensor A circuit for short circuit to
battery or open ACTIVE battery, open circuit, high resistance
Fuel level sensor A

battery, open circuit,
high resistance
1C Circuit voltage out of NOTE: Circuit reference the fuel level sensor A circuit for short circuit to
range ACTIVE ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
Fuel level sensor A
high resistance
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference the fuel level sensor B circuit for short circuit to
ground PASSIVE ground
Fuel level sensor B

ground
15 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference the fuel level sensor B circuit for short circuit to
battery or open PASSIVE battery, open circuit, high resistance
Fuel level sensor B

battery, open circuit,
high resistance
1C Circuit voltage out of NOTE: Circuit reference the fuel level sensor B circuit for short circuit to
range PASSIVE ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
Fuel level sensor B
high resistance
B1A84- Car Configuration Central junction box Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 Data - Not not configured system, re-configure the central junction box
programmed correctly with the latest level software
B1A85- Ambient Light Sensor Rain/light sensor Check that the rain/light sensor is not obscured
96 - Component internal obscured Check the rain/light sensor installation
failure Rain/light sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
incorrectly installed system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Rain/light sensor persists, install a new rain/light sensor
internal failure
B1A91- Speed/Position Roof opening panel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
31 Sensor A - No signal control module power the roof opening panel control module power and
Roof opening panel system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
control module LIN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
bus circuit short circuit the roof opening panel control module LIN bus
to ground, short circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
circuit to power, open power, open circuit, high resistance
Roof opening panel system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
position sensor A persists, install a new roof opening panel motor
signal failure
B1A92- Speed/Position Roof opening panel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
31 Sensor B - No signal control module power the roof opening panel control module power and
Roof opening panel system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
control module LIN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
bus circuit short circuit the roof opening panel control module LIN bus
to ground, short circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
circuit to power, open power, open circuit, high resistance
Roof opening panel system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
position sensor B persists, install a new roof opening panel motor
signal failure
B1B01- Key Transponder - Keyless vehicle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
55 Not configured module not configured system, configure the keyless vehicle module
B1B01- Key Transponder - Keyless vehicle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
64 Signal plausibility module power or the keyless vehicle module power and ground
failure ground circuit open circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Medium speed CAN system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
bus circuit short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
to ground, short the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short
circuit to power, open circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Keyless vehicle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
module ID not system, re-configure the keyless vehicle module
synchronised as a new module
B1B01- Key Transponder - Keyless vehicle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
81 Invalid serial data module power or the keyless vehicle module power and ground
received ground circuit open circuits for open circuit, high resistance
module ID not system, re-configure the keyless vehicle module
synchronised as a new module
B1B01- Key Transponder - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
87 Missing message NOTE: This DTC may be the keyless vehicle module power and ground
set if the engine start switch circuits for open circuit, high resistance
is operated without a valid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
smart key present system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Keyless vehicle the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short
module power or circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
Medium speed CAN system, re-configure the keyless vehicle module
bus circuit short circuit as a new module
to ground, short
Keyless vehicle
module ID not
synchronised
B1B33- Target ID Transfer - A new engine control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 Not programmed module has been system, re-configure the engine control module
installed with the latest level software
B1B33- Target ID Transfer - Invalid signal received No action necessary, clear/ignore DTC
64 Signal plausibility from engine control
failure module
B1B33- Target ID Transfer - Invalid serial data No action necessary, clear/ignore DTC
81 Invalid serial data received from engine
received control module
B1B33- Target ID Transfer - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

87 Missing message NOTE: Only diagnose system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
this DTC if the customer has persists, perform a CAN network integrity test.
reporting a starting fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
the high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit
Invalid message to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
received from engine high resistance
control module
B1B56- Sunroof Module - Roof opening panel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
46 Calibration/parameter control module LIN the roof opening panel control module LIN bus
memory failure bus circuit short circuit circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
to ground, short power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit, high resistance system, re-configure the central junction box
Central junction box with the latest level software
software Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
Roof opening panel not manual and perform - Manual Roof Opening
initialized Panel Initialization
Roof opening panel Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
internal failure persists, install a new roof opening panel control
module
B1B56- Sunroof Module - Roof opening panel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
83 Value of signal control module LIN the roof opening panel control module LIN bus
protection calculation bus circuit short circuit circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
incorrect to ground, short power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit, high resistance system, re-configure the central junction box
Central junction box with the latest level software
software Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
Roof opening panel not manual and perform - Manual Roof Opening
initialized Panel Initialization
Roof opening panel Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
internal failure persists, install a new roof opening panel control
module
B1B56- Sunroof Module - NOTES: Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
87 Missing message the roof opening panel control module LIN bus
circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
This DTC is inhibited if power, open circuit, high resistance
the car configuration file is
correct
Circuit reference LIN3
Roof opening panel

control module LIN
to ground, short
B1C32- Steering Column Tilt Steering column tilt

11 Solenoid - Circuit solenoid circuit short NOTE: This component is a serviceable item
short to ground circuit to ground
the steering column tilt solenoid circuit for short
circuit to ground
B1C32- Steering Column Tilt Steering column tilt

15 Solenoid - Circuit solenoid circuit short NOTE: This component is a serviceable item
short to power or circuit to battery,
open circuit open circuit, high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
resistance the steering column tilt solenoid circuit for short
circuit to battery, open circuit, high resistance
B1C33- Steering Column Tilt Steering column tilt Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
12 Feedback Signal - position sensor circuit the steering column tilt position sensor circuit
Circuit short to power short circuit to power for short circuit to power
B1C33- Steering Column Tilt Steering column tilt Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
14 Feedback Signal - position sensor circuit the steering column tilt position sensor circuit
Circuit short to short circuit to for short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
ground or open ground, open circuit, resistance
B1C34- Steering Column Steering column reach
11 Telescopic Solenoid - solenoid circuit short NOTE: This component is a serviceable item
Circuit short to circuit to ground
ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
the steering column reach solenoid circuit for
B1C34- Steering Column Steering column reach

15 Telescopic Solenoid - solenoid circuit short NOTE: This component is a serviceable item
Circuit short to power circuit to battery,
or open circuit open circuit, high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
resistance the steering column reach solenoid circuit for
short circuit to battery, open circuit, high
resistance
B1C35- Steering Column Steering column reach Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
12 Telescopic Feedback position sensor circuit the steering column reach position sensor circuit
Signal - Circuit short short circuit to power for short circuit to power
to power
B1C35- Steering Column Steering column reach Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
14 Telescopic Feedback position sensor circuit the steering column reach position sensor circuit
Signal - Circuit short short circuit to for short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
to ground or open ground, open circuit, resistance
B1C36- Steering Column Steering column Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Adjust Switch - adjust switch circuit the steering column adjust switch circuit for
Circuit short to short circuit to ground short circuit to ground
ground
B1C37- Master Lock Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
23 Stuck - Signal stuck NOTE: This DTC will set the interior central locking lock switches circuits
low if the switch is active for for short circuit to ground
more than 60 seconds Test the operation of the interior central locking
lock switches. Install a new interior central
Interior central locking locking switch as necessary
lock switch circuit
Interior central locking
lock switch stuck
active
B1C38- Master Unlock Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
23 Stuck - Signal stuck NOTE: This DTC will set the interior central locking unlock switches
low if the switch is active for circuits for short circuit to ground
more than 60 seconds Test the operation of the interior central locking
unlock switches. Install a new interior central
Interior central locking locking switch as necessary
unlock switch circuit
Interior central locking
unlock switch stuck
active
B1C43- Master Interior Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
23 Switch Stuck - Signal NOTE: This DTC will set the interior lamp switch circuit for short circuit
stuck low if the switch is active for to ground
more than 60 seconds Test the operation of the interior lamp switch.
Install a new interior lamp as necessary
Interior lamp switch
ground
Interior lamp switch
stuck active
B1C44- Rear Wiper Park Rear wiper park Ensure motor/mechanism is not jammed or
67 Position Switch Stuck position switch circuit seized. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
- Signal incorrect short circuit to power, and test the rear wiper park position switch
after event short circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground. Install a new
ground, open circuit rear wiper motor as necessary
B1C45- Front Wiper Park Front wiper park Ensure motor/mechanism is not jammed or
67 Position Switch Stuck position switch circuit seized. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
- Signal incorrect short circuit to power, and test the front wiper park position switch
after event short circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground. Install a new
ground, open circuit front wiper motor as necessary
B1C53- Front Wiper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
29 Intermittent Data - NOTE: Circuit reference the Front wiper variable intermittent wipe switch
Signal invalid DATA 1 / DATA 2 / DATA 3 circuits for short circuit to ground, short circuit
to power, open circuit, high resistance
Front wiper variable
intermittent wipe
switch circuits short
circuit to ground,
open circuit, high
resistance
B1C55- Horn Relay - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
12 short to battery NOTE: Circuit reference the horn relay / horn switch circuits for short
HORN circuit to power
Horn relay / horn

switch circuits short
circuit to power
B1C77- Rear Wiper Relay - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference the rear wiper relay circuit for short circuit to
ground REAR WIPER ground
Rear wiper relay

ground
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference the rear wiper relay circuit for short circuit to
battery REAR WIPER power
Rear wiper relay

power
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit reference the rear wiper relay circuit for open circuit
REAR WIPER
Rear wiper relay

circuit open circuit
B1C82- Headlamp Washer Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Relay A - Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference the headlamp wash relay A circuit for short
short to ground POWER WASH L circuit to ground
Headlamp wash relay

A circuit short circuit
to ground
12 Relay A - Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference the headlamp wash relay A circuit for short
short to battery POWER WASH L circuit to power
Headlamp wash relay

A circuit short circuit
to power
13 Relay A - Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference the headlamp wash relay A circuit for open
open POWER WASH L circuit
Headlamp wash relay

A circuit open circuit
B1C90- Auxiliary Driving Auxiliary driving lamps Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Lamps Relay - Circuit relay circuit short the auxiliary driving lamps relay circuit for short
short to ground circuit to ground circuit to ground
12 Lamps Relay - Circuit relay circuit short the auxiliary driving lamps relay circuit for short
short to battery circuit to power circuit to power
13 Lamps Relay - Circuit relay circuit open the auxiliary driving lamps relay circuit for open
open circuit, high resistance circuit, high resistance
B1C98- Left Corner Lamp Left cornering lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Circuit - Circuit short circuit short circuit to the left cornering lamp circuit for short circuit to
B1C98- Left Corner Lamp Left cornering lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Circuit - Circuit short circuit short circuit to the left cornering lamp circuit for short circuit to
to battery or open battery, open circuit, battery, open circuit, high resistance
high resistance
B1C99- Right Corner Lamp Right cornering lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Circuit - Circuit short circuit short circuit to the right cornering lamp circuit for short circuit
to ground ground to ground
B1C99- Right Corner Lamp Right cornering lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Circuit - Circuit short circuit short circuit to the right cornering lamp circuit for short circuit
to battery or open battery, open circuit, to battery, open circuit, high resistance
high resistance
B1D00- Left Low Beam - Left headlamp low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Circuit short to beam circuit short the left headlamp low beam circuit for short
ground circuit to ground circuit to ground
B1D00- Left Low Beam - Left headlamp low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Circuit short to beam circuit short the left headlamp low beam circuit for short
battery or open circuit to battery, circuit to battery, open circuit, high resistance
open circuit, high
resistance
B1D01- Right Low Beam - Right headlamp low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Circuit short to beam circuit short the right headlamp low beam circuit for short
B1D01- Right Low Beam - Right headlamp low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Circuit short to beam circuit short the right headlamp low beam circuit for short
open circuit, high
resistance
B1D02- Left High Beam - Left headlamp high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Circuit short to beam circuit short the left headlamp high beam circuit for short
B1D02- Left High Beam - Left headlamp high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Circuit short to beam circuit short the left headlamp high beam circuit for short
open circuit, high
resistance
B1D03- Right High Beam - Right headlamp high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Circuit short to beam circuit short the right headlamp high beam circuit for short
B1D03- Right High Beam - Right headlamp high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Circuit short to beam circuit short the right headlamp high beam circuit for short
open circuit, high
resistance
B1D08- Left Trailer Direction Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Indicator Circuit - NOTE: This DTC may be the trailer left turn signal indicator circuit for
Circuit short to set by a fault in the trailer short circuit to ground
ground
Trailer left turn signal
indicator circuit short
circuit to ground
B1D09- Right Trailer Direction Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Indicator Circuit - NOTE: This DTC may be the trailer right turn signal indicator circuit for
Circuit short to set by a fault in the trailer short circuit to ground
ground
Trailer right turn
signal indicator circuit
B1D13- Interior Lights Circuit Interior lamps circuits Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 "A" - Circuit short to short circuit to ground the interior lamps circuits for short circuit to
ground ground
B1D17- Battery Backed Battery back-up Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
83 Sounder - Value of sounder internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
signal protection failure persists, install a new battery back-up sounder
calculation incorrect
B1D17- Battery Backed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
87 Sounder - Missing NOTE: This DTC is system, check and update the car configuration
message inhibited if the car file as necessary
configuration file is correct

contains invalid data
B1D17- Battery Backed Battery back-up Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
96 Sounder - sounder internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Component internal failure persists, install a new battery back-up sounder
failure
B1D35- Hazard Switch Stuck Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
23 - Signal stuck low NOTE: This DTC will set the hazard warning lamp switch circuit for short
if the switch is active for circuit to ground
more than 60 seconds Test the operation of the hazard warning lamp
switch. Install a new hazard warning lamp
Hazard warning lamp switch as necessary
circuit to ground
Hazard warning lamp
switch stuck active
B1D97- Tilt Sensor - Battery back-up Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
96 Component internal sounder internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure failure persists, install a new battery back-up sounder
C0079- Variable effort Car configuration file Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
54 steering - Missing contains invalid data system, check and update the car configuration
calibration file as necessary
C111A- Right Stop Lamp - Right stop lamp circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Circuit short to short circuit to ground the right stop lamp circuit for short circuit to
ground ground
C111A- Right Stop Lamp - Right stop lamp circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Circuit short to short circuit to the right stop lamp circuit for short circuit to
high resistance
C111B- Left Stop Lamp - Left stop lamp circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Circuit short to short circuit to ground the left stop lamp circuit for short circuit to
ground ground
C111B- Left Stop Lamp - Left stop lamp circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Circuit short to short circuit to the left stop lamp circuit for short circuit to
high resistance
C1A56- Left Front Tire No action, no No action required

16 Pressure Sensor and customer symptom
Transmitter Assembly
- Circuit voltage
below threshold
C1A56- Left Front Tire No action, no No action required
- Signal invalid
C1A56- Left Front Tire Tire low pressure
93 Pressure Sensor and wheel sensor NOTE: Ignore instrument cluster positional
Transmitter Assembly damaged information, as can be incorrect if wheels moved
- No operation Tire low pressure after/during failure occurrence
wheel sensor RF
interference Complete visual external inspection to ensure
Tire low pressure tire low pressure wheel sensors are fitted
wheel sensor battery Complete 'tire pressure monitoring wheel sensor
flat test'
Tire low pressure If all 4 sensors fail:
wheel sensor faulty - Check for receiver faults and RF receiver
is correct part number
- Review potential electrical interference to
tire pressure monitoring system receiver
inside the car. e.g. charging units, power
adapters, laptop/navigation screens, etc
If 1-3 sensors fail, replace non-transmitting
sensors
C1A57- Left Front Initiator - Tire pressure Refer to pinpoint test D in the tire pressure
12 Circuit short to monitoring antenna monitoring system diagnosis and testing section
battery harness fault of the workshop manual (see section 204-04)
Tire pressure and proceed as directed
monitoring antenna Clear DTC and retest. If fault persists check and
failure install new initiator as required
C1A57- Left Front Initiator - Tire pressure Check front left initiator connected in wheel arch
14 Circuit short to monitoring antenna
ground or open disconnected For additional information, refer to: Tire
Tire pressure Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front
monitoring antenna Antenna (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
harness fault Installation).
Tire pressure Refer to pinpoint test D in the tire pressure
monitoring antenna monitoring system diagnosis and testing section
failure of the workshop manual (see section 204-04)
and proceed as directed
Clear DTC and retest. If fault persists check and
install new initiator as required
C1A58- Right Front Tire No action, no No action required

- Circuit voltage
below threshold
C1A58- Right Front Tire No action, no No action required
- Signal invalid
C1A58- Right Front Tire Tire low pressure
wheel sensor RF
flat test'
sensors
C1A59- Right Front Initiator - Tire pressure Refer to pinpoint test D in the tire pressure
C1A59- Right Front Initiator - Tire pressure Check front right initiator connected in wheel
14 Circuit short to monitoring antenna arch
Tire pressure Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front
C1A60- Left Rear Tire No action, no No action required

- Circuit voltage
below threshold
C1A60- Left Rear Tire No action, no No action required
- Signal invalid
C1A60- Left Rear Tire Tire low pressure
wheel sensor RF
flat test'
sensors
C1A61- Left Rear Initiator - Tire pressure Refer to pinpoint test D in the tire pressure
C1A61- Left Rear Initiator - Tire pressure Check rear left initiator connected in wheel arch
14 Circuit short to monitoring antenna For additional information, refer to: Tire
ground or open disconnected Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear
Tire pressure Antenna (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
monitoring antenna Installation).
harness fault Refer to pinpoint test D in the tire pressure
Tire pressure monitoring system diagnosis and testing section
monitoring antenna of the workshop manual (see section 204-04)
failure and proceed as directed
C1A62- Right Rear Tire No action, no No action required

- Circuit voltage
below threshold
C1A62- Right Rear Tire No action, no No action required
- Signal invalid
C1A62- Right Rear Tire Tire low pressure
wheel sensor RF
flat test'
sensors
C1A63- Right Rear Initiator - Tire pressure Refer to pinpoint test D in the tire pressure
C1A63- Right Rear Initiator - Tire pressure Check rear right initiator connected in wheel
14 Circuit short to monitoring antenna arch
Tire pressure Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear
C1D18- Wheel Localization At least two tire

00 Failed - No sub type pressure monitoring NOTE: If set with other DTC's, this should be
information system antennas are ignored
dislodged
If set with no other DTC's, check the tire
pressure monitoring system initiator antennas
are correctly located in the wheel arches
For additional information, refer to: Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front
Antenna (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation) /
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear
Antenna (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).
C1D21- Wheel Module - Tire low pressure Complete visual external inspection to ensure
05 System programming wheel sensor(s) tire low pressure wheel sensor are fitted. (e.g.
failures removed no winter wheels, space saver, etc)
Incorrect tire low Check number of tire low pressure wheel sensor
pressure wheel sensor failed (via PID 4127)
fitted If all 4 sensors fail:
(type/frequency/part - Check for receiver faults and RF receiver
No.) is correct part number
Tire low pressure - Review potential electrical interference to
wheel sensor tire pressure monitoring system receiver
damaged between inside the car. e.g. charging units, power
drive cycles adapters, laptop/navigation screens, etc
Tire low pressure If 1-3 sensors fail, identify faulty sensors using
wheel sensor external 'tire pressure monitoring wheel sensor test' and
RF interference replace faulty sensors
C2004- Headlamp Washer Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Relay B - Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference the headlamp washer relay B circuit for short
short to ground POWER WASH R circuit to ground
Headlamp washer
relay B circuit short
circuit to ground
12 Relay B - Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference the headlamp washer relay B circuit for short
short to power POWER WASH R circuit to power
Headlamp washer
relay B circuit short
circuit to power
13 Relay B - Circuit NOTE: Circuit reference the headlamp washer relay B circuit for open
open POWER WASH R circuit, high resistance
Headlamp washer
relay B circuit open
P0230- Fuel Pump Primary Fuel pump relay circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
12 Circuit - Circuit short short circuit to power the fuel pump relay circuit for short circuit to
to battery power
U0001- High Speed CAN High speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
88 Communication Bus - circuit short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Bus off ground, short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
to power, open circuit, the high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit
high resistance to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance
U0004- High Speed CAN High speed CAN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 Communication Bus high circuit short the high speed CAN bus high circuit for short
(+) Low - No sub circuit to ground circuit to ground
type information
(+) High - No sub circuit to power circuit to power
type information
00 Communication Bus low circuit short circuit the high speed CAN bus low circuit for short
(-) High - No sub to power circuit to power
type information
(-) shorted to Bus circuit to high speed circuit to the high speed CAN bus low circuit
(+) - No sub type CAN bus low circuit
information
U0010- Medium Speed CAN Medium speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
88 Communication Bus - bus circuit short circuit system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Bus off to ground, short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
U0013- Medium Speed CAN Medium speed CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 Communication Bus bus high circuit short the medium speed CAN bus high circuit for short
(+) Low - No sub circuit to ground circuit to ground
type information
(+) High - No sub circuit to power circuit to power
type information
00 Communication Bus bus low circuit short the medium speed CAN bus low circuit for short
(-) High - No sub circuit to power circuit to power
type information
(-) shorted to Bus circuit to high speed circuit to the medium speed CAN bus low circuit
(+) - No sub type CAN bus low circuit
information
U0100- Lost Communication Engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 With ECM/PCM "A" - power or ground the engine control module power and ground
No sub type circuit open circuit, circuits for open circuit, high resistance
information high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
High speed CAN bus system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
ground, short circuit the high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit
to power, open circuit, to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
Engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new engine control module
U0101- Lost Communication Transmission control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 With Transmission module power or the transmission control module power and
Control Module - No ground circuit open ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
sub type information circuit, high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
module internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new transmission control
module
U0102- Lost Communication Transfer case control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 With Transfer Case module power or the transfer case control module power and
Transfer case control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
persists, install a new transfer case control
module
U0103- Lost Communication Transmission control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 with Gear Shift switch power or the transmission control switch power and
Control Module A - ground circuit open ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
No sub type circuit, high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information High speed CAN bus system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
switch
U0121- Lost Communication Anti-lock brake system Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 With Anti-Lock Brake control module power the anti-lock brake system control module power
System (ABS) or ground circuit open and ground circuits for open circuit, high
Control Module - No circuit, high resistance resistance
sub type information High speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Anti-lock brake system high resistance
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
persists, install a new anti-lock brake system
control module
U0126- Lost Communication Steering angle sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 With Steering Angle module power or the steering angle sensor module power and
Sensor Module - No ground circuit open ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Steering angle sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
persists, install a new steering angle sensor
module
U0128- Lost Communication Electric park brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 With Park Brake control module power the electric park brake control module power
Control Module - No or ground circuit open and ground circuits for open circuit, high
sub type information circuit, high resistance resistance
High speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Electric park brake high resistance
persists, install a new electric park brake control
module
U0132- Lost Communication Air suspension control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 With Suspension module power or the air suspension control module power and
Control Module "A" - ground circuit open ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
information High speed CAN bus system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Air suspension control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
persists, install a new air suspension control
module
U0138- Lost Communication Terrain response Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 with All Terrain switchpack power or the terrain response switchpack power and
Terrain response Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
switchpack internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure persists, install a new terrain response
switchpack
U0139- Lost Communication Adaptive damping Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 With Suspension system control module the adaptive damping system control module
Control Module "B" - power or ground power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
No sub type circuit open circuit, resistance
Adaptive damping Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
internal failure persists, install a new adaptive damping system
control module
U0151- Lost Communication Restraints control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 With Restraints module power or the restraints control module power and ground
Control Module - No ground circuit open circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Restraints control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
persists, install a new restraints control module
U0155- Lost Communication Instrument cluster Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 With Instrument power or ground the instrument cluster power and ground circuits
Panel Cluster (IPC) circuit open circuit, for open circuit, high resistance
Control Module - No high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
sub type information High speed CAN bus system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Instrument cluster Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
persists, install a new instrument cluster
U0164- Lost Communication Automatic temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 With HVAC Control control module power the automatic temperature control module power
Module - No sub type or ground circuit open and ground circuits for open circuit, high
information circuit, high resistance resistance
Medium speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
bus circuit short circuit system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
to ground, short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Automatic temperature circuit, high resistance
persists, install a new automatic temperature
control module
U0184- Lost Communication Integrated audio Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 With Radio - No sub module / audio head the integrated audio module / audio head unit
type information unit power or ground power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
circuit open circuit, resistance
Integrated audio Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
module / audio head system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
unit internal failure persists, install a new integrated audio module /
audio head unit
U0199- Lost Communication Driver door module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 with Driver Door power or ground the driver door module power and ground
Module (DDM) - No circuit open circuit, circuits for open circuit, high resistance
sub type information high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Driver door module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
persists, install a new driver door module
U0200- Lost Communication Passenger door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 With "Door Control module power or the passenger door module power and ground
Module "B" - No sub ground circuit open circuits for open circuit, high resistance
type information circuit, high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Passenger door Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
persists, install a new passenger door module
U0208- Lost Communication Driver seat module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 With "Seat Control power or ground the driver seat module power and ground
Module "A" - No sub circuit open circuit, circuits for open circuit, high resistance
type information high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Driver seat module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
persists, install a new driver seat module
U0214- Lost Communication Keyless vehicle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 With Remote module power or the keyless vehicle module power and ground
Function Actuation - ground circuit open circuits for open circuit, high resistance
information Medium speed CAN system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
persists, install a new keyless vehicle module
U0241- Lost Communication Headlamp leveling Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 With Headlamp control module power the headlamp leveling control module power and
Control Module "A" - or ground circuit open ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Headlamp leveling Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
internal failure persists, install a new headlamp leveling control
module
U0242- Lost Communication Auto high beam Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 With Headlamp control module power the auto high beam control module power and
Control Module "B" - or ground circuit open ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Auto high beam Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
internal failure persists, install a new auto high beam control
module
U0257- Lost Communication Touch screen power or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 With Front Controls / ground circuit open the touch screen power and ground circuits for
Display Interface circuit, high resistance open circuit, high resistance
Module - No sub type Medium speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information bus circuit short circuit system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
to ground, short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
Touch screen internal circuit, high resistance
failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, install a new touch screen
U025D- Lost Communication Touch screen Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 With Front Controls switchpack power or the touch screen switchpack power and ground
Interface Module "B" ground circuit open circuits for open circuit, high resistance
- No sub type circuit, high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Touch screen Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
switchpack internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure persists, install a new touch screen switchpack
U1000- Solid State Driver Central junction box

00 Protection Active - output circuit - Short NOTE: The relevant output is disabled while this
Driver Disabled - No circuit to ground, DTC is set. Do not clear the DTC until the fault has
sub type information short circuit to power been rectified

system, check for other central junction box
short circuit to ground and/or short circuit to
power DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
for corrective actions
Once circuit faults have been rectified, clear DTC
and retest
U200D- Control Module Output power A circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Output Power A - short circuit to ground the output power A circuit for short circuit to
Circuit short to ground
ground
14 Output Power A - short circuit to the output power A circuit for short circuit to
Circuit short to ground, open circuit, ground, open circuit, high resistance
ground or open high resistance
15 Output Power A - short circuit to the output power A circuit for short circuit to
Circuit short to battery, open circuit, battery, open circuit, high resistance
battery or open high resistance
U200E- Control Module Output power B circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Output Power B - short circuit to ground the output power B circuit for short circuit to
Circuit short to ground
ground
U2010- Switch Illumination - Switch illumination Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Circuit short to circuit short circuit to the switch illumination circuit for short circuit to
U2017- Control Module Central junction box Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 Software #2 - Not software system, re-configure the central junction box
programmed invalid/incomplete with the latest level software
U201B- Control Module Adjustable steering Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
54 Calibration Data #2 - column not calibrated system, perform routine - Calibrate Steering
Missing calibration Column
U201F- External Receiver - Issue with tire

04 System internal pressure monitoring NOTE: Ignore all other tire pressure monitoring
failures system RF receiver system DTCs if this is set
Check tire pressure monitoring system RF

receiver fuse
Clear the DTC and retest. If fault persists, check
and install a new tire pressure monitoring
system RF receiver

11 Circuit short to pressure monitoring NOTE: Ignore all other tire pressure monitoring
ground system RF receiver system DTCs if this is set

receiver fuse
Check circuits to tire pressure monitoring system
RF receiver using pinpoint tests A in the tire
pressure monitoring system diagnosis and
testing section of the workshop manual (see
section 204-04) and proceed as directed
system RF receiver

12 Circuit short to pressure monitoring NOTE: Ignore all other tire pressure monitoring
battery system RF receiver system DTCs if this is set

receiver fuse
RF receiver using pinpoint tests B in the tire
system RF receiver

87 Missing message pressure monitoring NOTE: Ignore all other tire pressure monitoring
system RF receiver system DTCs if this is set

receiver fuse
receiver connected at module
RF receiver using pinpoint tests C in the tire
system RF receiver
U2101- Control Module Central junction box is Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Configuration not configured system, check and update the car configuration
Incompatible - No correctly file as necessary. Clear the DTC and retest
sub type information
U2104- Trip Meter Reset
23 Button - Signal stuck NOTE: This DTC will set NOTE: The trip computer switch is integral with
low if the switch is active for the steering column left multifunction switch
more than 60 seconds
Trip computer switch the trip computer switch circuit for short circuit
circuit short circuit to to ground
ground Test the operation of the trip switch. Install a
Trip computer switch new trip computer switch as necessary
stuck active
U2300- Central Configuration Tire pressure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 - Signal plausibility monitoring system system, check and update the car/local
failure configuration data is configuration file as necessary. Clear the DTC
invalid caused by and retest
incorrect car/local
configuration file(s)
U3000- Control Module - Central junction box -

49 Internal electronic Internal failure NOTE: The relevant output is disabled while this
failure DTC is set

system, check for other central junction box
short circuit to ground and/or short circuit to
power DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
for corrective actions
Install a new central junction box as required.
Clear DTCs and retest

54 Improper Shutdown - NOTE: This DTC is set system, check for steering column adjustment
Missing calibration when the steering column tilt related DTCs. Clear the DTC and operate the
or reach motor is active. The steering column through the complete tilt and
DTC is cleared when the new reach range
steering column position has
been successfully stored
Steering column
tilt/reach position not
stored
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Digital
Radio Control Module (DRCM)
Digital Radio Control Module (DRCM)
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter accurate to three decimal places,
and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance always take the resistance of the digital
multimeter leads into account.
specific customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as required.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Digital Radio Control Module
(DRCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1A56- Antenna - Circuit Digital radio L- Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 short to ground band antenna digital radio L-band antenna circuit for short circuit to
circuit short ground
circuit to ground Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Digital radio L- digital radio L-band antenna amplifier circuit for short
band antenna circuit to ground
amplifier circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
short circuit to clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
ground a new digital radio L-band antenna amplifier
Digital radio L- Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
band antenna clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
amplifier internal a new digital radio control module
failure
Digital radio
control module
internal failure
12 short to battery band antenna digital radio L-band antenna circuit for short circuit to
circuit short power
circuit to power Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Digital radio L- digital radio L-band antenna amplifier circuit for short
band antenna circuit to power
power a new digital radio L-band antenna amplifier
Digital radio L- Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
band antenna clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
failure
Digital radio
control module
internal failure
13 open band antenna digital radio L-band antenna circuit for open circuit,
circuit open high resistance
circuit, high Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
resistance digital radio L-band antenna amplifier circuit for open
Digital radio L- circuit, high resistance
band antenna Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
amplifier circuit clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
open circuit, high a new digital radio L-band antenna amplifier
resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Digital radio L- clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
band antenna a new digital radio control module
amplifier internal
failure
Digital radio
control module
internal failure
B1D55- Antenna #2 - Circuit Digital radio Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 short to ground band 3 antenna digital radio band 3 antenna circuit for short circuit to
circuit short ground
circuit to ground Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Digital radio digital radio band 3 antenna amplifier circuit for short
band 3 antenna circuit to ground
ground a new digital radio band 3 antenna amplifier
Digital radio Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
band 3 antenna clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
failure
Digital radio
control module
internal failure
12 short to battery band 3 antenna digital radio band 3 antenna circuit for short circuit to
circuit short power
circuit to power Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Digital radio digital radio band 3 antenna amplifier circuit for short
band 3 antenna circuit to power
power a new digital radio band 3 antenna amplifier
Digital radio Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
band 3 antenna clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
failure
Digital radio
control module
internal failure
13 open band 3 antenna digital radio band 3 antenna circuit for open circuit,
circuit open high resistance
circuit, high Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
resistance digital radio band 3 antenna amplifier circuit for open
Digital radio circuit, high resistance
band 3 antenna Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
amplifier circuit clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
open circuit, high a new digital radio band 3 antenna amplifier
Digital radio clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
band 3 antenna a new digital radio control module
amplifier internal
failure
Digital radio
control module
internal failure
U2100- Initial Configuration Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Not Complete - No data not loaded re-configure the digital radio control module with the
sub type information (new module latest level software
installed to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
vehicle and not clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
initialized) a new digital radio control module
Digital radio
control module
internal failure
U2101- Control Module Central car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Configuration configuration re-configure the digital radio control module with the
Incompatible - No parameter latest level software
sub type information missing or
corrupted
U3000- Control module - Digital radio Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
46 Calibration/parameter control module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
memory failure internal failure a new digital radio control module
U3000- Control Module - Digital radio Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 Internal electronic control module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
failure internal failure a new digital radio control module
U3000- Control Module - Digital radio Check that the digital radio control module cooling
98 Component or control module vents / air circulation are not obstructed. Cool the
system over cooling vents vehicle interior down by ensuring it is in the shade
temperature obstructed and have the air conditioning on cool. Using the
Digital radio manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
a new digital radio control module
U3003- Battery voltage - Mismatch Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
62 Signal compare between the check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
failure voltage at the (0xD111) - and compare it to battery voltage. Refer
digital radio to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the digital
control module radio control module power and ground circuits for
and the voltage open circuit, high resistance
value broadcast
on the CAN bus
Driver/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM)
Driver/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM)
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Driver/Passenger Door Modules
(DDM/PDM). For additional Diagnosis and Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Driver Door Module (DDM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Diagnosis
and Testing).

B108F- Cabin Lock/Unlock Cabin lock/unlock switch Check the switch operation and serviceability.
23 Switch - Signal signal stuck Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
stuck low Switch pressed for longer check the switch circuit
than 20 seconds
Switch circuit short circuit
to ground
Switch failure
B109C- Front Courtesy Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Light - Circuit short front courtesy light circuit for short to ground
to ground
B109C- Front Courtesy Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Light - Circuit short circuit front courtesy light circuit for short to power or
to battery or open open circuit
B10EB- Driver Door Double Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Locking Motor - driver door double locking motor circuit for
Circuit short to short to ground
ground
B10EB- Driver Door Double Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Locking Motor - circuit driver door double locking motor circuit for
Circuit short to short to power or open circuit
battery or open
B10EC- Passenger Door Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Double Locking passenger door double locking motor circuit for
Motor - Circuit short to ground
short to ground
B10EC- Passenger Door Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Double Locking circuit passenger door double locking motor circuit for
Motor - Circuit short to power or open circuit
short to battery or
open
B10ED- Rear Door Driver Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Side Double the driver side rear door double locking motor
Locking Motor - circuit for short to ground
Circuit short to
ground
B10ED- Rear Door Driver Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Side Double circuit driver side rear door double locking motor
Locking Motor - circuit for short to power or open circuit
Circuit short to
battery or open
B10EE- Rear Door Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Passenger Side the passenger side rear door double locking
Double Locking motor circuit for short to ground
Motor - Circuit
short to ground
B10EE- Rear Door Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Passenger Side circuit passenger side rear door double locking motor
Double Locking circuit for short to power or open circuit
Motor - Circuit
short to battery or
open
B1108- Driver Door Central Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Locking Motor - driver door central locking motor circuit for
ground
B1108- Driver Door Central Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Locking Motor - circuit driver door central locking motor circuit for
Circuit short to short to power or open circuit
battery or open
B1109- Passenger Door Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Central Locking passenger door central locking motor circuit for
Motor - Circuit short to ground
short to ground
B1109- Passenger Door Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Central Locking circuit passenger door central locking motor circuit for
Motor - Circuit short to power or open circuit
short to battery or
open
B110A- Rear Door Driver Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Side Central driver side rear door central locking motor
Locking Motor - circuit for short to ground
Circuit short to
ground
B110A- Rear Door Driver Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Side Central circuit driver side rear door central locking motor
Locking Motor - circuit for short to power or open circuit
Circuit short to
battery or open
B110B- Rear Door Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Passenger Side passenger side rear door central locking motor
Central Locking circuit for short to ground
Motor - Circuit
short to ground
B110B- Rear Door Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Passenger Side circuit passenger side rear door central locking motor
Central Locking circuit for short to power or open circuit
Motor - Circuit
short to battery or
open
B1163- Left Mirror Heater Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Output Short To left mirror heater output circuit for short to
Ground - Circuit ground
short to ground
B1163- Left Mirror Heater Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Output Short To circuit left mirror heater output circuit for short to
Power - Circuit power or open circuit
short to battery or
open
B1164- Right Mirror Heater Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Output Short To right mirror heater output circuit for short to
Ground - Circuit ground
short to ground
B1164- Right Mirror Heater Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Output Short To circuit right mirror heater output circuit for short to
Power - Circuit power or open circuit
short to battery or
open
B1165- Left Front Puddle Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Lamp Output Short left front puddle lamp output circuit for short to
To Ground - Circuit ground
short to ground
B1165- Left Front Puddle Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Lamp Output Open circuit left front puddle lamp output circuit for short to
Load Or Short To power or open circuit
Power - Circuit
short to battery or
open
B1166- Right Front Puddle Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Lamp Output Short right front puddle lamp output circuit for short
To Ground - Circuit to ground
short to ground
B1166- Right Front Puddle Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Lamp Output Open circuit right front puddle lamp output circuit for short
Load Or Short To to power or open circuit
Battery - Circuit
short to battery or
open
B117C- Rear Power Set when window is Check for mechanical problems with the
07 Window Up - reversed during window window operation. Check for obstructions in the
Mechanical failures up due to mechanical window channels and that the glass is not
problems, window channel restricted in the full range of travel
restriction preventing
window closure or window
mechanism fault
B117C- Rear Power Door module internal Renew the relevant rear door module
72 Window Up - relay sticking open
Actuator stuck
open
B117C- Rear Power Door module internal Renew the relevant rear door module
73 Window Up - relay sticking closed
Actuator stuck
closed
B117C- Rear Power Set when auto window up Check the window operation. Clear the DTC and
92 Window Up - was interrupted (e.g. by retest
Performance or pressing local switch)
incorrect operation
B117D- Rear Power Door module internal Renew the relevant rear door module
72 Window Down - relay sticking open
Actuator stuck
open
B117D- Rear Power Door module internal Renew the relevant rear door module
73 Window Down - relay sticking closed
Actuator stuck
closed
B117E- Front Power Set when window is Check for mechanical problems with the
07 Window Up - reversed during window window operation. Check for obstructions in the
Mechanical Failures up due to mechanical window channels and that the glass is not
problems, window channel restricted in the full range of travel
restriction preventing
window closure or
Window mechanism fault
B117E- Front Power Door module internal Renew the relevant front door module
72 Window Up - relay sticking open
Actuator stuck
open
B117E- Front Power Door module internal Renew the relevant front door module
73 Window Up - relay sticking closed
Actuator stuck
closed
B117E- Front Power Set when auto window up Check the window operation. Clear the DTC and
92 Window Up - was interrupted (e.g. by retest
Performance or pressing local switch)
incorrect operation
B117F- Front Power Door module internal Renew the relevant front door module
72 Window Down - relay sticking open
Actuator stuck
open
B117F- Front Power Door module internal Renew the relevant front door module
73 Window Down - relay sticking closed
Actuator stuck
closed
B1189- Front Window Missing signal from hall Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
29 Position Sensor - sensor 1 or 2 check the hall sensor circuit between the door
Signal invalid Sensor circuit fault module and window motor. Repair as
Hall sensor fault necessary. If the problem persists, renew the
window motor
B118A- Rear Window Missing signal from hall Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
29 Position Sensor - sensor 1 or 2 check the hall sensor circuit between the door
Signal invalid Sensor circuit fault module and window motor. Repair as
Hall sensor fault necessary. If the problem persists, renew the
window motor
B11D1- LIN Bus "C" - Value LIN bus checksum error; Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
83 of signal protection driver switchpack internal check the LIN bus circuit between the driver
calculation fault door window switch and the door module.
incorrect Check the connectors for integrity and security.
Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem
persists, renew the driver door window switch
B11D1- LIN Bus "C" - LIN bus header error; Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
86 Signal invalid driver switchpack internal check the LIN bus circuit between the driver
fault door window switch and the door module.
Check the connectors for integrity and security.
B11D1- LIN Bus "C" - Slave node Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
87 Missing message communication missing; check the LIN bus circuit between the driver
driver switchpack internal door window switch and the door module.
fault Check the connectors for integrity and security.
B11F6- Driver Folding Driver folding mirror Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Mirror Motor - motor circuit short circuit check the mirror fold circuit between the driver
Circuit short to to ground door module and the mirror assembly. Repair
ground Mirror motor failure as necessary
B11F6- Driver Folding Driver mirror heater Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Mirror Motor - output circuit short circuit check the mirror fold circuit between the driver
Circuit short to to power or open circuit door module and the mirror assembly. Repair
battery or open Mirror motor failure as necessary
B11F7- Passenger Folding Passenger folding mirror Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Mirror Motor - motor circuit short circuit check the mirror fold circuit between the
Circuit short to to ground passenger door module and the mirror
ground Mirror motor failure assembly. Repair as necessary
B11F7- Passenger Folding Passenger mirror heater Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Mirror Motor - output circuit short circuit check the mirror fold circuit between the
Circuit short to to power or open circuit passenger door module and the mirror
battery or open Mirror motor failure assembly. Repair as necessary
B1A98- LIN Bus Circuit #1 Rear door module not on Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
83 - Value of signal LIN bus check the LIN bus circuit between the rear door
protection module and the front door module. Check the
calculation connectors for integrity and security. Clear the
incorrect DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
the rear door module
86 - Signal invalid LIN bus check the LIN bus circuit between the rear door
module and the front door module. Check the
connectors for integrity and security. Clear the
DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
87 - Missing message LIN bus check the LIN bus circuit between the rear door
module and the front door module. Check the
connectors for integrity and security. Clear the
DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
B1C09- Driver Left/Right Driver mirror adjustment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Mirror Motor Circuit motor circuit short circuit check the mirror motor circuit between the
- Circuit short to to ground driver door module and the mirror assembly.
ground Mirror left/right motor Repair as necessary
failure
- Circuit short to to power or open circuit driver door module and the mirror assembly.
battery or open Mirror left/right motor Repair as necessary
failure
B1C10- Driver Up/Down Driver mirror adjustment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
- Circuit short to to ground driver door module and the mirror assembly.
ground Mirror motor failure Repair as necessary
- Circuit short to to power or open circuit driver door module and the mirror assembly.
battery or open Mirror motor failure Repair as necessary
B1C11- Passenger Passenger mirror Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Left/Right Mirror adjustment motor circuit check the mirror motor circuit between the
Motor Circuit - short circuit to ground passenger door module and the mirror
Circuit short to Mirror motor failure assembly. Repair as necessary
ground
Motor Circuit - short circuit to power or passenger door module and the mirror
Circuit short to open circuit assembly. Repair as necessary
battery or open Mirror motor failure
11 Up/Down Mirror adjustment motor circuit check the mirror motor circuit between the
Motor Circuit - short circuit to ground passenger door module and the mirror
Circuit short to Mirror motor failure assembly. Repair as necessary
ground
Motor Circuit - short circuit to power or passenger door module and the mirror
Circuit short to open circuit assembly. Repair as necessary
battery or open Mirror motor failure
11 Mirror Motor motor circuit short circuit check the mirror motor circuit between the
Feedback Circuit - to ground driver door module and the mirror assembly.
Circuit short to Mirror motor failure Repair as necessary
ground
Feedback Circuit - to power or open circuit driver door module and the mirror assembly.
battery or open
Feedback Circuit - to ground driver door module and the mirror assembly.
ground
Feedback Circuit - to power or open circuit driver door module and the mirror assembly.
battery or open
Motor Feedback short circuit to ground passenger door module and the mirror
Circuit - Circuit Mirror motor failure assembly. Repair as necessary
short to ground
Motor Feedback short circuit to power or passenger door module and the mirror
Circuit - Circuit open circuit assembly. Repair as necessary
short to battery or Mirror motor failure
open
Motor Feedback short circuit to ground passenger door module and the mirror
Circuit - Circuit Mirror motor failure assembly. Repair as necessary
short to ground
Motor Feedback short circuit to power or passenger door module and the mirror
Circuit - Circuit open circuit assembly. Repair as necessary
short to battery or Mirror motor failure
open
B1C39- Key Lock Switch - Key lock switch signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and the
29 Signal invalid invalid, stuck/jammed key lock switch circuit. Clear the DTC and
Switch held for longer retest. If no other DTCs are present, ignore this
than 20 seconds fault. If the DTC returns, suspect an internal
Key lock switch circuit fault with the central junction box
short to ground (where
connected)
Key lock switch failure
Central junction box fault
B1D06- Left Turn Indicator Left turn signal short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 - Circuit short to circuit to ground check left turn signal for short circuit to ground
ground
B1D06- Left Turn Indicator Left turn signal short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 - Circuit short to circuit to power check left turn signal for short circuit high
battery or open Left turn signal high resistance, open circuit
resistance, open circuit
B1D07- Right Turn Right turn signal short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Indicator - Circuit circuit to ground check right turn signal for short circuit to
short to ground ground
B1D07- Right Turn Right turn signal circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Indicator - Circuit short circuit to power check right turn signal for short circuit high
short to battery or Right turn signal circuit resistance, open circuit
open high resistance, open
circuit
C1B14- Sensor Supply #1 - Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 Circuit short to window sensor supply circuit for short to
ground ground
C1B14- Sensor Supply #1 - Short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 Circuit short to circuit window sensor supply circuit for short to power
battery or open or open circuit
C1B15- Sensor Supply Hall sensor supply circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Voltage A - Circuit short to ground check the hall sensor supply circuit between the
short to ground Hall sensor fault rear door module and the window motor. If the
problem persists, renew the window motor
C1B15- Sensor Supply Hall sensor supply circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Voltage A - Circuit short to power or open check the hall sensor supply circuit between the
short to battery or circuit rear door module and the window motor. If the
open Hall sensor fault problem persists, renew the window motor
U0010- Medium Speed Medium speed CAN Carry out network integrity test using
00 CAN communication bus manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Communication Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test
Bus - No sub type medium speed CAN network for open, short
information circuit and high resistance
U0140- Lost Logged when subscribed Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 Communication CAN message missing power and ground supplies to central junction
With CJB - No sub from central junction box box. Check CAN network between the door
type information module and the central junction box. Carry out
network integrity test using manufacturer
approved diagnostic system
U0208- Lost Missing message Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
00 Communication power and ground supplies to driver seat
With Driver Seat module. Check CAN network between door
Module (DSM) - No module and driver seat module. Carry out
sub type network integrity test using manufacturer
information approved diagnostic system
U0300- Internal Control Car configuration file

00 Module Software mismatch with vehicle NOTE: After updating the car configuration file,
Incompatibility - specification set the ignition to on and wait 30 seconds before
No sub type clearing the DTCs
information
system, check and up-date the car
configuration file as necessary
U2002- Switch - Signal Signal stuck high Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains, install a
24 stuck high new passenger side window switch
U2004- Auxiliary Switch Signal stuck high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
24 Pack - Signal stuck Left or right rear door check the left and right door switch circuits
high local switch pressed for
longer than 20 seconds
Switch circuit short to
ground or power
U2010- Switch Illumination Switch illumination circuit Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 - Circuit short to short to ground the switch illumination circuit
ground
U2012- Car Configuration Car configuration file Cycle the ignition status and re-test. If DTC
08 Parameter(s) - Bus contains features not remains, re-configure the central junction box
signal/message available on door module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
failures variant fitted system
U2013- Switch Pack - Signal stuck high Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains, install a
24 Signal stuck high new driver side window switch pack
U2014- Control Module Door module internal fault Install a new door module
44 Hardware - Data
memory failure
U2100- Initial Car configuration file Re-configure the door module using the
00 Configuration Not invalid / not received manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Complete - No sub Check the configuration of the car configuration
type information file
U2101- Control Module Car configuration file Re-configure the door module using the
00 Configuration invalid / not received manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Incompatible - No Check the configuration of the car configuration
sub type file
information
U3003- Battery Voltage - Mis-match of battery Check vehicle battery and charging system.
62 Signal compare voltage, of 2 volts or Refer to the relevant section in the workshop
failure lower, between door manual. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
module and central and check the power and ground supply circuits
junction box to both modules
Driver/Passenger Seat Module (DSM/PSM)
Driver Seat Module (DSM) / Passenger Seat Module (PSM)
CAUTIONS:
vehicle.
When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adapter kit, part
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Driver Seat Module (DSM) /
Passenger Seat Module (PSM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and
Testing section in the workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1060- Seat Headrest Motor Head restraint motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Output - Circuit short circuit short circuit to the head restraint motor circuit for short circuit to
15 Output - Circuit short circuit short circuit to the head restraint motor circuit for short circuit to
to battery or open power, open circuit, power, open circuit, high resistance
high resistance
31 Sensor - No signal position sensor circuit the head restraint motor position sensor circuit
short circuit to for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
to power, open
circuit, high
resistance
B106D- Headrest Up Switch - Head restraint up Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
24 Signal stuck high switch circuit short the head restraint up switch circuit for short
circuit to power circuit to power
Head restraint up Test the operation of the head restraint up switch
switch stuck active
B106E- Headrest Down Head restraint down Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
24 Switch - Signal stuck switch circuit short the head restraint down switch circuit for short
high circuit to power circuit to power
Head restraint down Test the operation of the head restraint down
switch stuck active switch
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Value Seat memory Install a new seat memory switchpack
83 of signal protection switchpack internal
calculation incorrect failure
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Signal Seat memory Install a new seat memory switchpack
86 invalid switchpack internal
failure
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Missing Seat memory Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
87 message switchpack power or the seat memory switchpack power and ground
ground circuit open circuits for open circuit, high resistance
circuit, high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
resistance the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
LIN bus circuit short short circuit to power, open circuit, high
circuit to ground, resistance
short circuit to Install a new seat memory switchpack
high resistance
Seat memory
switchpack internal
failure
B1B86- Seat Height Motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Relay - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit reference the seat height motor circuit for short circuit to
to ground HEIGHT MOTOR UP / ground
HEIGHT MOTOR DOWN
Seat height motor

ground
15 Relay - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit reference the seat height motor circuit for short circuit to
to battery or open HEIGHT MOTOR UP / power, open circuit, high resistance
HEIGHT MOTOR DOWN
Seat height motor

high resistance
31 Speed/Position NOTE: Circuit reference the seat height motor position sensor circuit for
Sensor - no signal HEIGHT MOTOR SENSE / short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
HEIGHT HALL SENS GND open circuit, high resistance
Seat height motor

position sensor circuit
short circuit to
to power, open
circuit, high
resistance
B1B88- Seat Slide Motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Relay - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit reference the seat forward/rearward motor circuit for short
to ground SLIDE MOTOR FORWARD / circuit to ground
SLIDE MOTOR REARWARD
Seat
forward/rearward
motor circuit short
circuit to ground
15 Relay - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit reference the seat forward/rearward motor circuit for short
to battery or open SLIDE MOTOR FORWARD / circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
SLIDE MOTOR REARWARD
Seat
forward/rearward
motor circuit short
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
31 Speed/Position NOTE: Circuit reference the seat forward/rearward motor position sensor
Sensor - No signal SLIDE MOTOR SENSE / circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
SLIDE HALL SENS GND power, open circuit, high resistance
Seat
forward/rearward
motor position sensor
to power, open
circuit, high
resistance
B1B90- Seat Tilt Motor Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference the seat tilt motor circuit for short circuit to
ground TILT MOTOR UP / TILT ground
MOTOR DOWN
Seat tilt motor circuit

short circuit to
ground
B1B90- Seat Tilt Motor Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
15 - Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference the seat tilt motor circuit for short circuit to
battery or open TILT MOTOR UP / TILT power, open circuit, high resistance
MOTOR DOWN
Seat tilt motor circuit

short circuit to
high resistance
B1B91- Seat Tilt Motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
31 Speed/Position NOTE: Circuit reference the seat tilt motor position sensor circuit for short
Sensor - No signal TILT MOTOR SENSE / TILT circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
HALL SENS GND circuit, high resistance
Seat tilt motor

short circuit to
to power, open
circuit, high
resistance
B1B92- Seat Recline Motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Relay - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit reference the seat backrest recline motor circuit for short
to ground SQUAB MOTOR INCLINE / circuit to ground
SQUAB MOTOR RECLINE
Seat backrest recline

motor circuit short
circuit to ground
15 Relay - Circuit short NOTE: Circuit reference the seat backrest recline motor circuit for short
to battery or open SQUAB MOTOR INCLINE / circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
SQUAB MOTOR RECLINE

motor circuit short
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
31 Speed/Position NOTE: Circuit reference the seat backrest recline motor position sensor
Sensor - No signal SQUAB MOTOR SENSE / circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
SQUAB HALL SENS GND power, open circuit, high resistance

motor position sensor
to power, open
circuit, high
resistance
B1B94- Seat Height Up Seat height up switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
24 Switch - Signal stuck circuit short circuit to the seat height up switch circuit for short circuit
high power to power
Seat height up switch Test the operation of the seat height up switch
stuck active
B1B95- Seat Height Down Seat height down Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
24 Switch - Signal stuck switch circuit short the seat height down switch circuit for short
Seat height down Test the operation of the seat height down switch
switch stuck active
B1B96- Seat Slide Forward Seat slide forward Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
24 Switch - Signal stuck switch circuit short the seat slide forward switch circuit for short
Seat slide forward Test the operation of the seat slide forward
B1B97- Seat Slide Backward Seat slide rearward Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
24 Switch - Signal stuck switch circuit short the seat slide rearward switch circuit for short
Seat slide rearward Test the operation of the seat slide rearward
B1B98- Seat Tilt Up Switch - Seat tilt up switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
24 Signal stuck high circuit short circuit to the seat tilt up switch circuit for short circuit to
power power
Seat tilt up switch Test the operation of the seat tilt up switch
stuck active
B1B99- Seat Tilt Down Seat tilt down switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
24 Switch - Signal stuck circuit short circuit to the seat tilt down switch circuit for short circuit to
high power power
Seat tilt down switch Test the operation of the seat tilt down switch
stuck active
B1C00- Seat Recline Up Seat backrest recline Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
24 Switch - Signal stuck up switch circuit the seat backrest recline up switch circuit for
high short circuit to power short circuit to power
Seat backrest recline Test the operation of the seat backrest recline up
up switch stuck switch
active
B1C01- Seat Recline Down Seat backrest recline Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
24 Switch - Signal stuck down switch circuit the seat backrest recline down switch circuit for
high short circuit to power short circuit to power
Seat backrest recline Test the operation of the seat backrest recline
down switch stuck down switch
active
B1C02- Memory Store Switch Memory store switch Test the operation of the memory store switch
24 - Signal stuck high stuck active
B1C03- Memory #1 Switch - Memory 1 switch Test the operation of the memory 1 switch
24 Signal stuck high stuck active
U0010- Medium speed CAN Medium speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
88 Communication Bus - bus circuit short system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Bus off circuit to ground, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short circuit to the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short
power, open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
high resistance circuit, high resistance
U0140- Lost Communication Central junction box Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Body Control power or ground the central junction box power and ground
Module - No sub type circuit open circuit, circuits for open circuit, high resistance
bus circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit to ground, the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short
short circuit to circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
power, open circuit, circuit, high resistance
Central junction box system, check the central junction box for related
system fault DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Module "B" - No sub circuit open circuit, circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Central junction box system, check the central junction box for related
U0155- Lost Communication Instrument cluster Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Control Module - No high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
sub type information Medium speed CAN system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Instrument cluster system, check the instrument cluster for related
U0199- Lost Communication Driver door module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With "Door Control power or ground the driver door module power and ground circuits
Module A" - No sub circuit open circuit, for open circuit, high resistance
Driver door module system, check the driver door module for related
fault DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
U0300- Software Driver/passenger Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

00 Incompatibility - No seat module is not system, re-configure the driver/passenger seat
sub type information configured correctly module with the latest level software
U1A14- CAN Initialization Driver/passenger Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

49 Failure - Internal seat module internal system, re-configure the driver/passenger seat
electronic failure failure module with the latest level software. Clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
new driver/passenger seat module
U1A4C- Build / End of Line Error/mismatch in car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 mode Active - No sub configuration file system, check and up-date the car configuration
type information file as necessary. Clear the DTC and re-test
U3000- Control Module - Driver/passenger Install a new driver/passenger seat module

49 Internal electronic seat module internal
failure failure
U3001- Control Module Driver/passenger

46 Improper Shutdown - seat module power NOTE: This DTC is for information only
Calibration/parameter has been
memory failure disconnected whilst in Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
manufacturing mode system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
persists, re-configure the driver/passenger seat
module with the latest level software
U3002- Vehicle Identification Driver/passenger Install the original or a new driver/passenger seat
81 Number - Invalid seat module module as necessary
serial data received previously installed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
on another vehicle system, perform routine - Learn VIN (0x0404)
New driver/passenger
seat module installed
and VIN not yet
programmed
U3003- Battery Voltage - Driver/passenger Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

16 Circuit voltage below seat module power or system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU
threshold ground circuit open Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer to the electrical
circuit, high circuit diagrams and check the driver/passenger
resistance seat module power and ground circuits for open
Battery/charging circuit, high resistance
system fault Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
manual and test the battery and charging system
U3003- Battery Voltage - Battery/charging Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

17 Circuit voltage above system fault system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU
threshold Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer to the relevant
section of the workshop manual and test the
battery and charging system
Dynamic Response Control Module (DRM)
Dynamic Response Control Module (DRM)
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Dynamic Response Control
Module (DRM), for additional Diagnosis and Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Active Stabilization System (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Diagnosis
and Testing).

B1A84- Car Data does not Configure the car configuration file using the approved
64 Configuration match that diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and test for normal
Data - Signal expected for VIN operation re-configure the dynamic response control
plausibility range module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
failure system, clear DTC and re-test
C1024- System Dynamic response Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check dynamic
00 Temporarily control module response control module power circuit for open circuit,
Disabled Due To power circuit, high resistance. Check engine management system control
Power open circuit, high relay. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Interruption resistance dynamic response control module ground circuit for open
During Driving - Dynamic response circuit, high resistance
No sub type control module
information ground circuit
open circuit, high
resistance
C1111- Control Lateral Dynamic response Check for associated codes giving more information.
22 Acceleration - control module Check and install a new dynamic response control module
Signal failure as required
amplitude >
maximum
C1111- Control Lateral Intermittent lower Check for associated codes giving more information. Refer
27 Acceleration - lateral to the electrical circuit diagrams and check lower lateral
Signal rate of accelerometer accelerometer circuit for intermittent open circuit, high
change above signal resistance. Check and install a new lower lateral
threshold Lower lateral accelerometer as required. Carry out the accelerometer
accelerometer tests using the approved diagnostic system. Check and
failure install a new lower lateral accelerometer as required
Internal dynamic
response control
module calculation
fault
C1112- Roll Angle - No Internal dynamic Check for associated codes giving more information.
00 sub type response control Check and install a new dynamic response control module
information module calculation as required
fault
Dynamic response
control module
failure
C1112- Roll Angle - Internal dynamic Check for associated codes giving more information.
29 Signal invalid response control Check and install a new dynamic response control module
module calculation as required
fault
Dynamic response
control module
failure
C1113- Off Road Internal dynamic Check for associated codes giving more information.
00 Determination - response control Check and install a new dynamic response control module
No sub type module calculation as required
information fault
Dynamic response
control module
failure
C1114- Roll Axis Torque Internal dynamic Check for associated codes giving more information.
00 - No sub type response control Check and install a new dynamic response control module
information module calculation as required
fault
Dynamic response
control module
failure
C1116- Torque/Pressure Internal dynamic Check for associated codes giving more information.
29 - Signal invalid response control Check and install a new dynamic response control module
module calculation as required
fault
Dynamic response
control module
failure
C1117- Direction Internal dynamic Check for associated codes giving more information.
29 Control Valve(s) response control Check and install a new dynamic response control module
- Signal invalid module calculation as required
fault
Dynamic response
control module
failure
C1117- Direction Sticking direction Check and install a new valve block
71 Control Valve(s) control valves
- Actuator stuck
C1117- Direction Incorrect Check the valve connections and rectify as necessary.
95 Control Valve(s) connection of the Check the direction control valves. Check direction control
- Incorrect pressure control valve circuit for high resistance. Check and install a new
assembly and direction direction control valve as required
control valves
Direction control
valve circuit high
resistance
Damaged direction
control valve
C1119- Hydraulic Low fluid Check and top up the fluid as required. Check and rectify
09 Pressure - Leak in high any leaks as required. Check and install a new pressure
Component pressure primary control valve as required. Check and install a new
failures circuit pressure transducer as required. Check and install a new
Leaking reservoir filter as required. Check the front and rear actuators.
Leak in secondary Check and install a new actuator as required
circuit
Direction control
valves stuck open
Pressure control
valve fault
Pressure
transducer fault
Blocked filter
Actuator fault
C1119- Hydraulic Pressure Check and install a new pressure transducer as required
22 Pressure - transducer fault Check and install a new pressure control valve as required
Signal Pressure control
amplitude > valve fault
maximum
62 Pressure - Leak in high any leaks as required. Check and install a new pressure
Signal compare pressure primary control valve as required. Check and install a new
failure circuit pressure transducer as required. Check and install a new
Leaking reservoir filter as required. Check the system front and rear
Leak in secondary actuators. Check and install a new actuator as required.
circuit Check and install new drop links or stabilizer bars as
Direction control necessary. Carry out the manual bleed procedure
valves stuck open
Pressure control
valve fault
Pressure
transducer fault
Blocked filter
Actuator fault
Broken drop link
Broken stabilizer
bar
Air in system
7B Pressure - Low Leak in high any leaks as required. Check and install a new filter as
fluid level pressure primary required. Check and replace the pump as required Check
circuit the suction hose for blockage or kinking, rectify or replace
Leaking reservoir as required
Leak in secondary
circuit
Blocked filter
Low pump flow
Blocked or kinked
suction hose
C1119- Hydraulic Pressure control For sticking / faulty valves, install a new pressure control
91 Pressure - valve fault valve as required. Clean the system, replace the fluid.
Parametric Contaminated fluid Check and replace the return pipe as necessary. For a
Kinked or blocked pressure transducer fault, install a new pressure
return pipe transducer
Pressure
transducer fault
C1A97- Lateral Damaged Check the accelerometers and brackets. Check and install
62 Accelerometer accelerometers new accelerometers as required
Circuit- Signal Bent brackets
compare failure
C1A99- Pressure Sensor Pressure sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check pressure
16 - Circuit voltage circuit short to sensor circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check and
below threshold ground, open install a new pressure sensor as required
circuit
Pressure sensor
failure
17 - Circuit voltage circuit short to sensor circuit for short to power. Check and install a new
above threshold power pressure sensor as required
Pressure sensor
failure
1C - Circuit voltage circuit short to sensor circuit for short to ground, short to power, open
out of range ground, short to circuit, high resistance. Check and install a new pressure
power, open sensor as required
circuit, high
resistance
Pressure sensor
failure
26 - Signal rate of circuit short to sensor circuit for short to ground, short to power, open
change below ground, short to circuit, high resistance. Check and install a new pressure
threshold power, open sensor as required
circuit, high
resistance
Pressure sensor
failure
C1B03- Directional Directional control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
01 Control Valve valve 1 circuit directional control valve 1 circuit for short to ground,
#1 - General short to ground, short to power, open circuit, high resistance, short to
electrical failure short to power, another circuit. Check and install a new dynamic response
open circuit, high control module as required
resistance, short
to another circuit
Dynamic response
control module
failure
12 Control Valve valve 1 circuit directional control valve 1 circuit for short to power.
#1 - Circuit short to power Check and install a new directional control valve 1
short to battery Directional control solenoid coil as required
valve 1 failure
#1 - Circuit short to ground, open circuit. Check and install a new directional control
short to ground open circuit valve 1 solenoid coil as required
or open Directional control
valve 1 failure
18 Control Valve valve 1 circuit high directional control valve 1 circuit for high resistance.
#1 - Circuit resistance Check and install a new directional control valve 1
current below Directional control solenoid coil as required
threshold valve 1 failure
current above Directional control solenoid coil as required
1D Control Valve valve 1 circuit directional control valve 1 circuit for open circuit, high
#1 - Circuit open circuit, high resistance. Check and install a new directional control
current out of resistance valve 1 solenoid coil as required
range Directional control
valve 1 failure
C1B04- Initial (Hit) Directional control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Current - valve 1 circuit directional control valve 1 circuit for open circuit, high
Directional open circuit, high resistance
control valve resistance
#1 - No sub
type
information
C1B05- Hold Current - Directional control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Directional valve 1 circuit high directional control valve 1 circuit for high resistance. Carry
control valve resistance out the manual bleed procedure
#1 - No sub Air in system
type
information
C1B06- Off State Directional control Disconnect the dynamic response control module 30 way
00 Current Monitor valve 1 off current connector, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
- Directional greater than the check directional control valve 1 circuit for short to
control valve limit another circuit
#1 - No sub Directional control
type valve 1 off current
information greater than 0.1
Amps
Directional control
valve 1 circuit
short to another
circuit
01 Control Valve valve 2 short to directional control valve 2 circuit for short to ground,
#2 - General ground, short to short to power, open circuit, high resistance, short to
electrical failure power, open another circuit. Check and install a new dynamic response
circuit, high control module as required
resistance, short
to another circuit
Dynamic response
control module
failure
short to battery Directional control solenoid coil as required
valve 2 failure
#2 - Circuit short to ground, open circuit. Check and install a new directional control
short to ground open circuit valve 2 solenoid coil as required
or open Directional control
valve 2 failure
18 Control Valve valve 2 circuit high directional control valve 2 circuit for high resistance.
#2 - Circuit resistance Check and install a new directional control valve 2
current below Directional control solenoid coil as required
current above Directional control solenoid coil as required
1D Control Valve valve 2 circuit directional control valve 2 circuit for open circuit, high
#2 - Circuit open circuit, high resistance. Check and install a new directional control
current out of resistance valve 2 solenoid coil as required
range Directional control
valve 2 failure
C1B08- Initial (Hit) Directional control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Current - valve 2 circuit directional control valve 2 circuit for open circuit, high
Directional open circuit, high resistance
control valve resistance
#2 - No sub
type
information
C1B09- Hold Current - Directional control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Directional valve 2 circuit high directional control valve 2 circuit for high resistance. Carry
control valve resistance out the manual bleed procedure
#2 - No sub Air in system
type
information
C1B10- Off State Directional control Disconnect the dynamic response control module 30 way
00 Current Monitor valve 2 off current connector, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
- Directional greater than the check directional control valve 2 circuit for short to
control valve limit another circuit
#2 - No sub Directional control
type valve 2 off current
information greater than 0.1
Amps
Directional control
valve 2 circuit
short to another
circuit
C1B11- Pressure Pressure control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check pressure
01 Control Valve - valve circuit short control valve circuit for short to ground, short to power,
General to ground, short open circuit, high resistance, short to another circuit.
electrical failure to power, open Check and install a new pressure control valve as required
circuit, high
resistance, short
to another circuit
Pressure control
valve failure
12 Control Valve - valve circuit short control valve circuit for short to power. Check and install
Circuit short to to power a new pressure control valve solenoid coil as required
battery Pressure control
valve failure
14 Control Valve - valve circuit short control valve circuit for short to ground, open circuit.
Circuit short to to ground, open Check and install a new pressure control valve solenoid
ground or open circuit coil as required
Pressure control
valve failure
18 Control Valve - valve circuit open control valve circuit for open circuit, high resistance.
Circuit current circuit, high Check and install a new pressure control valve solenoid
below threshold resistance coil as required
Pressure control
valve failure
19 Control Valve - valve circuit short control valve circuit for short to power. Check and install
Circuit current circuit to power a new pressure control valve solenoid coil as required
above threshold
1D Control Valve - valve circuit high control valve circuit for high resistance. Check and install
Circuit current resistance a new pressure control valve solenoid coil as required
out of range Pressure control
valve failure
C1B11- Pressure Low / Check fluid condition and replace as required. Check and
62 Control Valve - contaminated fluid top up fluid level as required. Check and install a new
Signal compare Pressure control pressure control valve as required. Check the pump
failure valve fault operation and hoses, rectify as necessary. Check and
Low flow / low install a new pressure transducer as required. Carry out
pressure pump the manual bleed procedure
Pressure
transducer fault
Air in system
64 Control Valve - valve circuit high control valve circuit for high resistance. Check and install
Signal resistance a new pressure control valve solenoid coil as required
plausibility Pressure control
failure valve failure
C1B12- Lower Lateral Lower lateral Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check lower
12 Accelerometer - accelerometer lateral accelerometer circuit for short to power, short to
Circuit short to signal circuit short another circuit
battery to power or
another circuit
C1B12- Lower Lateral Lower lateral Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check lower
14 Accelerometer - accelerometer lateral accelerometer circuit for short to ground, short to
Circuit short to signal circuit short another circuit, open circuit. Check and install a new lower
ground or open ground, short to lateral accelerometer as required
another circuit,
open circuit
Lower lateral
accelerometer
failure
C1B12- Lower Lateral Lower lateral Check the lower lateral accelerometer installation, rectify
22 Accelerometer - accelerometer as necessary. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Signal loose check lower lateral accelerometer circuit for short to
amplitude > Lower lateral ground, short to another circuit, open circuit. Check and
maximum accelerometer install a new lower lateral accelerometer as required
signal circuit short
circuit to ground,
short to another
circuit
Lower lateral
accelerometer
failure
Signal rate of loose check lower lateral accelerometer circuit for short to
change below Lower lateral ground, short to another circuit, open circuit. Check and
threshold accelerometer install a new lower lateral accelerometer as required
signal circuit short
circuit to ground,
short to another
circuit
Lower lateral
accelerometer
failure
28 Accelerometer - accelerometer as necessary. Carry out the accelerometer tests using the
Signal bias level mounting approved diagnostic system. Check and install a new
out of range / damaged lower lateral accelerometer as necessary
zero adjustment Lower lateral
failure accelerometer
loose
Lower lateral
accelerometer
failure
Wrong mounting approved diagnostic system. Check and install a new
mounting damaged lower lateral accelerometer as necessary
position Lower lateral
accelerometer
failure
C1B13- Upper Lateral Upper lateral Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check upper
12 Accelerometer - accelerometer lateral accelerometer circuit for short to power, short to
Circuit short to signal circuit short another circuit. Carry out the accelerometer tests using
battery to power, short to the approved diagnostic system. Check and install a new
another circuit upper lateral accelerometer as necessary
Upper lateral
accelerometer
failure
14 Accelerometer - accelerometer lateral accelerometer circuit for short to ground, short to
Circuit short to signal circuit short another circuit. Carry out the accelerometer tests using
ground or open circuit to ground, the approved diagnostic system. Check and install a new
short to anther upper lateral accelerometer as necessary
circuit
Upper lateral
accelerometer
failure
C1B13- Upper Lateral Upper lateral Check the upper lateral accelerometer installation, rectify
Signal loose check upper lateral accelerometer circuit for short to
amplitude > Upper lateral another circuit. Carry out the accelerometer tests using
maximum accelerometer the approved diagnostic system. Check and install a new
signal circuit short upper lateral accelerometer as necessary
to another circuit
Upper lateral
accelerometer
failure
26 Accelerometer - accelerometer lateral accelerometer circuit for short to another circuit.
Signal rate of signal circuit short Carry out the accelerometer tests using the approved
change below to another circuit diagnostic system. Check and install a new upper lateral
threshold Upper lateral accelerometer as necessary
accelerometer
failure
Signal bias level mounting approved diagnostic system. Check and install a new
out of range / damaged upper lateral accelerometer as necessary
zero adjustment Upper lateral
failure accelerometer
loose
Upper lateral
accelerometer
failure
Wrong mounting approved diagnostic system. Check and install a new
mounting damaged upper lateral accelerometer as necessary
position Upper lateral
accelerometer
failure
C1B14- Sensor Supply Lower lateral Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check lower
1C Voltage A - accelerometer or lateral accelerometer or pressure transducer supply circuit
Circuit voltage pressure for short to ground, short to another circuit. Carry out the
out of range transducer supply accelerometer tests using the approved diagnostic system.
circuit short to Check and install a new lower lateral accelerometer as
ground, short to necessary. Check and install a new pressure transducer as
another circuit necessary. Check and install a new dynamic response
Lower lateral control module as required
accelerometer
fault
Pressure
transducer fault
Dynamic response
control module
failure
C1B15- Sensor Supply Upper lateral Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check upper
1C Voltage B - accelerometer or lateral accelerometer or pressure transducer supply circuit
Circuit voltage pressure for short to ground, short to another circuit. Carry out the
out of range transducer supply accelerometer tests using the approved diagnostic system.
circuit short to Check and install a new upper lateral accelerometer as
ground, short to necessary. Check and install a new pressure transducer as
another circuit necessary. Check and install a new dynamic response
Upper lateral control module as required
accelerometer
fault
Pressure
transducer fault
Dynamic response
control module
failure
P1145- Calculated Internal control Check for associated codes giving more information.
29 Torque Error - module calculation Check and install a new dynamic response control module
Signal invalid failure
Dynamic response
control module
failure
U0001- High Speed Bus off Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
88 CAN complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Communications electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
Bus – Bus off
U0100- Lost CAN circuit fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication CAN module fault power and ground connections to the engine control
With ECM/PCM module. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
"A" - No sub system, complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to
type the electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
information between the engine control module and the dynamic
response control module
00 Communication CAN module fault power and ground connections to the transmission control
With TCM - No module. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
sub type system, complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to
information the electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
between the transmission control module and the dynamic
00 Communication CAN module fault power and ground connections to the transfer case control
With Transfer module. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Case Control system, complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to
Module - No sub the electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
type between the transfer case control module and the
information dynamic response control module
00 Communication CAN module fault power and ground connections to the anti-lock brake
With Anti-Lock system control module. Using the manufacturer approved
Brake System diagnostic system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
(ABS) Control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN
Module - No sub network between the anti-lock brake system control
type module and the dynamic response control module
information
00 Communication CAN module fault power and ground connections to the Steering angle
With Steering sensor module. Using the manufacturer approved
Angle Sensor diagnostic system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
Module - No sub Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN
type network between the Steering angle sensor module and
information the dynamic response control module
00 Communication CAN module fault power and ground connections to the air suspension
With control module. Using the manufacturer approved
Suspension diagnostic system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN
"A" - No sub network between the air suspension control module and
type the dynamic response control module
information
00 Communication CAN module fault power and ground connections to the central junction box.
With Body Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Control Module complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
- No sub type electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
information between the central junction box and the dynamic
U0300- Internal Control Dynamic response Clear DTC and re-test. Re-configure the dynamic response
00 Module control module not control module using the manufacturer approved
Software configured or diagnostic system
Incompatibility - incorrectly
No sub type configured
information
U0401- Invalid Data Engine control Check the engine control module for related DTCs using
68 Received From module fault the approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-check.
ECM/PCM A - Check for CAN or module DTCs. Using the manufacturer
Event approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
information integrity test
U0402- Invalid Data Transmission Check the transmission control module for related DTCs
68 Received From control module using the approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-
TCM - Event fault check. Check for CAN or module DTCs. Using the
information manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a
CAN network integrity test
U0403- Invalid Data Transfer case Check the transfer case control module for related DTCs
68 Received From control module using the approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-
Transfer Case fault check. Check for CAN or module DTCs. Using the
Control Module manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a
- Event CAN network integrity test
information
U0415- Invalid Data Road speed signal Check for CAN or anti-lock brake system control module
00 Received From fault DTCs. Check wheel speed sensor(s) for damage. Check
Anti-Lock Brake Wheel speed wheel speed sensor air gap and correct as required.
System (ABS) sensor(s) fault Check wheel speed rotors for damage. Check and replace
Control Module wheel speed sensor(s) as required. Using the
- No sub type manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a
information CAN network integrity test
U0415- Invalid Data Yaw rate sensor Check yaw rate sensor is correctly positioned / installed.
68 Received From wrong orientation/ Check for CAN or anti-lock brake system control module
Anti-Lock Brake position DTCs. Check the power and ground circuits to the yaw
System (ABS) Yaw rate sensor rate sensor. Check and replace yaw rate sensor as
Control Module fault required. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
- Event system, complete a CAN network integrity test
information
U0421- Invalid Data Suspension out of Calibrate the vehicle ride height using the approved
68 Received From calibration diagnostic system. Check for CAN or air suspension
Suspension Air suspension control module related DTCs. Check the power and ground
Control Module control module circuits to the air suspension control module. Check and
A - Event fault install a new air suspension control module as required.
information Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
complete a CAN network integrity test
U0428- Invalid Data Steering angle Calibrate the Steering angle sensor using the approved
68 Received From sensor out of diagnostic system. Check for CAN or module DTCs. Check
Steering Angle calibration the power and ground circuits to the Steering angle
Sensor Module - Steering angle sensor. Check and install a new steering angle sensor as
Event sensor fault required. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information system, complete a CAN network integrity test
85 Received From sensor out of diagnostic system. Check for CAN or module DTCs. Check
Steering Angle calibration the power and ground circuits to the Steering angle
Sensor Module - Steering angle sensor module. Check and install a new steering angle
Signal above sensor fault sensor module as required. Using the manufacturer
allowable range approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
integrity test
86 Received From sensor out of diagnostic system. Check the wheel alignment, adjust as
Steering Angle calibration necessary. Check for CAN or Steering angle sensor
Sensor Module - Wheels out of module DTCs. Check the power and ground circuits to the
Signal invalid alignment Steering angle sensor module. Check and install a new
Steering angle steering angle sensor module as required. Using the
sensor fault manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a
U1A14- CAN Dynamic response Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
49 Initialisation control module power and ground connections to the dynamic response
Failure - internal fault control module. Using the manufacturer approved
Internal diagnostic system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
electronic Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN
failure network. Check and install a new dynamic response
control module as required
U2007- Valve(s) - Check the filter and pipework and replace as required.
98 Component or NOTE: The DTC Check the fluid condition, replace and clean as necessary.
system over detects pressure control Clear DTC and re-test. Check and install a new pressure
temperature valve over temperature. control valve as required
Estimated valve
temperature over 142°c.
The temperature is
derived from the
resistance of the PCV coil.
Restricted filter
Restricted high
pressure or return
line pipework
Contaminated fluid
Pressure control
valve faulty
Continuous use at
high lateral
acceleration
U3000- Control Module Pressure control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
01 - General valve circuit short for associated codes giving more information. Refer to the
electrical failure circuit or very low electrical circuit diagrams and check pressure control
resistance. Short valve and directional control valve negative connections
to power circuit for fault
Directional control
valve circuit short
to power or very
low resistance
U3000- Control Module Dynamic response Check and install a new dynamic response control module
04 - System control module as required
internal failures internal fault
43 - Special control module as required
memory failure internal fault
- special
memory failure
45 - Programme control module as required
memory failure internal fault
47 - Watchdog / control module as required
safety Micro internal fault
controller failure
U3000- Control Module Dynamic response Clear DTC and re-test. Re-configure the dynamic response
52 - Not activated control module not control module using the manufacturer approved
configured or diagnostic system
incorrectly
configured
U3000- Control Module Dynamic response Clear DTC and re-test. Re-configure the dynamic response
54 - Missing control module not control module using the manufacturer approved
calibration configured or diagnostic system
incorrectly
configured
U3003- Battery Voltage Dynamic response Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check dynamic
1C - Circuit voltage control module response control module power supply circuit for high
out of range power supply resistance, open circuit. Check vehicle battery. Check for
circuit high charging system DTCs, rectify as necessary
resistance, open
circuit
Charging system
fault
U3003- Battery Voltage Inconsistent Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
62 - Signal battery voltages dynamic response control module power supply circuit for
compare failure received by high resistance, open circuit. Check vehicle battery. Check
dynamic response for charging system DTCs, rectify as necessary
control module
Dynamic response
control module
supply circuit(s)
short to ground,
short to power,
high resistance,
open circuit
Dynamic response
control module
internal failure
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Electric
Park Brake Control Module (EPBCM)
Electric Park Brake Control Module (EPBCM)
CAUTIONS:
vehicle.
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Electric Park Brake Control
Module (EPBCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing
section in the workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Diagnosis and Testing).

C0062- Longitudinal Electric park
01 Acceleration Sensor brake control NOTE: The longitudinal acceleration sensor is integral
- General electrical module internal with the electric park brake control module
failure failure
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
clear the DTCs. Perform Drive Cycle 2. If the fault
module
C0062- Longitudinal Electric park

02 Acceleration Sensor brake control NOTE: The longitudinal acceleration sensor is integral
- General signal module internal with the electric park brake control module
failure failure
module
C0062- Longitudinal Longitudinal

54 Acceleration Sensor acceleration NOTE: The longitudinal acceleration sensor is integral
- Missing calibration sensor calibration with the electric park brake control module
failure
perform routine - Sensor Calibration (0x211D)
C1104- Brake Bedding Mode Electric park

68 - Event information brake control NOTE: This DTC is for information only
module in brake
bedding mode Cycle the ignition to exit brake bedding mode
C1A43- Motor Supply - Electric park

01 General electrical brake control NOTE: The electric park brake actuator is integral with
failure module internal the electric park brake control module
failure
module

19 Circuit current brake actuator NOTE: The electric park brake actuator is integral with
above threshold current above the electric park brake control module
threshold
Check for mechanical failures causing the electric park
brake to jam on

67 Signal incorrect brake control NOTE: The electric park brake actuator is integral with
after event module internal the electric park brake control module
failure
Test the functionality of the electric park brake. Using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
for related DTCs. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the
fault persists, install a new electric park brake control
module
C1A46- Mismatch Between Electric park Test the functionality of the electric park brake. Using
01 Motor Drive Current brake control the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
and Resultant Force module internal for related DTCs. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the
- General electrical failure fault persists, install a new electric park brake control
failure module
C1A46- Mismatch Between Electric park Test the functionality of the electric park brake. Using
64 Motor Drive Current brake control the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
and Resultant Force module internal for related DTCs. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the
- Signal plausibility failure fault persists, install a new electric park brake control
failure module
C1A47- Force Sensor - Electric park

01 General electrical brake control NOTE: The force sensor is integral with the electric park
failure module internal brake control module
failure
module

02 General signal brake control NOTE: The force sensor is integral with the electric park
failure module internal brake control module
failure
module

54 Missing calibration brake control NOTE: The force sensor is integral with the electric park
module internal brake control module
failure
module
C1A48- Warning Lamp - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
01 General electrical NOTE: Circuit electric park brake warning lamp circuit for short
failure reference STATUS LAMP circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance
Electric park Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
brake warning clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
lamp circuit short new electric park brake control module
circuit to ground, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
short circuit to clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
power, open new instrument cluster
circuit, high
resistance
Electric park
brake control
module internal
failure
Instrument
cluster internal
failure
C1A53- Manual Emergency Electric park Check that the electric park brake emergency release
68 Release Activated - brake emergency cable is not permanently pulled (or stuck). Attempt to
Event information release cable has re-engage the electric park brake by operating the
been activated or apply switch twice. If successful, clear the DTCs and
is stuck/damaged test by operating the emergency release and re-
Park brake cables engaging the electric park brake
seized/damaged Check the integrity of the park brake cables
Electric park Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
brake control clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
module internal new electric park brake control module
failure
U0073- Control Module High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
88 Communication Bus bus circuit short perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
"A" Off - Bus off circuit to ground, electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed
short circuit to CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
power, open to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit, high
resistance
U0100- Lost Communication Engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 With ECM/PCM "A" - module power or engine control module power and ground circuits for
No sub type ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
information open circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
resistance perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
High speed CAN electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed
bus circuit short CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
circuit to ground, to power, open circuit, high resistance
short circuit to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
power, open check the engine control module for related DTCs and
circuit, high refer to the relevant DTC index
resistance
Engine system
fault
U0101- Lost Communication Transmission Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 with TCM - No sub control module transmission control module power and ground circuits
type information power or ground for open circuit, high resistance
circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
resistance electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed
High speed CAN CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
bus circuit short to power, open circuit, high resistance
short circuit to check the transmission control module for related
power, open DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
circuit, high
resistance
Transmission
system fault
U0102- Lost Communication Transfer case Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 With Transfer Case control module transfer case control module power and ground circuits
Control Module - No power or ground for open circuit, high resistance
sub type circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
information circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
resistance electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed
short circuit to check the transfer case control module for related
power, open DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
circuit, high
resistance
Transfer case
system fault
U0121- Lost Communication Anti-lock brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 With Anti-Lock system control anti-lock brake system control module power and
Brake System (ABS) module power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Control Module - No ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
sub type open circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
information resistance electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed
short circuit to check the anti-lock brake system control module for
power, open related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
circuit, high
resistance
Anti-lock brake
system fault
U0140- Lost Communication Central junction Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 With Body Control box power or central junction box power and ground circuits for
Module - No sub ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
type information open circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
bus circuit short CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
circuit to ground, to power, open circuit, high resistance
power, open check the central junction box for related DTCs and
resistance
Central junction
box system fault
U0300- Internal Control Electric park Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
55 Module Software brake control re-configure the electric park brake control module
Incompatibility - Not module is not with the latest level software
configured configured
correctly
U0401- Invalid Data Missing/invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Received From data from the check the engine control module for related DTCs and
ECM/PCM A - No engine control refer to the relevant DTC index
sub type module
information
68 Received from data from the check the engine control module for related DTCs and
ECM/PCM A - Event engine control refer to the relevant DTC index
information module
U0402- Invalid data Missing/invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 received from the data from the check the transmission control module for related
TCM - No sub type transmission DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
00 Received From The data from the check the transfer case control module for related
Transfer Case transfer case DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Control Module - No control module
sub type
information
00 Received From Anti- data from the check the anti-lock brake system control module for
Lock Brake System anti-lock brake related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
(ABS) Control system control
Module - No sub module
type information
00 Received From Body data from the check the central junction box for related DTCs and
Control Module - No central junction refer to the relevant DTC index
sub type box
information
68 Received From Body data from the check the central junction box for related DTCs and
Control Module - central junction refer to the relevant DTC index
Event information box
68 Received From data from the check the restraints control module for related DTCs
Restraints Control restraints control and refer to the relevant DTC index
Module - Event module
information
U1A14- CAN Initialization Electric park Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 Failure - Internal brake control clear the DTCs. Perform Drive Cycle 1. If the fault
electronic failure module internal persists, install a new electric park brake control
failure module
U2002- Switch - General

01 electrical failure NOTE: Circuit NOTE: This DTC can be set by operating the electric
reference SW1 / SW2 / park brake switch very slowly
SW3 / SW4
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Electric park electric park brake switch circuits for short circuit to
brake switch ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
circuits short resistance
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
U2002- Switch - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
12 short to battery NOTE: Circuit electric park brake switch circuit for short circuit to
reference SW1 / SW2 / power
SW3 / SW4
Electric park
brake switch
circuit short
circuit to power
U2002- Switch - Signal

2F erratic NOTE: Circuit NOTE: This DTC can be set by operating the electric
reference SW1 / SW2 / park brake switch very slowly
SW3 / SW4
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
U2002- Switch -
92 Performance or NOTE: Circuit NOTE: This DTC can be set by operating the electric
incorrect operation reference SW1 / SW2 / park brake switch very slowly
SW3 / SW4
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
U2012- Car Configuration Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Parameter(s) - No file mismatch check and up-date the car configuration file as
sub type with vehicle necessary
information specification
U3000- Control Module - No Electric park Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 sub type brake control clear the DTCs and retest
information module internal
failure
U3000- Control Module - Electric park Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
16 Circuit voltage brake control check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage
below threshold module power or (0xDD02). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground circuit check the electric park brake control module power
open circuit, high and ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
resistance Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
Battery/charging and test the battery and charging system
system fault
U3000- Control Module - Battery/charging Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
17 Circuit voltage system fault check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage
above threshold (0xDD02). Refer to the relevant section of the
workshop manual and test the battery and charging
system
U3000- Control Module - Electric park Allow the electric park brake control module to cool,
4B Over temperature brake control clear the DTC and retest. Do not renew the electric
module internal park brake control module as this is a protection
temperature function to ensure no internal damage occurs
above threshold
U300A- Ignition Switch - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
64 Signal plausibility NOTE: Circuit ignition sense circuit for short circuit to ground, short
failure reference IGN circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Ignition sense
circuit short
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Electric
Steering Column Lock Control Module (ESCL)
Electric Steering Column Lock Control Module (ESCL)
CAUTIONS:
vehicle.
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Electric Steering Column Lock
Control Module (ESCL). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing
section in the workshop manual.

B100D- Column Lock Electric Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the electric
16 Authorisation - steering steering column lock circuit for short circuit to ground, open
Circuit voltage column lock circuit, high resistance. If the fault persists, install a new electric
below circuit short steering column lock
threshold circuit to
ground,
open circuit,
high
resistance
B100D- Column Lock Electric Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
29 Authorisation - steering DTCs and perform routine - On Demand Self Test (0x0202). If
Signal invalid column lock the fault persists, install a new electric steering column lock
control
module
internal
failure
B100D- Column Lock Electric Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
42 Authorisation - steering DTCs and perform routine - On Demand Self Test (0x0202). If
General column lock the fault persists, install a new electric steering column lock
memory failure control
module
internal
failure
B100D- Column Lock Electric Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-configure
51 Authorisation - steering the electric steering column lock control module with the latest
Not column lock level software
programmed control
module is
not
configured
correctly
B100D- Column Lock Encrypted Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-configure
62 Authorisation - data the electric steering column lock control module with the latest
Signal compare exchange level software. Re-configure the instrument cluster with the
failure does not latest level software. If the fault persists, perform a CAN network
match integrity test. Perform routine - On Demand Self Test (0x0202)
between
electric
steering
column lock
and the
instrument
cluster
B100D- Column Lock Incorrect Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
64 Authorisation - conditions to DTCs and perform a CAN network integrity test. Perform routine
Signal allow locking - On Demand Self Test (0x0202). Check the anti-lock brake
plausibility action to system control module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
failure continue DTC index. Check the engine control module for related DTCs and
refer to the relevant DTC index
B100D- Column Lock Electric Ensure that the vehicle battery supply voltage is between 9 and
72 Authorisation - steering 16volts. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Actuator stuck column lock check datalogger signal - Main ECU Voltage Supply (0xDD02).
open unable to Clear the DTCs. Perform a CAN network integrity test. Perform
reach locked routine - On Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists,
state install a new electric steering column lock
Actuator stuck column lock check datalogger signal - Main ECU Voltage Supply (0xDD02).
closed unable to Clear the DTCs. Ensure that the column lock bolt movement is
reach not obstructed or restricted (the parked position of the road
unlocked wheels may be exerting a turning force through the steering
state column, preventing the lock from releasing. The steering wheel
may need to be held against the force to allow the column lock
to release). Perform a CAN network integrity test. Perform
routine - On Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists,
install a new electric steering column lock
Commanded column lock check datalogger signal - Main ECU Voltage Supply (0xDD02).
position not unable to Clear the DTCs. Ensure that the column lock bolt movement is
reachable reach not obstructed or restricted (the parked position of the road
unlocked or wheels may be exerting a turning force through the steering
locked state column, preventing the lock from releasing. The steering wheel
routine - On Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists,
Performance or column lock check datalogger signal - Main ECU Voltage Supply (0xDD02).
incorrect mechanism Clear the DTCs. Ensure that the column lock bolt movement is
operation jammed, not obstructed or restricted (the parked position of the road
obstructed wheels may be exerting a turning force through the steering
column, preventing the lock from releasing. The steering wheel
routine - On Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the problem persists,
Unexpected column lock check datalogger signal - Main ECU Voltage Supply (0xDD02).
operation mechanism Clear the DTCs. Ensure that the column lock bolt movement is
jammed, not obstructed or restricted (the parked position of the road
Component column lock check datalogger signal - Main ECU Voltage Supply (0xDD02).
internal failure mechanism Clear the DTCs. Ensure that the column lock bolt movement is
jammed, not obstructed or restricted (the parked position of the road
U0001- High Speed High speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a
88 CAN CAN bus CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Communication circuit short diagrams and check the high speed CAN bus circuit for short
Bus - Bus off circuit to circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
ground, resistance
short circuit
to power,
open circuit,
high
resistance
U0300- Internal Electric Ensure that the vehicle battery supply voltage is between 9 and
00 Control Module steering 16volts. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Software column lock check datalogger signal - Main ECU Voltage Supply (0xDD02).
Incompatibility is not Clear the DTCs. Ensure that the column lock bolt movement is
- No sub type configured not obstructed or restricted (the parked position of the road
information correctly wheels may be exerting a turning force through the steering
to release). Re-configure the electric steering column lock with
the latest level software Perform a CAN network integrity test.
Perform routine - On Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the problem
persists, install a new electric steering column lock
U3002- Vehicle Electric Install the original or a new electric steering column lock as
81 Identification steering necessary
Number - column lock Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform
Invalid serial previously routine - Learn VIN (0x0404)
data received installed on
another
vehicle
New electric
steering
column lock
installed and
VIN not yet
programmed
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Fuel
Fired Booster Heater Control Module (FFBH)
Fuel Fired Booster Heater (FFBH)
CAUTIONS:
vehicle.
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Fuel Fired Booster Heater
(FFBH). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Fired Booster Heater (412-02B Auxiliary Heating, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1206- Crash Occurred Crash signal
53 - Deactivated received from NOTE: Fuel fired booster heater operation is inhibited when this
restraints DTC is set.
control module
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
the restraints control module for related DTCs and refer to
the relevant DTC index
B1D22- Coolant Fuel fired Install a new fuel fired booster heater coolant temperature
11 Temperature booster heater sensor as necessary. Using the manufacturer approved
Sensor - coolant diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and perform routine -
Circuit short to temperature AHCM Operation Check (0x9013)
ground sensor circuit
short circuit to
ground
B1D22- Coolant Fuel fired Install a new fuel fired booster heater coolant temperature
15 Temperature booster heater sensor as necessary. Using the manufacturer approved
Sensor - coolant diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and perform routine -
Circuit short to temperature AHCM Operation Check (0x9013)
battery or sensor circuit
open short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
B1D23- Overheat Fuel fired Install a new fuel fired booster heater coolant temperature
13 Sensor - booster heater sensor as necessary. Using the manufacturer approved
Circuit open coolant diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and perform routine -
temperature AHCM Operation Check (0x9013)
sensor circuit
open circuit,
high resistance
B1D24- Glow Plug - Fuel fired Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel
11 Circuit short to booster heater fired booster heater glow plug circuit for short circuit to
ground glow plug circuit ground. Install a new fuel fired booster heater glow plug as
short circuit to necessary. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ground system, clear the DTCs and perform routine - AHCM
Operation Check (0x9013)
B1D24- Glow Plug - Fuel fired Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel
15 Circuit short to booster heater fired booster heater glow plug circuit for short circuit to
battery or glow plug circuit power, open circuit, high resistance. Install a new fuel fired
open short circuit to booster heater glow plug as necessary. Using the
power, open manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs
circuit, high and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check (0x9013)
resistance
B1D25- Heater Fuel Fuel fired Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel
11 Pump - Circuit booster heater fired booster heater fuel pump circuit for short circuit to
short to fuel pump ground
ground circuit short
circuit to ground
B1D25- Heater Fuel Fuel fired Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel
15 Pump - Circuit booster heater fired booster heater fuel pump circuit for short circuit to
short to fuel pump power, open circuit, high resistance
battery or circuit short
open circuit to
battery, open
circuit, high
resistance
B1D26- Combustion Air Fuel fired Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
11 Blower - Circuit booster heater DTCs and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check
short to internal failure (0x9013). If the fault persists, install a new fuel fired booster
ground heater
15 Blower - Circuit booster heater DTCs and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check
short to internal failure (0x9013). If the fault persists, install a new fuel fired booster
battery or heater
open
92 Blower - booster heater DTCs and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check
Performance or internal failure (0x9013). If the fault persists, install a new fuel fired booster
incorrect heater
operation
93 Blower - No booster heater DTCs and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check
operation internal failure (0x9013). If the fault persists, install a new fuel fired booster
heater
B1D27- Heater Coolant Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel
11 Pump - Circuit NOTE: Circuit fired booster heater coolant pump circuit for short circuit to
short to reference + ground
ground
Fuel fired
booster heater
coolant pump
circuit short
circuit to ground
B1D27- Heater Coolant Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel
15 Pump - Circuit NOTE: Circuit fired booster heater coolant pump circuit for short circuit to
short to reference + power, open circuit, high resistance
battery or
open Fuel fired
booster heater
coolant pump
circuit short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
B1D28- Fuel Pre-heater Fuel fired

11 - Circuit short booster heater NOTE: The pre heat is performed by the ignition glow plug
to ground glow plug circuit
short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel
ground fired booster heater glow plug circuit for short circuit to
ground. Install a new fuel fired booster heater glow plug as
necessary. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, clear the DTCs and perform routine - AHCM
Operation Check (0x9013). If the fault persists, install a new
fuel fired booster heater
B1D28- Fuel Pre-heater Fuel fired

15 - Circuit short booster heater NOTE: The pre heat is performed by the ignition glow plug
to battery or glow plug circuit
open short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel
power, open fired booster heater glow plug circuit for short circuit to
circuit, high power, open circuit, high resistance. Install a new fuel fired
resistance booster heater glow plug as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs
and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check (0x9013). If
the fault persists, install a new fuel fired booster heater
B1D29- No Start, Even No fuel present Check vehicle fuel level. Check fuel lines to fuel fired booster
93 After Restart at fuel fired heater module for blockage, kinking or damage. Check fuel
Attempt - No booster heater for aeration and correct fuel delivery. Check that the vehicle
operation module is not parked on an incline when the fuel fired booster heater
Fuel fired is operated. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
booster heater system, clear the DTCs and perform routine - AHCM
air intake Operation Check (0x9013)
blocked Check the fuel fired booster heater air intake for blockage,
Fuel fired kinking or damage. Using the manufacturer approved
booster heater diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and perform routine -
exhaust system AHCM Operation Check (0x9013)
blocked Check the fuel fired booster heater exhaust system for
blockage, kinking or damage. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and perform
routine - AHCM Operation Check (0x9013)
B1D30- No Start In No fuel present Check vehicle fuel level. Check fuel lines to fuel fired booster
93 Test Mode - No at fuel fired heater module for blockage, kinking or damage. Check fuel
operation booster heater for aeration and correct fuel delivery. Check that the vehicle
module is not parked on an incline when the fuel fired booster heater
Fuel fired is operated. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
booster heater system, clear the DTCs and perform routine - AHCM
air intake Operation Check (0x9013)
B1D31- Flame Fuel fired

94 Detected Prior booster heater NOTE: The glow plug and flame sensor are a combined unit
to Normal glow plug circuit
Operation - short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel
Unexpected ground, short fired booster heater glow plug circuit for short circuit to
operation circuit to power, ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
open circuit, Install a new fuel fired booster heater glow plug as
high resistance necessary. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, clear the DTCs and perform routine - AHCM
Operation Check (0x9013)
B1D32- Multiple Flame No fuel present Check vehicle fuel level. Check fuel lines to fuel fired booster
92 Interruption at fuel fired heater module for blockage, kinking or damage. Check fuel
During Heating booster heater for aeration and correct fuel delivery. Check that the vehicle
Cycle - module is not parked on an incline when the fuel fired booster heater
Performance or Fuel fired is operated. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
incorrect booster heater system, clear the DTCs and perform routine - AHCM
operation air intake Operation Check (0x9013)
B1D33- Flame No fuel present Check vehicle fuel level. Check fuel lines to fuel fired booster
92 Interruption at fuel fired heater module for blockage, kinking or damage. Check fuel
During Normal booster heater for aeration and correct fuel delivery. Check that the vehicle
Operation - module is not parked on an incline when the fuel fired booster heater
Performance or Fuel fired is operated. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
incorrect booster heater system, clear the DTCs and perform routine - AHCM
operation air intake Operation Check (0x9013)
B1D34- Heater In Lock Fuel fired

68 Out Mode - booster heater NOTE: This DTC is for information only. Diagnose and rectify
Event system fault other fuel fired booster heater DTCs first
information
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check (0x9013)
B1D63- External Fuel fired Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
11 Control Relay - booster heater DTCs and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check
Circuit short to internal failure (0x9013). If the fault persists, install a new fuel fired booster
ground heater
B1D63- External Fuel fired Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
15 Control Relay - booster heater DTCs and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check
Circuit short to internal failure (0x9013). If the fault persists, install a new fuel fired booster
battery or heater
open
U0010- Medium Speed Medium speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform
00 CAN CAN bus circuit a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Communication short circuit to diagrams and check the medium speed CAN bus circuit for
Bus - No sub ground, short short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
type circuit to power, high resistance
information open circuit,
high resistance
U0028- Vehicle Medium speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform
08 Communication CAN bus circuit a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Bus A - Bus short circuit to diagrams and check the medium speed CAN bus circuit for
signal/message ground, short short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
failures circuit to power, high resistance
open circuit,
high resistance
U0300- Internal Fuel fired Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
00 Control Module booster heater configure the fuel fired booster heater with the latest level
Software is not configured software
Incompatibility correctly
- No sub type
information
U2101- Control Module Car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
00 Configuration configuration file and up-date the car configuration file as necessary
Incompatible - mismatch with
No sub type vehicle
information specification
U3000- Control Module Fuel fired Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
16 - Circuit booster heater datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer
voltage below power or ground to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuel fired
threshold circuit open booster heater power and ground circuits for open circuit,
circuit, high high resistance
resistance Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Battery/charging test the battery and charging system
system fault
U3000- Control Module Battery/charging Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
17 - Circuit system fault datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer
voltage above to the relevant section of the workshop manual and test the
threshold battery and charging system
U3000- Control Module Fuel fired Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
43 - Special booster heater DTCs and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check
memory failure internal failure (0x9013). If the fault persists, install a new fuel fired booster
heater
U3000- Control Module Fuel fired Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
49 - Internal booster heater DTCs and perform routine - AHCM Operation Check
electronic internal failure (0x9013). If the fault persists, install a new fuel fired booster
failure heater
U3003- Battery Voltage Mismatch Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
62 - Signal between the datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage (0xDD02) - and
compare failure voltage at the compare it to battery voltage. Refer to the electrical circuit
fuel fired diagrams and check the fuel fired booster heater power and
booster heater ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
and the voltage
value broadcast
on the CAN bus
Headlamp Leveling Control Module (HCM)
Headlamp Leveling Control Module (HCM)
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Headlamp Control Module, for
For additional information, refer to: Headlamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1041- Levelling Headlamp Install a new headlamp leveling control module as required
04 Control - leveling
System control module
internal internal failure
failures
B1041- Levelling
54 Control - NOTE: This DTC NOTE: Sensor calibration routine must be carried out with the
Missing will normally be vehicle unladen and with correct tire pressures.
calibration logged when a new
module has been Calibrate the headlamp leveling sensors using the
installed. manufacturer approved diagnostic system, carry the out
routine 'Headlamp Control Module System Calibration'
Levelling
sensor
calibration
routine not
carried out
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - LIN bus circuit

83 Value of signal fault NOTE: This circuit uses shielded cable
protection No
calculation communication Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the LIN bus
incorrect on the LIN bus circuit for harness damage
LIN bus EMC
interference

86 Signal invalid fault NOTE: This circuit uses shielded cable
No
communication Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the LIN bus
on the LIN bus circuit for harness damage
LIN bus EMC
interference

88 Bus off fault NOTE: This circuit uses shielded cable
No
communication Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the LIN bus
on the LIN bus circuit for harness damage
B10AE- Headlamp Headlamp
11 Leveling Motor levelling motor NOTE: Circuit - DCM R/L -
- Circuit short control circuit
to ground short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check headlamp
ground leveling motor control circuit for short to ground
B10AE- Headlamp Headlamp

12 Leveling Motor levelling motor NOTE: Circuit - DCM R/L -
- Circuit short control circuit
to battery short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check headlamp
leveling motor control circuit for short to power
B10AE- Headlamp Signal

64 Leveling Motor plausibility NOTE: Circuit - DCM R/L -
- Signal failure (voltage
plausibility out of range) Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check headlamp
failure leveling motor circuits for failure. Disconnect one headlamp
connector, clear DTC and re-test. If DTC cleared, suspect
headlamp leveling control module or circuits to the
disconnected side of the failure. If DTC remains, reconnect first
headlamp and disconnect second, clear DTC and re-test. If
DTC cleared, suspect headlamp leveling control module or
circuits to the disconnected side of the failure. If DTC remains,
suspect common circuits of the failure. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check as required
B1A59- Sensor 5 Volt Headlamp

11 Supply - Circuit levelling NOTE: Circuits - SVSF+ - SVSR+ -
short to sensor 5 volt
ground supply circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check headlamp
short to levelling sensor 5 volt supply circuit for short to ground
ground
B1A59- Sensor 5 Volt Headlamp

12 Supply - Circuit levelling NOTE: Circuits - SVSF+ - SVSR+ -
short to sensor 5 volt
battery supply circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check headlamp
short to power levelling sensor 5 volt supply circuit for short to power
B1D64- Left Headlamp Internal Check the headlamp connections, clear the DTC and re-test. If
01 Swivelling headlamp the DTC remains install a new headlamp
Motor - motor fault
General Internal
electrical headlamp
failure circuit fault
B1D64- Left Headlamp Left headlamp Check the headlamp connections, clear the DTC, switch off the
04 Swivelling swivelling ignition and allow sufficient time for the headlamp leveling
Motor - System motor fault control module to power down and re-test. If the DTC persists,
internal install a new headlamp
failures
B1D64- Left Headlamp Missing Check the headlamp connections, clear DTC and re-test. If DTC
87 Swivelling message remains install a new headlamp
Motor - Missing
message
B1D65- Right Internal Check the headlamp connections, clear the DTC and re-test. If
01 Headlamp headlamp the DTC remains install a new headlamp
Swivelling motor fault
Motor - Internal
General headlamp
electrical circuit fault
failure
B1D65- Right Right Check the headlamp connections, clear the DTC, switch off the
04 Headlamp headlamp ignition and allow sufficient time for the headlamp leveling
Swivelling swivelling control module to power down and re-test. If the DTC persists,
Motor - System motor fault install a new headlamp
internal
failures
B1D65- Right Missing Check the headlamp connections, clear DTC and re-test, if DTC
87 Headlamp message remains install a new headlamp
Swivelling
Motor - Missing
message
B1D68- Left Headlamp Sensor not Check the headlamp connector for integrity. Refer to the
00 Swivelling detected circuit diagrams and check headlamp circuit. Clear DTC and re-
Feedback test, if DTC remains install a new headlamp
Sensor - No
sub type
information
B1D69- Right Sensor not Check the headlamp connector for integrity. Refer to the
00 Headlamp detected circuit diagrams and check headlamp circuit. Clear DTC and re-
Swivelling test, if DTC remains install a new headlamp
Feedback
Sensor - No
sub type
information
C1A04- Right Front Height sensor Check the air suspension control module for DTCs. Check the
11 Height Sensor harness wiring sensor connector for damage. Refer to the electrical circuit
- Circuit short short circuit to diagrams and check the sensor circuit for continuity or short
to ground ground circuit. Check sensor signal changes when sensor is rotated. If
any height sensor fixings are slackened or found to be loose,
or a height sensor has been changed, the vehicle ride height
must be re-calibrated. Calibrate the system using the approved
diagnostic system
to battery or power circuit. Check sensor signal changes when sensor is rotated. If
open any height sensor fixings are slackened or found to be loose,
diagnostic system
64 Height Sensor signal sensor connector for damage. Refer to the electrical circuit
- Signal plausibility diagrams and check the sensor circuit for continuity or short
plausibility failure circuit. Check sensor signal changes when sensor is rotated. If
failure any height sensor fixings are slackened or found to be loose,
diagnostic system
C1A06- Right Rear Height sensor Check the air suspension control module for DTCs. Check the
to ground ground circuit. Check sensor signal changes when sensor is rotated. If
any height sensor fixings are slackened or found to be loose,
diagnostic system
to battery or power circuit. Check sensor signal changes when sensor is rotated. If
open any height sensor fixings are slackened or found to be loose,
diagnostic system
64 Height Sensor signal sensor connector for damage. Refer to the electrical circuit
- Signal plausibility diagrams and check the sensor circuit for continuity or short
plausibility failure circuit. Check sensor signal changes when sensor is rotated. If
failure any height sensor fixings are slackened or found to be loose,
diagnostic system
U0001- High Speed CAN bus off Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete
88 CAN a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Communication diagrams and check the CAN network
Bus - Bus off
U0101- Lost CAN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
00 Communication communication and ground connections to the transmission control module.
with TCM - No error Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete
sub type a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
transmission control module and the headlamp leveling control
module
00 Communication communication and ground connections to the transfer case control module.
with Transfer error Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete
Case Control a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Module - No diagrams and check the CAN network between the transfer
sub type case control module and the headlamp leveling control module
information
00 Communication communication and ground connections to the anti-lock brake system control
With Anti-Lock error module. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Brake System complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical
(ABS) Control circuit diagrams and check the CAN network between the anti-
Module - No lock brake system control module and the headlamp leveling
sub type control module
information
00 Communication communication and ground connections to the steering angle sensor module.
With Steering error Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete
Angle Sensor a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Module - No diagrams and check the CAN network between the steering
sub type angle sensor module and the headlamp leveling control module
information
00 Communication communication and ground connections to the central junction box. Using the
With Body error manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
Control Module network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
- No sub type and check the CAN network between the central junction box
information and the headlamp leveling control module
00 Communication communication and ground connections to the central junction box. Using the
With Body error manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
Control Module network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
"B" - No sub and check the CAN network between the central junction box
type and the headlamp leveling control module
information
U0300- Internal Car Check/amend car configuration file using the manufacturer
00 Control Module configuration approved diagnostic system
Software file information
Incompatibility incompatible
- No sub type
information
U0402- Invalid Data No sub type Check the transmission control module for related DTCs and
Transmission
Control Module
- No sub type
information
U0403- Invalid Data No sub type Check the transfer case control module for related DTCs and
Transfer Case
Control Module
- No sub type
information
U0415- Invalid Data Invalid data Check the anti-lock brake system control module for related
00 Received From received from DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Anti-Lock anti-lock brake
Brake System system control
Control Module module
- No sub type
information
U0428- Invalid Data No sub type Check the steering angle sensor module for related DTCs and
Steering Angle
Sensor Module
- No sub type
information
U2100- Initial Car Check/amend car configuration file using manufacturer
Not Complete - file information
No sub type not received
information completely
U2101- Control Module Car Check/amend car configuration file using manufacturer
Incompatible - file information
No sub type incompatible
information to ECU
U3002- Vehicle Stored VIN Check/amend car configuration file using manufacturer
81 Identification does not approved diagnostic system
Number - match most
Invalid serial recent VIN
data received
U3003- Battery Voltage Circuit voltage Check vehicle battery and charging system. Refer to the
16 - Circuit below relevant section in the workshop manual. Refer to the
voltage below threshold electrical circuit diagrams and check the power and ground
threshold supply circuits to the headlamp leveling control module
U3003- Battery Voltage Circuit voltage Check vehicle battery and charging system. Refer to the
17 - Circuit above relevant section in the workshop manual. Refer to the
voltage above threshold electrical circuit diagrams and check the power and ground
threshold supply circuits to the headlamp leveling control module
U3003- Battery Voltage Mis-match in Check vehicle battery and charging system. Refer to the
62 - Signal battery relevant section in the workshop manual. Refer to the
compare failure voltage, electrical circuit diagrams and check the power and ground
between the supply circuits to the central junction box and the headlamp
central leveling control module
junction box
and the
headlamp
leveling
control
module, of 2
volts or more
Instrument Cluster (IC)
Instrument Cluster (IC)
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Instrument Cluster (IC), for
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1009- Ignition Authorisation Ignition Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
51 - Not programmed authorisation re-configure the instrument cluster with the latest
not programmed level software
B1009- Ignition Authorisation Ignition Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
87 - Missing message authorisation re-configure the instrument cluster with the latest
message level software
missing
B100D- Column Lock Request to lock Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
64 Authorisation - Signal or unlock check the engine control module for related DTCs and
plausibility failure electric steering refer to the relevant DTC index
column lock has
failed due to
engine speed or
vehicle speed
B1026- Steering Column Lock Electric steering Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
12 - Circuit short to column lock electric steering column lock ground circuit for short
battery ground circuit circuit to power
short circuit to
power
B1026- Steering Column Lock Electric steering Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
63 - Circuit/component column lock electric steering column lock ground circuit for short
protection time-out ground circuit circuit to power
short circuit to
power
B1A14- RCM Warning Lamp - Supplementary Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
96 Component internal restraint system instrument cluster power and ground circuits for open
failure light emitting circuit, high resistance. Clear the DTC and retest. If
diode circuit the fault persists, install a new instrument cluster
failure
(instrument
cluster internal
failure)
B1A68- Ambient Temperature Instrument Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
86 Sensor - Signal cluster internal instrument cluster power and ground circuits for open
invalid temperature circuit, high resistance. Clear the DTC and retest. If
sensor signal is the fault persists, install a new instrument cluster
out of
range/invalid
B1A85- Ambient Light Sensor Instrument Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
96 - Component internal cluster internal instrument cluster power and ground circuits for open
failure light sensor circuit, high resistance. Clear the DTC and retest. If
failure the fault persists, install a new instrument cluster
P0610- Control Module Control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
55 Vehicle Options Error incorrectly re-configure the instrument cluster with the latest
- Not configured configured level software
U0001- High Speed CAN Medium speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
88 Communication Bus - CAN bus circuit perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Bus off short circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and test the high speed CAN
ground, short bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
circuit to power, power, open circuit, high resistance
open circuit,
high resistance
U0010- Medium Speed CAN Medium speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Bus off short circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and test the medium speed
ground, short CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
circuit to power, to power, open circuit, high resistance
open circuit,
high resistance
U0100- Lost Communication Engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 With ECM/PCM "A" - module power engine control module power and ground circuits for
No sub type or ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
information open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
high resistance perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
- Engine electrical circuit diagrams and test the high speed CAN
speed bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
signal power, open circuit, high resistance
missing
for more
than 1
second
High speed CAN
bus circuit short
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0101- Lost Communication Transmission Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 with TCM - No sub control module transmission control module power and ground circuits
type information power or ground for open circuit, high resistance
circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
resistance electrical circuit diagrams and test the high speed CAN
High speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
bus circuit short power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0102- Lost Communication Transfer case Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 with Transfer Case control module transfer case control module power and ground circuits
sub type information circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0104- Lost Communication Speed control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 With Cruise Control module power speed control module power and ground circuits for
Module - No sub type or ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
High speed CAN electrical circuit diagrams and test the high speed CAN
bus circuit short bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0121- Lost Communication Anti-lock brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 With Anti-Lock Brake system control anti-lock brake system control module power and
System (ABS) module power ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Control Module - No or ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
sub type information open circuit, perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
high resistance electrical circuit diagrams and test the high speed CAN
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0126- Lost Communication Steering angle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 With Steering Angle sensor module steering angle sensor module power and ground
Sensor Module - No power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0128- Lost Communication Electric park Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 With Park Brake brake control electric park brake control module power and ground
Control Module - No module power circuits for open circuit, high resistance
sub type information or ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
open circuit, perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0132- Lost Communication Air suspension Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the air
00 With Suspension control module suspension control module power and ground circuits
Control Module "A" - power or ground for open circuit, high resistance
No sub type circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0133- Lost Communication Dynamic Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 With Active Roll response control dynamic response control module power and ground
Control Module - No module power circuits for open circuit, high resistance
sub type information or ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0136- Lost Communication Rear differential Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 With Differential control module rear differential control module power and ground
Control Module - power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Rear - No sub type circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0138- Lost Communication Terrain response Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 with All Terrain switchpack terrain response switchpack power and ground circuits
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0139- Lost Communication Adaptive Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
08 With Suspension damping system adaptive damping system control module power and
Control Module "B" - control module ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Bus signal / message power or ground Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
failures circuit open perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
circuit, high electrical circuit diagrams and test the high speed CAN
resistance bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
High speed CAN power, open circuit, high resistance
bus circuit short
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0140- Lost Communication Central junction Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
Module - No sub type ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
Medium speed electrical circuit diagrams and test the medium speed
CAN bus circuit CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
short circuit to to power, open circuit, high resistance
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0141- Lost Communication Central junction Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
Module "A" - No sub ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
type information open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
High speed CAN electrical circuit diagrams and test the high speed CAN
bus circuit short bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0151- Lost Communication Restraints Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 With Restraints control module restraints control module power and ground circuits for
Control Module - No power or ground open circuit, high resistance
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0159- Lost Communication Park distance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 With Parking Assist control module park distance control module power and ground
Control Module "A" - power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
No sub type circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
resistance electrical circuit diagrams and test the medium speed
Medium speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
CAN bus circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0164- Lost Communication Automatic Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 With HVAC Control temperature automatic temperature control module power and
Module - No sub type control module ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
information power or ground Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit open perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
circuit, high electrical circuit diagrams and test the medium speed
resistance CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
Medium speed to power, open circuit, high resistance
CAN bus circuit
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0184- Lost Communication Integrated audio Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 With Radio - No sub module / audio integrated audio module / audio head unit power and
type information head unit power ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
or ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
high resistance electrical circuit diagrams and test the medium speed
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0208- Lost Communication Driver seat Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 With "Seat Control control module driver seat control module power and ground circuits
Module A" - No sub power or ground for open circuit, high resistance
type information circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0214- Lost Communication Keyless vehicle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 With Remote module power keyless vehicle module power and ground circuits for
Function Actuation - or ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
No sub type open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
information high resistance perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0241- Lost Communication Headlamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 With Headlamp leveling control headlamp leveling control module power and ground
Control Module "A" - module power circuits for open circuit, high resistance
No sub type or ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
information open circuit, perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0242- Lost Communication Rear view Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 With Headlamp mirror power or rear view mirror power and ground circuits for open
Control Module "B" - ground circuit circuit, high resistance
No sub type open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U025D- Lost Communication Integrated Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 With Front Controls control panel integrated control panel power and ground circuits for
Interface Module "B" power or ground open circuit, high resistance
- No sub type circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0264- Lost Communication Proximity Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 With Camera Module- camera control proximity camera control module power and ground
Rear - No sub type module power circuits for open circuit, high resistance
information or ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance
U0300- Internal Control Instrument Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Module Software cluster check for other modules reporting CAN bus off or lost
Incompatibility - No expulsion from communication faults. If other modules report
sub type information network problems, check the software version in the central
management junction box. If no other modules report problems, re-
configure the instrument cluster with the latest level
software
U0402- Invalid Data Received Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
68 from TCM - Event control module check the transmission control module for related
information network DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
communications
are missing
partially or
intermittently
U2013- Switch Pack - General Steering wheel Test the operation of the steering wheel left
02 signal failure left switchpack switchpack
LIN bus
communications
indicate
switchpack
failure
U2013- Switch Pack - Bus Steering wheel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the LIN
08 signal/message left switchpack bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
failures LIN bus power, open circuit, high resistance
communications
have failed
U3000- Control Module - Instrument Check the harness connector to the instrument cluster
46 Calibration/parameter cluster storage for security and integrity. Clear the DTC and retest. If
memory failure of odometer the problem persists, install a new instrument cluster
reading is
corrupted
U3000- Control Module - Instrument Check the harness connector to the instrument cluster
49 Internal electronic cluster internal for security and integrity. Clear the DTC and retest. If
failure failure the problem persists, install a new instrument cluster
U3000- Control Module - Not Tire size Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
55 configured compensation is check and up-date the car configuration file as
incorrectly necessary
configured
U3000- Control Module - Car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
87 Missing message configuration file check and up-date the car configuration file as
missing necessary
message
U3002- Vehicle Identification Invalid vehicle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
81 Number - Invalid identification perform routine - Learn VIN (0404)
serial data received number
U3003- Control Module - Instrument Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
16 Circuit voltage below cluster power or check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage
threshold ground circuit (0xDD02). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
open circuit, test the instrument cluster power and ground circuits
high resistance for open circuit, high resistance
Battery/charging Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
system fault and test the battery and charging system
U3003- Control Module - Battery/charging Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
17 Circuit voltage above system fault check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage
threshold (0xDD02). Refer to the relevant section of the
system
U3003- Control Module - Mis-match Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
62 Signal compare between the check datalogger signal - Main ECU Voltage Supply
failure instrument (0xDD02) - and compare it to battery voltage
cluster voltage
and the voltage
value broadcast
on the CAN bus
Integrated Audio Module (IAM) - High Line
Integrated Audio Module (IAM)
CAUTIONS:
vehicle.
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the digital
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Integrated Audio Module (IAM).
For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop
manual.

B119F- GPS Antenna - Circuit Confirm that the navigation antenna is connected to the
11 short to ground NOTE: Circuit integrated audio module
reference Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
GPS_SIGNAL navigation antenna circuit for short circuit to ground
Navigation
antenna not
connected to
the integrated
audio module
Navigation
antenna circuit
short circuit to
ground
B119F- GPS Antenna - Circuit

13 open NOTE: Circuit NOTE: This DTC may be set even though no fault
reference condition is present and should be ignored unless the customer
GPS_SIGNAL has reported a navigation system concern. Clear the DTC and
retest. Verify the customer concern prior to diagnosis
Navigation
antenna not Confirm that the navigation antenna is connected to the
connected to integrated audio module
the integrated Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
audio module navigation antenna circuit for open circuit, high
Navigation resistance
antenna circuit
open circuit,
high resistance
B11A3- Gyroscope - Internal Integrated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 electronic failures audio module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
internal new integrated audio module
gyroscope
failure
B121C- Hard Drive - Circuit Integrated

13 open audio module NOTE: This DTC may be set even though no fault
internal hard condition is present and should be ignored unless the customer
drive has reported a navigation system concern. Clear the DTC and
communication retest. Verify the customer concern prior to diagnosis
failure
clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, re-
configure the integrated audio module with the latest
level software. Insert a CD and copy one track to the
hard drive to confirm correct operation. Return vehicle
to standard settings and delete the file. If the fault
persists, install a new integrated audio module
B121C- Hard Drive - Internal Integrated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 electronic failures audio module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, re-
internal hard configure the integrated audio module with the latest
drive failure level software. Insert a CD and copy one track to the
hard drive to confirm correct operation. Return vehicle
to standard settings and delete the file. If the fault
B1252- USB Port - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
09 Component failures NOTE: Circuit USB circuits for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
reference USB_5B / power, open circuit, high resistance. Using the
USB_DATA_POS / manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
USB_DATA_NEG / DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
USB_DATA_GND / integrated audio module
USB_SCR
No USB
function
B1252- USB Port - Circuit Excessive Disconnect all universal serial bus devices. Connect a
19 current above current drawn test universal serial bus memory stick. Using the
threshold by a universal manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform
serial bus routine - USB Connector Test (0x6018). If the fault
device persists, install a new integrated audio module
B1296- Navigation Map Data Navigation

4A - Incorrect map does not NOTE: This DTC may be set even though no fault
component installed match the condition is present and should be ignored unless the customer
market of the has reported a navigation system concern. Clear the DTC and
vehicle retest. Verify the customer concern prior to diagnosis
Update the map data as necessary. Using the

manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-configure
the integrated audio module with the latest level
software. Check and up-date the car configuration file
as necessary. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
B1A56- Antenna - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 short to ground NOTE: Circuit AM/FM antenna amplifier circuit for short circuit to
reference AM_FM ground. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
AM/FM install a new integrated audio module
antenna
amplifier
circuit short
circuit to
ground
B1A56- Antenna - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
13 open NOTE: Circuit AM/FM antenna amplifier circuit for open circuit, high
reference AM_FM resistance. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
AM/FM install a new integrated audio module
antenna
amplifier
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B1D50- Digital Disk Player - Integrated

07 Mechanical failures audio module NOTE: This DTC may be set even though no fault
internal failure condition is present and should be ignored unless the customer
has reported a navigation system concern. Clear the DTC and
Perform basic visual inspection for foreign matter inside

disk player. Remove foreign matter if possible. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest with multiple disks. If the fault persists,
install a new integrated audio module
B1D55- Antenna#2 - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 short to ground NOTE: Circuit FM/TMC antenna amplifier circuit for short circuit to
reference FM2 ground. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
FM/TMC install a new integrated audio module
antenna
amplifier
circuit short
circuit to
ground
B1D55- Antenna#2 - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
13 open NOTE: Circuit FM/TMC antenna amplifier circuit for open circuit, high
reference FM2 resistance. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
FM/TMC install a new integrated audio module
antenna
amplifier
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B1D57- Antenna#4 Circuit - VICS antenna

11 Circuit short to circuit short NOTE: Vehicle Information and Communication System
ground circuit to (VICS) is a type of Traffic Message Channel system used in the
ground Japan market only

VICS antenna circuit for short circuit to ground. Using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
integrated audio module
B1D57- Antenna#4 Circuit - VICS antenna

13 Circuit open circuit open NOTE: Vehicle Information and Communication System
circuit, high (VICS) is a type of Traffic Message Channel system used in the
resistance Japan market only

VICS antenna circuit for open circuit, high resistance.
clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
new integrated audio module
B1D78- Auxiliary Input - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit auxiliary input 1 circuit for short circuit to ground. Using
ground reference AUX1 L+ / the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
AUX1 R+ / AUX1 LR- DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Auxiliary input
1 circuit short
circuit to
ground
B1D78- Auxiliary Input - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit auxiliary input 1 circuit for open circuit, high resistance.
reference AUX1 L+ / Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
AUX1 R+ / AUX1 LR- clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
Auxiliary input
1 circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B1D79- Microphone Input - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit microphone 1 circuit for short circuit to ground. Using
ground reference MIC_1_POS the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
/ MIC_1_NEG DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Microphone 1
circuit short
circuit to
ground
B1D79- Microphone Input - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit microphone 1 circuit for open circuit, high resistance.
reference MIC_1_POS Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
/ MIC_1_NEG clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
Microphone 1
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
P150E- Electronic Control Integrated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Module Cooling Fan audio module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
Circuit - No sub type internal failure new integrated audio module
information
U2005- Vehicle Speed - Anti-lock brake NOTES:
62 Signal compare system control
failure module power
or ground This DTC may be set when the vehicle is being
circuit open transported
circuit, high
resistance
High speed This DTC may be set even though no fault condition is
CAN bus present and should be ignored unless the customer has
circuit short reported a navigation system concern. Clear the DTC and
circuit to retest. Verify the customer concern prior to diagnosis
ground, short
circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
power, open anti-lock brake system control module power and
circuit, high ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
MOST network perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
failure - Speed electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed CAN
signal bus circuits for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
broadcast is power, open circuit, high resistance
not received Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
by the and test the MOST network
integrated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
audio module check the anti-lock brake system control module for
Anti-lock brake related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index. Clear
system fault the DTCs and retest
U200D- Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 Output Power A - NOTE: Circuit AM/FM antenna amplifier circuit for short circuit to
Circuit short to reference ground. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ground ANTENNA_AMP system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
AM/FM
antenna
amplifier
circuit short
circuit to
ground
U200D- Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
13 Output Power A - NOTE: Circuit AM/FM antenna amplifier circuit for open circuit, high
Circuit open reference resistance. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ANTENNA_AMP system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
AM/FM
antenna
amplifier
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
U2100- Initial Configuration Medium speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Not Complete - No CAN bus perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
sub type information circuit short electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium speed
circuit to CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
ground, short to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
power, open check the touch screen for related DTCs and refer to the
circuit, high relevant DTC index
resistance Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
Touch screen and test the MOST network
MOST network check and up-date the car configuration file as
failure necessary
Integrated
audio module
is not
configured
correctly
U2101- Control Module Medium speed NOTES:

00 Configuration CAN bus
Incompatible - No circuit short
sub type information circuit to Only applicable to the Japanese market
ground, short
circuit to
power, open This DTC may be set even though no fault condition is
circuit, high present and should be ignored unless the customer has
resistance reported a navigation system concern. Clear the DTC and
Touch screen retest. Verify the customer concern prior to diagnosis
internal failure
MOST network Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
failure perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Integrated electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium speed
audio module CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
is not to power, open circuit, high resistance
configured Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
correctly check the touch screen for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
and test the MOST network
check and up-date the car configuration file as
necessary
U2200- Control Module Integrated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
41 Configuration audio module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, re-
Memory Corrupt - internal failure configure the integrated audio module with the latest
General checksum level software. If the fault persists, install a new
failure integrated audio module
U2200- Control Module Integrated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
44 Configuration audio module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, re-
Memory Corrupt - internal failure configure the integrated audio module with the latest
Data memory failure level software. If the fault persists, install a new
U3000- Control Module - Integrated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
41 General checksum audio module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, re-
failure internal failure configure the integrated audio module with the latest
level software. If the fault persists, install a new
45 Program memory audio module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, re-
U3000- Control Module - Integrated

46 Calibration/parameter audio module NOTE: This DTC may be set even though no fault
memory failure internal failure condition is present and should be ignored unless the customer
has reported a navigation system concern. Clear the DTC and

configure the integrated audio module with the latest
49 Internal electronic audio module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, re-
U3000- Control Module - Incorrect Check that the installed hardware is correct
4A Incorrect component hardware or Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
installed software configure the integrated audio module with the latest
detected level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Integrated persists, install a new integrated audio module
audio module
internal failure
U3000- Control Module - Ventilation

98 Component or ducts NOTE: Allow vehicle to cool before performing any
system over obstructed diagnostic steps. Move vehicle into shade and operate climate
temperature Integrated control on a cool setting
audio module
internal failure Check the ventilation ducts for obstructions
U3003- Battery Voltage - Mismatch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
62 Signal compare between the integrated audio module power and ground circuits for
failure voltage at the open circuit, high resistance
integrated
audio module
and the
voltage value
broadcast on
the CAN bus
Integrated Control Panel (ICP)
Integrated Control Panel (ICP)
CAUTIONS:
vehicle.
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Integrated Control Panel (ICP).
manual.

88 Communication Bus CAN bus circuit perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
- Bus off short circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium speed
open circuit, high
resistance
00 With Body Control box power or central junction box power and ground circuits for open
Module - No sub ground circuit circuit, high resistance
type information open circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Medium speed electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium speed
ground, short Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit to power, check the central junction box for related DTCs and
open circuit, high refer to the relevant DTC index
resistance
Central junction
box system fault
U0155- Lost Communication Instrument Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 With Instrument cluster power or instrument cluster power and ground circuits for open
Panel Cluster (IPC) ground circuit circuit, high resistance
Control Module - No open circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
sub type information resistance perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Medium speed electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium speed
circuit to power, check the instrument cluster for related DTCs and refer
open circuit, high to the relevant DTC index
resistance
Instrument
cluster system
fault
U0164- Lost Communication Automatic Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 With HVAC Control temperature automatic temperature control module power and
Module - No sub control module ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
type information power or ground Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit open perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
circuit, high electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium speed
resistance CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
Medium speed to power, open circuit, high resistance
CAN bus circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
short circuit to check the automatic temperature control module for
ground, short related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
Automatic
temperature
control system
fault
U0166- Lost Communication Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 With Auxiliary file mismatch check and up-date the car configuration file as
Heater Control with vehicle necessary
Module - No sub specification Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
type information Fuel fired booster fuel fired booster heater power and ground circuits for
heater power or open circuit, high resistance
ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
open circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
resistance electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium speed
ground, short check the fuel fired booster heater for related DTCs
circuit to power, and refer to the relevant DTC index
open circuit, high
resistance
Fuel fired booster
heater system
fault
U0300- Internal Control Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Module Software file mismatch check and up-date the car configuration file as
Incompatibility - No with vehicle necessary
sub type information specification Install a new integrated control panel as necessary
Incorrect
integrated
control panel
installed
68 Received From data from the check the automatic temperature control module for
HVAC Control automatic related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Module - Event temperature
U2002- Switch - Signal Integrated Test the operation of the integrated control panel
24 stuck high control panel switches
switch stuck Install a new integrated control panel as necessary
active
Integrated
control panel
internal failure
U2100- Initial Configuration Integrated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Not Complete - No control panel is re-configure the integrated control panel with the latest
sub type information not configured level software
correctly
U2101- Control Module Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Configuration file mismatch check and up-date the car configuration file as
Incompatible - No with vehicle necessary
sub type information specification Install a new integrated control panel as necessary
Incorrect
integrated
control panel
installed
41 General checksum control panel clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
failure internal failure new integrated control panel
U3003- Battery Voltage - Mismatch Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
62 Signal compare between the check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage
failure voltage at the (0xDD02) - and compare it to battery voltage. Refer to
integrated the electrical circuit diagrams and check the integrated
control panel and control panel power and ground circuits for open
the voltage value circuit, high resistance
broadcast on the
CAN bus
Integrated Control Panel B (ICPB)
Integrated Control Panel B (ICPB)
CAUTIONS:
vehicle.
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Integrated Control Panel B
(ICPB). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual.

B1A85- Ambient Light Ambient light
11 Sensor - Circuit sensor failure NOTE: The ambient light sensor and circuits are integral to the
short to ground integrated control panel B
Clear the DTC and re-test. Using the manufacturer approved

diagnostic system, check datalogger signal - Ambient Sensor
Voltage (0x721C). Check that the voltage decreases when the
sensor is covered and increases when a light source is directed
into the sensor. If the sensor voltage does not change with
varying light intensity install a new integrated control panel B
as necessary
B1A85- Ambient Light Ambient light

12 Sensor - Circuit sensor failure NOTE: The ambient light sensor and circuits are integral to the
short to integrated control panel B
battery
Clear the DTC and re-test. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, check datalogger signal - Ambient Sensor
Voltage (0x721C). Check that the voltage decreases when the
sensor is covered and increases when a light source is directed
into the sensor. If the sensor voltage does not change with
varying light intensity install a new integrated control panel B
as necessary
U0010- Medium Speed Medium speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a
88 CAN CAN bus CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Communication circuit short diagrams and check the medium speed CAN bus circuit for
Bus - Bus off circuit to short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
ground, short high resistance
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
U0140- Lost Central Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the central
00 communication junction box junction box power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
with body power or resistance
control module ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a
- No sub type open circuit, CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
information high diagrams and check the medium speed CAN bus circuit for
resistance short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
Medium speed high resistance
CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
circuit short central junction box for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
circuit to DTC index
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Central
junction box
system fault
U0256- Lost Integrated

00 Communication control panel NOTE: This DTC relates to the compact disc eject switch
With Front power or
Controls ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the integrated
Interface open circuit, control panel power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
Module "A" - high resistance
No sub type resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a
information Medium speed CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
CAN bus diagrams and check the medium speed CAN bus circuit for
circuit short short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
circuit to high resistance
ground, short Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
circuit to integrated control panel for related DTCs and refer to the
power, open relevant DTC index
circuit, high
resistance
Integrated
control panel
system fault
U0300- Internal Incorrect Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
00 Control Module integrated DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new integrated
Software control panel control panel B
Incompatibility B installed
- No sub type
information
U2002- Switch - Signal Integrated Test operation of all integrated control panel B switches. Clear
24 stuck high control panel the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
B switch stuck integrated control panel B
active
U3000- Control Module Integrated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
41 - General control panel DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new integrated
checksum B internal control panel B
failure failure
U3003- Battery Voltage Mismatch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the integrated
62 - Signal between the control panel B power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
compare failure voltage at the resistance
integrated
control panel
B and the
voltage value
broadcast on
the CAN bus
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Keyless
Vehicle Module (KVM)
Keyless Vehicle Module (KVM)
CAUTIONS:
vehicle.
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Keyless Vehicle Module (KVM).
manual.
For additional information, refer to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry
Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).

B102B- Passive Key - No Smart key is not
00 sub type configured NOTE: This DTC is set if an invalid smart key is detected
information correctly when the stop/start switch is operated

configure the smart key with the latest level software
B10A9- Remote Keyless Secret key has Clear DTC and retest. If the fault persists, configure the
00 Entry Less Than 2 been key fobs using the manufacturers approved diagnostic
Keys Programmed programmed to system
- No sub type the vehicle but
information less than 2 key
fobs have been
programmed
B10C1- Left Front Unlock Front left exterior Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
15 Pull Switch - Short door handle front left exterior door handle power and ground circuits
circuit to battery power or ground for open circuit, high resistance
or open circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
circuit, high front left exterior door handle unlock switch circuit for
resistance short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Front left exterior Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
door handle clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
unlock switch new front left exterior door handle
circuit short
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
Front left exterior
door handle
internal failure
B10C1- Left Front Unlock Front left exterior Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Pull Switch - door handle front left exterior door handle unlock switch circuit for
Signal stuck low unlock switch short circuit to ground
circuit short Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit to ground clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
Front left exterior new front left exterior door handle
door handle
internal failure
B10C2- Left Rear Unlock Rear left exterior Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
15 Pull Switch - Short door handle rear left exterior door handle power and ground circuits
circuit to battery power or ground for open circuit, high resistance
or open circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
circuit, high rear left exterior door handle unlock switch circuit for
Rear left exterior Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
door handle clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
unlock switch new rear left exterior door handle
circuit short
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
Rear left exterior
door handle
internal failure
B10C2- Left Rear Unlock Rear left exterior Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Pull Switch - door handle rear left exterior door handle unlock switch circuit for
Signal stuck low unlock switch short circuit to ground
circuit short Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
circuit to ground clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
Rear left exterior new rear left exterior door handle
door handle
internal failure
B10C3- Right Front Unlock Front right Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
15 Pull Switch - Short exterior door front right exterior door handle power and ground
circuit to battery handle power or circuits for open circuit, high resistance
or open ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
open circuit, high front right exterior door handle unlock switch circuit for
Front right Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
exterior door clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
handle unlock new front right exterior door handle
switch circuit
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Front right
exterior door
handle internal
failure
B10C3- Right Front Unlock Front right Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Pull Switch - exterior door front right exterior door handle unlock switch circuit for
Signal stuck low handle unlock short circuit to ground
switch circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
ground new front right exterior door handle
Front right
exterior door
handle internal
failure
B10C4- Right Rear Unlock Rear right Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
15 Pull Switch - Short exterior door rear right exterior door handle power and ground circuits
circuit to battery handle power or for open circuit, high resistance
or open ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
open circuit, high rear right exterior door handle unlock switch circuit for
Rear right Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
exterior door clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
handle unlock new rear right exterior door handle
switch circuit
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Rear right
exterior door
handle internal
failure
B10C4- Right Rear Unlock Rear right Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Pull Switch - exterior door rear right exterior door handle unlock switch circuit for
Signal stuck low handle unlock short circuit to ground
switch circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
ground new rear right exterior door handle
Rear right
exterior door
handle internal
failure
B10C5- Trunk Unlock Pull Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Switch - Signal NOTE: Circuit upper tailgate exterior switch circuit for short circuit to
stuck low reference EXT BOOT ground
RELEASE SW Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Upper tailgate new upper tailgate exterior switch
exterior switch
circuit short
circuit to ground
Upper tailgate
exterior switch
internal failure
B10C6- Exterior Trunk Tailgate exterior

00 Antenna - No sub low frequency NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit to
type information antenna circuit power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
short circuit to first
ground, short
circuit to power Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On Demand
Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the tailgate exterior
low frequency antenna circuit for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power

11 Antenna - Circuit low frequency NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit to
short to ground antenna circuit power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
short circuit to first
ground, short
circuit between Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
positive and clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On Demand
negative Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer to the
low frequency antenna circuit for short circuit to ground,
short circuit between positive and negative
B10C6- Exterior Trunk Tailgate exterior Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
12 Antenna - Circuit low frequency clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On Demand
short to battery antenna circuit Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer to the
short circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check the tailgate exterior
power low frequency antenna circuit for short circuit to power

13 Antenna - Circuit low frequency NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit to
open antenna circuit power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
open circuit, high first
resistance
low frequency antenna circuit for open circuit, high
resistance
B10C7- Interior Trunk Passenger
00 Antenna - No sub compartment left NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit to
type information low frequency power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
antenna circuit first
short circuit to
circuit to power clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On Demand
electrical circuit diagrams and check the passenger
compartment left low frequency antenna circuit for short
circuit to ground, short circuit to power

11 Antenna - Circuit compartment left NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit to
short to ground low frequency power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
short circuit to
circuit between clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On Demand
positive and Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer to the
negative electrical circuit diagrams and check the passenger
circuit to ground, short circuit between positive and
negative
B10C7- Interior Trunk Passenger Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
12 Antenna - Circuit compartment left clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On Demand
short to battery low frequency Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer to the
antenna circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check the passenger
short circuit to compartment left low frequency antenna circuit for short
power circuit to power

13 Antenna - Circuit compartment left NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit to
open low frequency power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
open circuit, high
compartment left low frequency antenna circuit for open
B10C8- Interior Center Passenger

00 Antenna - No sub compartment NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit to
type information right low power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
frequency first
antenna circuit
ground, short clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On Demand
circuit to power Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer to the
compartment right low frequency antenna circuit for
short circuit to ground, short circuit to power

11 Antenna - Circuit compartment NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit to
short to ground right low power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
frequency first
antenna circuit
circuit between Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer to the
positive and electrical circuit diagrams and check the passenger
negative compartment right low frequency antenna circuit for
short circuit to ground, short circuit between positive
and negative
B10C8- Interior Center Passenger Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
12 Antenna - Circuit compartment clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On Demand
short to battery right low Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer to the
frequency electrical circuit diagrams and check the passenger
antenna circuit compartment right low frequency antenna circuit for
short circuit to short circuit to power
power

open right low power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
frequency first
antenna circuit
open circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
resistance clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On Demand
B10C9- Interior Front Passenger

00 Antenna - No sub compartment NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit to
type information front low power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
frequency first
antenna circuit
compartment front low frequency antenna circuit for

short to ground front low power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
frequency first
antenna circuit
positive and electrical circuit diagrams and check the passenger
negative compartment front low frequency antenna circuit for
and negative
B10C9- Interior Front Passenger Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
12 Antenna - Circuit compartment clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On Demand
short to battery front low Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer to the
frequency electrical circuit diagrams and check the passenger
antenna circuit compartment front low frequency antenna circuit for
power

open front low power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
frequency first
antenna circuit
compartment front low frequency antenna circuit for
B10CA- Left rear door Rear left door

00 handle Antenna - exterior handle NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit to
No sub type low frequency power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
information antenna circuit first
short circuit to
electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear left door
exterior handle low frequency antenna circuit for short

Circuit short to low frequency power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
ground antenna circuit first
short circuit to
negative electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear left door
negative
B10CA- Left rear door Rear left door Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
12 handle Antenna - exterior handle clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On Demand
Circuit short to low frequency Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer to the
battery antenna circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear left door
short circuit to exterior handle low frequency antenna circuit for short

Circuit open low frequency power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
open circuit, high
electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear left door
exterior handle low frequency antenna circuit for open
B10CB- Right rear door Rear right door

short circuit to
electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear right door

short circuit to
negative electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear right door
negative
B10CB- Right rear door Rear right door Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
12 handle Antenna - exterior handle clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On Demand
battery antenna circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear right door

open circuit, high
electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear right door
B10CC- Left Front Latch Front left door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Clutch Switch - latch clutch front left door latch clutch switch circuit for short circuit
Signal stuck low switch circuit to ground
short circuit to
ground
B10CD- Left Rear Latch Rear left door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Clutch Switch - latch clutch rear left door latch clutch switch circuit for short circuit
short circuit to
ground
B10CE- Right Front Latch Front right door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Clutch Switch - latch clutch front right door latch clutch switch circuit for short circuit
short circuit to
ground
B10CF- Right Rear Latch Rear right door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Clutch Switch - latch clutch rear right door latch clutch switch circuit for short circuit
short circuit to
ground
B10D1- Left Front Lock Front left door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Button - Signal exterior handle front left door exterior handle lock switch circuit for
stuck low lock switch circuit short circuit to ground
short circuit to
ground
B10D2- Left Rear Lock Rear left door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Button - Signal exterior handle rear left door exterior handle lock switch circuit for short
stuck low lock switch circuit circuit to ground
short circuit to
ground
B10D3- Right Front Lock Front right door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Button - Signal exterior handle front right door exterior handle lock switch circuit for
short circuit to
ground
B10D4- Right Rear Lock Rear right door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
23 Button - Signal exterior handle rear right door exterior handle lock switch circuit for
short circuit to
ground
B12D5- Door Handle Door handle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
16 Proximity Sensor - proximity sensor door handle proximity sensor circuit for short circuit to
Circuit voltage circuit short ground
below threshold circuit to ground Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Keyless vehicle check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
module power or (0xD111). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground circuit check the keyless vehicle module power and ground
open circuit, high circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Keyless vehicle clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
module internal new keyless vehicle module
failure
B12D6- Fast Door Door E latch

11 Unlock/Open circuit(s) short NOTE: Faults on individual terminals/circuits cannot be
Actuator - Circuit circuit to ground detected
short to ground
door E latch circuits for short circuit to ground
B12D6- Fast Door Door E latch

12 Unlock/Open circuit(s) short NOTE: Faults on individual terminals/circuits cannot be
Actuator - Circuit circuit to power detected
short to battery
door E latch circuits for short circuit to power
B12EA- Radio Frequency RF receiver Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
96 (RF) Receiver - internal failure clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
Component new RF receiver
internal failure
B1334- Tailgate Glass Tailgate glass
23 Release Switch - switch circuit NOTE: This circuit/switch is available as an option
Signal stuck low short circuit to
ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Tailgate glass tailgate glass switch circuit for short circuit to ground
switch stuck Test the operation of the tailgate glass switch
active
B1335- Front Luggage

00 Triangulation / compartment NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit to
Loadspace right low power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
Antenna - No sub frequency first
type information antenna circuit
electrical circuit diagrams and check the luggage

Antenna - Circuit frequency first
short to ground antenna circuit
positive and electrical circuit diagrams and check the luggage
negative compartment right low frequency antenna circuit for
and negative
B1335- Front Luggage Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,

12 Triangulation / compartment clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On Demand
Loadspace right low Self Test (0x0202). If the fault persists, refer to the
Antenna - Circuit frequency electrical circuit diagrams and check the luggage
short to battery antenna circuit compartment right low frequency antenna circuit for
power

Antenna - Circuit frequency first
open antenna circuit
B1336- Left Front Door Front left door

00 External Antenna - exterior handle NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit to
short circuit to
electrical circuit diagrams and check the front left door

short circuit to
negative electrical circuit diagrams and check the front left door
negative
B1336- Left Front Door Front left door Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
12 External Antenna - exterior handle clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On Demand
battery antenna circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check the front left door

open circuit, high
electrical circuit diagrams and check the front left door
B1337- Right Front Door Front right door

short circuit to
electrical circuit diagrams and check the front right door

short circuit to
negative electrical circuit diagrams and check the front right door
negative
B1337- Right Front Door Front right door Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
12 External Antenna - exterior handle clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On Demand
battery antenna circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check the front right door

open circuit, high
electrical circuit diagrams and check the front right door
B133D- Loadspace/Interior Luggage

00 Boot Antenna - No compartment left NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit to
sub type low frequency power DTC is also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s)
short circuit to

11 Boot Antenna - compartment left NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit to
short circuit to
negative electrical circuit diagrams and check the luggage
negative
B133D- Loadspace/Interior Luggage Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,

12 Boot Antenna - compartment left clear the DTCs and retest. Perform routine - On Demand
battery antenna circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check the luggage
short circuit to compartment left low frequency antenna circuit for short

13 Boot Antenna - compartment left NOTE: If any other low frequency antenna short circuit to
open circuit, high
compartment left low frequency antenna circuit for open
C1017- Boot/Trunk Tailgate lock

23 Primary Switch - switch circuit NOTE: This circuit/switch is available as an option
Signal stuck low short circuit to
ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
tailgate lock switch circuit for short circuit to ground
U0010- Medium Speed Medium speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
88 CAN CAN bus circuit perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Communication short circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check the medium speed
Bus - Bus off ground, short CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
open circuit, high
resistance
U0300- Internal Control Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Module Software file mismatch check and up-date the car configuration file as
Incompatibility - with vehicle necessary
No sub type specification
information
U201F- External Receiver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the RF
00 - No sub type NOTE: Circuit receiver power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
information reference RX SERIAL resistance
DATA Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the LIN
bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
RF receiver power power, open circuit, high resistance
open circuit, high clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
resistance new RF receiver
LIN bus circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
ground, short new keyless vehicle module
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
RF receiver
internal failure
Keyless vehicle
module internal
failure
U201F- External Receiver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the RF
31 - No signal NOTE: Circuit receiver power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
reference RX SERIAL resistance
DATA Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the LIN
bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
RF receiver power power, open circuit, high resistance
open circuit, high clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
resistance new RF receiver
LIN bus circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
ground, short new keyless vehicle module
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
RF receiver
internal failure
Keyless vehicle
module internal
failure
U201F- External Receiver Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
95 - Incorrect file mismatch check and up-date the car configuration file as
assembly with vehicle necessary
specification - RF Install a new RF receiver as necessary
receiver
frequency
Incorrect RF
receiver installed
U2100- Initial Keyless vehicle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
00 Configuration Not module is not configure the keyless vehicle module with the latest level
Complete - No sub configured software
type information correctly
U2101- Control Module Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Configuration file mismatch check and up-date the car configuration file as
Incompatible - No with vehicle necessary
sub type specification
information
U3000- Control Module - Keyless vehicle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 Internal electronic module internal clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
failure failure new keyless vehicle module
U3000- Control Module - Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
95 Incorrect file mismatch check and up-date the car configuration file as
assembly with vehicle necessary
specification - Install a new keyless vehicle module as necessary
Passive entry /
passive start or
passive start only
Incorrect keyless
vehicle module
installed
U3002- Vehicle Keyless vehicle Install the original or a new keyless vehicle module as
81 Identification module previously necessary
Number - Invalid installed on Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
serial data another vehicle perform routine - Learn VIN (0x0404)
received New keyless
vehicle module
installed and VIN
not yet
programmed
Occupant Classification Sensor Control Module (OCSCM)
Occupant Classification Sensor Control Module (OCSCM)
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER
SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS) COMPONENTS. TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE AND WAIT ONE MINUTE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTIONS:
vehicle.
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Occupant Classification Sensor
Control Module (OCSCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and
For additional information, refer to: Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1193- Crash Event Crash event occurred Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
53 Storage Full system, clear the DTCs and perform routine - On
and Locked - Demand Self Test (0x0202)
Deactivated
B1A54- Occupant Belt Seatbelt tension sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
01 Tension Sensor internal failure system, clear the DTCs and perform routine - On
- General Demand Self Test (0x0202). If the problem
electrical persists, install a new seatbelt tension sensor as
failure necessary
B1A54- Occupant Belt Seatbelt tension sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
02 Tension Sensor signal circuit short circuit to the seatbelt tension sensor signal circuit for short
- General ground, short circuit to circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
signal failure power, open circuit, high circuit, high resistance
resistance
- Circuit short ground circuit to ground
to ground
- Circuit short power circuit to power
to battery
13 Tension Sensor signal circuit open circuit, the seatbelt tension sensor signal circuit for open
- Circuit open high resistance circuit, high resistance
B1A62- Pressure Occupant detection sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
02 Sensor - signal circuit short circuit to the occupant detection sensor circuit for short
General signal ground, short circuit to circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
failure power, open circuit, high circuit, high resistance
resistance
11 Sensor - Circuit signal circuit short circuit to the occupant detection sensor signal circuit for
short to ground ground short circuit to ground
12 Sensor - Circuit signal circuit short circuit to the occupant detection sensor signal circuit for
short to power short circuit to power
battery
13 Sensor - Circuit signal circuit open circuit, the occupant detection sensor signal circuit for
open high resistance open circuit, high resistance
B1A62- Pressure Occupant classification Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

7B Sensor - Low sensor control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
fluid level internal failure persists, install a new occupant classification
sensor control module
U0001- High Speed High speed CAN bus circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
88 CAN short circuit to ground, system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Communication short circuit to power, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Bus - Bus off circuit, high resistance the high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
U0151- Lost Restraints control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Communication power or ground circuit the restraints control module power and ground
With Restraints open circuit, high resistance circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Control Module High speed CAN bus circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
- No sub type short circuit to ground, system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
information short circuit to power, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit, high resistance the high speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
Restraints system fault ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
system, check the restraints control module for
U0300- Internal Master car configuration file Check that the correct the occupant classification
00 Control Module ID does not correspond sensor control module is installed for vehicle
Software specification. Using the manufacturer approved
Incompatibility diagnostic system, check the central junction box
- No sub type for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
information index
U2016- Control Module Occupant classification Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 Main Software sensor control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
- Not internal failure persists, install a new occupant classification
programmed sensor control module
U201A- Control Module Occupant classification Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
51 Main sensor control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Calibration internal failure persists, install a new occupant classification
Data - Not sensor control module
programmed
U3000- Control Module Occupant classification Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
04 - System sensor control module system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
internal failures internal failure persists, install a new occupant classification
sensor control module
U3000- Control Module This diagnostic trouble code Check the following criteria have all been
54 - Missing is set if routine - Calibrate achieved:
calibration OCS Empty Seat Offset - Ignition status set to RUN/START
(0x5000) - is requested and - Verify seat is always empty after power-
fails due to one of the pre- up before re-zero is requested
conditions to execute the - The occupant classification sensor control
routine module has gone through the seat
assembly plant calibration
- No collision event received from the
restraints control module during the
current ignition cycle
- No faults present in the current ignition
cycle
- The trigger message for calibrate empty
seat offset has been received from the
diagnostic tool
- Occupant classification sensor control
module has enough time to begin
classification
- Temperature is between 6°C (42°F) and
36°C (97°F)
U3003- Battery Voltage Occupant classification Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
16 - Circuit sensor control module system, check datalogger signal - ECU Power
voltage below power or ground circuit Supply Voltage (0xD111). Refer to the electrical
threshold open circuit, high resistance circuit diagrams and check the occupant
Battery/charging system classification sensor control module power and
fault ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
U3003- Battery Voltage Battery/charging system Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
17 - Circuit fault system, check datalogger signal - ECU Power
voltage above Supply Voltage (0xD111). Refer to the relevant
threshold section of the workshop manual and test the
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Parking
Aid Control Module (PACM)
Parking Aid Control Module (PACM)
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
Physical damage to the sensor (impact damage or scratched sensor surface) must NOT be changed under
warranty.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Parking Aid Control Module
(PACM). For additional Diagnosis and Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Parking Aid (413-13 Parking Aid, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1B36- Front Right Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the front
01 Outer Sensor - fault bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor circuit
General Front Right for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Electrical Failure Outer Sensor - circuit. Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
Component Check the connector for integrity and damage, then re-
internal failure connect sensor to confirm connection
Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system clear
the DTC and run the on demand self test
If the problem persists remove the suspect sensor from the
bumper. Inspect the sensor connector for signs of water
ingress/corrosion. Exchange the suspect sensor with another
sensor within the bumper that is not reporting a fault. Clear
the DTC and run the on demand self test to confirm if the
fault code now appears for the new position of the suspect
sensor. Renew the faulty sensor
12 Outer Sensor - fault bumper harness for damage. Check sensor circuit for short
Circuit short to circuit to power. Repair or replace any wiring harness as
battery required
Check the connector for integrity and damage, then re-
connect sensor to confirm connection
Component Front Right for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
internal failure Outer Sensor - circuit. Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
01 Inner Sensor - fault bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor circuit
General Front Right for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Electrical Failure Inner Sensor - circuit. Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
12 Inner Sensor - fault bumper harness for damage. Check sensor circuit for short
battery required
96 Inner Sensor - fault bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor circuit
Component Front Right for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
internal failure Inner Sensor - circuit. Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
B1B40- Front Left Outer Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the front
01 Sensor - fault bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor circuit
General Front Left Outer for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Electrical Failure Sensor - circuit. Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
12 Sensor - Circuit fault bumper harness for damage. Check sensor circuit for short
short to battery circuit to power. Repair or replace any wiring harness as
required
Component Front Left Outer for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
internal failure Sensor - circuit. Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
B1B42- Front Left Inner Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the front
General Front Left Inner for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
required
Component Front Left Inner for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
B1B44- Rear Right Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
General Rear Right for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Electrical Failure Outer Sensor - circuit. Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
12 Outer Sensor - fault bumper harness for damage. Check sensor circuit for short
battery required
Component Rear Right for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
internal failure Outer Sensor - circuit. Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
B1B46- Rear Right Inner Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
General Rear Right for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Electrical Failure Inner Sensor - circuit. Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
required
Component Rear Right for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
internal failure Inner Sensor - circuit. Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
B1B48- Rear Left Outer Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
General Rear Left Outer for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
required
Component Rear Left Outer for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
B1B50- Rear Left Inner Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
General Rear Left Inner for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
electrical failure Sensor - circuit. Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
required
Component Rear Left Inner for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
B1B54- Function LED - Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the parking aid
11 Park Aid - fault LED circuit for short circuit to ground. Repair or replace any
Circuit short to Switch/LED - wiring harness as required
ground Component Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system clear
internal failure the DTC and run the on demand self test. If the problem
persists, suspect the switch/LED
B1B54- Function LED - Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the parking aid
12 Park Aid - fault LED circuit for short circuit to power. Repair or replace any
Circuit short to Switch/LED - wiring harness as required
battery Component Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system clear
Control Module persists, suspect the switch/LED
- Component
internal failure
B1B57- Front Sensors Wiring harness Check front and rear bumper harness for signs of damage
11 Power Circuit- fault and security of connections
Circuit short to Control Module Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the parking
ground - Component assist front sensor power circuit and rear sensor power
internal failure circuit for short circuit to ground. Repair or replace any
wiring harness as required
the DTC and run the on demand self test. If the problem
persists, suspect the control module
Cycle the ignition off, then on, to power up parking aid
system and check corrective action
B1B58- Rear Sensors Wiring harness Check rear and front (if front PDC fitted) bumper harness for
11 Power Circuit - fault signs of damage and security of connections
Circuit short to Control Module Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the parking
ground - Component assist rear sensor power circuit and front sensor power
internal failure circuit (if front PDC fitted) for short circuit to ground. Repair
or replace any wiring harness as required
the DTC and run the on demand self test. If the problem
persists, suspect the control module
Cycle the ignition off, then on, to power up parking aid
system and check corrective action
B1C30- Disable Switch - Wiring harness Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the parking
73 Actuator stuck fault assist switch and switch circuit. Repair or replace any wiring
closed Control Switch - harness as required
Component Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system clear
persists, suspect the control switch
Check the switch function
U0010- Medium Speed Medium speed Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the Parking
00 CAN CAN failure - aid control module high speed CAN bus for short circuit to
Communication bus off ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance,
Bus - No sub or short circuit between the paired CAN wires
type information Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
complete a CAN network integrity test
Cycle the ignition off, then on, and check if the DTC is still
logged
U0140- Lost Loss of CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
00 Communication communication and ground connections to the central junction box. Clear
With Body with central DTC and retest
Control Module - junction box Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
No sub type complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical
information circuit diagrams and check the CAN network between the
central junction box and the parking aid control module
U0155- Lost Loss of CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
00 Communication communication and ground connections to the instrument cluster. Clear DTC
With Instrument with instrument and retest
Panel Cluster cluster Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
(IPC) Control complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical
Module - No sub circuit diagrams and check the CAN network between the
type information central junction box and the parking aid control module
U0300- Internal Control Car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
00 Module Software configuration all other control modules, for related DTCs and refer to the
Incompatibility - file stored in relevant DTC index
No sub type Parking aid Check the components installed on the vehicle were installed
information control module by the factory or a dealer
does not match Install the original component or a new one as required.
the master car
configuration
file
Master car
configuration
file not being
transmitted by
master control
module
U0422- Invalid Data Invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
00 Received From received central junction box, for related DTCs and refer to the
Body Control relevant DTC index
Module - No sub Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
type information complete a CAN network integrity test
Cycle the ignition off, then on, and check if the DTC is still
logged
U0423- Invalid Data Invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
00 Received From received instrument cluster, for related DTCs and refer to the
Instrument relevant DTC index
Panel Control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Module - No sub complete a CAN network integrity test
type information Cycle the ignition off, then on, and check if the DTC is still
logged
U2100- Initial Car

00 Configuration configuration NOTE: After updating the car configuration file, set the ignition
Not Complete - file not the to on and wait 30 seconds before clearing the DTCs
No sub type same as
information expected by the Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
parking aid and update the car configuration file as required. Clear the
control module DTC and retest
U2101- Control Module Parking aid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
00 Configuration control module and up-date the car configuration file as required. Clear the
Incompatible - configuration DTC and re-test
No sub type error
information
U3000- Control Module - Parking aid Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system clear
49 Internal control module the DTC, cycle the ignition off, then on, and check if the DTC
electronic failure internal failure is still logged
If the DTC is still logged suspect the parking aid control
module
U3002- Vehicle VIN Mismatch, Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system clear
81 Identification stored VIN does the DTC, cycle the ignition off, then on, and check if the DTC
Number - not match is still logged
Invalid serial broadcast VIN If the DTC is still logged replace the parking aid control
data received module
U3003- Battery Voltage Signal compare Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
62 - Signal failure in central junction box, for related DTCs and refer to the
compare failure battery voltage, relevant DTC index
of 2 volts or Check the vehicle charging system performance to ensure
more, between the voltage regulation is correct
parking aid Refer to relevant section of workshop manual and battery
system control care manual. Check battery state of charge and
module and starting/charging system performance
central junction Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check parking aid
box control module power and ground circuits for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit
Clear the DTC and retest
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Rear
Differential Control Module (RDCM)
Rear Differential Control Module (RDCM)
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Rear Differential Control
Module, for additional Diagnosis and Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Diagnosis
and Testing).

P0562- System Voltage Rear differential Check the battery charge condition, refer to the
00 Low - No sub type control module electrical circuit diagrams and check the wiring to the
information voltage supply rear differential control module, repair as necessary
below 9V
P0563- System Voltage System voltage Check engine control module for stored DTCs, suspect
00 High - No sub type high (supply charging system fault. Refer to the electrical circuit
information voltage supply diagrams and check, power and ground circuit for
greater than 16 fault
volts)
P0604- Internal Control Rear differential Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
00 Module Random control module renew the control module
Access Memory internal error
(RAM) Error - No
sub type
information
P0605- Internal Control Rear differential Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
00 Module Read Only control module renew the control module
Memory (ROM) internal error
Error - No sub type
information
P0606- Control Module Watchdog reset - This is a control module internal check DTC and is not
00 Processor - No sub Internal control necessarily a fault. If no other DTCs are logged and
type information module failure no customer complaint exists, clear/ignore this DTC. If
the problem persists, renew the control module
P0607- Control Module Rear differential Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
00 Performance - No control module renew the control module
sub type internal error -
information charge pump
voltage below
threshold
P0652- Sensor Reference Position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Voltage 'B' Circuit supply below 5.7V differential actuator sensor position circuit, repair as
Low - No sub type Sensor failure necessary. If no circuit problems exist, renew the
information (within actuator) differential actuator
P0653- Sensor Reference Position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Voltage 'B' Circuit supply above 8.3V differential actuator hall sensor ref voltage at the
High - No sub type Internal control control module or the actuator. If voltage is too high,
information module failure then suspect control module fault
P0666- PCM/ECM/TCM Rear differential This is a control module internal check DTC and is not
00 Internal control module necessarily a fault. If no other DTCs are logged and
Temperature internal no customer complaint exists, clear this DTC and
Sensor 'A' Circuit - temperature sensor retest. Check the security of control module fixings.
No sub type value above 105°C Check the module ground connection. Consider
information environmental conditions before suspecting the control
module. If the problem persists, renew the control
module
P0702- Transmission Implausibility of Check the rear differential oil quantity and
64 Control System differential motor specification. Refer to the relevant section of the
Electrical - Signal temperature sensor workshop manual. Check both temperature sensor
plausibility failure and oil temperature circuits and connectors for damage/water ingress,
sensor readout repair as necessary. Where available, after vehicle has
detected been switched off for at least an hour, use the
Motor or oil manufacturer approved diagnostic system to read
temperature sensor motor temperature and oil temperature sensor values.
circuit short circuit Temperature difference should be less than 25°C.
to ground or power Clear the DTC and retest
P0712- Transmission Fluid Differential actuator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Temperature internal differential actuator sensor circuit, repair as
Sensor 'A' Circuit temperature sensor necessary. If no circuit problems exist, renew the
Low - No sub type open circuit or differential actuator
information short circuit to
ground
P0713- Transmission Fluid Differential actuator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Temperature internal circuit between oil temp sensor and control module
Sensor 'A' Circuit temperature sensor connector, repair as necessary. Measure oil temp
High - No sub type open circuit or sensor resistance at control module connector.
information short circuit to Resistance should be less than 10K if oil temp >0°C.
power If not suspect, oil temp sensor open-circuit. If no
circuit problems exist, renew the sensor
P0806- Clutch Position Mismatch of actual Calibrate the clutch and range change mechanism
00 Sensor Circuit and using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Range/Performance expected/calculated Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
- No sub type actuator position renew the differential actuator
information - Internal
differential
actuator
error
P0807- Clutch Position Differential actuator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Sensor Circuit Low internal position differential actuator motor position hall sensor signal
- No sub type sensor supply, circuit (A or B), repair as necessary. If no circuit
information ground, signal A or problems exist, renew the differential actuator
B open circuit or
sensor supply,
signal A or B short
circuit to ground
P0808- Clutch Position Differential actuator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Sensor Circuit High internal position differential actuator motor position hall sensor signal
- No sub type sensor signal 1 or circuit (A or B), repair as necessary. If no circuit
information 2 short circuit to problems exist, renew the differential actuator
power
P080A- Clutch Position Not Rear differential Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Learned - No sub control module not calibrate the rear differential control module. Clear the
type information calibrated DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew the
Differential clutch rear differential assembly
stuck or out of
tolerance
P0894- Transmission Differential actuator Renew the differential actuator

00 Component internal magnetic
Slipping - No sub brake is slipping
type information
P0900- Clutch Actuator Differential actuator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Circuit/Open - No supply open circuit differential actuator circuit, repair as necessary
sub type
information
00 Circuit supply short circuit differential actuator circuit. Check the actuator circuit
Range/Performance Both DC motor resistance carefully (a good motor also has a low
- No sub type supply leads are resistance). Repair as necessary
information short circuited
together
H Bridge overload
detected
00 Circuit Low - No supply circuit short differential actuator circuit, repair as necessary
sub type to ground
information
00 Circuit High - No supply circuit short differential actuator circuit, repair as necessary
sub type to power
information
P1603- EEPROM Rear differential Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
00 Malfunction - No control module renew the control module
sub type internal error
information
P1783- Transmission Over- Rear differential oil Confirm the customer complaint and vehicle usage at
00 Temperature sump temperature the time of DTC event. Check the operation of the rear
Condition - No sub sensor value above differential. Check the rear differential oil quantity and
type information 160°C specification. Refer to the relevant section of the
workshop manual. Clear the DTC and retest. If the
problem persists, suspect an electrical fault. Check for
water ingress into wiring harness/connectors. Renew
the actuator
P186A- Differential Lock- Open circuit of Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Up Actuator Brake actuator internal differential actuator circuit, repair as necessary. If no
Control magnetic brake circuit problems exist, renew the differential actuator
Circuit/Open - No supply leads
sub type
information
P186B- Differential Lock- Short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Up Actuator Brake ground of both differential actuator circuit, repair as necessary. If no
Control Circuit Low differential actuator circuit problems exist, renew the differential actuator
- No sub type internal magnetic
information brake pins
P186C- Differential Lock- Short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Up Actuator Brake power of both differential actuator circuit, repair as necessary. If no
Control Circuit differential actuator circuit problems exist, renew the differential actuator
High - No sub type internal magnetic
information brake pins
P186D- Clutch Actuator Actuator fault Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system,
00 Stuck - No sub calibrate the rear differential control module/clutch
type information actuator. If the problem persists, renew the actuator
P2742- Transmission Fluid Rear differential oil Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Temperature sump temperature differential oil temperature sensor circuit, repair as
Sensor 'B' Circuit sensor short circuit necessary
Low - No sub type to ground
information
P2743- Transmission Fluid Rear differential oil Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Temperature sump temperature differential oil temperature sensor circuit, repair as
Sensor 'B' Circuit sensor open circuit necessary
High - No sub type or short circuit to
information power
P2785- Clutch Actuator Extensive Check for other DTCs (e.g. P186B). If multiple DTCs
00 Temperature Too prolonged off-road exist, suspect a control module internal fault. Confirm
High - No sub type use the customer complaint and vehicle usage at the time
information Insufficient oil of DTC event. Check the operation of the rear
quantity differential. Check the rear differential oil quantity and
Incorrect oil specification. Refer to the relevant section of the
specification workshop manual. Clear the DTC and retest. If the
Internal actuator problem persists, renew the actuator
problem
P2787- Clutch Rear differential Confirm the customer complaint and vehicle usage at
00 Temperature Too clutch pack the time of DTC event. Check the operation of the rear
High - No sub type temperature differential. Check the rear differential oil quantity and
information (calculated) above specification. Refer to the relevant section of the
200°C workshop manual. Clear the DTC and retest. If the
problem persists, renew the actuator
U0001- High Speed CAN Bus off Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
88 Communication power and ground connections to the module. Using
Bus - Bus off the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
U0100- Lost No sub type Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Communication information power and ground connections to the module. Using
With ECM/PCM "A" the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
- No sub type complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
information electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
between the engine control module and rear
differential control module
With Transfer Case the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Control Module - complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
No sub type electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
information between the transfer case control module and rear
differential control module
With Anti-Lock the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Brake System complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Module - No sub between the anti-lock brake system control module
type information and rear differential control module
With Body Control the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Module - No sub complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
type information electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
between the central junction box and rear differential
control module
U0300- Internal Control Rear differential Check & confirm differential control module installed is
00 Module Software control module not correct. If correct, clear DTC, ignition off for 5
Incompatibility - configured seconds, ignition on and then check if DTC reoccurs. If
No sub type Incorrect software the problem persists, configure the module using the
information installed manufacturers approved diagnostic system
U0403- Invalid Data Event information Check the transfer case control module for related
68 Received From DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Transfer Case
Control Module -
Event information
U0415- Lost Event information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
68 Communication power and ground connections to the module. Using
With Anti-Lock the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Brake System complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Module - Event between the anti-lock brake system control module
information and rear differential control module
U0422- Invalid Data Event information - Check the generic electronics module for related DTCs
68 Received from invalid vehicle and refer to the relevant DTC index
Body Control configuration
Module - Event message
information
U1A14- CAN Initialization Rear differential Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
49 Failure - Internal control module has configure the module using the manufacturers
electronic failure failed the CAN approved diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and retest.
serial data If the problem persists, renew the control module
communication
software
initialization or the
CAN controller
initialization
Internal control
module failure
Seat Entertainment Control Module (RSECM)
Rear Seat Entertainment Control Module (RSECM)
CAUTIONS:
vehicle.
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Rear Seat Entertainment
Control Module (RSECM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and

B100F- Video Input "B" -
29 Signal invalid NOTE: Circuit reference AUX NOTE: This DTC can only set when routine -
PANEL VIDEO IN / AUX PANEL Test Composite Video Blanking and Synchronisation
VIDEO GND Input (0x6015) - is run and fails
Auxiliary video in circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

short circuit to ground, check the auxiliary video in circuit for short
short circuit to power, open circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Auxiliary device internal Connect a known functional video signal
failure source to the audio video input/output panel
Rear seat entertainment and select this source using the rear seat
control module internal entertainment remote control. Check the
failure left/right rear seat entertainment screen for a
valid signal
persists, install a new rear seat entertainment
control module
B1010- Video Input "C" -

29 Signal invalid NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC can only set when routine -
HLDF_CVBS_VIDEO_IN / Test Composite Video Blanking and Synchronisation
HLDF_CVBS_VIDEO_GND Input (0x6015) - is run and fails
Touch screen video in Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

circuit short circuit to check the touch screen video in circuit for
ground, short circuit to short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
power, open circuit, high open circuit, high resistance
resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Touch screen internal system, check the touch screen for related
failure DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Rear seat entertainment Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
control module internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure persists, install a new rear seat entertainment
control module
B1252- USB Port - A USB device is detected

57 Invalid/incomplete but the content format of NOTE: This DTC can only set when routine -
software the USB device is not USB Interface Self Test (0x602E) - is run and fails
component supported
system, clear the DTCs, remove and reconnect
the USB device, and retest. If fault persists,
replace the content of the USB device with
content that is correctly formatted
B1252- USB Port - No

93 operation NOTE: Circuit reference AUX NOTE: This DTC can only set when routine -
PANEL USB DATA POS / AUX USB Interface Self Test (0x602E) - is run and fails
PANEL USB DATA NEG
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
USB device circuit short check the USB circuit for short circuit to
circuit to ground, short ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
circuit to power, open high resistance
circuit, high resistance Connect a known functional USB device to the
USB device internal failure audio video input/output panel and select this
Rear seat entertainment source using the rear seat entertainment
control module internal remote control. Check the left/right rear seat
failure entertainment screen for a valid signal
control module
B125E- Left Rear Display

4A - Incorrect NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC is set when the rear seat
component SUPPLY_HLDR_L_R / entertainment control module has not read a valid
installed HLDR_MS_CAN_POS / serial number from the left rear seat entertainment
HLDR_MS_CAN_NEG / HLDR_GND screen within 25 seconds
Rear seat entertainment left Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
screen power or ground check the rear seat entertainment left screen
circuit open circuit, high power and ground circuits for open circuit,
resistance high resistance
Rear seat entertainment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
CAN bus circuit short circuit check the rear seat entertainment CAN bus
to ground, short circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
power, open circuit, high to power, open circuit, high resistance
resistance Check that the rear seat entertainment left
Incorrect rear seat screen has not been substituted
entertainment left screen
installed
B125E- Left Rear Display Rear seat entertainment left Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
96 - Component screen internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
internal failure persists, install a new rear seat entertainment
left screen
B125E- Left Rear Display Rear seat entertainment left Allow the system to cool. Using the
98 - Component or screen over temperature manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
system over condition clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
temperature install a new rear seat entertainment left
screen
B125F- Right Rear

4A Display - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC is set when the rear seat
Incorrect SUPPLY_HLDR_L_R / entertainment control module has not read a valid
component HLDR_MS_CAN_POS / serial number from the right rear seat entertainment
installed HLDR_MS_CAN_NEG / HLDR_GND screen within 25 seconds

right screen power or check the rear seat entertainment right screen
ground circuit open circuit, power and ground circuits for open circuit,
CAN bus circuit short circuit check the rear seat entertainment CAN bus
to ground, short circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
power, open circuit, high to power, open circuit, high resistance
resistance Check that the rear seat entertainment right
Incorrect rear seat screen has not been substituted
entertainment right screen
installed
B125F- Right Rear Rear seat entertainment Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
96 Display - right screen internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Component persists, install a new rear seat entertainment
internal failure right screen
B125F- Right Rear Rear seat entertainment Allow the system to cool. Using the
98 Display - right screen over manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Component or temperature condition clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
system over install a new rear seat entertainment right
temperature screen
B1285- Video Input "D" - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
88 Bus off NOTE: Circuit reference check the TV control module low-voltage
TV_LVDS_POS / TV_LVDS_NEG differential signalling circuit for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
TV control module low- high resistance
voltage differential Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
signalling circuit short system, check the TV control module for
circuit to ground, short related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
circuit to power, open index
Television system fault system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Rear seat entertainment persists, install a new rear seat entertainment
control module internal control module
failure
B12A0- Auxiliary Input 2 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference AUX check the right auxiliary audio in circuit for
ground PANEL AUDIO IN RIGHT short circuit to ground
Right auxiliary audio in

ground
B12A0- Auxiliary Input 2 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference AUX check the right auxiliary audio in circuit for
battery PANEL AUDIO IN RIGHT short circuit to power
Right auxiliary audio in

circuit short circuit to power
B12ED- Video Input "F" - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
88 Bus off NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear seat entertainment left screen
L_HLDR_LVDS_VIDEO_OUT_POS / low-voltage differential signalling circuit for
L_HLDR_LVDS_VIDEO_OUT_NEG short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
Rear seat entertainment left
screen low-voltage
differential signalling circuit
short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, open
B12F8- Video Input "G" - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
88 Bus off NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear seat entertainment right screen
R_HLDR_LVDS_VIDEO_OUT_POS / low-voltage differential signalling circuit for
R_HLDR_LVDS_VIDEO_OUT_NEG short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
Rear seat entertainment
right screen low-voltage
differential signalling circuit
B1D21- Remote Control

02 Switch - General NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC can only set when routine -
signal failure SUPPLY_REMOTE / TSRC (Touch Screen Remote Control Interface Self
REMOTE_DATA_IN / Test (0x602F) - is run and fails
REMOTE_DATA_OUT /
REMOTE_GND Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the rear seat entertainment remote
Rear seat entertainment control docking station power and ground
remote control docking circuits for open circuit, high resistance
station power or ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit open circuit, high check the rear seat entertainment remote
resistance control data bus circuit for short circuit to
Rear seat entertainment ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
remote control data bus high resistance
circuit short circuit to Place the rear seat entertainment remote
ground, short circuit to control in the docking station. Using the
power, open circuit, high manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
resistance clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
Rear seat entertainment install a new rear seat entertainment remote
remote control internal control
failure
B1D21- Remote Control Rear seat entertainment Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
08 Switch - Bus remote control fault system, re-configure the rear seat
signal/message entertainment remote control with the latest
failures level software
B1D21- Remote Control Rear seat entertainment

1C Switch - Circuit remote control fault NOTE: This DTC can only set when routine -
voltage out of TSRC (Touch Screen Remote Control Interface Self
range Test (0x602F) - is run and fails
Install a new rear seat entertainment remote

control battery

57 Switch - remote control fault NOTE: This DTC can only set when routine -
Invalid/incomplete TSRC (Touch Screen Remote Control Interface Self
software Test (0x602F) - is run and fails
component
system, re-configure the rear seat
entertainment remote control with the latest
level software

71 Switch - Actuator remote control fault NOTE: This DTC can only set when routine -
stuck TSRC (Touch Screen Remote Control Interface Self
Test (0x602F) - is run and fails
Test the operation of the rear seat

entertainment remote control switches
B1D78- Auxiliary Input - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference AUX check the left auxiliary audio in circuit for
ground PANEL AUDIO IN LEFT short circuit to ground
Left auxiliary audio in circuit

B1D78- Auxiliary Input - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit reference AUX check the left auxiliary audio in circuit for
battery PANEL AUDIO IN LEFT short circuit to power
Left auxiliary audio in circuit

U0196- Lost Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

31 Communication NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear seat entertainment left screen
With SUPPLY_HLDR_L_R / power and ground circuits for open circuit,
Entertainment HLDR_MS_CAN_POS / high resistance
Control Module - HLDR_MS_CAN_NEG / HLDR_GND Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Rear "A" - No check the rear seat entertainment CAN bus
signal Rear seat entertainment left circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
screen power or ground to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit open circuit, high
resistance
CAN bus circuit short circuit
to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit, high
resistance
U0249- Lost Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

31 Communication check the rear seat entertainment right screen
NOTE: Circuit reference
With SUPPLY_HLDR_L_R / power and ground circuits for open circuit,
Entertainment HLDR_MS_CAN_POS / high resistance
Control Module - HLDR_MS_CAN_NEG / HLDR_GND Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Rear "B" - No check the rear seat entertainment CAN bus
signal Rear seat entertainment circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
right screen power or to power, open circuit, high resistance
ground circuit open circuit,
high resistance
CAN bus circuit short circuit
resistance
U1009- Invalid Data

00 Received From NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC indicates that unexpected data
Right Rear SUPPLY_HLDR_L_R / was received from the rear seat entertainment right
Display Module - HLDR_MS_CAN_POS / screen. This could be due to a reset, harness fault,
No sub type HLDR_MS_CAN_NEG / incorrect programming or random corruption
information R_HLDR_LVDS_VIDEO_OUT_POS /
R_HLDR_LVDS_VIDEO_OUT_NEG / Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
HLDR_GND check the rear seat entertainment CAN bus
circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
Rear seat entertainment to power, open circuit, high resistance
CAN bus circuit short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
to ground, short circuit to check the rear seat entertainment right screen
power, open circuit, high low-voltage differential signalling circuit for
resistance short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
Rear seat entertainment open circuit, high resistance
right screen low-voltage Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
differential signalling circuit check the rear seat entertainment right screen
short circuit to ground, power and ground circuits for open circuit,
short circuit to power, open high resistance
Rear seat entertainment system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
right screen power or persists, install a new rear seat entertainment
ground circuit open circuit, right screen
high resistance
right screen internal failure
U100A- Invalid Data

00 Received From NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC indicates that unexpected data
Left Rear Display SUPPLY_HLDR_L_R / was received from the rear seat entertainment left
Module - No sub HLDR_MS_CAN_POS / screen. This could be due to a reset, harness fault,
type information HLDR_MS_CAN_NEG / incorrect programming or random corruption
L_HLDR_LVDS_VIDEO_OUT_POS /
L_HLDR_LVDS_VIDEO_OUT_NEG / Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
HLDR_GND check the rear seat entertainment CAN bus
circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
Rear seat entertainment to power, open circuit, high resistance
CAN bus circuit short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
to ground, short circuit to check the rear seat entertainment left screen
power, open circuit, high low-voltage differential signalling circuit for
resistance short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
Rear seat entertainment left open circuit, high resistance
screen low-voltage Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
differential signalling circuit check the rear seat entertainment left screen
short circuit to ground, power and ground circuits for open circuit,
short circuit to power, open high resistance
Rear seat entertainment left system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
screen power or ground persists, install a new rear seat entertainment
circuit open circuit, high left screen
resistance
Rear seat entertainment left
screen internal failure
U200D- Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 Output Power A - NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear seat entertainment left/right
Circuit short to SUPPLY_HLDR_L_R screen circuit for short circuit to ground
ground
left/right screen circuit
U200D- Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

12 Output Power A - NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear seat entertainment left/right
Circuit short to SUPPLY_HLDR_L_R screen circuit for short circuit to power
battery
left/right screen circuit
U200D- Control Module

19 Output Power A - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: This DTC is logged when the combined
Circuit current SUPPLY_HLDR_L_R / HLDR_GND total current consumption of the rear screens exceeds
above threshold 1.35 amps
left/right screen circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short circuit to ground, check the rear seat entertainment left/right
short circuit to power screen circuit for short circuit to ground, short
Rear seat entertainment circuit to power
control module internal Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
control module
U200E- Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 Output Power B - NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear seat entertainment remote
Circuit short to SUPPLY_REMOTE control docking station supply circuit for short
ground circuit to ground
remote control docking
station supply circuit short
circuit to ground
U200E- Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

12 Output Power B - NOTE: Circuit reference check the rear seat entertainment remote
Circuit short to SUPPLY_REMOTE control docking station supply circuit for short
battery circuit to power
remote control docking
station supply circuit short
circuit to power
U200E- Control Module

19 Output Power B - NOTE: Circuit reference NOTE: If this DTC is set, install a new rear seat
Circuit current SUPPLY_REMOTE/ REMOTE_GND entertainment control module even if a circuit fault
above threshold has been found and rectified
remote control docking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
station circuit short circuit check the rear seat entertainment remote
to ground, short circuit to control docking station circuit for short circuit
power to ground, short circuit to power
Rear seat entertainment Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
control module internal system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure persists, install a new rear seat entertainment
control module
U2014- Control Module Rear seat entertainment Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
56 Hardware - control module is not system, re-configure the rear seat
Invalid/incomplete configured correctly entertainment control module with the latest
configuration level software
U2100- Initial Rear seat entertainment Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Configuration Not control module is not system, re-configure the rear seat
Complete - No configured correctly entertainment control module with the latest
sub type level software
information
U2101- Control Module Car configuration file Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Configuration mismatch with vehicle system, check and up-date the car
Incompatible - No specification configuration file as necessary
sub type Incorrect rear seat Install a new rear seat entertainment control
information entertainment control module as necessary
module installed
U3000- Control Module - Rear seat entertainment

19 Circuit current control module internal NOTE: If this DTC is set, install a new rear seat
above threshold failure entertainment control module even if a circuit fault
has been found and rectified

control module
U3000- Control Module - Rear seat entertainment Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
55 Not configured control module is not system, re-configure the rear seat
configured correctly entertainment control module with the latest
level software
U3000- Control Module - Rear seat entertainment Allow the vehicle to cool. Check the rear seat
98 Component or control module over entertainment control module ventilation ducts
system over temperature for obstructions. Using the manufacturer
temperature approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs
and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
rear seat entertainment control module
U3003- Battery Voltage - Mismatch between the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
62 Signal compare voltage at the rear seat check the rear seat entertainment control
failure entertainment control module power and ground circuits for open
module and the voltage circuit, high resistance
value broadcast on the CAN
bus
Published: 15-Mar-2013
View Camera (RVC)
Proximity Camera Control Module (IPMB)
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Image Processing Module, for
For additional information, refer to: Video System (415-07 Video System, Diagnosis and Testing).

B100E- Video Input "A" Video output Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the circuit
29 signal - Signal connection error between the proximity cameras and the touch screen
invalid Video output line
short or open
circuit
B12BD- Rear Camera - Rear proximity

19 Circuit current camera circuit NOTE: When checking LVDS circuits, DO NOT probe the LVDS
above current above cables. Visual checks ONLY should be performed at the cable inter-
threshold threshold connect points
Rear proximity
camera is Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear
drawing little or proximity camera circuit for short to power, open circuit,
no current, high resistance
indicating an
open circuit fault
or disconnected
camera
B12BD- Rear Camera - Rear proximity

31 No signal camera circuit NOTE: When checking LVDS circuits, DO NOT probe the LVDS
fault cables. Visual checks ONLY should be performed at the cable inter-
Rear proximity connect points
camera faulty
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear
proximity camera circuit for open circuit
B12BD- Rear Camera - Rear proximity Clear DTC, wait for a minimum of 2 minutes, then retest
49 Internal camera internal If fault persists, check and install a new rear proximity
electronic electronic failure camera as required
failure
B12BD- Rear Camera - Rear proximity Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system calibrate
54 Missing camera not the rear proximity camera
calibration calibrated Check the rear proximity camera is fitted and aligned
Rear proximity correctly
camera not
installed
correctly
B12BE- Left Front Front left
19 Camera - proximity NOTE: When checking LVDS circuits, DO NOT probe the LVDS
Circuit current camera circuit cables. Visual checks ONLY should be performed at the cable inter-
above current above connect points
threshold threshold
Front left Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the front
proximity left proximity camera circuit for short to power, open circuit,
camera is high resistance
drawing little or
no current,
indicating an
open circuit fault
or disconnected
camera
B12BE- Left Front Front left

31 Camera - No proximity NOTE: When checking LVDS circuits, DO NOT probe the LVDS
signal camera circuit cables. Visual checks ONLY should be performed at the cable inter-
fault connect points
Front left
proximity Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the front
camera faulty left proximity camera circuit for open circuit
B12BE- Left Front Front left Clear DTC, wait for a minimum of 2 minutes, then retest
49 Camera - proximity If fault persists, check and install a new front left proximity
Internal camera internal camera as required
electronic electronic failure
failure
B12BE- Left Front Front left Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system calibrate
54 Camera - proximity the front left proximity camera
Missing camera not Check the front left proximity camera is fitted and aligned
calibration calibrated correctly
Front left
proximity
camera not
installed
correctly
B12BF- Right Front Front right

threshold threshold
Front right Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the front
proximity right proximity camera circuit for short to power, open
camera is circuit, high resistance
drawing little or
no current,
indicating an
open circuit fault
or disconnected
camera
B12BF- Right Front Front right

Front right
proximity Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the front
camera faulty right proximity camera circuit for open circuit
B12BF- Right Front Front right Clear DTC, wait for a minimum of 2 minutes, then retest
49 Camera - proximity If fault persists, check and install a new front right proximity
failure
B12BF- Right Front Front right Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system calibrate
54 Camera - proximity the front right proximity camera
Missing camera not Check the front right proximity camera is fitted and aligned
Front right
proximity
camera not
installed
correctly
B12C0- Left Mirror Left mirror

threshold threshold
Left mirror Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the left
proximity mirror proximity camera circuit for short to power, open
drawing little or
no current,
indicating an
open circuit fault
or disconnected
camera
B12C0- Left Mirror Left mirror

Left mirror
proximity Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the left
camera faulty mirror proximity camera circuit for open circuit
B12C0- Left Mirror Left mirror Clear DTC, wait for a minimum of 2 minutes, then retest
49 Camera - proximity If fault persists, check and install a new left mirror proximity
failure
B12C0- Left Mirror Left mirror Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system calibrate
54 Camera - proximity the left mirror proximity camera
Missing camera not Check the left mirror proximity camera is fitted and aligned
Left mirror
proximity
camera not
installed
correctly
B12C1- Right Mirror Right mirror

threshold threshold
Right mirror Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the right
proximity mirror proximity camera circuit for short to power, open
drawing little or
no current,
indicating an
open circuit fault
or disconnected
camera
B12C1- Right Mirror Right mirror

Right mirror
proximity Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the right
camera faulty mirror proximity camera circuit for open circuit
B12C1- Right Mirror Right mirror Clear DTC, wait for a minimum of 2 minutes, then retest
49 Camera - proximity If fault persists, check and install a new right mirror
Internal camera internal proximity camera as required
failure
B12C1- Right Mirror Right mirror Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system calibrate
54 Camera - proximity the right mirror proximity camera
Missing camera not Check the right mirror proximity camera is fitted and aligned
Right mirror
proximity
camera not
installed
correctly
P1603- EEPROM Proximity Clear DTC, wait for a minimum of 2 minutes, then retest. If
00 Malfunction - camera control fault persists, check and install a new proximity camera
No sub type module internal control module as required
information memory error
U0010- Medium Speed Bus off Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
88 CAN private network for short, open circuit. Carry out CAN
Communication network integrity tests using the manufacturer approved
Bus - Bus off diagnostic system. Refer to the network communications
section of the workshop manual
U0300- Internal Incorrect Check for other modules reporting CAN bus off or lost
00 Control Module software loaded communication faults. If other modules report problems,
Software Lost CAN signal check the software version in the central junction box using
Incompatibility the manufacturers approved diagnostic system. If no other
- No sub type modules report problems, check the software version in the
information park distance control module. Update as necessary
U1A4B- Control Module Internal Clear DTC, wait for a minimum of 2 minutes, then retest. If
49 Processor B - electronic failure the DTC resets, renew the proximity camera control module
Internal
electronic
failure
U201A- Control Module Local Configure the proximity camera control module using the
51 Main config/calibration approved diagnostic system
Calibration file
Data - Not missing/invalid
programmed (LCF)
U3000- Control Module Internal memory Clear DTC, wait for a minimum of 2 minutes, then retest. If
46 - Calibration / error the DTC resets, renew the proximity camera control module
parameter
memory failure
U3000- Control Module Watchdog/safety Clear DTC, wait for a minimum of 2 minutes, then retest. If
47 - Watchdog / MicroController the DTC resets, renew the proximity camera control module
safety failure
MicroController
failure
U3000- Control Module Internal memory Clear DTC, wait for a minimum of 2 minutes, then retest. If
49 - Internal error the DTC resets, renew the proximity camera control module
electronic
failure
U3000- Control Module Component or Consider the environmental conditions before suspecting the
98 - Component system over proximity camera control module. Allow the proximity
or system over temperature camera control module to cool, clear DTC, wait for a
temperature minimum of 2 minutes, then retest
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER
SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS) COMPONENTS. TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE AND WAIT ONE MINUTE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
does not guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
Given the legal implications of a restraints system failure, harness repairs to the restraints control module
circuits are not acceptable. Where the text refers to "REPAIR the circuit", this will normally mean the replacement of
a harness.
When performing electrical voltage or resistance checks, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to
three decimal places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When checking resistance, always take the
resistance of the DMM leads into account.
Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint checks.
If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint checks, a fault is not present, an intermittent concern
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the restraints control module, for
For additional information, refer to: Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint
System, Diagnosis and Testing).

B0001- Driver Frontal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the driver
11 Stage 1 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 1) circuit for short to ground
Deployment reference DR AIRBAG F1 Test for intermittent shorts to ground within the
Control - / DR AIRBAG R1 clockspring by rotating the steering column during the tests
Circuit short to
ground Driver airbag
(stage 1) circuit
short to ground
12 Stage 1 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 1) circuit for short to power
Deployment reference DR AIRBAG F1 Test for intermittent shorts to power within the clockspring
Control - / DR AIRBAG R1 by rotating the steering column during the tests
Circuit short to
battery Driver airbag
(stage 1) circuit
short to power
1A Stage 1 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 1) circuit for short circuit. Test connector
Deployment reference DR AIRBAG F1 security at clockspring and airbag
Control - / DR AIRBAG R1 Test for intermittent short circuits within the clockspring by
Circuit rotating the steering column during the tests
resistance Driver airbag
below (stage 1) circuit
threshold resistance below
threshold
1B Stage 1 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 1) circuit for high resistance or open circuit
Deployment reference DR AIRBAG F1 Test for intermittent open circuit, high resistance faults
Control - / DR AIRBAG R1 within the clockspring by rotating the steering column
Circuit during the tests
above (stage 1) high
threshold circuit resistance
B0001- Driver Frontal Configuration error: This output has been switched off but
64 Stage 1 NOTE: Circuit the airbag is actually installed. Re-configure the restraints
Deployment reference DR AIRBAG F1 control module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Control - / DR AIRBAG R1 system
Signal
plausibility Driver airbag
failure (stage 1) signal
95 Stage 1 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 1) circuit for faults
Deployment reference DR AIRBAG F1 Test for intermittent short circuits within the clockspring by
Control - / DR AIRBAG R1 rotating the steering column during the tests
Incorrect
assembly Driver airbag
(stage 1) incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between
two different
circuits (at least
two faults)
11 Stage 2 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 2) circuit for short to ground
Deployment reference DR AIRBAG F2 Test for intermittent shorts to ground within the
Control - / DR AIRBAG R2 clockspring by rotating the steering column during the tests
Circuit short to
ground Driver airbag
(stage 2) circuit
short to ground
12 Stage 2 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 2) circuit for short to power
Deployment reference DR AIRBAG F2 Test for intermittent shorts to power within the clockspring
Control - / DR AIRBAG R2 by rotating the steering column during the tests
Circuit short to
battery Driver airbag
(stage 2) circuit
short to power
1A Stage 2 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 2) circuit for short circuit. Test connector
Deployment reference DR AIRBAG F2 security at clockspring and airbag
Control - / DR AIRBAG R2 Test for intermittent short circuits within the clockspring by
Circuit rotating the steering column during the tests
threshold
1B Stage 2 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 2) circuit for high resistance or open circuit
Deployment reference DR AIRBAG F2 Test for intermittent open circuit, high resistance faults
Control - / DR AIRBAG R2 within the clockspring by rotating the steering column
Circuit during the tests
B0002- Driver Frontal Configuration error: This output has been switched off but
64 Stage 2 NOTE: Circuit the airbag is actually installed. Re-configure the restraints
Deployment reference DR AIRBAG F2 control module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Control - / DR AIRBAG R2 system
Signal
plausibility Driver airbag
95 Stage 2 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 2) circuit for faults
Deployment reference DR AIRBAG F2 Test for intermittent short circuits within the clockspring by
Control - / DR AIRBAG R2 rotating the steering column during the tests
Incorrect
assembly Driver airbag
(stage 2) incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between
two different
circuits (at least
two faults)
B0010- Passenger Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the passenger
11 Frontal Stage 1 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 1) circuit for short to ground
Deployment reference PASS AIRBAG
Control - F1 / PASS AIRBAG R1
Circuit short to
ground Passenger airbag
(stage 1) circuit
short to ground
12 Frontal Stage 1 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 1) circuit for short to power
Circuit short to
battery Passenger airbag
(stage 1) circuit
short to power
1A Frontal Stage 1 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 1) circuit for short circuit. Test connectors for
Deployment reference PASS AIRBAG security
Circuit
resistance Passenger airbag
threshold
1B Frontal Stage 1 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 1) circuit for high resistance or open circuit
Circuit
B0010- Passenger Configuration error: This output has been switched off but
64 Frontal Stage 1 NOTE: Circuit the airbag is actually installed. Re-configure the restraints
Deployment reference PASS AIRBAG control module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Control - F1 / PASS AIRBAG R1 system
Signal
plausibility Passenger airbag
95 Frontal Stage 1 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 1) circuit for faults
Incorrect
assembly Passenger airbag
(stage 1) incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between
two different
circuits (at least
two faults)
11 Frontal Stage 2 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 2) circuit for short to ground
Circuit short to
ground Passenger airbag
(stage 2) circuit
short to ground
12 Frontal Stage 2 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 2) circuit for short to power
Circuit short to
battery Passenger airbag
(stage 2) circuit
short to power
1A Frontal Stage 2 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 2) circuit for short circuit. Test connectors for
Deployment reference PASS AIRBAG security
Circuit
threshold
1B Frontal Stage 2 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 2) circuit for high resistance or open circuit
Circuit
B0011- Passenger Configuration error: This output has been switched off but
64 Frontal Stage 2 NOTE: Circuit the airbag is actually installed. Re-configure the restraints
Deployment reference PASS AIRBAG control module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Control - F2 / PASS AIRBAG R2 system
Signal
plausibility Passenger airbag
95 Frontal Stage 2 NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 2) circuit for faults
Incorrect
assembly Passenger airbag
(stage 2) incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between
two different
circuits (at least
two faults)
B0020- Left Side Air Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the left side
11 Bag NOTE: Circuit airbag (seat) circuit for short to ground
Deployment reference LH SIDE A/BAG
Control - F1 / LH SIDE A/BAG R1
Circuit short to
ground Left side airbag
circuit short to
ground
12 Bag NOTE: Circuit airbag (seat) circuit for short to power
Circuit short to
battery Left side airbag
circuit short to
power
1A Bag NOTE: Circuit airbag (seat) circuit for short circuit. Test connectors for
Deployment reference LH SIDE A/BAG security
Circuit
resistance Left side airbag
below circuit resistance
threshold below threshold
1B Bag NOTE: Circuit airbag (seat) circuit for high resistance or open circuit
Deployment
reference LH SIDE A/BAG
Circuit
resistance Left side airbag
above high circuit
threshold resistance
B0020- Left Side Air Configuration error: This output has been switched off but
64 Bag NOTE: Circuit the airbag is actually installed. Re-configure the restraints
Deployment reference LH SIDE A/BAG control module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Control - F1 / LH SIDE A/BAG R1 system
Signal
plausibility Left side airbag
failure signal plausibility
failure
B0020- Left Side Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the left side
95 Airbag NOTE: Circuit airbag (seat) circuit for faults
Incorrect
assembly Left side airbag
incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between
two different
circuits (at least
two faults)
B0021- Left Curtain Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the left side air
11 Deployment NOTE: Circuit curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit for short to ground
Control 1 - reference LH SIDE CUR
Circuit short to F1 / LH SIDE CUR R1
ground
Left side air
curtain circuit
short to ground
12 Deployment NOTE: Circuit curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit for short to power
Circuit short to F1 / LH SIDE CUR R1
battery
Left side air
curtain circuit
short to power
1A Deployment NOTE: Circuit curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit for short circuit. Test
Control 1 - reference LH SIDE CUR connectors for security
Circuit F1 / LH SIDE CUR R1
resistance
below Left side air
threshold curtain circuit
resistance below
threshold
1B Deployment NOTE: Circuit curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit for high resistance or open
Control 1 - reference LH SIDE CUR circuit
Circuit F1 / LH SIDE CUR R1
resistance
above Left side air
threshold curtain high circuit
resistance, open
circuit
B0021- Left Curtain Configuration error: This output has been switched off but
64 Deployment NOTE: Circuit the airbag is actually installed. Re-configure the restraints
Control 1 - reference LH SIDE CUR control module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Signal F1 / LH SIDE CUR R1 system
plausibility
failure Left side air
curtain
configuration error
95 Deployment NOTE: Circuit curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit for faults
Incorrect F1 / LH SIDE CUR R1
assembly
Left side air
curtain incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between
two different
circuits (at least
two faults)
B0028- Right Side Air Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the right side
11 Bag NOTE: Circuit airbag (seat) circuit for short to ground
Deployment reference RH SIDE A/BAG
Control - F1 / RH SIDE A/BAG R1
Circuit short to
ground Right side airbag
circuit short to
ground
12 Bag NOTE: Circuit airbag (seat) circuit for short to power
Circuit short to
battery Right side airbag
circuit short to
power
1A Bag NOTE: Circuit airbag (seat) circuit for short circuit. Test connectors for
Deployment reference RH SIDE A/BAG security
Circuit
resistance Right side airbag
below circuit resistance
threshold below threshold
1B Bag NOTE: Circuit airbag (seat) circuit for high resistance or open circuit
Circuit
resistance Right side airbag
above high circuit
threshold resistance
B0028- Right Side Air Configuration error: This output has been switched off but
64 Bag NOTE: Circuit the airbag is actually installed. Re-configure the restraints
Deployment reference RH SIDE A/BAG control module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Control - F1 / RH SIDE A/BAG R1 system
Signal
plausibility Right side airbag
failure signal plausibility
failure
B0028- Right Side Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the right side
95 Airbag NOTE: Circuit airbag (seat) circuit for faults
Incorrect
assembly Right side airbag
incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between
two different
circuits (at least
two faults)
B0029- Right Curtain Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the right side
11 Deployment NOTE: Circuit air curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit for short to ground
Control 1 - reference RH SIDE CUR
Circuit short to F1 / RH SIDE CUR R1
ground
Right side air
curtain circuit
short to ground
12 Deployment NOTE: Circuit air curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit for short to power
Circuit short to F1 / RH SIDE CUR R1
battery
Right side air
curtain circuit
short to power
1A Deployment NOTE: Circuit air curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit for short circuit. Test
Control 1 - reference RH SIDE CUR connectors for security
Circuit F1 / RH SIDE CUR R1
resistance
below Right side air
threshold curtain circuit
resistance below
threshold
1B Deployment NOTE: Circuit air curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit for high resistance or
Control 1 - reference RH SIDE CUR open circuit
Circuit F1 / RH SIDE CUR R1
resistance
above Right side air
threshold curtain high circuit
resistance
B0029- Right Curtain Configuration error: This output has been switched off but
64 Deployment NOTE: Circuit the airbag is actually installed. Re-configure the restraints
Control 1 - reference RH SIDE CUR control module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Signal F1 / RH SIDE CUR R1 system
plausibility
failure Right side air
curtain
configuration error
95 Deployment NOTE: Circuit air curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit for faults
Incorrect F1 / RH SIDE CUR R1
assembly
Right side air
curtain incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between
two different
circuits (at least
two faults)
B0050- Driver Seatbelt Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the driver
11 Sensor - NOTE: Circuit safety belt buckle switch circuit for short to ground
Circuit short to reference BUCKLE
ground SWITCH-DR
Driver safety belt

buckle switch
circuit short to
ground
12 Sensor - NOTE: Circuit safety belt buckle switch circuit for short to power
Circuit short to reference BUCKLE
battery SWITCH-DR
Driver safety belt

buckle switch
circuit short to
power
1D Sensor - NOTE: Circuit safety belt buckle switch circuit for fault
Circuit current reference BUCKLE
out of range SWITCH-DR
Driver safety belt

buckle switch
circuit current out
of range
B0050- Driver Seatbelt Configuration error: This input has been switched off but
64 Sensor - Signal NOTE: Circuit the sensor is actually installed. Re-configure the restraints
plausibility reference BUCKLE control module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
failure SWITCH-DR system
Driver safety belt
buckle switch
signal plausibility
failure
B0090- Left Frontal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the left front
11 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor circuit for short to ground
Sensor - reference LH CRASH
Circuit short to SENS F / LH CRASH
ground SENS R
Left front impact

sensor circuit
short to ground
12 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor circuit for short to power
Circuit short to SENS F / LH CRASH
battery SENS R
Left front impact

sensor circuit
short to power
B0090- Left Frontal Configuration error: This input has been switched off but
64 Restraints NOTE: Circuit the sensor is actually installed. Re-configure the restraints
Sensor - Signal reference LH CRASH control module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
plausibility SENS F / LH CRASH system
failure SENS R
Left front impact

sensor signal
81 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor circuit for open circuit fault
Sensor - reference LH CRASH Install a new left front impact sensor as necessary
Invalid serial SENS F / LH CRASH
data received SENS R
Left front impact

sensor open
circuit
Left front impact
sensor fault
B0090- Left Frontal Test component fixings for security. If secure suspect left
92 Restraints NOTE: Circuit front impact sensor internal fault
Performance or SENS F / LH CRASH
incorrect SENS R
operation
Left front impact
sensor
performance or
incorrect operation
B0090- Left Frontal Suspect left front impact sensor internal fault
96 Restraints NOTE: Circuit
Component SENS F / LH CRASH
internal failure SENS R
Left front impact

sensor internal
failure
11 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor 1 (door) circuit for short to ground
Sensor 1 - reference LH SIDE SENS
Circuit short to F1 / LH SIDE SENS R1
ground
Left side impact
sensor 1 circuit
short to ground
12 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor 1 (door) circuit for short to power
Sensor 1 -
reference LH SIDE SENS
battery
Left side impact
sensor 1 circuit
short to power
B0091- Left Side Configuration error: This input has been switched off but
Sensor 1 - reference LH SIDE SENS control module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Signal F1 / LH SIDE SENS R1 system
plausibility
failure Left side impact
sensor 1
configuration error
81 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor 1 (door) circuit for open circuit fault
Sensor 1 - reference LH SIDE SENS Install a new left side impact sensor 1 (door) as necessary
Invalid serial F1 / LH SIDE SENS R1
data received
Left side impact
sensor 1 circuit
open circuit
Left side impact
sensor 1 failure
B0091- Left Side Install a new left side impact sensor 1 (door) as necessary
Performance or F1 / LH SIDE SENS R1
incorrect
operation Left side impact
sensor 1 internal
failure
B0091- Left Side Install a new left side impact sensor 1 (door) as necessary
Component F1 / LH SIDE SENS R1
internal failure
Left side impact
sensor 1 internal
failure
11 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor 2 (B pillar) circuit for short to ground
ground
Left side impact
sensor 2 circuit
short to ground
12 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor 2 (B pillar) circuit for short to power
battery
Left side impact
sensor 2 circuit
short to power
plausibility
sensor 2 signal
81 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor 2 (B pillar) circuit for open circuit fault
Sensor 2 - reference LH SIDE SENS Install a new left side impact sensor 2 (B pillar) as
Invalid serial F1 / LH SIDE SENS R1 necessary
data received
Left side impact
sensor 2 circuit
open circuit
Left side impact
sensor 2 fault
B0092- Left Side Suspect left side impact sensor 2 (B pillar) internal fault
incorrect
sensor 2
performance or
incorrect operation
B0092- Left Side Suspect left side impact sensor 2 (B pillar) internal fault
internal failure
Left side impact
sensor 2 internal
failure
11 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor 3 circuit for short to ground
ground
Left side impact
sensor 3 circuit
short to ground
12 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor 3 circuit for short to power
battery
Left side impact
sensor 3 circuit
short to power
plausibility
sensor 3
configuration error
81 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor 3 circuit for open circuit. Install a new left
Sensor 3 - reference LH SIDE SENS side impact sensor 3 as necessary
Invalid serial F2 / LH SIDE SENS R2
data received
Left side impact
sensor 3 circuit
open circuit
Left side impact
sensor 3 failure
B0093- Left Side Install a new left side impact sensor 3 as necessary
incorrect
sensor 3 internal
failure
B0093- Left Side Install a new left side impact sensor 3 as necessary
internal failure
Left side impact
sensor 3 internal
failure
B0095- Right Frontal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the right front
11 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor circuit for short to ground
Sensor - reference RH CRASH
Circuit short to SENS F / RH CRASH
ground SENS R
Right front impact

sensor circuit
short to ground
12 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor circuit for short to power
Circuit short to SENS F / RH CRASH
battery SENS R
Right front impact

sensor circuit
short to power
B0095- Right Frontal Configuration error: This input has been switched off but
Sensor - Signal reference RH CRASH control module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
plausibility SENS F / RH CRASH system
failure SENS R
Right front impact

sensor signal
81 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor circuit for open circuit fault. Install a new
Sensor - reference RH CRASH right front impact sensor as necessary
Invalid serial SENS F / RH CRASH
data received SENS R
Right front impact

sensor open
circuit
Right front impact
sensor fault
B0095- Right Frontal Test component fixings for security. If secure suspect right
92 Restraints NOTE: Circuit front impact sensor internal fault
Performance or SENS F / RH CRASH
incorrect SENS R
operation
Right front impact
sensor
performance or
incorrect operation
B0095- Right Frontal Suspect right front impact sensor internal fault
Component SENS F / RH CRASH
internal failure SENS R
Right front impact

sensor internal
failure
11 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor 1 (door) circuit for short to ground
Sensor 1 - reference RH SIDE SENS
Circuit short to F1 / RH SIDE SENS R1
ground
Right side impact
sensor 1 circuit
short to ground
12 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor 1 (door) circuit for short to power
battery
Right side impact
sensor 1 circuit
short to power
B0096- Right Side Configuration error: This input has been switched off but
Sensor 1 - reference RH SIDE SENS control module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Signal F1 / RH SIDE SENS R1 system
plausibility
failure Right side impact
sensor 1
configuration error
81 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor 1 (door) circuit for open circuit fault. Install
Sensor 1 - reference RH SIDE SENS a new right side impact sensor 1 (door) as necessary
Invalid serial F1 / RH SIDE SENS R1
data received
Right side impact
sensor 1 circuit
open circuit
Right side impact
sensor 1 failure
B0096- Right Side Install a new right side impact sensor 1 (door) as
92 Restraints NOTE: Circuit necessary
Performance or F1 / RH SIDE SENS R1
incorrect
operation Right side impact
sensor 1 internal
failure
B0096- Right Side Install a new right side impact sensor 1 (door) as
96 Restraints NOTE: Circuit necessary
Component F1 / RH SIDE SENS R1
internal failure
Right side impact
sensor 1 internal
failure
11 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor 2 (B pillar) circuit for short to ground
ground
Right side impact
sensor 2 circuit
short to ground
12 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor 2 (B pillar) circuit for short to power
battery
Right side impact
sensor 2 circuit
short to power
plausibility
sensor 2 signal
81 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor 2 (B pillar) circuit for open circuit fault.
Sensor 2 - reference RH SIDE SENS Install a new right side impact sensor 2 (B pillar) as
Invalid serial F1 / RH SIDE SENS R1 necessary
data received
Right side impact
sensor 2 circuit
open circuit
Right side impact
sensor 2 fault
B0097- Right Side Suspect right side impact sensor 2 (B pillar) internal fault
incorrect
sensor 2
performance or
incorrect operation
B0097- Right Side Suspect right side impact sensor 2 (B pillar) internal fault
internal failure
Right side impact
sensor 2 internal
failure
11 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor 3 circuit for short to ground
ground
Right side impact
sensor 3 circuit
short to ground
12 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor 3 circuit for short to power
battery
Right side impact
sensor 3 circuit
short to power
plausibility
sensor 3
configuration error
81 Restraints NOTE: Circuit impact sensor 3 circuit for open circuit. Install a new right
Sensor 3 - reference RH SIDE SENS side impact sensor 3 as necessary
Invalid serial F2 / RH SIDE SENS R2
data received
Right side impact
sensor 3 circuit
open circuit
Right side impact
sensor 3 failure
B0098- Right Side Install a new right side impact sensor 3 as necessary
incorrect
sensor 3 internal
failure
B0098- Right Side Install a new right side impact sensor 3 as necessary
internal failure
Right side impact
sensor 3 internal
failure
B00A0- Occupant Occupant Test the occupant classification sensor control module for
49 Classification classification stored DTCs
System - sensor control
Internal module internal
electronic fault
failure
B00A0- Occupant Signal plausibility For Federal specification vehicles, configuration error: This
64 Classification failure input has been switched off but the sensor is actually
System - installed. Re-configure the restraints control module using
Signal the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
plausibility For non-Federal specification vehicles: This input has been
failure switched off and the sensor is not installed. 1) This fault
may be caused by an extended engine crank. Check for
symptoms of poor engine starting or depleted battery
charge levels. 2) Check the stowed unused safety belt
tension sensor connector located on the passenger side
rear heel board for any water ingress/dampness. Dry out,
clean and prevent any further water ingress
B00A0- Occupant CAN bus circuit Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN bus
88 Classification fault circuit to the occupant classification sensor control module
System - Bus for fault
off
B00A0- Occupant Occupant Test the occupant classification sensor control module for
92 Classification classification stored DTCs
System - sensor control
Performance or module internal
incorrect fault
operation
B00B5- Driver Seat Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the driver seat
11 Track Position NOTE: Circuit track position sensor circuit for short to ground
Restraints reference DR SEAT
Sensor - TRACK POS F
Circuit short to
ground Driver seat track
position sensor
circuit short to
ground
15 Track Position NOTE: Circuit track position sensor circuit for short to power or open
Restraints reference DR SEAT circuit
Circuit short to
battery or Driver seat track
open position sensor
circuit short to
power or open
circuit
1D Track Position NOTE: Circuit track position sensor circuit for fault
Restraints reference DR SEAT
Circuit current
out of range Driver seat track
position sensor
circuit current out
of range
B00B5- Driver Seat Configuration error: This input has been switched off but
64 Track Position NOTE: Circuit the sensor is actually installed. Re-configure the restraints
Restraints reference DR SEAT control module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Sensor - Signal TRACK POS F system
plausibility
failure Signal plausibility
failure
B00C0- Passenger Seat Occupant Test the occupant classification sensor control module for
96 Occupant classification stored DTCs
Classification system module
Sensor "A" - internal fault
Component
internal failure
B00D2- Restraint Events information Suspect instrument cluster internal fault. Test for stored
68 System DTCs
Malfunction
Indicator 1 -
Event
information
B00D2- Restraint Missing message Test the CAN bus circuit to the instrument cluster for
87 System from the circuit fault
Malfunction instrument cluster
Indicator 1 -
Missing
message
B00D5- Restraint Passenger airbag Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the passenger
14 System deactivation lamp airbag deactivation lamp circuit for short to ground or open
Passenger circuit short to
Disable ground or open
Indicator - circuit
Circuit short to
ground or open
B00D5- Restraint Module not Re-configure the restraints control module using the
55 System configured manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Passenger
Disable
Indicator - Not
configured
B00DF- Passenger Passenger airbag Install a new passenger airbag deactivation switch as
00 Restraints deactivation necessary
Disable Switch switch stuck
- No sub type Passenger airbag
information deactivation
switch internal
failure
B00DF- Passenger Passenger airbag Calibrate the passenger airbag deactivation switch using
54 Restraints deactivation the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Disable Switch switch missing
- Missing calibration
calibration
B00DF- Passenger Passenger airbag Re-configure the restraints control module using the
64 Restraints deactivation manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Disable Switch switch
- Signal configuration error
plausibility
failure
B1211- Driver Seatbelt Driver safety belt Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the driver
11 Retractor retractor and safety belt retractor and pretensioner deployment control
Pretensioner pretensioner circuit short to ground
Deployment deployment
Control - control circuit
ground
Pretensioner pretensioner circuit short to power
Circuit short to short to power
battery
1A Retractor retractor and safety belt retractor and pretensioner deployment control
Pretensioner pretensioner circuit for circuit shorted to each other
Circuit resistance below
resistance threshold
below
threshold
1B Retractor retractor and safety belt retractor and pretensioner deployment control
Pretensioner pretensioner circuit open circuit, high resistance
Circuit open circuit, high
resistance resistance
above
threshold
B1211- Driver Seatbelt Driver safety belt Re-configure the restraints control module using the
64 Retractor retractor and manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Pretensioner pretensioner
Control - control
Signal configuration error
plausibility
failure
Pretensioner pretensioner circuit for faults
Control - control short
Incorrect circuit between
assembly two different
circuits (at least
two faults)
11 Buckle NOTE: Circuit safety belt pretensioner deployment control circuit short to
Pretensioner reference DR PRETEN F1 ground
Deployment / DR PRETEN R1
Control -
Circuit short to Driver safety belt
ground pretensioner
deployment
control circuit
short to ground
12 Buckle NOTE: Circuit safety belt pretensioner deployment control circuit short to
Pretensioner reference DR PRETEN F1 power
Control -
Circuit short to Driver safety belt
battery pretensioner
deployment
control circuit
short to power
1A Buckle NOTE: Circuit safety belt pretensioner deployment control circuit for
Pretensioner reference DR PRETEN F1 circuit shorted to each other
Control -
Circuit Driver safety belt
resistance pretensioner
below deployment
threshold control circuit
resistance below
threshold
1B Buckle NOTE: Circuit safety belt pretensioner deployment control circuit open
Pretensioner reference DR PRETEN F1 circuit, high resistance
Control -
Circuit Driver safety belt
resistance pretensioner
above deployment
open circuit, high
resistance
B1212- Driver Seatbelt Re-configure the restraints control module using the
64 Buckle NOTE: Circuit manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Pretensioner reference DR PRETEN F1
Control -
Signal Driver safety belt
plausibility retractor
failure pretensioner
deployment
control
configuration error
95 Buckle NOTE: Circuit safety belt pretensioner deployment control circuit for
Pretensioner reference DR PRETEN F1 faults
Control -
Incorrect Driver safety belt
assembly pretensioner
deployment
control short
circuit between
two different
circuits (at least
two faults)
11 Seatbelt Buckle NOTE: Circuit safety belt pretensioner deployment control circuit short to
Pretensioner reference PASS PRETEN ground
Deployment F1 / PASS PRETEN R1
Control -
Circuit short to Passenger safety
ground belt pretensioner
deployment
control circuit
short to ground
12 Seatbelt Buckle NOTE: Circuit safety belt pretensioner deployment control circuit short to
Pretensioner reference PASS PRETEN power
Control -
Circuit short to Passenger safety
battery belt pretensioner
deployment
control circuit
short to power
1A Seatbelt Buckle NOTE: Circuit safety belt pretensioner deployment control circuit for
Pretensioner reference PASS PRETEN circuit shorted to each other
Control -
Circuit Passenger safety
resistance belt pretensioner
below deployment
resistance below
threshold
1B Seatbelt Buckle NOTE: Circuit safety belt pretensioner deployment control circuit open
Pretensioner reference PASS PRETEN circuit, high resistance
Control -
Circuit Passenger safety
resistance belt pretensioner
above deployment
open circuit, high
resistance
B1213- Passenger Re-configure the restraints control module using the

64 Seatbelt Buckle NOTE: Circuit manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Pretensioner reference PASS PRETEN
Control -
Signal Passenger safety
plausibility belt retractor
failure pretensioner
deployment
control
configuration error
95 Seatbelt Buckle NOTE: Circuit safety belt pretensioner deployment control circuit for
Pretensioner reference PASS PRETEN faults
Control -
Incorrect Passenger safety
assembly belt pretensioner
deployment
control short
circuit between
two different
circuits (at least
two faults)
B1A00- Control Module System voltage Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the power and
16 - Circuit low at control ground circuit for fault
voltage below module (supply
threshold voltage less than
9 volts)
B1A00- Control Module System voltage Test the engine control module for stored DTCs. Suspect
17 - Circuit high (supply charging system fault. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
voltage above voltage supply and test the power and ground circuits
threshold greater than 16
volts)
B1A00- Control Module Restraints control Suspect restraints control module internal fault. Install a
49 - Internal module internal new restraints control module as necessary
failure
B1A17- Driver Stage 1 Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the driver
95 Airbag Squib NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 1) circuit for faults
Short Circuit reference DR AIRBAG F1
To Ignition / DR AIRBAG R1
Loop -
Incorrect Driver airbag
assembly (stage 1) incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between
two different
circuits (at least
two faults)
B1A19- Driver Stage 2 Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the driver
95 Airbag Squib NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 2) circuit for faults
Short Circuit reference DR AIRBAG F2
To Ignition / DR AIRBAG R2
Loop -
Incorrect Driver airbag
assembly. Short
circuit between
two different
circuits (at least
two faults)
B1A21- Passenger Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the passenger
95 Stage 1 Airbag NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 1) circuit for faults
Squib Short reference PASS AIRBAG
Circuit To F1 / PASS AIRBAG R1
Ignition Loop -
Incorrect Passenger airbag
assembly. Short
circuit between
two different
circuits (at least
two faults)
B1A23- Passenger Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the passenger
95 Stage 2 Airbag NOTE: Circuit airbag (stage 2) circuit for faults
Squib Short reference PASS AIRBAG
Circuit To F2 / PASS AIRBAG R2
Ignition Loop -
Incorrect Passenger airbag
assembly. Short
circuit between
two different
circuits (at least
two faults)
B1A29- Left Side Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the left side
95 Airbag Squib NOTE: Circuit airbag (seat) circuit for faults
Short Circuit reference LH SIDE A/BAG
To Ignition F1 / LH SIDE A/BAG R1
Loop -
Incorrect Left side airbag
assembly incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between
two different
circuits (at least
two faults)
B1A31- Right Side Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the right side
95 Airbag Squib NOTE: Circuit airbag (seat) circuit for faults
Short Circuit reference RH SIDE A/BAG
To Ignition F1 / RH SIDE A/BAG R1
Loop -
Incorrect Right side airbag
assembly incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between
two different
circuits (at least
two faults)
B1A33- Left Curtain Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the left side air
95 Airbag Squib NOTE: Circuit curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit for faults
Short Circuit reference LH SIDE CUR
To Ignition F1 / LH SIDE CUR R1
Loop -
Incorrect Left side air
assembly curtain incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between
two different
circuits (at least
two faults)
B1A35- Right Curtain Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the right side
95 Airbag Squib NOTE: Circuit air curtain (rows 1 and 2) circuit for faults
Short Circuit reference RH SIDE CUR
To Ignition F1 / RH SIDE CUR R1
Loop -
Incorrect Right side air
assembly curtain incorrect
assembly. Short
circuit between
two different
circuits (at least
two faults)
B1A40- Left Side Only logged in the Re-configure the restraints control module using the
11 (pelvic) 2 - event of incorrect manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Circuit short to restraints control
ground module
configuration. Not
used for 2010MY
Circuit short to restraints control
battery module
configuration. Not
used for 2010MY
1A (pelvic) 2 - event of incorrect manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Circuit restraints control
resistance module
below configuration. Not
threshold used for 2010MY
1B (pelvic) 2 - event of incorrect manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Circuit restraints control
resistance module
above configuration. Not
threshold used for 2010MY
Signal restraints control
plausibility module
failure configuration. Not
used for 2010MY
Incorrect restraints control
assembly module
configuration. Not
used for 2010MY
B1A41- Left Side Left side (pelvic) 2 Re-configure the restraints control module using the
95 (pelvic) 2 incorrect manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Short circuit To assembly. Short
Ignition Loop – circuit between
Incorrect two different
assembly circuits (at least
two faults)
B1A55- Crash Record Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the crash
14 Output - NOTE: Circuit record output circuit for short to ground or open circuit. If
Circuit short to reference CRASH OUTPUT this has occurred after a software download then
ground or open disconnect the battery for 1 minute
Crash record
output circuit
short to ground or
open
B1A55- Crash Record Re-configure the restraints control module using the
64 Output - Signal NOTE: Circuit manufacturer approved diagnostic system
plausibility reference CRASH OUTPUT
failure
Signal plausibility
failure
B1D74- Passenger Passenger airbag Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the passenger
11 Airbag Cutoff activation switch airbag activation switch circuit for short circuit to ground
Enable Switch - circuit short circuit
Circuit short to to ground
ground
12 Airbag Cutoff activation switch airbag activation switch circuit for short circuit to power
Enable Switch - circuit short circuit
Circuit short to to power
battery
13 Airbag Cutoff activation switch airbag activation switch circuit for open circuit, high
Enable Switch - circuit open resistance
Circuit open circuit, high
resistance
11 Airbag Cutoff deactivation airbag deactivation switch circuit for short circuit to ground
Disable Switch switch circuit short
- Circuit short circuit to ground
to ground
12 Airbag Cutoff deactivation airbag deactivation switch circuit for short circuit to power
Disable Switch switch circuit short
- Circuit short circuit to power
to battery
13 Airbag Cutoff deactivation airbag deactivation switch circuit for open circuit, high
Disable Switch switch open resistance
- Circuit open circuit, high
resistance
U0001- High Speed CAN bus circuit Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN bus
88 CAN fault circuit for fault
Communication
Bus - Bus off
U0122- Lost Lost Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test the power and
87 Communication communication ground connections to the anti-lock brake system control
With Vehicle with the anti-lock module. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Dynamics brake system system, complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to
Control Module control module electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN network
- Missing between the restraints control module and the anti-lock
message brake system control module
U0300- Internal Mis-match Re-configure the restraints control module with the latest
55 Control Module between vehicle level software using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Software and restraints system
Incompatibility control module
- Not software levels
configured
U1A02- Permanent Wiring harness Restraints control module memory full - refer to the new
66 Memory Store fault module installation note at the top of the DTC index (not
Full – Signal Restraints control warrantable change)
has too many module internal
transitions / fault
events
U1A03- Car Missing message Test central junction box for stored DTCs. Refer to
87 Configuration electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN bus circuit to
Parameter – the central junction box for fault
Missing
message
U1A14- CAN Not configured Suspect restraints control module internal fault
55 Initialization
Failure - Not
configured
U201A- Control Module Incorrect Re-configure the restraints control module using the
4A Main component manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC and
Calibration installed re-test. If DTC remains, suspect restraints control module
Data - internal fault
Incorrect
component
installed
U201A- Control Module Restraints control Re-configure the restraints control module with the latest
51 Main module not level software using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Calibration programmed system
Data - Not
programmed
U201B- Control Module Incorrect Re-configure the restraints control module using the
4A Calibration component manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC and
Data #2 - installed re-test. If DTC remains, suspect restraints control module
Incorrect internal fault
component
installed
U201B- Control Module Not programmed Re-configure the restraints control module using the
51 Calibration manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC and
Data #2 - Not re-test. If DTC remains, suspect restraints control module
programmed internal fault
U201C- Control Module Incorrect Re-configure the restraints control module using the
4A Calibration component manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC and
Data #3 - installed re-test. If DTC remains, suspect restraints control module
Incorrect internal fault
component
installed
U201C- Control Module Not programmed Re-configure the restraints control module using the
51 Calibration manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC and
Data #3 - Not re-test. If DTC remains, suspect restraints control module
programmed internal fault
U3000- Control Module Internal electronic Suspect restraints control module internal fault
49 - Internal failure
electronic
failure
U3002- Vehicle Vehicle/component Re-configure the restraints control module using the
81 Identification mis-match. manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC and
Number - Corrupt VIN data re-test. If DTC remains, suspect restraints control module
Invalid serial being transmitted, internal fault
data received module previously
installed to other
vehicle
Satellite Radio Control Module (SRCM)
Satellite Radio Control Module (SRCM)
CAUTIONS:
vehicle.
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Satellite Radio Control Module
(SRCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual.

B1A89- Satellite Digital radio antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
01 Antenna - circuit short circuit digital radio antenna circuit for short circuit to ground,
General to ground, short short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
electrical circuit to power, If fault persists, install a new satellite radio control module
failure open circuit, high
resistance
Satellite radio
control module
internal failure
U3000- Control Car configuration file Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
4A Module - mismatch and up-date the car configuration file as necessary. Clear
Incorrect the diagnostic trouble code and re-test
component
installed
U3000- Control Satellite radio Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
55 Module - Not control module not configure the satellite radio control module with the latest
configured configured level software
U3000- Control Satellite radio Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
87 Module - control module configure the satellite radio control module with the latest
Missing configuration level software
message incomplete/corrupted
U3000- Control Satellite radio Check that the satellite radio control module cooling vents
98 Module - control module / air circulation are not obstructed. Cool the vehicle
Component cooling vents interior down by ensuring it is in the shade and have the
or system obstructed A/C on cool. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
over Satellite radio system, clear the DTCs and retest
temperature control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
internal failure the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
satellite radio control module
Steering Angle Sensor Module (SASM)
Steering Angle Sensor Module (SASM)
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Steering Angle Sensor Module,
for additional Diagnosis and Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Steering System (211-00 Steering System - General Information, Diagnosis and
Testing).

C0051- Steering Wheel System internal failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
04 Position Sensor Harness/connector issue steering angle sensor module connector and circuits.
- System Check the sensor calibration using the approved
internal diagnostic/calibration system before renewing the
failures steering angle sensor module
C0051- Steering Wheel Signal compare failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
62 Position Sensor Harness/connector issue steering angle sensor module connector and circuits.
- Signal Check the steering angle sensor module calibration
compare failure using the approved diagnostic/calibration system
C0051- Steering Wheel Signal plausibility failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
64 Position Sensor Harness/connector issue steering angle sensor module, connector and circuits.
- Signal Check the steering angle sensor module calibration
plausibility using the approved diagnostic/calibration system
failure
U0001- High Speed Bus off Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
88 CAN complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Communication electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
Bus - Bus off
U0122- Lost Lost communication Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Communication with the anti-lock brake power and ground supplies to the anti-lock brake
With Vehicle system control module system control module. Check CAN network between
Dynamics the steering angle sensor module and the anti-lock
Control Module brake system control module. Alternatively, using the
- No sub type manufacturer approved diagnostic system, carry out
information CAN network integrity test
U0140- Lost Lost communication Configure the central junction box and the steering
00 Communication with the central junction angle sensor module using the approved
With Body box diagnostic/calibration system. Refer to the network
Control Module communications section of the workshop manual
- No sub type
information
U0300- Internal Connector or connection Configure the modules using the approved
55 Control Module failure diagnostic/calibration system. Refer to the network
Software CAN hardware failure communications section of the workshop manual
Incompatibility CAN configuration
- Not failure - the steering
configured angle sensor module
has failed to recognize
the correct master
configuration ID
- Indicates that an
internal software
mismatch has
occurred which
could be due to
problems with
software
download
between the
master and the
rest of network
nodes
U1A14- CAN Steering angle sensor Renew the steering angle sensor module
49 Initialization module internal CAN
failure- controller failure
Internal
electronic
failure
U3002- Vehicle Mismatch between
62 Identification received VIN and stored NOTE: This DTC will occur if a steering angle sensor
Number - VIN in the steering module has been substituted from another vehicle to fix an
Signal compare angle sensor module issue with the original steering angle sensor module/vehicle
failure
Clear the diagnostic trouble code and retest. If the
problem persists, check and install new steering
angle sensor module as required
Tailgate Control Module (TGCM)
Tailgate Control Module (TGCM)
CAUTIONS:
guarantee confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or the donor
vehicle.
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
read by the manufacturer approved diagnostic system).
When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to three decimal
places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the
DMM leads into account.
If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests a fault is not present, an intermittent concern
Where an 'on demand self-test' is referred to, this can be accessed via the 'DTC Monitor' tab on the
manufacturers approved diagnostic system.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Tailgate Control Module
(TGCM), for additional Diagnosis and Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry
Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).

B10D0- Trunk Latch Clutch Check the tailgate latch for mechanical blockages
23 Switch - Signal stuck NOTE: Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
low reference LATCH tailgate ajar switch circuit for short circuit to ground
SECONDARY SIG Test the operation of the tailgate ajar witch
Install a new tailgate control module as necessary
Tailgate latch
not closed fully
Tailgate ajar
switch circuit
short circuit to
ground
Tailgate ajar
switch failure
Tailgate
control module
internal failure
B11C4- Boot/Trunk Close Test the operation of the tailgate close switch. Install a
23 Button - Signal stuck NOTE: Circuit new tailgate close switch as necessary
low reference TAILGATE Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
CLOSE tailgate close switch circuit for short circuit to ground
Tailgate close
switch stuck
active
Tailgate close
switch circuit
short circuit to
ground
Tailgate
control module
internal failure
B1316- Boot/Trunk Latch Check the tailgate latch for mechanical blockages
02 Power Close Unit - NOTE: Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
General signal failure reference STRIKER tailgate soft close actuator signal circuit for short circuit
HOME to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
Tailgate latch Install a new tailgate soft close actuator as necessary
not closed fully Install a new tailgate control module as necessary
Tailgate soft
close actuator
signal circuit
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Tailgate soft
close actuator
internal failure
Tailgate
control module
internal failure
B1316- Boot/Trunk Latch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
93 Power Close Unit - No NOTE: Circuit tailgate soft close actuator circuit for short circuit to
operation reference CLOSE ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
MTR+ / CLOSE MTR- / resistance
STRIKER HOME Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
tailgate soft close actuator signal circuit for short circuit
Tailgate soft to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
close actuator resistance
circuit short Install a new tailgate soft close actuator as necessary
circuit to Install a new tailgate control module as necessary
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Tailgate soft
close actuator
signal circuit
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Tailgate soft
close actuator
internal failure
Tailgate
control module
internal failure
C2005- Right Actuator - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit powered tailgate right strut circuit for short circuit to
ground reference MOTOR+ / ground
MOTOR- Install a new powered tailgate right strut as necessary
Powered
tailgate right
strut circuit
short circuit to
ground
Powered
tailgate right
strut internal
failure
Tailgate
control module
internal failure
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit powered tailgate right strut circuit for short circuit to
battery reference MOTOR+ / power
Powered
tailgate right
strut circuit
short circuit to
power
Powered
tailgate right
strut internal
failure
Tailgate
control module
internal failure
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit powered tailgate right strut circuit for open circuit, high
reference MOTOR+ / resistance
Powered
tailgate right
strut circuit
open circuit,
high resistance
Powered
tailgate right
strut internal
failure
Tailgate
control module
internal failure
15 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit powered tailgate right strut position sensor power
battery or open reference HALL SENS supply circuit for short circuit to battery, open circuit,
PWR high resistance
Install a new powered tailgate right strut as necessary
Powered Install a new tailgate control module as necessary
tailgate right
strut position
sensor power
supply circuit
short circuit to
battery, open
circuit, high
resistance
Powered
tailgate right
strut internal
failure
Tailgate
control module
internal failure
C2005- Right Actuator - Check that the tailgate movement is not inhibited by an
19 Circuit current above NOTE: Circuit obstruction above or inside the luggage compartment.
threshold reference MOTOR+ / Check the condition of the mechanical linkages/hinges
MOTOR- Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
powered tailgate right strut circuit for short circuit to
Powered ground
tailgate Install a new powered tailgate right strut as necessary
movement Install a new tailgate control module as necessary
blocked
Powered
tailgate right
strut circuit
short circuit to
ground
Powered
tailgate right
strut internal
failure
Tailgate
control module
internal failure
C2005- Right Actuator - No Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
31 signal NOTE: Circuit powered tailgate right strut position sensor circuits for
reference HALL 1 / short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
HALL 2 / HALL GND circuit, high resistance
Install a new powered tailgate right strut as necessary
tailgate right
strut position
sensor circuits
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Powered
tailgate right
strut internal
failure
Tailgate
control module
internal failure
C2006- Left Actuator - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
11 short to ground NOTE: Circuit powered tailgate left strut circuit for short circuit to
reference MOTOR+ / ground
MOTOR- Install a new powered tailgate left strut as necessary
Powered
tailgate left
strut circuit
short circuit to
ground
Powered
tailgate left
strut internal
failure
Tailgate
control module
internal failure
12 short to battery NOTE: Circuit powered tailgate left strut circuit for short circuit to
reference MOTOR+ / power
Powered
tailgate left
strut circuit
short circuit to
power
Powered
tailgate left
strut internal
failure
Tailgate
control module
internal failure
13 open NOTE: Circuit powered tailgate left strut circuit for open circuit, high
reference MOTOR+ / resistance
Powered
tailgate left
strut circuit
open circuit,
high resistance
Powered
tailgate left
strut internal
failure
Tailgate
control module
internal failure
15 short to battery or NOTE: Circuit powered tailgate left strut position sensor power supply
open reference HALL SNS circuit for short circuit to battery, open circuit, high
PWR resistance
Install a new powered tailgate left strut as necessary
tailgate left
strut position
sensor power
supply circuit
short circuit to
battery, open
circuit, high
resistance
Powered
tailgate left
strut internal
failure
Tailgate
control module
internal failure
C2006- Left Actuator - Circuit Check that the tailgate movement is not inhibited by an
19 current above NOTE: Circuit obstruction above or inside the luggage compartment.
threshold reference MOTOR+ / Check the condition of the mechanical linkages/hinges
MOTOR- Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
powered tailgate left strut circuit for short circuit to
Powered ground
tailgate Install a new powered tailgate left strut as necessary
movement Install a new tailgate control module as necessary
blocked
Powered
tailgate left
strut circuit
short circuit to
ground
Powered
tailgate left
strut internal
failure
Tailgate
control module
internal failure
C2006- Left Actuator - No Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
31 signal NOTE: Circuit powered tailgate left strut position sensor circuits for
reference HALL 1 / short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
HALL 2 / HALL SNS circuit, high resistance
GND Install a new powered tailgate left strut as necessary
Powered
tailgate left
strut position
sensor circuits
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Powered
tailgate left
strut internal
failure
Tailgate
control module
internal failure
Bus off short circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and test the medium speed
circuit to to power, open circuit, high resistance
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
U0140- Lost Communication Central Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
00 With Central Junction junction box central junction box power and ground circuits for open
Box - No sub type power or circuit, high resistance
information ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
U0300- Internal Control Tailgate Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
00 Module Software control module configure the tailgate control module with the latest
Incompatibility - No is not level software
sub type information configured
correctly
U0401- Invalid Data Received Tailgate Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
68 From ECM/PCM A - control module check the engine control module for related DTCs and
Event information has received refer to the relevant DTC index
invalid data
from the
engine control
module
U0415- Invalid Data Received Tailgate Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
68 From Anti-Lock control module check the anti-lock brake system control module for
Braking System has received related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
(ABS) Control Module invalid data for
- Event information the anti-lock
brake system
control module
U201A- Control Module Main Tailgate Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
51 Calibration Data - control module configure the tailgate control module with the latest
Not programmed is not level software
configured
correctly
U201A- Control Module Main Tailgate Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
52 Calibration Data - control module configure the tailgate control module with the latest
Not activated is not level software
configured
correctly
U2100- Initial Configuration Tailgate Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
00 Not Complete - No control module configure the tailgate control module with the latest
sub type information is not level software
configured
correctly
U2101- Control Module Tailgate Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Configuration control module check and install the latest relevant level of software to
Incompatible - No is not the tailgate control module
sub type information configured Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
correctly check and up-date the car configuration file as
necessary. Clear the DTC and re-test
U3000- Control Module - Tailgate Install a new tailgate control module

44 Data memory failure control module
internal failure
- RAM
memory

45 Program memory control module
failure internal failure
- ROM
memory

46 Calibration/parameter control module
memory failure internal failure
- Non
volatile
memory

49 Internal electronic control module
failure internal failure
U3000- Control Module - The tailgate The ambient air temperature value received by the
4B Over temperature control module tailgate control module from the engine control module
has received has exceeded 80°C. This signal is transmitted on CAN.
an ambient If the value exceeds 80°C the tailgate control module
temperature strategy is to protect the powered tailgate struts by
value which inhibiting operation. Using the manufacturer approved
exceeded 80°C diagnostic system, check the engine control module for
ambient air temperature related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index. Check if the vehicle has been
exposed to very high ambient temperatures, for
example in a paint curing oven
U3003- Battery Voltage - Mis-match Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
62 Signal compare between the check datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage
failure voltage at the (0xDD02) - and compare it to battery voltage
tailgate control
module and
the voltage
value
broadcast on
the CAN bus
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Terrain
Response Switch Pack (TR)
Terrain Response Control Module (ATCM)
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
There are references to "power latch" within the DTC index. This is where the module must be reset by means
of a complete power down and power up.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the All Terrain Control Module, for
For additional information, refer to: Ride and Handling Optimization (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization,

C1A00- Control Module - The terrain response Rectify this DTC before attempting to rectify
46 Calibration/parameter switchpack has others. Record all DTCs logged and clear them.
memory failure indicated a With ignition on select a terrain response special
calibration/parameter program, turn off the ignition, then turn back on
memory failure for the ignition and verify the selected special
embedded systems program is still active. If the selected terrain
using FLASH response special program is still not active and
memory. This is has returned to the general program, confirm if
equivalent to DTC has returned. Repeat procedure again once
EEPROM in more. If DTC is still present install a new terrain
RAM/ROM/EEPROM response switchpack
embedded systems
Corruption in the
non-volatile memory
storage system
(EEPROM) in the
terrain response
switchpack
C1A01- LED - Component LED circuit short

96 internal failure circuit to ground or NOTE: If the system is in 'failsafe default mode due
open circuit to another issue no LEDs will illuminate. This fault does
not cause the system to go to 'failsafe default'.
Refer to the description and operation section of

workshop manual. Check terrain response system,
special program LEDs. One or more of the LEDs is
suspected of not illuminating as appropriate. With
the engine running move the terrain response
switchpack through all five programmes and
confirm the appropriate special program LED does
not illuminate when the terrain response
switchpack is in that position. Suspect the terrain
response switchpack, check and install a new
terrain response switchpack as required
C1A02- Rotary Encoder Stuck The terrain response

94 In Intermediate switchpack is held in NOTE: Suspect driver error do not replace the
Position - Unexpected an intermediate terrain response switchpack
operation position (between
the special Check for foreign object preventing correct
programmes) for operation of terrain response switchpack. Start the
more than 60 vehicle engine, rotate the terrain response
seconds switchpack until it has located a genuine detent,
Foreign object wait 60 seconds. Stop the vehicle engine, clear
preventing correct the DTC and retest
operation of terrain
response switchpack
Mechanical damage
to the terrain
response switchpack
U0001- High Speed CAN Bus off. The terrain Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
88 Communication Bus response switchpack the power and ground connections to the terrain
Off - Bus off has detected the response switchpack. Using the manufacturer
data bus is not approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN
available network integrity test. Refer to the electrical
CAN bus short circuit circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
to ground, power or
open circuit
Failure of another
control module on
the CAN bus
U0100- Lost Communication The terrain response Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 With The ECM/PCM switchpack has not system, check the engine control module for DTCs
'A' - No sub type received one or more and refer to the relevant DTC index. Using the
information expected messages manufacturer approved diagnostic system, carry
from the engine out network integrity test. Using the manufacturer
control module approved diagnostic system, re-configure the
Engine control engine control module. Refer to electrical circuit
module power circuit diagrams check the power and ground connections
open circuit to engine control module. Check the high speed
Engine control CAN low and CAN high circuits, repair as
module ground necessary. Clear the DTC and retest. If the
circuit open circuit problem persists, suspect the engine control
High speed CAN module. Check the system is operating correctly
circuit and the DTC does not return
communications
failure
Engine control
module disconnected
from the high speed
CAN communication
bus
Engine control
module high speed
CAN high circuit
open circuit
Engine control
module high speed
CAN Low circuit open
circuit
Engine control
module not
configured
Engine control
module failure
00 With The TCM - No switchpack has not system, check the transmission control module for
sub type information received one or more DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index. Using
expected messages the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
from the carry out network integrity test. Using the
transmission control manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
module configure the transmission control module. Refer
High speed CAN to electrical circuit diagrams check the power and
circuit ground connections to transmission control
communications module. Check the high speed CAN low and CAN
failure high circuits, repair as necessary. Clear the DTC
Transmission control and retest. If the problem persists, suspect the
module power circuit transmission control module. Check the system is
open circuit operating correctly and the DTC does not return
Transmission control
module ground
module disconnected
from the high speed
CAN communication
bus
module high speed
CAN high circuit
open circuit
module high speed
CAN low circuit open
circuit
module not
configured
module failure
00 With The Transfer switchpack has not system, check the transfer case control module
Case Control Module received one or more for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index.
- No sub type expected messages Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information from the transfer system, carry out network integrity test. Using the
case control module manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
High speed CAN configure the transfer case control module. Refer
circuit to electrical circuit diagrams check the power and
communications ground connections to transfer case control
failure module. Check the high speed CAN low and CAN
Transfer case control high circuits, repair as necessary. Clear the DTC
module power circuit and retest. If the problem persists, suspect the
open circuit transfer case control module. Check the system is
Transfer case control operating correctly and the DTC does not return
module ground
Transfer case control
module disconnected
from the high speed
CAN communication
bus
module high speed
circuit
module high speed
CAN high circuit
open circuit
module not
configured
module failure
00 With Anti-Lock Brake switchpack has not system, check the anti-lock brake system control
System (ABS) received one or more module for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Control Module - No expected messages index. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
sub type information from the anti-lock system, carry out network integrity test. Using the
brake system control manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
module configure the anti-lock brake system control
High speed CAN module. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams check
circuit the power and ground connections to anti-lock
communications brake system control module. Check the high
failure speed CAN low and CAN high circuits, repair as
Anti-lock brake necessary. Clear the DTC and retest. If the
system control problem persists, suspect the anti-lock brake
module power circuit system control module. Check the system is
open circuit operating correctly and the DTC does not return
Anti-lock brake
system control
module ground
Anti-lock brake
system control
module disconnected
from the high speed
CAN communication
bus
Anti-lock brake
system control
module high speed
circuit
Anti-lock brake
system control
module high speed
CAN high circuit
open circuit
Anti-lock brake
system control
module not
configured
Anti-lock brake
system control
module failure
00 With Suspension switchpack has not system, check the air suspension control module
Control Module 'A' - received one or more for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index.
No sub type expected messages Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information from the air system, carry out network integrity test. Using the
suspension control manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
module configure the air suspension control module. Refer
High speed CAN to electrical circuit diagrams check the power and
circuit ground connections to air suspension control
communications module. Check the high speed CAN low and CAN
failure high circuits, repair as necessary. Clear the DTC
Air suspension and retest. If the problem persists, suspect the air
control module suspension control module. Check the system is
power circuit open operating correctly and the DTC does not return
circuit
Air suspension
control module
ground circuit open
circuit
Air suspension
control module
disconnected from
the high speed CAN
communication bus
Air suspension
control module high
speed CAN low
Air suspension
control module high
speed CAN high
Air suspension
control module not
configured
Air suspension
control module
failure
00 With Suspension switchpack has not system, check the adaptive damping system
Control Module 'B' - received one or more control module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
No sub type expected messages DTC index. Using the manufacturer approved
information from the adaptive diagnostic system, carry out network integrity
damping system test. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
control module system, re-configure the adaptive damping
High speed CAN system control module. Refer to electrical circuit
circuit diagrams check the power and ground connections
communications to adaptive damping system control module.
failure Check the high speed CAN low and CAN high
Adaptive damping circuits, repair as necessary. Clear the DTC and
system control retest. If the problem persists, suspect the
module power circuit adaptive damping system control module. Check
open circuit the system is operating correctly and the DTC
Adaptive damping does not return
system control
module ground
Adaptive damping
system control
module disconnected
from the high speed
CAN communication
bus
Adaptive damping
system control
module high speed
circuit
Adaptive damping
system control
module high speed
CAN high circuit
open circuit
Adaptive damping
system control
module not
configured
Adaptive damping
system control
module failure
00 With Body Control switchpack has not system, check the central junction box for DTCs
Module - No sub type received one or more and refer to the relevant DTC index. Using the
information expected messages manufacturer approved diagnostic system, carry
from the central out network integrity test. Using the manufacturer
junction box approved diagnostic system, re-configure the
High speed CAN central junction box. Refer to electrical circuit
circuit diagrams check the power and ground connections
communications to central junction box. Check the high speed CAN
failure low and CAN high circuits, repair as necessary.
Central junction box Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
power circuit open suspect the central junction box. Check the
circuit system is operating correctly and the DTC does
Central junction box not return
ground circuit open
circuit
disconnected from
the high speed CAN
communication bus
high speed CAN low
high speed CAN high
not configured
failure
U0300- Internal Control The terrain response Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Module Software switchpack has failed system, check the CAN configuration in the terrain
Incompatibility - No to recognize a response switchpack, check correct software
sub type information matching master versions installed and update as necessary. If
configuration ID from similar DTCs from other modules exist suspect
the CAN data bus CAN Bus or CAN bus master control module.
master Check CAN bus operation, check the CAN
The terrain response configuration in the CAN bus master module,
switchpack has check correct software versions installed and
incorrect CAN update as necessary. Check the system is
configuration operating correctly and the DTC does not return
CAN bus master not
correctly configured
Message containing
configuration ID not
received due to CAN
bus issue
Message containing
configuration ID not
transmitted by CAN
bus master
U0401- Invalid Data Received The terrain response Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
68 From The ECM/PCM switchpack has system, check the engine control module for DTCs
'A' - Event detected that the and refer to the relevant DTC index, rectify as
information engine control required. Check the system is operating correctly
module had operated and the DTC does not return. If the problem
in a way or at a time persists, suspect the engine control module
that it had not been
commanded to
operate
The engine
management system,
engine control
module is unable to
support normal
terrain response
functionality, the
terrain response
system will go into
default condition
Engine management
fault
Engine control
module failure
68 From The TCM - switchpack has system, check the transmission control module for
Event information detected that the DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index, rectify
transmission control as required. Check the system is operating
module had operated correctly and the DTC does not return. If the
in a way or at a time problem persists, suspect the transmission control
that it had not been module
commanded to
operate
The transmission
control module is
unable to support
normal terrain
response
functionality, the
terrain response
system will go into
default condition
Transmission system
fault
module failure
68 From The Transfer switchpack has system, check the transfer case control module
Case Control Module detected that the for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index,
- Event information transfer case control rectify as required. Check the system is operating
in a way or at a time problem persists, suspect the transfer case control
that it had not been module
commanded to
operate
The transfer case
control module is
unable to support
normal terrain
response
functionality, the
terrain response
system will go into
default condition
Transfer case system
fault
module failure
68 From Anti-Lock Brake switchpack has system, check the anti-lock brake system control
System (ABS) detected that the module for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Control Module - anti-lock brake index, rectify as required. Check the system is
Event information system control operating correctly and the DTC does not return.
module had operated If the problem persists, suspect the anti-lock
in a way or at a time brake system control module
commanded to
operate
The anti-lock brake
system control
module is unable to
support normal
terrain response
functionality, the
terrain response
system will go into
default condition
Anti-lock brake
system fault
Anti-lock brake
system control
module failure
68 From Suspension switchpack has system, check the air suspension control module
Control Module 'A' - detected that the air for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index,
Event information suspension control rectify as required. Check the system is operating
in a way or at a time problem persists, suspect the air suspension
that it had not been control module
commanded to
operate
The air suspension
control module is
unable to support
normal terrain
response
functionality, the
terrain response
system will go into
default condition
Air suspension
system fault
Air suspension
control module
failure
68 From Body Control switchpack has system, check the central junction box for DTCs
Module - Event detected that the and refer to the relevant DTC index, rectify as
information central junction box required. Check the system is operating correctly
had operated in a and the DTC does not return. If the problem
way or at a time that persists, suspect the central junction box
it had not been
commanded to
operate
The central junction
box is unable to
support normal
terrain response
functionality, the
terrain response
system will go into
default condition
system fault
failure
U043A- Invalid Data Received The terrain response Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
68 From Suspension switchpack has system, check the adaptive damping system
Control Module "B" - detected that the control module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
Event information adaptive damping DTC index, rectify as required. Check the system
system control is operating correctly and the DTC does not
module had operated return. If the problem persists, suspect the
in a way or at a time adaptive damping system control module
commanded to
operate
The adaptive
damping system
control module is
unable to support
normal terrain
response
functionality, the
terrain response
system will go into
default condition
Adaptive damping
system fault
Adaptive damping
system control
module failure
U2101- Control Module The terrain response Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Configuration switchpack has system, check the car configuration file, rectify as
Incompatible - No detected a mismatch necessary. Check correct components for vehicle
sub type information between the configuration are installed, rectify as necessary.
hardware connected Check the system is operating correctly and the
and the hardware DTC does not return
expected
Vehicle not correctly
configured
Incorrect
components installed
for vehicle
configuration
Published: 27-Sep-2012
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code Index: Touch Screen DTC:
(TS)
Touch Screen (TS)
CAUTIONS:
vehicle
number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:
the warranty policy and procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in
read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system)
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the touch screen, for additional
diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant diagnosis and testing section.

B1087- LIN Bus "A" - LIN bus to the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the LIN bus
83 Value of signal rear view circuit to the rear view camera for short circuit to ground,
protection camera circuit short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
calculation short circuit to
incorrect ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
86 Signal invalid rear view circuit to the rear view camera for short circuit to ground,
camera circuit short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
87 Missing rear view circuit to the rear view camera for short circuit to ground,
message camera circuit short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
88 Bus off rear view circuit to the rear view camera for short circuit to ground,
camera circuit short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
B1D21- Remote control Steering wheel No steering wheel remote in-car entertainment switchpack
13 switch - Circuit switchpack functionality. This DTC is logged if the module detects an open
open fault circuit on the steering wheel audio switch signal line. Refer to
Clockspring the electrical circuit diagrams and test the signal line running
fault from the steering wheel audio switchpack through the
Wiring harness clockspring to the touch screen for insecure connectors, open
fault circuits, including intermittent faults (rotate steering wheel
during checks). Also test ground connections to the control
module for open circuits. Repair or replace wiring harness as
required
U0010- Medium speed Medium speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete
00 CAN CAN bus a CAN network integrity test
communication circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the medium
bus - No sub circuit to speed CAN circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
type ground, short power, open circuit, high resistance
information circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
U0010- Medium speed Medium speed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete
48 CAN CAN bus a CAN network integrity test
communication circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the medium
bus - circuit to speed CAN circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
Supervised ground, short power, open circuit, high resistance
software failure circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
U0140- Lost Lost Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete
00 communication communication a CAN network integrity test
with central with the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power and
junction box - central ground connections to the central junction box
No sub type junction box Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN circuit
information between the touch screen and the central junction box for
short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance
with body with the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power and
control module central ground connections to the central junction box
"B" - No sub junction box Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN circuit
type between the touch screen and the central junction box for
information short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance
with instrument with the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power and
panel cluster - instrument ground connections to the instrument cluster
No sub type cluster Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN circuit
information between the touch screen and the instrument cluster for short
resistance
with parking with the park Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power and
assist control distance ground connections to the park distance control module
module A - No control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN circuit
sub type between the touch screen and the park distance control
information module for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
00 communications communication a CAN network integrity test
with HVAC with the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power and
control module automatic ground connections to the automatic temperature control
- No sub type temperature module
information control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN circuit
between the touch screen and the automatic temperature
control module for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
00 Communication communication a CAN network integrity test
With Auxiliary with the fuel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power and
Heater Control fired booster ground connections to the fuel fired booster heater
Module - No heater Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN circuit
sub type between the touch screen and the fuel fired booster heater for
high resistance
U0184- Lost Lost

00 communications communication NOTE: This DTC may be stored even though no fault condition is
with radio - No with the present and should be ignored unless the customer has reported an
sub type integrated information and entertainment system concern. Clear the DTC and
information audio module retest. Verify the customer concern prior to diagnosis
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete

a MOST network integrity test
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power and
ground connections to the integrated audio module
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the MOST
circuit between the touch screen and the integrated audio
module
U0184- Lost The serial Check the serial number of the part is valid (as installed at
4A communications number of the the factory). If the part has been installed by a dealer the
with radio - component installation routine has not been performed correctly, install
Incorrect does not the component using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
component match the system. Clear the DTC and retest the system
installed serial number
stored in the
master module
U0186- Lost Lost

00 communication communication NOTE: This DTC may be stored even though no fault condition is
with audio with the audio present and should be ignored unless the customer has reported an
amplifier A - No amplifier information and entertainment system concern. Clear the DTC and
sub type module retest. Verify the customer concern prior to diagnosis
information
a CAN network integrity test
ground connections to the audio amplifier module
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN circuit
between the touch screen and the audio amplifier module for
short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance
4A communication number of the the factory). If the part has been installed by a dealer the
with audio component installation routine has not been performed correctly, install
amplifier A - does not the component using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Incorrect match the system. Clear the DTC and retest the system
component serial number
installed stored in the
master module
U0191- Lost Lost

with television - with the TV present and should be ignored unless the customer has reported an
No sub type control module information and entertainment system concern. Clear the DTC and
information retest. Verify the customer concern prior to diagnosis

ground connections to the TV control module
between the touch screen and the TV control module for short
resistance
with television - component installation routine has not been performed correctly, install
Incorrect does not the component using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
component match the system. Clear the DTC and retest the system
installed serial number
stored in the
master module
U0193- Lost Lost

with digital with the present and should be ignored unless the customer has reported an
audio control satellite radio information and entertainment system concern. Clear the DTC and
module A - No control module retest. Verify the customer concern prior to diagnosis
sub type
information Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete
ground connections to the satellite radio control module
between the touch screen and the satellite radio control
module for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
with digital component installation routine has not been performed correctly, install
audio control does not the component using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
module A - match the system. Clear the DTC and retest the system
Incorrect serial number
component stored in the
installed master module
U0194- Lost Lost

with digital with the digital present and should be ignored unless the customer has reported an
audio control radio control information and entertainment system concern. Clear the DTC and
module B - No module retest. Verify the customer concern prior to diagnosis
sub type
information Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete
ground connections to the digital radio control module
between the touch screen and the digital radio control module
for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance
with digital component installation routine has not been performed correctly, install
audio control does not the component using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
module B - match the system. Clear the DTC and retest the system
Incorrect serial number
component stored in the
installed master module
U0196- Lost Lost

with with the rear present and should be ignored unless the customer has reported an
entertainment seat information and entertainment system concern. Clear the DTC and
control module entertainment retest. Verify the customer concern prior to diagnosis
- Rear A - No control module
sub type Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete
information a CAN network integrity test
ground connections to the rear seat entertainment control
module
between the touch screen and the rear seat entertainment
control module for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
with component installation routine has not been performed correctly, install
entertainment does not the component using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
control module match the system. Clear the DTC and retest the system
- Rear A - serial number
Incorrect stored in the
component master module
installed
With "Seat with the driver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power and
Control Module seat module ground connections to the driver seat module
A" - No sub Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN circuit
type between the touch screen and the driver seat module for
high resistance
With "Seat with the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power and
Control Module passenger seat ground connections to the passenger seat module
B" - No sub module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN circuit
type between the touch screen and the passenger seat module for
high resistance
U023B- Lost Lost Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete
with image with the rear Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power and
processing view camera ground connections to the rear view camera
module B - No Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN circuit
sub type between the touch screen and the rear view camera for short
information circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
U025D- Lost Lost Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete
with front with the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power and
controls integrated ground connections to the integrated control panel
interface control panel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CAN circuit
module - No between the touch screen and the integrated control panel for
sub type short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
information high resistance
U0300- Internal control Touch screen Check the touch screen part number. Install the correct part
00 module is not as necessary. Check that the correct software is installed
software compatible
incapability - with the
No sub type vehicle
information
U0300- Internal control Touch screen Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
51 module software part numbers of the software installed. Re-configure the touch
software incorrect or screen with the latest level software as necessary
incapability - missing
Not
programmed
U1A24- MOST ring MOST ring
87 complete. No complete NOTE: This DTC may be stored even though no fault condition is
Communication MOST ring present and should be ignored unless the customer has reported an
- Missing node internal information and entertainment system concern. Clear the DTC and
message fault retest. Verify the customer concern prior to diagnosis
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the MOST ring
for fault, bypass each MOST module in turn to isolate faulty
node
U2003- Fibre optic MOST ring Check MOST ring for disconnected modules or fibreoptic cable
87 communication incomplete concerns
bus - Missing
message
U3000- Control module Touch screen Allow the system to cool, clear the diagnostic trouble code
4B - Over panel backlight and check/monitor system for re-occurrence, if DTC re-occurs,
temperature - High check and install a new touch screen as necessary
temperature
detected
U3000- Control module System shut This DTC is logged if the touch screen display control module
98 - Component or down request receives a system shut down request from another MOST
system over from another module that is registering as over temperature. Allow the
temperature module on system to cool, clear the diagnostic trouble code and
MOST ring check/monitor system for re-occurrence
MOST module If DTC re-occurs, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
- Internal check each MOST module for signs of overheating and related
temperature DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
over limit
U3003- Battery voltage Mis-match Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the power and
62 - Signal between the ground circuits to the touch screen compared to battery
compare failure supply voltage voltage
to the touch
screen and the
battery voltage
value
broadcast on
the CAN bus
Published: 31-Oct-2013
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Module
Name: Transfer Case Control Module
Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM)
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Transfer Case Control Module
(TCCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual
For additional information, refer to: Transfer Case (308-07 Transfer Case, Diagnosis and Testing).

P0560- System Voltage - Transfer case Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 No sub type control module check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
information power or ground (0xD111). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit open circuit, check the transfer case control module power and
high resistance ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Transfer case Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
control module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
internal failure a new transfer case control module and perform
routine - Transfer Case Replacement
P0561- System Voltage Transfer case Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Unstable - No sub control module check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
type information power or ground (0xD111). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P0562- System Voltage Low Transfer case Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 - No sub type control module check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
information power or ground (0xD111). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P0563- System Voltage Battery/charging

00 High - No sub type system fault NOTE: This DTC may be set when the vehicle is jump
information started.

check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
(0xD111). Refer to the relevant section of the
system
P0607- Control Module Transfer case Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Performance - No control module clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
sub type internal failure a new transfer case control module and perform
information routine - Transfer Case Replacement
P0634- PCM / ECM / TCM Transfer case NOTES:

00 Internal motor circuit short
Temperature A Too circuit to ground,
High - No sub type short circuit to Transfer case motor resistance should be 0.2 ohms to
information power, open 10.0 ohms.
circuit, high
resistance
Transfer case This DTC may be induced by excessive high/low range
control module changes.
internal failure
This DTC may be induced by prolonged off-road driving.
Allow the vehicle to cool. Using the manufacturer

approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
retest. If the fault persists, refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the transfer case motor
circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
a new transfer case control module and perform
P0641- Sensor Reference Transfer case

00 Voltage A Circuit - motor position NOTE: Transfer case motor position sensor voltage
No sub type sensor circuit short (sensor supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V,
information circuit to ground, resistance (signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be 16.0k
short circuit to ohms to 20.0k ohms and resistance (signal B circuit to
power, open ground circuit) should be 16.0k ohms to 20.0k ohms.
circuit, high
resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Transfer case transfer case motor position sensor circuit for short
control module circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
internal failure high resistance

00 Voltage A Circuit motor position NOTE: Transfer case motor position sensor voltage
Low - No sub type sensor circuit short (sensor supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V,
information circuit to ground resistance (signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be 16.0k
Transfer case ohms to 20.0k ohms and resistance (signal B circuit to
control module ground circuit) should be 16.0k ohms to 20.0k ohms.
internal failure
transfer case motor position sensor circuit for short
circuit to ground

00 Voltage A Circuit motor position NOTE: Transfer case motor position sensor voltage
High - No sub type sensor circuit short (sensor supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V,
information circuit to power resistance (signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be 16.0k
internal failure
circuit to power

00 Voltage B Circuit selector fork NOTE: Transfer case selector fork position sensor
Low - No sub type position sensor voltage (supply circuit to ground circuit) should be 4.0V to
information circuit short circuit 6.0V.
to ground
Transfer case Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
control module transfer case selector fork position sensor circuit for
internal failure short circuit to ground

00 Voltage B Circuit selector fork NOTE: Transfer case selector fork position sensor
High - No sub type position sensor voltage (supply circuit to ground circuit) should be 4.0V to
to power
internal failure short circuit to power
P0666- PCM/ECM/TCM Transfer case

00 Internal solenoid circuit NOTE: Transfer case solenoid resistance should be 0.2
Temperature short circuit to ohms to 10.0 ohms.
Sensor 'A' Circuit - ground
No sub type Transfer case Allow the vehicle to cool. Using the manufacturer
information control module approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
internal failure retest. If the fault persists, refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the transfer case solenoid
circuit for short circuit to ground
P0702- Transmission Transfer case

00 Control System control module NOTE: This DTC may be set during a forced reset by
Electrical - No sub power or ground the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
type information circuit open circuit,
high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Battery/charging check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
system fault (0xD111). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the transfer case control module power and
ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
and test the battery and charging system
P0712- Transmission Fluid Transfer case

00 Temperature motor temperature NOTE: Transfer case motor temperature sensor
Sensor A Circuit sensor circuit short (temperature signal circuit to motor position sensor ground
Low - No sub type circuit to ground circuit) resistance should be 1.0k ohms to 30.0k ohms.
information Transfer case
control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
internal failure transfer case motor temperature sensor circuit for
P0713- Transmission Fluid Transfer case

00 Temperature motor temperature NOTE: Transfer case motor temperature sensor
Sensor A Circuit sensor circuit short (temperature signal circuit to motor position sensor ground
High - No sub type circuit to power circuit) resistance should be 1.0k ohms to 30.0k ohms.
information Transfer case
internal failure transfer case motor temperature sensor circuit for
P0780- Shift Malfunction - Transfer case NOTES:

00 No sub type motor circuit short
information circuit to ground,
short circuit to Transfer case motor resistance should be 0.2 ohms to
power, open 10.0 ohms.
circuit, high
resistance
Transfer case Transfer case motor position sensor voltage (sensor
motor position supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V, resistance
sensor circuit short (signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be 16.0k ohms to
circuit to ground, 20.0k ohms and resistance (signal B circuit to ground circuit)
short circuit to should be 16.0k ohms to 20.0k ohms.
power, open
circuit, high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
resistance transfer case motor circuit for short circuit to ground,
Transfer case short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
internal failure transfer case motor position sensor circuit for short
Transfer case circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
a new transfer case and perform routine - Transfer
Case Replacement
P0806- Clutch Position Transfer case NOTES:

00 Sensor Circuit selector fork
Range/Performance position sensor not
- No sub type calibrated If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs are
information Transfer case also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s) first and
motor circuit short retest.
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power, open Transfer case motor resistance should be 0.2 ohms to
circuit, high 10.0 ohms.
resistance
Transfer case
motor position
Transfer case motor position sensor voltage (sensor
sensor circuit short
supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V, resistance
circuit to ground,
(signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be 16.0k ohms to
short circuit to
20.0k ohms and resistance (signal B circuit to ground circuit)
power, open
should be 16.0k ohms to 20.0k ohms.
circuit, high
resistance
Transfer case
Transfer case selector fork position sensor voltage
selector fork
(supply circuit to ground circuit) should be 4.0V to 6.0V.
position sensor
circuit short circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
to ground, short perform routine - Transfer Case Replacement. Clear
circuit to power, the DTCs and retest
open circuit, high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
resistance transfer case motor circuit for short circuit to ground,
motor failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
selector fork circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
position sensor high resistance
failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Transfer case transfer case selector fork position sensor circuit for
control module short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
internal failure circuit, high resistance
internal failure clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
a new transfer case motor and perform routine -
Transfer Case Replacement
a new transfer case selector fork position sensor and
perform routine - Transfer Case Replacement
Case Replacement
P0807- Clutch Position Transfer case

00 Sensor Circuit Low - motor position NOTE: Transfer case motor position sensor voltage
No sub type sensor circuit short (sensor supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V,
internal failure
circuit to ground
P0808- Clutch Position Transfer case

00 Sensor Circuit High motor position NOTE: Transfer case motor position sensor voltage
- No sub type sensor circuit short (sensor supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V,
internal failure
circuit to ground
P0826- Up and Down Transfer case NOTES:

00 Switch Circuit - No high/low range
sub type switch stuck active
information Transfer case This DTC will be set if the switch signal is active for >
high/low range 255 seconds.
switch signal circuit
short circuit to
power This DTC may be induced by the driver.
Transfer case
control module Check the operation of the transfer case high/low
internal failure range switch
check datalogger signal - TCCM Input Status
(0x1983). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the transfer case high/low range switch signal
circuits for short circuit to power
P0900- Clutch Actuator Transfer case

00 Circuit/Open - No motor circuit short NOTE: Transfer case motor resistance should be 0.2
sub type circuit to ground, ohms to 10.0 ohms.
information short circuit to
power, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
circuit, high transfer case motor circuit for short circuit to ground,

00 Circuit - No sub motor circuit short NOTE: Transfer case motor resistance should be 0.2
type information circuit to ground, ohms to 10.0 ohms.
short circuit to

00 Circuit - No sub motor circuit short NOTE: Transfer case motor resistance should be 0.2
type information circuit to ground, ohms to 10.0 ohms.
short circuit to
P0915- Gear Shift Position Transfer case NOTES:

00 Circuit motor position
Range/Performance sensor circuit short
- No sub type circuit to ground, If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs are
information short circuit to also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s) first and
power, open retest.
circuit, high
resistance
selector fork supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V, resistance
position sensor (signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be 16.0k ohms to
circuit short circuit 20.0k ohms and resistance (signal B circuit to ground circuit)
to ground, short should be 16.0k ohms to 20.0k ohms.
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
Transfer case selector fork position sensor voltage
Transfer case
(supply circuit to ground circuit) should be 4.0V to 6.0V.
selector fork
position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
failure transfer case motor position sensor circuit for short
motor failure high resistance
internal failure short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
a new transfer case selector fork position sensor and
perform routine - Transfer Case Replacement
P0916- Gear Shift Position Transfer case

00 Circuit Low - No sub selector fork NOTE: Transfer case selector fork position sensor
type information position sensor voltage (supply circuit to ground circuit) should be 4.0V to
circuit short circuit 6.0V.
to ground
internal failure short circuit to ground
P0917- Gear Shift Position Transfer case

00 Circuit High - No selector fork NOTE: Transfer case selector fork position sensor
sub type position sensor voltage (supply circuit to ground circuit) should be 4.0V to
to power
internal failure short circuit to power
P173A- Clutch Actuator Transfer case NOTES:

00 Position Sensor motor circuit short
Circuit circuit to ground,
Range/Performance short circuit to If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs are
- No sub type power, open also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s) first and
information circuit, high retest.
resistance
Transfer case
motor position Transfer case motor resistance should be 0.2 ohms to
sensor circuit short 10.0 ohms.
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Transfer case
motor failure
Transfer case
internal failure transfer case motor circuit for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance
P173B- Clutch Actuator Transfer case

00 Position Sensor motor position NOTE: Transfer case motor position sensor voltage
Circuit Low - No sub sensor circuit short (sensor supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V,
type information circuit to ground resistance (signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be 16.0k
internal failure
circuit to ground
P173C- Clutch Actuator Transfer case

00 Position Sensor motor position NOTE: Transfer case motor position sensor voltage
Circuit High - No sensor circuit short (sensor supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V,
sub type circuit to power resistance (signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be 16.0k
information Transfer case ohms to 20.0k ohms and resistance (signal B circuit to
internal failure
circuit to power
P1804- 4-Wheel Drive High Transfer case high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Indicator Circuit range LED circuit transfer case high range LED circuit for short circuit
Failure - No sub short circuit to to ground, open circuit, high resistance
type information ground, open
circuit, high
resistance
00 Indicator Short range LED circuit transfer case high range LED circuit for short circuit
Circuit To Battery - short circuit to to power
No sub type power
information
00 Indicator Short range LED circuit transfer case high range LED circuit for short circuit
Circuit To Ground - short circuit to to ground
No sub type ground
information
P1808- 4-Wheel Drive Low Transfer case low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Indicator Circuit range LED circuit transfer case low range LED circuit for short circuit to
Failure - No sub short circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance
type information ground, open
circuit, high
resistance
P1810- 4-Wheel Drive Low Transfer case low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 Indicator Short range LED circuit transfer case low range LED circuit for short circuit to
Circuit To Battery - short circuit to power
No sub type power
information
P181B- Clutch Actuator Transfer case
00 Changeover solenoid circuit NOTE: Transfer case solenoid resistance should be 0.2
Solenoid Low - No short circuit to ohms to 10.0 ohms.
sub type ground
information Transfer case Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
control module transfer case solenoid circuit for short circuit to
internal failure ground
P181C- Clutch Actuator Transfer case

00 Changeover solenoid circuit NOTE: Transfer case solenoid resistance should be 0.2
Solenoid High - No short circuit to ohms to 10.0 ohms.
sub type power
information Transfer case Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
control module transfer case solenoid circuit for short circuit to power
P181D- Clutch Actuator Transfer case NOTES:

00 Changeover motor position
Solenoid sensor circuit short
Range/Performance circuit to ground, If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs are
- No sub type short circuit to also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s) first and
information power, open retest.
circuit, high
resistance
solenoid circuit supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V, resistance
short circuit to (signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be 16.0k ohms to
ground, short 20.0k ohms and resistance (signal B circuit to ground circuit)
circuit to power, should be 16.0k ohms to 20.0k ohms.
open circuit, high
resistance
Transfer case
Transfer case solenoid resistance should be 0.2 ohms
motor failure
to 10.0 ohms.
Transfer case
solenoid failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
internal failure transfer case solenoid circuit for short circuit to
resistance
a new transfer case solenoid and perform routine -
Case Replacement
P181E- Clutch Actuator Transfer case NOTES:

00 Range/Performance motor circuit short
- No sub type circuit to ground,
information short circuit to If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs are
power, open also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s) first and
circuit, high retest.
resistance
Transfer case
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Transfer case
solenoid circuit
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
to 10.0 ohms.
resistance
motor failure transfer case motor circuit for short circuit to ground,
solenoid failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
resistance
Case Replacement
P181F- Clutch Control Transfer case NOTES:

00 System motor circuit short
Performance - No circuit to ground,
sub type short circuit to If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs are
information power, open also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s) first and
resistance
Transfer case
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Transfer case
solenoid circuit
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
to 10.0 ohms.
resistance
control module transfer case motor circuit for short circuit to ground,
internal failure short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
motor failure transfer case motor position sensor circuit for short
solenoid failure high resistance
resistance
Case Replacement
P183A- Range Change Transfer case NOTES:

00 Mechanism Failure - motor circuit short
No sub type circuit to ground,
information short circuit to If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs are
resistance
Transfer case
motor position If any transmission control module DTCs are also set,
sensor circuit short perform the relevant corrective action(s) first and retest.
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power, open
Transfer case motor resistance should be 0.2 ohms to
circuit, high
10.0 ohms.
resistance
Transfer case
motor failure
Transfer case
control module
internal failure
Transfer case
internal failure
Transmission fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
- High drag torque transfer case motor circuit for short circuit to ground,
in Neutral short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
high resistance
Case Replacement
and test the transmission
P186D- Clutch Actuator Transfer case NOTES:

00 Stuck - No sub type motor circuit short
information circuit to ground,
short circuit to If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs are
resistance
Transfer case
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power, open
circuit, high
resistance
Transfer case
solenoid circuit
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
to 10.0 ohms.
resistance
motor failure transfer case motor circuit for short circuit to ground,
internal failure transfer case motor position sensor circuit for short
transfer case solenoid circuit for short circuit to
resistance
Case Replacement
P2711- Unexpected Transfer case NOTES:

00 Mechanical Gear motor circuit short
Disengagement - circuit to ground,
No sub type short circuit to If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs are
information power, open also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s) first and
resistance
Transfer case
motor position If any transmission control module DTCs are also set,
sensor circuit short perform the relevant corrective action(s) first and retest.
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power, open
Transfer case motor resistance should be 0.2 ohms to
circuit, high
10.0 ohms.
resistance
Transfer case
motor failure
Transfer case
control module
internal failure
Transfer case
internal failure
Transmission fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
- High drag torque transfer case motor circuit for short circuit to ground,
in Neutral short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
high resistance
Case Replacement
and test the transmission
P2785- Clutch Actuator Transfer case NOTES:

00 Temperature Too motor temperature
High - No sub type too high (> 150°C)
information Transfer case Transfer case motor resistance should be 0.2 ohms to
motor circuit short 10.0 ohms.
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power, open This DTC may be induced by prolonged off-road driving.
circuit, high
resistance Allow the vehicle to cool. Using the manufacturer
Transfer case approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
control module retest
internal failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
transfer case motor circuit for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
P2787- Clutch Temperature Transfer case

00 Too High - No sub clutch temperature NOTE: This DTC may be induced by prolonged off-road
type information too high driving.
Incorrect
specification Allow the vehicle to cool. Using the manufacturer
wheels/tires approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
installed - retest
Mismatch between Check the wheel and tire specifications
axle speeds Check the integrity of the front and rear driveshafts
Front/rear Check the integrity of the front and rear differentials
driveshaft failure Check the integrity of the halfshafts
Front/rear
differential failure
Front/rear left/right
halfshaft failure
P2789- Clutch Adaptive Transfer case NOTES:

00 Learning at Limit - clutch not
No sub type calibrated
information Transfer case If additional transfer case circuit fault related DTCs are
motor position also set, perform the relevant corrective action(s) first and
sensor circuit short retest.
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power, open Transfer case motor position sensor voltage (sensor
circuit, high supply to sensor ground) should be 8V to 11V, resistance
resistance (signal A circuit to ground circuit) should be 16.0k ohms to
Transfer case 20.0k ohms and resistance (signal B circuit to ground circuit)
solenoid circuit should be 16.0k ohms to 20.0k ohms.
short circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
to 10.0 ohms.
resistance
Transfer case fluid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
contaminated with perform routine - Transfer Case Replacement
water Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
clutch worn/burnt circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
Transfer case high resistance
resistance
and check the transfer case fluid level/condition. If
water is present in the fluid, check the integrity of the
transfer case breather and install a new transfer case
and perform routine - Transfer Case Replacement
Check the integrity of the driveshafts, differentials
and half shafts. Rectify as necessary and install a
new transfer case and perform routine - Transfer
Case Replacement
perform routine - Transfer Case Replacement. Clear
the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a
new transfer case control module and perform routine
- Transfer Case Replacement
U0001- High Speed CAN High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
88 Communication Bus bus circuit short perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
- Bus off circuit to ground, electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed
short circuit to CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
power, open circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit, high
resistance
U0100- Lost Communication Engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 With ECM/PCM "A" - module power or engine control module power and ground circuits for
No sub type ground circuit open open circuit, high resistance
information circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
bus circuit short CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
power, open check the engine control module for related DTCs and
resistance
Engine system
fault
U0101- Lost Communication Transmission Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 with TCM - No sub control module transmission control module power and ground
type information power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
circuit open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
power, open check the transmission control module for related
circuit, high DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
resistance
Transmission
system fault
U0121- Lost Communication Anti-lock brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 With Anti-Lock system control anti-lock brake system control module power and
Brake System module power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
(ABS) Control ground circuit open Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Module - No sub circuit, high perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
type information resistance electrical circuit diagrams and check the high speed
High speed CAN CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
bus circuit short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
short circuit to check the anti-lock brake system control module for
power, open related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
circuit, high
resistance
Anti-lock brake
system fault
U0126- Lost Communication Steering angle Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 With Steering Angle sensor module steering angle sensor module power and ground
Sensor Module - No power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
sub type circuit open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
power, open check the steering angle sensor module for related
resistance
Steering angle
sensor system fault
U0128- Lost Communication Electric park brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 With Park Brake control module electric park brake control module power and ground
Control Module - No power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
sub type circuit open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
power, open check the electric park brake control module for
circuit, high related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
resistance
Electric park brake
system fault
U0132- Lost Communication Air suspension Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 With Suspension control module air suspension control module power and ground
Control Module "A" power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
- No sub type circuit open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
power, open check the air suspension control module for related
resistance
Air suspension
system fault
U0136- Lost Communication Rear differential Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 With Differential control module rear differential control module power and ground
Control Module - power or ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Rear - No sub type circuit open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
power, open check the rear differential control module for related
resistance
Rear differential
system fault
U0138- Lost Communication Terrain response Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
00 with All Terrain switchpack power terrain response switchpack power and ground circuits
Control Module - No or ground circuit for open circuit, high resistance
sub type open circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
information resistance perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
power, open check the terrain response switchpack for related
resistance
Terrain response
system fault
Module - No sub ground circuit open open circuit, high resistance
type information circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
power, open check the central junction box for related DTCs and
resistance
Central junction
box system fault
U0300- Internal Control Transfer case Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
00 Module Software control module is re-configure the transfer case control module with the
Incompatibility - No not configured latest level software
sub type correctly Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
information Incorrect transfer clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
case control a new transfer case control module and perform
module installed routine - Transfer Case Replacement
00 Received From data from the check the engine control module for related DTCs and
ECM/PCM A - No engine control refer to the relevant DTC index
sub type module
information
00 Received from TCM data from the check the transmission control module for related
- No sub type transmission DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
00 Received From Anti- data from the anti- check the anti-lock brake system control module for
Lock Brake System lock brake system related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
(ABS) Control control module
Module - No sub
type information
00 Received From Park data from the check the electric park brake control module for
Brake Control electric park brake related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Module - No sub control module
type information
00 Received From data from the check the steering angle sensor module for related
Steering Angle steering angle DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Sensor Module - No sensor module
sub type
information
U3000- Control Module - Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
55 Not configured file mismatch with check and up-date the car configuration file as
vehicle necessary
specification Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Incorrect transfer clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install
case control a new transfer case control module and perform
module installed routine - Transfer Case Replacement
U3003- Battery Voltage - Mismatch between Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
62 Signal compare the voltage at the check datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage
failure transfer case (0xD111) - and compare it to battery voltage. Refer
control module and to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
the voltage value transfer case control module power and ground
broadcast on the circuits for open circuit, high resistance
CAN bus
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
CAUTIONS:
vehicle.
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Transmission Control Switch
(TCS). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: External Controls (307-05A Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls -
TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Vehicles With: 6HP28 6-Speed Automatic Transmission,

B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
08 signal/message NOTE: Circuit reference the transmission control module power and
failures LIN ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Transmission control the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
module power or short circuit to power, open circuit, high
LIN bus circuit short system, check the transmission control module
circuit to ground, for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
short circuit to power, index
open circuit, high
resistance
Transmission system
fault
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Invalid Transmission system Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
81 serial data received fault system, check the transmission control module
for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Transmission system Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
82 Alive/sequence fault system, check the transmission control module
counter incorrect / for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
not updated index
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Value Transmission system Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
83 of signal protection fault system, check the transmission control module
calculation incorrect for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Missing Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
87 message NOTE: Circuit reference the transmission control module power and
LIN ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Transmission control the LIN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
module power or short circuit to power, open circuit, high
LIN bus circuit short system, check the transmission control module
circuit to ground, for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
short circuit to power, index
open circuit, high
resistance
Transmission system
fault
B1142- Ignition Status 1 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
62 Signal compare NOTE: Circuit reference the ignition sense circuit for short circuit to
failure IGN ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
Ignition sense circuit
short circuit to
high resistance -
Power mode differs to
that broadcast on high
speed CAN
B123C- Dynamic Stability Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
01 Control Status switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Indicator - General persists, install a new transmission control
electrical failure switch
B123D- Dynamic Stability Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Control Button - switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Signal plausibility persists, install a new transmission control
failure switch
B123F- Adaptive Speed Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
01 Limiter Mode switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
B1241- Adaptive Speed Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Limiter Button - switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Signal plausibility persists, install a new transmission control
failure switch
B1242- Winter Button - Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Signal plausibility switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure persists, install a new transmission control
switch
B1243- Winter Button Mode Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
01 Indicator - General switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
electrical failure persists, install a new transmission control
switch
B1244- Dynamic / Sport Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 Button - Signal switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
plausibility failure persists, install a new transmission control
switch
B1245- Dynamic / Sport Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
01 Button Mode switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
C113A- Wakeup Control - Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
62 Signal compare switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
failure persists, install a new transmission control
switch
P0603- Internal Control Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
44 Module Keep Alive switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Memory (KAM) Error persists, install a new transmission control
- Data memory switch
failure
44 Module Random switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Access Memory persists, install a new transmission control
(RAM) Error - Data switch
memory failure
45 Module Read Only switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Memory (ROM) Error persists, install a new transmission control
- Program memory switch
failure
P0606- ECM / PCM Processor Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
2F - Signal erratic switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
switch
P0606- ECM / PCM Processor Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
47 - Watchdog/safety switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
microcontroller failure persists, install a new transmission control
switch
P0705- Transmission Range Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
09 Sensor A Circuit switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
(PRNDL Input) - persists, install a new transmission control
Component failures switch
Calibration/parameter switch
memory failure
Signal invalid switch
01 Display Circuit - switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
General electrical persists, install a new transmission control
failure switch
P081C- Park Input Circuit - Hardwired park and Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
64 Signal plausibility transmission control the park signal circuit for short circuit to ground,
failure switch position display short circuit to power, open circuit, high
signals are not resistance. Using the manufacturer approved
consistent diagnostic system, check the transmission
control module for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
P084F- Park / Neutral Switch Park/neutral signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Output Circuit - circuit short circuit to the park/neutral signal circuit for short circuit to
Circuit short to ground ground
ground
P084F- Park / Neutral Switch Park/neutral signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
15 Output Circuit - circuit short circuit to the park/neutral signal circuit for short circuit to
Circuit short to power, open circuit, battery, open circuit, high resistance
battery or open high resistance
P176A- Transmission Range Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
01 Selector Up and switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Down Position Circuit persists, install a new transmission control
- General electrical switch
failure
- Circuit open switch
- Circuit current switch
above threshold
- Unexpected switch
operation
P176B- Transmission Range Transmission control
71 Selector Up and switch internal failure NOTE: This DTC may be set by resisting the
Down Position - Raise/lower failure raising/lowering of the transmission control switch
Control Error -
Actuator stuck Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
switch
P176C- Transmission Range Transmission control

07 Selector Lock Control switch internal failure NOTE: This DTC may be set by releasing the brake
Error - Mechanical - Rotation detected pedal whilst rotating the transmission control switch
failures while locked
switch
P176C- Transmission Range Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
11 Selector Lock Control switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Error - Circuit short - Lock solenoid circuit persists, install a new transmission control
to ground short circuit to ground switch
P176C- Transmission Range Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
12 Selector Lock Control switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
Error - Circuit short - Lock solenoid circuit persists, install a new transmission control
to battery short circuit to power switch
P176C- Transmission Range Transmission control

73 Selector Lock Control switch internal failure NOTE: This DTC may be set by attempting to
Error - Actuator stuck - Lock solenoid circuit rotate the transmission control switch as it unlocks
closed failure
switch
U0001- High Speed CAN High speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
88 Communication Bus - circuit short circuit to system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Bus off ground, short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
high resistance
U0100- Lost Communication Engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With ECM/PCM "A" - power or ground the engine control module power and ground
No sub type circuit open circuit, circuits for open circuit, high resistance
circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Engine system fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check the engine control module for
U0100- Lost Communication Missing/invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
87 With ECM/PCM "A" - from the engine system, check the engine control module for
Missing message control module - related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Engine speed
U0101- Lost Communication Transmission control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 with TCM - No sub module power or the transmission control module power and
type information ground circuit open ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Transmission system Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
fault system, check the transmission control module
index
87 with TCM - Missing from the transmission system, check the transmission control module
message control module - for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
TCM_PosDisp index
U0121- Lost Communication Anti-lock brake system Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Anti-Lock Brake control module power the anti-lock brake system control module power
System (ABS) or ground circuit open and ground circuits for open circuit, high
Control Module - No circuit, high resistance resistance
sub type information High speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ground, short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Anti-lock brake system high resistance
fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check the anti-lock brake system control
module for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
87 With Anti-Lock Brake from the anti-lock system, check the anti-lock brake system control
System (ABS) brake system control module for related DTCs and refer to the
Control Module - module - Steering relevant DTC index
Missing message angle
Module - No sub type circuit open circuit, circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Central junction box Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system fault system, check the central junction box for
U0155- Lost Communication Instrument cluster Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Control Module - high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Missing message High speed CAN bus system, perform a CAN network integrity test.
Instrument cluster Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system fault system, check the instrument cluster for related
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
U0300- Internal Control Invalid master Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Module Software configuration ID system, re-configure the central junction box
Incompatibility - No received with the latest level software. Clear the DTCs
sub type information and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control switch
U0401- Invalid Data Received Missing/invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
92 From ECM/PCM - from the engine system, check the engine control module for
Performance or control module related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
incorrect operation
64 from Transmission from the transmission system, check the transmission control module
control module - control module - for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Signal plausibility Implausible lock index
failure request received
Invalid serial data TCM_PosDisp / index
received TCM_LockReq
control module - control module - Alive for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Alive/sequence counter index
counter incorrect /
not updated
Value of signal Checksum index
protection calculation
incorrect
control module - control module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Performance or index
incorrect operation
92 From Anti-Lock Brake from the anti-lock system, check the anti-lock brake system control
System (ABS) brake system control module for related DTCs and refer to the
Control Module - module relevant DTC index
Performance or
incorrect operation
08 From Body Control from the central system, check the central junction box for
Module - Bus junction box related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
signal/message
failures
Module - Invalid junction box - Invalid related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
serial data received power mode
Module - Performance junction box related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
or incorrect operation
92 From Instrument from the instrument system, check the instrument cluster for related
Panel Control Module cluster DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
- Performance or
incorrect operation
U043A- Invalid Data Received Missing/invalid data Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
92 From Suspension from the adaptive system, check the adaptive damping control
Control Module "B" - damping control module for related DTCs and refer to the
Performance or module relevant DTC index
incorrect operation
U101A- Lost Communication CAN and LIN bus
86 With Transmission failure NOTE: Ignore this DTC if no other CAN or LIN
Control Module DTCs are set
(Multiple Bus) -
Signal invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check the transmission control module
index
U1A14- CAN Initialization Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
04 Failure - System switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
internal failures persists, install a new transmission control
switch
U2012- Car Configuration Car configuration file Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
4A Parameter(s) - mismatch with vehicle system, check and up-date the car configuration
Incorrect component specification file as necessary
installed Incorrect transmission Install a new transmission control switch as
control switch installed necessary
U2100- Initial Configuration Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Not Complete - No switch internal failure system, clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault
sub type information persists, install a new transmission control
switch
U3003- Battery Voltage - Transmission control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
16 Circuit voltage below switch power or system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU
threshold ground circuit open Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer to the electrical
circuit, high resistance circuit diagrams and check the transmission
Battery/charging control switch power and ground circuits for
system fault open circuit, high resistance
U3003- Battery Voltage - Battery/charging Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

17 Circuit voltage above system fault system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU
threshold Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer to the relevant
section of the workshop manual and test the
U3003- Battery Voltage - Mismatch between the Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
62 Signal compare voltage at the system, check datalogger signal - Main ECU
failure transmission control Supply Voltage (0xDD02) - and compare it to
switch and the voltage battery voltage. Refer to the electrical circuit
value broadcast on the diagrams and check the transmission control
CAN bus switch power and ground circuits for open
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
CAUTIONS:
vehicle.
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the digital
If a failure condition is reported indicating the need to renew the transmission assembly on a vehicle that
remains under manufacturer warranty, an authorisation request must first go through the warranty prior approval
programme before any work is begun.
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Transmission Control Module
(TCM), for additional diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section
For additional information, refer to: Diagnostics - TDV6 3.0L Diesel , Vehicles With: 8HP70 8-Speed Automatic
Transmission AWD (307-01B Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel , Vehicles With: 8HP70 8-Speed
Automatic Transmission AWD, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Local Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check local
41 General checksum interconnect interconnect network circuit to transmission control switch.
failure network circuit Clear the DTC and retest
fault
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Local Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check local
63 Circuit / interconnect interconnect network circuit to transmission control switch.
component network circuit Clear the DTC and retest
protection time-out fault
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Signal Transmission control switch position fault. Vehicle issue -
64 Signal plausibility plausibility Check transmission control switch
failure failure
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Alive Local Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check local
82 / sequence counter interconnect interconnect network circuit to transmission control switch.
incorrect / not network circuit Clear the DTC and retest
updated fault
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Value of signal Gear selector position fault. Vehicle issue - Check gear
83 Signal plausibility protection selector unit
failure - value of calculation
signal protection incorrect
calculation
incorrect
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Bus Local Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check local
88 off interconnect interconnect network circuit to transmission control switch.
network circuit Clear the DTC and retest
fault
B108E- Display - General General signal Clear DTCs. Test drive the car and watch the displayed
02 signal failure failure position matches the engaged gear. If the problem
persists, renew the module
C1A88- High Pressure Signal Check the transmission control module connector and the
64 Switching Valve #1 plausibility power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
- Signal plausibility failure Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
failure the transmission control module
P0071- Ambient Air Ambient air Check engine control module for related DTCs and refer to
02 Temperature temperature the relevant DTC index
Sensor Circuit "A" sensor range
Range/Performance performance
- General signal
failure
P0121- Throttle/Pedal Accelerator Check engine control module for related DTCs and refer to
86 Position Sensor A pedal position the relevant DTC index
Circuit sensor sensing
Range/Performance circuit signal
- Signal invalid invalid
Accelerator
pedal position
sensor failure
P0219- Engine Overspeed Crankshaft Check engine control module for related DTCs and refer to
64 Condition - Signal position sensor the relevant DTC index. Clear the DTC and retest
plausibility failure circuit
Camshaft
position sensor
circuit
P0562- System Voltage Power supply Check the battery and charging system. Refer to the
1C Low - Circuit voltage is out relevant workshop manual section. Clear the DTC and
voltage out of of range when retest
range the engine is
running
P0562- System Voltage Supply voltage Check the battery condition and state of charge. Check the
21 Low - Signal to transmission control module connector and power supply
amplitude < transmission circuits
minimum control module
very low
P0563- System Voltage Power supply Check the battery condition and state of charge. Check the
22 High - Signal voltage is too transmission control module connector and power supply
amplitude > high if the circuits. Check if the vehicle has been jump-started. Clear
maximum engine is the DTC and retest
running and
there has been
no jump-start
or
transmission
limp-home
event
P0601- Internal Control Checksum Check the transmission control module connector and the
41 Module Memory error power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Check Sum Error- Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
General checksum new transmission control module as required
failure
P0606- Control Module Internal failure Check the transmission control module connector and the
04 Processor - System power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
internal failures Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
the transmission control module
11 Processor - Circuit power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
short to ground Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
62 Processor - Signal power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
compare failure Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
64 Processor - Signal power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
plausibility failure Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
P0613- TCM Processor - Internal failure Check the transmission control module connector and the
04 System internal power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
failures Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
P0613- TCM Processor - Internal Check the transmission control module connector and the
06 Algorithm based processor power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
failures watchdog Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
error new transmission control module as required
P0613- TCM Processor - Internal circuit Check the transmission control module connector and the
11 Circuit short to short to power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
ground ground Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
12 Circuit short to short to power power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
battery Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
13 Circuit open open circuit power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
15 Circuit short to short to power power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
battery or open or open circuit Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
18 Circuit current short to power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
below threshold ground or Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
open circuit the transmission control module
P061B- Internal Control Internal failure Check the transmission control module connector and the
02 Module Torque power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Calculation Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
Performance - the transmission control module
General signal
failure
P061B- Internal Control Signal Check the transmission control module connector and the
64 Module Torque plausibility power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Calculation failure Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Performance# - new transmission control module as required
Signal plausibility
failure
P062F- Internal Control EEPROM error Check the transmission control module connector and the
04 Module EEPROM power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Error - System Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
internal failures new transmission control module as required
P0641- Sensor Reference Internal failure Check the transmission control module connector and the
64 Voltage A power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Circuit/Open - Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, check
Signal plausibility and install a new transmission control module
failure
P0642- Sensor Reference Reference Check the transmission control module connector and the
21 Voltage A Circuit voltage circuit power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Low - Signal signal Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
amplitude < amplitude new transmission control module as required
minimum below
minimum
P0643- Sensor Reference Reference Check the transmission control module connector and the
22 Voltage A Circuit voltage circuit power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
High - Signal signal Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
amplitude > amplitude new transmission control module as required
maximum above
maximum
P0657- Actuator Supply Supply voltage Check for other related DTCs. Check the park lock
13 Voltage A Circuit / circuit open actuator, the actuator connector and wiring. Check the
Open - Circuit circuit transmission control module connector and the
open power/ground circuits to the module. Clear the DTC and
test the shift lever in all positions. If the problem persists,
check and install a new transmission control module
P0657- Actuator Supply Actuator Check solenoid at lever, check wiring and connectors, clear
64 Voltage A Circuit / supply DTCs. Test position lever in all positions and cycle ignition.
Open - Signal (pressure If the problem persists, check and install a new
plausibility failure control valves transmission control module
etc) voltage
plausibility
fault
P0658- Actuator Supply Supply voltage Check the transmission control module connector and the
11 Voltage A Circuit circuit short power/ground circuits to the module. If the problem
Low - Circuit short circuit to persists, check and install a new transmission control
to ground ground module
P0659- Actuator Supply Supply voltage Check the transmission control module connector and the
12 Voltage A Circuit circuit short power/ground circuits to the module. If the problem
High - Circuit short circuit to persists, check and install a new transmission control
to battery power module
P0666- Control Module Internal Check for engine overheating and cooling system faults.
64 Internal temperature Check the transmission control module connector and the
Temperature sensor power/ground circuits to the module. Allow the
Sensor "A" Circuit - transmission control module to cool. Clear the DTC and
Signal plausibility retest. If the problem persists, renew the module.
failure Consider environmental conditions before condemning the
module
P0667- PCM / ECM / TCM Module Check for engine overheating and cooling system faults.
01 Internal internal Check the transmission control module connector and the
Temperature temperature power/ground circuits to the module. Allow the
Sensor sensor general transmission control module to cool. Clear the DTC and
Range/Performance failure retest. If the problem persists, renew the module.
- General electrical Consider environmental conditions before condemning the
failure module
P0668- PCM / ECM / TCM Module Check the transmission control module connector and the
21 Internal internal power/ground circuits to the module. Allow the
Temperature temperature transmission control module to cool. Clear the DTC and
Sensor A Circuit too low retest. If the problem persists, renew the module.
Low - Signal Temperature Consider environmental conditions before condemning the
amplitude < sensor circuit module
minimum high resistance
Temperature
sensor circuit
short circuit to
ground
P0669- ECM / ECM / TCM Module Check for engine overheating and cooling system faults.
22 Internal internal Check the transmission control module connector and the
Temperature temperature power/ground circuits to the module. Allow the
Sensor A Circuit too high transmission control module to cool. Clear the DTC and
High - Signal Temperature retest. If the problem persists, renew the module.
amplitude > sensor circuit Consider environmental conditions before condemning the
maximum short circuit to module
power
P06AC- PCM / ECM / TCM General Check for engine overheating and cooling system faults.
01 Internal electrical Check the transmission control module connector and the
Temperature failure power/ground circuits to the module. Allow the
Sensor B transmission control module to cool. Clear the DTC and
Range/Performance retest. If the problem persists, renew the module.
- General electrical Consider environmental conditions before condemning the
failure module
P06AC- PCM / ECM / TCM Signal Check for engine overheating and cooling system faults.
64 Internal plausibility Check the transmission control module connector and the
Temperature failure power/ground circuits to the module. Allow the
Sensor B transmission control module to cool. Clear the DTC and
Range/Performance retest. If the problem persists, renew the module.
- Signal plausibility Consider environmental conditions before condemning the
failure module
P06AD- PCM / ECM / TCM Signal Check for engine overheating and cooling system faults.
22 Internal amplitude Check the transmission control module connector and the
Temperature greater than power/ground circuits to the module. Allow the
Sensor B Circuit maximum transmission control module to cool. Clear the DTC and
Low - Signal retest. If the problem persists, renew the module.
amplitude > Consider environmental conditions before condemning the
maximum module
P06AE- PCM / ECM / TCM Signal Transmission control module chip temperature fault. Allow
21 Internal amplitude cooling time. If the problem persists, renew the
Temperature greater than transmission control module
Sensor B Circuit minimum
High - Signal
amplitude <
minimum
P0700- Transmission General signal Check for other DTCs and rectify those first. Clear the
02 Control System failure DTCs and road test the vehicle. If further DTCs are logged,
(MIL Request) - investigate according to the individual faults logged
General signal
failure
P0700- Transmission Value of signal Check the transmission control module connector and the
83 Control System protection power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
(MIL Request) - calculation Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
Value of signal incorrect the transmission control module
protection
calculation
incorrect
P0702- Transmission Component or Check transmission cooling circuit. Clear DTCs and test
98 Control System system over drive the vehicle. If the problem persists, renew the
Electrical - temperature transmission control module
Component or
system over
temperature
P0710- Transmission Fluid System Clear DTCs and test drive the vehicle. If the problem
04 Temperature internal persists, renew the transmission control module
Sensor A Circuit - failures
System internal
failures
P0710- Transmission Fluid Transmission Check the transmission control module connector and the
13 Temperature fluid power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Sensor A Circuit - temperature Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Circuit open sensor circuit new transmission control module as required. Consider
open circuit environmental conditions before condemning the module
Temperature
sensor fault
P0710- Transmission Fluid Transmission Allow the transmission to cool, clear the DTC and retest.
27 Temperature fluid Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
Sensor A Circuit - temperature the transmission control module
Signal rate of sensor signal
change above rate of change
threshold above
threshold
P0710- Transmission Fluid Transmission Allow the transmission to cool, clear the DTC and retest.
64 Temperature fluid Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
Sensor A Circuit - temperature the transmission control module
Signal plausibility sensor signal
failure plausibility
failure
P0712- Transmission Fluid Sensor circuit Check the transmission control module connector and the
11 Temperature short circuit to power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Sensor A Circuit ground Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Low - Circuit short new transmission control module as required
to ground
P0713- Transmission Fluid Transmission Check the transmission control module connector and the
12 Temperature Fluid power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Sensor A Circuit Temperature Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
High - Circuit short Sensor circuit new transmission control module as required
to battery short circuit to
power
P0715- Turbine/Input Turbine sensor Check the transmission control module connector and the
12 Shaft Speed circuit short to power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Sensor A Circuit - power Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
Circuit short to the transmission control module.
battery
P0715- Turbine/Input Turbine sensor Clear the DTC and test drive the vehicle. Check output
64 Shaft Speed signal speed and vehicle speed plausibility against turbine speed
Sensor A Circuit - plausibility If the problem persists renew the transmission control
Signal plausibility failure module.
failure
P0716- Turbine/Input Sensor circuit Check the transmission control module connector and the
14 Shaft Speed short circuit to power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Sensor A Circuit ground or Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Range/Performance open circuit new transmission control module as required
- Circuit short to
ground or open
P0716- Turbine/Input Turbine sensor Check the transmission control module connector and the
27 Shaft Speed signal rate of power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Sensor A Circuit change above Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Range/Performance threshold new transmission control module as required
- Signal rate of
change above
threshold
P0720- Output Shaft Sensor circuit Check the transmission control module connector and the
12 Speed Sensor short circuit to power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Circuit - Circuit power Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
short to battery new transmission control module as required
P0720- Output Shaft Sensor circuit Check the transmission control module connector and the
14 Speed Sensor short circuit to power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Circuit - Circuit ground or Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
short to ground or open circuit new transmission control module as required
open
P0721- Output Shaft Output shaft Check the transmission control module connector and the
02 Speed Sensor speed sensor power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Circuit general signal Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Range/Performance failure new transmission control module as required
- General signal
failure
P0721- Output Shaft Signal rate of Check for the possible wheel lock up due to anti-lock
27 Speed Sensor change above brake system issue. Check anti-lock brake system control
Circuit threshold module for related DTCs. Check the transmission control
Range/Performance module connector and the power/ground circuits to the
- Signal rate of transmission control module. Clear the DTC and retest. If
change above the problem persists, install a new transmission control
threshold module as required
P0721- Output Shaft Output shaft Check the transmission control module connector and the
62 Speed Sensor speed sensor power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Circuit circuit signal Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Range/Performance compare new transmission control module as required
- Signal compare failure
failure
P0721- Output Shaft Engine speed Check the transmission control module connector and the
64 Speed Sensor signal power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Circuit plausibility Clear the DTC and test drive the vehicle. Clear the DTC
Range/Performance failure and retest. If the problem persists, install a new
- Signal plausibility transmission control module as required
failure
P0725- Engine Speed Engine speed Check engine control module for related DTCs and refer to
83 Input Circuit - input circuit the relevant DTC index
Value of signal failure
protection
calculation
incorrect
P0729- Gear 6 Incorrect Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
07 Ratio - Mechanical failures relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear the DTC
failures and test drive the vehicle. Clear the DTC and retest. If the
problem persists, renew the transmission
P0730- Incorrect Gear Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
00 Ratio - No sub type failures relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear the DTC
information and test drive the vehicle. Clear the DTC and retest. If the
P0736- Reverse Incorrect Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
P0736- Reverse Incorrect Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
64 Ratio - Signal failures relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear the DTC
plausibility failure and test drive the vehicle using all gears in drive and
reverse. Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
or if any other gear ratio related DTCs are logged, renew
the transmission
P0741- Torque Converter Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
07 Clutch Solenoid failures relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear the DTC
Circuit and test drive the vehicle. If the problem persists, renew
Performance/Stuck the torque convertor. If the problem still persists, renew
Off - Mechanical the transmission
failures
P0745- Pressure Control Pressure Check the transmission control module connector and the
11 Solenoid A - Circuit control power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
short to ground solenoid A Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
circuit short to new transmission control module as required
ground
short to battery solenoid A Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
circuit short to new transmission control module as required
power
open solenoid A Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
circuit, open new transmission control module as required
circuit
short to ground or solenoid A Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
open circuit short to new transmission control module as required
ground, open
circuit
64 Solenoid A - Signal control power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
plausibility failure solenoid A Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
circuit signal new transmission control module as required
plausibility
failure
P0745- Pressure Control Control Check the transmission control module connector and the
93 Solenoid A - No solenoid not power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
operation operating Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
new transmission control module as required
P0745- Pressure Control Control Check the transmission control module connector and the
94 Solenoid A - solenoid power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Unexpected unexpected Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
operation operation new transmission control module as required
11 Solenoid A control power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Electrical - Circuit solenoid A Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
short to ground circuit short to new transmission control module as required
ground
short to battery circuit short to new transmission control module as required
power
open circuit, open new transmission control module as required
circuit
P076F- Gear 7 Ratio Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
07 Incorrect - failures relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear the DTC
Mechanical failures and test drive the vehicle. Clear the DTC and retest. If the
P077E- Transmission Fluid General signal Check the transmission control module connector and the
02 Temperature failure power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Measurement Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
System - Multiple new transmission control module as required
Sensor Correlation
- General signal
failure
P0780- Shift Malfunction - Signal Check the transmission control module connector and the
62 Signal compare compare power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
failure failure Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
P0780- Shift Malfunction - Internal failure Check the transmission control module connector and the
93 No operation power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
P0780- Shift Malfunction - Internal failure Check the transmission control module connector and the
94 Unexpected power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
operation Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
P0795- Pressure Control Internal failure Check the transmission control module connector and the
04 Solenoid C - power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
System internal Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
failures new transmission control module as required
P07AD- Transmission Mechanical Check the transmission control module connector and the
07 Friction Element failures power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
"F" Stuck On - Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Mechanical failures new transmission control module as required
P07D9- Gear 8 Incorrect Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
P07DC- Incorrect Shift Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
07 from Gear 1 - failures relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear the DTC
P07DD- Incorrect Shift Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
P07DE- Incorrect Shift Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
P07DF- Incorrect Shift Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
P07E0- Incorrect Shift Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
P0801- Reverse Inhibit Reverse inhibit Check the transmission control module connector and the
94 Control Circuit - control circuit power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Unexpected unexpected Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
operation operation new transmission control module as required
P0810- Clutch Position Internal failure Clear DTCs and test drive the vehicle. Ensure the displayed
04 Control Error - position matches the engaged gear
System internal Check and install a new transmission control module as
failures required
P0826- Up and Down Tip switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
01 Switch Circuit - electrical fault circuit between the command shift switch and the
General electrical or harness transmission control module. Check the switch operation of
failure fault the Transmission Shift Selector
2A Switch Circuit - electrical fault circuit between the command shift switch and the
Signal stuck in or harness transmission control module. Check the switch operation of
range fault the transmission ontrol switch
64 Switch Circuit - electrical fault circuit between the command shift switch and the
Signal plausibility or harness transmission control module. Check the switch operation of
failure fault the transmission ontrol switch
P084F- Park / Neutral Park / neutral Check the transmission control module connector and the
11 Switch Output switch circuit power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Circuit - Circuit short to Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
short to ground ground new transmission control module as required
Circuit - Circuit short to power Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
short to battery new transmission control module as required
Circuit - Circuit open circuit Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
open new transmission control module as required
Circuit - Circuit short to Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
short to ground or ground, open new transmission control module as required
open circuit
P084F- Park / Neutral Park / neutral Check for correct output signal at transmission control
29 Switch Output switch output module pin 1 to transmission plug (check in all positions).
Circuit - Signal circuit signal If the signal appears normal, then check wiring and
invalid invalid connectors to the module. If no signal present, install a
P0850- Park / Neutral Park / neutral Clear DTC and retest. Test drive the vehicle and check
02 Switch Output switch output parklock mechanism by engaging and disengaging the
Circuit - General circuit failure parking lock several times. If fault persists, check parklock
signal failure components and renew as required. If fault persists, check
and install a new transmission control module as required
P0850- Park / Neutral Starter inhibit Clear DTC and retest. Test drive the vehicle and check
29 Switch Input signal invalid parklock mechanism by engaging and disengaging the
Circuit - Signal parking lock several times. If fault persists, check parklock
invalid components and renew as required. If fault persists, check
and install a new transmission control module as required
P0851- Park / Neutral Switch input Clear DTC and retest. Test drive the vehicle and check
01 Switch Input circuit general parklock mechanism by engaging and disengaging the
Circuit Low - signal failure parking lock several times. If fault persists, check parklock
General electrical components and renew as required. If fault persists, check
failure and install a new transmission control module as required
P0852- Park / Neutral Switch input Clear DTC and retest. Test drive the vehicle and check
01 Switch Input circuit general parklock mechanism by engaging and disengaging the
Circuit High - signal failure parking lock several times. If fault persists, check parklock
General electrical components and renew as required. If fault persists, check
failure and install a new transmission control module as required
P0942- Hydraulic Pressure Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
07 Unit - Mechanical NOTE: This DTC relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear the DTC
failures is only active with and test drive the vehicle. Clear the DTC and retest. If the
vehicles fitted with problem persists, renew the transmission
stop/start
functionality
Mechanical
failures
P0942- Hydraulic Pressure Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
62 Unit - Signal NOTE: This DTC new transmission control module as required
compare failure is only active with
vehicles fitted with
stop/start
functionality
Hydraulic
pressure unit
signal compare
failure
P0965- Pressure Control Control circuit Check the transmission control module connector and the
64 Solenoid B Control signal power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Circuit plausibility Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Range/Performance failure new transmission control module as required
- Signal plausibility
failure
93 Solenoid B Control no operation power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Circuit Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Range/Performance new transmission control module as required
- No operation
94 Solenoid B Control unexpected power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Circuit operation Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Range/Performance new transmission control module as required
- Unexpected
operation
11 Solenoid B Control short circuit to power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Circuit Low - ground Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Circuit short to new transmission control module as required
ground
12 Solenoid B Control short to power power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Circuit Low - Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Circuit short to new transmission control module as required
battery
14 Solenoid B Control short circuit to power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Circuit Low - ground or Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Circuit short to open circuit new transmission control module as required
ground or open
P0972- Shift Solenoid A Control circuit Check the transmission control module connector and the
13 Control Circuit open circuit power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Range/Performance Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
- Circuit open new transmission control module as required
64 Control Circuit signal power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Range/Performance plausibility Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
- Signal plausibility failure new transmission control module as required
failure
93 Control Circuit no operation power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
- No operation new transmission control module as required
94 Control Circuit unexpected power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Range/Performance operation Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
- Unexpected new transmission control module as required
operation
P0973- Shift Solenoid A Shift solenoid Check the transmission control module connector and the
11 Control Circuit Low circuit short to power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
- Circuit short to ground Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
ground new transmission control module as required
18 Control Circuit Low current below power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
- Circuit current threshold Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
below threshold new transmission control module as required
12 Control Circuit short to power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
High - Circuit short battery Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
to battery new transmission control module as required
19 Control Circuit current above power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
High - Circuit threshold Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
current above new transmission control module as required
threshold
P0975- Shift Solenoid B Control circuit Check the transmission control module connector and the
13 Control Circuit open power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
- Circuit open new transmission control module as required
failure
operation
11 Control Circuit Low short to power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
12 Control Circuit short to power power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
High - Circuit short Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
threshold
P0978- Shift Solenoid C Control circuit Check the transmission control module connector and the
Range/Performance amplitude < Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
- Signal amplitude minimum new transmission control module as required
< minimum
failure
operation
- Circuit short to ground or Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
ground or open open new transmission control module as required
threshold
P0981- Shift Solenoid D Control circuit Check the transmission control module connector and the
failure
operation
threshold
P0984- Shift Solenoid E Control circuit Check the transmission control module connector and the
failure
operation
threshold
P164C- Internal Control Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
62 Module Start-Stop NOTE: This DTC new transmission control module as required
Performance - is only active with
Signal compare vehicles fitted with
failure stop/start
functionality
Signal
compare
failure
P1706- High Vehicle Speed Unexpected Check the transmission control module connector and the
94 Observed in Park - operation power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Unexpected Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
operation new transmission control module as required
P1707- Transfer Case Actuator stuck Ensure that emergency park release has not been pulled
72 Neutral or open and is not sticking
Park/Neutral Clear DTC. Test drive the vehicle, engaging and
Indication Circuit - disengaging the parking lock several times. If the fault
Actuator stuck persists renew the park pawl as required
open
P1707- Transfer Case Commanded Ensure that emergency park release has not been pulled
77 Neutral or position not and is not sticking
Park/Neutral reachable Clear DTC. Test drive the vehicle, engaging and
Indication Circuit - disengaging the parking lock several times. If the fault
Commanded persists renew the park pawl as required
position not
reachable
P177A- Transmission Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
07 Friction Element A failures relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear the DTC
or B - Mechanical and test drive the vehicle. If the problem persists, renew
failures the transmission as required
P177B- Transmission Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
or C - Mechanical and test drive the vehicle. If the problem persists, renew
P177C- Transmission Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
or D - Mechanical and test drive the vehicle. If the problem persists, renew
P177D- Transmission Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
or E - Mechanical and test drive the vehicle. If the problem persists, renew
P177E- Transmission Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
07 Friction Element B failures relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear the DTC
or C - Mechanical and test drive the vehicle. If the problem persists, renew
P177F- Transmission Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
P178A- Transmission Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
P178B- Transmission Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
07 Friction Element C failures relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear the DTC
P178C- Transmission Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
P178D- Transmission Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
07 Friction Element D failures relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear the DTC
P2159- Vehicle Speed General signal Check for related anti-lock brake system DTCs and refer to
02 Sensor B failure the relevant DTC index
Range/Performance
- General signal
failure
P215B- Vehicle Speed / Signal Check anti-lock brake system DTCs and refer to the
62 Output Shaft compare relevant DTC index
Speed Correlation - failure
Signal compare
failure
P258F- Torque General signal Clear DTC and retest. If fault persists, check and install a
02 Management failure new transmission control module as required
Request Output
Signal - General
signal failure
P2700- Transmission Mechanical Check the transmission oil level and quality, refer to the
Apply Time and test drive the vehicle. If the problem persists, renew
Range/Performance the transmission as required
- Mechanical
failures
- Mechanical
failures
- Mechanical
failures
07 Friction Element D failures relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear the DTC
- Mechanical
failures
07 Friction Element E failures relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear the DTC
- Mechanical
failures
P2711- Unexpected Gear Check the transmission control module connector and the
94 Mechanical Gear disengagement power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Disengagement - unexpected Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Unexpected operation new transmission control module as required
operation
P2713- Pressure Control System Check the transmission control module connector and the
04 Solenoid D - internal power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
System internal failures Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
P2722- Pressure Control System Check the transmission control module connector and the
04 Solenoid E - internal power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
System internal failures Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
P2757- Torque Converter Control Check the transmission control module connector and the
93 Clutch Pressure solenoid power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Control Solenoid control circuit Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Control Circuit Perf no operation new transmission control module as required
or Stuck Off - No
operation
P2757- Torque Converter Control circuit Check the transmission control module connector and the
94 Clutch Pressure unexpected power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Control Solenoid operation Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Control Circuit Perf new transmission control module as required
or Stuck Off -
Unexpected
operation
11 Clutch Pressure solenoid circuit power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Control Solenoid short to Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Electrical - Circuit ground new transmission control module as required
short to ground
Control Solenoid short to power Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Electrical - Circuit new transmission control module as required
short to battery
Control Solenoid open Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Control Circuit / new transmission control module as required
Open - Circuit
open
P2762- Torque Converter Control circuit Check the transmission control module connector and the
64 Clutch Pressure signal power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Control Solenoid plausibility Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
Control Circuit failure new transmission control module as required
Range / Perf -
Signal plausibility
failure
P2784- Input / Turbine Sensor general Check engine control module for related DTCs and refer to
02 Speed Sensor A / signal failure, the relevant DTC index
B Correlation - multiple input Check anti-lock brake system DTCs and refer to the
General signal speed signal relevant DTC index
failure faults
P2787- Clutch Clutch over Allow the transmission to cool, clear the DTC and retest.
4B Temperature Too temperature Check transmission oil level and check for excessive gear
High - Over changes during normal driving. Check shift paddles for
temperature intermittent operation and renew as required
P2787- Clutch Component or Allow the transmission to cool, clear the DTC and retest.
98 Temperature Too system over Clear the DTC and retest. Check transmission oil level and
High - Component temperature check for excessive gear changes during normal driving.
or system over Check shift paddles for intermittent operation. Refer to the
temperture relevant section of the workshop manual and check the
transmission oil level and quality. Clear the DTC and test
drive the vehicle using all gears in drive and reverse. Clear
the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, or if any other
gear ratio related DTCs are logged, renew the transmission
P2793- Gear Shift Gear shift Check the transmission control module connector and the
92 Direction Circuit - direction power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Performance or circuit Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
incorrect operation performance new transmission control module as required
or incorrect
operation
P2793- Gear Shift Gear shift Check the transmission control module connector and the
94 Direction Circuit - direction power/ground circuits to the transmission control module.
Unexpected circuit Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, install a
operation unexpected new transmission control module as required
operation
P279D- Four Wheel Drive General signal Check transfer case control module DTCs and refer to the
02 (4WD) Range failure relevant DTC index
Signal Circuit -
General signal
failure
P279D- Four Wheel Drive Signal Check transfer case control module DTCs and refer to the
64 (4WD) Range plausibility relevant DTC index
Signal Circuit - failure
Signal plausibility
failure
U0001- High Speed CAN CAN bus off Check the powertrain control module and anti-lock brake
88 Communication system ontrol module for other CAN bus off DTCs and
CAN Bus - Bus off refer to the relevant DTC index. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the module connector and
power/ground circuits. Refer to network communication
section of the workshop manual. Using the manufacturers
approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN integrity test.
Check fuses, examine fuse-box for water ingress, moisture
or loose plugs. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
connect an Ohm meter between the pins for CAN high and
CAN low. If the resistance is 0 Ohm with a short circuit at
CAN bus, renew the transmission control module. If the
resistance is infinite with open circuit at CAN bus, renew
the transmission control module. A correct resistance
should be approximately 40kOhm
U0100- Lost Circuit / Check for other CAN bus codes. Refer to the electrical
63 Communication component circuit diagrams and check the module connector and
With ECM/PCM "A" protection power/ground circuits. Refer to network communication
- Circuit / time-out section of the workshop manual. Using the manufacturers
component CAN signal approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN integrity test
protection time-out error from
engine control
module
CAN bus fault
with Transfer Case protection power/ground circuits. Refer to network communication
Control Module - time-out section of the workshop manual. Using the manufacturers
Circuit / CAN signal approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN integrity test
component error from
protection time-out transfer case
control module
CAN bus fault
U0103- Lost Circuit / Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check module
63 Communication component connectors / LIN harness between transmission control
With Gear Shift protection module and transmission control switch
Control Module A - time-out
Circuit / LIN signal
protection time-out transmission
control switch
With Anti-Lock protection power/ground circuits. Refer to network communication
Brake System time-out section of the workshop manual. Using the manufacturers
(ABS) Control CAN signal approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN integrity test
Module - Circuit / error from
component anti-lock brake
protection time-out system control
module
CAN bus fault
With Steering protection power/ground circuits. Refer to network communication
Angle Sensor time-out section of the workshop manual. Using the manufacturers
Module - Circuit / CAN signal approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN integrity test
protection time-out steering angle
sensor module
CAN bus fault
With Park Brake protection power/ground circuits. Refer to network communication
protection time-out electric park
brake control
module
CAN bus fault
with All Terrain protection power/ground circuits. Refer to network communication
protection time-out centre console
switch pack
CAN bus fault
With Body Control protection power/ground circuits. Refer to network communication
Module - Circuit / time-out section of the workshop manual. Using the manufacturers
component CAN signal approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN integrity test
protection time-out error from
central
junction box
CAN bus fault
U0300- Internal Control Invalid / Check that the vehicle configuration is correctly set in the
57 Module Software incomplete car configuration file using the manufacturer's approved
Incompatibility - software diagnostic software. Check and update the transmission
Invalid / component control module software version if necessary
incomplete
software
component
U0401- Invalid Data General signal Check engine control module for related DTCs. Refer to
02 Received from failure the relevant section in the workshop manual
ECM/PCM A -
General signal
failure
U0401- Invalid Data Signal invalid Check for other CAN bus codes. Refer to the electrical
29 Received from CAN signal circuit diagrams and check the module connector and
ECM/PCM A - error from power/ground circuits. Refer to network communication
Signal invalid engine control section of the workshop manual. Using the manufacturers
module approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN integrity test
CAN bus fault
U0401- Invalid Data General Check for other CAN bus codes. Refer to the electrical
41 Received from checksum circuit diagrams and check the module connector and
ECM/PCM A - failure power/ground circuits. Refer to network communication
General checksum CAN signal section of the workshop manual. Using the manufacturers
failure error from approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN integrity test
engine control
module
CAN bus fault
U0401- Invalid Data Signal Check for other module related DTCs. Refer to the
64 Received from plausibility relevant section in the workshop manual. Check the
ECM/PCM A - failure control module for correct software version using the
Signal plausibility manufacturers approved diagnostic system
failure
U0401- Invalid Data Alive / Check for other CAN bus codes. Refer to the electrical
82 Received from sequence circuit diagrams and check the module connector and
ECM/PCM A - Alive counter power/ground circuits. Refer to network communication
/ sequence counter incorrect / not section of the workshop manual. Using the manufacturers
incorrect / not updated approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN integrity test
updated CAN signal
error from
engine control
module
CAN bus fault
U0401- Invalid Data Value of signal Check engine control module for other codes. Carry out
83 Received from protection repair actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ECM/PCM A - Value calculation check the module connector and power/ground circuits
of signal protection incorrect
calculation CAN signal
incorrect error from
engine control
module
U0404- Invalid Data General Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check module
41 Received from checksum connectors / CAN harness between transmission control
Gear Shift Control failure module and transmission control switch
Module A - General
checksum failure
U0404- Invalid Data Signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check module
64 Received from plausibility connectors / CAN harness between transmission control
Gear Shift Control failure module and transmission control switch. Check
Module A - Signal transmission control switch for failure
U0404- Invalid Data Alive / Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check module
82 Received from sequence connectors / CAN harness between transmission control
Gear Shift Control counter module and transmission control switch
Module A - Alive / incorrect / not
sequence counter updated
incorrect / not
updated
U0404- Invalid Data Value of signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check module
83 Received from protection connectors / CAN harness between transmission control
Gear Shift Control calculation module and transmission control switch. Check
Module A - Value incorrect transmission control switch for failure
of signal protection
calculation
incorrect
U0415- Invalid Data Signal invalid Check for other CAN bus codes. Refer to the electrical
29 Received From CAN signal circuit diagrams and check the module connector and
Anti-Lock Brake error from power/ground circuits. Refer to network communication
System (ABS) anti-lock brake section of the workshop manual. Using the manufacturers
Control Module - system control approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN integrity test
Signal invalid module
CAN bus fault
41 Received From checksum circuit diagrams and check the module connector and
Anti-Lock Brake failure power/ground circuits. Refer to network communication
System (ABS) CAN signal section of the workshop manual. Using the manufacturers
Control Module - error from approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN integrity test
General checksum anti-lock brake
failure system control
module
CAN bus fault
82 Received From sequence circuit diagrams and check the module connector and
Anti-Lock Brake counter power/ground circuits. Refer to network communication
System (ABS) incorrect / not section of the workshop manual. Using the manufacturers
Control Module - updated approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN integrity test
Alive / sequence CAN signal
counter incorrect / error from
not updated anti-lock brake
system control
module
CAN bus fault
U0416- Invalid Data Component or Check anti-lock brake system for other codes. Carry out
98 Received From system over repair actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Vehicle Dynamics temperature check the module connector and power/ground circuits
Control Module -
Component or
system over
temperature
41 Received From checksum circuit diagrams and check the module connector and
Body Control failure power/ground circuits. Refer to network communication
Module - General CAN signal section of the workshop manual. Using the manufacturers
checksum failure error from approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN integrity test
central
junction box
CAN bus fault
82 Received From sequence circuit diagrams and check the module connector and
Body Control counter power/ground circuits. Refer to network communication
Module - Alive / incorrect / not section of the workshop manual. Using the manufacturers
sequence counter updated approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN integrity test
incorrect / not
updated
U0422- Invalid Data Value of signal Check for other CAN bus codes. Refer to the electrical
83 Received From protection circuit diagrams and check the module connector and
Body Control calculation power/ground circuits. Refer to network communication
Module - Value of incorrect section of the workshop manual. Using the manufacturers
signal protection PowerMode approved diagnostic system, complete a CAN integrity test
calculation CAN signal
incorrect error from
passenger
compartment
fuse box
U0424- Invalid Data Bus signal / Check integrated climate control module and switch pack
08 Received From message for other codes. Carry out repair actions. Refer to the
HVAC Control failures electrical circuit diagrams and check the module connector
Module - Bus and power/ground circuits
signal / message
failures
U101B- Lost Missing Check for other CAN bus and LIN related DTC codes. Refer
87 Communication message to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the module
With GSM - connector and power/ground circuits. Refer to network
Multiple Bus - communication section of the workshop manual. Using the
Missing message manufacturers approved diagnostic system, complete a
CAN/LIN integrity test
U2101- Control Module Invalid / Check that the vehicle configuration is correctly set in the
56 Configuration incomplete car configuration file using the manufacturer's approved
Incompatible - configuration diagnostic software. Check and update the transmission
Invalid / control module software version if necessary
incomplete
configuration
U3000- Control Module - Invalid / Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, contact
56 Invalid / incomplete Dealer Technical Support
incomplete configuration
configuration
U3001- Control Module Unexpected Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check charging
94 Improper operation circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit. Clear DTC
Shutdown - Charging and repeat automated diagnostic procedure using the
Unexpected circuit short to manufacturer approved diagnostic system. If DTC remains
operation ground, check battery is in fully charged and serviceable condition
power, open using the Midtronics battery tester and battery care
circuit manual. If OK suspect the generator
Quiescent
current high
Battery
failure/worn
out
Generator
failure
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: TV
Control Module (TVCM)
Television Control Module (TVCM) - Digital
CAUTIONS:
vehicle.
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Television Control Module
(TVCM) - Digital. For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section
in the workshop manual.

B1A56- Antenna - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit antenna 1 signal circuit for short circuit to ground
ground reference - TV1 SIG
Antenna 1 signal
circuit short
circuit to ground
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit antenna 1 signal circuit for short circuit to power
battery reference - TV1 SIG
Antenna 1 signal
circuit short
circuit to power
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit antenna 1 signal circuit for open circuit, high resistance
reference - TV1 SIG
Antenna 1 signal
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B1D55- Antenna #2 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit antenna 2 signal circuit for short circuit to ground
ground reference - TV2 SIG
Antenna 2 signal
circuit short
circuit to ground
12 Circuit short to NOTE: Circuit antenna 2 signal circuit for short circuit to power
battery reference - TV2 SIG
Antenna 2 signal
circuit short
circuit to power
13 Circuit open NOTE: Circuit antenna 2 signal circuit for open circuit, high resistance
reference - TV2 SIG
Antenna 2 signal
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B1D56- Antenna #3 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 Circuit - Circuit NOTE: Circuit antenna 3 signal circuit for short circuit to ground
short to ground reference - TV3 SIG
Antenna 3 signal
circuit short
circuit to ground
12 Circuit - Circuit NOTE: Circuit antenna 3 signal circuit for short circuit to power
short to reference - TV3 SIG
battery
Antenna 3 signal
circuit short
circuit to power
13 Circuit - Circuit NOTE: Circuit antenna 3 signal circuit for open circuit, high resistance
open reference - TV3 SIG
Antenna 3 signal
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
11 Circuit - Circuit NOTE: Circuit antenna 4 signal circuit for short circuit to ground
short to ground reference - TV4 SIG
Antenna 4 signal
circuit short
circuit to ground
12 Circuit - Circuit NOTE: Circuit antenna 4 signal circuit for short circuit to power
short to reference - TV4 SIG
battery
Antenna 4 signal
circuit short
circuit to power
13 Circuit - Circuit NOTE: Circuit antenna 4 signal circuit for open circuit, high resistance
open reference - TV4 SIG
Antenna 4 signal
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
B1D58- Television Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the CVBS
11 Output - Circuit NOTE: Circuit signal circuit for short circuit to ground
short to ground reference - CVBS OUT
CVBS signal
circuit short
circuit to ground
12 Output - Circuit NOTE: Circuit circuit for short circuit to power
short to reference - CVBS OUT
battery
CVBS signal
circuit short
circuit to power
13 Output - Circuit NOTE: Circuit circuit for open circuit, high resistance
open reference - CVBS OUT
CVBS signal
circuit open
circuit, high
resistance
U2100- Initial Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
00 Configuration file mismatch with and up-date the car configuration file as necessary
Not Complete - vehicle Install a new TV control module as necessary
information Incorrect TV
control module
installed
U2101- Control Module Car configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
00 Configuration file mismatch with and up-date the car configuration file as necessary
Incompatible - vehicle Install a new TV control module as necessary
information Incorrect TV
control module
installed
U3000- Control Module TV control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-
46 - Calibration / is not configured configure the TV control module with the latest level
parameter correctly software
memory failure
U3000- Control Module TV control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
49 - Internal failure and install the latest relevant level of software to the TV
electronic control module
failure Clear the DTCs and retest. If fault persists, check and
install new TV control module as required
U3000- Control Module TV control module Check airflow to the TV control module. Using the
98 - Component over temperature manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs
or system over and retest. If the fault persists, install a new TV control
temperature module
U3003- Battery Voltage Mismatch between Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
62 - Signal the voltage at the datalogger signal - ECU Power Supply Voltage (0xD111) -
compare failure TV control module and compare it to battery voltage. Refer to the electrical
and the voltage circuit diagrams and check the TV control module power
value broadcast and ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
on the CAN bus
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index TDV6 3.0L
Diesel , DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM)
Engine Control Module (ECM) 3.0L TdV6
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Engine Control Module, for
For additional information, refer to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1087- LIN Bus "A" - No operation Generator LIN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
93 communication circuit check the generator LIN bus circuit, for
failure short circuit to power, short circuit to
ground, open circuit. Repair harness as
required. Clear DTC and retest
B10A2- Crash Input - Signal low This DTC is set when the 'airbag deployed'
32 time < minimum NOTE: - Circuit INI - signal supplied by the restraints control
module is outside the specification
Restraints control expected by the engine control module
module failure Check the restraints control module for
Auxiliary junction box DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
failure Check auxiliary junction box for DTCs and
Harness failure refer to the relevant DTC index
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
check the supplementary restraints system
input circuit for failures. This circuit is a
single wire which connects the restraints
control module to the auxiliary junction
box and the engine control module. Check
this circuit for short circuit to power, short
circuit to ground, open circuit. Repair
harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
B10A2- Crash Input - Signal high This DTC is set when the 'airbag deployed'
35 time > maximum NOTE: - Circuit INI - signal supplied by the restraints control
Restraints control expected by the engine control module
module failure Check the restraints control module for
Auxiliary junction box DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
failure Check auxiliary junction box for DTCs and
Harness failure refer to the relevant DTC index
check the supplementary restraints system
input circuit for failures. This circuit is a
single wire which connects the restraints
control module to the auxiliary junction
box and the engine control module. Check
B10A2- Crash Input - Signal This DTC is set when the 'airbag deployed'
36 frequency too low NOTE: - Circuit INI - signal supplied by the restraints control
The engine control expected by the engine control module
module detected Check the restraints control module for
excessive duration for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
one cycle of the Check auxiliary junction box for DTCs and
output across a refer to the relevant DTC index
specified sample size Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
Restraints control check the supplementary restraints system
module failure input circuit for failures. This circuit is a
Auxiliary junction box single wire which connects the restraints
failure control module to the auxiliary junction
Harness failure box and the engine control module. Check
B10A2- Crash Input - Signal This DTC is set when the 'airbag deployed'
37 frequency too high NOTE: - Circuit INI - signal supplied by the restraints control
The engine control expected by the engine control module
module detected Check the restraints control module for
insufficient duration DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
for one cycle of the Check auxiliary junction box for DTCs and
output across a refer to the relevant DTC index
specified sample size Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
Restraints control check the supplementary restraints system
module failure input circuit for failures. This circuit is a
Auxiliary junction box single wire which connects the restraints
failure control module to the auxiliary junction
Harness failure box and the engine control module. Check
B11D9- Vehicle Battery - No sub Harness failure This DTC is set when the battery
00 type information Battery failure monitoring system fails a diagnostic check
Battery monitoring Refer to the battery care manual and
system module failure verify that the vehicle battery is fully
charged and serviceable before continuing
with further diagnostic tests
check the connections between the battery
and the battery monitoring module are
clean and secure
Ensure that full battery voltage is present
on the monitor line pin at the battery
monitoring system module connector.
Ensure the battery ground connection is
clean and secure
Check the LIN bus connections to the
battery monitoring system module. Check
LIN bus integrity. Check and install new
battery monitoring system module as
required
B11DB- Battery Monitoring Module Harness failure This DTC is set when the engine control
87 - Missing message Battery monitoring module has lost communication with the
system module failure battery monitoring system module
Refer to the battery care manual and
verify that the vehicle battery is fully
charged and serviceable before continuing
with further diagnostic tests
check the connections between the battery
and the battery monitoring module are
clean and secure
Ensure that full battery voltage is present
on the monitor line pin at the battery
monitoring system module connector.
Ensure the battery ground connection is
clean and secure
Check the LIN bus connections to the
battery monitoring system module. Check
LIN bus integrity. Check and install new
battery monitoring system module as
required
B1206- Crash Occurred - Event Event information - This DTC is set if the restraints control
68 information The engine control module has deployed the restraints
module has received a systems following activation of the crash
crash signal from the sensors. Check the restraints control
restraints control module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
module DTC index
P0030- HO2S Heater Control Using the manufacturer approved

11 Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor 1) NOTE: - Circuit LPPH_A diagnostic system check datalogger
- Circuit short to ground - signals, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater
Duty Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 1 (0x03A1).
The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
module has detected a check the heated oxygen sensor heater
ground measurement control (heater ground) circuit for short
for a period longer circuit to ground. Repair harness as
than expected or has required. Clear DTC and retest
detected a ground Check and install new heated oxygen
measurement when sensor as required
another value was
expected
Harness failure -
Heated oxygen sensor
heater control circuit
failure

- Circuit short to battery - signals, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater
module has detected a check the heated oxygen sensor heater
vehicle power control (heater ground) circuit for short
measurement for a circuit to power. Repair harness as
period longer than required. Clear DTC and retest
expected or has Check and install new heated oxygen
detected a vehicle sensor as required
power measurement
when another value
was expected
Harness failure -
failure

- Circuit open - signals, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater
module has check the heated oxygen sensor heater
determined an open control (heater ground) circuit for open
circuit via lack of bias circuit. Repair harness as required. Clear
voltage, low current DTC and retest
flow, no change in the Check and install new heated oxygen
state of an input in sensor as required
response to an output
Harness failure -
open circuit
failure
P0030- HO2S Heater Control Harness failure - Using the manufacturer approved
4B Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Heated oxygen sensor diagnostic system check datalogger
- Over temperature heater control circuit signals, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater
short circuit to power Duty Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 1 (0x03A1).
Heated oxygen sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
failure check the heated oxygen sensor heater
control (heater ground) circuit for short
circuit to power. Repair harness as
Check and install new heated oxygen
sensor as required
P0033- Turbocharger/Supercharger Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Bypass Valve Control NOTE: - Circuit CRV - check the boost air recirculation solenoid
Circuit / Open - No sub control circuit between the engine control
type information Harness failure - Boost module and the control valve for open
air recirculation circuit. Check the power supply to the
solenoid control circuit control valve. Repair harness as required.
open circuit Clear DTC and retest
Boost air recirculation Check and install new boost air
solenoid failure recirculation solenoid as required

Circuit Low - No sub type circuit between the engine control module
information Harness failure - Boost and the control valve for a short circuit to
air recirculation ground. Check the power supply to the
solenoid circuit short control valve. Repair harness as required.
circuit to ground Clear DTC and retest

Circuit High - No sub type circuit between the engine control module
information Harness failure - Boost and the control valve for a short circuit to
air recirculation power. Check the power supply to the
solenoid circuit short control valve. Repair harness as required.
circuit to power Clear DTC and retest
P0039- Turbocharger/Supercharger Harness failure - Boost Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
4B Bypass Valve Control air recirculation check the boost air recirculation solenoid
Circuit Range/Performance solenoid circuit short circuit between the engine control module
- Over temperature to ground, short and the control valve for a short circuit to
circuit to power, high ground, short circuit to power, high
resistance resistance. Check the power supply to the
Boost air recirculation control valve. Repair harness as required.
solenoid failure Clear DTC and retest
Check and install new boost air
recirculation solenoid as required
P004A- Turbocharger/Supercharger Using the manufacturer approved

00 Boost Control B Circuit / NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - No sub type VGT_POS - VGT_NEG - signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
information Control Bank 2 (0x0533), Boost Pressure
Harness failure - Actuator Bank 2 - Controller output
Variable geometry (0x03DE). Refer to the electrical circuit
turbine vane actuator diagrams and check the variable geometry
control circuit open turbine vane actuator control circuit for
circuit open circuit. Check both of the circuits for
Variable geometry open circuit. Repair harness as required.
turbine vane actuator Clear DTC and retest
control unit failure Check and install new variable geometry
turbine vane actuator control unit as
required
P004A- Turbocharger/Supercharger Using the manufacturer approved

71 Boost Control B Circuit / NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - Actuator stuck VGT_POS - VGT_NEG - signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
Control Bank 2 (0x0533), Boost Pressure
Harness failure - Actuator Bank 2 - Controller output
Variable geometry (0x03DE). Refer to the electrical circuit
turbine vane actuator diagrams and check the variable geometry
control circuit open turbine vane actuator control circuit for
circuit open circuit. Check both of the circuits for
Variable geometry open circuit. Repair harness as required.
turbine vane actuator Clear DTC and retest
required
P004B- Turbocharger/Supercharger Using the manufacturer approved

16 Boost Control B Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - VGT_POS - VGT_NEG - signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
Circuit voltage below Control Bank 2 (0x0533). Refer to the
threshold The engine control electrical circuit diagrams and check the
module measured a variable geometry turbine vane actuator
voltage below a control circuit for high resistance or short
specified range but circuit to another circuit. Check both of
not necessarily a short the circuits for failures. Repair harness as
circuit to ground required. Clear DTC and retest
Harness failure - Check and install new variable geometry
Variable geometry turbine vane actuator control unit as
turbine vane actuator required
control circuit
Variable geometry
turbine vane actuator
control unit failure

Circuit current above Control Bank 2 (0x0533). Refer to the
threshold Harness failure - electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Variable geometry variable geometry turbine vane actuator
turbine vane actuator control circuit for short circuit to ground,
control circuit short short circuit to power, high resistance.
circuit to ground, Check both of the circuits for failures.
short circuit to power, Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
high resistance retest
Variable geometry Check and install new variable geometry
turbine vane actuator turbine vane actuator control unit as
control unit failure required

1D Boost Control B Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit current out of range Control Bank 2 (0x0533). Refer to the
Harness failure - electrical circuit diagrams and check the
turbine vane actuator control circuit for short circuit to another
control circuit circuit. Check both of the circuits for
Mechanical failure on failures. Repair harness as required. Clear
actuator mechanism DTC and retest
Variable geometry Check for mechanical failure on actuator
turbine vane actuator mechanism
required
P004B- Turbocharger/Supercharger Harness failure - Using the manufacturer approved

4B Boost Control B Circuit Variable geometry diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - Over turbine vane actuator signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
temperature control circuit short Control Bank 2 (0x0533). Refer to the
circuit to ground, electrical circuit diagrams and check the
short circuit to power, variable geometry turbine vane actuator
high resistance. control circuit for short circuit to ground,
Mechanical failure on short circuit to power, high resistance.
actuator mechanism Check both of the circuits for failures.
Variable geometry Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
turbine vane actuator retest
control unit failure Check for mechanical failure on actuator
mechanism
Check and install new variable geometry
required
P004C- Turbocharger/Supercharger Using the manufacturer approved

00 Boost Control B Circuit Low NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
- No sub type information VGT_POS - VGT_NEG - signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
Control Bank 2 (0x0533). Refer to the
turbine vane actuator control circuit for short circuit to ground.
control circuit short Check both of the circuits for failures.
circuit to ground Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
retest

- Circuit short to ground VGT_POS - VGT_NEG - signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
The engine control electrical circuit diagrams and check the
module has detected a variable geometry turbine vane actuator
ground measurement control circuit for short circuit to ground.
for a period longer Check both of the circuits for failures.
than expected or has Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
detected a ground retest
measurement when
another value was
expected
Harness failure -
Variable geometry
control circuit short
circuit to ground

circuit - Short to battery VGT_POS - VGT_NEG - signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
module has detected a variable geometry turbine vane actuator
vehicle power control circuit for short circuit to power.
measurement for a Check both circuits for failures. Repair
period longer than harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
expected or has
detected a vehicle
power measurement
when another value
was expected
Harness failure -
Variable geometry
control circuit short
circuit to power
P004C- Turbocharger/Supercharger Harness failure - Using the manufacturer approved

77 Boost Control B Circuit Low Variable geometry diagnostic system check datalogger
- Commanded position not turbine vane actuator signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
reachable control circuit short Control Bank 2 (0x0533). Refer to the
circuit to ground, high electrical circuit diagrams and check the
resistance, open variable geometry turbine vane actuator
circuit control circuit for short circuit to ground,
Harness failure - high resistance, open circuit. Repair
Variable geometry harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
turbocharger sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit, short circuit to check the variable geometry turbocharger
ground, high sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
resistance, open high resistance, open circuit
circuit Check for mechanical failure on actuator
Mechanical failure on mechanism
actuator mechanism Check and install new variable geometry
Variable geometry turbine vane actuator control unit as
turbine vane actuator required
control unit failure
P004D- Turbocharger/Supercharger Using the manufacturer approved

High - No sub type VGT_POS - VGT_NEG - signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
information Control Bank 2 (0x0533). Refer to the
Variable geometry boost control circuit for short circuit to
turbine vane actuator power. Check both circuits for failures.
control circuit short Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
circuit to power retest
P004D- Turbocharger/Supercharger Harness failure - Using the manufacturer approved

77 Boost Control B Circuit Variable geometry diagnostic system check datalogger
High - Commanded turbine vane actuator signals, Commanded Boost Actuator
Position Not Reachable control circuit short Control Bank 2 (0x0533). Refer to the
circuit to power electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Harness failure - variable geometry turbine vane actuator
Variable geometry control circuit for short circuit to power.
turbocharger sensor Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
circuit, short circuit to retest
power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Mechanical failure on check the variable geometry turbocharger
actuator mechanism sensor circuit for short circuit to power
Variable geometry Check for mechanical failure on actuator
turbine vane actuator mechanism
required
P006A- MAP - Mass or Volume Air Intake air system, If this DTC is logged with P1247-00,
00 Flow Correlation - No sub high pressure boost P0402-00 & P00BF-07, suspect intake air
type information leak bank 1 system, high pressure boost leak bank 1
Intake air system, If this DTC is logged with P1247-00,
high pressure boost suspect intake air system, high pressure
leak bi-turbo mode boost leak bi-turbo mode bank 2
bank 2 If this DTC is logged with P00BE-07 &
Intake air system, low P0401-00, suspect intake air system, low
pressure boost leak pressure boost leak bank 1
bank 1 If this DTC is logged with P00BC-00,
Intake air system, low suspect intake air system, low pressure
pressure boost leak boost leak bank 2
bank 2 Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
P006A- MAP - Mass or Volume Air The engine control Check for other DTCs associated with
22 Flow Correlation - Signal module measured a intake and boost air flow control
amplitude > maximum signal voltage above a actuators, refer to the relevant DTC index
specified range but and act on those DTCs first
not necessarily a short Refer to workshop manual and check
circuit to power, gain intake air circuit, boost air circuit and
too high associated control valves, intercooler and
Error path indicating air filter for leaks, blockages, restrictions
whether over boost and control valve actuator malfunctions
monitoring is active or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
not check both mass air flow sensor circuits
Failure in induction air for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
circuit power, high resistance, open circuit.
Failure in boost air Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
circuit retest
Mass air flow sensor Check manifold absolute pressure sensor
circuit short circuit to wiring circuits for short circuit to ground,
ground, short circuit short circuit to power, high resistance,
to power, high open circuit. Repair harness as required.
resistance, open Clear DTC and retest
circuit Check and install new mass air flow
Manifold absolute sensor or manifold absolute pressure
pressure sensor circuit sensor as required
short circuit to
to power, high
resistance, open
circuit
Mass air flow sensor
failure
Manifold absolute
pressure sensor failure
P0070- Ambient Air Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

16 Sensor Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit AAT - diagnostic system check datalogger
voltage below threshold signals, Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
The engine control Voltage (0x03BA), Ambient Air
module measured a Temperature (0xF466). This DTC is set
voltage below a when the ambient air temperature sensor
specified range but signal line voltage at the engine control
not necessarily a short module is less than the threshold value.
circuit to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Harness failure - check both sides of the circuit for high
Ambient air resistance or short circuits. Repair harness
temperature sensor as required. Clear DTC and retest
circuit Check and install new ambient air
Ambient air temperature sensor as required
temperature sensor
failure
P0070- Ambient Air Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

17 Sensor Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit AAT - diagnostic system check datalogger
voltage above threshold signals, Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
The engine control Voltage (0x03BA), Ambient Air
module measured a Temperature (0xF466). This DTC is set
voltage above a when the ambient air temperature sensor
specified range but signal line voltage at the engine control
not necessarily a short module is greater than the threshold
circuit to power value. Refer to the electrical circuit
Harness failure - diagrams and check both sides of the
Ambient air circuit for high resistance or short circuits.
temperature sensor Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
circuit retest
Ambient air Check and install new ambient air
temperature sensor temperature sensor as required
failure
P007A- Charge Air Cooler Using the manufacturer approved

16 Temperature Sensor NOTE: - Circuit ACT - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit (Bank 1) - Circuit signals, Charge Air Temperature Voltage
voltage below threshold The engine control (0x03EE). This DTC is set when the air
module measured a charge temperature sensor signal line
voltage below a voltage at the engine control module is
specified range but less than the threshold value. Refer to the
not necessarily a short electrical circuit diagrams and check both
circuit to ground sides of the circuit for high resistance or
Harness failure - Air short circuits. Repair harness as required.
charge temperature Clear DTC and retest
sensor circuit Check and install new charge air
Air charge temperature sensor as required
temperature sensor
failure
P007A- Charge Air Cooler Using the manufacturer approved

17 Temperature Sensor NOTE: - Circuit ACT - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit (Bank 1) - Circuit signals, Air Charge Temperature
voltage above threshold The engine control (0x051C). This DTC is set when the air
module measured a charge temperature sensor signal line
voltage above a voltage at the engine control module is
specified range but greater than the threshold value. Refer to
not necessarily a short the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit to power both sides of the circuit for high resistance
Harness failure - Air or short circuits. Repair harness as
charge temperature required. Clear DTC and retest
sensor circuit Check and install new charge air
Air charge temperature sensor as required
temperature sensor
failure
P007A- Charge Air Cooler Harness failure - Air Using the manufacturer approved
62 Temperature Sensor charge temperature diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit (Bank 1) - Signal sensor circuit short signals, Charge Air Temperature Voltage
compare failure circuit to ground, (0x03EE). Refer to the electrical circuit
short circuit to power, diagrams and check air charge
high resistance, open temperature sensor circuit for short circuit
circuit to ground, short circuit to power, high
Air charge resistance, open circuit. Repair harness as
temperature sensor required. Clear DTC and retest
failure Check and install new charge air
temperature sensor as required
P0087- Fuel Rail/System Pressure Low level fuel Check the fuel volume available in the fuel
00 - Too Low - No sub type condition tank is sufficient, add fuel as required.
information Fuel gauge sender unit Clear DTC and retest
sticking Check the fuel gauge sender units for
Fuel lines restricted correct operation
Fuel lines leaking Check fuel lines for restriction
Fuel pump failure Check fuel lines for leakage
Fuel rail pressure Check for fuel pump related DTCs and
sensor signal circuit refer to the relevant DTC index
short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground, short circuit check fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for
to power, open circuit, short circuit to ground, short circuit to
high resistance power, open circuit, high resistance.
Fuel rail pressure Repair harness as required
sensor failure Check and install new fuel rail pressure
sensor as required
P0087- Fuel Rail/System Pressure The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
16 - Too Low - Circuit voltage module measured a check fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for
below threshold voltage below a short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
specified range but resistance. Repair harness as required.
not necessarily a short Clear DTC and retest
circuit to ground Check and install new fuel rail pressure
Fuel rail pressure sensor as required
sensor circuit, short
circuit to ground,
open circuit, high
resistance
Fuel rail pressure
sensor failure
P0087- Fuel Rail/System Pressure The engine control Check fuel lines for restriction
21 - Too Low - Signal module measured a Check fuel lines for leakage
amplitude < minimum signal voltage below a Check fuel injector's for stuck open,
specified range but leakage
not necessarily a short Check for fuel pump related DTCs and
circuit to ground, gain refer to the relevant DTC index
low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Fuel lines restricted check fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for
Fuel lines leaking short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
Fuel injector's stuck resistance. Repair harness as required
open, leaking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Fuel pump failure check fuel pressure control valve circuit
Fuel rail pressure for short circuit to ground, open circuit,
sensor circuit short high resistance. Repair harness as
circuit to ground, required
open circuit, high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
resistance check fuel volume control valve circuit for
Fuel pressure control short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
valve circuit short resistance. Repair harness as required
circuit to ground, Check and install new fuel rail pressure
open circuit, high sensor as required
resistance Check and install new fuel pressure
Fuel volume control control valve as required
valve circuit short Check and install new fuel volume control
circuit to ground, valve as required
open circuit, high
resistance
Fuel rail pressure
sensor failure
Fuel pressure control
valve failure
Fuel volume control
valve failure
P0088- Fuel Rail/System Pressure Fuel gauge sender unit Check the fuel gauge sender units for
00 - Too High - No sub type sticking correct operation
information Fuel rail pressure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
sensor signal circuit check fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for
short circuit to power short circuit to power. Repair harness as
Fuel rail pressure required
sensor ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
open circuit, high check fuel rail pressure sensor ground
resistance circuit for open circuit, high resistance.
Fuel pressure control Repair harness as required
valve circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to power, check fuel pressure control valve circuit
ground, open circuit, for short circuit to power, ground, open
high resistance circuit, high resistance. Repair harness as
Fuel volume control required
valve circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to power, check fuel volume control valve circuit for
ground, open circuit, short circuit to power, ground, open
high resistance circuit, high resistance. Repair harness as
Fuel rail pressure required
sensor failure Check and install new fuel rail pressure
Fuel pressure control sensor as required
valve failure Check and install new fuel pressure
Fuel volume control control valve as required
valve failure Check and install new fuel volume control
valve as required
P0088- Fuel Rail/System Pressure The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
17 - Too High - Circuit voltage module measured a check fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for
above threshold voltage above a short circuit to power
specified range but
not necessarily a short
circuit to power
Fuel rail pressure
sensor signal circuit
P0088- Fuel Rail/System Pressure The engine control Check the fuel gauge sender units for
22 - Too High - Signal module measured a correct operation
amplitude > maximum signal voltage above a Check fuel lines for restriction
specified range but Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
not necessarily a short check fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for
circuit to power, gain short circuit to power, ground, open
too high circuit, high resistance. Repair harness as
Fuel gauge sender unit required
sticking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Fuel lines restricted check fuel pressure control valve circuit
Fuel rail pressure for short circuit to power, ground, open
sensor circuit short circuit, high resistance. Repair harness as
circuit to power, required
ground, open circuit, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
high resistance check fuel volume control valve circuit for
Fuel pressure control short circuit to power, ground, open
valve circuit short circuit, high resistance. Repair harness as
circuit to power, required
ground, open circuit, Check and install new fuel rail pressure
high resistance sensor as required
Fuel volume control Check and install new fuel pressure
valve circuit short control valve as required
circuit to power, Check and install new fuel volume control
ground, open circuit, valve as required
high resistance Check for fuel pump related DTCs and
Fuel rail pressure refer to the relevant DTC index
sensor failure
valve failure
Fuel volume control
valve failure
Fuel pump failure
P0089- Fuel Pressure Regulator The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
21 Performance - Signal module measured a check fuel pressure regulator circuit for
amplitude < minimum signal voltage below a short circuit to ground, open circuit.
specified range but Repair harness as required
not necessarily a short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to ground, gain check fuel pressure regulator reference
low voltage circuit for high resistance. Repair
Fuel pressure harness as required
regulator signal circuit Check and install new fuel pressure
short circuit to regulator as required
ground, open circuit
Fuel pressure
regulator reference
voltage circuit high
resistance
Fuel pressure
regulator failure
P0089- Fuel Pressure Regulator The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
22 Performance - Signal module measured a check fuel pressure regulator circuit for
amplitude > maximum signal voltage above a short circuit to power. Repair harness as
specified range but required
not necessarily a short Check and install new fuel pressure
circuit to power, gain regulator as required
too high
Fuel pressure
regulator signal circuit
Fuel pressure
regulator failure
P0090- Fuel Pressure Regulator 1 Using the manufacturer approved

13 Control Circuit/Open - NOTE: - Circuit PCV - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit open signals, Fuel Pressure Relief Control Valve
The engine control Duty Cycle (0x03C3). Refer to the
module has electrical circuit diagrams and check the
determined an open fuel pressure control valve control circuit
circuit via lack of bias for open circuit. Repair harness as
voltage, low current required. Clear DTC and retest
flow, no change in the
state of an input in
Harness failure - Fuel
pressure control valve
control circuit open
circuit
P0090- Fuel Pressure Regulator 1 Fuel pressure control Using the manufacturer approved
4B Control Circuit/Open - valve signal circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Over temperature short circuit to power, signals, Fuel Pressure Relief Control Valve
open circuit Duty Cycle (0x03C3). Refer to the
Fuel pressure electrical circuit diagrams and check fuel
regulator failure pressure control valve circuit for short
circuit to power, open circuit. Repair
Check and install new fuel pressure
regulator as required

11 Control Circuit Low - NOTE: - Circuit PCV - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit short to ground signals, Fuel Pressure Relief Control Valve
module has detected a electrical circuit diagrams and check the
ground measurement fuel pressure control valve circuit for short
for a period longer circuit to ground. Check power supply
than expected or has circuit to control valve. Repair harness as
detected a ground required. Clear DTC and retest
measurement when Check and install new fuel pressure
another value was control valve as required
expected
ground
valve failure

16 Control Circuit Low - NOTE: - Circuit PCV - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit voltage below signals, Fuel Pressure Relief Control Valve
threshold The engine control Duty Cycle (0x03C3). This DTC is set
module measured a when the voltage on the fuel pressure
voltage below a control valve circuit is less than the
specified range but threshold expected by the engine control
not necessarily a short module. Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to ground diagrams and check the fuel pressure
Harness failure - Fuel control valve circuit for high resistance,
pressure control valve short circuit to ground. Check power
circuit supply circuit to the fuel pressure control
Fuel pressure control valve. Repair harness as required. Clear
valve failure DTC and retest
control valve as required

12 Control Circuit High - NOTE: - Circuit PCV - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit short to battery signals, Fuel Pressure Relief Control Valve
vehicle power fuel pressure control valve circuit for short
measurement for a circuit to power. Check power supply
period longer than circuit to control valve. Repair harness as
expected or has required. Clear DTC and retest
detected a vehicle
power measurement
when another value
was expected
power

17 Control Circuit High - NOTE: - Circuit PCV - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit voltage above signals, Fuel Pressure Relief Control Valve
threshold The engine control Duty Cycle (0x03C3). This DTC is set
module measured a when the voltage on the fuel pressure
voltage above a control valve circuit is more than the
specified range but threshold expected by the engine control
not necessarily a short module. Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to power diagrams and check the fuel pressure
Harness failure - Fuel control valve circuit for high resistance,
pressure control valve short circuit to power. Check power supply
circuit circuit to the fuel pressure control valve.
Fuel pressure control Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
valve failure retest
control valve as required
P00AA- Intake Air Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

16 Sensor 1 Circuit (Bank 2) - NOTE: - Circuit IAT - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit voltage below signals, Intake Air Temperature Sensor
threshold The engine control (0x1279), Intake Air Temperature
module measured a (0xF40F). This DTC is set when the
voltage below a voltage on the intake air temperature
specified range but sensor circuit is less than the threshold
not necessarily a short expected by the engine control module.
circuit to ground The intake air temperature sensor is
Harness failure - integrated into the electronics package of
Intake air temperature the mass air flow sensor and shares the
sensor circuit same ground circuit as the mass air flow
Intake air temperature element of the sensor. Refer to the
sensor failure (part of electrical circuit diagrams and check all
mass air flow sensor) the circuits connected to the mass air flow
sensor for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance. Check mass air flow sensor 2
circuits as both sensors share the ground
connection. Repair harness as required.
Clear DTC and retest
Check and install new intake air
P00AA- Intake Air Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

17 Sensor 1 Circuit (Bank 2) - NOTE: - Circuit IAT - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit voltage above signals, Intake Air Temperature Sensor
threshold The engine control (0x1279), Intake Air Temperature
module measured a (0xF40F). This DTC is set when the
voltage above a voltage on the intake air temperature
specified range but sensor circuit is more than the threshold
circuit to power The intake air temperature sensor is
Harness failure - integrated into the electronics package of
Intake air temperature the mass air flow sensor and shares the
sensor circuit same ground circuit as the mass air flow
Intake air temperature element of the sensor. Refer to the
sensor failure (part of electrical circuit diagrams and check all
mass air flow sensor) the circuits connected to the mass air flow
sensor for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance. Check mass air flow sensor 2
circuits as both sensors share the ground
connection. Repair harness as required.
P00AA- Intake Air Temperature Harness failure - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
62 Sensor 1 Circuit (Bank 2) - Intake air temperature check all the circuits connected to the
Signal compare failure sensor circuit mass air flow sensor for short circuit to
Intake air temperature ground, short circuit to power, open
sensor failure (part of circuit, high resistance. Check mass air
mass air flow sensor) flow sensor 2 circuits as both sensors
share the ground connection. Repair
P00BC- Mass or Volume Air Flow A Boost air solenoid If this DTC is logged with P1247-00,
00 Circuit Range/Performance stuck shut bi-turbo suspect boost air solenoid stuck shut bi-
- Air Flow Too Low - No mode turbo mode
sub type information Turbine intake If this DTC is logged with P22D3-77 &
solenoid stuck shut P22CF-71, suspect turbine intake solenoid
Intake system low stuck shut
pressure boost leak If this DTC is logged with P006A-00,
bank 2 suspect intake system low pressure boost
leak bank 2
P00BC- Mass or Volume Air Flow A Air flow disruption at This DTC is set if the mass air flow signal
07 Circuit Range/Performance sensing element of from sensor 1 is less than the value
- Air Flow Too Low - mass air flow sensor expected by the engine control module.
Mechanical failures Mass air flow sensor Refer to the relevant sections of the
failure workshop manual and check the induction
system for air leaks, and obstructions to
flow. Check the condition of the air filter
and examine the induction pipes for debris
which could disrupt air flow at the sensing
element. Clear DTC and retest
Check and install new mass air flow
sensor as required
P00BC- Mass or Volume Air Flow A Boost air solenoid If this DTC is logged with P1247-00,
64 Circuit Range/Performance stuck shut bi-turbo suspect boost air solenoid stuck shut bi-
- Air Flow Too Low - Signal mode turbo mode
Plausibility Failure Turbine intake If this DTC is logged with P22D3-77 &
solenoid stuck shut P22CF-71, suspect turbine intake solenoid
Intake system low stuck shut
pressure boost leak If this DTC is logged with P006A-00,
bank 2 suspect intake system low pressure boost
leak bank 2
Refer to the relevant sections of the
workshop manual and check the induction
P00BD- Mass or Volume Air Flow A Air leak at air intake Refer to the relevant sections of the
00 Circuit Range/Performance system A workshop manual and check the induction
- Air Flow Too High - No Harness failure - Mass system for air leaks
sub type information air flow sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short circuit to power check mass air flow sensor for short
Mass air flow sensor circuit to power. Repair harness as
failure required. Clear DTC and retest
sensor as required
P00BD- Mass or Volume Air Flow A Boost air solenoid If this DTC is logged with P0235-94
07 Circuit Range/Performance stuck open mono suspect, boost air solenoid stuck open
- Air Flow Too High - turbo mode mono turbo mode
Mechanical failures Turbine intake If this DTC is logged with P0235-94
solenoid leakage when suspect, turbine intake solenoid leakage
closed when closed
Turbine intake If this DTC is logged with P0235-94,
solenoid stuck open P22D2-77, P1247-00 & P22CF-71 suspect,
Intake air system, turbine intake solenoid stuck open
blocked low pressure If this DTC is logged with P0235-94,
air intake. This failure P22D2-77, P1247-00 & P22CF-71 suspect,
mode can be caused intake air system, blocked low pressure air
by snow packing in intake
the intake system. If this DTC is logged with P00BE-07 &
Symptoms often P1247-00 suspect, primary turbocharger
disappear after the seized
vehicle has been Using the manufacturer approved
warmed and heat diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
soaked. Similar EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
symptoms to seized
primary turbo
Primary turbo charger
seized
P00BD- Mass or Volume Air Flow A Boost air solenoid If this DTC is logged with P0235-94
64 Circuit Range/Performance stuck open mono suspect, boost air solenoid stuck open
- Air Flow Too High - turbo mode mono turbo mode
Signal Plausibility Failure Turbine intake If this DTC is logged with P0235-94
solenoid leakage when suspect, turbine intake solenoid leakage
closed when closed
mono turbo mode turbine intake solenoid stuck open
Intake system high Using the manufacturer approved
pressure bank 2 in diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
mono turbo mode EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
P00BE- Mass or Volume Air Flow B Boost air recirculation If this DTC is logged with P1247-00,
00 Circuit Range/Performance solenoid stuck open suspect boost air recirculation solenoid
- Air Flow Too Low - No bi-turbo mode stuck open. Refer to the relevant sections
sub type information Air flow disruption at of the workshop manual and check the
sensing element of boost air recirculation solenoid circuit for
mass air flow sensor 2 short circuit to power, short circuit to
Harness failure - Mass ground, open circuit. Refer to the relevant
air flow sensor circuit sections of the workshop manual and
short circuit to check the induction system for air leaks,
ground, high and obstructions to flow. Check the
resistance, open condition of the air filter and examine the
circuit induction pipes for debris which could
Mass air flow sensor 2 disrupt air flow at the sensing element
failure Check and install new boost air
recirculation solenoid as required
check mass air flow sensor 2 for short
circuit to ground, high resistance, open
circuit. Repair harness as required. Clear
DTC and retest
sensor 2 as required
P00BE- Mass or Volume Air Flow B Air flow disruption at This DTC is set if the mass air flow signal
07 Circuit Range/Performance sensing element of from sensor 2 is less than the value
- Air Flow Too Low - mass air flow expected by the engine control module.
Mechanical failures Mass air flow failure Refer to the relevant sections of the
workshop manual and check the induction
Check and install new mass air flow as
required
P00BF- Mass or Volume Air Flow B Air leak at air intake If this DTC is logged with P00BE-00,
00 Circuit Range/Performance system B suspect boost air recirculation solenoid
- Air Flow Too High - No Harness failure - Mass stuck open. Refer to the relevant sections
sub type information air flow sensor circuit of the workshop manual and check the
short circuit to power boost air recirculation solenoid circuit for
Mass air flow sensor 2 short circuit to power, short circuit to
failure ground, open circuit. Refer to the relevant
sections of the workshop manual and
check the induction system for air leaks
Check and install new boost air
recirculation solenoid as required.
circuit to power. Repair harness as
P00BF- Mass or Volume Air Flow B Intake air system, If this DTC is logged with P1247-00,
07 Circuit Range/Performance high pressure boost P006A-00 & P00BF-07, suspect intake air
- Air Flow Too High - leak system, high pressure boost leak
Mechanical failures
P00CF- Secondary Compressor Boost air circuit leak This DTC is set when the engine control
62 Outlet Pressure Sensor - or blockage module detects a signal compare failure
Signal compare failure Boost air recirculation on the boost air pressure sensor signal.
solenoid failure Check the sensor hose for blockages or
Boost air solenoid leaks. Check the sensor and harness for
failure mechanical damage caused by heat or
Mechanical failure - chaffing
Sensor hose blocked Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
or leaking check the secondary compressor outlet
Harness failure - Boost pressure sensor power and ground
air pressure sensor supplies for short circuit to ground, open
circuit circuit. Check the signal line for short
Boost air pressure circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
sensor failure open circuit. Repair harness as required
Check and install new secondary
compressor outlet pressure sensor as
required
P0101- Mass or Volume Air Flow A The engine control This DTC is set if the mass air flow signal
21 Circuit Range/Performance module measured a from sensor 1 is less than the value
- Signal amplitude < signal voltage below a expected by the engine control module.
minimum specified range but Refer to the relevant sections of the
not necessarily a short workshop manual and check the induction
circuit to ground, gain system for air leaks, and obstructions to
low flow. Check the condition of the air filter
Air flow disruption at and examine the induction pipes for debris
sensing element of which could disrupt air flow at the sensing
mass air flow sensor element
Harness failure - Mass Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
air flow sensor circuit check mass air flow sensor circuit for
short circuit to short circuit to ground, high resistance,
ground, high open circuit. Repair harness as required.
Mass air flow sensor sensor as required
failure
P0101- Mass or Volume Air Flow A The engine control This DTC is set if the mass air flow signal
22 Circuit Range/Performance module measured a from sensor 1 is more than the value
- Signal amplitude > signal voltage above a expected by the engine control module.
maximum specified range but Refer to the relevant sections of the
circuit to power, gain system for air leaks, and obstructions to
too high flow. Check the condition of the air filter
mass air flow sensor element
air flow sensor circuit check mass air flow sensor circuit for
Mass air flow sensor required. Clear DTC and retest
failure Check and install new mass air flow
sensor as required
P0101- Mass or Volume Air Flow Air flow disruption at This DTC is set if the mass air flow signal
92 Sensor "A" Circuit sensing element of from sensor 1 is less than the value
Range/Performance - mass air flow sensor expected by the engine control module.
Performance or incorrect Harness failure - Mass Refer to the relevant sections of the
operation air flow sensor circuit workshop manual and check the induction
short circuit to system for air leaks, and obstructions to
ground, short circuit flow. Check the condition of the air filter
to power, open circuit, and examine the induction pipes for debris
high resistance which could disrupt air flow at the sensing
Mass air flow sensor element
failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check mass air flow sensor circuit for
short circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit, high resistance.
Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
retest
sensor as required
P0102- Mass or Volume Air Flow A Using the manufacturer approved

00 Circuit Low - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit MAF_B - diagnostic system check datalogger
information signals, Air Flow Rate From mass air flow
Air flow disruption at Sensor Bank 1 (0x0504). This DTC is set if
sensing element of the mass air flow signal from sensor 1 is
mass air flow sensor less than the value expected by the engine
Harness failure - Mass control module. Refer to the relevant
air flow sensor circuits sections of the workshop manual and
Mass air flow sensor check the induction system for air leaks,
failure and obstructions to flow. Check the
condition of the air filter and examine the
induction pipes for debris which could
disrupt air flow at the sensing element
check the mass air flow sensor power and
ground circuits for high resistance, short
circuit to power, short circuit to ground.
Check the mass air flow signal line for
high resistance. Repair harness as
sensor as required
P0103- Mass or Volume Air Flow A Using the manufacturer approved

00 Circuit High - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit MAF_B - diagnostic system check datalogger
information signals, Air Flow Rate From Mass Air Flow
mass air flow sensor greater than the value expected by the
Harness failure - Mass engine control module. Refer to the
air flow sensor circuits relevant sections of the workshop manual
Mass air flow sensor and check the induction system for air
failure leaks, and obstructions to flow. Check the
disrupt air flow at the sensing element.
check the mass air flow sensor power and
ground circuits for high resistance, short
circuit to power, short circuit to ground.
Check the mass air flow signal line for
sensor as required
P0105- Manifold Absolute Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

16 Pressure/BARO circuit - NOTE: - Circuit MAP_A - check the 5 volt supply circuit for open
Circuit voltage below circuit, high resistance, short circuit to
threshold The engine control ground. Check the sensor ground for open
module measured a circuit, short circuit to power. Check the
voltage below a signal circuit for short circuit to ground,
specified range but high resistance. Repair harness as
not necessarily a short required. Clear DTC and retest
circuit to ground Check and install new manifold absolute
Harness failure - pressure sensor as required
Manifold absolute Using the manufacturer approved
pressure sensor diagnostic system check datalogger
circuits signals, Corrected Intake Manifold
Manifold absolute Absolute Pressure (0x0322), Manifold
pressure sensor failure Absolute Pressure Sensor Voltage
Blockage or leak (0x0301), Manifold Absolute Pressure
between the intake Bank 1 (0x052C). This DTC is set when
manifold and the the voltage on the manifold absolute
manifold absolute pressure sensor signal circuit is less than
pressure sensor the threshold expected by the engine
control module. Refer to the workshop
manual and check the manifold absolute
pressure sensor is correctly connected to
the air intake manifold and there are no
blockages or air leaks preventing
communication of pressure changes
between the manifold and the sensor

17 Pressure/BARO circuit - NOTE: - Circuit MAP_A - check the 5 volt supply circuit for short
Circuit voltage above circuit to power. Check the sensor ground
threshold The engine control for open circuit, short circuit to power.
module measured a Check the signal circuit for short circuit to
voltage above a power. Repair harness as required. Clear
specified range but DTC and retest
not necessarily a short Check and install new manifold absolute
circuit to power pressure sensor as required
Harness failure - Using the manufacturer approved
Manifold absolute diagnostic system check datalogger
pressure sensor signals, Corrected Intake Manifold
circuits Absolute Pressure (0x0504), Manifold
Manifold absolute Absolute Pressure Sensor Voltage
pressure sensor failure (0x0301), Manifold Absolute Pressure
Blockage or leak Bank 1 (0x052C). This DTC is set when
between the intake the voltage on the manifold absolute
manifold and the pressure sensor signal circuit is greater
manifold pressure than the threshold expected by the engine
sensor control module. Refer to the workshop

65 Pressure/Barometric NOTE: - Circuit MAP_A - check the 5 volt supply circuit for short
Pressure Sensor Circuit - circuit to power. Check the sensor ground
Signal has too few Harness failure - for open circuit, short circuit to power.
transitions / events Manifold absolute Check the signal circuit for short circuit to
pressure sensor power. Repair harness as required. Clear
circuits DTC and retest
Manifold absolute Check and install new manifold absolute
pressure sensor failure pressure sensor as required
Blockage or leak Using the manufacturer approved
between the intake diagnostic system check datalogger
manifold and the signals, Corrected Intake Manifold
manifold pressure Absolute Pressure (0x0504), Manifold
sensor Absolute Pressure Sensor Voltage
(0x0301), Manifold Absolute Pressure
Bank 1 (0x052C). Refer to the workshop

00 Pressure/Barometric NOTE: - Circuit MAP_A - check the 5 volt supply circuit for short
Pressure Sensor Circuit circuit to power. Check the sensor ground
Low - No sub type Harness failure - for open circuit, short circuit to power.
information Manifold absolute Check the signal circuit for short circuit to
pressure sensor power. Repair harness as required. Clear
circuits DTC and retest
pressure sensor failure pressure sensor as required
Blockage or leak Using the manufacturer approved
between the intake diagnostic system check datalogger
manifold and the signals, Corrected Intake Manifold
manifold pressure Absolute Pressure (0x0504), Manifold
sensor Absolute Pressure Sensor Voltage

16 Pressure/Barometric NOTE: - Circuit MAP_A - check the 5 volt supply circuit for open
Pressure Sensor Circuit circuit, short circuit to power, short circuit
Low - Circuit voltage below The engine control to ground. Check the sensor ground for
threshold module measured a open circuit, short circuit to power. Check
voltage below a the signal circuit for open circuit, short
specified range but circuit to power, short circuit to ground.
not necessarily a short Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
circuit to ground retest
Harness failure - Check and install new manifold absolute
Manifold absolute pressure sensor as required
pressure sensor Using the manufacturer approved
circuits diagnostic system check datalogger
Manifold absolute signals, Corrected Intake Manifold
pressure sensor failure Absolute Pressure (0x0504), Manifold
Blockage or leak Absolute Pressure Sensor Voltage
between the intake (0x0301), Manifold Absolute Pressure
manifold and the Bank 1 (0x052C). This DTC is set when
manifold pressure the manifold absolute pressure sensor
sensor signal voltage is lower than expected by
the engine control module. Refer to the
workshop manual and check the manifold
absolute pressure sensor is correctly
connected to the air intake manifold and
there are no blockages or air leaks
preventing communication of pressure
changes between the manifold and the
sensor

High - No sub type Harness failure - to ground. Check the sensor ground for
information Manifold absolute open circuit, short circuit to power. Check
pressure sensor the signal circuit for open circuit, short
circuits circuit to power, short circuit to ground.
Manifold absolute Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
pressure sensor failure retest
Blockage or leak Check and install new manifold absolute
between the intake pressure sensor as required
manifold and the Using the manufacturer approved
manifold pressure diagnostic system check datalogger
sensor signals, Corrected Intake Manifold
Absolute Pressure (0x0504), Manifold
Absolute Pressure Sensor Voltage

High - Circuit voltage The engine control to ground. Check the sensor ground for
above threshold module measured a open circuit, short circuit to power. Check
voltage above a the signal circuit for open circuit, short
specified range but circuit to power, short circuit to ground.
circuit to power retest
Harness failure - Check and install new manifold absolute
Manifold absolute pressure sensor as required
pressure sensor Using the manufacturer approved
circuits diagnostic system check datalogger
Manifold absolute signals, Corrected Intake Manifold
pressure sensor failure Absolute Pressure (0x0504), Manifold
Blockage or leak Absolute Pressure Sensor Voltage
between the intake (0x0301), Manifold Absolute Pressure
manifold and the Bank 1 (0x052C). This DTC is set when
manifold pressure the manifold absolute pressure sensor
sensor signal voltage is greater than expected by
the engine control module. Refer to the
workshop manual and check the manifold
absolute pressure sensor is correctly
connected to the air intake manifold and
there are no blockages or air leaks
preventing communication of pressure
changes between the manifold and the
sensor
P010A- Mass or Volume Air Flow Air flow disruption at This DTC is set if the mass air flow signal
92 Sensor "B" Circuit - sensing element of from sensor 2 is greater than the value
Performance or incorrect mass air flow expected by the engine control module.
operation Harness failure - Mass Refer to the relevant sections of the
air flow sensor circuit workshop manual and check the induction
short circuit to system for air leaks, and obstructions to
ground, short circuit flow. Check the condition of the air filter
to power, open circuit, and examine the induction pipes for debris
high resistance which could disrupt air flow at the sensing
Mass air flow failure element
circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit, high resistance. Repair
P010B- Mass or Volume Air Flow B The engine control This DTC is set if the mass air flow signal
21 Circuit Range/Performance module measured a from sensor 2 is less than the value
- Signal amplitude < signal voltage below a expected by the engine control module.
minimum specified range but Refer to the relevant sections of the
circuit to ground, gain system for air leaks, and obstructions to
low flow. Check the condition of the air filter
mass air flow element
air flow sensor circuit check mass air flow sensor 2 for short
short circuit to circuit to ground, high resistance, open
ground, high circuit. Repair harness as required. Clear
resistance, open DTC and retest
Mass air flow failure sensor 2 as required
P010B- Mass or Volume Air Flow B The engine control This DTC is set if the mass air flow signal
22 Circuit Range/Performance module measured a from sensor 2 is more than the value
- Signal amplitude > signal voltage above a expected by the engine control module.
maximum specified range but Refer to the relevant sections of the
circuit to power, gain system for air leaks, and obstructions to
too high flow. Check the condition of the air filter
mass air flow sensor 2 element
air flow sensor circuit check mass air flow sensor 2 circuit for
Mass air flow failure required. Clear DTC and retest
P010C- Mass or Volume Air Flow B Using the manufacturer approved

00 Circuit Low - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit MAF_A - diagnostic system check datalogger
mass air flow less than the value expected by the engine
Harness failure - Mass control module. Refer to the relevant
air flow sensor circuits sections of the workshop manual and
Mass air flow failure check the induction system for air leaks,
and obstructions to flow. Check the
check the power and ground circuits for
the mass air flow sensors for high
resistance, short circuit to power, short
circuit to ground. Check the mass air flow
signal line between the engine control
module and the mass air flow sensor for
sensor as required
P010D- Mass or Volume Air Flow B Using the manufacturer approved

00 Circuit High - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit MAF_A - diagnostic system check datalogger
mass air flow greater than the value expected by the
Harness failure - Mass engine control module. Refer to the
air flow sensor circuits relevant sections of the workshop manual
Mass air flow failure and check the induction system for air
leaks, and obstructions to flow. Check the
check the power and ground circuits for
the mass air flow sensors for high
resistance, short circuit to power, short
circuit to ground. Check the mass air flow
signal line between the engine control
module and the mass air flow sensor for
sensor as required
P0116- Engine Coolant Using the manufacturer approved

00 Temperature Sensor 1 NOTE: - Circuit ECT_A - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit Range/Performance signals, Engine Coolant Temperature
- No sub type information Engine coolant level or Sensor (0x0357), Engine Coolant
flow failure Temperature (0xF405). This DTC is set if
Harness failure - the engine coolant temperature value fails
Engine coolant plausibility checks by the engine control
temperature sensor module. Refer to the workshop manual
circuits and check the engine cooling system to
Engine coolant ensure the coolant condition and level is
temperature sensor correct
check the engine coolant temperature
sensor circuits for high resistance, short
circuit to other circuits. Repair harness as
Check and install new engine coolant

- Circuit voltage below The engine control Sensor (0x0357), Engine Coolant
threshold module measured a Temperature (0xF405). This DTC is set if
voltage below a the engine coolant temperature sensor
specified range but signal voltage is less than the value
circuit to ground Refer to the workshop manual and check
Engine coolant level or the engine cooling system to ensure the
flow failure coolant condition and level is correct
Harness failure - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Engine coolant check the engine coolant temperature
temperature sensor sensor circuits for high resistance, short
circuits circuit to other circuits. Repair harness as
Engine coolant required. Clear DTC and retest
temperature sensor Check and install new engine coolant
failure temperature sensor as required

- Circuit voltage above The engine control Sensor (0x0357), Engine Coolant
threshold module measured a Temperature (0xF405). This DTC is set if
voltage above a the engine coolant temperature sensor
specified range but signal voltage is greater than the value
not necessarily a short expected by the control module. Refer to
circuit to power the workshop manual and check the
Engine coolant level or engine cooling system to ensure the
flow failure coolant condition and level is correct
Harness failure - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Engine coolant check the engine coolant temperature
temperature sensor sensor circuits for high resistance, short
circuits circuit to other circuits. Repair harness as
Engine coolant required. Clear DTC and retest
temperature sensor Check and install new engine coolant
P0116- Engine Coolant The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
21 Temperature Sensor 1 module measured a diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit Range/Performance signal voltage below a signals, Engine Coolant Temperature
- Signal amplitude < specified range but Sensor (0x0357), Engine Coolant
minimum not necessarily a short Temperature (0xF405). This DTC is set if
circuit to ground, gain the engine coolant temperature sensor
low signal amplitude is lower than the value
Engine coolant level or expected by the control module. Refer to
flow failure the workshop manual and check the
Harness failure - engine cooling system to ensure the
Engine coolant coolant condition and level is correct
temperature sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit short circuit to check the engine coolant temperature
ground, high sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
resistance, open high resistance, open circuit. Repair
circuit harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
Engine coolant Check and install new engine coolant
failure
P0116- Engine Coolant The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
22 Temperature Sensor 1 module measured a diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit Range/Performance signal voltage above a signals, Engine Coolant Temperature
- Signal amplitude > specified range but Sensor (0x0357), Engine Coolant
maximum not necessarily a short Temperature (0xF405). This DTC is set if
circuit to power, gain the engine coolant temperature sensor
too high signal amplitude is greater than the value
Engine coolant level or expected by the control module. Refer to
flow failure the workshop manual and check the
Harness failure - engine cooling system to ensure the
Engine coolant coolant condition and level is correct
circuit short circuit to check the engine coolant temperature
power sensor circuit for short circuit to power.
Engine coolant Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
temperature sensor retest
failure Check and install new engine coolant
P0130- O2 Sensor Circuit (Bank 1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Sensor 1) - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit LPV_A - check the heated oxygen sensor circuits
information LPPC_A for open circuit. Repair harness as
Harness failure - Check and install new heated oxygen
Heated oxygen sensor sensor as required
component failure
P0130- O2 Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 1) - Circuit short to ground NOTE: - Circuit LPV_A - check the heated oxygen sensor circuits
for short circuit to ground. Repair harness
The engine control as required. Clear DTC and retest
module has detected a Check and install new heated oxygen
ground measurement sensor as required
for a period longer
than expected or has
detected a ground
measurement when
another value was
expected
Harness failure -
ground
component failure
12 1) - Circuit short to battery NOTE: - Circuit LPV_A - check the heated oxygen sensor circuits
for short circuit to power. Repair harness
module has detected a Check and install new heated oxygen
vehicle power sensor as required
measurement for a
period longer than
expected or has
detected a vehicle
power measurement
when another value
was expected
Harness failure -
power
component failure
13 1) - Circuit open NOTE: - Circuit LPPC_A check the heated oxygen sensor circuits
- LPV_A - for open circuit. Repair harness as
The engine control Check and install new heated oxygen
module has sensor as required
determined an open
circuit via lack of bias
voltage, low current
Harness failure -
component failure
P0130- O2 Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor This DTC is set when the heated oxygen
1A 1) - Circuit resistance NOTE: - Circuit LPTR_A sensor internal trim resistance value is
below threshold - less than that expected by the engine
control module. Refer to the electrical
Harness failure - circuit diagrams and check the heated
Heated oxygen sensor oxygen sensor circuits for short circuits.
circuit failure Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
Heated oxygen sensor retest
component failure Check and install new heated oxygen
sensor as required
P0130- O2 Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor This DTC is set when the oxygen sensor
1B 1) - Circuit resistance NOTE: - Circuit LPTR_A internal trim resistance value is greater
above threshold - than that expected by the engine control
module. Refer to the electrical circuit
Harness failure - diagrams and check the heated oxygen
Heated oxygen sensor sensor circuits for short circuits, open
circuit failure circuits. Repair harness as required. Clear
Heated oxygen sensor DTC and retest
component failure Check and install new heated oxygen
sensor as required
P0130- O2 Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor The signal transitions Check for and rectify any exhaust leak
26 1) - Signal rate of change more slowly than is between cylinder head and catalytic
below threshold reasonably allowed converter. Check heated oxygen sensor is
Exhaust system leak correctly installed in exhaust manifold
Fuel control system Check fuel control system for related DTCs
failure and refer to the relevant DTC index
to engine control check heated oxygen sensor to engine
module circuit short control module circuit for short circuit to
circuit to ground, ground, short circuit to power, high
short circuit to power, resistance, open circuit. Repair harness as
high resistance required. Clear DTC and retest
Heated oxygen sensor Check and install new heated oxygen
failure sensor as required
P0133- O2 Circuit Slow Response Exhaust system leak Check for and rectify any exhaust leak
00 (Bank 1, Sensor 1) - No Fuel control system between cylinder head and catalytic
sub type information failure converter. Check heated oxygen sensor is
Heated oxygen sensor correctly installed in exhaust manifold
to engine control Check fuel control system for related DTCs
module wiring shield and refer to the relevant DTC index
high resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Heated oxygen sensor check heated oxygen sensor to engine
failure control module wiring shield for high
resistance. Repair harness as required.
sensor as required
P0135- O2 Sensor Heater Circuit Check fuel control system for related DTCs
16 (Bank 1 Sensor 1) - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit LPPH_A and refer to the relevant DTC index
voltage below threshold - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check heated oxygen sensor to engine
Heated oxygen sensor control module circuit for short circuit to
to engine control ground, open circuit
module circuit short Check and install new heated oxygen
circuit to ground, sensor as required
open circuit
failure
P0148- Fuel Delivery Error - No This DTC is set after Check high pressure fuel pump for
00 sub type information the engine control mechanical damage and excessive wear
module internal Using the manufacturer approved
monitoring function diagnostic system, clear DTC and retest
has evaluated high Check and install new high pressure fuel
pressure fuel pump pump as required
fatigue and wear
against fuel rail
pressure
P0181- Fuel Temperature Sensor A Using the manufacturer approved

16 Circuit Range/Performance NOTE: - Circuit IFTS - diagnostic system check datalogger
- Circuit voltage below signals, Fuel Temperature "A" (0x0522),
threshold The engine control Fuel Rail Temperature Sensor Voltage
module measured a (0x033F). This DTC is set when the
voltage below a voltage on the fuel temperature sensor
specified range but circuit is less than that expected by the
not necessarily a short engine control module. Refer to the
circuit to ground electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Harness failure - Fuel fuel temperature sensor signal circuit for
temperature sensor short circuit to ground. Repair harness as
circuit failure required. Clear DTC and retest
Sensor component Check and install new fuel temperature
failure sensor as required

17 Circuit Range/Performance NOTE: - Circuit IFTS - diagnostic system check datalogger
- Circuit voltage above signals, Fuel Temperature "A" (0x0522),
threshold The engine control Fuel Rail Temperature Sensor Voltage
module measured a (0x033F). This DTC is set when the
voltage above a voltage on the fuel temperature sensor
specified range but circuit is greater than that expected by the
not necessarily a short engine control module. Refer to the
circuit to power electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Harness failure - Fuel fuel temperature sensor signal and ground
temperature sensor circuits for short circuit to power, open
circuit failure circuit or high resistance. Repair harness
Sensor component as required. Clear DTC and retest
failure Check and install new fuel temperature
sensor as required

00 Circuit Low - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit IFTS - diagnostic system check datalogger
information signals, Fuel Temperature "A" (0x0522),
Harness failure - Fuel Fuel Rail Temperature Sensor Voltage
temperature sensor (0x033F). This DTC is set when the
circuit failure voltage on the fuel temperature sensor
Sensor component circuit is less than that expected by the
failure engine control module. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the
fuel temperature sensor signal circuit for
short circuit to ground. Repair harness as
Check and install new fuel temperature
sensor as required

00 Circuit High - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit IFTS - diagnostic system check datalogger
information signals, Fuel Temperature "A" (0x0522),
Harness failure - Fuel Fuel Rail Temperature Sensor Voltage
temperature sensor (0x033F). This DTC is set when the
circuit failure voltage on the fuel temperature sensor
Sensor component circuit is greater than that expected by the
failure engine control module. Refer to the
fuel temperature sensor signal and ground
circuits for short circuit to power, open
circuit or high resistance. Repair harness
as required. Clear DTC and retest
Check and install new fuel temperature
sensor as required
P0191- Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Using the manufacturer approved

16 A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit RPS - diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - signals, Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
Circuit voltage below The engine control (0x0324), Fuel Rail Pressure (0xF423).
threshold module measured a The fuel rail pressure sensor is a pressure
voltage below a transducer mounted on the fuel rail. This
specified range but DTC is set when the voltage on the signal
not necessarily a short line is less than that expected by the
circuit to ground engine control module. Refer to the
Fuel supply system workshop manual and ensure that the fuel
failure supply system is working correctly
Harness failure - Fuel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
rail pressure sensor check the sensor supply, signal and
circuit failure ground connections for intermittent
Sensor component failures, open circuits, short circuits, high
failure resistance. Repair harness as required.
Check and install new fuel rail pressure
sensor as required

17 A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit RPS - diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - signals, Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
Circuit voltage above The engine control (0x0324), Fuel Rail Pressure (0xF423).
threshold module measured a The fuel rail pressure sensor is a pressure
voltage above a transducer mounted on the fuel rail. This
not necessarily a short line is greater than that expected by the
circuit to power engine control module. Refer to the
circuit failure ground connections for intermittent
Sensor component failures, open circuits, short circuits, high
failure resistance. Repair harness as required.
sensor as required

16 A Circuit Low - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit RPS - diagnostic system check datalogger
voltage below threshold signals, Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
The engine control (0x0324), Fuel Rail Pressure (0xF423).
module measured a The fuel rail pressure sensor is a pressure
voltage below a transducer mounted on the fuel rail. This
not necessarily a short line is less than that expected by the
circuit to ground engine control module. Refer to the
circuit failure ground connections for short circuit to
Sensor component power, short circuit to ground, open
failure circuit, high resistance. Repair harness as
sensor as required

17 A Circuit High - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit RPS - diagnostic system check datalogger
voltage above threshold signals, Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
The engine control (0x0324), Fuel Rail Pressure (0xF423).
module measured a The fuel rail pressure sensor is a pressure
voltage above a transducer mounted on the fuel rail. This
not necessarily a short line is greater than that expected by the
circuit to power engine control module. Refer to the
circuit failure ground connections for short circuit to
Sensor component power, short circuit to ground, open
failure circuit, high resistance. Repair harness as
sensor as required
P0194- Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Fuel supply system Using the manufacturer approved
00 A Circuit failure diagnostic system check datalogger
Intermittent/Erratic - No Harness failure - Fuel signals, Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
sub type information rail pressure sensor (0x0324), Fuel Rail Pressure (0xF423).
circuit failure The fuel rail pressure sensor is a pressure
Sensor component transducer mounted on the fuel rail. Refer
failure to the workshop manual and ensure that
the fuel supply system is working correctly
check the sensor supply, signal and
ground connections for intermittent
failures, open circuits, short circuits, high
resistance. Repair harness as required.
sensor as required
P0195- Engine Oil Temperature Check the oil level is correct and the oil
00 Sensor Circuit - No sub NOTE: - Circuit OTL - does not appear contaminated. Renew or
type information top up oil as required
Oil contaminated or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
level incorrect check the sensor power and ground
Harness failure - Oil supplies for open circuit or short circuit to
level and temperature ground. Check the signal line for open
sensor circuits circuit, short circuit to power, short circuit
Oil level and to ground, high resistance and
temperature sensor intermittent connections. Repair harness
failure as required. Clear DTC and retest
Check and install new engine oil level and
P0195- Engine Oil Temperature Check the oil level is correct and the oil
23 Sensor Circuit - Signal NOTE: - Circuit OTL - does not appear contaminated. Renew or
stuck low top up oil as required
module measures a check the sensor power and ground
signal that remains supplies for open circuit or short circuit to
low when transitions ground. Check the signal line for open
are expected circuit, short circuit to power, short circuit
Oil contaminated or to ground, high resistance and
level incorrect intermittent connections. Repair harness
Harness failure - Oil as required. Clear DTC and retest
level and temperature Check and install new engine oil level and
sensor circuits temperature sensor as required
Oil level and
temperature sensor
failure
P0195- Engine Oil Temperature Oil contaminated or Check the oil does not appear
62 Sensor Circuit - Signal level incorrect contaminated and the level is correct.
compare failure Harness failure - Oil Renew or top up oil as required
level and temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
sensor circuit short check oil level and temperature sensor
circuit to ground, signal circuit for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, short circuit to power, high resistance,
high resistance, open open circuit, disconnected
circuit, disconnected Start the engine from cold and allow to
Oil level and idle, check and record Sump Oil
temperature sensor Temperature - Measured (0x03F3)
failure datalogger signal. Continue to warm up at
idle, after approximately 10 minutes check
and record Sump Oil Temperature -
Measured (0x03F3) signal. If value of
signal has not increased by 5°C check and
install new oil level and temperature
sensor as required
P0201- Cylinder 1 Injector This DTC is set when the engine control
00 Circuit/Open - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit module detects an open circuit on the
information O_P_PVL11 - O_P_PVH11 - cylinder 1 injector control circuit. Refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Harness failure - the two control circuits between the
Cylinder 1 injector engine control module and the fuel
circuit open circuit injector for high resistance, open circuits
Cylinder 1 injector or intermittent connections. Repair
failure harness as required.
Check and install new fuel injector as
required
failure harness as required
required
required
required
required
required
P0216- Injector/Injection timing Internal engine control Refer to the workshop manual and the
00 Control Circuit - No sub module power supply battery care manual, inspect the vehicle
type information is unable to supply the battery and ensure it is fully charged and
fuel injectors with the serviceable before performing further tests
maximum number of Check the vehicle charging system
injections required performance to ensure the voltage
Internal engine control regulation is correct
module monitoring has Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
detected a fuel check engine control module power and
pressure not able to ground circuits
meet the demand for Check fuel control system for related DTCs
the number of fuel and refer to the relevant DTC index
injections Using the manufacturer approved
At high engine speeds diagnostic system, clear DTC and retest
the internal engine
control module
monitoring has
detected that the
computing time
available for the
desired number of
injections is not
sufficient
P0219- Engine Overspeed Camshaft or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Condition - No sub type crankshaft position check camshaft and crankshaft position
information sensor circuit short sensor circuits for short circuit to ground,
circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit
short circuit to power, Check for engine oil ingestion to sensors.
open circuit Check and install new camshaft and
Camshaft or crankshaft position sensor as required
crankshaft position
sensor failure
P0235- Turbocharger/Supercharger Using the manufacturer approved

16 Boost Sensor A Circuit - NOTE: - Circuit SCOP - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit voltage below signals, Turbocharger/Supercharger Boost
threshold The engine control Sensor A Circuit (0x033C), Boost Absolute
module measured a Pressure - Raw Value (0x033E). This DTC
voltage below a is set when the engine control module
specified range but detects a signal voltage from the boost air
not necessarily a short pressure sensor signal line which is less
circuit to ground than the threshold value. Check the sensor
Mechanical failure - hose for blockages or leaks
Sensor hose blocked Check the intake air and boost air circuits
or leaking for failures including leaks, blockages,
Failure affecting intake control valve actuator malfunctions
air circuit or boost air Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit control valves check the sensor power and ground
or actuators supplies for open circuit or short circuit to
Harness failure - Boost ground. Check the signal line for open
air pressure sensor circuit, short circuit to ground, high
circuit resistance and intermittent connections.
Boost air pressure Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
sensor failure retest
Check and install new boost air pressure
sensor as required
P0235- Turbocharger/Supercharger Using the manufacturer approved

17 Boost Sensor A Circuit - NOTE: - Circuit SCOP - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit voltage above signals, Turbocharger/Supercharger Boost
threshold The engine control Sensor A Circuit (0x033C), Boost Absolute
module measured a Pressure - Raw Value (0x033E). This DTC
voltage above a is set when the engine control module
specified range but detects a signal voltage from the boost air
not necessarily a short pressure sensor signal line which is
circuit to power greater than the threshold value. Check
Mechanical failure - the sensor hose for blockages or leaks
Sensor hose blocked Check the intake air and boost air circuits
or leaking for failures including leaks, blockages,
Failure affecting intake control valve actuator malfunctions
air circuit or boost air Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit control valves check the sensor power and ground
or actuators supplies for open circuit or short circuit to
Harness failure - Boost ground. Check the signal line for open
air pressure sensor circuit, short circuit to power. Repair
Boost air pressure Check and install new boost air pressure
sensor failure sensor as required
P0235- Turbocharger/Supercharger If this DTC is logged with P00BD-07

94 Boost Sensor A Circuit - NOTE: - Circuit SCOP - suspect, boost air solenoid stuck open
Unexpected operation mono turbo mode
Boost air solenoid If this DTC is logged with P00BD-07
stuck open mono suspect, turbine intake solenoid leakage
turbo mode when closed
Turbine intake If this DTC is logged with P00BD-07,
solenoid leakage when P22D2-77, P1247-00 & P22CF-71 suspect,
closed turbine intake solenoid stuck open
Turbine intake If this DTC is logged with P00BD-07,
Intake air system, intake air system, blocked low pressure air
blocked low pressure intake
air intake. This failure Using the manufacturer approved
mode can be caused diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
by snow packing in EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
the intake system.
Symptoms often
disappear after the
vehicle has been
warmed and heat
soaked. Similar
symptoms to seized
primary turbo
P023D- Manifold Absolute Induction system air Check induction system for leaks,
00 Pressure- leak or blockage blockages
Turbocharger/Supercharger Boost air system leak Check boost air system for leaks,
Boost Sensor A Correlation or blockage blockages. Check for related DTCs and
- No sub type information Manifold absolute refer to the relevant DTC index
pressure sensor A Check and install new manifold absolute
failure pressure sensor as required
turbocharger actuator turbocharger actuator as required
A sticking, failure Check turbocharger rod connection and oil
Turbocharger A failure seals
P0251- Injection Pump Fuel Using the manufacturer approved

13 Metering Control A - NOTE: - Circuit MEU - diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit open signals, Fuel Volume Control Valve Duty
The engine control Cycle (0x03C2), Fuel Volume Control
module has Valve Current - Measured (0x03EA). Refer
determined an open to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit via lack of bias check the fuel volume control valve circuit
voltage, low current between the engine control module and
flow, no change in the the fuel volume control valve for open
state of an input in circuit. Check power supply to fuel volume
response to an output control valve. Repair harness as required.
Harness failure - Fuel Clear DTC and retest
volume control valve Check and install new fuel volume control
circuit open circuit valve as required
Fuel volume control
valve failure
P0251- Injection Pump Fuel Harness failure - Fuel Using the manufacturer approved
4B Metering Control A - Over volume control valve diagnostic system check datalogger
temperature circuit short circuit to signals, Fuel Volume Control Valve Duty
ground, short circuit Cycle (0x03C2), Fuel Volume Control
to power, high Valve Current - Measured (0x03EA). Refer
resistance to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Fuel volume control check the fuel volume control valve circuit
valve failure between the engine control module and
the fuel volume control valve for short
circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
high resistance. Check power supply to
fuel volume control valve. Repair harness
Check and install new fuel volume control
valve as required

16 Metering Control A NOTE: - Circuit MEU - diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - signals, Fuel Volume Control Valve Duty
Circuit voltage below The engine control Cycle (0x03C2), Fuel Volume Control
threshold module measured a Valve Current - Measured (0x03EA). This
voltage below a DTC is set when the voltage on the signal
specified range but circuit to the fuel volume control valve is
not necessarily a short less than that expected by the engine
circuit to ground control module. Refer to the electrical
Harness failure - Fuel circuit diagrams and check the fuel
volume control valve volume control valve circuit between the
circuit engine control module and the fuel volume
Fuel volume control control valve for an intermittent open
valve failure circuit, high resistance, short circuit to
ground. Check the power supply to fuel
volume control valve. Repair harness as
valve as required
17 Metering Control A NOTE: - Circuit MEU - diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - signals, Fuel Volume Control Valve Duty
Circuit voltage above The engine control Cycle (0x03C2), Fuel Volume Control
threshold module measured a Valve Current - Measured (0x03EA). This
voltage above a DTC is set when the voltage on the signal
specified range but circuit to the fuel volume control valve is
not necessarily a short greater than that expected by the engine
circuit to power control module. Refer to the electrical
Harness failure - Fuel circuit diagrams and check the fuel
volume control valve volume control valve circuit between the
circuit engine control module and the volume
Fuel volume control control valve for a short circuit to power.
valve failure Check the power supply to fuel volume
control valve. Repair harness as required.
valve as required

00 Metering Control A Low - NOTE: - Circuit MEU - diagnostic system check datalogger
No sub type information signals, Fuel Volume Control Valve Duty
Harness failure - Fuel Cycle (0x03C2), Fuel Volume Control
volume control valve Valve Current - Measured (0x03EA). This
circuit short circuit to DTC is set when the voltage on the signal
ground, open circuit circuit to the fuel volume control valve is
Fuel volume control less than that expected by the engine
valve failure control module. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the fuel
volume control valve circuit between the
engine control module and the fuel volume
control valve for a short circuit to ground,
open circuit. Repair harness as required.
valve as required

00 Metering Control A High - NOTE: - Circuit MEU - diagnostic system check datalogger
No sub type information signals, Fuel Volume Control Valve Duty
Harness failure - Fuel Cycle (0x03C2), Fuel Volume Control
volume control valve Valve Current - Measured (0x03EA). This
circuit short circuit to DTC is set when the voltage on the signal
power circuit to the fuel volume control valve is
Fuel volume control greater than that expected by the engine
valve failure control module. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the fuel
volume control valve circuit between the
engine control module and the fuel volume
control valve for a short circuit to power.
retest
valve as required
P0255- Injection Pump Fuel Harness failure - Fuel Using the manufacturer approved
00 Metering Control A volume control valve diagnostic system check datalogger
Intermittent - No sub type circuit intermittent signals, Fuel Volume Control Valve Duty
information short circuit to Cycle (0x03C2), Fuel Volume Control
ground, short circuit Valve Current - Measured (0x03EA). Refer
to power, high to the electrical circuit diagrams and
resistance check the fuel volume control valve circuit
Fuel volume control between the engine control module and
valve intermittent the fuel volume control valve for an
failure intermittent short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, high resistance. Repair
valve as required
P0261- Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Low - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit check the injector control circuit between
information O_P_PVL11 - O_P_PVH11 - the engine control module and the cylinder
1 injector for short circuit to ground or
Harness failure - short between the two wires. This circuit is
Injector control circuit a twisted pair, check both high and low
short circuit sides for short circuit to power. Repair
Injector failure harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
required
11 Low - Circuit short to NOTE: - Circuit check the injector control circuit between
ground O_P_PVL11 - O_P_PVH11 - the engine control module and the cylinder
The engine control short between the two wires. This circuit is
module has detected a a twisted pair, check both high and low
ground measurement sides for short circuit to ground. Repair
for a period longer harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
than expected or has Check and install new fuel injector as
detected a ground required
measurement when
another value was
expected
Harness failure -
Injector control circuit
23 Low - Signal stuck low NOTE: - Circuit check the injector control circuits between
O_P_PVL11 - O_P_PVH11 - the engine control module and the cylinder
1 injector for short circuit to other injector
The engine control control circuits. Repair harness as
module measures a required. Clear DTC and retest
signal that remains
low when transitions
are expected
Harness failure - Short
circuit between
injector control circuits
on different cylinders
required
measurement when
another value was
expected
Harness failure -
signal that remains
are expected
circuit between
required
measurement when
another value was
expected
Harness failure -
signal that remains
are expected
circuit between
required
measurement when
another value was
expected
Harness failure -
signal that remains
are expected
circuit between
required
measurement when
another value was
expected
Harness failure -
signal that remains
are expected
circuit between
required
measurement when
another value was
expected
Harness failure -
23 Low - Signal Stuck Low NOTE: - Circuit check the injector control circuits between
signal that remains
are expected
circuit between
P02CD- Cylinder 1 Fuel Injector Corrected set point Check for other related DTCs and refer to
00 Offset Learning at Max voltage of the piezo the relevant DTC index. Clear DTC and
Limit - No sub type actuator violates the retest
information on board diagnostic Check and install new a fuel injector as
limit required
Fuel injector internal
components out of
tolerance
P02CF- Cylinder 2 Fuel Injector Corrected set point Check for other related DTCs and refer to
limit required
components out of
tolerance
P02D1- Cylinder 3 Fuel Injector Corrected set point Check for other related DTCs and refer to
limit required
components out of
tolerance
limit required
components out of
tolerance
limit required
components out of
tolerance
limit required
components out of
tolerance
P02EE- Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit This DTC is set when the engine control
17 Range/Performance - NOTE: - Circuit module monitors a voltage on the cylinder
Circuit voltage above O_P_PVL11 - O_P_PVH11 - 1 injector control circuit that is above the
threshold diagnostic threshold. The injector control
The engine control circuit consists of a twisted pair of wires
module measured a between the engine control module and
voltage above a the Piezo actuator within the injector.
not necessarily a short check both the control circuits (high and
circuit to power low) for open circuit, short circuit to
Harness failure - ground, short circuit to power,
Injector control circuit intermittent connections, high resistance,
Fuel injector failure short to or interference from other
circuits. Repair wiring harness as required
Check and install new a fuel injector as
required
1C Range/Performance - NOTE: - Circuit module monitors a voltage on the cylinder
Circuit voltage out of range O_P_PVL11 - O_P_PVH11 - 1 injector control circuit that is out of
range. The injector control circuit consists
The engine control of a twisted pair of wires between the
module measured a engine control module and the Piezo
voltage outside of the actuator within the injector. Refer to the
expected range, but electrical circuit diagrams and check both
not identified as too the control circuits (high and low) for
high or too low open circuit, short circuit to ground, short
Harness failure - circuit to power, intermittent connections,
Injector control circuit high resistance, short to or interference
Fuel injector failure from other circuits. Repair wiring harness
as required
required
Event information O_P_PVL11 - O_P_PVH11 - 1 injector control circuit that is out of
Harness failure - of a twisted pair of wires between the
Injector control circuit engine control module and the Piezo
Fuel injector failure actuator within the injector. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check both
the control circuits (high and low) for
open circuit, short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, intermittent connections,
high resistance, short to or interference
from other circuits. Repair wiring harness
as required
required
P02EF- Cylinder 2 Injector Circuit This DTC is set when the engine control
required
as required
required
as required
required
P02F0- Cylinder 3 Injector Circuit This DTC is set when the engine control
circuit consists of a twisted pair of wires
The engine control
required
as required
required
as required
required
required
as required
required
as required
required
required
as required
required
as required
required
short to or interference from other
Fuel injector failure
required
as required
required
as required
required
P0300- Random Misfire Detected - Fuel injector circuit Check for cylinder mis-fire, glow plug and
00 No sub type information failure(s) (injector injector DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTCs also flagged) DTC index. Refer to the electrical circuit
Fuel system failure diagrams and check injector circuits for
power, open circuit. Repair harness as
Check for fuel system failure. Repair
P0301- Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected Fuel injector electrical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 - No sub type information circuit failure(s) check injector circuit for short circuit to
(injector DTCs also ground, short circuit to power, open
flagged) circuit. Repair harness as required. Clear
Fuel injector failure DTC and retest
Cylinder compression Check for cylinder mis-fire, glow plug and
low injector DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
Check for fuel injector failure or blockage.
Carry out cylinder compression tests
DTC index
DTC index
DTC index
DTC index
DTC index
P0336- Crankshaft Position Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
29 A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit CPS - check crankshaft position sensor circuit for
Range/Performance - short circuit to ground, short circuit to
Signal Invalid Crankshaft position power, open circuit, disconnected. Repair
sensor circuit for short harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
circuit to ground, Check and install new crankshaft position
short circuit to power, sensor circuit shielding as required
open circuit, Check crankshaft position sensor for
disconnected foreign matter on crankshaft position
Crankshaft position sensor face. Check crankshaft position
sensor circuit shielding sensor air gap
failure Check and install new crankshaft position
Crankshaft Position sensor as required. Check and install new
sensor failure target wheel as required
Crankshaft position
sensor foreign matter
on sensor face, gap
incorrect
Target wheel failure
P0336- Crankshaft Position Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams.

31 A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit CPS - Check the power supply and ground
Range/Performance - No circuits to the sensor, check the signal
Signal Harness failure - circuit for open circuits, short circuit to
Crankshaft position power, and short circuit to ground. Repair
sensor circuits harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
Crankshaft position Refer to the relevant section of the
sensor failure workshop manual. Check the sensor and
Crankshaft position crankshaft target for damage,
sensor or reference contamination, and correct mounting
target positioning Check and install new crankshaft position
incorrect sensor as required. Check and install new
target wheel as required
P0336- Crankshaft Position Sensor Crankshaft position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
64 A Circuit sensor circuit for short check crankshaft position sensor circuit for
Range/Performance - circuit to ground, short circuit to ground, short circuit to
Signal plausibility failure short circuit to power, power, open circuit, disconnected. Repair
open circuit, harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
disconnected Check and install new crankshaft position
Crankshaft position sensor circuit shielding as required
sensor circuit shielding Check crankshaft position sensor for
failure foreign matter on crankshaft position
Crankshaft Position sensor face. Check crankshaft position
sensor failure sensor air gap
Crankshaft position Check and install new crankshaft position
sensor foreign matter sensor as required. Check and install new
on sensor face, gap target wheel as required
incorrect
Target wheel failure
P0341- Camshaft Position Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams.

31 A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit CID - Check the power supply and ground
Range/Performance (Bank circuits to the sensor, check the signal
1 or single sensor) - No Harness failure - circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
Signal Camshaft position power, and short circuit to ground. Repair
sensor circuits harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
Camshaft position Refer to the relevant section of the
Camshaft position camshaft target for damage,
sensor or reference contamination, and correct mounting
target positioning Check and install new camshaft position
incorrect sensor as required
P0341- Camshaft Position Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams.

3A A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit CID - Check the power supply and ground
Range/Performance (Bank circuits to the sensor, check the signal
1 or single sensor) - Harness failure - circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
Incorrect has too many Camshaft position power, and short circuit to ground. Repair
pulses sensor circuits harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
Camshaft position Refer to the relevant section of the
Camshaft position camshaft target for damage,
sensor or reference contamination, and correct mounting.
target positioning Check camshaft timing is to specification
incorrect Check and install new camshaft position
sensor as required
P0342- Camshaft Position Sensor Harness failure - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams.
64 A Circuit Low (Bank 1 or Camshaft position Check the power supply and ground
single sensor) - Signal sensor circuit circuits to the sensor, check the signal
plausibility failure Camshaft position circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
sensor failure power, and short circuit to ground. Repair
Camshaft position harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
sensor or reference Check the sensor and camshaft target for
target positioning damage, contamination, and correct
incorrect mounting. Check camshaft timing is to
specification
Check and install new camshaft position
sensor as required
P0380- Glow Plug/Heater Circuit A Using the manufacturer approved

11 - Circuit short to ground NOTE: - Circuit GPC - diagnostic system check datalogger signal,
Glow Plug Coil Duty Cycle (0x9A04). Refer
The engine control to the electrical circuit diagrams and
module has detected a check the control circuit from the engine
ground measurement control module to the glow plug control
for a period longer module for short circuit to ground. Repair
than expected or has harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
detected a ground Check and install new glow plug control
measurement when module as required
another value was
expected
Harness failure
between engine
control module and
glow plug control
module - Short circuit
to ground
Component failure -
Glow plug control
module failure

12 - Circuit short to battery NOTE: - Circuit GPC - diagnostic system check datalogger signal,
module has detected a check the control circuit from the engine
vehicle power control module to the glow plug control
measurement for a module for short circuit to power. Repair
period longer than harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
expected or has Check and install new glow plug control
detected a vehicle module as required
power measurement
when another value
was expected
Harness failure
between engine
control module and
glow plug control
module - Short circuit
to power
Component failure -
Glow plug control
module failure

13 - Circuit open NOTE: - Circuit GPC - diagnostic system check datalogger signal,
module has check the control circuit from the engine
determined an open control module to the glow plug control
circuit via lack of bias module for short circuit to ground. Repair
voltage, low current harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
flow, no change in the Check and install new glow plug control
state of an input in module as required
Harness failure
between engine
control module and
glow plug control
module - Open circuit
Component failure -
Glow plug control
module failure
P0380- Glow Plug/Heater Circuit A Harness failure - Glow Using the manufacturer approved
4B - Over temperature plug heater circuit A diagnostic system check datalogger signal,
short circuit to Glow Plug Coil Duty Cycle (0x9A04). Refer
ground, short circuit to the electrical circuit diagrams and
to power, high check the glow plug heater circuit A for
resistance short circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, high resistance. Repair harness as
P0401- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Intake air system, low If this DTC is logged with P00BE-07 &
00 A Flow Insufficient pressure boost leak P006A-00, suspect intake air system, low
Detected - No sub type Exhaust gas pressure boost leak
information recirculation actuator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit short circuit to check exhaust gas recirculation actuator
ground, high circuit for short circuit to ground, high
resistance, open resistance, open circuit, disconnected.
circuit, disconnected Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
Exhaust gas retest
recirculation actuator Check and install new exhaust gas
failure recirculation actuator as required
P0402- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Intake air system, If this DTC is logged with P1247-00,
00 A Flow Excessive Detected high pressure boost P006A-00 & P00BF-07, suspect intake air
- No sub type information leak system, high pressure boost leak
Exhaust gas Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
recirculation actuator check exhaust gas recirculation actuator
circuit short circuit to circuit for short circuit to power, high
power, high resistance, open circuit, disconnected.
resistance, open Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
circuit, disconnected retest
Exhaust gas Check and install new exhaust gas
recirculation actuator recirculation actuator as required
failure
P0403- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Using the manufacturer approved

13 A Control Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
open EGR_A_NEG - EGR_A_POS - signals, EGR Bank 1 - Commanded
(0x03FB)
module has check the bank 1 exhaust gas recirculation
determined an open control circuit for open circuit. This circuit
circuit via lack of bias consists of two wires connected between
voltage, low current the engine control module and the exhaust
flow, no change in the gas recirculation valve motor. Check both
state of an input in wires for open circuit. Repair harness as
response to an output required. Clear DTC and retest
recirculation actuator recirculation control actuator as required
circuit high resistance,
open circuit,
disconnected
Exhaust gas
recirculation actuator
failure

voltage below threshold EGR_A_NEG - EGR_A_POS - signals, EGR Bank 1 - Commanded
(0x03FB)
module measured a check exhaust gas recirculation actuator
voltage below a circuit for short circuit to ground, high
specified range but resistance, open circuit, disconnected.
circuit to ground retest
ground, high
resistance, open
circuit, disconnected
Exhaust gas
failure

current above threshold EGR_A_NEG - EGR_A_POS - signals, EGR Bank 1 - Commanded
(0x03FB). Refer to the electrical circuit
Exhaust gas diagrams and check exhaust gas
recirculation actuator recirculation actuator circuit for short
circuit short circuit to circuit to power. Repair harness as
power required. Clear DTC and retest
failure

1D A Control Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
current out of range EGR_A_NEG - EGR_A_POS - signals, EGR Bank 1 - Commanded
(0x03FB)
circuit short circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short
ground, short circuit circuit to power, high resistance,
to power, high disconnected. Repair harness as required.
circuit, disconnected Check and install new exhaust gas
Exhaust gas recirculation actuator as required
failure

4B A Control Circuit - Over NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
temperature EGR_A_NEG - EGR_A_POS - signals, EGR Bank 1 - Commanded
(0x03FB)
ground, short circuit circuit to power, high resistance,
failure

71 "A" Control Circuit / Open NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
- Actuator stuck EGR_A_NEG - EGR_A_POS - signals, EGR Bank 1 - Commanded
(0x03FB)
circuit open circuit, circuit for open circuit, disconnected.
disconnected Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
Exhaust gas retest

19 A Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - EGR_A_NEG - EGR_A_POS - signals, EGR Bank 1 - Commanded
Circuit current above (0x03FB)
threshold Exhaust gas Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground, short circuit circuit to power, high resistance. Repair
to power, high harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
resistance Check and install new exhaust gas
failure

00 Sensor A Circuit Low - No NOTE: - Circuit EVP_A - diagnostic system check datalogger
sub type information signals, EGR Valve Position Bank 1
Exhaust gas (0x052E)
recirculation actuator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
sensor circuit short check exhaust gas recirculation actuator
circuit to ground, high sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
resistance, open high resistance, open circuit, disconnected.
Exhaust gas retest
P0405- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Sensor A Circuit Low - NOTE: - Circuit EVP_A - check the bank 1 exhaust gas recirculation
Circuit short to ground sensor signal circuit for short circuit to
The engine control ground. Check the power and ground
module has detected a circuits which supply the sensor. Repair
ground measurement harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
for a period longer Check and install new exhaust gas
than expected or has recirculation sensor as required
detected a ground
measurement when
another value was
expected
Exhaust gas
Exhaust gas
failure
P0405- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Using the manufacturer approved
77 Sensor A Circuit Low - recirculation actuator diagnostic system check datalogger
Commanded position not position sensor circuit signals, EGR Valve Position Bank 1
reachable short circuit to ground (0x052E)
recirculation actuator check the bank 1 exhaust gas recirculation
failure sensor signal circuit for short circuit to
ground. Check the power and ground
circuits which supply the sensor. Repair
Check and install new exhaust gas
recirculation sensor as required

00 Sensor A Circuit High - No NOTE: - Circuit EVP_A - diagnostic system check datalogger
Exhaust gas (0x052E)
recirculation actuator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit short circuit to check exhaust gas recirculation valve bank
power 1 circuits for short circuit to power. Repair
Exhaust gas harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
failure recirculation sensor as required
12 Sensor A Circuit High - NOTE: - Circuit EVP_A - check the bank 1 exhaust gas recirculation
Circuit short to battery sensor signal circuit for short circuit to
The engine control power. Repair harness as required. Clear
module has detected a DTC and retest
vehicle power Check and install new exhaust gas
measurement for a recirculation sensor as required
period longer than
expected or has
detected a vehicle
power measurement
when another value
was expected
Exhaust gas
Exhaust gas
failure
P0406- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
77 Sensor A Circuit High - recirculation actuator check the bank 1 exhaust gas recirculation
Commanded position not circuit short circuit to sensor signal circuit for short circuit to
reachable power power. Check the power and ground
Exhaust gas circuits which supply the sensor. Repair
recirculation actuator harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
failure Check and install new exhaust gas
recirculation sensor as required
00 Sensor B Circuit Low - No NOTE: - Circuit TPS - check the throttle position sensor circuits
sub type information for short circuit to ground, open circuit.
Harness failure - Repair harness as required, clear the DTC
Throttle position and retest system
sensor circuit Check and install new throttle position
Throttle position sensor as required
sensor failure
00 Sensor B Circuit High - No NOTE: - Circuit TPS - check the throttle position sensor circuits
sub type information for short circuit to ground, open circuit.
Harness failure - Repair harness as required, clear the DTC
Throttle position and retest system
sensor circuit Check and install new throttle position
Throttle position sensor as required
sensor failure
13 Sensor A Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit EVP_A - check the bank 1 exhaust gas recirculation
open sensor signal circuit for open circuit.
The engine control Check the power and ground circuits which
module has supply the sensor. Repair harness as
determined an open required. Clear DTC and retest
circuit via lack of bias Check and install new exhaust gas
voltage, low current recirculation sensor as required
Harness failure -
Exhaust gas
circuit
Exhaust gas
failure
16 Sensor A Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit EVP_A - check exhaust gas recirculation actuator
voltage below threshold sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
The engine control high resistance, open circuit, disconnected.
module measured a Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
voltage below a retest
specified range but Check and install new exhaust gas
not necessarily a short recirculation actuator as required
circuit to ground
Exhaust gas
ground, high
resistance, open
Exhaust gas
failure
17 Sensor A Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit EVP_A - check exhaust gas recirculation actuator
voltage above threshold sensor circuit for short circuit to power.
The engine control Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
module measured a retest
voltage above a Check and install new exhaust gas
specified range but recirculation actuator as required
circuit to power
Exhaust gas
power
Exhaust gas
failure
P0409- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
92 Sensor A Circuit - recirculation actuator check exhaust gas recirculation actuator
Performance or incorrect circuit short circuit to sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
operation ground, high high resistance, open circuit, disconnected.
failure
P0426- Catalyst Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor Circuit NOTE: - Circuit CCCIT_B diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance (Bank - signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
1, Sensor Circuit 1) - No Sensor 1 Voltage (0x03BF), Exhaust Gas
sub type information Exhaust gas Temperature Bank 2 Sensor 1 (0x03F7)
post turbocharger check exhaust gas temperature sensor
circuit to ground, high post turbocharger circuit for short circuit
resistance, open to ground, high resistance, open circuit,
circuit, disconnected disconnected
temperature sensor post turbocharger -
bank 2, sensor 1 as required

00 Sensor Circuit Low (Bank NOTE: - Circuit CCCIT_B diagnostic system check datalogger
1, Sensor Circuit 1) - No - signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
sub type information Sensor 1 Voltage (0x03BF), Exhaust Gas
Exhaust gas Temperature Bank 2 Sensor 1 (0x03F7)
circuit to ground, high post turbocharger circuit for short circuit
resistance, open to ground, high resistance, open circuit,
circuit, disconnected disconnected

00 Sensor Circuit High (Bank NOTE: - Circuit CCCIT_B diagnostic system check datalogger
circuit to power post turbocharger circuit for short circuit
to power
P042B- Catalyst Temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

00 Sensor Circuit NOTE: - Circuit check exhaust gas temperature sensor
Range/Performance CCCOT_A - post catalytic converter circuit for short
(Bank1, Sensor Circuit 2) - circuit to ground, open circuit, high
No sub type information Exhaust gas resistance
temperature sensor Check and install new exhaust gas
post catalytic temperature sensor post catalytic
converter short circuit converter as required
to ground, open
Exhaust gas
temperature sensor
post catalytic
converter failure
P042C- Catalyst Temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Sensor Circuit Low (Bank NOTE: - Circuit check exhaust gas temperature sensor
1, Sensor Circuit 2) - No CCCOT_A - post catalytic converter circuit for short
sub type information circuit to ground, open circuit, high
Exhaust gas resistance
converter short circuit converter as required
to ground, open
Exhaust gas
temperature sensor
post catalytic
converter failure
P042E- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Check for other related DTCs and refer to
77 A Control Stuck Open - recirculation actuator the relevant DTC index
Commanded position not circuit short circuit to Using the manufacturer approved
reachable ground, short circuit diagnostic system, operate the exhaust
to power, high recirculation valve through the full
resistance, open operating range whilst monitoring the
circuit, disconnected position sensor signal value. If the
Exhaust gas position signal does not change smoothly
recirculation actuator in proportion to the commands check the
failure operation of the valve
check exhaust gas recirculation actuator
circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, high resistance, open
circuit, disconnected. Repair harness as
recirculation actuator as required
P042F- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Check for other related DTCs and refer to
77 A Control Stuck Closed - recirculation actuator the relevant DTC index
reachable ground, short circuit diagnostic system, operate the exhaust
to power, high recirculation valve through the full
recirculation actuator in proportion to the commands check the
check exhaust gas recirculation actuator
recirculation actuator as required

00 Sensor Circuit (Bank 2, NOTE: - Circuit CCCIT_B diagnostic system check datalogger
Sensor Circuit 1) - No sub - signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
type information Sensor 1 Voltage (0x03BF), Exhaust Gas
bank 2, sensor 1 post turbocharger bank 2, sensor 1 circuit
circuit short circuit to for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
ground, short circuit power, high resistance, open circuit,
P0436- Catalyst Temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

00 Sensor Circuit NOTE: - Circuit STOT - check exhaust gas temperature sensor
Range/Performance (Bank post turbocharger circuit for short circuit
2, Sensor Circuit 1) - No Exhaust gas to ground, open circuit, high resistance
sub type information temperature sensor Clear the DTC and retest
post turbocharger Check and install new exhaust gas
overheating temperature sensor post turbocharger as
Exhaust gas required
temperature sensor
post turbocharger
short circuit short
circuit to ground,
open circuit, high
resistance
Exhaust gas
temperature sensor
post turbocharger
failure

00 Sensor Circuit Low (Bank NOTE: - Circuit CCCIT_B diagnostic system check datalogger
circuit short circuit to for short circuit to ground, high
ground, high resistance, open circuit, disconnected.
temperature sensor temperature sensor post turbocharger -
post turbocharger bank 2, sensor 1 as required
bank 2, sensor 1
failure

00 Sensor Circuit High (Bank NOTE: - Circuit CCCIT_B diagnostic system check datalogger
Exhaust gas Temperature Bank 2 Sensor 1 (0x03F7).
circuit short circuit to for short circuit to power. Repair harness
power as required. Clear DTC and retest
bank 2, sensor 1
failure
P043A- Catalyst Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor Circuit (Bank 2, NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Sensor Circuit 2) - No sub CCCOT_A - signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 2
type information Sensor 2 (0x03F8), Exhaust Gas
Exhaust gas Temperature Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 2
temperature sensor Voltage (0x03E9)
post turbocharger Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
bank 2, sensor 2 check exhaust gas temperature sensor
circuit short circuit to post turbocharger bank 2, sensor 2 circuit
ground, short circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
to power, high power, high resistance, open circuit,
resistance, open disconnected. Repair harness as required.
circuit, disconnected Clear DTC and retest
bank 2, sensor 2
failure
P043B- Catalyst Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance (Bank CCCOT_A - signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 2
2, Sensor Circuit 2) - No Sensor 2 (0x03F8), Exhaust Gas
sub type information Exhaust gas Temperature Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 2
ground, short circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
to power, high power, high resistance, open circuit,
resistance, open disconnected. Repair harness as required.
circuit, disconnected Clear DTC and retest
bank 2, sensor 2
failure
P043C- Catalyst Temperature Using the manufacturer approved
00 Sensor Circuit Low (Bank NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
2, Sensor Circuit 2) - No CCCOT_A - signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 2
sub type information Sensor 2 (0x03F8), Exhaust Gas
ground, high for short circuit to ground, high
Exhaust gas retest
post turbocharger temperature sensor post turbocharger -
bank 2, sensor 2 bank 2, sensor 2 as required
failure
P043D- Catalyst Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor Circuit High (Bank NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
2, Sensor Circuit 2) - No CCCOT_A - signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 2
sub type information Sensor 2 (0x03F8), Exhaust Gas
power for short circuit to power. Repair harness
Exhaust gas as required. Clear DTC and retest
post turbocharger temperature sensor post turbocharger -
bank 2, sensor 2 bank 2, sensor 2 as required
failure
P044A- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Using the manufacturer approved

13 Sensor C Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit EVP_B - diagnostic system check datalogger
open signals, EGR Valve Position Bank 2
The engine control (0x052F)
module has Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
determined an open check the bank 2 exhaust gas recirculation
circuit via lack of bias sensor signal circuit for open circuit.
voltage, low current Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
flow, no change in the retest
state of an input in Check and install new exhaust gas
response to an output recirculation valve bank 2 as required
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank 2 circuit high
resistance, open
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank 2 failure

voltage below threshold signals, EGR Valve Position Bank 2
The engine control (0x052F)
module measured a Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
voltage below a check exhaust gas recirculation valve bank
specified range but 2 circuit for short circuit to ground, high
not necessarily a short resistance, disconnected. Repair harness
circuit to ground as required. Clear DTC and retest
recirculation valve recirculation valve bank 2 as required
bank 2 circuit short
circuit to ground, high
resistance,
disconnected
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank 2 failure

voltage above threshold signals, EGR Valve Position Bank 2
The engine control (0x052F).
module measured a Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
voltage above a check exhaust gas recirculation valve bank
specified range but 2 circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
not necessarily a short harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
circuit to power Check and install new exhaust gas
Exhaust gas recirculation valve bank 2 as required
recirculation valve
circuit to power
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank 2 failure

92 Sensor C Circuit - NOTE: - Circuit EVP_B - diagnostic system check datalogger
Performance or incorrect signals, EGR Valve Position Bank 2
operation Exhaust gas (0x052F)
recirculation valve Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
bank 2 circuit short check exhaust gas recirculation valve bank
circuit to ground, 2 circuit for short circuit to ground, short
short circuit to power, circuit to power, open circuit, high
open circuit, high resistance, disconnected. Repair harness
resistance, as required. Clear DTC and retest
disconnected Check and install new exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank 2 failure
P044C- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor C Circuit Low - No NOTE: - Circuit EVP_B - diagnostic system check datalogger
Exhaust gas (0x052F)
circuit to ground, high 2 circuit for short circuit to ground, high
Exhaust gas retest
recirculation valve Check and install new exhaust gas
bank 2 failure recirculation valve bank 2 as required
P044D- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor C Circuit High - No NOTE: - Circuit EVP_B - diagnostic system check datalogger
Exhaust gas (0x052F)
circuit to power 2 circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
Exhaust gas harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
bank 2 failure recirculation valve bank 2 as required

13 B Control Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
open EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
(0x0525)
module has check the bank 2 exhaust gas recirculation
determined an open control circuit for open circuit,
circuit via lack of bias disconnected. Check both wires. Repair
voltage, low current harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
flow, no change in the Check and install new exhaust gas
state of an input in recirculation control actuator as required
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank 2 circuit open
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank 2 failure

voltage below threshold EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
(0x0525)
module measured a check exhaust gas recirculation valve bank
voltage below a 2 circuit for short circuit to ground, high
specified range but resistance, open circuit, disconnected.
not necessarily a short Check both circuits. Repair harness as
resistance, open
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank 2 failure

current above threshold EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
(0x0525)
module has measured check exhaust gas recirculation valve bank
current flow above a 2 circuit for short circuit to ground, short
specified range circuit to power, high resistance, open
Exhaust gas circuit, disconnected. Check both circuits.
recirculation valve Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
bank 2 circuit short retest
circuit to ground, Check and install new exhaust gas
short circuit to power, recirculation valve bank 2 as required
high resistance, open
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank 2 failure

1D B Control Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
current out of range EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
(0x0525)
module has detected a check exhaust gas recirculation valve bank
current outside of the 2 circuit for short circuit to ground, short
expected range, but circuit to power, high resistance, open
not identified as too circuit, disconnected. Check both circuits.
high or too low Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
Exhaust gas retest
bank 2 circuit short recirculation valve bank 2 as required
circuit to ground,
high resistance, open
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank 2 failure

4B B Control Circuit - Over NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
temperature EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
(0x0525)
module detected an check exhaust gas recirculation valve bank
internal temperature 2 circuit for short circuit to ground, short
above the expected circuit to power, high resistance. Check
range both circuits. Repair harness as required.
Exhaust gas Clear DTC and retest
bank 2 circuit short recirculation valve bank 2 as required
circuit to ground,
high resistance
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank 2 failure

71 B Control Circuit - Actuator NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
stuck EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
(0x0525)
recirculation valve check exhaust gas recirculation valve bank
bank 2 circuit short 2 circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to ground, circuit to power, open circuit, high
short circuit to power, resistance. Check both circuits. Repair
open circuit, high harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
resistance Check and install new exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank 2 failure
P045B- Exhaust Gas Recirculation The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
19 B Control Circuit module has measured diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - current flow above a signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
Circuit current above specified range (0x0525)
threshold Exhaust gas Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
bank 2 circuit short 2 circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to ground, circuit to power, high resistance, open
short circuit to power, circuit, disconnected. Repair harness as
high resistance, open required. Clear DTC and retest
recirculation valve
bank 2 failure

00 B Control Circuit Low - No NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
sub type information EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
(0x0525)
bank 2 circuit short 2 circuit for short circuit to ground, high
circuit to ground, high resistance, open circuit, disconnected.
resistance, open Check both circuits. Repair harness as
circuit, disconnected required. Clear DTC and retest
bank 2 failure

11 B Control Circuit Low - NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit short to ground EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
(0x0525). Refer to the electrical circuit
The engine control diagrams and check exhaust gas
module has detected a recirculation valve bank 2 circuit for short
ground measurement circuit to ground. Repair harness as
for a period longer required. Clear DTC and retest
than expected or has Check and install new exhaust gas
detected a ground recirculation valve bank 2 as required
measurement when
another value was
expected
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
circuit to ground
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank 2 failure
P045C- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Using the manufacturer approved
77 B Control Circuit Low - recirculation valve diagnostic system check datalogger
Commanded position not bank 2 circuit short signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
reachable circuit to ground (0x0525). Refer to the electrical circuit
recirculation valve recirculation valve bank 2 circuit for short
bank 2 failure circuit to ground. Repair harness as
recirculation valve bank 2 as required

00 B Control Circuit High - No NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
sub type information EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
bank 2 circuit short circuit to power. Repair harness as
circuit to power required. Clear DTC and retest
bank 2 failure

12 B Control Circuit High - NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit short to battery EGR_B_NEG - EGR_B_POS - signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
The engine control diagrams and check exhaust gas
module has detected a recirculation valve bank 2 circuit for short
vehicle power circuit to power. Repair harness as
measurement for a required. Clear DTC and retest
period longer than Check and install new exhaust gas
expected or has recirculation valve bank 2 as required
detected a vehicle
power measurement
when another value
was expected
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
circuit to power
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank 2 failure
P045D- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Using the manufacturer approved
77 B Control Circuit High - recirculation valve diagnostic system check datalogger
Commanded position not bank 2 circuit short signals, Commanded EGR Bank 2
reachable circuit to power (0x0525). Refer to the electrical circuit
bank 2 failure circuit to power. Repair harness as
recirculation valve bank 2 as required
P045E- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Check for other related DTCs and refer to
77 B Control Stuck Open - recirculation valve B the relevant DTC index
reachable ground, short circuit diagnostic system, operate the Exhaust
to power, high Recirculation Valve through the full
recirculation valve B in proportion to the commands check the
check exhaust gas recirculation valve B
recirculation valve B as required
P045F- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust gas Check for other related DTCs and refer to
77 B Control Stuck Closed - recirculation valve B the relevant DTC index
reachable ground, short circuit diagnostic system, operate the Exhaust
to power, high Recirculation Valve through the full
recirculation valve B in proportion to the commands check the
check exhaust gas recirculation valve B
recirculation valve B as required
P046E- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Sensor "B" Circuit NOTE: - Circuit TPS - check throttle position sensor for short
Range/Performance - No circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
sub type information Throttle position open circuit, high resistance. Repair
sensor short circuit to harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
ground, short circuit Check and install new throttle position
to power, open circuit, sensor as required
high resistance
Throttle position
sensor failure
P0480- Fan 1 Control Circuit - Using the manufacturer approved

11 Circuit short to ground NOTE: - Circuit ECFC - diagnostic system check datalogger
signals, Electric Fan PWM Control -
The engine control Commanded (0x03F9). Refer to the
ground measurement cooling fan 1 control circuit for short
for a period longer circuit to ground. Check the power and
than expected or has ground supplies to the cooling fan 1
detected a ground control module. Repair harness as
measurement when required. Clear DTC and retest
another value was Check and install new cooling fan 1 control
expected module as required
Fan 1 control circuit -
Short circuit to ground
Cooling fan 1
component failure

12 Circuit short to battery NOTE: - Circuit ECFC - diagnostic system check datalogger
vehicle power cooling fan 1 control circuit for short
measurement for a circuit to power. Check the power and
period longer than ground supplies to the cooling fan 1
expected or has control module. Repair harness as
detected a vehicle required. Clear DTC and retest
power measurement Check and install new cooling fan 1 control
when another value module as required
was expected
Short circuit to power
Cooling fan 1
component failure

13 Circuit open NOTE: - Circuit ECFC - diagnostic system check datalogger
determined an open cooling fan 1 control circuit for open
circuit via lack of bias circuit. Check the power and ground
voltage, low current supplies to the cooling fan 1 control
flow, no change in the module. Repair harness as required. Clear
state of an input in DTC and retest
response to an output Check and install new cooling fan 1 control
Fan 1 control circuit - module as required
Open circuit
Cooling fan 1
component failure
P0480- Fan 1 Control Circuit - The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
16 Circuit voltage below module has check the fan 1 supply circuit for short
threshold determined that the circuit to ground, open circuit, high
fan 1 supply voltage is resistance. Check the power and ground
below the calibrated supplies to the cooling fan 1 control
threshold module. Repair harness as required. Clear
Fan 1 control circuit - DTC and retest
Open circuit, short Check and install new cooling fan 1 control
circuit to ground, high module as required
resistance
Cooling fan 1 control
module failure
17 Circuit voltage above module has check the fan 1 supply circuit for short
threshold determined that the circuit to power. Check the power and
fan 1 supply voltage is ground supplies to the cooling fan 1
above the calibrated control module. Repair harness as
threshold required. Clear DTC and retest
Fan 1 control circuit - Check and install new cooling fan 1 control
Short circuit to power module as required
module failure
P0480- Fan 1 Control Circuit - Engine cooling fan Confirm if customer has been deep water
71 Actuator stuck partially stalled wading
Engine cooling fan Check for damage to or blockages in fan
stalling caused by and fouling of fan cowling. Rectify as
deep water wading required
Engine cooling fan Using the manufacturer approved
stalling caused by diagnostic system check datalogger signal
obstruction in fan - Electric Fan PWM Control - Commanded -
cowling (0x03F9)
diagnostic system, operate cooling fan 1
through the full operating range and check
that the DTC does not reset
97 Component or system stalled wading
operation obstructed or Engine cooling fan Check for damage to or blockages in fan
blocked stalling caused by and fouling of fan cowling. Rectify as
obstruction in fan - Electric Fan PWM Control - Commanded -
cowling (0x03F9)

11 Circuit short to ground NOTE: - Circuit ECFC_2 diagnostic system check datalogger
- signals, Electric Fan PWM Control -
Commanded (0x03FA). Refer to the
module has detected a cooling fan 2 control circuit for short
ground measurement circuit to ground. Check the power and
for a period longer ground supplies to the cooling fan 2
than expected or has control module. Repair harness as
detected a ground required. Clear DTC and retest
measurement when Check and install new cooling fan 2 control
another value was module as required
expected
Short circuit to ground
Cooling fan 2
component failure

12 Circuit short to battery NOTE: - Circuit ECFC_2 diagnostic system check datalogger
module has detected a cooling fan 2 control circuit for short
vehicle power circuit to power. Check the power and
measurement for a ground supplies to the cooling fan 2
period longer than control module. Repair harness as
expected or has required. Clear DTC and retest
detected a vehicle Check and install new cooling fan 2 control
power measurement module as required
when another value
was expected
Short circuit to power
Cooling fan 2
component failure

13 Circuit open NOTE: - Circuit ECFC_2 diagnostic system check datalogger
module has cooling fan 2 control circuit for open
determined an open circuit. Check the power and ground
circuit via lack of bias supplies to the cooling fan 2 control
voltage, low current module. Repair harness as required. Clear
flow, no change in the DTC and retest
state of an input in Check and install new cooling fan 2 control
response to an output module as required
Open circuit
Cooling fan 2
component failure
16 Circuit voltage below module has check the fan 2 supply circuit for short
threshold determined that the circuit to ground, open circuit, high
fan 2 supply voltage is resistance. Check the power and ground
below the calibrated supplies to the cooling fan 2 control
threshold module. Repair harness as required. Clear
Fan 2 control circuit - DTC and retest
Open circuit, short Check and install new cooling fan 2 control
circuit to ground, high module as required
resistance
module failure
17 Circuit voltage above module has check the fan 2 supply circuit for short
threshold determined that the circuit to power. Check the power and
fan 2 supply voltage is ground supplies to the cooling fan 2
above the calibrated control module. Repair harness as
threshold required. Clear DTC and retest
Fan 2 control circuit - Check and install new cooling fan 2 control
Short circuit to power module as required
module failure
71 Actuator stuck partially stalled wading
Engine cooling fan Check for damage to or blockages in fan
stalling caused by and fouling of fan cowling. Rectify as
obstruction in fan - Viscous Fan PWM Control - Commanded
cowling - (0x03FA)
97 Component or system stalled wading
operation obstructed or Engine cooling fan Check for damage to or blockages in fan
blocked stalling caused by and fouling of fan cowling. Rectify as
obstruction in fan - Viscous Fan PWM Control - Commanded
cowling - (0x03FA)
P0483- Fan Performance - Signal Engine cooling fan Refer to relevant section of workshop
27 rate of change above acceleration manual and check the viscous fan unit
threshold plausibility defect
This DTC is set if the
calculated engine
cooling fan
acceleration value is
greater than a
calibrated value
P0483- Fan Performance - Signal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and

36 frequency too low NOTE: - Circuit VCFC - check the viscous fan circuit for short
CFM - circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
The engine control
module detected
excessive duration for
one cycle of the
output across a
specified sample size
Engine cooling fan
speed below
maximum threshold
Viscous fan circuit
short circuit to
high resistance
P0483- Fan Performance - Signal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and

37 frequency too high NOTE: - Circuit VCFC - check the viscous fan circuit for short
CFM - circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
The engine control
module detected
insufficient duration
for one cycle of the
output across a
specified sample size
Engine cooling fan
speed above
maximum threshold
Viscous fan circuit
short circuit to
high resistance
P0486- Exhaust Gas Recirculation This DTC is set when the engine control
13 Sensor B Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit TPS - module detects a no load error on the
open throttle motor position sensor circuit. This
The engine control sensor is a potentiometer. Refer to the
determined an open sensor 5 volt supply and ground circuits.
circuit via lack of bias Check the sensor circuits for open circuits,
voltage, low current short circuit to ground, short circuit to
flow, no change in the power. Repair harness as required. Clear
state of an input in DTC and retest
response to an output Check and install new throttle motor
Harness failure - position sensor failure
Throttle motor
open circuit
Throttle motor
position sensor failure
16 Sensor B Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit TPS - check exhaust gas recirculation valve B
voltage below threshold circuit for short circuit to ground, high
The engine control resistance, open circuit, disconnected.
module measured a Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
voltage below a retest
specified range but Check and install new exhaust gas
not necessarily a short recirculation valve B as required
circuit to ground
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
resistance, open
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank 2 failure
17 Sensor B Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit TPS - check exhaust gas recirculation valve bank
voltage above threshold 2 circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
The engine control harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
module measured a Check and install new exhaust gas
voltage above a recirculation valve bank 2 as required
specified range but
circuit to power
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
circuit to power
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank 2 failure
92 Sensor B Circuit - NOTE: - Circuit TPS - check throttle position sensor circuit for
Performance or incorrect short circuit to ground, short circuit to
operation Throttle position power, high resistance, open circuit,
sensor circuit short disconnected. Repair harness as required.
circuit to ground, Clear DTC and retest
short circuit to power, Check and install new throttle position
high resistance, open sensor as required
Throttle position
sensor failure
00 Throttle Control Circuit A / NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - No sub type TPA_POS - TPA_NEG - signals, Commanded Throttle Actuator
information Control (0xF44C). This DTC is set when
Harness failure - the engine control module detects an open
Throttle motor control load error on the throttle motor control
circuit open circuit, circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit
short circuit to diagrams and check the throttle control
ground, short circuit circuits for open circuit, short circuit to
to power ground, short circuit to power. Repair
Throttle motor failure harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
Check and install new throttle motor
control actuator as required

19 Throttle Control Circuit A / NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - Circuit current TPA_POS - TPA_NEG - signals, Commanded Throttle Actuator
above threshold Control (0xF44C). Refer to the electrical
The engine control circuit diagrams and check the throttle
module has measured control circuits for short circuit to ground,
current flow above a high resistance, open circuit. Repair
specified range harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
Harness failure - Check and install new throttle motor
Throttle motor control control actuator as required
ground, high
resistance, open
circuit
Throttle motor failure

1D Throttle Control Circuit A / NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - Circuit current out TPA_POS - TPA_NEG - signals, Commanded Throttle Actuator
of range Control (0xF44C). Refer to the electrical
module has detected a plate actuator control circuits for short
current outside of the circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
expected range, but short circuit to other circuit. Repair
not identified as too harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
high or too low Check and install new throttle motor
Harness failure - control actuator as required
Throttle motor control
to power, short circuit
to other circuit

16 Throttle Control Circuit A NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - TPA_POS - TPA_NEG - signals, Commanded Throttle Actuator
Circuit voltage below Control (0xF44C). Refer to the electrical
threshold The engine control circuit diagrams and check the throttle
module measured a plate actuator control circuits for open
voltage below a circuit, short circuit to ground, short
specified range but circuit to power, high resistance, short
not necessarily a short circuit to other circuit. Repair harness as
short circuit to
to power, high
resistance, short
circuit to another
circuit
P0488- Exhaust Gas Recirculation The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
19 Throttle Control Circuit A module has measured diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - current flow above a signals, Commanded Throttle Actuator
Circuit current above specified range Control (0xF44C). Refer to the electrical
threshold Harness failure - circuit diagrams and check the throttle
Throttle motor control plate actuator control circuit for short
circuit short circuit to circuit to ground, high resistance. Repair
ground, high harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
resistance Check and install new throttle motor
Throttle motor failure control actuator as required
1D Throttle Control Circuit A NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - TPA_POS - TPA_NEG - signals, Commanded Throttle Actuator
Circuit current out of range Control (0xF44C). Refer to the electrical
module has detected a plate actuator control circuits for high
current outside of the resistance, open circuit, short circuit to
expected range, but ground, short circuit to power, short
not identified as too circuit to other circuit. Repair harness as
high or too low required. Clear DTC and retest
circuit high resistance,
open circuit, short
circuit to ground,
short circuit to other
circuit
P0488- Exhaust Gas Recirculation The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
4B Throttle Control Circuit A module detected an diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - Over internal temperature signals, Commanded Throttle Actuator
temperature above the expected Control (0xF44C). Refer to the electrical
range circuit diagrams and check the throttle
Harness failure - motor control circuit for short circuit to
Throttle motor control ground, short circuit to power, high
circuit short circuit to resistance. Repair harness as required.
ground, short circuit Clear DTC and retest
to power, high Check and install new throttle motor
resistance control actuator as required
P0488- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Harness failure - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
72 Throttle Control Circuit A Exhaust gas check the exhaust gas recirculation
Range/Performance - recirculation throttle throttle inlet control circuit for short circuit
Actuator stuck open inlet control circuit to ground, short circuit to power, high
short circuit to resistance, open circuit. Repair harness as
ground, short circuit required. Clear DTC and retest
to power, high Check and install new exhaust gas
resistance, open recirculation throttle inlet control actuator
circuit as required
Exhaust gas
recirculation throttle
inlet control actuator
failure
P0488- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Harness failure - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
73 Throttle Control Circuit A Exhaust gas check the exhaust gas recirculation
Range/Performance - recirculation throttle throttle inlet control circuit for short circuit
Actuator stuck closed inlet control circuit to ground, short circuit to power, high
short circuit to resistance, open circuit. Repair harness as
ground, short circuit required. Clear DTC and retest
resistance, open recirculation throttle inlet control actuator
circuit as required
Exhaust gas
recirculation throttle
inlet control actuator
failure
P0489- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Check for related DTCs and refer to the
77 Control Circuit Low - NOTE: - Circuit relevant DTC index
Commanded position not SENSOR_GND_5 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
reachable check the throttle position sensor circuit
Throttle position for open circuit. Repair harness as
sensor circuit open required. Clear DTC and retest
circuit
P0490- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Throttle position Check for related DTCs and refer to the
77 A Control Circuit High - sensor circuit, short relevant DTC index
Commanded position not circuit to ground, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
reachable short circuit to power, check the throttle position sensor circuit
open circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
P049D- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Harness failure - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 A Control Position Exhaust gas check the bank 1 exhaust gas recirculation
Exceeded Learning Limit - recirculation valve control circuit for short circuit to ground,
No sub type information bank 1 control circuit short circuit to power, high resistance,
short circuit to open circuit. Repair harness as required.
resistance, open recirculation control actuator as required
circuit
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank 1 actuator failure
P049E- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Harness failure - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 B Control Position Exhaust gas check the bank 2 exhaust gas recirculation
Exceeded Learning Limit - recirculation valve control circuit for short circuit to ground,
No sub type information bank 2 control circuit short circuit to power, high resistance,
short circuit to open circuit. Repair harness as required.
resistance, open recirculation control actuator as required
circuit
Exhaust gas
recirculation valve
bank 2 actuator failure
P0504- Brake Switch A / B Check for related brake pressure DTCs

27 Correlation - Signal rate of NOTE: - Circuit BOO_1 - within the anti-lock brake system control
change above threshold BOO_2 - module
Check brake pedal switch is fitted
Brake pedal switch correctly. Clear DTC, start the engine and
plunger failure press the brake pedal, using maximum
Brake pedal switch not travel, for greater than 1 second taking
fitted correctly care not to press the accelerator pedal
Brake switch A failure Check and install new brake switch as
required
P0504- Brake Switch A / B Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

62 Correlation - Signal NOTE: - Circuit BOO_1 - check brake pedal switch circuit for short
compare failure BOO_2 - circuit to power, open circuit. Repair
Error check for brake
plausibility
Brake pedal switch
power, open circuit
P050E- Cold Start Engine Exhaust Engine coolant Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Temperature Too Low - No temperature sensor check engine coolant temperature sensor
sub type information circuit short circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short
ground, short circuit circuit to power, open circuit,
to power, open circuit, disconnected. Repair harness as required.
disconnected Clear DTC and retest
Engine coolant Check and install new engine coolant
failure
P050F- Brake Assist Vacuum Too Harness failure - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Low - No sub type Vacuum switch circuit check vacuum switch circuit for short
information short circuit to circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
ground, short circuit open circuit, disconnected. Repair harness
to power, open circuit, as required. Clear DTC and retest
disconnected Check and install new vacuum switch as
Vacuum switch failure required
P0512- Starter Request Circuit - This DTC is set when the engine control
24 Signal stuck high NOTE: - Circuit CRNK - module detects the engine crank signal
from the central junction box is stuck
The engine control high. If this DTC is logged on its own clear
module measures a the DTC using the manufacturer approved
signal that remains diagnostic system. Select PARK position.
high when transitions Set ignition OFF, wait 2 minutes for post
are expected drive to complete. Set ignition ON but do
Harness failure - NOT crank. Wait 25 seconds. Crank engine
Starter request circuit and check if DTC is cleared. If this DTC is
failure logged with lost communication DTCs refer
Central junction box to electrical circuit diagrams and check
failure CAN circuit. If the engine cannot be
Post drive cycle not cranked read the DTCs stored in the
completed central junction box and refer to the
Harness failure - CAN relevant DTC index. Check the engine
circuit crank signal input circuit for open circuit,
short circuit to power, short circuit to
ground, short circuit to other circuits.
retest
P0512- Starter Request Circuit - This DTC is set when the engine control
64 Signal plausibility failure NOTE: - Circuit CRNK - module detects the engine crank signal
from the passenger compartment fuse box
Harness failure - is stuck high. If this DTC is logged on its
Starter request circuit own clear the DTC using the manufacturer
failure approved diagnostic system. Select PARK
Central junction box position. Set ignition OFF, wait 2 minutes
failure for post drive to complete. Set ignition ON
Postdrive cycle not but do NOT crank. Wait 25 seconds. Crank
completed engine and check if DTC is cleared. If this
Harness failure - CAN DTC is logged with lost communication
circuit DTCs refer to electrical circuit diagrams
and check CAN circuit. If the engine
cannot be cranked read the DTCs stored in
the central junction box and refer to the
relevant DTC index. Check the engine
crank signal input circuit for open circuits,
ground, short to other circuits. Repair
wiring harness as required, clear DTC and
retest system
P0513- Incorrect Immobilizer Key Security key invalid Check for CAN network and engine control
00 - No sub type information module related DTCs. Re-configure the
engine control module using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Re-configure the instrument cluster using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
P0528- Fan Speed Sensor Circuit Using the manufacturer approved

00 No Signal - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit CFM - diagnostic system check datalogger
information signals, Fan Speed Indicated (0x0702).
Harness failure - This DTC is set when the engine control
Cooling fan monitor module does not receive a signal on the
circuit cooling fan monitor circuit. Check the
cooling fan monitor signal input circuit for
open circuits, short circuit to power, short
circuit to ground or other circuits. Repair
P052F- Glow Plug Control Module Glow plug control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 System Voltage - No sub module circuit short check glow plug control module circuit for
type information circuit to ground, short circuit to ground, short circuit to
short circuit to power, power, open circuit, disconnected. Repair
open circuit, harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
disconnected Check and install new glow plug control
Glow plug control module as required
module failure
P0544- Exhaust Gas Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor Circuit - Bank 1 NOTE: - Circuit CCCIT_B diagnostic system check datalogger
Sensor 1 - No sub type - signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
information Sensor 1 Voltage (0x03BF), Exhaust Gas
circuit short circuit to for short circuit to ground. Repair harness
ground as required. Clear DTC and retest
bank 2, sensor 1
failure
P0545- Exhaust Gas Temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Sensor Circuit Low - Bank NOTE: - Circuit STOT - check exhaust gas temperature sensor,
1 Sensor 1 - No sub type bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for short circuit to
information Exhaust gas ground, high resistance, open circuit,
temperature sensor, disconnected. Repair harness as required.
bank 1 sensor 1 circuit Clear DTC and retest
short circuit to Check and install new exhaust gas
ground, high temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 as
resistance, open required
Exhaust gas
temperature sensor,
bank 1 sensor 1 failure
00 Sensor Circuit High - Bank NOTE: - Circuit STOT - check exhaust gas temperature sensor,
1 Sensor 1 - No sub type bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for short circuit to
information Exhaust gas power. Repair harness as required. Clear
temperature sensor, DTC and retest
bank 1 sensor 1 circuit Check and install new exhaust gas
short circuit to power temperature sensor, bank1 sensor 1 as
temperature sensor,
bank 1 sensor 1 failure
00 Sensor Circuit - Bank 2 NOTE: - Circuit STOT - check exhaust gas temperature sensor
Sensor 1 - No sub type post turbocharger circuit for short circuit
information Exhaust gas to ground
temperature sensor Clear the DTC and retest
short circuit to ground temperature sensor post turbocharger as
temperature sensor
post turbocharger
failure
00 Sensor Circuit Low - Bank NOTE: - Circuit STOT - check exhaust gas temperature sensor
2 Sensor 1 - No sub type post turbocharger circuit for short circuit
information Exhaust gas to ground, open circuit, high resistance
short circuit short temperature sensor post turbocharger as
open circuit, high
resistance
Exhaust gas
temperature sensor
post turbocharger
failure
00 Sensor Circuit High - Bank NOTE: - Circuit STOT - check exhaust gas temperature sensor
2 Sensor 1 - No sub type post turbocharger circuit for short circuit
information Exhaust gas to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit to power, open required
Exhaust gas
temperature sensor
post turbocharger
failure
P0571- Brake Switch A Circuit - The brake switch Using the manufacturer approved
62 Signal compare failure signal received over diagnostic system carry out network
CAN is defective integrity test
Brake switch Check for related DTCs and refer to the
(footbrake switch) relevant DTC index
failure Check and install new brake switch as
required
P0571- Brake Switch A Circuit - Brake pedal pressed Ensure driver has not lightly pressed brake
68 Event information by driver at same time pedal and accelerator pedal at the same
as accelerator pedal time
pressed Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Brake pedal switch - check Brake switch - Circuit BOO_1 - For
Circuit BOO_1 - Short short circuit to power. Repair wiring
circuit to power harness as required, Clear DTC and retest.
Brake switch Check and install new brake switch as
(footbrake switch) required
failure
P0575- Cruise Control Input Circuit The DTC sets if the Check speed control buttons are not
81 - Invalid serial data cancel, set minus, set jammed/contaminated/damaged. Check
received plus, resume, speed control module for related DTCs and
headway increase and refer to the relevant DTC index
headway decrease
speed control buttons
have been pressed for
longer than a
calibrated period of
time. The system then
assumes a
stuck/damaged button
and will cancel and/or
disable cruise. The
failure will be healed
in the next driving
cycle if the failure is
removed
P0602- Powertrain Control Module Mismatch between car Using the manufacturer approved
00 Programming Error - No configuration file and diagnostic system re-configure the engine
sub type information engine control module control module. Clear DTC and retest
calibration for
expected engine power
output
Incorrect engine
control module
calibration for vehicle
specification
P0605- Internal Control Module Corrupt engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 Read Only Memory (ROM) module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the engine
Error - No sub type Engine control module control module
information power supply failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Engine control module check the engine control module power
ground supply failure and ground supplies for open circuit.
Engine control module Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
failure retest
Check and install new engine control
module as required
P0606- Control Module Processor - Corrupt engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 No sub type information module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the engine
Engine control module control module
power supply failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
failure retest
module as required
44 Data memory failure module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the engine
failure retest
module as required
49 Internal electronic failure module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the engine
failure retest
module as required
P0607- Control Module Corrupt engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 Performance - No sub type module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the engine
information Engine control module control module
failure supply for open circuit. Repair harness as
module as required
P060A- Internal Control Module Engine control module Check engine control module power and
00 Monitoring Processor has reset due to ground supply circuits for open circuits.
Performance - No sub type hardware failure Re-configure the engine control module
information using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, Clear DTC and retest
module as required
P060A- Internal Control Module The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
16 Monitoring Processor module measured a diagnostic system re-configure the engine
Performance - Circuit voltage below a control module
voltage below threshold specified range but Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
not necessarily a short check the engine control module power
circuit to ground supply for open circuit. Repair harness as
Corrupt engine control required. Clear DTC and retest
module software flash Check and install new engine control
Engine control module module as required
power supply failure
Engine control module
failure
P060A- Internal Control Module The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
17 Monitoring Processor module measured a diagnostic system re-configure the engine
Performance - Circuit voltage above a control module
voltage above threshold specified range but Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to power and ground supplies for open circuit.
Corrupt engine control Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
module software flash retest
Engine control module Check and install new engine control
power supply failure module as required
ground supply failure
failure
P060B- Internal Control Module Corrupt engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 A/D Processing module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the engine
Performance - No sub type Engine control module control module
failure retest
module as required
P060B- Internal Control Module The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
16 A/D Processing module measured a diagnostic system re-configure the engine
Performance - Circuit voltage below a control module
voltage below threshold specified range but Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to ground supply for open circuit. Repair harness as
module software flash Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Engine control module check the engine control module ground
power supply failure supply for open circuit. Repair harness as
Engine control module required. Clear DTC and retest
ground supply failure Check and install new engine control
failure
P060B- Internal Control Module The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
17 A/D Processing module measured a diagnostic system re-configure the engine
Performance - Circuit voltage above a control module
voltage above threshold specified range but Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to power supply for open circuit. Repair harness as
failure
Performance - Calibration / Engine control module control module
parameter memory failure power supply failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground supply failure supply for open circuit. Repair harness as
check the engine control module ground
supply for open circuit. Repair harness as
module as required
Performance - Internal Engine control module control module
electronic failure power supply failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
module as required
Performance - Circuit / Engine control module control module
component protection power supply failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
time-out Engine control module check the engine control module power
module as required
P060C- Internal Control Module Engine control module Clear DTC and road test vehicle including
00 Main Processor has reset due to at least 5 ignition cycles. Re-check DTC
Performance - No sub type hardware or software and repeat above procedure. If DTC resets
information failure check and install new engine control
module as required
P060D- Internal Control Module Accelerator pedal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Accelerator Pedal Position position sensor circuit, check the reference voltage and ground
Performance - No sub type short circuit to connections to the accelerator pedal
information ground, short circuit position sensor. Check signal circuits for
to power, high high resistance, open circuits, short circuit
resistance, open to power, short circuit to ground. Clear
circuit DTC and retest
Accelerator pedal Check and install a accelerator pedal
position sensor failure position sensor as required
failure module as required
P0610- Control Module Vehicle Corrupt engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 Options Error - No sub module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the engine
type information Engine control module control module
module as required
P0615- Starter Relay Circuit - No Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 sub type information NOTE: - Circuit check starter relay circuit for short circuit
SM_COMMAND_H - to ground, short circuit to power, open
SM_COMMAND_L - circuit, high resistance
Starter relay circuit

failure
P061A- Internal Control Module Corrupt engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 Torque Performance - No module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the engine
sub type information Engine control module control module
ground supply failure supply's for open circuit. Repair wiring
Engine control module harness as required, clear DTC and retest
failure system
supply's for open circuit. Repair wiring
harness as required, clear DTC and retest
system
module as required
00 Torque Calculation module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the engine
Performance - No sub type Engine control module control module
ground supply failure supply's for open circuit. Repair wiring
Engine control module harness as required, clear DTC and retest
failure system
supply's for open circuit. Repair wiring
system
module as required
P061C- Internal Control Module Corrupt engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 Engine RPM Performance - module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the engine
No sub type information Engine control module control module
module as required
P061C- Internal Control Module The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Engine RPM Performance - module has detected a check the power and ground supplies to
Circuit short to ground ground measurement the engine control module
for a period longer
detected a ground
measurement when
another value was
expected
Internal failure within
engine control module
- Engine speed output
short to ground
12 Engine RPM Performance - module has detected a check the power and ground supplies to
Circuit short to battery vehicle power the engine control module
measurement for a
period longer than
expected or has
detected a vehicle
power measurement
when another value
was expected
short to power
13 Engine RPM Performance - module has check the power and ground supplies to
Circuit open determined an open the engine control module
open circuit
P0620- Generator Control Circuit - Electrical failure has Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 No sub type information been detected by the check the generator circuit, for short
generator and circuit to power, short circuit to ground,
reported to the engine open circuit. Repair harness as required.
control module by LIN Clear DTC and retest
bus Check and install new generator as
Generator failure required
P0627- Fuel Pump A Control

13 Circuit / Open - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit LPPR - NOTE: When this DTC is set the engine
open control module limits engine torque to protect the
The engine control engine and avoid pulling air into the fuel system
module has under high load
determined an open
circuit via lack of bias Check the operation of the lift pump relay.
voltage, low current Replace if required. Refer to the electrical
flow, no change in the circuit diagrams and check the fuel lift
state of an input in pump relay control circuit between the
response to an output engine control module and the central
Wiring harness failure junction box for open circuit. Repair
between engine harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
control module and
Lift pump relay failure

11 Circuit Low - Circuit short NOTE: - Circuit LPPR - NOTE: When this DTC is set the fuel lift
to ground pump will run continuously when the ignition is
The engine control on, even when the engine is stopped
module has detected a
ground measurement Check the operation of the lift pump relay.
for a period longer Replace if required. Refer to the electrical
than expected or has circuit diagrams and check the fuel lift
detected a ground pump relay control circuit between the
measurement when engine control module and the central
another value was junction box for a short circuit to ground.
expected Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
Wiring harness failure retest
between engine
control module and

12 Circuit High - Circuit short NOTE: - Circuit LPPR - NOTE: When this DTC is set the engine
to battery control module limits engine torque to protect the
The engine control engine and avoid pulling air into the fuel system
module has detected a under high load
vehicle power
measurement for a Check the operation of the lift pump relay.
period longer than Replace if required. Refer to the electrical
expected or has circuit diagrams and check the fuel lift
detected a vehicle pump relay control circuit between the
power measurement engine control module and the central
when another value junction box for a short circuit to power.
was expected Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
Wiring harness failure retest
between engine
control module and
P062A- Fuel Pump A Control Lift pump relay has Check for related DTCs within the central
92 Circuit Range/Performance been driven by the junction box
- Performance or incorrect central junction box, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
operation but has not been check fuel lift pump relay circuit for short
requested by the circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
engine control module open circuit. Clear DTC and retest
Lift pump relay has Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
been requested by the check between the engine control module
engine control module, and the rear junction box for short circuit
but has not been to ground. Clear DTC and retest
driven by the central Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
junction box check the rear junction box to in tank fuel
Wiring harness failure pump relay for short circuit to power.
lift pump monitor Clear DTC and retest
circuit Check and install new fuel lift pump relay
Lift pump relay as required. Clear DTC and retest
P062B- Internal Control Module Injector failure(s) Check for related injector DTCs and repair
00 Fuel Injector Control Corrupt engine control these first. Clear DTCs and retest
Performance - No sub type module software flash Using the manufacturer approved
information Engine control module diagnostic system re-configure the engine
power supply failure control module
Engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground supply failure check the engine control module power
Engine control module supply for open circuit. Repair harness as
module as required
Performance - General module software flash Using the manufacturer approved
checksum failure Engine control module diagnostic system re-configure the engine
module as required
Performance - Supervision module software flash Using the manufacturer approved
software failure Engine control module diagnostic system re-configure the engine
module as required
Performance - Internal module software flash Using the manufacturer approved
electronic failure Engine control module diagnostic system re-configure the engine
module as required
Performance - Signal module software flash Using the manufacturer approved
calculation failure Engine control module diagnostic system re-configure the engine
module as required
compare failure Engine control module diagnostic system re-configure the engine
module as required
plausibility failure Engine control module diagnostic system re-configure the engine
module as required
incorrect after event Engine control module diagnostic system re-configure the engine
module as required
Performance - Parametric module software flash Using the manufacturer approved
Engine control module diagnostic system re-configure the engine
module as required
Performance - Performance module software flash Using the manufacturer approved
or incorrect operation Engine control module diagnostic system re-configure the engine
module as required
Performance - Unexpected module software flash Using the manufacturer approved
operation Engine control module diagnostic system re-configure the engine
module as required
9A Fuel Injector Control Corrupt engine control these first. Clear DTCs and retest
Performance - Component module software flash Using the manufacturer approved
or system operating Engine control module diagnostic system re-configure the engine
conditions power supply failure control module
module as required
P062D- Fuel Injector Driver Circuit Bank 1 injector Check for related injector DTCs. Check
00 Performance Bank 1 - No circuit(s) high injector connections to bank 1 cylinders.
sub type information resistance, short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to ground, check bank 1 injector circuits for short
short circuit to power, circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit, open circuit, high resistance. Clear DTC
disconnected and retest
Injector bank 1 failure Check and install new injector(s) as
required
P062D- Fuel Injector Driver Circuit The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Performance Bank 1 - module has detected a check the wiring harness between engine
Circuit short to ground ground measurement control module and bank 1 fuel injectors
for a period longer for short circuit to ground
detected a ground
measurement when
another value was
expected
Wiring harness failure
- Short circuit to
ground
P062D- Fuel Injector Driver Circuit The engine control Check for related injector DTCs. Check
16 Performance Bank 1 - module measured a injector connections to bank 1 cylinders.
Circuit voltage below voltage below a Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
threshold specified range but check bank 1 injector circuits for short
not necessarily a short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
circuit to ground resistance. Clear DTC and retest
Bank 1 injector Check and install new injector(s) as
circuit(s) high required
resistance, short
resistance, open
Injector bank 1 failure
P062D- Fuel Injector Driver Circuit The engine control Check for related injector DTCs. Check
Circuit voltage above voltage above a Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
not necessarily a short circuit to power. Clear DTC and retest
circuit to power Check and install new injector(s) as
Bank 1 injector required
circuit(s) short circuit
to power
P062E- Fuel Injector Driver Circuit Bank 2 injector Check for related injector DTCs. Check
00 Performance Bank 2 - No circuit(s) high injector connections to bank 2 cylinders.
sub type information resistance, short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to ground, check bank 2 injector circuits for short
short circuit to power, circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
high resistance, open open circuit, high resistance. Clear DTC
circuit, disconnected and retest
Injector bank 2 failure Check and install new injector(s) as
required
P062E- Fuel Injector Driver Circuit The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Performance Bank 2 - module has detected a check the wiring harness between engine
Circuit short to ground ground measurement control module and bank 2 fuel injectors
for a period longer for short circuit to ground
detected a ground
measurement when
another value was
expected
- Short circuit to
ground
P062E- Fuel Injector Driver Circuit The engine control Check for related injector DTCs. Check
Circuit voltage above voltage above a Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
not necessarily a short circuit to power. Clear DTC and retest
circuit to power Check and install new injector(s) as
Bank 2 injector required
circuit(s) short circuit
to power
P0633- Immobilizer Key Not Security key not Check for CAN network
00 Programmed - ECM/PCM - programmed interference/engine control module related
No sub type information errors. Re-configure the engine control
module using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Re-configure the
instrument cluster using the manufacturer
P0634- Control Module Internal Engine control module Clear DTC, wait 10 minutes and retest
1B Temperature "A" Too High internal temperature Check and install new engine control
- Circuit resistance above too high module as required
threshold Engine control module
failure
P064C- Glow Plug Control Module - Glow plug control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 No sub type information module circuit short check glow plug control module circuit for
circuit to ground, short circuit to ground, short circuit to
short circuit to power, power, open circuit, disconnected. Clear
open circuit, DTC and retest
disconnected Check and install new glow plug control
Glow plug control module as required
module failure
P064D- Internal Control Module O2 Heated oxygen sensor Check and repair related heated oxygen
00 Sensor Processor circuit short circuit to sensor DTCs. Refer to the electrical circuit
Performance - Bank 1 - No ground, short circuit diagrams and check heated oxygen sensor
sub type information to power, high for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
resistance, open power, high resistance, open circuit
circuit Check and install new heated oxygen
Heated oxygen sensor sensor as required. Clear DTC and retest
failure Check and install new engine control
failure
P064D- Internal Control Module O2 The engine control Check and repair related heated oxygen
16 Sensor Processor module measured a sensor DTCs. Refer to the electrical circuit
Performance - Bank 1 - voltage below a diagrams and check heated oxygen sensor
Circuit voltage below specified range but for short circuit to ground, high
threshold not necessarily a short resistance, open circuit
circuit to ground Check and install new heated oxygen
Heated oxygen sensor sensor as required. Clear DTC and retest
circuit short circuit to Check and install new engine control
ground, high module as required
resistance, open
circuit
failure
failure
P0658- Actuator Supply Voltage A Actuator supply circuit Using the manufacturer approved
00 Circuit Low - No sub type voltage below diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
information threshold EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
check engine control module power and
ground supplies for short circuit to
P0659- Actuator Supply Voltage A Actuator supply circuit Using the manufacturer approved
00 Circuit High - No sub type voltage above diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
information threshold EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
check engine control module power and
ground supplies for short circuit to power
P065A- Generator System Generator circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Performance - No sub type circuit to ground, high check generator circuit for short circuit to
information resistance, open ground, high resistance, open circuit.
circuit Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
Generator mechanical retest
failure Check and install new generator as
required
P065B- Generator Control Circuit The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
16 Range/Performance - module measured a check charging circuit for short circuit to
Circuit voltage below voltage below a ground, short circuit to power, open
threshold specified range but circuit. Clear DTC and repeat automated
not necessarily a short diagnostic procedure using the
circuit to ground manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Charging circuit short If DTC remains check battery is in fully
circuit to ground, charged and in a serviceable condition
short circuit to power, using the Midtronics battery tester and
open circuit battery care manual. If ok suspect the
Quiescent current high generator
Battery failure/worn Check and install new generator as
out required
Generator failure
P065B- Generator Control Circuit The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
17 Range/Performance - module measured a check generator circuit for short circuit to
Circuit voltage above voltage above a ground, high resistance, open circuit.
threshold specified range but Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
not necessarily a short retest
circuit to power Check and install new generator as
Generator circuit short required
resistance, open
circuit
Generator mechanical
failure
P0668- Control Module Internal Engine control module Check and install new engine control
00 Temperature Sensor "A" internal temperature module as required
Circuit Low - No sub type sensor failure
information
P0669- Control Module Internal Engine control module Check and install new engine control
00 Temperature Sensor "A" internal temperature module as required
Circuit High - No sub type sensor failure
information
P066A- Cylinder 1 Glow Plug The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Control Circuit Low - No module has detected a check the glow plug control circuit
sub type information ground measurement between the glow plug control module and
for a period longer the glow plug connector for short circuit to
than expected or has ground, check the power supply and
detected a ground ground connections to the glow plug
measurement when control module. Repair harness as
another value was required. Refer to relevant section of
expected workshop manual, check cylinder 1 glow
Cylinder 1 glow plug plug for internal short circuit to ground.
circuit short circuit to Replace glow plug if required. Clear DTC
ground and retest
Glow plug failure Check and install new glow plug control
Glow plug control module
module failure
P066C- Cylinder 2 Glow Plug The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground and retest
module failure
P066E- Cylinder 3 Glow Plug The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground and retest
module failure
P0671- Cylinder 1 Glow Plug Glow plug control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Circuit / Open - No sub circuit open circuit, check glow plug circuit for open circuit,
type information high resistance high resistance. Repair wiring harness as
Glow plug control required, clear DTC and retest system
connector Check glow plug connector is correctly
disconnected connected, clear DTC and retest system
Glow plug failure Check and install new glow plug as
required
required
required
required
required
required
P067A- Cylinder 4 Glow Plug The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground and retest
module failure
P067C- Cylinder 5 Glow Plug The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground and retest
module failure
P067E- Cylinder 6 Glow Plug The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
measurement when control module, ensure that the harness is
another value was checked for intermittent failures. Repair
expected harness as required. Refer to relevant
Cylinder 6 glow plug section of workshop manual, check
circuit short circuit to cylinder 6 glow plug for internal short
ground circuit to ground. Replace glow plug if
Glow plug failure required. Clear DTC and retest
Glow plug control Check and install new glow plug control
module failure module
P0683- Glow Plug Control Module This DTC is set when the data
00 to PCM Communication NOTE: - Circuit GPC - transmission on the control circuit
Circuit - No sub type between the engine control module and
information Engine control module the glow plug control module has an error.
to glow plug control Check for other related DTCs and refer to
module circuit failure the relevant DTC index. Refer to the
Glow plug control electrical circuit diagrams and check the
module failure glowplug control signal line from the
Engine control module engine control module to the glow plug
failure control module for failures such as
intermittent open circuits, high resistance,
power. Check the glowplug monitor signal
line from the glowplug control module to
the engine control module for intermittent
open circuits, high resistance, short circuit
to ground, short circuit to power
check power and ground supplies to the
glowplug control module. Repair harness
module as required
P068A- ECM/PCM Power Relay De- Vehicle battery This DTC is set when the engine
00 Energized - Too Early - No disconnected before management system high current relay
sub type information engine management contacts open early - Indicating a power
system relay has hold failure. Check the vehicle battery has
powered down not been disconnected before the engine
Engine management management system relay has powered
system high current down. Check the operation of the engine
relay failure management system high current relay.
Central junction box Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
failure check the engine management system
Harness failure - Relay high current relay supply and control
control circuit circuits for open circuits, high resistance,
power, short circuit to other circuits.
retest
Check and install new relay or central
junction box as required
P06AF- Torque Management Injection cut off Check for related engine control module
00 System - Forced Engine demand for shut off DTCs and repair these first. Clear the DTC
Shutdown - No sub type coordinator and retest
information The DTC sets when
the engine speed has
exceeded the hard
engine speed limiter.
When this DTC sets, a
request to the shut-off
coordinator is made
for a reversible shut-
off of the injection
power stages,
ensuring no injections
take place. It is reset
when engine speed
falls less than or equal
to the hard limiter
Engine run away
Excessive injected fuel
Over boost from a
turbocharger
P0700- Transmission Control MIL request by Check transmission control module for
00 System (MIL Request) - No automatic gearbox DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index.
sub type information HS CAN network, Clear DTC and retest
short circuit to power, If this DTC is logged with other HS CAN
short circuit to related DTCs refer to the electrical circuit
ground, open circuit diagrams and check HS CAN network for
P0850- Park / Neutral Switch Input Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
64 Circuit - Signal plausibility NOTE: - Circuit PNS - check the park/neutral switch circuit, for
Hardwired ground, open circuit
park/neutral switch If this DTC is logged with other HS CAN
does not match the related DTCs refer to the electrical circuit
information within the diagrams and check HS CAN network for
CAN signal short circuit to power, short circuit to
Park/neutral switch ground, open circuit
circuit, short circuit to
power, short circuit to
HS CAN network
failure
P0A09- DC/DC Converter Status The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
16 Circuit Low - Circuit module measured a check the engine control module power
voltage below threshold voltage below a supply for open circuit. Repair harness as
specified range but required. Clear DTC and retest
circuit to ground check the engine control module ground
power supply failure required. Clear DTC and retest
ground supply failure module as required
failure
P0A0F- Engine Failed to Start - No Engine control module Check for related engine control module
00 sub type information has logged an DTCs and repair these first. Clear DTC and
extended crank with retest
no engine start Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Harness failure - check the starter motor circuit for short
Starter motor circuit circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
and relays open circuit, high resistance
Vehicle battery failure Refer to the workshop manual and the
Starter motor battery care manual, inspect the vehicle
mechanical failure battery and ensure it is fully charged and
serviceable before performing further tests
Check Starter motor for mechanical
failure. Install a new starter motor as
required
P0A0F- Engine Failed to Start - Vehicle battery failure Refer to the workshop manual and the
71 Actuator stuck Jammed starter motor battery care manual, inspect the vehicle
battery and ensure it is fully charged and
Check for a jammed or damaged starter
motor. Install a new starter motor as
required
P0A10- DC/DC Converter Status The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
17 Circuit High - Circuit module measured a diagnostic system re-configure the engine
voltage above threshold voltage above a control module
circuit to power supply for open circuit. Repair harness as
failure
P0A14- Engine Mount Control A Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
13 Circuit / Open - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit AEM_1 - check the active engine mount solenoid
open control circuit for open circuit. Repair
The engine control harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
module has
determined an open
- Active engine mount
solenoid circuit
11 Circuit Low - Circuit short NOTE: - Circuit AEM_1 - check the active engine mount solenoid
to ground control circuit for short circuit to ground.
module has detected a retest
ground measurement
for a period longer
detected a ground
measurement when
another value was
expected
solenoid circuit
12 Circuit High - Circuit short NOTE: - Circuit AEM_1 - check the active engine mount solenoid
to battery control circuit for short circuit to power.
vehicle power
measurement for a
period longer than
expected or has
detected a vehicle
power measurement
when another value
was expected
solenoid circuit
P0A16- Engine Mount Control A Active engine mount Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
4B Circuit High - Over solenoid circuit short check active engine mount solenoid circuit
temperature circuit to ground, for short circuit to ground, power. Repair
short circuit to power harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
Active engine mount Check and install new engine mount
solenoid failure control vacuum solenoid as required
P0A1A- Generator Control Module - Generator to engine Check for good/clean contact at generator
00 No sub type information control module LIN and engine control module LIN circuit
circuit, open circuit connectors/pins. Refer to the electrical
Generator/engine circuit diagrams and check generator to
control module failure engine control module LIN circuit for open
circuit. Check for engine control module
hardware DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
index. Clear DTCs and repeat automated
diagnostic procedure using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Check and install new generator / engine
control module as required
P0A1A- Generator Control Module - Generator to engine Check for good/clean contact at generator
87 Missing message control module LIN and engine control module LIN circuit
circuit open circuit connectors/pins. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check generator to
engine control module LIN circuit for open
circuit. Check for engine control module
hardware DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
index. Clear DTCs and repeat automated
manufacturer approved diagnostic system
P0A3B- Generator Over Generator Check the generator wiring and connectors
00 Temperature - No sub type wiring/connectors heat for heat damage
information damaged Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Generator circuit short check generator wiring for short circuit to
circuit to ground, high ground, high resistance. Repair harness as
resistance required. Clear DTC and retest
Generator failure Check and install new generator as
required
P0A94- DC/DC Converter Using the manufacturer approved

00 Performance - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system re-configure the engine
information V_V_5V10 - V_V_5V9 - control module
V_V_5V8 - V_V_5V7 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
V_V_5V6 - V_V_5V5 - check the engine control module power
V_V_5V4 - V_V_5V3 - supply for open circuit. Repair harness as
V_V_5V2 - V_V_5V1 - required. Clear DTC and retest
Corrupt engine control check the engine control module ground
module software flash supply for open circuit. Repair harness as
power supply failure Check and install new engine control
ground supply failure
failure
P115A- Low Fuel Level - Forced Low level fuel Check the fuel level, add fuel if required.
00 Limited Power - No sub condition Clear DTC and retest
type information Fuel level sensor If there is sufficient fuel, refer to the
signal circuit - Short electrical circuit diagrams and check the
circuit to ground, fuel level sensor circuits for short, open
short circuit to power, circuit. Repair harness as required. Clear
open circuit DTC and retest
Fuel level sensor Check and install new fuel level sensor as
failure required
P115A- Low Fuel Level - Forced Low level fuel Check the fuel level, add fuel if required.
68 Limited Power - Event condition Clear DTC and retest
information Fuel level sensor If there is sufficient fuel, refer to the
signal circuit - Short electrical circuit diagrams and check the
circuit to ground, fuel level sensor circuits for short, open
short circuit to power, circuit. Repair harness as required. Clear
open circuit DTC and retest
Fuel level sensor Check and install new fuel level sensor as
failure required
P115B- Low Fuel Level - Forced Low level fuel Check the fuel level, add fuel if required.
00 Engine Shutdown - No sub condition enabling run Clear DTC and retest
type information dry strategy If there is sufficient fuel, refer to the
Fuel level sensor electrical circuit diagrams and check the
signal circuit - Short fuel level sensor circuits for short, open
circuit to ground, circuit. Repair harness as required. Clear
short circuit to power, DTC and retest
open circuit Check and install new fuel level sensor as
Fuel level sensor required
failure
P115F- Electronic Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Cooling Fan Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit EFC - check the engine control module cooling
short to ground fan circuit for short circuit to ground.
ground measurement Check and install new cooling fan as
for a period longer required
detected a ground
measurement when
another value was
expected
Harness failure -
cooling fan circuits
Cooling fan failure
short to battery fan circuit for short circuit to power.
vehicle power
measurement for a
period longer than
expected or has
detected a vehicle
power measurement
when another value
was expected
Harness failure -
open fan circuit for open circuit. Repair harness
module has Check and install new cooling fan as
determined an open required
Harness failure -
Cooling fan failure
P115F- Electronic Control Module Engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
19 Cooling Fan Circuit - Circuit cooling fan circuit check the engine control module cooling
current above threshold short circuit to ground fan circuit for short circuit to ground.
cooling fan failure or retest
obstructed Check engine control module cooling fan
for obstruction. Check and install new
engine control module cooling fan as
required
P120F- Fuel Pressure Regulator Fuel pressure Using the manufacturer approved
00 Excessive Variation - No regulator signal circuit diagnostic system check for fuel pump
sub type information short circuit to related DTCs
ground, short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
to power, open circuit check the fuel pressure regulator signal
Fuel pressure circuit for short circuit to ground, short
regulator VREF circuit circuit to power, open circuit. Repair
high resistance wiring harness as required, clear DTC and
Fuel pressure retest system
regulator failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the fuel pressure regulator VREF
circuit for high resistance. Repair wiring
system
Check and install new Fuel pressure
regulator as required
P1247- Turbocharger Boost Air intake system, low Test air intake system for air leaks and
00 Pressure Low - No sub pressure intake check exhaust system for blockages or
type information blocked or restricted restriction
Exhaust system If this DTC is logged with P00BE-00,
blocked or restricted suspect boost air recirculation solenoid
Boost air recirculation stuck open in bi-turbo mode
solenoid stuck open in If this DTC is logged with P00BC-00,
bi-turbo mode suspect boost air solenoid stuck closed in
Boost air solenoid bi-turbo mode
stuck closed in bi- If this DTC is logged with P0235-94,
turbo mode P00BD-07, P22D2-77 & P22CF-71 suspect
Turbine intake turbine intake solenoid stuck open
solenoid stuck open If this DTC is logged with P006A-00,
Air intake system, P0402-00 & P00BF-07 suspect air intake
boost air system high system, boost air system high pressure
pressure boost air leak boost air leak on bank 1
on bank 1 If this DTC is logged with P006A-00
Air intake system, suspect air intake system, boost air
boost air system high system high pressure boost air leak in bi-
pressure boost air leak turbo mode on bank 2
in bi-turbo mode on If this DTC is logged with P00BE-07 &
bank 2 P00BD-07 suspect variable geometry
Variable geometry turbocharger compressor wheel seized
turbocharger If this DTC is logged with P0235-94,
compressor wheel P00BD-07, P22D2-77 & P22CF-71 suspect
seized Air intake system, low pressure intake
blocked or restricted
P1334- EGR Throttle Position Exhaust gas Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Sensor Minimum/Maximum recirculation throttle check exhaust gas recirculation throttle
Stop Performance - No sub position sensor circuit position sensor circuit for short circuit to
type information short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, high
ground, short circuit resistance, open circuit. Repair harness as
to power, high required. Clear DTC and retest
resistance, open Check and install new exhaust gas
circuit recirculation throttle position sensor as
recirculation throttle Check and install new engine control
position sensor failure module as required
failure
P151B- Idle Speed Control - RPM Indicated torque at Using the manufacturer approved
00 Lower Than Expected - No idle < minimum diagnostic system check for additional
sub type information DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index.
Check engine oil level. Carry out cylinder
compression tests. Check for mechanical
failure of engine
P151C- Idle Speed Control - RPM Indicated torque at Using the manufacturer approved
00 Higher Than Expected - No idle > maximum diagnostic system check for additional
sub type information DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index.
Check engine oil level. Carry out cylinder
compression tests. Check for mechanical
failure of engine
32 Range/Performance - NOTE: - Circuit check the injector control circuits for
Signal low time < O_P_PVL11 - O_P_PVH11 - intermittent failures, open circuits, short
minimum circuit to power, short circuit to ground,
This DTC is set when short circuit to other circuits. Repair
the engine control harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
module detects that Refer to the workshop manual and check
the injector signal low the injector is to specification and has
time is less than the been installed correctly. Check and install
minimum value new injector as required
Injector control circuit Check and install new engine control
Injector failure
failure
35 Range/Performance - NOTE: - Circuit check the injector control circuits for
Signal high time > O_P_PVL11 - O_P_PVH11 - intermittent failures, open circuits, short
maximum circuit to power, short circuit to ground,
This DTC is set when short circuit to other circuits. Repair
the engine control harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
module detects that Refer to the workshop manual and check
the injector signal high the injector is to specification and has
time is greater than been installed correctly. Check and install
the maximum value new injector as required
Injector control circuit Check and install new engine control
Injector failure
failure
32 Range/Performance - NOTE: - Circuit check fuel injector control circuit for short
Signal low time < O_P_PVL12 - O_P_PVH12 - circuit to ground
minimum Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
This DTC is set when check fuel injector control circuit for short
the engine control to each other
module detects that
the injector signal low
time is less than the
minimum value
Harness failure - fuel
injector control circuit
short to each other
Signal high time > O_P_PVL12 - O_P_PVH12 - circuit to power
maximum Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
module detects that
the injector signal high
time is greater than
the maximum value
short to each other
module detects that
minimum value
short to each other
module detects that
the maximum value
short to each other
module detects that
minimum value
short to each other
module detects that
the maximum value
short to each other
module detects that
minimum value
short to each other
module detects that
the maximum value
short to each other
module detects that
minimum value
short to each other
module detects that
the maximum value
short to each other
P1575- Pedal Position Out Of Self Brake pedal switch - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Test Range - No sub type Circuit Brake_SW_2 - check brake pedal switch - Circuit
information Short circuit to power Brake_SW_2 - For short circuit to power
Brake pedal switch - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit Brake_SW_2 - check brake pedal switch - Circuit
Open circuit Brake_SW_2 - For open circuit
Brake switch failure Check and install new brake switch as
required
P1627- Module Supply Voltage Out Refer to the workshop manual and the
16 Of Range - Circuit voltage NOTE: - Circuit VBR1 - battery care manual, inspect the vehicle
below threshold VBR2 - battery and ensure it is fully charged and
The engine control Check the vehicle charging system
module measured a performance to ensure the voltage
voltage below a regulation is correct
specified range but Using the manufacturer approved
not necessarily a short diagnostic system check datalogger
circuit to ground signals, Control module voltage (0xF442).
Vehicle battery failure This DTC is set when the engine control
Charging system module supply voltage is below the
failure threshold value. Refer to the electrical
Engine control module circuit diagrams and check the four engine
power or ground control module power ground circuits for
supply high resistance or open circuits
Engine junction box Check the switched power supply feeds to
failure the engine control module which come
Power distribution from the engine junction box though the
failure engine management system relay. Repair
Engine control module harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
failure failure Check and install new engine control
module as required
P1627- Module Supply Voltage Out Refer to the workshop manual and the
17 Of Range - Circuit voltage NOTE: - Circuit VBR1 - battery care manual, inspect the vehicle
above threshold VBR2 - battery and ensure it is fully charged and
The engine control Check the vehicle charging system
module measured a performance to ensure the voltage
voltage above a regulation is correct
specified range but Using the manufacturer approved
not necessarily a short diagnostic system check datalogger
circuit to power signals, Control module voltage (0xF442).
Vehicle battery failure This DTC is set when the engine control
Charging system module supply voltage is greater than the
failure threshold value. Refer to the electrical
Engine control module circuit diagrams and check the four engine
power or ground control module power ground circuits for
supply high resistance or open circuits
Engine junction box Check the switched power supply feeds to
failure the engine control module which come
Power distribution from the engine junction box though the
failure engine management system relay. Repair
P162F- Starter Motor Disabled - Vehicle battery failure Refer to the workshop manual and the
00 Engine Crank Time Too Other starting related battery care manual, inspect the vehicle
Long - No sub type failures battery and ensure it is fully charged and
information serviceable before performing further tests
diagnostic system, check the engine
control module, for related DTCs and refer
to the relevant DTC index
P1631- Main Relay (power hold) - This DTC is set when the engine
00 No sub type information NOTE: - Circuit PWRSTN management system high current relay
- contacts open early - Indicating a power
hold failure. Check the vehicle battery has
Vehicle battery not been disconnected before the engine
disconnected before management system relay has powered
engine management down. Check the operation of the engine
system relay has management system high current relay
powered down Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Relay control circuit check the engine management system
failure high current relay supply and control
Engine management circuits for open circuits, high resistance,
system high current short circuit to ground, short circuit to
relay failure power, short circuit to other circuits.
Central junction box Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
failure retest
Check and install new relay as required
Check and install new central junction box
as required
P1631- Main Relay (power hold) - This DTC is set when the engine
73 Actuator stuck closed NOTE: - Circuit PWRSTN management system high current relay
- contacts are detected stuck closed by the
engine control module. Check the
Engine management operation of the engine management
system high current system high current relay. Refer to the
relay failure electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Relay control circuit engine management system high current
failure relay supply and control circuits for open
circuits, high resistance, short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, short
circuit to other circuits. Repair harness as
Check and install new relay as required
P165D- Grill Shutter "A" Control Grill shutter actuator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
01 Circuit - General electrical supply voltage falls check the grill shutter actuator circuits for
failure outside the specified short circuit to ground, short circuit to
range power, open circuit, high resistance.
Grill shutter actuator Repair harness as required
internal circuit failure Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, operate the grill shutter
Check and install new grill shutter actuator
as required
P165D- Grill Shutter "A" Control Grill shutter "A" Check all vanes within the grill shutter are
07 Circuit - Mechanical actuator has become connected to the grill shutter actuator.
failures disconnected from the Repair as required. Clear DTC and retest
grill shutter Using the manufacturer approved
Linkage between the diagnostic system, operate the grill shutter
grill shutter "A" through the full operating range and check
actuator and grill that the DTC does not reset
shutter has failed Check and install new grill shutter as
required
P165D- Grill Shutter "A" Control Grill shutter "A" Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
13 Circuit - Circuit open control circuit - Open check the grill shutter actuator control
circuit circuit for open circuit. Repair harness as
Grill shutter actuator required
internal circuit failure Check and install new grill shutter actuator
as required
P165D- Grill Shutter "A" Control The grill shutter Check the grill shutter for damage,
4B Circuit - Over temperature actuator internal obstructions and blockages. Repair as
circuits are overheated required. Clear DTC and retest
diagnostic system, operate the grill shutter
as required
P165D- Grill Shutter "A" Control The engine control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
87 Circuit - Missing message module has not check the grill shutter actuator control
received the expected circuit for open circuit, high resistance.
signal from the grill Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
shutter "A" actuator retest
Grill shutter "A" Check and install new grill shutter actuator
control circuit - Open as required
circuit
Grill shutter actuator
internal circuit failure
P165D- Grill Shutter "A" Control Grill shutter damaged, Check the grill shutter for damage,
97 Circuit - Component or obstructed or blocked obstructions and blockages. Repair as
system operation Grill shutter actuator required. Clear DTC and retest
obstructed or blocked has failed all Using the manufacturer approved
calibration attempts diagnostic system, operate the grill shutter
as required
P1695- CAN Link Injection Pump The engine control Check engine control module for DTCs and
00 Control Module/Engine module internal refer to the relevant DTC index. Clear DTC
Control Module - No sub powerstage is and retest
type information overheated Check the engine control module is
sufficiently able to be cooled
P1703- Brake Switch Out Of Self Brake switch circuit, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Test Range - No sub type short circuit to check the brake switch for short to
information ground, short circuit ground, short circuit to power, high
to power, high resistance, open circuit. Repair wiring
resistance, open harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
circuit Check and adjust brake switch as required
Brake switch incorrect Check and install new brake switch as
adjustment required
Brake switch internal
failure
P1712- Transmission Torque Unintended torque Check transmission control module for
00 Reduction Request Signal - request signal sent related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
No sub type information over CAN from index, Clear DTC and retest
transmission control
module to engine
control module. The
recognizes it is
unintended and
applies a torque limit
and sets the DTC
P1719- Engine Torque Signal - Working limitation Check engine control module for related
68 Event information information DTCs and refer to relevant DTC index
The DTC sets as a Refer to the workshop manual and check
result of an engine the cooling system is functioning correctly
torque limitation
caused by an engine
overheat situation
P2002- Diesel Particulate Filter Diesel particulate filter Using the manufacturer approved
68 Efficiency Below Threshold regeneration disabled diagnostic system, check for related DTCs
(Bank 1) - Event by other DTCs logged and refer to the relevant DTC index. Carry
information out a diesel particulate filter regeneration
00 Sensor Circuit Bank 1 NOTE: - Circuit check exhaust gas temperature sensor
Sensor 2 - No sub type CCCOT_A - post catalytic converter circuit for short
information circuit to ground
temperature sensor temperature sensor post catalytic
post catalytic converter as required
converter short circuit
to ground
Exhaust gas
temperature sensor
post catalytic
converter failure

00 Sensor Circuit Low Bank 1 NOTE: - Circuit PFIT - diagnostic system check datalogger
Sensor 2 - No sub type signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
information Harness failure - Sensor 2 Voltage (0x03C4), Exhaust Gas
Particulate filter inlet Temperature Bank 1 Sensor 2 (0x03F5).
exhaust gas This DTC is set if the particulate filter inlet
temperature sensor exhaust gas temperature sensor fails a
Particulate filter inlet diagnostic check due to the circuit voltage
exhaust gas being less than the expected value. Refer
temperature sensor to the electrical circuit diagrams and
failure check the signal circuit for open circuit,
ground, high resistance. Check the ground
circuit for open circuit, high resistance,
short circuit to power. Repair harness as
required

00 Sensor Circuit High Bank 1 NOTE: - Circuit PFIT - diagnostic system check datalogger
information Harness failure - Sensor 2 Voltage (0x03C4), Exhaust Gas
Particulate filter inlet Temperature Bank 1 Sensor 2 (0x03F5).
exhaust gas This DTC is set if the particulate filter inlet
temperature sensor exhaust gas temperature sensor fails a
Particulate filter inlet diagnostic check due to the circuit voltage
exhaust gas being greater than the expected value.
failure check the signal circuit for open circuit,
ground, high resistance. Check the ground
circuit for open circuit, high resistance,
short circuit to power. Repair harness as
required

00 Sensor Circuit NOTE: - Circuit CCCIT_B diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance Bank 1 - signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
Sensor 1 - No sub type Sensor 1 Voltage (0x03BF), Exhaust Gas
information Exhaust gas Temperature Bank 2 Sensor 1 (0x03F7)
overheating post turbocharger circuit for short circuit
Exhaust gas to ground
temperature sensor Clear DTC and retest
circuit short circuit to temperature sensor post turbocharger -
ground bank 2, sensor 1 as required
00 Sensor Circuit NOTE: - Circuit STOT - check exhaust gas temperature sensor
Range/Performance Bank 2 post turbocharger circuit for short circuit
Sensor 1 - No sub type Exhaust gas to ground, open circuit, high resistance
information temperature sensor Clear the DTC and retest
open circuit, high
resistance
Exhaust gas
temperature sensor
post turbocharger
failure
00 Sensor Circuit NOTE: - Circuit check exhaust gas temperature sensor
Range/Performance Bank 1 CCCOT_A - post catalytic converter circuit for short
Sensor 2 - No sub type circuit to ground
information Exhaust gas Clear the DTC and retest
converter overheating converter as required
Exhaust gas
temperature sensor
post catalytic
converter circuit, short
circuit to ground
Exhaust gas
temperature sensor
post catalytic
converter failure
P2121- Throttle/Pedal Position Using the manufacturer approved

1F Sensor/Switch D Circuit NOTE: - Circuit APP_1 - diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - signals, Accelerator Pedal Position D
Circuit intermittent Harness failure - (0xF449), Pedal Position Sensor Voltage -
Accelerator pedal Sensor 1 (0x0914). The accelerator pedal
position sensor circuit position sensor consists of two
Accelerator pedal potentiometer circuits feeding independent
position sensor failure pedal demand signals to the engine
control module. This DTC is set when the
engine control module detects noise on
the pedal demand 1 signal circuit. Refer to
the reference voltage and ground
connections to the accelerator pedal
position sensor. Check signal circuits for
high resistance, open circuit, short circuit
to power, short circuit to ground. Check
all accelerator pedal position sensor
circuits for intermittent failures. Repair
Check and install new accelerator pedal
position sensor as required

00 Sensor/Switch D Circuit NOTE: - Circuit APP_1 - diagnostic system check datalogger
Low - No sub type signals, Accelerator Pedal Position D
information Harness failure - (0xF449), Pedal Position Sensor Voltage -
Accelerator pedal Sensor 1 (0x0914). The Accelerator Pedal
position sensor circuit Position sensor consists of two
engine control module detects the pedal
demand 1 signal range is low. Refer to the
reference voltage and ground connections
to the accelerator pedal position sensor.
Check signal circuits for high resistance,
open circuit, short circuit to power, short
circuit to ground. Repair harness as

00 Sensor/Switch D Circuit NOTE: - Circuit APP_1 - diagnostic system check datalogger
High - No sub type signals, Accelerator Pedal Position D
information Harness failure - (0xF449), Pedal Position Sensor Voltage -
demand 1 signal range is high. Refer to
to power, short circuit to ground. Repair

1F Sensor/Switch E Circuit NOTE: - Circuit APP_2 - diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance - signals, Accelerator Pedal Position E
Circuit intermittent Harness failure - (0xF44A), Pedal Position Sensor Voltage -
engine control module detects noise on
the pedal demand 2 signal circuit. Refer to
to power, short circuit to ground. Check
all accelerator pedal position sensor
circuits for intermittent failures. Repair

00 Sensor/Switch E Circuit NOTE: - Circuit APP_2 - diagnostic system check datalogger
Low - No sub type signals, Accelerator Pedal Position E
information Harness failure - (0xF44A), Pedal Position Sensor Voltage -
demand 2 signal range is low. Refer to the
reference voltage and ground connections
to the accelerator pedal position sensor.
Check signal circuits for high resistance,
open circuits, short circuit to power, short
circuit to ground. Repair harness as

00 Sensor/Switch E Circuit NOTE: - Circuit APP_2 - diagnostic system check datalogger
High - No sub type signals, Accelerator Pedal Position E
information Harness failure - (0xF44A), Pedal Position Sensor Voltage -
demand 2 signal range is high. Refer to
high resistance, open circuits, short circuit
to power, short circuit to ground. Repair
P2138- Throttle/Pedal Position Accelerator pedal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Sensor/Switch D / E position sensor circuit check accelerator pedal position sensor 1
Voltage Correlation - No short circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short
sub type information ground, short circuit circuit to power, open circuit. Refer to the
to power, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check
Accelerator pedal accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit
position sensor failure for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
Voltage Correlation - Signal short circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short
plausibility failure ground, short circuit circuit to power, open circuit. Refer to the
Voltage Correlation - Signal short circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short
incorrect after event ground, short circuit circuit to power, open circuit. Refer to the
P213E- Fuel Injection System Fault Quantity shut-off of Check for fuel / injector related DTCs and
01 - Forced Engine Shutdown the dual-mass repair these first. Clear DTC and retest
- General electrical failure flywheel
00 Throttle Control Circuit A NOTE: - Circuit module detects a short circuit to ground
Low - No sub type TPA_POS - TPA_NEG - on the throttle motor control circuit. Refer
information to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Harness failure - check both the throttle plate actuator
Throttle motor control control circuits for short circuit to ground.
circuit Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
Throttle motor failure retest
Check and install new throttle motor
00 Throttle Control Circuit A NOTE: - Circuit module detects a short circuit to power on
High - No sub type TPA_POS - TPA_NEG - the throttle motor control circuit. Refer to
information the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Harness failure - both the Throttle Plate Actuator control
Throttle motor control circuits for short circuit to power. Repair
Throttle motor failure Check and install new throttle motor
P2177- System Too Lean Off Idle - Oxygen concentration Check for excess fuel at exhaust manifold,
00 Bank 1 - No sub type implausibly high downpipe, heated oxygen sensor
information Heated oxygen sensor Check for fuel / injector related DTCs and
circuit short circuit to repair these first. Clear DTC and retest
to power, high check heated oxygen sensor for short
resistance, open circuit to ground, high resistance, open
circuit circuit. Repair harness as required. Clear
failure Check and install new heated oxygen
sensor as required
P2178- System Too Rich Off Idle - Oxygen concentration Check for air leaks at exhaust manifold,
00 Bank 1 - No sub type implausibly low downpipe, heated oxygen sensor
information Heated oxygen sensor Check for fuel / injector related DTCs and
sensor as required
P2191- System Too Lean at Higher Oxygen concentration Check for excess fuel at exhaust manifold,
00 Load - Bank 1 - No sub implausibly high downpipe, heated oxygen sensor
type information Heated oxygen sensor Check for fuel / injector related DTCs and
sensor as required
P2192- System Too Rich at Higher Oxygen concentration Check for air leaks at exhaust manifold,
00 Load - Bank 1 - No sub implausibly low downpipe, heated oxygen sensor
type information Heated oxygen sensor Check for fuel / injector related DTCs and
sensor as required
P2195- O2 Sensor Signal Air leak at exhaust Check for fuel / injector related DTCs and
00 biased/Stuck Lean - Bank manifold, downpipe, repair these first. Clear DTC and retest
1, Sensor 1 - No sub type heated oxygen sensor Check for air leaks at exhaust manifold,
information bank 1 downpipe, heated oxygen sensor
circuit short circuit to check heated oxygen sensor for short
ground, short circuit circuit to ground, high resistance, open
to power, high circuit. Repair harness as required. Clear
failure
P2196- O2 Sensor Signal Fuel injection system Check for fuel / injector related DTCs and
00 biased/Stuck Rich - Bank failure repair these first. Clear DTC and retest
1, Sensor 1 - No sub type Heated oxygen sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
information circuit short circuit to check heated oxygen sensor for short
ground, short circuit circuit to ground, high resistance, open
to power, high circuit. Repair harness as required. Clear
failure
P2226- Barometric Pressure Differential pressure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
62 Sensor A Circuit - Signal sensor circuit short check differential pressure sensor circuit
compare failure circuit to ground, for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
short circuit to power, power, open circuit, high resistance
open circuit, high Check the engine control module is clean
resistance and dry
Differential pressure Check the engine control module is not
sensor failure sealed by any non approved covering
The engine control Clear DTC and retest
module has been Check and install new differential pressure
submersed in water or sensor as required
mud Check and install new engine control
The engine control module as required
module has been
sealed in a non
approved covering
Differential pressure
sensor failure
failure
P2228- Barometric Pressure Corrupt engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 Sensor A Circuit Low - No module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the engine
Engine control module check engine control module power supply
ground supply failure circuits for open circuit. Repair harness as
check engine control module ground
supply circuits for open circuit. Repair
module as required
P2229- Barometric Pressure Corrupt engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 Sensor A Circuit High - No module software flash diagnostic system re-configure the engine
Engine control module check engine control module power supply
ground supply failure circuits for open circuit. Repair harness as
check engine control module ground
supply circuits for open circuit. Repair
module as required
P2238- O2 Sensor Positive Current Heated oxygen sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Control Circuit Low - Bank positive current check heated oxygen sensor for short
1, Sensor 1 - No sub type control circuit short circuit to ground, high resistance, open
information circuit to ground, high circuit. Repair harness as required. Clear
failure
P2245- O2 Sensor Reference This DTC is set if the engine control

00 Voltage Circuit Low - Bank NOTE: - Circuit LPV_A - module detects the bank 1, heated oxygen
1, Sensor 1 - No sub type sensor 1 reference voltage is lower than
information Harness failure - expected. Refer to the electrical circuit
Heated oxygen sensor diagrams and check the heated oxygen
circuit sensor circuits for open circuits, high
Oxygen sensor failure resistance, short circuit to ground. Repair
sensor as required
P2246- O2 Sensor Reference This DTC is set if the engine control

00 Voltage Circuit High - Bank NOTE: - Circuit LPV_A - module detects the bank 1, heated oxygen
1, Sensor 1 - No sub type sensor 1 reference voltage is greater than
information Harness failure - expected. Refer to the electrical circuit
Heated oxygen sensor diagrams and check the heated oxygen
circuit sensor circuits for open circuits, high
Oxygen sensor failure resistance, short circuit to power. Repair
sensor as required
P2261- Turbocharger/Supercharger Boost air recirculation This DTC is set when the engine control
73 Bypass Valve "A" - solenoid stuck shut module detects that the turbocharger
Mechanical - Actuator during transition from bypass valve is not operating. Refer to the
stuck closed mono turbo to bi- workshop manual and inspect the boost
turbo mode air recirculation solenoid for sticking shut
during transition from mono turbo to bi-
turbo mode
P2263- Turbocharger/Supercharger The engine control Check induction system for leaks,
21 Boost System Performance module measured a blockages
- Signal amplitude < signal voltage below a Check boost air system for leaks,
minimum specified range but blockages. Check for related DTCs
circuit to ground, gain check manifold absolute pressure sensor
low circuit for short circuit to power, ground,
Induction system air open circuit. Repair harness as required
leak or blockage Check and install new manifold absolute
Boost air system leak pressure sensor as required
or blockage Check turbocharger rod connection and oil
Manifold absolute seals
pressure sensor circuit Check and install new variable geometry
short circuit to power, turbocharger actuator as required. Check
ground, open circuit install new turbocharger as required
Manifold absolute
pressure sensor failure
Variable geometry
turbocharger actuator
A sticking, failure
Turbocharger A failure
P2263- Turbocharger/Supercharger The engine control Check induction system for leaks,
22 Boost System Performance module measured a blockages
- Signal amplitude > signal voltage above a Check boost air system for leaks,
maximum specified range but blockages. Check for related DTCs
not necessarily a short Using the manufacturer approved
circuit to power, gain diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
too high EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
Induction system air Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
leak or blockage check manifold absolute pressure sensor
Boost air system leak circuit for short circuit to power, ground,
or blockage open circuit. Repair harness as required
pressure sensor circuit pressure sensor as required
short circuit to power, Check turbocharger rod connection and oil
ground, open circuit seals
Manifold absolute Check and install new variable geometry
pressure sensor failure turbocharger actuator as required. Check
Variable geometry install new turbocharger as required
turbocharger actuator
A sticking, failure
Turbocharger A failure
P2264- Water in Fuel Sensor This DTC is set if the engine control
00 Circuit - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit WIF - module receives information indicating an
information implausible fuel level. Refer to the
Fuel supply workshop manual and check the fuel
incorrect/contaminated system to ensure there is an adequate
Harness failure - fuel level in the tank and the system is not
Water in fuel sensor leaking fuel or suffering from air ingress.
circuit Check the fuel for contamination by other
Water in fuel sensor fluids (petrol or water etc)
failure Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and
Central junction box check the water in fuel sensor signal
power distribution circuit between the sensor and the engine
failure control module for high resistance, open
circuit, short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, intermittent failures.
Repair harness as required
Check and install new water in fuel sensor
Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and
check the water in fuel sensor power
supply from the central junction box for
to ground. Check the water in fuel sensor
ground supply circuit for high resistance,
open circuit, short circuit to power. Check
the voltage supply from the central
junction box, check and replace fuses as
required. Replace central junction box if
there is no voltage supply to the water in
fuel sensor
P2269- Water in Fuel Condition - Water in fuel Drain water from fuel filter housing. Clear
68 Event information Water in fuel sensor DTC and wait 30 seconds and re-check
circuit short circuit to DTC has cleared
power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Water in fuel sensor check water in fuel sensor circuit for short
failure circuit to power, open circuit. Repair
harness as required
Check and install new water in fuel sensor
as required
P226B- Turbocharger/Supercharger Error path indicating Check for turbocharging related DTCs and
00 Boost Pressure Too High - whether over boost repair these first. Clear DTC and retest
Mechanical - No sub type shut down is active or
information not
This DTC is set when
overboost shut down
is active. This means
that the vehicle has
lost control of boost.
The engine is shut
down as a safety
precaution. The engine
control module checks
for an overboost by
system monitoring and
also monitors vehicle
acceleration, if in gear
and engine
acceleration at idle, if
in neutral
P228C- "Fuel Pressure Fuel pressure control Check fuel pressure control valve for fuel
00 Regulator 1 valve, fuel leak from leakage from the high pressure side
Exceeded Control the high pressure side Check for fuel injector stuck open /
Limits - Pressure Fuel injector stuck leaking
Too Low" - No sub open / leaking Check for blocked fuel filter
type information Blocked fuel filter Check for low pressure fuel pipe leakage
Low pressure fuel pipe from the fuel tank fuel pump
leaking from the fuel Using the manufacturer approved
tank fuel pump diagnostic system check datalogger
Fuel supply system signals, Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
failure (0x0324), Fuel Rail Pressure (0xF423).
Harness failure - Fuel Check for related fuel system DTCs and
rail pressure sensor A refer to the relevant DTC index
circuit high resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Fuel rail pressure check fuel pump circuit for high
sensor A failure resistance. Check fuel rail pressure sensor
Fuel lift pump failure A circuit for high resistance
sensor A as required
Check and install new fuel lift pump as
required
P2297- O2 Sensor Out of Range Heated oxygen sensor Check for fuel / injector related DTCs and
00 During Deceleration Bank circuit short circuit to repair these first. Clear DTC and retest.
1, Sensor 1 - No sub type ground, short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
information to power, high check heated oxygen sensor for short
sensor as required
P2299- Brake Pedal Brake pedal switch - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
68 Position/Accelerator Pedal Circuit Brake_SW_1 - check brake pedal switch - Circuit
Position Incompatible - Short circuit to Brake_SW_1 - For short circuit to ground,
Event information ground, open circuit open circuit. Repair harness as required.
Brake pedal switch - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit Brake_SW_2 - check brake pedal switch - Circuit
Short circuit to ground Brake_SW_2 - For short circuit to ground
Brake pedal switch Repair wiring harness as required, clear
incorrect adjustment DTC. Start the engine press the brake
Brake pedal switch pedal, using maximum travel for greater
failure than 1 second taking care not to press the
Brake pedal pressed accelerator pedal. Check the system is
by driver at same time operating correctly and the DTC does not
as accelerator pedal return
pressed Check and adjust brake switch as required
Check and install new brake pedal switch
as required
P22C5- Turbocharger Compressor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

11 Outlet Valve Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit CSOV - check the turbocharger boost air solenoid
/ Open - Circuit short to circuit between the engine control module
ground The engine control and the control valve for a short circuit to
module has detected a ground. Check power supply to the control
ground measurement valve. Repair harness as required. Clear
for a period longer DTC and retest
detected a ground
measurement when
another value was
expected
Harness failure -
Turbocharger boost air
solenoid circuit short
circuit to ground

/ Open - Circuit short to circuit between the engine control module
battery The engine control and the control valve for a short circuit to
module has detected a power. Check power supply to the control
vehicle power valve. Repair harness as required. Clear
measurement for a DTC and retest
period longer than Check and install new turbocharger boost
expected or has air solenoid as required
detected a vehicle
power measurement
when another value
was expected
Harness failure -
circuit to power
solenoid failure

/ Open - Circuit open circuit between the engine control module
The engine control and the control valve for open circuit.
module has Check power supply to the control valve.
determined an open Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
circuit via lack of bias retest
voltage, low current Check and install new turbocharger boost
flow, no change in the air solenoid as required
Harness failure -
solenoid circuit open
circuit
solenoid failure
P22C5- Turbocharger Compressor Harness failure - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
4B Outlet Valve Control Circuit Turbocharger boost air check the turbocharger boost air solenoid
/ Open - Over temperature solenoid circuit open circuit between the engine control module
circuit and the control valve for open circuit.
Turbocharger boost air Check power supply to the control valve.
solenoid failure Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
retest
Check and install new turbocharger boost
air solenoid as required. Check and install
new turbocharger boost air solenoid as
required
P22CF- Turbocharger Turbine Inlet Using the manufacturer approved

00 Valve Control Circuit / NOTE: - Circuit TSOV - diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - No sub type signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
information Harness failure - Position - Commanded (0x03F0). Refer to
Turbine intake the electrical circuit diagrams and check
solenoid circuit open the turbine intake solenoid circuit between
circuit the engine control module and the control
Turbine intake valve for open circuit. Check power supply
solenoid failure to the control valve. Repair harness as
Check and install new turbine intake
solenoid as required

16 Valve Control Circuit / NOTE: - Circuit TSOV - diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - Circuit voltage signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
below threshold The engine control Position - Commanded (0x03F0). Refer to
module measured a the electrical circuit diagrams and check
voltage below a the turbine intake solenoid circuit between
specified range but the engine control module and the control
not necessarily a short valve for a high resistance, intermittent
circuit to ground open circuit, short circuit to ground.
Harness failure - Check power supply to the control valve.
Turbine intake Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
solenoid circuit failure retest
Turbine intake Check and install new turbine intake
solenoid failure solenoid as required
P22CF- Turbocharger Turbine Inlet Harness failure - Using the manufacturer approved
19 Valve Control Circuit / Turbine intake diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - Circuit current solenoid circuit failure signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
above threshold Turbine intake Position - Commanded (0x03F0). Refer to
solenoid failure the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the turbine intake valve control circuit for
short circuit to ground. Check power
supply to the solenoid. Repair harness as

1D Valve Control Circuit / NOTE: - Circuit TSOV - diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - Circuit current out signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
of range Harness failure - Position - Commanded (0x03F0). Refer to
solenoid circuit failure the turbine intake solenoid control circuit
Turbine intake for short circuit to ground. Check power
solenoid failure supply to the solenoid. Repair harness as
P22CF- Turbocharger Turbine Inlet Harness failure - Using the manufacturer approved
4B Valve Control Circuit / Turbine intake diagnostic system check datalogger
Open - Over temperature solenoid circuit failure signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
Turbine intake Position - Commanded (0x03F0). Refer to
solenoid failure the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the turbine intake valve control circuit for
short circuit to ground. Check power
supply to the solenoid. Repair harness as
P22CF- Turbocharger Turbine Inlet Turbine intake If this DTC is logged with P22D3-77 &
71 Valve Control Circuit / solenoid sticking P00BC-00 suspect, turbine intake solenoid
Open - Actuator stuck closed sticking closed
solenoid sticking open P00BD-07, P22D2-77 & P1247-00 suspect,
Intake air system, turbine intake solenoid sticking open
blocked low pressure If this DTC is logged with P00BD-07,
air intake. This failure P22D2-77, P1247-00 & P0235-94 suspect,
mode can be caused intake air system, blocked low pressure air
by snow packing in intake
the intake system. Using the manufacturer approved
Symptoms often diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
disappear after the EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
vehicle has been
warmed and heat
soaked. Similar
symptoms to seized
primary turbo
P22D0- Turbocharger Turbine Inlet Using the manufacturer approved

00 Valve Control Circuit Low - NOTE: - Circuit TSOV - diagnostic system check datalogger
No sub type information signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
Harness failure - Position - Commanded (0x03F0). Refer to
solenoid circuit failure the turbine intake solenoid control circuit
Turbine intake for short circuit to ground. Check power
solenoid failure supply to the solenoid. Repair harness as

Circuit short to ground signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
The engine control Position - Commanded (0x03F0). Refer to
module has detected a the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground measurement the turbine intake solenoid control circuit
for a period longer on bank 2 for short circuit to ground.
than expected or has Check power supply to the solenoid.
detected a ground Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
measurement when retest
another value was Check and install new turbine intake
expected solenoid as required
Harness failure -
Turbine intake
solenoid bank 2 circuit
Turbine intake
solenoid failure

Circuit short to battery signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
The engine control Position - Commanded (0x03F0). Refer to
module has detected a the electrical circuit diagrams and check
vehicle power the turbine intake solenoid control circuit
measurement for a on bank 2 for short circuit to power.
period longer than Check power supply to the solenoid.
expected or has Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
detected a vehicle retest
power measurement Check and install new turbine intake
when another value solenoid as required
was expected
Harness failure -
Turbine intake
solenoid bank 2 circuit
Turbine intake
solenoid failure

00 Valve Control Circuit High NOTE: - Circuit TSOV - diagnostic system check datalogger
- No sub type information signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
Harness failure - Position - Commanded (0x03F0). Refer to
solenoid circuit short the turbine intake solenoid control circuit
circuit to power for short circuit to power. Check power
Turbine intake supply to the solenoid. Repair harness as
solenoid failure required. Clear DTC and retest
P22D2- Turbocharger Turbine Inlet Turbine intake Using the manufacturer approved
77 Valve Stuck Open - solenoid sticking open diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
Commanded position not Blocked low pressure EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
reachable air intake Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system check datalogger
signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
Position - Commanded (0x03F0) and
Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening Position -
Measured (0x03F1). Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the turbine
intake solenoid control circuit for short
circuit to power. Check power supply to
the solenoid. Repair harness as required.
If this DTC is logged with P0235-94,
P00BD-07, P1247-00 & P22CF-71, suspect
turbine intake solenoid sticking open
If this DTC is logged with P1247-00,
P0235-94, P00BD-07, & P22CF-71, suspect
blocked low pressure air intake
P22D3- Turbocharger Turbine Inlet Turbine intake Using the manufacturer approved
77 Valve Stuck Closed - solenoid sticking diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
Commanded position not closed EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
reachable Using the manufacturer approved
signals, Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening
Position - Commanded (0x03F0) and
Turbo Shut Off Valve Opening Position -
Measured (0x03F1). Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the turbine
intake solenoid control circuit for short
circuit to power. Check power supply to
the solenoid. Repair harness as required.
If this DTC is logged with P00BC-00, &
P22CF-71, suspect turbine intake solenoid
sticking closed

13 Valve Position Sensor NOTE: - Circuit TSVP - diagnostic system perform the (Turbo,
Circuit - Circuit open EGR and air path dynamic test) routine
module has check turbine intake valve position sensor
determined an open circuit for open circuit, high resistance.
circuit via lack of bias Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
voltage, low current retest
Turbine intake valve
open circuit, high
resistance
P22D4- Turbocharger Turbine Inlet Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
16 Valve Position Sensor NOTE: - Circuit TSVP - check turbine intake valve position sensor
Circuit - Circuit voltage circuit short circuit to ground. Repair
below threshold The engine control harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
module measured a
voltage below a
specified range but
circuit to ground
Circuit - Circuit voltage circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
above threshold - Actuator The engine control harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
stuck module measured a Check and install new turbine intake valve
voltage above a position sensor as required
specified range but
circuit to power
This is the long term
adaption limit
diagnostic. It
diagnoses that the
adapted values for the
actuator end stops is
outside of tolerance.
This could be caused
by sensor drift over
time
position sensor stuck
P22D4- Turbocharger Turbine Inlet This is the long term Check and install new turbine intake valve
71 Valve Position Sensor adaption limit position sensor as required
Circuit - Actuator stuck diagnostic. It
diagnoses that the
time
Circuit - Performance or diagnostic. It
incorrect operation diagnoses that the
time
Circuit Range/Performance diagnostic. It
- Performance or incorrect diagnoses that the
operation adapted values for the
time
Circuit Low - Circuit short circuit for short circuit to ground. Repair
to ground The engine control harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
ground measurement
for a period longer
detected a ground
measurement when
another value was
expected
Circuit High - Circuit short circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
to battery The engine control harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
vehicle power
measurement for a
period longer than
expected or has
detected a vehicle
power measurement
when another value
was expected
P242A- Exhaust Gas Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor Circuit Bank 1 NOTE: - Circuit PFOT - diagnostic system check datalogger
information Harness failure - Sensor 3 (0x03C8), Exhaust Gas
Exhaust gas Temperature Bank 1 Sensor 3 Voltage
temperature sensor (0x03F6). This DTC is set if the exhaust
post DPF gas temperature sensor post DPF fails a
Exhaust gas cold start diagnostic check by the engine
temperature sensor control module. Refer to the electrical
post DPF failure circuit diagrams and check the exhaust
gas temperature sensor post DPF signal
circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
Check the sensor ground circuit for open
circuit, short circuit to power, high
resistance. Repair harness as required
temperature sensor post DPF as required
P242B- Exhaust Gas Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor Circuit NOTE: - Circuit PFOT - diagnostic system check datalogger
Range/Performance Bank 1 signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
Sensor 3 - No sub type Exhaust gas Sensor 3 (0x03C8), Exhaust Gas
information temperature sensor Temperature Bank 1 Sensor 3 Voltage
post DPF overheating (0x03F6). This DTC is set if the exhaust
Harness failure - gas temperature sensor post DPF fails a
Exhaust gas cold start diagnostic check by the engine
temperature sensor control module. Refer to the electrical
post DPF circuit diagrams and check the exhaust
Exhaust gas gas temperature sensor post DPF signal
temperature sensor circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
post DPF failure ground, short circuit to other circuits.
P242C- Exhaust Gas Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor Circuit Low Bank 1 NOTE: - Circuit PFOT - diagnostic system check datalogger
information Harness failure - Sensor 3 (0x03C8), Exhaust Gas
Exhaust gas Temperature Bank 1 Sensor 3 Voltage
temperature sensor (0x03F6). This DTC is set if the exhaust
post DPF gas temperature sensor post DPF signal
Exhaust gas voltage is less than the engine control
temperature sensor module was expecting. Refer to the
post DPF failure electrical circuit diagrams and check the
exhaust gas temperature sensor post DPF
signal circuit for open circuit, short circuit
to ground, short circuit to other circuits.
P242D- Exhaust Gas Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor Circuit High Bank 1 NOTE: - Circuit PFOT - diagnostic system check datalogger
information Exhaust gas Sensor 3 (0x03C8), Exhaust Gas
temperature sensor Temperature Bank 1 Sensor 3 Voltage
post DPF circuit, short (0x03F6)
circuit to power, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit check the exhaust gas temperature sensor
Exhaust gas post DPF circuit, for short circuit to power,
temperature sensor open circuit
post DPF failure Check and install new exhaust gas
P242F- Diesel Particulate Filter Maximum ash load

00 Restriction - Ash NOTE: The setting value of this DTC is
Accumulation (Bank 1) - inhibited
No sub type information
Contact dealer technical support
P244A- Diesel Particulate Filter Diagnostic failure Using the manufacturer approved
00 Differential Pressure Too check for minimum diagnostic system, check for related DTCs
Low(Bank 1) - No sub type pressure differential and refer to the relevant DTC index
information characteristics Clear DTC and re-test
Diesel particulate filter Check and install new diesel particulate
internal components filter as required
are missing or
destroyed
P244A- Diesel Particulate Filter Destroyed particulate Refer to the relevant pinpoint test in
96 Differential Pressure Too filter section 309-00
Low(Bank 1) - Component
internal failure
P244B- Diesel Particulate Filter Engine protection back
68 Differential Pressure Too pressure high NOTE: This DTC when logged on its own is
High (Bank 1) - Event Sudden increases in advisory only and no further action should be
information differential pressure taken
across the diesel
particulate filter Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, check for related DTCs.
If this DTC exists with any other diesel
particulate filter differential pressure
sensor DTCs, follow the advise given for
that DTC
P244E- Exhaust Temperature Too Error path for not Using the manufacturer approved
00 Low For Particulate Filter reaching the setpoint diagnostic system check for related DTCs
Regeneration, Bank 2 - No of the inner loop with and refer to the relevant DTC index. Clear
sub type information maximal control DTC and re-test. This DTC has been
variable calibrated not to flag
P244F- Exhaust Temperature Too Error path for not Using the manufacturer approved
00 High For Particulate Filter reaching the setpoint diagnostic system check for related DTCs
Regeneration, Bank 2 - No of the inner loop with and refer to the relevant DTC index. Clear
sub type information minimal control DTC and re-test. This DTC has been
variable calibrated not to flag
P2452- Diesel Particulate Filter Differential pressure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
23 Pressure Sensor A Circuit - sensor circuit, short check the differential pressure sensor
Signal stuck low circuit to ground circuit, for short circuit to ground
Diesel differential Using the manufacturer approved
pressure sensor A diagnostic system, check for related DTCs
circuit, hose line error and refer to the relevant DTC index
P2452- Diesel Particulate Filter Diagnostic failure Using the manufacturer approved
29 Pressure Sensor A Circuit - check for frozen diagnostic system check for related DTCs
Signal invalid differential pressure and refer to the relevant DTC index
sensor
P2452- Diesel Particulate Filter

95 Pressure Sensor A Circuit - NOTE: In cold climates NOTE: If a new diesel particulate filter
Incorrect assembly differential pressure sensor pressure sensor or hose lines have been installed
hose lines or metal pipes or incorrectly routed, or any pressure sensor
may be frozen circuit repairs carried out, the engine control
module must learn and store the new diesel
Differential pressure particulate filter pressure sensor offset value. The
sensor hoses following conditions must be met to allow the
connected incorrectly diesel particulate filter pressure sensor offset
Differential pressure value to be learnt and stored: Using the
sensor hoses crushed, manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
blocked, split DTCs from engine control module, then monitor
the datalogger signal 'sump oil temperature -
measured' ensuring a minimum of 50 degrees C
is achieved. Start engine, run above 500RPM for
2 minutes, then a further 30 seconds at idle.
Ensure the engine cooling fan is not running. Set
vehicle in park and set ignition status to off. Wait
30 seconds for the engine control module to
power down, learn and store diesel particulate
filter pressure sensor offset value. This process
must be carried out six times, to allow a large
negative offset value to adapt back to 0 Hpa

signals, Particulate Filter Differential
Pressure Sensor Voltage - Bank 1
(0x03DB). Refer to the workshop manual
and check differential pressure sensor
hoses are installed correctly
Check differential pressure sensor hoses
for crushed, blockage, split

00 Pressure Sensor A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit DPS - NOTE: If a new diesel particulate filter
Range/Performance - No pressure sensor or hose lines have been installed
sub type information Harness failure - or incorrectly routed, or any pressure sensor
Differential pressure circuit repairs carried out, the engine control
sensor module must learn and store the new diesel
sensor failure following conditions must be met to allow the
diesel particulate filter pressure sensor offset
value to be learnt and stored: Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
DTCs from engine control module, then monitor

(0x03DB). This DTC is set when the
particulate pressure sensor fails a
plausibility check. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the differential
pressure sensor signal circuit for open
circuit to other circuits. Check the sensor
ground circuit for open circuit, short circuit
to power, high resistance. Check the
sensor power supply circuit for open
circuit, short circuit to ground, high
Check and install new differential pressure
sensor as required
P2453- Diesel Particulate Filter Using the manufacturer approved

16 Pressure Sensor A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit DPS - diagnostic system check for related DTCs
Range/Performance - and refer to the relevant DTC index
Circuit voltage below Diagnostic failure Using the manufacturer approved
threshold check for signal range diagnostic system check datalogger
check low in flow signals, Particulate Filter Differential
resistance Pressure Sensor Voltage - Bank 1
Harness failure - (0x03DB). This DTC is set when the
Differential pressure particulate pressure sensor fails a
sensor plausibility check. Refer to the electrical
Differential pressure circuit diagrams and check the differential
sensor failure pressure sensor signal circuit for open
sensor as required
P2453- Diesel Particulate Filter Using the manufacturer approved

17 Pressure Sensor A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit DPS - diagnostic system check for related DTCs
Range/Performance - and refer to the relevant DTC index
Circuit voltage above Diagnostic failure Using the manufacturer approved
threshold check for signal range diagnostic system check datalogger
check high in flow signals, Particulate Filter Differential
resistance Pressure Sensor Voltage - Bank 1
Harness failure - (0x03DB). This DTC is set when the
Differential pressure particulate pressure sensor fails a
sensor plausibility check. Refer to the electrical
Differential pressure circuit diagrams and check the differential
sensor failure pressure sensor signal circuit for open
sensor as required

Low - No sub type pressure sensor or hose lines have been installed
information Harness failure - or incorrectly routed, or any pressure sensor
sensor crossed hose following conditions must be met to allow the
lines diesel particulate filter pressure sensor offset
Differential pressure value to be learnt and stored: Using the
sensor failure manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
is achieved. Start engine, run above 500rpm for

particulate pressure sensor voltage is less
than the threshold set in the engine
control module diagnostic check. Refer to
the differential pressure sensor signal
resistance. Check the sensor power supply
ground, high resistance. Repair harness as
required
Check differential pressure sensor hose
lines are installed correctly
sensor as required

High - No sub type pressure sensor or hose lines have been installed
information Harness failure - or incorrectly routed, or any pressure sensor
sensor failure following conditions must be met to allow the
Exhaust back pressure diesel particulate filter pressure sensor offset
is too high value to be learnt and stored: Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear

diagnostic system, check engine control
module, for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
particulate pressure sensor voltage is
greater than the threshold set in the
engine control module diagnostic check.
check the differential pressure sensor
signal circuit for open circuit, short circuit
to power, short circuit to other circuits.
resistance. Check the sensor power supply
ground, high resistance. Repair harness as
required
sensor as required
P2456- Diesel Particulate Filter Differential pressure

00 Pressure Sensor A Circuit sensor circuit short NOTE: If a new diesel particulate filter
Intermittent/Erratic - No circuit to ground, pressure sensor or hose lines have been installed
sub type information short circuit to power, or incorrectly routed, or any pressure sensor
open circuit, high circuit repairs carried out, the engine control
resistance module must learn and store the new diesel
In cold climate or off particulate filter pressure sensor offset value. The
road driving following conditions must be met to allow the
differential pressure diesel particulate filter pressure sensor offset
sensor hoses crushed, value to be learnt and stored: Using the
blocked, split manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
Differential pressure DTCs from engine control module, then monitor
sensor failure the datalogger signal 'sump oil temperature -

check differential pressure sensor circuit
for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
Inspect connectors for signs of water
ingress, and pins for damage and/or
corrosion
Check differential pressure sensor hoses
for crushed, blocked, split
Check and replace diesel particulate filter
differential pressure sensor as required
P2458- Diesel Particulate Filter Permanent

66 Regeneration Duration regeneration NOTE: This code is enabled for JLR
(Bank 1) - Signal has too engineering detailed diagnostics only. No further
many transitions / events action should be taken

diagnostic system, check for related DTCs
and refer to the relevant DTC index
P2459- Diesel Particulate Filter Blocked regeneration

65 Regeneration Frequency Customer driving NOTE: If DTC is P2459-65 or AMBER DPF
(Bank 1) - Signal has too routine does not allow FULL REFER TO HANDBOOK message is displayed
few transitions / events the system to clean with no other reported messages. No repair is
the particulate filter required, if the vehicle is driven on a highway AS
DIRECTED IN THE HANDBOOK then the light will
be extinguished and the system self healed,
nothing more than this is required
Refer to the diesel particulate filter

regeneration procedure and carry out a
diesel particulate filter regeneration
Advise customer of driving routine
required to regenerate diesel particulate
filter as stated in the vehicle handbook
P2459- Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration
66 Regeneration Frequency frequency NOTE: This code is enabled for JLR
(Bank 1) - Signal has too engineering detailed diagnostics only. No further
many transitions / events action should be taken

diagnostic system, check for related DTCs
and refer to the relevant DTC index

11 Cooler Bypass Control NOTE: - Circuit EGRCBV diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit - Circuit short to - signals, EGR Cooler Bypass Valve Duty
ground Cycle (0x03C5). Refer to the electrical
The engine control circuit diagrams and check the exhaust
module has detected a gas recirculation bypass solenoid circuit
ground measurement for short circuit to ground. Check power
for a period longer supply to the solenoid. Repair harness as
than expected or has required. Clear DTC and retest
detected a ground
measurement when
another value was
expected
Harness failure -
Exhaust gas
recirculation bypass
circuit to ground

Circuit - Circuit short to - signals, EGR Cooler Bypass Valve Duty
battery Cycle (0x03C5). Refer to the electrical
module has detected a gas recirculation bypass solenoid circuit
vehicle power for short circuit to power. Check power
measurement for a supply to the solenoid. Repair harness as
period longer than required. Clear DTC and retest
expected or has Check and install new exhaust gas
detected a vehicle recirculation bypass solenoid as required
power measurement
when another value
was expected
Harness failure -
Exhaust gas
circuit to power
Exhaust gas
solenoid failure

Circuit - Circuit open - signals, EGR Cooler Bypass Valve Duty
Cycle (0x03C5). Refer to the electrical
module has gas recirculation bypass solenoid circuit
determined an open for open circuit. Check power supply to
circuit via lack of bias the solenoid. Repair harness as required.
voltage, low current Clear DTC and retest
flow, no change in the Check and install new exhaust gas
state of an input in recirculation bypass solenoid as required
Harness failure -
Exhaust gas
solenoid circuit open
circuit
Exhaust gas
solenoid failure
P245B- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Harness failure - Using the manufacturer approved
19 Cooler Bypass Control Exhaust gas diagnostic system check datalogger
Circuit Range/Performance recirculation bypass signals, EGR Cooler Bypass Valve Duty
- Circuit current above solenoid circuit short Cycle (0x03C5). Refer to the electrical
threshold circuit to ground, high circuit diagrams and check the exhaust
resistance gas recirculation bypass solenoid circuit
Exhaust gas for short circuit to ground, high
recirculation bypass resistance. Repair harness as required.
solenoid failure Clear DTC and retest
recirculation bypass solenoid as required
P2463- Diesel Particulate Filter Maximum soot mass Refer to the relevant pinpoint test in
00 Restriction - Soot section 309-00
Accumulation (Bank 1) -
No sub type information
P246C- Diesel Particulate Filter Diagnostic failure Using the manufacturer approved
00 Restriction - Forced Limited check for maximum diagnostic system check for related DTCs
Power (Bank 1) - No sub pressure differential and refer to the relevant DTC index
type information characteristics
P250A- Engine Oil Level Sensor Using the manufacturer approved

36 Circuit - Signal frequency NOTE: - Circuit OTL - diagnostic system check datalogger
too low signals, Engine Oil Level - Measured
The engine control (0x03E6), Engine Oil Volume - Calculated
module detected (0x03F2), Sump Oil Temperature -
excessive duration for Measured (0x03F3). Refer to the electrical
one cycle of the circuit diagrams and check the oil level
output across a and temperature sensor circuit for short
specified sample size circuit to ground, high resistance, open
Oil level and circuit. Repair harness as required. Clear
temperature sensor DTC and retest
circuit short circuit to Check and install new oil level and
ground, high temperature sensor as required
resistance, open
circuit
Oil level and
temperature sensor
failure

too high signals, Engine Oil Level - Measured
The engine control (0x03E6), Engine Oil Volume - Calculated
module detected (0x03F2), Sump Oil Temperature -
insufficient duration Measured (0x03F3). Refer to the electrical
for one cycle of the circuit diagrams and check the oil level
output across a and temperature sensor circuit for short
specified sample size circuit to power. Repair harness as
Oil level and required. Clear DTC and retest
temperature sensor Check and install new oil level and
circuit short circuit to temperature sensor as required
power
Oil level and
temperature sensor
failure

incorrect signals, Engine Oil Level - Measured
Oil level and (0x03E6), Engine Oil Volume - Calculated
temperature sensor (0x03F2), Sump Oil Temperature -
circuit short circuit to Measured (0x03F3). Refer to the electrical
ground, short circuit circuit diagrams and check the oil level
to power, high and temperature sensor circuit for short
resistance, open circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
circuit high resistance, open circuit. Repair
Oil level and harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
temperature sensor Check and install new oil level and
P250A- Engine Oil Level Sensor Oil level and Using the manufacturer approved
47 Circuit - Watchdog / safety temperature sensor diagnostic system check datalogger
micro controller failure circuit short circuit to signals, Engine Oil Level - Measured
ground, short circuit (0x03E6), Engine Oil Volume - Calculated
to power, high (0x03F2), Sump Oil Temperature -
resistance, open Measured (0x03F3). Refer to the electrical
circuit circuit diagrams and check the oil level
Oil level and and temperature sensor circuit for short
temperature sensor circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
failure high resistance, open circuit. Repair
Check and install new oil level and
P250A- Engine Oil Level Sensor Oil level and Using the manufacturer approved
92 Circuit - Performance or temperature sensor diagnostic system check datalogger
incorrect operation circuit short circuit to signals, Engine Oil Level - Measured
ground, short circuit (0x03E6), Engine Oil Volume - Calculated
to power, high (0x03F2), Sump Oil Temperature -
resistance, open Measured (0x03F3). Refer to the electrical
circuit circuit diagrams and check the oil level
Oil level and and temperature sensor circuit for short
temperature sensor circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
failure high resistance, open circuit. Repair
Check and install new oil level and
P2586- Turbocharger Boost Using the manufacturer approved

13 Control Position Sensor B NOTE: - Circuit VGT_FB diagnostic system check datalogger signal,
Circuit - Circuit open - Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2 -
Measured Position (0x0347). Refer to the
module has variable geometry turbine vane actuator
determined an open on bank 1 for open circuit. This circuit
circuit via lack of bias consists of three wires between the engine
voltage, low current control module and the variable geometry
flow, no change in the turbocharger control module. The three
state of an input in sensor wires are a 5 volt sensor supply, a
response to an output sensor ground and a signal line. Check
Harness failure - signal line for open circuit and power and
Variable geometry ground supply to sensor. Repair harness
turbine vane actuator as required. Clear DTC and retest
open circuit Check and install new variable geometry
Variable geometry turbocharger position sensor as required
failure

Circuit - Signal low time < - Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2 -
minimum Measured Position (0x0347). Refer to the
turbine vane actuator on bank 1 for short circuit to ground, high
circuit short circuit to resistance, open circuit. Repair harness as
ground, high required. Clear DTC and retest
resistance, open Check and install new variable geometry
circuit turbocharger position sensor as required
Variable geometry
failure

Circuit - Signal high time > - Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2 -
maximum Measured Position (0x0347). Refer to the
turbine vane actuator on bank 1 for open circuit, short circuit to
Variable geometry power, short circuit to ground. Check the
turbine vane actuator power and ground supply to the sensor.
failure Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
retest
turbocharger position sensor as required

Circuit - Signal frequency - Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2 -
too low Measured Position (0x0347). Refer to the
module detected variable geometry turbine vane actuator
excessive duration for on bank 1 for open circuit, short circuit to
one cycle of the power, short circuit to ground. Check the
output across a power and ground supply to the sensor.
specified sample size Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
Harness failure - retest
turbine vane actuator turbocharger position sensor as required
Variable geometry
failure

Circuit - Signal frequency - Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2 -
too high Measured Position (0x0347). Refer to the
module detected variable geometry turbine vane actuator
insufficient duration on bank 1 for open circuit, short circuit to
for one cycle of the power, short circuit to ground. Check the
output across a power and ground supply to the sensor.
specified sample size Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
Harness failure - retest
turbine vane actuator turbocharger position sensor as required
Variable geometry
failure
P2587- Turbocharger Boost Harness failure - Using the manufacturer approved

92 Control Position Sensor B Variable geometry diagnostic system check datalogger signal,
Circuit Range/Performance turbine vane actuator Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2 -
- Performance or incorrect Variable geometry Measured Position (0x0347). Refer to the
operation turbine vane actuator electrical circuit diagrams and check the
failure variable geometry turbine vane actuator
on bank 1 for open circuit, short circuit to
power, short circuit to ground. Check the
power and ground supply to the sensor.
retest
turbocharger position sensor as required

Circuit Low - No sub type - Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2 -
information Measured Position (0x0347). This DTC is
Harness failure - set when the engine control module
Variable geometry detects a low circuit voltage on the signal
turbine vane actuator line from the variable geometry turbine
Variable geometry vane actuator. Check signal line for short
turbine vane actuator circuit to ground. Check power and ground
circuit short circuit to supply to sensor. Repair harness as
ground required. Clear DTC and retest
Variable geometry Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
turbine vane actuator check variable geometry turbine vane
failure actuator circuit for short circuit to ground
turbine vane actuator as required

Circuit High - No sub type - Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2 -
information Measured Position (0x0347). This DTC is
Harness failure - set when the engine control module
Variable geometry detects a high circuit voltage on the signal
turbine vane actuator line from the variable geometry turbine
Variable geometry vane actuator. Check signal line for short
turbine vane actuator circuit to power. Check power and ground
circuit short circuit to supply to sensor. Repair harness as
power required. Clear DTC and retest
Variable geometry Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
turbine vane actuator check variable geometry turbine vane
failure actuator circuit for short circuit to power
turbine vane actuator as required
P268C- Cylinder 1 Injector Data Injector calibration Using the manufacturer approved
00 Incompatible - No sub type data held in the diagnostic system reprogram the injector
information engine control module codes
is different to that
read from the injector
Injector calibration
data not stored /
programmed
P268C- Cylinder 1 Injector Data Injector calibration Using the manufacturer approved
51 Incompatible - Not data held in the diagnostic system reprogram the injector
programmed engine control module codes
data not stored /
programmed
P268D- Cylinder 2 Injector Data Injector calibration Using the manufacturer approved
data not stored /
programmed
P268D- Cylinder 2 Injector Data Injector calibration Using the manufacturer approved
data not stored /
programmed
P268E- Cylinder 3 Injector Data Injector calibration Using the manufacturer approved
data not stored /
programmed
P268E- Cylinder 3 Injector Data Injector calibration Using the manufacturer approved
data not stored /
programmed
P268F- Cylinder 4 Injector Data Injector calibration Using the manufacturer approved
data not stored /
programmed
P268F- Cylinder 4 Injector Data Injector calibration Using the manufacturer approved
data not stored /
programmed
P2690- Cylinder 5 Injector Data Injector calibration Using the manufacturer approved
data not stored /
programmed
data not stored /
programmed
data not stored /
programmed
data not stored /
programmed
P2A00- O2 Circuit Range / This DTC is set when the engine control
16 Performance (Bank 1, NOTE: - Circuit LPTR_A module detects the voltage on the trim
Sensor 1) - Circuit voltage - resistor circuit of the heated oxygen
below threshold sensor is less than the voltage threshold.
The engine control This may be caused by the heated oxygen
module measured a sensor being too hot to operate correctly.
voltage below a Refer to the workshop manual and check
specified range but the exhaust system and heated oxygen
not necessarily a short sensor harness for sign of mechanical
circuit to ground damage. Refer to the electrical circuit
Harness failure - diagrams and check all the heated oxygen
Heated oxygen sensor sensor circuits for open circuits, short
failure circuit to power, short circuit to ground,
Heated oxygen sensor short circuit to other circuits. Check all
failure engine control module power and ground
supplies. Repair harness as required. Clear
DTC and retest
sensor as required
Sensor 1) - Circuit voltage - resistor circuit of the heated oxygen
above threshold sensor is greater than the voltage
The engine control threshold. This may be caused by the
module measured a heated oxygen sensor being too hot to
voltage above a operate correctly. Refer to the workshop
specified range but manual and check the exhaust system and
not necessarily a short heated oxygen sensor harness for sign of
circuit to power mechanical damage. Refer to the electrical
Harness failure - circuit diagrams and check all the heated
Heated oxygen sensor oxygen sensor circuits for open circuits,
Heated oxygen sensor ground, short circuit to other circuits.
failure Check all engine control module power
and ground supplies. Repair harness as
sensor as required
Sensor 1) - Signal rate of - resistor circuit of the heated oxygen
change below threshold sensor is greater than the voltage
Harness failure - threshold. This may be caused by the
Heated oxygen sensor heated oxygen sensor being too hot to
failure operate correctly. Refer to the workshop
Heated oxygen sensor manual and check the exhaust system and
failure heated oxygen sensor harness for sign of
mechanical damage. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check all the heated
oxygen sensor circuits for open circuits,
Check all engine control module power
and ground supplies. Repair harness as
sensor as required
U0001- High Speed CAN High speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved
00 Communication Bus - No failure diagnostic system carry out network
sub type information High speed CAN bus integrity test
circuit, short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground, short circuit check high speed CAN network for short
to power, open circuit circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit
U0001- High Speed CAN High speed CAN bus Using the manufacturer approved
88 Communication Bus - Bus failure diagnostic system carry out network
off High speed CAN bus integrity test
circuit, short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground, short circuit check high speed CAN network for short
to power, open circuit circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit
U0101- Lost Communication with The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 TCM - No sub type module has not diagnostic system, check transmission
information received the expected control module for DTCs and refer to the
CAN signal from the relevant DTC index
transmission control Using the manufacturer approved
module within the diagnostic system carry out network
specified time interval integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
CAN harness link diagrams and check transmission control
between engine module power and ground circuits for
control module and open circuit. Check CAN harness between
transmission control engine control module and transmission
module network control module, repair as necessary
malfunction
26 TCM - Signal rate of module has not diagnostic system, check transmission
change below threshold received the expected control module for DTCs and refer to the
malfunction
00 Transfer Case Control module has not diagnostic system, check transfer box
Module - No sub type received the expected control module for DTCs and refer to the
information CAN signal from the relevant DTC index
transfer box control Using the manufacturer approved
CAN harness link diagrams and check transfer box control
transfer box control engine control module and transfer box
malfunction
U0103- Lost Communication With The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 Gear Shift Control Module module has not diagnostic system, check transmission
A - No sub type received the expected control switch for DTCs and refer to the
switch within the diagnostic system carry out network
between engine switch power and ground circuits for open
control module and circuit. Check CAN harness between
switch network control switch, repair as necessary
malfunction
00 Cruise Control Module - No module has not diagnostic system, check speed control
sub type information received the expected module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
CAN signal from the DTC index
speed control module Using the manufacturer approved
within the specified diagnostic system carry out network
time interval integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
CAN harness link diagrams and check speed control module
between engine power and ground circuits for open circuit.
control module and Check CAN harness between engine
speed control module control module and speed control module,
network malfunction repair as necessary
00 Starter/ Generator Control module has not diagnostic system, check anti-lock brake
Module - No sub type received the expected system control module for DTCs and refer
information CAN signal from the to the relevant DTC index
anti-lock brake system Using the manufacturer approved
control module within diagnostic system carry out network
the specified time integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
interval diagrams and check generator system
CAN harness link control module power and ground circuits
between engine for open circuit. Check CAN harness
control module and between engine control module and anti-
anti-lock brake system lock brake system control module, repair
control module as necessary
network malfunction
00 Anti-Lock Brake System module has not diagnostic system, check anti-lock brake
(ABS) Control Module - No received the expected system control module for DTCs and refer
sub type information CAN signal from the to the relevant DTC index
anti-lock brake system Using the manufacturer approved
interval diagrams and check anti-lock brake
CAN harness link system control module power and ground
between engine circuits for open circuit. Check CAN
control module and harness between engine control module
anti-lock brake system and anti-lock brake system control
control module module, repair as necessary
network malfunction
00 Steering Angle Sensor module has not diagnostic system, check steering angle
Module - No sub type received the expected sensor control module for DTCs and refer
information CAN signal from the to the relevant DTC index
steering angle sensor Using the manufacturer approved
interval diagrams and check steering angle sensor
control module and between engine control module and
steering angle sensor steering angle sensor control module,
control module repair as necessary
network malfunction
00 Park Brake Control Module module has not diagnostic system, check park brake
- No sub type information received the expected control module for DTCs and refer to the
park brake control Using the manufacturer approved
CAN harness link diagrams and check park brake control
park brake control engine control module and park brake
malfunction
U012A- Lost Communication with The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 Chassis Control Module "A" module has not diagnostic system, check integrated
- No sub type information received the expected suspension control module for DTCs and
CAN signal from the refer to the relevant DTC index
integrated suspension Using the manufacturer approved
control module within diagnostic system, complete a CAN
the specified time network integrity test
interval Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
CAN harness link check integrated suspension control
control module and open circuit
integrated suspension Check CAN harness between engine
control module control module and integrated suspension
network malfunction control module, repair as necessary
00 Power Steering Control module has not diagnostic system, check power steering
Module - No sub type received the expected control module for DTCs and refer to the
power steering control Using the manufacturer approved
CAN harness link diagrams and check power steering
between engine control module power and ground circuits
control module and for open circuit. Check CAN harness
power steering control between engine control module and power
module network steering control module, repair as
malfunction necessary
00 Active Roll Control Module module has not diagnostic system, check dynamic
- No sub type information received the expected response control module for DTCs and
dynamic response Using the manufacturer approved
interval diagrams and check dynamic response
control module and between engine control module and
dynamic response dynamic response control module, repair
control module as necessary
network malfunction
00 All Terrain Control Module module has not diagnostic system, check terrain response
- No sub type information received the expected switchpack for DTCs and refer to the
terrain response Using the manufacturer approved
switchpack within the diagnostic system carry out network
CAN harness link diagrams and check terrain response
between engine switchpack power and ground circuits for
terrain response engine control module and terrain
switchpack network response switchpack, repair as necessary
malfunction
00 Body Control Module - No module has not diagnostic system, check central junction
sub type information received the expected box for DTCs and refer to the relevant
central junction box Using the manufacturer approved
CAN harness link diagrams and check central junction box
central junction box control module and central junction box,
00 Gateway "A" - No sub type module has not diagnostic system, check gateway control
information received the expected module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
gateway control Using the manufacturer approved
module within the diagnostic system, complete a CAN
specified time interval network integrity test
CAN harness link Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
between engine check gateway control module power and
control module and ground circuits for open circuit
gateway control Check CAN harness between engine
module network control module and gateway control
malfunction module, repair as necessary
00 Restraints Control Module - module has not diagnostic system, check restraints control
No sub type information received the expected module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
restraints control Using the manufacturer approved
CAN harness link diagrams and check restraints control
restraints control engine control module and restraints
malfunction
08 Restraints Control Module - module has not diagnostic system, check restraints control
Bus Signal / Message received the expected module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
Failures CAN signal from the DTC index
restraints control Using the manufacturer approved
CAN harness link diagrams and check restraints control
restraints control engine control module and restraints
malfunction
00 Instrument Panel Cluster module has not diagnostic system, check instrument
Control Module - No sub received the expected cluster for DTCs and refer to the relevant
type information CAN signal from the DTC index
instrument cluster Using the manufacturer approved
CAN harness link diagrams and check instrument cluster
instrument cluster control module and instrument cluster,
00 Parking Assist Control module has not diagnostic system, check park distance
Module "A" - No sub type received the expected control module for DTCs and refer to the
park distance control Using the manufacturer approved
module within the diagnostic system, complete a CAN
specified time interval network integrity test
between engine check park distance control module power
control module and and ground circuits for open circuit
park distance control Check CAN harness between engine
module network control module and park distance control
malfunction module, repair as necessary
U0164- Lost Communication With Power distribution This DTC is set if the engine control
00 HVAC Control Module - No system failure - Fuse module loses communication with the
sub type information failure automatic temperature control module.
CAN network failure Check the automatic temperature control
Automatic temperature module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
control module failure DTC index
check the power supply and ground
connections to the automatic temperature
control module
network integrity test. Refer to electrical
circuit diagrams and check CAN circuits if
required. Repair wiring harness as
required
Check and install new automatic
temperature control module
U0167- Lost Communication With Engine control module Check the electric steering column lock for
00 Vehicle Immobilizer identity transfer failed DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index.
Control Module - No sub Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
type information check the power supply and ground
connections to the electric steering column
lock. Using the manufacturer approved
required
Check and install new electric steering
column lock
U0300- Internal Control Module CAN network failure Using the manufacturer approved
00 Software Incompatibility - Central junction box diagnostic system, complete a CAN
No sub type information failure network integrity test. Refer to electrical
Car configuration file circuit diagrams and check CAN circuits if
incorrect required. Repair harness as required
Car configuration signal not received.
Check central junction box for DTCs and
diagnostic system check and up-date the
car configuration file as required
U0402- Invalid Data Received from CAN network failure Check transmission control module for
00 TCM - No sub type Implausible CAN data related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
information received from index
module diagnostic system, complete a CAN
required. Repair harness as required
U0402- Invalid Data Received from CAN network failure Check transmission control module for
83 TCM - Value of signal Implausible CAN data related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
protection calculation received from index
incorrect transmission control Using the manufacturer approved
module diagnostic system, complete a CAN
U0404- Invalid Data Received from CAN network failure Check transmission control switch for
68 Gear Shift Control Module Implausible CAN data related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
A - Event information received from index
switch diagnostic system, complete a CAN
U0405- Invalid Data Received Speed control system Check speed control module for related
68 From Cruise Control failure DTCs and refer to relevant DTC index
Module - Event information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
connections to the speed control module
Check and install new speed control
module
U0405- Invalid Data Received Speed control system Check speed control buttons are not
82 From Cruise Control failure jammed/contaminated/damaged. Check
Module - Alive/sequence CAN network failure speed control module for related DTCs and
counter incorrect/not Harness failure - refer to the relevant DTC index
updated Speed control module Using the manufacturer approved
power supply or diagnostic system, complete a CAN
ground failure network integrity test. Refer to electrical
module
U0405- Invalid Data Received Speed control system Check speed control module for related
84 From Cruise Control failure DTCs and refer to relevant DTC index
Module - Signal below Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
allowable range check the power supply and ground
module
U0405- Invalid Data Received Speed control system Check speed control buttons are not
86 From Cruise Control failure jammed/contaminated/damaged. Check
Module - Signal invalid speed control module for related DTCs and
U0407- Invalid Data Received This DTC is set when Check the correct glow plug control
00 From Glow Plug Control the glow plug control module is installed to the vehicle
Module - No sub type module does not
information match what is
expected by the
engine control module.
Detection of the
coding word is
complete when 2 of 3
coding words match.
This process is a one
time operation and
will be completed
during assembly of the
vehicle
U0407- Invalid Data Received Glow plug control Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
81 From Glow Plug Control system failure check the power supply and ground
Module - Invalid serial data connections to the glow plug control
received module. Check the diagnostic circuit
between the engine control module and
the glow plug control module for short
circuit to power, short circuit to ground,
open circuits. Clear the DTC and retest
Check and install new glow plug control
module
U0415- Invalid Data Received Signal error for vehicle Using the manufacturer approved
68 From Anti-Lock Brake speed over CAN diagnostic system, check anti-lock brake
System (ABS) Control system control module for DTCs and refer
Module - Event information to the relevant DTC index
U0416- Invalid Data Received Anti-lock brake system Using the manufacturer approved
46 From Vehicle Dynamics failure diagnostic system, check anti-lock brake
Control Module - system control module for DTCs and refer
Calibration / parameter to the relevant DTC index
memory failure
U0416- Invalid Data Received The engine control Using the manufacturer approved
68 From Vehicle Dynamics module has received diagnostic system, check anti-lock brake
Control Module - Event the default brake system control module for DTCs and refer
information pressure signal value to the relevant DTC index
over CAN from the Using the manufacturer approved
anti-lock brake system diagnostic system carry out network
control module for a integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
specified time interval diagrams and check anti-lock brake
Anti-lock brake system system control module power and ground
failure circuits for open circuit. Check CAN
CAN harness link harness between engine control module
between engine and anti-lock brake system control
control module and module, repair as necessary
anti-lock brake system
control module
network malfunction
U0416- Invalid Data Received Difference between Check the anti-lock brake system control module
92 From Vehicle Dynamics anti-lock brake system for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Control Module - speed signal value and
Performance or incorrect instrument cluster
operation speed value at low
vehicle speeds
00 From Body Control Module module has not diagnostic system, check central junction
- No sub type information received the expected box for DTCs and refer to the relevant
central junction box Using the manufacturer approved
within the specified diagnostic system, complete a CAN
time interval network integrity test
between engine check central junction box power and
control module and ground circuits for open circuit
central junction box Check CAN harness between engine
network malfunction control module and central junction box,
repair as necessary
00 From HVAC Control Module module has not diagnostic system, check automatic
- No sub type information received the expected temperature control module for DTCs and
automatic temperature Using the manufacturer approved
control module within diagnostic system, complete a CAN
the specified time network integrity test
interval Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
CAN harness link check automatic temperature control
control module and open circuit
automatic temperature Check CAN harness between engine
control module control module and automatic temperature
network malfunction control module, repair as necessary
U0424- Invalid Data Received Power distribution This DTC is set if the engine control
68 From HVAC Control Module system failure - Fuse module loses communication with the
- Event information failure automatic temperature control module.
CAN network failure Check the automatic temperature control
Automatic temperature module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
control module failure DTC index
connections to the automatic temperature
control module
required
Check and install new automatic
temperature control module as required
U0426- Invalid Data Received Electric steering Using the manufacturer approved
00 From Vehicle Immobilizer column lock has diagnostic system, complete a CAN
Control Module - No sub received an invalid network integrity test. Refer to electrical
type information identity response circuit diagrams and check CAN circuits if
Module substituted required. Repair harness as required.
diagnostic system check and up-date the
car configuration file as required
Ensure all modules installed in the vehicle
which store vehicle identity are valid for
this vehicle and are not substitutes from a
donor vehicle
U0A1A- LIN Bus "A" - Missing Generator LIN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
87 message communication circuit check the generator LIN bus circuit, for
ground, open circuit. Repair harness as
U1A14- CAN Initialization Failure - Harness failure - CAN Using the manufacturer approved
00 No sub type information circuit failure diagnostic system, complete a CAN
required
U2005- Vehicle Speed - Signal Anti-lock brake system This DTC is set when the engine control
64 plausibility failure failure module has recognized a vehicle speed
signal plausibility failure. Check the anti-
lock brake system module for related
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index.
Check the instrument cluster for related
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index.
required
U2005- Vehicle Speed - Below Anti-lock brake system This DTC is set when the engine control
84 allowable range failure module has recognized a vehicle speed
signal which is below the allowable range.
Check the anti-lock brake system control
relevant DTC index. Check the instrument
cluster for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
complete a CAN network integrity test.
check CAN circuits if required. Repair
U2005- Vehicle Speed - Above Anti-lock brake system This DTC is set when the engine control
85 allowable range failure module has recognized a vehicle speed
signal which is above the allowable range.
Check the anti-lock brake system control
relevant DTC index. Check the instrument
cluster for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
complete a CAN network integrity test.
check CAN circuits if required. Repair
U2108- Adaptive Cruise Control - Adaptive speed control Check adaptive speed control module for
00 No sub type information system failure - Error DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index.
indicating adaptive Using the manufacturer approved
speed control failure diagnostic system, complete a CAN
flag set network integrity test. Refer to electrical
required
U2108- Adaptive Cruise Control - The engine control Check adaptive speed control module for
24 Signal stuck high module measures a DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index.
signal that remains Using the manufacturer approved
high when transitions diagnostic system, complete a CAN
are expected network integrity test. Refer to electrical
Adaptive speed control circuit diagrams and check CAN circuits if
system failure - required. Repair wiring harness as
Adaptive speed control required
follow speed error
64 Signal plausibility failure system failure - DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index.
Adaptive speed control Using the manufacturer approved
follow speed range diagnostic system, complete a CAN
error network integrity test. Refer to electrical
required
68 Event information system failure - Error DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index.
indicating adaptive Using the manufacturer approved
speed control follow diagnostic system, complete a CAN
speed check when network integrity test. Refer to electrical
stationary circuit diagrams and check CAN circuits if
required
86 Signal invalid system failure - Error DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index.
when invalid adaptive Using the manufacturer approved
speed control resume diagnostic system, complete a CAN
requests are present network integrity test. Refer to electrical
required
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM)
Engine Control Module (PCM) 5.0L V8
the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Engine Control Module, for
For additional information, refer to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol,

B10A2- Crash Input - No signal Refer to the electrical circuit
31 NOTE: - Circuit SRS_SIGNAL - diagrams and check restraints
control module pulse width
Loss of communication modulated SRS signal line circuit,
between restraints control hard wired connection between
module and engine control engine control module and
module restraints control module for short
circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit. Repair circuit
as required, clear the DTC and
retest
B10AC- Cruise Control Switch - The engine control module has Clear the DTC and press all the
81 Invalid serial data received received an invalid command steering wheel switches, re-check
from the steering wheel switch for DTCs. Refer to the electrical
pack circuit diagrams and check the
speed control switch circuit for
open circuit, short circuit to
power, short circuit to ground,
disconnected
Check and install a new steering
wheel module as required. Refer
to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine
if any prior approval programme is
in operation, prior to the
installation of a new
module/component
B10AC- Cruise Control Switch - Cruise buttons alive counter is Refer to the electrical circuit
82 Alive / sequence counter not incrementing. Which diagrams and check the speed
incorrect / not updated suggests that the LIN bus is control switch circuit for open
faulty circuit, short circuit to power,
Steering wheel module is not short circuit to ground,
connected disconnected
Steering wheel module failure Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the LIN bus
between steering wheel module
and the CAN gateway
Check and install a new steering
wheel module as required. Refer
module/component
B10AC- Cruise Control Switch - Cruise buttons checksum Check and install new cruise
83 Value of signal protection incorrect, incorrect cruise switches as required. Refer to the
calculation incorrect switches fitted to vehicle warranty policy and procedures
manual, or determine if any prior
approval programme is in
operation, prior to the installation
of a new module/component
B10AC- Cruise Control Switch - Speed control switch circuit, Check for related DTCs in other
96 Component internal failure open circuit, short circuit to central junction boxes
power, short circuit to ground, Refer to the electrical circuit
disconnected diagrams and check the speed
Speed control switch failure control switch circuit for open
Steering wheel module failure circuit, short circuit to power,
disconnected
Check and install a new speed
control switch as required. Check
and install a new steering wheel
module as required. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures
B10FF- Ignition Control - Event Spark plug(s) fault Refer to repair manual and check
68 information Wiring harness fault spark plug(s) for condition and
Ignition coil(s) fault security. Replace any defective
components as required
Refer to electrical wiring diagrams
and check ignition coil circuit for
intermittent open circuit, short
circuit to power, short circuit to
ground
Check and install a new coil(s) as
required. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval
programme is in operation, prior
to the installation of a new
module/component
B11DB- Battery Monitoring Module Refer to electrical wiring diagrams

01 - General electrical failure NOTE: - Circuit BATTERY - and check charging system for
faults. Perform any repairs
Charging system fault required
Battery monitoring signal line Refer to the electrical wiring
circuit fault diagrams and check the battery
Vehicle battery fault monitoring system module circuit
for open circuit, short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power
Refer to the workshop manual and
the battery care manual, inspect
the vehicle battery and ensure it is
fully charged and serviceable
before performing further tests
B11DB- Battery Monitoring Module Refer to the electrical wiring

87 - Missing message NOTE: - Circuit BATTERY - diagrams and check the battery
monitoring system module circuit
Battery signal line circuit fault for open circuit, short circuit to
Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the LIN circuit
for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, open circuit
B1206- Crash Occurred - Event Refer to the electrical circuit

68 information NOTE: - Circuit SRS_SIGNAL - diagrams and check the engine
control module to restraints
Engine control module has control module circuit for short
detected the vehicle has circuit to ground, short circuit to
crashed - event information power, open circuit. Repair circuit
DTC only as required, clear the DTC and
retest
C0031- Left Front Wheel Speed Invalid data received from anti- Check anti-lock braking system
00 Sensor - No sub type lock braking system module - module for related DTCs and refer
information left front wheel speed signal to relevant DTC index
fault
C0034- Right Front Wheel Speed Invalid data received from anti- Check anti-lock braking system
information right front wheel speed signal to relevant DTC index
fault
C0037- Left Rear Wheel Speed Invalid data received from anti- Check anti-lock braking system
information left rear wheel speed signal to relevant DTC index
fault
C003A- Right Rear Wheel Speed Invalid data received from anti- Check anti-lock braking system
information right rear wheel speed signal to relevant DTC index
fault
P0010- Intake (A) Camshaft Refer to the electrical circuit

13 Position Actuator (Bank 1) NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_A - diagrams and check intake (A)
- Circuit open camshaft position actuator (Bank
Intake (A) camshaft position 1) circuit for open circuit
actuator (Bank 1) open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
Engine control module diagrams and check engine control
interface harness open circuit module interface harness for open
circuit

00 Position Timing - Over- NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_A - diagrams and check intake (A)
Advanced (Bank 1) - No camshaft position actuator (Bank
sub type information Intake (A) camshaft position 1) circuit for open circuit
circuit
P0013- Exhaust (B) Camshaft Refer to the electrical circuit

13 Position Actuator (Bank 1) NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A - diagrams and check exhaust (B)
Exhaust (B) camshaft position 1) circuit for open circuit
circuit
P0015- Exhaust (B) Camshaft Check for related DTC P0365-00.

00 Position Timing - Over- NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A - Refer to the electrical circuit
Retarded (Bank 1) - No diagrams and check exhaust (B)
sub type information Exhaust (B) camshaft position camshaft position actuator (Bank
actuator (Bank 1) open circuit, 1) for open circuit, short circuit to
short circuit to ground, short ground, short circuit to power
circuit to power
P0016- Crankshaft Position - Check engine timing. Check

00 Camshaft Position NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A - camshaft sensor timing plate is
Correlation - Bank 1 installed correctly. Check timing
Sensor A - No sub type The relative positions of the chain is installed correctly
information crankshaft position sensor and
cam timing plate teeth are not
correct
Engine timing incorrect
Timing chain installed
incorrectly
Variable valve timing forced
fully advanced
P0017- Crankshaft Position - Check for related DTC P0365-00.

00 Camshaft Position NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A - Check engine timing. Check
Correlation - Bank 1 camshaft sensor timing plate is
Sensor B - No sub type The relative positions of the installed correctly. Check timing
information crankshaft position sensor and chain is installed correctly
camshaft timing plate teeth are Refer to the electrical circuit
not correct diagrams and check exhaust (B)
Engine timing incorrect camshaft position actuator (Bank
Timing chain installed 1) for open circuit, short circuit to
incorrectly ground, short circuit to power
fully advanced

00 Camshaft Position NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_B - camshaft sensor timing plate is
Sensor A - No sub type The relative positions of the chain is installed correctly
camshaft timing plate teeth are
not correct
incorrectly
fully advanced

00 Camshaft Position NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_B - camshaft sensor timing plate is
Sensor B - No sub type The relative positions of the chain is installed correctly
camshaft timing plate teeth are
not correct
incorrectly
fully advanced
P001A- Intake (A) Cam Profile Refer to the electrical circuit

13 Control Circuit (Bank 1) - NOTE: - Circuit CPS_A - diagrams and check camshaft
Circuit open profile switching solenoid bank 1
Camshaft profile switching for open circuit
solenoid bank 1 open circuit
P001B- Intake (A) Cam Profile Refer to the electrical circuit

11 Control Circuit Low (Bank NOTE: - Circuit CPS_A - diagrams and check camshaft
1) - Circuit short to ground profile switching solenoid bank 1
Camshaft profile switching circuit for short circuit to ground
solenoid bank 1 circuit short
circuit to ground
P001C- Intake (A) Cam Profile Refer to the electrical circuit

12 Control Circuit High (Bank NOTE: - Circuit CPS_A - diagrams and check camshaft
1) - Circuit short to battery profile switching solenoid bank 1
Camshaft profile switching circuit for short circuit to power
circuit to power
P001D- Intake (A) Cam Profile Refer to the electrical circuit

13 Control Circuit (Bank 2) - NOTE: - Circuit CPS_B - diagrams and check camshaft
Circuit open profile switching solenoid bank 2
Camshaft profile switching for open circuit
solenoid bank 2 open circuit
P001E- Intake (A) Cam Profile Refer to the electrical circuit

11 Control Circuit Low (Bank NOTE: - Circuit CPS_B - diagrams and check camshaft
2) - Circuit short to ground profile switching solenoid bank 2
Camshaft profile switching circuit for short circuit to ground
circuit to ground
P001F- Intake (A) Cam Profile Refer to the electrical circuit

12 Control Circuit High (Bank NOTE: - Circuit CPS_B - diagrams and check camshaft
2) - Circuit short to battery profile switching solenoid bank 2
Camshaft profile switching circuit for short circuit to power
circuit to power

13 Position Actuator (Bank 2) NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_B - diagrams and check intake valve
- Circuit open solenoid 2 for open circuit
Intake valve solenoid 2 open
circuit
P0023- Exhaust (B) Camshaft Refer to the electrical circuit

13 Position Actuator (Bank 2) NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_B - diagrams and check exhaust (B)
Exhaust (B) Camshaft Position 2) circuit for open circuit
actuator (Bank 2) circuit, open
circuit
P0026- Intake Valve Control Check operation of intake valve

72 Solenoid Circuit NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_A - solenoid 1. Check and install a
Range/Performance (Bank new intake valve solenoid 1 as
1) - Actuator stuck open Intake valve solenoid 1 angle required. Refer to the warranty
less than target policy and procedures manual, or
Intake valve solenoid 1 slow or determine if any prior approval
not operating programme is in operation, prior
module/component

77 Solenoid Circuit NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_A - solenoid 1. Check and install a
1) - Commanded position Intake valve solenoid 1 angle required. Refer to the warranty
not reachable greater than target policy and procedures manual, or
Intake valve solenoid 1 not determine if any prior approval
returning to target in time programme is in operation, prior
Intake valve solenoid 1 stuck to the installation of a new
advanced module/component
P0027- Exhaust Valve Control Check operation of exhaust valve

72 Solenoid Circuit NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A - solenoid 1. Check and install a
Range/Performance (Bank new exhaust valve solenoid 1 as
1) - Actuator stuck open Exhaust valve solenoid 1 angle required. Refer to the warranty
Exhaust valve solenoid 1 slow determine if any prior approval
or not operating programme is in operation, prior
module/component

77 Solenoid Circuit NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A - solenoid 1. Check and install a
1) - Commanded position Exhaust valve solenoid 1 angle required. Refer to the warranty
Exhaust valve solenoid 1 not determine if any prior approval
Exhaust valve solenoid 1 stuck to the installation of a new

72 Solenoid Circuit NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_B - solenoid 2. Check and install a
2) - Actuator stuck open Intake valve solenoid 2 angle required. Refer to the warranty
Intake valve solenoid 2 slow or determine if any prior approval
not operating programme is in operation, prior
module/component

77 Solenoid Circuit NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_B - solenoid 2. Check and install a
2) - Commanded position Intake valve solenoid 2 angle required. Refer to the warranty
Intake valve solenoid 2 not determine if any prior approval
Intake valve solenoid 2 stuck to the installation of a new

72 Solenoid Circuit NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_B - solenoid 2. Check and install a
2) - Actuator stuck open Exhaust valve solenoid 2 angle required. Refer to the warranty
Exhaust valve solenoid 2 slow determine if any prior approval
or not operating programme is in operation, prior
module/component

77 Solenoid Circuit NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_B - solenoid 2. Check and install a
2) - Commanded position Exhaust valve solenoid 2 angle required. Refer to the warranty
Exhaust valve solenoid 2 not determine if any prior approval
Exhaust valve solenoid 2 stuck to the installation of a new
P0031- HO2S Heater Control NOTES: Using the manufacturer approved

11 Circuit Low (Bank 1, diagnostic system check
Sensor 1) - Circuit short to datalogger signal, Oxygen Sensor
ground - Circuit (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 1
HTR_CTRL_A_UPSTREAM - Sensor 1 (0x03A1)
diagrams and check pre catalyst
LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER A - oxygen sensor-odd heater control
circuit (Bank 1, Sensor 1) circuit
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-odd for short circuit to ground
heater control circuit (Bank 1,
Sensor 1) circuit short circuit
to ground

Sensor 1) - Circuit open datalogger signal, Oxygen Sensor
- Circuit (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 1
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-odd for open circuit
Sensor 1) circuit, open circuit

12 Circuit High (Bank 1, diagnostic system check
battery - Circuit (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 1
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-odd for short circuit to power
Sensor 1) circuit short circuit
to power

00 Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor 2) NOTE: - Circuit HTR_HEGO_A - diagnostic system check
- No sub type information datalogger signal, Oxygen Sensor
Catalyst oxygen sensor heater (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 1
circuit control fuse failure Sensor 2 (0x03A2)
Post catalyst oxygen sensor- Refer to the electrical circuit
odd heater control circuit short diagrams and check post catalyst
circuit to ground, short circuit oxygen sensor-odd sensor fuse for
to power, open circuit open circuit
Catalyst oxygen sensor heater Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit control relay circuit diagrams and check post catalyst
short circuit to ground, short oxygen sensor-odd sensor circuit
circuit to power, open circuit for short circuit to ground, short
Catalyst oxygen sensor heater circuit to power, open circuit
circuit control relay failure Refer to the electrical circuit
Post catalyst oxygen sensor- diagrams and check catalyst
odd failure oxygen sensor heater circuit
control relay circuit for short
power, open circuit
Check and install a new catalyst
oxygen sensor heater control
relay, as required. Check and
install a new post catalyst oxygen
sensor-odd as required. Refer to
the warranty policy and
module/component
P003C- A Camshaft Profile Control Check for the presence of oil at

00 Performance /Stuck Off NOTE: - Circuit CPS_A - the camshaft profile switching
(Bank 1) - No sub type solenoid
information Oil supply blockage to Check for catalyst oxygen sensor
camshaft profile switching related DTCs
solenoid Refer to the electrical circuit
Catalyst oxygen sensor failure, diagrams and check camshaft
giving false flag profile switching solenoid bank 1
Camshaft profile switching circuit for short circuit to power,
solenoid bank 1 circuit fault short circuit to ground, open
Camshaft profile switching circuit
solenoid bank 1 fault Check and install a new camshaft
profile switching solenoid bank 1
as required. Refer to the warranty
module/component
Clear DTC and road test the
vehicle. If fault remains contact
dealer technical support before
carrying out any further work
P003E- A Camshaft Profile Control Check for the presence of oil at

00 Performance/ Stuck Off NOTE: - Circuit CPS_B - the camshaft profile switching
(Bank 2) - No sub type solenoid
information Oil supply blockage to Check for catalyst oxygen sensor
camshaft profile switching related DTCs
solenoid Refer to the electrical circuit
Catalyst oxygen sensor failure, diagrams and check camshaft
giving false flag profile switching solenoid bank 2
Camshaft profile switching circuit for short circuit to power,
solenoid bank 2 circuit fault short circuit to ground, open
Camshaft profile switching circuit
solenoid bank 2 fault Check and install a new camshaft
profile switching solenoid bank 2
module/component
Clear DTC and road test the
vehicle. If fault remains contact
dealer technical support before
carrying out any further work

ground - Circuit (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 2
HTR_CTRL_B_UPSTREAM - Sensor 1 (0x03A4)
LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER B - oxygen sensor-even heater control
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor- for short circuit to ground
even heater control circuit
(Bank 2, Sensor 1) circuit short
circuit to ground

Sensor 1) - Circuit open datalogger signal, Oxygen Sensor
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor- for open circuit
(Bank 2, Sensor 1) circuit,
open circuit

12 Circuit High (Bank 2, diagnostic system check
battery - Circuit (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 2
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor- for short circuit to power
(Bank 2, Sensor 1) circuit short
circuit to power
P0054- HO2S Heater Resistance NOTES: Using the manufacturer approved

00 (Bank 1, Sensor 2) - No diagnostic system check
sub type information datalogger signal, Oxygen Sensor
diagrams and check post catalyst
LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER A - oxygen sensor-odd sensor fuse for
open circuit
circuit control fuse failure diagrams and check post catalyst
Post catalyst oxygen sensor- oxygen sensor-odd sensor circuit
odd heater control circuit short for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to ground, short circuit circuit to power, open circuit, high
to power, open circuit, high resistance
resistance Refer to the electrical circuit
Catalyst oxygen sensor heater diagrams and check catalyst
circuit control relay circuit oxygen sensor heater circuit
short circuit to ground, short control relay circuit for short
circuit to power, open circuit circuit to ground, short circuit to
Catalyst oxygen sensor heater power, open circuit
circuit control relay failure Check and install a new catalyst
Post catalyst oxygen sensor- oxygen sensor heater control
odd failure relay, as required. Check and
sensor-odd as required. Refer to
module/component

00 Circuit (Bank 2, Sensor 2) NOTE: - Circuit HTR_HEGO_B - diagnostic system check
- No sub type information datalogger signal, Oxygen Sensor
Post catalyst oxygen sensor- (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 2
even heater control circuit Sensor 2 (0x03A5)
short circuit to ground, short Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to power, open circuit diagrams and check post catalyst
Catalyst oxygen sensor heater oxygen sensor-even sensor circuit
circuit control relay circuit for short circuit to ground, short
short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit
circuit to power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit control relay failure oxygen sensor heater circuit
Post catalyst oxygen sensor- control relay circuit for short
even failure circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit
sensor-even, as required. Refer to
module/component
P0060- HO2S Heater Resistance NOTES: Using the manufacturer approved

00 (Bank 2, Sensor 2) - No diagnostic system check
sub type information datalogger signal, Oxygen Sensor
diagrams and check post catalyst
LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER B - oxygen sensor-even sensor fuse
for open circuit
circuit control fuse failure diagrams and check post catalyst
Post catalyst oxygen sensor- oxygen sensor-even sensor circuit
even heater control circuit for short circuit to ground, short
short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
circuit to power, open circuit, resistance
high resistance Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit control relay circuit oxygen sensor heater circuit
short circuit to ground, short control relay circuit for short
circuit to power, open circuit circuit to ground, short circuit to
Catalyst oxygen sensor heater power, open circuit
circuit control relay failure Check and install a new catalyst
Post catalyst oxygen sensor- oxygen sensor heater control
even failure relay, as required. Check and
sensor-even as required. Refer to
module/component
P0069- MAP - Barometric Pressure Manifold absolute pressure Using the manufacturer approved
29 Correlation - Signal invalid sensor failure diagnostic system check
Engine control module failure datalogger signal, Barometric
Pressure Sensor Voltage (0x035A).
Check for related manifold
absolute pressure sensor DTCs
diagrams and check manifold
absolute pressure sensor circuit
for short circuit to ground, short
Check and install new manifold
absolute pressure sensor as
required. Check and install a new
engine control module as required.
Refer to the warranty policy and
module/component
P0071- Ambient Air Temperature NOTES: Using the manufacturer approved

21 Sensor Range/Performance diagnostic system check
- Signal amplitude < datalogger signal, Ambient Air
minimum Jaguar - Circuit Temperature Sensor Voltage
AMBIENT_TEMP_SENSOR - (0x03BA)
diagrams and check ambient air
LR - Circuit TAMB TEMP - temperature sensor circuit for
short circuit to ground, short
Ambient air temperature circuit to power, open circuit
sensor circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit
ground, short circuit to power, diagrams and check temperature
open circuit and manifold absolute pressure
Temperature and manifold sensor circuit for short circuit to
absolute pressure sensor circuit ground, short circuit to power,
short circuit to ground, short open circuit
circuit to power, open circuit Check and install a new ambient
Ambient air temperature air temperature sensor as
sensor failure required. Check and install a new
Temperature and manifold temperature and manifold absolute
absolute pressure sensor pressure sensor as required. Refer
failure to the warranty policy and
module/component

22 Sensor Range/Performance diagnostic system check
- Signal amplitude > datalogger signal, Ambient Air
maximum - Circuit Temperature Sensor Voltage
Ambient air temperature circuit to power, open circuit
sensor circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit
ground, short circuit to power, diagrams and check temperature
open circuit and manifold absolute pressure
Temperature and manifold sensor circuit for short circuit to
absolute pressure sensor circuit ground, short circuit to power,
short circuit to ground, short open circuit
circuit to power, open circuit Check and install a new ambient
Ambient air temperature air temperature sensor as
sensor failure required. Check and install a new
Temperature and manifold temperature and manifold absolute
absolute pressure sensor pressure sensor as required. Refer
failure to the warranty policy and
module/component

00 Sensor Circuit Low - No diagnostic system check
sub type information datalogger signal, Ambient Air
- Circuit Temperature Sensor Voltage
short circuit to ground, open
Ambient air temperature circuit, high resistance
sensor circuit short circuit to Check and install a new ambient
ground, open circuit, high air temperature sensor as
resistance required. Refer to the warranty
Ambient air temperature policy and procedures manual, or
sensor failure determine if any prior approval
module/component

00 Sensor Circuit High - No diagnostic system check
sub type information datalogger signals Ambient Air
- Circuit Temperature Sensor Voltage
short circuit to ground, high
Ambient air temperature resistance, short circuit to power.
sensor ground circuit high Check connector terminals for
resistance, open circuit corrosion or damage
Ambient air temperature Check and install a new ambient
sensor signal circuit short air temperature sensor as
circuit to power required. Refer to the warranty
Ambient air temperature policy and procedures manual, or
sensor failure determine if any prior approval
module/component
P007B- Charge Air Cooler Using the manufacturer approved

23 Temperature Sensor NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check
Circuit Range/Performance TMAP_TEMP_SENSOR - datalogger signal, Charge Air
(Bank 1) - Signal stuck low Temperature Voltage (0x03EE)
Charge air cooler temperature Refer to the electrical circuit
sensor circuit poor / diagrams and check charge air
intermittent connection cooler temperature sensor circuit
Charge air cooler temperature for poor, intermittent connection
sensor failure Check and install a new charge air
cooler temperature sensor as
module/component
P007B- Charge Air Cooler Inspect connectors for signs of

24 Temperature Sensor NOTE: Jaguar circuit reference water ingress, and pins for
Circuit Range/Performance IC_COOLANT_PMP_CTRL & damage and/or corrosion
(Bank 1) - Signal stuck BOOST_PRESS_SENSOR_TEMP_SIG. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
high Land Rover circuit reference and check for fuse failure, install
O_S_CACWPR & I_A_BTS new fuse as required
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
Connector is disconnected, and check the temperature and
connector pin is backed out, manifold absolute pressure sensor
connector pin corrosion circuit for short circuit to ground,
Fuse failure short circuit to power, open
Temperature and manifold circuit, high resistance
absolute pressure sensor Check and install a new
circuit, short circuit to ground, temperature and manifold absolute
short circuit to power, open pressure sensor as required
circuit, high resistance Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
Temperature and manifold and check the air charge coolant
absolute pressure sensor pump and control circuit for short
failure circuit to ground, short circuit to
Air charge coolant pump and power, open circuit, high
control circuit, short circuit to resistance
ground, short circuit to power, Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
open circuit, high resistance and check the air charge coolant
Air charge coolant pump relay pump for open circuit, high
failure resistance
Air charge coolant pump failure Refer to the relevant section of
the workshop manual and check
the air charge coolant pump for
correct operation. Check and
install a new air charge coolant
pump as required
P007B- Charge Air Cooler Inspect connectors for signs of

29 Temperature Sensor NOTE: Jaguar circuit reference water ingress, and pins for
Circuit Range/Performance IC_COOLANT_PMP_CTRL & damage and/or corrosion
(Bank 1) - Signal invalid BOOST_PRESS_SENSOR_TEMP_SIG. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
Land Rover circuit reference and check for fuse failure, install
O_S_CACWPR & I_A_BTS new fuse as required
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
Connector is disconnected, and check the temperature and
connector pin is backed out, manifold absolute pressure sensor
connector pin corrosion circuit for short circuit to ground,
Fuse failure short circuit to power, open
Temperature and manifold circuit, high resistance
absolute pressure sensor Check and install a new
circuit, short circuit to ground, temperature and manifold absolute
short circuit to power, open pressure sensor as required
circuit, high resistance Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
Temperature and manifold and check the air charge coolant
absolute pressure sensor pump and control circuit for short
failure circuit to ground, short circuit to
Air charge coolant pump and power, open circuit, high
control circuit, short circuit to resistance
ground, short circuit to power, Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
open circuit, high resistance and check the air charge coolant
Air charge coolant pump relay pump for open circuit, high
failure resistance
Air charge coolant pump failure Refer to the relevant section of
the workshop manual and check
the air charge coolant pump for
correct operation. Check and
install a new air charge coolant
pump as required
P007C- Charge Air Cooler Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Temperature Sensor NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check charge air
Circuit Low (Bank 1) - No TMAP_TEMP_SENSOR - cooler temperature sensor (Bank
sub type information 1) circuit for short circuit to
Charge air cooler temperature ground, open circuit, high
sensor (Bank 1) circuit short resistance
circuit to ground, open circuit, Check and install a new charge air
high resistance cooler temperature sensor (Bank
Charge air cooler temperature 1) as required. Refer to the
sensor (Bank 1) failure warranty policy and procedures
P007D- Charge Air Cooler Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Temperature Sensor NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check charge air
Circuit High (Bank 1) - No TMAP_TEMP_SENSOR - cooler temperature sensor (Bank
sub type information 1) circuit for short circuit to
Charge air cooler temperature power, open circuit, high
sensor (Bank 1) circuit short resistance
circuit to power, open circuit, Check and install a new charge air
high resistance cooler temperature sensor (Bank
Charge air cooler temperature 1) as required. Refer to the
sensor (Bank 1) failure warranty policy and procedures
P0087- Fuel Rail/System Pressure Using the manufacturer approved

00 - Too Low - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check
information FUEL_HIGH_PRESS_SENSOR - datalogger signal, Fuel Rail
Pressure Sensor - High Range
Fuel rail pressure sensor circuit Sensor Voltage (0x0377)
short circuit to ground, open Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit, high resistance diagrams and check fuel rail
Fuel rail pressure sensor failure pressure sensor circuit for short
Fuel lines leaking or restricted circuit to ground, open circuit,
Fuel pump failure high resistance
Check for fuel pump related DTCs.
Check fuel lines for leakage or
restriction
Check and install new fuel rail
pressure sensor as required.
Check and install a new fuel pump
module/component
P0088- Fuel Rail/System Pressure Using the manufacturer approved

00 - Too High - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check
information FUEL_HIGH_PRESS_SENSOR - datalogger signal, Fuel Rail
Fuel rail pressure sensor circuit Sensor Voltage (0x0377)
short to each other, high Refer to the electrical circuit
resistance, short circuit to diagrams and check fuel rail
power pressure sensor circuit for short to
Fuel rail pressure sensor failure each other, high resistance, short
circuit to power
Check and install new fuel rail
pressure sensor as required. Refer
module/component
P008A- Low Pressure Fuel System Using the manufacturer approved

00 Pressure - Too Low - No NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check
sub type information LOW_PRESS_FUEL_PRESS_SENSOR - datalogger signal, Fuel Rail
Pressure - Low Range Sensor
Low pressure fuel sensor circuit Voltage (0x0376)
failure, short circuit to ground, Check fuel system for leakage
short circuit to power, open Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit diagrams and check low pressure
Fuel pump driver module fuel sensor circuit for short circuit
circuit short circuit to ground, to ground, short circuit to power,
short circuit to power, open open circuit
circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
Low pressure fuel diagrams and check fuel pump
Fuel pump driver module driver module circuit short circuit
failure to ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit
Check and install a new low
pressure fuel sensor as required.
driver module as required. Refer
module/component
P008B- Low Pressure Fuel System Using the manufacturer approved

00 Pressure - Too High - No NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check
sub type information LOW_PRESS_FUEL_PRESS_SENSOR - datalogger signal, Fuel Rail
Low pressure fuel sensor circuit Voltage (0x0376)
short circuit to ground, short Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to power, open circuit diagrams and check low pressure
Fuel pump driver module fuel sensor circuit for short circuit
circuit short circuit to ground, to ground, short circuit to power,
short circuit to power, open open circuit. Check for blockage or
circuit restriction in low pressure fuel line
Blockage or restriction in low Refer to the electrical circuit
pressure fuel line diagrams and check fuel pump
Low pressure fuel sensor driver module circuit short circuit
failure to ground, short circuit to power,
Fuel pump driver module open circuit
failure Check and install a new low
pressure fuel sensor as required.
driver module as required. Refer
module/component
P00AB- Intake Air Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

23 Sensor 1 Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check
Range/Performance (Bank INLET_AIR_TEMP_SENSOR_B - datalogger signal, Intake Air
2) - Signal stuck low Temperature Sensor Bank 2
Intake air temperature sensor (0x0312)
bank 2 circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit
ground, open circuit diagrams and check intake air
Intake air temperature sensor temperature sensor bank 2 circuit
bank 2 failure for short circuit to ground, open
circuit
Check and install a new intake air
temperature sensor bank 2 as
module/component

2) - Signal stuck high Temperature Sensor Bank 2
power diagrams and check intake air
Intake air temperature sensor temperature sensor bank 2 circuit
bank 2 failure for short circuit to power
module/component

2) - Signal invalid Temperature Sensor Bank 2
ground, open circuit, short diagrams and check intake air
circuit to power temperature sensor bank 2 circuit
Intake air temperature sensor for open circuit, short circuit to
bank 2 failure ground, short circuit to power
module/component
P00AC- Intake Air Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check
2) - No sub type INLET_AIR_TEMP_SENSOR_B - datalogger signal, Intake Air
information Temperature Sensor Bank 2
bank 2 sensing circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to ground, high diagrams and check intake air
resistance, disconnected temperature sensor bank 2 circuit
Intake air temperature sensor for short circuit to ground, open
bank 2 failure circuit, high resistance,
disconnected connector
module/component
P00AD- Intake Air Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor 1 Circuit High NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check
(Bank 2) - No sub type INLET_AIR_TEMP_SENSOR_B - datalogger signal, Intake Air
information Temperature Sensor Bank 2
bank 2 sensing circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit
ground, short circuit to power, diagrams and check intake air
open circuit, high resistance temperature sensor bank 2 circuit
Intake air temperature sensor for short ground, short circuit to
bank 2 failure power, open circuit, high
resistance. Check for backed out
or damaged connector pins
module/component
P00C6- Fuel Rail Pressure Too Low No fuel at pump Check fuel supply to both pumps
00 - Engine Cranking - No sub Injector stuck open (if engine runs then supply is not
type information Fuel pressure sensor signal suspect). If engine does not run
stuck perform fuel prime routine. Use
Fuel pump failure fuel pump diagnostic routine to
determine if one pump has failed,
if so replace pump. If a fuel
injector is stuck open the exhaust
will smell of fuel and fuelling
adaptions may indicate rich shift.
Perform checks for as DTC P0191-
00
module/component
P0101- Mass or Volume Air Flow A Intake air distribution and Using the manufacturer approved
00 Circuit Range/Performance filtering components incorrectly smoke tester check intake air
- No sub type information installed distribution and filtering
Leakage from intake air system components for leakage and
Blocked air cleaner element(s) correct installation
Blocked engine breather Check air cleaner element is free
Blockage in intake air system from restriction and in serviceable
Mass air flow sensor seal condition
failure Ensure the engine breather system
Connector is disconnected, is correctly installed and in
connector terminal is backed serviceable condition
out, connector terminal Check for mass air flow sensor
corrosion seal integrity and correct
Mass air flow sensor circuit, installation
short circuit to ground, short Inspect connectors for signs of
circuit to power, open circuit, water ingress, and pins for
high resistance damage and/or corrosion
Carbon build-up on throttle Refer to the electrical circuit
blade diagrams and check mass air flow
Blocked injectors sensor circuit for short circuit to
Blocked catalysts ground, short circuit to power,
Mass air flow sensor failure open circuit, high resistance
Make sure throttle blade is clean of
carbon
Check for blocked injectors
Check for blocked catalysts
Refer to the relevant section of
workshop manual. Reset fuelling
adaptions and carry out
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Long Drive Cycle Self-Test
Check and install new mass air
flow sensor as required
P0102- Mass or Volume Air Flow A Fuse failure Check for fuse failure
00 Circuit Low - No sub type Connector is disconnected, Inspect connectors for signs of
information connector terminal is backed water ingress, and pins for
out, connector terminal damage and/or corrosion
corrosion Refer to the electrical circuit
Mass air flow sensor circuit, diagrams and check mass air flow
short circuit to ground, short sensor circuit for short circuit to
circuit to power, open circuit, ground, short circuit to power,
high resistance open circuit, high resistance
Mass air flow sensor failure Clear the DTC and retest
P0103- Mass or Volume Air Flow A Connector is disconnected, Using the manufacturer approved
00 Circuit High - No sub type connector terminal is backed diagnostic system check
information out, connector terminal datalogger signal, Mass Air Flow
corrosion Sensor, Bank 1 (0x0314)
Mass air flow sensor circuit, Inspect connectors for signs of
short circuit to ground, short water ingress, and pins for
circuit to power, open circuit, damage and/or corrosion
Blocked air cleaner element(s) diagrams and check mass air flow
Blockage in air intake system sensor circuit for short circuit to
Mass air flow sensor failure ground, short circuit to power,
Check air cleaner element is free
from restriction and in serviceable
condition
Check air intake system for
blockage
P0106- Manifold Absolute Check air cleaner element is free

00 Pressure/BARO Sensor NOTE: - Circuit MAP_SENSOR - from restriction
Range/Performance - No Check for leak from air intake
sub type information Blocked air cleaner element(s) system, rectify as required
Intake manifold air leak Refer to the electrical circuit
Manifold absolute pressure diagrams and check manifold
sensor circuit short circuit to absolute pressure sensor circuit
ground, short circuit to power, for short circuit to ground, short
open circuit, high resistance circuit to power, open circuit, high
Engine breather leak resistance
Carbon build up on throttle Ensure the engine breather system
plate is correctly installed and in
Exhaust system blocked serviceable condition
Manifold absolute pressure Make sure throttle blade is clean of
sensor failure carbon
BARO sensor failure Check for blocked exhaust
Check and install a new manifold
absolute pressure sensor as
required. Check for related BARO
sensor DTC P0069-29. Refer to
module/component
P0107- Manifold Absolute Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Pressure/BARO Sensor Low NOTE: - Circuit MAP_SENSOR - diagrams and check manifold
- No sub type information absolute pressure sensor circuit
Manifold absolute pressure for short circuit to ground, open
sensor circuit short circuit to circuit, high resistance
ground, open circuit, high Check and install a new manifold
resistance absolute pressure sensor as
Manifold absolute pressure required. Refer to the warranty
sensor failure policy and procedures manual, or
module/component
P0108- Manifold Absolute Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Pressure/BARO Sensor NOTE: - Circuit MAP_SENSOR - diagrams and check manifold
High - No sub type absolute pressure sensor circuit
information Manifold absolute pressure for short circuit to power, open
sensor circuit short circuit to circuit, high resistance
power, open circuit, high Check and install a new manifold
resistance absolute pressure sensor as
Manifold absolute pressure required. Refer to the warranty
sensor failure policy and procedures manual, or
module/component
P010B- Mass or Volume Air Flow B Intake air distribution and Using the manufacturer approved
00 Circuit Range/Performance filtering components incorrectly smoke tester check intake air
- No sub type information installed distribution and filtering
carbon
P010C- Mass or Volume Air Flow B Fuse failure Check for fuse failure
00 Circuit Low - No sub type Connector is disconnected, Inspect connectors for signs of
information connector terminal is backed water ingress, and pins for
out, connector terminal damage and/or corrosion
corrosion Refer to the electrical circuit
Mass air flow sensor circuit, diagrams and check mass air flow
short circuit to ground, short sensor circuit for short circuit to
circuit to power, open circuit, ground, short circuit to power,
high resistance open circuit, high resistance
Mass air flow sensor failure Clear the DTC and retest
P010D- Mass or Volume Air Flow B Connector is disconnected, Using the manufacturer approved
00 Circuit High - No sub type connector terminal is backed diagnostic system check
information out, connector terminal datalogger signal, Mass Air Flow
corrosion Sensor 2 Voltage (0x0503)
Mass air flow sensor circuit, Inspect connectors for signs of
short circuit to ground, short water ingress, and pins for
circuit to power, open circuit, damage and/or corrosion
Blocked air cleaner element(s) diagrams and check mass air flow
Blockage in air intake system sensor circuit for short circuit to
Mass air flow sensor failure ground, short circuit to power,
from restriction and in serviceable
condition
Check air intake system for
blockage
P010F- Mass or Volume Air Flow Intake air distribution and Using the manufacturer approved
00 Sensor A/B Correlation - filtering components incorrectly smoke tester check intake air
No sub type information installed distribution and filtering
carbon
P0111- Intake Air Temperature Refer to the electrical circuit

23 Sensor 1 Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check intake air
Range/Performance - INLET_AIR_TEMP_SENSOR_A - temperature sensor circuit for
Signal stuck low short circuit to ground, open
Intake air temperature sensor circuit, high resistance
short circuit to ground, open Check and install a new intake air
circuit, high resistance temperature sensor as required.
Intake air temperature sensor Refer to the warranty policy and
failure procedures manual, or determine
module/component

Signal stuck high short circuit to power, open circuit
Intake air temperature sensor Check and install a new intake air
circuit short circuit to power, temperature sensor as required.
open circuit Refer to the warranty policy and
Intake air temperature sensor procedures manual, or determine
failure if any prior approval programme is
module/component

Signal invalid short circuit to ground, short
Intake air temperature sensor circuit to power, open circuit
circuit short circuit to ground, Check and install a new intake air
short circuit to power, open temperature sensor as required.
circuit Refer to the warranty policy and
Intake air temperature sensor procedures manual, or determine
module/component

00 Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check intake air
1) - No sub type INLET_AIR_TEMP_SENSOR_A - temperature sensor circuit for
information short circuit to ground, short
Intake air temperature sensor circuit to power, open circuit, high
circuit short circuit to ground, resistance
short circuit to power, open Check and install a new intake air
circuit, high resistance temperature sensor bank 1 as
Intake air temperature sensor required. Refer to the warranty
failure policy and procedures manual, or
module/component

00 Sensor 1 Circuit High NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check intake air
(Bank 1) - No sub type INLET_AIR_TEMP_SENSOR_A - temperature sensor circuit for
information short circuit to power, open
Intake air temperature sensor circuit, high resistance
circuit short circuit to power, Check and install a new intake air
open circuit, high resistance temperature sensor bank 1 as
Intake air temperature sensor required. Refer to the warranty
failure policy and procedures manual, or
module/component

23 Temperature Sensor 1 NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check
Circuit Range/Performance COOLANT_TEMP_SENSOR - datalogger signal, Engine Coolant
- Signal stuck low Temperature Sensor Voltage
Battery reset carried out when (0x0357)
the engine was warm/hot Check for related DTC P2610- 87.
Engine coolant temperature Start the engine and switch off.
sensor 1 sensing circuit Clear DTC and re-test
intermittent high resistance Refer to the electrical circuit
Engine coolant temperature diagrams and check engine
sensor 1 failure coolant temperature sensor 1
circuit for intermittent high
resistance
Check and install a new engine
coolant temperature sensor 1 as
module/component

Circuit Range/Performance COOLANT_TEMP_SENSOR - datalogger signal, Engine Coolant
- Signal stuck high Temperature Sensor Voltage
Engine coolant temperature (0x0357)
sensor 1 sensing circuit Check for related DTC P2610- 87.
intermittent high resistance Start the engine and switch off.
Engine coolant temperature Clear DTC and re-test
sensor 1 failure Refer to the electrical circuit
Battery reset carried out when diagrams and check engine
the engine was warm/hot coolant temperature sensor 1
circuit for intermittent high
resistance
module/component
P0116- Engine Coolant Fill cooling system to correct level

29 Temperature Sensor 1 NOTE: - Circuit and specification
Circuit Range/Performance COOLANT_TEMP_SENSOR - Using the manufacturer approved
- Signal invalid diagnostic system check
Low coolant level datalogger signal, Engine Coolant
Engine coolant temperature Temperature Sensor Voltage
sensor 1 sensing circuit - (0x0357)
intermittent high resistance Refer to the electrical circuit
Engine coolant temperature diagrams and check engine
sensor 1 failure coolant temperature sensor 1
Possible airlock in cooling circuit for intermittent high
system resistance
Check and install new engine
module/component
Bleed cooling system

Circuit Low - Circuit COOLANT_TEMP_SENSOR - datalogger signal, Engine Coolant
voltage below threshold Temperature Sensor Voltage
sensor 1 circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit
ground diagrams and check engine
Engine coolant temperature coolant temperature sensor 1
sensor 1 failure circuit for short circuit to ground
Check and install a new Engine
module/component

Circuit High - Circuit COOLANT_TEMP_SENSOR - datalogger signal, Engine Coolant
voltage above threshold Temperature Sensor Voltage
sensor 1 circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit
power, open circuit, sensor diagrams and check engine
disconnected coolant temperature sensor 1
Engine coolant temperature circuit for short circuit to power,
sensor 1 failure open circuit, sensor disconnected
Check and install new engine
module/component
P0121- Throttle/Pedal Position Corrupt engine control module Using the manufacturer approved
00 Sensor A Circuit software flash diagnostic system check and
Range/Performance - No Engine control module power install latest relevant level of
sub type information supply circuit open circuit, high software to the engine control
resistance module
Engine control module damage Refer to the electrical circuit
through water ingress, internal diagrams and check engine control
fault module power supply circuit for
control module as required. Refer
module/component
P0122- Throttle/Pedal Position Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Sensor A Circuit Low - No NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check throttle
sub type information THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_1 - position sensor 1 circuit for short
circuit to ground, open circuit
Throttle position sensor 1 Clear DTC and repeat automated
circuit short circuit to ground, diagnostic procedure using the
open circuit manufacturer approved diagnostic
Throttle position sensor 1 system. If DTC remains suspect
failure the electronic throttle unit
Check and install a new electronic
throttle unit as required. Refer to
module/component

00 Sensor A Circuit High - No NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check throttle
sub type information THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_1 - position sensor 1 circuit for short
Throttle position sensor 1 power, open circuit
circuit short circuit to ground, Clear DTC and repeat automated
short circuit to power, open diagnostic procedure using the
circuit manufacturer approved diagnostic
Throttle position sensor 1 system. If DTC remains suspect
failure the electronic throttle unit
module/component
P0125- Insufficient Coolant Temp Coolant temperature sensor 1 Refer to the electrical circuit
00 For Closed Loop Fuel circuit, open circuit, high diagrams and check engine
Control - No sub type resistance coolant temperature sensor 1
information Engine coolant temperature circuit for open circuit, high
sensor 1 failure resistance
coolant temperature sensor 1.
module/component
P0126- Insufficient Coolant Temp Thermostat stuck open Refer to the electrical circuit
26 For Stable Operation - Coolant temperature coolant diagrams and check engine
Signal rate of change sensor circuit, short circuit to coolant temperature sensor 1
below threshold ground, short circuit to power, circuit for short circuit to ground,
open circuit short circuit to power, open circuit
Check for related coolant
temperature coolant sensor faults.
Check and install a new
thermostat as required. Refer to
module/component
P0128- Coolant Thermostat Thermostat stuck open Check for related coolant
00 (Coolant Temp Below Cooling fans running temperature coolant sensor faults
Thermostat Regulating continuously or at a high duty Check cooling fans for correct
Temperature) - No sub operation. Repair as required
type information Check and install a new
thermostat as required. Refer to
module/component
P0131- O2 Circuit Low Voltage Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor
00 (Bank 1, Sensor 1) - No disconnected odd connector is connected
sub type information Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd Refer to the electrical circuit
variable circuit, short circuit to diagrams and check pre-catalyst
ground oxygen sensor odd variable circuit
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd for short circuit to ground, open
variable circuit, open circuit circuit
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor
heater fault odd heater circuit
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd Check and install a new pre-
failure catalyst oxygen sensor odd as
module/component
P0131- O2 Sensor Circuit Low Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor

1A Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) NOTE: - Circuit odd connector is connected
- Circuit resistance below UHEGO_A_VARIABLE - Refer to the electrical circuit
threshold diagrams and check pre-catalyst
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd oxygen sensor odd variable circuit
disconnected for short circuit to ground, open
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd circuit
variable circuit, short circuit to Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor
ground odd heater circuit
variable circuit, open circuit catalyst oxygen sensor odd as
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd required. Refer to the warranty
heater fault policy and procedures manual, or
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd determine if any prior approval
failure programme is in operation, prior
module/component
P0132- O2 Sensor Circuit High Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor

1B Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) NOTE: - Circuit odd connector is connected
- Circuit resistance above UHEGO_A_VARIABLE - Refer to the electrical circuit
threshold diagrams and check pre-catalyst
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd oxygen sensor odd variable circuit
disconnected for short circuit to power, open
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd circuit
variable circuit, short circuit to Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor
power odd heater circuit
variable circuit, open circuit catalyst oxygen sensor odd as
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd required. Refer to the warranty
heater fault policy and procedures manual, or
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd determine if any prior approval
failure programme is in operation, prior
module/component
P0132- O2 Circuit High Voltage Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor
00 (Bank 1, Sensor 1) - No disconnected odd connector is connected
sub type information Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd Refer to the electrical circuit
variable circuit, short circuit to diagrams and check pre-catalyst
power oxygen sensor odd variable circuit
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd for short circuit to power, open
variable circuit, open circuit circuit
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor
heater fault odd heater circuit
failure catalyst oxygen sensor odd as
module/component
P0133- O2 Circuit Slow Response Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor

00 (Bank 1, Sensor 1) - No NOTE: - Circuit odd is correctly installed in
sub type information UHEGO_A_VARIABLE - exhaust manifold
Check for and rectify any exhaust
Exhaust leak leak between cylinder head and
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd catalytic converter
to engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit
wiring shield high resistance diagrams and check pre-catalyst
Fuel control system fault oxygen sensor odd to engine
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd control module wiring shield for
failure high resistance
Check fuel control system for
failure
Check and install a new pre-
catalyst oxygen sensor odd as
module/component
P0134- O2 Circuit No Activity Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Detected (Bank 1, Sensor NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check pre-catalyst
1) - No sub type UHEGO_A_VARIABLE - oxygen sensor odd circuit for
information short circuit to ground, short
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd circuit to power, open circuit
circuit short circuit to ground, Check and install a new pre-
short circuit to power, open catalyst oxygen sensor odd as
circuit required. Refer to the warranty
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd policy and procedures manual, or
failure determine if any prior approval
module/component
P0137- O2 Circuit Low Voltage Refer to the electrical circuit

00 (Bank 1, Sensor 2) - No NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check post catalyst
sub type information HEGO_SENSOR_A - oxygen sensor - odd, sensing
circuit for short circuit to ground,
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - high resistance, open circuit
odd, sensing circuit short Check for damaged or blocked
circuit to ground, high catalyst
resistance, open circuit Check for air leak between
Damaged or blocked catalyst catalyst and exhaust manifold
Air leak between catalyst and Check and install new post
exhaust manifold catalyst oxygen sensor - odd, as
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - required. Refer to the warranty
odd, failure policy and procedures manual, or
module/component
P0138- O2 Circuit High Voltage Refer to the electrical circuit

sub type information HEGO_SENSOR_A - oxygen sensor - odd, sensing
circuit for short circuit to power
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - Check post catalyst oxygen sensor
odd, sensing circuit short - odd, tip for damage, blockage,
circuit to power poisoned, install a new sensor as
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - required
odd, tip damaged, blocked, Check for blocked catalyst
poisoned Check and install new catalyst as
Catalyst blocked required. Check and install new
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - post catalyst oxygen sensor - odd,
odd, failure as required. Refer to the warranty
module/component
P0139- O2 Circuit Slow Response Check for excessive oil

00 (Bank 1, Sensor 2) - No NOTE: - Circuit consumption. Repair as required
sub type information HEGO_SENSOR_A - Check for related DTCs. Check
post catalyst oxygen sensor - odd,
Excessive oil consumption tip for damage, blockage,
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - poisoned, install a new sensor as
odd, tip damaged, blocked, required. Refer to the warranty
poisoned policy and procedures manual, or
module/component

00 Detected (Bank 1, Sensor NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check post catalyst
2) - No sub type HEGO_SENSOR_A - oxygen sensor - odd, sensing
information circuit for short circuit to ground,
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - short circuit to power, high
odd, sensing circuit short resistance, open circuit
circuit to ground, short circuit Check for air leak between
to power, high resistance, open catalyst and exhaust manifold
circuit Check post catalyst oxygen sensor
Air leak between catalyst and - odd, tip for damage, blockage,
exhaust manifold poisoned, install a new sensor as
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - required
odd, tip damaged, blocked, Check for excessive oil
poisoned consumption. Repair as required
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - Check and install new post
odd, failure catalyst oxygen sensor - odd, as
module/component
P0141- O2 Heater Circuit (Bank 1, Using the manufacturer approved

00 Sensor 2) - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit HTR_HEGO_A - diagnostic system check
information datalogger signal, Oxygen Sensor
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 1
odd, sensing circuit short Sensor 2 (0x03A2)
circuit to ground, short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
to power, high resistance, open diagrams and check post catalyst
circuit oxygen sensor - odd, sensing
Air leak between catalyst and circuit for short circuit to ground,
exhaust manifold short circuit to power, high
Catalyst oxygen sensor heater resistance, open circuit
circuit control relay failure Check for air leak between
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - catalyst and exhaust manifold
odd, failure Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check catalyst
oxygen sensor heater circuit
control relay circuit for short
power, open circuit
install new post catalyst oxygen
sensor - odd, as required. Refer to
module/component
P0148- Fuel Delivery Error - Signal Injector(s) circuit, short circuit Check for related injector DTCs
65 has too few transitions / to ground, short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit
events power, high resistance diagrams and check injector(s)
Injector(s) failure circuit for, short circuit to ground,
Engine control module internal short circuit to power, high
failure resistance
Check and install a new injector(s)
as required. Check and install a
new engine control module as
module/component
P0148- Fuel Delivery Error - Signal Injector(s) circuit, short circuit Check for related injector DTCs
66 has too many transitions / to ground, short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit
events power, high resistance diagrams and check injector(s)
failure resistance
module/component
P0149- Fuel Timing Error - Signal Injector(s) circuit, short circuit Check for related injector DTCs
32 low time < minimum to ground, short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit
power, high resistance diagrams and check injector(s)
failure resistance
module/component
P0149- Fuel Timing Error - Signal Injector(s) circuit, short circuit Check for related injector DTCs
35 high time > maximum to ground, short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit
power, high resistance diagrams and check injector(s)
failure resistance
module/component
P0151- O2 Sensor Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit

1A Voltage (Bank 2 Sensor 1) NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check pre-catalyst
- Circuit resistance below UHEGO_B_VARIABLE - oxygen sensor - even circuit for
threshold short circuit to ground
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor - Check and install new pre catalyst
even circuit short circuit to oxygen sensor - even. Refer to
ground the warranty policy and
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor - procedures manual, or determine
even failure if any prior approval programme is
module/component
P0152- O2 Sensor Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit

1B Voltage (Bank 2 Sensor 1) NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check pre-catalyst
- Circuit resistance above UHEGO_B_VARIABLE - oxygen sensor - even circuit for
threshold short circuit to power,
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor - disconnected
even circuit short circuit to Check and install new pre catalyst
power, disconnected oxygen sensor - even. Refer to
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor - the warranty policy and
even failure procedures manual, or determine
module/component
P0153- O2 Circuit Slow Response Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor

00 (Bank 2, Sensor 1) - No NOTE: - Circuit even is correctly installed in
sub type information UHEGO_B_VARIABLE - exhaust manifold
Check for and rectify any exhaust
Exhaust leak leak between cylinder head and
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor catalytic converter
even to engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit
wiring shield high resistance diagrams and check pre-catalyst
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor oxygen sensor even to engine
even to engine control module control module wiring shield for
signal circuit short circuit to high resistance
ground Refer to the electrical circuit
Fuel control system fault diagrams and check Pre-catalyst
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor oxygen sensor even to engine
even failure control module signal circuit for
Check fuel control system for
failure
catalyst oxygen sensor even as
module/component
P0154- O2 Circuit No Activity Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor

00 Detected (Bank 2, Sensor NOTE: - Circuit even is correctly installed in
1) - No sub type UHEGO_B_VARIABLE - exhaust manifold
information Refer to the electrical circuit
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor diagrams and check pre-catalyst
even to engine control module oxygen sensor even to engine
wiring shield high resistance control module wiring shield for
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor high resistance
even to engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit
signal circuit short circuit to diagrams and check pre-catalyst
ground, high resistance, open oxygen sensor even to engine
circuit control module signal circuit for
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor short circuit to ground, high
even failure resistance, open circuit
catalyst oxygen sensor even as
module/component
P0157- O2 Circuit Low Voltage Refer to the electrical circuit

sub type information HEGO_SENSOR_B - oxygen sensor - even, sensing
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - high resistance, open circuit
even, sensing circuit short Check for air leak between
circuit to ground, high catalyst and exhaust manifold
resistance, open circuit Check post catalyst oxygen sensor
Air leak between catalyst and - even, tip for damage, blockage,
exhaust manifold poisoned
even, tip damaged, blocked, catalyst oxygen sensor - even, as
poisoned required. Refer to the warranty
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - policy and procedures manual, or
even, failure determine if any prior approval
module/component
P0158- O2 Circuit High Voltage Refer to the electrical circuit

sub type information HEGO_SENSOR_B - oxygen sensor - even, sensing
circuit for short circuit to power
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - Check post catalyst oxygen sensor
even, sensing circuit short - even, tip for damage, blockage,
circuit to power poisoned
module/component
P0159- O2 Circuit Slow Response Check for excessive oil

00 (Bank 2, Sensor 2) - No NOTE: - Circuit consumption, repair as required
sub type information HEGO_SENSOR_B - Check post catalyst oxygen sensor
- even, tip for damage, blockage,
Excessive oil consumption poisoned, install a new sensor as
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - required. Refer to the warranty
even, tip damaged, blocked, policy and procedures manual, or
poisoned determine if any prior approval
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - programme is in operation, prior
even, failure to the installation of a new
module/component

00 Detected (Bank 2, Sensor NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check post catalyst
2) - No sub type HEGO_SENSOR_B - oxygen sensor - even, sensing
information circuit for short circuit to ground,
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - short circuit to power, high
even, sensing circuit short resistance, open circuit
circuit to ground, short circuit Check for air leak between
to power, high resistance, open catalyst and exhaust manifold
circuit Check post catalyst oxygen sensor
Air leak between catalyst and - even, tip for damage, blockage,
exhaust manifold poisoned
module/component
P0161- O2 Heater Circuit (Bank 2, Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Sensor 2) - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit HTR_HEGO_B - diagrams and check post catalyst
information oxygen sensor - even, sensing
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - circuit for short circuit to ground,
even, sensing circuit short short circuit to power, high
circuit to ground, short circuit resistance, open circuit
to power, high resistance, open Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit diagrams and check Post catalyst
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - oxygen sensor - even, sensing
even, sensing circuit fuse circuit fuse, replace as required
failure Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit control relay failure oxygen sensor heater circuit
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - control relay circuit for short
even, failure circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit
install new post catalyst oxygen
sensor - even, as required. Refer
module/component
P0171- System Too Lean (Bank 1) Air leak upstream of MAF/IAT Refer to the electrical circuit
00 - No sub type information sensor bank 1 diagrams and check MAF/IAT
MAF/IAT sensor bank 1 circuit sensor circuit, for short circuit to
failure ground, short circuit power, high
MAF/IAT sensor bank 1 failure resistance, open circuit
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit failure diagrams and check post catalyst
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd oxygen sensor - even, sensing
failure circuit for short circuit to ground,
Post-catalyst oxygen sensor short circuit power, high
odd circuit failure resistance, open circuit
Post-catalyst oxygen sensor Check for leak from air intake
odd failure system
Check for additional MAF/IAT
sensor bank 1 related DTCs and
refer to relevant DTC index
Check for additional pre-catalyst
oxygen sensor odd related DTCs
and refer to relevant DTC index
Check for additional post-catalyst
P0172- System Too Rich (Bank 1) Restricted air cleaner Refer to the electrical circuit
00 - No sub type information Leaking fuel injector(s) diagrams and check MAF/IAT
MAF/IAT sensor bank 1 failure sensor circuit, for short circuit to
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd ground, short circuit power, high
circuit failure resistance, open circuit
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd Refer to the electrical circuit
failure diagrams and check post catalyst
Post-catalyst oxygen sensor oxygen sensor - even, sensing
odd circuit failure circuit for short circuit to ground,
odd failure resistance, open circuit
from restriction
Check for leaking injectors, install
new injector(s) as required. Refer
module/component
P0174- System Too Lean (Bank 2) Air leak upstream of MAF/IAT Refer to the electrical circuit
00 - No sub type information sensor bank 2 diagrams and check MAF/IAT
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor Refer to the electrical circuit
even circuit failure diagrams and check post catalyst
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor oxygen sensor - even, sensing
even failure circuit for short circuit to ground,
even circuit failure resistance, open circuit
even failure system
oxygen sensor even related DTCs
P0175- System Too Rich (Bank 2) Restricted air cleaner Refer to the electrical circuit
00 - No sub type information Leaking fuel injector(s) diagrams and check MAF/IAT
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor Refer to the electrical circuit
even circuit failure diagrams and check post catalyst
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor oxygen sensor - even, sensing
even failure circuit for short circuit to ground,
even circuit failure resistance, open circuit
even failure system
P018B- Fuel Pressure Sensor B Using the manufacturer approved

29 Circuit Range/Performance NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check
- Signal invalid LOW_PRESS_FUEL_PRESS_SENSOR - datalogger signal, Fuel Rail
Fuel Filter or fuel system Voltage (0x0376)
restriction Check for related fuel pump DTCs
Fuel system leak Check the fuel system for
Fuel pump pressure sensor restrictions or blockages
circuit short circuit to ground, Refer to the electrical circuit
short circuit to power, open diagrams and check fuel pump
circuit, high resistance pressure sensor circuit for short
Fuel pump pressure sensor circuit to power, open circuit, high
failure resistance
module/component
P018C- Fuel Pressure Sensor B Using the manufacturer approved

00 Circuit Low - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check
information LOW_PRESS_FUEL_PRESS_SENSOR - datalogger signal, Fuel Rail
Fuel pump pressure sensor Voltage (0x0376)
Fuel pump pressure sensor circuit to power, short circuit to
failure ground, open circuit, high
resistance
module/component
P018D- Fuel Pressure Sensor B Using the manufacturer approved

00 Circuit High - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check
information LOW_PRESS_FUEL_PRESS_SENSOR - datalogger signal, Fuel Rail
Fuel pump pressure sensor Voltage (0x0376)
Fuel pump pressure sensor circuit to power, short circuit to
failure ground, open circuit, high
resistance
module/component

00 A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check
Range/Performance - No FUEL_HIGH_PRESS_SENSOR - datalogger signal, Fuel Rail
sub type information Pressure Sensor - High Range
Fuel rail pressure sensor short Sensor Voltage (0x0377)
to power, open circuit, high diagrams and check fuel rail
resistance pressure sensor A circuit for short
Fuel rail pressure sensor A circuit to power, short circuit to
failure ground, high resistance, open
circuit, terminal damage or
corrosion
Check and install a new fuel rail
pressure sensor A as required.
module/component

00 A Circuit Low - No sub NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check
type information FUEL_HIGH_PRESS_SENSOR - datalogger signal, Fuel Rail
corrosion
module/component

00 A Circuit High - No sub NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check
type information FUEL_HIGH_PRESS_SENSOR - datalogger signal, Fuel Rail
corrosion
module/component
P0196- Engine Oil Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

23 Sensor Range/Performance NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check
- Signal stuck low OIL_QUALITY_SENSOR - datalogger signal, Sump Oil
Temperature - Measured (0x03F3)
Oil temperature - level sensor Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit short circuit to ground, diagrams and check oil
high resistance temperature - level sensor circuit
Oil temperature - level sensor for short circuit to ground,
failure intermittent high resistance
Check and install new oil
temperature - level sensor as
module/component
P0196- Engine Oil Temperature Using the manufacturer approved

24 Sensor Range/Performance NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check
- Signal stuck high OIL_QUALITY_SENSOR - datalogger signal, Sump Oil
Oil temperature - level sensor Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit short circuit to power diagrams and check oil
Oil temperature - level sensor temperature - level sensor circuit
failure for intermittent short circuit to
power
Check and install new oil
temperature - level sensor as
module/component
P0200- Injector Circuit - System Engine control module injector Refer to the electrical circuit
04 internal failures circuit power failure diagrams and check engine control
Engine control module power module injector power circuit for
supply open circuit open circuit
Engine control module ground Refer to the electrical circuit
supply open circuit diagrams and check the power
and ground connections to the
module
Check for misfire DTCs, if present
suspect the engine control module
P0200- Injector Circuit - Internal Engine control module failure Check for misfire DTCs, if present
49 electronic failure suspect the engine control module
module/component
P0200- Injector Circuit - Over Engine control module failure If combined with misfire codes for
4B temperature one or both injector sets, then no
service rectification is proposed
module/component
P0201- Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit / Refer to the electrical circuit

13 Open - Circuit open NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1A - diagrams and check fuel injector
INJECTOR_1A_COMMON - no.1 circuit for open circuit,
disconnected injector, high
Fuel injector no.1 circuit open resistance
circuit
Injector disconnected
Injector high resistance

13 Open - Circuit open NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1B - diagrams and check fuel injector
INJECTOR_1B_COMMON - no.2 circuit for open circuit,
circuit

circuit

circuit
circuit

circuit

circuit

circuit

00 Sensor/Switch B Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check throttle/pedal
Low - No sub type THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_2 - position sensor/switch B circuit for
information open circuit, short circuit to
Throttle/pedal position ground
sensor/switch B circuit open Check and install a new
circuit, short circuit to ground throttle/pedal position
Throttle/pedal position sensor/switch B as required. Refer
sensor/switch B failure to the warranty policy and
module/component

00 Sensor/Switch B Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check throttle/pedal
High - No sub type THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_2 - position sensor/switch B circuit for
information open circuit, short circuit to power
Throttle/pedal position Check and install a new
sensor/switch B circuit open throttle/pedal position
circuit, short circuit to power sensor/switch B as required. Refer
Throttle/pedal position to the warranty policy and
sensor/switch B failure procedures manual, or determine
module/component
P0231- Fuel Pump Secondary Check for related DTCs P0232-24

23 Circuit Low - Signal stuck NOTE: - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
low HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2NEG diagrams and check fuel pump
- driver module signal circuit for
HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2POS short circuit to ground, open
- circuit
Fuel pump driver module signal diagrams and check fuel pump
circuit short circuit to ground, driver module is energized with
open circuit the ignition on. Repair as required
Fuel pump driver module is not Check and install a new fuel pump
energized with the ignition on driver module as required. Refer
Fuel pump driver module to the warranty policy and
module/component
P0232- Fuel Pump Secondary Check for related DTCs P0231-23

24 Circuit Low - Signal stuck NOTE: - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
high HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2NEG diagrams and check fuel pump
- driver module signal circuit for
HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2POS short circuit to ground, open
- circuit
Fuel pump driver module signal diagrams and check fuel pump
circuit short circuit to ground, driver module is energized with
open circuit the ignition on. Repair as required
Fuel pump driver module is not Check and install a new fuel pump
energized with the ignition on driver module as required. Refer
Fuel pump driver module to the warranty policy and
module/component
P0236- Turbocharger/Supercharger Check air cleaner element is free

00 Boost Sensor A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit from restriction
Range/Performance - No TMAP_PRESS_SENSOR - Check for leak from air intake
sub type information system, rectify as required
Blocked air cleaner element(s) Refer to the electrical circuit
Intake manifold air leak diagrams and check manifold
Manifold absolute pressure absolute pressure sensor 2 circuit
sensor 2 circuit short circuit to for short circuit to ground, short
ground, short circuit to power, circuit to power, open circuit, high
Engine breather leak Ensure the engine breather system
Carbon build up on throttle is correctly installed and in
plate serviceable condition
Exhaust system blocked Make sure throttle blade is clean of
Manifold absolute pressure carbon
sensor 2 failure Check for blocked exhaust
BARO sensor failure Check for related BARO sensor
DTC P0069-29
absolute pressure sensor 2 as
module/component
P0237- Turbocharger/Supercharger Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Boost Sensor A Circuit Low NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check manifold
- No sub type information TMAP_PRESS_SENSOR - absolute pressure sensor 2 circuit
for short circuit to ground, open
Manifold absolute pressure circuit, high resistance
sensor 2 circuit short circuit to Check and install a new manifold
ground, open circuit, high absolute pressure sensor 2 as
Manifold absolute pressure policy and procedures manual, or
sensor 2 failure determine if any prior approval
module/component
P0238- Turbocharger/Supercharger Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Boost Sensor A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check manifold
High - No sub type TMAP_PRESS_SENSOR - absolute pressure sensor 2 circuit
information for short circuit to power, open
Manifold absolute pressure circuit, high resistance
sensor circuit 2 short circuit to Check and install a new manifold
power, open circuit, high absolute pressure sensor 2 as
Manifold absolute pressure policy and procedures manual, or
module/component
P0251- Injection Pump Fuel Refer to the electrical circuit

13 Metering Control A - NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check fuel rail
Circuit open pressure sensor circuit for open
HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG
- circuit
-
Fuel rail pressure sensor

circuit, open circuit

11 Metering Control A Low - NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check fuel rail
Circuit short to ground HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG pressure sensor circuit for short
- circuit to ground
-

circuit, short circuit to ground

12 Metering Control A High - NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check fuel rail
Circuit short to battery HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG pressure sensor circuit for short
- circuit to power
-

circuit, short circuit to power

13 Metering Control B - NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check fuel rail
Circuit open HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG pressure sensor circuit for open
- circuit
-


11 Metering Control B Low - NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check fuel rail
Circuit short to ground HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG pressure sensor circuit for short
- circuit to ground
-


12 Metering Control B High - NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check fuel rail
Circuit short to battery HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG pressure sensor circuit for short
- circuit to power
-

P025C- Fuel Pump Module Control Refer to the electrical circuit

14 Circuit Low - Circuit short NOTE: - Circuit FPDM control - diagrams and check fuel pump
to ground or open driver module circuit short circuit
Fuel pump driver module to ground, open circuit
control circuit, short circuit to
P025D- Fuel Pump Module Control Refer to the electrical circuit

12 Circuit High - Circuit short NOTE: - Circuit FPDM control - diagrams and check fuel pump
to battery driver module circuit short circuit
Fuel pump driver module to power
control circuit, short circuit to
power
P0261- Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit

11 Low - Circuit short to NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1A - diagrams and check fuel injector
ground INJECTOR_1A_COMMON - no.1 circuit for short circuit to
ground
Fuel injector no.1 circuit short
circuit to ground

battery INJECTOR_1A_COMMON - no.1 circuit for short circuit to
power
circuit to power

01 High - General electrical NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1A - diagrams and check fuel injector
failure INJECTOR_1A_COMMON - no.1 circuit for short circuit to
circuit to ground, short circuit
to power

12 High - Circuit short to NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1A - diagrams and check fuel injector
power
circuit to power

11 Low - Circuit short to NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1B - diagrams and check fuel injector
ground INJECTOR_1B_COMMON - no.2 circuit for short circuit to
ground
circuit to ground

battery INJECTOR_1B_COMMON - no.2 circuit for short circuit to
power
circuit to power

01 High - General electrical NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1B - diagrams and check fuel injector
failure INJECTOR_1B_COMMON - no.2 circuit for short circuit to
to power

12 High - Circuit short to NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1B - diagrams and check fuel injector
power
circuit to power

ground
circuit to ground

power
circuit to power

to power

power
circuit to power
ground
circuit to ground

power
circuit to power

to power

power
circuit to power

ground
circuit to ground

power
circuit to power

to power

power
circuit to power

ground
circuit to ground

power
circuit to power

to power
power
circuit to power

ground
circuit to ground

power
circuit to power

to power

power
circuit to power

ground
circuit to ground

power
circuit to power

to power

power
circuit to power
P02EE- Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit

01 Range/Performance - NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1A - diagrams and check cylinder 1
General electrical failure INJECTOR_1A_COMMON - injector circuit for short circuit to
power, short circuit together
Cylinder 1 injector low circuit Check and install a new cylinder 1
short circuit to power injector as required. Refer to the
Cylinder 1 injector low circuit warranty policy and procedures
shorted to high circuit manual, or determine if any prior
Cylinder 1 injector failure approval programme is in
P02EE- Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit Using the manufacturer approved

1C Range/Performance - NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1A - diagnostic system, check engine
Circuit voltage out of range INJECTOR_1A_COMMON - control module, for related DTCs
and refer to the relevant DTC
Engine control module failure index
P02EF- Cylinder 2 Injector Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit

01 Range/Performance - NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1B - diagrams and check cylinder 2
General electrical failure INJECTOR_1B_COMMON - injector circuit for short circuit to
P02EF- Cylinder 2 Injector Circuit Using the manufacturer approved

1C Range/Performance - NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1B - diagnostic system, check engine
Circuit voltage out of range INJECTOR_1B_COMMON - control module, for related DTCs
P02F0- Cylinder 3 Injector Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit

P02F0- Cylinder 3 Injector Circuit Using the manufacturer approved











P0300- Random Misfire Detected - Poor fuel quality Using the manufacturer approved
00 No sub type information Catalyst/exhaust system diagnostic system, check engine
blockage control module, for related DTCs
Spark plug(s) fouled or failed and refer to the relevant DTC
Coil(s) failure index
Injector(s) circuit short circuit Check the fuel system for
to ground, short circuit to blockages, repair as required
power, open circuit Check the catalyst/exhaust system
Injector(s) failure for blockage, repair as required
Fuel system excessively too Check and install a new spark
lean or too rich plug(s) as required
Camshaft position sensor Check and install a new coil(s) as
failure required
diagrams and check injector(s)
short circuit to power, open circuit
as required
Check for air leaks within the
intake system
Check and install a new camshaft
module/component
P0301- Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected Poor fuel quality Using the manufacturer approved
00 - No sub type information Catalyst/exhaust system diagnostic system, check engine
failure required
as required
intake system
module/component
failure required
as required
intake system
module/component
failure required
as required
intake system
module/component
failure required
as required
intake system
module/component
failure required
as required
intake system
module/component
failure required
as required
intake system
module/component
failure required
as required
intake system
module/component
failure required
as required
intake system
module/component
P0313- Misfire Detected With Low Poor fuel quality Using the manufacturer approved
00 Fuel - No sub type Catalyst/exhaust system diagnostic system, check engine
information blockage control module, for related DTCs
failure required
as required
intake system
module/component
P0316- Misfire Detected On Poor fuel quality Using the manufacturer approved
00 Startup (First 1000 Catalyst/exhaust system diagnostic system, check engine
Revolutions) - No sub type blockage control module, for related DTCs
information Spark plug(s) fouled or failed and refer to the relevant DTC
failure required
as required
intake system
module/component
P0327- Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low Ensure a good electrical contact

00 (Bank1) - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit with the cylinder block
information KNOCK_SENSOR_1A_POS - Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check knock sensor
Poor sensor contact with the bank 1 front circuit for short
cylinder block circuit to ground, open circuit
Knock sensor bank 1 front Check and install a new knock
circuit short circuit to ground, sensor bank 1 front as required.
Knock sensor bank 1 front procedures manual, or determine
module/component
P0328- Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Ensure a good electrical contact

00 High (Bank 1) - No sub NOTE: - Circuit with the cylinder block
type information KNOCK_SENSOR_1A_POS - Refer to the electrical circuit
cylinder block circuit to power, high resistance
circuit high resistance, short sensor bank 1 front as required.
circuit to power Refer to the warranty policy and
module/component
P032C- Knock Sensor 3 Circuit Low Ensure a good electrical contact

information KNOCK_SENSOR_2A_POS - Refer to the electrical circuit
cylinder block circuit to ground
circuit short circuit to ground sensor bank 2 front as required.
Knock sensor bank 2 front Refer to the warranty policy and
module/component
P032D- Knock Sensor 3 Circuit Ensure a good electrical contact

00 High (Bank1) - No sub NOTE: - Circuit with the cylinder block
type information KNOCK_SENSOR_2A_POS - Refer to the electrical circuit
cylinder block circuit to power, high resistance
circuit high resistance, short sensor bank 2 front as required.
module/component
P0332- Knock Sensor 2 Circuit Low Ensure a good electrical contact

information KNOCK_SENSOR_1B_POS - Refer to the electrical circuit
Poor sensor contact with the bank 1 rear circuit for short circuit
cylinder block to ground, open circuit
Knock sensor bank 1 rear Check and install a new knock
circuit short circuit to ground, sensor bank 1 rear as required.
Knock sensor bank 1 rear procedures manual, or determine
module/component
P0333- Knock Sensor 2 Circuit Ensure a good electrical contact

type information KNOCK_SENSOR_1B_POS - Refer to the electrical circuit
cylinder block to power
circuit short circuit to power sensor bank 1 rear as required.
Knock sensor bank 1 rear Refer to the warranty policy and
module/component
P0335- Crankshaft Position Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit

02 A Circuit - General signal NOTE: - Circuit CRANK_SENSOR diagrams and check crankshaft
failure - position sensor circuit for short
Crankshaft position sensor power, high resistance,
circuit short circuit to ground, disconnected
short circuit to power, high Check and install new crankshaft
resistance, disconnected position as required. Refer to the
Crankshaft position sensor warranty policy and procedures
failure manual, or determine if any prior

31 A Circuit - No signal NOTE: - Circuit CRANK_SENSOR diagrams and check crankshaft
- position sensor circuit for short
circuit - short circuit to ground, disconnected
short circuit to power, high Check and install new crankshaft
resistance, disconnected position as required. Refer to the

00 A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit CRANK_SENSOR diagrams and check crankshaft
Range/Performance - No - position sensor circuit for short
sub type information circuit to ground, short circuit to
circuit short circuit to ground, disconnected
short circuit to power, high Check crankshaft position sensor
resistance, disconnected for damage and check air gap
Crankshaft position sensor gap (check at 90° intervals, should be
incorrect, foreign matter on no greater than 4.5mm)
sensor face, damaged teeth on Check and install new crankshaft
rotor position as required. Refer to the
P033C- Knock Sensor 4 Circuit Low Ensure a good electrical contact

00 (Bank 2) - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit with the cylinder block
information KNOCK_SENSOR_2B_POS - Refer to the electrical circuit
cylinder block to ground
circuit short circuit to ground sensor bank 2 rear as required.
Knock sensor bank 2 rear Refer to the warranty policy and
module/component
P033D- Knock Sensor 4 Circuit Ensure a good electrical contact

type information KNOCK_SENSOR_2B_POS - Refer to the electrical circuit
cylinder block to power, high resistance
circuit high resistance, short sensor bank 2 rear as required.
Knock sensor bank 2 rear procedures manual, or determine
module/component
P0340- Camshaft Position Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit

02 A Circuit (Bank 1 or single NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check camshaft
sensor) - General signal CAM_IN_SENSOR_A - position sensor bank 1 inlet sensor
failure circuit for short circuit to ground,
Camshaft position sensor bank short circuit to power, high
1 inlet sensor circuit short resistance, disconnected
circuit to ground, short circuit Check camshaft position sensor
to power, high resistance, bank 1 inlet sensor for correct
disconnected installation and damage
Camshaft position sensor bank Check and install a new camshaft
1 inlet sensor gap incorrect, position sensor bank 1 inlet as
foreign matter on sensor face, required. Refer to the warranty
damaged rotor policy and procedures manual, or
Camshaft position sensor bank determine if any prior approval
1 inlet sensor failure programme is in operation, prior
module/component
31 A Circuit (Bank 1 or single NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check camshaft
sensor) - No signal CAM_IN_SENSOR_A - position sensor bank 1 inlet sensor
module/component

00 A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check camshaft
Range/Performance (Bank CAM_IN_SENSOR_A - position sensor bank 1 inlet sensor
1 or single sensor) - No circuit for short circuit to ground,
sub type information Camshaft position sensor bank short circuit to power, high
module/component

02 A Circuit (Bank 2) - NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check camshaft
General signal failure CAM_IN_SENSOR_B - position sensor bank 2 inlet sensor
module/component

31 A Circuit (Bank 2) - No NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check camshaft
signal CAM_IN_SENSOR_B - position sensor bank 2 inlet sensor
2 inlet sensor circuit - short resistance, disconnected
module/component

00 A Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check camshaft
Range/Performance (Bank CAM_IN_SENSOR_B - position sensor bank 2 inlet sensor
2) - No sub type circuit for short circuit to ground,
information Camshaft position sensor bank short circuit to power, high
2 inlet sensor circuit - short resistance, disconnected
bank 2 inlet sensor for correct
to power, high resistance,
Camshaft position sensor bank Check target rotor for run out,
2 inlet sensor gap incorrect, repair as required
foreign matter on sensor face, Check and install a new camshaft
target rotor run-out position sensor bank 2 inlet as
Camshaft position sensor bank required. Refer to the warranty
2 inlet sensor failure policy and procedures manual, or
module/component
P0351- Ignition Coil A Refer to the electrical circuit

13 Primary/Secondary Circuit NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_1A - diagrams and check ignition coil 1
- Circuit open circuit for open circuit,
Ignition coil 1 open circuit disconnected ignition coil, high
Ignition coil 1 disconnected resistance
Ignition coil high resistance
P0352- Ignition Coil B Refer to the electrical circuit

13 Primary/Secondary Circuit NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_1B - diagrams and check ignition coil 2
P0353- Ignition Coil C Refer to the electrical circuit

P0354- Ignition Coil D Refer to the electrical circuit

P0355- Ignition Coil E Refer to the electrical circuit

P0356- Ignition Coil F Refer to the electrical circuit

P0357- Ignition Coil G Refer to the electrical circuit

P0358- Ignition Coil H Refer to the electrical circuit


02 B Circuit (Bank 1) - NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check camshaft
General signal failure CAM_EX_SENSOR_A - position sensor bank 1 outlet
sensor circuit for short circuit to
Camshaft position sensor bank ground, short circuit to power,
1 outlet sensor circuit short high resistance, disconnected
to power, high resistance, bank 1 outlet sensor for correct
1 outlet sensor gap incorrect, position sensor bank 1 outlet as
1 outlet sensor failure programme is in operation, prior
module/component

00 B Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check camshaft
Range/Performance (Bank CAM_EX_SENSOR_A - position sensor bank 1 outlet
1) - No sub type sensor circuit for short circuit to
information Camshaft position sensor bank ground, short circuit to power,
Camshaft position sensor bank Check target run-out, repair as
1 outlet sensor gap incorrect, required
target rotor run-out position sensor bank 1 outlet as
1 outlet sensor failure policy and procedures manual, or
module/component

02 B Circuit (Bank 2) - NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check camshaft
General signal failure CAM_EX_SENSOR_B - position sensor bank 2 outlet
sensor circuit for short circuit to
Camshaft position sensor bank ground, short circuit to power,
2 outlet sensor gap incorrect, position sensor bank 2 outlet as
2 outlet sensor failure programme is in operation, prior
module/component

00 B Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check camshaft
Range/Performance (Bank CAM_EX_SENSOR_B - position sensor bank 2 outlet
2) - No sub type sensor circuit for short circuit to
information Camshaft position sensor bank ground, short circuit to power,
Camshaft position sensor bank Check target rotor, repair as
2 outlet sensor gap incorrect, required
damaged rotor, rotor run-out position sensor bank 2 outlet as
2 outlet sensor failure policy and procedures manual, or
module/component
P0420- Catalyst System Efficiency Catalytic converter failure due Using the manufacturer approved
00 Below Threshold (Bank 1) - to overheating damage caused diagnostic system, check for
No sub type information by misfire and/or lean misfire/lean combustion related
combustion DTCs and refer to the relevant
Catalytic converter failure due DTC index
to poisoning caused by Check the oil and fuel
excessive oil consumption condition/level
and/or contaminated fuel Check the catalytic converter for
damage
Check and install a new catalytic
converter bank 1 as required.
module/component
P0430- Catalyst System Efficiency Catalytic converter failure due Using the manufacturer approved
00 Below Threshold (Bank 2) - to overheating damage caused diagnostic system, check for
No sub type information by misfire and/or lean misfire/lean combustion related
combustion DTCs and refer to the relevant
Catalytic converter failure due DTC index
to poisoning caused by Check the oil and fuel
excessive oil consumption condition/level
and/or contaminated fuel Check the catalytic converter for
damage
Check and install a new catalytic
converter bank 2 as required.
module/component
P0441- Evaporative Emission Check all evaporative emission

00 System Incorrect Purge NOTE: - Circuit PURGE_VALVE - system hoses, pipes and
Flow - No sub type connection are serviceable,
information Evaporative emission system repair/replace as required
hoses, pipes or connection Refer to the electrical circuit
failure diagrams and check purge control
Purge control valve circuit valve circuit for short circuit to
short circuit to ground, short ground, short circuit to power,
circuit to power, open circuit, open circuit
high resistance Check and install a new purge
Purge control valve failure control valve as required. Refer to
module/component
P0442- Evaporative Emission Fuel filler cap not Check fuel tank filler cap for
00 System Leak Detected sealing/missing sealing/missing. Check and install
(small leak)- No sub type Diagnostic module tank a new fuel tank filler cap as
information leakage connector not sealed required
Purge valve dirty Check evaporative emission
Evaporative emission system system for leak using appropriate
leak smoke/leak tester
Fuel tank, filler neck leak Carry out a purge valve self test
Diagnostic module tank to clean the purge valve
leakage module failure Check fuel tank and filler neck for
leakage, replace as required
Check and install a new diagnostic
module tank leakage module as
module/component
P0444- Evaporative Emission Refer to the electrical circuit

13 System Purge Control NOTE: - Circuit PURGE_VALVE - diagrams and check purge control
Valve Circuit Open - Circuit valve circuit for open circuit,
open Purge control valve open disconnected purge valve, high
circuit, high resistance, resistance
disconnected
P0447- Evaporative Emission NOTES: Refer to the electrical circuit

00 System Vent Control diagrams and check diagnostic
Circuit Open - No sub type module tank leakage module
information - Circuit COV - circuit for open circuit
Check diagnostic module tank
leakage module fuse and replace
LR - Circuit CHANGE OVER as required
VALVE - Check and install a new diagnostic
Diagnostic module tank required. Refer to the warranty
leakage module circuit open policy and procedures manual, or
circuit determine if any prior approval
Diagnostic module tank programme is in operation, prior
leakage module circuit fuse to the installation of a new
blown / not secure in holder module/component
Diagnostic module tank
leakage module failure
P0448- Evaporative Emission NOTES: Refer to the electrical circuit

00 System Vent Control diagrams and check diagnostic
Circuit Shorted - No sub module tank leakage module
type information - Circuit COV - circuit for short circuit to ground,
LR - Circuit CHANGE OVER module tank leakage module as
VALVE - required. Refer to the warranty
Diagnostic module tank determine if any prior approval
leakage module circuit, short programme is in operation, prior
circuit to ground, short circuit to the installation of a new
to power, open circuit module/component
leakage module failure
P0456- Evaporative Emission Fuel filler cap not Check fuel tank filler cap for
00 System Leak Detected sealing/missing sealing/missing. Check and install
(very small leak) - No sub Diagnostic module tank a new fuel tank filler cap as
type information leakage connector not sealed required
Purge valve dirty Check evaporative emission
Evaporative emission system system for leak using appropriate
leak smoke/leak tester
Fuel tank, filler neck leak Carry out a purge valve self test
Diagnostic module tank to clean the purge valve
leakage module failure Check fuel tank and filler neck for
leakage, replace as required
module/component

11 System Purge Control NOTE: - Circuit PURGE_VALVE - diagrams and check evaporative
Valve Circuit High - Circuit emission system purge control
short to ground Evaporative emission system valve circuit for short circuit to
purge control valve circuit ground

12 System Purge Control NOTE: - Circuit PURGE_VALVE - diagrams and check evaporative
Valve Circuit High - Circuit emission system purge control
short to battery Evaporative emission system valve circuit for short circuit to
purge control valve circuit power
P0461- Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit Fuel level sensor circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit
29 Range/Performance - circuit, short circuit to ground, diagrams and check fuel level
Signal invalid short circuit to power sensor circuit for short circuit to
Fuel level sensor stuck ground, short circuit to power,
Fuel level sensor failure open circuit
Check for stuck level sensor
Check and install a new fuel level
sensor as required. Refer to the
P0461- Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit Fuel level sensor circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit
2F Range/Performance - circuit to ground, short circuit diagrams and check fuel level
Signal erratic to power, open circuit sensor circuit for short circuit to
Fuel level sensor track ground, short circuit to power,
damaged open circuit
Fuel level sensor failure Check level sensor track for
damage
Check and install a new fuel level
sensor as required. Refer to the
P0480- Fan 1 Control Circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit

13 Circuit open NOTE: - Circuit VISCOUS FAN diagrams and check viscous fan
CTRL - control circuit for open circuit
Viscous fan control circuit,

open circuit
P0483- Fan Performance - No sub Refer to the electrical circuit

00 type information NOTE: - Circuit VISCOUS FAN diagrams and check viscous fan
CTRL - control circuit for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power,
Viscous fan control circuit, open circuit
short circuit to ground, short Check and install a new viscous
circuit to power, open circuit fan unit as required. Refer to the
Viscous fan unit hydraulic fluid warranty policy and procedures
leakage manual, or determine if any prior
P0493- Fan Overspeed (clutch Refer to the electrical circuit

00 locked) - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit VISCOUS FAN diagrams and check viscous fan
information CTRL - control circuit for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power,
Viscous fan control circuit, open circuit
P0500- Vehicle Speed Sensor A - Wheel speed sensor fault Check anti-lock braking system
81 Invalid serial data received module for related DTCs and refer
to relevant DTC index
P0500- Vehicle Speed Sensor A - Anti-lock braking system Check anti-lock braking system
82 Alive / sequence counter module not on bus module and engine control module
incorrect / not updated for related DTCs and refer to
relevant DTC index
diagrams and check anti-lock
braking system module circuit for
P0500- Vehicle Speed Sensor A - Incorrect level of anti-lock Clear DTC and re-test
83 Value of signal protection braking system module Using the manufacturer approved
calculation incorrect software diagnostic system check and
Incorrect level of engine install latest relevant level of
control module software software to the anti-lock braking
system module
diagnostic system check and
install latest relevant level of
software to the engine control
module
P0500- Vehicle Speed Sensor A - Anti-lock braking system Check anti-lock braking system
85 Signal above allowable module has reported a speed module for related DTCs and refer
range above 300 km/h to relevant DTC index
P0501- Vehicle Speed Sensor A Vehicle speed from the anti- Check engine control module for
62 Range/Performance - lock braking system module related vehicle speed DTCs and
Signal compare failure does not match the calculated refer to relevant DTC index
vehicle speed from the engine Check anti-lock braking system
control module module and transmission control
module for related DTCs and refer
to relevant DTC index
Check the vehicle tire sizes are
correct
P0504- Brake Switch A / B No brake pressure signal Check Anti-Lock braking module
00 Correlation - No sub type available from anti-lock braking for related DTCs and refer to
information module relevant DTC index
Brake switch 1 and Brake Check for brake fluid leaks
switch 2 sense circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to ground, short circuit diagrams and check anti-lock
to power, open circuit braking system module circuit for
Brake switch 1 failure short circuit to ground, short
diagrams and check brake switch
Check and install a new brake
switch 1 as required. Refer to the
P0504- Brake Switch A / B Check for brake fluid leaks

64 Correlation - Signal NOTE: - Circuit BRAKE_SW - Refer to the electrical circuit
plausibility failure BRAKE_SW_2 - diagrams and check brake switch
1 circuit for short circuit to brake
Brake fluid leak switch 2
Brake switch incorrectly Check brake switch is correctly
installed/adjusted installed and adjusted
Brake switch 1 sense circuit Check and install a new brake
short circuit to Brake switch 2 switch as required. Refer to the
sense warranty policy and procedures
Brake switch failure manual, or determine if any prior
P0506- Idle Air Control System Air intake restriction Ensure the air intake system is
00 RPM Lower Than Expected Front end accessory drive free from restriction
- No sub type information overload (defective/seized Check the front end accessory
component) drive belt and components for
failure, repair as required
24 RPM Lower Than Expected Air intake system air leak free from restriction
- Signal stuck high between MAF/IAT sensor and Check for air leak between
throttle MAF/IAT sensor and throttle
Intake air leak between throttle Check for air leak between throttle
and manifold and inlet manifold
Engine crankcase breather leak Check for engine breather system
Front end accessory drive leak
overload (defective/seized Check the front end accessory
component) drive belt and components for
failure
P0507- Idle Air Control System Air intake system air leak Check for air leak between
00 RPM Higher Than Expected between MAF/IAT sensor and MAF/IAT sensor and throttle
- No sub type information throttle Check for air leak between throttle
Intake air leak between throttle and inlet manifold
and manifold Check for engine breather system
Engine crankcase breather leak leak
23 RPM Higher Than Expected Air intake system air leak free from restriction
- Signal stuck low between MAF/IAT sensor and Check for air leak between
throttle MAF/IAT sensor and throttle
Intake air leak between throttle Check for air leak between throttle
and manifold and inlet manifold
Engine crankcase breather leak Check for engine breather system
leak
P050B- Cold Start Ignition Timing Ignition coil(s)faulty Refer to the electrical circuit
23 Performance - Signal stuck Ignition coils circuit noise diagrams and check ignition coil
low Engine control module failure circuit for short circuit to ground,
diagrams and check engine control
module to ignition coil circuit for
required
diagrams and check ignition coils
circuit for corrosion, high
resistance
module/component
P050B- Cold Start Ignition Timing Ignition coil(s)faulty Refer to the electrical circuit
24 Performance - Signal stuck Ignition coils circuit noise diagrams and check ignition coil
high Engine control module failure circuit for short circuit to ground,
module to ignition coil circuit for
required
diagrams and check ignition coils
circuit for corrosion, high
resistance
module/component
P050E- Cold Start Engine Exhaust Incorrect coolant temperature Check the correct coolant
00 Temperature Too Low - No sensor installed temperature sensor is installed
sub type information Coolant temperature sensor Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit short circuit to ground, diagrams and check coolant
open circuit temperature sensor circuit for
Coolant temperature sensor short circuit to ground, open
failure circuit
Check and install a new coolant
temperature sensor as required.
module/component
P0512- Starter Request Circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit

12 Circuit short to battery NOTE: - Circuit CRANK_REQUEST diagrams and check crank request
- circuit between engine control
module and central junction box
Crank request circuit between for short circuit to power
engine control module and
central junction box short
circuit to power
P0512- Starter Request Circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit

14 Circuit short to ground or NOTE: - Circuit CRANK_REQUEST diagrams and check crank request
open - circuit between engine control
module and central junction box
Crank request circuit between for short circuit to ground, open
engine control module and circuit
central junction box short
circuit to ground, open circuit
P0513- Incorrect Immobilizer Key Security key invalid Check for CAN network
00 - No sub type information Controller area network data interference/engine control module
corruption related error
Low battery voltage Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, complete a
Check the vehicle charging system
for faults, repair as required
P0526- Fan Speed Sensor Circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit

16 Circuit voltage below NOTE: - Circuit VISCOUS FAN diagrams and check viscous fan
threshold SPEED - circuit for short circuit to ground,
Viscous fan circuit, short circuit
power, open circuit
P0526- Fan Speed Sensor Circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit

17 Circuit voltage above NOTE: - Circuit VISCOUS FAN diagrams and check viscous fan
threshold SPEED - circuit for short circuit to ground,
Viscous fan circuit, short circuit
power, open circuit
P052A- Cold Start Intake (A) Check engine oil level and top up
00 Camshaft Position Timing NOTE: - Circuit as required
Over-Advanced (Bank 1) - CAM_IN_SENSOR_A - Refer to the electrical circuit
No sub type information diagrams and check intake valve
Engine oil pressure too low solenoid 1 sensor circuit for short
Intake valve solenoid 1 circuit circuit to ground, open circuit,
short circuit to ground, open high resistance
circuit, high resistance Check and install a new intake
Intake valve solenoid 1 failure valve solenoid 1 sensor as
Timing chains stretched required
beyond allowable limits Check service history /mileage
Check and install new timing
chains as required
module/component
P052B- Cold Start Intake (A) Check engine oil level and top up
Over-Retarded (Bank 1) - CAM_IN_SENSOR_A - Refer to the electrical circuit
chains as required
module/component
P052C- Cold Start Intake (A) Check engine oil level and top up
Over-Advanced (Bank 2) - CAM_IN_SENSOR_B - Refer to the electrical circuit
chains as required
module/component
P052D- Cold Start Intake (A) Check engine oil level and top up
Over-Retarded (Bank 2) - CAM_IN_SENSOR_B - Refer to the electrical circuit
chains as required
module/component
P054A- Cold Start Exhaust (B) Check engine oil level and top up
Over-Advanced (Bank 1) - CAM_EX_SENSOR_A - Refer to the electrical circuit
No sub type information diagrams and check exhaust valve
Exhaust valve solenoid 1 circuit circuit to ground, open circuit,
circuit, high resistance Check and install a new exhaust
Exhaust valve solenoid 1 valve solenoid 1 sensor as
failure required
Timing chains stretched Check service history /mileage
beyond allowable limits Check and install new timing
chains as required
module/component
P054B- Cold Start Exhaust (B) Check engine oil level and top up
Over-Retarded (Bank 1) - CAM_EX_SENSOR_A - Refer to the electrical circuit
failure required
chains as required
module/component
P054C- Cold Start Exhaust (B) Check engine oil level and top up
Over-Advanced (Bank 2) - CAM_EX_SENSOR_B - Refer to the electrical circuit
failure required
chains as required
module/component
P054D- Cold Start Exhaust (B) Check engine oil level and top up
Over-Retarded (Bank 2) - CAM_EX_SENSOR_B - Refer to the electrical circuit
failure required
chains as required
module/component
P0560- System Voltage - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit

13 open NOTE: - Circuit BATTERY - diagrams and check engine control
module power supply circuit for
Engine control module power open circuit
supply circuit, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
Engine control module battery diagrams and check engine control
monitor disconnected module battery monitor circuit for
open circuit
P0562- System Voltage Low - No Refer to the electrical circuit

00 sub type information NOTE: - Circuit BATTERY - diagrams and check battery circuit
for high resistance
Battery circuit high resistance Refer to the electrical circuit
Generator circuit open circuit, diagrams and check generator
high resistance circuit for open circuit, high
Generator failure resistance
Check and install a new generator
module/component
P0563- System Voltage High - No Refer to the electrical circuit

00 sub type information NOTE: - Circuit BATTERY - diagrams and check battery circuit
for high resistance
Battery circuit high resistance Check and install a new generator
Generator over charging as required. Refer to the warranty
module/component
P0572- Brake Switch A Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit

17 - Circuit voltage above NOTE: - Circuit BRAKE_SW - diagrams and check brake switch
threshold 2 circuit for short circuit to ground
Brake switch 2 sense circuit Check brake switch is correctly
short circuit to ground installed and adjusted
Brake switch incorrectly Ensure customer is not driving
installed/adjusted with foot resting on brake pedal
Customer is driving with foot Check and install a new brake
resting on brake pedal switch as required. Refer to the
Brake switch 2 failure warranty policy and procedures
P0573- Brake Switch A Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit

16 High - Circuit voltage NOTE: - Circuit BRAKE_SW - diagrams and check brake switch
below threshold 1 circuit for open circuit
Brake switch 1 sense circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
short circuit to ground diagrams and check brake switch
Brake switch 2 sense circuit 2 circuit for open circuit
open circuit Check brake switch is correctly
Brake switch incorrectly installed and adjusted
installed/adjusted Ensure customer is not driving
Customer is driving with foot with foot resting on brake pedal
resting on brake pedal Check and install a new brake
Brake switch 2 failure switch as required. Refer to the
P0578- Cruise Control Multi- Speed control circuit, output Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Function Input A Circuit signal stuck diagrams and check speed control
Stuck - No sub type Speed control switch stuck switch circuit for short circuit to
information ground
Check for stuck speed control
switch, install a new switch pack
module/component
P057B- Brake Pedal Position Brake pressure signal missing Check the anti-lock braking
87 Sensor Circuit from anti-lock braking system system control module for related
Range/Performance - control module DTCs and refer to the relevant
Missing message DTC index
P0590- Cruise Control Multi- Active speed limiter switch Check for active speed limiter
00 Function Input B Circuit stuck DTCs within gear shift module
Stuck - No sub type Check and install a new gear shift
information module as required. Refer to the
P0600- Serial Communication Link Corrupt engine control module Using the manufacturer approved
49 - Internal electronic failure software diagnostic system check and
Engine control module power install latest relevant level of
supply fault software to the engine control
Engine control module damage module
through water ingress Check engine control module
power supply circuit for open
circuit
Check engine control module for
signs of water ingress
module/component
P0601- Internal Control Module Corrupt engine control module Using the manufacturer approved
43 Memory Check Sum Error - software flash diagnostic system check and
Special memory failure Engine control module power install latest relevant level of
circuit
module/component
45 Memory Check Sum Error - software flash diagnostic system check and
Program memory failure Engine control module power install latest relevant level of
circuit
module/component
42 Random Access Memory software flash diagnostic system check and
(RAM) Error - General Engine control module power install latest relevant level of
memory failure supply fault software to the engine control
circuit
module/component
(RAM) Error - Special Engine control module power install latest relevant level of
circuit
module/component
(RAM) Error - Data Engine control module power install latest relevant level of
circuit
module/component
00 Read Only Memory (ROM) software flash diagnostic system check and
Error - No sub type Engine control module power install latest relevant level of
information supply fault software to the engine control
circuit
module/component
Error - Signal invalid Engine control module power install latest relevant level of
circuit
module/component
Error - General memory Engine control module power install latest relevant level of
failure supply fault software to the engine control
circuit
module/component
Error - Data memory Engine control module power install latest relevant level of
circuit
module/component
Error - Calibration / Engine control module power install latest relevant level of
parameter memory failure supply fault software to the engine control
circuit
module/component
Error - Supervision Engine control module power install latest relevant level of
software failure supply fault software to the engine control
circuit
module/component
Error - Signal plausibility Engine control module power install latest relevant level of
circuit
module/component
P0606- Control Module Processor - Corrupt engine control module Using the manufacturer approved
01 General electrical failure software flash diagnostic system check and
circuit
module/component
04 System internal failures software flash diagnostic system check and
circuit
module/component
05 System programming software flash diagnostic system check and
failures Engine control module power install latest relevant level of
circuit
module/component
41 General checksum failure software flash diagnostic system check and
circuit
module/component
42 General memory failure software flash diagnostic system check and
circuit
module/component
43 Special memory failure software flash diagnostic system check and
circuit
module/component
44 Data memory failure software flash diagnostic system check and
circuit
module/component
47 Watchdog / safety micro software flash diagnostic system check and
controller failure Engine control module power install latest relevant level of
circuit
module/component
48 Supervision software software flash diagnostic system check and
failure Engine control module power install latest relevant level of
circuit
module/component
49 Internal electronic failure software flash diagnostic system check and
circuit
module/component
P0607- Control Module Corrupt engine control module Using the manufacturer approved
00 Performance - No sub type software flash diagnostic system check and
information Engine control module power install latest relevant level of
circuit
module/component
P0610- Control Module Vehicle Corrupt engine control module Clear the DTC and re-test
43 Options Error - Special software flash Using the manufacturer approved
memory failure Corrupt rear junction box diagnostic system check and
software flash install latest relevant level of
Corrupt central junction box software to the engine control
software flash module
Re-configure the rear junction box
using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
Re-configure the central junction
box using the manufacturer
P0615- Starter Relay Circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit

13 Circuit open NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check starter relay
STARTER_RELAY_NEG - control circuit for open circuit
Check and install a new starter
Starter relay control circuit relay as required. Refer to the
open circuit warranty policy and procedures
Starter relay failure manual, or determine if any prior
P0616- Starter Relay Circuit Low - Refer to the electrical circuit

11 Circuit short to ground NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check starter relay
STARTER_RELAY_NEG - control circuit for short circuit to
ground
Starter relay control circuit Check and install a new starter
short circuit to ground relay as required. Refer to the
Starter relay failure warranty policy and procedures
P0617- Starter Relay Circuit High - Refer to the electrical circuit

12 Circuit short to battery NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check starter relay
STARTER_RELAY_NEG - control circuit for short circuit to
power
Starter relay control circuit Check and install a new starter
short circuit to power relay as required. Refer to the
Starter relay failure warranty policy and procedures
P061A- Internal Control Module Manifold air flow sensor(s) Check for related DTCs
00 Torque Performance - No failure Check manifold air flow sensors
sub type information Electronic throttle unit failure are reading correctly
air flow sensor(s) as required
Check throttle position sensors are
reading the same position
Check throttle body is clear of any
deposits
module/component
P061A- Internal Control Module Manifold air flow sensor(s) Check for related DTCs
04 Torque Performance - failure Check manifold air flow sensors
System internal failures Electronic throttle unit failure are reading correctly
air flow sensor(s) as required
Check throttle position sensors are
reading the same position
deposits
module/component
P061A- Internal Control Module Intake system air leak Check for related DTCs
29 Torque Performance - Manifold air flow sensor(s) Check intake air system for leaks
Signal invalid failure Check manifold air flow sensors
Throttle position sensors are are reading correctly
reading incorrectly Check and install a new air flow
Electronic throttle unit failure sensor(s) as required
Atmospheric pressure sensor Check throttle position sensors are
failure reading the same position
deposits
throttle unit as required
module/component
P061A- Internal Control Module Intake system air leak Check for related DTCs
64 Torque Performance - Manifold air flow sensor(s) Check intake air system for leaks
Signal plausibility failure failure and is correctly installed
Check manifold air flow sensors
are reading correctly
air flow sensor(s) as required.
module/component
P061B- Internal Control Module Intake system air leak Check intake air system for leaks
62 Torque Calculation Engine breather system leak Check engine breather system for
Performance - Signal Manifold air flow sensor failure leaks
compare failure Electronic throttle unit failure Check throttle position sensors are
Throttle position sensors are reading the same position
reading incorrectly Check and install a new manifold
Atmospheric pressure sensor air flow sensor as required
failure Check and install a new electronic
throttle unit as required
module/component
P0620- Generator Control Circuit - Check for good/clean contact at

01 General electrical failure NOTE: - Circuit LIN_A - generator B+ and battery terminal
connectors
Generator B+ or battery Refer to the electrical circuit
terminal disconnected/poor diagrams and check charging
connection circuit for short circuit, open
Charging circuit short, open circuit
circuit Clear DTC and repeat automated
Generator failure diagnostic procedure using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
If DTC remains, check and install
a new generator as required.
module/component
P0627- Fuel Pump A Control Refer to the electrical circuit

00 Circuit / Open - No sub NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check high pressure
type information HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG fuel pump 1 circuit for short circuit
to ground, short circuit to power,
High pressure fuel pump 1 open circuit, high resistance
circuit to fuel pump driver
module short circuit to ground,
P062A- Fuel Pump A Control Invalid fuel pump duty Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Circuit Range/Performance requested by the engine diagrams and check the fuel pump
- No sub type information control module driver module circuit for short
resistance
P0630- VIN Not Programmed or Car configuration file to CAN Using the manufacturer approved
00 Incompatible - ECM/PCM - VIN mismatch diagnostic system check and
No sub type information New engine control module install latest relevant level of
fitted and incorrectly software to the engine control
configured module, clear DTC and re-test
New central junction box fitted Re-configure the central junction
and incorrectly configured box using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, clear
DTC and re-test
P0634- PCM / ECM/ TCM Internal Engine control module internal Clear the DTC. With the ignition
22 Temperature Too High - temperature too high off, wait 10 minutes and re-check
Signal amplitude > DTC
maximum Check the engine control module
does not have additional external
covering or obstructions which
may cause overheating
module/component
P0634- PCM / ECM / TCM Internal Engine control module internal Clear the DTC. With the ignition
4B Temperature A Too High - temperature too high off, wait 10 minutes and re-check
Over temperature DTC
Check the engine control module
does not have additional external
covering or obstructions which
may cause overheating
module/component
P0642- Sensor Reference Voltage Refer to the electrical circuit

00 A Circuit Low - No sub NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check 5V supply
type information SENSOR_5V_SUPPLY - circuit for short circuit to ground
open circuit, high resistance,
Short circuit to power of a 5V terminal damage or corrosion
output pin, either in the Check engine control module for
harness, or a connector sensor related DTCs and refer to
Internal short circuit in a faulty the relevant DTC index
component
P0643- Sensor Reference Voltage Refer to the electrical circuit

00 A Circuit High - No sub NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check 5V supply
type information SENSOR_5V_SUPPLY - circuit for short circuit to power
open circuit, high resistance,
Short circuit to ground of a 5V terminal damage or corrosion
output pin, either in the Check engine control module for
harness, or a connector sensor related DTCs and refer to
Internal short circuit in a faulty the relevant DTC index
component
P0657- Actuator Supply Voltage A NOTES: Refer to the electrical circuit

13 Circuit / Open - Circuit diagrams and check intake
open manifold tuning solenoid circuit for
Jaguar - Circuit IMTV - open circuit
LR - Circuit MANIFOLD TUNING

VALVE -
Intake manifold tuning solenoid


11 Circuit Low - Circuit short diagrams and check intake
to ground manifold tuning solenoid circuit for
Jaguar - Circuit IMTV - short circuit to ground
VALVE -


12 Circuit High - Circuit short diagrams and check intake
to battery manifold tuning solenoid circuit for
Jaguar - Circuit IMTV - short circuit to power

VALVE -

P065B- Generator Control Circuit Check for good/clean contact at

16 Range/Performance - NOTE: - Circuit LIN_A - generator B+ and battery terminal
Circuit voltage below connectors
threshold Generator B+ or battery Refer to the electrical circuit
terminal disconnected/poor diagrams and check charging
connection circuit for short circuit, open
Charging circuit short, open circuit
circuit Ensure the battery is in a fully
Generator failure charged and serviceable condition.
Battery failure Refer to the battery care manual
and the relevant sections of the
workshop manual
Clear DTC and repeat automated
system. If DTC remains, check
and install a new generator as
module/component
P065B- Generator Control Circuit Check for good/clean contact at

17 Range/Performance - NOTE: - Circuit LIN_A - generator B+ and battery terminal
Circuit voltage above connectors
threshold Charging circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit
power diagrams and check charging
Generator failure circuit for short circuit, open
Battery failure circuit
Ensure the battery is in a fully
charged and serviceable condition.
Refer to the battery care manual
workshop manual
Clear DTC and repeat automated
system. If DTC remains, check
and install a new generator as
module/component
P065C- Generator Mechanical Check front end accessory belt for

00 Performance - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit LIN_A - condition/contamination and
information correct tension
Poor front end accessory belt Check generator pulley for failure
tension Clear DTC and repeat automated
Generator pulley loose/failure diagnostic procedure using
Generator failure manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
If DTC remains check and install a
new generator as required. Refer
module/component
P0660- Intake Manifold Tuning NOTES: Refer to the electrical circuit

13 Valve Control Circuit Low - diagrams and check intake
Bank 1 - Circuit open manifold tuning valve circuit for
- Circuit IMTV - open circuit

VALVE -
Intake manifold tuning valve


11 Valve Control Circuit Low - diagrams and check intake
Bank 1 - Circuit short to manifold tuning valve circuit for
ground - Circuit IMTV - short circuit to ground

VALVE -

circuit short circuit to ground

12 Valve Control Circuit Low - diagrams and check manifold
Bank 1 - Circuit short to tuning valve circuit for short
battery - Circuit IMTV - circuit to power

VALVE -

P0668- PCM / ECM / TCM Internal Engine control module internal Check and install a new engine
00 Temperature Sensor A temperature sensor failure control module as required. Refer
Circuit Low - No sub type to the warranty policy and
information procedures manual, or determine
module/component
P0669- PCM / ECM / TCM Internal Engine control module internal Check and install a new engine
00 Temperature Sensor A temperature sensor failure control module as required. Refer
Circuit High - No sub type to the warranty policy and
information procedures manual, or determine
module/component
P0687- ECM/PCM Power Relay Refer to the electrical circuit

73 Control Circuit High - NOTE: - Circuit EMS_MAIN_RLY - diagrams and check engine control
Actuator stuck closed module relay circuit for short
Engine control module relay circuit to power
circuit short circuit to power Check and install a new engine
Engine control module relay control module relay as required.
failure Refer to the warranty policy and
module/component
P0691- Fan 1 Control Circuit Low - Refer to the electrical circuit

11 Circuit short to ground NOTE: LR - Circuit VISCOUS FAN diagrams and check viscous fan
CTRL - circuit for short circuit to ground
Check and install a new viscous
Viscous fan circuit, short circuit fan as required. Refer to the
to ground warranty policy and procedures
Viscous fan control module manual, or determine if any prior
failure approval programme is in
P0692- Fan 1 Control Circuit High Refer to the electrical circuit

12 - Circuit short to battery NOTE: LR - Circuit VISCOUS FAN diagrams and check viscous fan
CTRL - circuit for short circuit to power
Check and install a new viscous
Viscous fan circuit, short circuit fan as required. Refer to the
to power warranty policy and procedures
Viscous fan control module manual, or determine if any prior
failure approval programme is in
P0721- Output Shaft Speed Transmission control module Check transmission control module
85 Sensor Circuit has reported a fault in the for related DTCs and refer to
Range/Performance - shaft speed signal relevant DTC index
Signal above allowable
range
P0721- Output Shaft Speed Transmission control module Check transmission control module
86 Sensor Circuit has taken to 8 seconds or for related DTCs and refer to
Range/Performance - longer to change range relevant DTC index
Signal invalid
P0724- Brake Switch B Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
17 High - Circuit voltage NOTE: - Circuit BRAKE_SW - diagrams and check brake switch
above threshold 1 circuit for short circuit to power
Brake switch 1 sense circuit Check brake switch is correctly
short circuit to power installed and adjusted
Brake switch incorrectly Ensure customer is not driving
installed/adjusted with foot resting on brake pedal
Customer is driving with foot Check and install a new brake
resting on brake pedal switch as required. Refer to the
Brake switch 1 failure warranty policy and procedures
P0850- Park / Neutral Switch Input Check gear shift module for
86 Circuit - Signal invalid NOTE: - Circuit PN_SW - related DTCs and refer to relevant
DTC index
Intermittent fault on Refer to the electrical circuit
Park/Neutral signal from gear diagrams and check Park/Neutral
shift module switch input circuit for short circuit
CAN network failure between to ground, short circuit to power,
gear shift module and engine open circuit
control module Using the manufacturer approved
P0850- Park / Neutral Switch Input Check gear shift module for
8F Circuit - Erratic NOTE: - Circuit PN_SW - related DTCs and refer to relevant
DTC index
Intermittent fault on Refer to the electrical circuit
Park/Neutral signal from gear diagrams and check Park/Neutral
shift module switch input circuit for short circuit
CAN network failure between to ground, short circuit to power,
gear shift module and engine open circuit
control module Using the manufacturer approved
P0851- Park / Neutral Switch Input Refer to the electrical circuit

14 Circuit Low - Circuit short NOTE: - Circuit PN_SW - diagrams and check park/neutral
to ground or open switch input circuit for short circuit
Park/Neutral switch input to ground, open circuit
circuit short circuit to ground,
open circuit
P0852- Park / Neutral Switch Input Refer to the electrical circuit

12 Circuit Low - Circuit short NOTE: - Circuit PN_SW - diagrams and check park/neutral
to battery switch input circuit for short circuit
Park/Neutral switch input to power
P0A1A- Generator Control Module - Check for good/clean contact at

87 Missing message NOTE: - Circuit LIN_A - generator and engine control
module LIN circuit connectors/pins
Generator to engine control Refer to the electrical circuit
module LIN circuit open circuit diagrams and check generator
circuit for open circuit
Check for engine control module
hardware DTCs and refer to
relevant DTC index
Clear DTCs and repeat automated
system
P0A1A- Generator Control Module - Check for good/clean contact at

88 Bus off NOTE: - Circuit LIN_A - generator and engine control
module LIN circuit connectors/pins
Generator to engine control Refer to the electrical circuit
module LIN circuit open circuit diagrams and check generator
Check for engine control module
hardware DTCs and refer to
relevant DTC index
Clear DTCs and repeat automated
system
P0A3B- Generator Over Cooling fan not operating Check for correct cooling fan
00 Temperature - No sub type Coolant level low operation
information Check coolant level. Clear DTC
and re-test
P0A3B- Generator Over Cooling fan not operating Check for correct cooling fan
68 Temperature - Event Coolant level low operation
information Check coolant level. Clear DTC
and re-test
P115D- Mass Air Flow Circuit Using the manufacturer approved

00 Offset - No sub type NOTE: - Circuit MAF_SENSOR_A diagnostic system check
information - MAF_SENSOR_B - datalogger signal, Mass Air Flow
Sensor 2 Voltage (0x0503)
Check air cleaner for blockage
NOTE: Customer likely to Check air intake system for leaks
report hesitation. Check engine breather system for
blockages
Air cleaner blocked Check for carbon build up on
Air intake leak throttle blade
Engine breather blocked Check for related mass air flow
Air intake blockage DTCs P0102 or P0103
Carbon build up on throttle Refer to the electrical circuit
Mass air flow sensor circuit, sensor circuit for high resistance
high resistance Check and install a new mass air
Blocked catalyst(s) flow sensor as required. Refer to
Mass air flow sensor failure the warranty policy and
module/component
P1315- Persistent Misfire - No sub Engine control module to Check for cylinder mis-fire,
00 type information ignition coil primary circuit ignition and injector DTCs and
fault (cylinder misfire detected refer to the DTC index
DTC also flagged) Refer to the electrical circuit
Fuel injector circuit fault(s) diagrams and check ignition coil
(injector DTCs also flagged) circuit for short circuit to ground,
Fuel delivery pressure low short circuit to power, open circuit
Spark plug Check for fuel system failure
failure/fouled/incorrect gap Check and install a new spark
Ignition coil failure plug(s) as required
Cylinder compression low Check and install a new ignition
Exhaust system blockage coil as required
Carry out cylinder compression
tests
Check exhaust system for
blockage
module/component
P1316- Injector Driver Module Engine control module to Check for cylinder mis-fire,
00 Codes Detected - No sub ignition coil primary circuit ignition and injector DTCs and
type information fault (cylinder misfire detected refer to the DTC index
DTC also flagged) Refer to the electrical circuit
Fuel injector circuit fault(s) diagrams and check ignition coil
(injector DTCs also flagged) circuit for short circuit to ground,
Fuel delivery pressure low short circuit to power, open circuit
Spark plug Check for fuel system failure
failure/fouled/incorrect gap Check and install a new spark
Ignition coil failure plug(s) as required
Cylinder compression low Check and install a new ignition
Exhaust system blockage coil as required
Carry out cylinder compression
tests
Check exhaust system for
blockage
module/component
P1593- Cruise Control Monitor Speed control monitor fault. Using the manufacturer approved
64 Fault - Signal plausibility The engine control module diagnostic system check and up-
failure performs a independent check date the car configuration file as
of the cruise status required. Clear the DTC and
retest. If the problem persists,
contact dealer technical support
P1603- EEPROM Malfunction - No Corrupt engine control module Using the manufacturer approved
00 sub type information software flash diagnostic system check and
through water ingress Refer to the electrical circuit
module power supply circuit for
open circuit
module/component
P2088- A Camshaft Position Refer to the electrical circuit

11 Actuator Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_A - diagrams and check intake valve
Low Bank 1 - Circuit short solenoid 1 for short circuit to
to ground Intake valve solenoid 1 short ground
circuit to ground

12 Actuator Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_A - diagrams and check intake valve
High Bank 1 - Circuit short solenoid 1 for short circuit to
to battery Intake valve solenoid 1 short power
circuit to power
P2090- B Camshaft Position Refer to the electrical circuit

11 Actuator Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A - diagrams and check exhaust valve
to ground Exhaust valve solenoid 1 short ground
circuit to ground

12 Actuator Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A - diagrams and check exhaust valve
to battery Exhaust valve solenoid 1 short power
circuit to power

11 Actuator Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_B - diagrams and check intake valve
to ground Intake valve solenoid 2 short ground
circuit to ground

12 Actuator Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_B - diagrams and check intake valve
to battery Intake valve solenoid 2 short power
circuit to power

11 Actuator Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_B - diagrams and check exhaust valve
to ground Exhaust valve solenoid 2 short ground
circuit to ground

12 Actuator Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_B - diagrams and check exhaust valve
to battery Exhaust valve solenoid 2 short power
circuit to power
P2096- Post Catalyst Fuel Trim Refer to the electrical circuit

00 System Too Lean Bank 1 - NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check post catalyst
No sub type information HEGO_SENSOR_A - oxygen sensor - odd, sensing
Post catalyst oxygen sensor high resistance, open circuit
odd, sensing circuit short Check for air leak between
resistance, open circuit Check for air leak between the
Air leak between catalyst and two oxygen sensors
exhaust manifold Check and install new post
Air leak between the two catalyst oxygen sensor odd, as
oxygen sensors required. Refer to the warranty
Post catalyst oxygen sensor policy and procedures manual, or
odd, failure determine if any prior approval
module/component

00 System Too Rich Bank 1 - NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check post catalyst
No sub type information HEGO_SENSOR_A - oxygen sensor - odd, sensing
odd, sensing circuit short Check for air leak between
Air leak between the two catalyst oxygen sensor odd, as
odd, failure determine if any prior approval
module/component

00 System Too Lean Bank 2 - NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check post catalyst
No sub type information HEGO_SENSOR_B - oxygen sensor even, sensing
Air leak between the two catalyst oxygen sensor even, as
module/component

00 System Too Rich Bank 2 - NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check post catalyst
No sub type information HEGO_SENSOR_B - oxygen sensor even, sensing
Air leak between the two catalyst oxygen sensor even, as
module/component
P2105- Throttle Actuator Control Check for any DTCs relating to

00 System - Forced Engine NOTE: - Circuit engine control module, throttle
Shutdown - No sub type THROTTLE_MOTOR_NEG - pedal position sensor, or torque
information THROTTLE_MOTOR_POS - faults and refer to the DTC index
Engine speed or torque

limitation has been activated
as a result of engine control
module, throttle pedal position
sensor, or torque faults
P2118- Throttle Actuator Control Refer to the electrical circuit

19 Motor Current NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check electronic
Range/Performance - THROTTLE_MOTOR_NEG - throttle unit circuit for short circuit
Circuit current above THROTTLE_MOTOR_POS - to ground, short circuit to power,
threshold high resistance
Throttle motor control circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
short circuit to ground, short diagrams and check engine control
circuit to power, high module ground circuit for faults
resistance Make sure throttle blade is clean of
Engine control module ground carbon
circuit fault Check the system is operating
Carbon build-up on throttle correctly and the DTC does not
blade return
Electronic throttle unit failure Check and install a new electronic
module/component
P2119- Throttle Actuator Control Make sure throttle blade is clean of

00 Throttle Body NOTE: - Circuit carbon
Range/Performance - No THROTTLE_MOTOR_NEG - Refer to the electrical circuit
sub type information THROTTLE_MOTOR_POS - diagrams and check engine control
module ground circuit for faults
Carbon build-up on throttle Check the system is operating
blade correctly and the DTC does not
Engine control module ground return
circuit fault Check and install a new electronic
Electronic throttle unit return throttle unit as required. Refer to
spring faulty the warranty policy and
Electronic throttle unit limp procedures manual, or determine
home spring faulty if any prior approval programme is
module/component
P2119- Throttle Actuator Control Ensure throttle blade is free of any

29 Throttle Body NOTE: - Circuit carbon build-up / other
Range/Performance - THROTTLE_MOTOR_NEG - obstructions
Signal invalid THROTTLE_MOTOR_POS - Check the system is operating
correctly and the DTC does not
Stuck / sticking throttle blade return
module/component
P2119- Throttle Actuator Control Ensure throttle blade is free of any

64 Throttle Body NOTE: - Circuit carbon build-up / other
Range/Performance - THROTTLE_MOTOR_NEG - obstructions
Signal plausibility failure THROTTLE_MOTOR_POS - Check the system is operating
correctly and the DTC does not
Stuck / sticking throttle blade return
module/component

00 Sensor/Switch D Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check accelerator
Low - No sub type THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_1 - pedal unit, accelerator pedal
information position sensor 1 circuit for short
Accelerator pedal position circuit to ground, open circuit
sensor 1 circuit short circuit to Check accelerator pedal unit, VREF
ground, open circuit circuit for open circuit
Accelerator pedal position Clear DTC and repeat automated
sensor 1, VREF circuit open diagnostic procedure using the
Accelerator pedal position system
sensor 1 failure If DTC remains, check and install
a new accelerator pedal unit as
module/component

00 Sensor/Switch D Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check accelerator
High - No sub type THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_1 - pedal unit, accelerator pedal
Accelerator pedal position circuit to power
power circuit for open circuit
module/component

00 Sensor/Switch E Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check accelerator
Low - No sub type THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_2 - pedal unit, accelerator pedal
Accelerator pedal position circuit to ground, open circuit
ground, open circuit circuit for open circuit
module/component

00 Sensor/Switch E Circuit NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check accelerator
High - No sub type THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_2 - pedal unit, accelerator pedal
Accelerator pedal position circuit to power
power circuit for open circuit
module/component
P2135- Throttle/Pedal Position Throttle pedal position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
00 Sensor/Switch A / B circuit 1 and 2 short circuit to and check throttle pedal position sensor
Voltage Correlation - No ground, short circuit to power, circuit 1 and 2 for short circuit to ground,
sub type information open circuit short circuit to power, open circuit
P2135- Throttle/Pedal Position Throttle pedal position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
09 Sensor/Switch A / B circuit 1 and 2 short circuit to and check throttle pedal position sensor
Voltage Correlation - ground, short circuit to power, circuit 1 and 2 for short circuit to ground,
Component Failures open circuit short circuit to power, open circuit
P2138- Throttle/Pedal Position Accelerator pedal position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
64 Sensor/Switch D / E sensor circuit 1 and 2 short and check accelerator pedal position
Voltage Correlation - No circuit to ground, short circuit sensor circuit 1 and 2 for short circuit to
sub type information to power, open circuit ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit
P2169- Exhaust Pressure Refer to the electrical circuit
13 Regulator Vent Solenoid NOTE: Jaguar - Circuit diagrams and check active
Control Circuit / Open - ACTIVE_EXT_VALVE - exhaust solenoid valve circuit for
Circuit open open circuit
Active exhaust solenoid valve

Control Circuit Low - ACTIVE_EXT_VALVE - exhaust solenoid valve circuit for
Circuit short to ground short circuit to ground
circuit short circuit to ground

Control Circuit high - ACTIVE_EXT_VALVE - exhaust solenoid valve circuit for
Circuit short to battery short circuit to power
P2183- Engine Coolant Refer to the electrical circuit

23 Temperature Sensor 2 NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check engine
Circuit Range/Performance COOLANT_TEMP_SENSOR_2 - coolant temperature sensor 2
- Signal stuck low circuit for high resistance, open
Engine coolant temperature circuit
sensor 2 circuit high resistance, Check and install a new engine
open circuit coolant temperature sensor 2 as
Engine coolant temperature required. Refer to the warranty
sensor 2 failure policy and procedures manual, or
module/component

- Signal stuck high circuit for short circuit to power
Engine coolant temperature Check and install a new engine
sensor 2 circuit short circuit to coolant temperature sensor 2 as
power required. Refer to the warranty
Engine coolant temperature policy and procedures manual, or
module/component

- Signal invalid circuit for high resistance, open
Engine coolant temperature circuit, short circuit to ground,
sensor 2 circuit high resistance, short circuit to power
open circuit, short circuit to Check and install a new engine
ground, short circuit to power coolant temperature sensor 2 as
sensor 2 failure policy and procedures manual, or
module/component

Circuit Low - Circuit COOLANT_TEMP_SENSOR_2 - coolant temperature sensor 2
voltage below threshold circuit for high resistance, open
Engine coolant temperature circuit, short circuit to ground
sensor 2 circuit high resistance, Check and install a new engine
open circuit, short circuit to coolant temperature sensor 2 as
ground required. Refer to the warranty
Engine coolant temperature policy and procedures manual, or
module/component
P2185- Engine Coolant Clear the DTC and re-test

17 Temperature Sensor 2 NOTE: - Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit
Circuit High - Circuit COOLANT_TEMP_SENSOR_2 - diagrams and check engine
voltage above threshold coolant temperature sensor 2
Ignition turned on with an circuit for short circuit to power
ambient temperature of below Check and install a new engine
-40c coolant temperature sensor 2 as
sensor 2 circuit short circuit to policy and procedures manual, or
power determine if any prior approval
Engine coolant temperature programme is in operation, prior
sensor 2 failure to the installation of a new
module/component
P219A- Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio Using the manufacturer approved

00 Imbalance - No sub type NOTE: Post catalyst oxygen diagnostic system check the
information sensor-odd & Pre catalyst oxygen engine control module for oxygen
sensor-odd sensor related DTCs and refer to
the relevant DTC index. Record
Other oxygen sensor related any available freeze frame data
DTCs Check for air leaks in the exhaust
Air leak in the exhaust system system between post catalyst
between post catalyst oxygen oxygen sensor-odd and catalyst
sensor-odd and catalyst Check for air leaks in the exhaust
Air leak in the exhaust system system between catalyst and
between catalyst and exhaust exhaust manifold flange
manifold flange Check for air leaks in the exhaust
Air leak in the exhaust system system between pre catalyst
between pre catalyst oxygen oxygen sensor-odd and post
sensor-odd and post catalyst catalyst oxygen sensor-odd
oxygen sensor-odd Check for air leaks around pre
Air leak around pre catalyst catalyst oxygen sensor-odd
oxygen sensor-odd Check for air leaks within the
Air leaks within the intake intake system
system Check for air leak around fuel
Air leak around fuel injector(s) injector(s) bank 1
bank 1 Check for air leak around spark
Air leak around spark plug(s) plug(s) bank 1
bank 1 Check for low fuel pressure, fuel
Low fuel pressure, fuel injector(s) leak, fuel system leak
injector(s) leak, fuel system bank 1
leak bank 1 Check for camshaft position
camshaft position actuator actuator sticking
sticking Check for airpath blockage
Airpath blockage between between throttle butterfly and inlet
throttle butterfly and inlet poppet valve
poppet valve Carry out cylinder compression
Post catalyst oxygen sensor- check. Record the results
odd failure Check and install a post catalyst
Cylinder head gasket failure oxygen sensor-odd as required.
module/component
diagnostic system clear DTC and
retest
P219B- Bank 2 Air-Fuel Ratio Using the manufacturer approved
00 Imbalance - No sub type NOTE: Post catalyst oxygen diagnostic system check the
information sensor-even & Pre catalyst oxygen engine control module for oxygen
sensor-even sensor related DTCs and refer to
the relevant DTC index. Record
Other oxygen sensor related any available freeze frame data
DTCs Check for air leaks in the exhaust
Air leak in the exhaust system system between post catalyst
between post catalyst oxygen oxygen sensor-even and catalyst
sensor-even and catalyst Check for air leaks in the exhaust
Air leak in the exhaust system system between catalyst and
between catalyst and exhaust exhaust manifold flange
manifold flange Check for air leaks in the exhaust
Air leak in the exhaust system system between pre catalyst
between pre catalyst oxygen oxygen sensor-even and post
sensor-even and post catalyst catalyst oxygen sensor-even
oxygen sensor-even Check for air leaks around pre
Air leak around pre catalyst catalyst oxygen sensor-even
oxygen sensor-even Check for air leaks within the
Air leaks within the intake intake system
system Check for air leak around fuel
Air leak around fuel injector(s) injector(s) bank 2
bank 2 Check for air leak around spark
Air leak around spark plug(s) plug(s) bank 2
bank 2 Check for low fuel pressure, fuel
Low fuel pressure, fuel injector(s) leak, fuel system leak
injector(s) leak, fuel system bank 2
leak bank 2 Check for camshaft position
camshaft position actuator actuator sticking
sticking Check for airpath blockage
Airpath blockage between between throttle butterfly and inlet
throttle butterfly and inlet poppet valve
poppet valve Carry out cylinder compression
Post catalyst oxygen sensor- check. Record the results
even failure Check and install a post catalyst
Cylinder head gasket failure oxygen sensor-even as required.
module/component
diagnostic system clear DTC and
retest
P2228- Barometric Pressure Circuit Barometric pressure sensor Using the manufacturer approved
00 Low - No sub type failure(internal engine control diagnostic system check
information module failure) datalogger signal, Barometric
Pressure Sensor Voltage (0x035A)
module/component
P2229- Barometric Pressure Circuit Barometric pressure sensor Using the manufacturer approved
00 Low - No sub type failure(internal engine control diagnostic system check
information module failure) datalogger signal, Barometric
Pressure Sensor Voltage (0x035A)
module/component
P2279- Intake Air System Leak - Part load breather pipe Check for related DTCs
00 No sub type information disconnected Check part load breather pipe for
Brake vacuum pipe leaks or disconnected
disconnected Check brake vacuum pipe for
Excessive intake air leak leaks or disconnected
Check intake air system for leaks
P2300- Ignition Coil A Primary Refer to the electrical circuit

11 Control Circuit Low - NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_1A - diagrams and check ignition coil 1
Circuit short to ground circuit for short circuit to ground
Ignition coil 1 circuit short
circuit to ground
P2301- Ignition Coil A Primary Refer to the electrical circuit

12 Control Circuit High - NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_1A - diagrams and check ignition coil 1
Circuit short to battery circuit for short circuit to power
circuit to power
P2303- Ignition Coil B Primary Refer to the electrical circuit

11 Control Circuit Low - NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_1B - diagrams and check ignition coil 2
circuit to ground
P2304- Ignition Coil B Primary Refer to the electrical circuit

12 Control Circuit High - NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_1B - diagrams and check ignition coil 2
circuit to power
P2306- Ignition Coil C Primary Refer to the electrical circuit

circuit to ground
P2307- Ignition Coil C Primary Refer to the electrical circuit

circuit to power
P2309- Ignition Coil D Primary Refer to the electrical circuit

circuit to ground
P2310- Ignition Coil D Primary Refer to the electrical circuit

circuit to power
P2312- Ignition Coil E Primary Refer to the electrical circuit

circuit to ground
P2313- Ignition Coil E Primary Refer to the electrical circuit

circuit to power
P2315- Ignition Coil F Primary Refer to the electrical circuit

circuit to ground
P2316- Ignition Coil F Primary Refer to the electrical circuit

circuit to power
P2318- Ignition Coil G Primary Refer to the electrical circuit

circuit to ground
P2319- Ignition Coil G Primary Refer to the electrical circuit

circuit to power
P2321- Ignition Coil H Primary Refer to the electrical circuit

circuit to ground
P2322- Ignition Coil H Primary Refer to the electrical circuit

circuit to power
P2401- Evaporative Emission Check diagnostic module tank

00 System Leak Detection NOTE: - Circuit leakage fuse for failure and
Pump Control Circuit Low - FUEL_LEAK_PUMP - security in holder
No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit
Diagnostic module tank diagrams and check diagnostic
leakage fuse failure module tank leakage circuit for
Diagnostic module tank short circuit to ground, open
leakage circuit short circuit to circuit
ground, open circuit Check and install a new diagnostic
Diagnostic module tank module tank leakage as required.
leakage failure Refer to the warranty policy and
module/component

00 System Leak Detection NOTE: - Circuit diagrams and check diagnostic
Pump Control Circuit High FUEL_LEAK_PUMP - module tank leakage circuit for
- No sub type information short circuit to power
Diagnostic module tank Check and install a new diagnostic
leakage circuit short circuit to module tank leakage as required.
power Refer to the warranty policy and
Diagnostic module tank procedures manual, or determine
leakage failure if any prior approval programme is
module/component
P2404- Evaporative Emission Check and install a new diagnostic

29 System Leak Detection NOTE: - Circuit module tank leakage as required.
Pump Sense Circuit FUEL_LEAK_PUMP - Refer to the warranty policy and
Range/Performance - procedures manual, or determine
Signal invalid Diagnostic module tank if any prior approval programme is
leakage failure in operation, prior to the
module/component
P2404- Evaporative Emission Check and install a new diagnostic

2F System Leak Detection NOTE: - Circuit module tank leakage as required.
Pump Sense Circuit FUEL_LEAK_PUMP - Refer to the warranty policy and
Range/Performance - procedures manual, or determine
Signal erratic Diagnostic module tank if any prior approval programme is
leakage failure in operation, prior to the
module/component

Pump Sense Circuit Low - FUEL_LEAK_PUMP - module tank leakage circuit for
No sub type information short circuit to ground, high
Diagnostic module tank resistance, open circuit
leakage circuit short circuit to Check and install a new diagnostic
ground, high resistance, open module tank leakage as required.
circuit Refer to the warranty policy and
leakage failure if any prior approval programme is
module/component
P2406- Evaporative Emission Check for blockage in the Blockage

00 System Leak Detection NOTE: - Circuit in diagnostic module tank leakage
Pump Sense Circuit High - ventilation pipe
FUEL_LEAK_PUMP -
No sub type information Check and install a new diagnostic
Blockage in diagnostic module module tank leakage as required.
tank leakage ventilation pipe Refer to the warranty policy and
leakage circuit, open circuit if any prior approval programme is
module/component
P240A- Evaporative Emission Refer to the electrical circuit

Pump Heater Circuit / PUMP_HEATER_CONTROL - module tank leakage heater circuit
Open - No sub type for open circuit
information Diagnostic module tank
leakage circuit, open circuit
P240B- Evaporative Emission Refer to the electrical circuit

Pump Heater Circuit Low - PUMP_HEATER_CONTROL - module tank leakage heater circuit
No sub type information for short circuit to ground, high
Diagnostic module tank resistance
leakage heater circuit short
resistance
P240C- Evaporative Emission Refer to the electrical circuit

Pump Heater Circuit High - PUMP_HEATER_CONTROL - module tank leakage heater circuit
No sub type information for short circuit to power
leakage heater circuit short
circuit to power
P2450- Evaporative Emission NOTES: Check and install a new diagnostic

00 Control System Switching module tank leakage as required.
Valve Performance/Stuck Refer to the warranty policy and
Open - No sub type - Circuit COV - procedures manual, or determine
information if any prior approval programme is
LR - Circuit CHANGE OVER installation of a new
VALVE - module/component

leakage failure
P2451- Evaporative Emission NOTES: Check and install a new diagnostic

00 Control System Switching module tank leakage as required.
Valve Performance/Stuck Refer to the warranty policy and
Closed - No sub type - Circuit COV - procedures manual, or determine
information if any prior approval programme is
LR - Circuit CHANGE OVER installation of a new
VALVE - module/component

leakage failure
P250C- Engine Oil Level Sensor Using the manufacturer approved

23 Circuit Low - Signal stuck NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check
low OIL_QUALITY_SENSOR - datalogger signal, Sump Oil
Oil temperature level sensor Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit short circuit to ground diagrams and check oil
Oil temperature level sensor temperature level sensor circuit
failure for short circuit to ground
Check and install a new oil
temperature level sensor as
module/component
P250D- Engine Oil Level Sensor Using the manufacturer approved

24 Circuit High - Signal stuck NOTE: - Circuit diagnostic system check
high OIL_QUALITY_SENSOR - datalogger signal, Sump Oil
Oil temperature level sensor Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit short circuit to power diagrams and check oil
Oil temperature level sensor temperature level sensor circuit
failure for short circuit to power
Check and install a new oil
temperature level sensor as
module/component
P2544- Torque Management Inappropriate request from Check for related DTCs within
64 Request Input Signal A - anti-lock braking system anti-lock braking system module
Signal plausibility failure and refer to the relevant DTC
index
P2544- Torque Management Inappropriate request from Check for related DTCs within
92 Request Input Signal A - anti-lock braking system anti-lock braking system module
Performance or incorrect and refer to the relevant DTC
operation index
P2600- Coolant Pump A Control Refer to the electrical circuit

13 Circuit / Open - Circuit NOTE: XF - Circuit diagrams and check coolant pump
open IC_COOLANT_PMP_CTRL - XK - Circuit A control circuit for open circuit
INT_WATERPUMP_RLY -
Coolant pump A control circuit

open circuit
P2601- Coolant Pump Control Check coolant level and top up as

00 Circuit Range/Performance NOTE: XF - Circuit required
- No sub type information IC_COOLANT_PMP_CTRL - XK - Circuit Check the cooling system for
INT_WATERPUMP_RLY - blockages or trapped hoses
Coolant level low diagrams and check coolant pump
Blocked cooling system A control circuit for open circuit
Coolant pump A control circuit Check and install a new coolant
open circuit pump A as required. Refer to the
Coolant pump A failure warranty policy and procedures

11 Circuit Low - Circuit short NOTE: XF - Circuit diagrams and check coolant pump
to ground IC_COOLANT_PMP_CTRL - XK - Circuit A control circuit for short circuit to
INT_WATERPUMP_RLY - ground


12 Circuit High - Circuit short NOTE: XF - Circuit diagrams and check coolant pump
to battery IC_COOLANT_PMP_CTRL - XK - Circuit A control circuit for short circuit to
INT_WATERPUMP_RLY - power

P2610- ECM/PCM Internal Engine Instrument cluster fault Check for DTCs related to any of
00 Off Timer Performance - Central junction box fault the components listed and refer to
No sub type information CAN network error relevant DTC index
P2610- ECM/PCM Engine Off Timer Instrument cluster fault Check for DTCs related to any of
84 Performance - Signal below Central junction box fault the components listed and refer to
allowable range Engine coolant temperature relevant DTC index
sensor fault Refer to the electrical circuit
Ambient temperature sensor diagrams and check engine
fault coolant temperature sensor circuit
Low battery voltage for short circuit to ground, short
CAN network error circuit to power, open circuit
temperature sensor circuit for
Check the battery voltage, repair
as required
P2610- ECM/PCM Engine Off Timer Instrument cluster fault Check for DTCs related to any of
85 Performance - Signal Central junction box fault the components listed and refer to
above allowable range Engine coolant temperature relevant DTC index
Low battery voltage for short circuit to ground, short
CAN network error circuit to power, open circuit
Check the battery voltage, repair
as required
P2610- ECM/PCM Internal Engine Instrument cluster fault Check for DTCs related to any of
87 Off Timer Performance - Central junction box fault the components listed, and refer
Missing message Engine coolant temperature to relevant DTC index
CAN network error for short circuit to ground, short
P2772- Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Missing data in the car Using the manufacturer approved
64 Low Switch Circuit configuration file diagnostic system check and up-
Range/Performance - Vehicle speed related failure date the car configuration file as
Signal plausibility failure Gearbox output shaft speed required. Clear the diagnostic
related failure trouble code and retest
diagnostic system check for
vehicle speed related DTCs and
diagnostic system check for
gearbox output shaft speed
related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
Clear the diagnostic trouble code
and re-test
U0001- High Speed CAN Refer to the electrical circuit

88 Communication Bus - Bus NOTE: - Circuit HS_CAN_NEG - diagrams and check CAN network
off HS_CAN_POS - for short circuit to ground, short
High speed CAN bus circuit, Using the manufacturer approved
short circuit to ground diagnostic system, carry out
High speed CAN bus circuit, network integrity test
High speed CAN bus, open
circuit
U0101- Lost Communication with CAN link engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 TCM - No sub type module/transmission control diagnostic system, check
information module network malfunction transmission control module for
Transmission control module DTCs and refer to the relevant
failure DTC index
diagrams and check transmission
control module power and ground
Check CAN harness to
transmission control module,
repair as necessary
U0102- Lost Communication with CAN harness link between Using the manufacturer approved
00 Transfer Case Control engine control module and diagnostic system, check transfer
Module - No sub type transfer box control module box control module for DTCs and
information network malfunction refer to the relevant DTC index
diagrams and check transfer box
circuits for open circuit
Check CAN harness between
transfer box control module,
repair as necessary
U0104- Lost Communication With Vehicle configured for speed Check vehicle has correct speed
00 Cruise Control Module - No control, but speed control control module installed
sub type information module is not installed Using the manufacturer approved
CAN Link engine control diagnostic system, check speed
module/speed control module control module, anti-lock braking
network malfunction system module for DTCs and refer
Speed control module power or to the relevant DTC index
ground circuit, open circuit Using the manufacturer approved
diagrams and check speed control
module power and ground circuit
for open circuit
Check CAN harness to speed
control module, repair as
necessary
U0121- Lost Communication With CAN Link engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 Anti-lock Braking System module/anti-lock braking diagnostic system, check anti-lock
(ABS) Control Module - No system module network braking system module for DTCs
sub type information malfunction and refer to the relevant DTC
Anti-lock braking system index
module power or ground Using the manufacturer approved
circuit, open circuit diagnostic system, complete a
diagrams and check anti-lock
braking system module power and
ground circuit for open circuit
Check CAN harness to anti-lock
braking system module, repair as
necessary
U0126- Lost Communication With CAN harness link between Using the manufacturer approved
00 Steering Angle Sensor engine control module and diagnostic system, steering angle
Module - No sub type steering angle sensor network sensor for DTCs and refer to the
information malfunction relevant DTC index
diagrams and check steering angle
sensor power and ground circuits
for open circuit
steering angle sensor, repair as
necessary
U0128- Lost Communication With CAN Link engine control Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Park Brake Control Module module/electronic parking diagrams and check power and
- No sub type information brake signal missing network ground supplies to electronic
malfunction parking brake
U0132- Lost Communication with CAN link/suspension control Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Suspension Control Module module network malfunction diagrams and check power and
A - No sub type ground supplies to suspension
00 Active Roll Control Module engine control module and diagnostic system, check active
- No sub type information active roll control module roll control module for DTCs and
network malfunction refer to the relevant DTC index
diagrams and check active roll
engine control module and active
roll control module, repair as
necessary
U0138- Lost Communication with CAN harness link between Using the manufacturer approved
00 All Terrain Control Module engine control module and diagnostic system, check center
- No sub type information center console switch pack console switch pack for DTCs and
network malfunction refer to the relevant DTC index
diagrams and check center
console switch pack power and
ground circuits for open circuit
engine control module and center
console switch pack, repair as
necessary
00 Body Control Module - No engine control module and diagnostic system, check central
sub type information central junction box network junction box for DTCs and refer to
malfunction the relevant DTC index
diagrams and check central
junction box power and ground
engine control module and central
junction box, repair as necessary
U0151- Lost Communication with Lost communication with Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Restraints Control Module - restraints control module over diagrams and check power and
No sub type information CAN or hardwired link ground supplies to restraints
control module
U0151- Lost Communication with Lost communication due to Check restraints control module
87 Restraints Control Module - restraints control module fault for associated DTCs and refer to
Missing message relevant DTC index
diagrams and check power and
ground supplies to restraints
control module
U0155- Lost Communication with CAN link between engine Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Instrument Panel Cluster control module and instrument diagrams and check power and
(IPC) - No sub type cluster fault ground supplies to instrument
information cluster
U0167- Lost Communication with Security challenge response Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Vehicle Immobilizer timeout diagrams and check power and
Control Module - No sub Battery fault ground supplies to the electric
type information steering column lock
Check for related CAN DTCs and
Ensure the battery is in a fully
charged and serviceable condition.
Refer to the battery care manual
workshop manual
U0300- Internal Control Module Engine control module has Check and install the correct
00 Software Incompatibility - incorrect software installed engine control module software
No sub type information The engine control module is in Check and install the correct
expulsion mode. An incorrect engine control module as required.
specification engine control Refer to the warranty policy and
module has been installed to procedures manual, or determine
the vehicle if any prior approval programme is
module/component
U0402- Invalid Data Received Transmission engine control Using the manufacturer approved
00 From Transmission Control module request corruption diagnostic system, check
Module - No sub type transmission control module, for
information DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
diagrams and check high speed
CAN bus circuit for short circuit,
open circuit
U0402- Invalid Data Received from Transmission engine control Using the manufacturer approved
08 TCM - Bus signal / module request corruption diagnostic system, check
message failures High speed CAN bus circuit transmission control module, for
failure, short, open circuit DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
open circuit
U0402- Invalid Data Received from Transmission to engine control Using the manufacturer approved
64 TCM - Signal plausibility module request corruption diagnostic system, check
failure High speed CAN bus signal transmission control module, for
corruption DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
open circuit
U0402- Invalid Data Received from Transmission control module Using the manufacturer approved
82 TCM - Alive / sequence shaft-speed faults diagnostic system, check
counter incorrect / not transmission control module, for
updated DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
U0402- Invalid Data Received from Transmission control module Using the manufacturer approved
83 TCM - Value of signal shaft-speed faults diagnostic system, check
protection calculation transmission control module, for
incorrect DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
U0415- Invalid Data Received Electronic throttle unit, throttle Using the manufacturer approved
00 From Anti-lock Braking position sensor 1 failure diagnostic system, check for
System (ABS) Control Electronic throttle unit, throttle electronic throttle unit DTCs repair
Module - No sub type position sensor 2 failure as necessary
information Electronic throttle unit harness Refer to the electrical circuit
short, open circuit diagrams and check electronic unit
harness for short circuit, open
circuit
module/component
U0415- Invalid Data Received Invalid request from anti-lock Using the manufacturer approved
64 From Anti-lock Braking braking system diagnostic system, check anti-lock
System (ABS) Control Torque up request higher than braking system, for DTCs and
Module - Signal plausibility expected from anti-lock braking refer to the relevant DTC index
failure system Refer to the electrical circuit
open circuit
U0415- Invalid Data Received Torque up request higher than Using the manufacturer approved
67 From Anti-lock Braking expected from anti-lock braking diagnostic system, check anti-lock
System (ABS) Control system braking system, for DTCs and
Module - Signal incorrect refer to the relevant DTC index
after event Refer to the electrical circuit
open circuit
U0426- Invalid Data Received Security code mis-match Check CAN network between
00 From Vehicle Immobilizer This DTC will be logged if the engine control module, instrument
Control Module - No sub encrypted data exchange does cluster and central junction box
type information not match between engine Refer to the electrical circuit
control module and the diagrams and check power and
instrument cluster or central ground circuit to engine control
junction box module and instrument cluster
Check correct engine control
module and instrument cluster
installed
Re-synchronise ID by re-
configuring the engine control
module and instrument cluster as
new modules
U0447- Invalid Data Received The LIN to high speed CAN This DTC has been inhibited in the
81 From Gateway "A" - gateway has informed the engine control module, as the LIN
Invalid serial data received engine control module of a bus flag is set during normal
failure operation
Identification Codes - Identification Codes
VIN Number
The VIN number will be found in three locations:
1. Stamped on the side of the RH longitudinal member, rearward of the body front mounting.
2. At the bottom of the windshield glass on the LH side of the vehicle and visible from the outside.
3. UK, Europe and ROW - Not NAS/Canada -On the VIN plate attached to the bonnet locking platform.
4. NAS/Canada - On the Tire Data/Specification label attached to the front of the LH B-pillar.
Longitudinal Member VIN
Windscreen VIN
VIN number - UK, EU and ROW

VIN Position Character Identifies
1 - 3 - World identifier SAL Jaguar Land Rover Limited
4,5 - Vehicle type LS Range Rover Sport
6 - Class A Standard
6 - Class J Japan
7 - Body style A 4 Door
8 - Engine D 508PN - V8 5.0 NA Petrol
8 - Engine E 508PS - V8 5.0 SC Petrol
8 - Engine F 306DT - V6 3.0 High power diesel
8 - Engine G 306DT - V6 3.0 High power diesel with cDPF
8 - Engine M 306DT - V6 3.0 Low power diesel with cDPF
9- Steering and transmission 3 RHD - 6 Speed automatic
9- Steering and transmission 4 LHD - 6 Speed automatic
9- Steering and transmission 5 RHD - 8 Speed automatic
9- Steering and transmission 6 LHD - 8 Speed automatic
10- Model year C 2012
11 - Plant A Solihull
12 - 17 - Serial number 123456 Unique six digit serial number
VIN number - NAS and Canada
NOTE: # Manual belts with driver and passenger frontal air bags and side inflatable restraint (1st and second
row).
VIN Position Character Identifies

1 - 3 - World identifier SAL Jaguar Land Rover Limited
4 - Make / Model S Land Rover-Range Rover Sport
5 - Class / Nas restarint system type D TL "SE" 5 seats #
5 - Class / Nas restarint system type F TL "HSE" 5 seats #
5 - Class / Nas restarint system type K TL "LUX" 5 seats #
5 - Class / Nas restarint system type H TL "SC" 5 seats #
5 - Class / Nas restarint system type N China
5 - Class / Nas restarint system type P Autobiography #
6 - Body style 2 4 Door Station Wagon
7 - Engine D 508PN - V8 5.0 NA Petrol
7 - Engine E 508PS - V8 5.0 SC Petrol
7 - Engine F 306DT - V6 3.0 High power diesel
7 - Engine G 306DT - V6 3.0 High power diesel with cDPF
8- Steering and transmission 4 LHD Automatic - 6 Speed
8- Steering and transmission 6 LHD Automatic - 8 Speed
9- Check digit *
10- Model year C 2012
11 - Plant A Solihull
12 - 17 - Serial number 123456 Unique six digit serial number
Bonnet locking platform VIN plate - Not NAS/Canada
The VIN plate contains the following information:
A - Reserved
B - Engine Description
C - Country
D - Diesel Indicator
E - Reserved
F - Headlamp Code/initial aim value - If shown
G - Colour code/group
H - Type/Approval Number - If shown
I - VIN Number
J - Gross Vehicle Weight
K - Gross Train Weight
L - Front Axle Weight
M - Rear Axle Weight
VIN/Certification/Tire Data Label - NAS only
The Certification Label contains the following VIN information:
A - Vehicle VIN Number

B - Bar code identification
VIN/Tire Pressure Specification Label - Canada only
The Tire Pressure Certification Label contains the following VIN information:
A - Vehicle VIN Number

B - Vehicle Type
Unit/Assembly Serial Number Locations
5.0 Litre SC and 5.0 Litre NA V8 Petrol Engine Serial Number
The 5.0 Litre SC and 5.0 Litre NA V8 Petrol Engine Serial Number is stamped on the LH side of the cylinder block.
3.0 litre V6 Diesel Engine Serial Number

The 3.0 Litre V6 Diesel Engine Serial Number is stamped on the RH side of the cylinder block.
Automatic Transmission serial Number
The transmission serial number is on a plate attached to the LH side of the transmission casing.
Front Differential Serial Number
The Front Differential Serial Number is stamped on the underside of the differential casing and is located above the
removable cross member.
Rear Differential Serial Number

The Rear Differential Serial Number is stamped on the underside of the differential casing adjacent to the front
mounting.
Transfer Case Serial Number
The Transfer Case serial number is stamped on the RH side of the transfer case and may also be on a bar coded
self-adhesive label attached to the case.
Jacking and Lifting - Jacking
General
WARNING: The following instructions must be adhered to before raising the vehicle off the ground:
Position vehicle on a solid, level surface.

Apply the parking brake.
Select 'P' - PARK on automatic transmission selector and 'H' High on transfer case.
WARNING: If the drive shaft(s) are to be disconnected, it will be necessary to raise all four wheels off the
ground in order that the shaft(s) can be rotated. DO NOT use the customer jack and ensure that the vehicle is
adequately supported on axle stands. With the vehicle raised, it will be necessary to release the park brake and
select Neutral - 'N' in the main transmission to enable the drive shaft(s) to be rotated
CAUTIONS:
To avoid damage to the underbody components of the vehicle, the following instructions must be adhered to:
Do not position jacks or axle stands under the following components:
Body structure other than any approved jacking or lifting points

Bumpers
Fuel lines
Fuel tank
Brake lines
Front or rear suspension arms
Steering linkage
Transfer case
Front or rear differential units
Transmission
Engine oil pan - See note below
NOTE: For certain repair operations, it may be necessary to support the engine under the oil pan. In this case,
a block of hardwood or a rubber pad must be positioned on the jack lifting pad to protect the oil pan.
Vehicle jack
The jack provided with the vehicle is only intended for use in an emergency such as changing a tire. DO NOT use the
jack for any other purpose. Refer to the Owner's Handbook for the vehicle jack location points and jacking
procedures.
WARNING: Never work under a vehicle supported solely by the vehicle jack.
Hydraulic jack
A hydraulic jack with a minimum lifting capacity of 1500 kg, (3,300 lbs) must be used.
WARNINGS:
Do not commence work on the underside of the vehicle until suitable axle stands have been placed in the
correct position.
Always chock the wheels when jacking. The parking brake may be ineffective when the wheel(s) are off the
ground.
Raising and Supporting the Vehicle
To assist in raising the vehicle, jacking points are provided as shown in the following illustrations.
Raising the Front of the Vehicle

Select 'P' - PARK on automatic transmission selector.
WARNING: Always chock the rear wheels when jacking the front of the vehicle.
Position the lifting pad of the hydraulic jack in the centre of the recess in the engine undershield.
NOTE: If the engine undershield has been removed, position the jack lifting pad in the centre of the front cross
beam.
With the vehicle raised to the desired height, position axle stands at positions shown.
CAUTION: Position suitable material between axle stands and longitudinal members to prevent damage to the
longitudinal members.
Carefully lower jack until vehicle rests on axle stands.
WARNING: Before commencing work on the underside of the vehicle, ensure that axle stands are correctly
positioned and vehicle is securely supported.
Reverse procedure when removing vehicle from stands.
Raising the Rear of the Vehicle
WARNING: Always chock the front wheels when jacking the rear of the vehicle.
Position the lifting pad of the hydraulic jack under the centre of the rear cross member as shown.
CAUTION: Take care that the lifting pad of the jack is of a suitable size to avoid damaging the heat shield. It is
not advisable to use a spacer block between the lifting pad and the rear cross member as this may result in some
vehicle instability.
With vehicle raised to desired height, position axle stands at positions shown.
WARNING: Before commencing work on underside of vehicle, ensure that axle stands are correctly positioned
and vehicle is securely supported.
Raising Vehicle - One Wheel/side
WARNING: Always chock the wheels which are not to be raised.

One front wheel - position lifting pad of hydraulic jack beneath longitudinal member on the side to be raised
at Point 'A'
One rear wheel - position lifting pad of jack beneath longitudinal member on the side to be raised at Point
'B'
Front and rear wheels - ONE SIDE - position lifting pad of jack beneath longitudinal member on the side
to be raised at Point 'C'
NOTE: Point 'C' is in line with number 3 body mounting.
With vehicle at desired height, position axle stand(s) beneath longitudinal members and adjacent to the lifting pad of
the jack at appropriate point(s) D.
WARNING: Before commencing work on underside of vehicle, ensure that axle stands are correctly positioned
and vehicle is securely supported.

Jacking and Lifting - Lifting
Vehicle on Wheels - Four Post Ramp
WARNING: If the drive shaft(s) are to be disconnected, it will be necessary to raise all four wheels off the ramp
in order that the shaft(s) can be rotated. If the wheel free facility is not to be used, raise the vehicle off the ramp
using suitable equipment. With the vehicle raised, position axle stands in the positions shown for the front and rear
support blocks - see illustration in Jacking. With the axle stands positioned, release the parking brake and select
NEUTRAL 'N' in the transmission.
WARNING: Do not push the vehicle backwards and forwards along the ramp in order to gain access to the drive
shaft fixings.
Position the vehicle on the ramp with the front and rear of the vehicle equidistant from the ends of the ramp. Chock
the wheels, select NEUTRAL in the transmission and where practicable, apply the parking brake.
Wheel Free Lift - Four Post Ramp
NOTE: To enable the vehicle to be supported correctly on the wheel free longitudinals, it will be necessary to
produce 2 off each of the support blocks to the dimensions given in the accompanying illustrations. The supporting
part of each block must be manufactured from suitable hardwood or metal and the 'U' shaped base of each block
must be manufactured from metal. Note that it is essential to ensure that the 'U' shaped base of each block is wide
enough to fit over the wheel free longitudinals.
Front Support Block Dimensions
'A' = 127.0 mm (5.0 in)

'B' = 146.0 mm (5.75 in)
'C' = 89.0 mm (3.5 in)
Rear support block dimensions
'A' = 152.0 mm (6.0 in)

'B' = 101.0 mm (4.0 in)
'C' = 76.0 mm (3.0 in)
Raising and Supporting the Vehicle
1. Position vehicle on ramp.
2. Position suspension in 'off-road' height.

3. Apply parking brake.
4. Raise ramp to desired height.
5. Align the wheel free longitudinals beneath the body frame longitudinals and position the support blocks beneath
the longitudinals in the positions shown.
CAUTION: Ensure that the front and rear support blocks are correctly oriented to front and rear of vehicle.
6. Engage wheel free and lower ramp slowly until weight of vehicle rests on support blocks and road wheels are just
clear of ramp.
7. Ensure that the vehicle is correctly supported on all four support blocks, that blocks are still correctly positioned
and are in full contact with the body frame longitudinals.
8. Lower the ramp.
WARNING: Make sure that the vehicle is stable before commencing work.
NOTE: Return the suspension to 'normal ride height' when the vehicle is removed from the ramp.
Two Post Lift
CAUTION: If the drive shaft(s) are to be removed, release the parking brake and select NEUTRAL 'N' in the
transmission in order that the shaft(s) can be rotated when the vehicle is raised to the desired height.
1. Position the vehicle with the centre of the lift pillars aligned approximately with the front of the driver/passenger
seat cushions.
2. Extend the lifting arms and position the pad of each lifting arm beneath the body frame longitudinal lifting points.
3. Raise the vehicle until the wheels are just clear of the ground and check that the pads of each lifting arm are still
correctly positioned.
4. Raise the vehicle to the desired height.
5. Ensure that vehicle is correctly supported on all four lifting pads, that pads are still correctly positioned and are in
full contact with the body frame longitudinals.
WARNING: Make sure that the vehicle is stable before commencing work.
Jacking and Lifting - Vehicle Recovery
Towing/Lashing eyes
CAUTION: The single towing/lashing eyes at the front and rear of the vehicle are designed for vehicle recovery
purposes only and MUST not be used to tow a trailer or caravan.
The front towing/lashing eye is accessible after releasing the 2 toggle fasteners securing the towing eye access panel
and removing the panel.
CAUTION: Ensure that during towing, the towing attachment does not contact the bumper.
The rear towing/lashing eye 'A' is accessible after releasing the 2 fasteners securing the access panel to the bumper
and removing the panel.
CAUTION: This towing/lashing eye should only be used for towing another vehicle or for recovery purposes to
enable this vehicle to be positioned in order that the front towing eye may be used for recovery/towing.
4 Wheel Towing
CAUTIONS:
Suspended towing of this vehicle MUST NOT be attempted, if 4 wheel towing is not possible, vehicle must be
recovered on a suitable trailer.
The vehicle may be towed for a maximum of 3 hours or 90 miles (150 km) at a maximum speed of 30 mph
(50 km/h), these limits MUST NOT be exceeded.
The following procedures must be followed to ensure that the vehicle is towed in a safe condition and damage
to the vehicle transmission system is prevented.
1. Remove the front towing/lashing eye access panel.
2. Secure the towing attachment from the recovery vehicle to the towing/lashing eye.
CAUTION: Ensure that the towing attachment will not contact the front bumper during towing.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Insert ignition key and turn the ignition switch to position 'II'.
CAUTION: If 'N' - Neutral cannot be selected, front and rear propeller shafts must be removed before vehicle is
towed.
6. Apply the footbrake and move the selector lever to the 'N' Neutral position.
NOTE: If electrical power is not available, use the manual interlock release tab on the selector lever to move
the selector lever to the Neutral position.
7. Select 'H' - HIGH on the transfer case.
CAUTION: If electrical power is not available, and 'H' - HIGH cannot be selected, the vehicle may not be towed
but must be recovered on a suitable trailer. If, however, transfer case was in 'H' - HIGH when electrical power was
lost, vehicle may still be towed.
8. Release the parking brake.
NOTE: If electrical power is not available, it will be necessary to release the parking brake manually using the
following procedures:
NOTE: Left hand drive illustrated, right hand drive on opposite side of centre console.
9. Lift out the cup holder inserts from the centre console
10. Remove the access panel from the centre console.
11. Locate the electric parking brake release cable, insert a suitable tool through the cable eye and pull the cable
upwards to release the parking brake.
CAUTION: The electric parking brake will not function until electrical power is restored. It will, therefore, be
necessary to chock the wheels when vehicle is at a standstill.
WARNING: Do not release the parking brake until towing is about to commence. Whilst towing, do not attempt
to remove the ignition key and do not turn the key to any position other than 'II'. With the engine switched off, the
power assisted steering system and brake booster will be inoperative thereby resulting in an increase in the effort
required to turn the steering wheel and apply the brakes.
CAUTION: The vehicle tow connections should only be used in normal road conditions, 'snatch' recovery must
be avoided.
On completion of 4 wheel towing
1. Apply the parking brake or if electrical power is not available, securely chock the wheels.
2. Detach towing equipment from towing/lashing eyes.
3. Fit the towing eye access panel and secure the toggle fasteners.
Transporting by trailer
CAUTION: Use the towing/lashing eyes at the front and rear of the vehicle, DO NOT secure lashing hooks or
restraints to any other part of the vehicle.
Position the vehicle, apply the parking brake and select 'N' - Neutral on the automatic transmission selector lever
CAUTION: If electrical power is not available and the parking brake is released, it will not be possible to re-
apply the parking brake. It will, therefore be necessary to select 'P' Park and ensure that the vehicle wheels are
adequately chocked to prevent vehicle movement.
Maintenance Schedules - Maintenance Schedules - Gasoline Engines
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.
Torque Specifications
Description Nm lb-ft
Seat frame fixing Torx screws 40 30
Seat belt fixing Torx screws 40 30
Road wheel nuts 140 103
CAUTION: Unless stated otherwise, the following operations must be carried out at every service interval. Note
that the 'A' and 'B' Service Intervals listed on the 'Maintenance Check Sheet' for vehicles operating under arduous
conditions, vary from those specified for vehicles operating under normal conditions. Reference must therefore,
always be made to the 'Arduous Conditions Maintenance Check Sheet' for vehicles operating under these conditions.
Underbonnet View - 5.0 Litre without supercharger
1. Brake fluid reservoir (LH drive illustrated - RH drive on opposite side)

2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Power steering fluid reservoir
4. Windshield washer reservoir
5. Coolant expansion tank
Underbonnet View - 5.0 Litre with supercharger
1. Dynamic response fluid reservoir

3. Brake fluid reservoir (RH drive illustrated - LH drive on opposite side)
Maintenance Operations
Seats and Safety Belts
Front seat frame fixings - Every 2 years or 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
1. Carefully remove the trim panels covering the seat frame fixing Torx screws.
2. Check that the front seat frame fixing Torx screws are secure and that the seat frames show no signs of
movement.
3.Install the trim panels on completion.
Rear seat frame front fixings - Every 2 years or 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
4. Check that the rear seat frame front fixings are secure and that the seat frames show no signs of movement.
Rear seat frame rear fixings - Every 2 years or 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
5. Fold the seat cushions forwards and check that the rear seat frame rear fixings are secure and that the seat
frames show no signs of movement.
6. Fold the seat cushions back on completion.
Front seat controls
7. Check operation of all seat controls.
Safety belts - Every 2 years or 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
CAUTION: When vehicles are operating under arduous conditions, the following service items must
be carried out every 1 year or 15,000 miles (24,000 km)
8. Fully extend each safety belt and check that it returns unassisted; repeat for all belts.
9. Check entire length of safety belt webbing for signs of fraying or damage; repeat for all belts.
10. Connect each safety belt to the correct buckle, check safety belt buckle and tongue are secure; check that
buckle releases tongue correctly.
11. Check all safety belt and buckle mountings and fixings for security.
12. Check front safety belt height adjusters for correct operation.
Lamps, Horns and Warning Indicators
1. Check side, head, fog, reversing and tail lamps for correct operation.
2. Check operation of headlamp automatic levelling system - if installed.
3. Check turn signals and hazard warning lamps for correct operation.
4. Check brake (stop) lamps for correct operation.
5. Check all exterior lamp lenses for clarity and condition; pay particular attention to headlamp and fog lamp lenses
for stone chips or damage.
6. Check horn for loud, clear sound.
7. Switch on headlamps and check that side/headlamp reminder warning sounds when door is opened.
8. Check operation of interior courtesy lamps.
9. Check operation of all instrument pack warning and indicator lamps.
Washers and Wipers

1. Check all wiper blades for condition and signs of splits or damage.
2. Check security of wiper arms.
3. Operate front and rear screen washers, check that jets are clear and correctly aimed.
4. Operate front and rear wipers at all speeds and check for smooth, smear free operation.
Check High/Low Gear Engagement
1. Select LOW range gear, drive vehicle forwards 3 to 4 vehicle lengths, stop vehicle and select HIGH range gear -
gears must engage smoothly.
Pollen Filter
1. Replace pollen filter.

For additional information, refer to: Pollen Filter (412-01 Air Distribution and Filtering, Removal and Installation).
Corrosion/Cosmetic Inspection
1. Carry out the annual corrosion/cosmetic inspection using the Annual Corrosion Inspection Sheet.
Wheels and Tires
1. Check that tires comply with manufacturer's specification.

For additional information, refer to: Wheels and Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Description and Operation).
2. Check/adjust tire pressures including spare.

3. Vehicle fitted with Uni-directional tires: Mark the wheel to stud relationship of each road wheel and note
location of each road wheel to its respective hub.
4. Loosen road wheel nuts. Raise vehicle to a wheel free condition.

For additional information, refer to: Lifting (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation).
5. Remove the road wheels.
6. Visually check tires for condition, lumps or bulges. Check tread depth across the width of the tire and around the
circumference; make sure that remaining tread depth does not contravene local legislative requirements.
NOTE: Do not install wheels at this stage.
Braking System
be carried out every 3 months or 3,750 miles (6,000 km)
1. Inspect front brake pads for wear.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Specifications).
2. Inspect rear brake pads for wear.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Specifications).
3. Check brake calipers for signs of fluid leaks.

4. Check brake discs for condition.
5. Check all brake booster and brake system pipes and hoses for condition, chafing and leaks.
6. Clean road wheel hub spigots and apply grease, Land Rover Part Number RYL 105020 to the wheel mating surface
of each spigot.
7. Vehicles fitted with Uni-directional tires:Install road wheels on their respective hubs ensuring that stud to
wheel relationship is maintained.
8. Vehicles fitted with NON uni-directional tires: Install wheels on the opposite side of the vehicle but make
sure that they are on the same axle as they were originally installed.
9. Install road wheel nuts and tighten to 140 Nm (103 lb-ft).
CAUTION: When vehicles are operating under arduous conditions, the following service item must be
carried out every 2 years or 30,000 miles (48,000 km).
10. Every 3 years or 45,000 miles (72,000 km): Replace brake fluid.
For additional information, refer to: Brake System Bleeding - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-00 Brake System
- General Information, General Procedures) /
Brake System Bleeding - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-00 Brake System - General Information,
General Procedures).
11. Every 6 years or 90,000 miles (144,000 km): Replace all flexible brake hoses.
Electric Parking Brake
be carried out every 3 months or 3,750 miles (6,000 km)
1. Check the adjustment of the electric parking brake.

For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake Shoe and Lining Adjustment (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation,
2. Vehicles operating under arduous conditions: Check the condition of the electric parking brake system.
Road Wheel Speed Sensors
carried out every 3 months or 3,750 miles (6,000 km).
1. Inspect the road wheel speed sensor harnesses for damage.
Radiator and Cooling Fan
1. Vehicles operating under arduous conditions: Visually check radiator for external obstructions, check cooling
fan blades for damage.
Air Suspension
1. Every 5 years or 75,000 miles (120,000 km) - Vehicles operating under arduous conditions: Replace air
suspension compressor filter.
For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension Air Filter (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
Door Locks and Hinges
1. Check operation of all door locks, bonnet lock and fuel filler flap.
2. Lubricate all door check straps, bonnet catch and fuel filler flap catch.
Cooling System
1. Check specific gravity of coolant using a hydrometer.
NOTE: A suitable hydrometer is available from the Equipment Programme under Part Number 511 3302 001 00.
2. Top-up cooling system if necessary.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (303-03B Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Specifications).
CAUTION: Anti-freeze concentration must be maintained at 50%.
Cooling system - Check/Top-up
WARNING: Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping steam or coolant, do not
remove the filler cap from the coolant expansion tank whilst the system is hot.
CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage the paint finished surfaces. If coolant is spilled, immediately
remove the coolant and wash the area with water.
1. Check the level of coolant in the expansion tank. With the engine cold, the coolant level must be to the 'UPPER
LEVEL' indicator mark above the 'COLD FILL RANGE' text on the side of the expansion tank. Ignore any coolant
which may be visible in the top section of the tank.
2. If topping-up is required, remove expansion tank filler cap and top-up coolant level to the 'UPPER LEVEL'
indicator mark.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (303-03B Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Specifications).
CAUTION: Always top-up with a 50% mixture of anti-freeze and water.
3.Install expansion tank filler cap, tighten cap until ratchet is heard to 'click'.
Coolant - Replace
1. Every 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km): Replace the coolant.

For additional information, refer to: Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (303-03B
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures) /
Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding - V8 5.0L Petrol (303-03B Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol, General Procedures).
Ignition System
2. Every 3 years or 45,000 miles (72,000 km) - Vehicles operating under arduous conditions: Replace
spark plugs.
For additional information, refer to: Spark Plugs - V8 5.0L Petrol (303-07B Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation) /
Spark Plugs - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (303-07B Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
5. Every 7 years or 105,000 miles (168,000 km): Replace spark plugs.

For additional information, refer to: Spark Plugs - V8 5.0L Petrol (303-07B Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation) /
Spark Plugs - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (303-07B Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
Air Filtering
carried out every 12 months or 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
1. Every 4 years or 60,000 miles (96,000 km) - vehicles without supercharger: Replace the air filter
element.
For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner Element (303-12B Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L
Petrol, Removal and Installation).
2. Every 5 years or 75,000 miles (120,000 km) - vehicles with supercharger:Replace the air filter element.
For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner Element (303-12B Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L
Ancillary Drive Belt
1. Check the condition of the ancillary drive belt.
2. Remove all traces of mud and dirt from the drive belt and pulleys.
3. Check the drive belt for signs of splitting and wear.
be carried out every 5 years or 75,000 miles (120,000 km).
4. Every 7 years or 105,000 miles (168,000 km) - vehicles with supercharger installed: Replace the
supercharger belt.
For additional information, refer to: Supercharger Belt (303-05C Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
5. Every 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km): Replace the ancillary drive belt.
For additional information, refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05B Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation) /
Accessory Drive Belt (303-05C Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
Fluid Levels
Brake fluid reservoir
1. Remove the brake fluid reservoir cover.
2. Check the fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir, the level must be to the 'MAX' mark on the reservoir; top-up if
necessary.
3. Clean the area around the reservoir filler cap, remove cap.
4. If necessary, top-up using the recommended fluid to the 'MAX' mark on the reservoir.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (206-00 Brake System - General Information, Specifications).
5. Install the reservoir filler cap.
6. Install the brake fluid reservoir cover.
Power steering fluid reservoir

CAUTION: To prevent over filling, check/top-up the system with the engine switched off and the
system cold. Make sure that the steering wheel is in the straight ahead position, do not turn the steering
wheel prior to checking the fluid level.
1. Check that the fluid level is to the mid-way mark between the 'MAX' and 'MIN' marks on the fluid reservoir, top-
up if necessary.
3. If necessary, top-up using the recommended fluid to the mid-way mark on the reservoir.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (211-02 Power Steering, Specifications).
CAUTION: Do not fill reservoir above the 'MAX' mark.
Windshield washer reservoir
1. Remove the windshield washer reservoir filler cap.
2. Top-up the reservoir using a mixture of an approved windshield washer fluid and water until the level is to the
bottom of the gauze filter in the reservoir filler neck.
Dynamic Response reservoir
up if necessary.
Engine Oil and Filter
CAUTIONS:
Rest of World Vehicles - Not UK and Europe: The following service items must be carried out every 6
months or 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
When vehicles are operating under arduous conditions, the following service items must be carried
out every 3 months or 3,750 miles (6,000 km).
1. Renew engine oil and filter.

For additional information, refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, General
Procedures).
Automatic Transmission
1. Every 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km): Renew automatic transmission fluid. For additional
information, refer to:
Specifications (307-01B, Specifications),

Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01A Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Vehicles With: 6HP28 6-Speed Automatic Transmission, General Procedures).
Transfer Case
1. Every 5 years or 75,000 miles (120,000 km): Renew transfer case oil.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (308-07B Transfer Case, Specifications) /
Transfer Case Draining and Filling (308-07B Transfer Case, General Procedures).
Differential Assemblies
1. Every 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km): Renew front differential oil.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (205-03 Front Drive Axle/Differential, Specifications) /
Differential Draining and Filling (205-03 Front Drive Axle/Differential, General Procedures).
2. Every 5 years or 75,000 miles (120,000 km): Renew rear 'Electronic Torque Managed (ETM)' differential oil.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Specifications) /
3. Every 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km): Renew rear 'OPEN' differential oil.
Differential Draining and Filling (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, General Procedures).
Suspension and Body Mountings
1. Check for free play in all suspension and body mounting rubbers.
2. Check condition of suspension rubber boots and gaiters.
3.Lift the vehicle so that front wheels are clear of ground/ramp to enable insertion of a suitable lever (e.g. a
1200mm long steel tube). Check the lower ball joints for free play by placing the lever between the ground/ramp and
the tire, and lifting the wheel assembly with the lever. A second person will be required to check simultaneously for
any ball joint lift. If free play (knock) is noted in the ball joint, replacement is required.
Removable Tow Bar
1. Check condition of removable tow bar.

For additional information, refer to: Tow Bar Mounting Check (502-02 Full Frame and Body Mounting, General
Procedures).
Fuel System
1. Check fuel system pipes, hoses and unions for chafing, leaks and corrosion.
Electrical Harnesses
1. Check all electrical harnesses for chafing.
Oil/Fluid Leaks
1. Check for oil/fluid leaks.
Exhaust System
1. Check exhaust system for leaks, security and damage.
Power Steering
1. Check power steering rod ball joint fixings, gaiters and condition of ball joints and dust covers.
2. Check power steering pipes, hoses and unions for chafing, leaks and corrosion.
Fault Lamp(s)
1. If fault lamp(s) are illuminated, test the associated system using approved Land Rover diagnositc equipment and
report findings.
Road Test
1. Carry out road test of vehicle.

For additional information, refer to: Road/Roller Testing (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
General
1. Endorse Service Record.
2. Report any unusual features of vehicle condition and any additional work required.
Additional Items That May Require Attention
It is recommended that:
1. Every 6 years: All brake fluid hydraulic seals are replaced.
NOTE: This is in addition to the maintenance requirement that flexible brake hoses MUST be replaced at this
service interval.
2. After 50 miles (80 km) continuous use in severe off-road conditions i.e. wading, deep mud and
abrasive grit/slurry: The electric parking brake should be cleaned and inspected.
abrasive grit/slurry: The ancillary drive belt should be cleaned and inspected.
4. Vehicles with air suspension: Vehicles used extensively in arduous or off road conditions will require the
compressor air inlet filter to be renewed more frequently.
5. Vehicles used in dusty or field conditions or deep wading: More frequent attention to the air cleaner will be
required.
Maintenance Schedules - Maintenance Schedules - Diesel Engines
Seat frame fixing Torx screws 40 30
Seat belt fixing Torx screws 40 30
CAUTION: Unless stated otherwise, the following operations must be carried out at every service interval. Note
that the A and B Services listed on the Maintenance Check Sheet, applicable to vehicles operating under arduous
conditions, vary both in period and mileage (kilometres) to the intervals specified for those vehicles operating under
normal conditions. Reference must therefore, always be made to the 'Arduous Conditions Maintenance Check Sheet'
for vehicles operating under these conditions.
Underbonnet View - 3.0 Litre

Underbonnet View - 3.6 Litre

Maintenance Operations
Seats and Safety Belts

Front seat frame fixings - Every 2 years or 30,000 miles (48,000 km) - vehicles with 3.6L diesel. Or 32,000 miles
(52,000 km) - vehicles with 3.0L diesel
1. Carefully remove the trim panels covering the seat frame fixing Torx screws.
2. Check that the front seat frame fixing Torx screws are secure and that the seat frames show no signs of
movement.
3. Reinstall the trim panels on completion.
4. Check that the rear seat frame front fixings are secure and that the seat frames show no signs of movement.
5. Fold the seat cushions forwards and check that the rear seat frame rear fixings are secure and that the seat
frames show no signs of movement.
6. Fold the seat cushions back on completion.
Front seat controls
7. Check operation of all seat controls.
Safety belts - Every 2 years or 30,000 miles (48,000 km) - vehicles with 3.6L diesel. Or 32,000 miles (52,000 km) -
vehicles with 3.0L diesel
8. Fully extend each safety belt and check that it returns unassisted; repeat for all belts.
9. Check entire length of safety belt webbing for signs of fraying or damage; repeat for all belts.
10. Connect each safety belt to the correct buckle, check safety belt buckle and tongue are secure; check that
buckle releases tongue correctly.
11. Check all safety belt and buckle mountings and fixings for security.
12. Check front safety belt height adjusters for correct operation.
Lamps, Horns and Warning Indicators
1. Check side, head, fog, reversing and tail lamps for correct operation.
2. Check operation of headlamp automatic levelling system - if installed.
3. Check turn signals and hazard warning lamps for correct operation.
4. Check brake (stop) lamps for correct operation.
5. Check all exterior lamp lenses for clarity and condition; pay particular attention to headlamp and fog lamp lenses
for stone chips or damage.
6. Check horn for loud, clear sound.
7. Switch on headlamps and check that side/headlamp reminder warning sounds when door is opened.
8. Check operation of interior courtesy lamps.
9. Check operation of all instrument pack warning and indicator lamps.
Washers and Wipers
1. Check all wiper blades for condition and signs of splits or damage.
2. Check security of wiper arms.
3. Operate front and rear screen washers, check that jets are clear and correctly aimed.
4. Operate front and rear wipers at all speeds and check for smooth, smear free operation.
Check High/Low Gear Engagement
1. Select LOW range gear, drive vehicle forwards 3 to 4 vehicle lengths, stop vehicle and select HIGH range gear -
gears must engage smoothly.
Pollen Filter
1. Replace pollen filter.

For additional information, refer to: Pollen Filter (412-01 Air Distribution and Filtering, Removal and Installation).
Corrosion/Cosmetic Inspection
1. Carry out the annual corrosion/cosmetic inspection using the Annual Corrosion Inspection Sheet.
Wheels and Tires
1. Check that tires comply with manufacturer's specification.

2. Check/adjust tire pressures including spare.

3. Vehicles fitted with Uni-directional tires: Mark the wheel to stud relationship of each road wheel and note
location of each road wheel to its respective hub.
4. Loosen road wheel nuts. Raise vehicle to a wheel free condition.

For additional information, refer to: Lifting (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation).
5. Remove the road wheels.
6. Visually check tires for condition, lumps or bulges. Check tread depth across the width of the tire and around the
circumference; make sure that remaining tread depth does not contravene local legislative requirements.
NOTE: Do not install wheels at this stage.
Braking System
be carried out:
Every 3 months or 3,750 miles (6,000 km) - vehicles with 3.6L diesel
1. Inspect front brake pads for wear.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Specifications).
2. Inspect rear brake pads for wear.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Specifications).
3. Check brake calipers for signs of fluid leaks.
4. Check brake discs for condition.
5. Check all brake booster and brake system pipes and hoses for condition, chafing and leaks.
6. Clean road wheel hub spigots and apply grease, Land Rover Part Number RYL 105020 to the wheel mating surface
of each spigot.
7. Vehicles fitted with Uni-directional tires: Install road wheels to their respective hubs ensuring that stud to
wheel relationship is maintained.
8. Vehicles fitted with NON uni-directional tires: Install wheels on the opposite side of the vehicle but make
sure that they are on the same axle as they were originally fitted.
9. Install road wheel nuts and tighten to 140 Nm (103 lb-ft).
be carried out:
Every 2 years or 30,000 miles (48,000 km) - vehicles with 2.7L diesel
10. Every 3 years or 45,000 miles (72,000 km) - vehicles with 3.6L diesel. Or 48.000 miles (77,000 km)
- vehicles with 3.0L diesel: : Replace brake fluid.
For additional information, refer to: Brake System Bleeding - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-00 Brake
System - General Information, General Procedures) /
Brake System Bleeding - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-00 Brake System - General Information, General
Procedures).
11. Every 6 years or 90,000 miles (144,000 km) - vehicles with 3.6L diesel. Or 96,000 miles (156,000
km) - vehicles with 3.0L diesel: Replace all flexible brake hoses.
Electric Parking Brake
be carried out:
1. Check the adjustment of the electric parking brake.

For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake Shoe and Lining Adjustment (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation,
2. Vehicles operating under arduous conditions: Check the condition of the electric parking brake system.
Road Wheel Speed Sensors
be carried out:
1. Inspect the road wheel speed sensor harnesses for damage.
Fuel Filter Element
CAUTIONS:
When vehicles are operating under arduous conditions, the following service item must be carried
out:
China and India markets only: The following service item must be carried out:
1. Every 2 years or 30,000 miles (48,000 km) - vehicles with 3.6L diesel. Or 32,000 miles (52,000 km) -
vehicles with 3.0L diesel: Replace fuel filter element.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Filter (310-01A, Removal and Installation) /
Fuel Filter Element (310-01A Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
Fuel Sedimentor
be carried out:
1. Drain the fuel sedimentor.
Radiator/intercooler and Cooling Fan
CAUTION: Vehicles operating under arduous conditions:
1. Visually check the radiator/intercooler for external obstructions, check cooling fan blades for damage.
2. Remove any debris from the intercooler using a low pressure hose.
Air Suspension
1. Every 5 years or 75,000 miles (120,000 km) - vehicles with 3.6L diesel. Or 80,000 miles (129,000 km)
- vehicles with 3.0L diesel - On vehicles operating under arduous conditions: Replace the air suspension
compressor filter.
For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension Air Filter (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
Door Locks and Hinges
1. Check operation of all door locks, bonnet lock and fuel filler flap.
2. Lubricate all door check straps, bonnet catch and fuel filler flap catch.
Cooling System
1. Check specific gravity of coolant using a hydrometer.
NOTE: A suitable hydrometer is available from the Equipment Programme under Part Number 511 3302 001 00.
2. Top-up cooling system if necessary.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (303-03A Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Specifications) /
Specifications (303-03B, Specifications).
CAUTION: Anti-freeze concentration must be maintained at 50%.

Cooling system - Check/Top-up
WARNING: Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping steam or coolant, do not
remove the filler cap from the coolant expansion tank whilst the system is hot.
CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage the paint finished surfaces. If coolant is spilled, immediately
remove the coolant and wash the area with water.
1. Check the level of coolant in the expansion tank. With the engine cold, the coolant level must be to the'UPPER
LEVEL' indicator mark above the 'COLD FILL RANGE' text on the side of the expansion tank. Ignore any coolant
which may be visible in the top section of the tank.
2. If topping-up is required, remove expansion tank filler cap and top-up coolant level to the 'UPPER LEVEL'
indicator mark.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (303-03A Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Specifications) /
Specifications (303-03B, Specifications).
CAUTION: Always top-up with a 50% mixture of anti-freeze and water.
3. Install expansion tank filler cap, tighten cap until ratchet is heard to 'click'.
Coolant - Replace
km) - vehicles with 3.0L diesel: Replace the coolant.
For additional information, refer to: Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03A Engine Cooling - TDV6
3.0L Diesel, General Procedures) /
Cooling System Draining and Vacuum Filling (303-03B, General Procedures).
Air Filtering
carried out:
1. Every 3 years or 45,000 miles (72,000 km) - vehicles with 3.6L diesel. Or 48,000 miles (77,000 km) -
vehicles with 3.0L diesel: Replace the air cleaner element.
For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner Element (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L
Diesel, Removal and Installation) /
Air Cleaner Element (303-12B, Removal and Installation).
Ancillary Drive Belt
1. Check the condition of the ancillary drive belt.
2. Remove all traces of mud and dirt from the drive belt and pulleys.
3. Check the drive belt for signs of splitting and wear.
be carried out:
km) - vehicles with 3.0L diesel: Replace the ancillary drive belt.
For additional information, refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05A Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation) /
Accessory Drive Belt (303-05B, Removal and Installation).
Camshaft Timing Belt and Rear End Accessory Drive (READ) Belt
be carried out every 4 years or 56,000 miles (90,000 km) - vehicles with 3.0L diesel:
1. Every 7 years or 112,000 miles (180,000 km) - vehicles with 3.0L diesel: Replace camshaft timing belt.
For additional information, refer to: Timing Belt (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
Replace READ belt.
For additional information, refer to: Rear End Accessory Drive (READ) (303-05A Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,
Removal and Installation).
Fluid Levels
Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
1. Remove the brake/clutch fluid reservoir cover.
2. Check the fluid level in the brake/clutch fluid reservoir, the level must be to the 'MAX' mark on the reservoir; top-
up if necessary.
3. Clean the area around the reservoir filler cap, remove the cap.
4. If necessary, top-up using the recommended fluid to the 'MAX' mark on the reservoir.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (206-00 Brake System - General Information, Specifications).
6. Install the brake/clutch fluid reservoir cover.
Power steering fluid reservoir
CAUTION: To prevent over filling, check/top-up the system with the engine switched off and the system cold.
Make sure that the steering wheel is in the straight ahead position, do not turn the steering wheel prior to checking
the fluid level.
up if necessary.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (211-02 Power Steering, Specifications).
CAUTION: Do not fill reservoir above the 'MAX' mark.

4. Refit the reservoir filler cap.
Windshield washer reservoir
1. Remove the windshield washer reservoir filler cap.
2. Top-up the reservoir using a mixture of an approved windshield washer fluid and water until the level is to the
bottom of the gauze filter in the reservoir filler neck.
Dynamic Response reservoir
1. Check that the fluid level is to the mid-way mark between the 'MAX'and 'MIN'marks on the fluid reservoir, top
up if necessary.
3. If necessary, top-up using the recommended fluid.
Engine Oil and Filter
CAUTIONS:
When vehicles are operating under arduous conditions, the following service items must be carried
out:
Rest of World Vehicles - Not UK and Europe: The following service items must be carried out:
1. Renew engine oil and filter.

For additional information, refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, General
Procedures) /
Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01B, General Procedures).
Automatic Transmission
1. Every 10 years or 150,000 miles (241,000 km) - vehicles with 3.6L diesel: Renew automatic transmission
fluid.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (307-01A, Specifications) /
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - 3.6L (TdV8) Diesel, General
Procedures).
1. Every 9 years or 144,000 miles (232,000 km) - vehicles with 3.0L diesel: Renew automatic transmission
fluid.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (307-01B, Specifications) /
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01A Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Vehicles With: 6HP28 6-Speed Automatic Transmission, General Procedures).
Transfer Case
1. Every 5 years or 75,000 miles (120,000 km) - vehicles with 3.6L diesel. Or 80,000 miles (129,000 km)
- vehicles with 3.0L diesel: Renew transfer case oil.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (308-07B Transfer Case, Specifications) /
Transfer Case Draining and Filling (308-07B Transfer Case, General Procedures).
Differential Assemblies
km) - vehicles with 3.0L diesel: Renew front differential oil.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (205-03 Front Drive Axle/Differential, Specifications) /
2.Every 5 years or 75,000 miles (120,000 km) - vehicles with 3.6L diesel. Or 80,000 miles (129,000 km)
- vehicles with 3.0L diesel: Renew rear 'Electronic Torque Managed (ETM)' differential oil.
km) - vehicles with 3.0L diesel: Renew rear 'OPEN' differential oil.
Suspension and Body Mountings
1. Check for free play in all suspension and body mounting rubbers.
2. Check condition of suspension rubber boots and gaiters.
3.Lift the vehicle so that front wheels are clear of ground/ramp to enable insertion of a suitable lever (e.g. a
1200mm long steel tube). Check the lower ball joints for free play by placing the lever between the ground/ramp and
the tire, and lifting the wheel assembly with the lever. A second person will be required to check simultaneously for
any ball joint lift. If free play (knock) is noted in the ball joint, replacement is required.
Removable Tow Bar
1. Check condition of removable tow bar.

For additional information, refer to: Tow Bar Mounting Check (502-02 Full Frame and Body Mounting, General
Procedures).
Fuel System
1. Check fuel system pipes, hoses and unions for chafing, leaks and corrosion.
Electrical Harnesses
1. Check all electrical harnesses for chafing.
Oil/Fluid Leaks
1. Check for oil/fluid leaks.
Exhaust System
1. Check exhaust system for leaks, security and damage.
Power Steering
1. Check power steering rod ball joint fixings, gaiters and condition of ball joints and dust covers.
2. Check power steering pipes, hoses and unions for chafing, leaks and corrosion.
Clutch
1. Check clutch pipes and unions for chafing, leaks and corrosion.
Fault Lamp(s)
1. If fault lamp(s) are illuminated, test the associated system using approved Land Rover diagnostic equipment and
report findings.
Road Test
1. Carry out road test of vehicle.

For additional information, refer to: Road/Roller Testing (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
General
1. Endorse Service Record.
2. Report any unusual features of vehicle condition and any additional work required.
Additional Items That May Require Attention
It is recommended that:
1. Every 6 years: All brake fluid hydraulic seals are replaced.
NOTE: This is in addition to the maintenance requirement that flexible brake hoses MUST be replaced at this
service interval.
abrasive grit/slurry: The electric parking brake should be cleaned and inspected.
abrasive grit/slurry: The ancillary drive belt should be cleaned and inspected.
4. Vehicles fitted with air suspension: Vehicles used extensively in arduous or off road conditions will require the
compressor air inlet filter to be renewed more frequently.
5. Vehicles used in dusty or field conditions or deep wading: More frequent attention to the air cleaner will be
required.
6. Vehicles used in areas where fuel quality is poor: Where vehicles are used in these areas, the fuel
sedimentor may require draining at more frequent intervals.
Vehicle Transportation Aids and Vehicle Storage - New Vehicle Storage
INTRODUCTION
Standards
Vehicles may require storage for varying periods of time before the customer takes delivery. It is essential that a
new Land Rover vehicle is stored correctly, in order to ensure total customer satisfaction after the car is removed
from storage and prepared for sale.
This document establishes the MINIMUM STANDARDS required of franchise holders and appointed vehicle storage
companies by Land Rover for the storage of new vehicles, and may only be deviated from with the Company’s
agreement. Any concerns should be discussed with your Franchise Regional Manager.
This information should be used in conjunction with the relevant Pre-Delivery Inspection (PDI) information.
AREAS OF RESPONSIBILITY
Preventative Measures
Adequate preventative measures must be taken to ensure that each vehicle in stock is maintained in peak condition.
ARRIVAL
It is your responsibility to notify delivery companies immediately of any losses and/or transit damage identified on
receipt of the vehicle.
Where applicable, Vehicle Condition Reports (VCR’s) must be endorsed accordingly, otherwise it is unlikely that the
transit insurance company will accept any claims for missing items or damage rectification.
STORAGE
Correct preparation of vehicles for storage is essential. The majority of new vehicles leaving Land Rover are provided
with the appropriate protection for transit. It is your responsibility to ensure that a vehicle storage department, or
specialist company, is sufficiently equipped to undertake the storage requirements endorsed in this publication.
Whilst vehicles are in storage, any deterioration or damage sustained is the sole responsibility of the
storage operator and must NOT be made the subject of a warranty claim.
DISPATCH
When removing vehicles from storage, you are responsible for procedures that ensure they are in a safe and
roadworthy condition.
VEHICLE STORAGE
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION UPON ARRIVAL
1. A New Vehicle Storage History Sheet must be raised for every new vehicle upon arrival and should
remain inside the vehicle until despatch. This must contain a record of the vehicle condition and
any rectification work carried out during the storage period (see Storage History Sheet).
2. Vehicles must be checked for correct specification and/or shortages. Where this is incorrect the required parts
should be procured through normal channels and costs claimed back via the DDW system using the
appropriate shortage or misbuild program code.
- Claims for rectifying incorrect specification items and/or shortages must be made in accordance with
the conditions detailed in Section C of the Warranty Policy and Procedures Manual.
- NOTE: All missing items should be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage History Sheet and
countersigned by an authorized person.
3. Vehicles must be inspected for transit damage.
- Delivery damage is not the responsibility of Land Rover and must not be made the subject of a
warranty claim. It is the responsibility of the Dealer/Retailer or vehicle storage company to identify any
such damage at the time of the new vehicle receipt and to ensure that the full details are recorded on
the Delivery Receipt. Claims for rectification of such damage must be directed to the Delivery
Company.
- Failure to notify the Delivery Company of damage details at the time of vehicle delivery will result in
claims for subsequent rectification being rejected.
- Warranty claims for damage repairs may only be submitted where Land Rover's responsibility is clearly
indicated. Examples falling into this category are paintwork damage during the fitment of trim or
outward facing dents on the door skin.
- Warranty claims will not be accepted for any transit damage repaired or identified after the vehicle has
been placed into service.
4. A label should be suitably affixed to the inside of the windshield indicating the date of vehicle arrival. Labels
must not be stuck directly to the windshield but placed in a transparent licence holder, or alternatively stuck
to a piece of cling film and attached to the inside of the windshield. This will avoid damage to the windshield
when removing labels.
5. Ignition and door keys must be suitably labelled and when the vehicle is locked, they must be held in a
suitably identified and secure office. All key numbers must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage History
Sheet. All keys, including spares, must be removed from the vehicle during storage for security reasons.
VEHICLE INSPECTION
The entire vehicle exterior must be inspected and, if necessary, washed thoroughly, including the underside and
wheel arches, to remove all dirt and mud deposits.
Any defects found during inspection must be rectified before the vehicle is stored.
Ensure that bumper and body side protectors are correctly located.
There are two main methods of vehicle storage:
1. Collective storage of several vehicles in an open compound.

2. Collective storage of a small number of vehicles, normally at the dealership/retailer and possibly under cover.
IDEALLY ALL VEHICLES SHOULD BE STORED IN A WELL VENTILATED AND TEMPERATURE-CONTROLLED BUILDING.
However, it is recognised that the majority of all vehicle storage is done in an open compound. Therefore, the
following site requirements must be observed and should be authorised with your Regional Manager.
1. The site should have a well-drained hard standing surface, preferably concrete or tarmac, which is free from
undergrowth.
2. The site and driveways must be kept clean and clear of any obstruction at all times.
3. The site must be enclosed by a secure intruder-proof perimeter fence and the gates securely locked. The site
should be under daily surveillance, with unauthorised access prevented at all times.
4. The site should be located away from areas subject to industrial fallout, sea spray or wind-blown dust and
sand. Where fallout conditions are unavoidable it will be necessary to monitor the exterior condition of all cars
and wash as necessary. Heavy contamination may require vehicles to have the transit protection coating
removed and problems arising from the contamination rectified. Once the transit coating has been removed,
the vehicle must not be returned to outdoor storage unless it is fully covered to provide the necessary
protection against deterioration.
5. Mains water, tyre inflation and battery charging facilities must be available on site.
6. Hedges, shrubs and trees adjacent to the site should be kept trimmed and clear of parked vehicles.
7. Vehicles must not be parked under trees, overhead cables or other overhanging structures as bird droppings
or other types of contamination could occur.
VEHICLE PARKING
Vehicles must be parked tidily with a minimum of 600 mm (2 feet) between bumpers, front and rear.
There must be a full doors width clearance between the driver’s door and any adjacent vehicle or obstruction.
Vehicles must be parked at least 1.2 metres (4 feet) away from any interior wall or, for outside storage, at least 2
metres (6 feet) away from any perimeter fence.
Vehicles must be moved on a first-in-first-out basis, subject to specification.

Item Part Number Description

A - Storage Outside
B - Storage Inside
FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT
Car wash facilities.
Tyre inflation equipment with calibrated gauge 0 - 4.05 bar (0 - 60lbf/in²).
All equipment used must be functionally capable of meeting the compliance requirements. Please refer to the
approved equipment document.
Jacking equipment.
Wheel brace.
The following materials must be available and must meet Land Rover specifications:
Engine oil.
Transmission fluid.
Brake fluid.
Distilled water.
Windscreen washer fluid.
Anti-freeze.
Access to trailer/recovery vehicle (Vehicles should not be towed).
Comprehensive filing system for vehicle records.

NOTE: Tools supplied with the vehicle must not be used for any rectification work prior to the prospective
purchaser.
OPERATIONS REQUIRED DURING STORAGE PERIOD
REFERENCE CHART
The following chart gives a quick reference to the requirements necessary during the time a vehicle is in storage. A
detailed explanation of each operation is provided on subsequent pages.
If a vehicle remains in storage after 150 days from receipt of vehicle, a new form must be started.
UPON 30 days 60 days 90 days 120 days 150 days

OPERATION RECEIPT from receipt from receipt from receipt from receipt from receipt
1. IDENTIFICATION X . . . . .
2. INSPECTION X X X X X X
3. BATTERIES X X X X X X
4. COOLING SYSTEM X X X X X X
5. ENGINE X X X X X X
6. AIR CONDITIONING X X X X X X
7. TIRES X X X X X X
8. PARKING BRAKE X X X X X X
9. DOORS, WINDOWS AND X . . X . .
VEHICLE INTERIOR
10. WINDSHIELD WIPER X . . X . .
BLADES
11. PAINTWORK .
All markets REMOVE 'WRAPGUARD' AFTER 180 DAYS
STORAGE OPERATIONS
BATTERIES
To make sure the correct standard of battery care, please see the ‘Battery Care Requirements for New Vehicles
(Dealer and Retailer).
For requirements for receipt of a new vehicle, new vehicle storage and replacement batteries please see the battery
care requirements for new vehicles (dealer and service)
Place a label on the vehicle (or on New Vehicle Storage History Sheet) to indicate when a recharge will be required.
The battery condition should be checked prior to starting and/or moving the vehicle.
For additional information, refer to: Battery Care Requirements (414-00 Battery and Charging System - General
Information, Description and Operation).
The storage, handling and charging of batteries is not dangerous provided that the relevant battery manufacturers’
recommendations are followed. However, a suitable storage and charging facility must be available and should be in
accordance with local legal requirements.
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV) BATTERY PACK
CAUTION: Always keep the high voltage battery charged, failure to do so may cause damage to the battery.
NOTE: In extreme cold climate conditions (circa -30°C), store the vehicle in a warmer area to protect it from the
environment.
If the vehicle is not used for 30 days or more, it is essential that the high voltage battery is charged. For longer
storage periods, charge the high voltage battery every 30 days.
Charge the HEV battery pack as follows:
Start the vehicle (using the engine Start/Stop button and brake pedal sequence).
To view the Tachometer, open the instrument cluster menu, then select Instrument Display, Hybrid Content
and Reduced Hybrid Display.
Raise the engine to approximately 1500 rpm.
When the battery charge level has reached the position indicated in the following graphic, the vehicle may be
switched off.
COOLING SYSTEM
It is ESSENTIAL to maintain the concentration of anti-freeze at the factory-fill condition. Failure to do so may cause
oxidisation of the cooling system leading to corrosion of the engine and heater.
The coolant mixture specification is 50% plain water and 50% Land Rover anti-freeze, Coolant and Corrosion
Inhibitor for frost protection down to -36°C (-33°F).
Coolant specific gravity must be checked monthly using a high quality hydrometer with an appropriate range. At a
coolant temperature of 15°C (60°F), the correct specific gravity reading is 1.074. If the coolant is above or below
this temperature, the following corrections will enable accurate specific gravity readings to be taken:
For higher temperatures: add 0.004 to the specific gravity for each 5°C (10°F).
For lower temperatures: deduct 0.004 from the specific gravity for each 5°C (10°F).
If the specific gravity is correct but the cooling system requires additional coolant, mix anti-freeze and water to the
correct proportions and to the correct volume, then add to the system. Examine for leaks from the radiator and
hoses and rectify as necessary.
If the check shows that the coolant contains less than the required anti-freeze content, proceed as follows:
1. Carefully examine the radiator and all hoses for leaks and security of hose clamps.
2. Remove the header tank pressure cap and drain the cooling system as instructed in the relevant service
manual.
3. Mix anti-freeze and water in the correct proportions and to the correct volume.
4. Close the drain plug and add the coolant until the level in the header tank is steady at ‘MAX’.
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE THE HEADER TANK PRESSURE CAP WHILE THE ENGINE IS HOT.
CAUTION: DO NOT use radiator anti-freeze solution in the windshield washer equipment or paint work will be
damaged.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Where fitted, remove the dipstick and check the engine oil level. If necessary, top up with the approved grade of
engine oil.
On vehicles with an electronic oil level and temperature sensor, check the engine oil level using the procedures
described in the applicable Workshop Manual.
ENGINE AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
If the vehicle is stored for 30 days or more, the engine and air conditioning system should be operated using the
following process:
Set the ignition to power mode 6

Ensure the air conditioning system is switched off
Start the engine and run for 1 minutes at idle
Raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM for 5 minutes
Return the engine speed to idle
Set the air conditioning temperature to 22° and the fan blower speed to 75% of the maximum blower speed
Switch on the air conditioning system
Ensure all the instrument panel air ducts are open
Run the air conditioning system for minimum of 5 continuous minutes with the engine at idle
TIRES
For storage purposes, tires on fitted wheels must be inflated to and maintained at a maximum pressure of 3.60 bar
(52 lbf/in2).
NOTE: Wheels must be rotated through 90 degrees in the forward direction monthly, to ensure that the tread is
rotated evenly during the storage period.
The spare wheel tire pressure must be maintained at the appropriate pressure specified in the Owners Handbook.
Tire condition should be inspected and defective tires replaced prior to removal from storage.
Guidance for Rotation of Tires
To ensure tires are rotated through a minimum of 90 degrees, apply a chalk mark on a front wheel tire wall at the
current centre contact point with the road surface. Move the car forwards until the chalk mark is at the horizontal
position. This process can be applied to a single car or to a row of vehicles and should ensure that all four wheels on
each vehicle is rotated by 90 degrees.
PARKING BRAKE
Vehicles with Manual Park Brake
The parking brake must NOT remain ‘on’ during storage.
After parking:
Manual transmission vehicles: select first or reverse gear and release the parking brake
Automatic transmission vehicles: select ‘P’ and release the parking brake.
Vehicles with Electric Park Brake (EPB)
For vehicles with EPB, the park brake will remain locked onto the brake disc during storage. Refer to the Workshop
Manual, General Procedures, Parking Brake and Actuation for EPB release procedure.
NOTE: For all vehicles with an Electronic Parking Brake (EPB), on manual transmission vehicles, first or reverse
gear must be selected before releasing the EPB. On automatic transmission vehicles 'Park' (P) must be selected
before releasing the EPB.
Where possible the EPB must not remain on during storage. If, for any reason, it is not possible to perform the
release procedure, the operation of the EPB must be checked/monitored monthly during the road wheel rotation
procedure.
AIR SUSPENSION (IF FITTED)
During storage the air suspension system should be left in the transit mode. No other checks are necessary during
storage for this system.
DOORS, WINDOWS AND VEHICLE INTERIOR
Doors, windows, bonnet, boot lid and fuel filler flap must be closed and locked to prevent water and moisture
ingress. A check should be done each month for any signs of water ingress into the cars interior and luggage
compartment. Any water ingress points should be rectified immediately.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Depending on the model, where possible move the wiper arms and blades away from the windshield and leave in the
extended position.
PAINTWORK
Paintwork can be damaged if the protective coating remains on the vehicle for an extended period of time. In
markets with high levels of ultraviolet light (tropical or semi-tropical conditions), the protective coating MUST be
removed after six months. For all other markets the protective coating MUST be removed after nine months.
If storage is subsequently continued, the vehicle must be kept under cover and should be washed regularly (at least
every month).
REMOVAL FROM STORAGE
PROCEDURES
Before removal from storage area, all fluid levels including coolant, hydraulic fluids and lubricating oils must be
checked and replenished where necessary. Where a substantial loss has occurred the cause must be traced prior to
moving the vehicle.
The New Vehicle Storage History Sheet must be checked and safety related faults rectified before the vehicle is
moved from the storage site. These checks are essential to ensure that the vehicle is safe to drive.
Tires must be adjusted to the pressures recommended in the relevant service manual or owners handbook.
Reconnect the battery negative terminal (when applicable).
Check the operation of the lighting and signalling equipment.

TRANSIT PROTECTION COATING (WHERE FITTED)
REMOVAL OF TRANSIT PROTECTION COATING
During storage, the protective coating will collect airborne dirt and grit. Great care must be taken when removing the
transit coating so that damage to the paint film and exterior trim is avoided.
Removal of the transit protection coating should be carried out in accordance with the procedure detailed in the Pre-
Delivery Inspection (PDI) information.
When the vehicle is dispatched from the storage area, remove the New Vehicle Storage History Sheet and file in the
vehicle records.
STORAGE HISTORY SHEET
STORAGE HISTORY SHEET (Continued)

Vehicle Transportation Aids and Vehicle Storage - New Vehicle Storage
Form
Before carrying out any battery assessments. refer to the battery care requirements.
NOTE: If the vehicle has been started within the previous 24 hours the surface charge must be removed prior
to any battery assessment
This form is to be used to record the battery condition for vehicles and parts by the dealer / retailer prior to
handover to the customer. If the vehicle is kept in storage longer than 150 days, a new form must be started.
For AGM batteries Midtronics EXP 1080 / GR1 tester must be used.
Follow the instructions on the Midtronics EXP 1080 / GR1 tester to assess battery condition.
TESTER RESULTS ACTION

GOOD BATTERY Return to service.
GOOD RE-CHARGE Fully charge battery and return to service.
CHARGE AND RE-TEST Fully charge battery. Remove surface charge. Re-test battery. If same result replace
battery.
REPLACE BATTERY OR Verify surface charge removed. Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test. If result
BAD CELL BATTERY repeats after surface charge removal, replace battery. DO NOT RECHARGE.
UNABLE TO DO TEST Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test.
Voltage Date Signature

Vehicle Arrival
Initial battery voltage and date of reading Midtronics Code
taken
Battery Voltage
Recharge Details (if any)
Post Charge Voltage
30 days from initial battery reading Midtronics Code
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Pre Delivery Inspection (PDI) Midtronics Code
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Customer Handover The battery voltage MUST be 12.55 volts or
above
Please make sure that any transit relays are refitted and / or the vehicle is put into transportation mode if the
vehicle is stored
Transit relay removal / vehicle placed in normal mode should only be completed a maximum of 72 hours prior to
handover to customer
STORAGE HISTORY SHEET

MODEL: COLOR: ARRIVAL DATE:
KEY NUMBER:
VIN:
DOORS,
WINDOWS
PARKING AND
BRAKE - VEHICLE
OPERATIONS IDENTIFICATION INSPECTION COOLING SYSTEM ENGINE TIRES OFF INTERIOR
UPON . . . . . . .
RECEIPT
30 DAYS . . . . . . .
60 DAYS . . . . . . .
90 DAYS . . . . . . .
120 DAYS . . . . . . .
150 DAYS . . . . . . .
OPERATIONS WINDSHIELD PAINTWORK COMMENTS ON VEHICLE INSPECTORS
WIPER BLADES CONDITION SIGNATURE
AND DATE
UPON . . NOTE: RECORD ANY .
RECEIPT VEHICLE BODY DAMAGE
ON SILHOUETTES THAT
FOLLOW
30 DAYS . . . .
60 DAYS . . . .
90 DAYS . . . .
120 DAYS . . . .
150 DAYS . . . .
Pre-Delivery Inspection Manual - Preliminary
1. Transportation: Make sure that the vehicle has arrived with the transportation seals intact. Remove and discard
the transportation seals.
1.1 During production of the vehicle, a transportation relay is fitted to the battery positive terminal. This is to
minimize battery drain during vehicle storage and delivery. To start the vehicle when a transit relay is fitted, press
the hazard warning switch. This activates the transit relay to power-up and allow the engine to be started. If the
ignition is turned on but the engine is not started the vehicle will return to transport mode after 15 seconds. After
parking the vehicle in a work bay, remove the keys.
1.2 Check the integrity of factory fitted door and tailgate closure seals. Should a seal be broken or missing, make
sure the tool kit and spare wheel are present. Also check that no internal damage to trim has occurred.
1.3 Remove door and tailgate closure seals.
1.4 Open bonnet for access.
2. Vehicle Transportation Relay: A transit relay is fitted to the battery. This allows the vehicle to be driven when
necessary, but isolates the vehicle during transit and storage to prevent the battery becoming discharged.
2.1 To remove the transit relay:
2.1.1 Disconnect the battery negative lead from the battery negative terminal.
2.1.2 Disconnect the electrical connector (1) from the transit relay. Secure the electrical connector to the stowage
position (2) provided on the main wiring harness.
2.1.3 Remove the bolt (3), that secures the battery positive cables to the top of the transit relay. Discard this bolt.
2.1.4 Remove the two bolts (4), and (5), that secure the transit relay to the mega-fuse assembly (7). Discard the
transit relay (6).
2.1.5 Replace the bolts (4), and (5), to the mega-fuse (7). Make sure that all the positive leads removed from the
top of the transit relay (6), are reconnected to the top of the mega-fuse (7). Tighten the bolts finger tight at this
point.
2.1.6 Loosen the battery positive terminal pinch bolt (8), twist the mega-fuse clockwise until it stops hard against
the battery.
2.1.7 Torque the bolts (4), and (5), to 12 Nm (9 lb.ft).
2.1.8 Twist the mega-fuse back to the straight position, and torque the battery positive terminal pinch bolt (8), to 6
Nm (4 lb.ft).
2.1.9 Reconnect the battery negative terminal, and torque to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft). Make sure this is carried out in one
clean connection, this will avoid creating electrical ‘spikes’ in the system.
2.1.10 After the transit relay has been removed and the battery re-connected, a Battery Monitor System (BMS),
reset will need to be carried out using the Integrated Diagnostic System, (IDS).
NOTE: Information regarding the BMS reset can be found in the Battery Care Manual on GTR.
CAUTIONS:
Damage to battery. The battery terminal posts have a rotational torque threshold of 9 Nm (6 lb.ft). Extreme
care MUST be observed when torquing the bolts (4), and (5), to 12 Nm (9 lb.ft).
Damage to equipment. Failure to remove the transit relay before carrying out the PDI checks may result in
damage to the IDS equipment.
Damage to vehicle. Do not disconnect the battery while the ignition is switched on:
Electrical modules will not be allowed to shut down correctly and will result in fault codes being stored and
spurious faults being induced.
Permanent damage to the instrument cluster may also result if the battery is disconnected with the ignition
switched on.
3. Battery Care Requirements
Make sure the correct standard of battery care is applied to the battery,
NOTES:
All equipment used must be functionally capable of meeting the compliance requirements.
The vehicle may need to be taken out of transit mode to carry out the preconditions.
3.1. Carry out the battery test process shown below.
It is recommended that this test is conducted at least 24 hours after the vehicle engine has been run or the battery
charged to avoid the need of surface charge removal. If time constraints make this unacceptable then the surface
charge must be removed.
Surface Charge Removal
A vehicle which has had its battery charged or been driven in a 24 hour period before the test, must have its surface
charge removed.
Turn on the ignition but do not start the vehicle

Switch on the headlamps on high beam for a minimum 3 minutes
Switch off the headlamps
Wait a minimum of 5 minutes before recording test results for any battery measurements
Battery Test
The battery may be tested either on a bench or on the vehicle.
The battery condition must be checked in accordance with the battery test process utilizing an appropriate tester as
outlined in the equipment section (Section 5)
NOTE: The midtronics code must be recorded on the form.
Any actions must be carried out in accordance with the table shown in the determining battery condition section
(Section 6)
. The details must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which is part of the new vehicle storage document.
For additional information, refer to: New Vehicle Storage Form (100-11 Vehicle Transportation Aids and Vehicle
Storage, Description and Operation).
CAUTION: DO NOT connect the tester to any other circuit or chassis point other than the battery negative
terminal.
3.2. If the battery is disconnected again after conducting the PDI, certain vehicle electrical systems that are
calibrated during the PDI will lose the calibration and will require resetting again once the battery is reconnected.
This may include the PDI application and Market configurations shown in section 11.
3.3. The battery must be tested to determine that the battery is in good condition, and there is sufficient charge to
carry out the PDI. Certain electrical systems require a precise voltage to operate correctly.
Check the battery positive terminal cable and BMS clamp pinch bolts are tightened to 6 Nm.
NOTE: It is imperative, to make sure correct vehicle functionality, that the battery terminal is pushed fully
home and is tightened to the specified torque figure.
Connect the Land Rover recommended battery tester to the battery.

Check and record on the PDI check sheet, the battery condition as indicated by the Land Rover recommended
battery tester.
NOTE: The voltage check must be carried out before connecting the diagnostic equipment. Failure to do this
may result in vehicle configuration failure.
3.4.Check security of battery carrier clamp and that it is tightened to a torque of 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).
4. Check/top-up the level in the windscreen washer reservoir. Top-up the reservoir using a mixture of an approved
windscreen washer fluid and water until the level is to the bottom of the gauze filter in the reservoir filler neck.
5. Check/top-up all under-hood fluid levels. Investigate cause of any low level readings.
5.1 Vehicles with 5.0L petrol and 3.0L diesel engines: The engine must be switched off and allowed to stand
for a period of at least 10 minutes for petrol engines, and 20 minutes for diesel engines, before checking the oil
level. Checking the oil level soon after the engine has been run will provide a false low level reading, which may
result in overfilling. To allow for the actual oil level to be verified, a service mode exists to give access to live oil
readings. In order to have a correct reading, the following conditions must be met:
The vehicle MUST be parked on a level area of ground. The sensor installation is very sensitive to vehicle tilt
in the fore-aft direction: 0.5 degree vehicle tilt corresponds to an up to 0.5 liter measurement error.
The gear selector must be in the ‘PARK’ (P) position and the hood must be open.
A minimum time of 10 minutes for petrol engines, and 20 minutes for diesel engines, MUST be
allowed to pass after running the engine. This drain-down time is to allow the oil to return to the sump.
NOTE: If the Oil Level Display on the Message Center displays: ‘not available’, not enough time has elapsed to
allow the oil to drain back into the sump.
To access service mode, the following procedure should be followed:
1 With the ignition ‘ON’, engine not running, use the controls on the steering wheel, select on the Message Center:
Service Menu > Oil Level Display
2 Press the cruise control CANCEL button twice within 2 seconds.
3 The instrument pack display will revert back to the normal display in the trip computer.
4 Using the controls on the steering wheel, access the Oil Level Display again.
Messages to the right of the guage will advise of any action that may need to be taken. If the oil level is below the
required operating range, a message advising how much oil to add will be displayed; i.e., ‘Add 0.5 liters’. If
necessary, add the recommended quantity of oil then re-check the level.
CAUTION: Serious damage to the engine and components will result from overfilling engine with oil. When
filling the engine with oil, make sure any spilt oil is immediately cleaned from the engine, components or bodywork.
5 With the ignition ‘ON’, engine not running, remove the oil filler cap.
NOTE: Petrol Engines: SAE 5W-20 meeting Land Rover specification WSS M2C925-A (Castrol SLX Professional
OE 5W-20).
Diesel Engines: SAE 5W-30 meeting Land Rover specification WSS M2C934-B (Castrol SLX Professional OE 5W-20).
6 If the oil level is within the required operating range, the message ‘Level OK’ will be displayed.
7 If indicated by the Message Center oil level display, add the appropriate quantity of oil (as advised). Wait 5
minutes to let the oil level stabilise and re-check the level.
8 Clean up any oil spilt during the top-up process.
9 Install the oil filler cap.
CAUTION: The ignition must be left on during the top-up, so that the electronic dipstick can register and
display the new oil level. This enables an accurate level recheck.
NOTE: Investigate the cause of any low fluid levels.

5.2 Remove the auxiliary battery box cover. Check the fluid level in the brake/clutch fluid reservoir. The level must
be to the 'MAX' mark on the reservoir, top-up if necessary. Top-up the fluid level using Shell Donax YB DOT4 ESL
brake/ clutch fluid to the 'MAX' mark on the reservoir. Install the auxiliary battery box cover.
5.3 Check that the power steering fluid level is midway between the 'MAX' and 'MIN' marks on the fluid reservoir,
top-up if necessary. Top-up the fluid level using Texaco cold climate fluid 14315.
5.4 If installed: Check that the dynamic response fluid level is mid-way between the 'MAX' and 'MIN' marks on the
fluid reservoir, top-up if necessary. Top-up the fluid level using Texaco cold climate fluid 14315.

5.5 Check the coolant level in the expansion tank. With the engine cold, the coolant level must be to the upper level
of the cold fill range indicator mark, above the text on the side of the expansion tank. Ignore any coolant which may
be visible in the top section of the tank.
5.6 Top-up the coolant to the upper level mark on the tank using a 50% mixture of water and Havoline Extended
Life Coolant (XLC) or any ethylene glycol based anti-freeze containing no methanol with only Organic Acid
Technology (OAT) corrosion inhibitors. Install the expansion tank filler cap, tighten the cap until the ratchet is heard
to 'click'.
NOTES:
Anti-freeze concentration MUST be maintained at 50%.
Investigate the cause of any low fluid levels.
5.7 Check/record the specific gravity of the coolant using a hydrometer. The specific gravity of the coolant at 20oC
(68oF) must be 1.068:
Loosen the expansion tank filler cap to relieve pressure in the cooling system.
Tighten the expansion tank filler cap.
Remove the expansion tank bleed screw.
Extract enough coolant to enable the gravity to be checked.
Install the expansion tank bleed screw.
Top-up the coolant.
WARNING: Risk of injury. Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping steam or coolant, do not
remove, or loosen, the filler cap from the coolant expansion tank while the system is hot.
NOTE: A suitable hydrometer is available from the Equipment Program, Part Number FT 2030.
6. Make sure that the cold air deflector has been fitted on vehicles with 5.0L normally aspirated and supercharged
engines, that operate in severe cold markets: (Russia and Nordic countries).
Normally Aspirated
Supercharger
6.1 The cold air deflector should be secured to both of the multi-stage thermostat (MST) hoses and visually flat to
the front of the engine. If necessary, push on the center of the deflector to firmly seat between both MST hoses.
Make sure the deflector is retained, and is flat to the front of the engine.
7. Connect the approved Land Rover battery power supply, then connect the Land Rover approved diagnostic
equipment to the vehicle diagnostic socket. Insert IDS disk 127 (with the latest patch) or later.
NOTE: To charge the battery, connect the positive booster cable to the positive terminal on the battery. The
negative booster cable MUST be connected to a suitable earth point on the vehicle. The earth point should be at
least 0.5 meters, (20 inches) away from the battery and as far away as possible from any fuel pipes, brake pipes
and moving parts.
CAUTION: Damage to vehicle. Failure to charge the battery in this manner will cause the BMS, to NOT register
the charge increase. This can cause certain systems to be inhibited during the first few days of driving while the BMS
recalibrates.
8. Using the diagnostic equipment, run the PDI application:
Switch the ignition ON.

Enter VIN and vehicle details into diagnostic equipment.
Select the correct model year.
Select ‘Vehicle Configuration’ icon.
Select ‘Special Applications’.
Select the ‘Pre-delivery Inspection’ Application.
Follow the on-screen instructions. This will take the vehicle out of transit mode, sets the Service Interval
Announcer (SIA), on petrol models ‘flight recorder’ data, and the EMS adaption values.
9. Using the diagnostic equipment, clear any fault codes:
Select ‘Diagnostic Trouble Code Monitor’ icon.

Confirm vehicle features.
Select ‘Diagnostic Trouble Code Monitor’ icon.
Select ‘Complete Vehicle’ to clear fault codes.
10. Check the doors, door locks and child safety locks for correct operation. Install the door lock cover.
10.1 Check operation of the internal ‘master lock’ and ‘unlock switch’ on the door pad.
10.2 Check the hood release and safety catch for correct operation.
10.3 Check the operation of every button on both the supplied key fobs, to make sure the expected functionality is
carried out as indicated by each buttons legend.
To check the Passive Entry system, perform the following additional tests:
Make sure both Smart Keys are taken at least 3 meters away from the vehicle.
Lock the vehicle by pressing the lock button on one of the Smart Keys. Make sure that the locking process
has been completed as evidenced by the door mirrors folding in.
Wait 5 seconds.
Take one Smart Key and bring it within close proximity (1 meter), of the drivers door, pull the door handle
and make sure the vehicle unlocks.
Close the drivers door and press the exterior lock button on the drivers door handle, whilst keeping the Smart
Key in close proximity of the drivers door.
Make sure the locking process has been completed as evidenced by the door mirrors folding in.
Remove the Smart Key to at least 3 meters from the vehicle.
Take the second Smart Key and bring it within close proximity (1 meter), of the drivers door, pull the door
handle and make sure the vehicle unlocks.
Enter the vehicle, place the first Smart Key on the center console and press both the start button and the
brake pedal simultaneously. Repeat this process for the second Smart Key.
If the vehicle starts with both Smart Keys, the Passive Entry and both Smart Keys are operating correctly.
10.4 Check for correct operation of the vehicle alarm system:
Make sure all doors, windows and sunroofs are closed.

Press the lock button on the Smart Key once. This will ‘superlock’ the vehicle (interior and exterior vehicle
protection). Check that the indicator triple flashes for 10 seconds then continues to single flash.
Press the unlock button and make sure the alarm has been disarmed.
Press the lock button twice within three seconds. This will activate the perimetric alarm but NOT the interior
space protection.
Check that the indicator double flashes for 10 seconds, then continues to single flash.
Press the unlock button and make sure the alarm has been disarmed.
NOTE: To carry out this procedure in the correct manner the battery charger should be removed.
Pre-Delivery Inspection Manual - Vehicle Interior
NOTE: The battery charger should be reconnected whilst carring out the sections 11- 23 of this PDI manual.
To charge the battery, connect the positive booster cable to the positive terminal on the battery. The negative
booster cable MUST be connected to a suitable earth point on the vehicle. The earth point should be at least 0.5
meters, (20 inches) away from the battery and as far away as possible from any fuel pipes, brake pipes and moving
parts.
CAUTION: Damage to vehicle. Failure to charge the battery in this manner will cause the BMS, to NOT register
the charge increase. This can cause certain systems to be inhibited during the first few days of driving while the BMS
recalibrates.
11. Touchscreen Audio System: Using the Touch Screen Display (TSD), set the clock, date, voice language and
the Satellite Navigation, specific to the Market unless otherwise instructed on the Customer Configurations Sheet.
11.1 Clock Setting - With the vehicle ignition system switched on in convenience mode and the TSD switched on,
select the HOME MENU by pressing the hard button on the left side of the audio controls:
1. Touch the Audio settings soft-button.

2. At the settings menu, touch the Clock adjust soft-button.
3. Touch the arrow up or arrow down softbuttons to adjust the hours or minutes.
4. Touch the 12/24 soft-buttons to set the hours for the 12 or 24 hour clock display. With the 12 hour display
selected, am/pm is also displayed as appropriate.
5. Touch the Set soft-button to confirm the clock settings.
6. Return to the Home menu screen by touching the arrow soft-button at the top left of the screen, or press
the HOME MENU hard-button on the audio controls.
NOTE: The displayed clock time will not be set and displayed correctly until the Set soft-button is touched. If
the Set soft-button is not touched the clock will not be reset on exiting the Clock adjust screen.
11.2 Date Setting - With the vehicle ignition system switched on in convenience mode and the TSD switched on,

2. At the settings menu, touch the Clock adjust soft-button.
3. Touch the Date soft-button then touch the arrow up or arrow down soft-buttons to adjust the days or
months.
4. Touch the dd/mm or mm/dd soft-buttons to set the date format setting.
5. Touch Set to confirm the date settings.
NOTE: The displayed date will not be set and displayed correctly until the Set soft-button is touched. If the Set
soft-button is not touched the date will not be reset on exiting the Clock Adjust screen.
11.3 Language Setting - With the vehicle ignition system switched on in convenience mode and the TSD switched
on, select the HOME MENU by pressing the hard button on the left side of the audio controls:

2. At the settings menu, touch the Language softbutton. Select and change the specified language on the
customer configurations sheet.
3. Set the voice language (if option is available).
4. Set the system voice feedback, Male or Female (if option is available).
12. Navigation system - Check the Navigation screen, make sure that the correct country map has been uploaded
onto the Navigation hard drive. To set the Naviagtion search area the following must be done:
Select ‘Navigation’.
Select ‘Enter destination’.
Select ‘More’.
Select ‘Search area’.
Then select the local country or state specific to the Market unless otherwise instructed on the Customer
Configurations Sheet.
13. Bluetooth® - Using a Bluetooth® capable phone:
1 Switch the ignition ON and make sure that the Touch Screen is active.
2 From the Home menu, select Phone.
3 A menu will appear. If no phone is connected, select Search new, otherwise select Change phone and then
select Search new.
NOTE: There are two ways of pairing the Bluetooth® device and the vehicle. Detailed below is pairing to the
vehicle, the other method is using the vehicle 'Vehicle to device' to pair to the device. If you use the 'Vehicle to
device' method, follow the instructions on screen. Select Device to vehicle option. The vehicles Bluetooth® system is
discoverable for only 3 minutes.
5 Using the mobile phone, search for Bluetooth® devices. On some phones, this is referred to as new paired device.
See your phone’s operating instructions for further information.
6 When the vehicle’s Bluetooth® system is discovered, begin the pairing process and follow the on-screen
instructions.
7 When requested, enter the Land Rover Bluetooth® access pin (2121) into the phone and vehicle system.
8 Once your phone is paired it may automatically connect to the vehicle system. If not, use the device list shown on
the touch screen or use the mobile phone.
NOTE: Make sure that the device is enabled for Bluetooth®
When the customer configures a Bluetooth® phone, this will overwrite the last configured phone.
14. Rear Seat Entertainment - The Rear Seat Entertainment headphones will be in the transit items bag and the
Touchscreen Remote Control (TsRC) will be in the docking station. The following MUST be carried out:
Fit 2 AAA batteries to each set of headphones.

Place the headphones in the rear door cards - one in each side.
Fit and connect the battery into the TsRC by first removing the rear battery cover. Make the electrical
connection and locate the battery into position.
CAUTION: Ensure that the battery wires are located as in the graphic below. Incorrect positioning of the wires
will not allow the battery cover to fit flush. This in turn will not allow the TsRC to dock correctly.
Replace and re-secure the battery cover. Locate the 2 black rubber bungs over the battery cover screw heads
and push in to secure.
Dock the TsRC unit into the docking station. Observe until at least 2 charge segments are illuminated.
NOTE: The TsRC is docked by locating its bottom edge onto the locating pins in the docking station, then
pushing down on the ‘raised blip’ on the top centre of the TsRC. A positive lock will be denoted by a ‘click’ from the
TsRC and docking connector.
15. Satellite navigation - Check operation of the system:
Driving the vehicle will automatically establish global position.

If global position has not been established, the navigation screen will display a ‘GPS’ icon with a line through
it. Make sure no obstructions, such as tall buildings or trees, are close-by.
16. Set the Radio and DAB, specific to the Market unless otherwise instructed on the Customer Configurations Sheet.
17. Radio system - With the vehicle ignition system switched on in convenience mode and the TSD switched on,

2. At the Radio menu, set 6 radio stations for each wavelength as specified on the customer configuration
sheet. Touch the Radio (1) soft button to select a waveband.
3. Short touch the Auto Seek soft-button (3) to search for the next chosen radio station (Shown in the display
(2).
4. Touch and hold the Preset soft button (4) to store the current station on the chosen preset (the radio will
mute while the station is stored then beep to confirm).
5. Repeat these steps until all wavelengths have 6 preset radio stations.
6. Touch the Settings soft-button (5) to activate/ deactivate the RDS, Traffic, News, AF and Reg functions;
according to the Market unless otherwise specified on the 'New Vehicle Configurations Options' sheet.
7. Return to the Home menu screen by pressing the arrow soft-button at the top left of the screen, or, press
CAUTION: Due to radio reception constrains, it may be necessary to set the radio presets outside of the
workshop.
18. DAB Radio system - With the vehicle ignition system switched on in convenience mode and the TSD switched
on, select the HOME MENU by pressing the hard button on the left side of the audio controls:

2. At the DAB Radio menu, set 6 radio stations for each DAB band (DAB 1, 2, or 3) as specified on the
customer configuration sheet. Touch the DAB Radio (1) soft button to select a DAB band.
3. Short touch the Auto Seek soft-button (3) to search for the next chosen DAB radio station (Shown in the
display (2)).
4. Touch and hold the Preset soft button (4) to store the current station on the chosen preset (the DAB radio
will mute while the station is stored).
5. Repeat these steps until all DAB bands have 6 preset radio stations.
6. Touch the Settings soft-button (5) to activate/ deactivate the FM Traffic, Announcements, Link DAB (auto
search when signal strength drops), DAB format (DAB regions) and DAB country functions; according to the
Market unless otherwise specified on the 'New Vehicle Configurations Options' sheet.
7. Return to the Home menu screen by pressing the arrow soft-button at the top left of the screen, or, press
CAUTION: Due to radio reception constrains, it may be necessary to set the radio presets outside of the
workshop.
19. If requested on the ‘New Vehicle Configurations Options’ sheet place the iPod™ lead into the centre console
glove compartment.
20. The automatic headlamp system has an additional feature called HBA (High Beam Assist). The ‘Hand of Traffic’
must be set in the Message Center and the feature enabled to make sure of correct operation of the system. To set
the HBA the following steps must be followed in order:
With the ignition ‘ON’, engine not running, use the controls on the steering wheel to select on the instrument
cluster menu:
Main Menu > Vehicle Set-up > High Beam Assist.
Configure the ‘Hand of Traffic’ setting by selecting the appropriate Drive on Left (of road) or Drive on Right
(of road) to Market condition.
‘Enable’ the feature by setting Activate Assist.
Carry out a visual check to make sure that there are no stickers, or labels, directly in view of the HBA camera
sensor.
NOTE: The HBA feature can be enabled (or disabled) by selecting (or de-selecting) Activate Assist.
Enabling or disabling HBA will not affect previous ‘Hand of Traffic’ settings.
21. Vehicles with 5.0L petrol and 3.0L diesel engines: Reset the oil level indicator. To reset the oil level
indicator the following steps must be followed in order:
With the ignition ‘ON’, engine not running, use the controls on the steering wheel to select on the instrument
cluster menu: Service Menu > Oil Level Display.
Press the cruise control CANCEL button twice within 2 seconds.
The instrument pack display will revert to the normal display in the trip computer.
Using the controls on the steering wheel, access the Oil Level Display again.
Press and hold the cruise control CANCEL button for 10 seconds to reset the oil level indicator.
The trip menu display will revert to the normal display mode on the Message Center.
Turn the ignition OFF.
22. Emergency Park Release System diesel vehicles only - The Drive Selector is now incorporated in the automatic
transmission.
In the event of a vehicle transmission failure, a mechanical means of selecting neutral is now available. An
Emergency Park Release (EPR) provides this functionality.
In an emergency, the EPR hand lever can be operated to release the park pawl within the transmission. The
park pawl will not be allowed to re-engage until the hand lever is locked down in the closed position.
The EPR lever is exposed while in transit. Actuation of the EPR requires the operator to be seated in the
driver’s seat with the foot brake applied. Turn the locking device 90 degrees anti-clockwise and lift using the
pull strap.
Ensure that the EPR lever locking device is locked down securely, then fit the finisher panel and cup holders.
The cup holders are despatched in the glovebox.
23. Remove battery charger: Disconnect the approved battery charger/power supply from the vehicle.
24. Make sure that the interior of the vehicle is undamaged. Refer to the Cosmetic Standards Manual on Topix.
Pre-Delivery Inspection Manual - Vehicle Exterior
25. Check operation of fuel flap and lock.
26. Inspect the road wheels and tires for damage. Check the wheel retaining nuts for correct torque, 140 Nm (103
lb.ft).
27. The vehicle is delivered with the tire pressures set higher than the normal operating pressures. Set the tire
pressures to 2.0 bar (29psi) for the road test.
CAUTION: When the tire pressures are reduced from the high transit / storage pressure to the road test
pressures, the final pressure will rise. The initial high drop in pressure from transit / storage pressure to normal
pressure will cause the tire pressure to rise after 2 minutes, giving incorrect tire pressures by up to 0.4 bar (6psi).
Initially drop each tire pressure to approximately 0.1-0.3 bar (2-4psi) below the recommended pressure and then
inflate the tires to the desired pressure.
CAUTION: If the vehicle is returned to storage after the PDI, the tire pressures must be raised to
3.60 bar (52psi).
28. Remove all internal and external transit protection. Stow the rear outer seat belts in the stowage clips.
29. Check that the vehicle exterior is clean and undamaged. Refer to the ‘Cosmetics Standards Manual’ on TOPIx, for
further details.
30. Apply lubricant to the door seals on vehicles that operate in severe cold markets: (Russia and Nordic
countries).
Front door seals
30.1 Vehicles operated in severe cold markets (Russia and Nordic countries): Apply the Carboflo pen, Land
Rover Part No. CYK500010 to the primary and secondary front door seals as illustrated above.
Rear door seals

30.2 Vehicles operated in severe cold markets (Russia and Nordic countries): Apply the Carboflo pen, Land
Rover Part No. CYK500010 to the primary and secondary rear door seals as illustrated above
Pre-Delivery Inspection Manual - Road Test
NOTE: Before driving the vehicle, check the operation of:
Lights, indicators, wipers, wash/wipe and hazard warning.

Seats and seat belts.
Fascia switches.
Electric park brake.
31. Make sure that the automatic transmission starter isolator, operates in all gears with the exception of 'P' - Park
and 'N' - Neutral.
32. Check for the correct operation of all the driver controls and systems. Including the Terrain Response indicators,
wheel direction/ differential locking indicators and the low tire pressure monitoring system, if fitted.
32.1 Start vehicle and check operation of:
CAUTION: Make sure the climate control is set in the off position.
Starter/Inhibitor switch.
Electric mirrors, including power fold.
32.2 During the road test, make sure the transfer box range change functionality is tested by using the following
method.
With engine running and parking brake applied, select neutral on automatic gearbox.
Request range change for low gear with switch - wait until change is complete.
Request range change into high gear with switch - wait until change is complete.
Repeat 5 times.
Make sure high range is left selected.
Press the fascia mounted Tyre Pressure Monitor button to calibrate the tyre pressure ECU, if fitted.
32.3 Make sure the correct operation of the shift interlock (where applicable).
CAUTION: Risk of injury. Apply the parking brake, chock the wheels and make sure that all personnel are clear
of the vehicle before carrying out the above procedure.
32.4 Check the electric windows for correct operation. Open and close all the windows fully. Check that the rear
window isolation switch is operational.
32.5 If the battery is disconnected, becomes discharged or the power supply is interrupted, the one-touch ‘window
up’ operation is disabled until the window position is reset.
To reset the window position:
Close the window fully.

Release the switch, the pull up and hold for one second.
Repeat the procedure on each window.
32.6 Check the sunroof for correct operation. Make sure both sunroof open/close and sunroof tilt are fully
operational.
32.7 Check operation of the air conditioning (A/C) system.
When the vehicle is at operating temperature, set the heater control to 22ºC and run the fan speed at 75%.
Switch on the A/C system and run for 5 minutes.
32.8 Check for correct operation of the cruise control or adaptive cruise control (ACC) system.
WARNING: Damage to vehicle. Adaptive cruise control is not a collision warning or avoidance system.
Risk of injury. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
Only use cruise control when conditions are favourable, e.g. on straight, dry, open roads with light traffic.
32.9 The cruise control and ACC system are operated by switches mounted on the steering wheel. The driver can
also intervene at any time by use of the brake or accelerator pedals. The Forward Alert function can be manually
turned on or off in the Message Centre. Using the Message Centre steering wheel controls select: Vehicle Set-up
and then Forward Alert from the menu; using the OK button will turn the function on or off.
32.10 Controls - all cruise control switches are located on the steering wheel switch-pack:
1. SET + : Set the speed (+) or increase.

2. SET - : Set the speed (-) or decrease.
3. GAP: Gap decrease (ACC only).
4. GAP: Gap increase (ACC only).
5. RESUME: Resume set speed.
6. CANCEL: Cancels without erasing memorised speed.
32.11 Setting a speed:
Accelerate as normal until required speed is reached.

Press the ‘SET’ button (1). The vehicle speed will be stored in the memory and cruise control should be
engaged.
The message centre will display the selected speed - ‘SETSPEED 80KM/H 50MPH’.
32.12 Checking the ACC gap: After the ignition is switched on a default gap will be automatically selected (setting
No 3). There are 4 gaps available to select.
After selecting cruise control, check that the vehicle slows when a vehicle ahead is detected by the system.
WARNING: If the adaptive cruise control system predicts that its maximum braking level will not be sufficient,
then an audible warning will sound while the system continues to brake. ‘DRIVER INTERVENE’ will also be displayed
on the message centre.
When a vehicle ahead is detected the vehicle will be in ‘follow mode’.
WARNING: When in ‘follow mode’ the vehicle will not decelerate automatically to a stop, nor will the vehicle
always decelerate quickly enough to avoid a collision without driver intervention.
Check that when in ‘follow mode’ a warning light in the instrument pack is illuminated and the message
centre displays ‘CRUISE GAP’.
32.13 Altering the cruise gap to the vehicle ahead:
Press, the top part of the switch (3) to decrease the gap, and the bottom part of the switch (4) to increase
the gap.
Check ‘follow mode’ functions correctly.
32.14 Check the operation of the ‘Forward Alert’ system. Make sure that the ACC system is disengaged: this will
allow the GAP buttons to be used to adjust the Forward Alert.
Switch on ‘Forward Alert’
Set the ‘Forward Alert’ gap.

Using the GAP increase button (4), on the steering wheel switch-pack, select the largest gap available.
Check that when a vehicle is detected close ahead, an audible warning sounds and the message centre displays:
‘FORWARD ALERT’.
This is easiest to achieve by following a lead vehicle as it slows down.
WARNING: The ‘Forward Alert’ system DOES NOT provide vehicle braking.
NOTE: The ‘Forward Alert’ system provides warnings if a vehicle is detected close ahead.
32.15 Set the ‘Forward Alert’ gap:
Using the GAP decrease button (3), on the steering wheel switch-pack, select the smallest gap available.
32.16 Switch OFF the Forward Alert system so that the customer receives the vehicle set in this condition.
33. Check for any unusual noises from the power train, suspension or braking systems.
34. Check for any squeaks or rattles from the vehicle interior.
35. Check the operation of the satellite navigation system (if fitted).
Pre-Delivery Inspection Manual - Quality Assurance Checks
36. On completion of road test:
Position the vehicle on lift.

Raise the vehicle on lift.
Visually check beneath the vehicle for leaks from the powertrain components.
Lower the vehicle.
37. Install the front towing eye cover, secure with the 4 toggle fasteners. Install the rear towing eye cover, tighten
the fixings.
38. Check the register of Service Action Bulletins - make sure a fault free delivery to the customer.
39. If fault lamp(s) are illuminated, interrogate that system using IDS, report findings and clear faults.
40. Retain copy of this schedule in the Customer/ Vehicle History file.
41. Make sure the vehicle details are included in the Service Portfolio and endorse with the dealer stamp.
42. Record locking wheel nut code and place in Customer/Vehicle History file, (If applicable).
43. Record the Bluetooth code and place in Customer/Vehicle History file, (If applicable).
44. Make sure vehicle literature pack and security item contents are correct.
45. Place vehicle literature pack, mats and security items in the vehicle, (If applicable).
46. Make sure the tire pressures are set to the correct pressure.
46.1 For vehicles that will be delivered to the customer: Set all tire pressures (including spare) with the tires
cold to the recommended tire pressures for 'normal' conditions (up to 100mph [160kph]). The recommended tire
pressures are provided on a label attached to the 'B' pillar.
46.2 For vehicles being returned to storage: Set all tire pressures with the tires cold to 3.6 bar (52psi).
47. Valet vehicle prior to customer release.
48. Attach correct type approval labels to the handsets (where applicable).
NOTE: A vehicle must not be left without a transportation switch/relay installed for longer than two days, prior
to customer handover.
If the transit relay has been refitted prior to release to customer; step 2 will need to be repeated, to remove the
transit relay. Step 9 will need to be repeated, using the necessary diagnostic equipment, to clear DTC's.
Showroom Preparation - Showroom Preparation
NOTE: The information given in this document is subject to change for different model years.
Prior to the vehicle being placed into the showroom, the following components must be removed.
Function Fuse Rating Location

Starter motor (All variants) 14E 40amp Engine junction box (EJB)
Horn 25E 15amp EJB
Wipers 29E 30amp EJB
Washers 43P & 38P 15amp Central junction box (CJB)
Power washers 7E 30amp EJB
Workshop Service Manual for Range Rover Sport L320 2013 Sec.2
2: Chassis
204: Suspension
204-00: Suspension System - General Information
Specification
Diagnosis and Testing
Suspension System
General Procedures
Four-Wheel Alignment (57.65.04)
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout Check
204-01: Front Suspension
Specification
Front Suspension
Front Suspension
Removal and Installation
Front Stabilizer Bar (60.10.01)
Front Stabilizer Bar Link (60.10.02/60.10.04)
Upper Arm Ball Joint (60.15.02)
Lower Arm Ball Joint (60.15.03)
Wheel Knuckle (60.25.01)
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub (60.25.14)
Upper Arm (60.35.01)
Lower Arm (60.35.02)
Upper Arm Bushing (60.35.32)
Lower Arm Bushing (60.35.33)
Lower Arm Rear Bushing (60.35.25) (60.35.36) (60.35.36.47)
204-02: Rear Suspension
Specification
Rear Suspension
Rear Suspension
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub (64.15.14)
Upper Arm (64.35.60)
Lower Arm (64.35.54)
Upper Arm Ball Joint (64.15.07)
Rear Stabilizer Bar (64.35.08)
Rear Stabilizer Bar Link (64.35.24)
Lower Arm Bushing (64.35.15)
Upper Arm Bushing (64.35.22)
Lower Arm Ball Joint (64.15.08)
Toe Link (64.35.70)
Wheel Knuckle (64.35.10)
204-04: Wheels and Tires
Specification
Wheels and Tires
Wheels and Tires
Tire Low Pressure Sensor (74.10.05)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna (86.53.16)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna (86.53.17)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module (86.54.05)
204-05: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
Specification
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
General Procedures
Ride Height Adjustments (60.90.03)
Air Suspension System Depressurize and Pressurize (60.50.38)
Air Leaks
Front Shock Absorber and Air Spring Assembly (60.21.01.99)
Front Air Shock Absorber (60.30.02.45)
Suspension Height Sensor (60.36.01)
Air Suspension Reservoir (60.50.03)
Air Suspension Control Module (60.50.04)
Air Suspension Reservoir Solenoid Valve Block (60.50.05)
Air Suspension Compressor Drier (60.50.09)
Air Suspension Compressor (60.50.10)
Air Suspension Front Solenoid Valve Block (60.50.11)
Rear Shock Absorber and Air Spring Assembly (64.21.01.99)
Rear Air Shock Absorber (64.30.02.45)
Air Suspension Rear Solenoid Valve Block (64.50.11)
Air Suspension Air Filter (64.50.12)
Air Suspension Muffler (64.50.01)
Air Suspension Pressure Sensor
204-06: Ride and Handling Optimization
Specification
Ride and Handling Optimization
Active Stabilization System
Ride and Handling Optimization
Active Stabilization System
General Procedures
Active Stabilization System Bleeding (60.60.13)
Upper Accelerometer (60.60.02)
Lower Accelerometer (60.60.03)
Fluid Pump - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Fluid Pump (60.60.10) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Dynamic Response Module (60.60.01)
Valve Block (60.60.20)
Valve Block Filter (60.60.21)
Valve Block to Front Stabilizer Bar Actuator Pipe Assembly
Valve Block to Rear Stabilizer Bar Actuator Pipe Assembly
Valve Block Transducer (60.60.22)
Front Stabilizer Bar Bushing (60.60.47) - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Front Stabilizer Bar Bushing (60.60.47) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Front Stabilizer Bar (60.60.50) - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Front Stabilizer Bar (60.60.50) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Rear Stabilizer Bar Bushing (64.60.47)
Rear Stabilizer Bar (64.60.50)
Pressure Control Valve
Ride and Handling Optimization Switch (86.65.11)
Direction Control Valve Solenoid
205: Driveline
205-00: Driveline System - General Information
Driveline System
205-01: Driveshaft
Specification
Driveshaft
Universal Joints
Driveshaft
Front Driveshaft (47.15.02) - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Front Driveshaft (47.15.02) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Rear Driveshaft (47.15.03)
205-02: Rear Drive Axle/Differential
Specification
Rear Drive Axle and Differential
Rear Drive Axle and Differential
General Procedures
Differential Draining and Filling (51.25.02)
In-Vehicle Repair
Differential Locking Motor (51.15.03)
Rear Axle Oil Temperature Sensor (51.15.06)
Drive Pinion Seal (51.20.01)
Differential Locking Module (51.30.01)
Axle Assembly (51.15.01)
Axle Housing Bushing (51.15.41)
Rear Axle Housing Support Insulator (51.15.44)
205-03: Front Drive Axle/Differential
Specification
Front Drive Axle and Differential
Front Drive Axle
General Procedures
Differential Draining and Filling (54.15.02)
In-Vehicle Repair
Drive Pinion Seal (54.10.20)
Front Axle Housing Support Insulator (54.10.24)
Axle Tube (47.10.42)
Axle Assembly (54.10.01)
Axle Carrier Bushing (54.10.26)
Axle Tube Bushing
Axle Cover Bushing
205-04: Front Drive Halfshafts
Specification
Front Drive Halfshafts
Halfshaft Joint
Front Drive Halfshafts
Front Halfshaft LH (47.10.01)
Front Halfshaft RH (47.10.02)
Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot (47.10.03)
Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint (47.10.04)
Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot (47.10.16)
Halfshaft Seal LH (54.10.18)
Halfshaft Seal RH (54.10.21)
205-05: Rear Drive Halfshafts
Specification
Rear Drive Halfshafts
Rear Drive Halfshafts
Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot (47.11.03)
Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot (47.11.16)
Rear Halfshaft (47.11.01)
206: Brake System
206-00: Brake System - General Information
Specification
Brake System
General Procedures
Front Brake Disc Runout Check (70.12.15.01) - Vehicles Without: High
Performance Brakes
Front Brake Disc Runout Check (70.12.15.01) - Vehicles With: High
Performance Brakes
Rear Brake Disc Runout Check (70.12.36.01)
Brake System Bleeding (70.25.02) - Vehicles With: High Performance
Brakes
Brake System Bleeding (70.25.02) - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake System Pressure Bleeding (70.25.02)
Component Bleeding - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Component Bleeding - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Front Brake Disc Runout Check - With Wheel On - Vehicles With: Standard
Brakes
Front Brake Disc Runout Check - With Wheel On - Vehicles With: High
Performance Brakes
Brake Pad Bedding-In
206-03: Front Disc Brake
Specification
Front Disc Brake
Front Disc Brake
Brake Disc (70.12.10) - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake Disc (70.12.10) - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Brake Pads (70.40.02) - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake Pads (70.40.02) - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Brake Caliper (70.55.24) - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake Caliper (70.55.24) - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
206-04: Rear Disc Brake
Specification
Rear Disc Brake
Rear Disc Brake
Brake Disc (70.12.33)
Brake Pads (70.40.03)
Brake Caliper (70.55.25)
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate (70.55.29)
206-05: Parking Brake and Actuation
Specification
Parking Brake
Parking Brake
General Procedures
Parking Brake Shoe and Lining Adjustment (70.40.11)
Parking Brake Shoes Bedding-In (70.40.12)
Parking Brake Cable LH
Parking Brake Cable RH
Parking Brake Switch
Parking Brake Actuator (70.35.48) - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Parking Brake Actuator (70.35.48) - Vehicles With: High Performance
Brakes
Parking Brake Shoes (70.40.09)
206-06: Hydraulic Brake Actuation
Specification
Hydraulic Brake Actuation
Hydraulic Brake Actuation
Brake Fluid Reservoir (70.25.31)
Brake Master Cylinder (70.30.08)
Brake Pedal (70.35.01)
Brake Pedal and Bracket (70.35.03)
206-07: Power Brake Actuation
Specification
Brake Booster
Power Brake System
Brake Booster (70.50.01)
Brake Vacuum Pump - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Brake Vacuum Pump - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
206-09A: Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control
Specification
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module (70.25.12)
Front Wheel Speed Sensor (70.65.30)
Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (70.65.31)
206-09B: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist
Specification
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist
Yaw Rate Sensor (70.70.35)
211: Steering System
211-00: Steering System - General Information
Steering System
General Procedures
Power Steering System Filling and Bleeding
Power Steering System Flushing
211-02: Power Steering
Specification
Power Steering
Power Steering
General Procedures
Power Steering Pressure Test - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /TDV8 3.6L Diesel
Power Steering Pressure Test - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Power Steering Control Valve Actuator (57.10.05)
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (57.15.08)
Power Steering Fluid Cooler (57.15.11) - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Power Steering Pump (57.20.14) - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Power Steering Pump (57.20.14) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
/V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Steering Angle Sensor (57.40.02)
Steering Gear (57.10.01) - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Steering Gear (57.10.01) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
211-03: Steering Linkage
Specification
Steering Linkage
Steering Linkage
Steering Gear Boot (57.10.29)
Tie Rod (57.55.09)
Tie Rod End (57.55.07)
211-04: Steering Column
Specification
Steering Column
Steering Column
Steering Column (57.40.01) (57.40.06)
Steering Column Shaft (57.40.22)
Steering Column Lower Shaft (57.40.16 / 57.40.27)
Steering Wheel (57.61.01)
211-05: Steering Column Switches
Specification
Steering Column Switches
Steering Column Lock and Ignition Switch Housing (57.40.31)
Ignition Switch (86.65.02)
Steering Column Multifunction Switch RH (86.65.41)
Steering Column Multifunction Switch LH (86.65.55)
Suspension System - General Information -
Air Spring Suspension
Item Specification
Type Independent with standard/Dynamic Response stabilizer bars, and air springs with multiple, driver selectable
ride heights - Standard, off-road and access.
Wheel Alignment Specification (All Markets) - Front LHD - Vehicles with 5.0L Supercharged and diesel vehicles with Dynamic
Response
CAUTION: When checking or adjusting front or rear steering geometry, the vehicle must either have a full fuel
tank or have sufficient weight placed in the vehicle's load space to give the equivalent weight of a full fuel tank. The
weight must be evenly distributed at the front and the right hand side of the load space. The fuel tank capacity is
86.3 litres (18.9 Imperial gallons) (22.7 US gallons). Depending on the amount of fuel in the tank, calculate the
amount of weight which must be added:
1 litre of fuel weighs 0.8 kg (1.7 pounds)

1 Imperial gallon of fuel weighs 3.6 kg (8.0 pounds)
1 US gallon of fuel weighs 3.0 kg (6.7 pounds)
NOTE: All figures are with vehicle at 'Showroom' ride height - full fluids, full tank of fuel, no occupants/luggage,
tires inflated to normal pressures
Item Left-hand Right-hand Total/Balance

Camber Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance
Decimal degrees -0.63° ± 0.75° -0.75° ± 0.75° 0.12° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -38' ± 45' -45' ± 45' 7' ± 45'
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
Decimal degrees -1.38° 0.12° -1.50° 0.00° -0.63° 0.87°
Degrees/minutes -1°23' 7' -1°30' 0' -38' 52'

Castor Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance
Decimal degrees 3.96° ± 0.75° 4.07° ± 0.75° -0.11° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes 3°58' ± 45' 4°4' ± 45' -7' ± 45'
Decimal degrees 3.21° 4.71° 3.32° 4.82° -0.86° 0.64°
Degrees/minutes 3°13' 4° 43' 3°19' 4° 49' -52' 38'

Toe Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance
Decimal degrees 0.08° ±0.10° 0.08° ±0.10° 0.15° ±0.20°
Degrees/minutes 5' ±6' 5' ±6' 9' ±12'
Decimal degrees -0.03° 0.18° -0.03° 0.18° -0.05° 0.35°
Degrees/minutes -2' 11' -2' 11' -3' 21'
Wheel Alignment Specification (All Markets) - Front LHD - Vehicles with 5.0L Naturally Aspirated and diesel vehicles without
Dynamic Response


Decimal degrees -0.38° ± 0.75° -0.50° ± 0.75° 0.12° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -23' ± 45' -30' ± 45' 7' ± 45'
Decimal degrees -1.13° 0.37° -1.25° 0.25° -0.63° 0.87°
Degrees/minutes -1°8' 22' -1°15' 15' -38' 52'

Decimal degrees 3.96° ± 0.75° 4.07° ± 0.75° -0.11° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes 3°58' ± 45' 4°4' ± 45' -7' ± 45'
Decimal degrees 3.21° 4.71° 3.32° 4.82° -0.86° 0.64°
Degrees/minutes 3°13' 4° 43' 3°19' 4°49' -52' 38'

Decimal degrees 0.05° ±0.10° 0.05° ±0.10° 0.10° ±0.20°
Degrees/minutes 3' ±6' 3' ±6' 6' ±12'
Decimal degrees -0.05° 0.15° -0.05° 0.15° -0.10° 0.30°
Degrees/minutes -3' 9' -3' 9' -6' 18'
Wheel Alignment Specification (All Markets) - Front RHD - Vehicles with 5.0L Supercharged and diesel vehicles with Dynamic
Response


Decimal degrees -0.75° ± 0.75° -0.63° ± 0.75° -0.12° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -45' ± 45' -38' ± 45' -7' ± 45'
Decimal degrees -1.50° 0.00° -1.38° 0.12° -0.87° 0.63°
Degrees/minutes -1°30' 0' -1°23' 7' -52' 38'

Decimal degrees 4.07° ± 0.75° 3.96° ± 0.75° 0.11° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes 4°4' ± 45' 3°58' ± 45' 7' ± 45'
Decimal degrees 3.32° 4.82° 3.21° 4.71° -0.64° 0.86°
Degrees/minutes 3°19' 4° 49' 3°13' 4° 43' -38' 52'

Decimal degrees 0.08° ±0.10° 0.08° ±0.10° 0.15° ±0.20°
Degrees/minutes 5' ±6' 5' ±6' 9' ±12'
Decimal degrees -0.03° 0.18° -0.03° 0.18° -0.05° 0.35°
Degrees/minutes -2' 11' -2' 11' -3' 21'
Wheel Alignment Specification (All Markets) - Front RHD - Vehicles with 5.0L Naturally Aspirated and diesel vehicles without
Dynamic Response


Decimal degrees -0.50° ± 0.75° -0.38° ± 0.75° -0.12° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -30' ± 45' -23' ± 45' -7' ± 45'
Decimal degrees -1.25° 0.25° -1.13° 0.37° -0.87° 0.63°
Degrees/minutes -1°15' 15' -1°8' 22' -52' 38'

Decimal degrees 4.07° ± 0.75° 3.96° ± 0.75° 0.11° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes 4°4' ± 45' 3°58' ± 45' 7' ± 45'
Decimal degrees 3.32° 4.82° 3.21° 4.71° -0.64° 0.86°
Degrees/minutes 3°19' 4° 49' 3°13' 4° 43' -38' 52'

Decimal degrees 0.05° ±0.10° 0.05° ±0.10° 0.10° ±0.20°
Degrees/minutes 3' ±6' 3' ±6' 6' ±12'
Decimal degrees -0.05° 0.15° -0.05° 0.15° -0.10° 0.30°
Degrees/minutes -3' 9' -3' 9' -6' 18'
Wheel Alignment Specification (All Markets) - Rear
Item Left-hand Right-hand Total/Balance Thrust Angle

Camber Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance
Decimal degrees -1.00° ± 0.75° -1.00° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -1° ± 45' -1° ± 45'
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
Decimal degrees -1.75° -0.25° -1.75° -0.25°
Degrees/minutes -1°45' -15' -1°45' -15'

Toe Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance
Decimal degrees 0.10° ± 0.10° 0.10° ± 0.10° 0.19° ± 0.14° 0° ± 0.14°
Degrees/minutes 6' ± 6' 6' ± 6' 11' ± 8' 0' ± 8'
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
Decimal degrees 0.00° 0.20° 0.00° 0.20° 0.05° 0.33° -0.14° 0.14°
Degrees/minutes 0' 12' 0' 12' 3' 20' -8' 8'
Suspension System - General Information - Suspension System
Principle of Operation
For a detailed description of the Suspension System and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual.
Inspection and Verification
WARNING: Before carrying out a road test, make sure the vehicle is safe to do so. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in personal injury.
does not guarantee confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or
the donor vehicle.
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.
1. Gather as much information from the driver as possible and verify the customer concern by carrying out a
road test, as closely as possible reproducing the conditions under which the fault occurs.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage.

Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Tire pressures
Damaged wheels or tires
Wheel bearing(s)
Loose or damaged front or rear suspension components
Loose, damaged or missing suspension fastener(s)
Damaged or leaking air suspension components
Worn or damaged suspension bushing(s)
Loose, worn or damaged steering system components
Damaged axle components
Damaged Chassis
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported condition is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the symptom chart.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively check
for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible Causes Action

Crabbing Incorrect rear thrust angle Check the rear alignment
Front or rear suspension Check the front and rear suspension for signs of
components damage or wear
Drift/Pull/Wander Tire pressures Check and adjust the tire pressures (see visual
Uneven tire wear inspection)
Damaged steering Check for uneven tire wear, investigate the
components cause and rectify as necessary
Wheel alignment Check the steering for wear/damage
Brake drag Check and adjust the wheel alignment as
Unevenly loaded or necessary
overloaded vehicle Check for binding brakes, rectify as necessary
Advise the driver of the load issues
Front bottoming or Damaged suspension Check the suspension components for damage
riding low components Check the dynamic suspension
Air spring fault
Uneven tire wear Incorrect tire pressure (rapid Check and adjust the tire pressures (see visual
centre rib or inner and outer inspection)
edge wear) Check and adjust the wheel alignment as
Incorrect front or rear toe necessary
(rapid inner or outer edge Balance the wheels and tires as necessary
wear)
Incorrect camber (rapid
inner or outer edge wear)
Tires out of balance (tires
cupped or dished)
Harsh ride Damaged suspension Check the suspension components for damage
components Check the dynamic suspension
Air spring fault
Shimmy or wheel Wheels/tires Check the wheels and tires for condition and
tramp Loose wheel nut(s) balance
Loose front suspension Check and tighten the wheel nuts and
fasteners suspension fasteners to specification
Front wheel bearing(s) fault Check the front wheel bearings, suspension
Worn or damaged bushings, ball joints and steering components
suspension component for wear or damage
bushing Check and adjust the wheel alignment as
Loose, worn or damaged ball necessary
joint(s)
Loose, worn or damaged
steering components
Front wheel alignment
Poor return ability of Steering column Check the steering column universal joints, etc
the steering (self- Ball joints Check the ball joints and other steering
centering) Steering components components
Sway or roll Loose front or rear stabilizer Check the stabilizer bar security and condition.
bar Rectify as necessary
Worn lower suspension arm Check the function of the active stabilization
stabilizer bar insulators system (where installed)
Air spring fault Check the air springs
Vehicle leans to one Front or rear suspension Check the front and rear suspension
side components Check the air springs
Air spring fault
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Air Suspension Control Module (100-00 General Information,
Description and Operation).
Suspension System - General Information - Four-Wheel Alignment
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
204-805
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the vehicle is on a flat level surface.
Make sure the tire pressures are within specification.
Make sure that only the manufacturers' recommended four wheel alignment equipment is used.
Make sure the vehicles fuel tank is full, if not distribute extra weight evenly over the fuel tank area to represent
a full tank of fuel.
Make sure there are no heavy objects in the vehicle.
Make sure the air suspension is set to NORMAL ride height.
Make sure the steering is in the straight ahead position.
Make sure the slip plates (turntables) are free to move before adjusting the geometry.
NOTE: This procedure can be used for vehicles with either air or coil spring suspension.
1. Check the tie rod ends, suspension joints, wheel bearings and
wheels and tires for damage, wear and free play.
Adjust or repair any worn, damaged or incorrectly
adjusted components.
2. Check and adjust tire pressures.
3. Position the vehicle on a calibrated, level, vehicle lift.
4. Release the vehicle parking brake.
5. Vehicles with dynamic suspension: Using the approved

diagnostic tool, check the air suspension control module for
fault codes and clear as required.
6. Vehicles with dynamic suspension: Using the diagnostic tool,

set vehicle to 'Geometry Set Mode', using the instructions
below. Putting the vehicle into this mode will make sure that
the ride heights are controlled more accurately.
1. Select the 'Configuration' tab
2. Select 'Set up and Configure'.
3. Select 'Air Suspension'.
4. Select 'Suspension Geometry Set Up'.
5. Select 'Tight Tolerance Mode'.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions until the set up process
has finished.
7. NOTE: If rear camber adjustment is required, loosen the

rear camber adjustment bolts enough to allow adjustment
before starting any other wheel alignment adjustments. Do not
fully loosen the rear camber adjustment bolts.
Using only four wheel alignment equipment approved by Land
Rover, check and adjust the wheel alignment.
8. CAUTION: Make sure the toe link anti-rotation

tang is fully seated in the integrated body frame
before tightening the toe link retaining nut. Failure
to follow this instruction will result in damage to
the toe link or integrated body frame.
NOTE: This step is only required if the toe

links have been removed or replaced.
Adjust the rear bump steer.

Loosen the toe link inner ball joint retaining
nut.
Set the gap, between the underside of the
toe link rubber boot and the integrated
body frame bracket, to 10 mm (0.473 in).
Tighten the toe link inner ball joint retaining
nut to 133 Nm (98 lb.ft)
Repeat the above procedure for the other
side.
9. Adjust the rear camber.

Loosen the rear camber adjusting bolts.
Rotate the rear camber adjusting bolt until
the correct value is obtained.
side.
Tighten the rear camber adjusting bolts.
10. Install the special tool and a suitable socket to the

rear camber adjusting bolt retaining nut.
11. NOTES:
The torque wrench must be installed in a

direct line with the special tool, as shown.
Calculate the torque wrench setting

using the formula below.
Key to letters:
A = Effective length of the torque wrench,

measured in mm.
Formula:
Torque wrench setting (Nm) =

(133xA)/(A+100)
Using the special tool, a suitable extension bar and
a torque wrench, fully tighten the camber
adjusting bolt retaining nut.
Use the torque wrench setting calculated
above.
side.
12. Adjust the rear toe.

Loosen the toe link adjustment locking nut.
Rotate the toe link inner ball joint until the
correct rear toe value is obtained.
Tighten the toe link adjustment locking nut
to 130 Nm (96 lb.ft).
side.
Repeat the rear toe measurement.
13. CAUTION: Make sure the slip plates

(turntables) are free to move before adjusting the
geometry.
Adjust the front camber.

Loosen the lower arm front camber
adjusting bolt.
Rotate the front camber adjusting bolt until
the correct value is obtained.
Tighten the lower arm front camber
adjusting bolt to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).
side.
14. Adjust the front castor.

Loosen the lower arm rear castor adjusting
bolt.
Rotate the castor adjusting bolt until the
correct value is obtained.
Tighten the lower arm rear castor adjusting
bolt.
side.
Repeat the castor measurement.
Repeat the above procedure until both
castors achieve the correct value.
Tighten the lower arm rear castor adjusting
bolts to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).
15. Align the steering to straight ahead.

Measure the length of the exposed thread
on each track rod.
If the exposed thread lengths differ by
more than two millimetres:
Stage one: Loosen one track rod end
locking nut.
Stage two: Rotate the track rod until the
lengths of the exposed threads on both
track rods are equal.
Stage three: Tighten the track rod end
locking nut.
Stage four: Rotate the steering wheel until
both front toe measurements are equal.
16. Adjust the front toe.

Loosen the track rod end locking nuts.
Rotate the track rods to adjust each
individual front toe to the correct value.
Tighten the track rod end locking nuts to 53
Nm (39 lb.ft).
17. Vehicles with dynamic suspension: Using the diagnostic tool,
return the vehicle to 'Normal Mode'.
1. Select the 'Configuration' tab
2. Select 'Set up and Configure'.
3. Select 'Air Suspension'.
4. Select 'Suspension Geometry Set Up'.
5. Select 'Normal Mode'.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions until the normal mode
process has finished.
18. Calibrate the steering angle sensor using the diagnostic tool.
Suspension System - General Information - Front Wheel Bearing and
Wheel Hub Runout Check
General Procedures
NOTES:
Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.
LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
1. WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle

stands.
Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the road wheel.
3. CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the brake caliper to hang on the

brake hose.
LH side: Do not allow the brake caliper to

hang on the brake pad wear warning sensor lead.
NOTE: Models with standard brakes shown,

models with high performance brakes similar.
Release the brake caliper and tie aside.
4. Remove the front brake disc.

Remove the Allen screw.
5. Thoroughly clean the hub mounting face.
6. Using special tool (100-053) mount a Dial Test

Indicator (DTI) to and secure to the backplate
using the upper backplate fixing.
7. CAUTION: Make sure the DTI is positioned clear of the
wheel studs.
Position the DTI probe on the outer edge of the hub face.
8. Zero the DTI and rotate the hub one complete revolution to
measure hub runout.
The hub runout limit is 0.0135 mm.
9. NOTE: If the hub runout exceeds the limit replace the

hub.
For additional information, refer to: Front Wheel Bearing and

Wheel Hub (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
10. Remove the DTI.
11. Install the brake disc.

Tighten the Torx screw to 35 Nm (26 lb.ft).
12. Install the brake caliper and tighten the bolts. TORQUE: 275
Nm
13. Install the road wheel and tighten nuts to 140Nm (103 lb-ft).
14. Repeat the above procedure on the opposite side.
15. Depress the brake pedal several times to set brake pads.
16. Lower the vehicle.

Front Suspension -
General Specifications
Item Specification
Gap between underside of the toe link rubber boot and the chassis bracket 12.0 mm (0.473 in)
Height/distance between centre of halfshaft and edge of the fender trim 462 mm (18.19 in)
* Stabilizer bar link nuts 175 129
Stabilizer bar clamp nuts 115 85
Front axle crossmember bolts 115 85
Shock absorber and spring assembly to lower arm bolt 300 221
Shock absorber top mounting nuts 70 52
* Shock absorber upper bush rebound plate nut 98 72
Heat shield bolts 10 7
* Upper arm and wheel knuckle nut 70 52
* Tie-rod end ball joint nut 70 52
Brake hose retaining bracket to wheel knuckle bolt 25 18
*+ Halfshaft retaining nut 230 169
Brake hose to upper arm bolt 22 16
Upper arm nuts and bolts 175 129
Radiator access panel bolts 10 7
Wheel hub bolts 115 85
Brake disc dust shield bolts 10 7
Lower arm bolts 275 203
Lower arm ball joint retaining nut 115 85
Lower arm front camber adjusting bolt 275 203
Lower arm rear castor adjusting bolts 275 203
Toe link inner ball joint retaining nut 133 98
Rear camber adjusting bolts 133 98
Track rod end locking nuts 53 39
Wheel speed sensor bolt 10 7
Axle carrier bushing bolt - M14 105 77
Axle carrier bracket bolts 80 59
* New nut/bolts must be installed
+ Stake nut on completion

Front Suspension - Front Suspension
Front Suspension Component Layout
NOTE: Without Dynamic Response version shown

1 - Flanged bolt (Upper arm forward bush)
2 - Bush - forward (Upper arm)
3 - Nut (Upper arm forward bush)
4 - Flanged bolt (Upper arm forward bush)
5 - Bush - rearward (Upper arm)
6 - Nut (Upper arm rearward bush)
7 - Nut (Stabilizer bar link to upper arm)
8 - Upper arm
9 - Ball joint (Upper arm to swivel hub)
10 - Nut (Ball joint to swivel hub attachment)
11 - Nut (Lower arm rearward bush)
12 - Cam washer (Lower arm rearward bush)
13 - Bush - rearward (Lower arm)
14 - Wheel knuckle
15 - Wheel hub and bearing assembly
16 - Steering gear attachment
17 - Nut (Damper assembly lower attachment)
18 - Ball joint (Lower arm to swivel hub)
19 - Nut (Ball joint to swivel hub attachment)
20 - Lower arm
21 - Bolt (Damper assembly lower attachment)
22 - Nut (Lower arm forward bush)
23 - Cam washer (Lower arm forward bush)
24 - Lower arm forward bush
25 - Bolt (Lower arm forward bush)
26 - Bolt (Lower arm rearward bush)
27 - Stabilizer bar link
28 - Stabilizer bar
29 - Stabilizer bar bush
30 - Nut (Stabilizer bar bracket)
31 - Stabilizer bar bracket
32 - Nut (Stabilizer bar link to stabilizer bar)
33 - Damper assembly
34 - Hardened washer (2 off per link)
GENERAL
The front suspension is a fully independent design which offers a reduction in unsprung weight over the beam axle
design. The front suspension comprises an upper arm, a lower arm, a wheel knuckle and hub, a stabilizer bar and links
assembly and an air damper assembly. A conventional stabilizer bar is fitted to some models, with a Dynamic Response
stabilizer bar system available as a standard or optional fitment.
For additional information, refer to: Active Stabilization System (204-06, Description and Operation).
The suspension lower arms have been designed for maximum ground clearance and also allow for adjustment of the
camber and castor using cam adjusters.
AIR SUSPENSION DAMPER MODULE


1 - Rebound washer*
2 - O-ring - damper rod (2 off)*
3 - Self-locking nut*
4 - Spacer - damper rod*
5 - Bump washer
6 - Spring aid*
7 - O-ring - air spring sleeve support (2 off)*
8 - Damper assembly*
9 - Voss air fitting
10 - Damper rod
11 - Self-locking nut (3 off)
12 - Top mount
13 - Bush
14 - Retaining pin - air spring assembly*
15 - Air spring assembly*
NOTE: * shows service items
The damper module comprises an air spring assembly, top mount and a damper assembly. The damper and air spring
are only serviceable as complete assemblies.
Damper
The damper assembly is a mono tube design with an air spring. The lower end of the damper is fitted with a bush and is
attached to the lower arm with a bolt and nut.
The damper functions by restricting the flow of hydraulic fluid through internal galleries within the damper. The damper
rod moves axially within the damper, its movement limited by the flow of fluid through the galleries, providing damping
of undulations in the terrain. The damper rod is sealed at its exit point from the damper body to maintain the fluid within
the unit and to prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture. The seal also incorporates a wiper to keep the rod clean.
Air Spring
The air spring comprises an aluminium restraining cylinder, top mount, spring aid, air sleeve and an inner support sleeve.
The air sleeve is made from a flexible rubber material which allows the sleeve to roll up and down the air spring piston as
the vehicle changes height. The air sleeve is attached to the restraining cylinder and support sleeve by crimp rings which
provide an air tight seal. The support sleeve contains a seal carrier which has two O-rings sealing the support sleeve and
two O-rings sealing to the damper body. The top of the air sleeve is crimped to the top mount which attaches to the
chassis frame with three integral studs and self-locking nuts.
A spring aid is fitted to the damper rod and prevents the top mount contacting the top of the damper during full
suspension compression and assists the suspension tune. The lower end of the air spring is located over the damper body
and seats on a fabricated seat on the damper body. The air sleeve is positively attached to the seat with a retaining pin.
The damper rod is located through a central hole in the top mount. The rod is threaded at its outer end. A self-locking
nut secures the air spring to the damper rod.
The top mount is an integral part of the air spring and is fitted with a bush and a rebound washer. A bump washer is
located between the top mount plate and the damper rod. The top mount is secured to the damper rod with a self-
locking nut. The top mount attaches to a housing on the chassis with three integral studs and self-locking nuts. The top
mount also incorporates a 6 mm Voss air fitting which allows for the attachment of the air harness.
STABILIZER BAR

1 - Nut - link to stabilizer bar/upper arm (4 off)
2 - Hardened washer (4 off)
3 - Right hand Link
4 - Upper arm
5 - Bracket (2 off)
6 - Locknut (4 off)
7 - Bush (2 off)
8 - Left hand link
9 - Stabilizer bar
Vehicles with the Dynamic Response system use an active stabilizer bar.
The stabilizer bar is fabricated from induction hardened, 31 mm diameter solid spring steel bar. The stabilizer bar
operates, via a pair of links, from their attachment to the upper arm.
The stabilizer bar is mounted on the forward face of the chassis front cross member and is attached to the cross member
with two, Teflon lined bushes. Brackets, which are pressed onto the bushes, are attached to the cross member with nuts,
screwed onto studs in the cross member. The stabilizer bar has crimped, 'anti-shuffle' collars pressed in position on the
inside edges of the bushes. The collars prevent sideways movement of the stabilizer bar.
The links, which are handed and have a ball joint at each end, are fitted with hardened steel washers at both ends. The
top ball joint is attached to the link at 90 degrees to the link axis. The ball joint is located in a hole in the side of the
upper arm and secured with the hardened steel washer on one side of the interface and a slef-locking nut on the other.
The bottom ball joint is attached to the link at 90 degrees to the link axis. The ball joint is located in a hole in the end of
the stabilizer bar and secured with the hardened steel washer on one side of the interface and the self-locking nut on
other.
It is important that hardened steel washer is in the correct position between the stabilizer bar and the link ball joint and
the upper arm and the link ball joint and the correct, hardened washer is fitted.
CAUTION: Failure to fit the washer or using an incorrect washer will result in relaxation of the torque on the self-
locking nut and damage will be caused to the stabilizer bar, link and suspension upper arm.
UPPER ARM

1 - Flanged bolt
2 - Bush
3 - Self locking nut
4 - Flanged bolt
5 - Bush
7 - Upper arm
8 - Stabilizer bar link attachment hole (hidden)
9 - Ball joint
10 - Timing mark
11 - Circlip
13 - Timing mark
The upper arm assembly comprises, the upper arm, two bushes and a ball joint. The upper arm is made from cast and
machined iron. Its outer end has a hole to accept the ball joint. A small indentation is located adjacent to the ball joint
hole and is used to obtain the correct orientation of the ball joint. A hole on the rear side of the arm provides for the
attachment of the stabilizer bar link.
The inner end of the arm has two bush housings which are machined in the arm casting. A bush is pressed into each
housing. The bushes are located between lugs on the chassis and are secured with bolts and self-locking nuts through
metal inserts in the centre of the bushes.
The ball joint is pressed into the upper arm. The ball joint is an interference fit in the hole which prevents the ball joint
from moving. A circlip is fitted to the ball joint to retain it in the hole. The top face of the ball joint has two semi-circular
cut-outs. One of these cut-outs must be aligned with the small indentation in the upper arm to ensure the correct
operation of the ball joint.
A bracket, located on on the underside of the upper arm, provides for the attachment of the air suspension height sensor
drop link.
LOWER ARM

2 - Washer
3 - Cam washer
4 - Bush
5 - Bolt
6 - Bolt
7 - Hydrobush
8 - Cam washer
9 - Washer
11 - Self locking nut - damper lower attachment
12 - Ball joint
13 - Circlip
15 - Lower arm
16 - Bolt - damper lower attachment
The lower arm assembly comprises, the lower arm, two bushes and a ball joint. The lower arm is a pressed steel
fabrication with a hole at its outer end to accept the ball joint.
The inner end of the arm has two fabricated bush housings which are welded to the arm pressing. A bush is pressed into
each housing. The rear bush is a hydrobush which provides a progressive increase in the hardness of the bush as the
deflection of the wheel increases. The bushes are located between lugs on the chassis and are secured with bolts and
self-locking nuts through metal inserts in the centre of the bushes. The forward bush, self-locking nut, has a cam washer
located beneath it. The cam washer is located between lugs on the chassis bracket and its orientation can be adjusted to
set the front camber. The rear bush, self-locking nut, also has a cam washer located beneath it. The cam washer is
located between lugs on the chassis bracket and its orientation can be adjusted to set the front castor.
A central aperture in the arm provides for the attachment of the damper module lower bush. The damper is secured with
a long bolt which is positioned through holes in the lower arm and secured with a self-locking nut.
The ball joint is pressed into the lower arm. The ball joint is an interference fit in the hole which prevents the ball joint
from moving. A circlip is fitted to the ball joint to retain it in the hole.
WHEEL KNUCKLE, HUB AND BEARING ASSEMBLY


1 - Upper arm attachment
2 - Brake caliper attachment holes
3 - Brake hose bracket attachment point
4 - Wheel speed sensor location
5 - Wheel studs
6 - Wheel hub
7 - Brake disc dust shield attachment holes
8 - Lower arm ball joint attachment
9 - Steering gear ball joint attachment
10 - Wheel hub bolts (4 off)
The wheel knuckle is a machined casting which is located between the ball joints of the upper and lower arms. The
knuckle has four clearance holes which allow for the fitment of four bolts which secure the wheel hub housing. A cast
boss on the forward edge of the knuckle provides for attachment of the steering gear, tie rod ball joint.
The wheel hub and bearing assembly comprises the wheel hub housing, wheel hub and taper roller bearing. The wheel
hub and bearing assembly is a non-serviceable component. Five M14 studs are pressed into the wheel hub and provide
for the attachment of the road wheel with wheel nuts.
The wheel hub housing is a machined forging which houses a taper roller bearing. The housing has four threaded holes
which provide for the attachment to the wheel knuckle with four bolts.
The wheel hub has a splined centre bore which mates with corresponding splines on the half shaft. Rotation of the half
shaft is passed, via the splines, to the wheel hub which rotates on the taper roller bearing.
Front Suspension - Front Suspension
For additional information.

REFER to: Suspension System (204-00, Diagnosis and Testing).
Front Suspension - Front Stabilizer Bar
Removal
1. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported

only by a jack. Always support the vehicle on safety stands.
2. Remove the wheels and tires.
3. CAUTIONS:
Note the position of the hardened steel

washer. The hardened steel washer must be
installed between the stabilizer bar link and the
stabilizer bar. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the vehicle.
Use a Torx socket to prevent the ball joint

rotating whilst removing the nut.
Disconnect both the stabilizer bar links from the

stabilizer bar.
Remove and discard the 2 nuts.
4. NOTE: RH side only.
Remove the fender splash shield lower extension

panel.
Remove the 2 screws.
Remove the 2 clips.
5. Remove the engine undershield.

For additional information, refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02
Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
6. Remove the front axle crossmember.

Remove the 4 bolts.
7. Remove the stabilizer bar bushing.

Remove the 4 nuts.
Remove the stabilizer bar clamps.
8. Remove the stabilizer bar.

Remove the stabilizer bar out through the LH side wheel
arch.
Installation
1. Install the stabilizer bar.
Install the stabilizer bar through the LH side wheel arch.
2. Install the stabilizer bar bushing and clamps.

Tighten fixings 1 to 115 Nm (85 lb.ft).
3. Install the front axle crossmember.

Tighten the 4 bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb.ft).
4. Install the engine undershield.

5. NOTE: RH side only.
Install the fender splash shield lower extension panel.

Install the 2 screws.
Install the 2 clips.
6. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the hardened steel washer is installed between

the stabilizer bar link and the stabilizer bar. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Use a Torx socket to prevent the ball joint rotating whilst

installing the nut.
Connect both stabilizer bar links to the stabilizer bar.

Install new nuts and tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
7. Install the wheels and tires.
Tighten the wheel nuts to 140 Nm (103 lb.ft).
Front Suspension - Front Stabilizer Bar Link
Removal

2. Remove the wheel and tire.
3. CAUTIONS:


rotating whilst installing the nut.
Release the stabilizer bar link.

Remove and discard the nut.
4. CAUTIONS:

upper arm. Failure to follow this instruction may

Remove the stabilizer bar link.

Installation
Vehicles without Active Stabilization
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the hardened steel washers are installed

between the stabilizer bar link and the stabilizer bar, and
between the stabilizer bar link and the upper arm. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.

installing the nut.
Install the stabilizer bar link.

Vehicles with Active Stabilization
2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the hardened steel washers are installed

between the stabilizer bar link and the stabilizer bar, and
between the stabilizer bar link and the upper arm. Failure to
installing the nut.
Install the stabilizer bar link.

All vehicles
3. Install the wheel and tire.
Front Suspension - Upper Arm Ball Joint
Special Tool(s)
Ball joint remover/installer
204-530-1
204-530-2
204-530-3
204-516/3(LRT-64-026/3)
Removal
NOTE: This procedures shows removal and installation of the upper arm ball joint.
1. Remove the upper arm.

For additional information, refer to: Upper Arm (204-01,
2. Remove the dust seal.

Remove the seal retainer.
Remove the circlip.
3. Using the special tools, remove the ball joint.

Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the timing marks are

aligned.
Using the special tools, install the ball joint.
2. CAUTION: Circlip holes to be 90 degrees

rotated from timing marks.
Install the circlip.
3. Install the upper arm.

Front Suspension - Lower Arm Ball Joint
Special Tool(s)
Remover/installer front lower arm ball joint
204-531/3
204-531/2
204-531/1
204-753
204-754
Removal
All vehicles

3. Remove the lower arm.

For additional information, refer to: Lower Arm (204-01,
4. Remove the circlip.

5. Inspect the installed ball joint to determine if a
radius is present.
Ball joint without radius

Ball joint with radius

Installation
All vehicles
1. Clean the components.
2. Inspect the new ball joint to determine if a radius

is present.
Ball joint without radius

3. Using the special tools, install the ball joint.
Ball joint with radius

4. Using the special tools, install the ball joint.
All vehicles
5. Install the circlip.
6. Install the lower arm.

For additional information, refer to: Lower Arm (204-01,

Front Suspension - Wheel Knuckle
Special Tool(s)
Halfshaft remover/replacer
204-506/1 (LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/2(LRT-60-030/2)
204-506/3 (LRT-60-030/3)
Retainers - halfshaft remover/replacer
204-506/5 (LRT-60-030/5)
Halfshaft installer adapter
204-506-01
Ball joint separator
205-754 (LRT-54-027)
Removal
All vehicles


3. Loosen the halfshaft retaining nut.
Vehicles with standard brakes

4. Remove the brake disc.
For additional information, refer to: Brake Disc - Vehicles With:
Standard Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
Vehicles with high performance brakes

High Performance Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal
and Installation).
All vehicles
6. Remove the halfshaft retaining nut.
Discard the nut.
7. Loosen the tie-rod end ball joint retaining nut.
8. Using the special tool, release the tie-rod end ball

joint from the wheel knuckle.
Discard the nut.
9. Release the wheel speed sensor from the wheel

knuckle.
Remove the bolt.
10. CAUTIONS:



Discard the nut.
11. Loosen the upper arm retaining nut.
12. Using the special tool, release the upper arm ball
joint.
13. CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to detach

the halfshaft from the hub assembly, failure to
follow this instruction may result in damage to the
halfshaft.
Using the special tools, release the halfshaft from

the drive flange.
14. Remove the lower ball joint retaining nut.
15. Using the special tool, release the lower ball joint
from the steering knuckle.
16. Remove the upper arm retaining nut.
Discard the nut.
17. CAUTION: The lower arm ball joint can be damaged by

excessive articulation. The wheel knuckle must be fully
supported at all times. Do not allow the wheel knuckle to hang
on the lower arm. Failure to follow this instruction will result in
damage to vehicle.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is

removed for access only.
Remove the wheel knuckle.
18. Remove the brake disc dust shield.

Remove the four retaining bolts.
19. Remove the wheel hub.

Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
All vehicles
2. Install the wheel hub.

3. Install the brake disc dust shield.

excessive articulation. The wheel knuckle must be fully
supported at all times. Do not allow the wheel knuckle to hang
on the lower arm. Failure to follow this instruction will result in
damage to vehicle.
With assistance, install the wheel knuckle.
5. Using the special tools, install the halfshaft in the

wheel hub.
6. Connect the upper arm and wheel knuckle.

Install a new nut and tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb.ft).
Vehicles without Active Stabilization
7. CAUTIONS:

the stabilizer bar link and the upper arm. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.

installing the nut.
Secure the stabilizer bar link.

8. CAUTIONS:


installing the nut.

9. Tighten the lower arm ball joint retaining nut to 115 Nm (85
lb.ft).
10. Connect the tie-rod end ball joint.

11. Install a new halfshaft retaining nut and lightly tighten.
12. Install the wheel speed sensor.

Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

Installation).

High Performance Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal
and Installation).
All vehicles
15. CAUTION: Do not use air tools to install the nut. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
component.
Tighten the new halfshaft retaining nut to 230 Nm (169 lb.ft).

Stake the nut to the halfshaft.

Front Suspension - Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Special Tool(s)
204-506/1(LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/2(LRT-60-030/2)
204-506/3(LRT-60-030/3)
204-506/5(LRT-60-030/5)
204-506-01(LRT-60-030/4)
Removal


4. Release the brake hose bracket from the wheel
knuckle.
Remove the bolt.
5. Remove the wheel speed sensor retaining bolt.
6. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang on the

brake hose.
Release the brake caliper anchor plate from the wheel knuckle
and tie the caliper aside.
Tie aside complete with the wheel speed sensor.

Remove the Torx screw.

Discard the nut.

halfshaft.

the wheel hub.
10. Remove the wheel hub.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
2. Install the wheel hub.

Using the special tools, install the halfshaft
in the wheel hub.
4. Make sure the brake disc and hub mating surfaces are clean.

6. Install the brake caliper and anchor plate.

Install the wheel speed sensor.
Tighten the bolts to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).
7. Install the wheel speed sensor retaining bolt.
8. Secure the brake hose retaining bracket to the wheel knuckle.


component.

10. Depress the brake pedal several times, check the fluid level in
the brake fluid reservoir and top-up with brake fluid if
necessary.

Front Suspension - Upper Arm
Special Tool(s)
205-754(LRT-54-027)
Removal

3. RH side front: Release the height sensor wiring

harness.
4. Remove the upper arm and brake line heat shields

for access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
5. Release the wheel speed sensor leads from the upper

arm.
Remove the bolt.
6. Release the brake hose from the upper arm.

Remove the bolt.
7. RH side front: Release the front splash guard.
8. Loosen the upper arm bolts.
9. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force to

disconnect the height sensor link.
Disconnect the height sensor link arm.
10. CAUTIONS:


Remove the stabilizer bar link nut.
Discard the nut.
11. CAUTION: To prevent the wheel knuckle falling

outwards and disconnection of the halfshaft inner
joint, support the wheel knuckle.
Loosen the upper arm retaining nut.
joint.

Installation
Fit the bolts but do not fully tighten at this stage.
Install new nuts.

3. Secure the stabilizer bar link.

4. Connect the height sensor link.

5. Secure the brake hose to the upper arm.
6. Secure the wheel speed sensor leads to the upper arm.

Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (7 Ib.ft).
7. Set the height distance between the centre of the

halfshaft end and the edge of the fender trim to
466 mm (18.34'').
8. Tighten the 2 upper arm nuts and bolts to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
9. RH side front: Secure the front splash guard.
10. Install the upper arm and brake line heat shields.
Install the 3 bolts.
Install the 3 nuts.
11. RH side front: Secure the height sensor wiring harness.

13. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, calibrate the
suspension ride height.
Front Suspension - Lower Arm
Special Tool(s)
205-754(LRT-54-027)
Removal
All vehicles
1. Place vehicle into access mode.

4. Remove the lower ball joint retaining nut.
5. Using the special tool, release the lower ball joint

from the steering knuckle.
6. Mark the position of the bolts in relation to the

chassis brackets.
Remove the 2 bolts.
7. Disconnect the shock absorber and spring
assembly from the lower arm.
Remove the nut and bolt.
8. CAUTION: Only displace the wheel knuckle sufficiently

outboard to release the lower arm past the undertray. This will
prevent the inboard driveshaft joint from separating. Failure to
NOTE: Make sure the steering is in the straight ahead

position.
Remove the lower arm.

Release the lower arm from the subframe and reposition
downwards.
Rotate the lower arm and position forward to release
from the wheel knuckle.

9. Position a transmission jack to support the hub assembly.
Installation

1. Remove the transmission jack.
All vehicles

excessive articulation. Do not over articulate the ball joint.
Failure to follow this instruction will result in damage to
vehicle.
Connect the lower arm to the wheel knuckle.

Tighten the lower arm ball joint retaining nut to 115 Nm
(85 lb.ft).
4. Set the height distance, between the center of the

halfshaft end, and the edge of the fender to 462
mm (18.19'').
5. Tighten the lower arm bolts to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).
Align the bolts to the marks made previously.
6. Connect the shock absorber and spring assembly

to the lower arm.
Tighten the nut and bolt to 300 Nm (221
lb.ft).

8. Carry out the wheel alignment procedure.

Front Suspension - Upper Arm Bushing
Special Tool(s)
205-754(LRT-54-027)
Receiver cup upper arm bushes
204-532/1
Remover upper arm bushes
204-532/2
Installer upper arm front bush
204-532/3
Installer upper arm rear bush
204-532/4
Removal
NOTE: The bushings must be replaced in pairs, LH and RH sides.

2. Remove the front wheels and tires.
3. Remove the RH upper arm.

4. Release the heat shield for access to the upper

arm bolts.
Remove the retaining nut and two bolts.
5. Loosen the upper arm bolts.
6. Disconnect the height sensor link.
7. CAUTIONS:



Discard the nut.
8. CAUTION: To prevent the wheel knuckle

falling outwards and disconnection of the halfshaft
inner joint, support the wheel knuckle.

joint.
Remove and discard the retaining nut.
10. Release the brake hose from the upper arm.

Remove the bolt.
11. Release the wheel speed sensor lead from the upper arm.
Remove the bolt.
12. Remove the LH upper arm.

13. Note the position of the bushing in relation to the upper arm.
14. CAUTION: The bush flanges need to be

removed to allow bush removal.
Using a suitable tool, bend over the bush flanges.
15. Using a hacksaw, remove the flange from the bushing, making
sure the upper arm is not damaged.
16. Using the special tools, remove and discard the

upper arm bushings.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the correct special tool

is used to install the bushings to the correct depth.
Using the special tools, install the upper arm rear

bushings.
Align the arrow on the bush with the mark,
previously made on the upper arm.
2. Using the special tools, install the upper arm front

bushings.
Align the arrow on the bush with the mark,
previously made on the upper arm.
3. WARNING: Make sure that new nuts are installed.
Install the LH upper arm.

4. Secure the brake hose to the upper arm.

5. Secure the wheel speed sensor lead to the upper arm.

Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (7 Ib.ft).

7. CAUTIONS:


installing the nut.

9. Set the height distance, between the center of the

halfshaft end, and the edge of the fender to 462
mm (18.19'').
10. Tighten the 2 upper arm nuts and bolts to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
11. Secure the heat shield.

Tighten to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
12. Install the RH upper arm.
13. Install the front wheels and tires.

Front Suspension - Lower Arm Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Hydraulic cylinder 10t
204-598
Receiver front lower arm front bush
204-536/1
Remover front lower arm front bush
204-536/2
Remover front lower arm rear bush
204-535/2
Installer front lower arm front bush
205-536/3
205-754(LRT-54-027)
Receiver lower arm rear bush
204-535/1
Remover plate front lower arm rear bush
204-535/4
Installer lower arm rear bush
204-535/3
Installer/depth setter front lower arm rear bush
204-535/5
Removal
NOTES:
If installing the front bushes, both front bushes must be installed.
If installing the rear bushes, both rear bushes must be installed.
Note orientation of the bush.
Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.
All vehicles
1. Make sure that the tire pressures are correct and that the
vehicle is at the correct ride height.
For additional information, refer to: Ride Height Adjustments
(204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, General Procedures).

3. Remove the clips and trim for access to the lower

arm camber bolts.
Vehicles with dynamic suspension
4. NOTE: Discard the nuts.
Disconnect the front stabilizer bar links and rotate bar upwards
to access lower arm bolts.
All vehicles
5. For additional information, refer to: Lower Arm (204-01 Front
Suspension, Removal and Installation).
6. Secure lower arm in a suitable vice or similar to carry out the

following steps.
7. NOTE: Mark the new bush to aid correct

orientation on installation.
Mark alignment of original bush prior to removal.

8. CAUTION: The bush flanges need to be
removed to allow bush removal.
Remove the lower arm front bushing flanges.
9. CAUTION: Make sure correct alignment is maintained

whilst carrying out the step.
Using the special tools, remove the bush.



Installation
All vehicles

Using the special tools install the bush.

3. For additional information, refer to: Lower Arm (204-01 Front


4. Connect both stabilizer links to the stabilizer bar.
Install new nuts and tighten to 115 Nm.
All vehicles
5. Refit the trim.

Front Suspension - Lower Arm Rear Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Hydraulic cylinder 10t
204-598
Remover front lower arm rear bush
204-535/2
Receiver front lower arm front bush
204-535/1
Remover plate front lower arm rear bush
204-535/4
Installer front lower arm rear bush
204-535/3
Installer/depth setter front lower arm rear bush
204-535/5
Removal
NOTES:
If installing the rear bushes, both rear bushes must be installed.
Take note of the fitted position of the bush.
Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details
All vehicles
1. Make sure that the tire pressures are correct and that the
vehicle is at the correct ride height.
For additional information, refer to: Ride Height Adjustments

3. Remove the clips and trim for access to the lower

arm camber bolts.

4. Disconnect the front stabilizer bar links and rotate bar upwards
to access lower arm bolts.
All vehicles
5. Mark the position of the bolts in relation to the chassis brackets
making note of the original position.
6. CAUTION: Make sure the lower arm is
supported. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the ball joint.
Remove lower arm camber bolts and the lower

damper bolt and rotate arm downwards for access.
7. Using a suitable transmission jack, support the

lower arm in the position illustrated.


Installation
All vehicles


2. NOTE: Do not tighten the bolts at this stage.
Install the lower front arm.
3. Set the height distance between the centre of the

half shaft end and the edge of the fender trim to
462 mm (18.19") before tightening lower arm bolts.
4. Attach the lower arm.

Align the bolts to the marks made
previously.
Tighten the lower arm camber bolts to 275
Nm.
Tighten the shock absorber and spring
assembly to lower arm bolt to 300 Nm.

5. Connect both stabilizer links to the stabilizer bar.
All vehicles
6. Refit the trim.

Rear Suspension -
Coil Spring Suspension
Item Specification
Road spring color coding - 5 Seat Model:
BROWN/WHITE
BROWN/GREEN
BROWN/ORANGE
BROWN
Road spring color coding - 7 Seat Model:
RED/WHITE
RED/GREEN
RED/ORANGE
RED
Note: The first color indicates the fitted position of the spring on the vehicle i.e. rear. The secondary
color identifies the thickness of the isolator which is fitted to a particular spring to ensure that the
vehicle ride height is maintained within specified limits. Replacement springs will be supplied with the
appropriate isolator fitted.
Item Specification
Gap between underside of the toe link rubber boot and the integrated body frame bracket 15.0 mm (0.591 in)
Height between the center of the halfshaft end and the edge of the fender trim 463 mm (18.19 in)
Toe link bolt 175 129
* Toe link inner ball joint retaining nut 133 98
Stabilizer bar clamp bolts 62 46
Body mount retaining bolts 133 83
Shock absorber to the lower suspension arm nut and bolt 300 221
Shock absorber to suspension turret nuts 70 52
Lower arm to wheel knuckle bolt 175 129
Lower arm bolts 275 203
*+ Halfshaft nut 420 311
Upper arm to wheel knuckle nut 133 98
Upper arm front bolt 175 129
Upper arm rear bolt 275 203
Brake tube unions 18 13
Wheel speed sensor 9 7
Parking brake cable coupling 8 6
Road wheel nuts Stage 1: 4 Stage 1: -
Stage 2: 70 Stage 2: 52
* New nut must be installed
+ Nut must be staked after tightening

Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension
Rear Suspension Component Location
NOTE: Without Dynamic Response version shown

1 - Bolt (Upper arm forward bush)
2 - Bush - Forward (Upper arm)
3 - Caged nut (Upper arm forward bush)
4 - Bolt (Upper arm rearward bush)
5 - Bush - Rearward (Upper arm)
6 - Caged nut (Upper arm rearward bush)
7 - Upper arm
8 - Eccentric washer (Wheel knuckle upper ball joint)
9 - Nut (Wheel knuckle upper ball joint)
10 - Bolt (Wheel knuckle upper ball joint)
11 - Special nut (Adjustable transverse toe link)
12 - Adjustable transverse toe link
13 - Washer (Adjustable transverse toe link)
14 - Damper module assembly
15 - Bolt (Adjustable transverse toe link)
16 - Ball joint (Wheel knuckle upper)
17 - Wheel knuckle and bearing assembly
18 - Wheel hub
19 - Ball joint (Wheel knuckle lower)
20 - Circlip (Wheel knuckle lower ball joint)
21 - Self-locking nut (Wheel knuckle lower ball joint)
22 - Self-locking nut (Damper assembly lower attachment)
23 - Bolt (Wheel knuckle lower ball joint)
24 - Bolt (Damper assembly lower attachment)
25 - Lower arm
26 - Bush - Forward (Lower arm)
27 - Self-locking nut (Lower arm forward bush)
28 - Bolt (Lower arm forward bush)
29 - Nut and retainer (Lower arm rearward bush)
30 - Bush - Rearward (Lower arm)
31 - Self-locking nut (Stabilizer bar link to lower arm)
32 - Bolt (Lower arm rearward bush)
33 - Stabilizer bar link
34 - Self-locking nut (Stabilizer bar link to stabilizer bar)
35 - Stabilizer bar bush
36 - Bolt (Stabilizer bar bracket)
38 - Stabilizer bar
GENERAL
The independent rear suspension offers a reduction in unsprung weight over the beam axle design. The rear
suspension comprises an upper arm, a lower arm, a wheel knuckle and wheel hub, two air spring damper modules
and a stabilizer bar and links assembly.
The rear suspension arms have been designed to give maximum ground clearance. The suspension geometery can be
adjusted for camber using a cam bolt and toe and bump steer adjustment can be corrected via an adjustable
transverse link.
AIR SUSPENSION DAMPER MODULE


1 - Strap*
2 - Upper gaitor*
3 - Self-locking nut*
4 - Rebound washer*
5 - O-ring - Damper rod*
6 - Spacer - Damper rod*
7 - Air spring*
8 - Retaining pin - Air spring sleeve support*
9 - Bump washer*
10 - Spring aid*
11 - O-ring - Air sleeve support (2 off)*
12 - Damper rod
13 - Damper assembly
14 - Strap*
15 - Lower gaitor*
16 - Strap*
17 - Self-locking nut (3 off)
18 - Top mount assembly
19 - Bush
20 - Voss connector
NOTE: * Shows service items
The damper module comprises an air spring assembly, top mount and a damper assembly. The damper and air
spring are only serviceable as complete assemblies.
Damper
The damper assembly is a mono tube design with an air spring. The lower end of the damper is fitted with a bush
and is attached to the lower arm with a bolt and nut.
The damper functions by restricting the flow of hydraulic fluid through internal galleries within the damper. The
damper rod moves axially within the damper, its movement limited by the flow of fluid through the galleries,
providing damping of undulations in the terrain. The damper rod is sealed at its exit point from the damper body to
maintain the fluid within the unit and to prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture. The seal also incorporates a wiper
to keep the rod clean.
Air Spring
The air spring is similar in design to the air spring used on the front suspension.
The air spring comprises an aluminium restraining cylinder, top mount, spring aid, air sleeve and an inner support
sleeve.
The air sleeve is made from a flexible rubber material which allows the sleeve to roll up and down the air spring
piston as the vehicle changes height. The air sleeve is attached to the restraining cylinder and the support sleeve
with crimp rings which provide an air tight seal. The support sleeve contains a seal carrier which has two O-rings
sealing the support sleeve and two O-rings sealing to the damper body. The top of the air sleeve is crimped to the
top mount which attaches to a mounting on the chassis with 3 integral studs and self-locking nuts.
A spring aid is fitted to the damper rod and prevents the top mount contacting the top of the damper during full
suspension compression and assists the suspension tune. The lower end of the air spring is located over the damper
body and seats on a fabricated seat on the damper body. The air sleeve is positively attached to the seat with a
retaining pin. The damper rod is located through a central hole in the top mount. The rod is threaded at its outer end
and accepts a self-locking nut which secures the air spring to the damper rod.
The top mount is an integral part of the air spring. A bump washer is located between the top mount plate and the
damper rod. A self locking nut secures the damper rod to the top mount. The top mount attaches to a housing on
the chassis with 3 integral studs and self-locking nuts. The top mount also incorporates a 6 mm Voss air fitting which
allows for the attachment of the air harness.
The air spring is fitted with two gaitors. The upper gaitor is fitted between the top mount and the air spring
restraining cylinder. The lower gaitor is secured to the lower end of the restraining cylinder and the damper body
with metal straps. The gaitors prevent dirt and debris becoming trapped between the air sleeve and the restraining
cylinder.
STABILIZER BAR

1 - RH lower arm
2 - Nut - link to lower arm (2 off)
3 - Link (2 off)
4 - Nut - link to stabilizer bar (2 off)
5 - LH lower arm
6 - Bush (2 off)
7 - Bolt (4 off)
8 - Bracket (2 off)
Vehicles without the Dynamic Response stabilizer bar system use a conventional stabilizer bar. The Dynamic
Response system is detailed in a separate section.
The stabilizer bar is fabricated from heat treated, 23 mm diameter solid, spring steel bar. The stabilizer bar operates,
via a pair of links, from their attachment to the lower arm.
The stabilizer bar is located on the upper face of a combined body mount and stabilizer bar bracket which is welded
to each chassis side member. The stabilizer bar is attached to the brackets with two, Teflon lined bushes. The bushes
are fitted with brackets, which are pressed onto the bushes and secured to the chassis brackets with bolts.
The stabilizer bar has crimped, 'anti-shuffle' collars pressed into position on the inside edges of the bushes. The
collars prevent sideways movement of the stabilizer bar.
The ends of the stabilizer bar are attached to the lower arms via links. These allow the stabilizer bar to move with
the wheel travel providing maximum effectiveness.
The rear stabilizer links are unique to vehicles with a passive (non-Dynamic Response) stabilizer bar. The passive
(non-Dynamic Response) links can be identified by a white colored plastic bearing moulding. The Dynamic Response
rear links are identified by a grey color plastic bearing moulding.
Each link has a ball joint at each end. The top ball joint is attached to the link at 90 degrees to the link axis. The ball
joint is located in a hole in the end of the stabilizer bar and secured with a self locking nut.
The bottom ball joint is also attached to the link at 90 degrees to the link axis. The ball joint is located a hole in a
bracket on the lower arm and secured with a self-locking nut. The links are not handed and therefore can be fitted to
either side of the stabilizer bar.
UPPER ARM

1 - Bolt
2 - Bumpstop clip
3 - Forward bush
4 - Bumpstop clip
5 - Caged nut
6 - Bolt
7 - Rearward bush
8 - Caged nut
9 - Self-locking nut - upper knuckle ball joint
10 - Eccentric washer - upper knuckle ball joint
11 - Cam bolt - upper knuckle ball joint
12 - Upper arm
The upper arm locates in brackets on the upper surface of each chassis side member. The upper arm assembly
comprises the upper arm and two bushes. The upper arm is a pressed steel fabrication. Its outer end has two
brackets with slotted holes which locate the upper ball joint of the knuckle. The ball joint is secured in the upper arm
with a cam bolt, eccentric washer and a self-locking nut. The cam bolt and the eccentric washer allow for the
adjustment of the wheel camber.
Two fabricated tubular housings provide the location for the forward and rearward bushes. The bushes, which are
pressed into the housings, locate between brackets on the chassis side members and are secured with bolts and
caged nuts through metal inserts in the centre of the bushes.
LOWER ARM

1 - Self-locking nut
2 - Bumpstop clip
3 - Forward bush
4 - Bumpstop clip
5 - Bolt
6 - Nut and retainer
7 - Rearward bush
8 - Bolt
9 - Stabilizer bar link bracket
10 - Self-locking nut - damper lower attachment
11 - Self-locking nut - knuckle lower ball joint attachment
12 - Bolt - knuckle lower ball joint attachment
13 - Bolt - damper lower attachment
14 - Lower arm
The lower arm locates in brackets on the lower surface of each chassis side member. The lower arm assembly
comprises the lower arm and two bushes. The lower arm is a pressed steel fabrication. Its outer end has two
brackets which locate the lower ball joint of the knuckle. The ball joint is secured with a bolt and self-locking nut. The
lower control arm also provides for the attachment of the damper bush which is secured with a bolt and a self-
locking nut.
A bracket, welded to the upper surface of the lower arm, allows for the attachment of the bottom ball joint of the
stabilizer bar link. The ball joint is secured to the bracket with a self-locking nut.
Two fabricated tubular housings provide the location for the forward and rearward bushes. The bushes, which are
pressed into the housings, locate between brackets on the chassis side members. The forward bush is secured to the
chassis bracket with a bolt and self-locking nut. The rearward bush is secured to the chassis bracket with a bolt and
a nut with retainer. The nut and retainer allows for easy installation or removal of the bolt by removing the
requirement to hold the self-locking nut when installing or removing the bolt.
WHEEL KNUCKLE, WHEEL HUB AND BEARING ASSEMBLY


1 - Circlip - lower ball joint
2 - Ball joint - lower
3 - Park brake assembly attachment holes
4 - Wheel speed sensor location
5 - Wheel speed sensor cable bracket attachment
6 - Ball joint - upper
7 - Knuckle
8 - Brake caliper attachment holes
9 - Wheel bearing
10 - Circlip - wheel bearing retention
11 - Wheel hub
12 - Nut - halfshaft
The wheel knuckle is a machined forging which is located between the upper and lower arms. The knuckle is fitted
with two ball joints which are pressed into the knuckle, with the lower ball joint being secured with a circlip. The ball
joints are positioned between brackets on the upper and lower arms and secured to the arms with a bolt and self-
locking nut.
The wheel knuckle provides the location for the rear wheel taper roller bearing, which is pressed into a machined
bore and retained with a circlip. The wheel bearing is a serviceable item. The knuckle has a machined bore which
provides the location for the wheel speed sensor. Four threaded holes allow for the attachment of the park brake
assembly. A cast boss on the knuckle provides positive location for the park brake assembly. Two bosses on the
knuckle casting provide the attachment points for the rear brake caliper.
The wheel hub is a machined casting which is pressed into the wheel bearing in the knuckle. The hub has a splined
centre bore which mates with corresponding splines on the halfshaft. Five M14 studs are pressed into the wheel hub
and provide for the attachment of the road wheel with wheel nuts. Rotation of the halfshaft is passed, via the splines,
to the wheel hub which rotates on the taper roller bearing.
Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension

REFER to: Suspension System (204-00, Diagnosis and Testing).
Rear Suspension - Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Special Tool(s)
Rear wheel bearing remover/installer
204-509/10(LRT-60-033/10)
205-802/1
205-802/2
205-802/3
205-802/4
205-802/5
Removal


3. Remove the wheel knuckle.
For additional information, refer to: Wheel Knuckle (204-02,
4. Remove the adjuster and return spring.
5. Remove the primary brake shoe.

Remove the hold-down spring and retaining
pin.
Pivot the shoe to release it from the
spreader plate and return spring.
6. Remove the spreader plate and spring.
7. Remove the return spring.
8. Remove the secondary brake shoe.

pin.
Disconnect the parking brake cable
retaining spring from the brake shoe lever.
9. Using the special tools, remove the drive flange.
10. Remove the brake disc dust shield.

11. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing.

Remove the circlip.
Installation
2. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing.
3. CAUTION: Make sure that the bearing seal is

not damaged when installing the circlip.
Install the circlip.
4. Install the brake disc dust shield.

5. WARNING: Do not use compressed air to clean brake

components. Dust from friction materials can be harmful if
inhaled.
Clean the backing plate and apply grease to the brake shoe
contacts.
6. Clean the adjuster and set it to its minimum extension.
7. Install the secondary brake shoe.

Connect the parking brake cable retaining spring to the
brake shoe lever, making sure the spring is not twisted.
Install the hold-down spring and retaining pin.
8. Install the primary brake shoe.

Install the spreader plate and the spring.
Install the return spring.
Install the hold-down spring and retaining pin.
9. Install the return spring.
10. Install the brake shoe adjuster.
11. Using the special tools, install the drive flange.
12. Install the wheel knuckle.

Rear Suspension - Upper Arm
Removal

3. CAUTION: Always plug any open connections to prevent

contamination.
Remove the brake tube.

Disconnect the 2 brake tube unions.
Remove the brake hose clips and release the hoses.
Release the brake tube from the clip.
5. Release the wheel speed sensor lead.
6. RH side only: Release the brake pad wear indicator

sensor lead.

Loosen the upper arm bolts.
Mark the position of the bolt in relation to
the upper arm.
Remove the nut and bolt, then release the
upper arm from the wheel knuckle.
Remove the upper arm bolts.
Installation
All vehicles
1. CAUTION: Make sure that bumpstop

inserts are fitted on both sides of the front
bushing prior to installation of the arm.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the bushing.
NOTE: Bumpstop inserts are installed to both

sides of the bushing.
Check the bumpstop inserts are correctly installed.

3. Set the height, between the center of the halfshaft

end and the edge of the fender trim, to 463 mm
(18.23'').
Support with an axle stand.
4. CAUTION: Make sure the ball joint seal is not damaged. A
damaged seal will lead to the premature failure of the joint.
Connect the upper arm and wheel knuckle.

Align the bolt to the marks made previously.
5. Tighten the upper arm front bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
6. Tighten the upper arm rear bolt to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).
7. Secure the wheel speed sensor lead.
8. Secure the brake pad wear indicator sensor lead.
10. Install the brake tube.

Tighten the brake tube unions to 18 Nm (13 lb.ft).

11. Bleed the brake system.
For additional information, refer to: Component Bleeding -
Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-00 Brake System -
General Information, General Procedures).

Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-00 Brake System
- General Information, General Procedures).
All vehicles

Rear Suspension - Lower Arm
Removal

3. CAUTION: Use a wrench on the hexagon

provided to prevent the ball joint rotating.

4. Loosen the 2 lower arm bolts.
5. Disconnect the shock absorber and spring assembly from the

lower arm.
6. Release the parking brake cable.
7. Remove the 2 lower arm bolts.
8. CAUTION: Ensure the ball joint seal is not damaged. A

Release the knuckle from the lower arm.

Remove the bolt.
9. Remove the lower arm.
Installation





4. Connect the shock absorber and spring assembly to the lower

arm.
Tighten the nut and bolt to 300 Nm (221 lb.ft).
5. Set the height, between the center of the halfshaft

end and the edge of the fender trim, to 463 mm
(18.23'').
6. Tighten the lower arm bolts to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).
7. Secure the parking brake cable.
8. Connect the stabilizer link.



Rear Suspension - Upper Arm Ball Joint
Special Tool(s)
Remover/installer rear upper arm ball joint
204-525/1
204-525/2
204-525/3
Removal

stands.
3. Remove the wheel knuckle.


Position machined face against the special
tool.
Installation
2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the ball joint seal is not damaged.

A damaged seal will lead to the premature failure
of the joint.
If the push in force is less than 10 kN the

wheel knuckle must be replaced.
Using the special tools, install the ball joint.

Position machined face against the special
tool.
3. Install the wheel knuckle.


Rear Suspension - Rear Stabilizer Bar
Removal
CAUTION: It is possible to install the stabilizer bar incorrectly. Note the position of the stabilizer bar before
removal.

2. Remove the rear bumper cover.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper Cover (501-
19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the spare wheel and tire.
4. Raise the vehicle.
5. Remove the rear wheels and tires.

Release both stabilizer bar links.

7. Remove the body mount retaining bolts.

Remove the 8 bolts.
8. CAUTION: Only raise the body sufficiently to remove the

body mount.
Carefully raise the body.

Using suitable stands, raise the body to release the body
mounts.
9. Remove the 2 rear body mounts.

Remove the 4 bolts.
11. CAUTION: Mark the position of the stabilizer

bar.
Remove the stabilizer bar.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the stabilizer bar is correctly

installed.
Install the stabilizer bar.
2. Install the stabilizer bar bushing.
3. Install the stabilizer bar bushing and clamps.

4. Install the body mounts.
5. Lower the body.

Remove the stands.
6. Install the body mount retaining bolts.

Tighten the 8 retaining bolts to 133 Nm (98 lb.ft).
7. Attach both stabilizer bar links.

Tighten the nuts to 115 Nm (85 lb.ft).

10. Install the spare wheel and tire.
11. Install the rear bumper cover.

Rear Suspension - Rear Stabilizer Bar Link
Removal


Remove the stabilizer bar link.

Installation
1. Install the stabilizer bar link.

Rear Suspension - Lower Arm Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Receiver rear lower arm front bush
204-526/1
Remover rear lower arm front bush
204-526/2
Installer rear lower arm front bush
204-526/3
Receiver rear lower arm rear bush
204-540/1
Remover rear lower arm rear bush
204-540/2
Installer rear lower arm rear bush
204-540/3
Removal


3. Remove the LH lower arm.

For additional information, refer to: Lower Arm (204-02 Rear
4. Remove the RH lower arm.
5. Note the position of the bushing in relation to the lower arm.
6. CAUTION: The bush flanges need to be removed to allow

bush removal.
NOTE: Take note of the fitted position of the bush.
Using a suitable tool, bend over the bush flanges.
7. Using a hacksaw, remove the flange from the

bushing, making sure the upper arm is not
damaged.

lower arm rear bushings.

lower arm front bushings.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the bush is correctly aligned.

Make sure the correct special tool is used to
install the bushings to the correct depth.
Using the special tools, install the lower arm front

bushings
2. CAUTION: Make sure the bush is correctly

aligned.
Using the special tools, install the lower arm rear

bushings.


4. Install the LH lower arm.

For additional information, refer to: Lower Arm (204-02 Rear
5. Install the RH lower arm.


Rear Suspension - Upper Arm Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Remover/installer - rear suspension upper arm front bushing
204-528/1
204-528/2
204-528/3
Remover/installer rear suspension upper arm rear bushing
204-527/1
204-527/2
204-527/3
Removal



contamination.
Remove the brake tube.

Disconnect the 2 brake tube unions.
Remove the brake hose clips and release the hoses.
Release the brake tube from the clip.
5. Release the wheel speed sensor lead.
6. Remove the LH upper arm.

Loosen the upper arm bolts.
the upper arm.
Disconnect the upper arm from the wheel
knuckle.
Remove the upper arm bolts.
7. Remove the RH upper arm.

For additional information, refer to: Upper Arm (204-02 Rear
8. Mark the position of the bushing in relation to the upper arm.
9. Using the special tools, remove and discard the rear upper arm
front bushing.
10. Using the special tools, remove and discard the rear upper arm
rear bushing.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the bush is correctly aligned.
Make sure the correct special tool is used to install the

bushings to the correct depth.
Using the special tools, install the rear upper arm front bushing.
2. CAUTION: Make sure the bush is correctly aligned.
Using the special tools, install the rear upper arm rear bushing.


4. Install the LH upper arm.

5. Set the height between the center of the halfshaft

end and the edge of the fender trim to 485 mm
(19.10'').
Support with an axle stand.

Connect the upper arm and wheel knuckle.

7. Tighten the upper arm front bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
8. Tighten the upper arm rear bolt to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).
9. Secure the wheel speed sensor lead.
10. Secure the brake pad wear indicator sensor lead.

12. Install the brake tube.

13. Install the RH upper arm.

For additional information, refer to: Upper Arm (204-02 Rear

Rear Suspension - Lower Arm Ball Joint
Special Tool(s)
204-516/1 (LRT-64-026/1)
204-516/2 (LRT-64-026/2)
204-516/3 (LRT-64-026/3)
204-516/4 (LRT-64-026/4)
204-506/1 (LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/3 (LRT-60-030/3)
204-506-01

204-506/5 (LRT-60-030/5)
Removal
CAUTION: The bolt securing the toe link to the wheel knuckle must not be used more than 5 times. Mark the
bolt head with a suitable centre punch.

4. Disconnect the toe link.

Remove the bolt.
5. Release the parking brake cable from the lower

arm.

7. Release the knuckle from the lower arm.
Remove the bolt.
8. Using the special tools, release the halfshaft from

the wheel hub.
9. Using the special tool, remove the lower arm ball

joint.
Support the wheel knuckle to give access to
the lower ball joint.
Remove and discard the snap ring.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
If the push in force is less than 17 kN the

wheel knuckle must be replaced.
Make sure the ball joint in installed from the

chamfered side of the wheel knuckle.
Using the special tool, install the lower arm ball

joint.
Install the snap ring.

wheel hub.

5. Secure the parking brake cable.
6. CAUTION: Do not use a bolt that has been installed more

than 5 times. Check the bolt head for centre punch marks. A
bolt head with 4 centre punch marks indicates the bolt has been
installed 5 times and must be replaced.
Connect the toe link.

Mark the bolt head with a centre punch, to indicate the
number of times it has been used.
7. Tighten the halfshaft retaining nut to 350 Nm (258 lb.ft).


Rear Suspension - Toe Link
Removal


Remove and discard the bolt.
4. Remove the toe link.

Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the toe link anti-rotation tang is fully

seated in the integrated body frame before tightening the toe
link retaining nut. Failure to follow this instruction will result in
damage to the toe link or integrated body frame.
Install the toe link.

Install a new nut and lightly tighten.
2. Connect the toe link.

Using a M14 x 2 tap, clean the threads of the knuckle
fixing hole. Blow out debris with an air-line.
Tighten the new bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
3. Set the gap, between the underside of the toe link

rubber boot and the integrated body frame
bracket, to 15 mm (0.590 in).
Tighten the toe link inner ball joint retaining
nut to 133 Nm (98 lb.ft)


Rear Suspension - Wheel Knuckle
Special Tool(s)
204-506/1(LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/2(LRT-60-030/2)
204-506/3(LRT-60-030/3)
204-506/5(LRT-60-030/5)
204-506-01(LRT-60-030/4)
Removal
NOTE: If a new knuckle is installed a new wheel bearing must be installed.


For additional information, refer to: Brake Disc (206-04 Rear
Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
5. Release the parking brake cable.

Disconnect the parking brake cable from the
brake shoe lever.
Disconnect the parking brake cable from the
backplate.
Release the cable from the lower arm.

knuckle.

9. CAUTION: Make sure the ball joint seal is not

damaged. A damaged seal will lead to the
premature failure of the joint.

Remove the bolt.

halfshaft.

the wheel hub.

Disconnect the upper arm from the wheel knuckle.

the upper arm.
Discard the nut.
Remove the wheel knuckle.
Installation
Install the wheel knuckle.

Locate the halfshaft.


wheel hub.
5. CAUTION: Install the halfshaft nut finger tight.
Install a new halfshaft retaining nut and lightly tighten.




9. Locate the parking brake cable to the backplate.

Connect the cable to the brake shoe lever.
Tighten the coupling to 8 Nm (6 lb.ft).
Secure the parking brake cable to the lower arm.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Disc (206-04 Rear
Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
component.


Tighten the wheel nuts in the sequence
shown:
1. 1. Stage 1: 4 Nm
2. 2. Stage 2: 70 Nm
3. 3. Stage 3: 140 Nm
Wheels and Tires -
Wheels
Wheel type Wheel size
Alloy wheel 9J x 19
Alloy wheel 9.5J x 20
Reduced size spare wheel - Alloy 5.5J x 19
Durable spare wheel - Alloy 8J x 19
CAUTIONS:
Reduced Size Spare wheel to be fitted to V6 Diesel and non Supercharged vehicles only.
Durable Spare may be fitted to all derivatives and is fitted as standard to all V8 Diesel and Supercharged
Vehicles
Full size spare is available on vehicles fitted with 19" wheels only.
With either 'Reduced Size' or 'Durable' spare wheel installed, do not exceed 50 mph (80 kph) and replace with
standard size wheel at earliest opportunity.
Do not use power tools when operating the spare wheel winch, raise and lower winch manually using hand
tools only.
Tire Sizes - Standard Fit
Wheel size Tire size Tire load index
8J x 19 - Alloy 255/50 R19Y - All terrain 107
9J x 19 - Alloy 255/50 R19Y - All terrain 107
9J x 19 - Alloy * 255/50 R19V - All terrain 107
9.5J x 20 - Alloy 275/40 R20Y - All terrain 106
CAUTIONS:
* Fitted to NAS/Gulf/Brazil non Supercharged Vehicles Only
Inner tubes must not be installed with any of these tires.

Tire Pressures - Not NAS, Gulf and Brazil Vehicles
Loading condition bar lb/in² kPa
Normal operating conditions - Up to 4 people:
Front 2.3 34 230
Rear 2.5 36 250
Vehicle loaded to maximum gross vehicle weight:
Front 2.6 38 260
Rear 2.9 42 290
* Reduced size spare wheel 4.2 60 420
** Standard size spare wheel 2.9 42 290
Durable spare wheel 2.9 42 290
CAUTIONS:
* The Reduced Section Spare must not be fitted to V8 Diesel or Supercharged vehicles
** The standard size spare wheel tire should be inflated to the maximum gross vehicle weight pressure and
the pressure for the front or rear wheel locations must be adjusted accordingly if the wheel is to be used under
conditions other than with the vehicle loaded to maximum gross vehicle weight.
Tire Pressures - NAS, Gulf and Brazil Vehicles
Loading condition bar lb/in² kPa
All conditions - all Y rated Tires:
Front 2.6 38 260
Rear 2.9 42 290
All conditions - 19" V rated Tires Only:
Front 2.7 39 270
Rear 3.0 43 300
* Reduced size spare wheel 4.2 60 420
** Standard size spare wheel 2.9 42 290
Durable spare wheel 2.9 42 290
CAUTIONS:
* The Reduced Section Spare must not be fitted to V8 Diesel or Supercharged vehicles
** The standard size spare wheel tire should always be inflated to the highest loading condition pressure which
must be adjusted accordingly if the wheel is to be installed to the front wheel locations.
General Specification
Item Make Location
Tire low pressure sensor Continental/Siemens On inside of wheel rim
Tire pressure sensor
initiator:
Front Continental/Siemens Attached to the fender splash shield adjacent to the front
bumper
Rear Continental/Siemens Attached to the fender splash shield adjacent to the rear
bumper
Recommended Lubricant
Application Land Rover Part No.
Wheel hub spigot RYL 105020
* Road wheel nuts 140 103
Tire low pressure sensor 8 6
* Wheel nuts must be tightened by diagonal selection
Wheels and Tires - Wheels and Tires
TIRES
NOTE: The TPMS valve should be serviced using the suitable service kit, each time the tyre is dismounted, to
ensure an air tight seal. Attention should be made to the detail of fitting this kit.
Care must be taken when removing and refitting tires to ensure that the tire pressure sensor is not damaged.

1 - Tire valve and pressure sensor
2 - Tire fitting/removal tool initial start position
3 - High tire and bead tension area
4 - Low tire and bead tension area
When removing the tire, the bead breaker must not be used within 90 degrees of the tire valve in each direction.
When using the tire removal machine, the fitting arm start position must be positioned as shown in the tire changing
illustration. The wheel can then be rotated through 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction. This will relieve the
high tension from the tire bead allowing the remaining 180 degrees of the tire to be manually pulled from the rim.
When refitting the tire, position the fitting arm as shown. Rotate the tire and take care that the bead on the low
tension side of the tire does not damage the sensor.
Tread Act - NAS Only
Vehicles supplied to the North American markets must comply with the legislation of the Transport Recall
Enhancement, Accountability and Documentation (TREAD) act. Part of the requirement of the TREAD act is for the
vehicle to display a label, positioned on the driver's side B-pillar, which defines the recommended tire inflation
pressure, load limits and maximum load of passengers and luggage weight the vehicle can safely carry. This label
will be specific to each individual vehicle and will be installed on the production line.
This label must not be removed from the vehicle. The label information will only define the specification of the vehicle
as it came off the production line. It will not include dealer or owner fitted accessory wheels and tires of differing size
from the original fitment.
NOTE: If tires and wheels of a non-standard size are fitted to the vehicle, the car configuration file must be
updated using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
If the label is damaged or removed for body repair, it must be replaced with a new label specific to that vehicle. A
new label is requested from Land Rover parts and will be printed specifically for the supplied VIN of the vehicle.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System - Component Location

1 - RH (right-hand) front initiator
2 - Instrument cluster
3 - TPMS RF receiver
4 - RH rear tire pressure sensor
5 - RH rear initiator
6 - Spare tire pressure sensor
7 - LH (left-hand) rear initiator
8 - LH rear tire pressure sensor
9 - CJB (central junction box)
10 - EJB (engine junction box)
11 - LH front tire pressure sensor
12 - LH front initiator
13 - RH front tire pressure sensor
The purpose of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is to assist the driver in maintaining the vehicle’s tire
pressures at the optimum level in order to:
improve fuel consumption

maintain ride and handling characteristics
reduce the risk of rapid tire deflation – which may be caused by under inflated tires
comply with legislation in relevant markets.
The TPMS measures the pressure in each of the tires on the vehicle (including the spare, if required) and issues
warnings to the driver if any of the pressures deviate from defined tolerances.
NOTES:
During a ‘blow out’ a very rapid reduction in pressure is experienced. The system is not intended to warn the
driver of a ‘blow out’, since it is not possible to give the driver sufficient warning that such an event is occurring, due
to its short duration. The design of the TPMS is to assist the driver in keeping the tires at the correct pressure, which
will tend to reduce the likelihood of a tire ‘blow out’ occurring.
TPMS is inhibited when the vehicle is in Delivery mode. For more details on Delivery mode refer to the PDI
manual.
A single TPMS hardware configuration is used. TPMS status information is relayed to the driver with a message
displayed in the instrument cluster message center and a amber warning indicator.
Tire Location
Because of the requirement for different pressure targets and thresholds for the front and rear tires, the CJB can
identify the location of the tires on the vehicle, and assign a received tire pressure sensor identification to a specific
position on the vehicle (i.e. FL (front left), FR (front right), RL (rear left) or RR (rear right)).
Tire location is performed automatically by the CJB using an auto-location function. This function requires no manual
intervention by the driver. The CJB can automatically learn the position of tires on the vehicle if the tire pressure
sensors or their positions are changed on the vehicle.
The tire learn and location process is ready to commence when the vehicle has been stationary or is traveling at less
than 12 mph (20 km/h) for 15 minutes. This is known as 'parking mode'. The learn/locate process requires the
vehicle to be driven at speeds of more than 12 mph (20 km/h) for 15 minutes. If the vehicle speed reduces to below
12 mph (20 km/h), the learn process timer is suspended until the vehicle speed increases to more than 12 mph (20
km/h), after which time the timer is resumed. If the vehicle speed remains below 12 mph (20 km/h) for more than
15 minutes, the timer is set to zero and process starts again.
The CJB can automatically detect, under all operating conditions, the following:
one or more tire pressure sensors have been replaced

one or more tire pressure sensor identifications are missing
one or more ‘alien’ identifications are being received, i.e. the CJB can reject identifications from tire pressure
sensors that do not belong to the vehicle
the spare tire and one of the tires in use on the vehicle have exchanged position on the vehicle.
If the tire pressure sensors fitted to the running wheels (not the spare) are changed, the CJB can learn the new
sensor identifications automatically. The learn function requires no manual intervention by the driver.
If a new sensor is fitted to the spare tire it must have its identification code programmed into the CJB using a Land
Rover approved diagnostic system, or used on the vehicle as a 'running' wheel and the vehicle driven for 15 minutes
at more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h).
Spare Tire Identification
Depending on the vehicle specification, the spare tire may or may not be fitted with a tire pressure sensor.
NOTE: Tire pressure sensors cannot be fitted to steel space saver spare wheels.
If the spare tire is fitted with a tire pressure sensor, the CJB can detect it, determine that it is the spare tire and
monitor its pressure and issue warnings to the driver accordingly. If the CJB expects the spare tire to be fitted with a
tire pressure sensor and it does not, the CJB will not show a fault to the driver, however a fault code will be stored in
the CJB.
If the spare tire is being monitored and the driver replaces a flat ‘running’ tire with the spare tire, the CJB will not
continually warn the driver that the original flat tire (now in the spare position) is flat. This prevents distraction of the
driver by constant pressure warnings being issued. The driver is reminded by a message displayed for 20 seconds at
each ignition on cycle that the spare tire is flat.
System Operation
Each time the vehicle is driven, the CJB transmits a Low Frequency (LF) (125 KHz) signal to each initiator in turn.
This is received by the tire pressure sensor which transmits a Radio Frequency (RF) (315 or 433 MHz depending on
market) signal to the RF receiver. This signal contains coded data which corresponds to sensor identification, air
pressure, air temperature and acceleration data. This signal is communicated to the CJB via a K-bus line.
The system enters 'parking mode' after the vehicle speed has been less than 12.5 mph (20 km/h) for 12 minutes. In
parking mode the tire pressure sensors transmit a coded signal to the CJB once every 13 hours. If the tire pressure
decreases by more than 1 lbf/in2 (0.6 bar) the sensor will transmit more often if pressure is being lost.
The spare tire sensor transmits a signal every 13 hours in the same manner as the road wheels when in parking
mode. If the tire pressure decreases by more than 1 lbf/in2 (0.6 bar) the sensor will transmit more often if pressure
is being lost.
As each wheel responds to the LF signal from the CJB, it is assigned a position on the vehicle and is monitored for
the remainder of that drive cycle in that position.
When the vehicle has been parked for more than 15 minutes and then driven at a speed of more than 12.5 mph (20
km/h), the initiators fire in turn for 18 seconds in the following order:
Front left
6 second pause (for the to detect a response from the tire pressure sensor)
Front right
6 second pause
Rear right
6 second pause
Rear left
6 second pause.
Each tire pressure sensor responds in turn so the CJB can establish the sensor positions at the start of the drive
cycle. This process is repeated up to three times but less if the sensor positions are already known in the CJB. The
process is known as 'Auto Location' and takes 7 to 8 minutes to complete. During this period the tire sensors
transmit at regular intervals, once every 15 seconds. For the remainder of the drive cycle the tire sensors transmit
once every 60 seconds or if a change in tire pressure is sensed until the vehicle stops and the system returns to
parking mode.
Once the wheel position is established, the initiators stop firing a signal and do not fire again until the vehicle has
been parked for more than 15 minutes. The signal transmissions from each wheel sensor continue at 1 minute
intervals whilst the vehicle is being driven. This transmission is to monitor the tire pressure.
At 25% deflation the amber warning indicator in the instrument cluster is illuminated and an appropriate message
displayed in the message center.
RF Receiver
The RF receiver is mounted behind the overhead console and connects to the vehicle harness via a fly lead.
The RF receiver receives transmissions from each of the tire pressure sensors via an internal antenna. This
information is then communicated to the CJB via a dedicated Local Interconnect Network (K-bus).
Initiator
The initiators are located at the front of the front wheel arches and at the rear of the rear wheel arches and are
secured with two scrivets. The TPMS has four initiators and each has a connector which connects with the body
harness.
The initiator is a passive, Low Frequency (LF) transmitter. Each initiator provides an auto-location feature to identify
tire positions on the vehicle and transmit that data to the CJB.
The CJB energizes each initiator in turn using LF drivers. The corresponding tire pressure sensor detects the resulting
LF transmission and responds by initiating an RF transmission of its data. This data is received by the RF receiver
and communicated to the CJB via a K-bus. The CJB can then determine which sensor is transmitting and its location
on the vehicle.
Tire Pressure Sensor
The TPMS system uses ‘active’ tire pressure sensors which are mounted on each wheel, inside the tire cavity. The
sensor is retained in position by the valve attachment to the wheel structure. The sensors transmit their RF signals at
either 315 MHz or 433 MHz dependent on market requirements.
The sensors periodically measure the pressure and temperature of the air inside the tire plus the centripetal
acceleration acting on the sensor. These measurements are transmitted periodically to the RF receiver located behind
the overhead console.
The tire pressure sensors are self-contained units which have no electrical connections into or out of the sensor.
The care points detailed in the 'Tires' section of this chapter must be followed to avoid damage to the sensor. If the
sensor is replaced, the nut, seal and washer must also be replaced and the sensor tightened to the correct torque
value as given in the Service Repair manual.
The RF transmission from the sensor contains a unique identification code in its transmission data, so that the CJB
can identify the tire on the vehicle. If the sensor is replaced on a 'running' wheel, the new sensor identification will
be learnt when the vehicle is first driven at a speed of more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h) for 15 minutes. If a new
sensor is fitted to the spare wheel, the identification for that sensor must be programmed into the CJB using a Land
Rover approved diagnostic system or that wheel will not be monitored. The code is provided on a label with the
complete wheel and tire assembly when new and is also printed on the casing of each sensor.
The replacement spare wheel may also be programmed to the vehicle by using it as a 'running' wheel for 15 minutes
at more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h), then replacing it to the spare wheel position.
In order to conserve battery power, the tire sensor module uses different transmission rates when the wheel is
stationary or moving. The wheel speed required to change between the stationary and moving transmission rates is
very low to allow for the requirement for slow off-road driving.
Instrument Cluster Indications


1 - Message center
2 - Amber warning indicator
The warning indications to the driver are common on all vehicles fitted with TPMS. Warnings are conveyed by an
amber light emitting diode (LED) warning indicator and a text message displayed in the message center.
The warning indicator and message center are driven by CAN messages from the CJB. The warning indicator is
illuminated by the cluster software for 3 seconds when the vehicle is in power mode 6 for a bulb check.
For additional information, refer to: Information and Message Center (413-08, Description and Operation).
Controller Area Network (CAN)
The CJB sends and receives a number of digital messages via the medium speed controller area network (CAN). The
received messages are used for the operation of the TPMS. The transmitted messages comprise of TPMS status and
requests to the instrument cluster to illuminate warnings indicators and/or display messages in the message center.
Transmitted Messages
The CJB transmits the messages shown in the following table.
Message Received By
TPMS diagnostic response A Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
TPMS amber warning indicator request at 25% tire deflation Instrument cluster
TPMS message display request Instrument cluster
Diagnostics
The CJB has a diagnostic connection via the medium speed CAN to enable system status and faults to be retrieved
using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
Additionally, an on-board diagnostic routine within the CJB constantly monitors the system and alerts the driver to
system faults by illuminating the amber warning indicator and/or displaying a message in the instrument cluster
message center.
Fault Detection
If a sensor fails, the amber warning indicator in the instrument cluster will be illuminated. A message 'XX Tyre Not
Monitored' will be displayed in the message center in addition to the amber warning indicator.
NOTE: 'XX' is the tire position on the vehicle, e.g. FL (front left), FR (front right), RL (rear left) or RR (rear
right).
If more than one sensor fails or the CJB develops a fault, the amber warning indicator will be illuminated. A message
'Tyre Monitoring System Fault' will be displayed in the message center in addition to the amber warning indicator.
This fault could also be caused if RF interference near the vehicle affects the system signal reception. When the
interference has ceased, the fault will be automatically cancelled and the TPMS will operate normally.
If a tire pressure sensor battery voltage becomes low, the sensor transmits a message to the CJB. The CJB stores
the low battery condition as a fault flag in its memory with no other visual warnings displayed. If the battery fails, the
sensor will stop transmitting and the CJB will transmit a message to display 'FL Tyre Not Monitored' for example in
the message center. The dealer should interrogate the CJB for the fault flag using a Land Rover approved diagnostic
system to determine the cause of the message. If the battery has failed, the sensor must be replaced and the stored
fault flags removed using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system. The CJB will learn the identification of the new
sensor when the vehicle is driven. If the replaced sensor is fitted to the spare wheel (if fitted), its identification must
be manually programmed into the CJB using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system or by using it as a 'running'
wheel for 15 minutes at more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h), then replacing it to the spare wheel position.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; B = K-Bus; F = RF Transmission; N = Medium Speed CAN Bus; W = LF Transmission

1 - Battery
2 - RH rear initiator
3 - LH rear initiator
4 - RH front initiator
5 - LH front initiator
6 - Spare tire pressure sensor
7 - RH rear tire pressure sensor
8 - LH rear tire pressure sensor
9 - RH front tire pressure sensor
10 - LH front tire pressure sensor
11 - TPMS RF receiver
12 - Instrument Cluster
13 - CJB
14 - EJB
Wheels and Tires - Wheels and Tires
Principles of Operation
For a detailed description of the wheels and tires, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Wheels and Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Description and Operation).
the donor vehicle.
1. Verify the customer complaint. As much information as possible should be gathered from the driver to assist
in diagnosing the cause(s). Confirm which of the following two warning types (A or B) exist for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System when the ignition status is switched from 'OFF' to 'ON'
(A) Check Tire Pressure Warnings. A low tire pressure warning will continuously illuminate the
low tire pressure warning lamp. This warning may be accompanied by a text message such as CHECK
TIRE PRESSURE (refer to owner literature). The manufacturer approved diagnostic system does NOT
need to be used. Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are not generated with this type of warning. To
extinguish this warning it is essential that, with the ignition 'ON', all vehicle tires (including the spare)
are to be set to the correct pressure as stated in the vehicle handbook or as indicated on the placard
label in the passenger/driver door aperture. It is not necessary to drive the vehicle to clear
'check tire pressure' warnings - just changing the tire pressure causes the tire low
pressure sensor to transmit new data.
NOTES:
The tire pressures should be set by:
Using a calibrated tire pressure gauge

With 'cold' tires (vehicle parked in the ambient temperature for at least one hour, not in a
garage with an artificial ambient temperature)
If the tire pressure warning does not clear within two minutes, it is likely that the gauge is not
correctly calibrated or the tires are 'warm'. Carry out the following steps until the warning has cleared:
Rotate wheels approximately 180 degrees

Increase the tire pressures by 3psi
Wait a further two minutes
When the tires are at ambient temperature and a calibrated gauge is available, reset the tire
pressures to the correct pressure.
Tire pressure adjustments are part of routine owner maintenance. Tire pressure adjustments that
are required due to a lack of owner maintenance are not to be claimed under vehicle warranty.
(B) System Fault Warnings. When a system fault is detected, the low tire pressure warning lamp
will flash for approximately 75 seconds prior to being continuously illuminated. Visually inspect wheel
arch Tire Pressure Monitoring System Antennas and check for system DTCs. External visual damage to
the tire low pressure sensors and air leaks will not cause system fault warnings (note: nut and seal
system should be replaced at each tyre change using the available service kit). Check for the presence
of tire low pressure sensors on all four wheels (note: a tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve
stem rather than a rubber one).
2. Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Central Junction Box (CJB) (100-00 General Information,
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : U201F11 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA
LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
TEST CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
A1: U201F11 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
1 Ignition OFF.
2 Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Receiver electrical connector, C2875.
3 Measure the resistance between
C2875, harness side Battery

Pin 1 Negative terminal
Is the resistance less than 5 Ohms?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
GO to A3.
A2: U201F11 CHECK THE EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Disconnect the Body Control Module electrical connector, C0580.

Pin 1 Negative terminal
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit in wiring harness.
No
GO to A4.
A3: U201F11 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER FOR SHORT
CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Reconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Receiver electrical connector, C2875.
2 Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system run On Demand Self Test (0x0202).
Is the DTC U201F11 set?
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.
No
Investigate possible cause of intermittent failure.
A4: U201F11 CHECK THE BODY CONTROL MODULE FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Reconnect the Body Control Module electrical connector, C0580.
Yes
Replace Body Control Module.
No
PINPOINT TEST B : U201F12 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA
LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO POWER
B1: U201F12 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO POWER
1 Ignition OFF.

Pin 1 Positive terminal
Yes
GO to B2.
No
GO to B3.
B2: U201F12 CHECK THE EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER

Pin 1 Positive terminal
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit in wiring harness.
No
GO to B4.
B3: U201F12 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER FOR SHORT
CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.
No
B4: U201F12 CHECK THE BODY CONTROL MODULE FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : U201F87 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA
LINE MISSING MESSAGE
C1: U201F87 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE MISSING MESSAGE
Yes
GO to C2.
No
C2: U201F87 CHECK EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT
1 Ignition OFF.
C2875, harness side C0580, harness side

Pin 1 Pin 25
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
REPAIR the high resistance/open circuit in wiring harness.
C3: U201F87 CHECK EXTERNAL RECEIVER
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.GO to C4.
No
C4: U201F87 CHECK BODY CONTROL MODULE.
Yes
No
Test is complete. No further action is required.
PINPOINT TEST D : C1A5693, C1A5893, C1A6093, C1A6293 DEFECTIVE RUNNING TIRE LOW
PRESSURE SENSOR OR RECEIVER
TEST DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
CONDITIONS
D1: C1A5693, C1A5893, C1A6093, C1A6293 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL DTCS
1 Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system check for additional DTCs C1A5693, C1A5893,
C1A6093, C1A6293, with identical time stamps.
Have all four DTCs logged with identical time stamps in the Body Control module?
Yes
Diagnose and fix DTCs related to the tire pressure monitoring receiver.
No
Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform diagnostic routine to verify reception
of all tire low pressure sensors, by carrying out 'TPMS wheel unit & receiver reception test' from
set up and configuration application and complete remedial actions.
PINPOINT TEST E : C1D1800 LOCALIZATION FAILURE

CONDITIONS
E1: C1D1800 ESTABLISH THE LOCATIONS OF THE TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR LOCALIZATION
FAILURES
NOTE: To clear or reset information read in datalogger signal 'Unsuccessful wheel position
triggering statistic' (0x4149) Use manufacturer approved diagnostic system and carry out 'Reset/
Clear Specified Function' (0x040E) from Special Applications.
1 Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system read datalogger signal 'Unsuccessful wheel
position triggering statistic' (0x4149) to establish the locations of the tire low pressure sensor
localization failures.
Have the locations of the tire low pressure sensor localization failures been identified?
Yes
GO to E2.
No
E2: C1D1800 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LF INITIATOR CIRCUIT DTCS
C1A5912, C1A5914, C1A6112, C1A6114, C1A6312, C1A6314.
Are any of the following DTCs logged C1A5712, C1A5714, C1A5912, C1A5914, C1A6112, C1A6114,
C1A6312, C1A6314?
Yes
Refer to the DTC Index. Check for possible causes for each of the logged DTCs and carry out the
repair operations specified.
No
GO to E3.
E3: C1D1800 CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR DTCS
C1A6093, C1A6293, C1D2105.
Are any of the following DTCs logged C1A5693, C1A5893, C1A6093, C1A6293, C1D2105?
Yes
Refer to the DTC Index. Check for possible causes for each of the logged DTCs and carry out the
repair operations specified.
No
GO to E4.
E4: C1D1800 CHECK INITIATORS ARE CORRECTLY INSTALLED
1 Check for correct installation of Initiators for the locations identified. REFER to: (204-04 Wheels
and Tires)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna (Removal and Installation),
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna (Removal and Installation).
Are the Initiators correctly installed?
Yes
GO to E5.
No
Install Initiators to the correct locations.
E5: C1D1800 CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT IN INITIATOR HARNESS
1 Ignition OFF.
2 Disconnect the Body Control Module electrical connector, C0584 (Front LF Initiators).
3 Disconnect the Body Control Module electrical connector, C0586 (Rear LF Initiators).
4 Measure the resistance of Front Right Hand Initiator.

Pin 1 Pin 2
5 Measure the resistance of Front Left Hand Initiator.

Pin 14 Pin 15
6 Measure the resistance of Rear Right Hand Initiator.

Pin 30 Pin 31
7 Measure the resistance of Rear Left Hand Initiator.

Pin 18 Pin 19
Are any of the Initiator resistance measurements less than 1 Ohm?
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit as required.
No
Install the correct tire low pressure sensor, of correct frequency, in accordance with that defined
in the manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor application, to the
position(s) identified.
REFER to: Tire Low Pressure Sensor (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
PINPOINT TEST F : C1D2105 MISSING, INCOMPATIBLE OR DEFECTIVE RUNNING TIRE LOW

PRESSURE SENSOR(S) OR RECEIVER
CONDITIONS
F1: C1D2105 CHECK FOR CORRECT WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY AND TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSORS
NOTE: As a visual check, a tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a
rubber one and cannot be installed to a mini or space saver spare wheel.
1 Check that all full size running wheel and tire assemblies have tire low pressure sensors
installed.
Is a full size wheel and tire assembly with tire low pressure sensor installed to all running wheel
positions?
Yes
Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform diagnostic routine to verify reception
of all tire low pressure sensors, by carrying out 'TPMS wheel unit & receiver reception test' from
set up and configuration application and complete remedial actions.
No
If agreed with the customer, install the correct wheel and tire assembly or tire low pressure
sensor(s), of correct frequency, in accordance with that defined in the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor application.
(Note: If the datalogger signal 'Number Of Missing Tire Pressure Wheel Units' is 4 and the Instrument Panel Cluster displays text
message 'Tire Pressure Monitoring Unavailable', the system has detected winter tire installation, as detailed in the owner's manual.
Confirm why the vehicle has non-TPMS wheel & tire assemblies installed before installing tire low pressure sensors, which are not to
be claimed under vehicle warranty.)
Component Tests
Wheels and Tires
For wheel and tire specification information (pressures, torques, etc).

REFER to: Specifications (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Specifications).
When replacing wheels or tires, local legislation regarding health and safety must be complied with.
If the vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitoring System installed, only manufacturer approved wheels and tires should
be used. If the wheel and tire size is changed (for example from R18 to R20) the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
module should be updated with the correct pressure information appropriate to the new wheel and tire set. Update
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
As a general guideline, only replace tires in pairs or as a set, and only with tires of equivalent size and specification.
Confirm the symptoms of the customer complaint.
As much information as possible should be gathered from the driver to assist in diagnosing the cause(s).
1. Before a road test, carry out a basic inspection to make sure the vehicle is safe and legal to drive.
Basic inspection
Correct tire inflation.

REFER to: Specifications (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Specifications).
Legal tire tread depth
Cuts/Bulges in tire sidewall(s)
Tire ply separation
Embedded objects
Wheel rim damage
Correct tire installation (specification, direction of rotation, etc)
Any obvious distortion of the tire (flat/high spots)
Worn/Damaged steering or suspension components
Road test
If the results of the basic inspection are acceptable, carry out a road test to confirm the symptoms.
To reproduce the symptoms, test the vehicle on similar roads to those on which the fault occurs and at similar
speeds (provided it is legal to do so).
If the vibration or noise can be reproduced, note the speed at which it occurs and see if it is possible to drive
through the symptom, meaning, is it possible to alter the fault by driving faster or slower than the speed at which it
occurs?
If it is possible, it is likely that the fault is caused by an imbalance in the wheel or tire.
If the vibration or noise gets worse as the vehicle speed increases, it is likely that the fault is caused by distortion in
the wheel or tire, or worn or damaged components.
Distortion checks
Check for distortion by raising the vehicle so that the wheels are free and placing an axle stand or similar fixed
object next to each wheel in turn.
If the stand is placed at the tread of the tire, the tire can be checked for ovality by turning the wheel by hand and
checking for high or low spots where the gap between the tread and the stand increases or reduces.
If the stand is placed next to the wheel rim or tire sidewall, the wheel and tire can be checked for run-out in a
similar way.
Wheels and Tires - Tire Low Pressure Sensor
Removal
NOTE: It is strongly recommended that the valve seal and steel washer is replaced each time a tire is changed
to avoid a seal failure. The seal and washer must be replaced if the sensor is removed. Removal of the sensor
retaining nut must be regarded as sensor removal. The valve cap must always be in place except when inflating,
releasing pressure or checking pressure.

3. CAUTION: To avoid damage to the tire low pressure

sensor, release the tire bead from the rim, 180 degrees from
the valve.
Remove the tire from the wheel.
4. CAUTIONS:
Do not push on the valve.
If the tire low pressure sensor is to be re-

installed, a new washer, seal and nut must be
installed.
If the tire low pressure sensor is to be re-

installed, a new washer, seal, nut and silver
coloured nickel valve core must be installed.
Remove the tire low pressure sensor.

Remove the nut.
Release and withdraw the sensor along the
valve axis.
5. If necessary, install a new seal and washer.

Remove and discard the seal and washer.
Install a new washer and seal, making sure
the valve remains pressed fully onto its
seat.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Do not use compressed air to clean the sensor.

Do not clean the sensor with solvents or cleaning agents of any
type, use a clean dry cloth.
Clean the component mating faces.
2. CAUTION: Do not apply any lubricant to the

new valve.
NOTE: If the sensor is replaced on a 'running'
wheel, the new sensor identification will be learnt
when the vehicle is first driven. If a new sensor is
fitted to the spare wheel the identification for that
sensor must be programmed into the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) module using T4. The
identifcation code is provided on a label with the
complete assembly and is also printed on the
casing of each sensor.
Install the tire low pressure sensor.

Install and hand tighten the nut whilst
keeping the sensor in place.
Tighten the nut to 6.5 Nm (4.8 lb.ft).
3. Install the tire and balance the wheel.

Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front
Antenna
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the fender splash shield.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Splash Shield (501-
02, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the tire pressure antenna.

Remove the 2 retainers.
Installation
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
2. Initiate a new tire pressure antenna using T4.

Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear
Antenna
Removal

Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the tire pressure antenna.

Remove the 2 retainers.
Installation
2. Initiate a new tire pressure antenna using T4.

Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module
Removal
1. The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) module is an
integral part of the central junction box (CJB).
For additional information, refer to: Central Junction Box (CJB)
(418-00, Removal and Installation).
Installation
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension -
Air Suspension - General Specification
Item Specification
Ride height:
Off road 55 mm (2.1 in) above standard
Access - reselectable whilst 50 mm (1.9 in) below standard
vehicle is moving
Trim height Configured using approved diagnostic equipment
Height sensors:
Location 4 per vehicle - one sensor for each wheel
Height sensor arm colour
coding:
Front GREY
Left-hand rear WHITE
Right-hand rear BLACK
Height sensor operating
voltages:
Supply voltage 5 volts - supplied by air suspension ECU
Output voltage Left hand front and right hand rear - Decreases to 0.5 volts with bump travel.
Right hand front and left hand rear - Decreases to 4.5 volts with bump travel
Spring/damper modules:
Type Guided air spring surrounding twin tube damper
Pressures:
Normal - Front 800 to 1000 kPa (8.0 to 10.0 bar) (116.0 to 145.0 lbf/in²)
Normal - Rear 500 to 800 kPa (5.0 to 8.0 bar) (72.5 to 116.0 lbf/in²)
Burst pressure 3500 kPa (35 bar) (507.5 lbf/in²)
Maximum spring pressure - Full Approximately 2700 kPa (27 bar) (391.5 lbf/in²)
bump at gross vehicle weight
Air compressors: Supplied with air drier, electrically switched, pilot operated exhaust valve and
double temperature sensors
Old type Hitachi
*New type AMK
Controlled by Electronic Control Unit (ECU)
Maximum pressure 1680 kPa (16.8 bar) (243.6 lbf/in²)
Air reservoir:
Volume 9 litres (0.31 cu.ft)
Working pressure 1750 kPa (17.5 bar) (253.75 lbf/in²)
Maximum operating pressure 2300 kPa (23 bar) (333.5 lbf/in²)
Reservoir valve block Incorporates pressure sensor to monitor spring and air reservoir pressures
Valve blocks:
Front 2 corner valves, 1 cross link valve - all mounted on front bumper armature
Rear 2 corner valves, 1 cross link valve - all mounted on left hand rear spring tower
Note: The front height sensors are not handed.
* If an AMK air compressor is installed to replace an Hitachi air compressor then a new corresponding
air compressor relay must also be installed
Item Specification
Gap between underside of the toe link rubber boot and the chassis bracket 12.0 mm (0.473 in)
Air suspension compressor bolts 10 7
Air suspension compressor lower cover bolts 10 7
Voss connector to the front solenoid valve block 2.5 1.7
Voss connector to the front and rear air springs 3.5 2.6
Voss connector to the rear solenoid valve block 2.5 1.7
Voss connector to the air suspension reservoir 5 4
Voss connector to the air suspension reservoir solenoid valve block 2.5 1.7
Air suspension control module bolt 10 7
Air suspension reservoir bolts 23 17
Toe link inner ball joint retaining nut 133 98
Toe link nut 103 76
Toe link adjustment locking nut 130 96
Lower front arm camber adjusting bolt 275 203
Lower arm rear castor adjusting bolts 275 203
Track rod end locking nuts 53 39
Front and rear air spring/shock absorber to the suspension turret nuts 70 52
Front and rear air spring/shock absorber to the lower suspension arm nut and bolt 300 221
* Front and rear air spring/shock absorber top nut 98 72
Heat shield bolts 10 7
Wheel speed sensor bolt 10 7
Wheel hub bolts 115 85
* Lower arm ball joint retaining nut 115 85
* Tie-rod end ball joint 70 52
Suspension height sensor Torx bolts 2.2 1.5
+ Stake nut on completion of tightening

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
Adaptive Dynamics - Component Location
NOTE: LHD (left-hand drive) vehicle shown, RHD (right-hand drive) similar.

1 - Front RH (right-hand) height sensor
2 - Accelerometer
3 - Rear RH height sensor
4 - Rear RH air spring damper module
5 - Accelerometer
6 - Adaptive Damping Module (ADM)
7 - Rear LH (left-hand) air spring damper module
8 - Rear LH height sensor
9 - Front LH height sensor
10 - Front LH air spring damper module
11 - Front RH air spring damper module
Continuously variable damping, known as Adaptive Dynamics, is available on Range Rover. Adaptive dynamics is an
electronically controlled suspension system which continuously adjusts the damping characteristics of the suspension
dampers in reaction to the current driving conditions.
Adaptive dynamics is standard on 5.0 S/C variants, not available on 5.0 N/A and it is optional on TdV6 variants.
The system is controlled by an Adaptive Damping Module (ADM). The ADM receives signals from three
accelerometers, four suspension height sensors and from other vehicle systems to determine vehicle state, body and
wheel motions and driver inputs. These signals are used by the ADM to continuously control the damping
characteristics of each damper to the appropriate level resulting in optimum body control and vehicle ride.
DAMPERS

A - Front Dampers
B - Rear Dampers
The adaptive dynamics dampers are monotube, nitrogen gas and oil filled units. The dampers are continuously
variable, which allows the damping force to be electrically adjusted when the vehicle is being driven. The dampers
provide the optimum compromise between vehicle control and ride comfort. To maintain wheel travel, the rear
dampers feature an additional external accumulator. This is to provide adequate rebound travel by recovering the
volume through the external source. All the dampers have an electrical connector on the end of the piston rod, in the
center of the top mount.
In each damper, the damping adjustment is achieved by a solenoid operated variable orifice, which opens up an
alternative path for oil flow within the damper. When de-energized, the bypass is closed and all the oil flows through
the main (firm) valve. When energized, the solenoid moves an armature and control blade, which work against a
spring. The control blade incorporates an orifice which slides inside a sintered housing to open up the bypass as
required. In compression, oil flows from the lower portion of the piston through a hollow piston rod, a separate soft
(comfort) valve, the slider housing and orifice and into the upper portion of the damper, thereby bypassing the main
(firm) valve. In rebound, the oil flows in the opposite direction.
The damper operates continuously between these two boundary conditions.
The solenoid in each damper is operated by a 526 Hz PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the ADM. When fully
energized, the ADM applies a 1.5 A current to operate the damper in the soft setting. When de-energized (0.0 A), the
damper is in the firm setting. The current varies continuously as required to increase and decrease the damping
individually in each of the dampers.


A - Firm Setting
B - Soft Setting
C - Main Oil Flow
D - Bypass oil flow
1 - Bypass valve (open)
2 - Main valve
3 - Tube
4 - Bypass valve (closed)
5 - Piston and rod assembly
ACCELEROMETERS
Three accelerometers are used in the adaptive dynamics system.
Accelerometers locations are as follows
center front bulkhead area (below wind shield)

Right rear luggage area (behind light unit)
Left rear luggage area (below rear window)
The accelerometers measure acceleration in the vertical plane and output a corresponding analogue signal to the
ADM. The algorithms in the ADM calculate the heave, pitch and roll motions of the vehicle, which are used by the
controller to control road induced body modes.
Each accelerometer is connected to the ADM via three wires, which supply ground, 5 V supply and signal return.
The sensing element comprises a single parallel plate capacitor, one plate of which moves relative to the other
dependent on the force (acceleration) applied. This causes the capacitance to change as a function of applied
acceleration. This capacitance is compared with a fixed reference capacitor in a bridge circuit and the signal is
processed by means of a dedicated integrated circuit to generate an output voltage that varies as a function of
applied acceleration. The sensors output a signal voltage of approximately 1 V/g ± 0.05 V/g.
HEIGHT SENSORS
The four suspension height sensors that are used in the air suspension system also supply input to the adaptive
dynamics system, two for the front suspension and two for the rear suspension. A front suspension height sensor is
attached to each side of the chassis rail and connected by a sensor arm and sensor link to the related upper lateral
arm of the front suspension. A rear suspension height sensor is attached to each side of the chassis rail and
connected by a sensor arm and sensor link to the related upper control arm of the rear suspension. On each
suspension height sensor, the sensor arm and sensor link convert linear movement of the suspension into rotary
movement of the sensor shaft.
Front Height Sensor


1 - Drop link
2 - Electrical connector
3 - Sensor body
4 - Lever arm
Rear Height Sensor

2 - Sensor body
3 - Lever arm
4 - Drop link
The suspension height sensors measure suspension displacement at each corner of the vehicle and output a
corresponding analogue signal to the ADM. The algorithms in the ADM calculate the position, velocity and frequency
content of the signals and use the results for wheel control.
A calibration routine is performed using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system to read the position of each
corner of the vehicle and record the settings in the control module memory. Once set, the calibration is not required
to be performed unless the air suspension control module or adaptive damping module is removed or replaced, a
height sensor is removed or replaced or a suspension arm to which the sensor is connected is removed or replaced.
If the removed height sensor is subsequently refitted, the calibration procedure will have to be performed to ensure
the integrity of the system.
The front and rear sensor drop links are serviceable items.
The following graph shows the vehicle height displacement from normal against output voltage for the front height
sensors. The center line represents the "nominal" condition but depending on tolerances, the actual line may lie
anywhere between the upper and lower lines.
Front Height Sensor
The following graph shows the vehicle height displacement from normal against output voltage for the rear height
sensors. The center line represents the "nominal" condition but depending on tolerances, the actual line may lie
anywhere between the upper and lower lines.
Rear Height Sensor

Height Sensor Calibration
A calibration routine is performed using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system to read the position of each corner
of the vehicle and record the settings in the control module memory. Once set, the calibration is not required to be
performed unless the air suspension control module or adaptive damping module is removed or replaced, a height
sensor is removed or replaced or a suspension arm to which the sensor is connected is removed or replaced. If the
removed height sensor is subsequently refitted, the calibration procedure will have to be performed to ensure the
integrity of the system.
If a replacement drop link is fitted calibration is required.
The sensing element consists of an array of hall effect devices arranged to measure the direction of the magnetic field
of a small magnet attached to the end of the sensor shaft. As the sensor shaft rotates, so do the lines of magnetic
flux from the magnet. The signals from the Hall effect elements are processed by means of a dedicated integrated
circuit to generate an output voltage that varies as the sensor shaft is rotated. The sensor has a measurement range
of ± 40° around its nominal position and the nominal sensitivity is 57 mV/° of shaft rotation. The graphic below
describes the repetition of the output signal as the sensor is rotated through and beyond 40°.
Height Sensor Wiring


A - Adaptive Damping Module
B - Air Suspension Module
1 - Ground
2 - Ground
3 - 5v Supply
4 - Signal Output (Air Suspension)
5 - 5v Supply
6 - Signal Output (ADM)
Height Sensor Voltage


A - Sensor voltage
B - Angle of rotation
1 - Outside measuring range
2 - Voltage output
3 - +- 40 degree measuring range
Adaptive Damping Module (ADM)
The adaptive damping module (ADM) is located in the LH rear quarter panel.
CONTROL DIAGRAM - ADAPTIVE DYNAMICS
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High Speed CAN (controller area network) bus


1 - Battery
2 - LH front height sensor
3 - RH front height sensor
4 - LH rear height sensor
5 - RH rear height sensor
6 - Accelerometer
7 - Accelerometer
8 - Accelerometer
9 - CAN connection to other systems
10 - LH rear damper solenoid
11 - RH rear damper solenoid
12 - LH front damper solenoid
13 - RH front damper solenoid
14 - BJB (battery junction box)
AIR SUSPENSION
Air Suspension - Component Location


1 - RH air spring damper module
2 - Air suspension control module
3 - Air suspension control switch
5 - Rear axle valve block
6 - Air supply unit silencer
7 - Air supply unit filter
8 - Rear LH air spring damper module
9 - Rear LH height sensor
10 - Pipe - Compressor inlet
11 - Pipe - Reservoir valve block to rear axle valve block
12 - Pipe - Compressor exhaust
13 - Air supply unit
14 - Pipe - Air supply unit to reservoir valve block
15 - Reservoir valve block
16 - Pipe - exhaust
17 - Rear RH height sensor
18 - Air reservoir
19 - Front LH height sensor
21 - Front RH height sensor
22 - Front axle valve block
General Information
The air suspension system is a four corner system which is fitted to all models.
The system is electronically controlled by an air suspension control module which controls the air supply unit, reacts
to inputs from four height sensors and distributes air around the system via valve blocks.
The main air suspension system components are:
Air suspension control module

Air supply unit
Four height sensors
Three valve block assemblies
Reservoir
Air harness
Two front struts incorporating air spring damper modules
Two rear struts incorporating air spring damper modules
Air Suspension Switch
The four corner air suspension system maintains the vehicle height under all operating conditions by controlling the
mass of air in the air springs. The air suspension control module uses signals from the four height sensors to
maintain the correct suspension height, irrespective of vehicle load. Additionally, the system allows the driver to
request ride height changes to improve off-road performance or ease access or loading. The system automatically
adjusts the ride height to improve the vehicle handling and dynamics when speed increases or decreases. This is
achieved by operating pneumatic control valves to increase or decrease the mass of air in the air springs.
The air suspension system has three driver selectable, pre-determined ride heights and an automated high speed
ride height. A driver interface indicates the selected ride height and height change movement. Additional information
is also relayed to the driver via the instrument cluster message center and by audible warnings also transmitted by
the instrument cluster.
Most height changes can only be made when the engine is running and the driver's and passenger doors are closed.
The air suspension can be controlled manually by the driver using a switch on the floor console to select the required
height change.
The system will temporarily inhibit height adjustments when the vehicle is subject to cornering, heavy acceleration or
heavy braking. The inhibit function prevents unsettling of the vehicle.
Height changes are also restricted for safety reasons, when a door is opened and the vehicle is stationary for
example.
The air suspension system is controlled by the air suspension control module which is located on the driver side 'A'
pillar. The control module monitors the height of each corner of the vehicle via four height sensors, which are
mounted in-board of each road wheel. The control module also performs an 'on-board diagnostic' function to perform
'health checks' on the system. If faults are detected, codes are stored in the control module and can be retrieved
using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
Ride Height Tolerance Control
The air suspension control module has two ride height tolerance bands; normal tolerance and tight tolerance.
The control module considers the vehicle to be at target height if the current height is within the appropriate
tolerance band. Height adjustments are not made until the vehicle height falls outside of the tolerance band for a
pre-determined time. The time period is different depending on if the vehicle is moving or stationary. The tolerance
bands are as follows:
Normal ± 10 mm
Tight ± 3 mm.
The tight tolerance band is only used if set by the Land Rover approved diagnostic system for diagnostic purposes or
when the vehicle has been stationary for more than 5 minutes.
OPERATING MODES
The driver can manually select, using the air suspension switch, one of four ride states:
ON-ROAD - this height is the normal operating height of the vehicle

OFF-ROAD - this height is higher than the on-road height and provides improved ground clearance, approach,
departure and breakover angles
ACCESS - this height is lower than the on-road height and makes entering and exiting the vehicle easier for
the occupants
CRAWL (Locked at access) - this mode allows the vehicle to be driven at the access height at low speeds to
provide increased roof clearance in low car parks etc.
HIGH SPEED - A non-selectable, automatic high speed mode is provided which lowers the vehicle height to improve
vehicle handling.
NOTE: Vehicle height changes are restricted if the air suspension control module receives a 'Door Open' signal
and the speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
A complete vehicle delivery mode is available but is only selectable using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
When this mode is active most vehicle systems, in addition to the air suspension, are inhibited or restricted to a
minimal functionality. In this mode the air suspension is set to the transportation mode.
If the air suspension control module senses that the vehicle has grounded and lost traction, the control module can
temporarily increase and/or redistribute the volume of air supplied to the affected air spring(s) to maximize the
available traction. This is known as extended mode and will be indicated to the driver by the lamps on the air
suspension switch flashing and an 'EXTENDED MODE' message being displayed in the instrument cluster.
If a fault is detected by the air suspension control module, the control module will reduce the system functionality
dependent on the type and severity of the fault. The control module will also store a fault code which can be
retrieved using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system. If a severe fault occurs, the control module will attempt
to put the vehicle in a safe condition. A fault is relayed to the driver by the instrument cluster message center and
an audible warning emitted from the instrument cluster.
All information messages will be displayed for four seconds.
Air Suspension Switch Pack

1 - Raise/lower switch
2 - Off-Road Mode
3 - On-Road Mode
4 - Access Mode
5 - Crawl (Locked at Access) Mode
The air suspension control switch is located in the floor console, behind the transmission selector. The switch is a
three position, non-latching switch which allows selection of the following driver selectable modes:
Off-road mode
On-road mode
Access mode
Crawl (locked at access) mode.
The air suspension switch can be rocked from its central position. The switch is non-latching and returns to the
central position when released. The switch completes an earth path to the air suspension control module when
operated. This earth path is completed on separate wires for the raise and lower switch positions, allowing the control
module to determine which selection the driver has made.
The switch has six symbols which illuminate to show the current selected height and the direction of movement. The
raise and lower symbols will flash and a warning tone will be emitted from the instrument cluster sounder when a
requested height change is not allowed, i.e. vehicle speed too fast.
A flashing symbol indicates that the air suspension system is in a waiting state or that the system will override the
driver's selection because the speed threshold is too high.
The driver can also ignore the system's warnings signals and allow the height to change automatically. For example,
increasing the vehicle speed to more than 25 mph (40 km/h) when locked to access height will cause the control
module to automatically change the ride height from access mode to on-road mode.
On-Road Mode
This is the normal ride height for the vehicle.
Off-Road Mode
Off-road mode will only be selectable if the vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h). The vehicle will be raised
55mm (2.2 inches) to provide additional body clearance and improved approach, departure and breakover angles. If
the vehicle speed exceeds 31 mph (50 km/h), the air suspension control module will automatically lower the vehicle
to the on-road mode height. At 25 to 28 mph (40 to 45 km/h) a message is displayed in the message center to warn
the driver to slow down or the vehicle will lower.
Access Mode
Access mode lowers the vehicle body height and provides easier entry, exit and loading of the vehicle.
Access mode can be selected at any vehicle speed. When access mode is selected, the response of the air suspension
system will depend on the vehicle speed:
If the vehicle speed is more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h), the air suspension control module will wait for up to
one minute for the vehicle speed to be reduced. The access mode light emitting diode (LED) and the lowering
LED will flash while the air suspension control module waits for the vehicle speed to be reduced, the on-road
mode lamp will remain illuminated. If the vehicle speed is not reduced sufficiently, the access mode request
will be cancelled after 1 minute.
If the vehicle speed is less than 12.5 mph (20 km/h), the air suspension control module will lower the
suspension to a part lowered height and will remain at this height for up to one minute. The on-road mode
lamp will extinguish as the air suspension control module lowers the suspension to the part lowered height.
The access mode lamp and the lowering LED will illuminate. When part lowered is reached, the lowering LED
will flash. If the vehicle speed is not reduced to less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in the one minute period, the
access mode request will be cancelled.
If the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), the suspension will be lowered to access mode immediately.
The access mode LED and the lowering LED will illuminate. When the access mode height is reached, the
lowering LED will be extinguished.
Access height may be selected up to 40 seconds after the ignition is turned off, provided that the driver's door has
not been opened within this time.
The suspension will automatically rise from access mode when the vehicle speed exceeds 6.2 mph (10 km/h). If
access mode was selected directly from off-road mode then the system will return to off-road mode when the vehicle
speed exceeds 6.2 mph (10 km/h). Otherwise the system will lift the suspension to On-road height.
Selecting Access Mode Directly from Off-Road Mode
When the suspension is in off-road mode height, pressing the 'Access' height change switch once, or pressing the
lowering switch twice before the lowering LED is extinguished, the control module will lower the suspension to access
mode height. The control module will remember to return the suspension to off-road height automatically if the
vehicle speed increases above 6.2 mph (10 km/h).
Crawl (Locked at Access) Mode
Crawl mode allows the vehicle to be driven at low speeds with the suspension locked at the access mode height. This
allows the vehicle to be driven in low car parks etc. with increased roof clearance.
Crawl mode can be selected up to 21.7 mph (35 km/h) with a long press of the switch in a down direction. The
access mode lamp and the crawl mode lamp will be illuminated. When the control module is in crawl mode, on-road
mode height will be selected automatically if the vehicle speed exceeds 24.8 mph (40 km/h). At 18.6 to 21.7 mph
(30 to 35 km/h) a message is displayed in the message center to warn the driver to slow down or the vehicle will
rise. Crawl mode can also be manually cancelled by moving the switch in the up direction for 1 second. The crawl
mode lamp will now be extinguished.
High Speed Mode
High speed mode is a non-selectable, automatic mode which lowers the vehicle height to improve vehicle handling.
This feature is fully automated and is 'invisible' to the driver.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 100 mph (160 km/h) for more than five seconds, the air suspension control module
initiates the high speed mode. When the vehicle speed reduces to less than 80 mph (130 km/h) for more than 30
seconds, the vehicle returns to the On-Road height. This function is cancelled if a trailer is connected to the trailer
socket.
Automatic Height Change Warnings
When the suspension is in off-road mode, access mode or crawl mode height, the air suspension control module will
change the suspension height automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds a predetermined threshold.
When the suspension is at off-road mode or crawl mode height, the control module issues a warning to advise the
driver that the vehicle is approaching the speed threshold. The instrument cluster sounder will emit a chime, a
message will be displayed in the message center and the on-road mode LED and either the raising or lowering LED
will flash.
The off-road mode or crawl mode height speed warning is removed when the vehicle speed is reduced.
SPECIAL MODES
Door Open Functionality
If one or more of the vehicle doors are opened during a height change when the vehicle is stationary, the air
suspension control module will restrict further height change.
The LED on the air suspension LED display for the target mode height will remain illuminated and the raising or
lowering LED will flash.
If all of the doors are closed within 90 seconds, the height change will resume. If the 90 second period is exceeded,
the message 'CONFIRM REQUIRED SUSPENSION HEIGHT' will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Extended Modes
Raise Inhibit Raise inhibit is a reactive mode invoked when the following conditions are satisfied, vehicle speed
below 10kph and vehicle raising very slowly. Raise inhibit is normally invoked when vehicle is lifting against an
obstacle, it can also be used when the vehicle is winching or is tethered down.
Jacking Jacking is a reactive mode invoked when the following conditions are satisfied, vehicle stationary, system
attempts to level the vehicle down and rate of vehicle lowering is below a predefined threshold for a predefined time.
Jacking mode is normally invoked under the following conditions, vehicle jacking or vehicle grounded and stationary
Lower Inhibit Lower inhibit is a reactive mode invoked when the following conditions are satisfied, vehicle
stationary, rate of vehicle lowering is below a predefined threshold for a predefined time. Lower inhibit is normally
invoked under the following conditions, vehicle lowered onto an obstacle during a height change.
Belly-Out Belly-Out is a pro-active mode invoked when the following conditions are satisfied, vehicle moving and
speed is below 50kph, traction activity is induced on axle pairs for fixed period of time and wheel heights above a
predetermined threshold on coinciding axle pairs for the same fixed period of time. Belly-Out is normally invoked
under the following condition, vehicle is attempting to move and with low levels of traction and supported by an
obstacle.
If the vehicle becomes grounded and the traction control becomes operational, the air suspension control module
automatically increases the mass of air in the air springs to raise the vehicle clear of the obstruction. Extended mode
is activated automatically and cannot be selected manually.
When the air suspension control module has activated the extended mode, the off-road mode lamp will flash if the
suspension is above off-road mode height. The off-road mode and on-road mode lamps will flash if the suspension is
between off-road mode and on-road mode heights. The on-road mode and access mode lamps will flash if the
suspension is between on-road mode and access mode. A message will also be displayed in the message center.
To exit the extended mode, press the air suspension switch briefly in the up or down position or alternatively drive
the vehicle at a speed of more than 2 mph (3 km/h) for 45 seconds.
Additional Lift in Extended Mode
When extended mode has been invoked and the automatic lifting of the vehicle is complete, the driver can request
an additional lift of the vehicle. This can be particularly useful when extended mode has been activated on soft
surfaces.
The additional lift can be requested once the height change LED has extinguished. Press and hold the air suspension
switch in the up position for 3 seconds whilst simultaneously depressing the brake pedal. A chime from the
instrument cluster will sound to confirm that the request has been accepted. The raising LED will be illuminated while
the vehicle is being lifted.
Periodic Re-leveling
When the vehicle is parked, the air suspension control module 'wakes up' two hours after the ignition was last
switched off and then once every twenty four hours. The vehicle height is checked and if the vehicle is not level
within a pre-set tolerance, small downwards height adjustments may be made automatically.
Transportation Mode
Transportation mode is a factory set mode which locks the suspension to enable the vehicle to be safely lashed to a
transporter. The suspension transportation mode is automatically set when the vehicle is configured for delivery
mode using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system. Delivery mode also affects other vehicle systems which are
inhibited or restricted to a minimal functionality.
When the ignition switch is switched off, the vehicle will be lowered to access mode. This ensures that the securing
straps do not become loose should air leak from the air springs.
When transportation mode is active, the air suspension switches are disabled. Periodic re-levelling is also disabled.
When the engine is started, the air suspension control module will cause the vehicle to rise allowing sufficient ground
clearance for the vehicle to be loaded. While the height is changing, all the LED's in the air suspension control switch
will flash and a chime will be emitted by the instrument cluster. When the sufficient height reached, all the LED's will
illuminate continuously and the chime will stop.
When the engine is switched off, the air suspension control module will cause the vehicle to lower allowing the
vehicle to be strapped down. While the height is changing, all the LED's in the air suspension control switch will flash.
When the height of –50mm is reached, all the LED's will illuminate continuously.
Calibration Mode
This mode is used when the air suspension control module has been replaced or a height sensor or suspension
component has been dismantled or replaced.
The following conditions apply when the vehicle is in calibration mode:
The ride height is set to tight tolerance

Fault reaction to vehicle identification number (VIN) mis-match with the Car Configuration File (CCF) is
disabled
The raise, lower, access and hold switches are disabled
Message "Air suspension not in customer mode" is displayed in the instrument pack.
Remote Operation

1 - Hold
2 - Raise vehicle
3 - Lower vehicle
The buttons on the Smart Key may be used to operate the air suspension system, allowing the vehicle to be raised
or lowered remotely. This may be useful in attaching a trailer or loading the vehicle.
To change the suspension height using the Smart Key, the vehicle must be stationary, all the doors closed and the
hazard warning lamps switched on.
To raise the vehicle suspension buttons 1 and 2 to are to be press simultaneously.
To lower the vehicle suspension buttons 1 and 3 to are to be press simultaneously
Air Harness
The air harness comprises ten separate nylon pipes which are connected between the system components with Voss
connectors. The pipes have the following diameters:
Pipe Diameter
High pressure pipes 6 mm
Compressor inlet pipe 8 mm
Inlet filter to silencer 8 mm
Compressor exhaust pipe 10 mm
Silencer exhaust pipe 19 mm
If a pipe becomes damaged, an in-line connector is available for repair purposes. The pipes are secured to the body
and chassis with a number of plastic clips.
LEAK DETECTION
Leak detection can be carried out using a Land Rover approved leak detection spray.
If the vehicle appears to be leaking, perform a leak check on all aspects of the system, i.e.; air spring hose fittings
and the associated connections on the valve blocks, air springs and reservoir. Failure to correctly diagnose leakage
will result in unnecessary exchange of serviceable components and recurrence of original problem.
AIR SUSPENSION COMPONENTS
Valve Blocks
Front and Rear Valve Blocks


1 - Isolation rubber mounts (3 off)
2 - Location slots
3 - Front valve block, valves and solenoid assembly
4 - Front bumper armature
6 - LH air spring damper module air harness connection
7 - Air inlet/outlet connection
8 - RH air spring damper module air harness connection
9 - Rear valve block, valves and solenoid assembly
10 - RH air spring damper module air harness connection
11 - Air inlet/outlet connection
12 - LH air spring damper module air harness connection
13 - Rear suspension turret
Reservoir Valve Block


1 - Chassis mounting bracket
2 - Location slot
3 - Isolation rubber mounts (3 off)
5 - Reservoir valve block, valves and solenoid assembly
6 - Reservoir connection
7 - Rear valve block connection
8 - Front valve block connection
9 - Air supply unit connection
10 - Pressure sensor
Front and Rear Valve Blocks
The front and rear axle valve blocks are similar in their design and construction and control the air supply and
distribution to the front or rear pairs of air spring damper modules respectively. The difference between the two
valves is the connections from the valve block to the left and right hand air spring damper modules and the valve
size. It is important that the correct valve block is fitted to the correct axle. Fitting the incorrect valve block will not
stop the air suspension system from functioning but will result in slow raise and lower times and uneven raising and
lowering between the front and rear axles.
The front valve block is attached to the RH end of the front bumper armature assembly. The valve block has three
attachment lugs which are fitted with isolation rubber mounts. The rubber mounts locate in slots in the armature. The
valve lugs locate in the holes above the slots and are pushed downwards into positive location in the slots.
The rear valve block is located on the forward face of the left hand rear suspension turret. The valve block has three
attachment lugs which are fitted with isolation rubber mounts which locate in a bracket with three slotted holes. The
bracket is attached to the left hand side of the chassis. The isolation rubber mounts locate in the 'V' shaped slots and
are pushed downwards into positive location in the slots.
The front and rear valve blocks each have three air pipe connections which use 'Voss' type air fittings. One
connection is an air pressure inlet/outlet from the reservoir valve block. The remaining two connections provide the
pressure connections to the left and right hand air springs.
Each valve block contains three solenoid operated valves; two corner valves and one cross-link valve. Each of the
valve solenoids is individually controlled by the air suspension control module. The solenoids have a resistance value
of 2 Ohms at a temperature of 20°C (68°F).
Reservoir Valve Block
The reservoir valve block is attached to a bracket on the outside of the left hand chassis rail, between the reservoir
and the air supply unit. The valve block is located within the air supply unit acoustic box to protect it from dirt
ingress and damage from stones. The valve block has three attachment lugs which are fitted with isolation rubber
mounts. The rubber mounts locate in the chassis bracket which has three corresponding 'V' shaped slots. The rubber
mounts are pushed downwards into positive location in the slots.
The reservoir valve block controls the storage and distribution of air from the reservoir. The reservoir valve block
also contains the system's pressure sensor.
The valve block has four air pipe connections which use 'Voss' type air fittings. The connections provide for air
supply from the air supply unit, air supply to and from the reservoir and air supply to and from the front and rear
valve blocks. The connections from the air supply unit and the front and rear control valves are all connected via a
common gallery within the valve and therefore are all subject to the same air pressures.
The valve block contains a solenoid operated valve which is controlled by the air suspension control module. The
solenoid valve controls the pressure supply to and from the reservoir. The solenoid has a resistance value of 2 Ohms
at a temperature of 20°C (68°F). When energized, the valve spool moves allowing air to pass to or from the
reservoir.
The valve block also contains a pressure sensor which can be used to measure the system air pressure in the air
springs and the reservoir. The pressure sensor is connected via a harness connector to the air suspension control
module. The control module provides a 5V reference voltage to the pressure sensor and monitors the return signal
voltage from the sensor.
Using this sensor, the control module controls the air supply unit operation and therefore limits the nominal system
operating pressure to 244 lbf/in2 (16.8 bar gage).

A - Output voltage (V)
B - Pressure (kPa)
Removal of the reservoir valve block will require full depressurization of the reservoir. The valve block is a non-
serviceable item and should not be disassembled other than for replacement of the pressure sensor.
Air Supply Unit


1 - Mounting bracket
2 - Air dryer
3 - Pilot exhaust valve solenoid and temperature sensors harness connector
4 - Motor harness connector
5 - Intake port
6 - Pilot exhaust valve
7 - Exhaust valve
8 - Isolation mounting rubber (2 off)
9 - Electric motor
10 - Isolation mounting rubber (1 off)
11 - Pilot air pipe
12 - High pressure supply to the air suspension system
13 - Compressor cylinder head temperature sensor
14 - Compressor
The air supply unit is located on the outside of the left hand chassis rail, forward of the upper control arm. The unit
is attached to the chassis rail with three bolts and is protected by an acoustic box.
Acoustic Box

1 - Upper cover
2 - Lower cover
3 - Air supply unit
4 - Reservoir valve block
The acoustic box, which comprises of two parts; upper and lower, surrounds the air supply unit. The acoustic box is a
plastic moulding which is lined with an insulating foam which controls the operating noise of the air supply unit. The
reservoir valve block is also located in the acoustic box, forward of the air supply unit.
The air supply unit comprises the following major components:
A piston compressor
A 12V electric motor
A solenoid operated pilot valve
An exhaust valve
An air dryer unit
The air supply unit supplies dry, compressed air into the air suspension system where it is directed into the air
springs or the reservoir by solenoid operated valves. Air can be exhausted from the system when required by the
opening of an air spring or reservoir valve in addition to the exhaust valve which is part of the air supply unit.
The compressor operates to pressurize either the reservoir or to inflate one or more of the air springs. Height
changes of less than 20 mm are achieved using the compressor alone. Height changes of more than 20 mm are
achieved using the reservoir and the compressor. The compressor cannot operate without the engine running, with
the following exceptions:
During remote operation to raise the vehicle to allow for the attachment of a trailer
When under control of a Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
The air supply unit can be serviced in the event of component failure, but is limited to the following components; air
dryer, pilot exhaust pipe and the rubber mounts.
The air supply unit is attached to a bracket which is bolted to the chassis. The unit is mounted to the bracket with
flexible isolation mounting rubbers which assist with preventing operating noise being transmitted to the chassis.
Removal of the air supply unit does not require the whole air suspension system to be depressurized. The front and
rear valve blocks and the reservoir valve block are normally closed when de-energized, preventing air pressure in the
air springs and the reservoir escaping when the unit is disconnected.
There are a number of conditions that will inhibit operation of the air supply unit. It is vitally important that these
system inhibits are not confused with a system malfunction. A full list of air supply unit inhibits are given in the
compressor section of this document.
Air Supply Unit - Sectional View

1 - Exhaust valve cap
2 - Plunger
3 - Valve seat
4 - Intake silencer port
5 - Delivery valve
6 - Valve guide
7 - Cylinder head
8 - Dryer case
9 - Desiccant
10 - Pilot exhaust line
11 - Isolation rubber mount
12 - Motor assembly
13 - Crankcase
14 - Crank
15 - Crankcase cover
16 - Connecting rod
17 - Piston
19 - Spring - pressure relief
Electric Motor
The electric motor is a 12V DC (direct current) motor with a nominal operating voltage of 13.5V. The motor drives a
crank which has an eccentric pin to which the compressor connecting rod is attached.
The motor is fitted with a temperature sensor on the brush Printed Circuit Board (PCB) assembly. The sensor is
connected to the air suspension control module which monitors the motor temperature and can suspend motor
operation if the operating thresholds are exceeded.
The following graph shows motor temperature sensor resistance values against given temperatures.
NOTE: This graph is also applicable for the compressor cylinder head temperature sensor.

A - Resistance (kOhms)
B - Temperature (°C)
The following graph shows air suspension control module output voltages against motor temperature sensor
temperatures.
NOTE: This graph is also applicable for the compressor cylinder head temperature sensor.


A - Control module input voltage (V)
B - Temperature sensor (°C)
Compressor
The compressor is used to supply air pressure to the air suspension reservoir. The air suspension control module
monitors the pressure within the reservoir and, when the engine is running, maintains a pressure of 16.8 bar gage
(244 lbf/in2).
The compressor comprises a motor driven connecting rod and piston which operate in a cylinder with a separate
cylinder head. The motor rotates the crank moving the piston up and down in the cylinder bore. The air in the
cylinder is compressed with the up stroke and is passed via the delivery valve through the air dryer and into the
system.
The cylinder head is fitted with a temperature sensor. The sensor is connected to the air suspension control module
which monitors the cylinder temperature and can suspend motor and compressor operation if an overheat condition
occurs.
The compressor will not be allowed to start if the pressure sensor reads greater than 4 bar (absolute).
The following table shows the control module operating parameters for the differing air supply unit functions and the
allowed compressor cylinder head operating temperatures.
Compressor Cylinder Head Operating Temperatures
Leveling Reservoir Filling
OFF 140°C (284°F) 130°C (266°C)
ON 120°C (248°F) 110°C (230°F)
Refer to the motor temperature sensor graph for compressor cylinder head temperature sensor resistance values and
the air suspension control module output voltage / temperature sensor graph.
Air Dryer
Attached to the compressor is the air dryer which contains a Desiccant for removing moisture from the compressed
air. Pressurized air is passed through the air dryer which removes any moisture in the compressed air before it is
passed into the reservoir and/or the system.
When the air springs are deflated, the exhaust air also passes through the air dryer, removing the moisture from the
unit and regenerating the Desiccant.
The air dryer is an essential component in the system ensuring that only dry air is present in the system. If moist air
is present, freezing can occur resulting in poor system operation or component malfunction or failure.
Pilot Exhaust Valve
Attached to the cylinder head is a solenoid operated exhaust pilot valve. This valve is opened when the air springs
are to be deflated or when the system pressure needs to be reduced.
The pilot exhaust valve is connected to the air delivery gallery, downstream of the air dryer. The pilot valve, when
opened, operates the compressor exhaust valve allowing the air springs to be deflated.
When the solenoid is energized, pilot air moves the exhaust valve plunger, allowing pressurized air from the air
springs and/or the reservoir to pass through the air dryer to atmosphere.
Exhaust Valve
The exhaust valve operates when the pilot exhaust valve is opened, allowing air returning from the air springs and/or
the reservoir to be exhausted quickly.
The pilot exhaust valve also provides the system pressure relief function which protects the air springs from over
inflation. The valve is pneumatically operated, responding to air pressure applied to it to overcome pressure from its
internal spring. The valve is connected into the main pressure gallery which is always subject to the system pressure
available in either the air springs or the reservoir. The valve is controlled by a spring which restricts the maximum
operating pressure to between 22 to 27 bar gage (319 to 391 lbf/in2).
The minimum pressure in the system is also controlled by the exhaust valve to ensure that, even when deflated, the
air springs contain a positive pressure with respect to atmosphere. This protects the air spring by ensuring it can still
'roll' over the piston without creasing.
Air Supply Unit Specifications
Description Value
Working pressure 16.8 bar gage
Maximum pressure (stabilized) 22.0 to 27.0 bar gage
Operating voltage 10 to 16.5 Volts (13.5 Volts nominal)
Running current consumption 20-50 Amps depending on load
Maximum start-up current 120 Amps
Pilot Exhaust Valve - Solenoid valve resistance at 20°C (68°F) 4 Ohms ± 10%
NOTE: Resistance values will vary with coil temperature. Resistance of test leads must be measured before any
readings are taken. Resistance value of the test leads must be subtracted from final solenoid resistance value.
There are a number of conditions that will inhibit operation of the air suspension compressor. It is vitally important
that these inhibits are not confused with a system malfunction. A full list of compressor inhibits is contained in the
compressor section of this document.
Reservoir

1 - Front bracket
2 - Reservoir
3 - Air hose connection to reservoir valve block
4 - Rear bracket
The reservoir is an air storage vessel which provides fast air suspension lift times by the immediate availability of
pressurized air into the system.
The reservoir is a steel fabrication and is located on the outside of the left hand chassis rail, in front of the air supply
unit. The reservoir has a bracket at each end which attach to the body mounting brackets on the chassis.
The rearward end of the reservoir has a 'Voss' air fitting which provides for the connection of the air hose between
the reservoir and the reservoir valve block.
The reservoir has a capacity of 9 liters (550 in30). The nominal working pressure of the reservoir is 16.8 bar gage
(243.6 lbf/in2), with a maximum pressure of 35 bar gage (507 lbf/in2).
Air Springs


A - Front air spring and damper assembly
B - Rear air spring and damper assembly
The air springs on the front and rear suspension are similar in construction. The air springs are manufactured from a
flexible rubber and each air spring forms an air tight cavity which provides the required spring rate for each corner of
the vehicle.
As the air spring is compressed, the rubber material compresses and rolls down the side of the vertical housing
(piston) below the spring. An air connection port is located on the top of each spring and allows air to be added or
removed from each spring. The port is connected via a Voss connector and a plastic tube to the axle valve block.
Replacement of an individual air spring does not require a full depressurization of the air suspension system. Only the
corner concerned need be depressurized. This is achieved using a routine in the Land Rover approved diagnostic
system.
When servicing of an air spring or a full system depressurization is required, the weight of the vehicle must be
supported before the system is depressurized. On reassembly, the air spring must be fully pressurized before the
weight of the vehicle is applied to it.
AIR SILENCER AND INLET AIR FILTER

1 - Exhaust (to atmosphere)
2 - Inlet and exhaust silencer
3 - Air inlet filter
4 - Exhaust air from air supply unit
5 - Air inlet supply to air supply unit
The air silencer is required to limit any noise produced from the air supply unit during inflation or deflation of the air
springs.
The silencer comprises two plastic molded cans, which are bonded together. A silencing foam in the large internal
chamber forms the exhaust silencer. A pipe connection is molded onto each end of the silencer and provides for the
attachment of the exhaust air to atmosphere pipe and the exhaust air pipe from the air supply unit.
A secondary chamber, located around the outside of the exhaust chamber forms the silencer for the inlet air. Pipe
connections are molded onto each end of the intake silencer and provide for the attachment of the air inlet pipe from
the inlet air filter and the air inlet pipe to the air supply unit. The intake air silencer is a hollow chamber with no
noise reduction foam filling.
The air intake filter is connected via a pipe to the intake silencer chamber of the air silencer unit. The filter is located
in the rear left hand corner of the body, away from possible sources of dirt and moisture.
The filter contains a foam element which removes particulate matter from the inlet air before it reaches the silencer
or the air supply unit.
AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE

2 - Connector C2321
3 - Connector C2320
4 - Connector C2030
5 - Connector C0867
The air suspension system fitted is controlled by the air suspension control module which is located behind the
instrument panel, on the driver's side 'A' pillar.
The control module monitors the height of each corner of the vehicle via four height sensors, which are mounted in-
board of each road wheel.
The control module has the following modes of operation:
Calibration
Normal
Periodic Wake-Up.
When a new air suspension control module is fitted, the air suspension system will not function until the air
suspension software is loaded and the system calibrated using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
Calibration
A calibration routine is performed using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system to access the position of each
corner of the vehicle and record the settings in the control module memory. Once set, the calibration is not required
to be performed unless the air suspension control module or adaptive damping module is removed or replaced, a
height sensor or bracket is removed, replaced or disturbed or a suspension arm to which the sensor is connected is
removed or replaced. If the removed height sensor is subsequently refitted, the calibration procedure will have to be
performed to ensure the integrity of the system.
If the air supply unit, the reservoir, a valve block, a damper module or the air harness is removed or replaced, the
system will not require recalibration.
Periodic Wake-Up Mode
When the vehicle is parked, the air suspension control module 'wakes up' two hours after the ignition was last
switched off and once every twenty four hours thereafter. The vehicle height is checked and if the vehicle is not level
within a pre-set tolerance, small downwards height adjustments may be made automatically.
SYSTEM OPERATION
Under normal operating conditions, the air suspension control module keeps the vehicle level at the 'current' ride
height. The incoming height signals from the sensors are passed through filters to remove irregular signals produced
by road noise or other irregularities. When the vehicle is stationary or a height change is in progress, the signals are
passed through a 'fast' filter, which tracks the true rate of change of height. When the vehicle is moving, the signals
are passed through a 'slow' filter. The 'slow' filtered signals remove almost all road noise from the signals and output
a true long term average for each corner height. The 'slow' filtered signals cannot be used to respond quickly during
height changes.
The air suspension control module monitors each corner height signal using the fast filtered signals if the vehicle is
stationary or the slow filtered signals if the vehicle is moving. If the height remains in a 'dead band' which is ±10 mm
from the target height, the control module does not implement any height adjustment changes. When the control
module detects that a corner has moved outside of the 'dead band', the control module operates the compressor
and/or the valves to raise or lower the corresponding corner(s) back into the target height.
SYSTEM INHIBITS
A number of conditions exist where a change in ride height is undesirable. To counter this, the air suspension control
module is programmed with a number of system inhibits. If any of the conditions detailed below exist, the air
suspension control module will suspend height changes and height corrections.
Compressor
System Pressure
The compressor will not start if the system pressure is greater than 4 bar (gage)
Compressor Temperature
Two temperature sensors are located within the compressor to prevent overheating. If the temperature of the motor
brush assembly or the compressor cylinder head rise above pre-set limits, the air suspension control module will
inhibit the compressor operation. The limits are detailed in tables in the Air Supply Unit section of this manual.
Cornering
If the air suspension control module registers a cornering force greater than 0.2g it will inhibit all height changes and
corrections. The system will remain inhibited until the cornering force falls to less than 0.15g. The air suspension
control module receives a message from the lateral acceleration sensor (which is an integral part of the anti-lock
brake system (ABS) yaw rate sensor) on the high speed controller area network (CAN) bus for the cornering force.
Rapid Acceleration
If the air suspension control module registers a rapid acceleration greater than 0.2g it will inhibit all height changes
and corrections. The system will remain inhibited until the rapid acceleration falls to less than 0.15g. Acceleration is
calculated by the control module from a vehicle speed signal received via the high speed CAN bus.
Rapid Deceleration
If the air suspension control module registers a rapid deceleration smaller than - 0.2g it will inhibit all height changes
and corrections. The system will remain inhibited until the rapid deceleration rises above - 0.15g. Deceleration is
calculated by the control module from a vehicle speed signal received via the high speed CAN bus.
Vehicle Jack
The air suspension control module will inhibit all height changes and corrections if it detects a corner lowering too
slowly for more than 1.2 seconds. This is interpreted as the corner identified as moving too slowly being supported
on a jack. In this situation, the corner height will not change when air is released from the air spring because the
jack acts as a mechanical prop.
The system will remain inhibited until any of the following conditions exist:
The air suspension rotary switch is moved to the up or down position

The vehicle speed rises to more than 3 km/h (2 mph) for more than 45 seconds.
Door Open
The air suspension control module will stop all height change requests while any of the doors are open. Vehicle
leveling continues with a door open by keeping the vehicle at the height when the door was opened if the vehicle
load changes. Door open status is ignored when the vehicle speed is above 8 km/h (5 mph).
DIAGNOSTICS
The air suspension control module can store fault codes which can be retrieved using the Land Rover approved
diagnostic system. The diagnostics information is obtained via the diagnostic socket which is located below the
instrument panel, above the driver's foot pedals. The socket is protected by a hinged cover.
The diagnostic socket allows the exchange of information between the various control modules on the bus systems
and the Land Rover approved diagnostic system. This allows the fast retrieval of diagnostic information and
programming of certain functions using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
Fault Messages
The air suspension has two methods which it can use to inform the driver of a fault in the air suspension system; the
air suspension control switch LED's and the instrument cluster message center.
If the air suspension control module suffers a major failure and there is no air suspension control, all the control
switch LED's will remain unlit.
If a fault occurs and the control module can determine the ride height and the vehicle is not above on-road height,
the driver will be notified via a message in the message center. If the control module cannot determine the height of
the vehicle, or the vehicle is above on-road height and cannot be lowered, a message is displayed and accompanied
with a maximum speed message.
If a fault is detected within the DSC (dynamic stability control) the message 'SUSPENSION LOWERED FOR SAFETY'
and a chime will be emitted. This is not a fault with the air suspension system. The fault should be investigated and
rectified as soon as possible.
For additional information, refer to: Information and Message Center (413-08, Description and Operation).
RESERVOIR
The air suspension control module assumes the reservoir has sufficient pressure, which is measured before a vehicle
raise is started. The control module then uses a software model to operate the compressor as required.
SYSTEM PNEUMATIC CIRCUIT
The following schematic diagram shows the connection relationship between the air supply unit, the reservoir, the
reservoir valve block, the cross-link valves and the air springs.
Schematic Pneumatic Circuit

1 - Compressor
2 - Compressor temperature sensor
3 - Air dryer
4 - Reservoir
6 - Front valve block
7 - Cross link valve
8 - Front RH air spring damper module
9 - Front RH corner valve
10 - Front LH corner valve
11 - Reservoir control valve
12 - Pressure sensor
13 - Rear RH corner valve
15 - Cross link valve
16 - Rear valve block
17 - Rear LH corner valve
18 - Rear LH air spring damper module
19 - Inlet air filter
21 - Exhaust
22 - Air silencer
23 - Pressure relief and exhaust valve
24 - Motor temperature sensor
25 - Electric motor
CONTROL DIAGRAM - AIR SUSPENSION
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High Speed CAN bus


1 - Battery
2 - Air supply unit
3 - Compressor temperature sensor
4 - Motor temperature sensor
5 - Motor
6 - Exhaust valve solenoid
7 - Reservoir control valve
8 - Air suspension switch
9 - RH front height sensor
10 - RH rear height sensor
11 - Rear control valve
13 - Front control valve
14 - LH rear height sensor
15 - LH front height sensor
17 - BJB
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
For a detailed description of the Vehicle Dynamic Suspension System and operation, refer to the relevant Description
and Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic
Suspension, Description and Operation).
the donor vehicle.
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.

Visual Inspection
Mechanical Electrical
Air leakage Battery
Air springs Fuse(s)
Reservoir Wiring harness physical damage or water ingress
Compressor Loose or corroded electrical connectors
Compressor air filter Air suspension control switch
Pipework and unions Controller Area Network (CAN) circuits
Sensor installation Sensors
Valve block(s) Actuators
Suspension components Valve block(s)
Air suspension control module
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported condition is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the symptom chart.
Symptom Chart
Possible Possible Other

Symptom Message Warnings Possible Causes Action
Vehicle on bump stops Suspension Two chimes Water ingress to Visually inspect
fault repeated wiring harness or the wiring
regularly, connectors harness and
red warning Air leak(s) connectors for
indicator Vehicle in water ingress
permanently transportation Visually inspect
illuminated mode the system for
System not air leakage
calibrated or Check the
calibration corrupt system mode
Implausible and calibration
articulation using the
symptoms detected approved
Failure of multiple diagnostic
height sensors system
Air suspension Check for
control module implausible
failure articulation
symptoms, i.e.
height sensor
or linkage fault,
deflated air
spring, under
inflated tire etc
Note
implausible
articulation
symptoms may
be caused by
an un-
calibrated
height sensor
Check for
height sensor
DTCs and refer
to the DTC
index
Vehicle does not sit level Suspension Two chimes Water ingress to Visually inspect
fault repeated wiring harness or the wiring
regularly, connectors harness and
red warning Air leak(s) connectors for
indicator Calibration corrupt water ingress
permanently cross-link valve Visually inspect
illuminated fault the system for
Height sensor fault air leakage and
Reservoir valve refer to the
stuck open guided
Exhaust valve diagnostic
stuck closed routine on the
Corner valves approved
stuck open diagnostic
Air suspension system
control module Check the
failure system
calibration
using the
approved
diagnostic
system
For front and
rear cross link
valve tests
refer to the
guided
diagnostic
routine on the
approved
diagnostic
system
Check for
height sensor
DTCs and refer
to the DTC
index
For reservoir
and exhaust
valve tests
refer to the
guided
diagnostic
routine on the
approved
diagnostic
system
Check for
corner valve
DTCs and refer
to the DTC
index
Vehicle sits too low Suspension Two chimes, Water ingress to Visually inspect
fault amber wiring harness or the wiring
Hill warning connectors harness and
descent indicator Air leak(s) connectors for
control permanently Air suspension water ingress
(HDC) illuminated compressor Visually inspect
fault, One chime temperature sensor the system for
system not DSC amber fault air leakage
available warning Inlet air filter For air
Dynamic indicator blockage/restriction compressor
stability permanently Air suspension temperature
control illuminated compressor fault sensor, inlet air
(DSC) Anti-lock Exhaust valve filter, exhaust
brake stuck/sticking valve and air
system Air suspension compressor
warning control module lost tests refer to
indicator communication the guided
permanently with ABS module diagnostic
illuminated ABS fault. routine on the
Air suspension approved
control module diagnostic
failure system
For air
suspension
control module
lost
communication
with anti-lock
brake system
control module,
refer to the lost
communication
codes
statement at
the end of this
table
Check for anti-
lock brake
system DTCs,
refer to the
relevant
section of the
workshop
manual
Vehicle sits too high Suspension Two chimes, Reservoir valve For reservoir
fault amber stuck open valve and
warning Exhaust valve exhaust valve
indicator stuck closed tests refer to
permanently Corner valves the guided
illuminated stuck open diagnostic
Air suspension routine on the
control module approved
failure diagnostic
system
Check for
corner valve
DTCs and refer
to the DTC
index
System detects extended Suspension Two chimes, Crossed gallery Refer to the
mode unnecessarily when fault amber and air spring guided
lowering warning pipes diagnostic
indicator Incorrect valve routine on the
permanently block installed to approved
illuminated front or rear diagnostic
Damage or system
blockage in air
harness
Vehicle leans/tilts after - - Leaking air Refer to the

being left over-night or for spring(s) guided
some days Leak from corner diagnostic
valve to gallery routine on the
Exhaust valve approved
stuck open diagnostic
system
After vehicle left over-night Suspension - Leaking air Refer to the

or for some days system vehicle spring(s) guided
regularly indicates raising Leaking reservoir diagnostic
"Suspension vehicle raising slowly routine on the
slowly" when first driving approved
off diagnostic
system
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Air Suspension Control Module (100-00 General Information,
Air Suspension Deflation Exit Routine
1. Key on, engine off.
2. Key off.
3. Press and release raise switch.

4. Press and release lower switch.
5. Key on, engine off.
6. Key on, engine running.
7. Press and release raise switch twice.
8. Press and release lower switch twice.
9. Press and release raise switch.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Ride Height Adjustments
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Gauge, Ride height
204-557B
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the wheels and tires, tie rod ends, suspension joints and wheel bearings are free from damage, wear
and free play.
Make sure there are no heavy objects in the vehicle.
The ride height must be measured with the vehicle weight supported by the suspension.
With the engine running and all vehicle doors closed, make sure the air suspension is functioning and the
vehicle height can be raised and lowered using the air suspension switch.
Drive the vehicle on to a flat, level surface.
NOTE: This procedure must be carried out after replacement of the air suspension control module or height
sensor link arm, removal or replacement of the front or rear upper arms or the height sensor. The ride height does
not need calibration after removal or replacement of the front or rear air springs or shock absorbers.
1. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, carry out the
ride height adjustments.
2. CAUTION: Make sure the vehicle is not moved once it has

been positioned to take measurements.
Position the vehicle on a flat level surface.
3. Connect IDS to the vehicle data link connector.

Connect the vehicle data link cable into the vehicle
communications module.
Connect the IDS USB Lead into the vehicle
communications module.
Connect the data link cable to the data link connector.
Connect the IDS USB lead to the IDS USB port.
4. CAUTION: Make sure the ignition switch is turned off, the

park brake is on and the selector lever is in park.
NOTE: IDS already loaded with the latest issue of

software.
Switch IDS on and navigate to the vehicle identification number

(VIN) input screen.
5. Enter the VIN and navigate to the vehicle configuration menu.

Select setup and configuration.
Select air suspension height calibration and read all
warnings and cautions.
6. NOTES:
Do not install the special tool over a locking
wheel nut.
Make sure the special tool is square to the

wheel face with the measuring rod in a vertical
position.
Take the measurement from the top edge of

the slider on the special tool.
Make sure the fender splash shields are

correctly fitted.
Once in the suspension height measurement

screen, use the special tool to measure and record
the height setting from each wheel center to the
wheel arch.
7. CAUTION: IDS will now cause the vehicle height to

change.
Input the ride height measurements taken from the vehicle into
IDS.
8. Using the special tool, repeat the vehicle ride height

measurements.
9. After successful calibration of the air suspension switch off IDS

and return to its original position.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension System Depressurize and
Pressurize
General Procedures
WARNINGS:
A small amount of air pressure will be left in the air suspension system.
Eye protection must be worn.
Wear protective gloves.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure tailgate, hood and all doors are closed.
Make sure the vehicle is in a clear working area.
1. WARNING: The air suspension is pressurised. Make sure

dirt or grease does not enter the system. Always wear hand,
eye and ear safety standard protection when working on the
system.
Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, depressurize

the air suspension.
Follow the on-screen prompts.
2. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, pressurize

the air suspension.
Start and run the engine.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Leaks
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Hose Cutter
204-494 (LRT 60-002)
1. CAUTION: Any leak detection spray used must have a

corrosion inhibitor, and must not cause damage to paintwork,
plastics, metals or plastic lines.
NOTE: The recommended leak detection spray is GOTEC

LDS, Landrover part number STC 1090.
The recommended leak detection spray should be used to

identify any suspected leaks. This procedure should also be
used where any of the air suspension components have been
disturbed.
2. Clean around the area of the suspected air leak.
3. Using the recommended leak detection spray, spray around all

of the air suspension components, working systematically until
the source of the air leak has been found.
4. If any of the air suspension components are found to be

leaking e.g. air spring, compressor, reservoir or a solenoid
valve block, repair is effected by replacement only.
5. Using T4, depressurize the air suspension system.

For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension System
Depressurize and Pressurize (204-05, General Procedures).
6. CAUTIONS:
Different air lines in the air suspension

system have different material properties and wall
thicknesses. It is important, in order to prevent
subsequent air line failure, that the new air line
material and wall thicknesses are identical to those
of the air line being removed.
Replacement air line must be cut from a new

air line with the equivalent Land Rover part
number as the one being replaced. Do not use air
line cut from a roll or coil.
Any existing heatsleeves and abrasion sleeves

must be replaced as part of the repair.
Air line connectors should be positioned in

areas away from heat sources such as the exhaust
system, and away from any section of air line with
a heat shield installed.
Do not trim air line ends. If the end of the air

line is damaged, the air line must be cut and a
new section added using a Land Rover approved
air line connector, or the air line must be renewed
completely.
NOTES:
Air lines must only be cut using either Hose
cutter 204-494 (LRT 60-002), available from SPX
LTD or Hose cutter YA1000A, available from Snap-
On Tools. Make sure the cut air line end is free
from damage or burrs.
Only Land Rover approved air lines have

been tested to the correct pressure and
temperature specifications.
Only the Land Rover approved air line

connector, RYC500210, has been tested to the
correct pressure and temperature specifications.
If the markings or tape adjacent to the air

line connections are removed when cutting air
lines, the cut end of the air line must be clearly
marked with a suitable colored tape or paint mark.
If the source of the air leak is found to be an air

line connection, renew the Voss connector and, if
required, the end of the air line. Using the special
tool, cut off the damaged end of the air line and
replace with new Land Rover approved air line and
air line connectors as required.
7. If the source of the air leak is found to be in a section of air

line, either; renew the air line, or, using the special tool, cut
out the damaged section of air line and replace with new Land
Rover approved air line, and air line connectors, as required.
8. NOTE: If the repair has been unsuccessful repeat the

above steps until the air leak is rectified.
Using T4, pressurize the air suspension system.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Front Shock Absorber and Air Spring
Assembly
Removal
1. For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension System

Depressurize and Pressurize (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic
Suspension, General Procedures).

4. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, depressurize

the air suspension.
5. Disconnect the shock absorber and air spring

assembly from the lower arm.
6. Disconnect the active damping wiring.
7. Release the shock absorber and air spring

assembly.
Remove the 3 nuts.
8. CAUTION: Always plug any open connections
to prevent contamination.
Release the shock absorber and air spring

assembly and disconnect the air line.
9. Remove the shock absorber and air spring assembly.
10. Remove the Voss connector from the air line.

Remove and discard the collet and the union.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the new Voss connector is installed

and fully tightened with the alignment plug installed.
Install a new Voss connector to the air spring.

Tighten to 3.5 Nm (2.6 lb.ft)
2. NOTE: Remove and discard the blanking caps.
Install the shock absorber and air spring assembly.

Make sure the shock absorber and air spring assembly
top mounting to body mating faces are clean.
Fit the nuts and tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb.ft).
Connect the air line into the Voss connector.
Pull on the air line to make sure it is fully installed into
the Voss connecter.
3. Attach the active damping wiring.

4. Connect the shock absorber and air spring assembly to the
lower arm.
Do not fully tighten at this stage.
5. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, pressurize

the air suspension.
6. Tighten the shock absorber and air spring assembly to the

lower arm.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Front Air Shock Absorber
Special Tool(s)
Air spring tester
204-538
Remover front air shocker absorber spindle nut
204-700
Removal
NOTE: This procedure should also be used to remove the front air spring.
1. Remove the front shock absorber and air spring assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Front Shock Absorber and
Air Spring Assembly (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension,
2. NOTE: If no leak is detected, investigate other areas of

the air suspension for faults.
Check the assembly for leaks.

Inflate the module to 4 bar and check for pressure loss
using leak detector spray.
If a leak is suspected, immerse the shock absorber and
air spring assembly in a tank of water to locate the
source of the leak and mark the area.
3. Remove the nylon retaining pin.
4. Using the special tool, remove the nut.

5. Remove the rebound washer.
6. CAUTIONS:
Make sure protective jaws are installed to the

vice. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the component.
Do not clamp the shock absorber tube.

Position the front shock absorber and air spring

assembly in a vice.
7. Remove and discard the 3 spacers and 2 O-ring

seals.
8. Remove the air spring.
Using a soft faced mallet, gently tap the
sleeve support upwards to release it from
the O-ring seals.
9. NOTE: Note the fitted position.
Remove the bump plate and spring aid.

10. Remove and discard the 2 large black O-ring seals
from the lower seal carrier.
11. Remove the front shock absorber and air spring assembly from
the vice.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure protective jaws are installed to the

vice. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
Do not clamp the shock absorber tube.

Position the front shock absorber and air spring

assembly in a vice.
2. CAUTION: Use compressed air and lint free non-flocking

material.
Clean the components.
3. Lift the seal carrier to expose the O-ring seal stack.

Make sure that the damper body O-ring
seals and spacers are fully seated to the
spring seat.
4. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the O-

ring seals during installation.
Install new O-ring seals to the seal carrier.

Apply loctite 8021 (silicon-based oil) to the
O-ring seals.
5. NOTE: Make sure that these components are

installed to the noted removal position.
Install the bump plate and spring aid.

6. Install the air spring.
Align the sleeve support with the first O-
ring seal making sure that the location tag
is correctly aligned with the spring seat cut-
out.
7. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the threads of the front air

shock absorber are covered with protective tape.
Take care not to damage the O-ring seals

during installation.
Install the components in the following order:

1. O-ring seal
2. Spacer
3. O-ring seal
4. Spacer
5. Spacer
8. NOTE: The "T5" stamp on the upper face of
the rebound washer must be visable after
assembly.
Install the rebound washer.
9. Install a new nut and using the special tool, and

tighten to 98 Nm (72 lb.ft).
10. CAUTIONS:
The air supply must be free of any moisture.

If during disassembly the air sleeve is
unrolled, the air sleeve may inflate incorrectly (to
one side). If this occurs, release the air pressure,
and insert a suitable tool that will not damage the
air sleeve or piston (a screw driver handle), into
the side opposite the bulge. Inflate and deflate
until the air sleeve inflates correctly (the air sleeve
will be uniform inside the shroud).
NOTE: To prevent damage when seating the

sleeve support over the large black O-rings,
compressed air should be used to inflate the air
spring.
Using the special tool coupled to a tire inflator with

a gauge, apply approximately 2 bar of air pressure
to the air spring to fully seat the sleeve support
over the O-ring seals.
11. Check the assembly for leaks.

Inflate the module to 4 bar and check for pressure loss
using leak detector spray.
If a leak is suspected, immerse the shock absorber and
air spring assembly in a tank of water to locate the
source of the leak.
12. Depressurize and remove the special tool from the shock
absorber and air spring assembly.
13. Install the nylon retaining pin.
14. NOTE: Install a new air spring pipe connector.
Install the front shock absorber and air spring assembly.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Suspension Height Sensor
Removal
NOTES:
The rear height sensors are handed. The right hand sensor has a black colored lever and the left hand sensor
has a white colored lever. The front height sensors are not handed, and are fitted with grey levers for identification.
This procedure covers removal and installation of both the front and rear suspension height sensors.

2. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force to

disconnect the height sensor link.
Remove the suspension height sensor.

Disconnect the height sensor link.
Remove the 2 Torx screws.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the Torx screw is not over tightened.

Failure to follow this instruction will result in damage to the
vehicle.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Tighten the screws to 3 Nm (2 lb.ft).
2. Using Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment, calibrate the

ride hight.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Reservoir
Removal

2. Using T4, depressurize the air suspension.

3. CAUTIONS:
Before the disconnection or removal of any

components, ensure the area around joint faces
and connections are clean. Plug any open
connections to prevent contamination.
The air line must only be disconnected by

removal of the voss connector. Do not remove the
air line retaining boss from the air suspension
reservoir. Failure to follow this instruction may
Visually inspect the air line ends for damage

or wear. Repair or replace the air line as
necessary.
Disconnect the air line from the air suspension

reservoir.
4. Remove the air suspension reservoir.

Remove the 4 bolts.
5. Remove the Voss connector from the air line.

Remove and discard the collet and the union.
Installation

Install a new Voss connector to the air reservoir.

Tighten the new Voss connector to 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).
2. Install the air suspension reservoir.

Locate the air reservoir to the chassis brackets, fit the
bolts and tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb.ft).
Fully seat the air line into the Voss connector.
Pull on the air line to make sure it is fully installed into
the Voss connecter.
3. Using T4, pressurize the air suspension.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Control Module
Removal
1. Driver side: Remove the cowl side trim panel.
For additional information, refer to: Cowl Side Trim Panel (501-
2. Remove the closing trim panel.

Release the clip.
3. Remove the air suspension control module.

Disconnect the 4 electrical connectors.
Remove the bolt.
Release from the 2 clips.
Installation
1. Install the air suspension control module.
Secure with the clips.
Connect the electrical connectors.
2. Install the closing trim panel.

Connect the electrical connector.
Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.
3. Install the cowl side trim panel.

4. Initiate a new control module using T4.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Reservoir Solenoid Valve
Block
Removal


3. Remove the air suspension compressor lower

cover.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Release the 5 clips.
4. Move the air compressor electrical connector aside.

5. CAUTIONS:
Before the disconnection or removal of any

components, ensure the area around joint faces
and connections are clean. Plug any open
Visually inspect the air line ends for damage

or wear. Repair or replace the air line as
necessary.
NOTE: Note the air line fitted positions.
Remove the air suspension reservoir solenoid valve

block.
Disconnect the 4 air lines.
Release the valve block 3 rubber insulators.
6. Remove the Voss connectors.

Remove and discard the collets and the unions.
Installation

NOTE: New air suspension components are supplied with

new Voss connectors tightened to the correct torque. Do not
install new voss connectors if a new component is being
installed.
Install new Voss connectors to the air suspension reservoir

solenoid valve block.
Tighten to 2.5 Nm (1.7 lb.ft).
2. NOTE: Make sure the valve block does not become

detached during connection of the air lines.
Install the air suspension reservoir solenoid valve block.

Secure the 3 valve block rubber insulators.
Connect the air lines into the Voss connector.
Pull on each air line to make sure it is fully installed into
the Voss connecter.
3. Secure the air compressor electrical connector.
4. Install the air suspension compressor lower cover.

Install the bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Compressor Drier
Removal
CAUTION: If a new air suspension compressor, air compressor drier or air compressor delivery valve kit is
installed due to failure, an air compressor relay must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the air suspension system components.

2. Remove the air suspension compressor.

For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension Compressor
(204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
3. CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing the

components, ensure the area around the joint faces and
connections are clean and dry. Plug open connections to
prevent contamination.
Disconnect the air line from the air suspension compressor

drier.
Release the air line from the retaining clip.
4. NOTE: If equipped, note the position of the

air suspension compressor retaining cable.
Remove the air suspension compressor drier.

Remove the retaining screw.
Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
Installation
1. Install a new O-ring seal.
Lubricate the O-ring with a lithium based grease.
2. NOTE: If equipped, make sure the air suspension

compressor retaining cable is correctly routed around the
compressor cylinder head.
Install the air suspension compressor drier.

Install the retaining screw and tighten to 3 Nm (2.2
lb.ft).
3. CAUTIONS:
Visually inspect the air line ends for damage or wear.

Replace the air line as necessary.
Pull on the air line to make sure it is securely intalled in

the connector.
Connect the air line to the air suspension compressor drier.

Attach the air line to the retaining clip.
4. Install the air suspension compressor.

(204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Compressor
Removal
WARNING: Steps 1 and 2 must be carried out within 10 minutes of each other. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing components, make sure the area around the joint faces and connections are clean. Plug
open connections to prevent contamination.
1. CAUTION: Make sure the ignition switch is turned off, the park brake is on and
the selector lever is in park.
Open the front door.
2. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a jack. Always

support the vehicle on safety stands.
Raise and support the vehicle. Make sure at least one of the wheels is off the ground.
3.

contamination.

contamination.
6.
NOTE:
Note the
orientation
of the
component
prior to
removal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Check the air compressor type. If an AMK air compressor is installed to
replace an Hitachi air compressor then a new corresponding relay must also be
installed.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (204-05, Specifications).
2. CAUTION: Using a suitable tap, cut a starting thread to align the

self tapping bolts.
3. CAUTIONS:
Make
sure that
these
components
are
installed to
the noted
removal
position.
Make
sure that
the self
tapping
bolts
remains
aligned
during the
tightening
process.
TORQUE:
10 Nm
4.
5.
6. TORQUE: 9 Nm
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Front Solenoid Valve
Block
Removal

2. Remove the RH fender splash shield.


4. CAUTIONS:
Before the disconnection or removal of any components,

ensure the area around joint faces and connections are clean.
Plug any open connections to prevent contamination.

Replace the air line as necessary.
Disconnect the 3 air lines from the air suspension front solenoid
valve block.
5. Remove the air suspension front solenoid valve block.

6. Remove the Voss connectors from the air lines.

Remove and discard the collet and the
union.
Installation

NOTE: New air suspension components are supplied with

installed.
Install new Voss connectors to the air suspension front solenoid

valve block.
detached during connection of the air lines.
Install the air suspension front solenoid valve block.

the Voss connecter.

4. Install the RH fender splash shield.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Rear Shock Absorber and Air Spring Assembly
Removal
NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH is similar.
1. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, depressurize the air suspension.
For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension System Depressurize and Pressurize
2. Remove the
loadspace floor
panel.
3. Remove the jack and wheel brace.
4. Remove the spare wheel/tool compartment cover.
5. Lower the spare wheel and tire.

6. Remove the spare wheel.
Disconnect the spare wheel release strap and position aside.
7. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a jack. Always

support the vehicle on safety stands.
8. CAUTION:
Make sure that all
openings are
sealed. Use new
blanking caps.
Remove the Voss

connector from
the air line.
Remove
and
discard
the collet
and the
union.
Disconnect
the active
damping
wiring.
10. Disconnect the shock absorber and air spring assembly from the lower arm.
11. Remove the three shock absorber and air spring retaining nuts.
Remove the shock absorber and air spring assembly.
Installation
1. Install the shock absorber and air spring assembly.
Make sure the shock absorber and air spring assembly top mounting to body mating
faces are clean.
Fit the nuts and tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb.ft).
Connect the air line into the Voss connector.
Pull on the air line to make sure it is fully installed into the Voss connecter.
2. Connect the shock absorber and air spring assembly to the lower arm.
3. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, pressurize the air suspension.
For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension System Depressurize and Pressurize
4. Tighten the shock absorber and air spring assembly to the lower arm.
5. CAUTION: Make sure the new Voss connector is installed and fully tightened with the
alignment plug installed.
Install a new Voss connector to the air spring.

Tighten to 3.5 Nm (2.6 lb.ft)
Attach the active damping wiring.

7. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
8. Connect the spare wheel release strap to the spare wheel and tire.

Raise the spare wheel and tire.
10. Install the spare wheel/tool compartment cover.
11. Install the jack and wheel brace.
12. Install the loadspace floor panel.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Rear Air Shock Absorber
Special Tool(s)
Air spring tester
204-538
Band-it Thrift tool
100-050 (LRT-99-019)
Removal
NOTE: This procedure should also be used to remove the rear air spring.

3. Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Shock Absorber and
Air Spring Assembly (204-05, Removal and Installation).
4. Remove the gaiter.

Remove and discard the 2 straps.
5. Remove the nut, rebound washer and rubber

bushing.
Discard the nut.
6. Remove and discard the O-ring seals and spacer.
7. Remove the nylon retaining pin.
8. Remove the rebound plate and spring aid.
9. Remove the air spring.

Using a soft faced mallet, gently tap the
sleeve support upwards to release it from
the O-ring seals.
Remove and discard the 2 O-ring seals.
10. Remove the shock absorber from the vise.
Installation
1. Install the shock absorber in the vise.

3. Lubricate and install new O-rings to the seal carrier.
4. Install the spring aid and rebound plate.
5. Install the air spring.

Align the piston with the first O-ring seal,
making sure the location tag is correctly
aligned.
6. Install the new O-ring seals and spacer, taking care not to
damage the seals.
7. Install the rubber bushing and rebound washer.

Make sure the formed insert on the bushing
is located against the O-ring seal.
8. Install and lightly tighten the nut.
9. CAUTIONS:
The air supply must be free of any moisture.
If during disassembly the air sleeve is unrolled, the air

sleeve may inflate incorrectly (to one side). If this occurs,
release the air pressure, and insert a suitable tool that will not
damage the air sleeve or piston (a screw driver handle), into
the side opposite the bulge. Inflate and deflate until the air
sleeve inflates correctly (the air sleeve will be uniform inside
the shroud).
Install the air spring piston over the O-ring seals.

Using the special tool coupled to a tire inflator with a
gauge, apply approximately 2 bar of air pressure to the
air spring to fully seat the piston over the O-ring seals.
10. Tighten the top nut to 98 Nm (72 lb.ft).
11. Check the assembly for leaks.

Inflate the module to 4 bar and check for pressure loss.
If a leak is suspected, immerse the spring and shock
absorber assembly in a tank of water to locate the
source of the leak.
12. Install the gaiter.

Using the special tool, install new straps.
13. Install the shock absorber and spring assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Shock Absorber and
Air Spring Assembly (204-05, Removal and Installation).
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Rear Solenoid Valve Block
Removal

2. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire.

4. CAUTIONS:


Repair or replace the air line as necessary.
Disconnect 3 air lines from the rear valve block.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
6. Remove the rear valve block.

7. Remove the Voss connectors from the air lines.

Remove and discard the collets and the
unions.
Installation
1. NOTE: New air suspension components are supplied with

installed.
Install new Voss connectors to the rear valve block.

2. Install the rear valve block.

the Voss connecter.


Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Air Filter
Removal
1. Open the liftgate and tailgate.
3. Remove the 4 nuts securing the LH rear tail pipe

heat shield.
4. Reposition the LH rear tail pipe heat shield.
5. Disconnect the air suspension intake filter line.
6. Detach the air suspension intake filter.

Release the grommet.
Release from the clip.
7. Remove the LH lower rear quarter trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Quarter Trim Panel
8. Remove the air suspension intake filter.

Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the air suspension air filter retaining clip
is fully seated in the vehicle body. An audible click will be heard
when the retaining clip is fully seated.
Install the air suspension intake filter.

Install the grommet.
2. Install the LH rear quarter trim panel.

3. Attach the air suspension intake filter.
4. Connect the air suspension intake filter line.
5. Reposition the LH rear tail pipe heat shield.

Install the nuts.
7. Close the liftgate and tailgate.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Muffler
Removal

2. Remove the muffler assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Muffler (309-00B Exhaust
System - 4.4L, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the evaporative emissions canister.

For additional information, refer to: Evaporative Emission
Canister (303-13B, Removal and Installation).
4. Remove the air suspension compressor.

5. Remove the air suspension compressor upper

cover.
6. Disconnect the air suspension intake filter pipe.
7. Remove the air suspension muffler.

Release clip from the air suspension muffler
pipe.
Release the air suspension compressor to
air suspension silencer pipes.
Installation
1. Install the air suspension muffler.
Locate the air suspension muffler pipes.
Secure the clip.
2. Connect the air suspension intake filter.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the air suspension compressor upper

cover is correctly positioned.
Install the air suspension compressor upper cover.
4. Install the air suspension compressor.

5. Install the evaporative emissions canister.
For additional information, refer to: Evaporative Emission
Canister (303-13B, Removal and Installation).
6. Install the muffler assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Muffler (309-00B Exhaust
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Pressure Sensor
Removal

2. Remove the air compressor housing cover.

Remove the 3 bolts.


detached during removal of the air pressure sensor.
5. CAUTION: Before the disconnection or

removal of any components, ensure the area
around joint faces and connections are clean. Plug
any open connections to prevent contamination.
Remove the air pressure sensor.

Installation

detached during installation of the air pressure sensor.
Install the air pressure sensor.

Install a new O-ring seal.
2. Connect the electrical connector.

4. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the air suspension compressor upper cover is

correctly positioned.
Make sure the air suspension exhaust pipe is correctly

located in to the air suspension upper cover.
Install the air compressor housing cover.

Ride and Handling Optimization -
Item Specification
Dynamic Response fluid Texaco Cold Climate Fluid 33270
Capacity 2.4 Liters (4.2 pints) (2.5 US quarts)
System pressure Variable between 3-165 bar dependant on lateral acceleration
Dynamic Response actuator bleed screw 15 11
Dynamic Response pump bolts 23 17
Fluid pipe banjo bolt 35 26
Dynamic Response pump drive pulley bolts 22 16
Radiator access panel 10 7
Dynamic Response module 4 3
* Front actuator pipes to valve block nuts 22 16
Valve block bolts 22 16
* Rear actuator pipes to valve block nuts 22 16
Dynamic Response fluid pipe securing bracket nuts/bolts 9 7
Valve block filter access plug 62 46
Body mount bolts 133 98
Upper suspension arm to wheel knuckle nut 70 52
Wheel speed sensor 9 7
Brake caliper to wheel knuckle bolt 275 203
Brake hose bracket bolt 23 17
Fluid lines to actuator bolts 22 16
* Stabilizer bar link nut 175 129
Valve block transducer 25 18
Front stabilizer bar to body clamp bolts 115 85
Rear stabilizer bar to body clamp bolts 62 46
LH stabilizer bar to actuator bolts 120 89
* New nuts/bolts must be installed
Ride and Handling Optimization - Ride and Handling Optimization
Terrain Response - Component Location

1 - Terrain Response control and control module
2 - Rear differential
3 - Rear differential control module
5 - Transfer box (center differential and high/low range)
7 - ECM (engine control module)
8 - ABS (anti-lock brake system) module
9 - Transfer box control module
GENERAL
The Terrain Response™ system allows the driver to select a program which aims to provide the optimum settings for
traction and performance for the prevailing terrain conditions. The system cannot be switched off. The 'special
programs off' is the default program and covers all general driving conditions. Four specific terrain programs are
selectable to cover all terrain surfaces.
The system is controlled by a rotary control located on the center console, rearward of the selector lever (automatic
transmission) or gearshift lever (manual transmission). The rotary control allows the selection of one of the following
five programs:
Special programs off

Grass/Gravel/Snow
Mud-Ruts
Sand
Rock crawl.
The rotary control can be rotated through 360 degrees or more in either direction and selects each program in turn.
When Terrain Response is fitted to a vehicle the instrument cluster will display the selected program in the message
center.
The Terrain Response system uses a combination of a number of vehicle subsystems to achieve the required vehicle
characteristics for the terrain selected. The following subsystems make up the Terrain Response system:
Engine management system

Automatic transmission (if fitted)
Transfer box (center differential)
Rear differential (electronically controlled)
Brake system (ABS/DSC/ETC/HDC functions)
Air suspension.
A Terrain Response control module is located below the rotary control. The control module detects the selection made
on the rotary control and transmits a signal on the high speed CAN (controller area network) which is received by
each of the subsystem control modules.
Each of the affected sub-system control modules contain software which applies the correct operating parameters to
their controlled system for the Terrain Response program selection made.
Each sub-system control module also provides a feedback for the selected program so that the Terrain Response
control module can check that all systems have changed to the correct operating parameters.
Information is displayed in the instrument cluster message center which informs the driver of improvements which
can be made to the vehicle operating parameters to optimise the vehicle for the prevailing conditions. Inexperienced
off-road drivers may benefit from the automatic assistance of the Terrain Response system and the driver
information. Experienced off-road drivers can select the specific programs for extreme conditions to access control
over the vehicle systems (e.g., throttle shift maps or traction settings) which are not accessible on vehicles without
Terrain Response.
AIR SUSPENSION AND TERRAIN RESPONSE SWITCH PACK


A - Terrain Response™ control - Non-Electronic Transmission Shifter
B - Terrain Response™ control - Electronic Transmission Shifter
C - Air suspension switch location in switch pack
D - Hill Descent Control (HDC) switch location in switch pack
1 - Dynamic
2 - General program (special programs off)
3 - Grass/Gravel/Snow
4 - Mud-Ruts
5 - Sand
6 - Rock crawl
7 - Raise/lower switch
8 - Off-Road Mode
9 - On-Road Mode
10 - Access Mode
11 - Crawl (Locked at Access) Mode
12 - Hill Descent Control (HDC) switch
Each program is denoted by a symbol which represents the terrain encountered. The rotary control can be depressed
downwards to lock it in a position flush with the trim surround. A second push of the control releases the lock and
the control emerges from the surround allowing it to be rotated.
The rotary control can be rotated to select the required program. The control will only select the last program in its
direction of rotation. Further rotation of the control once the last program in either direction has been selected, will
have no effect, e.g. once rock crawl has been selected, further rotation in a clockwise direction will have no effect.
The Terrain Response control module is located below the rotary control. The module is connected via a harness
connector which also contains the wiring for the HDC switch, the transfer box high/low range switch, the air
suspension switch and the switch illumination circuits. The control module and switch uses four of these wires for a
12V battery supply when the ignition switch is in ignition position II, a ground and high speed CAN positive and
negative.
TERRAIN RESPONSE OPERATION
The following vehicle subsystem control modules are used for the Terrain Response system:
Engine management (engine control module)

Transmission control (transmission control module - automatic transmission only)
Transfer box control (transfer box control module)
Rear differential control (rear differential control module - if fitted)
Air suspension control (air suspension control module)
Brake system (ABS/DSC/ETC/HDC functions) (ABS module)
Each subsystem operates in different ways in relation to the selected Terrain Response program to achieve the
optimum traction, stability and ease of control for the terrain encountered. The system has a safety factor built in
which ensures that any program can be safely used on any surface, even when an inappropriate program selection
has been made.
ECM
The ECM varies the throttle pedal response to control the engine torque output. The ECM can change the throttle
maps to change the amount of torque per percentage of pedal travel. The ECM can also change the throttle response
to control the allowed torque change relative to the percentage pedal travel.
Each terrain program uses a combination of operating parameters for each subsystem. Changing between terrain
programs initiates a different set of operating characteristics which will be noticeable to the driver. The driver will
notice differences in engine and throttle response when, for example, the throttle pedal is held in a constant position
and the terrain program is changed from grass/gravel/snow to sand, the driver will notice the torque and engine
speed increase. If the terrain program is changed from sand to grass/gravel/snow the driver will notice a reduction in
torque and engine speed.
NOTE: The change in torque and engine speed can take approximately 30 seconds and care must be taken not
to confuse the Terrain Response system operation with an ECM fault.
Transmission Control
The transmission control module changes the shift maps for the Terrain Response program selected. This changes the
shift points providing early or late upshifts and downshifts.
On slippery surfaces the transmission will select 2nd gear in high range or 3rd gear in low range for starting from a
standstill to minimise wheel slip. In muddy conditions the transmission will provide maximum torque output from the
transmission. In sand the transmission will provide an output which passes maximum engine power from the
transmission.
In rock crawl special program (low range) the transmission will select 1st gear for driving off.
Sport mode is only available when the general program is selected and the transfer box is in high range. Sport mode
is disabled in low range and all Terrain Response special programs. CommandShift™ is available in any program and
also in high or low range.
If the transmission is in 'Sport' mode and a special program is subsequently selected, the transmission will
automatically change to manual 'CommandShift™' mode. If a special program is already selected and the
transmission selector lever is moved from drive 'D' to the 'Sport' mode position, the transmission will automatically
change to 'CommandShift™' mode.
Transfer Box and Rear Differential Control
The transfer box electronically controlled differential and the rear electronically controlled differential (if fitted) are
treated as one system. The electronic rear differential is an optional fitment on vehicles fitted with the Terrain
Response system. The differential control has two operating strategies; pre-emptive and reactive.
The pre-emptive strategy anticipates and predicts the locking torque value required for each differential to minimise
slip and maximise stability. Each Terrain Response program has a different threshold and input criteria for the pre-
emptive strategy. The pre-emptive strategy improves vehicle traction and composure by avoiding wheel spin. This is
achieved by anticipating the amount of differential lock required for the program selected. For example, a high
locking torque would be applied for rock crawl or slippery surfaces.
The reactive strategy varies the amount of locking torque in response to the actual slip level and the dynamic
behaviour of the vehicle. Each Terrain Response program has a different threshold and input for the reactive
strategy. The reactive strategy improves vehicle traction and composure by eliminating any wheel spin which has
occurred after the pre-emptive strategy was applied. The locking response applied is applicable to the terrain
program selected, for example, very sensitive on slippery surfaces to provide maximum traction and minimise
surface damage.
The locking torque calculations use various signals from other subsystems, for example, engine torque, throttle
position, selected gear, steering angle, vehicle speed, lateral acceleration and yaw behaviour.
The Dynamic Stability Control function of the ABS system can override the Terrain Response differential control and
reduce any applied locking torque during DSC action.
Control, Description and Operation).
Air Suspension Control
The air suspension control module contains a strategy which provides automatic switching between normal and off-
road heights. Changes in vehicle height settings will be relayed to the driver via the instrument cluster message
center and LED (light emitting diode) illuminated icons on the switch. The automatic selection and deselection of the
vehicle height provides automatic increase and decrease in ground clearance and aims to provide maximum benefit
to the selected terrain program.
On a vehicle fitted with a correctly installed, Land Rover approved trailer socket, if an electrical load is sensed on the
trailer socket, height changes are prohibited and the message center displays a message advising that a trailer is
connected and off-road height is not automatically selected. The driver can raise the suspension manually using the
air suspension switch.
NOTE: The prohibiting of the automatic ride height selection is only operational if a Land Rover approved trailer
socket is fitted and an electrical load is sensed on the socket.
ABS Control
The ABS module controls several vehicle functions and adjusts the operating parameters of these functions to
optimise the selected Terrain Response program.
Traction control uses different slip/acceleration thresholds to improve traction and vehicle composure. For example,
the system sensitivity is increased on slippery surfaces to reduce wheel spin.
If DSC is switched off (with the DSC switch on the instrument panel) when using a Terrain Response special program,
if the special program is subsequently changed for a different program DSC is automatically switched back on.
The stability control uses different threshold values for the selected program to automatically reduce DSC
intervention, removing the requirement for the driver to disable the DSC system in order to reduce engine
intervention which is sometimes induced in extreme off-road conditions. In extreme sand conditions, there may be an
additional benefit of disabling the DSC function using the DSC switch on the instrument panel in addition to selecting
the sand program.
HDC is automatically switched on or off and target speeds are adjusted in response to the Terrain Response program
selected. The responsiveness of the HDC function is also increased where required.
Automatic operation of HDC aims to assist the driver by switching the system on or off when it is of most benefit.
Target speeds for HDC operation are also adjusted according the vehicle operating conditions.
Incorrect Program Usage
Selection of an inappropriate program is discouraged in the following ways:
The active program icon is continually displayed in the instrument cluster message center
The Terrain Response control module 'locks' out certain functions in some programs, e.g.
- cruise control is only available with the special programs off or grass/gravel/snow program
- transmission 'Sport' mode is deactivated in all special programs.
In any special program, except the grass/gravel/snow program, when the ignition has been in the off position,
continually for more than six hours, the Terrain Response system defaults to the Special Programs off. When
in the grass/gravel/snow program, the Terrain Response system will never default to the Special Programs off.
This is to allow for drivers in cold climates where continuous use of the grass/gravel/snow program would be
beneficial.
The rock crawl program is only available with the transfer box in low range.
Selection of an inappropriate program for the terrain conditions will not endanger the driver or cause damage to the
vehicle. Continued use of an inappropriate program may reduce the life of some components. The driver may notice
reduced vehicle response, with the engine and transmission being less responsive than in the special programs off.
Also, in some programs, HDC will remain on, signified by illumination of the HDC indicator in the instrument cluster.
The driver may also notice torque 'wind-up' in the center and rear differentials causing a 'braking' effect when the
vehicle is manoeuvred in some special programs.
The use of the special programs in the Terrain Response system is monitored by the Terrain Response control module
which records the mileage and time the vehicle has operated in a specific program in high and low range. This
information can be retrieved using T4 and used by the dealer technician to check customer concerns, e.g. high fuel
consumption which may be due to continued use of a certain program.
Driver Information
The instrument cluster contains a message center which displays vehicle information to the driver. The message
center contains the Terrain Response program icons which display the currently selected program. If no symbol is
displayed, no special program is selected and the system is in special programs off.
Any required changes to the subsystems are also passed to the driver in the form of indicator illumination in the
instrument cluster or appropriate messages in the message center, HDC off or air suspension height change for
example.
In certain operating conditions, the Terrain Response system also displays advice or warning messages to ensure the
driver is using the vehicle to its full potential, e.g.
Steering angle is displayed in the message center to avoid driving in deep ruts with steering lock applied
gear information is displayed to recommend a gear for slippery conditions
if the system automatically provided off road ride height, but the driver subsequently lowers the vehicle to
normal height, then the system may advize that this will cause a risk of grounding.
The messages which can be displayed in the instrument cluster message center are detailed in the Information and
Message Center section.
For additional information, refer to: Information and Message Center (413-08 Information and Message Center,
DIAGNOSTICS
The Terrain Response control module stores information on detected Terrain Response faults and CAN errors which
can be interrogated using T4. The Terrain Response sub-systems and the instrument cluster also store fault
information relating to CAN errors from the Terrain Response control module.
The control module also stores the miles travelled and time elapsed in high range for the individual programs and in
low range for use of all programs which can also be retrieved using T4. This information aids diagnosis of the Terrain
Response system and also provides an indication of Terrain Response system abuse by the driver which can lead to
premature component failure.
Terrain Response System Fault Diagnosis
Terrain Response relies on the correct functionality of the five sub-systems. If one of the sub-systems develops a
fault, the Terrain Response system will not function, even though the fault is not in the Terrain Response system. The
Terrain Response control module and rotary control should only be investigated if there are no apparent faults in any
of the sub-systems. If a fault in a sub-system is subsequently corrected, the Terrain Response system will function
normally after an ignition on and off cycle.
Terrain Response Sub-System Faults
If a fault occurs in a sub-system, the driver is alerted by the illumination of a warning indicator and/or an appropriate
message for that sub-system in the instrument cluster message center. There will be no warning of a Terrain
Response system fault.
When a sub-system fault is present and the driver attempts to select a different Terrain Response program using the
rotary control or at the next ignition on cycle, a message 'SYSTEM FAULT SPECIAL PROGRAMS NOT AVAILABLE' will
appear in the message center. This implies that the Terrain Response system has a fault, but only because a sub-
system fault is preventing its operation. This message will be displayed for 5 seconds per ignition cycle, but is
repeated if a further selection is made by the driver using the Terrain Response rotary control or at the next ignition
on cycle.
NOTE: The message 'SYSTEM FAULT SPECIAL PROGRAMS NOT AVAILABLE' can also be generated by a fault in
the Terrain Response rotary control or control module. See following section for details of rotary control or control
module faults.
It is not possible for the Terrain Response control module to cause any fault behaviour (warning indicator illumination
or message generation) in any of the five sub-systems. Illumination of a sub-system warning indicator and/or a sub-
system related message will never be associated with a Terrain Response control module or Terrain Response system
fault.
The sub-system control modules can detect a fault with the CAN signal from the Terrain Response control module. If
a fault in the Terrain Response system is detected, the sub-system control modules will operate in the 'special
programs off' setting. The sub-system control modules will record a fault code for a failure of the Terrain Response
CAN signal. These faults can be retrieved using T4 and will provide useful information to indicate investigation of the
Terrain Response control module or the CAN network.
Terrain Response Rotary Control or Control Module Fault
If a fault occurs in the Terrain Response rotary control, all rotary control icon amber LEDs will be turned off
(background illumination will remain on) and rotation of the rotary control is ignored. The instrument cluster
message center will display a message 'SYSTEM FAULT SPECIAL PROGRAMS NOT AVAILABLE' when the fault occurs, if
the fault is present and the driver attempts to select a special program (if the control module is able to do this) or at
the next ignition on cycle.
If a failure of a rotary control icon amber LED occurs, the Terrain Response system will still function. Any selected
special program will default to 'special programs off' at every ignition on cycle, with the exception of the
grass/gravel/snow program.
The Terrain Response rotary control and the control module are an integral unit. If a fault occurs in either
component, the whole unit will require replacement.
CAN Faults
If a CAN fault exists and prevents Terrain Response system operation, all of the Terrain Response rotary control icon
LEDs will be illuminated and rotation of the rotary control is ignored.
If the instrument cluster does not receive a Terrain Response system CAN message from the Terrain Response
Control module, the message 'SYSTEM FAULT SPECIAL PROGRAMS NOT AVAILABLE' will be displayed when the fault
occurs and will be repeated at every ignition on cycle.
User Error
The following incorrect usage of the system may be misinterpreted as a system fault:
Engine not running - Program changes and driver advisory messages are only available with the engine
running
Rock crawl program selected but transfer box in high range
Special program change attempted with DSC or ABS active (this includes ABS cycling which is operational
when HDC is being used on slippery or loose surfaces).
Special program change attempted with overheat condition present on center or rear differential.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High Speed CAN bus

1 - Battery
4 - ECM
6 - Terrain Response control and control module
7 - ABS module
11 - Transfer box (center differential and high/low range)
Ride and Handling Optimization - Active Stabilization System
Dynamic Response Component Location
NOTE: LHD (left-hand drive) V8 Petrol shown, other models similar

1 - RH (right-hand) front stabilizer link
2 - Front hydraulic pipes
3 - Accelerometer
4 - Accelerometer
5 - Rear hydraulic pipes
6 - RH rear stabilizer link
7 - Rear actuator and stabilizer bar
8 - LH (left-hand) rear stabilizer link
9 - Steering angle sensor
10 - Dynamic Response control module
11 - Valve block
12 - LH front stabilizer link
13 - Front actuator and stabilizer bar
14 - Pump
15 - Return pipe - valve block to reservoir
16 - Feed pipe - reservoir to pump
OVERVIEW
The Dynamic Response system provides improved vehicle handling and ride characteristics and is active for both on
and off-road driving.
The Dynamic Response system uses two accelerometers to detect vehicle lateral acceleration and inputs from the
steering angle sensor and vehicle speed to supply data to the Dynamic Response control module. The control module
then operates solenoid valves in a valve block which apply hydraulic pressure to actuators fitted to the front and rear
stabilizer bars. The application of hydraulic pressure to the actuators applies a specified amount of torque to the
stabilizer bars to counteract the cornering forces and reduces vehicle body roll.
The following illustrations demonstrate the difference in body angle between a conventional 'passive' (non-Dynamic
Response) stabilizer bar vehicle and a vehicle fitted with the Dynamic Response system.
Conventional 'Passive' Stabilizer Bar

A - Direction of travel - Right hand bend
B - Body roll
C - Axle roll
D - Tire squash
E - Dampers
F - Body roll angle
G - Axle roll angle
H - Direction of stabilizer bar twist
Dynamic Response System


A - Direction of travel - Right hand bend
B - Body roll
C - Axle roll
D - Tire squash
E - Stabilizer bar
F - Direction of stabilizer bar twist
G - Dampers
H - Axle roll angle
I - Reduced body roll with Dynamic Response system
The Dynamic Response system is electrically and hydraulically operated. Electrical and hydraulic operation is
controlled by the Dynamic Response control module which is located on the driver's side 'A' pillar, behind the
instrument panel.
The Dynamic Response system comprises front and rear stabilizer bars with integral actuators, two accelerometers, a
control module, a hydraulic pump, hydraulic pipes, hydraulic hoses, a valve block and a fluid reservoir.
The Dynamic Response system reduces body roll with cornering forces of up to 0.4 g. From 0.4 g there is a
progressive increase in body roll but significantly lower than on a 'passive' system. A 'passive' system will have a
progressive increase in body roll angle as soon as cornering forces are applied and will have a greater roll angle than
the Dynamic Response system for the same cornering force.
The Dynamic Response system can also detect when the vehicle is driven off-road. If off-road conditions are detected
and the vehicle is traveling at 25 mph (40 km/h) or less, the control module will reduce roll compensation. On side
slopes of more than 11 degrees the Dynamic Response system will switch to a 'locked bars' condition at slow speed.
Lateral acceleration of the body is sensed by two accelerometers, signals from these together with steering angle and
vehicle speed are transmitted to the control module. The engine driven hydraulic pump supplies a constant hydraulic
flow to the valve block. Two directional control valves are solenoid operated by the control module and supply
hydraulic pressure to the applicable side of each actuator to apply a force equal to and opposite to the body roll
force. In operation the Dynamic Response system maintains the attitude of the vehicle body when cornering.
The Dynamic Response hydraulic system uses a semi-synthetic hydraulic fluid which is the same fluid used in the
power steering system. The total capacity of the Dynamic Response system is 2.50 liters (0.66 US gallons).
CAUTION: The Dynamic Response hydraulic system is extremely sensitive to the ingress of dirt and debris. The
smallest amount can cause the system to become unserviceable. It is imperative that the following precautions are
followed:
Dynamic Response components are thoroughly cleaned externally before work commences
All opened pipe and component ports are capped immediately
All fluid is stored in clean containers.
In the event of a control module failure the system will 'fail-safe' to a 'locked bars' condition. The 'locked bars'
condition will allow the stabilizer bars to operate in a similar manner as conventional 'passive' stabilizer bars.
Prolonged cornering forces will allow a progressive increase in roll angle due to hydraulic leakage through the
actuators and valve block. Failures of the system are relayed to the driver by illumination of the air
suspension/dynamic response warning indicator in the instrument cluster, an audible warning chime and a message
displayed in the instrument cluster message center. Faults are recorded by the control module and can be retrieved
using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
When the ignition switch is moved to position II, the warning indicator is illuminated for two seconds to check
functionality. The warning indicator functionality can also be checked using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
A Land Rover approved diagnostic system must also be used to perform a hydraulic system response test after
bleeding post repair or maintenance operations have been performed. This is to ensure that the system is completely
free from air. Trapped air in the system can significantly reduce system performance.
FLUID RESERVOIR
The fluid reservoir is located in the front right hand side of the engine compartment. The reservoir is attached to the
front of air cleaner housing or radiator cooling pack by two slotted rails which positively locate the reservoir.
The reservoir is a molded plastic container with a twist lock neck which is fitted with a sealed cap. Two connections
on the bottom of the reservoir provide for connection of the feed pipe to the pump and the return pipe from the
valve block.
A non-serviceable filter assembly is fitted to the base of the reservoir. The filter is made from a fine nylon mesh
which is molded into the bottom of the reservoir. The filter removes particulate matter from the fluid before it is
drawn into the pump.
Upper and lower fluid level marks are molded onto the reservoir body. The capacity of the reservoir to the upper
level mark is 0.4 liter (0.11 US gallon).
DYNAMIC RESPONSE PUMP
The Dynamic Response hydraulic pump is located on the RH side of the engine. The pump is attached to a mounting
bracket below the generator on TdV6 engines and above the generator on V8 petrol engines. On both engines the
pump is driven by the accessory drive belt from the crankshaft.


1 - Cam ring
2 - Cylinder housing
3 - Inlet port
4 - Outlet port
5 - Shaft
6 - Silencer volume
7 - Discharge valve
8 - Piston spring
9 - Piston
10 - Housing
11 - Counter balance
12 - Pulley attachment flange
The hydraulic pump is driven at approximately 1.7 times crankshaft speed by the auxiliary drive belt. The pump is a
radial piston type which delivers fluid at high pressures.
The radial pump has eight pistons located in bores in a cylinder housing. A balanced central shaft, which is driven by
a pulley and the auxiliary drive belt, has a cam which operates the pistons as the shaft rotates.
As the cam lobe reaches each piston, the piston is pushed outward, moving the fluid above the piston. The pressure
created by the fluid flow from the bore opens a spring loaded discharge valve. When the valve opens, the now
pressurized fluid flows, via the silencer volume area of the cylinder housing, to the outlet port. The silencer volume
assists with damping out operating noise from the pump. When the piston reaches its full stroke, the flow reduces
and the discharge valve closes under spring pressure.
As the cam lobe moves away from the piston, a spring pushes the piston down the bore, creating a vacuum above
the piston. As the piston moves down the bore, ports in the piston are exposed and connect with the fluid inlet port.
The vacuum draws fluid into the piston filling the piston and the chamber above it. As the piston is again pushed
upwards, the ports in the piston are closed off by the bore and the pressurized fluid opens the discharge valve and
flows to the outlet port.
The above sequence is applied to each of the eight pistons for every revolution of the shaft and cam. When the
engine is running the sequence occurs rapidly creating a constant flow of fluid. The fluid flow varies with engine
speed and the rotational speed of the shaft. The pressure applied to the actuators, created by the flow from the
pump, is controlled by the pressure control valve in the valve block.
The pump has a displacement of 6cm 3/rev and an operational pressure of 165 bar (2248 lbf/in2). The pump output
flow ranges from 6.5 l/min (1.7 US Gallons/min) at idle to 10 l/min (2.64 US Gallons/min) at 1000 rev/min and
above.
DYNAMIC RESPONSE VALVE BLOCK
The valve block is located below the RH sill of the body and is secured with three bolts and rubber bushes to captive
nuts located in the chassis. The rubber bushes isolate the valve block preventing hydraulic noise from transmitting
through the body.


1 - Nut (3 off)
2 - O ring (3 off)
3 - Directional control valve coils (DCV1 and DCV2)
4 - O ring (3 off)
5 - DCV1 (Directional control valve)
6 - Pressure transducer
7 - Mounting bush (6 off)
8 - Washer (7 off)
9 - Bolt (3 off)
10 - Nut
11 - O ring
12 - High pressure filter
13 - O ring
14 - Pipe connections
15 - Stud (3 off)
16 - Pressure control valve
17 - O ring
18 - Pressure control valve coil
19 - DCV2
20 - Spacer (3 off)
21 - Captive nut (3 off) (chassis mounting)
The valve block directs hydraulic pressure to the actuators via solenoid operated directional control valves. A solenoid
operated pressure control valve regulates the required pressure to the actuators. The three solenoid valves are
controlled by signals received from the dynamic response control module. A pressure transducer monitors the
pressure generated by the Pressure Control Valve (PCV). A serviceable high pressure filter is installed into the
underside of the valve block and filters the hydraulic fluid before it reaches the control valves. The filter must be
changed at the intervals defined on the vehicle service schedule.
The two Directional Control Valves (DCV's) are fitted to ports in the top face of the valve block. The DCV's are
screwed into the valve block and are sealed with O rings. Each DCV has a solenoid for electrical operation of the
valve. The solenoid is sealed to the DCV with two O rings and secured with a threaded nut. The DCV's, nut, coil and
O rings are serviceable parts.
The PCV is fitted to a port in the rear facing end of the valve block. The PCV is screwed into the valve block and is
sealed with O rings. The PCV has a coil for electrical operation which is sealed to the PCV with two O rings and
secured with a threaded nut. The nut, coil and O rings are serviceable items. The PCV is serviceable.
The pressure transducer is located in the forward facing end of the valve block and is sealed with an O ring. The
pressure transducer measures the hydraulic pressure and returns a signal to the Dynamic Response control module.
A high pressure filter locates in a port on the lower face of the valve block. The gauze and fiber filter is sealed in the
port with O rings and is secured with a threaded cap which is also sealed with an O ring. A threaded hole in the
lower face of the filter allows a bolt to be fitted to remove the filter from the port. If a system hydraulic component is
replaced, the filter must also be replaced.
Four ports are located on the forward facing end of the valve block and two ports on the opposite end. Each port is
fitted with a seal pack which contains two O rings and backing rings. The pipes locate and seal in the seal packs and
are secured to the valve block with studs and nuts.
ACTUATORS AND STABILIZER BARS
Two stabilizer bars with integral hydraulic actuators are used for the Dynamic Response system. The actuators apply
a hydraulically generated force or rotational torque to the stabilizer bar to oppose lateral forces caused by the vehicle
cornering.
Actuator Sectional View


1 - Air bleed ports
2 - Piston
3 - Ball screw
4 - Stabilizer bar
Each actuator has a piston which is attached to the inner part of a rota linear ball screw, which is splined to one half
of the stabilizer bar. The outer part of the ball screw is crimped and welded into a housing which is attached to the
other half of the stabilizer bar. As pressure is applied to one side of the piston or the other, the ball screw converts
the linear force applied to the piston into a rotational torque between the two halves of the stabilizer bar.
Front Actuator and Stabilizer Bar


1 - Hardened washer (4 off)
2 - RH stabilizer link
3 - Stabilizer bar
4 - Chassis mounting brackets
5 - Actuator
6 - LH stabilizer link
7 - Stabilizer bar mounting bush
8 - Pipe fluid connections
Rear Actuator and Stabilizer Bar
NOTE: The internal piston size of the rear actuator changes amongst the different vehicle derivatives, it is
important to ensure the correct parts are fitted to the relevant derivatives.


1 - RH stabilizer link
3 - Stabilizer bar mounting bush
4 - Actuator
5 - Stabilizer bar
6 - LH stabilizer link
NOTE: On vehicles from 2007MY, the positions of the FRONT actuator ports have been moved and therefore
care must be taken to ensure matching pipes and actuators are fitted in service.
Two hydraulic connections provide for the attachment of the hydraulic pipes from the valve block. The connections
provide hydraulic flow to each side of the actuator piston.
The front and rear actuator assemblies are similar in their construction, with the rear actuator being smaller than the
front. Each stabilizer bar is made from 34 mm (1.34 in) diameter spring steel bar.
The actuator assembly and the stabilizer bars are not serviceable items. Only the stabilizer bar attachment bushes,
brackets and stabilizer links are serviceable components.
The front stabilizer links are not handed on the front stabilizer bar and are also common to vehicles not fitted with
Dynamic Response. The rear stabilizer links are unique to vehicles with Dynamic Response. The Dynamic Response
rear links are identified by a grey color plastic bearing moulding. The passive (non-Dynamic Response) links can be
identified by a white colored plastic bearing moulding.
The front stabilizer bar and actuator is attached to a chassis strengthening member known as the secondary load
path and to the front cross-member. Two serviceable, split rubber bushes are fitted to the stabilizer bar and are
located in cast brackets. Each bracket is secured to the secondary load path with two bolts and to the front cross-
member with a third bolt.
The rear stabilizer bar and actuator is attached to fabricated brackets which are located on the outside of the chassis
side members, forward of the rear wheels.
Two rubber bushes are fitted to each stabilizer bar and are located in clamp brackets. The front and rear bushes and
brackets are not interchangeable.
On both the front and rear stabilizer bars, roll correction force is transmitted to the suspension arm via ball jointed
stabilizer bar links. The front links are attached to the front suspension upper arm and the rear links are attached to
the rear lower arm.
Each front stabilizer link is fitted with a hardened steel washer which is located between the stabilizer bar and the
link ball joint and the upper arm and the link ball joint. It is important that these washers are in the correct position
and the correct, hardened washers are fitted. Failure to fit the washers or using incorrect washers will result in
relaxation of the torque on the self-locking nut and damage will be caused to the stabilizer bar, link and suspension
upper arm.
SYSTEM PIPES
Fluid is moved through the Dynamic Response system via a series of six pipes and hoses. The pipes are mounted on
brackets at strategic points to provide quiet operation of the system.
The six pipes connecting the pump, reservoir and actuators are one-piece components. If the pipes require
replacement during service, the pipes are supplied individually and are removed and replaced in one piece. The front
and rear pipes require the body to be lifted slightly to allow access for removal and replacement.
The flexible high pressure hose which supplies pressure from the pump to the high pressure pipe is fitted with
attenuators. The attenuators comprise of tuned lengths of PTFE pipe and restrictors within the flexible hose. The
attenuators damp pressure pulsations in the hydraulic fluid produced by the pump, reducing noise and strain on
components downstream. The attenuator is integral with the high pressure hose and cannot be serviced separately.
CAUTION: Under no circumstances during repairs should clamps be used on the high pressure hose or the front
and rear actuator feed pipes to prevent fluid loss. The use of clamps will damage the pipes and hoses leading to
premature failure.
DYNAMIC RESPONSE CONTROL MODULE
The Dynamic Response control module is located on the driver's side 'A' pillar, behind the instrument panel. The
control module is secured to the vehicle body with two screws. Two connectors are located on the control module
and allow for the connection of the harness connectors. The two connectors supply power, ground, signal and sensor
information to and from the control module for control of the Dynamic Response system.
When a replacement control module is fitted, the correct tune is selected from the data contained within the Car
Configuration File (CCF). Post Dynamic Response control unit installation lateral accelerometer calibration needs to be
completed.
The Dynamic Response control module receives a power supply from the main relay via fuse 9E in the BJB (battery
junction box).
An engine speed signal is transmitted to the control module from the ECM (engine control module) via the high speed
CAN (controller area network) bus. The engine speed signal is used by the Dynamic Response control module to
detect that the engine is running and hydraulic pressure for the Dynamic Response system is available.
A road speed signal is transmitted to the control module from the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module on the high
speed CAN. A steering angle signal is transmitted on the high speed CAN bus from the steering angle sensor. The
Dynamic Response control module uses the road speed and steering angle signals to calculate lateral acceleration and
for on and off-road roll compensation.
When reverse gear is selected and reverse wheel rotation is transmitted on the high speed CAN bus, the Dynamic
Response system reverts to a 'locked bars' condition. This condition is maintained until reverse gear is deselected
and a forward wheel rotation message is transmitted on the CAN bus.
The Dynamic Response control module receives an "ignition on" signal on the high speed CAN bus. The ignition signal
provides an input into the control module to inform the control module that the ignition switch is in position II. The
control module initiates a 250 ms start time which is used to prevent functions operating when the software routines
are being initialized.
When the 'ignition-on' CAN signal is removed, the control module senses that the ignition has been switched off. The
control module remains powered for a 30 second period to allow fault information and adaptive values to be stored in
the memory. The values and fault information are read by the control module when the ignition is next switched on.
The power supply to the control module is maintained for as long as the main relay remains energized.
The Dynamic Response control module is connected via the high speed CAN bus to the diagnostic socket which allows
diagnostic interrogation of the control module. The diagnostic socket allows for the connection of a Land Rover
approved diagnostic system to read any stored fault codes in the control module. The control module can also be
updated with revised software using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system should a software update be required.
When system faults are detected, the control module issues a message on the CAN bus which is received by the
instrument cluster. The instrument cluster then illuminates the air suspension/Dynamic Response warning indicator
as follows:
Minor faults - warning indicator illuminated in an amber color with an applicable message in the message
center
Major faults - warning indicator illuminated in a flashing red color with an applicable message in the message
center and an audible warning. The message will instruct the driver to stop the vehicle immediately or drive
with caution.
Two messages relating to Dynamic Response are displayed in the instrument cluster message center:
SUSPENSION FAULT, VEHICLE LEAN, WHEN CORNERING

SUSPENSION FAULT, STOP SAFELY, STOP ENGINE.
The Dynamic Response control module supplies a control current to the Pressure Control Valve (PCV) in the valve
block. The current supplied is determined by a number of input signals from the upper and lower accelerometers,
road speed, steering angle etc. The PCV controls the hydraulic pressure supplied to the actuators proportional to the
current supplied by the control module.
Power is supplied to the two solenoid operated Directional Control Valves (DCV) in the valve block by the control
module. Together, the two DCV's control the direction of flow of hydraulic fluid to the actuators. When the control
module supplies power to the solenoids the valves open allowing hydraulic fluid to flow to the actuators. When power
is removed, the DCV's close. DCV1 is open for right hand corners and DCV2 is opened for left hand corners.
The pressure transducer located in the valve block receives a 5V current from the control module. The transducer
measures the hydraulic pressures in the range of 0 to 180 bar (0 to 2610 lbf/in2) and returns a linear output voltage
to the control module dependent on the hydraulic pressure.
The Dynamic Response control module supplies a 5V current to each of the accelerometers. Each accelerometer is
capable of measuring lateral acceleration in the range of ± 1.11 g. An analogue input to the control module of
between 0.5 and 4.5V relative to the lateral acceleration sensed is returned by each accelerometer. The control
module processes the two signals received, together with the steering angle and vehicle speed signals, to produce a
'pure' lateral acceleration signal which is then used as the main control signal for the Dynamic Response system.
Failure Modes
Failures where the vehicle can still be driven safely are indicated by the air suspension/Dynamic Response warning
indicator in the instrument cluster illuminating continuously in an amber color. The amber indicator will remain
illuminated until the ignition is switched off. For all faults, the warning indicator will only illuminate again if the fault
is still present.
Failures which require the driver to stop the vehicle immediately are indicated by the air suspension/Dynamic
Response warning indicator flashing in a red color and an audible warning. This will also be accompanied by an
applicable message displayed in the message center.
All faults are recorded by the control module and can be retrieved using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
The diagnostic system provides a description of the fault, possible causes and corrective action to rectify the fault.
The control module can fail to one of two states; 'locked bars' or 'reduced operation'.
The 'locked bars' condition means that pump flow is directed through the valve block and returns to the reservoir.
Both DCV's close, trapping the fluid in the actuators. The fluid can flow from one actuator to the other via the valve
block. The stabilizer bars will perform similar to a conventional stabilizer bar, resisting roll but still allowing
suspension articulation.
The 'reduced operation' condition means that the system can still operate, but one of the input signals is not being
received and so the system performance is not optimum.
If the steering angle sensor develops a fault or is out of calibration, there is a possibility that the dynamic response
control module will record a fault code. A Land Rover approved diagnostic system should be used to check for fault
codes and the adaptive data should be cleared by resetting the fault codes in the control module after the steering
angle sensor has been recalibrated.
ACCELEROMETERS
Two accelerometers are used; an upper and a lower. Both accelerometers are identical in their construction.
The lower accelerometer is secured to the underside of the vehicle floor, on the RH inner sill panel, below the front
door. The upper accelerometer is secured to a bracket on the body roof panel, in a central position at the top of the
windscreen.
The lower accelerometer is the primary sensor used to measure lateral acceleration of the vehicle for roll control. The
upper accelerometer is used by the Dynamic Response control module for roll correction and fault detection in
conjunction with the lower accelerometer.
Each accelerometer is a capacitive acceleration sensor and operates on a 5V supply from the dynamic response
control module. The upper and lower accelerometers can measure acceleration in the range of ±1.11 g and return an
output to the control module of between 0.5 and 4.5V.
Failures of an accelerometer are recorded by the control module and can be retrieved using a Land Rover approved
diagnostic system. A special tool is required to remove and replace the accelerometer in the mounting bracket.
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

1 - Hydraulic pump
2 - Attenuator hose
4 - Directional control valve 2 (DCV2)
5 - Front actuator assembly
6 - Rear actuator assembly
7 - Directional control valve 1 (DCV1)
8 - Valve block
9 - Pressure Control Valve (PCV)
10 - High pressure filter
11 - Filter
12 - Reservoir
DYNAMIC RESPONSE SYSTEM OPERATION
Vehicle Not Moving
When the engine is running and the vehicle is not moving, both DCV's are closed, locking fluid in each side of the
actuator piston. The hydraulic pump draws fluid from the reservoir and passes it at low pressure to the valve block.
Because both DCV's are closed, after the fluid passes through the high pressure filter, it is directed through the PCV
to the reservoir.
The PCV is open fully to allow the full flow to pass to the reservoir. The DCV's will remain closed until the control
module detects a requirement to operate.
Vehicle Moving and Turning Left
When the vehicle is turning left the steering sensor detects steered angle, the accelerometers detect the cornering
forces applied. These signals are transmitted to the control module. The control module determines that an opposing
force must be applied to the stabilizer bars to counter the cornering forces. The control module supplies a current to
the solenoid of DCV2. Simultaneously, a current is supplied from the control module to the PCV which operates to
restrict the flow of fluid returning to the reservoir.
The restriction causes the hydraulic pressure in the system to rise and the pressure is sensed by the pressure
transducer which sends a signal to the control module. The control module determines from the inputs it receives
what pressure is required and adjusts the pressure accordingly.
The pressure in the system is applied to the piston of each actuator, applying a force to the stabilizer bar and
minimizing the cornering effect on the vehicle and maintaining the vehicle attitude. The fluid displaced from the other
side of the piston is returned to the reservoir via the valve block.
As the cornering force is removed when the vehicle straightens up, the control module opens the PCV to reduce the
pressure in the system. The fluid bleeds from the actuator back into the system as the cornering force is reduced,
removing the force applied to the stabilizer bar. When the vehicle is moving in a straight line DCV2 closes.
Vehicle Moving and Turning Right
When the vehicle is turning right the steering sensor detects steered angle, the accelerometers detect the cornering
forces applied. These signals are transmitted to the control module. The control module determines that an opposing
force must be applied to the stabilizer bars to counter the cornering forces. The control module supplies a current to
the solenoid of DCV1. Simultaneously, a current is supplied from the control module to the PCV which operates to
restrict the flow of fluid returning to the reservoir.
The restriction causes the hydraulic pressure in the system to rise and the pressure is sensed by the pressure
transducer which sends a signal corresponding to the pressure to the control module. The control module determines
from the inputs it receives what pressure is required and adjusts the pressure control valve accordingly.
The pressure in the system is applied to the piston of each actuator, applying a force to the stabilizer bar and
minimizing the cornering effect on the vehicle and maintaining the vehicle attitude. The fluid displaced from the other
side of the piston is returned to the reservoir via the valve block.
As the cornering force is removed when the vehicle straightens up, the control module opens the PCV to reduce the
pressure in the system. The fluid bleeds from the actuator back into the system as the cornering force is reduced,
removing the force applied to the stabilizer bar. When the vehicle is moving in a straight line DCV1 closes.
Off-Road Driving
Off-road detection is achieved by the control module by monitoring the signals from the upper and lower
accelerometers for varying degrees of body movement. Off-road driving generates differing signals to the
accelerometers which in turn produce differing outputs due to their vertical separation and the location of the roll
center of the vehicle.
The two signals are passed through a filter to remove any offset caused by the vehicle leaning or the terrain. The
control module then uses this signal to calculate the percentage of road roughness.
Below 25 mph (40 km/h) the percentage of road roughness calculated is used by the control module to limit the
operation of the Dynamic Response system. At speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) the system disables the percentage
road roughness signal and full Dynamic Response system assistance is restored. The system is completely inoperative
at speeds below 2 mph (3 km/h).
Side Slope Detection
The control module uses side slope detection when the upper and lower accelerometers detect an average
acceleration of more than ± 0.2 g or 11 degrees of side slope and a road speed of less than 25 mph (40 km/h).
When side slope is detected, both DCV's close to provide a 'locked bars' condition. This condition increases stability
and gives a constant vehicle response. As the road speed increases up to 25 mph (40 km/h), the level of average
lateral acceleration must also increase and be maintained for the system to recognize that the vehicle is on a side
slope. If the side slope angle is steep and the road speed is low, the control module will detect the side slope in a
short time.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus

1 - Battery
2 - BJB
3 - Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor
4 - RH front wheel speed sensor
5 - LH front wheel speed sensor
6 - RH rear wheel speed sensor
7 - LH rear wheel speed sensor
8 - ABS module
13 - ECM
14 - Diagnostic socket
16 - Pressure Control Valve (PCV) coil
17 - Valve block
19 - DCV 1 coil
20 - DCV 2 coil
21 - Dynamic Response Module
22 - Lower accelerometer
23 - Upper accelerometer
Ride and handling optimization incorporates the terrain response system which links a number of modules around
the vehicle to give the best combination of settings in the different systems.
For a detailed description of the Ride and Handling System and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual.
REFER to: Ride and Handling Optimization (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Description and Operation).
the donor vehicle.

Visual Inspection
Tire condition, pressures, etc Fuses
Driveline components (correct installation, damage, etc) Harnesses/connectors
Engine components (correct installation, damage, etc) Terrain response switchpack
Transmission components (correct installation, damage, Engine Control Module (ECM)
etc) Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Suspension components (correct installation, damage, Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM)
etc) Anti-lock Braking System control module
(ABS)
Rear Differential Control Module (RDCM)
Adaptive Damping Control Module (ADCM)
Controller Area Network (CAN) circuits
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
Symptom Chart
Because the overall function of the system is dependent on sub-systems, it is possible to misinterpret displays in the
message centre as being terrain response faults when they are actually a result of a fault in one of the sub-systems.
Refer to the table below for help in deciding when to investigate terrain response faults and when the fault is likely
to be in a sub-system.
Symptom Description Possible Causes Action

Message centre The message centre indicates to Any sub- For details of the available
display indicating a the driver that a fault has occurred system fault messages, refer to the
sub-system fault and in which sub-system supported by relevant section of the
the message workshop manual. Carry
centre out a complete vehicle DTC
read and follow the
diagnostic routine(s)
indicated
Message centre This message will display when a Any sub- For details of the available
display: System fault sub-system fault has occurred if the system fault messages, refer to the
special programs driver attempts to change the supported by relevant section of the
not available, terrain special program, and at each the message workshop manual. Carry
response switch ignition on cycle for 5 seconds until centre out a complete vehicle DTC
operation normal the fault is rectified read and follow the
diagnostic routine(s)
indicated
Message centre CAN circuit errors CAN circuit: Carry out a complete
display: System fault short circuit to vehicle DTC read and
special programs ground follow the diagnostic
not available, all CAN circuit: routine(s) indicated
terrain response short circuit to
switch LEDs power
illuminated CAN circuit:
high resistance
Special program User error Engine not Refer to the relevant

changes not available running section of the workshop
Rock crawl manual. Make sure that the
selected with driver is familiar with the
transfer box in correct operation of the
high range system
Special
program
change
attempted
with anti-lock
brake system
or dynamic
stability
control active
- This
includes
anti-
lock
brake
system
cycling
as part
of hill
descent
control
Special
program
change
attempted
with an
overheat
condition
present in the
centre or rear
differential
DTC Index
REFER to: (100-00 General Information)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Adaptive Damping Control Module (ADCM) (Description and
Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Air Suspension Control Module (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Terrain Response Switch Pack (TR) (Description and Operation).
Ride and Handling Optimization - Active Stabilization System
For a detailed description of the Active Stabilization System and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
REFER to: Active Stabilization System (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Description and Operation).
the donor vehicle.
Fluid level/condition, pipes, reservoir, etc Fuses (battery junction box)
Pump and pulley Engine Control Module (ECM) relay
Drive belt condition Harnesses/connectors
Hoses Upper accelerometer
Valve block Lower accelerometer
Accelerometers (correct fitment, etc) Steering wheel rotation sensor
Tire condition, pressures, etc Dynamic Response Control Module (DRM)
Suspension components (correct fitment, damage, etc) Air suspension control module
Anti-lock Brake System control module (ABS)
Instrument cluster
Controller area network (CAN) circuits
Symptom Chart

Poor on-center System bleed Carry out the manual bleed procedure
response required Check the stabilizer bar bushes
Stabilizer bar Check for residual pressure in the system
bushes Check and calibrate the steering angle sensor, clear the
Residual pressure adaptive data after calibration
Steering angle
sensor offset
Control module
adaptive data
Asymmetrical Steering angle Check and calibrate the steering angle sensor, clear the
response sensor offset adaptive data after calibration
Accelerometer Calibrate the accelerometers using the approved diagnostic
calibration system
System bleed Carry out the manual bleed procedure
required
Excessive roll System bleed Carry out the manual bleed procedure
required Check the stabilizer bar bushes and drop links
Stabilizer bar
bushes
Stabilizer bar drop-
links
Powered roll-rock Harness faults Check for DTCs indicating any of the possible causes are
Valve block fault present
Control module
adaptive data
Accelerometer fault
Oversteer or Stabilizer bar drop- Check the stabilizer bar drop links and the system actuators
understeer links
System actuators
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Dynamic Response Control Module (DRM) (100-00 General
Ride and Handling Optimization - Active Stabilization System Bleeding
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Dynamic Response Bleed Bottle
204-591-01
Dynamic Response Control Box
204-591-02
CAUTION: Dynamic Response system components are manufactured to very precise tolerances. It is therefore
essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs to
any open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the dynamic
response system.
NOTE: This procedure should be carried out if the following components have been removed or replaced: front
or rear stabilizer bar, front or rear valve block to actuator bar pipe assemblies, or the valve block. It is possible to
bleed only the front or rear of the system if only a stabilizer bar or pipe assembly has been removed. If the valve
block has been removed, the complete system must be bled.
1. Check and top-up the dynamic response system

fluid reservoir.
Top-up the fluid level to the mid-way mark
on the reservoir.
2. Install the special tool to the dynamic response

reservoir.
Completely fill the reservoir with fluid.
Make sure the pressure regulator on the
special tool is turned OFF.
Fill the special tool bottle approximately
three-quarters full with fluid.
Connect the special tool to a suitable
workshop air supply.
4. Remove the RH rear wheel and tire.
5. RH side rear: To improve access to RH rear

actuator bleed screw, remove bracket from body
frame securing fuel breather pipes.
6. Disconnect the two direction control valve

electrical connectors.
7. Connect the special tool electrical connectors to
the valve block.
Connect the special tool power supply leads
to the vehicle battery.

For additional information, refer to: Engine Undershield (501-
9. Connect the hose from special tool kit to the front

stabilizer bar bleed screws.
Remove the bleed screw covers.
10. Loosen the front actuator RH bleed screw by one-half of a turn.
11. Using the special tool, open both actuator control

valves.
12. CAUTION: The Dynamic Response bleed tool
fluid reservoir must remain full with new, clean
fluid, at all times during bleeding.
NOTE: It may be necessary to operate the

switch several times to help pulse the air out of
the actuator.
Bleed the dynamic response system until a flow of

clean, air-free fluid, is being pumped into the bleed
jar.
Using the special tool pressure regulator,
carefully increase the air pressure to
approx. 5 - 10 PSI / 0.3 - 0.7 kPa, until
air/fluid is being expelled from bleed screw.
13. When a steady flow of clean air free fluid is running from the
bleed point, tighten the bleed screw to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).
Release the switch on the special tool to switch off the
actuator control valves.
14. Loosen the front actuator LH bleed screw by one-

half of a turn.

valves.
16. NOTE: It may be necessary to operate the switch several

times to help pulse the air out of the actuator.
Bleed the dynamic response system until a flow of clean, air-

free fluid, is being pumped into the bleed jar.
18. Repeat the front stabilizer bar bleed procedure, from steps 9 to
17, a further two times, to make sure all air is removed from
the actuator.
19. Disconnect the special tool hose from the front stabilizer bar
bleed screws.
Install the bleed screw covers.
Discard the fluid from the bleed jar.

For additional information, refer to: Engine Undershield (501-
21. Check and top-up the special tool fluid reservoir.
22. Connect the hose from the special tool kit to the
rear stabilizer bar bleed screws.
Remove the bleed screw covers.
23. Loosen the rear actuator RH bleed screw by one-half of a turn.

valves.
25. CAUTION: The Dynamic Response bleed tool

fluid reservoir must remain full with new, clean
fluid, at all times during bleeding.
NOTE: It may be necessary to operate the

switch several times to help pulse the air out of
the actuator.
Bleed the dynamic response system until a flow of

clean, air-free fluid, is being pumped into the bleed
jar.
26. When a steady flow of clean air free fluid is

running from the bleed point, tighten the bleed
screw to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).
Release the switch on the special tool to
switch off the actuator control valves.
27. Loosen the rear actuator LH bleed screw by one-

half of a turn.

valves.
29. NOTE: It may be necessary to operate the switch several

times to help pulse the air out of the actuator.
Bleed the dynamic response system until a flow of clean, air-

free fluid, is being pumped into the bleed jar.
31. Repeat the rear stabilizer bar bleed procedure, from steps 22 to
30, a further two times, to make sure all air is removed from
the actautor.
32. Disconnect the special tool hose from the rear stabilizer bar
bleed screws.
Discard the fluid from the bleed jar.
Install the bleed screw covers.
33. Disconnect the special tool from the valve block.

Connect the valve block electrical connectors.
34. WARNING: The special tool is still pressurised when the

source air pressure is removed. Release air pressure within
special tool slowly before removing.
Remove the special tool from the dynamic response system

reservoir.
Remove the special tool.
Top-up the fluid level to the mid-way mark on the
reservoir.
35. Install bracket securing fuel breather pipes.
36. Using IDS, check operation of the dynamic response system.
37. If necessary, repeat the above procedure.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Upper Accelerometer
Special Tool(s)
Accelerometer remover/replacer
204-505 (LRT-60-014A)
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00,
Specifications).
2. Remove the front overhead console.

Carefully release the 9 clips.
3. CAUTION: The accelerometer is an extremely

delicate component and can easily be rendered
unserviceable. Never use an accelerometer which
has been dropped or subjected to mistreatment of
any type.
Remove the upper accelerometer.

Using the special tool, release the
accelerometer.
Release and disconnect the electrical
connector.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the upper accelerometer.
Connect and secure the electrical connector.
2. Install the front overhead console.

Connect and secure the electrical connectors.
Carefully secure the clips.
3. Connect the battery ground cable.

Specifications).
4. Using T4, calibrate the dynamic response system.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Lower Accelerometer
Special Tool(s)
Accelerometer remover/replacer
204-505 (LRT-60-014A)
Removal
Specifications).

3. CAUTION: The accelerometer is an extremely

delicate component and can easily be rendered
unserviceable. Never use an accelerometer which
has been dropped or subjected to mistreatment of
any type.
Remove the lower accelerometer.

Using the special tool , release the
accelerometer.
Release and disconnect the electrical
connector.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the lower accelerometer.
Connect and secure the electrical connector.

Specifications).
3. Using T4, calibrate the dynamic response system.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Fluid Pump V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol
Removal
Refer to: Specifications (414-00, Specifications).

stands.
3. Refer to: Engine Cover - 5.0L (501-05, Removal and

Installation).
4. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02, Removal and

Installation).
5. Remove the RH front wheel and tire.
Torque: 140 Nm
6. NOTES:
Some variation in the illustrations may occur,

but the essential information is always correct.
Engine shown removed for clarity.
7.
8.
9. WARNING: Fluid loss is unavoidable, use
absorbent cloth or a container to collect the fluid.
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing

components, ensure the area around the joint
faces and connections are clean. Plug open
NOTE: Remove and discard the O-ring seals.
Torque: 35 Nm
10. Torque: 22 Nm
11. Torque: 22 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure both O-ring seals are correctly
installed on the high pressure union.
NOTE: Prime the pump with clean fluid.
2. NOTE: Start the engine and allow to idle. Remove

reservoir cap and inspect for fluid circulation, if no flow is
observed stop engine and apply a small amount of pressure to
the reservoir using the dynamic response system bleed kit to
encourage fluid flow into the fluid pump, and restart engine
with this pressure applied for approx 1 minute.
Fill the power steering reservoir.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Fluid Pump TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal

Specifications).

stands.
3. For additional information, refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-

4. For additional information, refer to: Engine Undershield (501-


TORQUE: 140 Nm
6.


TORQUE: 35 Nm
8. TORQUE: 22 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure both O-ring seals are correctly

NOTE: Prime the pump with clean fluid.
2. NOTE: Start the engine and allow to idle. Remove

reservoir cap and inspect for fluid circulation, if no flow is
observed stop engine and apply a small amount of pressure to
the reservoir using the dynamic response system bleed kit to
encourage fluid flow into the fluid pump, and restart engine
with this pressure applied for approx 1 minute.
Fill the power steering reservoir.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Dynamic Response Module
Removal
NOTE: The dynamic response module is always located on the driver's side of the vehicle.
1. Remove the cowl side trim panel.

05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the closing trim panel.

Release the clip.
3. Remove the dynamic response module.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the dynamic response module.
Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.
3. Install the cowl side trim panel.

05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
4. Initiate a new control module using T4.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Valve Block
Removal
CAUTION: Dynamic Response system components are manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine
clearances. It is therefore essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components.
Always install blanking plugs to any open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign
matter ingress to the Dynamic Response system.
NOTE: The valve block seals do not require replacement unless there is evidence of a fluid leak. A new valve
block is supplied with new seals installed.

2. NOTE: Some fluid spillage is inevitable during

this operation.
Release the front actuator pipes from the valve

block.
Position a container to collect the fluid
spillage.
3. Release the valve block to rear stabilizer bar

actuator pipe assembly mounting.
Remove the nut.

Remove the bolt.
Remove the nut.
Remove the bracket.
5. CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing
the components, ensure the area around the joint
NOTE: Some fluid spillage is inevitable during

this operation.
Disconnect the rear actuator pipes from the valve

block.
spillage.
6. CAUTIONS:
Before disconnecting or removing the

Make sure the actuator fluid lines are not

clamped or kinked. Failure to follow this
instruction will result in damage to the vehicle.
NOTES:
Some fluid spillage is inevitable during this

operation.
Note the fitted position of the washers.
Remove the valve block.

Remove the 3 bolts.
Collect the 4 washers.
Disconnect the front actuator pipes from the
valve block.
Installation
1. Check the valve block O-rings seals and plastic
spacer washers are correctly installed.
A: Backing rings (white)
B: Outer clamping ring
C: O-ring seals
D: Outer backing ring (Black)
2. NOTE: Make sure there are two washers
installed between the integrated body frame and
the valve block lower retaining bolt.
Install the valve block.

Remove the blanking caps from the ports.
Connect the front actuator pipes to the
valve block.
Install 3 new nuts and tighten to 23 Nm (17
lb.ft).
Discard the 3 valve block retaining bolts, fit
new ones and tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb.ft).
3. Connect the rear actuator pipes to the valve block.

Remove the container.
4. Secure the valve block to rear stabilizer bar

Install the bracket.
Install the nut and bolt and tighten to 9 Nm
(7 lb.ft).
5. Secure the valve block to rear stabilizer bar actuator pipe

assembly mountings.
Tighten the nut to 9 Nm (7 lb.ft)
6. Using T4, bleed the Dynamic Response system.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Valve Block Filter
Removal
NOTE: This procedure does not require the Dynamic Response system to be bled.


Remove and discard the valve block filter.

Position container to collect fluid loss.
Remove the access plug.
Remove and discard the access plug O-ring
seal.
Using a suitable M6 bolt, release the filter
from the valve block.
Installation
1. Install the new valve block filter.
Install a new access plug O-ring seal.
Tighten the access plug to 62 Nm (46 lb.ft).
2. Start the engine and allow to idle.
3. Check and top-up the Dynamic Response system fluid reservoir.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Valve Block to Front Stabilizer Bar
Actuator Pipe Assembly
Special Tool(s)
205-754 (LRT-54-027)
Removal
any open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the Dynamic
Response system.



5. CAUTIONS:


damaged or kinked during removal or installation.

this operation.
Disconnect the fluid lines from the actuator.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove and discard the O-ring seals.
Remove and discard the plastic spacer
washers.
Install blanking caps to the exposed ports.
7. RH front: Remove the shock absorber and air spring assembly.


knuckle.
Remove the retaining bolt.
9. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to
hang on the brake hose.
Release the brake caliper from the wheel knuckle.

Remove the 2 retaining bolts.
Tie the brake caliper aside.
10. NOTE: The brake disc is shown removed for

clarity.
Release the wheel speed sensor from the wheel

knuckle.
Remove the bolt.
11. CAUTIONS:
Note the position of the hardened steel washer. The

hardened steel washer must be installed between the stabilizer
bar link and the upper arm. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the vehicle.

removing the nut.

Discard the nut.
12. CAUTION: To prevent the wheel knuckle falling outwards

and disconnection of the halfshaft inner joint, support the wheel
knuckle.
joint.
14. Remove the integrated body frame bracket.
Remove the 3 bolts and 1 nut.

Remove the 8 bolts.

body mount.
Raise the body.

mounts.
17. Remove the body mount.


this operation.
Disconnect the high pressure line.

spillage.
19. Remove the air cleaner assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 4.2L, Removal and
Installation).


this operation.
Disconnect the fluid return line from the reservoir.

spillage.
Reposition the fluid line into the wheel arch
area.
21. Release the valve block to front stabilizer bar

actuator pipe assembly mountings.
Remove the 2 nuts and 1 bolt.
22. CAUTIONS:
Always plug any open connections to prevent

contamination.


this operation.
Disconnect the front actuator pipes from the valve

block.
spillage.
23. Remove the valve block to front stabilizer bar actuator pipe
assembly.
Installation
1. Check the valve block O-rings and plastic spacer
washers are correctly installed.
C: O-ring seals
2. Install the valve block to front stabilizer bar actuator pipe

assembly.
3. Connect the front actuator pipes to the valve block.

Install 2 new nuts and tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb.ft).
4. Attach the valve block to front stabilizer bar actuator pipe

assembly mountings.
Tighten the 2 nuts and 1 bolt to 9 Nm (7 lb.ft).
5. Connect the fluid line to the reservoir.

Reposition the fluid line from the wheel arch area.
Install the clip.
6. Install the air cleaner assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 4.2L, Removal and
Installation).
7. Connect the high pressure line.

Tighten the union to 21 Nm (15 lb.ft).
8. Install the body mount.
9. Lower the body.

Remove the stands.
11. Install the integrated body frame bracket.

Install the 3 bolts and tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb.ft).


Secure the wiring harness in the clips.
14. Secure the brake caliper to the wheel knuckle.

16. Install the shock absorber and air spring assembly.

17. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the actuator fluid lines are not damaged or

kinked during removal or installation.
Care must be taken to avoid damage to the plastic spacer

washers and O-ring seals during installation of the fluid lines to
the actautor.
NOTE: Some fluid spillage is inevitable during this

operation.
Connect the fluid lines to the actuator.

Install new plastic spacer washers and O-ring seals.
18. Bleed the front of the Dynamic Response system using T4.

20. CAUTIONS:


installing the nut.



Ride and Handling Optimization - Valve Block to Rear Stabilizer Bar
Actuator Pipe Assembly
Removal
any open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the Dynamic
Response system.
NOTE: The valve block seals do not require replacement unless there is evidence of a fluid leak.



Remove the 8 bolts.

valve block to rear stabilizer bar actuator pipe.
Using suitable stands, raise the body.

Remove the nut.

Remove the nut.
Remove the bolt.
Remove the bracket.
9. CAUTIONS:



this operation.

Remove the 2 bolts.
washers.


this operation.
Disconnect the rear actuator pipes from the valve

block.
spillage.
11. Remove the valve block to rear stabilizer bar actuator pipe
assembly.
Installation
1. Check the valve block O-rings and plastic spacer
washers are correctly installed.
C: O-ring seals
2. CAUTION: Make sure the actuator fluid lines are not
Install the valve block to rear stabilizer bar actuator pipe

assembly.
3. NOTE: Some fluid spillage is inevitable during this

operation.
Connect the rear actuator pipes to the valve block.

4. CAUTIONS:


the actuator.

operation.

5. Secure the valve block to rear stabilizer bar

Install the bracket.
Install the nut and bolt and tighten to 9 Nm
(7 lb.ft).
assembly mounting.
7. Bleed the rear of the Dynamic Response system using T4.

For additional information, refer to: Active Stabilization System
Bleeding (204-06, General Procedures).
8. Lower the body.

Remove the stands.



Ride and Handling Optimization - Valve Block Transducer
Removal


Remove the valve block transducer.

Installation
1. Install the valve block transducer.
3. Check and top-up the Dynamic Response system fluid reservoir.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Front Stabilizer Bar Bushing V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
Front Stabilizer Bar Bushing Tightening Tool
204-703
204-705
Removal


3. NOTE: Crossmember shown removed for

clarity.
Using a suitable jack, support the differential.

Remove and discard the three differential
mounting bolts.
Raise and reposition the front differential
case.
4. CAUTIONS:


NOTE: Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.

stabilizer bar.
5. NOTE: Right-hand shown, left-hand similar.
Position the special tools.
6. NOTE: Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.
Remove the stabilizer bar bushings.

Using the special tools, remove and discard
the 6 bolts.
7. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the stabilizer bar is

cleaned back to the paint. Do not remove the
paint.
The paint on the stabilizer bar may have

worn away, this is an acceptable condition.
Do not install a new stabilizer bar for this
issue.
Inspect the condition of the front stabilizer bar.

Remove any dirt or debris from the section
of the stabilizer bar that is clamped in the
bush. Paint, if present, does not need to be
removed.
If required, use a suitable strip of 320
grade abrasive paper/cloth to remove any
built-up deposits. Use a suitable brake
cleaner to remove any dirt or grease
residue.
Installation
CAUTION: The bush must be installed without any additional lubricant. Failure to follow this instruction may
cause damage to the component.
1. CAUTION: Make sure the faces of the

bush clamp and the upper and lower mating
faces of the chassis are clean, smooth and
free from debris. Use a suitable brake cleaner
to remove any dirt or debris from the mating
faces.
Install the stabilizer bar bushings.

To make sure that the bush is clamped
correctly the fixings must be tightened to
115 Nm in the following order:
Stage 1: Tighten the middle fixing.
Stage 2: Tighten the front fixing.
Stage 3: Tighten the rear fixing.
2. CAUTIONS:


installing the nut.

3. Align and secure the front differential case.

Tighten the new axle carrier bracket bolts to 80 Nm,
then a further 60 degrees.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Front Stabilizer Bar Bushing TDV6 3.0L
Diesel
Special Tool(s)
204-703
204-705
Removal


3. NOTE: Crossmember shown removed for

clarity.
Using a suitable jack, support the differential.

Remove and discard the three differential
mounting bolts.
Raise and reposition the front differential
case.
4. CAUTIONS:



stabilizer bar.

the 6 bolts.
7. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the stabilizer bar is

cleaned back to the paint. Do not remove the
paint.

worn away, this is an acceptable condition.
Do not install a new stabilizer bar for this
issue.
Inspect the condition of the front stabilizer bar.

removed.
residue.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the faces of the

bush clamp and the upper and lower mating
faces of the chassis are clean, smooth and
free from debris. Use a suitable brake cleaner
to remove any dirt or debris from the mating
faces.

To make sure that the bush is clamped
correctly the fixings must be tightened to
115 Nm in the following order:
Stage 1: Tighten the middle fixing.
Stage 2: Tighten the front fixing.
Stage 3: Tighten the rear fixing.
2. CAUTIONS:


installing the nut.

3. Align and secure the front differential case.

Tighten the new axle carrier bracket bolts to 80 Nm,
then a further 60 degrees.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Front Stabilizer Bar V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
204-703
204-705
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Do not remove or loosen the 6 bolts on the stabilizer bar. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to or failure of the stabilizer bar.
Dynamic Response system components are manufactured to very precise tolerances. It is therefore essential
that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs to any
open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the dynamic response
system.


4. CAUTIONS:
Mark the position of the driveshaft flange in

relation to the drive pinion flange.
To avoid damage to the joint or gaiter, do

not allow the driveshaft to hang.
Release the driveshaft from the front axle drive

flange.
Remove the 6 Torx bolts and washers.
Discard the bolts.
5. Support the driveshaft.

Compress the joints to disengage the drive
flanges.
Using suitable securing strap, reposition
and support the driveshaft.
6. CAUTIONS:

components, make sure the area around the joint


this operation.

Remove the 2 bolts.
washers.
7. CAUTIONS:


Release both of the stabilizer bar links from the

stabilizer bar.


the 6 bolts.

Remove the 4 bolts.
11. Remove the stabilizer bar and actuator assembly.

Installation
1. Install the stabilizer bar and actuator assembly.

3. Install the stabilizer bar clamps.

Install the stabilizer bar clamps.
Using the special tools, tighten the bolts to
115 Nm (85 lb.ft).
4. CAUTIONS:


installing the nut.
Secure both stabilizer bar links to the stabilizer bar.

5. CAUTIONS:

the actuator.
NOTE: Remove and discard the blanking caps.

6. Using the approved Land Rover diagnostic system, bleed the

active stabilization system.
7. NOTE: A small amount of oil may weep from the

driveshaft joints during storage. The loss of this oil will not
affect the operation or durability of the joint.
Secure the driveshaft to the front axle drive flange.

Remove and discard the tie strap.
Compress the joints to engage the drive flanges.
Install new retaining bolts.
Stage 1: Tighten the bolts to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft).
Stage 2: Tighten the bolts a further 90 degrees.


Ride and Handling Optimization - Front Stabilizer Bar TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Special Tool(s)
204-703
204-705
Removal
CAUTIONS:
open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the dynamic response
system.


4. CAUTIONS:



flange.
Discard the bolts.
5. Support the driveshaft.

flanges.
Using suitable securing strap, reposition
and support the driveshaft.
6. CAUTIONS:



this operation.

Remove the 2 bolts.
washers.
7. CAUTIONS:


Release both of the stabilizer bar links from the

stabilizer bar.


the 6 bolts.

Remove the 4 bolts.
11. Remove the stabilizer bar and actuator assembly.

Installation
1. Install the stabilizer bar and actuator assembly.


Install the stabilizer bar clamps.
Using the special tools, tighten the bolts to
115 Nm (85 lb.ft).
4. CAUTIONS:


installing the nut.
Secure both stabilizer bar links to the stabilizer bar.

5. CAUTIONS:

the actuator.
NOTE: Remove and discard the blanking caps.

6. Using the approved Land Rover diagnostic system, bleed the

active stabilization system.


Install new retaining bolts.


Ride and Handling Optimization - Rear Stabilizer Bar Bushing
Removal



Remove the 8 bolts.

body mounts.
Raise the body.

mounts.
9. Remove the stabilizer bar bushings.

Remove and discard the 4 bolts.
Remove the 2 clamps.
10. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the stabilizer bar is cleaned

back to the paint. Do not remove the paint.

worn away, this is an acceptable condition. Do not
install a new stabilizer bar for this issue.
NOTE: Front stabilizer bar shown, rear

stabilizer bar similar.
Inspect the condition of the rear stabilizer bar.

removed.
residue.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the faces of the bush clamp are

clean, smooth and free from debris. Use a suitable brake
cleaner to remove any dirt or debris from the mating faces.

4. Lower the body.

Remove the stands.


Ride and Handling Optimization - Rear Stabilizer Bar
Removal
CAUTIONS:
It is possible to install the stabilizer bar incorrectly. Note the position of the stabilizer bar before removal.
open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the Dynamic Response
system.


6. CAUTIONS:



this operation.

Remove the 2 bolts.
washers.

Release both stabilizer bar links.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Remove the 8 bolts.

body mount.
Raise the body.

mounts.
11. Remove the stabilizer bar and actuator assembly

bushings.
Remove and discard the 4 bolts.
Remove the 2 clamps.
With assistance, remove the stabilizer bar and actuator

assembly.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the stabilizer bar is correctly

installed.
With assistance, install the stabilizer bar and actuator

assembly.
2. Install the stabilizer bar and actuator assembly bushings.

4. CAUTION: Use a wrench on the hexagon provided to

prevent the ball joint rotating.
Connect the RH stabilizer bar link.

5. CAUTIONS:


the actuator

operation.

6. Bleed the rear of the Dynamic Response system using T4.
7. CAUTION: Use a wrench on the hexagon provided to

prevent the ball joint rotating.
Connect the LH stabilizer bar link.

9. Lower the body.

Remove the stands.



Ride and Handling Optimization - Pressure Control Valve
Removal
any open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the dynamic
response system.


Remove the nut.
Remove the bracket.
3. Remove the solenoid.

Remove the electrical connector.
Remove the solenoid nut.

the components, make sure the area around the
joint faces and connections are clean. Plug open
Remove the PCV valve.

Clamp the fluid pump supply and return
hoses to minimise fluid loss.
Remove the PCV valve.
5. CAUTIONS:


clamped or kinked. Failure to follow this
instruction will result in damage to the vehicle.
Remove and discard the valve block filter.

Remove and discard the access plug O-ring
seal.
Using a suitable M6 bolt, release the filter
from the valve block.
Installation
1. Install the PCV valve.
Install the PCV valve.
Torque: 35 Nm (26 lb.ft).
2. Install the solenoid.

Install the O-ring seal.
Tighten to 5 Nm.
Install the electrical connector.
3. Install the new valve block filter.

Install a new access plug O-ring seal.
Tighten the access plug to 62 Nm (46 lb.ft).
Remove the hose clamps.

assembly mountings.
5. Check and top-up the dynamic response system fluid reservoir.
7. Check and top-up the dynamic response system fluid reservoir.

Make sure there is fluid circulation through the reservoir.
Switch
Removal
NOTES:
Make sure that the gear selector lever is in position N before removing any components.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Installation

Ride and Handling Optimization - Direction Control Valve Solenoid
Removal

2. TORQUE: 10 Nm
3.
4. NOTE: Make sure there are two washers installed between

the integrated body frame and the valve block lower retaining
bolt.
TORQUE: 23 Nm
5. TORQUE: 5 Nm
•Install the O-ring seal.
Installation
1. To install reverse the removal procedure.
Driveline System - General Information - Driveline System
For a detailed description of the driveline system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section in the workshop manual. REFER to:
Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft, Description and Operation),

Universal Joints (205-01 Driveshaft, Description and Operation),
Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Description and Operation),
Front Drive Axle and Differential (205-03 Front Drive Axle/Differential, Description and Operation),
Front Drive Halfshafts (205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts, Description and Operation),
Halfshaft Joint (205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts, Description and Operation),
Rear Drive Halfshafts (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Description and Operation).
the donor vehicle.

If a road test is necessary make sure the vehicle is safe to do so.

Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Wheel rim and tire damage or runout
Check all the driveshafts and halfshafts for damage including dents, cracks and excessive runout
Check all the CV joint gaiters for splits, damage and security
Check all the driveshafts and halfshafts for correct alignment
Check the driveshaft mounting bolts security
Check all the driveshaft and halfshaft joints for excessive movement
Check the rear driveshaft centre support bearing for security, damage and excessive wear
Check the front and rear differential mounting bolts and bushes for wear, damage and security
Check the front and rear differentials for oil leaks
Symptom Chart

Vibration through the Road wheel Road test the vehicle. If the vibration is only at a specified speed, balance
vehicle body at a imbalance the road wheels. Test for normal operation. Disconnect the rear
specified speed Driveshaft driveshaft. Check CV and universal joints for smooth and full movement.
imbalance Disconnect the front driveshaft. Check CV joints for smooth and full
movement. If any joints are faulty, replace the driveshaft. Test for
normal operation.
Vibration through the Misalignment Road test the vehicle. Check the rear driveshaft for correct alignment
vehicle body at all of the rear through the centre support bearing. Rectify as necessary. Test for normal
speeds driveshaft operation. Check for a damaged or bent stub axle. Rectify as necessary.
Bent or
misaligned
stub axle
Rumbling noise from Rear Using a suitable listening device (e.g. stethoscope) listen to the rear
the rear of the differential differential pinion bearings and output bearings, the rear wheel bearings
vehicle varying at bearings and the rear driveshaft centre bearing. Rectify as necessary. Test for
different vehicle worn normal operation.
speed and load Rear wheel
bearings
worn
Rear
driveshaft
centre
support
bearing worn
Rumbling noise from Front Using a suitable listening device (e.g. stethoscope) listen to the front
the front of the differential differential pinion bearings and output bearings and the front wheel
vehicle varying at bearings bearings. Rectify as necessary. Test for normal operation.
different vehicle worn
speed and load Front wheel
bearings
worn
Whining noise from Rear Check and top up the rear differential oil level if necessary. Using a
the rear of the differential suitable listening device (e.g. stethoscope) listen to the rear differential.
vehicle during gears worn Replace the rear differential unit if there is excessive gear noise.
acceleration and or damaged
overrun conditions
Whining noise from Front Check and top up the front differential oil level if necessary. Using a
the front of the differential suitable listening device (e.g. stethoscope) listen to the front differential.
vehicle during gears worn Replace the front differential unit if there is excessive gear noise.
acceleration and or damaged
overrun conditions
Knocking, clicking or Rear Disconnect the rear driveshaft. Check joint mounting bolt holes for
clunking noise from driveshaft elongation. Check the joints. Disconnect the rear halfshafts. Check the
rear of vehicle during joint fixings shaft splines for wear or damage. Check the CV joints. Rectify as
acceleration and insecure necessary. With the rear driveshaft and halfshafts disconnected, check
overrun conditions Rear the rear differential for tight spots or excessive play. Rectify as
driveshaft necessary.
joints worn
or damaged
Rear
halfshaft
joints or
splined shaft
worn or
damaged
Rear
differential
internal
components
worn or
damaged
Knocking, clicking or Front Disconnect the front driveshaft. Check joint mounting bolt holes for
clunking noise from driveshaft elongation. Check the joints. Disconnect the front halfshafts. Check the
front of vehicle CV joints shaft splines for wear or damage. Check the CV joints. Rectify as
during acceleration worn or necessary. With the front driveshaft and halfshafts disconnected check
and overrun damaged the front differential for tight spots or excessive play. Rectify as
conditions Front necessary.
halfshaft
joints or
splined shaft
worn or
damaged
Front
differential
internal
components
worn or
damaged
DTC Index
Driveshaft -
Front Drive (Propeller) Shaft
Item Specification
Type One piece, variable length steel tube.
Constant velocity joints Plunging type, fitted at front and rear.
Rear Drive (Propeller) Shaft
Item Specification
Type Two piece, variable length steel tube with isolated centre bearing and swaged front section to
provide controlled collapse of the shaft during a crash.
Constant Plunging constant velocity joints are positioned at the front and centre of the shaft with a fixed,
velocity joints Hookes type universal joint at the rear.
* Front driveshaft to front axle drive flange Torx bolts:
Stage 1 45 33
Stage 2 Further 90° Further 90°
* Front driveshaft to transfer case drive flange Torx bolts:
Stage 1 45 33
* Rear driveshaft to rear axle drive flange Torx bolts 150 110
Rear driveshaft to transfer case drive flange Torx bolts 73 54
Rear driveshaft center bearing bolts 30 22
Fuel tank heat shield bolts 5 4
Fuel tank heat shield nuts 3 2
* New 'Patched' Torx bolts must be installed
Driveshaft - Driveshaft
Drive shaft Component Location

1 - Front drive shaft
2 - Rear drive shaft
GENERAL
Drive shafts are used to transmit drive from the transfer box to the front and rear differentials.
The front drive shaft is a one-piece unit, connected to the transfer box and front differential unit via Constant
Velocity (CV) joints.
The rear drive shaft is a two-piece unit, supported on a central bearing due to its increased length. The rear drive
shaft is connected to the transfer box via a CV joint and the rear differential with a universal joint. These joints allow
for angular deviations of the drive shaft due to acceleration and braking.
The front and rear drive shafts are not serviceable items and a failure will require the replacement of the complete
drive shaft assembly.
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT


1 - CV joint
2 - Front drive shaft
The front drive shaft is constructed from 1.7 mm wall tubular steel. A CV joint is attached to each end of the drive
shaft (see 'Halfshaft Joint' section for more information on CV joints).
Each CV joint has six holes, which allow for attachment to the input flange of the front differential and the front
output flange of the transfer box. The CV joints are secured to the front differential and transfer box with six Torx
head adhesive retained bolts.
Three compression link washers are fitted under each pair of bolts. The washers are required to prevent compression
of the CV joints attachment flange.
A shroud is pressed over the CV joint. The shroud seals to the joint body using an internal gasket and to the front
output flange of the transfer box using an end cap and internal gasket. This prevents the ingress of dirt and
moisture. The CV joints allow for movement of the drive shaft caused by small movements in the transmission and
transfer box mountings.
REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY

1 - CV joints
2 - Collapsible crash section
3 - Front shaft assembly
4 - Support bearing
5 - Rear shaft assembly
6 - Universal joint
The rear drive shaft assembly comprises front and rear shaft assemblies and a centrally mounted shaft bearing.
Front Shaft Assembly

The front shaft assembly incorporates a crash feature within the tube, which controls the collapse of the drive shaft
during a crash.
The front shaft assembly comprises a CV joint at each end (see 'Halfshaft Joint' section for more information on CV
joints).
The front CV joint (transfer box end) has six radial holes, which provide for the attachment to the transfer box rear
output flange. The joint is secured to the output flange with six torx bolts, which screw into threaded holes in the
flange. Three compression link washers are fitted under each pair of bolts. The rear splined shaft mates with splines
in the rear shaft CV joint hub and is pressed in and fixed with Locktite. A machined surface on the shaft accepts the
shaft bearing, which is a press fit.
Rear Shaft Assembly
The rear shaft assembly comprises a Hookes type universal joint at the rear (rear differential end).
The universal joint is welded to the rear shaft tube and is secured to the input shaft of the rear differential with four
flanged nuts. The opposite end of the rear shaft tube is welded directly to the CV joint body.
Shaft Bearing Assembly
The shaft bearing assembly comprises a pressed steel housing, a rubber diaphragm and a ball bearing. The
diaphragm is bonded into the housing. An internal metal ring, bonded to the bush, allows for the bearing to be press
fitted into it. The rubber bush allows for small deviations in alignment and also absorbs vibrational forces. The shaft
bearing assembly is located by screws, which pass through plain holes in the bearing assembly and locate into nuts
welded on the inside face of the chassis cross-member.
Driveshaft - Universal Joints
A Hookes type universal joint is used to connect the rear drive shaft assembly to the rear differential, allowing for
angular deviations of the drive shafts due to acceleration and braking.
The joint is bolted to the input shaft of the rear differential with four flanged adhesive screws and is lubricated during
manufacture and sealed for life.
Driveshaft - Driveshaft

REFER to: Driveline System (205-00, Diagnosis and Testing).
Driveshaft - Front Driveshaft V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
CAUTION: It is possible to fit the driveshaft incorrectly. Note the orientation before removal.
NOTE: A small amount of oil may weep from the driveshaft joints during storage. The loss of this oil will not

2. Remove the transmission crossmember.

For additional information, refer to: Transmission Support
Crossmember - 5.0L (502-02, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the transmission heat shield.

Remove the 4 bolts.
4. CAUTIONS:


Release the driveshaft from the transfer case drive

flange.
Remove the 6 Torx bolts and washers,
discard the bolts.
5. CAUTIONS:



flange.
discard the bolts.
6. Remove the front driveshaft.

flanges.
Installation

Install the driveshaft.

2. CAUTION: Make sure that new bolts are installed.

Secure the driveshaft to the transfer case drive flange.

4. Install the transmission heat shield.

5. Install the transmission crossmember.

Crossmember - 5.0L (502-02, Removal and Installation).
Driveshaft - Front Driveshaft TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
CAUTION: It is possible to fit the driveshaft incorrectly. Note the orientation before removal.

2. Remove the transmission crossmember.

Crossmember - 3.0L Diesel (502-02, Removal and Installation).
3. NOTE: If equipped.
Remove the transmission heat shield.

Remove the 4 bolts.
4. CAUTIONS:



flange.
discard the bolts.
5. CAUTIONS:



flange.
discard the bolts.

flanges.
Installation

Install the driveshaft.


Secure the driveshaft to the transfer case drive flange.

4. Install the transmission heat shield.

5. Install the transmission crossmember.

Crossmember - 3.0L Diesel (502-02, Removal and Installation).
Driveshaft - Rear Driveshaft
Removal

2. Remove the fuel tank heat shield.

Remove the 3 bolts and 2 nuts.
3. CAUTIONS:



flange.
4. CAUTIONS:


Release the driveshaft from the rear axle drive

flange.
Remove and discard the 4 Torx bolts.
5. With assistance, remove the driveshaft.

Remove the 2 driveshaft center bearing
mount bolts.
Installation

Attach the driveshaft to the rear axle drive flange.

Tighten the new Torx bolts to 150 Nm (110 lb.ft).

Attach the driveshaft to the transfer case drive flange.

Tighten the Torx bolts to 73 Nm (54 lb.ft).
3. CAUTIONS:
Align the driveshaft center bearing mount by moving the

floating front section of the shaft backward or forwards until
the bolt holes in the mount align with the holes in the chassis.
Make sure the center bearing mount is not under tension.
Install the driveshaft center bearing mount bolts.

Align the center bearing mount.
Tighten the driveshaft center bearing retaining bolts to
30 Nm (22 lb.ft).
4. Install the fuel tank heat shield.

Rear Drive Axle/Differential -
Lubricants
NOTE: Do not use any lubricant other than that specified
Item Specification
Recommended lubricant:
'Open' differential Castrol SAF-XO - 75W/90
Differential with locking motor Castrol SAF Carbon Mod Plus
Capacities
Unit Capacity
'Open' differential 1.25 litres (1.32 US quarts)
Differential with locking motor 1.76 litres (1.86 US quarts)
Rear 'Open' Differential
Item Specification
Reduction ratio:
V6 Diesel engine - 8HP70 Automatic transmission 3.21:1
V8 Petrol engine - 6HP28 Automatic transmission 3.54:1
Rear Differential with Locking Motor
Item Specification
Range Up to 2500 Nm (98.5 lbf/ft)
Differential locking motor Operates the ball/ramp mechanism and wet clutch. Motor incorporates a
temperature sensor and is controlled by a module
Differential type 4 pin
Reduction ratio:
V6 Diesel engine - 8HP70 3.21:1
Automatic transmission
V6 Diesel engine - 6HP28 3.54:1
V8 Petrol engine - 6HP28 3.54:1
Oil drain plug 29 21
Oil filler plug 29 21
Oil temperature sensor 22 16
++ Differential locking motor bolts 10 7
Differential front mounting bolts 275 203
Differential rear mounting bolts 175 129
* Driveshaft to rear axle drive flange Torx bolts 150 110
Lower arm to wheel knuckle 275 203
Stabilizer bar link nuts 115 85
**+ Halfshaft retaining nut 350 258
* New patchlok torx bolts must be installed
** New nut must be installed
+ Stake nut on completion of tightening operation
++ Apply sealant to flange of locking motor

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential
Overview

A - Electronic rear differential
B - Open rear differential
1 - Rear driveshaft
2 - Electronic rear differential
3 - RH rear drive halfshaft
4 - Actuator (locking) motor assembly
5 - LH rear drive halfshaft
The open rear differential converts the 'angle of drive' through 90° and distributes drive, via the rear drive halfshafts,
to the rear wheels.
The differential unit is mounted to the chassis via rubber bushes and bolts; two mounting points at the rear of the
unit and one at the front.
OPEN REAR DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
Open Rear Differential - Exploded View


1 - Cap
2 - Seal
3 - Bearing assembly, without race
4 - Bearing pre-load spacer
5 - Bearing
6 - Roller bearing cup
7 - Cover
8 - Seal
9 - Differential carrier
10 - Gear and pinion assembly
11 - Bearing
13 - Shim
14 - Collapsible spacer
15 - Pinion nut
16 - Retainer
17 - Flange
18 - Outer deflector
19 - Inner deflector
20 - Oil seal
21 - Bearing
23 - Roll pin
24 - Breather cap
25 - Breather
26 - Case
27 - Data location
28 - Mounting bush
29 - Bearing
32 - Plug
33 - Drain plug
34 - Thrust washer
35 - Planet gears
36 - Crosspin shaft
37 - Sunwheel
38 - Thrust washer
39 - Bolt, 10 of
40 - Bolt, 12 of
The cast iron casing comprises two parts; a cover and a carrier. The carrier provides locations for all the internal
components. The carrier is sealed to the cover via an O-ring seal and secured with twelve bolts. The cover and
carrier have cast fins, which assist mobility. A breather tube is fitted to the top of the carrier. This allows a plastic
tube to be fitted and routed to a high point under the vehicle body, preventing the ingress of water when the vehicle
is wading.
The carrier contains an oil drain plug. The differential unit contains a specified oil.
The differential is a conventional design using a hypoid gear layout, similar to the front differential. The open rear
differential is available in various ratios depending on engine installation.
Changing the number of teeth between the crown wheel drive gear and pinion gear changes the ratio.
The differential comprises a pinion shaft and hypoid pinion-gear and a crown wheel drive-gear with an integral cage,
which houses two planet gears. Two sun wheels are also located in the cage and pass the rotational drive to the drive
shafts.
The pinion shaft is mounted on two opposed taper roller bearings, with a collapsible spacer located between them.
The spacer is used to hold the bearings in alignment and also collapses under the pressure applied to the pinion
flanged nut. This allows the flanged nut to be tightened to a predetermined torque, which collapses the spacer,
setting the correct bearing preload.
The pinion shaft has an externally splined outer end, which accepts and locates the input flange, which is retained by
the pinion nut and retainer. The input flange has four threaded holes and mates with the rear drive shaft. Four bolts
secure the rear drive shaft to the input flange. An oil seal is pressed into the pinion housing and seals the input
flange to the pinion housing. The pinion shaft has a hypoid gear at its inner end, which mates with the crown wheel
drive gear.
The crown wheel drive gear is located on the differential case and secured with ten screws. The differential case is
mounted on taper roller bearings located in machined bores on each side of the pinion housing. Shims are retained in
the casing behind the bearing cups, the shim thickness is selected to apply the correct bearing preload and hypoid
backlash.
The differential carrier has a through hole, which provides location for the shaft. The shaft is supported by a sun gear
and a needle roller bearing. The shaft is fitted with a snap ring at one end, which locates in a machined groove in the
sun gear, locking the shaft in position.
The sun gears are located in pockets in the carrier cage and mesh with the planet gears. Spacers are fitted between
the sun wheels and the carrier and set the correct mesh contact between the planet gears and the sun wheels. Each
sun wheel has a machined bore with internal splines and machined groove near the splined end. The groove provides
positive location for a snap ring fitted to the end of each output flange.
Each output shaft has a spline, which locates in each sun wheel. A snap ring fitted to the splined shaft locates in the
groove the sun wheel bore and positively located the output shaft. Oil seals are pressed into each side of the pinion
housing and seal the seal the output shaft.
Differential Operation
The operating principles of the front and rear differentials are the same. Rotational input from the drive shaft is
passed via the input flange to the pinion shaft and pinion gear. The angles of the pinion gear to the crown wheel
drive gear moves the rotational direction through 90°.
The transferred rotational motion is now passed to the crown wheel drive gear, which in turn rotates the differential
casing. The shaft, which is secured to the casing, also rotates at the same speed as the casing. The planet gears,
which are mounted on the shaft, also rotate with the casing. In turn, the planet gears transfer their rotational motion
to the left and right hand sun wheels, rotating the drive halfshafts.
When the vehicle is moving in a forward direction, the torque applied through the differential to each sun wheel is
equal. In this condition both drive halfshafts rotate at the same speed. The planet gears do not rotate and effectively
lock the sun wheels to the differential casing.
If the vehicle is turning, the outer wheel will be forced to rotate faster than the inner wheel by having a greater
distance to travel. The differential senses the torque difference between the sun wheels. The planet gears rotate on
their axes to allow the outer wheel to rotate faster than the inner one.
ELECTRONIC REAR DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
Electronic Rear Differential - Exploded View


1 - Cap
2 - O ring
4 - Bearing
5 - Bearing cup
6 - Bolt, 4 of
7 - Housing and motor assembly
8 - Damper
10 - Bearing
11 - Bearing cup
12 - Shim
14 - Pinion nut
15 - Retainer
16 - Flange
17 - Deflector, outer
18 - Deflector, inner
19 - Seal
20 - Bearing
21 - Bearing cup
22 - Breather cap
23 - Breather
24 - Case
25 - Data location
26 - Mounting bush
27 - Bearing
28 - Bearing assembly without race
29 - Bearing cup
30 - Filler plug
31 - Drain plug
32 - Electronic differential assembly
33 - Bolt, 10 of
34 - O ring
35 - Cover
36 - Bolt, 12 of
37 - Temperature sensor
The electronic rear differential has the same functionality as the open rear differential but incorporates a locking
feature.
An electronically controlled multi-plate clutch provides a rear differential lock and torque biasing function to give
improved traction performance and vehicle dynamic stability.
A strategy to electronically control the rear differential multi-plate clutch assembly, has been developed to provide:
a pre-loading function, increasing locking torque with increased driving torque

a slip controller to increase locking torque under off-road conditions and decrease locking-torque for optimum
comfort, for example when parking the vehicle.
The unit receives a torque input from the transfer box output-shaft, which is passed through the unit to two outputs
for the rear drive halfshafts.
The unit detects wheel-slip via various vehicle system inputs to the differential locking module and locks the
differential accordingly.


1 - Actuator
2 - Clutch pack
3 - Differential
The electronic rear differential locking and biasing feature is actuated via a DC motor, which is controlled by the
differential locking module, via a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal.
Multi-plate Clutch Assembly

1 - Pressure disc
2 - Clutch plate assembly
3 - Pressure disc
4 - Thrust race
5 - Output actuator
6 - Actuator balls
7 - Input actuator
9 - Reduction gearset
10 - Actuator motor
The multi-plate clutch assembly for both centre (transfer box) and electronic rear differentials act in a similar way.
The aim of the multi-plate clutch assembly is to prevent excessive differential slip and therefore maximize the
traction performance of the vehicle. This is fundamentally different from the 'braked' traction control, which can only
counter act differential slip when it occurs.
A certain amount of differential slip is required to allow the vehicle to turn corners and to remain stable under
control of the ABS (anti-lock brake system). The transfer box control module monitors the driver's demands through
primary vehicle controls and automatically sets the slip torque at the rear differential via the differential locking
module. The system is completely automatic and does not require any special driver input.
The multi-plate clutch assembly actively controls the torque flow through the rear differential and optimizes the
torque distribution in the driveline. The clutch assembly biases the torque from the differential to the wheels with the
higher grip and prevents the wheels with the lower grip from spinning.
By turning the input actuator disc, via the motor shaft, the output actuator is rotated. This movement acts on 5 balls
in a ramp mechanism between the input and output actuators and gives a defined axial movement. The movement
forces the pressure disc to induce friction between the sun gear and differential case via the clutch plates supported
by the sun gear and the plates supported by the clutch basket on the differential case. This frictional force inhibits the
differential rotation; the differential case and left hand differential side gear are locked together.
Differential Locking Module
The differential locking module controls the multi-plate clutch actuation. The locking module is mounted on a bracket
located on the LH C-pillar, behind the trim.
The module is connected on the high-speed CAN (controller area network) bus and controls the differential operation
using CAN messages from other control modules on the network.
The module uses three connectors for all inputs and outputs. It receives a permanent power supply from the EJB
(engine junction box), and an ignition supply from the CJB (central junction box).
The module memorizes the position of the differential actuator motor when the engine is switched off.
The locking module controls the closed-loop position sensing system within the motor and regulates the power supply
to the motor.
If any of following components are replaced:
differential locking module

differential actuator motor
differential assembly.
An approved diagnostic system must be connected to the vehicle and the differential locking module self-calibration
procedure performed.
If a fault occurs with the electronic differential, the locking module or one of the required input signals, for example;
road speed signal, the locking module records an error code and a warning lamp, in the instrument cluster,
illuminates permanently.
CAN Bus Messages
The high-speed CAN is a broadcast network connected between various vehicle control modules. It allows the fast
exchange of data between control modules every few microseconds.
The differential locking module is connected on the high-speed CAN bus, via the transfer box control module, and
controls differential operation using CAN messages from other control units on the network. Wheel speed, steering
angle, automatic transmission speed, temperature information, vehicle configuration, axle ratios and mode inputs, are
some of the main signals received by the locking module.
The locking module also sends messages via the CAN bus to tell other control modules on the network, the status of
the electronic rear differential. The clutch torque and default mode status are some of the main signals sent out by
the locking module.
The following table shows the messages that can be displayed in the message centre of a high-line instrument cluster
relating to the electronic rear differential:
Message Description Chime

'TRANSMISSION Rear differential temperature has reached or is approaching the overheat threshold. None
OVERHEAT'
'SLOW DOWN'
'TRANSMISSION Transfer box control module has stopped transmitting CAN bus messages. Defaults to None
FAULT' open centre differential.
'TRACTION REDUCED' Message also displayed when fault occurs with electronic rear differential.
'TRANSMISSION Fault has occurred with electronic rear differential. Stop vehicle at earliest opportunity. Single
FAULT'
'STOP SAFELY'
On vehicles fitted with the low line instrument cluster, in place of the message centre there will be a status lamp,
which has the following logic:
Amber - Over temperature

Red - Failure, stop vehicle
DIAGNOSTICS
The electronic rear differential locking module can store fault codes, which can be retrieved using an approved
diagnostic system.
The information is communicated via a diagnostic socket. The diagnostic socket allows the exchange of information
between the various control modules on the bus systems and the diagnostic equipment. The information is
communicated to the socket via the CAN bus. This allows the retrieval of diagnostic information and programming of
certain functions using the diagnostic equipment.
The electronic differential locking module uses DTC (diagnostic trouble code), which relate to electronic rear
differential electrical faults.
ELECTRONIC DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = high-speed CAN bus.

1 - Battery
2 - EJB
3 - CJB
4 - Actuator motor
5 - Oil temperature sensor
6 - Differential locking module
7 - High- speed CAN to other vehicle systems
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential
For a detailed description of the Rear Drive Axle and Differential and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
REFER to: Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Description and Operation).
the donor vehicle.

Visual Inspection
Differential oil leakage power
Sensor installation Fuse(s)
Wiring harness physical damage or water ingress
Loose or corroded electrical connectors
Sensors
Rear differential control module
Symptom Chart
Possible Possible Other

Symptom Message Warnings Possible Causes Action
Running at Rear Driveline overheat Water Visually inspect the wiring harness
reduced differential warning lamp ingress to and connectors for water ingress.
capability with fault illuminated wiring Refer to the warranty policy and
fault present Rear harness or procedures manual if a module is
differential/driveline connectors suspect.
fault warning lamp Reduced
illuminated differential
capability
Differential
increased
tolerances
Internal
fault
Rear
differential
control
module fault
(Rear
differential
control
module)
Rear Rear Driveline overheat Oil level Check for correct oil quantity and
differential Differential warning lamp incorrect specifications. Refer to the relevant
overheat Overheat illuminated Oil level section of the workshop manual.
Slow incorrect
Down specification
Sensor fault
Internal
fault
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Rear Differential Control Module (RDCM) (100-00,
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Draining and Filling
General Procedures
CAUTION: Do not fill the differential with lubricant up to the filler plug. The filler plug is only used to fill the
differential with lubricant, and not to act as a level indicator.
NOTE: The only way to check the fluid level in the differential is to drain all the fluid out and refill with the
correct quantity, shown in the specification section.

2. CAUTION: Do not undo or remove the large

protruding hexagon on the differential casing.
Remove the differential case lubricant filler plug.

Clean the area around the lubricant filler
plug.
3. Drain the differential lubricant.

Clean the area around the drain plug.
Remove the fluid drain plug.
4. CAUTION: There has been 2 different types of fixings used

for the drain plug. Note the type and make sure the correct
torque is applied, see below.
Install the lubricant drain plug.

Clean the drain plug.
Up to differential serial number 254325: Tighten the
hexagonal drive drain plug to 54 Nm (40 lb.ft).
From differential serial number 254326: Tighten the 3/8''
square drive drain plug to 28 Nm (21 lb.ft).
5. CAUTIONS:
There have been 2 different types of fixings used for the

drain plug. Note the type and differential serial number, and
make sure the correct torque is applied, see below.
Make sure the correct specification and quantity of oil is

used.
Fill the differential with the correct amount of lubricant.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (205-02 Rear
Drive Axle/Differential, Specifications).
6. Install the differential filler plug.

Clean the filler plug.
Tighten the filler plug to 34 Nm (25 lb.ft).
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Locking Motor
In-vehicle Repair
Removal

2. Remove the differential locking motor.

Remove the 4 bolts.
3. Remove the 4 bolts.
4. Discard the motor.

5. Check the gear set for damage to the gears.
Installation
1. Clean the component mating faces.
2. Install the new motor with new O ring seal.
3. Install the 4 bolts 12 Nm.
4. Clean the component mating faces and apply

continuous bead of sealant to the motor mating
face on the differential.
5. Install the differential locking motor.

Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm.
7. Calibrate the differential locking motor using the diagnostic tool.

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Axle Oil Temperature Sensor
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Differential Draining and
Filling (205-02, General Procedures).

Release the wiring harness retaining clip.
4. Remove the oil temperature sensor.

Installation
2. Install the oil temperature sensor.


Secure the wiring harness clip.
4. Fill the differential with the correct amount of lubricant.

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Drive Pinion Seal
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Flange holding tool
205-053
Adapter for
205-053
Impulse extractor
100-012(LRT-99-004)
Installer drive pinion oil seal
205-821
Remover drive flange
205-824
Remover drive pinion seal
205-823
Seal installer, adaptor
205-821-01
Removal
CAUTIONS:
The input flange must not be change for one from another unit.
The drive pinion seal must only be renewed for 1 repair.



4. CAUTION: Mark the position of the driveshaft

flange in relation to the drive pinion flange.

pinion flange.
5. Measure the depth of the pinion nut on the pinion

shaft.
Note measurement for installation.
6. CAUTION: This step must be carried out to
make sure that the drive pinion nut is correctly
tightend on assembly.
Accurately scribe a line to mark the drive pinion

shaft to the drive pinion nut and pinion flange.
7. Remove the drive pinion flange retaining nut.

Using the special tool, counter hold the
drive pinion flange.
Note number of turns for installation.
8. Using the special tool, remove the drive pinion

flange.
Check flange seal journal for any damage.

seal.
Installation
1. Clean the drive pinion flange.
2. Clean the drive pinion seal mating faces.
3. Using the special tool, install the new drive pinion

seal.
4. Remove the special tool.
Install special tool 205-821-01 to the seal
face.
5. CAUTION: Make sure adaptor is removed or

damage to the vehicle may occur.
Using the special tool, install the new drive pinion

seal.
Remove the special tools.
6. CAUTION: Make sure the drive pinion flange scribed marks

are aligned.
Install the drive pinion flange.
7. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the mark on the drive pinion nut is

never tightened short of the scribed mark on the
drive pinion shaft.
Make sure the drive pinion flange has no end

float and is free to rotate.
Make sure the scribed mark on the drive

pinion nut is no more than a maximum of 5
degrees past the scribed mark on the drive pinion
shaft.
Install the drive pinion flange retaining nut.

Install nut to previously noted number of
turns.
Measure the depth of the pinion nut on the
pinion shaft.
8. Attach the driveshaft to the rear axle drive flange.


Tighten the bolts and nuts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
10. CAUTION: Make sure the correct specification and quanity

of oil is used.

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Locking Module
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
Specifications).
2. Remove the rear quarter trim panel.

3. Release the parking aid module.

Remove the 2 nuts.
4. Remove the differential locking module.

Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the differential locking module.
Connect and secure the electrical connectors.
2. Install the parking aid module.

3. Install the rear quarter trim panel.


Specifications).
5. Use T4 to calibrate a new differential locking module.

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Assembly
Removal
CAUTION: Do not undo or remove the large protruding hexagon on the differential casing.

3. Remove the exhaust system.

For additional information, refer to: Muffler (309-00 Exhaust
4. Drain the differential fluid.

Filling (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, General
Procedures).
5. Remove the RH halfshaft.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Halfshaft (205-05
Rear Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
6. Remove the LH halfshaft retaining nut.

Discard the nut.

Remove the LH stabilizer bar link and discard the

nuts.
8. Release the LH parking brake cable from the lower

arm.
9. Disconnect the LH toe link.
Remove the bolt.

Release the LH knuckle from the lower arm.

Remove the bolt.
11. Using the special tools, release the LH halfshaft

from the wheel hub.
12. Position a container to collect the oil spillage.
13. Release the LH halfshaft from the differential housing.
14. With assistance, remove the LH halfshaft.

15. CAUTIONS:



flange.
Tie aside.
16. Vehicles with differential locking motor: Disconnect

the 2 electrical connectors.
Release the 2 wiring harness clips.
17. Using a transmission jack, support the differential.

Remove the rear differential.

Remove the 3 bolts.
Disconnect the breather line.
Installation
1. Install the rear differential.
Connect the breather line.
Tighten the front mounting bolt to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).
Tighten the rear mounting bolts to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
2. Vehicles with differential locking motor: Connect the electrical

connectors.
Secure the wiring harness clips.

4. Install the exhaust system.

For additional information, refer to: Muffler (309-00 Exhaust
6. With assistance, install the LH halfshaft.

Open the halfshaft oil seal protector.
Make sure the snap ring is fully engaged and retains the
halfshaft.
7. NOTES:
The oil seal protector is designed to break

into two pieces.
RH illustration shown, LH is similar.
Remove and discard the halfshaft oil seal protector.

Use pull ring to break seal protector as
shown.
8. Using the special tools, install the LH halfshaft in
the wheel hub.

Connect the LH lower arm to the wheel knuckle.

11. Connect the LH toe link.

12. Secure the LH parking brake cable to the lower arm.
13. Install the LH stabilizer bar link.

Tighten the new nuts to 115 Nm (85 lb.ft).
14. Tighten the LH halfshaft retaining nut to 350 Nm (258 lb.ft).

15. Install the RH halfshaft.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Halfshaft (205-05
Rear Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
16. Fill the differential with fluid.

Procedures).

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Housing Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Remover rear differential rear bush
502-009/2
Hydraulic two legged puller
211-294
Adaptor/button
205-825/4
Installer rear differential front bush
205-825/3
Receiver cup rear differential front bush
205-825/5
Bearing Housing
205-825/6
Bearing Set for 16mm Bolt 51203
Remover/Installer long 16mm bolt

205-825/7
Nut for long 16mm bolt
205-825/8
Removal

2. Remove the muffler assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Muffler (309-00, Removal
and Installation).

4. CAUTIONS:



flange.
5. CAUTION: Make sure the weight of the axle is

always supported.
Using a suitable jack, lower the front of the axle.

Remove the axle front retaining bolt.
6. Using the special tools, remove the axle housing
bushing.
Installation
1. Using the special tools, install the axle housing
bushing.
2. CAUTION: Make sure the weight of the axle is always

supported.
Using a suitable jack, raise the front of the differential.

Install the axle front retaining bolt.

Tighten the bolts and nuts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
5. Install the muffler assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Muffler (309-00, Removal
and Installation).
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Axle Housing Support Insulator
Special Tool(s)
502-009/5
Bearing set for 14mm and 16mm bolt, 51203
Receiver cup rear differential rear bush
502-009/1
502-009/2
Installer rear differential rear bush
502-009/3
Removal

3. Remove the rear differential.

For additional information, refer to: Axle Assembly (205-02,
4. NOTE: Take note of the fitted position of the

bush.
Using the special tools, remove the rear axle
housing support insulator.
Installation
1. Using the special tools, install the rear axle
2. Install the rear differential.


Front Drive Axle/Differential -
Lubricants
NOTE: Do not use any lubricant other than that specified
Item Specification
Recommended lubricant Castrol SAF-XO - 75W/90
Capacities
Item Capacity
Front differential 0.61 litres (1.07 pints) (0.64 US quarts)
Front Differential
Item Specification
Reduction ratio:
V8 Petrol engine - 6HP28 Automatic transmission 3.54:1
Oil drain plug 29 21
Oil filler plug 29 21
Differential case mounting bolts:
Front mounting bolt 105 77
* Rear mounting bracket to differential casing bolts
Stage 1 80 59
Front axle crossmember bolts 115 85
** Driveshaft to front axle drive flange Torx bolts:
Stage 1 45 33
* New bolts must be installed
** New patchlok torx bolts must be installed

Front Drive Axle/Differential - Front Drive Axle and Differential
GENERAL

1 - RH front drive halfshaft
2 - Front differential assembly
3 - Front driveshaft
4 - LH front drive halfshaft
The front differential converts the 'angle of drive' through 90° and distributes drive, via the front drive halfshafts, to
the front wheels.
The front differential for the V8 petrol variants utilise the same output ratio, which differs to that used on the TdV6.
The front differential is mounted on the LH side of the chassis.
FRONT DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
Front Differential - Exploded View


1 - Protection cap
2 - Mounting bush assembly
3 - Seal
4 - Bearing assembly
5 - Front tube
6 - Bolt, 4 of
7 - O-ring
8 - Drain plug
9 - Bolt, 14 of
10 - Cover assembly
11 - Cover seal
13 - Bearing preload spacer
14 - Taper roller bearing
15 - Bolt, 10 of
16 - Differential case
17 - Roll pin
21 - Shim
25 - Oil seal
26 - Inner deflector
27 - Outer deflector
28 - Flange
29 - Pinion nut retainer
30 - Pinion nut
32 - Axle mounting bracket
33 - Data label
34 - Breather tube
35 - Cap
36 - Fill plug
37 - Bolt, 3 of
39 - Bearing preload spacer
41 - Thrust washer
42 - Planet gear
43 - Shaft
44 - Sunwheel
45 - Thrust washer
The casing comprises two halves with machined mating faces. When assembled, the cast iron casing halves are
sealed with a thin film of Loctite 5999 sealant and secured together with fourteen bolts. A breather tube is fitted to
the casings. This allows a plastic tube to be fitted and routed to a high point in the engine compartment, preventing
the ingress of water when the vehicle is wading.
The RH casing is fitted with a drain plug. The front differential unit contains approximately 0.7 litre of oil for a dry fill.
The differential is a conventional design using a hypoid gear layout. This employs a hypoid bevel pinion gear and
crown wheel, with the pinion offset above the centre line of the crown wheel. This design allows for a larger pinion
gear to be used, which has the advantages of increased gear strength and reduced operating noise.
The front differential is available in two ratios. V8 petrol engine vehicles use a front differential with a final drive ratio
of 3.73:1 and TdV6 diesel engine vehicles use a final drive ratio of 3.54:1. Changing the number of teeth between
the crown-wheel drive gear and pinion gear changes the ratio.
The differential comprises a pinion shaft and hypoid bevel gear, a crown wheel drive gear with an integral cage,
which houses two planet gears. Two sunwheels are also located in the cage and pass the rotational drive to the drive
shaft shafts.
The pinion shaft is mounted on two opposed taper roller bearings with a collapsable spacer located between them.
The spacer is used to hold the bearings in alignment and also collapses under the pressure applied to the pinion nut.
This allows the nut to be tightened to a predetermined torque, which collapses the spacer, setting the correct bearing
preload.
The pinion shaft has an externally splined outer end which accepts and locates the input flange, which is retained by
the pinion nut. The opposite end of the output flange has an internal spline which provides positive location for the
front propeller shaft. The flange has an external O-ring seal, which seals against the front propeller shaft shroud
preventing the ingress of dirt and moisture into the splines. An oil seal is pressed into the LH casing and seals the
input flange to the differential unit. The pinion shaft has a hypoid bevel gear at its inner end which mates with the
crown wheel drive gear.
The crown wheel drive gear is located on the carrier and secured with ten bolts. The carrier is mounted on taper
roller bearings located in each casing half. The bearings are press fitted into the casing and a spacer is located on the
outside face to set backlash and apply preload to the bearing.
The carrier is fitted with a shaft onto which the two planet gears are mounted. The shaft is secured in the carrier with
a roll pin. The sunwheels are located in pockets within the carrier and mesh with the planet gears. Thrust washers
are located between the carrier and the sunwheels and hold the sunwheels in mesh with the planet gears. Each
sunwheel has a machined, splined, bore to accept the drive shaft. A groove is machined in the bore to locate the
snap ring fitted to the drive shaft, providing positive drive shaft location.
Differential Operation
The operating principles of the front and rear differentials are the same. Rotational input from the drive shaft is
passed via the input flange to the pinion shaft and pinion gear. The angles of the pinion gear to the crown wheel
drive gear moves the rotational direction through 90°.
The transferred rotational motion is now passed to the crown wheel drive gear, which in turn rotates the carrier. The
shaft, which is secured to the carrier, also rotates at the same speed as the carrier. The planet gears, which are
mounted on the shaft, also rotate with the carrier. In turn, the planet gears transfer their rotational motion to the left
and right hand sunwheels, rotating the drive shafts.
When the vehicle is moving in a forward direction, the torque applied through the differential to each sunwheel is
equal. In this condition both drive shafts rotate at the same speed. The planet gears do not rotate and effectively
lock the sunwheels to the carrier.
If the vehicle is turning, the outer wheel will be forced to rotate faster than the inner wheel by having a greater
distance to travel. The differential senses the torque difference between the sunwheels. The planet gears rotate on
their axes to allow the outer wheel to rotate faster than the inner one.
SERVICE
The oil used in the front differential is Castrol SAF-XO. The oil contains unique additives, which enhance the
differentials operation. No other oil must be used in the front differential.
Front Differential Serviceable Components
Halfshaft seals
Needle roller bearing assemblies
Chassis bush/fixings
Lubricant.
Front Drive Axle/Differential - Front Drive Axle

Front Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Draining and Filling
General Procedures
CAUTION: Do not fill the differential with lubricant up to the filler plug. The filler plug is only used to fill the
differential with lubricant, not to act as a level indicator.
NOTE: The only way to check the fluid level in the differential is to drain all the fluid out and refill with the
correct quantity, shown in the specification section.


3. Remove the differential case lubricant filler plug.

Clean the area around the lubricant filler
plug.

Clean the area around the drain plug.
Remove the fluid drain plug.
5. CAUTION: There have been 2 different types of fixings

used for the drain plug. Note the type and differential serial
number, and make sure the correct torque is applied, see
below.
Install the lubricant drain plug.

Clean the drain plug.
Up to differential serial number 254845: Tighten the
hexagonal drive drain plug to 54 Nm (40 lb.ft).
From differential serial number 254846: Tighten the 3/8''
square drive drain plug to 28 Nm (21 lb.ft).
6. CAUTION: Do not fill the differential with lubricant up to

the filler plug. The filler plug is only used to fill the differential
with lubricant, not to act as a level indicator.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (205-03 Front
Drive Axle/Differential, Specifications).
7. Install the differential filler plug.
Tighten the filler plug to 34 Nm (25 lb.ft).

Front Drive Axle/Differential - Drive Pinion Seal
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Flange holding tool
205-053
Remover drive flange
205-824
Installer - drive pinion oil seal
205-820
Impulse extractor
100-012(LRT-99-004)
Removal
CAUTION: The drive pinion seal must only be renewed once.



For additional information, refer to: Front Driveshaft - 5.0L
(205-01, Removal and Installation) /
Front Driveshaft - 3.6L (TdV8) Diesel (205-01, Removal and
Installation) /
Front Driveshaft - 3.0L Diesel (205-01, Removal and
Installation).
4. Measure the depth of the pinion nut on the pinion

shaft.
Note measurement for installation.
5. CAUTION: This step must be carried out to
make sure that the drive pinion nut is correctly
tightend on assembly.
Accurately scribe a line to mark the drive pinion

shaft to the drive pinion nut and pinion flange.
6. Remove the drive pinion flange retaining nut.

Discard the drive pinion nut retainer.
7. CAUTION: Make sure only a bolt is used with

the special tool, to draw the drive pinion flange off
the drive pinion shaft.
Using the special tool, remove the drive pinion

flange.
seal.
Installation
1. Clean the drive pinion flange.
2. Clean the drive pinion seal mating faces.
3. Using the special tool, install the new drive pinion

seal.
4. CAUTION: Make sure the drive pinion flange scribed marks

are aligned.
Install the drive pinion flange.
5. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the mark on the drive pinion nut is

never tightened short of the scribed mark on the
drive pinion shaft.
Make sure the drive pinion flange has no end

float and is free to rotate.
Make sure the scribed mark on the drive

pinion nut is no more than a maximum of 5
degrees past the scribed mark on the drive pinion
shaft.
Install the drive pinion flange retaining nut.

Install nut to previously noted number of
turns.
Measure the depth of the pinion nut on the
pinion shaft.
6. Install the front driveshaft.

For additional information, refer to: Front Driveshaft - 5.0L
(205-01, Removal and Installation) /
Front Driveshaft - 3.6L (TdV8) Diesel (205-01, Removal and
Installation) /
Front Driveshaft - 3.0L Diesel (205-01, Removal and
Installation).
7. CAUTION: Make sure the correct specification and quanity

of oil is used.

Front Drive Axle/Differential - Front Axle Housing Support Insulator
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Bearing Housing
502-009/6
Bearing set for 14mm bolt 51204
Installer rear axle front bush
205-825/3
502-009/2
502-009/5
502-009/4
Receiver cup front axle front bush
205-825/1
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure the bush is correctly aligned.

3. Remove the front differential.


bush.
Using the special tools, remove the front axle

Installation

aligned.
Using the special tools, install the front axle

2. Install the front differential.

Front Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Tube
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Front Halfshaft RH (205-04
Front Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the axle tube.

Remove the bolt from the bushing.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Rotate and remove the axle tube.
Early models: Remove and discard the O-
ring seal.
Later models: Remove the sealant.
Installation
1. Install the axle tube.
Early models: Install a new O-ring seal.
Later models: Apply sealant to the mating face.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (205-
03, Specifications).
Tighten the 4 axle tube bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb.ft).
Tighten the axle tube bushing bolt to 63 Nm (46 lb.ft).

For additional information, refer to: Front Halfshaft RH (205-04
Front Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Assembly
Special Tool(s)
205-754(LRT-54-027)
204-703
204-705
Removal
All vehicles

stands.

For additional information, refer to: Axle Tube (205-03 Front
Drive Axle/Differential, In-vehicle Repair).
4. Remove the LH splash shield.

Remove the 4 clips.
5. Release the LH stabilizer bar link.

6. Release the LH brake hose bracket from the wheel
knuckle.
Remove the bolt.

Using the special tool, release the LH tie-rod end

ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
8. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the ball joint seal is not damaged.

A damaged seal will lead to the premature failure
of the joint.
The lower arm ball joint can be damaged by

excessive articulation. The wheel knuckle must be
fully supported at all times. Do not allow the wheel
knuckle to hang on the lower arm. Failure to
follow this instruction will result in damage to
vehicle.
Using the special tool, release the LH upper arm

ball joint.
9. Release the LH halfshaft from the axle assembly.

Using a suitable tie strap, support the LH
halfshaft.
10. CAUTIONS:



flange.
discard the bolts.
Using a suitable tie strap, secure the
driveshaft end plate.

Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the clamp.
Remove the stabilizer bar bushing.
Vehicles with diesel engine

12. Release the fuel cooler.
Remove the bolt.
Vehicles with 5.0L engine

13. Release the automatic transmission fluid cooler.
Remove the 4 bolts.
14. Remove the transmission fluid cooler mounting
bracket.
Release the transmission fluid cooler pipe
bracket.
Remove the nut.
Remove the 3 bolts.
All vehicles
Remove the 4 bolts.
16. CAUTION: Before the disconnection or
removal of any components, make sure the area
around joint faces and connections are clean. Plug
any open connections to prevent contamination.
Disconnect the breather line.

Release the clip.
17. Using a transmission jack, support the front axle assembly.
18. With assistance, remove the front axle assembly.

Remove and discard the 3 axle assembly
rear mounting bolts.
Remove the front axle assembly front
mounting bolt.
Installation
All vehicles
1. With assistance, install the front axle assembly.
With assistance, raise and manoeuvre the front final
drive unit.
Tighten the 3 new bolts in the front axle assembly to 80
Nm (59 lb.ft), then a further 60 degrees.
Tighten the front axle assembly front mounting bolt to
105 Nm (77 lb.ft).
2. Connect the breather line.


4. Install the transmission fluid cooler mounting bracket.
Tighten the 3 bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft.).
Secure the transmission fluid cooler coolant pipe to the
coolant hose bracket.
Tighten the nut to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).
5. Install the automatic transmission fluid cooler.
Tighten the 4 bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft.).
Vehicles with diesel engine

6. Secure the fuel cooler.

7. Install the stabilizer bar bushing.
Install the clamp.
Install the bolts.
All vehicles
8. NOTE: Make sure that new bolts are installed.

9. Install a new snap ring to the LH halfshaft.

10. NOTE: Do not fully engage the halfshaft until the

oil seal protector has been removed.
Secure the LH halfshaft in the axle assembly.

1. Open the halfshaft seal protector and install
the halfshaft.
2. Release the halfshaft seal protector from the
halfshaft seal.
3. Remove the halfshaft seal protector.
4. Fully install the halfshaft.
11. WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is installed.
Secure the LH upper arm to the wheel knuckle.

12. WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is installed.
Secure the LH tie-rod end ball joint to the wheel knuckle.

13. Secure the LH brake hose bracket to the wheel knuckle.

14. Secure the LH stabilizer bar link.
15. Install the LH splash shield.

Install the clips.

For additional information, refer to: Axle Tube (205-03 Front
Drive Axle/Differential, In-vehicle Repair).
17. If a new differential is installed, fill with the recommended fluid.

Filling (205-03 Front Drive Axle/Differential, General
Procedures).

Front Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Carrier Bushing
Special Tool(s)
205-825/3
Receiver cup rear differential front bush
205-825/5
502-009/2
Removal

2. Remove the exhaust system.

For additional information, refer to: Exhaust System (309-00C,
Removal and Installation) /
Exhaust System - Vehicles Without: Diesel Particulate Filter
(DPF) (309-00B, Removal and Installation) /
Exhaust System (309-00A, Removal and Installation).
3. Using a jack, support the axle assembly.
4. Remove the axle carrier bushing heat shield.

Remove the two retaining bolts.
5. CAUTION: The bolts must only be used once.
Remove the axle carrier.

Remove and discard the three bolts
retaining the axle carrier to the axle.
Remove the axle carrier bushing bolt.

bush.
Using the special tools, remove the axle carrier

bushing.
Installation

aligned.
Using the special tools, install the axle carrier

bushing.
2. Install the axle carrier.

Tighten the M14 bolt to 105 Nm (77 lb.ft).
Tighten the new axle carrier bracket bolts to 80 Nm (59
lb.ft), then a further 60 degrees.
3. Install the axle carrier bushing heat shield.

4. Remove the axle support.
5. Install the exhaust system.

For additional information, refer to: Exhaust System (309-00C,
Removal and Installation) /
Exhaust System - Vehicles Without: Diesel Particulate Filter
(DPF) (309-00B, Removal and Installation) /
Exhaust System (309-00A, Removal and Installation).
Front Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Tube Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Remover/installer - Front axle extension support bush
308-625/1
308-625/2
308-625/3
Removal
Specifications).

For additional information, refer to: Axle Tube (205-03, In-
vehicle Repair).
Using the special tools, remove the bushing.

Installation
Using the special tools, install the bushing.

For additional information, refer to: Axle Tube (205-03, In-
vehicle Repair).

Specifications).
Front Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Cover Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Bearing Housing
502-009/6
Bearing set for 14mm bolt
51204
205-825/3
502-009/2
502-009/5
502-009/4
Receiver cup front axle front bush
205-825/1
Removal

3. Remove the front differential.


bush.
Using the special tools, remove the front axle

Installation

aligned.
Using the special tools, install the front axle

2. Install the front differential.

Front Drive Halfshafts -
Item Specification
Type Fully floating, fixed length, solid shafts incorporating constant velocity joints at each end of shaft
Item Specification
Outboard joint Use grease supplied with replacement boot kit (Optimol MS139G)
Inboard joint Use grease supplied with replacement boot kit (1 Luber C MS132G)
* Stabilizer bar link nuts - vehicles with Dynamic Response 175 129
* Upper arm to wheel knuckle nut 70 52
* Tie rod end ball joint nut 76 56
Brake hose retaining bracket to wheel knuckle bolt 25 18
*+ Halfshaft retaining nut 230 169

Front Drive Halfshafts - Front Drive Halfshafts
Front Drive Halfshaft Component Location

GENERAL
The front drive shafts are handed components with the RH drive shaft being longer than the LH drive shaft. Both
shafts are of similar construction with Constant Velocity (CV) joints at each end to allow for steering and suspension
movement.
FRONT DRIVE HALFSHAFT ASSEMBLY


1 - RH outer CV joint
3 - RH inner CV joint
4 - LH inner CV joint
6 - LH outer CV joint
The front drive shafts are similar in their construction. The only difference is the lengths of each shaft, the RH drive
shaft is a longer shaft with an extended stem.
The outer CV joints have a target wheel on the outer diameter. This is used by the ABS wheel speed sensor for
vehicle and wheel speed calculations.
Each drive shaft comprises two CV joints (inner and outer), boots, an outer tube and a solid barshaft, which is
retained in the front differential by a circlip (see 'Halfshaft Joint' section for more information on CV joints).
Front Drive Halfshafts - Halfshaft Joint
Front Drive Halfshaft – Sectional Views

A - Front outboard halfshaft joint
B - Front inboard halfshaft joint
C - Rear outboard halfshaft joint
D - Rear inboard halfshaft joint
The outboard and rear inboard CV joints are of the Birfield design. This design uses longitudinal, elliptical grooves,
which retain six steel balls. A cage further retains the balls. Constant velocity is achieved by the position of the steel
balls. If a centre line is drawn through the balls and the driven hub or differential shaft, the two centre lines always
bisect each other at the angle of drive. This condition allows the rotational speed of the driven shaft to be passed to
the driven hub or differential shaft with no loss of rotational speed regardless of the shaft angle. The CV joints are
packed with grease, which is retained in the joint by a synthetic rubber gaiter. The gaiter is retained at each end by
a metal clamp, which provides a watertight seal to prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture. The CV joints are
retained on their respective shaft or tube by an internal snap ring. The snap rings are located in a groove on each
shaft or tube end and locate in a mating groove in the CV joint.
CAUTION: The inner hub is not retained in the joint body on this type of joint. The joint is held together in its
unfitted state only by the boot. Pulling on the barshaft can therefore pull the hub out of the joint body. For this
reason care must be taken when handling and fitting the front driveshafts.
The shaft is a sliding fit inside the outer tube, which allows for the small length changes, which occur with
articulation of the suspension. The shaft is located in a ball cage, which is retained inside the outer tube. The ball
cage ensures that the shaft is held rigidly in the outer tube whilst allowing it to freely move in and out of the tube as
necessary. A sealing plug is pressed into the outer tube and retains grease around the balls in the cage.
The inner CV joints are similar in design and operation to the outer joints except that the inner joints use rollers
rather than balls to transmit the drive.


A - Inner CV joint
B - Outer CV joint
1 - Tulip outer race
2 - Trunions (3 of)
3 - Spider
4 - Rollers (3 of)
5 - Outer race
6 - Steel balls (6 of)
7 - Cage
8 - Inner race
The front inboard joint is a 'tripode joint', having three 'feet' or 'podes'. The torque is transmitted from the outer race
to the connecting shaft by means of rollers running on needle rollers around the trunions of the tripode spider. The
roller tracks of the outer race enable the tripode assembly to move angularly and axially within the joint.
The inner CV joint shaft is splined and mates with splines in the front differential. There is no internal retaining
mechanism for this type of joint so care must be taken during service as the shaft and CV joint can separate.
Front Drive Halfshafts - Front Drive Halfshafts

Front Drive Halfshafts - Front Halfshaft LH
Special Tool(s)
205-754(LRT-54-027)
204-506/1(LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/3(LRT-60-030/3)
Halfshaft installer adapter (L319 up to VIN 671700, L320 up to VIN 810673)
204-506-01(LRT-60-030/4)
Halfshaft installer adapter (L319 from VIN 671701, L320 from VIN 810674)
JLR-204-506-01
204-506/5(LRT-60-030/5)
Axle oil seal remover
308-005(LRT-37-004/2)
Impulse extractor
100-012(LRT-99-004)
Installer/Guide halfshaft oil seal
308-626/2
Installer halfshaft oil seal
308-626/1
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Do not store or install halfshafts with joints at maximum articulation or damage may occur to the joint.
Do not allow halfshafts to hang unsupported at one end or joint damage will occur.
Angularly Adjusted Roller (AAR) joints, used at the inboard end of some halfshafts have no internal retaining
mechanism and can separate.


Procedures).

Discard the nut.

Disconnect the RH stabilizer bar link.



knuckle.
Remove the bolt.

Using the special tool, release the tie-rod end ball

Discard the nut.

knuckle.

Using the special tool, release the upper arm ball

joint.
12. CAUTIONS:

vehicle.
Do not use a hammer to detach the halfshaft

from the hub assembly, failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the halfshaft.

the wheel hub.
13. Release the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle.
14. Release the halfshaft from the differential housing.
15. Remove the halfshaft.

Raise the stabilizer bar to allow removal of
the halfshaft.

halfshaft oil seal.
Installation
2. Using the special tools, install a new halfshaft oil

seal.
The halfshaft oil seal protector must be left
in place, until the halfshaft is fully installed.
3. CAUTION: Do not fully engage the halfshaft

until the oil seal protector has been removed.
NOTE: The oil seal protector is designed to

break into two pieces.
Install the halfshaft.

Lubricate the seal and the bearing running
surfaces with clean axle oil.
Partially install the halfshaft.
Remove and discard the halfshaft oil seal
protector.
Make sure the snap ring is fully engaged
and retains the halfshaft.
4. CAUTIONS:

vehicle.
Use tool 204-506-01(LRT-60-030/4) for L319

up to VIN 671700, L320 up to VIN 810673. Use
tool number JLR-204-506-01 for L319 from VIN
671701, L320 from VIN 810674. Failure to follow
this instruction will result in damage to vehicle.
Using the special tools, install the halfshaft in the

wheel hub.




10. Secure the RH stabilizer link.

component.



with lubricant, and not to act as a level indicator.

Procedures).
Front Drive Halfshafts - Front Halfshaft RH
Special Tool(s)
205-754(LRT-54-027)
204-506/1(LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/3(LRT-60-030/3)
204-506-01(LRT-60-030/4)
204-506/5(LRT-60-030/5)
308-005(LRT-37-004/2)
Impulse extractor
100-012(LRT-99-004)

308-626/2
308-626/1
Halfshaft bearing installer
205-819
Removal
CAUTIONS:


Procedures).

Discard the nut.

Disconnect the stabilizer bar link.


knuckle.
Remove the bolt.

Using the special tool, release the tie-rod end ball

Discard the nut.

knuckle.

Using the special tool, release the upper arm ball

joint.
12. CAUTIONS:

vehicle.
Do not use a hammer to detach the halfshaft

from the hub assembly, failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the halfshaft.

the wheel hub.
13. Release the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle.
16. CAUTION: Keep the halfshaft horizontal to

avoid damaging the oil seal.
Remove the halfshaft.

Raise the stabilizer bar to allow removal of
the halfshaft.

halfshaft oil seal.
Installation

seal.
3. NOTE: Do not fully engage the halfshaft until the oil seal
protector has been removed.
Install the halfshaft.

Lubricate the seal and the bearing running surfaces with
clean axle oil.
halfshaft.
4. NOTE: The oil seal protector is designed to


5. CAUTION: The lower arm ball joint can be
damaged by excessive articulation. The wheel
knuckle must be fully supported at all times. Do
not allow the wheel knuckle to hang on the lower
arm. Failure to follow this instruction will result in
damage to vehicle.
Using the special tools, install the halfshaft in the

wheel hub.



11. Secure the LH stabilizer link.

component.




Procedures).
Front Drive Halfshafts - Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Front Halfshaft LH (205-04
4. Clamp the halfshaft in a vise.
5. Remove and discard the CV joint boot retaining

clamps.
6. Slide the CV joint boot along the halfshaft to gain access to the
joint.
7. Using a drift against the inner part of the CV joint,

remove the CV joint from the halfshaft.
8. Remove the outer CV joint boot.
Installation
2. Install the CV joint boot.
3. Install the outer CV joint.

Position the CV joint on the halfshaft, press the snap
ring into it's groove and push the CV joint fully on to the
halfshaft.
Pull on the CV joint to ensure the snap ring has fully
engaged.
4. Pack the CV joint with the grease supplied.

5. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the CV boot is not pushed too far

onto the drive shaft and the recess is exposed,
failure to follow this instruction may result in
After the clamps have been secured do not

adjust them, failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the component.
Install the CV joint boot to the CV joint.

Using a suitable tool, secure the CV joint
boot with the new clamps.
6. Install the halfshaft.


Front Drive Halfshafts - Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint
Removal



clamps.
joint.

Installation

halfshaft.
engaged.

5. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the CV boot is not pushed too far

onto the drive shaft and the recess is exposed,
failure to follow this instruction may result in
After the clamps have been secured do not

adjust them, failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the component.
Install the CV joint boot to the CV joint.

Using a suitable tool, secure the CV joint
boot with the new clamps.


Front Drive Halfshafts - Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Halfshaft LH (205-04,

clamps.
6. Slide the CV joint boot along the halfshaft to gain

access to the joint.

8. Remove the inner joint boot.
Installation
2. Install the inner joint boot.
3. Install the inner joint.

Install a new snap ring.
halfshaft.
engaged.
4. Pack the joint with the grease supplied.
5. Install the CV joint boot to the CV joint.

Secure with the new clamps.


Front Drive Halfshafts - Halfshaft Seal LH
Special Tool(s)
Ball joint separator (LRT-54-027)
205-754
Halfshaft remover/replacer (LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/1
204-506/3
204-506-01
Retainers - halfshaft remover/replacer (LRT-60-030/5)
204-506/5
Axle oil seal remover (LRT-37-004/2)
308-005
Impulse extractor (LRT-99-004)
100-012

308-626/2
308-626/1
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Do not store or install halfshafts with joints at maximum articulation or damage may occur to the joint

2. Remove the LH halfshaft.


halfshaft oil seal.
Installation
seal.
2. Install the LH halfshaft.

Front Drive Halfshafts - Halfshaft Seal RH
Special Tool(s)
Ball joint separator (LRT-54-027)
205-754
204-506/1
204-506/3
204-506-01
Retainers - halfshaft remover/replacer (LRT-60-030/5)
204-506/5
Axle oil seal remover (LRT-37-004/2)
308-005
Impulse extractor (LRT-99-004)
100-012

308-626/2
308-626/1
Removal
CAUTIONS:


For additional information, refer to: Halfshaft RH (205-04,

halfshaft oil seal.
Installation
seal.

For additional information, refer to: Halfshaft RH (205-04,
Rear Drive Halfshafts -
Item Specification
Outboard joint Use grease supplied with replacement boot kit (Optimol MS139G)
Inboard joint Use grease supplied with replacement boot kit (Thermax MS141G )
Item Specification
Type Fully floating, solid shafts incorporating plunging constant velocity joint at inboard end and fixed constant
velocity joint at outboard end of shaft
* Lower arm to wheel knuckle nut 275 203
Road wheel nuts Stage 1: 4 Stage 1: -

Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Drive Halfshafts
Rear Drive Halfshaft Component Locations

GENERAL
The rear drive halfshafts are identical in their construction with a Constant Velocity (CV) joint at each end to allow for
suspension movement.
REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY


1 - RH outer CV joint
3 - RH inner CV joint
4 - LH inner CV joint
6 - LH outer CV joint
Each outer CV joint has a target wheel on the outer diameter. The ABS wheel speed sensor for vehicle and wheel
speed calculations uses this target.
Each rear drive halfshaft comprises two CV joints (inner and outer), boots and a solid barshaft, which is retained in
the rear differential by a circlip.
The CV joints used on the rear drive halfshafts share the same design and operating principles as the front drive
halfshafts CV joints (see 'Halfshaft Joint' section for more information on CV joints). Peening over the lip of the joint
body retains the rear drive halfshaft inner joint hubs.
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Drive Halfshafts

Rear Drive Halfshafts - Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Halfshaft (205-05, Removal
and Installation).

clamps.
joint.

Installation

halfshaft.
engaged.
5. Install the CV joint boot to the CV joint.


and Installation).

Rear Drive Halfshafts - Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal


and Installation).

clamps.
joint.

8. Remove the inner CV joint boot.
Installation
2. Install the inner CV joint boot.
3. Install the inner joint.

Install a new snap ring.
halfshaft.
engaged.
4. Pack the joint with the grease supplied.
5. Install the boot to the joint.


and Installation).

Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Halfshaft
Special Tool(s)
204-506/1(LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/5(LRT-60-030/5)
204-506/3(LRT-60-030/3)
204-506-01(LRT-60-030/4)
308-005(LRT-37-004/2)
Impulse extractor
100-012(LRT-99-004)
308-626/1

308-626/2
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Do not undo or remove the large protruding hexagon on the differential casing.


Procedures).

Discard the nut.
5. Remove the stabilizer bar link.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Stabilizer Bar Link
(204-02 Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).
6. Release the parking brake cable from the lower

arm.
Remove the bolt.
8. Remove and discard the halfshaft retaining nut.


Remove the bolt.

halfshaft.

the wheel hub.
13. With assistance, remove the halfshaft.


halfshaft oil seal.
Installation

seal.
3. With assistance, install the halfshaft.

halfshaft.
4. NOTE: The oil seal protector is designed to


wheel hub.


Tighten the new nut to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).

9. Secure the parking brake cable to the lower arm.
10. Install the stabilizer bar link.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Stabilizer Bar Link
(204-02 Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).
component.


shown:
1. 1. Stage 1: 4 Nm
2. 2. Stage 2: 70 Nm
3. 3. Stage 3: 140 Nm


Procedures).
Brake System - General Information -
Brake Hydraulic Fluid
Item Specification
* Recommended hydraulic fluid SHELL DONAX YB DOT4 ESL FLUID
CAUTION: * If the above fluid is not available, use a low viscosity DOT 4 brake fluid meeting ISO 4925 Class 6
and Land Rover LRES22BF03 requirements.
Item Specification
Footbrake type:
Vehicles without Hydraulic, servo assisted, self-adjusting with front/rear split hydraulic system, twin piston sliding
Brembo brakes calipers to the front and single piston sliding calipers to the rear
Vehicles with Hydraulic, servo assisted, self-adjusting with front/rear split hydraulic system, opposed six
Brembo brakes piston calipers to the front and single piston sliding calipers to the rear
Parking brake type Twin shoe (leading/trailing) operating on rear wheels and controlled from park brake lever in
floor console via twin cables
Brake System - General Information - Brake System
For a detailed description of the Brake System and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
of the workshop manual.REFER to:
Front Disc Brake (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Description and Operation),
Rear Disc Brake (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Description and Operation),
Parking Brake (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Description and Operation),
Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Description and Operation),
Brake Booster (206-07 Power Brake Actuation, Description and Operation),
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control (206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control, Description and Operation).
the donor vehicle.


Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Brake pad(s) condition and installation
Brake caliper(s) condition and installation
Brake disc(s) condition and installation
Parking brake disc(s)/parking brake drum(s) condition and installation
Parking brake shoes condition and installation
Parking brake cable(s) condition and installation
Brake booster condition and installation
Brake booster vacuum hose condition and installation
Brake master cylinder condition and installation
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
Brake fluid leaks
Brake warning indicator
Symptom Chart
Brake noise Debris Inspect for debris, remove as necessary. Check for excessive brake
Brake pads pad wear. Check for brake disc damage.
Brake disc(s)
Brake vibration Suspension Check for worn or damaged suspension components. Check for brake
components disc distortion or runout.
Brake disc(s)
Excessive brake pedal Brake pads Worn pads may make the pedal travel excessive, new pads may make
travel/brake pedal Air in the the pedal spongy. Check after bedding in the pads. Check the pedal
spongy brake system travel. If the pedal "pumps-up", suspect air in the system. Check for a
Brake master cause for air ingress, rectify as necessary. If the pedal sinks to the
cylinder floor when held under pressure when there are no external leaks,
Brake fluid suspect a master cylinder fault. Refer to the relevant section of the
leak (see workshop manual.
visual
inspection)
Excessive brake pedal Brake pipe(s) Check for damaged brake pipes. Check the brake calipers. Check the
effort/brake pedal Brake caliper brake vacuum pipe for air leaks, rectify as necessary. Check the brake
hard slide(s) vacuum pump operation. Refer to the relevant section of the
Brake caliper workshop manual. Check the brake booster.
piston(s)
Brake vacuum
pipe
Brake vacuum
pump
Brake booster
Low foot brake Brake pipe(s) Check the vehicle for damaged brake pipes. Inspect the brake pads.
efficiency/brakes Pads Check the brake calipers. Check the brake discs. Refer to the relevant
pulling/sticking/binding Brake caliper section of the workshop manual.
piston(s)
Brake caliper
slide(s)
Brake disc(s)
Parking brake will not Parking brake Check the parking brake cable(s) for operation/condition. Check that
engage or release cables the cable end connector(s) are correctly installed to the operating
Low parking brake Parking brake lever(s). Inspect the parking brake shoes for wear. Check the parking
efficiency/parking shoes brake shoes for correct adjustment. Check the rear brake
brake sticking/binding Parking brake disc(s)/parking brake drum(s). Check the parking brake actuator for
adjusters damage and/or excessive noise in normal operation. Refer to the
Rear brake relevant section of the workshop manual.
disc(s)/parking
brake drum(s)
Parking brake
actuator
malfunction
Brake warning Brake Check the brake fluid level, top up if required. Inspect the brake pads.
indicator staying reservoir fluid Check the brake pad sensor circuit. Refer to the electrical guides.
illuminated level Check the function of the brake fluid level sensor. Refer to the
Brake pads relevant section of the workshop manual.
Brake pad
wear sensor
leads
Brake fluid
level sensor
DTC Index
Brake System - General Information - Front Brake Disc Runout
Check Vehicles Without: High Performance Brakes
General Procedures
NOTES:

stands.
Raise the front of the vehicle.

4. CAUTION: Brake discs must be renewed in

pairs, unless one disc requires changing before
1000 miles (1600 kilometers) from new.
At 4 points around disc, measure disc thisckness

using a micrometer; renew disc if less than service
limit or if variation is exceeded: Disc thickness,
NEW 30 mm, Service limit = 27 mm. Thickness
variation maximum = 0.01.
5. Mount a Dial Test Indicator (DTI) to and secure to

inboard side of hub using caliper assembly upper
bolt hole
6. Position DTI probe 5 mm in from outer edge of disc.
7. Install spacer washers under the wheel nuts.

Tighten the road wheel nuts to 140 Nm
(103 Ib.ft).
8. Zero DTI and rotate road wheel one complete revolution to

measure disc runout. Disc runout must not exceed 0.05 mm
(0.002 in).
9. If disc runout is outside limits:
10. Remove the wheel hub nuts.

Remove the spacers.
11. Remove Allen screw securing brake disc to drive flange.
13. Ensure mating surfaces of disc and drive flange are clean.


Tighten the road wheel nuts to 140 Nm (103 Ib.ft).
16. Check disc runout as detailed above.
17. If runout is still outside limits, renew disc and/or hub.

Remove the spacers.
19. Remove the DTI.
20. Install the brake caliper and tighten the bolts. TORQUE: 275
Nm
21. Install the road wheel(s) and tighten nuts to 140Nm (103 lb-ft).
22. Depress brake pedal several times to set brake pads.

Brake System - General Information - Front Brake Disc Runout
Check Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
General Procedures
NOTES:

stands.

4. CAUTION: Brake discs must be renewed in

pairs, unless one disc requires changing before
1000 miles (1600 kilometers) from new.
At 4 points around disc, measure disc thickness

NEW 34 mm, Service limit 31 mm. Thickness
variation maximum = 0.01 mm
5. Mount a Dial Test Indicator (DTI) to and secure to

bolt hole

Tighten the road wheel nuts to 140 Nm
(103 Ib.ft).

measure disc runout. Disc runout must not exceed 0.05 mm
(0.002 in).

Remove the spacers.


Tighten the road wheel nuts to 140 Nm (103 Ib.ft).

Remove the spacers.
19. Remove the DTI.
20. Install the brake caliper and tighten the bolts to 275 Nm (203
lb.ft)
21. Install the road wheel(s) and tighten nuts to 140Nm (103 lb-ft).

Brake System - General Information - Rear Brake Disc Runout Check
General Procedures
NOTES:
It is not necessary to carry out the parking brake shoe 'bedding-in procedure' if the rear brake discs or parking
brake shoes have been removed for access to other components.
1. CAUTION: Do not turn the ignition on when the parking

brake service mode has been set, this will result in the parking
brake being released from the service mode.
Enter the parking brake into the service mode.

Turn the ignition on.
Apply, and hold, the footbrake.
Apply, and hold, the parking brake switch to the
RELEASE position.
Turn the ignition off.
Release the footbrake.
Release the parking brake switch.

stands.
Raise rear of vehicle.
3. Remove road wheel.
4. CAUTION: The brake pad wear indicator

sensor is easily damaged. Do not use a lever to
remove the sensor. Use fingers only.
RH side rear only: Disconnect the brake pad wear

indicator sensor lead.
5. Remove 2 bolts securing brake caliper to hub.

Release caliper from hub and tie aside.
6. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may
occur, but the essential information is always
correct.
At 4 points around the disc, measure disc thickness

NEW = 20 mm Service limit = 18 mm. Thickness
variation maximum = 0.01 mm.

correct.
Mount a Dial Test Indicator (DTI) to and secure to

bolt hole.

correct.

Install spacer washers under the wheel
nuts.
10. Zero DTI and rotate wheel one complete revolution to measure
disc runout. Disc runout must not exceed 0.09 mm (0.003 in).

Remove the spacer washers.
14. Remove brake disc.

17. Tighten the wheel nuts to 140 Nm (103 lb.ft).

Install spacer washers under the wheel nuts.

Remove the spacer washers.
21. Remove the DTI.
22. Install the brake caliper anchor bolts

23. Tighten the wheel nuts to 140 Nm (103 lb.ft).
25. Remove stands and lower vehicle.

Brake System - General Information - Brake System Bleeding Vehicles
With: High Performance Brakes
General Procedures
WARNING: If any components upstream of the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU), including the HCU itself are
replaced, the brake system must be bled using Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment. This will ensure that all
air is expelled from the new component(s).
NOTES:
Bleeding of the complete brake system must be carried out using Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
Where only the primary or secondary brake circuits have been disturbed in isolation, it should only be necessary to
bleed that circuit. Partial bleeding of the hydraulic system is only permissible if a brake tube or hose has been
disconnected with only minimal loss of fluid.

2. Check that the brake fluid lines are secure and that there are
no signs of a brake fluid leak. If a brake fluid leak is detected,
investigate and rectify the cause of the leak before bleeding the
brakes.
3. WARNING: Do not allow dirt or foreign liquids

to enter the reservoir. Use only new brake fluid of
the correct specification from airtight containers.
Do not mix brands of brake fluid as they may not
be compatible.
CAUTIONS:
Brake fluid will damage paint finished

surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the fluid
and clean the area with water.
The brake fluid reservoir must remain full

with new, clean brake fluid at all times during
bleeding.
Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX mark.

Disconnect the brake fluid reservoir
electrical connector.
Remove the brake fluid reservoir cap.
4. Conduct the bleed procedure with the engine running.
5. Connect the diagnostic tool to the vehicle, select diagnostic and

proceed as directed for bleeding the brake system.
6. Starting at the brake caliper furthest away from

the brake master cylinder, loosen the bleed screw
by one-half to three-quarters of a turn.
7. Install the bleed tube to the brake caliper bleed screw and
immerse the free end of the bleed tube in a bleed jar containing
a small quantity of approved brake fluid.
Hold the bleed container at least 300 mm above the
Caliper that is being bled.
8. CAUTION: The brake fluid reservoir must remain full with

new, clean brake fluid at all times during bleeding.
With assistance, depress the brake pedal steadily through to

2/3 of its full stroke.
9. With the brake pedal held down, close bleed screw and then
return the brake pedal to 1/3 of its full stroke and hold.
10. Repeat steps 8 and 9, 28 times for the rear brake and 10 times
for the front brake.
11. At the end of the bleed process, depress and hold the brake
pedal down.
12. CAUTION: Make sure the bleed screw cap is

installed after bleeding. This will prevent corrosion
to the bleed screw.
With the brake pedal fully depressed, tighten the

bleed screw.
Tighten the front caliper bleed screws to 19
Nm (14 lb.ft).
Tighten the rear caliper bleed screws to 10
Nm (7 lb.ft).
13. Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX mark.
14. WARNING: High performance front brake

calipers have two bleed points. The inner bleed
point must be bled before the outer bleed point.
Braking efficiency may be seriously impaired if an
incorrect bleed sequence is used.
CAUTION: Make sure the bleed screw cap is

to the bleed screw.
Repeat the brake bleeding procedure for each front

brake caliper, following the above sequence.
If access is restricted to the front caliper
outer bleed screws, rotate the road wheels
to gain access.
Tighten the bleed screws to 19 Nm (14
lb.ft).
16. Apply the brakes and check for leaks.
17. Install the brake fluid reservoir cap.

Connect the brake fluid reservoir electrical connector.
18. On completion, road test the vehicle and check the brake pedal
operation. The pedal travel should be short with a firm feel.
Brake System - General Information - Brake System Bleeding Vehicles
With: Standard Brakes
General Procedures
NOTES:
Where only the primary or secondary brake circuits have been disturbed in isolation, it should only be necessary to
bleed that circuit. Partial bleeding of the hydraulic system is only permissible if a brake tube or hose has been
disconnected with only minimal loss of fluid.

stands.
brakes.

be compatible.
CAUTIONS:


bleeding.

5. Connect the diagnostic tool to the vehicle, select diagnostic and

proceed as directed for bleeding the brake system.



pedal down.

to the bleed screw.

bleed screw to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
14. WARNING: Braking efficiency may be seriously impaired if

an incorrect bleed sequence is used.
Repeat the brake bleeding procedure for each brake caliper,

following the above sequence.

Brake System - General Information - Brake System Pressure Bleeding
General Procedures
All vehicles

stands.
brakes.
3. WARNING: Do not allow dirt or foreign liquids to enter the

reservoir. Use only new brake fluid of the correct specification
from airtight containers. Do not mix brands of brake fluid as
they may not be compatible.
CAUTIONS:
Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled,

immediately remove the fluid and clean the area with water.
The brake fluid reservoir must remain full with new, clean
brake fluid at all times during bleeding.

Disconnect the brake fluid reservoir electrical connector.

6.
Install the bleed tube to the brake caliper bleed screw
and immerse the free end of the bleed tube in a bleed
jar containing a small quantity of approved brake fluid.


pedal down.
11. CAUTION: Make sure the bleed screw cap is installed after
bleeding. This will prevent corrosion to the bleed screw.
With the brake pedal fully depressed, tighten the bleed screw.
On vehicles with high performance brakes, tighten the
front caliper bleed screw to 19 Nm (14 lb.ft).
On vehicles with standard brakes, tighten the front
caliper bleed screw to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
Tighten the rear caliper bleed screws to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
13. WARNING: Braking efficiency may be seriously impaired if

an incorrect bleed sequence is used.
Repeat the brake bleeding procedure for each brake caliper,

following the above sequence.
Vehicles with supercharger
14. WARNING: High performance front brake calipers have

two bleed points. The inner bleed point must be bled before the
outer bleed point. Braking efficiency may be seriously impaired
if an incorrect bleed sequence is used.
Repeat the brake bleeding procedure for each front brake

caliper, following the above sequence.
If access is restricted to the front caliper outer bleed
screws, rotate the road wheels to gain access.
Tighten the bleed screws to 19 Nm (14 lb.ft).
All vehicles

Brake System - General Information - Component Bleeding Vehicles
With: High Performance Brakes
General Procedures
CAUTION: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
NOTES:
The following manual procedure covers bleeding the brake system for components down stream of the HCU, where
only the primary or secondary brake circuits have been disturbed in isolation. Partial bleeding of the hydraulic
system is only permissible if a brake tube or hose has been disconnected with only minimal loss of fluid.

stands.
brakes.

be compatible.
CAUTIONS:


bleeding.

Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX
mark.
6. WARNING: High performance front brake calipers have

two bleed points. The inner bleed point must be bled before the
outer bleed point. Braking efficiency may be seriously impaired
if an incorrect bleed sequence is used.
If access is restricted to the front caliper outer bleed

screws, rotate the road wheels to gain access.
Loosen the bleed screw by one-half to three-quarters of
a turn.

pedal down.
11. CAUTION: Make sure the bleed screw cap is installed after
bleeding. This will prevent corrosion to the bleed screw.
With the brake pedal fully depressed, tighten the bleed screw.
Tighten the front caliper bleed screws to 19 Nm (14
lb.ft).
Tighten the rear caliper bleed screws to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

Brake System - General Information - Component Bleeding Vehicles
With: Standard Brakes
General Procedures
NOTES:
The following manual procedure covers bleeding the brake system for components down stream of the HCU, where
only the primary or secondary brake circuits have been disturbed in isolation. Partial bleeding of the hydraulic
system is only permissible if a brake tube or hose has been disconnected with only minimal loss of fluid.

stands.
brakes.
3. Pump the brake pedal until the brake vacuum assistance is

exhausted.

be compatible.
CAUTIONS:


bleeding.

Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX
mark.
6. Loosen the bleed screw by one-half turn to three-quarters of a

turn.


pedal down.

to the bleed screw.

bleed screw.
On vehicles with high performance brakes,
tighten the front caliper bleed screw to 19
Nm (14 lb.ft).
On vehicles with standard brakes, tighten
the front caliper bleed screw to 10 Nm (7
lb.ft).
Tighten the rear caliper bleed screws to 10
Nm (7 lb.ft).

Brake System - General Information - Front Brake Disc Runout Check -
With Wheel On Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
General Procedures
NOTES:

stands.
2. NOTES:
Take care not to contact back plate with DTI

probe.
DTI probe extension maybe required.
Use magnetic base stand to mount Dial Test

Indicator (DTI) gauge gauge as shown 5 mm in
from edge of disc.
3. Zero DTI and rotate the wheel one full complete revolution to
measure disc runout. Disc runout must not exceed 0.03 mm.
4. NOTE: The following steps must be followed if

the runout exceeds 0.03 mm.
Remove and rotate the wheel 2 stud holes and

install the wheel and tire in the new position.
Tighten the road wheel nuts in sequence as
shown above to the following:
Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 70 Nm.
Stage 3: 140 Nm.
5. Check runout as detailed above.
NOTE: If the runout still exceeds 0.03
6. Check hub drive flange runout.

Wheel Hub Runout Check (204-00, General Procedures).

Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 70 Nm.
Stage 3: 140 Nm.
Brake System - General Information - Front Brake Disc Runout Check -
With Wheel On Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
General Procedures
CAUTION: Brake discs must be renewed in pairs, unless one disc requires changing before 1000 miles (1600
kilometers) from new.
NOTES:
RH illustration shown, LH similar.
All measurements must taken with the wheel installed.

stands.
2. NOTES:
DTI probe extension maybe required.
Take care not to contact the back plate with

the DTI probe.
Use magnetic base stand to mount the Dial Test

Indicator (DTI) gauge as shown. Position DTI
probe 2 mm in from the front upper corner of the
inspection window.

measure disc runout. Disc runout must not exceed 0.03 mm.
4. NOTE: The following steps must be followed if

the runout exceeds 0.03 mm.
Remove and rotate the wheel 2 stud holes and

install the wheel and tire in the new position.
Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 70 Nm.
Stage 3: 140 Nm.
5. Check disc runout as detailed above
NOTE: If the runout still exceeds 0.03 mm
6. Check hub drive flange runout.

Wheel Hub Runout Check (204-00 Suspension System - General
Information, General Procedures).

Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 70 Nm.
Stage 3: 140 Nm.
Brake System - General Information - Brake Pad Bedding-In
General Procedures
NOTE: This procedure is to gradually increase the temperature in the braking components without inducing
thermal shock and to mate the brake pad and disc friction surfaces.
1. With the vehicle stationary, pump the brake pedal until the
pedal is firm.
2. Drive the vehicle and make sure that the braking system
operates correctly.
3. NOTE: The following steps must be done without

excessive traffic.
Using light to medium deceleration and varying speeds, leave

at least 0.5 mile (0.8 Km) between each brake application.
4. Drive the vehicle, performing 30 brake applications, with a

duration of 3 seconds for each application.
Front Disc Brake -
Item Specification
Disc type Ventilated
Disc diameter:
Vehicles without High performance brakes 360 mm (14.2 in)
Vehicles with High performance brakes 380 mm (15.0 in)
Disc thickness:
Vehicles without High performance brakes:
New 30.0 mm (1.18 in)
Service limit 27.0 mm (1.063 in)
Maximum disc run-out - disc installed 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
Vehicles with High performance brakes:
New 34.0 mm (1.34 in)
Vehicles without High performance brakes:
Caliper type Sliding pin, twin piston
Piston diameter 48.0 mm (1.9 in)
Pad minimum thickness 3.0 mm (0.12 in)
Vehicles with High performance brakes:
Caliper type Fixed, six piston
Piston diameter 40/38/36 mm (1.57/1.50/1.42 in)
Brake pad wear warning lead:
Location Front left hand brake pad
Activates at 75% of pad life utilised
Torque Specifications Vehicles without High performance Brakes
Brake caliper bleed screw 10 7
Brake disc retaining bolt 35 26
Brake caliper anchor plate to hub bolts: 275 202
Brake caliper housing to anchor plate bolts 35 26
Brake hose union 32 24
Torque Specifications Vehicles with High performance Brakes
Brake disc retaining bolt 35 26
Brake caliper retaining bolts: 275 202
Brake pad centre bolt 30 22
Front Disc Brake - Front Disc Brake
COMPONENT LOCATIONS - STANDARD BRAKES

1 - Hub bearing assembly bolt (x 4)
2 - Caliper bolt (x 2)
3 - Wheel speed sensor
4 - Brake pad wear sensor lead
5 - Wheel speed sensor bolt
6 - Guide pin (x 2)
7 - Guide pin dust cover (x 2)
8 - Guide pin bolt (x 2)
9 - Caliper body
10 - Bleed screw dust cap
11 - Bleed screw
12 - Piston seal (x 2)
13 - Piston (x 2)
14 - Piston dust cover (x 2)
15 - Brake pad
16 - Brake pad retainers
17 - Caliper carrier
18 - Brake disc retaining bolt
19 - Brake disc
20 - Hub bearing assembly
21 - Dust shield screw (x 5)
22 - Dust shield
23 - Front knuckle
COMPONENT LOCATIONS - HIGH PERFORMANCE BRAKES

1 - Brake pad retainer
2 - Brake pad
3 - Bleed screw dust cap (x 2)
4 - Bleed screw (x 2)
5 - Caliper body
6 - Hub bearing assembly
8 - Dust shield
11 - Caliper retaining bolt (x 2)
12 - Hub bearing assembly bolt (x 4)
13 - Front knuckle
14 - Brake disc
16 - Caliper thread insert (x 2)
17 - Piston dust cover (x 6)
18 - Piston (x 6)
19 - Piston seal (x 6)
20 - Caliper bridge bolt
21 - Brake pad retaining pins (x 2)
GENERAL
The front brakes on all models feature ventilated brake discs, with different diameter brake discs for each model. All
models except 5.0L SC feature twin piston sliding calipers. On 5.0L SC models, 6 piston, opposed piston Brembo
calipers are installed.
On all models the brake caliper is attached to the rear of the front knuckle. The brake pads are made from an
asbestos free material. The inboard brake pad of the left front brake incorporates a wear sensor.
With the standard brake sliding calipers, when hydraulic pressure is supplied to the caliper, the pistons extend and
force the inner pad against the brake disc. The caliper body reacts and slides on the guide pins to bring the outer
pad into contact with the brake disc.
With the high performance fixed calipers, when hydraulic pressure is supplied to the caliper, the three pairs of
opposed pistons extend in the caliper. The three pistons in each side of the caliper force their related brake pads
against the brake disc.
The front brake pad wear sensor is connected in series with the rear brake pad wear sensor, between the instrument
cluster and ground. When a brake pad incorporating a brake pad wear sensor is approximately 75% worn, the brake
pad wear sensor goes open circuit. When the instrument cluster detects the open circuit, it illuminates the amber
light emitting diode (LED) in the brake warning indicator, displays an appropriate warning in the message center and
sounds a warning chime. For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01, Description and Operation).
At the beginning of each ignition cycle, the instrument cluster performs a bulb check on the brake warning indicator:
the indicator is illuminated amber for 1.5 seconds, red for 1.5 seconds, then goes off.
Front Disc Brake - Front Disc Brake

REFER to: Brake System (206-00, Diagnosis and Testing).
Front Disc Brake - Brake Disc Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal
WARNING: If installing a new brake disc, install new brake pads.
CAUTION: Brake discs must be renewed in pairs.
NOTES:
The brake pad wear warning indicator sensor must be replaced each time the brake pads are serviced.

stands.
2. Remove the front wheel and tire.
3. CAUTIONS:

brake hose.

Remove the brake caliper and anchor plate.

Remove the brake caliper anchor bolts.
4. Remove the front brake disc.

Installation


4. NOTE: Tighten the wheel nuts in the

sequence shown:
Install the wheels and tires.

Stage 1 : 4Nm
Stage 2 : 70Nm
Stage 3 : 140Nm
necessary.
6. For additional information, refer to: Brake Pad Bedding-In (206-

00 Brake System - General Information, General Procedures).
Front Disc Brake - Brake Disc Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal
NOTES:

stands.
3. CAUTIONS:

brake hose.


Release the brake caliper.

Installation

3. Install the brake caliper and tighten the bolts to 275 Nm (203
lb.ft)

necessary.

00, General Procedures).
Front Disc Brake - Brake Pads Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal
WARNINGS:
Brake pads must be renewed in axle sets only, otherwise braking efficiency may be impaired.
If the brake pad wear warning light has been activated, the pad wear sensor must be replaced.

stands.

LH side front: Disconnect the brake pad wear

indicator sensor wiring harness.
4. NOTE: This step is only required if a new wear indicator

harness is installed.
Remove the front LH fender splash shield.

5. NOTE: This step is only required if a new

wear indicator harness is installed.
LH side front: Release and disconnect the brake

pad wear indicator wiring harness.
6. NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent

the component from rotating.
Remove the brake caliper lower bolt.

7. NOTE: Note the orientation of the brake pads
including the position of the small mass on the
outer pad.
Remove the brake pads.

Rotate the brake caliper upwards.
Remove the 2 clips.
8. Repeat the above 2 steps for the other side.
Installation

inhaled.
Clean the brake caliper housing and anchor plate using brake
cleaning fluid.
2. Inspect the caliper piston and slide pin seals for damage.
3. CAUTIONS:
The brake caliper should move freely on both slide pins.

If necessary, renew the components.
Make sure that the plain slide pin is installed to the

upper part of the caliper and the bushed slide pin is
installed to the lower part.
Check the slide pins for correct operation.
4. CAUTION: Check the brake fluid reservoir level before

pushing the piston back, failure to follow this instruction may
NOTE: As the piston is pushed back into the caliper

housing, the brake fluid level in the reservoir will rise. Do not
allow the reservoir to overflow.
Press the pistons into the caliper housing.
5. CAUTION: Make sure that the plain clip is

installed to the bottom part of the caliper and
the rubber coated clip is installed to the
upper part.
Install the 2 clips
6. Apply a suitable amount of the supplied grease to

the caliper, as illustrated.
7. NOTE: Make sure the brake pads are installed in the

correct orientation.
Install the brake pads.
8. Rotate the brake caliper downwards.

Tighten the bolt to 35 Nm.
9. Repeat the above procedure for the other side.

LH side front: Connect the brake pad wear indicator wiring

harness electrical connection.

Install the front LH fender splash shield.

12. LH side front: Connect the brake pad wear indicator wiring
harness.

shown:
1. Stage 1: 4 Nm
2. Stage 2: 70 Nm
3. Stage 3: 140 Nm
necessary.
Front Disc Brake - Brake Pads Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal
WARNING: Brake pads must be renewed in axle sets only. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
braking efficiency being impaired.
NOTE: The brake pad wear warning indicator sensor must be replaced each time the brake pads are serviced.

stands.
3. LH side front: Disconnect the brake pad wear


Remove the front LH splash shield.

02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
5. NOTE: This step is only required if a new

wear indicator harness is installed.
LH side front: Release and disconnect the brake

pad wear indicator wiring harness.
6. NOTES:
Note the orientation of the brake pads.
Note the orientation of the anti-rattle spring

prior to removal.
Remove the front brake pads.

Remove the 2 retaining pins.
Remove the anti-rattle spring.
Remove the bridge bolt from the centre of
the caliper.
7. Repeat the above step for the other side.
Installation

inhaled.
2. Inspect the caliper piston seals for damage.
3. Position a bleed jar containing a small quantity of approved

brake fluid. Connect the bleed tube to the bleed screw and
loosen the screw.
4. Press the pistons into the caliper housing.

Tighten the bleed screw to 19 Nm (14 lb.ft).
5. Repeat the above process for the other 3 pistons.
6. Disconnect the bleed tube and remove the jar.
7. Apply grease LR020972 (Molykote CU7439 plus) to

the areas indicated on the brake pads.
8. NOTES:
Make sure the brake pads are installed in the correct

orientation.
Make sure the anti-rattle spring is installed in the correct

orientation.

Tighten the bridge bolt to 30 Nm (22 lb.ft.).
Position the anti-rattle spring.
Install the pins, making sure the pin collets are fully
engaged in the caliper.

LH side front: Connect the brake pad wear indicator wiring


Install the front LH splash shield.

12. LH side front: Connect the brake pad wear indicator wiring
harness.

necessary.
Front Disc Brake - Brake Caliper Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal
NOTES:

stands.

LH side only: Disconnect the brake pad wear

indicator sensor.
4. WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping

fluid.

Disconnect the brake hose from the brake caliper.

Remove the union.
Remove and discard the two sealing
washers.
5. NOTE: Note the orientation of the brake pads.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With:
Installation).

Remove the brake caliper housing.
Remove the brake caliper upper bolt.
Installation
1. NOTES:
Use an additional wrench to prevent the component from

rotating.
Make sure the brake caliper guide pins are installed in the
Install the brake caliper.

Tighten the brake caliper upper bolt to 35 Nm (26 lb.ft).


Installation).
Apply a suitable amount of the supplied grease to the
mating faces of the brake pads and brake calipers.
3. Connect the brake hose to the brake caliper.

Install new sealing washers.
Tighten the brake hose union to 32 Nm (24 lb.ft).
4. LH side only: Connect the brake pad wear indicator sensor.
5. Bleed the brake caliper.

Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-00 Brake System -
General Information, General Procedures).

sequence shown:

Stage 1 : 4Nm
Stage 2 : 70Nm
Stage 3 : 140Nm
Front Disc Brake - Brake Caliper Vehicles With: High Performance
Brakes
Removal

stands.

sensor, which is installed on the left hand side
only, is easily damaged. Do not use a lever to
remove the sensor.
4. WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping

fluid.
CAUTIONS:
Before disconnecting or removing

Make sure that new sealing washers are

installed.
TORQUE: 32 Nm
Remove the front brake pads.

High Performance Brakes (206-03, Removal and Installation).
6. TORQUE: 275 Nm
Installation


Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-00, General
Procedures).
Rear Disc Brake -
Item Specification
Disc type Ventilated
Disc diameter:
Vehicles without High performance brakes 354 mm (13.9in)
Vehicles with High performance brakes 365 mm (14.4 in)
Disc thickness - All engines:
New 20.0 mm (0.78 in)
Caliper type Sliding pin, single piston
Piston diameter 45.0 mm (1.7 in)
Brake pad wear warning lead:
Location Rear right hand brake pad
Activates at 75% of pad life utilised
Brake caliper housing to anchor plate bolts 35 26
Brake disc Torx screw 35 26
Brake caliper anchor plate to wheel knuckle bolts 115 85
Rear Disc Brake - Rear Disc Brake
COMPONENT LOCATIONS

1 - Brake pad wear sensor lead
4 - Caliper bolt (x 2)
5 - Rear knuckle
6 - Backplate assembly and dust shield
8 - Drive flange assembly
9 - Brake disc
11 - Brake pad retainers
12 - Caliper carrier
13 - Guide pin dust cover (x 2)
14 - Guide pin (x 2)
15 - Brake pad
16 - Piston seal
17 - Piston
18 - Piston dust cover
19 - Bleed screw
20 - Bleed screw dust cap
21 - Guide pin bolt (x 2)
22 - Caliper body
GENERAL
The rear brakes consist of a single piston brake caliper, a ventilated brake disc and a dust shield (integrated as part
of the parking brake). The dust shield, caliper and disc on 5.0L SC are unique to that model.
The brake caliper is attached to the rear knuckle. The brake pads are made from an asbestos free material. The
inboard brake pad of the right rear brake incorporates a wear sensor.
When hydraulic pressure is supplied to the caliper, the piston extends and forces the inner pad against the disc. The
caliper body reacts and slides on the guide pins to bring the outer pad into contact with the disc.
The rear brake pad wear sensor is connected in series with the front brake pad wear sensor, between the instrument
cluster and ground. When a brake pad incorporating a brake pad wear sensor is approximately 75% worn, the brake
pad wear sensor goes open circuit. When the instrument cluster detects the open circuit, it illuminates the amber
light emitting diode (LED) in the brake warning indicator, displays an appropriate warning in the message center and
sounds a warning chime. For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01, Description and Operation).
At the beginning of each ignition cycle, the instrument cluster performs a bulb check on the brake warning indicator:
the indicator is illuminated amber for 1.5 seconds, then red for 1.5 seconds.
Rear Disc Brake - Rear Disc Brake

Rear Disc Brake - Brake Disc
Removal
NOTES:
If the parking brake shoes or the brake discs have been removed for access to other components then DO NOT
carry out the bedding in procedure.
1. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, drive the

parking brake to the 'mounting position'.

stands.
3. Remove the rear wheel and tire.
4. Remove the brake caliper and anchor plate.
5. NOTE: Rotate the rear brake disc to locate

the parking brake shoe adjuster.
Release the parking brake shoe adjustment.

Remove the parking brake shoe adjuster
access plugs.
Rotate the parking brake shoe adjuster.
6. Remove the rear brake disc.
Installation
1. Make sure that the rear brake disc and hub mating surfaces are
clean.
2. Install the rear brake disc.


4. Adjust the parking brake.

For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake Shoe and
Lining Adjustment (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation,
5. Install the rear wheel and tire.


Rear Disc Brake - Brake Pads
Removal
WARNING: Brake pads must be renewed in axle sets only, otherwise braking efficiency may be impaired.
NOTES:

stands.
3. RH side rear: Disconnect the brake pad wear

4. RH side rear: Disconnect the brake pad wear

5. RH side rear: Release and disconnect the brake

pad wear indicator wiring harness electrical
connector.
Remove the brake caliper lower bolt.
7. NOTES:
Note the orientation of the brake pads.
Note the orientation of the clips.

Rotate the brake caliper upwards.
Remove the 2 clips.
8. Repeat the above 2 steps for the other side.
Installation

inhaled.
Clean the brake caliper housing and anchor plate using brake
cleaning fluid.
2. Inspect the caliper piston and slide pin seals for damage.
3. CAUTIONS:
Check the slide pins for correct operation.
4. CAUTION: Check the brake fluid reservoir level before

pushing the piston back, failure to follow this instruction may
NOTE: As the piston is pushed back into the caliper

housing, the brake fluid level in the reservoir will rise. Do not
allow the reservoir to overflow.
Press the piston into the caliper housing.
5. CAUTION: If installed, the adhesive strips covering the

outer brake pads must be removed before installation. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
If installed, remove the adhesive strips from the 2 outer brake

pads.
6. NOTES:
Make sure the brake pads are installed in the correct

orientation.
Make sure that the clips are installed in the correct

orientation.

7. Rotate the brake caliper downwards.

Tighten the brake caliper lower bolt to 35 Nm (26 lb.ft).
9. RH side rear: Connect the brake pad wear indicator wiring

10. RH side rear: Connect the brake pad wear indicator

sensor wiring harness.
11. RH side rear: Connect the brake pad wear indicator

sensor wiring harness.

sequence shown:

Stage 1 : 4Nm
Stage 2 : 70Nm
Stage 3 : 140Nm
necessary.
Rear Disc Brake - Brake Caliper
Removal

stands.

RH side only: Disconnect the brake pad wear

indicator sensor.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Pads (206-04,

Disconnect the brake hose from the brake caliper.

Remove the union.
Remove and discard the two sealing
washers.


Installation
1. NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the component

from rotating.



3. Connect the brake hose to the brake caliper.

Tighten the brake hose union to 32 Nm (24 lb.ft).
4. Connect the brake pad wear indicator sensor.

Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-00, General Procedures).

Rear Disc Brake - Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Removal

stands.

RH side only: Disconnect the brake pad wear

indicator sensor.
4. Remove the rear brake pads.



6. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate.

7. NOTE: Note the orientation of the brake
caliper guide pins.
Remove the guide pins and seals.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
NOTE: Make sure the brake caliper guide pins are installed
in the correct orientation.
Install the brake caliper guide pins.

Check the condition of the caliper guide pin seals.
Check for correct operation.
2. Install the brake caliper anchor plate.

3. NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the component

from rotating.

4. Install the rear brake pads.

5. Connect the brake pad wear indicator sensor.

Parking Brake and Actuation -
Item Specification
Make Continental Teves
Model/type N5528001
Operation Twin cable operation to park brake with emergency cable release located in
passenger compartment
Minimum brake lining material 2.0 mm (0.078 in)
thickness
Wedge adjuster Allen screw 7 5
Rear brake disc Torx screw 35 26
Brake caliper anchor plate to wheel knuckle bolts 115 85
Brake caliper to anchor plate bolts 35 26
Parking brake actuator and cable assembly nuts 5 4
Parking brake actuator mounting bracket bolts 22 16
* LH/RH parking brake cable bolts 22 16
Parking brake cable coupling 8 6
* New nuts/bolts must be installed
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Parking brake indicators (NAS only)
2 - Parking brake indicators (all except NAS (north America specification))
3 - Parking brake switch
4 - Parking brake module
5 - Drum brake
6 - Parking brake cable
7 - Emergency release cable
GENERAL
The parking brake is an electrically actuated system that operates drum brakes integrated into the rear brake discs.
The parking brake system consists of:
A parking brake switch.

Left and right drum brakes.
Left and right brake cables.
An emergency release cable.
Two parking brake indicators.
A parking brake module.
The parking brake is operated by the parking brake module, which adjusts the tension of the brake cables to apply
and release the drum brakes. Operation of the parking brake module is initiated by the parking brake switch.
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
Parking Brake Switch - Electronic Transmission Shifter
Parking Brake Switch - Non-Electronic Transmission Shifter
The parking brake switch is used by the driver to apply and release the parking brake, and is installed in the center
console adjacent to the gear lever.
Slots on the sides of the parking brake switch engage with the top panel of the center console, and a screw secures
the parking brake switch in position. An electrical connector on the back of the switch provides the interface with the
vehicle wiring. A brake symbol on the switch illuminates when the exterior lamps are selected on.
There are three states for the parking brake switch:
Apply request, when the handle of the parking brake switch is pulled up.
Release request, when the handle of the parking brake switch is pushed down.
Idle, when the handle of the parking brake switch is in the central or rest position.
Microswitches, incorporated into the parking brake switch, are activated by the handle of the parking brake switch. To
determine the operating state of the parking brake switch, the parking brake module scans the circuits containing the
microswitches.
DRUM BRAKES
NOTE: LH (left-hand) brake shown, RH (right-hand) brake similar

1 - Wedge adjuster screw
2 - Return spring
3 - Cross strut
4 - Backplate
5 - Brake shoe
6 - Shoe locating pin and clip
7 - Adjuster spring
8 - Toothed wheel adjuster
9 - Dust shield
10 - Rear brake disc
11 - Adjuster access plug
WARNING: Prior to removing a brake disc from a vehicle, power should be disconnected from the parking brake
module. Operation of the parking brake switch while a brake disc is removed can cause the actuating mechanism in
the parking brake module to seize. In addition, the parking brake may not switch off until 20 minutes after key-off;
automatic re-apply cannot be eliminated until this period has expired.
Each drum brake consists of a pair of brake shoes installed on a backplate attached to the rear hub carrier. The
brake shoes operate on the drum integrated into the rear brake disc. The orientation of the brake shoes differ by
180° between the left-hand (LH) and right-hand (RH) brakes.
When the parking brake module tensions the brake cables, the movement is transmitted to an operating lever on one
of the brake shoes. The operating lever pivots against a cross strut, which forces the brake shoes apart and into
contact with the drum in the rear brake disc. Brake shoe to drum clearance is set with two manual adjusters, which
are accessed through a hole in the brake disc. One of the adjusters is a conventional toothed wheel adjuster. The
second adjuster is a wedge adjuster operated by an Allen screw.
After replacement of the brake shoes or brake discs, a bedding in procedure must be performed to ensure the drum
brakes operate satisfactorily.
For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake (206-05, Description and Operation).
BRAKE CABLES

1 - Gearbox
2 - Parking brake module housing
3 - Cable nut
4 - Sealing collar
5 - Threaded connector
6 - Spline shaft
7 - Force sensor
8 - Shoe
9 - Locking cover
10 - Sealing collar
11 - Cable nut
WARNING: Prior to disconnecting a brake cable, power should be disconnected from the parking brake module.
Operation of the parking brake switch while a brake cable is disconnected can cause the actuating mechanism in the
parking brake module to seize. In addition, the parking brake may not switch off until 20 minutes after key-off;
automatic re-apply cannot be eliminated until this period has expired.
The brake cables consist of Bowden cables installed between the parking brake module and the drum brakes. Nuts,
on the ends of the outer cables, secure the brake cables to the parking brake module and the backplate of the
related drum brake. In each drum brake, the inner cable is located in the guide spring and connected to the brake
shoe operating lever by a nipple on the end of the cable. In the parking brake module, the two inner cables are
joined together via the force sensor and the spline shaft.
The inner cable of the RH brake cable is connected to a nipple on the force sensor by a 'shoe' on the end of the
cable; a locking cover keeps the shoe engaged with the nipple.
The inner cable of the LH brake cable is connected to the spline shaft by a threaded connector (LH thread); a
squared flange at the end of the threaded connector locates in the housing of the parking brake module, to prevent
the threaded connector from turning with the spline shaft.
When the spline shaft turns, the threaded connector of the LH brake cable is screwed into or out of the spline shaft,
which changes the effective length of the inner cables and operates the drum brakes. The ability of the spline shaft
to move axially in the gearbox equalizes the load applied by the inner cables to the two drum brakes.
EMERGENCY RELEASE CABLE

1 - Pull ring
2 - Quick release fitting
4 - Sealing collar
5 - Spring
6 - Inner cable
7 - Nipple
8 - Pulley wheel
Emergency Park Brake Release
The emergency release cable allows the parking brake to be mechanically released if:
The parking brake cannot be electrically released because of a system fault.

The battery is disconnected or battery voltage decreases below 7.5 volts while the parking brake is applied, so
that the parking brake cannot be electrically released.
The parking brake is mechanically released by disconnecting the force sensor from the spline shaft in the parking
brake module. During normal operation, the force sensor and the spline shaft are locked together by a lever operated
pawl on the end of the spline shaft, which engages with a spigot on the force sensor.
The emergency release cable is a Bowden cable installed between the parking brake module and the center console.
The emergency release cable is held in clips along the underside of the vehicle and enters the passenger
compartment below the center console through an aperture in the transmission tunnel. A quick release fitting seals
the emergency release cable in the aperture. At the parking brake module, a sealing collar on the outer cable is a
push fit in the housing of the parking brake module.
In the center console, a pull ring is installed on the end of the inner cable. The pull ring is designed to fit the hook on
the end of the jack handle which, in combination with a screwdriver shaft, can be used to pull on the cable. The pull
ring can be accessed by removing a circular panel in the bottom of the center console cupholders, on left-hand drive
(LHD) vehicles, or by removing the parking brake switch on right-hand drive (RHD) vehicles.
The pull required to release the latch is approximately 200 N (45 lbf). When the pull ring of the emergency release
cable is released, the spring in the parking brake module retracts the inner cable and the nipple moves away from
the pawl operating lever.
After the emergency release cable has been used to release the parking brake, the next time an apply selection is
made with the parking brake switch, the parking brake module automatically runs through a latching procedure to
reconnect the spline shaft with the force sensor. The parking brake module turns the spline shaft so that it moves
towards the force sensor. The pawl of the spline shaft then re-engages with the spigot of the force sensor. A second
apply selection with the parking brake switch is required to apply the parking brake.
PARKING BRAKE INDICATORS


1 - Red or amber warning indicator (NAS only)
2 - Red or amber warning indicator (all except NAS)
The parking brake has two warning indicators, one amber and one red, located in the speedometer of the instrument
cluster (same symbol, illuminated in either red, or amber).
Amber Parking Brake Warning Indicator
The amber parking brake warning indicator is continuously illuminated if there is a parking brake system fault.
Operation of the indicator is controlled by a high speed controller area network (CAN) bus signal from the parking
brake module to the instrument cluster.
Red Parking Brake Warning Indicator
When the parking brake is applied, the red parking brake warning indicator is continuously illuminated while the
ignition is on and for 3 minutes after the ignition is switched off. If the system is unable to comply with an apply or
release request, due to a system fault, the indicator flashes.
When the ignition is on and the indicator is not flashing, operation is controlled by a high speed CAN bus signal from
the parking brake module to the instrument cluster. When the ignition is off or when the indicator is flashing,
operation is controlled by a hardwired signal from the parking brake module to the instrument cluster.
Messages Center
When there is a fault condition, illumination of the warning indicators is accompanied by a text message displayed in
the message center.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01, Description and Operation).
PARKING BRAKE MODULE
The parking brake module monitors external and internal inputs and adjusts the tension of the brake cables to
operate the drum brakes and provide the required parking brake function.
The parking brake module is installed on a support bracket attached to the front of the spare wheel carrier. Two
rubber mounts, installed on lugs on the underside of the parking brake module, locate in holes in the support
bracket. The top corners of the parking brake module are secured to the support bracket with rubber mounts and
flanged nuts.
The main components of the parking brake module are:
A PCB (printed circuit board) incorporating the ASIC (application specific integrated circuit) for control of the
parking brake.
An electric motor.
A gearbox.
A spline shaft.
A force sensor.
The spline shaft and the force sensor are connected together by a latch on the end of the spline shaft. The spline
shaft rotates on the latch and moves axially in the gearbox. The latch and the force sensor slide in a channel in the
body of the parking brake module.
To apply or release the drum brakes, the parking brake module runs the electric motor, which drives the gearbox.
The gearbox turns the spline shaft to increase or decrease the tension in the brake cables. The parking brake module
monitors the load exerted by the brake cables using the input from the force sensor.
Interior of Parking Brake Module

2 - Housing
3 - Electric motor
4 - PCB (Printed Circuit Board)
5 - Spline shaft
6 - Gearbox
7 - Force sensor
Inputs and Outputs
A 32 pin electrical connector on the RH side of the parking brake module provides the interface between the PCB and
the vehicle wiring.
The parking brake module is powered by two permanent battery power feeds from the battery junction box (BJB).
Two further connections with the central junction box (CJB) provide battery voltage signals when the key is in the
ignition switch (key in) and when the ignition switch is in position II (ignition). Other hardwired inputs include those
from the parking brake switch.
In addition to the hardwired connections, the parking brake module is connected to the medium speed CAN bus to
enable communication with other vehicle systems.
Parking Brake Module Harness Connector C2178

Parking Brake Module Harness Connector C2178 Pin Details
Pin No. Description Input/Output
A1 Not used -
A2 Medium speed CAN bus low out Input/Output
A3 Medium speed CAN bus high in Input/Output
A4 Medium speed CAN bus low in Input/Output
B1 Not used -
B2 Medium speed CAN bus high out Input/Output
B3 Parking brake switch SW1 Input
B4 Parking brake switch SW4 Input
C1 and C2 Not used -
C3 Parking brake switch SW2 Input
C4 Parking brake switch SW5 Output
D1 to F1 Not used -
F2 Key in ignition switch Input
F3 Ignition power supply Input
F4 Red parking brake indicator Output
G1 Not used -
G2 Ground Output
G3 Not used -
G4 Battery power supply Input
H1 Not used -
H2 Ground Output
H3 Not used -
H4 Battery power supply Input
PARKING BRAKE OPERATION
The parking brake can be applied at any time provided sufficient battery power is available. For the parking brake to
be released, various pre-conditions are required. The parking brake has manual and automatic actuating modes, to
cater for different operating circumstances, as detailed in the following table:
Actuating Modes
Mode Pre-Conditions Driver Action
Static apply Vehicle speed less than 2.5 km/h (1.6 mph). Pull up parking brake switch.
Static release1. Vehicle speed less than 2.5 km/h (1.6 mph). Press down parking brake switch.
2. Engine running.
OR
Ignition switch in position II and brake pedal or accelerator
pedal pressed.
Dynamic apply Vehicle speed more than 2.5 km/h (1.6 mph). Pull up parking brake switch as
required.
Dynamic Vehicle speed more than 2.5 km/h (1.6 mph). Release (to neutral position) or press
release down parking brake switch.
DAR (drive 1. Ignition switch in position II. None. Parking brake released
away release) 2. Transmission in gear 1, 2 or R (with high range selected) automatically on drive away.
or 1, 2, 3 or R (with low range selected).
3. Accelerator pedal pressed more than 5%.
Operating Voltages
Actuation of the parking brake (apply or release) is only started if the power supply to the parking brake module is
within 9 to 18 volts. At any voltage in this range, the parking brake module is able to tighten the brake cables to the
maximum, to fully apply the parking brake, although at voltages between 9 and 10.5 volts the actuation time may
exceed 1.0 second.
During a parking brake actuation:
If the power supply to the parking brake module decreases to less than 8.3 volts, the parking brake module
continues the actuation, but stores a related fault code. If the ignition is on, the parking brake module also
signals the instrument cluster to illuminate the amber parking brake warning indicator and flash the red
parking brake warning indicator. On the instrument cluster, a message advising there is a parking brake fault
is shown in the message center. The warning indications are discontinued if the power supply voltage increases
to 8.3 volts or more.
If the power supply voltage decreases to less than 7.5 volts, the parking brake module discontinues the
actuation. Actuation is automatically resumed if the power supply voltage subsequently increases to 7.5 volts
or more and the parking brake switch request is still valid.
If the power supply voltage decreases below 6.5 volts, the parking brake function is disabled for the
remainder of the ignition cycle.
If the power supply voltage increases to more than 18.0 volts, the parking brake module immediately disables
the parking brake function and stores a related fault code. If the ignition is on, the parking brake module also
signals the instrument cluster to illuminate the amber parking brake warning indicator and flash the red
parking brake warning indicator. On the instrument cluster, a message advising that the parking brake has a
fault and is not functioning is shown in the message center. The parking brake function remains disabled until
the power supply voltage is within 9 to 18 volts again. When the power supply voltage is within 9 to 18 volts
again, the warning indications are cancelled and actuation is automatically resumed if the parking brake
module is in a dynamic mode of operation with a valid parking brake switch request.
NOTE: The instrument cluster shuts down below 8 volts, so warning indications and messages are not displayed
below 8 volts. CAN transmission stops if battery voltage drops below 7.0 volts and re-starts when voltage goes above
7.5 volts.
Sleep Mode
To reduce quiescent drain on the vehicle battery, the parking brake module incorporates a sleep mode. The parking
brake module enters the sleep mode, provided the ignition is off and there are no signals from the wheel speed
sensors, when one of the following occurs:
20 minutes elapse after the last actuation of the parking brake.

If no actuation occurred, 20 minutes elapse after the ignition is switched off.
The parking brake module wakes up from the sleep mode when one of the following occurs:
An apply or release request is made with the parking brake switch.

The ignition is turned on.
The parking brake module wakes up within 500 ms. The high speed CAN bus is activated within 200 ms maximum.
When the parking brake module is woken with a release request from the parking brake switch, the parking brake
module ignores the request but illuminates the red brake warning indicator. The parking brake module extinguishes
the red brake warning indicator and goes back to sleep immediately the switch is released to the neutral position.
When the parking brake module is woken with an apply request from the parking brake switch, if the parking brake is
already applied the parking brake module ignores the request but illuminates the red brake warning indicator. The
parking brake module extinguishes the red brake warning indicator and goes back to sleep immediately the switch is
released to the neutral position. If the parking brake is in the released condition when the apply request is made, the
parking brake module illuminates the red brake warning indicator and applies the parking brake. The parking brake
module extinguishes the red brake warning indicator and goes back to sleep 3 minutes after the apply activation, or
immediately after the switch is released to the neutral position, whichever occurs last.
Dynamic Apply
In the dynamic apply mode, if the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h (6.25 mph) when the parking brake switch is
selected to apply, the parking brake module requests the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module to activate the disc
brakes on all four wheels. When the vehicle comes to a standstill, the parking brake module statically applies the
parking brake. Once the static load is achieved, the hydraulic pressure is removed. If the parking brake switch is
released to the neutral position, or pressed down to the release position, during dynamic apply, braking is cancelled.
The ABS module monitors the deceleration rate using the wheel speed sensor signals, and adjusts the hydraulic
pressure to the disc brakes as required to achieve the required rate. All of the anti-lock control - traction control
system brake functions remain enabled in the dynamic apply mode.
The parking brake module incorporates two fallback functions for the dynamic apply mode:
Fallback 1 is invoked if vehicle speed is between 2.5 km/h (1.25 mph) and V max when the parking brake
switch is selected to apply and the ABS module is unable to fulfill a hydraulic request. When fallback 1 is
invoked, the parking brake module decelerates the vehicle using only the parking brake. The parking brake
module monitors the deceleration rate using the wheel speed information from the ABS module, and adjusts
the tension of the brake cables to achieve the required rate. During deceleration the parking brake module
also uses the wheel speed inputs from the ABS module to operate an anti-lock function for the rear wheels.
When vehicle speed decreases to 2.5 km/h (1.25 mph) the parking brake module changes to the static apply
mode.
Fallback 2 is invoked if there is a loss of communication between the parking brake module and the ABS
module or the CAN bus has failed. When fallback 2 is invoked, the parking brake module decelerates the
vehicle using only the parking brake. The parking brake module tightens the brake cables under the control of
the driver, no anti-lock function is available.
While dynamic apply is active, including fallback 1 and fallback 2, the parking brake module also outputs high speed
CAN bus signals to:
The ABS module, to apply the stoplamps.

The instrument cluster, to sound an intermittent warning buzzer, at 0.5 second on, 1.0 second off.
The instrument cluster, to illuminate the red parking brake warning indicator. The indicator is permanently
illuminated except in fallback 2, when it flashes.
DAR Pre-arming
The DAR pre-arming function operates when the transfer box is in high range to reduce the parking brake release
time during DAR and to provide a smooth take-off. DAR pre-arming is invoked when:
The ignition switch is in position II.

The transmission is in gear 1, 2 or R.
The vehicle is stationary.
No failsafe tighten actuation has occurred.
Automatic Load Adjustment
While the ignition is on, the parking brake module constantly monitors the input from the force sensor. If the tension
of the brake cables goes outside the limits for a given operating mode, the parking brake module automatically
restores the tension within limits.
Failsafe Tighten. If, during DAR pre-arming, the vehicle moves, then the maximum cable force is reinstated for the
remainder of that ignition cycle.
Automatic Apply. While the parking brake is applied, if the tension of the brake cables decreases by a prescribed
amount from the initial setting, the parking brake module automatically restores the tension to the initial setting.
Automatic Release. While the parking brake is released, if the tension of the brake cables increase to a prescribed
amount, the parking brake module automatically reduces the tension to zero.
Parking Brake Switch Monitoring
The parking brake module monitors for the following types of fault in the parking brake switch system:
Short circuits between a pull-down transistor in the parking brake module and battery voltage.
Broken wires and microswitches.
Plausibility.
If a fault is detected, the parking brake module stores a related fault code.
The parking brake switch has a degree of in-built redundancy. If a single microswitch fault is detected the parking
brake module can still determine the operating state of the parking brake switch. Short circuits or multiple failures
cause the parking brake module to disable the parking brake switch for the remainder of the ignition cycle. The
parking brake module also disables the parking brake switch if a plausibility fault occurs. However, since plausibility
faults are usually caused by incomplete operation of the parking brake switch, the parking brake switch is re-enabled
if the parking brake module subsequently establishes a plausible operating state.
If a single microswitch fault is detected, the parking brake module signals the instrument cluster to illuminate the
amber parking brake warning indicator. The parking brake module also signals the instrument cluster to display a
message advising there is a parking brake fault. During an apply actuation, the parking brake module also signals the
instrument cluster to flash the red parking brake warning indicator.
For all other fault types, the parking brake module signals the instrument cluster to illuminate the amber parking
brake warning indicator and to display a message advising the parking brake has a fault and is not functioning. If it
makes an apply actuation, the parking brake module signals the instrument cluster to flash the red parking brake
warning indicator for the remainder of the ignition cycle.
On the next ignition cycle, the warning indicators and the messages are only activated if the fault is still present,
although the fault code is retained by the parking brake module until cleared by T4.
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired connection; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus


1 - Battery
2 - Parking brake switch
5 - CAN (controller area network) connection to other systems
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake
For a detailed description of the Parking Brake System and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Parking Brake (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation,
CAUTIONS:
vehicle.
Please note this is a sealed unit and no attempt must be made to open the actuator as it will invalidate any
warranty claim.

Visual Inspection
Electric park brake cable(s) condition and installation Electric park brake warning indicators
Electric park brake shoes condition and fitment Fuses
Electric park brake drums (integrated into rear brake discs) Wiring harness / electrical connectors
Electric park brake actuator module condition and installation - Check for bent/corroded pins
Electric park brake switch
Electric park brake actuator
Symptom Chart

Electric park brake will not Electric park brake Check the electric park brake cables for
engage or release cables fouled, trapped or fouling, trapping or damage
Low electric park brake damaged Check the electric park brake cables for
efficiency / electric park brake Electric park brake correct routing
sticking/binding cables incorrectly routed Check that the electric park brake cable end
or fixed fitting connector(s) are correctly installed to
Electric park brake the operating lever(s)
shoes, linings Inspect the electric park brake shoes and
worn/contaminated drums for condition/wear/contamination
Electric park brake Check the electric park brake shoes for
drums (integrated into correct adjustment
rear brake discs) Check the operation of the electric park brake
Electric park brake shoes actuator , check for damage and/or excessive
incorrectly adjusted noise during operation
following replacement Check for electric park brake control module
Electric park brake DTCs
actuator malfunction
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Electric Park Brake Control Module (EPBCM) (100-00 General
Brake Bedding Mode
Bedding mode is a special mode available in the Electric Park Brake Control Module (EPBCM) that disables the
stability assist system and allows the parking brake to provide the braking force rather than the conventional
braking system whilst the vehicle is moving at a velocity of >3kph. This mode is entered via a series of brake pedal
presses and switch applications, full details on this procedure is available in the relevant section of the workshop
manual. If brake bedding mode is entered accidentally by the driver the RED warning lamp will flash in the
instrument cluster, the electric park brake control module will return to normal operational mode when the ignition
has been cycled. This DTC (C1104-68) is intended to highlight the fact that although the RED lamp was illuminated
there was no fault present in the control module.
Drive Cycles
Drive Cycle 1 Description
Ignition on
Make sure that no electric park brake activation (diagnostic command or switch input) is attempted for a
minimum of 3 seconds
Retest for functionality
Ignition on
Drive vehicle at a constant speed of 20kph (13mph) or slightly above in 2nd gear
At a constant speed of 20kph (13mph) or slightly above, apply the electric park brake via the electric park
brake switch
Press the brake pedal
Ignition on
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the electric park brake is released
Operate the electric park brake switch to the apply position and hold in this position until the electric park
brake motor has stopped (this may take up to 5 seconds)
Release the electric park brake switch to the idle position, leave in the idle position for 2 seconds
Operate the electric park brake switch to the release position (while pressing the brake pedal) and hold in
this position until the parking brake motor has stopped (this may take up to 5 seconds)
Release the electric park brake switch to the idle position
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Shoe and Lining
Adjustment
General Procedures
Check
NOTE: This procedure must be carried out if the vehicle has been mud wading (not water) for more than 50
miles or if the park brake is adjusted as part of a vehicle service.
1. Check the park brake for correct operation.
2. CAUTIONS:
When the vehicle is in the mounting position a red flashing

light may appear on the instrument cluster. This indicates that
the park brake actuator is in the mounting position. It does not
indicate a vehicle fault.
The warning lamp on the instrument cluster will flash

whilst the park brake is being driven into the mounting position.
Using Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment, drive the park

brake to the mounting position.
3. Place the vehicles transmission into NEUTRAL.

6. NOTES:
LH shown.
Align the access hole in the position shown.
Locate the park brake lever cable attachment point.

Rotate the brake disc.
7. NOTES:
RH shown.
Align the access hole in the position shown.
Locate the park brake lever cable attachment point.

8. CAUTIONS:
The park brake shoe lever should be visible as

shown.
There should be clearance between the park

brake shoe lever and the park brake cable cap as
shown.
NOTES:
LH shown.
The step must be carried out on both sides.
Observe the position of the park brake shoe lever

and the park brake cable cap.
If the park brake shoe lever and park brake
cable cap are not as shown, proceed to the
next step.
If the park brake shoe lever and park brake
cable cap are as shown, proceed to step 11.
9. NOTES:
LH shown.
Using a suitable tool, check that the park brake

shoe lever will move easily in the direction shown
and returns to its original position.
If the park brake shoe lever moves easily,
proceed to the next step.
If the park brake shoe lever does not move
easily, rectify any concerns before
proceeding.
10. NOTES:
LH shown.
Using a suitable tool, check that the park brake

cable moves easily as shown.
If the park brake cable does not move
easily, rectify any concerns before
proceeding.
Adjust
NOTE: This procedure must be carried out if new park brake shoes are installed, new rear brake discs are
installed, or if the vehicle has been mud wading (not water) for more than 50 miles or if the park brake is adjusted
as part of a vehicle service.
1. NOTE: Align the access hole with the

indicators located on the back plate.
Locate the park brake shoe adjuster.

2. CAUTION: Failure to follow this step may cause damage to

the park brake system. Failure to displace the park brake shoes,
as shown, will result in incorrect clearance when carrying out
the adjustment step.
NOTES:
The movement of the park brake shoe will be small and

may not be felt when levering.
LH shown.
Using a flat blade screwdriver, lever the brake shoes as
indicated.
3. CAUTION: Failure to follow this step may cause damage to

the park brake system. Failure to displace the park brake shoes,
as shown, will result in incorrect clearance when carrying out
the adjustment step.
NOTES:
The movement of the park brake shoe will be small and

may not be felt when levering.
RH Shown.
Using a flat blade screwdriver, lever the brake shoes as

indicated.
4. CAUTION: Do dot apply excessive force on the
park brake shoe adjuster. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the park brake
system.
Using a flat bladed screwdriver rotate the brake

shoe adjuster to extend it until the brake disc is
locked hand tight.
5. CAUTION: The following steps sets the

running clearance for the park brake shoes, failure
to adhere to the paint marking process may cause
damage to the park brake system when the
adjustment steps are carried out.
Using suitable marker, mark the position of the

park brake shoe adjuster.
6. CAUTION: The park brake adjuster must be rotated back
EXACTLY one full revolution (10 clicks). Failure to follow
this instruction may result in damage to the park brake system.
Rotate the adjuster back one revolution (10 clicks)until paint

mark is visible.
7. CAUTION: The wedge adjuster must be

correctly seated to make sure the park brake cable
is correctly adjusted. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the park brake
system.
Loosen the wedge adjuster Allen screw half a turn.

Tap the brake disc lightly with a soft faced
mallet, around the park brake shoe location
within the brake disc.
Tighten the wedge adjuster Allen screw to 6
Nm (5 lb.ft).

9. Take the vehicle out of the mounting position by operating the
park brake twice.
10. CAUTION: The next step should only be carried out

when new park brake shoes or brake disc have been
installed.
Carry out the park brake shoe bedding-in procedure.

For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake Shoes
Bedding-In (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, General
Procedures).
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Shoes Bedding-In
General Procedures
NOTE: This procedure must be carried out if, new parking brake shoes are fitted, new rear brake discs are
fitted or if the vehicle has been mud wading (not water) for more than 50 miles.
1. Carry out the parking brake shoe bedding-in procedure.
2. NOTE: The electronic parking brake 'Service Bedding-in

Procedure mode' will be active for the remainder of the igntion
cycle, or until the vehicle speed exceeds 31 mph (50 kph). If
the procedure needs to be re-entered, the entry actions must
be repeated.
To enter 'Service Bedding-in Procedure' mode.

Start and run the engine.
Apply the footbrake 3 times within 10 seconds and hold
applied after the 3rd application.
Apply the electronic parking brake switch 4 times,
followed by 3 release applications within 10 seconds.
3. Once the Service Bedding-in procedure mode has been entered,

the electronic parking brake linings can be bedded-in by
conducting 10 repeated stops from 30 - 35 kph (19 - 22 mph),
followed by a 500 metre (547 yard) interval between each stop
to allow the brakes to cool, using the electronic parking brake
control switch.
The electronic parking brake brake force will be
increased up to the dynamic maximum so long as the
switch is held in the applied position.
If the switch is released to either the NEUTRAL or OFF
positions, the electronic parking brake will be released.
The electronic parking brake MUST be allowed to cool
between applications, either by driving at 19 mph (30
kph) for 500 metres (547 yards) or remaining stationary
for 1 minute between each application.
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable LH
Removal
CAUTION: To avoid accidental operation of the parking brake, and possible damage to the parking brake
actuator, remove Fusible link 8, located in the engine compartment fuse box before commencing work.
NOTE: If the parking brake system has completed less than 50,000 cycles it is permissible to replace the
parking brake cables. If over 50,000 cycles have been completed, then the cables can only replaced as part of the
parking brake actuator and cable assembly. The parking brake cycle count can be checked using using the Land
Rover approved diagnostic system, (ON/OFF = 1 cycle). If a cable breaks or becomes detached whilst the vehicle is
being driven, a 'parking brake actuator unjaming procedure' may be required using the Land Rover approved
diagnostic system.

2. Isolate the parking brake electrical circuit.

Remove fuse number 8 from the BJB.

4. Remove both rear wheels and tires.
5. Release the parking brake shoe adjustment.

Loosen the screw.

Reposition the LH rear brake caliper.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Using a suitable tie strap, support the brake
caliper.
7. Remove the LH rear brake disc.
Remove the screw.
8. Disconnect parking brake cable from the wheel

hub.
Fully loosen the nut.
Disconnect the inner cable from the brake
shoe.
9. Release the LH parking brake cable.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Release the cable from the clip on the
chassis.
11. Remove the LH parking brake cable.

Release the retaining nut.
Release and remove the cable.
Installation
1. Install the LH parking brake cable.
LH cable: Screw the cable in 5 complete turns.
Tighten the retaining nut.
2. Locate and secure the LH parking brake cable.

Secure the wiring harness.
Secure the cable grommet to the integrated body frame
bracket.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the brake cable circlip

is positioned as shown.
Connect the parking brake cable to the wheel hub.

Locate the cable to the backplate.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is clean, free of
foreign material and lubricant.
Install the LH rear brake disc.

5. Secure the LH rear brake caliper.

6. NOTE: The adjustment procedure must be carried out in

full.
Adjust the parking brake shoes.

Lining Adjustment (206-05, General Procedures).
7. Install the rear wheels and tires.

8. Install fuse number 8 into the BJB.

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable RH
Removal
CAUTION: To avoid accidental operation of the parking brake, and possible damage to the parking brake
actuator, remove Fusible link 8, located in the engine compartment fuse box before commencing work.
NOTE: If the parking brake system has completed less than 50,000 cycles it is permissible to replace the
parking brake cables. If over 50,000 cycles have been completed, then the cables can only replaced as part of the
parking brake actuator and cable assembly. The parking brake cycle count can be checked using using the Land
Rover approved diagnostic system, (ON/OFF = 1 cycle). If a cable breaks or becomes detached whilst the vehicle is
being driven, a 'parking brake actuator unjaming procedure' may be required using the Land Rover approved
diagnostic system.




Loosen the screw.

Reposition the RH rear brake caliper.

Remove the 2 bolts.
caliper.
7. Remove the RH rear brake disc.
Remove the screw.
8. Disconnect parking brake cable from the wheel

hub.
shoe.
9. CAUTION: The fuel tank breather line bracket

can be easily damaged when releasing it from the
chassis.
Release the fuel tank breather line bracket.

Remove the plastic insert.
10. Release the RH parking brake cable.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Release the parking brake cable from the 2
pipe clips.
chassis.
12. CAUTION: Make sure that no dirt or moisture

enters the actuator during cable replacement.
Remove the RH parking brake cable.

Release the retaining nut.
Release the cable retaining clip.
Release and remove the cable.
Installation
1. Install the RH parking brake cable.
Install the cable.
Install the cable retaining clip.
Tighten the retaining nut.
2. Secure the fuel tank breather line bracket.

Install the plastic insert.
3. Locate and secure the RH parking brake cable.

Secure the parking brake cable to the 2 pipe clips.
bracket.

Connect the parking brake cable to the wheel hub.


Install the RH rear brake disc.

6. Secure the RH rear brake caliper.

7. NOTE: The adjustment procedure must be carried out in

full.
Adjust the parking brake shoes.

8. Install the rear wheels and tires.


Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Switch
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Installation

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Actuator Vehicles With:
Standard Brakes
Removal



Remove the plug from the access hole in
the brake disc.
Using a suitable tool, rotate the brake shoe
adjuster to release the adjustment.


Remove the 2 bolts.
caliper.

Remove the screw.

Remove the 2 bolts.
caliper.

Remove the screw.
10. Disconnect both parking brake cables from the

wheel hubs.
shoe.
Remove the 2 bolts.
chassis.

chassis.

14. Raise the RH side of the rear stabilizer bar.
Loosen the 2 bolts.

Remove the 2 bolts.
pipe clips.
chassis.

18. CAUTION: Inspect the parking brake
emergency release cable to body seal and replace
if damaged.
NOTE: Note the fitted position of the parking

brake emergency release cable to body seal.
Release the parking brake emergency release

cable.

RH side rear: Disconnect the brake line.

Position an absorbent cloth to collect fluid
spillage.
Disconnect the line union.
Remove the clip.
20. NOTE: Note the routing of the parking brake

emergency release cable.
Displace the parking brake actuator and cable

assembly.
Remove the 2 nuts.
21. NOTE: Brake cable shown removed for clarity.
Remove the parking brake actuator and cable

assembly.
Withdraw from the RH rear wheel arch
aperture.
Installation
1. NOTE: Note the routing of the parking brake emergency

release cable.
Install the parking brake actuator and cable assembly.

Install the 2 nuts.
RH side rear: Connect the brake line.

Secure the clip.
Tighten the brake line union to 16 Nm (12 lb.ft).
3. CAUTION: Make sure the parking brake emergency release

cable to body seal is installed correctly.
Locate and secure the parking brake emergency release cable.



bracket.

bracket.

Connect the parking brake cables to the wheel

hubs.





13. Adjust the parking brake shoes.


For additional information, refer to: Component Bleeding (206-

parking brake actuator on an even surface.
18. Apply and release hand brake to confirm operation.

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Actuator Vehicles With:
High Performance Brakes
Removal



Remove the plug from the access hole in
the brake disc.


Remove the 2 bolts.
caliper.

Remove the screw.

Remove the 2 bolts.
caliper.

Remove the screw.
10. Disconnect both parking brake cables from the

wheel hubs.
shoe.
Remove the 2 bolts.
chassis.

chassis.

14. Raise the RH side of the rear stabilizer bar.
Loosen the 2 bolts.

Remove the 2 bolts.
pipe clips.
chassis.

18. CAUTION: Inspect the parking brake
emergency release cable to body seal and replace
if damaged.
NOTE: Note the fitted position of the parking

brake emergency release cable to body seal.
Release the parking brake emergency release

cable.

RH side rear: Disconnect the brake line.

spillage.
Disconnect the line union.
Remove the clip.
20. NOTE: Note the routing of the parking brake

emergency release cable.
Displace the parking brake actuator and cable

assembly.
Remove the 2 nuts.
21. NOTE: Brake cable shown removed for clarity.
Remove the parking brake actuator and cable

assembly.
Withdraw from the RH rear wheel arch
aperture.
Installation
1. NOTE: Note the routing of the parking brake emergency

release cable.
Install the parking brake actuator and cable assembly.

Install the 2 nuts.
RH side rear: Connect the brake line.

Secure the clip.
Tighten the brake line union to 16 Nm (12 lb.ft).
3. CAUTION: Make sure the parking brake emergency release

cable to body seal is installed correctly.
Locate and secure the parking brake emergency release cable.



bracket.

bracket.

Connect the parking brake cables to the wheel

hubs.





13. Adjust the parking brake shoes.


Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-00, General
Procedures).

parking brake actuator on an even surface.
18. Apply and release hand brake to confirm operation.

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Shoes
Removal
NOTE: If the parking brake shoes or the brake discs have been removed for access to other components then
DO NOT carry out the bedding in procedure.



5. Release the brake caliper.

6. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang on the

brake hose.
7. Release the park brake shoe adjustment.

Remove the plug from the access hole in the
brake disc.
Remove the Torx screw.
9. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the green bias spring is installed to the

right hand parking brake shoes and the red bias spring is
installed to the left hand parking brake shoes.
Make sure the brake shoe spring is not over stretched.
NOTE: If equipped.
Remove the bias spring(s).

10. Remove the adjuster and return spring.
Release the parking brake shoe adjuster to
the minimum adjustment.
11. Remove the primary brake shoe.

pin.
Pivot the shoe to release it from the
spreader plate and return spring.
12. Remove the spreader plate and spring.
13. Remove the return spring.
14. Remove the secondary brake shoe.

pin.
Disconnect the parking brake cable retaining
spring from the brake shoe lever.
Release the parking brake cable.
Installation

inhaled.
Clean the backing plate and apply grease to the brake shoe
contacts.
2. Clean the adjuster and set it to its minimum extension.
3. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the brake shoe spring is not over

stretched.
Make sure the closed end of the retaining clip

is installed facing the brake shoe adjuster. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.
Illustration 'A' is the LH side and 'B' is the RH

side.
Install the secondary brake shoe.

Connect the parking brake cable.
Connect the parking brake cable retaining
spring to the brake shoe lever, making sure
the spring is not twisted.
Install the hold-down spring and retaining
pin.
4. Install the spreader plate and the spring.
Using a tie strap, tie back the spreader plate spring.
5. WARNING: Make sure the return spring and

the adjuster spring are correctly installed to the
primary shoe.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the brake shoe spring is not over

stretched.
Make sure the closed end of the retaining clip

is installed facing the brake shoe adjuster. Failure
the vehicle.
Illustration 'A' is the LH side and 'B' is the RH

side.
Install the primary brake shoe.

Install the return spring.
Connect the primary brake shoe to the
return spring.
Locate the primary brake shoe to the
spreader plate.
Install the hold-down spring and retaining
pin.
6. CAUTION: Make sure the brake shoe spring is not over

stretched.
Install the brake shoe adjuster and the retaining spring.
7. Remove and discard the spreader plate spring tie strap.

8. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the green bias spring is installed to the

right hand parking brake shoes and the red bias spring is
installed to the left hand parking brake shoes.
Make sure the brake shoe spring is not over stretched.
NOTE: If equipped.
Install the bias spring(s).

11. Install the brake caliper.

13. Adjust the parking brake.

Lining Adjustment (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, General
Procedures).


Hydraulic Brake Actuation -
Item Specification
Master cylinder bore diameter:
Primary 27 mm (1.1 in)
Secondary 20.6 mm (0.8 in)
Stroke 36 mm (1.4 in)
Brake pedal nut and bolt 45 33
Brake pedal bracket Torx bolts 10 7
Brake booster to brake pedal bracket nuts 25 18
Brake master cylinder nuts 26 19
Brake pipe unions 18 13
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
NOTE: right-hand drive (RHD) shown, left-hand drive (LHD) similar

1 - Brake pedal
2 - Brake warning indicator NAS (north American specification)
3 - Brake warning indicator (all except NAS)
4 - Brake pipes and hoses
5 - Brake master cylinder and reservoir
GENERAL
Hydraulic brake actuation consists of the brake pedal, the brake master cylinder and the hydraulic pipes and hoses.
BRAKE PEDAL

1 - In-vehicle cross beam
2 - Brake pedal buffer
3 - Stoplamp switch
4 - Brake pedal
5 - Clevis pin and clip
6 - Brake pedal bracket
The brake pedal is mounted in a bracket attached to the rear side of the engine bulkhead. A clevis pin and clip
connect the brake pedal to the push rod of the brake booster. A brake pedal buffer is installed on the in-vehicle cross
beam to restrain rearward movement of the brake pedal in an accident.
The stoplamp switch is mounted in the brake pedal bracket and operated by the brake pedal.
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER AND RESERVOIR
NOTE: RHD version shown, LHD version similar


1 - Reservoir
2 - Clutch outlet spigot and sealing cap (reference, not used)
3 - Primary outlet spigot
4 - Reservoir to master cylinder seal, primary inlet
5 - Primary outlet port
6 - Reservoir securing lug
7 - Secondary outlet port
8 - Cylinder housing
9 - Reservoir to master cylinder seal, secondary inlet
10 - Reservoir securing straps
11 - Secondary outlet spigot
12 - Filter
13 - Float
14 - Magnet
15 - Reservoir cap and level switch
The brake master cylinder and reservoir is attached to the front of the brake booster, on the driver side of the engine
compartment.
Master Cylinder
The brake master cylinder consists of a cylinder housing containing two pistons in tandem. The rear piston produces
pressure for the primary circuit and the front piston produces pressure for the secondary circuit. The pistons
incorporate center valves with a high flow rate to ensure there is always sufficient fluid available at the hydraulic
control unit for stability control operations.
When the brake pedal is pressed, the front push rod in the brake booster pushes the primary piston along the bore of
the cylinder housing. This produces pressure in the primary pressure chamber which, in conjunction with the primary
spring, overcomes the secondary spring and simultaneously moves the secondary piston along the bore. The initial
movement of the pistons, away from the piston stops, closes the primary and secondary center valves. Further
movement of the pistons then pressurizes the fluid in the primary and secondary pressure chambers, and thus the
brake circuits. The fluid in the chambers behind the pistons is unaffected by the movement of the pistons and can
flow unrestricted through the feed holes between the chambers and the reservoir.
When the brake pedal is released, the primary and secondary springs push the pistons back down the bore of the
cylinder housing. As the pistons contact the piston stops, the primary and secondary center valves open, which
allows fluid to circulate unrestricted between the two hydraulic circuits and the reservoir, through the center valves,
the chambers behind the pistons and the cylinder housing inlets.
Should a failure occur in one of the brake circuits, the remaining brake circuit will still operate effectively, although
brake pedal travel and vehicle braking distances will increase.
Reservoir
The reservoir is installed on top of the master cylinder to provide a supply of brake fluid for the primary and
secondary circuits of the brake system.
Two straps, integrated onto the sides of the reservoir, engage with lugs on the master cylinder to secure the
reservoir in position. Two outlet spigots on the underside of the reservoir locate in seals installed in the inlet ports of
the master cylinder. An outlet port is incorporated into the left side of the reservoir for use on vehicles with a clutch.
The reservoir is internally divided to isolate the circuits from each other at low fluid levels, and so prevent a leak in
one circuit from disabling the other circuit(s). The dividing walls support a central well and divide the area around the
well into a further eight separate compartments. The well forms an extension of the filler neck and contains the filter
and the fluid level switch.
The well and the surrounding compartments are interconnected by slots in the dividing walls. The slots are positioned
such that when the reservoir is full, fluid can move between the well and all of the surrounding compartments, but at
low fluid levels the interior forms separate reservoirs for each circuit. The following figure shows the separate
reservoirs for each circuit and the amount retained in each reservoir if there is a leak from one of the other circuits.
Reservoir Interior
NOTE: A = Clutch reservoir (reference, not used); B = Primary circuit reservoir; C = Secondary circuit reservoir

1 - Primary outlet
2 - Clutch outlet (reference, not used)
3 - Secondary outlet
The filler neck of the reservoir is sealed with a cap incorporating the level switch. The level switch is operated by a
magnet, which is installed in the float on the bottom of the switch. The switch reacts to the influence of the magnetic
field surrounding the magnet.
When the reservoir is full, the float rests against the bottom of the switch and holds the level switch open. When the
fluid level decreases, the float moves down and the switch closes to connect a ground to the instrument cluster.
When the ground is made, the instrument cluster illuminates the red light emitting diode (LED) in the brake warning
indicator. The instrument cluster also display an appropriate warning in the message center.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Description and Operation).
At the beginning of each ignition cycle, the instrument cluster performs a bulb check on the brake warning indicator;
the indicator is illuminated amber for 1.5 seconds, then red for 1.5 seconds.
The instrument cluster broadcasts the status of the brake fluid level, on the high speed controller area network (CAN)
bus, to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module.
BRAKE PIPES AND HOSES
The brake pipes and hoses connect the master cylinder to the wheel brakes via the hydraulic control unit. The pipes
are arranged to provide a front and rear split braking system. The brakes on the front axle are operated by the
primary system; the brakes on the rear axle are operated by the secondary system.
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation

Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Fluid Reservoir
Removal
CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean the
area with water.
1. Remove the cover.
2. Position an absorbent cloth to collect fluid spillage.
3. Disconnect the low brake fluid warning indicator switch


Remove the brake fluid reservoir.

Remove and discard 2 brake fluid reservoir
seals.
Installation
2. NOTE: Remove and discard all blanking caps.
Install the brake fluid reservoir.

Install new brake fluid reservoir seals.
3. Connect the low brake fluid warning indicator switch electrical

connector.
4. Bleed the brake system using T4.

For additional information, refer to: Brake System Bleeding -
Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-00, General Procedures).
5. Install the cover.

Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Master Cylinder
Removal

stands.
2. Remove the brake fluid reservoir.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Fluid Reservoir (206-
06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
3. CAUTION: Before the disconnection or removal of any

components, make sure the area around joint faces and
connections are clean. Plug any open connections to prevent
contamination.
Disconnect the brake master cylinder brake tubes.
4. Remove the brake master cylinder.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Installation
1. Install the brake master cylinder.
2. Connect the brake tubes.

3. Install the brake fluid reservoir.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Fluid Reservoir (206-
06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Pedal
Removal
1. Remove the headlamp switch.
For additional information, refer to: Headlamp Switch (417-01,
2. Remove the stoplamp switch.

For additional information, refer to: Stoplamp Switch (417-01,
3. Remove the instrument panel access panel.

4. Remove the brake pedal bracket.

Release the wiring harness clip.
Remove the 4 Torx bolts.
5. Remove the brake pedal clevis pin.

Remove the clip.
6. Remove the brake pedal.

7. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the
component is removed for access only.
Remove the brake pedal pad.
Installation
1. Install the brake pedal pad.
2. Install the brake pedal.

3. Install the brake pedal clevis pin.

Install the clip.
4. Install the brake pedal bracket.

5. Install the instrument panel access panel.

6. Install the stoplamp switch.

7. Install the headlamp switch.

Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Pedal and Bracket
Removal
1. Remove the headlamp switch.
2. Remove the stoplamp switch.


4. Remove the brake pedal bracket.

Release the wiring harness clip.
5. Remove the brake pedal clevis pin.

Remove the clip.
6. Release the stoplamp wiring harness.

7. Remove the brake pedal assembly.
Remove the 6 nuts.
Position the brake booster forward to aid
the removal of the brake pedal assembly.
Installation
1. Install the brake pedal assembly.
Position the brake booster to the brake pedal bracket.
2. Secure the wiring harness.

Secure the clips.
3. Install the brake pedal clevis pin.

Install the clip.
4. Install the brake pedal bracket.

Tighten the Torx bolt to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

6. Install the stoplamp switch.

7. Install the headlamp switch.

Power Brake Actuation -
Item Specification
Brake booster type Twin chamber 228 and 254 mm (9.0 and 10.0 in)
Boost ratio - vehicles without Brembo brakes 7:1
Boost ratio - vehicles with Brembo brakes 8:1
Brake booster nuts 23 17
Brake master cylinder nuts 26 19
M12 brake pipe unions 16 12
M14 brake pipe unions 18 13
Brake pedal buffer bolts 10 7
Brake vacuum pump nuts - 4.2 and 4.4 liter engines 5 4
Brake vacuum pump bolts - 2.7 liter engine 23 17
Brake vacuum pump stud - 2.7 liter engine 13 10
Brake vacuum pump nut - 2.7 liter engine 13 10
Brake vacuum pump bolts - 3.6 liter engine 23 17
Brake vacuum pump stud - 3.6 liter engine 10 7
Brake vacuum pump nut - 3.6 liter engine 23 17
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Booster
COMPONENT LOCATIONS - (5.0L NA and SUPERCHARGED)
NOTE: LHD shown, RHD similar

1 - Vacuum pipe connection to intake manifold
2 - Brake Booster
3 - Vacuum pump
4 - Vacuum pipes
COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 3.0L DIESEL
NOTE: LHD shown, RHD similar


1 - Vacuum pipe connection to brake booster
2 - Brake booster
3 - Oil Scavenger pipe
4 - Vacuum pump
COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 3.6L DIESEL
NOTE: RHD shown, LHD similar


1 - Vacuum pipe connection to vacuum pump
2 - Vacuum pipe
3 - Check valve
4 - Brake booster
5 - Vacuum pump
GENERAL
Power assistance for the brakes is provided by a vacuum operated brake booster. The vacuum is supplied by an
engine mounted vacuum pump.
VACUUM PIPES
Plastic vacuum pipes connect the brake booster to the vacuum source. Check valves are incorporated into the
vacuum pipes. On petrol models there are two in-line check valves, to maintain the vacuum in the brake booster
when the throttle is open and the vacuum pump is not running, and prevent fuel vapor entering the brake booster.
On diesel models there is a single check valve integrated into the vacuum pipe connection with the brake booster, to
maintain the vacuum in the brake booster when the vacuum pump is operating at less than the optimum.
BRAKE BOOSTER
The brake booster is installed in the driver side of the engine compartment, on the engine bulkhead.
The brake booster is a dual diaphragm unit with a boost ratio of 8.0 : 1 and 28 bar loop-in in all engine variants. The
input push rod is connected to the brake pedal. The output push rod locates in the primary piston of the brake
master cylinder. A vacuum pipe, installed in a grommet in the front face of the housing, connects the brake booster
to the intake manifold and electric vacuum pump (petrol models) or the engine driven vacuum pump (diesel models).
VACUUM PUMP (5.0L NA and SUPERCHARGED)

1 - Air vent
2 - Vacuum pump inlet
3 - Pump drive
On 5.0L (NA and Supercharged) petrol models the vacuum pump supplements the main vacuum supply from the
engine manifold.
The vacuum pump is a radial vane pump which is attached to the end of the auxiliary drive camshaft and driven by
crankshaft via the auxiliary drive chain. The vacuum pipe from the brake booster connects to an elbow on the rim of
the vacuum pump.
The vacuum pump is lubricated and cooled by engine oil supplied from the gallery in the block, through the auxiliary
shaft, to the oil pick up tube (see small hole in green shaft in picture above!). The oil return is through twin outlet
ports in the front face of the pump into a drain cavity in the sump. Air extracted from the brake booster is vented
into the drain cavity along with the returning engine oil.
VACUUM PUMP (3.0L DIESEL)


1 - Vacuum connection (turbo control)
2 - Vacuum connection for brake booster
3 - Oil inlet port
4 - Air vent
5 - Drive dog
6 - Oil return/scavenge pipe
The vacuum pump is a combined vacuum and oil scavenge pump. The scavenge pump is g-rotor type pump that
drains oil from the secondary turbocharger to accommodate vehicle tilt. The pump is located at the rear of the RH
side cylinder head and is driven from the exhaust camshaft.
The vacuum pump is a radial vane pump. The vacuum pipe from the brake booster connects to an elbow on the rim
of the vacuum pump.
The vacuum pump is lubricated and cooled by engine oil supplied to a port in the front face of the vacuum pump
from a gallery in the cylinder head. The oil return is through a vent in the front face of the pump into a drain cavity
in the cylinder head. Air extracted from the brake booster is vented into the drain cavity with the returning engine oil.
VACUUM PUMP (3.6L DIESEL)

1 - Vacuum pump connection to brake booster
2 - Camshaft drive lobe
3 - Mounting flange
The Vacuum required for brake booster operation on TdV8 vehicles is provided by an engine driven vacuum pump.
The vacuum pump is a radial vane type pump mounted to the front of the right-hand (RH) cylinder head which is
driven by the intake camshaft. The vacuum pipe from the brake booster connects to an elbow on the rim of the
vacuum pump.
The vacuum pump is lubricated and cooled by engine oil supplied to a port in the front face of the vacuum pump
from a gallery in the cylinder head. The oil return is through a vent in the front face of the pump into a drain cavity
in the cylinder head. Air extracted from the brake booster is vented into the drain cavity with the returning engine oil.
The vacuum pump is also used to supply vacuum for operation of the following components:
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system

The adaptive engine mounts.
Power Brake Actuation - Power Brake System

Power Brake Actuation - Brake Booster
Removal
1. Pump the brake pedal until the brake vacuum assistance is
exhausted.
2. Remove the auxiliary battery cover.

3. If installed, remove the auxiliary battery.
4. Detach the automatic transmission module bracket

and position it to one side.
Remove the 2 bolts.
5. Remove the auxiliary battery compartment side

wall.
Release the four clips.
6. Release the Air Conditioning (A/C) pipes.

Remove the retaining screw.
7. Remove the auxiliary battery tray.
Remove the 3 bolts.
8. Release the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module.

Remove the 3 nuts.
Release the brake tubes from the clip.
9. Disconnect the low brake fluid warning indicator switch

10. CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces.

If spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean the area with
water.
Position an absorbent cloth to collect fluid spillage.
11. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from

the brake booster.
12. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that excessive force is not used.
damage to the vehicle.
Make sure the wings and trim panels are

covered and protected, failure to follow this
Make sure the brake pipes are not damaged

when displacing the brake master cylinder and ABS
module. Failure to follow this instruction may
Displace the brake master cylinder and ABS

module as a complete assembly.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Discard the master cylinder seals.
13. Remove the outer plenum base.

Remove the 3 nuts.
14. Remove the driver side closing trim panel.

Release the clip.
15. NOTE: The cover is shown removed for

clarity.
Remove the brake booster push rod clevis pin.

Remove the retaining clip.
16. Remove the brake booster.
Remove the 4 nuts.
Installation
1. Install the brake booster.
2. Install the brake booster push rod clevis pin.

Install the retaining clip.
3. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose.
4. Install the outer plenum base.

Carefully lift the anti-lock brake system modulator for
access.
Install the 3 nuts.
5. CAUTION: Make sure the master cylinder is correctly

aligned.
NOTE: Install new seals and nuts.
Install the the brake master cylinder and ABS module.

6. Secure the anti-lock brake system modulator.

Install the 3 nuts.
Secure the brake tubes to the clip.
7. Connect the low brake fluid warning indicator switch electrical

connector.
8. Install the auxiliary battery tray.

9. Install the auxiliary battery compartment side wall.

Secure with the four retaining clips.
10. Secure the A/C pipes.

Install the retaining screw.
11. Secure the automatic transmission module bracket

12. If installed, install the auxiliary battery.
13. NOTE: This step is to check the tightness of the retaining

nuts after the initial tighten to make sure that torque has not
relaxed.
Check the brake booster retaining nuts.


Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.
15. Start engine and check the brake booster operation.

Power Brake Actuation - Brake Vacuum Pump TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Body - Diesel (502-02, Removal and Installation).
2.
3.
4. Torque: 23 Nm
5. Torque: 13 Nm
6. NOTE: Discard the O-ring seal.
Torque: 10 Nm
7. Torque: 23 Nm
8.
Installation
1. NOTES:
Install a new gasket.
Apply silicone gasket sealant or equivalent

meeting Land Rover specification.
The application of sealant must be 10 mm

square in two places. Install the brake vacuum
pump immediately after applying the sealant.
The brake vacuum pump should be fitted

directly to the engine without smearing the
sealant.
Make sure that the drive coupling is aligned

with camshaft coupling.

Power Brake Actuation - Brake Vacuum Pump V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol
Removal

stands.

Installation).
3. Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01D, General

Procedures).
4.
5. NOTES:
Discard the seal.

Torque: 12 Nm
Installation
1. NOTE: Install a new seal.

Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control -
Item Specification
System Bosch 8.0 Anti-lock braking system with Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD), Corner Brake Control (CBC),
make/type Electronic Traction Control (ETC), Hill Descent Control (HDC), Anti-roll Mitigation (ARM), Emergency
Brake Assist (EBA), and Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
Wheel
speed
sensors:
Make/type Bosch DF11i
Location Front and rear knuckles with the active directional sensor acting on the driveshaft pole wheel
Yaw rate Bosch DRS MM1.OR
sensor
make/type
Front road wheel speed sensor bolt 9 7
Front brake caliper anchor plate to wheel knuckle bolts 275 203
Brembo front brake caliper to wheel knuckle bolts 275 203
Front brake hose retaining bracket to wheel knuckle bolt 22 16
Rear road wheel speed sensor to wheel knuckle bolt 9 7
ABS module to mounting bracket nuts 8 6
ABS module mounting bracket to body nuts 23 17
M10 Brake tube union nuts 15 11
M12 Brake tube union nuts 15 11
M14 Brake tube union nut 17 13
Yaw rate sensor bolts 7 5
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control - Anti-Lock Control - Traction
Control
COMPONENT LOCATIONS - SHEET 1 OF 2

1 - hydraulic control unit (HCU) with attached anti-lock brake system (ABS) module
2 - Stoplamp switch
3 - Right rear wheel speed sensor
4 - Left rear wheel speed sensor
6 - HDC (hill descent control) relay (non-serviceable, integrated into central junction box
(CJB))
8 - Left front wheel speed sensor
9 - Right front wheel speed sensor
COMPONENT LOCATIONS - SHEET 2 OF 2

1 - Brake warning indicator (NAS (north American specification) only)
2 - ABS warning indicator
3 - Brake warning indicator (all except NAS)
4 - DSC (dynamic stability control) switch
5 - HDC switch
6 - HDC information indicator
7 - DSC warning indicator
GENERAL
The anti-lock control - traction control system is based on the 4 channel Bosch 8.0 system and provides the following
brake functions:
ARM (active roll mitigation).

ABS.
CBC (corner brake control).
DSC.
electronic brake force distribution (EBD).
ETC (electronic traction control).
emergency brake assist (EBA).
EDC (engine drag-torque control).
HDC.
The system consists of the following components:
A DSC switch.
An HDC switch.
An HDC relay.
A stoplamp switch.
Four wheel speed sensors.
A yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor.
A steering angle sensor.
Four warning indicators.
A HCU with attached ABS module.
DSC SWITCH
The DSC switch allows the DSC function to be selected off. Although Land Rover recommend that DSC is selected on
for all normal driving conditions, it may be beneficial to de-select DSC, to maximize traction, under the following
conditions:
If the vehicle needs to be rocked out of a hollow or a soft surface.

Driving on loose surfaces or with snow chains.
Driving in deep sand, snow or mud.
On tracks with deep longitudinal ruts.
The DSC switch is a non-latching switch installed in the center switch pack on the instrument panel. Pressing the DSC
switch connects an ignition power feed to the ABS module. With the first press of the DSC switch, the ABS module
disables the DSC functions. When the DSC switch is pressed again, the ABS module re-enables the DSC functions.
The DSC switch must be pressed for a minimum of 0.3 second for the ABS module to react. The DSC function is re-
enabled at the beginning of each ignition cycle.
The status of the DSC switch selection is shown by the DSC warning indicator. The DSC warning indicator is off while
DSC is selected on, and continuously illuminated while DSC is selected off.
A DSC switch request to disable DSC is ignored if the air suspension system has failed, or is in off-road height at
speeds above 60 km/h (37.5 mph).
To guard against incorrect operation or a broken switch, if the input from the DSC switch is held high for more than
one minute, a failure is stored in the ABS module.
Even if DSC is deselected, driving maneuvers with extreme yaw or lateral acceleration may trigger DSC activity to
assist vehicle stability.
HDC SWITCH
The HDC switch controls the selection of the HDC function.
The HDC switch is a non-latching switch installed on the center console, to the rear of the gear shift lever. Pressing
and releasing the HDC switch momentarily connects an ignition power feed to the ABS module. With the first press
and release of the HDC switch, the ABS module enables operation of the HDC function. When the HDC switch is
pressed and released again, the ABS module disables operation of the HDC function.
To guard against incorrect operation or a broken switch, if the switch is pressed for more than 10 seconds no change
of state occurs. If the input from the HDC switch is held high for more than one minute, a failure is stored in the ABS
module.
HDC RELAY
The HDC relay is used to illuminate the stoplamps when the brakes are activated:
During HDC operation.

During dynamic application of the parking brake.
For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake (206-05, Description and Operation).
By the adaptive speed control system. For additional information, refer to:
Speed Control (310-03B, Description and Operation),
Speed Control (310-03C, Description and Operation).
The HDC relay is a non-serviceable, solid state relay on the circuit board of the CJB. Operation of the HDC relay is
controlled by the ABS module switching the coil to ground.
To operate the stoplamps during HDC or adaptive speed control operation, the ABS module monitors brake system
hydraulic pressure and energizes the HDC relay during active braking. A pressure threshold and time filter prevent
the stoplamps from flickering when HDC is braking. During dynamic application of the parking brake, the ABS module
energizes the HDC relay when it receives a stoplamp request message from the parking brake module on the high
speed controller area network (CAN) bus.
STOPLAMP SWITCH
The stoplamp switch is mounted in the brake pedal bracket and operated by the brake pedal. The stoplamp switch is
a two pole switch: The BS (brake switch) pole supplies a brake pedal status signal to the ABS module; the BLS
(brake lamp switch) pole operates the stoplamps and also supplies a brake pedal status signal to the ABS module
and to the engine control module (ECM).
While the brake pedal is released:
The BS contacts are closed, and connect an ignition power feed from the CJB to the ABS module.
The BLS contacts are open.
When the brake pedal is pressed:
The BS contacts open.

The BLS contacts close, and connect an ignition power feed from the CJB to the three stoplamps, the ABS
module and the ECM.
The ABS module monitors the status inputs from the stoplamp switch and broadcasts the brake pedal status and an
associated quality factor on the high speed CAN bus.
WHEEL SPEED SENSORS

1 - Knuckle assembly
2 - Sensor ring
3 - Halfshaft
5 - Screw
An active wheel speed sensor is installed in each wheel hub to provide the ABS module with a rotational speed signal
from each road wheel. The head of each wheel speed sensor is positioned close to a 48 tooth sensor ring on the
outer diameter of the constant velocity joint of the halfshaft. A flying lead connects each sensor to the vehicle wiring.
The wheel speed sensors each have a power supply connection and a signal connection with the ABS module. When
the ignition switch is in position II, the ABS module supplies power to the wheel speed sensors and monitors the
return signals. Any rotation of the halfshafts induces current fluctuations in the return signals which are converted
into individual wheel speeds and the overall vehicle speed by the ABS module.
The ABS module outputs the individual wheel speeds and the vehicle speed on the high speed CAN bus for use by
other systems. The quality of the vehicle speed signal is also broadcast on the high speed CAN bus. If all wheel
speed signals are available to calculate vehicle speed from, the quality of the vehicle speed signal is set to 'data
calculated within specified accuracy'. If one or more wheel speed sensors is faulty, the quality of the vehicle speed
signal is set to 'accuracy outside specification'.
The ABS module monitors the wheel speed sensor circuits for faults. If a fault is detected the ABS module stores a
related fault code and illuminates the appropriate warning indicators, depending on the system functions affected
(DSC/ETC, ABS, EBA/EBD, HDC). Also a warning chime sounds and a related message is shown in the message
center.
Since the wheel speed sensors are active devices, a return signal is available when the road wheels are not turning,
which enables the ABS module to check the sensors while the vehicle is stationary. In addition, the direction of travel
of each wheel can be sensed. This information is broadcast on the high sped CAN bus for use by other systems.
YAW RATE AND LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR
The yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor provides the ABS module with inputs of yaw rate and lateral
acceleration.
The yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor is installed under the center console and secured to the transmission
tunnel with two bolts.
When the ignition switch is in position II, the yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor receives an ignition power feed
from the CJB. The sensor is self diagnosed by the ABS module and can be interrogated using T4. The ABS module
broadcasts the yaw rate and lateral acceleration values, on the high speed CAN bus, for use by other systems.
The ABS module monitors the yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor for faults. If a fault is detected the ABS
module stores a related fault code and illuminates the DSC warning indicator. Also, a warning chime sounds and a
message advising of an HDC fault is shown in the message center.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

1 - Gear wheel
The steering angle sensor measures the steering wheel angle and the rate of change of the steering wheel angle
(known as the steering wheel angle speed). These measurements are output on the high speed CAN bus, together
with a quality factor signal, for use by other systems. The ABS module uses the steering angle sensor signals for CBC
and DSC operation.
The steering angle sensor is fixed to the pivot bracket of the steering column by three screws. A gear wheel in the
steering angle sensor engages with a plastic drive collar fixed onto the lower shaft of the column. Inside the steering
angle sensor, the gear wheel meshes with a gear train containing magnets. An eight pin electrical connector provides
the interface between the vehicle wiring and integrated circuits in the steering angle sensor.
The steering angle sensor uses the MR (magneto resistive) effect, which evaluates the direction of magnetic fields, to
measure the angular position of the lower shaft, and thus the steering wheel angle. When the steering wheel turns,
the steering column lower shaft rotates the gear wheel in the steering angle sensor, which drives the gear train and
rotates the magnets on the gears. The direction of the magnetic fields is constantly monitored by the steering angle
sensor and converted into a steering wheel angle and steering wheel angle speed.
The steering angle sensor performs a plausibility check of the steering wheel angle each time the following conditions
co-exist:
The vehicle is traveling in a straight line.

The vehicle speed is between 20 and 25 km/h (12.5 and 15.6 mph).
The transfer box is in high range.
The brake pedal is not pressed.
There is no ABS, DSC or ETC activity.
The steering angle sensor uses inputs of wheel speed, yaw rate and lateral acceleration to determine when the
vehicle is traveling in a straight line. When all of the conditions co-exist, the steering angle sensor checks the
steering angle, which should be 0 ± 15°. If the steering angle is outside the limits on two successive checks, the
steering angle sensor changes the quality factor signal to 'outside specification' for the remainder of the ignition cycle
and stores a fault code. At the beginning of each ignition cycle the quality factor signal is reset to 'within specified
accuracy'.
The status of the steering angle sensor can be determined using T4.
If the steering angle sensor is replaced, the new sensor must be calibrated using T4. The steering angle sensor must
also be re-calibrated any time it is disturbed from the steering column, or if the upper and lower steering columns
are separated.
Steering Angle Sensor Harness Connector C0862

Steering Angle Sensor Harness Connector C0862 Pin Details
1 to 4 Not used -
5 Ignition power supply Input
6 High speed CAN bus high Input/Output
7 High speed CAN bus low Input/Output
8 Ground -
WARNING INDICATORS
The following anti-lock control - traction control indicators are installed in the instrument cluster:
ABS Warning Indicator
The ABS warning indicator is an amber colored indicator located between the coolant temperature gage and the fuel
level gage.
The ABS warning indicator is continuously illuminated if there is a fault that affects ABS performance or causes the
ABS function to be disabled.
Operation of the ABS warning indicator is controlled by a high speed CAN bus message from the ABS module to the
instrument cluster.
When the ignition switch is first turned to position II, the ABS warning indicator illuminates for approximately 3
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if a fault is stored in the memory of the ABS module, the ABS
warning indicator goes off for 0.5 second, 0.5 second after the start of the bulb check. If a fault during the previous
ignition cycle caused the ABS warning indicator to be illuminated, the ABS warning indicator may remain illuminated
after the next bulb check, even if the fault has been rectified and cleared from the ABS module; the ABS warning
indicator remains illuminated until vehicle speed reaches 15-20 km/h (9.5-12.5 mph) while additional checks of the
related inputs are performed.
Brake Warning Indicator
The brake warning indicator is a dual colored indicator, located in the coolant temperature gage, that illuminates
amber for EBA faults and red for EBD faults. The brake warning indicator is also used to give warnings of:
Low brake fluid level (illuminates red).

For additional information, refer to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Description
and Operation).
Brake pad wear (illuminates amber).
For additional information, refer to: Rear Disc Brake (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Description and Operation).
Operation of the brake warning indicator is controlled by a high speed CAN bus message from the ABS module to the
instrument cluster.
When the ignition switch is first turned to position II, the brake warning indicator illuminates amber for approximately
1.5 seconds then red for approximately 1.5 seconds, as a bulb check.
DSC Warning Indicator
The DSC warning indicator is an amber colored warning indicator located in the tachometer.
Each time the DSC or the ETC function is active, the DSC warning indicator flashes at 2 Hz. If DSC has been selected
off, or there is a fault that disables the DSC or the ETC function, the DSC warning indicator is continuously
illuminated. If DSC has been selected off the instrument cluster also displays a message advising that DSC is
switched off.
Operation of the DSC warning indicator is controlled by a high speed CAN bus message from the ABS module to the
instrument cluster.
When the ignition switch is first turned to position II, the DSC warning indicator illuminates for approximately 3
seconds as a bulb check. If a fault during the previous ignition cycle caused the DSC warning indicator to be
illuminated, the DSC warning indicator may remain illuminated after the next bulb check, even if the fault has been
rectified and cleared from the ABS module; the DSC warning indicator may remain illuminated during vehicle
operation while additional checks of the related inputs are performed.
HDC Information Indicator
The HDC information indicator is a green colored indicator located in the tachometer.
The HDC information indicator is continuously illuminated while the HDC function is selected on and the vehicle is
within the parameters for HDC operation; when the vehicle is outside the parameters for HDC operation, the HDC
information indicator is flashed at 2 Hz.
Operation of the HDC information indicator is controlled by a high speed CAN bus message from the ABS module to
the instrument cluster.
HCU
The HCU is a 4 channel unit that modulates the supply of hydraulic pressure to the brakes under the control of the
ABS module.
The HCU is attached by three mounting bushes to a bracket in the plenum box on the driver side of the engine
compartment. Hydraulic pipes connect the HCU to the master cylinder and the brakes.
For additional information, refer to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Description and
Operation).
The primary and secondary outlets of the master cylinder are connected to primary and secondary circuits within the
HCU. The primary circuit in the HCU has separate outlet ports to the front brakes. The secondary circuit in the HCU
has separate outlet ports to the rear brakes. Each of the circuits in the HCU contain the following components to
control the supply of hydraulic pressure to the brakes:
A normally open, solenoid operated, pilot valve, to enable active braking.

A normally closed, solenoid operated, priming valve, to connect the brake fluid reservoir to the return pump
during active braking.
A return pump, to generate hydraulic pressure for active braking and return brake fluid to the reservoir.
Normally open, solenoid operated, inlet valves and normally closed, solenoid operated, outlet valves, to
modulate the hydraulic pressure in the individual brakes.
An accumulator and a relief valve, to allow the fast release of pressure from the brakes.
Filters, to protect the components from contamination.
The primary circuit also incorporates a pressure sensor to provide the ABS module with a hydraulic pressure signal.
Contact pins on the HCU mate with contacts on the ABS module to provide the electrical connections from the ABS
module to the return pump motor and the pressure sensor. The solenoids that operate the valves are installed in the
ABS module.
Replacement HCU are supplied pre-filled. After installation on the vehicle, T4 must be used to operate the solenoid
valves and the return pump to ensure correct bleeding of the HCU and brake circuits.
Schematic of HCU


1 - Master cylinder
2 - Reservoir
3 - Brake booster
4 - Brake pedal
5 - HCU
6 - Pressure sensor
7 - Priming valve
8 - Pilot valve
9 - Return pump motor
10 - Return pump
11 - Inlet valve
12 - Relief valve
13 - Accumulator
14 - Outlet valve
15 - Left front brake
16 - Right front brake
17 - Right rear brake
18 - Left rear brake
The HCU has three operating modes: Normal braking/EBD mode, ABS braking and active braking.
Normal Braking/EBD Mode

Initially, all of the solenoid operated valves are de-energized. Operating the brake pedal produces a corresponding
increase or decrease of pressure in the brakes, through the open pilot valves and inlet valves. If the ABS module
determines that EBD is necessary, it energizes the inlet valves for the brakes of the trailing axle, to isolate the brakes
from any further increase in hydraulic pressure.
ABS Braking Mode
If the ABS module determines that ABS braking is necessary, it energizes the inlet and outlet valves of the related
brake and starts the return pump. The inlet valve closes to isolate the brake from pressurized fluid; the outlet valve
opens to release pressure from the brake into the accumulator and the return pump circuit; the reduced pressure
allows the wheel to accelerate. The ABS module then operates the inlet and outlet valves to modulate the pressure in
the brake to apply the maximum braking effort without locking the wheel. Control of the valves for each wheel takes
place individually.
Active Braking Mode
The active braking mode is used to generate and control hydraulic pressure to the brakes for functions other than
ABS braking, e.g. DSC, EBA, ETC, HDC, dynamic application of the parking brake and adaptive speed control.
For active braking, the ABS module energizes the pilot valves and priming valves, starts the return pump and
energizes all of the inlet valves. Brake fluid, drawn from the reservoir through the master cylinder and priming valve,
is pressurized by the return pump and supplied to the inlet valves. The ABS module then operates the inlet valves
and outlet valves, as required, to modulate the pressure in the individual brakes. Some noise may be generated
during active braking.
ABS MODULE
The ABS module controls the brake functions using the HCU to modulate hydraulic pressure to the individual wheel
brakes.
The ABS module is attached to the HCU, in the plenum box on the driver side of the engine compartment. A 46 pin
connector provides the electrical interface between the ABS module and the vehicle wiring.
ABS Module Harness Connector C0506
ABS Module Harness Connector C0506 Pin Details

1 Ground Output
2 Battery power supply Input
3 Battery power supply Input
4 Ground Output
5 Front left wheel speed sensor signal Input
6 Rear left wheel speed sensor power supply Output
7 Rear right wheel speed sensor power supply Output
8 Rear right wheel speed sensor signal Input
9 Front right wheel speed sensor power supply Output
10 Front right wheel speed sensor signal Input
11 to 13 Not used -
14 High speed CAN bus low Input/Output
15 Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor ground Input
16 Yaw rate signal Input
17 Not used -
18 Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor reference Input
19 Not used -
20 Lateral acceleration signal Input
21 Not used -
22 HDC relay Output
23 to 25 Not used -
26 Front left wheel speed sensor power supply Output
27 Rear left wheel speed sensor signal Input
28 Ignition power supply Input
29 Not used -
30 Stoplamp switch BLS contacts Input
31 DSC switch Input
32 Not used -
33 Road speed signal Output
34 Not used -
35 High speed CAN bus high Input/Output
36 HDC switch Input
37 Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor test Output
38 to 40 Not used -
41 Stoplamp switch BS contacts Input
42 to 46 Not used -
SYSTEM OPERATION
ARM
The ARM function uses the brakes and the engine to attempt to restore stability if the vehicle is forced into such a
harsh manoeuver that it risks tipping over.
The ABS module monitors driver inputs and vehicle behavior using various powertrain signals and the inputs from the
wheel speed sensors, the steering angle sensor and the yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor. These are compared
with modeled behavior and, if vehicle behavior reaches a given risk level, the ABS module cuts the engine power, or
brakes one or more wheels, just enough to help the vehicle regain its poise and help the driver remain in control.
While the ignition is on, ARM is permanently enabled, even when DSC has been selected off.
ABS
ABS controls the speed of all road wheels to ensure optimum wheel slip when braking at the adhesion limit. This
prevents the wheels from locking, which helps to retain effective steering control of the vehicle.
On the front axle, the brake pressure is modulated separately for each wheel. On the rear axle, brake pressure is
modulated by select low. Select low applies the same pressure to both rear brakes, with the pressure level being
determined by the wheel on the lower friction surface. This maintains rear stability on split friction surfaces.
CBC
CBC influences the brake pressures, below the DSC and ABS thresholds, to counteract the yawing moment produced
when braking in a corner. CBC produces a correction torque by limiting the brake pressure on one side of the vehicle.
DSC
DSC uses the brakes and powertrain torque control to help maintain the lateral stability of the vehicle. While the
ignition is on the DSC function is permanently enabled unless selected off by the DSC switch. Even if DSC is
deselected, driving maneuvers with extreme yaw or lateral acceleration may trigger DSC activity to assist vehicle
stability.
DSC enhances driving safety in abrupt maneuvers and in understeer or oversteer situations which may occur in a
bend. The ABS module monitors the yaw rate and lateral acceleration of the vehicle, and the steering input, then
selectively applies individual brakes and signals for powertrain torque adjustments to reduce understeer or oversteer.
In general: in an understeering situation, the inner wheels are braked to counteract the yaw movement towards the
outer edge of the bend; in an oversteering situation, the outer wheels are braked to prevent the rear end of the
vehicle from pushing towards the outer edge of the bend.
The ABS module monitors the tracking stability of the vehicle using inputs from the wheel speed sensors, the steering
angle sensor and the yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor. The tracking stability is compared with stored target
data and, whenever the tracking stability deviates from the target data, the ABS module intervenes by applying the
appropriate brakes. When the DSC function is active, the ABS module also signals the transmission control module
(TCM) to prevent gear shifts. If necessary, the ABS module also signals:
The ECM, to reduce engine torque.

The transfer box control module, to adjust the locking torque of the center differential.
The rear differential control module, to adjust the locking torque of the rear differential.
The DSC function overrides the differential locking torque requests from the terrain response system.
EBD
EBD limits the brake pressure applied to the rear wheels. When the brakes are applied, the weight of the vehicle
transfers forwards, which reduces the ability of the rear wheels to transfer braking effort to the road surface. This
can cause the rear wheels to slip and make the vehicle unstable.
EBD uses the anti-lock braking hardware to automatically optimize the pressure of the rear brakes, below the point
where anti-lock braking would be invoked. Only the rear axle is under EBD control.
ETC
ETC attempts to optimize forward traction by reducing engine torque or braking a spinning wheel until it regains grip.
ETC is activated if an individual wheel speed is above that of the vehicle reference speed (positive slip) and the brake
pedal is not pressed. The spinning wheel is braked, allowing the excess torque to be transmitted to the non spinning
wheels through the drive line. If necessary, the ABS module also sends a high speed CAN bus message to the ECM to
request a reduction in engine torque. Torque reduction requests are for either a slow or fast response: a slow
response requests a reduction of throttle angle (4.2L and 4.4L only); a fast response requests an ignition cut-off
(4.2L and 4.4L) or a fuel cut-off (2.7L Diesel).
When the DSC function is selected off with the DSC switch, the engine torque reduction feature is disabled.
When the ETC function is active the ABS module also signals the TCM to prevent gear shifts.
EBA
EBA assists the driver, in emergency braking situations, by automatically maximizing the braking effort. There are
two situations when the ABS module will invoke EBA: when the brake pedal is pressed very suddenly and when the
brake pedal is pressed hard enough to bring the front brakes into ABS operation.
When the brake pedal is pressed very suddenly, the ABS module increases the hydraulic pressure to all of the brakes
until they reach the threshold for ABS operation, thus applying the maximum braking effort for the available traction.
The ABS module monitors for the sudden application of the brakes using the inputs from the stoplamp switch and
from the pressure sensor in the HCU. With the brake pedal pressed, if the rate of increase of hydraulic pressure
exceeds the predetermined limit, the ABS module invokes emergency braking.
When the brake pedal is pressed hard enough to bring the front brakes into ABS operation, the ABS module increases
the hydraulic pressure to the rear brakes up to the ABS threshold.
EBA operation continues until the driver releases the brake pedal enough for the hydraulic pressure in the HCU to
drop below a threshold value stored in the ABS module.
EDC
EDC prevents wheel slip caused by any of the following:
A sudden decrease in engine torque when the accelerator is suddenly released.

A downshift using the CommandShift™.
When the ABS module detects the onset of wheel slip without the brakes being applied, it signals the ECM, on the
high speed CAN bus, to request a momentary increase in engine torque.
HDC
HDC uses brake intervention to control vehicle speed and acceleration during low speed descents in off-road and low
grip on-road conditions. Generally, equal pressure is applied to all four brakes, but pressure to individual brakes can
be modified by the ABS and DSC functions to retain stability. Selection of the HDC function is controlled by the HDC
switch on the center console. HDC operates in both high and low ranges, at vehicle speeds up to 50 km/h (31.3
mph).
HDC may be used in D, R and CommandShift 1 in high range, and in D, R and all CommandShift gears in low range.
When in D, the transmission control module will automatically select the most appropriate gear. The vehicle should
not be driven with HDC active and the transmission in N.
HDC can be selected at speeds up to 80 km/h (50 mph), but will only be enabled at speeds below 50 km/h (31.3
mph). When HDC is selected:
At speeds up to 50 km/h (31.3 mph), the HDC information indicator is permanently illuminated if a valid gear
is selected.
At speeds from >50 to 80 km/h (>31.3 to 50 mph) the HDC information indicator flashes and a message
advising that the speed is too high is displayed in the message center.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Description and
Operation).
If the HDC switch is pressed while vehicle speed is more than 80 km/h (50 mph), the HDC information
indicator will not illuminate and HDC will not be selected.
If the speed reaches 80 km/h (50 mph) or more, a warning chime sounds, the HDC function is switched off,
the information indicator goes off and a message advising that HDC has been switched off is displayed in the
message center.
When HDC is enabled, the ABS module calculates a target speed and compares this with the actual vehicle speed.
The ABS module then operates the HCU, in the active braking mode, as required to achieve and maintain the target
speed. During active braking for HDC, the ABS module also energizes the HDC relay to operate the stoplamps.
Applying the foot brakes during active braking may result in a pulse through the brake pedal, which is normal.
The target speed varies, between minimum and maximum values for each gear and transmission range, depending
on driver inputs through the foot pedals. If the foot pedals are not operated, the ABS module adopts a default target
speed.
Low Range Target Speeds
Limit Speed, km/h (mph)
Gear
1, R D, 2 to 6
Default 3.5 (2.19) 6 (3.75)
Minimum 3.5 (2.19) 3.5 (2.19)
Maximum 20 (12.5) 20 (12.5)
High Range Target Speeds
Limit Speed, km/h (mph)
Gear
1, R D
Default 6 (3.75) 10 (6.25)
Minimum 6 (3.75) 6 (3.75)
Maximum 20 (12.5) 20 (12.5)
The target speed is varied between the minimum and maximum values using the accelerator pedal.
The target speed can also be varied by pressing the speed control '+' and '-' buttons (where fitted). For additional
Speed Control (310-03A Speed Control - 4.2L, Description and Operation),

Speed Control (310-03B Speed Control - 4.4L, Description and Operation),
Speed Control (310-03C Speed Control - 2.7L (TdV6) Diesel, Description and Operation).
During changes of target speed, the ABS module limits deceleration and acceleration to -0.5 m/s 2 (-1.65 ft/s2) and
+0.5 m/s 2 (+1.65 ft/s2) respectively.
To provide a safe transition from active braking to brakes off, the ABS module invokes a fade out strategy, which
gradually discontinues the braking effort, if it detects any of the following during active braking:
HDC selected off with the HDC switch.

Failure of a component used by HDC, but not critical to fade out function.
Accelerator pedal pressed when transmission is in neutral.
Brake overheat.
If fade out is invoked because of deselection or component failure, the HDC function is cancelled by the ABS module.
If fade out is invoked because the accelerator pedal is pressed with the transmission in neutral, or because of brake
overheat, the HDC function remains in standby and resumes operation when the accelerator pedal is released or the
brakes have cooled.
The fade out strategy increases the target speed, at a constant acceleration rate of 0.5 m/s 2 (1.65 ft/s2), until the
maximum target speed is reached or until no active braking is required for 0.5 s. If the accelerator pedal is
positioned within the range that influences target speed, the acceleration rate is increased to 1.0 m/s 2 (3.3 ft/s2).
When fade out is invoked because of component failure, a warning chime sounds, the HDC information indicator is
extinguished and a message advising there is a fault is displayed in the message center.
When fade out is invoked because of brake overheat, a message advising that HDC is temporarily unavailable is
displayed. At the end of fade out, the HDC information indicator flashes. The message is displayed, while HDC
remains selected, until the brakes have cooled.
To monitor for brake overheat, the ABS module monitors the amount of braking activity and, from this, estimates the
temperature of each brake. If the estimated temperature of any brake exceeds a preset limit, the ABS module
invokes the fade out strategy. After the fade out cycle, the HDC function is re-enabled when the ABS module
estimates that all of the brake temperatures are at less than 64% of the temperature limit.
If there is a fault that affects the HDC function, or if the HDC function is temporarily unavailable because of brake
overheat, an appropriate message is displayed in the message center.
ANTI-LOCK CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired connection; D = High speed CAN bus


1 - Fusible link 11E, battery junction box (BJB)
2 - Ignition switch
3 - Fuse 37P, CJB
5 - Fusible link 9E, BJB
6 - Fusible link 23E, BJB
7 - Front wheel speed sensor
8 - Front wheel speed sensor
9 - Rear wheel speed sensor
10 - Rear wheel speed sensor
11 - Navigation computer
12 - ABS module
13 - TCM
14 - Diagnostic socket
20 - restraints control module (RCM)
21 - Left stoplamp
22 - Center stoplamp
23 - Right stoplamp
24 - ECM
26 - HDC relay (non-serviceable, integrated into CJB)
27 - Fuse 15P, CJB
28 - Stoplamp switch
29 - HDC switch
30 - DSC switch
31 - Fuse 66P, CJB
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control - Anti-Lock Control - Traction
Control
For a detailed description of the Anti-Lock Control- Traction Control System and operation, refer to the relevant
Description and Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control (206-09A
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control, Description and Operation).
the donor vehicle.

Visual Inspection
Tire size, condition and installation Fuses
Wheel speed sensor condition and installation Harnesses and connectors
Steering Angle Sensor Module (SASM) condition and installation Warning indicator operation
Yaw rate sensor and accelerometer condition and installation Wheel speed sensors
Hydraulic control unit (with attached anti-lock brake system control Central Junction Box (CJB)
module) condition and installation Hill Descent Control (HDC)
switch
Dynamic Stability Control
(DSC) switch
Stop lamp switch
Yaw rate sensor and
accelerometer
Steering Angle Sensor Module
(SASM)
Anti-lock Brake System
control module (ABS)
Controller Area Network (CAN)
circuits
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Anti-Lock Braking System Control Module (ABS) (100-00
General Information, Description and Operation).
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control - Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Module
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure the ignition switch is in position 0.
1. Remove the cover.
3. CAUTIONS:
Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled,

immediately remove the fluid and clean the area with water.

Disconnect the 6 brake tubes.

Position an absorbent cloth to collect fluid spillage.
4. Remove the ABS module from the mounting

bracket.
Loosen, but do not remove, the 2 nuts
securing the ABS module to the bracket.
Installation
1. NOTES:
Make sure the ABS module locating grommet is correctly

seated in the bracket before installing the ABS module.
Make sure the ABS module locating pin is correcly located

in the grommet, and the 2 front isolators are fully seated in the
bracket slots.
Install the ABS module.

Tighten the 2 ABS module retaining nuts to 8 Nm (6
lb.ft).
Tighten the two M10 and three M12 brake tube unions
to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).
Tighten the M14 brake tube union to 17 Nm (13 lb.ft).
Remove the ABS module from the mounting bracket.
2. Using T4, bleed the braking system.

For additional information, refer to: Brake System Bleeding -
Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-00, General Procedures) /
Brake System Bleeding - Vehicles With: High Performance
Brakes (206-00, General Procedures).
3. Install the cover.
4. If a new ABS module has been installed, interrogate the ABS

system using T4.
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control - Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Removal
All vehicles


4. Release the wheel speed sensor lead from the

brake hose retaining bracket.

Release the brake caliper anchor plate from the

wheel knuckle and tie the caliper aside.

Release the brake caliper from the wheel knuckle.

All vehicles
7. NOTE: The brake disc is shown removed for
clarity.
Release the wheel speed sensor from the wheel

knuckle.
Remove the bolt.
8. Remove the wheel speed sensor.

Release the wiring harness from the clips.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Make sure the wheel speed sensor location in the wheel knuckle
is free of dirt.
2. NOTE: Make sure the electrical connector retaining clip is

attached to the body wiring harness.
Install the wheel speed sensor.

Secure the wiring harness in the clips.

3. Secure the brake caliper and anchor plate to the wheel
knuckle.

4. Secure the brake caliper to the wheel knuckle.
All vehicles
5. Secure the wheel speed sensor lead to the brake hose retaining
bracket.
6. Install the fender splash shield.


Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
Removal

3. Disconnect the anti-lock brake system (ABS)

sensor electrical connector.
Release the wiring harness retaining clip.

knuckle.
Release the wiring harness.
Remove the retaining bolt.
5. Remove the wheel speed sensor.

Release the wiring harness from the 4 clips.
Installation
1. Make sure the wheel speed sensor location in the wheel knuckle
is free of dirt.

Attach the wiring harness to the 4 clips.
3. Secure the wheel speed sensor to the wheel knuckle.

Attach the wiring harness to the clip.
4. NOTE: Make sure the electrical connector retaining clip is

attached to the body wiring harness.
Connect the ABS sensor electrical connector.

Attach the wiring harness.
5. If a new wheel speed sensor has been installed, interrogate the

ABS system using T4.
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist -
Item Specification
Yaw Rate Sensor Bosch DRS MM1.OR
Yaw rate sensor bolts 10 7
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist

REFER to: Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control (206-09A Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control, Diagnosis and
Testing).
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Yaw Rate Sensor
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00
Battery and Charging System - General Information,
Specifications).
2. Remove the floor console.

For additional information, refer to: Floor Console (501-12
Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the instrument panel center reinforcement.

For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel Center
Reinforcement (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console, Removal
and Installation).
4.
5.
6. Remove the yaw rate sensor.

Installation
1. Install the yaw rate sensor.
Install the 2 bolts and tighten to 7 Nm (5
lb.ft).
2.
3.
4. Install the instrument panel center reinforcement.

For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel Center
Reinforcement (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console, Removal
and Installation).
5. Install the floor console.

For additional information, refer to: Floor Console (501-12
Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and Installation).

Specifications).
Steering System - General Information - Steering System
For a detailed description of the Steering System and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to:
Power Steering (211-02 Power Steering, Description and Operation),

Steering Linkage (211-03 Steering Linkage, Description and Operation),
Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Description and Operation).
the donor vehicle.


Visual Inspection
Check the tires for correct pressure, size and tread pattern Steering Angle Sensor Module
Check for wheel rim and tire damage (SASM) and circuits
Check road wheel security Controller Area Networks (CAN)
Check the power steering fluid level and the hydraulic circuit for circuits
oil leaks
Check the power steering pump drive belt condition and tension
Check the power steering pump for security, wear, damage and
excessive noise
Check the steering gear assembly for damage, wear and
security
Check the hydraulic pipes and cooler lines for damage and
correct routing
Check the steering joints for damage, excessive play, wear and
security
Check the steering column and joints for damage, excessive
play, wear and security
Symptom Chart

Steering wanders Excessive free Check for excessive movement or play in the steering system
play in the with the engine running. Check for play at several different
steering system steering positions
Steering Carry out steering geometry and alignment checks. Refer to
geometry the relevant section of the workshop manual
incorrectly
aligned
Steering pulls to the Steering Carry out steering geometry and alignment checks using a
left or right geometry four wheel alignment system. Ensure that the tire direction of
incorrectly rotation is correct for the position on the vehicle (where
aligned directional tires are installed)
Steering feels notchy Steering or Disconnect the steering gear from the suspension. Check for
when turning from suspension freedom of movement in the suspension
lock to lock swivel joints Disconnect the steering column from the steering gear. Check
Steering feels tight seized the steering column and universal joints for freedom of
and does not self- Steering tie rod movement
centre end joints or Check the steering gear for freedom of movement. Rectify as
track rod inner necessary
joints seized
Steering
column or
universal joints
seized
Steering gear
internal
components
misaligned,
worn or
damaged
Power steering Power steering Check and top-up the power steering fluid level if required,
hydraulics noisy fluid level low using the correct specification of fluid
operation or Check for contaminated fluid
contaminated Drain the fluid from the reservoir and visually inspect the filter
Incorrect for obstructions/blockage. Repair/renew as necessary
specification of Check for air ingress into the system
power steering Check the power steering hoses for twisting or restrictions.
fluid Rectify as necessary
Filter in the
power steering
reservoir
blocked
Power steering
fluid aerated
Power steering
hoses twisted
or restricted
Power steering pump Power steering Check and top-up the power steering fluid level if required
noisy fluid level low Check for contaminated fluid
or Drain the fluid from the reservoir and visually inspect the filter
contaminated for obstructions/blockage. Repair/renew as necessary
Filter in the Check for excessive pump noise. Rectify as necessary
power steering
reservoir
blocked
Pump internal
components
worn or
damaged
Power steering gear Power steering Check and top-up the power steering fluid level if required.
noisy fluid level low Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual. Check
or for contaminated fluid
contaminated Check for excessive steering gear noise. Rectify as necessary
Steering gear
internal
components
worn or
damaged
Steering column noisy Steering Check the steering column and universal joints. Rectify as
column fouling necessary
or universal
joints dry
Power steering feels Lack of power Check the power steering pump pressure. Check the steering
heavier than normal assistance column has no damage and rotates freely
through its operating
range
Power steering feels
too light at speed
Power steering feels
too heavy at standstill
and low speed
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Steering Angle Sensor Module (SASM) (100-00 General
Information, Description and Operation) /
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Electric Steering Column Lock Control Module (ESCL) (100-00 General
Steering System - General Information - Power Steering System Filling
and Bleeding
General Procedures
1. Check the power steering fluid level.
2. CAUTION: Fluid must always be present in

the reservoir during bleeding.
Remove the filler cap and fill to the MAX level

mark.
Install the reservoir filler cap.
3. Start the engine and allow to run for 10 seconds, stop the
engine.
Check the power steering fluid, if aerated, wait until fluid
is free from bubbles then top-up reservoir to UPPER level
mark with recommended fluid.
4. CAUTION: Do not hold steering on full lock for longer than

10 seconds.
Start the engine and turn steering fully lock to lock, stop the
engine.
Check and top-up power steering fluid level.
5. Start and run the engine for 2 minutes, turn the steering fully
lock to lock.
Check and top-up power steering fluid level.
Steering System - General Information - Power Steering System
Flushing
General Procedures
NOTES:
If heavy steering or contamination within the power steering system is found, it is necessary to carry out the
system flush procedure as detailed below. If any components have been replaced in the power steering system the
procedure below must be carried out in full.
1. Remove the power steering fluid reservoir cap.
2. Using a suitable syringe, remove the power steering fluid from

the power steering fluid reservoir.
3. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping

fluids.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the clip.
Detach the power steering fluid reservoir.

Detach but do not remove the power
steering fluid reservoir.
Release the power steering fluid return hose
from the power steering fluid reservoir.
If a quick release coupling is fitted to the
power steering return hose, release the
power steering fluid return hose from the
coupling by removing the clip.

fluids.
NOTE: Make sure that all openings are

sealed. Use new blanking caps.
Using a suitable blanking cap, cap the power

steering reservoir return pipe.

fluids.
NOTE: Make sure the extended pipe is not

kinked or twisted and is correctly secured with
hose clips.
Attach a suitable pipe to the power steering return

hose to allow the fluid to drain.
6. NOTES:
The suitable funnel should have the a

capacity of 4 litres and O-ring seal
The suitable funnel must be tightly sealed to

the power steering fluid reservoir to avoid fluid
leakage.
Install a suitable funnel onto the power steering

fluid reservoir.

Raise and support the vehicle with the wheels just clear of the
ground.
8. CAUTIONS:
Steps 8 and 9 must be carried out within 2 - 3 seconds of

each other. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the power steering system.
Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.
Using the suitable funnel, top up the power steering system

with the specified fluid. Make sure the fluid level is maintained
at two thirds full in the funnel.
9. CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the power steering fluid level in

the power steering fluid reservoir to fall below the
minimum power steering fluid level. Failure to
power steering system.
Make sure the engine is switched off as soon

as the full 4 litres of power steering fluid has
entered the power steering fluid reservoir.
Flush the power steering system.

Start the engine
With assistance turn the steering slowly lock
to lock 3 times at approximately 1
revolution every 5 seconds.
Continue to flush the power steering system
until 4 litres of power steering fluid has
been added to the power steering reservoir.
This should take approximately 30 seconds.

fluids.
Remove the suitable funnel.

fluids.
Remove the suitable pipe to the power steering

return hose.
12. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the clip.
If a quick release coupling is fitted to the power steering return

hose, connect the power steering fluid return hose to the
coupling by installing the clip.
13. Install a new power steering fluid reservoir.

For additional information, refer to: Power Steering Fluid
Reservoir (211-02, Removal and Installation).
Power Steering -
Recommended Fluid
Item Specification
Fluid Texaco Cold Climate Fluid 33270
Item Specification
Type Power assisted rack and pinion, speed proportional with belt driven pump, remote
hydraulic fluid reservoir and fluid cooler
Steering wheel diameter 395 mm (15.55 in)
Number of turns - lock to 3.1
lock
System ratio Variable - 19.5:1 on center
Pump relief valve
operating pressure
Petrol vehicles 114 ± 4 bar (11400 ± 400 kPa) (1653 ± 58 lb/in²)
Diesel vehicles 115 ± 4 bar (11500 ± 400 kPa) (1668 ± 58 lb/in²)
Fluid flow rate - constant
For all petrol vehicles and V6 8.8 ± 0.5 liter/min (15.4 ± 0.8 pints/min) (9.2 ± 0.5 US quarts/min)
diesel
V8 diesel vehicles 9.5 ± 0.5 liter/min (16.7 ± 0.8 pints/min) (10 ± 0.5 US quarts/min)
Steering rack travel 158 mm (6.22 in)
Piston diameter 50 mm (1.93 in)
Rack bar diameter 30 mm (1.18 in)
High-pressure line to pump bolt 25 18
Steering gear mounting bolts 175 129
High-pressure line to steering gear support bracket bolt 10 7
Power steering return line support bracket. 10 7
* High-pressure line and return line to steering gear bolt 22 16
Power steering Pump bolts 23 17
* Lower steering column universal joint to steering gear bolt 24 18
* New bolt/nuts must be installed
Power Steering - Power Steering
COMPONENT LOCATION
NOTE: Petrol version shown

1 - Fluid cooler and hose assembly - Fluid return (petrol models only)
2 - Spring clip
3 - Banjo bolt
4 - Spring clip
5 - Reservoir
6 - Suction hose - Reservoir to pump
7 - Spring clip
8 - Power steering pump
9 - Hose assembly - Steering gear to cooler - Fluid return
10 - Tie rod end (2 off)
11 - Locknut (2 off)
12 - Caged nut (2 off)
13 - Bolt (2 off)
14 - Steering gear
15 - Screw
16 - Hose - pump to steering gear - Fluid pressure
17 - Screw
18 - Servotronic valve
OVERVIEW
The steering system comprises a ZF manufactured rack and pinion Servotronic 2 steering gear, a power steering
pump, a reservoir, a fluid cooler and fluid hoses. The steering gear is an end take-off rack and pinion power assisted
unit with the addition of road speed proportional ZF Servotronic 2 assistance.
Servotronic 2 adds electronic control and speed sensitive steering to the steering gear. The Servotronic 2 feature
provides easy and comfortable steering operation when parking, improved 'road feel' at increased road speeds and
adds an integrated, positive centre feel feature which optimises steering wheel torque during high speed driving.
The Servotronic 2 system is controlled by software which is incorporated into the air suspension control module. The
software responds to steering torque inputs and road speed signals and controls the assistance via a transducer
valve located on the steering gear valve.
The steering gear has a variable ratio rack. This provides conventional response when the steering is in the centre,
straight ahead position, but provides more direct and faster steer as the turning angle increases. The variable ratio
provides precise and rapid steering response at high speeds and optimizes the steering of the vehicle when
manoeuvring into parking spaces, turning in tight areas and when cornering in extreme conditions.
The steering gear rack has a travel of 158 mm (6.22 in). Lock to lock requires 3.167 revolutions of the steering
wheel which gives a ratio of 45 mm (1.77 in)/revolution at the centre position and 52.6 mm (2.07 in)/revolution at
end of lock.
STEERING GEAR

1 - Locknut
2 - Tie-rod end
3 - Locknut
4 - Tie rod
5 - steering gear boot
6 - Steering gear casing attachment lugs
7 - Pressure/return pipes
8 - Pressure/return connection from/to pump
9 - Valve unit housing
10 - Input shaft
11 - Servotronic valve
12 - Pinion housing
The steering gear is located at the front of the engine, below the accessory belt drive. The gear is attached to two
brackets on the chassis and is secured to the brackets with flanged bolts and caged nuts. The cage prevents the nuts
from turning when the bolts are loosened or tightened. The cage nuts can only be used once and must be replaced
when the gear is removed. For service, M12 Nylock nuts are available as a replacement for the cage nuts.
The steering gear comprises an aluminum, cast, valve housing which contains the hydraulic valve unit and
Servotronic valve. The mechanical steering rack and the hydraulic power unit are located in a tubular steel cylinder
which is attached to the cast valve housing.
The steering gear uses a rack with an integrated piston which is guided on plain bearings within the cylinder and the
valve housing. The pinion, which is attached to the valve unit, runs in bearings and meshes with the rack teeth. The
rack is pressed against the pinion by a spring loaded yoke which ensures that the teeth mesh with the minimum of
play. The pinion is connected to the valve unit via a torsion bar. The rotary motion of the steering wheel is converted
into linear movement of the rack by the pinion and is initiated by the valve unit. This movement is transferred into
movement of the road wheels by adjustable tie-rods.
The rack teeth angles vary from 20 degrees in the centre position to 40 degrees at the end sections of the rack. It is
this variation in teeth angles which provides the variable ratio.
The 50 mm (1.97 in) diameter piston of the hydraulic power unit is located at one end of the cylinder. Each side of
the piston is connected to fluid pressure or fluid return via external metal pipes which are connected to the valve
unit.
Each end of the gear has a threaded hole which provides for the fitment of the tie-rod. The external ends of the gear
are sealed with steering gear boots which prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture. The tie-rod has a long threaded
area which allows for the fitment of the tie-rod end. The thread allows for the adjustment of the steering toe. When
the correct toe is achieved, a locknut is tightened against the tie-rod end preventing inadvertent movement.
The gear has a central hole machined along part of its length. The hole allows the air in the boots to be balanced
when the steering is turned. The boots are serviceable items and are retained on the gear housing and the tie-rod
with zip ties.
Valve Unit

1 - Pressure/return to/from steering gear
2 - Return fluid chamber
3 - Cut-off valve
4 - Radial groove
5 - Servotronic transducer valve
6 - Fluid feed radial groove
7 - Radial groove
8 - Orifice
9 - Balls
10 - Compression spring
11 - Torsion bar
12 - Valve rotor
13 - Reaction piston
14 - Reaction chamber
15 - Centering piece
16 - Pressure supply from pump
17 - Return to reservoir
18 - Pinion
19 - Steering gear rack
20 - Valve sleeve
The valve unit is an integral part of the steering gear. The principle function of the valve unit is to provide maximum
power assistance (i.e. when parking) with minimum effort required to turn the steering wheel.
The pinion housing of the valve is an integral part of the main steering gear casting. The pinion housing has four
machined ports which provide connections for pressure feed from the power steering pump, return fluid to the
reservoir and pressure feeds to each side of the cylinder piston.
The valve unit comprises an outer sleeve, an input shaft, a torsion bar and a pinion shaft. The valve unit is co-axial
with the pinion shaft which is connected to the steering column via the input shaft. The valve unit components are
located in the steering gear pinion housing which is sealed with a cap.
The outer sleeve is located in the main bore of the pinion housing. Three annular grooves are machined on its outer
diameter. PTFE rings are located between the grooves and seal against the bore of the pinion housing. Holes are
drilled radially in each annular groove through the wall of the sleeve. The bore of the outer sleeve is machined to
accept the input shaft. Six equally spaced slots are machined in the bore of the sleeve. The ends of the slots are
closed and do not continue to the end of the outer sleeve. The radial holes in the outer sleeve are drilled into each
slot.
The input shaft has two machined flats at its outer end which allow for the attachment of the steering column
intermediate shaft yoke. The flats ensure that the intermediate shaft is fitted in the correct position to maintain the
optimum phase angle. The inner end of the input shaft forms a dog-tooth which mates with a slot in the pinion shaft.
The fit of the dog-tooth in the slot allows a small amount of relative rotation between the input shaft and the pinion
shaft before the dog-tooth contacts the wall of the slot. This ensures that, if the power assistance fails, the steering
can be operated manually without over stressing the torsion bar. The central portion of the input shaft has equally
spaced longitudinal slots machined in its circumference. The slots are arranged alternately around the input shaft.
The torsion bar is fitted inside the input shaft and is an interference fit in the pinion shaft. The torsion bar is
connected to the input shaft by a drive pin. The central diameter of the torsion bar is machined to a smaller
diameter in its central section. The smaller diameter allows the torsion bar to twist in response to torque applied
from the steering wheel in relation to the grip of the tyres on the road surface.
The pinion shaft has machined upper teeth on its central diameter which mate with teeth on the steering gear rack. A
slot, machined in the upper end of the pinion shaft mates with the dog-tooth on the input shaft. The pinion shaft
locates in the pinion housing and rotates on ball and roller bearings.
Power Steering Hydraulic Operation
The following hydraulic circuits show power steering operation and fluid flow for the steering in a straight ahead,
neutral position and when turning right. The circuit diagram for turning left is similar to that shown for turning right.
Power Steering in Neutral Position
NOTE: Circuit shows steering rotary valve in neutral position with the vehicle not moving.


1 - Return fluid control groove
2 - Radial groove
3 - Feed fluid control groove
4 - Radial groove
5 - Axial groove
6 - Feed fluid control edge
7 - Feed fluid radial groove
8 - Return fluid control edge
10 - Cut-off valve
11 - Radial groove
14 - Radial groove
15 - Orifice
16 - Balls
18 - Torsion bar
19 - Power steering fluid reservoir
20 - Valve rotor
24 - Pressure relief/flow limiting valve
26 - Inner track rod
27 - Pinion
28 - Valve sleeve
29 - Steering gear
30 - Steering gear housing
31 - Power assist cylinder - right
32 - Piston
33 - Power assist cylinder - left
When the engine is started, the power steering pump draws fluid from the reservoir down the low pressure suction
line. The fluid passes through the pump and is delivered, via a hose, to the steering rack valve unit.
The pressurized fluid flows through a connecting bore in the valve and, via the feed fluid radial groove and the
transverse bores in the valve sleeve, passes to the feed fluid control groove of the valve rotor.
In the neutral (straight ahead) position, the fluid passes over the open feed fluid control edges to all valve sleeve
axial grooves. The fluid then passes through the open return fluid control edges and the return fluid control grooves
of the valve rotor. The fluid then passes via connecting bores to the return fluid chamber and to the reservoir via an
external hose.
Simultaneously, the radial grooves of the valve body and their associated pipes provide a connection between the left
and right power assist cylinders.
Power Steering in Right Turn Position
NOTE: Circuit shows steering rotary valve in right turn position, at high vehicle speed and with rapid steering
corrections. The Servotronic transducer valve is fully open and the maximum hydraulic reaction is limited by the cut-
off valve.

1 - Return fluid control groove
2 - Radial groove
3 - Feed fluid control groove
4 - Radial groove
5 - Axial groove
6 - Feed fluid control edge
8 - Return fluid control edge
10 - Cut-off valve
11 - Radial groove
14 - Radial groove
15 - Orifice
16 - Balls
18 - Power steering fluid reservoir
19 - Torsion bar
20 - Valve rotor
24 - Pressure relief/flow limiting valve
26 - Inner track rod
27 - Pinion
28 - Valve sleeve
29 - Steering gear
30 - Steering gear housing
31 - Power assist cylinder - right
32 - Piston
33 - Power assist cylinder - left
When the steering wheel is turned to the right, the steering rack and piston moves to the right in the piston bore.
The valve rotor is rotated to the right (clockwise) which directs pressurized fluid over the further opened feed fluid
control edges and associated axial grooves, the radial groove and via an external pipe to the left power assist
cylinder chamber. The pressure applied to the piston from the left power assist cylinder chamber provides the
hydraulic assistance.
An adaptable pressure build-up is achieved by the partially or fully closed feed fluid control edges restricting or
preventing a connection between the fluid pressure inlet and the other axial grooves connected to the radial groove.
Simultaneously, the fluid pressure outlet to the pressurized axial grooves are restricted or partially restricted by the
closing return fluid control edges. The fluid displaced by the piston from the right power assist cylinder chamber,
flows through an external pipe to the radial grooves. From there the fluid passes to the associated axial grooves and
on to the return fluid control grooves, via the further opened return fluid control edges.
The return flow of fluid to the reservoir passes via interconnecting bores which lead to the return fluid chamber.
When the steering wheel is turned to the left the operating sequence is as above but the pressure is applied to the
opposite side of the piston.
SERVOTRONIC VALVE
The Servotronic transducer valve is located in a port on the side of the steering gear valve housing. The valve is
sealed in the housing with an O-ring seal and is secured with two long screws into threaded holes in the housing. The
Servotronic valve is a transducer controlled valve which responds to control signals supplied from the body control
module.
The Servotronic valve determines the hydraulic reaction at the steering gear rotary valve and controls the input
torque required to turn the steering wheel. The Servotronic system allows the steering to be turned with minimum
effort when the vehicle is stationary or manoeuvred at slow speed. The hydraulic reaction changes proportional to the
vehicle speed, with the required steering effort increasing as the vehicle moves faster. At high speeds, the
Servotronic system provides the driver with a good feedback through the steering providing precise steering and
improved stability.
The body control module contains a microprocessor which receives road speed signals from the ABS module and
calculates the correct controlling signal for the Servotronic valve. The Servotronic software within the control module
has a diagnostic capability which allows T4 to check the tune of the steering and retrieve fault codes relating to the
Servotronic valve. Two fault codes are stored relating to the valve for positive connection short to ground or battery
and negative connection short to ground or battery.
The Servotronic software within the body control module contains a number of steering maps which are selected via
the car configuration file depending on the vehicle model, tire fitment and fitment of Dynamic Response.
If a failure of the Servotronic valve or software occurs, the system will suspend Servotronic assistance and only a
default level of power assistance will be available. Fault codes relating to the fault are stored in the body control
module. No warning lamps are illuminated and the driver may be aware of the steering being 'heavier' than usual.
Servotronic Operation
When the vehicle is manoeuvred into and out of a parking space (or other similar manoeuvre), the Servotronic
function of the body control module uses road speed data from the ABS module to determine the vehicle speed,
which in this case will be slow or stationary. The control module microprocessor analyses the signals and outputs an
appropriate control current to the Servotronic transducer valve. The Servotronic valve closes and prevents fluid
flowing from the feed fluid radial groove to the reaction chamber. An orifice also ensures that there is return pressure
in the reaction chamber. This condition eliminates any 'reaction' ensuring that the steering is very light to operate,
reducing the effort required to turn the steering wheel.
As the vehicle is driven and the road speed increases, the body control module microprocessor analyses the road
speed signals from the ABS module and reduces the amount of control current supplied to the Servotronic valve. The
Servotronic valve reacts to the control current and opens the valve by an amount appropriate to the road speed. This
allows a controlled fluid supply from the feed fluid radial groove to the reaction chamber. The orifice prevents the loss
of large amounts of fluid to the return fluid chamber. The higher fluid pressure acting on the reaction piston causes
compression of the balls which are located between the reaction piston and the centering piece which in turn is
securely connected to the valve sleeve. When driving in a straight line, this has a positive effect on the exact
centralising of the steering valve. When the steering valve is actuated, the balls, with a higher load on them, provide
additional torsional resistance to rotation of the valve rotor. This mode of Servotronic assistance requires an
established higher steering wheel torque until the hydraulic assistance required in the left or right power assist
cylinder is determined.
At high driving speeds, i.e. on a motorway, the Servotronic valve is fully open due to a very low or non-existent
control current supplied from the body control module. This enables maximum pressure supply from the feed fluid
radial groove to the reaction piston.
When the steering wheel is turned, the reaction pressure increases appropriate to the existing operating pressure and
pressurizes the piston in the reaction chamber. As soon as the reaction pressure reaches its upper limit, the fluid is
discharged to the return fluid chamber via the cut-off valve and prevents further increases in reaction pressure. This
maintains the input torque applied through the steering wheel and provides the driver with an improved 'road feel'
allowing precise steering and directional stability.
POWER STEERING PUMP

1 - 5.0L V8
2 - 3.0L TdV6
3 - 3.6L TdV8 (from 2007MY)
The power steering pumps used are basically the same pump with different connection fitments, therefore they are
not interchangeable.
Power Steering Pump - Petrol Engines
The pump is a fixed displacement, vane type pump which supplies hydraulic pressure to the steering gear valve unit.
The pump is driven by a Poly Vee belt from the crankshaft pulley. A self-adjusting tensioner is fitted to maintain the
correct tension on the belt.
The pump has an internal flow control valve which also incorporates a pressure relief valve. The pressure relief valve
limits the maximum pressure supplied to the steering gear to 115 bar (1667 lbf in2) ± 4 bar (58 lbf in2). The flow
control valve limits the maximum flow to 8.8 l/min (1.93 gal/min) ± 0.5 l/min (0.1 gal/min) regardless of engine
speed. The pump has a displacement of 11 cc/rev (0.67 in3/rev).
A shaft runs longitudinally through the pump. One end of the shaft is bolted on the drive pulley, the opposite end of
the shaft is closed by a cover. The shaft runs in bearings located in the body and oil seals at each end of the shaft
prevent leakage of hydraulic fluid.
The pump contains ten vanes which rotate within a cam ring and are driven by the shaft. As the vanes rotate, the
cam ring causes the space between the vanes to increase. This causes a depression between the vanes and fluid is
drawn from the reservoir via the suction hose into the space between the vanes.
As the shaft rotates, the inlet port is closed to the vanes which have drawn in fluid, trapping the fluid between the
vanes. The cam ring causes the space between the vanes to reduce and consequentially compresses and pressurizes
the hydraulic fluid trapped between them.
Further rotation of the shaft moves the vanes to the outlet port. As the vanes pass the port plate the pressurized
fluid passes from the pump outlet port into the pressure hose to the steering gear.
The pressurized fluid is subject to control by the flow control and pressure relief valve. The flow control valve
maintains a constant flow of fluid supplied to the steering gear irrespective of engine speed variations. The pressure
relief valve activates only to limit the maximum system pressure on the output side of the pump. A metering orifice
is included in the discharge port of the pump. If the pressure in the orifice reaches a predetermined level, a spring
loaded ball in the centre of the flow control valve is lifted from its seat and allows pressurized fluid to recirculate
within the pump.
The pressure relief valve will operate if the discharge from the pump is restricted, i.e.; steering held on full lock. If
the output from the pump is blocked, all output is recirculated through the pump. In this condition, as no fresh fluid
is drawn into the pump from the reservoir, the fluid temperature inside the pump will increase rapidly.
Consequentially, periods of operation of the steering gear on full lock should be kept to a minimum to prevent
overheating of the pump and the fluid within it.
Power Steering Pump - Diesel Engines
The pump is a variable displacement, vane type pump which supplies the required hydraulic pressure to the steering
gear valve unit. The pump is located at the front of the engine and is driven by a Poly Vee belt which is directly
driven from the crankshaft. A self-adjusting tensioner is fitted to maintain the correct tension on the belt.
The pump has an internal pressure relief valve and a flow control valve. The pressure relief valve limits the
maximum pressure supplied to the steering gear to 115 bar (1667 lbf in2) ± 4 bar (58 lbf in2). The flow control valve
limits the maximum flow as follows:
TdV6 - 8.8 l/min (1.93 gal/min) ± 0.5 l/min (0.1 gal/min) at 10 bar (145 lbf in2)
TdV8 - 9.5 l/min (2.09 gal/min) ± 0.5 l/min (0.1 gal/min) at 10 bar (145 lbf in2).
Both pumps have a displacement of 9.6 cc/rev (0.58 in3/rev).
The output from the pump increases proportionally with the load applied to the steering valve unit. Inside the pump,
a cartridge set consisting of 11 vanes and a rotor is mounted on the input shaft and is surrounded by the variable
displacement cam.
The variable displacement pump maintains a constant fluid output by varying the internal displacement of the pump,
unlike a conventional fixed displacement pump which has to use a flow control valve to recirculate the excess flow
within the pump. At low engine speeds, the internal displacement of the variable displacement pump is at its
maximum to generate the controlled fluid output.
As the pump speed increases with engine speed, the increased flow inside the pump generates a back pressure within
the pump. This back pressure causes the cam ring to move and reduce the internal displacement of the pump to
maintain the constant fluid flow from the pump. As the internal displacement of the pump decreases, the power and
torque required to drive the pump reduces, which leads to improved fuel economy.
RESERVOIR
The fluid reservoir is located on a bracket in the left hand side of the engine compartment, behind the radiator. The
reservoir comprises a body, cap and filter. The purpose of the reservoir is to contain a surplus of the hydraulic fluid
in the system to allow for expansion and contraction of the fluid due to temperature variations. The fluid level
ensures that the supply connection on the bottom of the reservoir is covered with fluid at all operating vehicle
attitudes. Any air which is present in the system is exhausted from the system in the reservoir.
The body is a plastic moulding with two ports at the bottom which provide for the connection of the suction supply
and return hoses. Moulded markings on the side of the reservoir denote the upper and lower fluid levels. A non-
serviceable, 100 micron nylon mesh filter is fitted in the body. The filter removes particulate matter from the fluid
before it is drawn into the pump supply connection.
The cap is rotated counterclockwise for one quarter turn to release from the body. The cap is fitted with an O-ring to
prevent fluid leakage. The cap incorporates a breather hole to allow for changes in fluid level during operation and
prevent vacuum or pressurization of the reservoir.
HIGH PRESSURE HOSE
The high pressure hose connecting the pump to the steering gear valve unit contains two attenuators. Each
attenuator has a restrictor which is secured inside the hose. The restrictors damp pressure pulses from the pump,
consequently reducing noise and strain on downstream components. The attenuators are an integral part of the hose
and cannot be serviced separately.
FLUID COOLER
NOTE: Diesel engine vehicles are not fitted with a fluid cooler.
The fluid cooler is located in the return line from the steering gear to the reservoir. The cooler comprises a flexible
hose and a solid pipe which connect between the reservoir and the return pipe from the steering gear. The cooler is
an integral part of the pipe and cannot be replaced as a separate component.
The cooler is a fabricated aluminum tube, through which the power steering fluid passes. The outer diameter of the
cooler tube has aluminum loops attached to it which dissipate heat. Cool air entering the front of the vehicle passes
over the cooler and flows through the loops. The loops act as heat exchangers, conducting heat from the fluid as it
passes through the tube.
Power Steering - Power Steering

REFER to: Steering System (211-00, Diagnosis and Testing).
Power Steering - Power Steering Pressure Test TDV6 3.0L Diesel /TDV8
3.6L Diesel
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Adaptor, power steering pressure test
211-011-14
Hose - power steering pressure test
211-011-02(LRT-57-002)
Hose - power steering pressure test
211-011-02(LRT-57-002)
Valve block power steering test
211-011-01(LRT-57-001)
Hose and gauge - power steering pressure test
211-287(LRT-57-005)
CAUTION: If power steering fluid comes into contact with the paintwork, the affected area must be immediately
washed down with cold water.


Specifications).
3. Siphon the fluid from the power steering reservoir.

Remove the filler cap.
4. Remove the front LH splash shield.
Remove the 4 clips.
5. Release the steering gear high-pressure line.

Remove the bolt.
6. Remove the front LH fender splash shield.

7. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new

blanking caps.
Make sure that the area around the component

is clean and free of foreign material.
Disconnect the power steering pump supply hose.

Release the clip.
Position a container to collect the fluid.
8. CAUTION: Make sure that the area around the

component is clean and free of foreign material.
Disconnect the power steering pump high-pressure

line.
Remove the bolt.
9. Install the special tools.
Tie the pressure gauge aside.
Connect the power steering pump supply hose.

Secure with the clip.
11. Fill the power steering reservoir.

Specifications).
13. NOTES:
Make sure the steering components and test equipment

are free from leaks.
Maintain the maximum fluid level during the test.
Under no circumstances must the low pressure spigot be

removed from the steering pump.
With the test valve open start the engine.

Start the engine and turn steering fully lock to lock, stop
the engine.
Top-up the power steering fluid reservoir.
14. For correct power steering pressures, refer to the steering

specification section.
Power Steering, Specifications).
15. CAUTION: Do not hold steering at full lock for longer than
10 seconds.
With the engine at idle, slowly turn the steering wheel and hold
on full lock.
Record the pressure reading.

17. With the engine at idle, release the steering wheel. The
pressure should be, at or below, the pressure specified.
18. Pressure outside this tolerance, indicates a fault.
19. CAUTION: Pump damage will occur if test valve is closed

for longer periods.
To determine if the fault is in the steering pump or the steering

rack, close the test valve for a maximum of 5 seconds.
20. If the pressures recorded fall outside the given values, replace
the power steering pump.
21. If the maximum pump pressure is correct, check the hoses for
correct routing and condition, if correct suspect the steering
gear.
22. On completion of the test stop the engine, disconnect the

battery ground cable and siphon the steering fluid from the
reservoir.
23. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking
caps.
Make sure that the area around the component is clean

and free of foreign material.
Disconnect the power steering pump supply hose.

Release the clip.
24. Disassemble the test equipment.
25. Connect the power steering pump high-pressure line.

Connect the power steering pump supply hose.

27. Secure the steering gear high-pressure line.

28. Install the front LH splash shield.

Install the clips.
29. Install the front LH fender splash shield.

31. Fill and bleed the power steering system.

For additional information, refer to: Power Steering System
Filling and Bleeding (211-00 Steering System - General
Power Steering - Power Steering Pressure Test V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Adapter, power steering test
211-313 (LRT-57-035A)
Hose, power steering test
211-011-02 (LRT-57-002)
Hose, power steering test
211-011-11
Valve block, power steering test
211-011-01 (LRT-57-001)
Hose and gauge, power steering test
211-287 (LRT-57-005)
Adapter, power steering test
211-325 (LRT-57-042)


Specifications).
3. Remove the radiator access panel.
Remove the 4 bolts.

Remove the 4 clips.


Install the filler cap.
7. Position an absorbent cloth to collect fluid spillage.
8. CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing the

components, ensure the area around the joint faces and
connections are clean. Plug open connections to prevent
contamination.
NOTES:
Some fluid spillage is inevitable during this operation.
Care must be taken to avoid contamination of the drive

belt.
Disconnect the power steering high-pressure pipe union.

Remove the bolt.
Remove and discard the 2 sealing washers.
9. Install the special tools to the power steering high-pressure

port.
Tie the pressure gauge aside under the hood.
10. Install the special tool to the high-pressure union.

Install the O-ring seals.
Connect the special tool line, to the special
tool valve block assembly.
11. Refill the power steering reservoir.


Specifications).
13. NOTES:
Ensure the steering components and test equipment are

free from leaks.
Maintain the maximum fluid level during the test.
Under no circumstances must the low pressure spigot be

removed from the steering pump.
With the test valve open start the engine.

Start the engine and turn steering fully lock to lock, stop
the engine.
Top-up the power steering fluid reservoir.
14. For correct power steering pressures, refer to the steering

specification section. For additional information, refer to:
Specifications (211-02, Specifications).
15. With the engine at idle, slowly turn the steering wheel and hold
on full lock.

17. With the engine at idle, release the steering wheel. The
pressure should be, at or below, the pressure specified.
18. Pressure outside this tolerance, indicates a fault.
19. To determine if the fault is in the steering pump or the steering

rack, close the test valve for a maximum of 5 seconds.
20. If the pressures recorded fall outside the given values, replace
the power steering pump.
21. If the maximum pump pressure is correct, then suspect the

power steering rack.
22. On completion of the test stop the engine, disconnect the

battery ground cable and siphon the steering fluid from the
reservoir.
Install the filler cap.
23. Disassemble the test equipment.
24. Connect the high-pressure line to the power steering pump.

Install the new O-ring seals.


27. Install the radiator access panel.

Tighten the M6 bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
Tighten the M10 bolts to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft).

Specifications).
29. Refill and bleed the power steering.

Filling and Bleeding (211-00, General Procedures).
Power Steering - Power Steering Control Valve Actuator
Removal
Specifications).

stands.
Raise the vehicle on the lift.

NOTES:
Note the fitted position.

Remove the power steering control valve actuator.

spillage.
Remove and discard the 2 Torx screws.
Remove and discard the filter.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the working surfaces are thoroughly

clean to avoid contamination of the sensitive hydraulic
components.
2. Install a new filter to the steering gear.
3. Install new seals to the actuator.
4. NOTE: Align to the position noted on removal.
Install the actuator.

Tighten the new Torx screws, evenly and progressively,
to 3 Nm (2.2 lb.ft).


Specifications).
7. Refill and bleed the power steering.

Power Steering - Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Removal

Specifications).
3. Release the power steering fluid reservoir from the

bracket.


this operation.
Remove the power steering fluid reservoir.

spillage.
Release the hose clips and disconnect the
hoses.
Installation

Power Steering - Power Steering Fluid Cooler V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol
Special Tool(s)
Spring lock decoupler
310-044
Removal
Specifications).
2. Remove the front radiator grille.

For additional information, refer to: Radiator Grille (501-08,
3. Remove the coolant expansion tank.

For additional information, refer to: Coolant Expansion Tank -
5.0L, Vehicles Without: Supercharger (303-03, Removal and
Installation) /
Coolant Expansion Tank - 5.0L, Vehicles With: Supercharger
(303-03C, Removal and Installation).
5. Disconnect the steering reservoir return hose.

spillage.
Release the clip.
6. Release the LH radiator air deflector lower clip,

position the deflector aside.
7. Position the horns to one side for access.

Remove the 2 bolts.

this operation.
Using the special tool, disconnect the cooler line.

spillage.
9. Remove the cooler line seperating clip.
10. NOTE: Care must be taken to prevent

damage to the cooler elements during removal and
installation.
Remove the power steering fluid cooler.

Installation
1. Install the power steering fluid cooler.
Position and secure in the clips.
2. Install the power steering fluid line and hose.

Secure the hose with the clip.
3. Install the cooler line seperating clip.
4. Install the horn assemblies.

5. Install the radiator deflector.

6. Install the coolant expansion tank.

For additional information, refer to: Coolant Expansion Tank -
5.0L, Vehicles Without: Supercharger (303-03, Removal and
Installation) /
Coolant Expansion Tank - 5.0L, Vehicles With: Supercharger
(303-03C, Removal and Installation).
7. Install the radiator grille.

For additional information, refer to: Radiator Grille (501-08,

Specifications).

Power Steering - Power Steering Pump V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol
Removal
Refer to: Specifications (414-00 Battery and Charging System -

General Information, Specifications).

stands.
3. Refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation

and Charging (412-00 Climate Control System - General
4. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05C Accessory Drive - V8

S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
5. Remove the LH front road wheel.
Torque: 140 Nm
6.
7. Torque: 10 Nm
8. CAUTION: Note the fitted position of the

component prior to removal.
Torque: 25 Nm
9. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use

new blanking caps.
A new O-ring seal is to be installed.
Torque: 18 Nm
10. CAUTIONS:
Fluid loss is unavoidable, use absorbent cloth

or a container to collect the fluid.

new blanking caps.
Torque: 25 Nm
11. Torque: 25 Nm
12. CAUTION: Note the fitted position of the

component prior to removal.
Torque: 25 Nm
Installation
2. Refer to: Power Steering System Filling and Bleeding (211-00

Steering System - General Information, General Procedures).
Power Steering - Power Steering Pump TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal

stands.

and Charging (412-00, General Procedures).
4. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05, Removal and

Installation).
5. Remove the LH front wheel and tire.
Torque: 140 Nm
6.
7.
8.
9. Torque:
Nuts 6 Nm
10. Torque: 9 Nm
11. Torque: 9 Nm
12. Torque: 9 Nm
13.
14.
15. NOTE: Make sure that all openings are

Torque: 18 Nm

CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces

are clean and free of foreign material.


CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces

Torque: 24 Nm
18. Torque: 25 Nm
19. Torque: 25 Nm
Installation
2. Refer to: Power Steering System Filling and Bleeding (211-00,

Power Steering - Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure
Line TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
NOTES:
RHD shown, LHD is similar.
All vehicles

stands.
2. Remove the front RH splash shield.

Remove the 4 clips.


Remove the 4 bolts.

Disconnect the high pressure line from the power

steering pump.
Loosen and release the power steering
pump line.
Allow the fluid to drain into a container.
Remove and discard the 2 sealing washers.
6. Release the power steering line support brackets.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Release the hose.
All other engine types

7. Release the power steering line support bracket.
Remove the nut.
Release the hose.
All vehicles

Disconnect the high pressure line from the power

steering gear.
Remove the bolt.
Release the power steering gear line.
9. Remove the steering gear high-pressure line.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Install the steering gear high-pressure line.
2. Connect the high-pressure line to the power steering gear.

Attach the power steering gear high-pressure line.

3. Install the power steering line support brackets.

4. Install the power steering line support bracket.
All vehicles
5. Connect the high-pressure line to the power steering pump.
Connect the power steering pump high-pressure line.


8. Install the front RH splash shield.


Power Steering - Steering Angle Sensor
Removal
Specifications).

Release the clip.
3. Disconnect the steering angle sensor electrical

connector.
4. Disconnect the steering column intermediate shaft

from the steering column.
Remove the special bolt and discard the
nut.
5. Remove the steering angle sensor.

Installation
1. Install the steering angle sensor.
Tighten the Torx screws to 3 Nm (2 lb.ft).
2. Connect the steering column intermediate shaft.

Install the special bolt and tighten the new nut to 22 Nm
(16 lb.ft).
3. Connect the steering angle sensor electrical connector.

Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.

Specifications).
6. Initiate a new steering angle sensor using T4.

Power Steering - Steering Gear V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
NOTES:
LHD illustration shown, RHD is similar.
All vehicles


Remove the 4 bolts.

Remove the 4 clips.

Remove the 4 clips.
5. CAUTION: Do not turn the steering wheel

with the steering column lower shaft disconnected
as damage to the clockspring and steering wheel
switches may occur.
NOTE: Make sure the steering is in the
straight ahead position.
Release the universal joint from the steering gear.

6. NOTE: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
Release both tie-rod end ball joints.

Loosen the locknut.
Release both track rods from tie rod ends,
note the number of turns for installation.
7. Disconnect the pressure lines from the power

steering gear.
Remove the bolt.
spillage.

8. Release the dynamic response line supports.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Remove the 2 supports.
Vehicles without supercharger

Remove the bolts.
Remove the bolt.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the steering gear electrical connector.
12. CAUTION: Make sure that the steering gear

pipes and the dynamic suspension system pipes
are not damaged during the removal of the
steering gear.
Remove the steering gear.

Remove the 2 bolts and discard the cage
nuts.
Release the steering gear.
Installation
All vehicles
2. CAUTION: Make sure that the steering gear pipes and the
dynamic suspension system pipes are not damaged during the
installation of the steering gear.
Install the steering gear.

4. NOTE: Do not install the support bracket bolt until the

steering gear connections are tightened.
Install the steering gear high pressure line.
5. NOTE: Lubricate the seals with clean power steering fluid.
Connect the steering gear pressure lines.

Install new O-ring seals.

Vehicles without supercharger

7. Install the power steering line support brackets.

8. Install the dynamic response line supports.
Tighten the supports to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
All vehicles
9. Connect the tie-rod end ball joints.
Attach both tie rods to previously noted positions.
Tighten the tie-rod locking nut.
10. Connect the universal joint to the steering gear.

Install a new patchlock bolt and tighten to 25 Nm (18
lb.ft).

Install the 4 bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

15. Adjust the front wheel alignment.

Power Steering - Steering Gear TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
NOTES:
LHD illustration shown, RHD is similar.
All vehicles

2. CAUTION: Do not turn the steering wheel with the

steering column lower shaft disconnected as damage to the
clockspring and steering wheel switches may occur.
Center the steering wheel.
3. Remove the radiator splash shield.

Remove the 4 bolts.


Remove the 4 clips.

Remove the 4 clips.
Release both tie-rod end ball joints.

Loosen the locknut.
Release both track rods from tie rod ends,
note the number of turns for installation.
Disconnect the lower steering column from the

steering gear.
Vehicles with 3.0L diesel engine

Remove the bolts.

10. Release the power steering return line support
bracket.
Remove the bolt.
11. Release the steering gear high-pressure line.
Remove the bolt.
All vehicles
12. Disconnect the steering gear control valve actuator
13. Release the transmission fluid cooler.

Remove the 4 bolts.

14. Remove the engine stabilizer and engine stabilizer
bracket.
Remove the bolt.
All vehicles
15. Release the fuel cooler.
Remove the bolt.
16. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the area around the component

is clean and free of foreign material.
Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new

blanking caps.
Disconnect the power steering high pressure line and

return line from the steering gear.
17. Release the steering gear.

Remove the 2 bolts.
18. Remove the transmission fluid cooler and fuel cooler

support bracket.
Remove the bolt.
Release the coolant line.
CAUTION: Make sure that the steering gear pipes and the dynamic suspension system pipes are not damaged
during the removal of the steering gear.
19. Remove the steering gear.
Installation
All vehicles
CAUTION: Make sure that the steering gear pipes and the dynamic suspension system pipes are not damaged
during the installation of the steering gear.
1. Install the steering gear.
2. Install the transmission fluid cooler and fuel cooler support

bracket.
Secure the coolant line.
3. Secure the steering gear.

4. NOTES:
Remove and discard the blanking caps.
Lubricate the seals with clean power steering fluid.
Connect the power steering high pressure line and return line to
the steering gear.
Install new O-ring seals.
5. Secure the fuel cooler.


6. Install the engine stabilizer and engine stabilizer bracket.
Tighten the nut.
Tighten the bolt.
All vehicles
7. Secure the transmission fluid cooler.
Tighten the nuts and bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
8. Connect the steering gear control valve actuator electrical

connector.

9. Secure the steering gear high pressure line.
10. Secure the power steering return line support bracket.

All vehicles
12. Connect the lower steering column shaft to the steering gear.
13. Connect the tie-rod end ball joints.

Attach both tie rods to previously noted positions.
Tighten the tie-rod locking nut.

Install the clips.

Install the clips.

17. Install the radiator splash shield.


19. Adjust the front wheel alignment.

Steering Linkage -
* Tie-rod end nut - Vehicles fitted with an M12 nut 76 56
* Tie-rod end nut - Vehicles fitted with an M14 nut 150 111
Tie-rod locking nut 55 40
Steering Linkage - Steering Linkage
Steering Linkage Component Location

1 - Steering gear
2 - Steering gear gaitor
3 - Tie rod
4 - Locknut
5 - Tie rod end
6 - Ball joint
GENERAL
The steering linkage comprises the tie rod which provides the connection between the steering gear and the front
wheel knuckle.
Each end of the steering gear has a threaded hole which provides for the fitment of the tie rods. The external ends
of the tie rods are sealed with steering gear gaitors to prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture into the steering
gear.
The outer ends of the tie rods are threaded to allow the fitment of the tie rod ends. The tie rod ends are screwed
onto the tie rods and locked with locknuts to prevent inadvertent movement. The thread on the tie rod allows the
position of the tie rod end to be adjusted in order to set the correct toe angle for each front wheel.
The tie rod end comprises a forged housing with a threaded bore for attachment to the tie rod. The tie rod end
incorporates a non-serviceable tapered ball joint which locates in a tapered hole in the front wheel knuckle and is
secured with a self-locking nut. The ball joint has an internal hexagonal drive which enables the joint to be held
stationary when the self-locking nut is tightened.
Steering Linkage - Steering Linkage

Steering Linkage - Steering Gear Boot
Removal
1. Remove the tie-rod end.
For additional information, refer to: Tie-Rod End (211-03,
Remove the locknut.
3. Remove the steering gear boot.

Installation
1. Install the steering gear boot.
2. Install the locknut.
3. Install the tie-rod end.

For additional information, refer to: Tie-Rod End (211-03,
Steering Linkage - Tie Rod
Special Tool(s)
205-754(LRT-54-027)
Removal

2. Remove the front wheel.
3. Loosen the outer tie-rod end ball joint retaining nut.
4. Loosen the outer tie-rod end lock nut.

Remove and discard the tie rod end
retaining nut.
6. Remove the outer tie-rod end, note the number of

turns for installation.
7. Remove the outer tie-rod end lock nut.
8. Remove the steering gear boot.

9. Remove the inner tie-rod end.
Loosen the nut.
Installation
1. Install the inner tie-rod end.
2. Install the steering gear boot.

3. Install the outer tie-rod end lock nut.
4. Install the tie rod end, note the number of turns until adjacent
to the locknut.
5. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the tie rods, use an

additional wrench when loosening or tightening the
components.
Connect the tie-rod end ball joint.

For vehicles fitted with an M12 nut, install a new nut
and tighten to 76 Nm (56 lb.ft).
6. Tighten the tie-rod locking nut.

7. Install the front wheel.

9. Using only four wheel alignment equipment approved by Land

Steering Linkage - Tie Rod End
Special Tool(s)
205-754 (LRT-54-027)
Removal

2. Remove the front wheel.
3. Loosen the tie rod end ball joint retaining nut.
4. Loosen the tie rod end lock nut.

Remove and discard the tie rod end
retaining nut.
6. Remove the tie-rod end, note the number of turns

for installation.
Installation
1. Install the tie rod end, note the number of turns until adjacent
to the locknut.
2. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the tie rods, use an

additional wrench when loosening or tightening the
components.
Connect the tie rod end ball joint.

3. Tighten the tie rod locking nut.

4. Install the front wheel.

6. Using only four wheel alignment equipment approved by Land

Steering Column -
Item Specification
Type Two piece, articulated with flexible coupling to steering rack; fitted with energy absorption system and
having a 120 mm (4.7 in) ride down capability with a 4.5 kN (0.45 ton force) maximum decoupling
load on the intermediate shaft and a 77 mm (3.0 in) collapse stroke on the lower shaft.
Upper
column
adjustment:
Reach 40 mm (1.57 in)
Rake 6°
Steering angle sensor Torx screws 3 2
* Steering column intermediate shaft to lower shaft bolts 30 22
* Steering column intermediate shaft to steering column nut 22 16
Steering column switch assembly Torx bolts 3 2
Steering wheel bolt 63 46
* New bolts/nut must be installed
Steering Column - Steering Column
Component Location

1 - Steering wheel
2 - Electronic steering lock
3 - Electric motor
5 - Bulkhead mounting
6 - Lower collapsible shaft yoke
7 - Lower collapsible shaft
8 - Intermediate shaft
9 - Gaitor
10 - Upper steering column assembly - Electric
11 - Upper steering column assembly - Manual
Overview
The steering column comprises the upper column assembly, the intermediate shaft and the lower collapsible shaft.
The three components are positively connected together to pass driver rotary input from the steering wheel to a
linear output of the steering rack.
The upper steering column assembly is electronically adjustable for steering wheel reach and rake and is controlled
by the CJB (central junction box). The upper steering column assembly also provides the location for the electronic
steering lock mechanism and the steering angle sensor.
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High-speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN (local interconnect
network) bus

1 - Battery
2 - Driver seat module
3 - Driver memory switch pack
6 - ABS module
8 - Reach/rake motor
9 - Reach solenoid and clutch
10 - Rake solenoid and clutch
11 - Potentiometer
12 - Steering column switch
13 - CJB
14 - EJB
Component Description
Upper Column Assembly - Manual

1 - Attachment holes
2 - Roof bracket
3 - Screw
4 - Locating hook
5 - 'U' bracket
6 - Steering wheel splines
7 - Main body
9 - Adjustment lever
10 - Clamp plate assembly
11 - Adjustment balance spring (2 off)
12 - Shearing capsule (2 off)
14 - Swing yoke
The steering column is attached to the in-vehicle crossbeam and secured with four, 8 mm thread forming, pan head
Torx drive screws. The two forward attachment screws are fixed through the column mounting bracket, the two
rearward mounting screws also pass through the shearing capsules. In the event of a high energy frontal impact, the
shearing capsules remain fixed to the crossbeam, but the 'U' bracket (with the main body) disengages from the
capsules, allowing the column to shorten axially (collapse), with the coiled straps absorbing energy to reduce
occupant loading.
WARNING: Take care when handling the column not to trap fingers if releasing the adjustment lever at any
point during the removal procedure when the column is not in the vehicle. The balance springs will cause the column
to rapidly move to its uppper-most position.
The column comprises a cast magnesium roof bracket which is attached to the in-vehicle crossbeam. Attached to the
roof bracket is a pivot housing, a 'U' bracket, upper and lower shafts and a main body. The roof bracket has two
hooks which locate in slots in the in-vehicle crossbeam. The hooks assist in supporting the weight of the column
during removal or installation.
The pivot housing is attached to the forward end of the roof bracket with two pivot pins. The pivot housing allows for
adjustment of the column rake and contains a bearing which supports the column lower shaft.
The 'U' bracket is attached to the roof bracket by a screw, bush and plastic washer assembly (third fixing) located in
a slot in the top of the roof bracket. When the column is assembled into the vehicle, the shearing capsules, which are
attached to the 'U' bracket, are clamped up against the roof bracket by the fixing screws, preventing movement of
the 'U' bracket. The bolts also pass through rectangular section steel straps, which at one end, have coils that locate
around a plastic bush (positioned on the shearing capsule). The straps are used to control the rate of column
collapse, in the event of a high energy frontal impact.
The main body is positioned in the 'U' bracket via the lever bolt. The bolt is captive within the vertical slots in the 'U'
bracket and the horizontal slots in the main body. The bolt also passes through the clamp plate assemblies (one on
either side of the 'U' bracket). The body houses the middle and upper bearings through which the upper shaft is
located. Two offset holes in the main body provide for the attachment of the electronic steering lock assembly.
The upper and lower shafts are located through the length of the column assembly. The upper shaft is supported in
two bearings in the main body and the lower shaft is located in the upper shaft and supported in a bearing in the
pivot housing. The lower shaft has a tubular section with external splines. These mate with the internal splines in the
upper shaft. The purpose of the splines is to transmit rotational movement of the upper shaft to the lower shaft, but
allowing the two components to telescope into each other in the event of a collision. The length of the splined
sections allow for 120 mm (4.72 in) of linear movement. The lower shaft is fitted with a universal joint spider to
which a swivel yoke is attached. The swivel yoke attaches to the intermediate shaft of the steering column on the
interior side of the bulkhead using a special cam bolt and self-locking nut.
A steering angle sensor is attached to the pivot housing of the column and its centre gear is rotated by a drive collar
which is attached to the lower shaft and rotates with movement of the steering wheel. The sensor transmits steering
angle data on the high speed CAN bus which is used by various systems on the vehicle. The steering angle sensor is
designed to become detached from the column in the event of a frontal impact. Care must be taken when handling
the column assembly to prevent accidental damage to the sensor.
The upper steering column assembly houses the electronic column lock mechanism and control module.
The steering column is adjustable for reach and rake. The column can be adjusted for 40 mm (1.57 in) of reach
adjustment and 6º of rake adjustment. The adjustment mechanism comprises an adjustment lever, a cam plate, a
lever bolt and nut, two brake pads and two clamp plate assemblies.
A plastic adjustment lever is located on the underside of the column assembly and is attached to a cam plate. When
the lever is pulled downwards, the cam plate rotates and releases tension in the lever bolt. The lever bolt also passes
through two sets of clamp plate assemblies. When the lever is moved upwards, the cam plate rotates applying
tension to the lever bolt, which applies pressure to the brake pads which in turn apply pressure to the clamp plate
assemblies (which lock the column in the desired position). The lever bolt is retained by a self-locking lever nut,
which abuts a thrust bearing.
WARNING: Under no circumstances should the lever nut torque be reduced, as this will reduce the clamping
efficiency of the adjustment mechanism possibly affecting the stability of the column during a frontal impact.
The pivot housing is attached to the roof bracket with two pivot pins. When the rake adjustment is operated, the
pivot housing rotates around the pivot pins to allow for the up and down adjustment, but maintains a positive
location to the roof bracket. An adjustment spring is fitted between the 'U' bracket and the main body, to counteract
the weight of the main body, upper shaft, steering wheel and airbag, preventing the steering wheel from dropping
rapidly when the adjustment lever is released.
In the event of a high energy frontal impact, the upper column assembly is designed to axially collapse reducing
impact injury to the driver. A number of components interact together to ensure that the collapse of the column is in
a controlled manner. The following components control the column collapse:
Pressure washer and bush (third fixing)

Shearing capsules
Straps
Upper and lower shaft (splined) connection
The shearing capsules have a central hole through which the rearward attachment bolts pass through into the roof
bracket. The capsules are located in the 'U' bracket by tapered slots, which have small cut-outs in the inside faces.
The shearing capsules have a number of small holes which align with the cut-outs in the 'U' bracket. When the
capsules are installed, plastic is injected into the holes and cut-outs. This plastic retention of the capsules provides
the initial controlled break-out force for the column in the event of a collision. After 10 mm of displacement, the 'U'
bracket is no longer located by the shearing capsules. When handling the column, care should be taken that the
shearing capsules are not impacted or dislodged.
The tension in the 'Third Fixing' screw, applies a clamp load to the roof bracket (via the bush and compression
washers). In the event of a collision, this clamp load (supplementary to the shearing capsules) must be overcome
before the column can collapse. When this load has been exceeded (and the fixing has been displaced 20 mm (0.79
in)) it slides easily within the roof bracket slot, providing directional control to the column, as it collapses. Under no
circumstances should the screw torque be adjusted.
The straps are rectangular section steel, which at one end, have coils that locate around a plastic bush (positioned on
the shearing capsule). The other end is formed into a hook which locates within a slot in the 'U' bracket. When a
collision has occurred, and the 'U' bracket has been displaced from the shearing capsules by 8 mm (0.3 in), the
straps begin to un-roll due to the displacement of the 'U' bracket. The straps provide the main element for energy
absorption as the column collapses. The cross section of the straps change after approximately 40 mm (1.6 in) of
extension, changing the amount of energy that they absorb.
Upper Column Assembly - Electric

1 - Pivot housing
2 - Roof bracket
3 - Locating hook
5 - Rake solenoid
6 - Rake clutch
7 - Reach solenoid
8 - Reach clutch
9 - Potentiometer
10 - Electric motor
11 - Outer profile
12 - Rake lever
14 - Pivot pin
16 - Swing yoke
The steering column is attached to the in-vehicle crossbeam and secured with four, 8mm, thread forming, pan head
Torx drive screws. In the event of a high energy frontal impact, a strap and shear pin on the underside of the column
provides a controlled collapse of the outer housing on the inner housing, allowing the column to shorten axially
(collapse), absorbing energy to reduce occupant loading.
The column comprises a cast magnesium roof bracket which is attached to the in-vehicle crossbeam. Attached to the
roof bracket is a pivot housing, a outer housing and upper and lower shafts. The roof bracket has two hooks which
locate in slots in the in-vehicle crossbeam. The hooks assist in supporting the weight of the column during removal or
installation.
The rake lever locates the aluminum outer profile, into which is fixed the electronic steering lock adaptor. The inner
profile is located within the outer profile, by 2 linear bearing assemblies, which allow a telescopic action for the reach
adjustment.
The assembly of the upper and lower shafts is located within the column by the bearings in the electronic steering
lock adaptor and the pivot housing. Both shafts are tubular. The lower shaft has external splines (which are over
molded with nylon), and these mate with the internal splines in the upper shaft. The purpose of the splines is to
transmit rotational movement of the upper shaft to the lower shaft, yet allow telescopic movement during column
axial collapse. The lower shaft is fitted with a universal joint spider to which a swivel yoke is attached. The swivel
yoke attaches to the intermediate shaft of the steering column on the interior side of the bulkhead using a special
cam bolt and self-locking nut.
A steering angle sensor is attached to the pivot housing of the column and its centre gear is rotated by a drive collar
which is attached to the lower shaft and rotates with movement of the steering wheel. The sensor transmits steering
angle data on the high speed CAN bus which is used by various systems on the vehicle. The steering angle sensor is
designed to become detached from the column in the event of a frontal impact. Care must be taken when handling
the column assembly to prevent accidental damage to the sensor.
The upper steering column assembly houses the electronic column lock mechanism and control module.
The steering column is adjustable electrically for reach and rake. The adjustment mechanism comprises an electric
adjustment motor, a lead screw, a rake solenoid, a reach solenoid, a rake clutch and a reach clutch.
The column adjustment is controlled by the driver using a joystick switch located on the left hand side of the column
cowl. The joystick can be moved forward and backward to adjust the column reach in and out and moved up and
down to adjust the rake. The single electric motor is used for both adjustment ranges. The switch selection uses the
applicable solenoid, engaging the applicable clutch on the lead screw.
When the auto function is activated, the steering column will adjust to the uppermost tilt position with ignition off,
and re-adjust to the previous set position, with ignition on.
For the reach adjustment, the lead screw drives the outer housing in or out as required. For the rake adjustment, the
lead screw drives a rake lever which moves the column up or down as applicable.
The pivot housing is attached to the roof bracket with two pivot pins. When the rake adjustment is operated, the
pivot housing rotates around the pivot pins to allow for the up and down adjustment, but maintains a positive
location to the roof bracket.
The electric steering column is linked to and controlled by the memory control module. The memory control module
provides storage of three separate memory positions which are stored against three individual vehicle keys.
For additional information, refer to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Description and Operation).
. The electric column also has an easy egress feature which lifts the column to its maximum rake to allow easier
access to the vehicle.
In the event of a high energy frontal impact, the upper column assembly is designed to collapse reducing impact
injury to the driver. A number of components interact together to ensure that the collapse of the column is in a
controlled manner. The following components control the column collapse:
Shear pin
Strap
Upper and lower shaft (splined) connection
The strap is rectangular section steel, which is secured by two Allen screws to the outer housing and by a shear pin
to the strap guide. The strap provides the main element for energy absorption as the column collapses. To initiate
axial movement of the column, the shear pin has to be severed, friction between several column interfaces has to be
overcome, and an axial load applied sufficient to initiate strap guide deformation. Once the column is telescoping,
deformation of the strap guide, and sliding friction between column interfaces, absorbs the energy of the occupant in
a controlled manner, as the column collapses.
WARNING: Do not attempt to dismantle the steering column. The crash safety of the unit will be compromised.
Intermediate Shaft

1 - Load limiter pins
2 - Cam bolt
4 - Retention spring
5 - Attachment hole
6 - Seal sleeve
CAUTION: Care should be taken when handling the intermediate shaft, to ensure that it is not subject to
impacts or that the retention spring is not displaced.
The non-handed, intermediate shaft is attached at its upper end to the swivel yoke on the lower shaft of the steering
column assembly. The intermediate shaft comprises two main parts; the upper and lower axis which are joined
together with a shear joint.
The upper axis has a cut-out in the shaft which allows for the fitment of the cam bolt. Only when the shaft is located
correctly in the swivel yoke, can the cam bolt be inserted. A self-locking nut is fitted to the cam bolt. The torque
applied as the nut is tightened, rotates the bolt, forcing the cam against the shaft, positioning it correctly in the
swivel yoke prior to the joint being clamped.
NOTE: If the self-locking nut is removed for any reason, it is recommended that a new, correct nut is fitted to
maintain the optimum torque on the cam bolt.
The lower axis is fitted with a plastic molded seal sleeve which provides a suitable surface for the location of the
plastic bearings within the two bulkhead seals. The bottom of the lower axis is machined to a double 'D' shape which
tapers at the end. One side of the taper has a slot which is used to align the intermediate shaft and the lower
collapsible shaft to ensure that the correct orientation of the steering wheel to steering gear is maintained. A hole is
drilled through the double 'D' shape and provides for attachment of the intermediate shaft to the lower collapsible
shaft.
The upper and lower axis, are joined together via a load limiter. The load limiter is designed to disconnect the upper
and lower axis in the event of a high energy frontal impact preventing an excessive load being applied to the steering
column (causing intrusion into the passenger compartment or an unstable airbag deployment).
The load limiter comprises two plates which are part of the upper and lower axis. The plates have a central 'guide'
pin, and two retention pins, which pass through bushes in the plates, onto which a rubber and steel washer are
staked in position. The size of the staking controls the load at which the lower axis separates from the upper axis. A
wire 'retention' spring is also fitted to the load limiter.
Lower Collapsible Shaft

1 - Bolt
2 - Heat shield
3 - Female shaft
4 - Male shaft
5 - Plastic spacer
6 - Flexible coupling
7 - Universal joint
8 - Torx bolt
The lower collapsible shaft is a handed component and the correct component must be fitted to ensure that the
steering phase angle is maintained. The shaft is attached at its upper end to the intermediate shaft and at its lower
end to the valve unit pinion on the steering gear. These attachment joints can only be fitted in one orientation to
ensure the correct alignment of the steering wheel to the steering gear. The shaft comprises two female and male
shafts which are a telescopic fit on each other. The male shaft can slide up to 77 mm (3.03 in) within the female
shaft in the event of a frontal impact, to minimize the effect of frontal intrusion. The sliding fit also allows for
dynamic displacement between the chassis and the body during severe off-road driving. A plastic spacer is fitted to
the male shaft which is only used as an assembly aid during vehicle production and serves no function once the shaft
is assembled to the vehicle.
The female shaft is a triangular section tube which is formed to a double 'D' hole at its upper end which mates with
the intermediate shaft. An indentation pressed in the wall of the tube ensures the correct alignment between the
intermediate shaft and the lower collapsible shaft. A captive nut, clinched to one side of a hole in the double 'D'
section, allows for the fitment of a patchlock bolt to secure the intermediate shaft. Clamped around the end of the
female shaft is a dust seal which prevents the ingress of dirt and moisture into the sliding joint, and a heat sleeve is
also fitted to reflect radiant heat from the exhaust.
The male shaft is a triangular section tube which is staked at its lower end into a flange. A cage and curved 'spring
plates' are fitted to its upper end, which slide in the female shaft. A pin is fitted into the side of the female tube, to
secure the male tube in the bore. The lower end of the male shaft is fitted with a flexible coupling to absorb vibration
and steering 'kick back', transmitted from the steering gear. A 'stabilizing pin' is fitted through the coupling to
prevent coupling articulation (acting as a universal joint), while still allowing rotational flexing and plunge movement.
The coupling is a rubber molding within which are nylon fibres wound around the attachment holes to transmit
torque applied to the steering. The coupling is attached to a drive flange (which is part of the male shaft), and to the
'U' yoke which in turn is connected to the pinion yoke, by the universal joint assembly.
Electronic Steering Column Lock


1 - Electronic steering column lock
With the passive start system, a conventional steering lock mechanism cannot be used. An electronic system was
developed which comprises a steering column assembly locking unit with an integrated control module. The steering
lock is operated with the door locks when the vehicle is locked or unlocked. A control module, located inside the
steering column, controls a motor, releasing the steering lock when appropriate.
The upper steering column assembly houses the column lock mechanism and control module. The components are
assembled with non-removable pins for security reasons and are therefore non-serviceable. Failure of any steering
lock components will require replacement of the upper steering column assembly.
The steering column lock comprises a locking motor and locking bolt. The locking motor drives a cam, which moves
the locking bolt into and out of engagement with the locking sleeve on the steering column. The locking motor is
fitted with a Hall effect sensor, which informs the control module of the position (locked/unlocked) of the steering lock
mechanism.

Removal
WARNING: Take care if releasing the adjustment lever when the column has been removed from the vehicle.
The spring is under a high tension, and if released, could cause personal injury. Make sure fingers are clear from any
areas, likely to be trapped.
CAUTION: Air tools MUST NOT be used on steering column bolts.
All vehicles
1. Fully extend the steering column for access.
2. Remove the steering wheel.

For additional information, refer to: Steering Wheel (211-04,
3. Remove the drivers side register trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Driver Side Register Trim
Panel (412-01, Removal and Installation).

Release the clip.

6. Remove the steering column upper shroud.

7. Remove the steering column lower shroud.
8. Remove the steering column side trim panel.

9. Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors from the
steering column multifunction switches.

clockspring.
11. Remove the steering column switch assembly.

12. Remove the steering column gaiter panel.
13. Disconnect the smart key antenna.
14. Disconnect the steering column lock electrical

connector.
15. Disconnect the steering angle sensor electrical
connector.
Vehicles with electric steering column

16. Disconnect the steering column adjustment motor

nut.
18. WARNING: Take care if releasing the

adjustment lever when the column has been
removed from the vehicle. The spring is under a
high tension, and if released, could cause personal
injury. Make sure fingers are clear from any areas,
likely to be trapped.
CAUTION: If the steering angle sensor is

damaged upon removal of the steering column, the
sensor MUST be replaced.
With assistance, remove the steering column.

19. Remove the steering angle sensor.

Installation
1. CAUTION: The potentiometer adjustment

values are unique for each steering column. Failure
to enter the correct code during calibration may
Note the potentiometer hexadecimal code on the

new steering column label for future reference.
All vehicles
2. Install the steering angle sensor.
Tighten the Torx screws to 3 Nm (2.2 lb.ft).
3. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the bolt holes are clean and free of swarf.
The steering column bolts must by tighted by hand a

minimum of 3 revolutions.
Air tools MUST NOT be used on steering column bolts.
With assistance, install the steering column.

Tighten the bolts in sequence to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
4. Connect the steering column intermediate shaft.

(16 lb.ft).
5. Secure the wiring harness to the steering column.

6. Connect the steering column adjustment motor electrical
connector.
All vehicles
7. Connect the steering angle sensor electrical connector.
8. Connect the steering column lock electrical connector.
9. Connect the smart key antenna.
10. Install the steering column gaiter panel.

Tighten the Torx screws.
11. Install the steering column switch assembly.

12. Connect the clockspring and multifunction switch electrical

connectors.
13. Install the steering column side trim panel.

14. Install the steering column shrouds.


Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.
17. Install the steering wheel.

18. Install the drivers side register trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Driver Side Register Trim
Panel (412-01, Removal and Installation).
19. Calibrate the steering angle sensor using the Land Rover
approved diagnostic tool.

20. If a new electric steering column is fitted re-calibrate the
steering column potentiometer using the Land Rover approved
diagnostic system.
Steering Column - Steering Column Shaft
Removal
Specifications).

Release the clip.

nut.

from the lower shaft.
5. Remove the steering column intermediate shaft.

Release the 2 grommets.
6. NOTES:
Do not disassemble further if the component

is removed for access only.
Remove the 2 intermediate shaft grommets.
Installation
1. Install the steering column intermediate shaft.
Install the grommets.
2. Connect the steering column intermediate shaft to the lower

shaft.
3. Connect the steering column intermediate shaft to the steering

column.
(16 lb.ft).
4. Install the driver side closing trim panel.

Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.

Specifications).
Steering Column - Steering Column Lower Shaft
Removal
CAUTION: Do not turn the steering wheel with the steering column lower shaft disconnected as damage to the
All vehicles
Specifications).
2. Turn the steering wheel to the straight ahead position.
3. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the steering wheel is in the

Do not turn the steering wheel with the

steering column lower shaft disconnected as
damage to the clockspring and steering wheel
switches may occur.
NOTE: Note the fitted position.
Remove and discard the steering column lower

shaft upper bolt.

5. CAUTION: Make sure that the brake hose and

the wiring harnesses are not damaged during the
removal and installation of the heat shields.
NOTE: Note the fitted position.
Remove the upper suspension arm and brake line

heat shields for access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 2 bolts.

6. Remove the brake line heat shield for access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
All vehicles
7. CAUTION: Do not turn the steering wheel with the

steering column lower shaft disconnected as damage to the
Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the

intermediate shaft.
8. Remove the fender splash shield lower trim.

Remove the 4 clips.
9. CAUTION: Make sure that the steering is correctly

positioned using the road wheels. Do not turn the steering
wheel. Failure to follow this instruction my result in damage to
the vehicle.
Turn the steering until access can be gained to the steering

column lower shaft bolt.
10. CAUTION: Do not turn the steering wheel

with the steering column lower shaft disconnected
as damage to the clockspring and steering wheel
switches may occur.
Remove and discard the steering column lower

shaft bolt.

12. NOTE: The steering column lower shaft is removed from

the vehicle through the inner wing.
Remove the steering column lower shaft.

steering gear.

13. Disconnect the steering gear electrical connector.
14. Remove the steering column lower shaft.

steering gear.
Installation
All vehicles
2. CAUTION: Make sure that the road wheels are in the

With assistance, install the steering column lower shaft.

Connect the steering column lower shaft to the steering
gear.
Connect the steering column intermediate shaft to the
lower shaft.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that a new bolt is installed.
Install the steering column lower shaft upper bolt.

Install a new bolt and tighten to 30 Nm (22 lb.ft).
5. Raise the vehicle on the lift.
6. CAUTIONS:
Do not turn the steering wheel with the steering column

lower shaft disconnected as damage to the clockspring and
steering wheel switches may occur.
Make sure that the steering is correctly positioned using

the road wheels. Do not turn the steering wheel. Failure to
follow this instruction my result in damage to the vehicle.
Turn the steering until access can be gained to the steering

column lower shaft bolt.
7. CAUTION: Make sure that a new bolt is installed.

Install the steering column lower shaft to steering gear bolt.
Install a new bolt and tighten to 30 Nm (22 lb.ft).

8. Connect the steering gear electrical connector.
All vehicles
9. Install the fender splash shield lower trim.
10. CAUTION: Make sure that the brake hose and the wiring
harnesses are not damaged during the removal and installation
of the heat shields.
Install the upper arm and brake line heat shields.

Install the 3 nuts.

11. Install the brake line heat shield.
Install the 3 nuts.

Steering Column - Steering Wheel
Removal
1. Refer to: Important Safety Instructions (100-00, Description

and Operation).
3. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible

personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted
before repairing or replacing any air bag supplementary
restraints system (SRS) components. To deplete the backup
power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and
wait for one minute. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in personal injury.
Refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20, Removal and

Installation).
4.
5.
6. NOTE: Note the steering wheel to column

alignment marks.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Installation
1.
2.
3.
4. Torque: 6 Nm
5. Torque: 3 Nm
6. Torque: 3 Nm
7. NOTE: Note the steering wheel to column

alignment marks.
Torque: 63 Nm
8.
9.
10. Refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20, Removal and
Installation).

Steering Column Switches -
Steering column switch Torx screws 3 2
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Switches
For additional information. REFER to:
Steering System (211-00 Steering System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing),
Turn Signal, Cornering and Hazard Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing),
Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Lock and Ignition Switch
Housing
Removal
CAUTION: If the ignition lock cylinder and switch are both removed from the ignition switch assembly, the
assembly shaft MUST NOT be rotated. Failure to comply will cause the incorrect operation of the lock, and the
assembly must be replaced.

Specifications).
3. Remove the steering wheel.




steering column multifunction switches.
clockspring.
8. Remove the steering column switch assembly.

9. Remove the passive coil.

10. Remove the ignition switch assembly.

Remove and discard the 2 shear bolts.
11. CAUTION: If the ignition lock cylinder and
switch are both removed from the ignition switch
assembly, the assembly shaft MUST NOT be
rotated. Failure to comply will cause the incorrect
operation of the lock, and the assembly must be
replaced.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the

Remove the ignition lock cylinder.

Turn the ignition key to position 1.
Insert a pin, not exceeding 2 mm diameter,
through the access hole in the ignition lock
cylinder housing to depress the plunger,
and release the ignition lock cylinder.
12. Remove the ignition switch.

Depress the 2 clips.
Installation
1. Install the ignition switch.
2. Install the ignition lock cylinder.

Turn the ignition key to position 1.
Locate into guides and depress the plunger.
3. Install the passive coil.
Secure the clips.
4. Install the ignition switch assembly.

Tighten the shear bolts until the heads shear off.
5. Install the steering column switch assembly.

6. Connect the clockspring and multifunction switch electrical

connectors.

Secure the clips.
8. Install the steering wheel.


Specifications).
Steering Column Switches - Ignition Switch
Removal


4. CAUTION: The ignition key must be removed

prior to the removal of the ignition switch.
Remove the ignition switch.

Depress the 2 clips.
Installation
1. Install the ignition switch.

Secure the clips.
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Multifunction Switch RH
Removal


4. Remove the steering column multifunction switch.

Installation
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Multifunction Switch LH
Removal


4. Remove the steering column multifunction switch.

Installation
Workshop Service Manual for Range Rover Sport L320 2013 Sec.3
3: Powertrain
303: Engine
303-00: Engine System - General Information
Engine (12.90.09.01) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Engine (12.90.09.01) - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Bearing Inspection
Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter
Camshaft End Play
Camshaft Lobe Lift
Camshaft Surface Inspection
Connecting Rod Cleaning
Connecting Rod Large End Bore
Crankshaft End Play
Cylinder Bore Out-of-Round
Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection
Piston Inspection
Piston Pin Diameter
Piston Pin to Bore Diameter
Piston Ring End Gap
Piston Ring-to-Groove Clearance
Valve Spring Free Length
Valve Stem Diameter
Leakage Test Using Smoke Test Equipment
Cylinder Head Gasket Selection - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Cylinder Head Distortion
Cylinder Compression Test - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
303-01A: Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
System Operation and Component Description
Engine
General Procedures
Engine Oil Draining and Filling (12.60.05)
Engine Oil Vacuum Draining and Filling
Camshaft LH
Camshaft RH
Camshaft Front Seal
Camshaft Rear Seal
Crankshaft Front Seal (12.21.14)
Crankshaft Pulley (12.21.01)
Crankshaft Rear Seal (12.21.20)
Cylinder Head (12.29.04)
Engine Mount LH (12.45.11)
Engine Mount RH (12.45.12)
Exhaust Manifold (30.15.10)
Exhaust Manifold Crossover Pipe
Flexplate (12.53.13)
Oil Cooler (12.60.68)
Oil Filter Element (12.60.02)
Oil Pan (12.60.44)
Oil Pump (12.60.26)
Timing Belt (12.65.18)
Timing Cover (12.65.01 or 12.65.43)
Valve Cover LH
Valve Cover RH
Removal
Engine
Installation
Engine
303-01B: Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Engine
Engine
General Procedures
Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check
Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Adjustment
Camshaft LH
Camshaft RH
Cylinder Head LH
Cylinder Head RH
Exhaust Manifold LH
Exhaust Manifold RH
Intake Manifold (30.15.02)
Oil Pan Extension (12.60.41)
Oil Pump (12.60.26)
Oil Restrictor
Timing Cover (12.65.01 or 12.65.43)
Timing Drive Components - Assembly Part Number: INA Timing Drive
Timing Drive Components - Assembly Part Number: Tsubaki Timing Drive
Valve Cover LH
Valve Cover RH
Cylinder Block Oil Gallery Plug
Fuel Pump Camshaft - Assembly Part Number: INA Timing Drive
Fuel Pump Camshaft - Assembly Part Number: Tsubaki Timing Drive
Lower Timing Cover
Timing Chain Tensioner Right
Removal
Engine
Installation
Engine
303-01C: Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Engine
Engine
General Procedures
Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check
Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Adjustment
Camshaft LH
Camshaft RH
Cylinder Head LH
Cylinder Head RH
Exhaust Manifold LH
Exhaust Manifold RH
Oil Pan Extension (12.60.41)
Oil Pump (12.60.26)
Timing Cover (12.65.01 or 12.65.43)
Timing Drive Components - Assembly Part Number: INA Timing Drive
Timing Drive Components - Assembly Part Number: Tsubaki Timing Drive
Valve Cover LH
Valve Cover RH
Cylinder Block Oil Gallery Plug
Fuel Pump Camshaft - Assembly Part Number: INA Timing Drive
Fuel Pump Camshaft - Assembly Part Number: Tsubaki Timing Drive
Lower Timing Cover
Timing Chain Tensioner Right
Removal
Engine
Installation
Engine
303-03A: Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Engine Cooling
General Procedures
Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding
Coolant Expansion Tank
Coolant Pump
Cooling Fan
Cooling Fan Shroud
Radiator
Thermostat
303-03B: Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Engine Cooling
Engine Cooling
General Procedures
Cooling System Draining and Vacuum Filling
Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding - V8 5.0L Petrol
Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding - V8 5.0L Petrol
Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Coolant Expansion Tank - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, 5.0L
Coolant Expansion Tank - V8 5.0L Petrol, 5.0L
Cooling Fan - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Cooling Fan - V8 5.0L Petrol
Coolant Pump - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Coolant Pump - V8 5.0L Petrol
Radiator - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Radiator - V8 5.0L Petrol
Thermostat Housing - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Thermostat Housing - V8 5.0L Petrol
303-03C: Supercharger Cooling - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Supercharger Cooling
Supercharger Cooling
Coolant Pump
Radiator
303-04A: Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Fuel Charging and Controls
General Procedures
Fuel Injection Component Cleaning
Fuel Injection Pump
Fuel Injectors LH
Fuel Injectors RH
Fuel Rail LH
Fuel Rail RH
Intake Air Shutoff Throttle
303-04B: Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Turbocharger
Turbocharger LH
Turbocharger RH
Turbocharger Bypass Valve
Fixed Vane Turbocharger Actuator
Turbocharger Oil Supply Tube
303-04C: Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol
Specification
General Procedures
Fuel Injection Component Cleaning Using Pressure Cleaner
Fuel Injectors
Fuel Rail LH
Fuel Rail RH
High Pressure Fuel Pump 1
Throttle Body
303-04D: Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
General Procedures
Fuel Injection Component Cleaning Using Pressure Cleaner
Fuel Injectors
Fuel Rail LH
Fuel Rail RH
Throttle Body
303-05A: Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Accessory Drive
Accessory Drive Belt
Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Fuel Injection Pump Pulley
Rear End Accessory Drive (READ)
303-05B: Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Accessory Drive
Accessory Drive
Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley
Cooling Fan Belt
303-05C: Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Accessory Drive
Accessory Drive
Supercharger Belt
Supercharger Belt Idler Pulley
Supercharger Belt Tensioner
303-06A: Starting System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Starting System
Starter Motor
303-06B: Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Starting System
Starting System
Starter Motor
303-07A: Glow Plug System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Glow Plug System
Glow Plugs
303-07B: Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Engine Ignition
Engine Ignition
Ignition Coil-On-Plug
Spark Plugs - V8 5.0L Petrol
Spark Plugs - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
303-08A: Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Engine Emission Control
Crankcase Vent Oil Separator
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Outlet Tube LH
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Outlet Tube RH
303-08B: Engine Emission Control - V8 5.0L Petrol
303-08C: Engine Emission Control - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
303-12A: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering
Air Cleaner
Air Cleaner Element (19.10.10)
Charge Air Cooler
303-12B: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Air Cleaner Element
Air Cleaner LH
Air Cleaner RH
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe LH
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe RH
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T-Connector
303-12C: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T-Connector
Charge Air Cooler
Supercharger
Air Cleaner Element
Air Cleaner LH
Air Cleaner RH
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe LH
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe RH
Supercharger Spring Isolator
303-13: Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Evaporative Emissions
Evaporative Emissions
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve - V8 5.0L Petrol
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
303-14A: Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Electronic Engine Controls
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (18.30.24)
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor (18.30.12)
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ring (18.30.14)
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Differential Pressure Sensor
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor (18.30.10)
Engine Control Module (ECM) (18.30.03)
Engine Oil Level Sensor (12.60.51)
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor
Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor RH
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) (19.22.16)
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor (18.30.09)
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor (18.30.56)
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor (19.22.25)
Oil Temperature Sensor (18.30.41)
Post Catalytic Converter Temperature Sensor
Post DPF Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor
Pre Catalytic Converter Temperature Sensor
Pre DPF Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor
303-14B: Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol
Specification
General Procedures
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Long Drive Cycle Self-Test
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Short Drive Cycle Self-Test
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor LH
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor RH
Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH
Catalyst Monitor Sensor RH
Front Knock Sensor (KS) LH
Front Knock Sensor (KS) RH
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) RH
Rear Knock Sensor (KS) LH
Rear Knock Sensor (KS) RH
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) Oil Control Solenoid LH
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) Oil Control Solenoid RH
303-14C: Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
General Procedures
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Long Drive Cycle Self-Test
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Short Drive Cycle Self-Test
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor LH
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor RH
Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH
Catalyst Monitor Sensor RH
Front Knock Sensor (KS) LH
Front Knock Sensor (KS) RH
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) RH
Rear Knock Sensor (KS) LH
Rear Knock Sensor (KS) RH
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) Oil Control Solenoid LH
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) Oil Control Solenoid RH
307: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle
307-01A: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol, Vehicles With: 6HP28 6-Speed Automatic Transmission
Specification
Transmission Description
Diagnostics
General Procedures
Transmission Fluid Level Check
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Input Shaft Seal
Extension Housing Seal
Transmission Control Module (TCM) and Main Control Valve Body
Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter
Transmission Support Insulator
Removal
Transmission - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Transmission - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Installation
Transmission - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Transmission - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
307-01B: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel , Vehicles With: 8HP70
8-Speed Automatic Transmission AWD
Specification
Transmission Description
Diagnostics - TDV6 3.0L Diesel , Vehicles With: 8HP70 8-Speed Automatic
Transmission AWD
General Procedures
Transmission Fluid Level Check
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Input Shaft Seal
Extension Housing Seal
Transmission Control Module (TCM) and Main Control Valve Body
Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter
Transmission Support Insulator
Removal
Transmission
Installation
Transmission
307-02A: Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol, Vehicles With: 6HP28 6-Speed Automatic Transmission
Specification
Transmission Cooling
Transmission Fluid Cooler - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Transmission Fluid Cooler - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
307-02B: Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel , Vehicles With: 8HP70 8-
Speed Automatic Transmission AWD
Specification
Transmission Fluid Cooler - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Transmission Fluid Cooler - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
307-05A: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Vehicles With: 6HP28 6-Speed Automatic Transmission
Specification
External Controls
External Controls
Selector Lever Assembly
307-05B: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel ,
Vehicles With: 8HP70 8-Speed Automatic Transmission AWD
Specification
External Controls
Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Knob
Emergency Park Position Release Lever
308: Manual Transmission/Transaxle, Clutch and Transfer Case
308-07A: Four-Wheel Drive Systems
Specification
Four-Wheel Drive Systems
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Control Module (41.30.01)
Transfer Case Shift Motor (41.30.03)
Transfer Case Clutch Solenoid
High/Low Range Sensor (41.30.07)
308-07B: Transfer Case
Specification
Transfer Case
Transfer Case
General Procedures
Transfer Case Draining and Filling (41.20.04)
In-Vehicle Repair
Transfer Case Input Shaft Seal (41.20.50) - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol
Transfer Case Input Shaft Seal (41.20.50) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Transfer Case Input Shaft Seal (41.20.50) - TDV8 3.6L Diesel
Transfer Case Chain
Transfer Case Front Output Seal
Transfer Case Front Output Shaft Bearing
Transfer Case Rear Output Seal
Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Bearing
Removal
Transfer Case (41.20.25.99) - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Transfer Case (41.20.25.99) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Transfer Case (41.20.25.99) - TDV8 3.6L Diesel
Installation
Transfer Case (41.20.25) - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Transfer Case (41.20.25) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Transfer Case (41.20.25) - TDV8 3.6L Diesel
309: Exhaust System
309-00A: Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Exhaust System
Component Location
Exhaust System
Diesel Particulate Filter
General Procedures
Exhaust System Repair
Catalytic Converter (17.50.01)
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Exhaust System (30.10.01)
Front Muffler (30.10.11)
Rear Muffler (30.10.22)
309-00B: Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Exhaust System
Exhaust System
General Procedures
Exhaust System Repair
Catalytic Converter LH
Catalytic Converter RH
Exhaust System (30.10.01)
Front Muffler (30.10.11)
Rear Muffler (30.10.22)
310: Fuel System
310-00: Fuel System - General Information
Fuel System
General Procedures
Diesel Filter Water Drain-Off
Fuel System Pressure Release (19.50.02) - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol
Fuel System Pressure Check (19.50.13)
Fuel Tank Draining (19.55.02)
Low-Pressure Fuel System Bleeding (19.50.07) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
310-01A: Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Fuel Tank and Lines
Fuel Tank and Lines
Fuel Cooler
Fuel Pump and Sender Unit
Fuel Tank (19.55.01)
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe (19.55.07)
Fuel Filter Element (192502)
310-01B: Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Fuel Tank and Lines
Fuel Tank and Lines
Fuel Filter (19.25.03)
Fuel Tank (19.55.01)
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe (19.55.07)
Fuel Pump and Sender Unit
310-03A: Speed Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Speed Control
Speed Control
General Procedures
Speed Control Sensor Adjustment
Speed Control Deactivator Switch
Speed Control Module
Speed Control Sensor
Speed Control Switch
310-03B: Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Speed Control
Speed Control
General Procedures
Speed Control Sensor Adjustment
Speed Control Deactivator Switch
Speed Control Module
Speed Control Sensor
Speed Control Switch
Engine System - General Information - Engine TDV6 3.0L Diesel
For a detailed description of the 3.0L Diesel engine, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (303-01A)
Engine (Description and Operation),

Engine (Description and Operation),
Engine (Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Coolant level Wiring harness
Coolant leaks Electrical connector(s)
Oil level Injectors
Oil leaks Glow plugs
Visibly damaged or worn parts 5 volt sensor supply
Loose or missing nuts or bolts Sensor(s)
Cooling fan control module and motor
Engine Control Module (ECM)
If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
3. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the relevant Symptom Chart. Symptom
Charts have been separated into Leaks and Noise Vibration and Harshness (NVH) for ease of use.
Alternatively, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
Symptom Charts
Symptom Chart, Leaks
Symptom Possible Cause Action
External coolant leaks Damaged hose(s) For cooling system checks,
Damaged REFER to: Engine Cooling (303-03A, Diagnosis and
expansion tank Testing).
Damaged radiator
Leaking
seals/gaskets
Cracked/damaged
casings
Internal coolant leaks Note: This may Leaking For cooling system checks,
be indicated by the production of seals/gaskets REFER to: Engine Cooling (303-03A, Diagnosis and
white smoke from the exhaust Cracked/damaged Testing).
casings
Engine overheats Insufficient For cooling system checks,

coolant REFER to: Engine Cooling (303-03A, Diagnosis and
Insufficient oil Testing).
Pressure cap fault
Thermostat not
opening
Coolant pump
failure
Cooling fan
failure
Engine takes too long to reach Thermostat stuck For cooling system checks,
operating temperature open REFER to: Engine Cooling (303-03A, Diagnosis and
Testing).
External oil leaks Gaskets Clean and confirm the area of the leak. Check the
Seals visual condition of oil carrying components. Check
Oil pipes the crankcase ventilation system. Carry out a
Oil filter compression test, GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Oil cooler
Damaged/cracked
casings
Crankcase
ventilation
system
Piston ring blow-
by
Internal oil leaks (leaks into coolant Gaskets Check for traces of oil in the coolant. Check for
or combustion chamber) Note: This Seals evidence of oil in the combustion chambers (deposits
may be indicated by the production of Damaged/cracked on the glow plugs, etc). Confirm oil consumption
blue smoke from the exhaust casings and vehicle usage with the owner/driver. Carry out
Worn valve an oil consumption test, GO to Pinpoint Test B.
guides
Worn cylinder
bores/pistons
Broken piston
rings
Symptom Chart, NVH
NOTE: As the checks suggested here are open to interpretation, they should be used as a guide only.
Descriptions of noises, etc, are in general terms, so depend on a degree of experience on the part of the technician.
Symptom Possible Cause Action

Rattle/ticking from top of Valve gear noise Check the engine oil pressure, GO to Pinpoint Test C. . Check
engine Camshaft bearing the function of the hydraulic tappets and the camshaft
noise condition. Check the camshaft bearings, chains and tensioners.
Camshaft chain Check the vacuum pump, and high pressure fuel pump
noise
Tensioner noise
Vacuum pump
noise
High pressure
fuel pump noise
Growl from top of engine High pressure Check the high pressure fuel pump belt and tensioner
fuel pump belt
noise
High pressure
fuel pump belt
tensioner noise
Squeaking/Creaking/Squeal Front End Check the FEAD belt and driven components,
from front of engine Accessory Drive REFER to: Accessory Drive (303-05A, Diagnosis and Testing).
(FEAD) belt
FEAD belt
tensioner
Driven
components on
FEAD belt
Whine/Slap/Growl from Front End Check the FEAD belt and driven components. Check the timing
front of engine Accessory Drive belt and tensioners
(FEAD) belt
FEAD belt
tensioner
Driven
components on
FEAD belt
Timing belt noise
Timing belt
tensioner noise
Knock from lower half of Piston slap Check the engine oil pressure, GO to Pinpoint Test C. . Check
engine (often worse with a Piston pin noise piston, cylinder bore, piston pin and connecting rod bearing for
cold engine) Connecting rod excess wear
bearing noise
Knock/Rumble from lower Main bearing Check the engine oil pressure, GO to Pinpoint Test C. . Check
half of engine (often worse noise connecting rod bearing for excess wear
on overrun)
Misfire/Rough running Engine For engine management system tests,
management REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index (100-00,
system Description and Operation).
Fuel charging and For fuel charging and controls systems tests, REFER to:
controls Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04A, Diagnosis and
Exhaust gas Testing),
recirculation Turbocharger (303-04B, Diagnosis and Testing).
(EGR) system For EGR system tests,
Burnt/sticking REFER to: Engine Emission Control (303-08A, Diagnosis and
valves Testing).
Worn valve Carry out a compression test, GO to Pinpoint Test A. Check for
guides excess wear in engine components
Worn cylinder
bores/pistons
Broken piston
rings
Damaged/cracked
casings
DTC Index
For a complete list of all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to
Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index (100-00, Description and Operation).
Pinpoint Tests
NOTE: Where reference is made to 'suitable equipment', this refers to standard workshop equipment. Refer to
the operating instructions for your own equipment when performing any tests.
PINPOINT TEST A : CHECK THE CYLINDER COMPRESSIONS
WARNING: Only compression testers able to read the higher compression pressures found in diesel engines
should be used. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
NOTE: Where possible, compression testing should be carried out on an engine at operating temperature.
CONDITIONS
A1: CARRY OUT A DRY CYLINDER COMPRESSION TEST
1 Make sure the parking brake is applied and that the selector lever is in park.
2 Set the ignition status to OFF.
3 Remove the starter relay.
4 Disconnect the starter motor solenoid connector.
5 Connect a suitable remote starter device to the starter motor solenoid.
6 Remove the glow plugs.
7 Install adaptor 303-1131 in place of the glow plug in the first cylinder to be tested.
8 Connect a suitable compression tester to the adaptor. See warning above.
9 Using the remote starter device, crank the engine a minimum of five revolutions.
10 Record the compression figure and the number of revolutions taken to reach it.
11 Repeat steps 7 - 10 above for the remaining cylinders, cranking the engine for a similar number
of revolutions each time.
12 Compare the compression figures across all the cylinders.
Are the compression figures within 10% of each other?
Yes
Unless the compression figures are universally very low (experience will indicate this), check for
other causes for the customer complaint.
No
GO to A2.
A2: CARRY OUT A WET CYLINDER COMPRESSION TEST
CAUTION: If engine oil is introduced into the cylinders, run the engine at 2,000 rpm for a minimum of ten
minutes after completing testing to prevent damage to the catalytic converters. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the vehicle.
NOTE: There is a combustion chamber in the top of each piston. Make sure that the oil is not allowed to run
into this chamber.
1 Using a suitable oil can with a flexible spout, introduce a small amount of clean engine oil into
the cylinder just before testing, such that the oil is able to run between the piston and the
cylinder bore.
2 Repeat steps 7 - 10 from the test above, introducing oil into each cylinder just before testing.
3 Compare the compression figures across all the cylinders.
Is the compression figure higher than the dry test?
Yes
A higher figure following the introduction of oil may indicate a worn or damaged cylinder bore,
piston and/or piston rings. Disassembly would be required to confirm this.
No
If the compression figure is unaffected by the introduction of oil, but the figure is still less than
90% of the other cylinders, this may indicate a burnt and/or sticking valve, leaking head gasket,
etc. Disassembly would be required to confirm this.
Clear any DTCs which may have been induced by the test.
PINPOINT TEST B : OIL CONSUMPTION TEST
NOTE: Oil consumption will vary, depending on a number of factors. New engines will normally use more oil
than 'run-in' engines, although a guideline would be to expect 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) per liter.
CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK FOR EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
1 Start the engine and allow it to run until it reaches normal operating temperature.
2 Make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface and set ignition status to OFF.
3 Allow to settle for at least five minutes.
4 Check the oil level.
5 Correct the level, if necessary, and record the reading and mileage in the vehicle history.
6 Make sure that the owner/driver is aware that a test is being carried out, and that they should
not top-up their oil level for the duration of the test, but should check the level every 160-240
Km (100-150 miles).
7 When the oil level reaches the ADD mark, the customer should bring the vehicle in to be
checked.
8 Top-up the oil to the level at the beginning of the test and record the amount of oil needed to
do so, and the mileage covered in the course of the test.
9 From this, the consumption can be calculated, and a decision made as to whether or not the
consumption is considered excessive.
Is the consumption excessive for the mileage and/or use?
Yes
Disassembly will be required to check the components indicated in the symptom chart.
No
No further action is required.
PINPOINT TEST C : CHECK THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

NOTES:
Check and, if necessary, top-up the engine oil level before beginning this test.
Where reference is made to 'suitable equipment', this refers to standard workshop equipment. Refer to the
operating instructions for your own equipment when performing any tests.
CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK FOR LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
1 Remove the oil pressure sensor.
2 Connect a suitable oil pressure gauge in place of the oil pressure sensor.
3 Start the engine and check for leaks at the gauge connection.
4 Allow the engine to idle and monitor the oil pressure.
5 Raise the engine speed to 2,500 rpm and monitor the oil pressure.
Is the oil pressure less than 0.50 bar (7.25 psi) between idle and 2,500 rpm?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
GO to C3.
C2: CHECK FOR LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE AT ENGINE SPEEDS GREATER THAN 2,500 RPM
1 Raise the engine speed to above 2,500 rpm and monitor the oil pressure.
Is the oil pressure less than 1.0 bar (14.5 psi) at engine speeds greater than 2,500 rpm?
Yes
Pressure this low may indicate a problem with: oil pump, filtering, clearances within the engine.
Check if there are any other indications of engine faults (noise, etc), refer to the symptom chart
above.
No
GO to C3.
C3: CHECK FOR HIGH ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
1 Monitor the engine oil pressure at varying engine speeds.
Does the oil pressure reach 4.0 bar (58 psi)?
Yes
Pressure this high may indicate a blockage in the lubrication system. If this is not resolved, high
oil pressure will lead to engine oil leaks and other failures.
No
If the oil pressure stays in the band between 0.50 bar (7.25 psi) and 1.0 bar (14.5 psi) this
would be considered normal.
Engine System - General Information - Engine V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
Oil pressure testing adaptor, 303-1451
Oil pressure testing gauge, 303-871
For a detailed description of the 5.0L engine, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Engine (303-01 Engine - 5.0L NA V8 - AJ133, Description and Operation) /
Engine (303-01 Engine - 5.0L SC V8 - AJ133, Diagnosis and Testing).
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity.

Visual Inspection
Coolant leaks Fuses
Oil leaks Loose or corroded electrical connectors
Leaks in the fuel system Harnesses
Visibly damaged or worn parts Sensors
Loose or missing fixings
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively
check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
Symptom Chart
NOTES:
If an engine is suspect, and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty refer to the Warranty Policy
and Procedure manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new engine.
Due to the possibility of loose carbon, that has become trapped between the valve face and seat, effecting the
pressure readings, when carrying out a compression test and some cylinders are found to have low pressures, install
the spark plugs, road test the vehicle and re-test the suspect cylinders. If the correct pressures are restored, no
further action is required.
Symptom Action
All engine related Check ECM for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to DTC Index.
issues
Difficult to start Carry out general engine checks:
hot and cold - Compression test. Refer to component tests in this section.
- Valve clearances
- Spark plug condition and color
Poor idle Ensure the air intake system is free from leaks
Carry out general engine checks:
- Compression test. Refer to component tests in this section.
- Valve clearances
Check for collapsed catalytic converter/blocked exhaust system
Check long and short term fuel trim datalogger signals
- Readings up to 10%: may be considered as acceptable if the readings are equal
bank to bank
- Positive readings of between 10-20%: check for air leaks in air intake system
- Negative readings of between 10-20%: check for over fuelling e.g. leaking
injectors, high fuel pressure
- Readings above 20%: check for DTCs and refer to DTC Index.
Carry out a vacuum gauge check. Refer to component tests in this section
Insufficient Ensure the air intake system is free from leaks

power/Insufficient Carry out general engine checks:
compression - Compression test. Refer to component tests in this section.
- Valve clearances
Check for collapsed catalytic converter/blocked exhaust system
Check long and short term fuel trim datalogger signals
- Readings up to 10%: may be considered as acceptable if the readings are equal
bank to bank
- Positive readings of between 10-20%: check for air leaks in air intake system
- Negative readings of between 10-20%: check for over fuelling e.g. leaking
injectors, high fuel pressure
- Readings above 20%: check for DTCs and refer to DTC Index.
Carry out a vacuum gauge check. Refer to component tests in this section
Oil consumption Carry out oil leak check followed by an oil consumption test. Refer to the component tests
in this section
If oil consumption is excessive:
Check the integrity of the engine breather system
Carry out general engine checks:
- Compression test. Refer to component tests in this section.
- Valve clearances
Noise Refer to the Special Service Messages on the Electronic Product Quality Report (EPQR)
system for sound files. If the symptom does NOT compare to any of the sound files,
contact Dealer Technical Support (DTS)
DTC Index
For a complete list of all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to
Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Engine Control Module (PCM) 5.0L V8 (100-00 General
Component Tests
Engine Oil Leaks
NOTE: Before installing new gaskets or oil seals, make sure that the fault is clearly established.
If the oil leak cannot be identified clearly by a visual inspection, carry out an Ultraviolet test:
Fluorescent Oil Additive Method
1. Clean the engine with a suitable cleaning fluid (brake cleaner).
2. Drain the engine oil and refill with recommended oil, premixed with Diesel Engine Oil Dye or equivalent. Use
a minimum 14.8 ml (0.5 ounce) to a maximum 29.6 ml (1 ounce) of fluorescent additive to all engines. If oil
is not premixed, fluorescent additive must first be added to the crankcase.
3. Run engine for 15 minutes. Stop the engine and inspect all seal and gasket areas for leaks using a 12 Volt
Master UV Diagnostic Inspection Kit or equivalent. A clear bright yellow or orange area will identify leak. For
extremely small leaks, several hours may be required for the leak to appear.
4. As necessary, pressurize the main oil gallery system to locate leaks due to incorrectly sealed, loose or cocked
plugs. If the flywheel bolts leak oil, look for sealer on the threads.
5. Repair all leaks as necessary.
Compression Test
General Remarks
NOTES:
Removing fuses and disconnecting electrical components may cause the Engine Control Module (ECM) to log
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). After the measurements have been carried out, DTCs should be cleared from
memory by connecting to the Manufacturer Approved Diagnostic System.
Only check the compression pressure with the valves set to the prescribed clearance (if this can be adjusted).
The compression pressure should be checked with the engine at normal operating temperature.
Check the Compression Pressure
WARNING: Move gear selector lever to 'P' position. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal
injury.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay.
2. Start the engine - the engine will start, run for a few seconds then stall.
3. Remove the spark plugs.
4. Install the compression tester.
5. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch OFF, using the auxiliary
starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of five compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note
the approximate number of compression strokes required to obtain the highest reading.
6. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression
strokes.
7. Install the removed components in reverse order, observing the specified tightening torques.
8. Clear all DTCs from the ECM.
Interpretation of the Results
NOTE: Due to the possibility of loose carbon that has become trapped between the valve face and seat
effecting the pressure readings, when carrying out a compression test and cylinders are found to have low
pressures, install the spark plugs, road test the vehicle and re-test the suspect cylinders. If the correct pressures are
restored, no further action is required.
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is within 75%
of the highest reading.
If the cylinder pressures are found to be low, carry out a leakdown test to determine the location of the fault (if any
leakback can be heard through the engine breather system suspect the piston rings, if any leakback can be heard
through the inlet system suspect the inlet valve or seat, if any leakback can be heard through the exhaust manifold
suspect the exhaust valve or seat. If the measurements for two cylinders next to each other are both too low then it
is very likely that the cylinder head gasket between them is burnt through. This can also be recognized by traces of
engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in the engine oil).
Oil Consumption Test
The amount of oil an engine uses will vary with the way the vehicle is driven in addition to normal engine-to-engine
variation. This is especially true during the first 16,100 km (10,000 miles) when a new engine is being broken in or
until certain internal components become conditioned. Vehicles used in heavy-duty operation may use more oil. The
following are examples of heavy-duty operation:
Trailer towing applications

Severe loading applications
Sustained high speed operation
Engines need oil to lubricate the following internal components:
Cylinder block cylinder walls

Pistons and piston rings
Intake and exhaust valve stems
Intake and exhaust valve guides
All internal engine components
When the pistons move downward, a thin film of oil is left on the cylinder walls. As the vehicle is operated, some oil
is also drawn into the combustion chambers past the intake and exhaust valve stem seals and burned.
The following are examples of conditions that can affect oil consumption rates:
Engine size
Operator driving habits
Ambient temperatures
Quality and viscosity of oil
Engine is being run in an overfilled condition (check the oil level at least five minutes after a hot shutdown
with the vehicle parked on a level surface. The oil level should not be above the top of the cross-hatched
area and the letter "F" in FULL).
Operation under varying conditions can frequently be misleading. A vehicle that has been run for several thousand
miles on short trips or in below-freezing ambient temperatures may have consumed a "normal" amount of oil.
However, when checking the engine oil level, it may measure up to the full mark on the oil level indicator due to
dilution (condensation and fuel) in the engine crankcase. The vehicle then might be driven at high speeds on the
highway where the condensation and fuel boil off. The next time the engine oil is checked it may appear that a liter
of oil was used in about 160 km (100 miles). Oil consumption rate is about one liter per 2,400 km (1,500 miles).
Make sure the selected engine oil meets Jaguar specification and the recommended API Performance category "SG"
and SAE viscosity grade as shown in the vehicle Owner's Guide. It is also important that the engine oil is changed at
the intervals specified for the typical operating conditions.
The following diagnostic procedure is used to determine the source of excessive oil consumption.
NOTE: Oil use is normally greater during the first 16,100 km (10,000 miles) of service. As mileage increases,
oil use decreases. High speed driving, towing, high ambient temperature and other factors may result in greater oil
use.
1. Define excessive consumption, such as the number of miles driven per liter of oil used. Also determine
customers driving habits, such as sustained high speed operation, towing, extended idle and other
considerations.
2. Verify that the engine has no external oil leaks as described under Engine Oil Leaks in this section.
3. Carry out an oil consumption test:

Run the engine to normal operating temperature. Switch engine OFF and allow oil to drain back for at
least five minutes .
With vehicle parked on level surface, check the engine oil level.
If required, add engine oil to set level exactly to the FULL mark.
Record the vehicle mileage.
Instruct the customer to return for a level check after driving the vehicle as usual for 1,610 km (1000
miles).
Check the oil level under the same conditions and at the same location as the initial check.
NOTE: If the oil consumption rate is unacceptable go to Step 4.
4. Check the Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) system. Make sure the system is not plugged.
5. Check for plugged oil drain-back holes in the cylinder head and cylinder block.
6. If the condition still exists after carrying out the above tests go to step 9.
7. Carry out a cylinder compression test. Refer to the Compression Test procedure in this section. This can help
determine the source of oil consumption such as valves, piston rings or other areas.
8. Check valve guides for excessive guide clearance. Install new valve stem seals after verifying valve guide
clearance.
9. Worn or damaged internal engine components can cause excessive oil consumption. Small deposits of oil on
the tips of the spark plugs can be a clue to internal oil consumption.
Intake Manifold Vacuum Test
Bring the engine to normal operating temperature. Connect a vacuum gauge or equivalent to the intake manifold.
Run the engine at the specified idle speed.
The vacuum gauge should read between 51-74 kPa (15-22 in-Hg) depending upon the engine condition and the
altitude at which the test is performed. Subtract 4.0193 kPa (1 in-Hg) from the specified reading for every 304.8 m
(1,000 feet) of elevation above sea level.
The reading should be steady. As necessary, adjust the gauge damper control (where used) if the needle is
fluttering rapidly. Adjust damper until needle moves easily without excessive flutter.
Interpreting Vacuum Gauge Readings
A careful study of the vacuum gauge reading while the engine is idling will help pinpoint trouble areas. Always
conduct other appropriate tests before arriving at a final diagnostic decision. Vacuum gauge readings, although
helpful, must be interpreted carefully.
Most vacuum gauges have a normal band indicated on the gauge face.
The following are potential gauge readings. Some are normal; others should be investigated further.
1. NORMAL READING: Needle between 51-74 kPa (15-22 in-Hg) and holding steady.
2. NORMAL READING DURING RAPID ACCELERATION: When the engine is rapidly accelerated, the needle will
drop to a low (not to zero) reading. When the throttle is suddenly released, the needle will snap back up to a
higher than normal figure.
3. NORMAL FOR HIGH-LIFT CAMSHAFT WITH LARGE OVERLAP: The needle will register as low as 51 kPa (15 in-
Hg) but will be relatively steady. Some oscillation is normal.
4. WORN RINGS OR DILUTED OIL: When the engine is accelerated, the needle drops to 0 kPa (0 in-Hg). Upon
deceleration, the needle runs slightly above 74 kPa (22 in-Hg).
5. STICKING VALVES: When the needle remains steady at a normal vacuum but occasionally flicks (sharp, fast
movement) down and back about 13 kPa (4 in-Hg), one or more valves may be sticking.
6. BURNED OR BENT VALVES: A regular, evenly-spaced, downscale flicking of the needle indicates one or more
burned or damaged valves. Insufficient hydraulic valve tappet or hydraulic lash adjuster clearance will also
cause this reaction.
7. POOR VALVE SEATING: A small but regular downscale flicking can mean one or more valves are not seating
correctly.
8. WORN VALVE GUIDES: When the needle oscillates over about a 13 kPa (4 in-Hg) range at idle speed, the
valve guides could be worn. As engine speed increases, the needle will become steady if guides are
responsible.
9. WEAK VALVE SPRINGS: When the needle oscillation becomes more violent as engine RPM is increased, weak
valve springs are indicated. The reading at idle could be relatively steady.
10. LATE VALVE TIMING: A steady but low reading could be caused by late valve timing.
11. IGNITION TIMING RETARDED: Retarded ignition timing will produce a steady but somewhat low reading.
12. INSUFFICIENT SPARK PLUG GAP: When spark plugs are gapped too close, a regular, small pulsation of the
needle can occur.
13. INTAKE LEAK: A low, steady reading can be caused by an intake manifold or throttle body gasket leak.
14. BLOWN HEAD GASKET: A regular drop of fair magnitude can be caused by a blown head gasket or warped
cylinder head to cylinder block surface.
15. RESTRICTED EXHAUST SYSTEM: When the engine is first started and is idled, the reading may be normal, but
as the engine RPM is increased, the back pressure caused by a clogged muffler, kinked tail pipe or other
concerns will cause the needle to slowly drop to 0 kPa (0 in-Hg). The needle then may slowly rise. Excessive
exhaust clogging will cause the needle to drop to a low point even if the engine is only idling.
When vacuum leaks are indicated, search out and correct the cause. Excess air leaking into the system will upset the
fuel mixture and cause concerns such as rough idle, missing on acceleration or burned valves. If the leak exists in
an accessory such as the power brake booster, the unit will not function correctly. Always repair vacuum leaks.
Engine Oil Pressure Check
NOTE: Prior to checking the engine oil pressure, a road test of 6 miles (10 kilometres), must be carried out. Do
not attempt to attain engine normal operating temperature by allowing the engine to idle.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. Refer to section 414-00 - Charging System - General Information of the
workshop manual
2. WARNINGS:
The spilling of hot engine oil is unavoidable during this procedure, care must be taken to prevent
scalding.
Wear protective gloves.
Remove the engine oil filter element

REFER to: Oil Filter Element (303-01C, Removal and Installation).
NOTE: Ensure the oil filter element is not contaminated during this procedure
3. Install the oil filter element into special tool (Oil filter adapter number 303-1451)
4. Install the special tool (Oil filter adapter number 303-1451) to the engine. Torque: 25 Nm
5. Install the special tool (Oil pressure testing gauge, 303-871) and tighten the union
6. Connect the battery ground cable
7. Refer to owner hand book, check and top-up the engine oil if required
8. Start and run the engine
9. Note the oil pressure readings with the engine running at idle and 3500 RPM
10. Turn off the engine
11. Disconnect the battery ground cable
12. Remove the special tools

1. Clean the components
13. Install the engine oil filter element

REFER to: Oil Filter Element (303-01C, Removal and Installation).
NOTE: Ensure the oil filter element is not contaminated during this procedure
14. Connect the battery ground cable
15. Refer to owner hand book, check and top-up the engine oil if required
Engine System - General Information - Bearing Inspection
General Procedures
1. Inspect bearings for the following defects.

1. Cratering - fatigue failure
2. Spot polishing - incorrect seating.
3. Imbedded dirt engine oil.
4. Scratching - dirty engine oil.
5. Base exposed - poor lubrication.
6. Both edges worn - journal damaged.
7. One edge worn - journal tapered or bearing not
seated.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Bearing Journal
Diameter
General Procedures
1. Determine the diameter of the camshaft journals.

Using a micrometer measure the diameter at
90 degrees intervals to determine if the
journals are out-of-round.
Measure at two different points on the journal
to determine if there is any tapering.
If the measurements are out of the specified
range, install a new camshaft.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft End Play
General Procedures
1. NOTE: Make sure that the camshaft is to

specification.
Using the special tool, measure the end play.

Slide the camshaft in both directions. Read and
note the maximum and minimum values on
the dial indicator gauge.
1. End play = maximum value minus
minimum value.
If the measurement is out of specification,

install new components.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Lobe Lift
General Procedures
1. Measure the diameter (1) and diameter (2) with a vernier

caliper. The difference in measurements is the lobe lift.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Surface Inspection
General Procedures
1. Inspect camshaft lobes for pitting or damage in the active

area. Minor pitting is acceptable outside the active area.
Engine System - General Information - Connecting Rod Cleaning
General Procedures
1. CAUTION: Do not use a caustic cleaning solution or

damage to connecting rods may occur.
Mark and separate the parts and clean with solvent. Clean the
oil passages.
Engine System - General Information - Connecting Rod Large End Bore
General Procedures
1. Measure the bearing bore in two directions. The difference is

the connecting rod bore out-of-round. Verify the out-of-round is
within specification.
2. Measure the bearing bore diameter in two directions. Verify

the bearing bore is within specification.
Engine System - General Information - Crankshaft End Play
General Procedures
1. Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Brackets,

measure the end play.
Measure the end play by lifting the crankshaft
using a lever.
If the value is out of the specification, install
new thrust half rings to take up the end float
and repeat the measurement.
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Bore Out-of-Round
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The main bearing caps or lower crankcase

must be in place and tightened to the specified torque;
however, the bearing shells should not be installed.
Measure the cylinder bore with an internal micrometer.

Carry out the measurements in different directions
and at different heights to determine if there is any
out-of-roundness or tapering.
If the measurement is out of the specified range,
hone out the cylinder block or install a new block.
Engine System - General Information - Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and
Inspection
General Procedures
1. Inspect the cylinder head joining flanges of the exhaust

manifold for evidence of exhaust gas leaks.
2. Inspect the exhaust manifold for cracks, damaged gasket

surfaces, or other damage that would make it unfit for further
use.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Inspection
General Procedures
1. CAUTION: Do not use any aggressive cleaning fluid

or a wire brush to clean the piston.
Carry out a visual inspection.

Clean the piston skirt, pin bush, ring grooves and
crown and check for wear or cracks.
If there are signs of wear on the piston skirt,
check whether the connecting rod is twisted or
bent.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Pin Diameter
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The piston and piston pin are a matched

pair. Do not mix up the components.
Measure the piston pin diameter.

Measure the diameter in two directions.
If the values are not to specification, install a
new piston and a new piston pin.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Pin to Bore Diameter
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The piston and piston pin form a matched pair. Do

not mix up the components.
Measure the diameter of the piston pin bore.

Measure the diameter in two directions.
If the values are not to specification, install both a new
piston and a new piston pin.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Ring End Gap
General Procedures
1. CAUTION: Do not mix up the piston rings. Install

the piston rings in the same position and location.
Using the Feeler Gauge, measure the piston ring gap.

The values given in the specification refer to a
gauge ring used during production.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Ring-to-Groove Clearance
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The piston ring must protrude from the

piston groove. To determine the piston ring clearance,
insert the Feeler Gauge right to the back of the
groove, behind the wear ridge.
Using the Feeler Gauge, measure the piston ring

clearance.
Engine System - General Information - Valve Spring Free Length
General Procedures
1. Using a vernier gauge, measure the free length of each

valve spring. Verify the length is within specification.
Engine System - General Information - Valve Stem Diameter
General Procedures
1. Using a micrometer measure the diameter of the valve

stems.
If the measurements are not to specification,
install a new valve.
Engine System - General Information - Leakage Test Using Smoke Test
Equipment
General Procedures
CAUTION: The compressed air line supply pressure must be between 3.5 and 12 bar (50 and 175 psi) for the
smoke test equipment to function correctly. Do not exceed this pressure. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in damage to the smoke test equipment.
NOTES:
The vehicle battery must be in good condition and fully charged before carrying out this procedure.
On vehicles with 3.0L TDV6, it will be necessary to insert smoke at both air cleaner outlet pipes independently
if the right hand turbocharger and associated hoses are to be tested.
In some cases it may be necessary to remove undertrays, trim or engine covers to obtain access to all
potential leak locations.
For further information regarding operation of the test equipment refer to the manufacturers operators manual
supplied with the kit.
1. WARNING: Use an additional support to

prevent the hood from falling if the smoke test
equipment is secured to the hood. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in personal injury.
Install the smoke test equipment to a suitable

location under the hood.
2. Connect a suitable compressed air line to the smoke test

equipment.
3. Connect the smoke test equipment positive power cable to the

battery positive terminal.
4. WARNING: Do not connect the smoke test equipment

negative cable to the battery negative terminal.
Connect the smoke test equipment negative cable to a suitable

body ground point.
5. NOTE: A flashing green light indicates low

battery voltage. In this case, place the battery on
charge and make sure that the battery is fully
charged before using the smoke test equipment.
Observe the power indicator lamp on the smoke

test equipment. Make sure that a continuous green
light is displayed.
6. NOTES:
In some cases it may be necessary to

remove the air cleaner(s) to allow access to the air
cleaner outlet pipes.
In some cases it will be necessary to cap one

of the air cleaner outlet pipes. Use the blanking
caps supplied in the kit to cap the open orifice.
Disconnect the air cleaner outlet pipe(s).
7. NOTE: Make sure the smoke test equipment

adapter is a good fit to the air cleaner outlet pipe.
This must be an air tight seal.
Connect the smoke test equipment supply hose to

the air cleaner outlet pipe.
1. Install the appropriate adapter to the air
cleaner outlet pipe.
2. Connect the smoke test equipment supply
hose to the adapter link hose.
8. NOTES:
The flow control valve must be in the fully
open position.
Smoke is produced for 5 minutes. The smoke

test equipment will automatically switch off after
this period of time.
Switch the smoke test equipment on.
9. Remove the oil filler cap, and observe until a constant flow of
smoke is visible leaving the oil filler orifice. Install the oil filler
cap.
10. NOTE: The longer smoke is allowed to exit from a leak,

the more fluorescent dye will be deposited at a leak location.
Using the torch supplied in the kit set to white light, look for
escaping smoke. Alternatively, use the ultraviolet light to look
for fluorescent dye deposits at the source of a leak.
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Head Gasket
Selection TDV6 3.0L Diesel
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-979
Measuring Bridge, Piston Protusion
Check
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the surface is clean

Zero the gauge on the cylinder block machined

face.
Special Tool(s): 303-979
2. CAUTION: Make sure that the surface is clean

NOTE: Note the dial gauge readings.
Take 2 measurements on each piston crown.
3. Use the average piston protrusion measurement (taken from all

piston measurements), to select the correct thickness cylinder
head gasket.
Refer to: Specifications (303-01A, Specifications).
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Head Distortion
General Procedures
Activation
1. Using a suitable metallic straight edge and feeler gauge, measure
the cylinder head face in the areas illustrated. Note the
maximum value.
2. CAUTION: Machine the minimum thickness of material

from the cylinder head to meet specification, then increase the
thickness of the cylinder head gasket by one size.
NOTES:
Prior to having the cylinder head being machined, prior

approval is required by Jaguar or Land Rover engineering.
If the cylinder head requires machining, this must be

carried out by a local engineering company.
If the cylinder head exceeds the maximum value (0.2mm), the

cylinder head must be machined.
This section contains no data
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Engine Data
Engine Maximum Engine Maximum Engine Power Compression
Engine Description Capacity Torque (EEC) (SAE) (EEC) (SAE) Ratio Bore Stroke
60° "Vee" • 6 Cylinder 2993 ccm 600 Nm at 2000 RPM 180 kW at 4000 RPM 16.1:1 ± 0.5 84 90
• 24 Valves
Engine Firing Order
Firing Order
1:4:2:5:3:6
Glow Plug
Specification
9X2Q-6M090-AC
Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
Description Specification
Engine oil (EUR) 5W/30 – WSS–M2C934–B
Engine oil (ROW) 5W/30 – WSS–M2C913–B or C
Sealant WSE–M4G323–A5
Core plug and stub pipe retainer WSK-M2G349-A7
Jaguar premium cooling system fluid WSS-M97B44-D
Capacities
Description Liters
Engine oil initial fill 6.75
Engine oil service fill with oil filter change 5.9
Cylinder Head and Valve Train
Item Specification
Valve guide inner diameter (mm) 5.980 ± 0.010
Intake valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line) 94.99mm +/- 0.15
Exhaust valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line) 94.45mm +/-0.15
Valve stem to guide clearance intake diametrical (mm) 0.027 - 0.063
Valve stem to guide clearance exhaust diametrical (mm) 0.037 - 0.073
Valve head diameter intake (mm) 27.8mm +/-0.1
Valve head diameter exhaust (mm) 25.2mm +/-0.1
Intake valve face angle (degrees) 44 deg 52 min +/-7min30sec
Exhaust valve face angle (degrees) 44 deg 52 min +/-7min30sec
Valve stem diameter intake (mm) 5.935±0.008
Valve stem diameter exhaust (mm) 5.925±0.008
Valve spring free length (mm) - inlet 38.9mm
Valve spring free length (mm) - exhaust 38.9mm
Valve spring installed height (mm) - inlet 31.22mm
Valve spring installed height (mm) - exhaust 31.22mm
Camshaft lobe max lift intake (mm) 3.75187mm
Camshaft lobe max lift exhaust (mm) 3.80999mm
Camshaft journal to cylinder head bearing surface clearance diametrical (mm) 0.040-0.090
Camshaft journal diameter - all positions 26.015±0.015
Bearing diameter - all positions 25.950±0.010
Camshaft journal maximum run out limit (mm) 0.030mm
Camshaft journal maximum out of round (mm) - all journals 0.010mm
Crankshaft end play 0.21 - 0.43 mm
Cylinder Head Gasket
Identification Gasket Thickness (mm) Piston Protrusion (mm)
2 1.17 0.552 - 0.603
3 1.22 0.604 - 0.655
4 1.27 0.656 - 0.707
5 1.32 0.708 - 0.760
Torque Specification
NOTE: A = refer to procedure for correct torque sequence
lb-
Description Nm lb-ft in
Piston cooling nozzle 10 7 -
Engine coolant drain plug 18 13 -
Cylinder head retaining bolts A - -
Oil filter housing retaining bolts 10 7 -
Fuel injection pump cradle retaining bolts 23 17 -
Fuel injection pump to cradle retaining bolts 23 17 -
Fuel injection pump bracket to cradle 10 7 -
retaining bolts
Fuel injection pump to bracket retaining 10 7 -
bolts
Oil pump retaining bolts 10 7 -
Crankshaft rear oil seal housing retaining 10 7 -
bolts
Oil pan retaining bolts M6 10 7 -
Oil pan retaining bolts M8 23 17 -
Oil pump pick up pipe retaining bolts 10 7 -
Engine oil level sensor retaining nuts 10 7 -
Crankshaft timing belt pulley retaining bolt Stage 1 - 150 Stage 2 - 300 -Stage 1 - 111 Stage 2 - 221 -
Stage 3 - 90 degrees Stage 3 - 90 degrees
Crankshaft position sensor (CKP) retaining 5 - 44
bolt
Timing chain tensioner retaining bolts 10 7 -
Camshaft bearing cap retaining bolts A - -
Timing belt idler pulley retaining bolt 45 33 -
Fuel injection pump belt rear cover retaining 10 7 -
bolts
Fuel injection pump sprocket retaining nut 50 37 -
Coolant outlet pipe retaining bolts 10 7 -
Coolant pump retaining bolts 10 7 -
Timing belt tensioner retaining bolt 26 19 -
Engine lifting eye bolts 23 17 -
Camshaft rear end accessory drive (READ) Stage 1 - 80 Stage 2 - 80 Stage 1 - 59 Stage 2 - 80 -
pulley hub retaining bolt degrees degrees
Camshaft front timing pulley hub retaining 80 + 80° 59 + 80 ° -
bolt
Camshaft READ pulley retaining bolt 23 17 -
Camshaft front timing pulley retaining bolt 23 17 -
Fuel injection pump timing belt tensioner 23 17 -
bolt
Camshaft position sensor (CMP) retaining 10 7 -
bolt
Intake manifold / camshaft cover retaining 10 7 -
bolts
Brake vacuum pump retaining bolts 23 17 -
Engine oil pressure (EOP) switch 14 10 -
Glow plug 11 8 -
Fuel rail retaining bolts 23 17 -
Fuel rail bracket retaining bolts 23 17 -
Fuel injector retaining bolts A - -
High pressure fuel line union nuts A - -
High pressure fuel line bracket retaining 9 - 80
bolts
Turbocharger assembly to exhaust manifold 24 18 -
retaining nuts
Exhaust manifold to cylinder head retaining A - -
nuts
Exhaust manifold heatshield retaining bolts 11 8 -
Turbocharger heatshield retaining bolts 11 8 -
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve 10 7 -
retaining bolts M6
Accessory drive belt idler pulley bracket 83 61 -
retaining bolts
Timing belt covers retaining bolts 10 7 -
Engine mount bracket to engine retaining 115 85 -
bolts
Exhaust cross over pipe retaining nuts 24 18 -
Engine coolant inlet pipe retaining bolts 10 7 -
Coolant pump pulley retaining bolts 25 18 -
Crankshaft pulley/vibration damper retaining 25 18 -
bolts
Throttle body retaining threaded stud 10 7 -
Wiring harness retaining nuts 10 7 -
Vacuum hose assembly retaining bolts 10 7 -
Flexplate retaining bolts A - -
Accessory drive component bracket retaining 23 17 -
bolts
Power steering pump retaining bolts 23 17 -
Generator retaining bolts 47 35 -
Accessory drive belt tensioner retaining bolt 47 35 -
Accessory drive belt idler pulley retaining 47 35 -
bolt
Air conditioning compressor bracket 23 17 -
retaining bolts
Air conditioning compressor retaining bolts 23 17 -
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine - Component Location
External View
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine - Overview
OVERVIEW
The 3.0 liter diesel engine is a V6 configuration unit with 2 banks of 3 cylinders arranged at 60 degrees to each
other. There are 4 valves per cylinder, which are operated by 2 overhead camshafts per cylinder bank.
The cylinder block is cast in compacted graphite iron, which uses less material to produce compared to a
conventional cast iron block. This provides reduced weight and length with superior structural capabilities.
The cylinder heads are cast aluminum with a moulded plastic camshaft cover with an integral air intake. The single-
piece structural oil pan is high pressure die cast from aluminum. The exhaust manifolds are cast from an iron alloy.
A moulded plastic acoustic cover is fitted over the upper engine to absorb engine-generated noise.
A low compression ratio of 16:1 contributes to improved emissions quality, quieter combustion and compatibility with
the engine’s unique forced induction system. For additional information refer to Intake Air distribution and Filtering.
The low compression ratio also means less heat build-up in the piston bowl and more efficient fuel burn, resulting in
the production of lower levels of pollutants. It also assists with cold starting allowing a faster cranking speed.
The engine is available in two power output forms. The power difference is achieved by changes to the engine
calibration within the ECM (engine control module) and other vehicle control modules.
NOTE: It is not possible to re-configure a lower power output engine to the higher output specification.
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
OPERATION
Operation of the engine is controlled by the ECM (engine control module).

Refer to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and
Operation).
ENGINE STRUCTURE
Item Description
1 Cylinder heads
2 Cylinder block
3 Oil pan
CYLINDER BLOCK COMPONENTS
The cylinder block is a single cast construction with a hollow beam structure, cast from compact graphite iron. This
type of construction provides outstanding strength and durability and uses less material than a conventional cast iron
block, therefore reducing engine weight and length.
The use of compact graphite iron allows the cross sectional areas of the casting to be reduced, compared with a
conventional gray cast iron block. This ensures reduced engine weight and length, with higher structural capabilities.
To maintain the stiffness of the bottom end of the cylinder block and crankshaft system, the cylinder block has a
deep skirt and bearing cap design. Each of the main bearing caps is double bolted at each side of the crankshaft
bearing and cross bolted back to the cylinder block.
Lubrication oil is distributed through the cylinder block, via a main oil gallery and channels bored in the block, to all
critical moving parts. These channels divert oil to the main and connecting rod bearings via holes machined into the
crankshaft.
A tapping at the rear of the cylinder block connects a pipe to the turbochargers by means of banjo connections. Oil is
supplied, under pressure via this tapping, from the oil pump to provide lubrication for the bearings of the
turbochargers.
Cylinder cooling is achieved by coolant circulating through chambers in the cylinder block casting.
Two hollow metal dowels are used to locate the cylinder heads to the cylinder block, 1 on each side at the rear of the
unit.
A port is included at the RH (right-hand) and LH (left-hand) side of the cylinder block, below each of the
turbochargers, to connect the turbochargers oil return pipe to the oil pan.
Two coolant drain plugs are installed in the cylinder block; one is fitted in the rear RH side, and the other is fitted in
the middle of the cylinder block on the LH side.
Engine Data
NOTE: Arrow indicates front of engine

Item Description
1 Engine data locations
Engine data is marked at 2 locations at the back of the cylinder block. Component diameters are represented by
alphabetical and numerical codes; keys to the codes are in the removal and installation section of this manual.
Piston Cooling Jets

Item Description
1 Bolt
2 Cooling jet
Jets located in the cylinder block provide piston and piston pin lubrication and cooling. These jets spray oil on to the
inside of the piston, the oil then flows through 2 internal wave shaped channels to help cool each piston crown.
CRANKSHAFT
Item Description
1 Oil pump drive
2 Main bearing Journal
3 Connecting rod bearing journal
4 Rear drive flange
5 Rear oil seal location
6 Trigger wheel location
The crankshaft is forged steel and fillet rolled with induction hardened journals, which run in 4 bearings with clamped
2 layer bearing shells. The upper and lower shells of bearing number 4 are flanged, which limits the end float of the
crankshaft. The main bearing caps are double bolted and cross bolted to increase the strength and rigidity of the
engine block.
The main bearings are aluminum/tin split plain selective bearings. An oil groove in the top half of each bearing
transfers oil into the crankshaft for lubrication of the connecting rod bearings. The upper and lower shells of bearing
number 4 contain integral thrust washers, which limits the end float of the crankshaft.
Rear Crankshaft Oil Seal
Item Description
1 Housing
2 Seal
3 Crankshaft
4 Rear oil seal retainer
5 Bolt (10 off)
The rear main oil seal and retainer assembly is a one-piece unit and is supplied with its own plastic fitting sleeve.
The seal and retainer have 2 locating dowels, 10 fixing bolts and a rubber seal. In addition, the retainer has a
location for the crankshaft position sensor. For additional information refer to 303-14A Electronic Engine Controls.
A torsional vibration crankshaft damper pulley is bolted to the front of the crankshaft.
Crankshaft Trigger Wheel

Item Description
1 Special Tool
2 Trigger wheel
The crankshaft trigger wheel is located on the rear of the crankshaft. It is pressed onto the crank using a special tool,
which also precisely aligns the trigger wheel for crankshaft position and timing.
The trigger wheel consists of 60 magnets minus 2 for ECM crankshaft position reference and synchronization. The
magnets cannot be seen on the trigger wheel, which therefore can only be positioned using a special tool. For
additional information refer to 303-14A Electronic Engine Controls.
If the trigger is removed for any reason, then a new trigger wheel must be fitted.
OIL PAN COMPONENTS

Item Description
1 Oil scavenge reservoir
2 Oil level and temperature sensor
3 Oil pick-up pipe
4 Oil level and temperature sensor connector
The structural oil pan is of a single piece die cast aluminum construction and is fitted to the lower cylinder block to
stiffen the base structure of the engine, helping to reduce noise, vibration and harshness. The oil pan also
incorporates an oil baffle plate to reduce oil foaming and splash.
The oil pan is secured to the cylinder block with 2 dowels, 2 locator pins for the gasket and 18 retaining bolts; 3
different lengths of bolts are used:
M6 x 20 (6 off)
M8 x 75 (4 off)
M6 x 105 (8 off).
Iron inserts, cast into the main bearing supports of the stiffening frame, minimize main bearing clearance changes
due to heat expansion.
A gasket seals the joint between the oil pan and the cylinder block.
An oil pick-up pipe with integral strainer locates in the oil pan to provide oil to the crankshaft driven oil pump.
An ultrasonic sensor provides an electronic indication when the oil in the oil pan is low or high. This removes the
requirement for the mechanical dipstick. An advantage in comparison with the static 'dipstick' method is that all
marginal influences, for example vehicle being on a slope, lateral and longitudinal acceleration, are compensated for
by averaging.
The values determined can be used to signal that the minimum oil level has been reached or to display the current
oil level if required.
The sensor is mounted inside the oil pan where it sends an ultrasonic pulse vertically upward, it then measures the
time for the pulse to be reflected back from the top surface of the oil.
Warnings will be displayed in the message center if the oil level is not maintained within the safe operating levels
(minimum and maximum). A warning will also be displayed if there is a fault with the oil level monitoring system.
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY

Item Description
1 Connecting rod bolts (2 off)
2 Connecting rod
3 Piston
4 Piston pin
5 Circlips
6 Connecting rod identification
The connecting rods are manufactured from sinter-forged steel and have fracture-split bearing caps. The bearing caps
are produced by fracturing the opposing sides of the connecting rod at the bearing horizontal centre-line. As well as
being easier to manufacture, when reassembled the fractured surfaces interlock to form a strong seamless joint. The
cylinder position is etched on adjoining sides of the joint to identify matching connecting rods and bearing caps. The
selective connecting rod bearings are aluminum/tin split plain bearings. The connecting rod bearing is 'sputter
coated', which is a manufacturing process that layers the bearing material to produce a higher load capacity for
improved durability.
NOTE: The connecting rods are not selective.
Piston and Connecting Rod Orientation

Item Description
1 Piston and connecting rod assembly, cylinders 4-6
2 Piston and connecting rod assembly, cylinders 1-3
3 Bolts (12 off)
4 Connecting rod bearing cap (6 off)
5 Connecting rod lower bearing (6 off)
When installing a connecting rod, ensure the back of the connecting rod faces the center of the 'vee'.
The pistons are made from aluminum alloy and are fitted with 3 rings. The piston crown incorporates a pronounced
bowl; this forms the combustion chamber, which promotes swirl and turbulence necessary for good combustion and
improved emissions. In addition, the piston skirt has a molybdenum-coated surface, which counteracts scoring of the
cylinder bore and piston.
The piston also incorporates a double wave gallery within the piston crown to enhance piston cooling. The pistons are
supplied oil by means of spray jets located in the cylinder block oil gallery. These jets ensure optimum piston cooling
to counteract the high temperatures generated by the combustion process.
Each piston is installed on a piston pin located in a aluminum/tin bushing in the connecting rod.
Piston Ring Orientation

Item Description
1 Ring gap oil control
2 Ring gap upper compression
3 Spiral joint oil control
4 Ring gap lower compression
5 Upper compression ring
6 Lower compression ring
7 Oil control ring
When installing pistons ensure the arrows on the piston crowns all point to the front of the engine. All pistons are
common single grade/single part number for all engines.
The piston top ring is a taper type and is fitted with the taper to the top of the piston. All rings marked 'top' are
assembled with 'top' uppermost. All rings must be spaced evenly around the piston before installing. The
circumference gap of the double bevelled oil control ring must be opposite the spiral control joint.
CAMSHAFT TIMING COMPONENTS

Item Description
1 Rear engine accessory drive rear cover
2 Rear engine accessory drive tensioner
3 Bolt
4 Fuel pump pulley
5 Nut
6 Rear engine accessory drive camshaft pulley
7 Rear engine accessory drive belt
8 Bolt
9 Rear engine accessory drive front cover
10 RH chain tensioner
11 RH timing chain
12 RH intake camshaft
13 RH exhaust camshaft
14 LH intake camshaft
15 LH exhaust camshaft
16 LH chain tensioner
17 LH timing chain
18 Timing belt
19 Front cover bridge
20 Primary drive cover
21 Bolt
22 Tensioner
23 Bolt
24 Idler
25 Camshaft hub
26 LH camshaft timing pulley
27 Bolt (3 off)
28 Bolt
29 Idler
30 Bolt
31 Bolt (3 off)
32 Bolt
33 RH camshaft timing pulley
34 Camshaft hub
Primary drive is provided by a single toothed belt from the crankshaft to the exhaust camshaft gears of each cylinder
bank via 2 idler pulleys and a tensioner.
Timing belt adjustment is carried out by an eccentric type tensioner mounted on the RH front face of the cylinder
block.
A primary drive cover is made up from 3 separate plastic mouldings. The covers are secured to the front of the
cylinder block and cylinder heads with 15 bolts and 1 stud and nut. The 2 upper covers are partially sealed with a
rubber seal.
Secondary Drive
Item Description
1 Timing chain
2 Bolts
3 Intake camshaft
4 Exhaust camshaft
5 Tensioner firing pin
Secondary drive is provided by 2 short crossover chains, which transfer drive from the exhaust camshaft gears to the
intake camshaft gears. The crossover drives are located at the rear of the RH cylinder bank and the front of the LH
cylinder bank. This allows for a much shorter and simpler run for the main camshaft drive belt at the front of the
engine.
Each crossover chain is tensioned via an automatic chain tensioner, which acts directly on the chains via a guide rail.
The tensioners are located between the exhaust and intake camshafts at the front or rear of the cylinder head,
depending on the cylinder bank.
The tensioner firing pin holds the automatic chain tensioner in a compressed state to aid installation.
CYLINDER HEAD COMPONENTS
NOTE: LH cylinder head shown; RH cylinder head similar.
Item Description
1 Hydraulic lash adjusters (12 off)
2 Valve spring retainers (12 off)
3 Roller rockers (12 off)
4 Valve stem seals (12 off)
5 Valve guides (12 off)
6 Exhaust valves (6 off)
7 Intake valve seats (6 off)
8 Exhaust valve seats (6 off)
9 Intake valves (6 off)
10 Valve springs (12 off)
11 Bolt
12 Bracket
13 Intake manifold
14 Lifting eye
15 Washer
16 Bolt
17 Bolt
18 Bolt
19 Seal
20 Cap
21 Intake manifold cover assembly
22 Washer
23 Bolt
24 Lifting eye
25 Seal
26 Camshaft bearing caps (7 off)
27 Bolts (18 off)
28 Gasket
29 Camshaft bearing cap and seal housing
30 Camshaft bearing cap and seal housing
31 Intake camshaft
32 Exhaust camshaft
33 Cylinder head
34 Cylinder head bolts (8 off)
35 Exhaust manifold studs (6 off)
36 Cylinder head gasket
37 Core plug
38 Plug
39 Seal
40 Oil filler tube
41 Oil filler cap
42 Intake manifold
43 Injectors (3 off)
44 Bolt (2 off)
45 Bolt
46 Tandem pump
47 Water outlet assembly
48 Bolt (4 off)
Cylinder Heads

Item Description
1 Studs
2 Bolts
3 Blanking plug
The aluminum gravity die cast cylinder heads are unique to each cylinder bank. Eight deep-seated bolts help reduce
distortion and secure each cylinder head to the cylinder block. The cylinder head bolts are located beneath the
camshafts, 4 under the intake camshaft and 4 under the exhaust camshaft. Two hollow dowels align each cylinder
head with the cylinder block.
NOTE: The cylinder heads cannot be reworked.
The cylinder head gasket is a 3-layer, laminated steel type and is available in 5 different thicknesses. The choice of
gasket thickness is dependent on the maximum piston protrusion. Gasket thickness is identified by serrations cut into
the front end of the gasket.
Refer to: Specifications (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Specifications).
The cylinder head has 4 ports machined at each cylinder location, 2 exhaust ports and 2 intake ports. One of the
intake ports is helical and functions as a swirl port, the other is arranged laterally as a tangential port and functions
as a charge port.
The camshafts are of a hollow steel tube construction, with pressed on sintered lobes. Each camshaft is retained by
aluminum alloy caps, 5 for the exhaust camshafts and 4 for the intake camshafts. Location letters, A to I for the
intake camshaft and R to Z for the exhaust camshaft, are marked on the outer faces of the caps for each cylinder
head.
The LH cylinder bank exhaust camshaft is machined to accept a rear camshaft gear. The rear camshaft gear provides
drive for the high-pressure fuel pump. For additional information refer to 303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls.
The exhaust camshaft gear of the LH cylinder head also incorporates a trigger wheel, which is used in conjunction
with the camshaft sensor to measure engine position. For additional information refer to 303-14A Electronic Engine
Controls.
The RH cylinder head exhaust camshaft is machined at the rear end to provide a drive connection for the tandem
pump.
The fuel injection nozzles are centrally mounted above each cylinder. For additional information refer to 303-04A Fuel
Charging and Controls.
The glow plugs are arranged centrally on the intake side of the cylinder heads, between the 2 intake ports of each
cylinder. For additional information refer to 303-07D Glow Plug System.
The engine lifting eyes are bolted to the cylinder head, 1 at the front and 2 at the rear, 1 per cylinder head.
Camshaft Covers
Item Description
1 Stud bolt M6 x 40 (6 off)
2 Bolt M6 x 40 (7 off)
3 Oil filler cap
4 RH camshaft cover assembly
The camshaft covers are manufactured from vinyl ester composite. The RH bank camshaft cover incorporates an
outlet for the full load engine breather and the engine oil filler cap. The LH bank camshaft cover incorporates an
outlet for the part load engine breather. For additional information refer to 303-08A engine Emission Control.
Silicon rubber in-groove gaskets seal the joints between the camshaft covers and the cylinder heads. Together with
spacers and seals on the camshaft cover fasteners, they also isolate the covers from direct contact with the cylinder
heads, to reduce noise.
Intake and Exhaust Valves
Item Description
1 Valve spring collet (24 off, 12 per cylinder head)
2 Valve spring retainer (24 off, 12 per cylinder head)
3 Valve spring (24 off, 12 per cylinder head)
4 Valve stem seal (24 off, 12 per cylinder head)
5 Intake valve (12 off, 6 per cylinder head)
6 Exhaust valve (12 off, 6 per cylinder head)
Each cylinder head incorporates 2 overhead camshafts operating 4 valves per cylinder via steel roller rockers with
hydraulic lash adjusters.
Roller Rockers with Hydraulic Lash Adjusters

Item Description
1 Roller rocker (24 off, 12 per cylinder head)
2 Hydraulic lash adjuster (24 off, 12 per cylinder head)
The lightweight valve gear provides good economy and noise levels. Valve head diameters are 31 mm (1.220 in) for
the exhaust and 35 mm (1.378 in) for the intake. All valves have 5 mm (0.197 in) diameter stems supported in
sintered metal seats and guide inserts. Collets, valve collars and spring seats locate single valve springs on both
intake and exhaust valves. Valve stem seals are integrated into the spring seats.
Tandem Pump

Item Description
1 Tandem pump connections
2 Bolt (2 off)
3 Nut
4 Bracket (emission hose)
5 Stud
The tandem pump is a combined vacuum and oil scavenge pump. The scavenge pump is g-rotor type pump that
drains oil from the secondary turbocharger to accommodate vehicle tilt. The pump is located at the rear of the RH
side cylinder head and is driven from the exhaust camshaft.
Exhaust Manifolds
NOTE: LH exhaust manifold shown; RH exhaust manifold similar.
Item Description
1 Cylinder head
2 Connecting pipe
3 Nut (2 off)
4 Nut (3 off)
5 Exhaust manifold
6 Bolt
7 Gasket
8 Turbocharger (primary turbocharger shown)
9 Manifold rear heat shield
10 Bolt
11 Bolt (2 off)
12 Manifold heat shield
The exhaust manifolds are cast from an iron alloy with a high nickel content giving excellent heat and corrosion
resistance properties. They are sealed to the cylinder head by means of a steel gasket. Sacrificial plastic sleeves are
used to align the manifolds. These sleeves must be changed when refitting the manifolds. Spacers on the securing
bolts allow the manifolds to expand and retract with changes of temperature while maintaining the clamping loads.
Each manifold has a connection for the EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) transfer pipe.
The engine is fitted with twin variable geometry turbochargers, which fix to the exhaust manifolds by a 3-hole flange
with a steel gasket.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Item Description
1 Inlet camshaft
2 Exhaust camshaft
3 Turbocharger oil supply
4 Primary turbocharger
5 Crankshaft and connecting rods
6 Oil level and temperature sensor
7 Oil pan
8 Oil pump
9 Oil cooler and filter assembly
10 Piston cooling jets
11 Secondary turbocharger
Oil is drawn from the oil pan and pressurized by the oil pump. The output from the oil pump is then filtered and
distributed through internal oil passageways.
All moving parts are lubricated by pressure or splash oil. Pressurized oil is also provided for operation of the hydraulic
adjusters and the timing gear chain tensioners.
Oil Cooler and Filter Assembly
Item Description
1 Filter housing
2 'O' ring seal
3 Paper element
4 Retaining bolt (6 off)
5 Coolant outlet connection
6 Cooler assembly
The engine is lubricated by a force-feed oil circulation system with a full flow oil filter. The oil cooler forms a unit with
the oil filter, which is mounted centrally in the middle of the cylinder block between the 2 banks of cylinders. The
engine oil is cooled using the engine cooling system. This eliminates the need for an additional engine oil cooler
remotely mounted.
Oil returns to the oil pan under gravity. Large drain holes through the cylinder heads and cylinder block ensure the
quick return of the oil, reducing the volume of oil required and enabling an accurate check of the contents soon after
the engine stops.
System replenishment is through the oil filler cap on the RH camshaft cover.
The moulded composite oil pick-up is immersed in the oil reservoir to provide a supply to the oil pump during all
normal vehicle attitudes. A mesh screen in the inlet prevents debris from entering the oil system.
NOTE: Fuel cooling is facilitated by a blast air fuel cooler in the return line to the fuel tank.
Oil Pump
Item Description
1 Oil pump
2 Bolt (10 off)
The oil pump is a gear type pump and is bolted and dowelled to the front of the cylinder block. It is sealed by means
of a rubber gasket, which is recessed into the oil pump housing. The pump inlet and outlet ports align with oil
passages in the stiffening frame.
The pumping element is an eccentric rotor, which is directly driven by flats on the crankshaft. An integral pressure
relief valve regulates pump outlet pressure at 4.5 bar (65.25 lb/in2).
The front crankshaft oil seal is housed in the oil pump casing and is fitted such that its front face is 1 mm (0.04 in)
under flush with the machined front face of the oil pump.
NOTE: The seal is not to be pushed all the way into the bore as this will block the seal drains.
Due to the wide range of inclines Land Rover vehicles operate across, the geometry of the oil pan has been
configured to guarantee oil pick-up across all operating angles. An oil-scavenge system has been developed to
guarantee excellent oil flow through the turbochargers on severe side-slopes. Whilst the 60-degree cylinder bank
angle of a V6 engine allows the turbochargers to be packaged relatively higher in the vehicle, to obtain the best
configuration for the V6 engine, the turbochargers must be sited much lower. At extreme angles, there is a risk they
may be below the oil level on the oil pan, restricting oil return flow.
To overcome this, the engine uses:
the oil pump to supply oil to the turbocharger bearings from the main oil reservoir (oil pan)
a secondary reservoir to receive oil from the turbocharger bearings
a tandem pump to urge oil to flow from the turbocharger bearings into the secondary reservoir and to pump
the oil back from the secondary reservoir to the primary reservoir (oil pan)

Item Description
1 Turbocharger oil feed pipe
2 Tandem pump
3 Oil evacuation tube
4 Turbocharger oil return pipe
5 Oil scavenge pipe
6 Oil pan
An additional feature of this system is that the tandem pump used to pump oil back from the secondary reservoir
can also be used as a source of vacuum for a vacuum operated system.
A semi-synthetic, low SAPS (sulphated ash, phosphorus and sulphur) oil is specified, which reduces the ash loading
in the DPF (diesel particulate filter). Ash cannot be burnt off like soot so it remains in the DPF for life. Without the
use of low SAPS oil, the DPF will not be a 'fit for life' component.
This low SAPS oil is also more resistant to temperature-related degradation than conventional mineral oil. It has
lower viscosity at low temperatures and improved lubrication performance at higher temperatures.
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine
Overview
For specific areas of the engine, refer to the general procedures in this section and the relevant section of the
manual.
For testing of excessive smoke from exhaust, please refer to the Pinpoint Tests list below and complete the Test
Results section as required.
the donor vehicle.

Visual Inspection
Engine oil level Fuses
Coolant level Wiring harness
Transmission fluid level Electrical connector(s)
Fuel level Injectors
Coolant leaks Glow plugs
Oil leaks Active engine mounts
Fuel leaks 5 volt sensor supply
Intake air system Sensor(s)
Hose connections Turbocharger actuators
Visibly damaged or worn parts Viscous fan solenoid
Loose or missing nuts or bolts Engine Control Module (ECM)
Fuel contamination/grade/quality
Sensor installation/condition
Viscous fan and solenoid
Active engine mounts, correct installation/damage
Charge air coolers
Turbochargers
General engine condition
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
Symptom Chart

Excessive Oil passing Carry out pinpoint tests GO to Pinpoint Test A.
smoke from through the
exhaust turbocharger
Poor Low/Contaminated Check the fuel level and condition. Draw off approximately 1 liter (2.11
performance fuel pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to make sure there
(off-boost) Restricted intake is no separation of the fuel indicating water or other liquid in the fuel.
air system Check the intake air system for restriction. Check the engine condition,
General engine compressions, etc if there are indications of a mechanical fault. Check for
condition DTCs indicating a module fault
Engine control
module failure
No boost Electrical Check the electrical connections and harnesses. Check the intake air
connections and system for restriction/leakage. Check the turbocharger actuators and
harnesses circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Check the turbochargers for wear.
Electrical Disconnect the turbocharger intake and outlet pipework and turn the
connections and turbochargers by hand. Any roughness indicates a fault. Check any up
harnesses and down movement in the turbocharger shafts. Excessive movement
Restricted intake indicates a fault. If in doubt, compare the suspect unit with a new
air system turbocharger. Check for DTCs indicating an actuator or module fault
Charge air cooler
restricted/leaking
Turbocharger
actuator failure(s)
Turbocharger
failure(s)
Engine control
module failure
No Turbocharger Disconnect the turbocharger intake and outlet pipework and turn the
boost/excessive failure(s) turbochargers by hand. Any roughness indicates a fault. Check any up
noise and down movement in the turbocharger shafts. Excessive movement
indicates a fault. If in doubt, compare the suspect unit with a new
turbocharger
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - TDV6 3.0L Diesel , DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM) (100-00
NOTES:
operation, prior to the installation of a new module/component
read by the manufacturer approved diagnostic system)
may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals
Test Results
During the following pinpoint routine you will be asked to record certain information. The following table identifies
the type of recorded information which will be required by dealer technical support for further advice if required.
Please locally construct a template to record the information as shown in the table below
TDV6 3.0L DIESEL Results

A. Customer complaint A. .....
B. Description of the drive cycle B. .....
C. Description of weather conditions when symptoms observed C. .....
Were the symptoms reproduced? YES

NO
Was the check engine lamp illuminated? YES

NO
Were there engine related warning messages displayed? YES

NO
What were the engine related warning messages displayed? A. .....

B. .....
C. .....
List all stored DTCs A. .....

B. .....
C. .....
Did oil level need topping up, or was there too much oil in Needed topping up
engine? To much oil in engine
Had LTB00358 already been carried out previously? YES

NO
Was the one-way valve (LR028945) already installed? YES

NO
Was the secondary turbocharger part number LR035869 YES

previously installed to the vehicle? NO
Did the smoke test find a leakage? No leakage found

In air induction system
In exhaust system
What was the pressure at the oil filler cap? A. At idle engine cold
- Pressure =
B. At idle engine warm
- Pressure =
C. At idle engine warm, secondary
turbocharger operating
- Pressure =
D. At 3000rpm
- Pressure =
Was there excessive blow-by? YES

What was the cause of the excessive blow-by? NO
Cause of excessive blow-by was .....
How many milliliters of oil were drained from the oil scavenge Oil drained from the oil scavenge tank
tank? was ..........ml
PINPOINT TEST A : TDV6 3.0L DIESEL EXCESSIVE SMOKE FROM EXHAUST

A1: FOLLOW CUSTOMER INFORMATION TO REPRODUCE THE SYMPTOMS
1 Follow customer information. Carry out road test to
reproduce the symptoms
Can customer symptoms be reproduced?
Yes
If smoke is seen determine whether smoke is white,
blue or blackProceed to next step
No
Proceed to next step
A2: ENGINE RELATED MESSAGES OR WARNING LAMPS
1 Check for engine related messages and warning lamps
Are there engine related messages and warning lamps
displayed?
Yes
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
check engine control module for additional DTCs and
refer to relevant DTC index. Rectify these firstProceed
to next step
No
A3: OIL VOLUME
1 Drain the engine oil into a measured container
Record the total oil volume drainedRemove the oil
filterCheck the oil filter element for damageRemove the oil
filler capCheck the oil filler cap for damage. Replace if
requiredCheck that the oil drain back valve is installed
correctly and closes correctly. The oil drain back valve is
situated in the bottom of the oil filter housingInstall new
oil filter elementInstall new oil filter housing sealRefill
engine oil with clean oil to the correct oil level. DO NOT
OVERFILLInstall oil filler capWere there any defects with
the filter cap, filter element or oil drain back valve?
Yes
Rectify defects, then proceed to next step
No
A4: VACUUM CHECK
1 Vacuum check on the compressor shut off valve
Use a Mityvac device to apply a vacuum of at least

750 mmHg (1000 mbar or 15 psi) to the
compressor shut off valve hose line
Observe the compressor shut-off valve arm for
movement. It should move more than 10 mm. If
compressor shut-off valve does not open install a
new compressor shut-off valve
If vacuum decays over 10 seconds (or cannot
generate a vacuum) use a smoke tester to find
leak and repair
Remove Mityvac and return vacuum line to
standard
check datalogger signal compressor shut off valve
Start the engine, allow to idle
Allow engine to idle for a further 4 minutes, the
during this time the datalogger signal compressor
shut off valve value should change, indicating the
secondary turbocharger is operating
Did the compressor shut-off valve operate during the
above tests?
Yes
No
If it was not possible to create the required vacuum
use a smoke tester to find leak and repairIf the
compressor shut-off valve did not operate during the
4 minute idle test use the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system check and install latest relevant
level of software to the engine control moduleProceed
to next step
A5: SMOKE TEST AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
1 Using the manufacturer approved smoke leak
detector, carry out a leak check of the air intake
system
Were air intake system leaks detected?

Yes
Refer to the workshop manual and rectify any leaks
detected in the air intake systemThoroughly clean air
induction system, remove intercooler, compressor shut
off valve and clean & remove all oil from exhaust.
Refer to TSB LTB00358. When the engine is restarted
and run you must be satisfied that any smoke
observed is not due to residual oil left in the system,
(see below)Carry out a 30 minute road drive. Keep
engine rpm below 1200 rpm and avoid hard
acceleration. After 30 minutes stop the vehicle, switch
off the engine and wait 15 minutes. Restart the engine
drive away and, when safe to do so, accelerate uphill.
During this acceleration it is important that the
secondary turbo is activated. If a co-driver is available
SDD may be used to monitor turbo shut off valve
commanded position to ensure the valve opens.
Otherwise engine speed will need to exceed 2800
rpm. Using manual gear selection may help to achieve
higher engine speed without excessive road speed. Be
aware of the rear view using mirrors. Look for
excessive smoke from the exhaust. Return to the
workshop and with the vehicle in Park raise the engine
rpm to above 3200 rpm and hold it for 2 minutes.
Observe whether or not there is smoke from the
exhaust tail pipesContact dealer technical support for
further advice if smoke still coming from the exhaust
tail pipes
No
A6: INTAKE MANIFOLD BLOW-BY
1 Modify a spare oil filler cap by drilling a 6mm hole in
the center and connecting a Mityvac tool or pressure
gauge
This test needs to be carried out on the vehicle

while the engine is still cold. The vehicle in PARK
with the handbrake applied
Connect the modified oil filler cap to the vehicle
check datalogger signal compressor shut off valve
Start the engine, allow to idle
Record the pressure value from the pressure gauge
- Value should be approx atmospheric
pressure
Allow engine to idle for a further 3 minutes, the
during this time the datalogger signal compressor
shut off valve value should change, indicating the
secondary turbocharger is operating
- Value should be approx atmospheric
pressure
Raise the engine speed to 3000rpm
with engine speed at 3000rpm
- Value should now show a slight vacuum
Switch off the engine
Was there a positive pressure value from the pressure

gauge with engine speed at 3000rpm
Yes
Install the correct oil filler capCheck the engine for
high manifold blow-by, check for low cylinder
compression and restrictions in the breather
systemThoroughly clean air induction system, remove
intercooler, compressor shut off valve and clean &
remove all oil from exhaust. Refer to TSB LTB00358.
When the engine is restarted and run you must be
satisfied that any smoke observed is not due to
residual oil left in the system, (see below)Carry out a
30 minute road drive. Keep engine rpm below 1200
rpm and avoid hard acceleration. After 30 minutes
stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and wait 15
minutes. Restart the engine drive away and, when
safe to do so, accelerate uphill. During this
acceleration it is important that the secondary turbo is
activated. If a co-driver is available SDD may be used
to monitor turbo shut off valve commanded position
to ensure the valve opens. Otherwise engine speed
will need to exceed 2800 rpm. Using manual gear
selection may help to achieve higher engine speed
without excessive road speed. Be aware of the rear
view using mirrors. Look for excessive smoke from the
exhaust. Return to the workshop and with the vehicle
in Park raise the engine rpm to above 3200 rpm and
hold it for 2 minutes. Observe whether or not there is
smoke from the exhaust tail pipesContact dealer
technical support for further advice if smoke still
coming from the exhaust tail pipes
No
A7: OIL SCAVENGE TANK
1 Check the oil scavenge pipe connector is correctly
installed to the oil scavenge pump. Refer to picture,
which shows the scavenge pipe fully disconnected
Was more than 500ml of oil collected from the oil

scavenge tank?
Yes
If the oil scavenge pump has previously been replaced
on this vehicle, check the scavenge pipes are not
blocked or restrictedIf the oil scavenge pump has not
previously been replaced on this vehicle, replace the
oil scavenge pump and check the scavenge pipes are
not blocked or restrictedThoroughly clean air induction
system, remove intercooler, compressor shut off valve
and clean & remove all oil from exhaust. Refer to TSB
LTB00358. When the engine is restarted and run you
must be satisfied that any smoke observed is not due
to residual oil left in the system, (see below)Carry out
a 30 minute road drive. Keep engine rpm below 1200
rpm and avoid hard acceleration. After 30 minutes
stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and wait 15
minutes. Restart the engine drive away and, when
safe to do so, accelerate uphill. During this
acceleration it is important that the secondary turbo is
activated. If a co-driver is available SDD may be used
to monitor turbo shut off valve commanded position
to ensure the valve opens. Otherwise engine speed
will need to exceed 2800 rpm. Using manual gear
selection may help to achieve higher engine speed
without excessive road speed. Be aware of the rear
view using mirrors. Look for excessive smoke from the
exhaust. Return to the workshop and with the vehicle
in Park raise the engine rpm to above 3200 rpm and
hold it for 2 minutes. Observe whether or not there is
smoke from the exhaust tail pipes
No
A8: CHECK THE LATEST LEVEL CALIBRATION FILE IS LOADED TO THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE.
1 Calibration Part Numbers 10MY: AH22-12K532-PTK -
High Power DPF, AH22-12K532-PSH - Low Power DPF,
AH22-12K532-PCJ - High Power no DPF, 12MY:
CH22-12K532-PTD - Hi Flow DPF, CH22-12K532-PSD -
Lo Flow DPF,
Is the latest level calibration file is loaded to the engine
control module?
Yes
No
update the engine control module calibration file to
the latest levelProceed to next step
A9: OIL IN EXHAUST OR CHARGED AIR SYSTEM
1 Check for oil contamination in the exhaust system and
charged air system downstream of the primary
turbocharger
Confirm if a primary turbocharger has recently be

installed
Is there oil contamination in the exhaust system and

charged air system downstream of the primary
turbocharger?
Yes
If a primary turbocharger has previously been
replaced on this vehicle, contact dealer technical
support for further adviceIf a primary turbocharger
has not previously been replaced on this vehicle,
replace the primary turbochargerThoroughly clean air
induction system, remove intercooler, compressor shut
off valve and clean & remove all oil from exhaust.
Refer to TSB LTB00358. When the engine is restarted
and run you must be satisfied that any smoke
observed is not due to residual oil left in the system,
(see below)Carry out a 30 minute road drive. Keep
exhaust tail pipes
No
Allow an overnight drain of the oil from the oil
scavenge tankCarry out a 30 minute road drive. Keep
exhaust tail pipesContact dealer technical support for
further advice if smoke still coming from the exhaust
tail pipes
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Oil Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Draining
WARNING: The spilling of hot engine oil is unavoidable during this procedure, care must be taken to prevent
scalding.
CAUTION: Make sure the engine is warm.
1. Refer to: Oil Filter Element (303-01A, Removal and

Installation).

stands.

Installation).
4. WARNING: Observe due care when draining

engine oil as the oil can be very hot.
CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping oil.
Discard the bolt.
Allow at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to

drain.
Drain the engine oil.
Filling
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the component is clean, free

of foreign material and lubricant.
Make sure that a new bolt is installed.
Torque: 23 Nm

Installation).
4. Refer to: Oil Filter Element (303-01A, Removal and

Installation).
5. Fill the engine with oil.

6. CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle is left for 5 minutes
from filling with oil and that the engine oil level is reading at
least minimum, before starting the engine. To check engine oil
level follow steps 9-12.
Clean any residual engine oil from the oil filler cap area.
7.
8.
Start the engine and allow to run for 10 minutes, stop
the engine.
Check for leaks.
9. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the vehicle is parked on level ground.
Make sure that the selector lever and the gearshift

mechanism are in the park (P) position.
Make sure that the hood is open.
NOTE: Allow 10 minutes from the engine switch off for the
engine oil level to stabilize.
10.
Press the right-hand directional button to
access the instrument cluster menu.
11.
Press the right-hand OK button.
12.
access the Oil Level Display.
13.
Press the right-hand OK button and follow
the instructions.
14.
Press the cruise control cancel button twice
within 2 seconds.
15.
The message center display will revert to
the normal display in the trip computer.
the instructions.
Check that the oil level display shows an oil
level reading.
Take a reading from the level display and, if
necessary, top up with oil as instructed.
16. Turn the ignition off.
17. NOTE: Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil level to stabilize
if there has been additional oil top up.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Scroll through the trip menu to access the
engine oil level display.
22.
within 2 seconds.
correct.

This display is now the live reading of the
engine oil level.
24.
Press and hold the cruise control cancel
button for more than 2 seconds.
25.
The message center display will revert to the normal
display in the trip computer.
27. Turn the ignition on.

correct.

Make sure that the average oil level value
has now been updated.
29. Refer to: Engine Cover - 3.0L V6 - TdV6 (501-05, Removal and
Installation).
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Oil Vacuum Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1484
Vacuum Pump, Oil Drain
303-1484-01
Adapter for 303-1484
Draining
scalding.
NOTES:
Clean the components general area prior to dismantling.
1. Refer to: Oil Filter Element (303-01 Engine - 3.0L V6 - TdV6,

2.
3. CAUTION: Allow 10 minutes from turning the

engine off before starting oil extraction.
4.
Using the oil vacuum pump drain the oil out
through the oil extraction tube.
Special Tool(s): 303-1484, 303-1484-01
5.
Remove the oil vacuum pump.
Filling
1. Refer to: Oil Filter Element (303-01 Engine - 3.0L V6 - TdV6,
2.
3. Fill the engine with oil.

least minimum, before starting the engine. To check engine oil
level follow steps 8-10.
5. CAUTION: Correct installation of the oil filler

cap can be obtained by tightening the cap until an
audible click is heard.
6.
the engine.
Check for leaks.
7. CAUTIONS:

NOTE: Allow 10 minutes from the engine switch off for the
engine oil level to stabilize.
8.
9.
10.
11.
the instructions.
12.
within 2 seconds.
13.
the instructions.
level reading.
Only after having started and run the
engine for 10 minutes, switch off the
engine, then stabilizing for 10 minutes, take
a reading from the oil level display and, if
necessary top up with engine oil.
15. NOTE: Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil level to stabilize
if there has been additional oil top up.
16.
17.
18.
19.
the instructions.
20.

correct.

the instructions.
This display is now the live reading of the
engine oil level.
22.
23. The message center display will revert to the normal display in
the trip computer.
26.
27.
28.
correct.

the instructions.
30. Refer to: Engine Cover - 3.0L V6 - TdV6 (501-05 Interior Trim
and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Camshaft LH
Special Tool(s)
303-1145/2
Remover, Camshaft Rear Pulley Bolt
Removal
1. Refer to: Specifications (414-00, Specifications).
2. Refer to: Rear End Accessory Drive (READ) (303-05, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: Timing Belt (303-01, Removal and Installation).
4. Install the special tool.
6. Using the special tool, remove the rear camshaft pulley retaining bolt.
7. Remove the special tools.
8.
9.
10.
12.
14.
15.
Reposition the secondary timing chain tensioner.
Retain the secondary timing chain tensioner plunger.
16. Remove the camshaft bearing caps evenly.
17.
18. CAUTION: Discard the seals.
19.
20.
21.
Installation
1. Install the secondary timing chain onto the camshafts.

2. Install the secondary timing chain tensioner assembly.
3. CAUTION: Make sure that the dots on the camshafts are aligned at the
12 o'clock position. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the engine.
NOTES:
Lubricate the camshafts and the camshaft bearing caps with oil meeting
Jaguar specification prior to installation.
Use hypoid oil to lubricate the camshafts.
Install the camshafts.
4. NOTE: Install new seals.
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6.
Apply
Loctite
518
sealant
to the
exhaust
camshaft
seal
bearing
caps.
Apply
Loctite
518
sealant,
2 mm
wide, to
the LH
rear and
RH front
camshaft
bearing
caps.
Apply
Loctite
518
sealant,
7 mm
diameter,
to the LH
front and
RH rear
camshaft
bearing
caps.
7. NOTE: Tighten the bolts in the indicated sequence.
Install the camshaft bearing caps in their original positions.

Stage 1: Bolts 1 to 14, 1 Nm.
8. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner retaining pin.

9.
11. Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:80°
13. CAUTION: Only tighten the bolt finger-tight at this stage.

14. Torque: 10 Nm
15. CAUTION: Only tighten the bolt finger-tight at this stage.

18. CAUTION: Make sure the torque wrench setting procedure is followed
correctly. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Calculate the setting for the torque wrench.
19. CAUTION: Make sure the torque wrench setting procedure is followed
correctly. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
vehicle.
Using the special tool, install the camshaft rear pulley retaining bolt.
Special Tool(s): 303-1145/2
Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:80°
22. Refer to: Rear End Accessory Drive (READ) (303-05, Removal and Installation).

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Camshaft RH
Special Tool(s)
303-1124
Holding Tool, Camshaft Front Pulley
Removal
2. Refer to: Brake Vacuum Pump - 3.0L Diesel (206-07, Removal

and Installation).
3. Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01, Removal and Installation).

9.
Reposition the secondary timing chain

tensioner.
Retain the secondary timing chain tensioner
plunger.
11. CAUTION: Evenly and progressively, release

the camshaft bearing caps.
NOTE: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.

15.
16.
Installation
1.
2.
3. CAUTION: Make sure that the dots on the

camshafts are aligned at the 12 o'clock position.
damage to the engine.
NOTE: Use hypoid oil to lubricate the

camshafts.
4. NOTE: Install new seals.

5. Torque: 10 Nm
6.
Apply Loctite 518 sealant to the exhaust camshaft seal
bearing caps.
Apply Loctite 518 sealant, 2 mm wide, to the LH rear and
RH front camshaft bearing caps.
Apply Loctite 518 sealant, 7 mm diameter, to the LH front
and RH rear camshaft bearing caps.
7. NOTE: Tighten the bolts in the indicated
sequence.
Install the camshaft bearing caps in their

original positions.
8.
9.
10. Special Tool(s): 303-1124
11. Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:80°
13. CAUTION: Only tighten the bolt finger-tight at

this stage.
15. Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01, Removal and Installation).
16. Refer to: Brake Vacuum Pump - 3.0L Diesel (206-07, Removal
and Installation).

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Camshaft Front Seal
Special Tool(s)
303-1118
Remover, Camshaft Seal
303-1119
Installer, Camshaft Seal
303-1124
Holding Tool, Camshaft Front Pulley
303-1126
Timing Peg, Camshaft Pulley
Removal
3. CAUTION: Do not use the special tools to lock

the camshafts. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the engine or the special
tools.
4.
6.
8.
9. CAUTION: Make sure the special tool is
correctly seated behind the camshaft seal. Failure
the special tool.
10.
Installation
2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the seal is installed correctly.
Make sure that the mating faces are clean

and free of corrosion and foreign material.
Do not use any lubricant on the camshaft
front seal or the camshaft. Failure to follow this
NOTE: Make sure that the seal is 1mm below

the face of the cylinder head.
4.

6. Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:80°

this stage.

tools.


Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Camshaft Rear Seal
Removal
1. Refer to: Rear End Accessory Drive (READ) (303-05A Accessory

Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
4. Using the special tool, remove the rear camshaft

pulley retaining bolt.
6.
7. CAUTION: Make sure the special tool is

correctly seated behind the camshaft seal. Failure
the special tool.
Install the special tool.
8.
Installation
1. Install with the special tool.
2. CAUTIONS:

Do not use any lubricant on the camshaft

rear seal or the camshaft. Failure to follow this
NOTE: Make sure that the seal is 1mm below

the face of the cylinder head.

this stage.

7. CAUTION: Make sure the torque wrench setting
procedure is followed correctly. Failure to follow this
Calculate the setting for the torque

wrench using the following method:
Stage 1: Multiply the required torque by the
effective length of the torque wrench (1).
Stage 2: Add the effective length of the special
tool (2) to the effective length of the torque
wrench.
Stage 3: Divide the total of stage 1 by the total
of stage 2.
Stage 4: Set the torque wrench to the figure
arrived at in stage 3.
8. CAUTION: Make sure the torque wrench setting procedure

is followed correctly. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in damage to the vehicle.
Using the special tool, install the camshaft rear pulley

retaining bolt.
Stage one: Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb/ft).
Stage two: Tighten a further 80 degrees.
9. Refer to: Rear End Accessory Drive (READ) (303-05A Accessory

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Crankshaft Front Seal
Special Tool(s)
303-1120
Remover, Crankshaft Front Seal
303-1121
Installer, Crankshaft Seal
303-1122
Installer, Crankshaft Front Seal
Removal

stands.
3. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01B, Removal and

Installation).

5. CAUTION: Discard the seal.
Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft front

seal.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Do not use any lubricant on the

crankshaft front seal, special tools or the
crankshaft. Failure to follow this instruction may
NOTE: Make sure that all the component

mating faces are clean.
Install a new crankshaft front seal to the special

tool.
2. Reposition the crankshaft front seal along the

special tool.
3. Install the special tool to the crankshaft.
5. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the seal is seated 1mm under
flush.
Discard the bolt.
Using the special tool, install the crankshaft front

seal.
7. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01B, Removal and

Installation).

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Crankshaft Pulley
Special Tool(s)
303-1117
Timing Peg, Automatic Transmission
303-1123
Locking Tool, Flywheel
303-D121
Puller, General Purpose
Removal

stands.
3. Refer to: Cooling Fan (303-03, Removal and Installation).
4.
5.
6.
7.
Special Tool(s): 303-D121
8. CAUTION: Discard the bolt.

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the pulley washer is correctly

seated before installing the pulley.
Do not lubricate the components.
Torque:
Stage 1:150 Nm
Stage 2:300 Nm
Stage 3:90°
2.
3.

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Crankshaft Rear Seal
Removal

stands.
3. Refer to: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ring (303-14B,

4.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the crankshaft rear oil seal is
correctly located.
Make sure the crankshaft seal mating faces

are clean and dry.
Apply an 8 mm bead of sealant to the cylinder

block in the areas shown.
2.
Lubricate the oil seal.
3. Torque: 10 Nm
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6. Refer to: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ring (303-14B,


Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Cylinder Head
Removal
Refer to: Specifications (414-00 Charging System - General

Information, Specifications).

stands.
3. Refer to: Camshaft LH (303-01 Engine - 3.0L V6 - TdV6,

4. Refer to: Glow Plugs (303-07 Glow Plug System - 3.0L V6 -

TdV6, Removal and Installation).
5. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold (303-01 Engine - 3.0L V6 - TdV6,

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11. CAUTION: Discard the bolts.
NOTE: Discard the gasket.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are clean and
free of foreign material.
Clean and inspect the cylinder head and cylinder block.
2. CAUTIONS:
Only tighten the bolts finger-tight at this

stage.
Make sure that new bolts are installed.
Use care when installing the cylinder head.

Damage to the cylinder block, cylinder head or
cylinder head gasket may result.
The head gasket must be installed over the

cylinder block dowels.
NOTES:
No additional lubrication to the cylinder head

bolts is required.

sequence.
Torque: 80 Nm

sequence.
Torque: 180°
5. .
6. CAUTION: Install the new seals.
Torque: 10 Nm
7. Torque: 10 Nm
8. Torque: 24 Nm
9. Torque: 14 Nm
10. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold (303-01 Engine - 3.0L V6 - TdV6,
11. Refer to: Glow Plugs (303-07 Glow Plug System - 3.0L V6 -
12. Refer to: Camshaft LH (303-01 Engine - 3.0L V6 - TdV6,


Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Mount LH
Removal
1. Refer to: Cooling Fan Shroud (303-03, Removal and

Installation).

stands.
3. Refer to: Catalytic Converter (309-00, Removal and

Installation).
Torque: 140 Nm
5.
6.
7. Torque: 9 Nm
8. Torque: 9 Nm
9. NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH is similar.
Torque: 9 Nm
10. CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are


NOTE: Engine shown removed for clarity.
Torque: 10 Nm
12. CAUTION: Make sure that new bolts are
installed.
Torque: 30 Nm

sealed.
14. CAUTIONS:
Use a wooden block to protect the oil pan when

supporting the engine.
Protect the radiator during this operation.
Using a suitable hydraulic jack, raise and support the engine.
15. Torque:
Bolts 115 Nm
nut 90 Nm
16. Torque:
Stage 1:45 Nm
Stage 2:60°
Installation

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Mount RH
Removal
NOTES:
1. Disconnect both battery cables.
2. Refer to: Exhaust System (309-00, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-

4. Refer to: Generator (414-02, Removal and Installation).

stands.
Torque: 140 Nm
7.
8.
9.
10. Torque: 9 Nm
11. Torque: 9 Nm
12. Torque: 9 Nm
13. NOTE: Engine shown removed for clarity.
Torque: 30 Nm
14.
15. Torque: 10 Nm

Torque: 10 Nm
17.
18. CAUTIONS:
Use a wooden block to protect the oil pan when

Protect the radiator during this operation.
Torque:
Bolts 115 Nm
nut 90 Nm
20. Torque: 45 Nm
21. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust Manifold
Removal
NOTES:

3. Refer to: Turbocharger LH (303-04, Removal and Installation).
4.
5.
6.

8.
9. NOTE: Remove and discard the gasket.
10.
11. CAUTION: Discard the nuts.

12. CAUTION: Discard the studs.
Installation
1. WARNING: Make sure that new nuts are

installed.
CAUTION: Install the nuts finger tight before

final tightening.
NOTE: Install a new gasket.

sequence.
Torque: 28 Nm
3. CAUTION: Install new studs.
Torque: 24 Nm

installed.
Torque: 24 Nm
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6. NOTE: Install new gaskets.
Torque: 10 Nm
7.
Torque: 10 Nm
9.
10.
11. Torque: 10 Nm
12. Refer to: Turbocharger LH (303-04, Removal and Installation).
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust Manifold Crossover Pipe
Removal
CAUTION: Take care when handling the cross-over pipe as damage to the insulating material may occur.

stands.
2. Refer to: Transmission Support Crossmember - TDV6 3.0L

Diesel (502-02 Full Frame and Body Mounting, Removal and
Installation).
3. Refer to: Exhaust System (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6

3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
4. NOTE: The transmission is lowered for

access.
5.
6.
7.
8.

10. CAUTION: Discard the nuts and bolt.
11.

14. NOTE: Discard the gasket.
Installation
1. NOTE: Install new gaskets.

2. NOTE: New exhaust manifold retaining studs
must be fitted if the old studs are removed.
Torque: 13 Nm
3. NOTE: New exhaust manifold retaining studs

must be fitted if the old studs are removed.
Torque: 13 Nm
4.
installed.
CAUTION: Only tighten the nuts finger-tight

at this stage.
6. CAUTIONS:
Only tighten the nuts and bolt finger-tight at

this stage.
Make sure that new nuts and bolt are

installed.
7. CAUTION: Only tighten the bolts finger-tight

at this stage.

at this stage.
Check for correct alignment.

at this stage.
Check for correct alignment.
10. Remove the exhaust cross-over pipe RH support

bracket.
11. Remove the exhaust cross-over pipe LH support

bracket.
12. Torque: 23 Nm

at this stage.

at this stage.
15. Torque: 23 Nm
16. Torque: 23 Nm
17. Torque: 23 Nm
18. Torque: 23 Nm
19. Torque: 23 Nm
20. Torque: 23 Nm
21. Torque: 11 Nm
22.
23. Refer to: Exhaust System (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6

24. Refer to: Transmission Support Crossmember - TDV6 3.0L

Diesel (502-02 Full Frame and Body Mounting, Removal and
Installation).
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Flexplate
Special Tool(s)
303-1123
Locking Tool, Flywheel
Removal

stands.
3. Refer to: Starter Motor (303-06B, Removal and Installation).
4. Refer to: Transmission - 3.0L Diesel (307-01D, Removal).
5.
NOTE: Prevent the flexplate from rotating.

Installation
NOTES:
Make sure that all the component mating faces are clean.
Loosely install all retaining bolts.
Prevent the flexplate from rotating.
2. CAUTION: Tighten the bolts evenly in the

stages shown.
Stage 1: Tighten to 50 Nm.

Stage 2: Tighten to 45 degrees.
Stage 3: Tighten to 45 degrees.
3.
4. Refer to: Transmission - 3.0L Diesel (307-01D, Installation).
5. Refer to: Starter Motor (303-06B, Removal and Installation).

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Oil Cooler
Removal
NOTES:
Some illustrations may show the engine removed for clarity.
2. Refer to: Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03,

3. Refer to: Glow Plugs (303-07B, Removal and Installation).
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Install new o-ring seals
Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of
foreign material.
Torque: 10 Nm
2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the mating faces are clean and

Torque: 10 Nm
3.
4.
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6. Refer to: Glow Plugs (303-07B, Removal and Installation).
7. Refer to: Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03,


Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Oil Filter Element
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that the correct tools are used to remove and install the oil filter element cap.

2.
Rotate the oil filter element housing six
complete turns counter-clockwise.
Allow the engine oil to drain from the oil
filter element housing for two minutes.
Remove the oil filter element housing.
3. NOTE: Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
Installation
1. CAUTION: A new O-ring seal is to be

installed.
NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean

engine oil.
2. Torque: 28 Nm
4. Start and run the engine.
5. Check and top-up the engine oil.

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Oil Pan
Removal


stands.
3. Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01A Engine -

TDV6 3.0L Diesel, General Procedures).
4. Refer to: Axle Assembly (205-03 Front Drive Axle/Differential,

5. Refer to: Starter Motor (303-06A Starting System - TDV6 3.0L

Diesel, Removal and Installation).
6. Vehicles with dynamic suspension.
Refer to: Front Stabilizer Bar - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L

Petrol (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Removal and
Installation).
7. Torque:
M10 40 Nm
M8 24 Nm
8. CAUTION: Make sure that the gaskets are

correctly located.
Torque: 10 Nm
9. Torque: 25 Nm
10. Torque: 10 Nm
11. Torque: 24 Nm
12. Torque: 10 Nm
13. Torque: 10 Nm
14. CAUTION: Make sure that the gaskets are
correctly located.
Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
16. CAUTION: Note the position of the bolts, prior

to removal.
Torque:
M8 23 Nm
M6 10 Nm
17. CAUTION: When removing this component be
careful not to damage the plastic crankcase
ventilation tube.
NOTE: Remove and discard the O-ring seal.

Torque: 10 Nm
19. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
22. NOTES:
Discard the gasket.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

Installation of the oil pan and tightening must

be carried out within 7 minutes of applying the
sealant.
Apply an 8 mm bead of sealant to the cylinder

block in the areas shown.

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Oil Pump
Removal

2. Remove the generator.
Refer to: Generator (414-02 Generator and Regulator - TDV6

3. Remove the accessory drive belt tensioner.
4. Remove the generator mounting bracket.
5. Refer to: Timing Belt (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,

6. Remove the crankshaft pulley.

8. Release the battery positive cable.
9. Remove the oil pump lower retaining bolts.
10. Remove the timing belt cover sealing strips.

11. Remove the timing belt cover sealing strips.
12. Remove the oil pump.
13. Remove the alignment dowels (if equipped).

Installation
1. Install a new oil pump gasket.
2. NOTE: Prime the oil pump.
Fill the orifice shown with 20 ml of engine oil.

Rotate the oil pump drive 2 complete turns.
3. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are
clean and free of foreign material.
Apply sealant WSE-M4G323-A5 in an 3mm bead to

the two areas shown, also apply a smear of sealant
to the gasket face as illustrated.
4. CAUTION: Make sure the base of the oil pump is aligned

within 0.2 mm of the base of the engine block. Failure to follow
NOTE: Vehicles fitted with oil pumps without dowels.
Check the oil pump to engine block alignment.

5. Install two bolts to the oil pump, only finger tighten
at this stage.
6. Install the oil pump lower retaining bolts.

7. NOTE: Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown
to 10 Nm .
Secure the oil pump.
8. Install the timing belt cover sealing strips.
9. CAUTION: Do not use any lubricant on the

crankshaft front seal, special tools or the crankshaft.
damage to the vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure all component mating faces
are clean.
Install a new crankshaft front seal to the special

tool.
10. NOTE: Remove the sleeve from the special tool.
Reposition the crankshaft front seal along the special

tool.
12. Remove the special tool from the crankshaft.

14. NOTES:
Use the crankshaft bolt with the service tool.
Install the special tool to the crankshaft.
15. NOTES:
Wait 10 seconds before removing the

crankshaft seal installation tool.
Remove and discard the crankshaft pulley retaining

bolt.
16. Install the battery positive cable.
Torque: 10 Nm
17. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the pulley washer is correctly

seated before installing the pulley.
Do not lubricate the components.
Install the crankshaft pulley.
Torque:
Stage 1:150 Nm
Stage 2:300 Nm
Stage 3:90°
18. Refer to: Timing Belt (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,
19. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
Torque: 22 Nm
20. Torque: 45 Nm
21. Remove the generator.
Refer to: Generator (414-02 Generator and Regulator - TDV6


Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Timing Belt
Special Tool(s)
303-1117
Timing Peg, Automatic Transmission
303-1126
Timing Peg, Camshaft Pulley
Removal

stands.
2. Refer to: Timing Cover (303-01 Engine - 3.0L V6 - TdV6,

3. Refer to: Starter Motor (303-06 Starting System - 3.0L V6 -

4.
5. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to align the crankshaft

alignment hole in the flywheel or flexplate with the block
aperture.
6. Check the camshaft pulley alignment holes are

correctly aligned. If the alignment holes are not
aligned, rotate the crankshaft one full turn
clockwise.
8.

tools.
NOTE: Do not loosen the bolts more than 2

turns.
11. CAUTIONS:
Discard the component.
Discard the bolt.
12. CAUTION: Discard the component.
Installation
1.
2. CAUTIONS:
Only tighten the bolts finger-tight at this

stage.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the camshaft pulleys

remain in the clockwise position.
Install the new timing belt.

Starting at the crankshaft pulley, install the
timing belt in a counter-clockwise direction,
in the sequence shown.
Stage one: Attach the timing belt to the
crankshaft pulley.
Stage two: Attach the timing belt to the
idler pulley.
Stage three: Attach the timing belt to the
left-hand camshaft pulley.
Stage four: Attach the timing belt to the
idler pulley.
Stage five: Attach the timing belt to the RH
camshaft pulley.
Stage six: Attach the timing belt to the
timing belt tensioner.
4. CAUTION: Make sure the timing belt tensioner

window is aligned with the groove as illustrated.
Tension the timing belt.

Rotate the tensioner assembly counter-
clockwise.
Torque: 26 Nm

tools.
Using a suitable tool, counterhold the

camshaft pulley center retaining bolts.
Torque: 23 Nm
8. CAUTION: Only rotate the crankshaft clockwise.
Rotate the engine two complete turns clockwise.

10.
Install the special tools to the exhaust
camshaft pulleys.
If the special tool does not fit correctly,
repeat the timing belt installation
procedure.
Remove the special tools from the camshaft
pulleys.
11. Torque: 80 Nm

13.
14. Refer to: Starter Motor (303-06 Starting System - 3.0L V6 -

15. Refer to: Timing Cover (303-01 Engine - 3.0L V6 - TdV6,

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Timing Cover
Removal

3. Refer to: Engine Cover - 3.0L Diesel (501-05, Removal and

Installation).
5.
6. Torque: 10 Nm
7.
8.
9. Torque: 3 Nm
10.
11. Torque: 8 Nm
13. Torque: 8 Nm
14. Torque: 8 Nm
15. Torque: 8 Nm
16. Torque: 5 Nm
17. Torque: 47 Nm
18. Torque: 24 Nm
19. Torque: 24 Nm
20. Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Valve Cover LH
Removal

Installation).


Installation).
5. Refer to: Fuel Rail LH (303-04, Removal and Installation).
6. Refer to: Intake Air Shutoff Throttle (303-04, Removal and

Installation).
7. Refer to: Timing Cover (303-01, Removal and Installation).
8. Refer to: Fuel Injector (303-04, Removal and Installation).
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces
are clean and free of corrosion and foreign
material.
NOTES:
Discard the gasket.

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

Install all the bolts finger tight before final

tightening.
Torque: 10 Nm
2. Torque: 23 Nm
3.
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5. Torque: 5 Nm
6.
7.
8.
9. Refer to: Fuel Injector (303-04, Removal and Installation).
Installation).

Installation).
Installation).

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Valve Cover RH
Removal

Installation).
3. Refer to: Fuel Rail RH (303-04, Removal and Installation).

Installation).
6. Refer to: Fuel Injectors RH (303-04, Removal and Installation).
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

material.

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:


tightening.
Torque: 10 Nm
2. Torque: 23 Nm
3.
4. Torque: 7 Nm
5. Torque: 7 Nm
6.
7.
8.
9. Refer to: Fuel Injectors RH (303-04, Removal and Installation).
Installation).

Installation).

Removal
Special Tool(s)
303-1129
Engine Lifting Brackets
303-1497
Left-Hand Rear Engine Lifting Bracket
1. Refer to: Body - TDV6 2.7L Diesel/TDV6 3.0L Diesel (502-02

Full Frame and Body Mounting, Removal and Installation).
2. Refer to: Cooling Fan (303-03 Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L




coolant.

coolant.

coolant.
9.
10.
11. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
12.
13.
14. Refer to: Starter Motor (303-06 Starting System - TDV6 3.0L
15.
16.
17. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold Crossover Pipe (303-01A Engine -
TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
18.
19.
20.
21. CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping fuel.

new blanking caps.

24. Refer to: Intake Air Shutoff Throttle (303-04A Fuel Charging
and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
25.
26.

sealed.
28. Special Tool(s): 303-1129, 303-1497

Torque:
M6 bolts 8 Nm
M8 bolts 22 Nm
29.

31.
32.
33.
34. Using a suitable tool, support the transmission.
35. NOTES:
Note the routing of the battery positive cable.
Note the routing of the transmission wiring

harness.
This step requires the aid of another

technician.
36. Special Tool(s): 303-1129, 303-1497

Installation
Special Tool(s)
303-1129
Engine Lifting Brackets
303-1497
Left-Hand Rear Engine Lifting Bracket
1. Special Tool(s): 303-1129, 303-1497

Torque:
M6 bolts 8 Nm
M8 bolts 22 Nm
2. CAUTIONS:
Apply grease of the correct specification to

the torque converter spigot.
Make sure the torque converter is fully located

into the oil pump drive.

NOTE: This step requires the aid of another
technician.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the torque converter

remains connected to the transmission.
Torque: 40 Nm
4. Torque: 90 Nm
5. Torque: 90 Nm
6. Torque: 40 Nm
7. CAUTIONS:
Only rotate the crankshaft clockwise.
Torque: 63 Nm
8.
9. Special Tool(s): 303-1129, 303-1497
Torque: 10 Nm
11. Torque: 8 Nm
12. Torque: 8 Nm
13. Refer to: Intake Air Shutoff Throttle (303-04A Fuel Charging
and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
14. NOTES:
Make sure that all the component mating

faces are clean.
Torque: 28 Nm
15. NOTES:
Make sure that all the component mating

faces are clean.
Torque: 28 Nm
17. Torque: 7 Nm
18.
19.
20. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold Crossover Pipe (303-01A Engine -

TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
21. Torque: 10 Nm
22.
23. Refer to: Starter Motor (303-06 Starting System - TDV6 3.0L
24. Torque: 22 Nm
25.
Torque: 25 Nm
27. Torque: 15 Nm
28.
29.
30.

32. NOTE: :Remove and discard the blanking
caps.
Torque: 5 Nm
Torque: 5 Nm
34. Refer to: Cooling Fan (303-03 Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L
35. Refer to: Body - TDV6 2.7L Diesel/TDV6 3.0L Diesel (502-02
Full Frame and Body Mounting, Removal and Installation).
36. Refer to: Power Steering System Filling and Bleeding (211-00
Steering System - General Information, General Procedures).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol -
Engine Data
Engine Maximum Engine Maximum Engine Compression
Engine Description Capacity Torque (EEC) Power (EEC) Ratio Bore Stroke
• 90° "Vee" • 8 Cylinder 4.999 ccm 510 Nm at 3.500 RPM 276 kW at 6.500 RPM 11.5 ± 0.5 92.5 93 mm
• 32 Valves mm
Engine Firing Order
Firing Order
1:2:7:3:4:5:6:8
Engine Valve Clearance (cold)
Intake Valve Exhaust Valve
N/A 0.25 mm ± 0.02
Spark Plugs
Specification Spark Plug Gap
ILKR6C-10 1 mm
Engine Oil WSS-M2C925-A
Sealant WSE-M4G323-A6
Capacities
Description Liters
Engine oil, initial fill 9.5
Engine oil, service fill with oil filter change 8.0
Item Specification
Cylinder head maximum permitted warp (mm) (flatnes specfication)
overall 0.08
over 150x150 mm area 0.05
Intake valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line) 97.63 ± 0.1
Exhaust valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line) 94.39 ± 0.1
Valve head diameter intake (mm) 36 ± 0.1
Valve head diameter exhaust (mm) 30 ± 0.1
Intake valve face angle (degrees) 44.875 ± 0.125
Exhaust valve face angle (degrees) 44.875 ± 0.125
Valve stem diameter intake (mm) 5.4705 ± 0.0075
Valve stem diameter exhaust (mm) 5.4625 ± 0.0075
Valve spring free length (mm) - inlet 43.43
Valve spring free length (mm) - exhaust 46.1
Valve spring installed height (mm) - inlet 34.49
Valve spring installed height (mm) - exhaust 35.1
Camshaft lobe lift intake (mm) 5.5 (low) 10.53 (high)
Camshaft lobe lift exhaust (mm) 9.36
Camshaft journal to cylinder head bearing surface clearance diametrical (mm) 0.025 - 0.065
Camshaft journal diameter - all positions 26.965 ± 0.01
Bearing diameter - all positions 27.01 ± 0.01
Camshaft journal maximum run out limit (mm)
Camshaft journals to end journals 0.03
Camshaft journals to adjacent journals 0.015
Camshaft journal maximum out of round (mm) - all journals 0.005
NOTE: A = Refer to procedure for correct torque sequence.
Description Nm lb-ft lb-in

Engine cover mounting bolts 10 7 -
Supercharger belt idler/tensioner bracket retaining bolts 25 18 -
Secondary drive belt idler retaining bolts 40 30 -
Power steering pump pulley retaining bolts 25 18 -
Power steering pump bracket to engine retaining bolts 25 18 -
Starter motor retaining bolts 40 30 -
Engine mounting to engine mounting bracket retaining nuts 100 74 -
Engine mounting to subframe retaining bolts 56 41 -
Engine mounting bracket to engine retaining bolts 45 + 60° 33 + 60° -
Crankshaft damper pulley retaining LH threaded bolt 200 + 270° 148 + 180° -
Flexplate retaining bolts 45 + 90° 33 + 90° -
Exhaust manifold heat shield retaining bolts A - -
Exhaust manifold retaining bolts A - -
Engine wiring harness bracket retaining bolts 10 7 -
Coolant outlet pipe 10 7 -
Intercooler retaining bolts 25 18 -
Intake manifold retaining bolts 25 18 -
Oil Cooler retaining bolts 13 10 -
Knock sensor (KS) retaining bolt 20 14 -
Ignition coil retaining bolts 8 - 71
Spark plugs 20 15 -
Fuel rail retaining bolts A - -
High pressure fuel pipe retaining bolts A - -
High pressure fuel pump retaining bolts 12 9 -
Oil filter housing assembly retaining bolts 12 9 -
Oil filter cap 25 18 -
Lifting eye bolts 25 + 90° 18 + 90° -
Manifold absolute pressure and temperature (MAPT) sensor sensor retaining bolts 5 - 44
Variable valve timing (VVT) oil control solenoid retaining bolts 10 7 -
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor retaining bolts 10 7 -
Camshaft cover retaining bolts 13 10 -
Front upper timing cover retaining bolts 12 9 -
Front lower timing cover retaining bolts A - -
Engine rear cover retaining bolts A - -
VVT to camshaft retaining bolts 32 24 -
Camshaft bearing caps retaining bolts 11 8 -
Primary timing chain fixed guide retaining bolts 12 9 -
Primary timing chain tensioner retaining bolts 12 9 -
Primary timing chain tensioner guide blade retaining bolts 25 18 -
Auxiliary chain tensioner guide retaining bolts 21 15 -
Auxiliary chain fixed guide retaining bolt 12 9 -
Oil pump sprocket retaining bolt 21 15 -
Engine oil level (EOL) sensor retaining bolt 12 9 -
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor retaining bolt 10 7 -
Oil sump body to engine retaining bolts 25 18 -
Oil pan drain plug 24 18 -
Oil transfer tube to Oil pan body retaining bolts 11 8 -
Oil pump to engine block retaining bolts 25 18 -
Pick-up pipe to oil pump retaining bolts 12 9 -
Windage tray retaining bolts 25 18 -
Piston cooling jet retaining bolts 12 9 -
Engine block coolant draining plug 50 37 -
Cooling fan pulley 25 18 -
Connecting Rod bolts
Stage 1 10 7 -
Stage 2 50 37 -
Main bearing cap
M10 bolt Stage 1 25 18 -
M10 bolt Stage 2 57 + 70° 42 + 70° -
M8 bolt Stage 2 33 + 75° 24 + 75° -
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine
EXTERNAL VIEW
INTRODUCTION
The 5.0L NA (naturally aspirated) gasoline engine is a liquid cooled V8 unit featuring direct fuel injection, four
overhead camshafts and four valves per cylinder. All four camshafts incorporate VCT (variable camshaft timing). The
intake camshafts and valves also incorporate CPS (camshaft profile switching).
The main structural components of the engine are all manufactured from aluminum alloy. The engine is built around a
very stiff, lightweight, enclosed V, deep skirt cylinder block. A structural windage tray is bolted to the bottom of the
cylinder block to further improve the block stiffness, minimize NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) and help reduce
oil foaming. To further enhance the stiffness of the lower engine structure, a heavily ribbed sump is installed. The
sump also helps to reduce engine noise.
Engine Structure


1 - LH (left hand) cylinder head (bank B)
2 - Cylinder block
3 - Windage tray
4 - Sump
5 - RH (right hand) cylinder head (bank A)
CYLINDER BLOCK
The cylinder block is a 90 degree configuration with cast-in iron cylinder liners and an open deck die-cast coolant
jacket. The low volume coolant jacket gives good warm-up times and low piston noise levels. The longitudinal flow
design of the coolant jacket, with a single cylinder head coolant transfer port in each bank, provides good rigidity and
head gasket sealing.
Cylinder Numbering

A - ISO standard cylinder numbering
B - DIN standard cylinder numbering
ISO cylinder firing order 1,2,7,3,4,5,6,8
DIN cylinder firing order 1,5,4,2,6,3,7,8
Engine Data Location


1 - Engine data location
Engine data is marked on the cylinder block at the rear of the RH cylinder bank.
CRANKSHAFT
The crankshaft is made from spheroidal graphite cast iron, which, compared with grey cast iron, has higher
mechanical strength, ductility and increased shock resistance. The undercut and rolled fillets also improve strength.
Eight counter-balance weights ensure low vibration levels and the large, cross-drilled main bearing journals are
designed to contribute to stiffness.
An oil groove in the upper half of each main bearing transfers the oil into the crankshaft for lubrication of the
connecting rod bearings. A thrust washer is installed each side of the top half of the center main bearing.
Crankshaft Data Location

1 - Pin journal classification and plant identification
2 - Main journal classification
3 - Date and time codes
The main bearings are numbered 1 to 5 starting from the front of the engine. There are five grades of main bearing
available, each being color coded. Journal sizes are marked on the rear of the crankshaft.
For additional information, refer to: Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter (303-00 Engine System - General
Crankshaft Installation


1 - Coolant drain plug
2 - Torque converter access plug
3 - Drive plate
4 - Rear cover
5 - Main bearing cap
6 - Identification mark
7 - Front cover
8 - Front pulley
The main bearing caps are made from cast iron and are cross bolted to increase rigidity. An identification mark on
the bearing cap faces the front of the engine.
At the front of the crankshaft, a tuned torsional vibration damper is incorporated into the crankshaft front pulley. At
the rear of the crankshaft a pressed steel drive plate, with a steel starter ring gear, is installed to transfer drive from
the engine to the transmission. The reluctor ring for the CKP (crankshaft position) sensor is integrated into the
perimeter of the drive plate.
The crankshaft seals are located in the front and rear covers.
PISTONS AND CONNECTING RODS

The diameter of each piston is graded and precisely matched to each cylinder bore to help reduce noise. In the
vertical plane, the pistons have a slight barrel form, which helps to ensure a reliable oil film is maintained between
the piston and the cylinder bore. A solid film lubricant coating is applied to both reaction faces of the piston to reduce
wear and improve fuel economy.
A three-ring piston-sealing system is used. The steel top ring is treated with a PVD (physical vapor deposition)
peripheral coating. PVD is a coating technique where material can be deposited with improved properties to ensure
good cylinder bore compatibility and wear resistance. A Napier center ring helps cylinder pressure and oil
management, while the three-piece oil control lower ring is produced from nitrided steel.
The connecting rods are forged from high strength steel. The cap is fracture-split from the rod to ensure precision re-
assembly for bearing shell alignment. There are three grades of large end bearing available, each being color coded.
For additional information, refer to: Connecting Rod Large End Bore (303-00 Engine System - General Information,
Cap Alignment with Connecting Rod


1 - Alignment marks
2 - Connecting rod
3 - Cap
4 - Bearings
The correct alignment of the cap with the connecting rod is indicated by marks on adjacent faces of the two
components.
Connecting Rod and Piston Orientation

A - Front of engine
1 - Alignment mark
2 - LH side (bank B)
3 - Alignment mark
4 - RH side (bank A)
5 - Piston orientation arrow
The orientation of the connecting rods and pistons on the crankshaft are given below:
Bank A - The arrow on the piston crown must face the front of the engine and the cap and connecting rod
alignment marks must face the rear of the engine.
Bank B - The arrow on the piston crown must face the front of the engine and the cap and connecting rod
alignment marks must face the front of the engine.
CYLINDER HEADS
NOTE: RH (right-hand) (A bank) cylinder head shown, LH (left-hand) (B bank) cylinder head similar.
The cylinder heads are manufactured in gravity die cast aluminum alloy and are unique for each cylinder bank. Deep-
seated bolts reduce distortion and secure the cylinder heads to the cylinder block.
Each cylinder is served by four valves. To help achieve the required gas-flow characteristics, these are arranged
asymmetrically around the cylinder bore. Each cylinder has a centrally mounted fuel injector and spark plug.
The cylinder head gasket is of a multi-layer steel construction.
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
NOTE: LH (B bank) installation shown, RH (A bank) installation similar.


1 - Cylinder head
2 - Gasket
3 - Heat shield
4 - Gasket
5 - Exhaust manifold
6 - Bolt (8 off)
7 - Heat shield
8 - Bolt (4 off)
9 - Spacer (8 off)
The high SiMo (silicon molybdenum) cast iron exhaust manifolds are unique for each cylinder bank. Each exhaust
manifold installation includes two metal gaskets and two heat shields. Spacers on the securing bolts allow the
manifolds to expand and contract with changes of temperature while maintaining the clamping loads.
VALVE TRAIN


1 - VCT solenoids
2 - CPS solenoids
3 - Inverted tooth timing chain
4 - Nylon chain guide
5 - Auxiliary chain tensioner
6 - Auxiliary drive chain
7 - Oil pump drive
8 - Auxiliary drive camshaft
9 - Timing chain tensioner
10 - Tensioner lever
11 - VCT unit
Camshafts

1 - Intake camshaft
2 - Exhaust camshaft
The lightweight valve train provides good economy and noise levels and is chain driven from the crankshaft.
Double overhead camshafts on each cylinder head operate the valves. For each cylinder head, an inverted tooth
timing chain transfers drive from the crankshaft to the VCT unit on the front of each camshaft. Graded tappets
enable setting of exhaust valve clearances. Switchable tappets with hydraulic lash adjusters are installed on the
intake valves.
Each timing chain has a hydraulic tensioner operated by engine oil pressure. The chain tensioners incorporate a
ratchet mechanism, which maintains tension while the engine is stopped to eliminate start-up noise. The chains are
lubricated with engine oil from jets located at the front of the engine block. Nylon chain guides control chain motion
on the drive side.
Variable Camshaft Timing

1 - VCT units
2 - Intake camshaft VCT solenoid
3 - Camshaft position sensors
4 - Exhaust camshaft VCT solenoid
The VCT system varies the timing of the intake and exhaust camshafts to deliver optimum engine power, efficiency
and emissions. The timing of the intake camshafts has a range of 62 degrees of crankshaft angle. The timing of the
exhaust camshafts has a range of 50 degrees of crankshaft angle.
In the base timing position:
The intake camshafts are fully retarded.

The exhaust camshafts are fully advanced.
VCT Operating Ranges
Camshaft Valve Opens Valve Closes
Intake - Low 27 degrees BTDC (before top dead center) to 35 degrees ATDC (after top 187 to 249 degrees
Lift dead center) ATDC
Intake - High 37 degrees BTDC to 25 degrees ATDC 213 to 275 degrees
Lift ATDC
Exhaust 244 to 194 degrees BTDC 6 to 56 degrees ATDC
The system consists of a VCT unit and a VCT solenoid for each camshaft. The ECM (engine control module) controls
the system using PWM (pulse width modulation) signals to the VCT solenoids.
The torsional energy generated by the valve springs and the inertia of the valve train components are used to
operate the system.
Variable Camshaft Timing Units
The VCT units change the position of the camshafts in relation to the timing chains.


1 - Bolt (3 off)
2 - VCT unit
3 - Filter
4 - Camshaft
5 - Inner plate
6 - Housing and sprocket
7 - Rotor assembly
8 - Reed plate
9 - Spring and lock pin
10 - Spring (3 off)
11 - Tip seal (3 off)
12 - Spring (2 off)
14 - Spring
15 - Dowel pin
16 - Bias spring
17 - Snap ring
18 - Reluctor ring
19 - Center plate
20 - Snap ring
21 - Screw (6 off)
22 - Spool valve
23 - Outer plate
Each VCT unit is attached to the camshaft by three bolts. A rotor assembly and a reed plate are installed inside a
sprocket housing, which consists of a sprocket, an outer plate and an inner plate held together by six screws.
A reluctor ring, for the CMP (camshaft position) sensor, a center plate and a bias spring are installed at the front of
the VCT unit. The ends of the bias spring locate on the center plate assembly and the sprocket housing, to give a
turning moment to the camshaft in the advance direction. A snap ring locates the reluctor ring on to a sleeve
installed in the center of the rotor assembly. The opposite end of the sleeve locates in a bore in the front face of the
camshaft, which contains a filter.
A spring and spool valve are installed in the rotor assembly sleeve and retained by a snap ring. The spring keeps the
spool valve in contact with the armature of the related VCT solenoid.
Each VCT unit is supplied with engine oil from an oil gallery in the cylinder head, through the camshaft front bearing
cap and a bore in the center of the camshaft.
Variable Camshaft Timing Solenoids
The VCT solenoids control the position of the spool valves in the VCT units.
The VCT solenoids are installed in the front upper timing covers, immediately in front of their related VCT units. Each
VCT solenoid is secured with two screws and sealed with an O-ring. A two pin electrical connector provides the
interface with the engine harness.
Each VCT solenoid incorporates a spindle that acts on the spool valve in the related VCT unit to advance and retard
the camshaft timing. The VCT solenoids operate independently and are controlled by a PWM signal from the ECM.
Variable Camshaft Timing Operation
When the engine is running, the compression and expansion of the valve springs causes momentary increases and
decreases in the torque acting on the camshafts. These momentary changes of torque are sensed in the VCT units
and used to change the camshaft timing.
Camshaft Torsional Energy (For a Single Valve Event)


A - Camshaft torque
B - Camshaft rotation (degrees)
C - Valve opening
D - Peak lift
E - Valve closing
1 - 1000 rev/min
2 - 4000 rev/min
3 - 7000 rev/min
4 - Inertia effects from valve train rotating components
5 - Force caused by valve spring
6 - Bias torque from friction
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Base Timing
NOTE: Intake camshaft VCT unit shown. For exhaust camshaft VCT unit, read advance for retard and retard for
advance.


1 - Advance chamber
2 - Retard chamber
3 - Sprocket housing
4 - Rotor assembly
5 - Lock pin
6 - Sleeve
7 - Engine oil supply from camshaft
8 - Inlet check valve
9 - Lock pin drain
10 - Spool valve
11 - Advance check valve
12 - Retard check valve
At engine start-up, once the engine oil pressure in the camshaft is sufficient to open the inlet check valve, engine oil
flows across the spool valve, through the advance and retard check valves and into the advance and retard
chambers. During the start cycle, the ECM signals the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve into the sleeve and
connect the lock pin to inlet oil pressure. The inlet oil pressure causes the lock pin to retract from the inner plate and
unlock the rotor assembly and camshaft from the sprocket housing.
There is a constant supply of oil to the VCT to ensure the unit remains filled during operation.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Advance

To advance the camshaft timing, the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve so that the
advance chamber oil passage is closed and the retard chamber oil passage is connected to inlet oil.
Each momentary increase of the torque acting on the camshaft generates a pressure pulse in the retard chamber. Oil
moves from the retard chamber, through the spool valve and the advance check valve to the advance chamber, to
equalize the pressures in the two chambers. The displacement of oil from the retard chamber causes the rotor
assembly to advance in relation to the sprocket housing. Each momentary decrease of torque acting on the camshaft
also generates a pressure pulse in the advance chamber, but, with the advance chamber oil passage closed, no
movement of oil between the advance and retard chambers occurs and the rotor assembly cannot move in the retard
direction.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Null

Once the camshaft has reached the required timing position the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to set the
spool valve in the null position. In the null position, the advance and retard chamber oil passages are both closed by
the spool valve and the rotor assembly is hydraulically locked to the sprocket housing.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Retard

To retard the camshaft timing, the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve to close the
retard chamber oil passage and connect the advance chamber oil passage to the inlet oil.
Each momentary decrease of the torque acting on the camshaft causes oil to transfer from the advance chamber,
through the spool valve and the retard check valve to the retard chamber, and so retard the camshaft timing.
Camshaft Profile Switching

The CPS (camshaft profile switching) system switches the intake valves between two cam profiles which have
different lift and period. The low lift profile improves driveability and emissions at lower engine speeds. The high lift
profile improves power and torque output at higher engine speeds.
The intake camshafts have three lobes for each valve. The two outer lobes have identical profiles that produce the
high lift of 10.53 mm (0.415 in.). The central lobe produces the low lift of 5.50 mm (0.217 in.). Switching between
cam profiles is performed by a switchable tappet on each intake valve. The switchable tappets are operated by
engine oil controlled by a CPS solenoid on each cylinder head. Operation of the CPS solenoids is controlled by the
ECM.
Camshaft Profile Switching Solenoids
The CPS solenoids control the supply of engine oil pressure to the locking pins in the switchable tappets, to switch the
tappets between the two cam profiles.
A CPS solenoid is installed on the rear of each cylinder block. Each CPS solenoid has a pintle installed in a sleeve,
which incorporates oil inlet and outlet holes. The sleeve is installed at the junction of oil galleries in the cylinder head,
with the oil inlet and outlet holes aligned with the galleries. Movement of the pintle in the sleeve controls a connection
between the oil galleries. When the CPS solenoid is energized, the pintle connects an oil supply gallery to the gallery
along the outboard side of the switchable tappets. When the CPS solenoid is de-energized, the oil gallery along the
outboard side of the switchable tappets is connected to drain.
The CPS solenoids receive a fused battery supply from the main relay. The ECM switches a ground connection to
operate the solenoids.
Switchable Tappets


1 - Outer tappet
2 - Outer locking pin
3 - Inner locking pin
4 - Return spring
5 - Lash adjuster oil inlet
6 - Lash adjuster
7 - Lost motion spring
8 - CPS oil inlet
9 - Anti-rotation lug
The switchable tappets are installed on the intake valves, in bores in the cylinder heads. The cylinder heads
incorporate engine oil galleries along the inboard and outboard sides of the bores. The inboard oil galleries (between
the tappets and the spark plug/fuel injector bores) supply an oil feed to the locking pins in the switchable tappets.
The outboard oil galleries (over the inlet ports) supply an oil feed to the hydraulic lash adjusters in the switchable
tappets.
Each switchable tappet consists of inner and outer tappets, which can operate independently or be locked together by
locking pins. A hydraulic lash adjuster on the bottom of the inner tappet locates on the intake valve stem.
In low lift, the intake valve lift is controlled by the inner tappets, which run on the center lobes of the intake
camshafts. The outer tappets run on the outer lobes of the intake camshafts, and move up and down the inner
tappets without affecting the valve lift. The lost motion springs keep the outer tappets in contact with the outer
lobes. Movement of the inner tappets is transferred to the intake valves through the hydraulic lash adjusters.
In high lift, engine oil is supplied to the locking pins, which lock the outer tappets to the inner tappets. Intake valve
lift is controlled by the outer tappets, which run on the outer lobes of the intake camshafts. Movement of the outer
tappets is transferred to the intake valves through the locking pins, the inner tappets and the hydraulic lash
adjusters.


1 - Intake camshaft
2 - Inner tappet
3 - Outer tappet
4 - Outer cam profile (high lift)
5 - Inner cam profile (low lift)
6 - Locking pin oil pressure inlet
7 - Outer locking pin
8 - Inner locking pin
9 - Outer tappet lost motion spring
10 - Valve spring
Camshaft Profile Switching Operation
The switching point is speed and load dependent. This strategy ensures that switching occurs at air flow neutral
points in the engine's operation and is imperceptible to the driver.
At engine speeds from idle up to the range of 2825 - 4250 rev/min (depending on engine load), the CPS solenoids
are de-energized and the switchable tappets are set to low lift. At engine speeds above the 2825 - 4250 rev/min
range, the CPS solenoids are energized by the ECM and the switchable tappets are set to high lift. There is a 200
rev/min hysteresis when switching from high lift to low lift with decreasing engine speed. Switching between lift
settings occurs within one revolution of the camshaft.
Switching is only enabled at engine oil temperatures of 20 ºC (68 ºF) and above. At oil temperatures below 20 °C (68
ºF), CPS operation is disabled and the switchable tappets remain in the low lift setting. CPS operation is also disabled
if a CPS solenoid fails. When CPS operation is disabled, engine speed is limited to 5000 rev/min.
The ECM can diagnose the operation of the CPS solenoids and store fault related DTC (diagnostic trouble code) if it
detects a failure.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM


1 - Oil pump outlet tube
2 - Anti-drain valve
3 - Oil cooler
4 - Oil filter
5 - Timing chain lubrication jet (2 off)
6 - Oil evacuation tube
7 - Oil pump
8 - Oil pick-up
9 - Oil temperature and level sensor
The oil pump is attached to the underside of the windage tray. The input shaft of the oil pump is driven from the
front of the crankshaft, by the auxiliary chain, at 0.87 engine speed.
The oil pump draws oil from the sump through a centrally mounted pick-up pipe. The oil is pressurized and pumped
through an output tube to the cylinder block. After passing through an anti-drain valve and a plate type oil cooler,
the oil is filtered by a replaceable cartridge installed on the front of the RH cylinder head.
The output from the oil filter is distributed through oil galleries in the cylinder heads and cylinder block. All moving
parts are lubricated by pressure or splash oil. Pressurized oil is also provided for the VCT system, the CPS system,
the timing chain tensioners and the timing chain lubrication jets.
The oil returns to the oil pan under gravity. Large drain holes through the cylinder heads and cylinder block ensure
the rapid return of the oil to the sump. System replenishment is through the oil filler cap on the LH cylinder head
cover.
An oil evacuation tube is installed to allow oil to be drawn from the sump. The upper end of the oil evacuation tube is
located under the oil filler cap.
An oil drain plug is installed in the RH side of the sump.

Oil Pump Nominal Operating Pressures
Engine Speed, rev/min Temperature, °C (°F) Pressure, bar (lbf/in 2 )
Idle 20 (68) 2.0 (29.0)
1500 20 (68) 6.0 (87.0)
3000 40 (104) 6.2 (90.0)
3000 110 (230) 5.0 (72.5)
3000 130 (266) 4.0 (58.0)
Oil Level Monitoring
Oil level monitoring is provided by an oil level and temperature sensor that measures the oil level in the sump. The
oil level can be displayed in the message center of the instrument cluster.
Oil Level and Temperature Sensor
The oil level and temperature sensor supplies the ECM with a signal containing the level and temperature of the oil in
the sump. The oil level and temperature sensor is secured to the bottom of the sump with three screws and sealed
with a gasket.
The oil level and temperature sensor sends an ultrasonic pulse vertically upward and measures the time taken for the
pulse to be reflected back from the top surface of the oil. This time is compared with the time taken for an ultrasonic
pulse to travel a reference distance within the oil level and temperature sensor to determine the oil level. The oil
level reading is combined with the oil temperature reading and transmitted in a PWM signal to the ECM.
Oil Level and Temperature Sensor Specifications
Feature Details
Power Source Battery Voltage
Level Accuracy ±2 mm (±0.08 in.) at temperatures of -30 °C (-22 °F)) and above; (±4 mm (±0.16 in.) at
temperatures below -30 °C (-22 °F))
Temperature ±2 °C (±3.6 °F)
Accuracy
Operating Level 116 to 147 mm (4.57 to 5.79 in.)
Range
Operating -40 to 160 °C (-40 to 320 °F)
Temperature Range
Oil Level Check
For additional information, refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01C, General Procedures).
For accuracy, oil level checks should be performed with the vehicle on level ground when the oil is hot. The vehicle
needs to stand for approximately 10 minutes, after the engine is switched off, to allow the oil to drain back into the
sump and the oil level to stabilize. The oil level system will not give a reading until the oil level has stabilized.
To check the oil level, make sure that the ignition is on, the engine stopped and the transmission is in P (park).
Access the vehicle information and settings menu, then select Oil Level Display from the Service Menu. An Engine
Oil Level sight glass will be displayed in the message center. The current oil level will be displayed in the sight glass.
One of the following messages will also be displayed:
If the oil level is within acceptable limits, the message Level OK is displayed.
If the oil level is less than acceptable, a message advising how much oil to add is displayed e.g. Add 1 Litre,
or Add 1 Quart, depending on the market.
If the message Overfilled is displayed, the oil level must be reduced to within acceptable limits before
starting the engine again.
If the message Not available is displayed, the oil level is still stabilizing. Wait 10 minutes and then recheck
level.
For additional information, refer to Diagnosis and Testing, Engine - 5.0L

REFER to: Engine - 5.0L NA V8 - AJ133/5.0L SC V8 - AJ133 (303-00, Diagnosis and Testing).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Oil Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Draining
scalding.
CAUTION: Correct installation of the oil filler cap can be obtained by tightening the cap until hard stop.
NOTE: Clean the components general area prior to dismantling.
1. CAUTION: Make sure the engine is warm.
Start the engine and allow to run for 10 minutes, stop the
engine.
2.

Installation).
4.
Loosen the element cover 4 complete turns
to allow engine oil to drain from the filter
cover.
Make sure that the O-ring seal is exposed.
5. NOTES:
Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil to drain

from the oil filter housing.
6. Remove and discard the oil filter element.


Installation).
9. CAUTIONS:

drain.
NOTE: Discard the sealing washer.
Filling

NOTE: Install a new sealing washer.
Torque: 24 Nm

Installation).
3. NOTE: Install new O-ring seals.
Lubricate the oil filter element O-ring seal with

clean engine oil.
4. CAUTION: Tighten the component finger tight
first.
Torque: 25 Nm

least minimum (by following Steps 9-15), before starting the
engine.
Fill the engine with oil - for filling values on vehicles

without supercharger:
Refer to: Specifications (303-01D, Specifications).

Fill the engine with oil - for filling values on vehicles with
supercharger:

6.
7. CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle has been left for 5
minutes from filling with oil.
Follow the Steps 9-15 before starting the engine.
8.
the engine.
Check for leaks.
9. CAUTIONS:

10.
11.
12.
13.
the instructions.
14.
within 2 seconds.
15.
the instructions.
level reading.
engine for 10 minutes (as indicated in Step
8), switch off the engine, then stabilizing for
10 minutes, take a reading from the oil level
display and, if necessary top up with engine
oil.
16. NOTE: If instructed to follow Steps 9-15 in a previous

step, return to Step 8 and continue the procedure.
17. Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil level to stabilize if there has
been additional oil top up.
18. NOTE: The following steps are to update the

average oil level value.

19.
22.
23.
24.
25.
the instructions.
Installation).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Oil Vacuum Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1484
303-1484-01
Draining
scalding.
NOTES:
1.
the engine.

3. Refer to: Engine Cover - 5.0L NA V8 - AJ133/5.0L SC V8 -

AJ133 (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
4.
cover.
5.
Special Tool(s): 303-1484, 303-1484-01
6.
7.
8. NOTE: Discard the O-ring seals.
Filling

clean engine oil.
first.
Torque: 25 Nm

engine.

Refer to: Specifications (303-01 Engine - 5.0L NA V8 -

AJ133, Specifications).
supercharger:

4.
6.
the engine.
Check for leaks.
7. CAUTIONS:

8.
9.
10.
11.
the instructions.
12.
within 2 seconds.
13.
the instructions.
level reading.
oil.



17.
20.
21.
22.
23.
the instructions.
Installation).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1447
Timing Tool
JLR-303-1621
Alignment Tool, Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing
Check
Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Specifications).
2. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a jack.

Always support the vehicle on safety stands.
3. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and
Installation).
4.
5. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping oil.
NOTES:
Discard the sealing washer.
Collect the engine oil in a clean container.
6.
7. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the crankshaft is fully locked.
Install the Special Tool(s): 303-1447
8. Using a suitable marker, mark the position of the crankshaft pulley as

illustrated.
9. NOTE: Discard the seal.
10. Remove the Special Tool(s): 303-1447
11. If
required,
carefully
adjust the
crankshaft
position to
allow
correct
installation
of the
special
tool.
Install the
Special
Tool(s):
JLR-303-
1621
12. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when adjusting the

crankshaft position.
NOTE: If the crankshaft timing tool cannot be installed,

adjustment of the fuel pump camshaft timing will be required.
If required, carefully adjust the crankshaft position to allow

correct installation of the special tool.

If the crankshaft timing tool cannot be installed, adjustment of
the fuel pump camshaft timing will be required.
Refer to: Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Adjustment (303-01B

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
13. Remove the Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1621
Torque: 12 Nm
16. Torque: 10 Nm
17. NOTE: Install a new sealing washer.
Torque: 24 Nm
19. CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle is left for 5 minutes from filling with oil
and that the engine oil level is reading at least minimum (by following Steps 22-
28), before starting the engine.
Fill the engine with oil - for filling values on vehicles without supercharger:
Refer to: Specifications (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Specifications).

Fill the engine with oil - for filling values on vehicles with supercharger:
Refer to: Specifications (303-01C Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

Specifications).
20. CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle has been left for 5 minutes from filling
with oil.

21.
Start the engine and allow to run for 10 minutes, stop the engine.
Check for leaks.
22. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the selector lever and the gearshift mechanism are in the park
(P) position.
23.
Press the right-hand directional button to access the instrument
cluster menu.
24.
25.
Press the right-hand directional button to access the Oil Level
Display.
26.
Press the right-hand OK button and follow the instructions.
27.
Press the cruise control cancel button twice within 2 seconds.
28.
The message center display will revert to the normal display in
the trip computer.
Check that the oil level display shows an oil level reading.
Only after having started and run the engine for 10 minutes (as
indicated in Step 21), switch off the engine, then stabilizing for
10 minutes, take a reading from the oil level display and, if
29. NOTE: If instructed to follow Steps 22-28 in a previous step, return to Step 21
and continue the procedure.
30. Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil level to stabilize if there has been additional oil
top up.
31. NOTE: The following steps are to update the average oil level
value.

Press and hold the cruise control cancel button for more than 2
seconds.
32.
The message center display will revert to the normal display in the trip
computer.
35.
cluster menu.
36.
37.
Display.
38.
Make sure that the average oil level value has now been
updated.
Installation).
40. Torque: 10 Nm
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Adjustment
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1447
Timing Tool
JLR-303-1613
Adjustment

3. Refer to: Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check (303-01D, General

Procedures).
4. Refer to: Lower Timing Cover (303-01C, Removal and

Installation).
Refer to: Lower Timing Cover (303-01D, Removal and
Installation).
5. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the area around the

Inspect the 3 timing chain oil nozzles for

signs of damage, install as necessary.
6. NOTE: Using a suitable tie strap, position

the tensioner to one side.
Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1613

Torque: 12 Nm
Installation).
Installation).
9. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 24 Nm
engine.

Refer to: Specifications (303-01C, Specifications).

supercharger:

14.
the engine.
Check for leaks.
15. CAUTIONS:

16.
17.
18.
19.
the instructions.
20.
within 2 seconds.
21.
the instructions.
level reading.
14), switch off the engine, then stabilizing
for 10 minutes, take a reading from the oil
level display and, if necessary top up with
engine oil.



25.
28.
29.
30.
31.
the instructions.
Installation).
33. Torque: 10 Nm
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft LH
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that the orientation and code on the top of the camshaft bearing caps is noted (along with
the bank - A or B), so that on installation the components are installed to their original position. Failure to follow
this instruction may cause damage to the vehicle.
NOTES:

stands.
3. Refer to: Timing Drive Components (303-01, Removal and

Installation).
4. CAUTIONS:
Rotate the camshafts until all the valves are

at their minimum open point.
Evenly and progressively, release the

camshaft bearing caps.
NOTE: Remove the camshaft bearing caps.

Note: their position, orientation and markings.
Each is marked with its position (number) and an
orientation (arrow).
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Prior to installing the camshafts, position the

crankshaft 45 degrees ATDC cylinder 1A to prevent
valve/piston collision.
Make sure that the camshafts and camshaft

bearing caps are installed in their original locations.
Evenly and progressively install and tighten

NOTE: Lubricate the camshafts and the

camshaft bearing caps with EP90 oil (or 75/90
viscosity oil will suffice) prior to installation.
Torque: 3 Nm

sequence.
Torque: 12 Nm
Rotate the crankshaft untill the camshaft lobe on the valve

being checked is 180 degrees from the maximum opening
position.
4. NOTES:
If the valve clearance is incorrect, continue to the next

step. If the valve clearance is correct, continue to step 8.
On vehicles without supercharger the inlet camshaft valve

clearances cannot be checked.
Using feeler gauge check the gap between the tappet and the
camshaft lobe and check against specifications table.
5. CAUTIONS:
Do not use a magnet to remove the tappet.
Use the following formula to calculate the required bucket

thickness. Original thickness + measured clearance - desired
clearance = required bucket thickness.
Remove the tappet and measure the thickness.
6. NOTE: If a new tappet is installed then go back to step 1

of the install procedure.
Install a new tappet if required.
7. Using feeler gauge check the gap between the tappet and the

Installation).

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft RH
Removal
NOTES:

stands.

Installation).
4. CAUTIONS:



Installation
1. CAUTIONS:




Torque: 3 Nm

sequence.
Torque: 12 Nm

position.
4. NOTES:


5. CAUTIONS:



Installation).

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Front Seal
Special Tool(s)
303-1434
Remover/Installer, Front Crankshaft Seal
Removal
2. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01, Removal and Installation).

Torque: 26 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Do not over tighten the crankshaft front seal. Failure to

Take extra care not to damage the seal.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Pulley
Special Tool(s)
303-1437
Crankshaft Damper Remover/Installer
303-1438
Crankshaft Damper Bolt Remover/Installer
303-1439
Crankshaft Damper Removal Plate
303-1440
Crankshaft Damper Removal/Installation Stud
303-1441
Crankshaft Damper Remover/Installer Body
303-1500
Installer, Stretchy Belt
Removal
NOTES:

stands.
3. Refer to: Radiator - V8 5.0L Petrol (303-03B Engine Cooling -

V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
4. Refer to: Starter Motor (303-06B Starting System - V8 5.0L

Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
5.
6.
8. CAUTION: Before removing the crankshaft

pulley bolt, note the numbers on the bolt head. If
the bolt head shows 10.9, the bolt must be
removed counter clockwise. If the bolt head shows
12.9, the bolt must be removed clockwise. Failure
the crankshaft.
Note the markings on the crankshaft pulley bolt.

9.
Special Tool(s): 303-1438, 303-1437
11. Torque: 65 Nm
12. NOTE: The graphic shows the tool position for
LH thread only, RH thread will be the opposite.
Using a suitable stand, support the special tool.
13. CAUTION: Discard the bolt.
NOTES:
The thread is left handed.
The crankshaft pulley bolt will be very tight.
14.
15. NOTE: If the crankshaft damper is fitted with
an early RH thread crankshaft bolt then the pulley
can be removed with a standard puller.
16.

20.
21. CAUTION: Discard the friction washer after
removing the crankshaft pulley.
NOTE: Make sure to clean the threads in the

end of the crankshaft and that the crank nose is
free of any foreign materials.
22.
23.
Installation
1.
Apply RTV sealant to the crankshaft pulley
keyway.
Make sure that the RTV sealant is applied in
a 2mm diameter bead.
Make sure that when the RTV sealant is
applied that the RTV sealant is level with
the top of the keyway.
2. CAUTION: Install a new friction washer before

installing the crankshaft pulley.
NOTES:
Make sure to clean the threads in the end of

the crankshaft and that the crank nose is free of
any foreign materials.
Skip to step 11 for engines fitted with early

RH thread crankshaft bolt.

Torque: 15 Nm
6. CAUTION: Rotate the crankshaft pulley

installation tool anti-clockwise until the pulley is
fully located, do not over tighten. Failure to do this
may result in damge to the components.

10. WARNING: Make sure that a new bolt is
installed.
Apply loctite 270 to the thread of the bolts.

Torque: 65 Nm

installed.
14. Torque: 65 Nm

16. Torque: 200 Nm

17. NOTE: The use of a torque multiplyer capable
of 600Nm will be required.
Torque: 270°
Make sure that the socket is turned through
270 degrees not the torque wrench.
18.

installed.

Torque: 65 Nm
21.
23.
Install the cooling fan belt.
Install the tool at the 12 o clock position.
Rotate the engine clockwise twice, making
sure that the belt is seated on both pulleys
correctly.

25. Refer to: Radiator - V8 5.0L Petrol (303-03B Engine Cooling -

V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Rear Seal
Special Tool(s)
303-1442
Rear Crankshaft Seal Installer
303-1443
Rear Crankshaft Cover Alignment Tool
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Flexplate (303-01, Removal and Installation).
2.
Installation
Special Tool(s): 303-1442, 303-1443

sequence.
Torque: 11 Nm
3. Torque: 11 Nm

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Head LH
Removal
NOTES:
1. Remove the battery for access.
Refer to: Battery (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,


stands.
3. Refer to: Camshaft LH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

4. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold LH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

5.
6.
7.
coolant.
9. NOTE: Clamp the hose to minimize coolant

loss.
10.
12.

14. CAUTIONS:
If a new cylinder head has been installed then

new tappets must be installed.
If the cylinder head is being removed without a

new component being installed, the tappets must be
installed in their original positions.
15.
16.
Installation

maximum value.
NOTES:



3. WARNING: Make sure care is taken when

handling the cylinder head gasket.
CAUTIONS:

NOTE: Install a new cylinder head gasket.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that new cylinder head

bolts are installed.
NOTE: Tighten the bolts in the indicated

sequence.
Torque:
Stage 1:20 Nm
Stage 2:35 Nm
Stage 3:90 °
Stage 4:120 °
5. Torque: 25 Nm

sequence.
Torque: 12 Nm
7. CAUTIONS:


Lubricate the valve tappets with clean engine oil.
8. Refer to: Camshaft LH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

9. Torque: 12 Nm
10. Torque: 10 Nm
11.
Torque: 10 Nm
13.

coolant.
Torque: 10 Nm
15.
16. Torque: 20 Nm
17. Torque: 20 Nm
18. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold LH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

19. Install the battery.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Head RH
Removal
NOTES:


3. Refer to: Intake Manifold (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

4. Refer to: Camshaft RH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

5. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold RH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,


coolant.
7.
8.
9. CAUTIONS:
Discard the seal.
10.
11.
12.
loss.
14.

16.

19.
20. CAUTIONS:



Installation

maximum value.
NOTES:






sequence.
Torque:
Stage 1:20 Nm
Stage 2:35 Nm
Stage 3:90 °
Stage 4:120 °
5. Torque: 25 Nm
6. Torque: 12 Nm
7. CAUTIONS:


8. Torque: 25 Nm
9. Refer to: Camshaft RH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

10. NOTE: Install a new gasket.

11. CAUTION: A new O-ring seal is to be installed.
NOTE: Install a new engine oil filter.
12. Torque: 12 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
14.

loss.
16. CAUTIONS:
Install a new seal.
Torque: 12 Nm
17.
18.
coolant.
Torque: 10 Nm
20. Torque: 20 Nm
21. Torque: 20 Nm
22. Torque: 25 Nm
23. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold RH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,


Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Mount LH
Special Tool(s)
303-1142
Viscous Coupling Wrench
303-1143
Viscous Coupling Holding Tool
Removal
NOTES:

3. Refer to: Catalytic Converter LH (309-00, Removal and

Installation).
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. CAUTION: Always protect the cooling pack
elements to prevent accidental damage.
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may

correct.
11. CAUTION: Use a wooden block to protect the oil pan when
12.
Installation
1.
Torque:
1 45 Nm
1 60°
2 56 Nm


correct.
Special Tool(s): 303-1142, 303-1143

Torque: 65 Nm
3.
4.
5. Torque: 100 Nm
6. Torque: 12 Nm
7. Torque: 12 Nm
8. Install the LH front wheel and tire.

Installation).

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Mount RH
Special Tool(s)
303-1142
303-1143
Removal
NOTES:

stands.

4. Refer to: Exhaust System (309-00 Exhaust System - 5.0L NA

V8 - AJ133, Removal and Installation).
5. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T-Connector (303-12 Intake

Air Distribution and Filtering - 5.0L NA V8 - AJ133, Removal
and Installation).
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

NOTES:
The thread is right handed.

13.
15.
Installation
1. Torque:
1 45 Nm
1 60°
2 56 Nm
2. Torque: 100 Nm

NOTES:

Special Tool(s): 303-1142, 303-1143

Torque: 65 Nm
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. Install the RH front wheel and tire.
and Installation).


Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust Manifold LH
Special Tool(s)
303-1444-01
Exhaust Manifold Installation Guide Pins - Threaded
303-1444-02
Exhaust Manifold Installation Guide Pins - Unthreaded
Removal
NOTES:


3. Refer to: Power Steering Pump - 5.0L (211-02 Power Steering,

4. Refer to: Exhaust System (309-00 Exhaust System - 5.0L,

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
NOTES:
Discard the gasket.
Make sure that the position of the spacers is

noted before removal of the manifold.

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

Make sure the anti-seize compound does not

contact the catalyst monitor sensor tip.
If accidentally dropped or knocked install a

new sensor.
Make sure the catalyst monitor sensor wiring

harness is not twisted more than 180 degrees and
is not in contact with either the exhaust or
driveshaft.
NOTE: If the original sensor is to be installed,

apply lubricant meeting specification ESE-M12A4-A
to the thread of the sensor.
Torque: 45 Nm
Special Tool(s): 303-1444-01
3. NOTE: If a new cylinder head is installed use

the special tools in the illustration.

installed.
NOTE: Install the spacers in the noted

position.
Torque: 10 Nm

installed.

position.
Torque: 10 Nm
7. Torque: 18 Nm
8. Torque: 3 Nm
9. Torque: 10 Nm
10. Torque: 10 Nm
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.


Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust Manifold RH
Special Tool(s)
303-1444-01
303-1444-02
Removal
NOTES:
All vehicles


stands.
3. Refer to: Exhaust System (309-00B Exhaust System - V8 5.0L

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
All vehicles
12.
13. CAUTIONS:
Discard the bolts.
NOTES:
Discard the gasket.


Installation
All vehicles
1. Torque: 45 Nm
2. CAUTION: LH illustration shown, RH is

similar.

similar.
NOTE: If a new cylinder head is installed use

4. CAUTIONS:

position.
Torque: 10 Nm

similar.
6. CAUTIONS:

position.
Torque: 10 Nm

similar.
Torque: 18 Nm
8.

9. Torque: 22 Nm
10.
All vehicles
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.


Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Flexplate
Removal

stands.
3. Refer to: Transmission - 5.0L (307-01, Removal).
4. CAUTIONS:

tightening.
The bolts can only be used 3 times, mark the

bolts with a center punch. If 2 punch marks are
visible, discard the bolts.
Make sure that no components fall off during

removal.
Install the bolts in the noted position.
NOTES:
Make sure that the crankshaft is not rotated.
Make sure the crankshaft and flexplate

mating faces are clean before installation.
Tighten the retaining bolts working

diagonally.
Torque:
Stage 1:45 Nm
Stage 2:90°
Installation

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Intake Manifold
Removal

Installation).
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.

17.
18.
19.
20.
Installation
1. Torque: 5 Nm
2. Torque: 10 Nm
3. Torque: 10 Nm
4. Torque: 5 Nm
5. CAUTION: A new O-ring seal is to be

installed.
Torque: 18 Nm
6.
7. CAUTIONS:

free of corrosion and foreign material.
NOTE: Do not tighten at this stage.

8.
9.
10.
11. Torque: 25 Nm
12. Torque: 8 Nm
13. NOTES:
Do not tighten at this stage.
14.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
Bolts 8 Nm
15. Torque: 21 Nm
16.
17.
18.
19.
20. Torque: 10 Nm
21. Torque: 3.5 Nm

Installation).

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Oil Cooler
Removal
NOTES:


stands.
3. Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01B Engine - V8

5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
4. Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding -

V8 5.0L Petrol (303-03B Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C

6.
7.
8. CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping coolant.

Torque: 13 Nm
9. CAUTION: Make sure that these components

are installed to the noted removal position.
10. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that these components are


Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

tightening.

Install the new seals.

sequence.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Oil Filter Element
Removal
NOTES:

Installation).
2.
3.
4.
Installation
1.
2. Torque: 25 Nm

Installation).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Oil Pan Extension
Special Tool(s)
303-1433
Lower Timing Cover Alignment tool
303-1442
303-1443
303-1448
Locking Tool
303-1500
Installer, Stretchy Belt
Removal
NOTES:


3. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01 Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,
4. Refer to: Engine (303-01 Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal).
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14. CAUTIONS:


removal.
NOTES:

15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22. NOTE: The high-pressure fuel pumps are
removed from the illustration for clarity.
23.

fluids.

fluids.
26.

fluids.

fluids.
29.
30. NOTE: Discard component.
31.
32.
33. NOTE: Make sure to use the aluminium lug
provided on the oil pan extension to lever against.

Installation
1. Torque: 10 Nm
2. CAUTIONS:

Use only a plastic scraper when removing the

sealing material.
Apply RTV sealant WSE-M4G323-A6 (Loctite

5901G) to the areas shown, and tighten the
bolts within 7 minutes.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the mating faces are


5901G) to the areas shown, and tighten the bolts
within 7 minutes.
sequence.
Torque: 25 Nm

NOTE: Install new lower timing cover.
Install the bolts, but do not tighten fully at this

stage.

sequence.
Torque:
M8 20 Nm
M6 12 Nm
8. Torque: 12 Nm
9.

sequence.
Torque: 11 Nm
12. Torque: 11 Nm
13.
Torque: 11 Nm
15. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail high-pressure

fuel pump bucket with clean engine oil.
16. CAUTION: Tighten the Torx screws a turn at a

time until the correct torque is achieved.
NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail high-pressure

fuel pump O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Torque: 11 Nm
17. Loosen the Torx screws half a turn each.

18.



Torque: 11 Nm

22.
23. CAUTION: Care must be taken when

positioning the fuel rail high-pressure fuel pump
cover to one side.
NOTE: Fuel rail high-pressure fuel pump

cover shown removed for clarity.
Torque: 11 Nm

cover to one side.

Torque: 11 Nm
25. CAUTIONS:
Install new high-pressure fuel supply lines.
Lubricate only the union threads with clean

engine oil.
NOTES:
Install the bolt and unions fully finger tight

before final tightening.
26.
Torque: 21 Nm
27.
Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
28. NOTES:
Install the bolt and unions finger tight before

final tightening.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
29. CAUTION: Make sure that a new component

is installed.
Torque: 21 Nm
30. Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 8 Nm
31.
32. Torque: 25 Nm
33.
34. CAUTION: Install all the bolts finger tight

Torque: 25 Nm
35.
36. Torque: 12 Nm

sequence.
Torque: 48 Nm
38.
39. CAUTIONS:

tightening.

NOTES:


diagonally.
Torque:
Stage 1:45 Nm
Stage 2:90°
40.
41. Torque: 48 Nm
42. NOTE: Install the bolt finger tight before final

tightening.
Torque: 40 Nm
43. Torque: 25 Nm
44. Torque: 25 Nm
45. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01 Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,


47.
Install the cooling fan belt.
Rotate the engine clockwise twice, making
sure that the belt is seated on both pulleys
correctly.
48. Torque: 25 Nm
49. Refer to: Engine (303-01 Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Installation).

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Oil Pump
Removal
NOTES:

stands.
3. Refer to: Oil Pan Extension (303-01 Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

4. NOTE: Tsubaki timing drive only.
5. NOTE: INA timing drive only.
6.
8. CAUTION: Remove and discard the O-ring

seals.

Installation
1. Lubricate and install the new O-ring seals.
2. Torque:
M8 25 Nm
M6 12 Nm
3. Lubricate and install a new O-ring seal.

4. Torque: 12 Nm
5. Torque: 21 Nm
Install the lower timing chain making sure the

coloured chain links align correctly with the fuel
rail high-pressure fuel pumps camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket markings.
7. CAUTION: Make sure that the tensioner
spring is correctly located.
NOTE: Tsubaki timing drive only.
Torque: 21 Nm

coloured chain links align correctly with the fuel rail
high-pressure fuel pumps camshaft and crankshaft
sprocket markings.
NOTE: INA timing drive only.
Torque: 21 Nm
10. Refer to: Oil Pan Extension (303-01 Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Oil Restrictor
Removal
1. Refer to: Timing Drive Components - Assembly Part Number:

INA Timing Drive (303-01D, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Timing Drive Components - Assembly Part Number:
Tsubaki Timing Drive (303-01D, Removal and Installation).
2.
Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Timing Cover
Special Tool(s)
303-1433
Removal


stands.

4. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

NOTE: Discard the seal.
6. Refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

7. Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

8.
9.

coolant.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Installation




sequence.
Torque: 12 Nm

sequence.
Torque: 12 Nm


within 7 minutes.

stage.
7. Torque:
M6 12 Nm
M8 20 Nm
9. Torque: 12 Nm
10. Torque: 12 Nm
11. Torque: 25 Nm
12. Torque: 12 Nm

tightening.
Torque: 40 Nm
14.
15. Torque: 25 Nm
16. Torque: 25 Nm
17.
18.
19.
20. Refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,
21. Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

Torque: 12 Nm
23. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,


26. Check and top up the engine oil.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Timing Drive Components Assembly Part
Number: INA Timing Drive
Special Tool(s)
303-1445
Timing Tool – Camshaft Alignment
303-1447
Timing Tool
303-1448
Locking Tool
303-1452
Camshaft Rotating Tool
303-1482
Tensioner Tool
Removal
CAUTION: Check all timing components for wear and install new components if required.
NOTES:


stands.
3. Refer to: Timing Cover (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

4.
6. CAUTION: If the noted postion of the woodruff

key is at the 9 o'clock position, then a new flexplate
must be installed. If the woodruff key is in the 6
o'clock position then proceed with the next step.
Note the position of the crankshaft woodruff key.
7.
8.
9.
10. CAUTION: If the variable valve timing (VVT)
units are knocked or dropped then the VVT must be
replaced.
Remove the timing chain with the VVT units.
11.
12.
13.
14. CAUTION: If the VVT is knocked or dropped
then the VVT must be replaced.
15.
16. CAUTION: Discard the friction washer.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Install a new friction washer.
2. Torque: 12 Nm
3.
Install the special tool to each Camshaft.
Torque: 10 Nm
4.
Carefully rotate the camshafts if the position
is not as shown.
5.
Install the special tool 303-1445 to the rear
of the camshafts making sure the key way's
are correctly located into each slot on each of
the camshafts.
6. CAUTIONS:
Do not overturn the camshafts.
Tighten the wing nuts finger tight. Failure to

components.
Using a suitable tool, carefully rock the

camshaft clockwise then anti-clockwise. Turn
the special tool locking nuts until there is no
movement left in camshafts.
Repeat steps 3- 6 for the camshafts on the
other cylinder head.
7. CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the camshaft to rotate.
If the VVT is knocked or dropped then the VVT

must be replaced.
Install the timing chain with the variable

valve timing (VVT) units.
8.
Make sure that all the timing chain alignment marks are in
the positions shown.
9. Torque: 25 Nm
10. Make sure the tensioner piston is fully extended.

Then fully depress and lock the tensioner piston with
the grenade pin before installation, failure to do this
may result in damage to the engine.
11. CAUTION: Do not release the timing chain
tensioner locking pin at this stage.
Torque: 10 Nm
12. CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the camshafts to rotate.

must be replaced.
Install the timing chain with the VVT units.

13.
14. Torque: 25 Nm

Torque: 10 Nm
17.
18. CAUTION: Do not use mechanical force.
Make sure that the tensioners are fully deployed.
19.
Release and reposition the oil suction tube to
one side.
20.
21. CAUTIONS:
Apply the torque to the end of the special tool.
Make sure that the torque wrench is aligned

with the special tool as illustrated in the graphic.
Install the torque wrench to the special tool.

Torque: 35 Nm
22. CAUTION: Make sure that the torque wrench

does not move whilst tightening the VVT bolts.
NOTE: Make sure to tighten the exhaust VVT

unit bolts first.
Torque: 32 Nm
23.
Install the oil suction tube.
Torque: 10 Nm
24.
25.
26.
Raise and support the engine, then install the special tool.
27. CAUTIONS:


Torque: 35 Nm

NOTE: Make sure to tighten the inlet VVT unit

bolts first.
Torque: 32 Nm
29.
Remove the special tool and lower the engine.
30.
Torque: 100 Nm
31.
Torque: 20 Nm
32.
33.
34.
35.
36. CAUTION: Install the crankshaft pulley bolt

with an M16 washer to prevent damage to the
crankshaft on installation.
Torque: 50 Nm
37.
38. Rotate the engine two complete turns clockwise.

40.
41.
42.
43. CAUTIONS:
If the special tool cannot be installed, return to

step 22 of the installation until the special tool 303-
1445 is installed correctly.
If directed to step 22, make sure that the VVT

unit retaining bolts are loosened prior to installing
the special tool(s).
44. CAUTION: If the special tool cannot be

installed, the timing chain installation steps must be
repeated.
45.
46.
47.
48. Torque: 10 Nm


Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Timing Drive Components Assembly Part
Number: Tsubaki Timing Drive
Special Tool(s)
303-1445
303-1447
Timing Tool
303-1448
Locking Tool
303-1452
303-1482
Tensioner Tool
Removal


stands.

3.

6. Refer to: Timing Cover (303-01 Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal

and Installation).
7.
8.
9.

replaced.

11.
12.
13.


15.
16. CAUTION: Discard the friction washers.

Installation
1. CAUTION: Install new friction washers.
2. Torque: 12 Nm
3.
Install the special tool to the LH bank
Camshafts.
Torque: 10 Nm
4.
is not as shown.
5.
the camshafts.
6. CAUTIONS:

components.

7. CAUTIONS:

must be replaced.

8.
9. Torque: 25 Nm

Torque: 10 Nm
11. CAUTIONS:

must be replaced.
12.
13. Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
16.
one side.
17.
18. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the torque wench is aligned


Torque: 35 Nm


unit bolts first.
Torque: 32 Nm
20.
Torque: 10 Nm
21.
22. CAUTIONS:


Torque: 35 Nm


bolts first.
Torque: 32 Nm
24.
25.
26.
27.

Torque: 50 Nm
29.
31.
32.
33.

35. CAUTIONS:



repeated.
37.
38.
39.
40. Torque: 10 Nm
and Installation).

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Valve Cover LH
Special Tool(s)
303-1446
Valve Cover Alignment Tool
Removal
NOTES:
2. Refer to: Air Cleaner LH (303-12, Removal and Installation).
4.
5.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

sealing material.
Use lint free cloth.

Installation of the valve cover and tightening

must be carried out within 7 minutes of applying
the sealant.
NOTE: Apply two beads of silcone gasket

sealant (Loctite 5901) as shown on the illustration.
The application of the sealant must be 1.5mm
diameter 12mm long. Install the valve cover
immediately after applying the sealant. The cover
should be fitted directly to the head without
smearing the sealant or the seals.

sequence.
Torque: 13 Nm
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Valve Cover RH
Special Tool(s)
303-1446
Removal
NOTES:
2. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T-Connector (303-12, Removal

and Installation).
3. Refer to: Air Cleaner RH (303-12, Removal and Installation).
5.
6.
7.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

sealing material.


the sealant.


sequence.
Torque: 13 Nm
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Block Oil Gallery Plug
Removal
NOTES:

stands.
3. Refer to: Catalytic Converter RH (309-00, Removal and

Installation).
4.
5.
6.
7. Torque: 10 Nm
8. Torque: 10 Nm
9. Torque: 12 Nm
10.
material.
Torque:
Stage 1:40 Nm
Stage 2:180°
Installation

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Assembly Part Number:
INA Timing Drive
Removal
NOTE: Some illustrations may show the engine removed for clarity.

stands.
3. Refer to: Oil Pan Extension (303-01C, Removal and

Installation).
4.
5.
6.
7. CAUTION: Take extra care when removing the
component, prevent damage to the mating faces.
Installation

2. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the

mating faces.
Torque: 12 Nm
3. Torque: 21 Nm
4. Torque: 12 Nm
5. Install the lower timing chain making sure the

sprocket markings.
Torque: 21 Nm

Installation).

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Assembly Part Number:
Tsubaki Timing Drive
Removal

stands.

Installation).
4.
5.
6.
Installation


mating faces.
Torque: 12 Nm
3. Torque: 21 Nm
4. Torque: 12 Nm

Torque: 21 Nm

Installation).

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Lower Timing Cover
Special Tool(s)
303-1433
Removal

stands.
3. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05C, Removal and

Installation).
4. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01C, Removal and

Installation).
5.
6. Refer to: Brake Vacuum Pump - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L

Petrol (206-07, Removal and Installation).
7.
Installation
1. Apply RTV sealant WSE-M4G323-A6 (Loctite

within 7 minutes.


stage.

sequence.
Torque:
M6 12 Nm
M8 20 Nm
4. Torque: 12 Nm


tightening.
Torque: 40 Nm
7. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05C, Removal and
Installation).
8. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01D, Removal and

Installation).
engine.


supercharger:

12.
the engine.
Check for leaks.
13. CAUTIONS:

14.
15.
16.
17.
the instructions.
18.
within 2 seconds.
19.
the instructions.
level reading.
engine oil.



23.
26.
27.
28.
29.
the instructions.
Installation).
31. Torque: 10 Nm
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Timing Chain Tensioner Right
Removal
All vehicles
2. Refer to: Health and Safety Precautions (100-00, Description and

Operation).
3. Refer to: Fuel System Pressure Release - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C

5.0L Petrol (310-00, General Procedures).
4. Refer to: Engine Cover - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (501-
5.
6. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T-Connector (303-12C, Removal

and Installation).
7.
8. WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted

tobacco or open flame of any type when working on
or near any fuel related components. Highly
flammable mixtures are always present and may
ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.

10. Remove the front right wheel and tire.
11.
12.
13.
14. Refer to: Generator (414-02C, Removal and Installation).
15. Refer to: Steering Column Lower Shaft (211-04, Removal and
Installation).
16.

17.
18.
All vehicles
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Using a suitable hydraulic jack, raise and support the

engine.
Position the engine mount to one side for access to the
fuel pipes.
Remove the fuel pipes.
25. Carefully lower the engine onto the engine mounts.
Torque: 20 Nm
26.
27.
28.
29. Refer to: Lower Timing Cover (303-01D, Removal and
Installation).
30.
31. CAUTION: Make sure the tension is maintained

on the timing chain.
32. Torque: 10 Nm
33.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Torque: 25 Nm
2. Remove cable tie from the timing chain.
3. NOTE: The piston is shown removed from

tensioner for clarity.
Make sure the piston is fully compressed and free to

move before installing the grenade pin into the
tensioner. Failure to do this may result in damage to
the engine.
4.
5. CAUTION: Make sure when the tensioner is

fully compressed the guide does not touch the
tensioner body.
Installation).

8. •Apply RTV sealant WSE-M4G323-A6 (Loctite 5901G)

to the areas shown, and tighten the bolts within 7
minutes.
9.
10. NOTE: Tighten bolts in the indicated sequence.
Torque: 12 Nm
11. Torque: 12 Nm

engine.
fuel pipes.
Install the fuel pipes.
Torque:
Stage 1:45 Nm
Stage 2:60°
14. Torque: 110 Nm
15. CAUTIONS:

engine oil.
NOTES:


Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
17. NOTES:

final tightening.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
18. The fuel pipe unions must be re-torqued after the fuel pipes
have been completely installed.
Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm
21. Torque: 25 Nm
22. Torque: 25 Nm
23. Torque: 22 Nm
All vehicles
Installation).
26.
27.
28.
30. Install the front right wheel and tire.
Torque: 140 Nm
31.
32. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T-Connector (303-12C, Removal
and Installation).
33.

Removal
Special Tool(s)
303-1142
303-1143
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Body - V8 5.0L Petrol (502-02, Removal and

Installation).
2.
3.
4.
5.

tobacco or open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel related components. Highly
flammable vapors are always present and may
ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping

fluids.
coolant.
8.
9.
10.


correct.
Special Tool(s): 303-1142, 303-1143

Torque: 65 Nm
12.
coolant.
14.

CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are

Torque: 25 Nm
16.
17.
18. Torque: 25 Nm
19.
20.
21. Torque: 25 Nm
22.
23.
24. CAUTION: Only rotate the crankshaft

clockwise.
Mark the torque converter and flexplate

when removing the last torque converter
bolt. Make sure that the alignment mark is
visible through the inspection hole.


fluids.
26.
27.
28.
29. NOTE: This step requires the aid of another

technician.
Installation
Special Tool(s)
303-1142
303-1143
NOTES:
If a new engine is to be installed, remove the intake manifold to access the top transmission retaining bolts.

technician.
2. Torque: 40 Nm
3.

clockwise.
Make sure that the alignment mark is visible

through the inspection hole on installation of
the first torque converter bolt.
Torque: 63 Nm
5. Torque: 100 Nm
6. Torque: 100 Nm
7. Torque: 25 Nm
8. Torque: 25 Nm
10. Torque: 10 Nm
11. Torque: 10 Nm
12. Torque: 25 Nm
13. Torque: 25 Nm
14. Torque: 12 Nm
15. Torque: 10 Nm
16. Torque:
M8 Bolt 25 Nm
M6 Bolt 10 Nm
17.
Torque:
M8 Nut 9 Nm
M8 Bolt 25 Nm
M6 bolt 10 Nm


Torque: 25 Nm
19.
coolant.
21. Torque: 22 Nm
22. Torque: 22 Nm
Special Tool(s): 303-1142, 303-1143

Torque: 65 Nm
24.
25.
26.
27.
28. Refer to: Body - 5.0L (502-02, Removal and Installation).
29. Using the approved diagnostic equipment, clear the powertrain

control module (PCM) adaptions.
Published: 04-Apr-2012
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Engine Data
Engine Maximum Engine Maximum Engine Compression
Engine Description Capacity Torque (EEC) Power (EEC) Ratio Bore Stroke
• 90° "Vee" • 8 Cylinder 4.999 ccm 625 Nm at 2.500 - 375 kW at 6.000 - 9.5 ± 0.50 92.5 93 mm
• 32 Valves 5.500 RPM 6.500 RPM mm
Engine Firing Order
Firing Order
1:2:7:3:4:5:6:8
Engine Valve Clearance (cold)
Intake Valve Exhaust Valve
0.20 ±0.02 0.25 ±0.02
Spark Plugs
Specification Spark Plug Gap
ILKR6C-10 1 mm
Engine Oil WSS-M2C925-A
Sealant WSE-M4G323-A6
Capacities
Description Liters
Engine oil, initial fill 9.65
Engine oil, service fill with oil filter change 8.0
Item Specification
Cylinder head maximum permitted warp (mm) (flatnes specfication)
overall 0.08
Intake valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line) 117.21 ± 0.1
Exhaust valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line) 94.39 ± 0.1
Valve head diameter intake (mm) 36 ± 0.1
Valve head diameter exhaust (mm) 30 ± 0.1
Intake valve face angle (degrees) 44.875 ± 0.125
Exhaust valve face angle (degrees) 44.875 ± 0.125
Valve stem diameter intake (mm) 5.4705 ± 0.0075
Valve stem diameter exhaust (mm) 5.4625 ± 0.0075
Valve spring free length (mm) - inlet 46.1
Valve spring free length (mm) - exhaust 46.1
Valve spring installed height (mm) - inlet 35.74
Valve spring installed height (mm) - exhaust 35.1
Camshaft lobe lift intake (mm) 10
Camshaft lobe lift exhaust (mm) 9.36
Camshaft journal to cylinder head bearing surface clearance diametrical (mm) 0.025 - 0.065
Camshaft journal diameter - all positions 26.965 ± 0.01
Bearing diameter - all positions 27.01 ± 0.01
Camshaft journal maximum run out limit (mm)
Camshaft journals to end journals 0.03
Camshaft journals to adjacent journals 0.015
Camshaft journal maximum out of round (mm) - all journals 0.005
NOTE: A = Refer to procedure for correct torque sequence.

Engine cover mounting bolts 10 7 -
Supercharger belt idler/tensioner bracket retaining bolts 25 18 -
Secondary drive belt idler retaining bolts 40 30 -
Power steering pump pulley retaining bolts 25 18 -
Power steering pump bracket to engine retaining bolts 25 18 -
Starter motor retaining bolts 40 30 -
Engine mounting to engine mounting bracket retaining nuts 100 74 -
Engine mounting to subframe retaining bolts 56 41 -
Engine mounting bracket to engine retaining bolts 45 + 60° 33 + 60° -
Crankshaft damper pulley retaining LH threaded bolt 200 + 270° 148 + 180° -
Flexplate retaining bolts 45 + 90° 33 + 90° -
Exhaust manifold heat shield retaining bolts A - -
Exhaust manifold retaining bolts A - -
Engine wiring harness bracket retaining bolts 10 7 -
Coolant outlet pipe 10 7 -
Intercooler retaining bolts 25 18 -
Intake manifold retaining bolts 25 18 -
Oil Cooler retaining bolts 13 10 -
Knock sensor (KS) retaining bolt 20 14 -
Ignition coil retaining bolts 8 - 71
Spark plugs 20 15 -
Fuel rail retaining bolts A - -
High pressure fuel pipe retaining bolts A - -
High pressure fuel pump retaining bolts 12 9 -
Oil filter housing assembly retaining bolts 12 9 -
Oil filter cap 25 18 -
Lifting eye bolts 25 + 90° 18 + 90° -
Manifold absolute pressure and temperature (MAPT) sensor sensor retaining bolts 5 - 44
Variable valve timing (VVT) oil control solenoid retaining bolts 10 7 -
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor retaining bolts 10 7 -
Camshaft cover retaining bolts 13 10 -
Front upper timing cover retaining bolts 12 9 -
Front lower timing cover retaining bolts A - -
Engine rear cover retaining bolts A - -
VVT to camshaft retaining bolts 32 24 -
Camshaft bearing caps retaining bolts 11 8 -
Primary timing chain fixed guide retaining bolts 12 9 -
Primary timing chain tensioner retaining bolts 12 9 -
Primary timing chain tensioner guide blade retaining bolts 25 18 -
Auxiliary chain tensioner guide retaining bolts 21 15 -
Auxiliary chain fixed guide retaining bolt 12 9 -
Oil pump sprocket retaining bolt 21 15 -
Engine oil level (EOL) sensor retaining bolt 12 9 -
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor retaining bolt 10 7 -
Oil sump body to engine retaining bolts 25 18 -
Oil pan drain plug 24 18 -
Oil transfer tube to Oil pan body retaining bolts 11 8 -
Oil pump to engine block retaining bolts 25 18 -
Pick-up pipe to oil pump retaining bolts 12 9 -
Windage tray retaining bolts 25 18 -
Piston cooling jet retaining bolts 12 9 -
Engine block coolant draining plug 50 37 -
Cooling fan pulley 25 18 -
Connecting Rod bolts
Stage 1 10 7 -
Stage 2 50 37 -
Main bearing cap
M10 bolt Stage 2 57 + 70° 42 + 70° -
M8 bolt Stage 2 33 + 75° 24 + 75° -
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine
EXTERNAL VIEW
INTRODUCTION
The 5.0L SC (supercharger) gasoline engine is a liquid cooled V8 unit featuring direct fuel injection, four overhead
camshafts and four valves per cylinder. All four camshafts incorporate VCT (variable camshaft timing).
The main structural components of the engine are all manufactured from aluminum alloy. The engine is built around a
very stiff, lightweight, enclosed V, deep skirt cylinder block. A structural windage tray is bolted to the bottom of the
cylinder block to further improve the block stiffness, minimize NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) and help reduce
oil foaming. To further enhance the stiffness of the lower engine structure, a heavily ribbed sump is installed. The
sump also helps to reduce engine noise.
Engine Structure


1 - LH (left hand) cylinder head (bank B)
2 - Cylinder block
3 - Windage tray
4 - Sump
5 - RH (right hand) cylinder head (bank A)
CYLINDER BLOCK
The cylinder block is a 90 degree configuration with cast-in iron cylinder liners and an open deck die-cast coolant
jacket. The low volume coolant jacket gives good warm-up times and low piston noise levels. The longitudinal flow
design of the coolant jacket, with a single cylinder head coolant transfer port in each bank, provides good rigidity and
head gasket sealing.
Cylinder Numbering

A - ISO standard cylinder numbering
B - DIN standard cylinder numbering
ISO cylinder firing order 1,2,7,3,4,5,6,8
DIN cylinder firing order 1,5,4,2,6,3,7,8
Engine Data Location


1 - Engine data location
Engine data is marked on the cylinder block at the rear of the RH cylinder bank.
CRANKSHAFT
The crankshaft is made from spheroidal graphite cast iron, which, compared with grey cast iron, has higher
mechanical strength, ductility and increased shock resistance. The undercut and rolled fillets also improve strength.
Eight counter-balance weights ensure low vibration levels and the large, cross-drilled main bearing journals are
designed to contribute to stiffness.
An oil groove in the upper half of each main bearing transfers the oil into the crankshaft for lubrication of the
connecting rod bearings. A thrust washer is installed each side of the top half of the center main bearing.
Crankshaft Data Location

1 - Pin journal classification and plant identification
2 - Main journal classification
3 - Date and time codes
The main bearings are numbered 1 to 5 starting from the front of the engine. There are five grades of main bearing
available, each being color coded. Journal sizes are marked on the rear of the crankshaft.
For additional information, refer to: Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter (303-00 Engine System - General
Crankshaft Installation


1 - Coolant drain plug
2 - Torque converter access plug
3 - Drive plate
4 - Rear cover
5 - Main bearing cap
6 - Identification mark
7 - Front cover
8 - Front pulley
The main bearing caps are made from cast iron and are cross bolted to increase rigidity. An identification mark on
the bearing cap faces the front of the engine.
At the front of the crankshaft, a tuned torsional vibration damper is incorporated into the crankshaft front pulley. At
the rear of the crankshaft a pressed steel drive plate, with a steel starter ring gear, is installed to transfer drive from
the engine to the transmission. The reluctor ring for the CKP (crankshaft position) sensor is integrated into the
perimeter of the drive plate.
The crankshaft seals are located in the front and rear covers.
PISTONS AND CONNECTING RODS

The diameter of each piston is graded and precisely matched to each cylinder bore to help reduce noise. In the
vertical plane, the pistons have a slight barrel form, which helps to ensure a reliable oil film is maintained between
the piston and the cylinder bore. A solid film lubricant coating is applied to both reaction faces of the piston to reduce
wear and improve fuel economy.
A three-ring piston-sealing system is used. The steel top ring is treated with a PVD (physical vapor deposition)
peripheral coating. PVD is a coating technique where material can be deposited with improved properties to ensure
good cylinder bore compatibility and wear resistance. A Napier center ring helps cylinder pressure and oil
management, while the three-piece oil control lower ring is produced from nitrided steel.
The pistons are cooled with engine oil from four piston cooling jets installed under the valley of the cylinder block.
Each piston cooling jet sprays oil onto the underside of the two adjacent pistons, one from each cylinder bank.
The connecting rods are forged from high strength steel. The cap is fracture-split from the rod to ensure precision re-
assembly for bearing shell alignment. There are three grades of large end bearing available, each being color coded.
For additional information, refer to: Connecting Rod Large End Bore (303-00 Engine System - General Information,
Cap Alignment with Connecting Rod


1 - Alignment marks
2 - Connecting rod
3 - Cap
4 - Bearings
The correct alignment of the cap with the connecting rod is indicated by marks on adjacent faces of the two
components.
Connecting Rod and Piston Orientation

A - Front of engine
1 - Alignment mark
2 - LH side (bank B)
3 - Alignment mark
4 - RH side (bank A)
5 - Piston orientation arrow
The orientation of the connecting rods and pistons on the crankshaft are given below:
Bank A - The arrow on the piston crown must face the front of the engine and the cap and connecting rod
alignment marks must face the rear of the engine.
Bank B - The arrow on the piston crown must face the front of the engine and the cap and connecting rod
alignment marks must face the front of the engine.
CYLINDER HEADS
NOTE: RH (right-hand) (A bank) cylinder head shown, LH (left-hand) (B bank) cylinder head similar.
The cylinder heads are manufactured in gravity die cast aluminum alloy and are unique for each cylinder bank. Deep-
seated bolts reduce distortion and secure the cylinder heads to the cylinder block.
Each cylinder is served by four valves. To help achieve the required gas-flow characteristics, these are arranged
asymmetrically around the cylinder bore. Each cylinder has a centrally mounted fuel injector and spark plug.
The cylinder head gasket is of a multi-layer steel construction.
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
NOTE: LH (B bank) installation shown, RH (A bank) installation similar.


1 - Cylinder head
2 - Gasket
3 - Heat shield
4 - Gasket
5 - Exhaust manifold
6 - Bolt (8 off)
7 - Heat shield
8 - Bolt (4 off)
9 - Spacer (8 off)
The high SiMo (silicon molybdenum) cast iron exhaust manifolds are unique for each cylinder bank. Each exhaust
manifold installation includes two metal gaskets and two heat shields. Spacers on the securing bolts allow the
manifolds to expand and contract with changes of temperature while maintaining the clamping loads.
VALVE TRAIN


1 - Inlet camshafts
2 - Exhaust camshaft
3 - Inverted tooth timing chain
4 - Nylon chain guide
5 - Auxiliary chain tensioner
6 - Auxiliary drive chain
7 - Oil pump drive
8 - Auxiliary drive camshaft
9 - Timing chain tensioner
10 - Tensioner lever
11 - VCT unit
12 - VCT solenoids
The lightweight valve train provides good economy and noise levels and is chain driven from the crankshaft.
Double overhead camshafts on each cylinder head operate the valves. For each cylinder head, an inverted tooth
timing chain transfers drive from the crankshaft to the VCT unit on the front of each camshaft. Graded tappets
enable setting of inlet and exhaust valve clearances.
Each timing chain has a hydraulic tensioner operated by engine oil pressure. The chain tensioners incorporate a
ratchet mechanism, which maintains tension while the engine is stopped to eliminate start-up noise. The chains are
lubricated with engine oil from jets located at the front of the engine block. Nylon chain guides control chain motion
on the drive side.
Variable Camshaft Timing


1 - VCT units
2 - Intake camshaft VCT solenoid
3 - Camshaft position sensors
4 - Exhaust camshaft VCT solenoid
The VCT system varies the timing of the intake and exhaust camshafts to deliver optimum engine power, efficiency
and emissions. The timing of the intake camshafts has a range of 62 degrees of crankshaft angle. The timing of the
exhaust camshafts has a range of 50 degrees of crankshaft angle.
In the base timing position:
The intake camshafts are fully retarded.

The exhaust camshafts are fully advanced.
VCT Operating Ranges
Camshaft Valve Opens Valve Closes
Intake 29 degrees BTDC (before top dead center) to 33 degrees ATDC (after top dead 207 to 269 degrees
center) ATDC
Exhaust 244 to 194 degrees BTDC 6 to 56 degrees ATDC
The system consists of a VCT unit and a VCT solenoid for each camshaft. The ECM (engine control module) controls
the system using PWM (pulse width modulation) signals to the VCT solenoids.
The torsional energy generated by the valve springs and the inertia of the valve train components are used to
operate the system.
Variable Camshaft Timing Units
The VCT units change the position of the camshafts in relation to the timing chains.


1 - Bolt (3 off)
2 - VCT unit
3 - Filter
4 - Camshaft
5 - Inner plate
6 - Housing and sprocket
7 - Rotor assembly
8 - Reed plate
9 - Spring and lock pin
10 - Spring (3 off)
12 - Spring (2 off)
14 - Spring
15 - Dowel pin
16 - Bias spring
17 - Snap ring
18 - Reluctor ring
19 - Center plate
20 - Snap ring
21 - Screw (6 off)
22 - Spool valve
23 - Outer plate
Each VCT unit is attached to the camshaft by three bolts. A rotor assembly and a reed plate are installed inside a
sprocket housing, which consists of a sprocket, an outer plate and an inner plate held together by six screws.
A reluctor ring, for the CMP (camshaft position) sensor, a center plate and a bias spring are installed at the front of
the VCT unit. The ends of the bias spring locate on the center plate assembly and the sprocket housing, to give a
turning moment to the camshaft in the advance direction. A snap ring locates the reluctor ring on to a sleeve
installed in the center of the rotor assembly. The opposite end of the sleeve locates in a bore in the front face of the
camshaft, which contains a filter.
A spring and spool valve are installed in the rotor assembly sleeve and retained by a snap ring. The spring keeps the
spool valve in contact with the armature of the related VCT solenoid.
Each VCT unit is supplied with engine oil from an oil gallery in the cylinder head, through the camshaft front bearing
cap and a bore in the center of the camshaft.
Variable Camshaft Timing Solenoids
The VCT solenoids control the position of the spool valves in the VCT units.
The VCT solenoids are installed in the front upper timing covers, immediately in front of their related VCT units. Each
VCT solenoid is secured with two screws and sealed with an O-ring. A two pin electrical connector provides the
interface with the engine harness.
Each VCT solenoid incorporates a spindle that acts on the spool valve in the related VCT unit to advance and retard
the camshaft timing. The VCT solenoids operate independently and are controlled by a PWM signal from the ECM.
Variable Camshaft Timing Operation
When the engine is running, the compression and expansion of the valve springs causes momentary increases and
decreases in the torque acting on the camshafts. These momentary changes of torque are sensed in the VCT units
and used to change the camshaft timing.
Camshaft Torsional Energy (For a Single Valve Event)


A - Camshaft torque
B - Camshaft rotation (degrees)
C - Valve opening
D - Peak lift
E - Valve closing
1 - 1000 rev/min
2 - 4000 rev/min
3 - 7000 rev/min
4 - Inertia effects from valve train rotating components
5 - Force caused by valve spring
6 - Bias torque from friction
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Base Timing
NOTE: Intake camshaft VCT unit shown. For exhaust camshaft VCT unit, read advance for retard and retard for
advance.


1 - Advance chamber
2 - Retard chamber
3 - Sprocket housing
4 - Rotor assembly
5 - Lock pin
6 - Sleeve
7 - Engine oil supply from camshaft
8 - Inlet check valve
9 - Lock pin drain
10 - Spool valve
11 - Advance check valve
12 - Retard check valve
At engine start-up, once the engine oil pressure in the camshaft is sufficient to open the inlet check valve, engine oil
flows across the spool valve, through the advance and retard check valves and into the advance and retard
chambers. During the start cycle, the ECM signals the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve into the sleeve and
connect the lock pin to inlet oil pressure. The inlet oil pressure causes the lock pin to retract from the inner plate and
unlock the rotor assembly and camshaft from the sprocket housing.
There is a constant supply of oil to the VCT to ensure the unit remains filled during operation.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Advance

To advance the camshaft timing, the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve so that the
advance chamber oil passage is closed and the retard chamber oil passage is connected to inlet oil.
Each momentary increase of the torque acting on the camshaft generates a pressure pulse in the retard chamber. Oil
moves from the retard chamber, through the spool valve and the advance check valve to the advance chamber, to
equalize the pressures in the two chambers. The displacement of oil from the retard chamber causes the rotor
assembly to advance in relation to the sprocket housing. Each momentary decrease of torque acting on the camshaft
also generates a pressure pulse in the advance chamber, but, with the advance chamber oil passage closed, no
movement of oil between the advance and retard chambers occurs and the rotor assembly cannot move in the retard
direction.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Null

Once the camshaft has reached the required timing position the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to set the
spool valve in the null position. In the null position, the advance and retard chamber oil passages are both closed by
the spool valve and the rotor assembly is hydraulically locked to the sprocket housing.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Retard

To retard the camshaft timing, the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve to close the
retard chamber oil passage and connect the advance chamber oil passage to the inlet oil.
Each momentary decrease of the torque acting on the camshaft causes oil to transfer from the advance chamber,
through the spool valve and the retard check valve to the retard chamber, and so retard the camshaft timing.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM


1 - Oil pump outlet tube
2 - Anti-drain valve
3 - Oil cooler
4 - Oil filter
5 - Piston cooling jet (4 off)
6 - Timing chain lubrication jet (2 off)
7 - Oil evacuation tube
8 - Oil pump
9 - Oil pick-up
10 - Oil temperature and level sensor
The oil pump is attached to the underside of the windage tray. The input shaft of the oil pump is driven from the
front of the crankshaft, by the auxiliary chain, at 0.87 engine speed.
The oil pump draws oil from the sump through a centrally mounted pick-up pipe. The oil is pressurized and pumped
through an output tube to the cylinder block. After passing through an anti-drain valve and a plate type oil cooler,
the oil is filtered by a replaceable cartridge installed on the front of the RH cylinder head.
The output from the oil filter is distributed through oil galleries in the cylinder heads and cylinder block. All moving
parts are lubricated by pressure or splash oil. Pressurized oil is also provided for the VCT system, the timing chain
tensioners, the piston cooling jets and the timing chain lubrication jets.
The oil returns to the oil pan under gravity. Large drain holes through the cylinder heads and cylinder block ensure
the rapid return of the oil to the sump. System replenishment is through the oil filler cap on the LH cylinder head
cover.
An oil evacuation tube is installed to allow oil to be drawn from the sump. The upper end of the oil evacuation tube is
located under the oil filler cap.
An oil drain plug is installed in the RH side of the sump.

Oil Pump Nominal Operating Pressures
Engine Speed, rev/min Temperature, °C (°F) Pressure, bar (lbf/in 2 )
Idle 20 (68) 2.0 (29.0)
1500 20 (68) 6.0 (87.0)
3000 40 (104) 6.2 (90.0)
3000 110 (230) 5.0 (72.5)
3000 130 (266) 4.0 (58.0)
Oil Level Monitoring
Oil level monitoring is provided by an oil level and temperature sensor that measures the oil level in the sump. The
oil level can be displayed in the message center of the instrument cluster.
Oil Level and Temperature Sensor
The oil level and temperature sensor supplies the ECM with a signal containing the level and temperature of the oil in
the sump. The oil level and temperature sensor is secured to the bottom of the sump with three screws and sealed
with a gasket.
The oil level and temperature sensor sends an ultrasonic pulse vertically upward and measures the time taken for the
pulse to be reflected back from the top surface of the oil. This time is compared with the time taken for an ultrasonic
pulse to travel a reference distance within the oil level and temperature sensor to determine the oil level. The oil
level reading is combined with the oil temperature reading and transmitted in a PWM signal to the ECM.
Oil Level and Temperature Sensor Specifications
Feature Details
Power Source Battery Voltage
Level Accuracy ±2 mm (±0.08 in.) at temperatures of -30 °C (-22 °F)) and above; (±4 mm (±0.16 in.) at
temperatures below -30 °C (-22 °F))
Temperature ±2 °C (±3.6 °F)
Accuracy
Operating Level 116 to 147 mm (4.57 to 5.79 in.)
Range
Operating -40 to 160 °C (-40 to 320 °F)
Temperature Range
Oil Level Check
For additional information, refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01D, General Procedures).
For accuracy, oil level checks should be performed with the vehicle on level ground when the oil is hot. The vehicle
needs to stand for approximately 10 minutes, after the engine is switched off, to allow the oil to drain back into the
sump and the oil level to stabilize. The oil level system will not give a reading until the oil level has stabilized.
To check the oil level, make sure that the ignition is on, the engine stopped and the transmission is in P (park).
Access the vehicle information and settings menu, then select Oil Level Display from the Service Menu. An Engine
Oil Level sight glass will be displayed in the message center. The current oil level will be displayed in the sight glass.
One of the following messages will also be displayed:
If the oil level is within acceptable limits, the message Level OK is displayed.
If the oil level is less than acceptable, a message advising how much oil to add is displayed e.g. Add 1 Litre,
or Add 1 Quart, depending on the market.
If the message Overfilled is displayed, the oil level must be reduced to within acceptable limits before
starting the engine again.
If the message Not available is displayed, the oil level is still stabilizing. Wait 10 minutes and then recheck
level.
For additional information, refer to Diagnosis and Testing, Engine - 5.0L.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Oil Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Draining
scalding.
NOTE: Clean the components general area prior to dismantling.
1. CAUTION: Make sure the engine is warm.
Start the engine and allow to run for 10 minutes, stop the
engine.
2.

Installation).
4.
cover.
Make sure that the O-ring seal is exposed.
5. NOTES:
Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil to drain

from the oil filter housing.
6. Remove and discard the oil filter element.


Installation).
9. CAUTIONS:

drain.
NOTE: Discard the sealing washer.
Filling

NOTE: Install a new sealing washer.
Torque: 24 Nm

Installation).

clean engine oil.
first.
Torque: 25 Nm

engine.


supercharger:

6.
8.
the engine.
Check for leaks.
9. CAUTIONS:

10.
11.
12.
13.
the instructions.
14.
within 2 seconds.
15.
the instructions.
level reading.
oil.



19.
22.
23.
24.
25.
the instructions.
Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Oil Vacuum Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1484
303-1484-01
Draining
scalding.
NOTES:
1.
the engine.


Installation).
4.
cover.
5.
Special Tool(s): 303-1484, 303-1484-01
6.
7.
8. NOTE: Discard the O-ring seals.
Filling

clean engine oil.
first.
Torque: 25 Nm

engine.


supercharger:

4.
6.
the engine.
Check for leaks.
7. CAUTIONS:

8.
9.
10.
11.
the instructions.
12.
within 2 seconds.
13.
the instructions.
level reading.
oil.



17.
20.
21.
22.
23.
the instructions.
Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1447
Timing Tool
JLR-303-1621
Check
2. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a jack.

Always support the vehicle on safety stands.
Installation).
4.
NOTES:
Discard the sealing washer.
Collect the engine oil in a clean container.
6.
7. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the crankshaft is fully locked.
8. Using a suitable marker, mark the position of the crankshaft pulley as

illustrated.
9. NOTE: Discard the seal.
11. If
required,
carefully
adjust the
crankshaft
position to
allow
correct
installation
of the
special
tool.
Install the
Special
Tool(s):
JLR-303-
1621
12. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when adjusting the

crankshaft position.
NOTE: If the crankshaft timing tool cannot be installed,

adjustment of the fuel pump camshaft timing will be required.
If required, carefully adjust the crankshaft position to allow

correct installation of the special tool.

If the crankshaft timing tool cannot be installed, adjustment of
the fuel pump camshaft timing will be required.
Refer to: Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Adjustment (303-01B

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
13. Remove the Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1621
Torque: 12 Nm
16. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 24 Nm
19. CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle is left for 5 minutes from filling with oil
and that the engine oil level is reading at least minimum (by following Steps 22-
28), before starting the engine.
Fill the engine with oil - for filling values on vehicles without supercharger:
Refer to: Specifications (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Specifications).

Fill the engine with oil - for filling values on vehicles with supercharger:
Refer to: Specifications (303-01C Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

Specifications).
20. CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle has been left for 5 minutes from filling
with oil.

21.
Start the engine and allow to run for 10 minutes, stop the engine.
Check for leaks.
22. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the selector lever and the gearshift mechanism are in the park
(P) position.
23.
cluster menu.
24.
25.
Display.
26.
27.
Press the cruise control cancel button twice within 2 seconds.
28.
The message center display will revert to the normal display in
the trip computer.
Check that the oil level display shows an oil level reading.
Only after having started and run the engine for 10 minutes (as
indicated in Step 21), switch off the engine, then stabilizing for
10 minutes, take a reading from the oil level display and, if
29. NOTE: If instructed to follow Steps 22-28 in a previous step, return to Step 21
and continue the procedure.
30. Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil level to stabilize if there has been additional oil
top up.
31. NOTE: The following steps are to update the average oil level
value.

Press and hold the cruise control cancel button for more than 2
seconds.
32.
The message center display will revert to the normal display in the trip
computer.
35.
cluster menu.
36.
37.
Display.
38.
Make sure that the average oil level value has now been
updated.
Installation).
40. Torque: 10 Nm
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Adjustment
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1447
Timing Tool
JLR-303-1613
Adjustment

3. Refer to: Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check (303-01D, General

Procedures).

Installation).
Installation).
5. CAUTIONS:

Inspect the 3 timing chain oil nozzles for

signs of damage, install as necessary.
6. NOTE: Using a suitable tie strap, position

the tensioner to one side.

Torque: 12 Nm
Installation).
Installation).
9. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 24 Nm
engine.


supercharger:

14.
the engine.
Check for leaks.
15. CAUTIONS:

16.
17.
18.
19.
the instructions.
20.
within 2 seconds.
21.
the instructions.
level reading.
engine oil.



25.
28.
29.
30.
31.
the instructions.
Installation).
33. Torque: 10 Nm
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft LH
Removal
NOTES:

stands.

4. CAUTIONS:



Installation
1. CAUTIONS:




Torque: 3 Nm
sequence.
Torque: 12 Nm

position.
4. NOTES:


5. CAUTIONS:




Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft RH
Removal
NOTES:

stands.

INA Timing Drive (303-01, Removal and Installation).
4. CAUTIONS:



Installation
1. CAUTIONS:




Torque: 3 Nm

sequence.
Torque: 12 Nm

position.
4. NOTES:


5. CAUTIONS:



INA Timing Drive (303-01, Removal and Installation).

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Front Seal
Special Tool(s)
303-1434
Remover/Installer, Front Crankshaft Seal
Removal
2. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01, Removal and Installation).

Torque: 26 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Do not over tighten the crankshaft front seal. Failure to

Take extra care not to damage the seal.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Pulley
Special Tool(s)
303-1437
Crankshaft Damper Remover/Installer
303-1438
Crankshaft Damper Bolt Remover/Installer
303-1439
Crankshaft Damper Removal Plate
303-1440
Crankshaft Damper Removal/Installation Stud
303-1441
Crankshaft Damper Remover/Installer Body
303-1448
Locking Tool
Removal

stands.
3. Refer to: Radiator - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (303-03B Engine

Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).

5.
6.
7. CAUTION: Before removing the crankshaft

pulley bolt, note the numbers on the bolt head. If
the bolt head shows 10.9, the bolt must be
removed counter clockwise. If the bolt head shows
12.9, the bolt must be removed clockwise. Failure
the crankshaft.
Note the markings on the crankshaft pulley bolt.

8.
Special Tool(s): 303-1437, 303-1438
10. Torque: 65 Nm
12. NOTES:
The crankshaft pulley bolt will be very tight.
Discard the bolt after removal.
The graphic shows the step for LH thread

only, RH thread will be the opposite.
13.
14. NOTE: If the crankshaft damper is fitted with

an early RH thread crankshaft bolt then the pulley
can be removed with a standard puller.
16.

20.
21. CAUTION: Discard the friction washer after

removing the crankshaft pulley.
NOTE: Make sure to clean the threads in the

end of the crankshaft and that the crank nose is
free of any foreign materials.
22.
23.
Installation
1.
Apply RTV sealant to the crankshaft pulley
keyway.
Make sure that the RTV sealant is applied in
a 2mm diameter bead.
Make sure that when the RTV sealant is
applied that the RTV sealant is level with
the top of the keyway.
2. CAUTION: Install a new friction washer before

installing the crankshaft pulley.
NOTES:
Make sure to clean the threads in the end of

the crankshaft and that the crank nose is free of
any foreign materials.
Skip to step 11 for engines fitted with early

RH thread crankshaft bolt.
6. CAUTION: Rotate the crankshaft pulley

installation tool anti-clockwise until the pulley is
fully located, do not over tighten. Failure to do this
may result in damge to the components.
8.

installed.

Torque: 65 Nm

installed.
14. Torque: 65 Nm

Torque: 200 Nm
17. NOTE: The use of a torque multiplyer capable

of 600Nm will be required.
Torque: 270°
Make sure that the socket is turned through
270 degrees not the torque wrench.
18.

installed.

Torque: 65 Nm
21.
22.

24. Refer to: Radiator - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (303-03B Engine

Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Rear Seal
Special Tool(s)
303-1442
303-1443
Removal
2.
Installation
Special Tool(s): 303-1442, 303-1443

sequence.
Torque: 11 Nm
3. Torque: 11 Nm

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Head LH
Removal
NOTES:
1. Remove the battery for access.

stands.
3. Refer to: Camshaft LH (303-01, Removal and Installation).
4. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold LH (303-01, Removal and

Installation).
5.
6.
7.
coolant.

coolant.

loss.
11.
13.

15. CAUTIONS:
If a new cylinder head has been installed

then new tappets must be installed.
If the cylinder head is being removed without

a new component being installed, the tappets must
be installed in their original positions.
16.
17.
Installation
1. CAUTION: An acceptable flatness of the

cylinder head is 0.1mm.
Check cylinder head face for distortion, across the

center and from corner to corner.

CAUTIONS:


NOTE: Install a new cylinder head gasket.


sequence.
Torque: 20 Nm
sequence.
Torque: 35 Nm

sequence.
Tighten the bolts 1 to 10, a further 90 degrees.

sequence.
Tighten the bolts 1 to 10, a further 120 degrees.
7. Torque: 25 Nm
sequence.
Torque: 12 Nm
9. CAUTIONS:
If a new cylinder head has been installed

then new tappets must be installed.
If the cylinder head is being removed without

a new component being installed, the tappets must
be installed in their original positions.
10. Torque: 12 Nm
11. Torque: 10 Nm
12.
Torque: 10 Nm
14.
coolant.
Torque: 10 Nm
16.
17.
18. Torque: 20 Nm
19. Torque: 20 Nm
20. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold LH (303-01, Removal and

Installation).
21. Refer to: Camshaft LH (303-01, Removal and Installation).

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Head RH
Special Tool(s)
303-1492
Guide Sleeve, Cylinder Head Bolt
Removal
NOTES:


stands.
3. Refer to: Supercharger (303-12C Intake Air Distribution and

Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
4. Refer to: Camshaft RH (303-01C Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

5. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold RH (303-01C Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L


coolant.

coolant.
8.
9.
10. CAUTIONS:
Discard the seal.

11.
12.
13.

loss.
15.
17.

20.
21. CAUTIONS:



Installation
1. CAUTION: An acceptable flatness of the cylinder head is

0.1mm.
NOTE: For cylinder head with distortion above the

maximum allowance, the cylinder head material must be
measured.
Check cylinder head face for distortion, across the center and
from corner to corner.

Torque: 20 Nm

Torque: 35 Nm
5. Tighten the bolts 1 to 10, a further 90 degrees.

6. Tighten the bolts 1 to 10, a further 120 degrees.
7. Torque: 25 Nm
8. Torque: 12 Nm
9. CAUTIONS:


10. Torque: 25 Nm
11. Refer to: Camshaft RH (303-01C Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
13. CAUTION: A new O-ring seal is to be installed.
NOTE: Install a new engine oil filter.

14. Torque: 12 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
16.
loss.
18. CAUTIONS:
Install a new seal.
Torque: 12 Nm
19.
20.

coolant.
Torque: 10 Nm
22.
23. Torque: 20 Nm
24. Torque: 20 Nm
25. Torque: 25 Nm
26. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold RH (303-01C Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L

27. Refer to: Supercharger (303-12C Intake Air Distribution and

Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Mount LH
Special Tool(s)
303-1142
303-1143
Removal
NOTES:


Installation).
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

correct.
12.
Installation
1.
Torque:
1 45 Nm
1 60°
2 56 Nm


correct.
Special Tool(s): 303-1142, 303-1143

Torque: 65 Nm
3.
4.
5. Torque: 100 Nm
6. Torque: 12 Nm
7. Torque: 12 Nm
8. Install the LH front wheel and tire.

Installation).

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Mount RH
Special Tool(s)
303-1142
303-1143
Removal
NOTES:

stands.



and Installation).
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

NOTES:

13.
15.
Installation
1. Torque:
1 45 Nm
1 60°
2 56 Nm
2. Torque: 100 Nm

NOTES:

Special Tool(s): 303-1142, 303-1143

Torque: 65 Nm
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
and Installation).


Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust Manifold LH
Special Tool(s)
303-1444-01
303-1444-02
Removal
NOTES:




5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
NOTES:
Discard the gasket.


Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

Make sure the anti-seize compound does not

contact the catalyst monitor sensor tip.
If accidentally dropped or knocked install a

new sensor.
Make sure the catalyst monitor sensor wiring

harness is not twisted more than 180 degrees and
is not in contact with either the exhaust or
driveshaft.
NOTE: If the original sensor is to be installed,

apply lubricant meeting specification ESE-M12A4-A
to the thread of the sensor.
Torque: 45 Nm
3. NOTE: If a new cylinder head is installed use


installed.

position.
Torque: 10 Nm

installed.

position.
Torque: 10 Nm
7. Torque: 18 Nm
8. Torque: 3 Nm
9. Torque: 10 Nm
10. Torque: 10 Nm
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.


Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust Manifold RH
Special Tool(s)
303-1444-01
303-1444-02
Removal
NOTES:
All vehicles


stands.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
All vehicles
12.
13. CAUTIONS:
Discard the bolts.
NOTES:
Discard the gasket.


Installation
All vehicles
1. Torque: 45 Nm

similar.

similar.
NOTE: If a new cylinder head is installed use

4. CAUTIONS:

position.
Torque: 10 Nm

similar.
6. CAUTIONS:

position.
Torque: 10 Nm

similar.
Torque: 18 Nm
8.

9. Torque: 22 Nm
10.
All vehicles
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.


Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Flexplate
Removal

stands.
3. Refer to: Transmission - 5.0L (307-01, Removal).
4. CAUTIONS:

tightening.


removal.
NOTES:


diagonally.
Torque:
Stage 1:45 Nm
Stage 2:90°
Installation

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Oil Cooler
Removal
NOTES:


stands.
3. Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01 Engine - 5.0L
NA V8 - AJ133, General Procedures).
4. Refer to: Supercharger (303-12 Intake Air Distribution and

Filtering - 5.0L SC V8 - AJ133, Removal and Installation).
5.
6.
7. CAUTIONS:
Torque: 13 Nm
8. CAUTION: Make sure that these components
are installed to the noted removal position.
9. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that these components are


Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

tightening.

Install the new seals.

sequence.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Oil Filter Element
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that the correct tools are used to remove and install the oil filter element cap.

Installation).
2.
3.
4.
Installation
1.
2. Torque: 25 Nm

Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Oil Pan Extension
Special Tool(s)
303-1433
303-1442
303-1443
303-1448
Locking Tool
Removal
NOTES:


3. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01 Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L

4. Refer to: Engine (303-01 Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

Removal).
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14. CAUTIONS:


removal.
NOTES:

15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
23.

fluids.

fluids.
26.

fluids.

fluids.
29.
30. NOTE: Discard the component.
31.
32.
33. NOTE: Make sure to use the aluminium lug
provided on the oil pan extension to lever against.

Installation
1. Torque: 10 Nm
2. CAUTIONS:


sealing material.


sequence.
Torque: 25 Nm

within 7 minutes.

NOTE: Install new lower timing cover.

stage.

sequence.
Torque:
M6 12 Nm
M8 20 Nm
8. Torque: 12 Nm
9.

sequence.
Torque: 11 Nm
12. Torque: 11 Nm
13.
Torque: 11 Nm



Torque: 11 Nm

18.



Torque: 11 Nm

22.

cover to one side.

Torque: 11 Nm

cover to one side.

Torque: 11 Nm
25. CAUTIONS:

engine oil.
NOTES:

26.
Torque: 21 Nm
27.
Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
28. NOTES:

final tightening.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
29. CAUTION: Make sure that a new component

is installed.
Torque: 21 Nm
30. Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 8 Nm
31.
32. Torque: 25 Nm
33.

Torque: 25 Nm
35.
36. Torque: 12 Nm

sequence.
Torque: 48 Nm
38.
39. CAUTIONS:

tightening.

NOTES:


diagonally.
Torque:
Stage 1:45 Nm
Stage 2:90°
40.
41. Torque: 48 Nm

tightening.
Torque: 40 Nm
43. Torque: 25 Nm
44. NOTE: Install bolts finger tight.
45. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01 Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L

46. Torque: 25 Nm
47. Refer to: Engine (303-01 Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Installation).

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Oil Pump
Removal

stands.
3. Refer to: Oil Pan Extension (303-01D, Removal and

Installation).
6.
8. CAUTION: Remove and discard the O-ring

seals.

Installation
1. Lubricate and install the new O-ring seals.
2. Torque:
M8 25 Nm
M6 12 Nm
3. Lubricate and install a new O-ring seal.

4. Torque: 12 Nm
5. Torque: 21 Nm

NOTE: Tsubaki timing drive only.
Torque: 21 Nm

sprocket markings.
NOTE: INA timing drive only.
Torque: 21 Nm

Installation).

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Timing Cover
Special Tool(s)
303-1433
Removal


stands.
3. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01C Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L

NOTE: Discard the seal.
5. Refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01C Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L

6. Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01C Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L

7. Refer to: Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding - V8

S/C 5.0L Petrol (303-03B Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
8.
9.

coolant.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Installation




sequence.
Torque: 12 Nm

sequence.
Torque: 12 Nm

within 7 minutes.


stage.

7. Torque:
M6 12 Nm
M8 20 Nm
8. Torque: 12 Nm
9. Torque: 12 Nm
10. Torque: 25 Nm
11. Torque: 12 Nm
12. Torque: 40 Nm

tightening.
Torque: 40 Nm
14.
15. Torque: 25 Nm
16. Torque: 25 Nm
17.
18.
19.
Torque: 12 Nm
21. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01C Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L

22. Refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01C Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L

23. Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01C Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L

24. Refer to: Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding - V8

S/C 5.0L Petrol (303-03B Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8

26. Check and top up the engine oil.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Timing Drive Components Assembly Part
Special Tool(s)
303-1445
303-1447
Timing Tool
303-1448
Locking Tool
303-1452
303-1482
Tensioner Tool
Removal
NOTES:


stands.

4.

7.
8.
9.
replaced.
11.
12.
13.
15.
16. CAUTION: Discard the friction washer.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Install a new friction washer.
2. Torque: 12 Nm
3.
Install the special tool to each Camshaft.
Torque: 10 Nm
4.
is not as shown.
5.
the camshafts.
6. CAUTIONS:

components.

7. CAUTIONS:

must be replaced.

8.
9. Torque: 25 Nm

Torque: 10 Nm
12. CAUTIONS:

must be replaced.

13.
14. Torque: 25 Nm

Torque: 10 Nm
17.
19.
one side.
20.
21. CAUTIONS:


Torque: 35 Nm


unit bolts first.
Torque: 32 Nm
23.
Torque: 10 Nm
24.
25.
26.
Raise and support the engine, then install the special tool.
27. CAUTIONS:


Torque: 35 Nm


bolts first.
Torque: 32 Nm
29.
Remove the special tool and lower the engine.
30.
Torque: 100 Nm
31.
Torque: 20 Nm
32.
33.
34.
35.

Torque: 50 Nm
37.

40.
41.
42.
43. CAUTIONS:



repeated.
45.
46.
47.
48. Torque: 10 Nm


Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Timing Drive Components Assembly Part
Special Tool(s)
303-1445
303-1447
Timing Tool
303-1448
Locking Tool
303-1452
303-1482
Tensioner Tool
Removal


stands.

3.


and Installation).
7.
8.
9.

replaced.

11.
12.
13.


15.
16. CAUTION: Discard the friction washers.

Installation
1. CAUTION: Install new friction washers.
2. Torque: 12 Nm
3.
Install the special tool to the LH bank
Camshafts.
Torque: 10 Nm
4.
is not as shown.
5.
the camshafts.
6. CAUTIONS:

components.

7. CAUTIONS:

must be replaced.

8.
9. Torque: 25 Nm

Torque: 10 Nm
11. CAUTIONS:

must be replaced.
12.
13. Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
16.
one side.
17.
18. CAUTIONS:


Torque: 35 Nm


unit bolts first.
Torque: 32 Nm
20.
Torque: 10 Nm
21.
22. CAUTIONS:


Torque: 35 Nm


bolts first.
Torque: 32 Nm
24.
25.
26.
27.

Torque: 50 Nm
29.
31.
32.
33.

35. CAUTIONS:



repeated.
37.
38.
39.
40. Torque: 10 Nm
and Installation).

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Valve Cover LH
Special Tool(s)
303-1446
Removal
NOTES:
2. Refer to: Supercharger (303-12, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe LH (303-12, Removal and

Installation).
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6.
7. Torque: 25 Nm
8.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

sealing material.


the sealant.


sequence.
Torque: 13 Nm
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Valve Cover RH
Special Tool(s)
303-1446
Removal
NOTES:
2. Refer to: Supercharger (303-12, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe RH (303-12, Removal and

Installation).
5.
6.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
sealing material.


the sealant.


sequence.
Torque: 13 Nm
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Block Oil Gallery Plug
Removal
NOTES:

stands.
3. Refer to: Catalytic Converter RH (309-00, Removal and

Installation).
4.
5.
6.
7. Torque: 10 Nm
8. Torque: 10 Nm
9. Torque: 12 Nm
10.
material.
Torque:
Stage 1:40 Nm
Stage 2:180°
Installation

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Assembly Part
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery groun cable.

stands.

Installation).
4.
5.
6.
Installation


mating faces.
Torque: 12 Nm
3. Torque: 21 Nm
4. Torque: 12 Nm

sprocket markings.
Torque: 21 Nm

Installation).

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Assembly Part
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery groun cable.

stands.

Installation).
4.
5.
6.
Installation


mating faces.
Torque: 12 Nm
3. Torque: 21 Nm
4. Torque: 12 Nm

Torque: 21 Nm

Installation).
8. Connect the battery groun cable.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Lower Timing Cover
Special Tool(s)
303-1433
Removal

stands.

Installation).

5.
Installation
1. Apply RTV sealant WSE-M4G323-A6 (Loctite

within 7 minutes.

stage.

sequence.
Torque:
M6 12 Nm
M8 20 Nm
4. Torque: 12 Nm

Installation).

engine.


supercharger:

10.
the engine.
Check for leaks.
11. CAUTIONS:

12.
13.
14.
15.
the instructions.
16.
within 2 seconds.
17.
the instructions.
level reading.
engine oil.



21.
24.
25.
26.
27.
the instructions.
Installation).
29. Torque: 10 Nm
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Timing Chain Tensioner Right
Removal
NOTES:
All vehicles
2. Refer to: Health and Safety Precautions (100-00, Description and

Operation).
3. Refer to: Fuel System Pressure Release - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C

5.0L Petrol (310-00, General Procedures).
5.
6. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe RH (303-12D, Removal and

Installation).
7.
tobacco or open flame of any type when working on
or near any fuel related components. Highly
flammable mixtures are always present and may
ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.

10. Remove the front right wheel and tire.
11.
12.
13.
Installation).
16.

17.
18.
All vehicles
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.

engine.
fuel pipes.
Remove the fuel pipes.
Torque: 20 Nm
26.
27.
28.
Installation).
30.
31. CAUTION: Make sure the tension is maintained

on the timing chain.
32. Torque: 10 Nm
33.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Torque: 25 Nm
2. Remove cable tie from the timing chain.
3. NOTE: The piston is shown removed from

tensioner for clarity.
Make sure the piston is fully compressed and free to

move before installing the grenade pin into the
tensioner. Failure to do this may result in damage to
the engine.
4.
5. CAUTION: Make sure when the tensioner is

fully compressed the guide does not touch the
tensioner body.
Installation).

8. •Apply RTV sealant WSE-M4G323-A6 (Loctite 5901G)

to the areas shown, and tighten the bolts within 7
minutes.
9.
10. NOTE: Tighten bolts in the indicated sequence.
Torque: 12 Nm
11. Torque: 12 Nm

engine.
fuel pipes.
Install the fuel pipes.
Torque:
Stage 1:45 Nm
Stage 2:60°
14. Torque: 110 Nm
15. CAUTIONS:

engine oil.
NOTES:


Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
17. NOTES:

final tightening.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
18. The fuel pipe unions must be re-torqued after the fuel pipes
have been completely installed.
Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm
21. Torque: 25 Nm
22. Torque: 25 Nm
23. Torque: 22 Nm
All vehicles
Installation).
26.
27.
28.
30. Install the front right wheel and tire.
Torque: 140 Nm
31.
32. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe RH (303-12D, Removal and
Installation).
33.

Removal
Special Tool(s)
303-1142
303-1143
NOTES:
All vehicles
1. Refer to: Body - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (502-02 Full Frame and
Body Mounting, Removal and Installation).
2.
3.
4.
5.

coolant.
7.
8.
9.

correct.
Special Tool(s): 303-1142, 303-1143

Torque: 65 Nm
11.

coolant.
13.


15.
16.
17. Torque: 25 Nm
18.
19. Torque: 25 Nm

CAUTIONS:

Make sure both O-ring seals are correctly

All vehicles
21.
22.
clockwise.
Mark the torque converter and flexplate

when removing the last torque converter
bolt. Make sure that the alignment mark is
visible through the inspection hole.


fluids.
25.
26.
27.
technician.
Installation
Special Tool(s)
303-1142
303-1143
NOTES:
All vehicles

technician.
2. Torque: 40 Nm
3.

clockwise.
Make sure that the alignment mark is visible

through the inspection hole on installation of
the first torque converter bolt.
Torque: 63 Nm
5. Torque: 100 Nm
6. Torque: 100 Nm

CAUTIONS:

Make sure both O-ring seals are correctly

Torque: 35 Nm
All vehicles
8. Torque: 25 Nm
9. Torque: 25 Nm

11. Torque: 10 Nm
12. Torque: 10 Nm
13. Torque: 25 Nm
14. Torque: 12 Nm
15. Torque: 10 Nm
16. Torque:
M8 Bolt 25 Nm
M6 Bolt 10 Nm
17.
Install new 4 O-ring seals.
Torque:
M8 Nut 9 Nm
M8 Bolt 25 Nm
M6 bolt 10 Nm


Torque: 25 Nm
19.
20.
21. Torque: 22 Nm
22. Torque: 22 Nm
Special Tool(s): 303-1142, 303-1143

Torque: 65 Nm
24.
25.
26.

coolant.
28. Refer to: Body - 5.0L SC V8 - AJ133 (502-02, Removal and

Installation).
29. Using the approved diagnostic equipment, clear the powertrain

control module (PCM) adaptions.
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Land Rover premium cooling system fluid WSS M97B44-D
Land Rover premium cooling system flush EGR-M14P7-A
Capacities
Item Specification
Vehicles fitted with 2 zone Air Conditioning (A/C) 15.9L (dry capacity)

Coolant expansion tank bolt 10 7 -
Coolant outlet assembly bolts 10 7 -
Coolant inlet hose bolts 10 7 -
Coolant pump bolts 10 7 -
Cooling fan nut 65 48 -
Thermostat housing upper to lower bolts 4 - 35
Fuel cooler bolts 5 - 44
Air Conditioning (A/C) radiator core bolts 5 - 44
Engine cooling module bolts 15 11 -
Cooling fan shroud M6 bolts 5 - 44
Cooling fan shroud M8 bolts 15 11 -
Charge air cooler bolts 15 11 -
Coolant bleed screw(s) 3 - 27
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Cooling - Component
Location
Component Location - without Fuel Fired Burning Heater
Item Description
1 Intercooler
2 Fan cowl
3 Throttle body
4 Heater core
5 LH (left-hand)EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) cooler
6 Transmission oil cooler pipes
7 Viscous fan
8 RH (right-hand)EGR cooler
9 Transmission oil cooler
10 Fuel sub-cooler
11 Engine oil cooler
12 Expansion tank
13 Fuel cooler
14 Condenser
15 Radiator
Component Location - with Fuel Fired Burning Heater and Park Heating
Item Description
1 Intercooler
2 Fan cowl
3 Throttle body
4 Heater core
5 LHEGR cooler
6 Transmission oil cooler pipes
7 Park heating valve assembly
8 Viscous fan
9 RHEGR cooler
11 Fuel sub-cooler
12 Engine oil cooler
13 FFBH (fuel fired buring heater)
14 Expansion tank
15 Condenser
16 Fuel cooler
17 Radiator
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Cooling - Overview
OVERVIEW
The engine cooling system maintains the engine within an optimum temperature range under changing ambient and
engine operating conditions. It also provides:
Heating for the passenger compartment.

Refer to: Auxiliary Heater (412-02B, Description and Operation).
Cooling for:
- The engine oil
- The fuel
- The EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) system.
Refer to: Engine Emission Control (303-08A, Description and Operation).
- The transmission fluid.
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Cooling - System Operation
and Component Description
System Operation
COOLANT CIRCUIT FLOW
When the engine is running the coolant is circulated around the engine cooling system by the coolant pump. From the
coolant pump, coolant flows through the cylinder block and the cylinder heads. Some of the coolant in the cylinder
block is diverted through the engine oil cooler before returning to the 5-way connector via the water outlet.
From the 5-way connector, the majority of the coolant flows to the pressure relief thermostat, either directly or via
the radiator, depending on the temperature of the coolant. From the outlet of the thermostat the coolant flows to the
inlet of the coolant pump.
A separate hose from the radiator allows extra-cooled coolant from the radiator to flow through the transmission oil
cooler. The coolant from the cooler is returned to the system via a branch in the bottom radiator hose.
Coolant from the water outlet also flows through the EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) coolers and then to the heater
core. From the heater core outlet, the coolant flows to the outlet zone of the pressure relief thermostat.
The expansion tank allows expansion of coolant due to temperature increases to pass excess coolant back to the
expansion tank. A small hose is connected from the water outlet to the expansion tank for this purpose. As the
coolant cools, the coolant is allowed back into the system from the tank via a hose from the expansion tank into the
radiator bottom hose.
PRESSURE RELIEF THERMOSTAT (PRT)
The thermostat is closed at temperatures below approximately 82°C (179°F). When the coolant temperature reaches
approximately 82°C the thermostat starts to open and is fully open at approximately 96°C (204°F). In this condition
the full flow of coolant is directed through the radiator. The thermostat is exposed to 90% hot coolant from the
engine on one side and 10% cold coolant returning from the radiator bottom hose on the other side. Hot coolant
from the engine passes from the by-pass pipe through four sensing holes in the flow valve into a tube surrounding
90% of the thermostat sensitive area. Cold coolant returning from the engine, cooled by the radiator, conducts
through 10% of the sensitive area.
In cold ambient temperatures, the engine temperature is raised by approximately 10°C (50°F) to compensate for the
heat loss of 10% exposure to the cold coolant returning from the bottom hose.
The by-pass flow valve is held closed by a light spring. It operates to further aid heater warm-up. When the main
valve is closed and the engine speed is at idle, the coolant pump does not produce sufficient flow and pressure to
open the valve. In this condition the valve prevents coolant circulating through the by-pass circuit and forces the
coolant through the heater matrix only. This provides a higher flow of coolant through the heater matrix to improve
passenger comfort in cold conditions. When the engine speed increases above idle, the coolant pump produces a
greater flow and pressure than the heater circuit can take. The pressure acts on the by-pass flow valve and
overcomes the valve spring pressure, opening the valve and limiting the pressure in the heater circuit. The valve
modulates to provide maximum coolant flow through the heater core and yet allowing excess coolant to flow into the
by-pass circuit to provide the engine's cooling needs at higher engine speeds.
COOLING FAN
For additional airflow through the radiator matrix, particularly when the vehicle is stationary, there is an engine
driven electro-viscous fan unit fitted to the rear of the radiator. The fan is used for engine cooling and for A/C (air
conditioning) system cooling. This unit functions as a normal viscous fan, but with electronic control over the level
engagement of the clutch. The ECM (engine control module), which determines the required fan speed, controls the
level of clutch engagement. The ECM determines engagement based on the coolant, charge air, ambient and
transmission oil temperatures and the A/C pressure. The fan is mounted using a left hand thread.
The viscous fan unit is electronically controlled by the ECM to optimize fan speed for all operating conditions.
NOTE: If the electrical connections to the viscous fan are disconnected the fan will 'idle' and overheating may
result. The ECM stores the appropriate fault codes in this case.
SCHEMATIC FLOW DIAGRAMS
ENGINE COOLING WITHOUT FUEL FIRED BURNING HEATER

Item Description
1 Expansion tank
2 Degas connector
3 Cylinder head
4 Engine oil cooler
5 Cylinder head
6 Static bleed point
7 EGR coolers
8 Cabin heater
9 Rear heater
10 Pressure Relief Thermostat (PRT)
11 Fuel cooler
12 Venturi connector
14 Transmission oil sub-cooler
15 Radiator
16 Fuel sub-cooler
17 Water pump
ENGINE COOLING WITH FUEL FIRED BURNING HEATER - SCHEMATIC FLOW DIAGRAM

Item Description
1 Expansion tank
2 Degas connector
3 Cylinder head
4 Engine oil cooler
5 Cylinder head
7 EGR coolers
8 Pump
9 FFBH (fuel fired burning heater)
10 Cabin heater
11 Rear heater
12 PRT
13 Fuel cooler
16 Radiator
18 Fuel sub-cooler
19 Water pump
ENGINE COOLING WITH FUEL FIRED BURNING HEATER AND PARK HEATING - SCHEMATIC FLOW DIAGRAM

Item Description
1 Expansion tank
2 Degas connector
3 Cylinder head
4 Engine oil cooler
5 Cylinder head
7 EGR coolers
8 3-way valve
9 Pump
10 FFBH (fuel fired burning heater)
11 Cabin heater
12 Rear heater
13 Heater by-pass
14 Restrictor
15 PRT
16 Fuel cooler
19 Radiator
21 Fuel sub-cooler
22 Water pump
PRESSURE RELIEF THERMOSTAT (PRT)

Item Description
1 Connection to radiator top hose
2 PRT body
3 Connection from radiator bottom hose
4 Heater core return connection
5 Connection to cylinder block water inlet
6 Connection to expansion tank
A plastic thermostat housing is located behind the radiator. The housing has 5 connections which locate the radiator
bottom hose, top hose from the 5-way connector, coolant pump feed hose to the cylinder block and return feed from
the heater core. The housing contains a wax element and a spring loaded by-pass flow valve.
The thermostat is used to maintain the coolant at the optimum temperature for efficient combustion and to aid
engine warm-up.
RADIATOR

Item Description
1 Coolant inlet
2 Coolant outlet to fuel cooler
3 Support - upper (2 off)
4 Support - lower (2 off)
5 Coolant outlet to transmission oil cooler
6 Coolant outlet to pressure relief thermostat
The radiator is a vertical-flow type with an aluminum core and plastic end tanks. The radiator is located in the vehicle
by locating spigots and supports integrated into the cooling pack end frames. The lower supports are installed in
rubber bushes in the upper chassis rails. The lupper ocating spigots are installed in rubber bushes in the front end
carrier. Coolant inlet and outlet connections are incorporated into the upper and lower end tanks respectively.
The lower end tank also has a connection for coolant outlet to the transmission fluid cooler.
COOLANT PUMP

Item Description
1 Bolt (3 off)
2 Drive hub
3 Housing
4 Impeller
5 Pulley
The coolant pump has a housing that supports a shaft with an impeller attached to one end and a drive hub at the
other. The housing is attached to the front of the cylinder block with the impeller located in a pumping chamber. The
pump is driven by a pulley attached to the drive hub and driven by the accessory drive belt. For additional
information refer to Accessory Drive 303-05B.
EXPANSION TANK

Item Description
1 Filler cap
2 Bleed screw
3 Vent hose connection
4 Expansion hose connection
5 Expansion tank
A pressurized expansion tank system is used which continuously separates the air from the cooling system and
replenishes the system through a hose connected between the expansion tank and the heater return hose. A
continuous vent into the expansion tank, through a hose connected to the engine's coolant outlet connector, prevents
air locks from forming in the cooling system.
The expansion tank is installed behind the top right corner of the radiator. A filler cap, bleed screw and level sensor
are incorporated into the expansion tank. MAX and MIN level markings are molded into the interior of the tank below
the filler cap.
The expansion tank provides the following functions:
Service fill
Coolant expansion during warm-up
Air separation during operation
System pressurization by the filler cap
The expansion tank has an air space of approximately 0.5 to 1 liter (1.06 to 2,11 US pints), above the MAX level, to
allow for coolant expansion.
COOLING FAN

Item Description
1 Shroud
2 Electrical connector
3 Fan
4 Viscous unit
To control the cooling fan, the ECM sends a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal to the cooling fan module (integral
to the ECM). The frequency of the PWM signal is used by the cooling fan module to determine the output voltage
supplied to the fan motor.
The ECM varies the duty cycle of the PWM signal between 0 and 100% to vary the fan speed. If the PWM signal is
outside the 0 to 100% range, the cooling fan module interprets the signal as an open or short circuit and runs the
fans at maximum speed to ensure the engine and transmission do not overheat.
The ECM operates the fan in response to inputs from the ECT (engine coolant temperature) sensor, the transmission
oil temperature sensor, the charge air temperature sensor, the A/C switch and the A/C pressure sensor.
The speed of the cooling fan is also influenced by vehicle road speed. The ECM adjusts the speed of the cooling fans,
to compensate for the ram effect of vehicle speed, using the CAN (controller area network) road speed signal
received from the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module.
ENGINE OIL COOLER
Item Description
1 Coolant outlet
2 Engine oil filter
3 Engine oil cooler
The engine oil cooler is attached to a common adapter assembly located in the vee of the cylinder block. Inlet and
outlet ports for engine oil, and an inlet port for coolant, are incorporated into the cylinder block mating face of the
adapter assembly. A metal gasket seals the joint between the adapter assembly and the cylinder block. From the
cylinder block, coolant flows through the adapter assembly and into the cooler. After passing through the cooler, the
coolant then flows into the engine coolant water outlet.
TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER
Item Description
1 Coolant inlet from radiator
2 Mounting bracket
3 Fuel cooler
4 Transmission fluid cooler
5 Transmission fluid inlet
6 Coolant outlet to radiator bottom hose
7 Transmission fluid outlet
The transmission fluid cooler is located on chassis cross member behind the radiator, sharing a bracket with the fuel
cooler. The cooler is connected to the cooling system with two hoses and receives cooled fluid from the lower section
of the radiator, which flows through the cooler, reducing the temperature of the transmission fluid.
ENGINE COOLANT
The coolant is silicate free and must not be mixed with conventional engine coolant.
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Cooling
For a detailed description of the engine cooling system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (303-03A Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Engine Cooling (Description and Operation),

Engine Cooling (Description and Operation),
Engine Cooling (Description and Operation).
the donor vehicle.

Visual Inspection
Coolant leaks Fuses
Coolant hoses Harnesses
Coolant expansion tank Loose or corroded connector(s)
Radiator Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor
Heater core
Accessory drive belt
Viscous fan
Symptom Chart

Coolant loss Hoses Carry out a visual inspection. If there are no obvious leaks,
Hose connections carry out a cooling system pressure test. Rectify any leaks as
Radiator necessary
Water pump
Heater core
Gaskets
Engine casting
cracks
Engine block core
plugs
Overheating Low/contaminated Check the coolant level and condition. Carry out a cooling
coolant system pressure test. Rectify any leaks as necessary
Thermostat Test the thermostat and rectify as necessary
Viscous fan Test the viscous fan operation, make sure the viscous fan
ECT sensor rotates freely. Rectify as necessary
Restricted air flow Check for obstructions to the air flow over the radiator.
over the radiator Rectify as necessary
Engine not reaching Thermostat Test the thermostat and rectify as necessary
normal temperature Viscous fan Test the viscous fan operation, make sure the viscous fan
Thermostat rotates freely
Electric fan
Fan speed module
DTC Index
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Cooling System Draining, Filling and
Bleeding
General Procedures
Draining
Installation).

stands.
3. WARNING: Since injury such as scalding

could be caused by escaping steam or coolant, do
not remove the filler cap from the coolant
expansion tank while the system is hot.
5.
coolant.
7. Connect the transmission fluid cooler coolant hose.

coolant.
9. Install the coolant hose.

11. Torque: 10 Nm
Filling
2.
3.
4.
5. CAUTIONS:
Anti-freeze concentration must be maintained

at 50%.
Fill the coolant expansion tank until coolant

appears through the bleed ports.

coolant.

7. Set the heater controls to maximum.
8. Start the engine and continue to fill the coolant until the
maximum level is reached.

coolant.

10. Increase engine speed to 2500rpm and cycle between this and
idle.
11. Continue to top-up with coolant with the engine at idle.
12. CAUTION: Correct installation of the Coolant

expansion tank cap can be obtained by tightening
the cap until an audible click is heard.
13. Allow the engine to idle, until hot air is emitted at the face
registers.
14. CAUTION: Switch off the engine and allow the coolant
temperature to go cold.
15. Visually check the engine and cooling system for signs of
coolant leakage.
16. WARNING: When releasing the cooling system pressure,

cover the coolant expansion tank cap with a thick cloth.
CAUTIONS:
Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping

steam or coolant, make sure the vehicle cooling system is cool
prior to carrying out this procedure
Make sure the coolant level remains above the "COLD FILL
RANGE" lower level mark.
NOTE: When the cooling system is warm, the coolant will

be approximately 10mm above the upper level mark on the
expansion tank with the cap removed.
Check and top-up the coolant if required.

17. Install the engine cover.
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Coolant Expansion Tank
Removal

stands.
2.

coolant.
4.
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6. Torque: 10 Nm

correct.
9.
Installation

Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Coolant Pump
Removal

stands.


Installation).
Using a suitable 6mm bar, retain the

coolant pump pulley.
Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Cooling Fan
Special Tool(s)
303-1142
303-1143
Removal

stands.

3.
4.
5. Torque: 3.5 Nm
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. NOTE: The thread is left handed.
Special Tool(s): 303-1142, 303-1143

Torque: 65 Nm
Installation

Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Cooling Fan Shroud
Removal
All vehicles

stands.
3. Refer to: Turbocharger Bypass Valve (303-04, Removal and

Installation).
4. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Cooler - 3.0L Diesel (307-02,


coolant.
Vehicles with fuel fired booster heater

coolant.
All vehicles
7.

coolant.

correct.
9. Torque: 5 Nm
10. Torque: 3.5 Nm


coolant.
All vehicles

coolant.
13.
14.
15. Torque: 5 Nm

coolant.

correct.
coolant.

correct.
18.
19. Torque: 15 Nm
20.
21. Torque: 15 Nm
22. Torque: 15 Nm

24.
All vehicles
25.
26.
27.
Installation

Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Radiator
Removal

stands.

3. Refer to: Cooling Fan Shroud (303-03, Removal and

Installation).
4. Refer to: Radiator Grille (501-08, Removal and Installation).

coolant.

coolant.
7.
8. Torque: 6 Nm
9.
10. Torque: 6 Nm
11. Torque: 5 Nm
12. Torque: 5 Nm
13.
Torque: 25 Nm

16.
17. Torque: 5 Nm
18. Torque: 5 Nm
19. Torque: 15 Nm
20. Torque: 15 Nm
21. Torque: 15 Nm
Installation

Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Thermostat
Removal

stands.

3. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Cooler - 3.0L Diesel (307-02,


coolant.

coolant.

coolant.
coolant.

coolant.
9.
10. Torque: 4 Nm
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Lubricants
Anti-freeze Havoline Extended Life Coolant (XLC)
Anti-freeze concentration 50%
Capacities
Item Specification
Vehicles with supercharger 19.8L (dry capacity)
Vehicles without supercharger 15.9L (dry capacity)
Coolant expansion tank retaining bolt 10 7 -
Cooling fan retaining nut 65 48 -
Thermostat housing retaining bolt 10 7 -
Radiator air deflector retaining bolts 9 - 80
Refrigerant line to condenser core retaining bolts 10 7 -
Radiator retaining bolts 25 18 -
Condenser core to radiator bolts 10 7 -
Coolant bleed screw(s) 3 - 27
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Cooling
COMPONENT LOCATION - NATURALLY ASPIRATED VEHICLES

1 - Radiator upper hose
2 - Cooling fan
3 - Heater system supply and return hoses
4 - FFBH (fuel fired booster heater) supply and return connections (where fitted)
5 - Heater manifold
6 - Throttle body heater hose
7 - Engine oil cooler
8 - Engine block heater (230 V version shown) or drain plug
9 - Transmission fluid cooler supply hose
10 - Transmission fluid cooler
11 - Bleed hoses
12 - Radiator
13 - Coolant pump
14 - Bleed screw
15 - Outlet tube
16 - Coolant expansion tank
17 - Transmission fluid cooler return hose
18 - Radiator lower hose
19 - Coolant supply/expansion hose
20 - Thermostat
21 - Throttle
COMPONENT LOCATION - SUPERCHARGER VEHICLES

2 - Outlet tube
3 - Heater system supply and return hoses
4 - FFBH (fuel fired booster heater) supply and return connections (where fitted)
5 - Heater manifold
7 - Engine block heater (230 V version shown) or drain plug
8 - Transmission fluid cooler supply hose
10 - Bleed hoses
11 - Radiator
12 - Charge air cooler return hose connections
13 - Cooling fan
14 - Charge air radiator supply hose
15 - Coolant pump
16 - Throttle body heater hose
17 - Bleed screw
18 - Coolant expansion tank
19 - Transmission fluid cooler return hose
20 - Radiator lower hose
21 - Coolant supply/expansion hose
22 - Thermostat
23 - Throttle
INTRODUCTION
The engine cooling system maintains the engine within an optimum temperature range under changing ambient and
engine operating conditions. The system is a pressurized expansion tank system with continuous bleeds to separate
air from the coolant and prevent the formation of air locks. The engine cooling system also provides:
Heating for:
- The passenger compartment.
- The throttle body.
Cooling for:
- The engine oil cooler.
- The transmission fluid cooler.
The primary components of the engine cooling system are the:
Coolant pump.
Thermostat.
Radiator.
Cooling fan.
Expansion tank.
Outlet tube and heater manifold.
Connecting hoses and pipes.
COOLANT PUMP

1 - Inlet connection
2 - Pump body
3 - Outlet flange to RH cylinder head
4 - Outlet to engine oil cooler
5 - Outlet flange to LH cylinder head
6 - Pulley
7 - Bleed pipe connection (containing check valve)
The body of the coolant pump contains an impeller attached to a shaft supported in a bearing assembly. The impeller
is driven by a pulley, pressed on to the front of the shaft, which is driven by the accessory drive belt. For additional
Accessory Drive (303-05 Accessory Drive - 5.0L, Vehicles Without: Supercharger, Description and Operation),
Accessory Drive (303-05 Accessory Drive - 5.0L, Vehicles With: Supercharger, Description and Operation).
Two coolant outlet flanges attach the coolant pump to the front of the cylinder heads. A pipe connects a further
coolant outlet to a pipe from the engine oil cooler. A bleed connector is installed in the front of the coolant pump,
adjacent to the coolant inlet connection from the thermostat. A check valve is incorporated into the bleed connection.
THERMOSTAT

1 - Screw (3 off)
2 - Lower body
3 - Upper body
4 - Thermostat
5 - Seal
The thermostat is a multi-stage device located in the coolant pump inlet to provide fast response and control of the
engine outlet temperature.
The thermostat allows rapid engine warm-up by preventing coolant flow through the radiator and by limiting coolant
flow through the cylinder block when the engine is cold. During warm-up and at engines speeds above approximately
1800 rev/min, a by-pass valve opens to control the coolant flow and pressure, to protect the engine components.
When the thermostat opening reaches 6 mm (0.24 in.), the by-pass flow is shut-off. When the thermostat opening
exceeds 6 mm (0.24 in.), the radiator coolant flow is further controlled up to the point where the thermostat is fully
open. At this point maximum radiator coolant flow is achieved to provide maximum cooling.
On both naturally aspirated and supercharger vehicles, the thermostat begins to open at 88 - 90 °C (190 - 194 °F)
and is fully open at 102 °C (216 °F).
RADIATOR


1 - Bleed hose connection
2 - Upper hose connection
3 - Transmission fluid cooler supply hose connection
4 - Lower hose connection
5 - Radiator lower support (2 off)
6 - Radiator upper support (2 off)
The radiator is an aluminum cross flow type with plastic end tanks. Upper and lower supports locate the radiator in
the radiator support assembly and the front crush siderails respectively.
Connections are incorporated into the end tanks for the upper and lower hoses, the supply hose of the transmission
fluid cooler and a bleed hose.
COOLING FAN


1 - Securing nut
2 - Harness
3 - Electro-viscous drive unit
For additional airflow through the radiator, particularly when the vehicle is stationary or moving slowly, there is an
engine driven electro-viscous cooling fan. The cooling fan functions as a normal viscous fan, but with electronic
control over the level of engagement of the viscous clutch. The ECM (engine control module) controls the level of
engagement to optimize fan speed for all operating conditions.
A securing nut attaches the cooling fan to a drive pulley, which is mounted on the front of the engine and driven by
the accessory drive system.
NOTE: On naturally aspirated engines the securing nut has a LH (left-hand) thread; on SC (supercharger)
engines the securing nut has a RH (right-hand) thread.
The blades of the cooling fan are located in a fan cowl attached to the rear of the radiator frame. Brushes around the
circumference of the aperture in the fan cowl provide a seal with the blade shroud. An electrical connector in the top
left corner of the fan cowl provides the interface between the cooling fan harness and the vehicle wiring.
EXPANSION TANK


1 - Bleed hose connection
2 - Bleed screw
3 - Level sensor
4 - Coolant supply/expansion hose connection
5 - Filler cap
The expansion tank is installed on the LH side of the cooling module, attached to the radiator support assembly and
the floor sidemember. A filler cap, bleed screw and level sensor are incorporated into the expansion tank. MAX and
MIN level markings are molded onto the exterior of the tank.
The expansion tank provides the following functions:
Service fill.
Coolant expansion during warm-up.
Air separation during operation.
System pressurization by the filler cap.
The expansion tank has an air space of approximately 1.1 liters (1.16 US quarts), above the MAX level, to allow for
coolant expansion.
OUTLET TUBE AND HEATER MANIFOLD
Outlet Tube


A - Outlet tube on naturally aspirated vehicles
B - Outlet tube on supercharger vehicles
1 - Bleed spigot (fitted with blanking plug)
2 - Radiator upper hose connection
3 - Cylinder block connections
4 - Thermostat hose connection
Heater Manifold

1 - Throttle body heater hose connection
2 - Heater core supply hose connection
3 - RH cylinder head connection
4 - Engine coolant temperature sensor
5 - LH cylinder head connection
ENGINE COOLANT
The engine coolant is formulated to last for ten years or 240,000 km (150,000 miles). The coolant is silicate free and
must not be mixed with conventional engine coolant.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN (controller area network).

1 - Battery
2 - EJB (engine junction box)
4 - Cooling fan
6 - Coolant level sensor
OPERATION
Engine Cooling Flow Diagram - Naturally Aspirated Vehicles


1 - Heater system
2 - Bleed screw
3 - RH cylinder head
4 - Cylinder block
5 - Throttle
7 - Heater manifold
8 - LH cylinder head
9 - Bleed screw
10 - Expansion tank
12 - Thermostat
13 - Check valve
14 - Coolant pump
15 - Radiator
Engine Cooling Flow Diagram - Supercharger Vehicles


1 - Heater system
2 - Bleed screw
3 - RH cylinder head
4 - Cylinder block
5 - Throttle
7 - Heater manifold
8 - LH cylinder head
9 - Bleed screw
10 - Expansion tank
12 - Thermostat
13 - Check valve
14 - Coolant pump
15 - Radiator
16 - Charge air radiator supply hose connection
17 - Charge air cooler return hose connections
When the engine is running, the coolant is circulated around the engine cooling system by the coolant pump. From
the coolant pump, coolant flows through the cylinder heads and the engine oil cooler into the cylinder block and the
heater manifold.
In the cylinder block, the coolant flows forwards to the outlet tube. When the coolant is cold, the thermostat is closed
and the coolant flows direct from the outlet tube back to the coolant pump. Once the coolant reaches operating
temperature the thermostat begins to open, to control system temperature, and coolant flows from the outlet tube to
the coolant pump via the radiator. When the thermostat is open, the coolant flow through the radiator also generates
a coolant flow through the transmission fluid cooler.
From the heater manifold the coolant flows through the electronic throttle and the heater core, in parallel circuits that
are unaffected by the position of the thermostat. From the electronic throttle, the coolant merges with bleed coolant
from the coolant pump and flows to the expansion tank. From the heater system, the coolant flows back to the inlet
of the coolant pump.
Expansion and contraction of the coolant is accommodated by an air space in the expansion tank and the compliance
of the flexible hoses.
If the coolant level in the expansion tank decreases below a predetermined value, the coolant level sensor connects a
ground to the CJB (central junction box), which sends a message to the instrument cluster on the medium speed
CAN bus to display the message COOLANT LEVEL LOW in the message center.
For additional information, refer to: Information and Message Center (413-08 Information and Message Center,
To control the cooling fan, the ECM sends a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal to the cooling fan drive unit. The
ECM varies the duty cycle of the PWM signal between 0 and 100% to vary the clutch engagement and thus fan
speed. The ECM determines the required fan speed from:
Coolant, ambient air and transmission fluid temperatures

A/C (air conditioning) system condenser cooling fan demand
Road speed
Terrain optimization mode.
If the electrical connections to the viscous fan are disconnected the fan will idle and the engine may overheat. If the
ECM detects a cooling fan fault it stores the appropriate DTC (diagnostic trouble code) and signals the instrument
cluster on the medium speed CAN bus to display the message COOLING SYSTEM FAULT MONITOR GAUGE in the
message center.
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Cooling
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Engine Cooling (303-03B Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
the donor vehicle.

Visual Inspection
Coolant leaks Fuses
Heater core
Viscous fan
Symptom Chart

Radiator necessary
Water pump
Heater core
Gaskets
Engine casting
cracks
Engine block core
plugs
Electric fan
Fan speed module
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, DTC: Engine Control Module
(ECM) (100-00, Description and Operation).
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cooling System
Draining and Vacuum Filling
General Procedures
Draining
1. Refer to: Engine Cover - V8 5.0L Petrol (501-05 Interior Trim

stands.
3. WARNING: Release the cooling system

pressure by slowly turning the coolant expansion
tank cap a quarter of a turn. Cover the expansion
tank cap with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Since injury such as scalding could be caused

by escaping steam or coolant, make sure the
vehicle cooling system is cool prior to carrying out
this procedure
5.
coolant.
7. Install the lower coolant hose to the radiator.

9. Torque: 10 Nm
Filling
2. CAUTION: Anti-freeze concentration must be maintained

at 50%.
Install the cooling system vacuum refill adaptor to the

expansion tank.
Install the vacuum filler gauge to the cooling system
vacuum refill adaptor.
Install the venturi tube assembly to the vacuum filler
gauge.
3. NOTES:
Make sure the coolant supply valve is in the closed

position on the vacuum filler gauge assembly.
The coolant vacuum fill tool needs an air pressure of 6 to

8 bar (87 to 116 psi) to operate correctly.
Small diameter or long airlines may restrict airflow to the

coolant vacuum fill tool.
Connect a regulated compressed air supply to the venturi tube

assembly.
4. Position the evacuated air hose into a container.
5. Open the air supply valve.

6. NOTE: Make sure the coolant supply hose is positioned
into a container of fifty percent mixture of Land Rover Premium
Cooling System Fluid or equivalent, meeting Land Rover
specification Halvoline XLC and fifty percent water. Make sure
no air can enter the supply hose.
Open the coolant supply valve for 2 seconds to prime the

coolant supply hose.
7. Apply air pressure progressively until the arrow on the vacuum

filler gauge reaches the green segment.
8. Disconnect the compressed air supply line.
9. NOTE: Close the coolant supply valve when the coolant

expansion tank MAX mark is reached or coolant movement has
ceased.
Open the coolant supply valve and allow the coolant to be

drawn into the system.
10. Remove the vacuum filler gauge and cooling system vacuum
refill adaptor assembly.

13. CAUTION: Observe the engine temperature gauge. If the

engine starts to over-heat switch off immediately and allow to
cool. Failure to follow this instruction may cause damage to the
vehicle
Start the engine and idle until hot air is emited at the face
registers.
14. Switch the heater off.
15. Raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM for eight minutes.
Switch the engine off.
coolant leakage.

CAUTIONS:



Draining, Filling and Bleeding V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Draining
1. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T-Connector (303-12C Intake
Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).

stands.
3. WARNINGS:
Release the cooling system pressure by slowly

turning the coolant expansion tank cap a quarter
of a turn. Cover the expansion tank cap with a
thick cloth to prevent the possibility of scalding.
personal injury.
CAUTION: Since injury such as scalding could

be caused by escaping steam or coolant, make
sure the vehicle cooling system is cool prior to
carrying out this procedure.
5.
6.

fluids.

fluids.

fluids.

fluids.
fluids.
14. CAUTION: Install a new seal.
Torque: 50 Nm

18. Install the RH splash shield.

19. Torque: 10 Nm
Filling
2.

correct.
4.
5.
6. CAUTIONS:

at 50%.


fluids.
Installation).

fluids.

fluids.
11. Continue to fill the coolant until the maximum level is reached.

at 50%.
Start the engine and continue to fill the coolant until the
14. Increase the engine speed to 2000 rpm.
15. Check if the front heater is warm after 2 minutes, if warm

proceed to step 17.
16. If not, turn the engine off for 10 seconds and then start the
engine and return to step 14.
17. Once the front heater is warm, check if the rear heater is warm
(if equipped).If no heat is felt, increase the engine speed to
3000 rpm for 30 seconds and return to idle.
18. Once the heat is felt at the rear heater, continue filling with
coolant until the level stops dropping and top up to 65mm
below the rim (to top rib on the back of the coolant expansion
tank).

Switch the engine off and allow to cool.
coolant leakage.

CAUTIONS:



Draining, Filling and Bleeding V8 5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Draining
and Installation).

stands.

Installation).
4. WARNING: Since injury such as scalding

could be caused by escaping steam or coolant, do
not remove the filler cap from the coolant
expansion tank while the system is hot.
6.
coolant.

coolant.
Install the lower coolant hose to the radiator.

coolant.

coolant.
coolant.
12. CAUTION: Install a new seal.
Torque: 50 Nm

16. Torque: 10 Nm
Filling
Installation).

and Installation).
4.

correct.
6.
7. CAUTIONS:

at 50%.

coolant.


coolant.

11. Start the engine and continue to fill the coolant until the

proceed to step 23

coolant leakage.

CAUTIONS:



Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding V8 5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Draining
1. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T-Connector (303-12B Intake
Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).

stands.
3. WARNINGS:

personal injury.

4.

fluids.

Filling
2.
correct.
4.
5.
6. CAUTIONS:

at 50%.


fluids.
Installation).

fluids.

fluids.

at 50%.

proceed to step 17.
tank).

coolant leakage.

CAUTIONS:



Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Draining
Installation).

stands.
3. WARNINGS:

personal injury.

4.

fluids.

Filling
2.
correct.
4.
5.
6. CAUTIONS:

at 50%.


fluids.
Installation).

fluids.

fluids.

at 50%.

proceed to step 17.
tank).

coolant leakage.

CAUTIONS:



Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Coolant Expansion
Tank V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, 5.0L
Removal

stands.
2. Refer to: Air Cleaner LH (303-12B Intake Air Distribution and

Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
3. CAUTIONS:
Clamp the hoses to minimize coolant loss.

correct.
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6.

Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Coolant Expansion
Tank V8 5.0L Petrol, 5.0L
Removal

stands.
2. Refer to: Air Cleaner LH (303-12 Intake Air Distribution and

Filtering - 5.0L, Vehicles Without: Supercharger, Removal and
Installation).
3.
4.
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6.

Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cooling Fan V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
303-1142
303-1143
Removal

and Installation).
2. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe LH (303-12, Removal and

Installation).
3. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe RH (303-12, Removal and

Installation).
4.
5.
6.
7.


correct.
Special Tool(s): 303-1142, 303-1143

Torque: 65 Nm
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cooling Fan V8 5.0L
Petrol
Special Tool(s)
303-1142
303-1143
Removal


Installation).
3. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe LH (303-12 Intake Air

Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
4. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe RH (303-12 Intake Air

Installation).
5.
6.
7.

NOTES:

The thread is left handed.
Special Tool(s): 303-1142, 303-1143

Torque: 65 Nm
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Coolant Pump V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal


stands.

V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (303-03B Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
4. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05C Accessory Drive - V8

S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
5.
6.
7.
Torque: 10 Nm
8. NOTES:
The retaining clips cannot be removed from

the pipe.


correct.
Torque: 40 Nm

CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage the

paint finished surfaces. If spilt, immediately
remove the coolant and clean the area with water.
Torque: 12 Nm
11. CAUTIONS:
Note the fitted position of the component
prior to removal.
NOTE: Install new gaskets.
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Coolant Pump V8
5.0L Petrol
Removal


stands.


correct.
5. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05B Accessory Drive - V8

5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
6.
7.
8.
Torque: 10 Nm
9. NOTE: The retaining clips cannot be removed

from the pipe.

correct.

CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage the

paint finished surfaces. If spilt, immediately
remove the coolant and clean the area with water.

Torque: 12 Nm
12. CAUTIONS:
Note the fitted position of the component

prior to removal.
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Radiator V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol
Removal

stands.
2. Refer to: Condenser Core - Vehicles With: Supercharger (412-

3.
4.
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Radiator V8 5.0L
Petrol
Removal

stands.

and Charging (412-00 Climate Control System - General

4. Refer to: Radiator Grille (501-08 Exterior Trim and

Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
5. Refer to: Cooling Fan - V8 5.0L Petrol (303-03B Engine Cooling

- V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
6.
7.
8.
9.

11.

Torque: 10 Nm
13.
14.
15.

Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
18. Torque: 10 Nm
19.
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Thermostat
Housing V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal

stands.

V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (303-03B Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8

Installation).
4. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe LH (303-12B Intake Air

Installation).
5.

correct.
correct.

correct.
Torque: 10 Nm
9. NOTES:


the pipe.
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Thermostat
Housing V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal

stands.


Installation).
4. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe LH (303-12B Intake Air

Installation).
5.

correct.
correct.
Torque: 10 Nm
8. NOTES:


the pipe.
Installation

Supercharger Cooling - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Charge air cooler coolant pump mounting bracket bolts 6 4
Charge air cooler radiator to radiator bolts 10 7
Supercharger Cooling - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Supercharger Cooling
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Charge air coolers
2 - Supply hose to charge air coolers
3 - Charge air coolant pump
4 - Charge air radiator
5 - Return hose from charge air coolers
INTRODUCTION
The supercharger cooling system cools the pressurized charge air from the supercharger. The supercharger cooling
system consists of:
A charge air coolant pump.

A charge air radiator.
Two charge air coolers.
Connecting hoses and pipes.
The supercharger cooling system is operationally independent of the engine cooling system, but connected to it at the
radiator upper hose. The connection with the engine cooling system accommodates thermal expansion and retraction
of the coolant in the supercharger cooling system, and enables filling and draining of the supercharger cooling
system.
CHARGE AIR COOLANT PUMP

1 - Coolant inlet connection
2 - Coolant outlet connection
The charge air coolant pump is an electric pump installed on the LH (left-hand) side of the cooling module. Hoses
connect the inlet of the charge air coolant pump to the charge air radiator, and the outlet to the charge air coolers.
An electrical connector provides the interface between the motor of the charge air coolant pump and the vehicle
wiring.
CHARGE AIR RADIATOR


1 - Coolant outlet connection
2 - Coolant inlet connection
3 - Mounting bracket (4 off)
The charge air radiator is installed at the front of the cooling module and attached to end tanks of the radiator by
four mounting brackets.
The coolant inlet and outlet connections of the charge air radiator are installed in the RH (right-hand) and LH end
tanks respectively. Hoses connect the inlet of the charge air radiator to the charge air coolers, and the outlet to the
charge air coolant pump.
CHARGE AIR COOLERS
A charge air cooler is installed in each intake manifold.

For additional information, refer to: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering (303-12D, Description and Operation).
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired.


1 - Battery
2 - EJB (engine junction box) (charge air coolant pump relay)
OPERATION
Supercharger Cooling Flow Diagram


1 - RH charge air cooler
2 - Engine
3 - LH (left hand) charge air cooler
5 - Charge air radiator
Electrical power for the charge air coolant pump is supplied from the charge air coolant pump relay in the EJB
(engine junction box). When the relay is energized, it connects power from the battery to the charge air coolant
pump. Operation of the relay is controlled by the ECM (engine control module). The charge air coolant pump relay is
energized continuously while the ignition is in power mode 6.
When the charge air coolant pump is running, coolant flows from the pump outlet through the charge air coolers, the
charge air radiator and back to the pump inlet.
Supercharger Cooling - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Supercharger Cooling
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Supercharger Cooling (303-03C Supercharger Cooling - V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
the donor vehicle.

Visual Inspection
Coolant leaks Fuses
Heater core
Viscous fan
Symptom Chart

Radiator necessary
Water pump
Heater core
Gaskets
Engine casting
cracks
Engine block core
plugs
Electric fan
Fan speed module
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, DTC: Engine Control Module
(ECM) (100-00, Description and Operation).
Supercharger Cooling - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Coolant Pump
Removal
WARNING: Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping steam or coolant, make sure the vehicle
cooling system is cool prior to carrying out this procedure.
CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage the paint finished surfaces. If spilt, immediately remove the coolant and
clean the area with water.
NOTE: This procedure covers the removal and installation of the supercharger auxiliary coolant pump.

AJ133 (501-05, Removal and Installation).

4.
5. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
NOTE: Clamp both auxiliary coolant pump

coolant hoses to minimize coolant loss.

coolant.
stands.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Installation
1. Torque: 6 Nm
2.
3.
4. Torque:
M6 10 Nm
M10 62 Nm
6.
7.
8. Torque: 3.5 Nm

10.
11. When coolant runs from the bleed point bubble-
free, tighten the bleed screw.
12. Check and top-up the coolant.
14. CAUTION: Damage to the charge air cooler coolant pump

will occur if the pump is allowed to cavitate.
NOTE: With the ignition on the charge air coolant pump

will run, to aid coolant bleed. Make sure the charge air coolant
pump is primed prior to running the pump.
Start the engine and allow to run for 30 seconds, stop the
engine.
15. Check and top-up the coolant.

AJ133 (501-05, Removal and Installation).
Supercharger Cooling - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Radiator
Removal

stands.

3. Refer to: Radiator Grille (501-08, Removal and Installation).
4. Refer to: Coolant Pump (303-03, Removal and Installation).
5. Refer to: Cooling Fan - Vehicles With: Supercharger (303-03,


correct.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11. Torque: 9 Nm

correct.
Torque: 9 Nm

Torque: 10 Nm
coolant.

correct.

coolant.
17.
18.

Torque: 25 Nm
20. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
NOTE: A = refer to procedure for the correct torque sequence.

Fuel injection pump cradle bolts 23 16 -
Fuel injection pump retaining bolts 23 16 -
Fuel injection pump bracket 9 - 80
Fuel injection pump sprocket bolt 50 37 -
Inlet manifold retaining bolts 9 - 80
Fuel injection pump belt rear cover retaining bolts 9 - 80
Camshaft rear end accessory drive (READ) pulley hub retaining bolt A - -
Fuel injection pump belt tensioner retaining bolt 23 16 -
Camshaft READ pulley retaining bolt A - -
Fuel rail bracket retaining bolts 23 16 -
Fuel injector retaining bolts 10 - -
Fuel rail retaining bolts 25 - -
High-pressure fuel line bracket retaining bolts 9 - 80
High-pressure fuel line union nuts A - -
Fuel rail supply tube union nuts A - -
Fuel crossover line union nuts A - -
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve retaining bolts 9 - 80
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Charging and
Controls - Component Location
Component Location
Item Description
1 High pressure fuel supply
2 Common fuel rail
3 Fuel pressure control valve
4 Exhaust camshaft
5 Injectors
6 Volume control valve
7 Fuel rail balance pipe
8 Fuel pressure sensor
9 High pressure fuel pump
Controls - Overview
OVERVIEW
The 3.0L V6 diesel engine is equipped with a HP (high pressure) common rail fuel injection system. With this fuel
injection process, a HP pump delivers a uniform level of pressure to the shared fuel lines (the common rails), which
serve all 6 fuel injectors. Pressure is controlled to the optimum level for smooth operation.
The common rail system supports a pre and pilot injection depending on engine operating conditions, which reduces
combustion noise levels, more commonly referred to as 'diesel knock'.
Fuel injection pressure is generated independently of engine speed and fuel injection events.
The fuel injection timing and volume are calculated by the ECM (engine control module), which then energizes the
appropriate piezo actuated injector. The common rail fuel injection system has the following features:
High fuel injection pressures of up to 2000 bar (29007 lbf/in2) for greater atomization of fuel (increasing
performance and lowering emissions).
Variable injection to optimize combustion in all engine operating conditions
Low tolerances and high precision throughout the life of the system.
The fuel system is divided into two sub systems:
LP (low pressure) system

HP system.
The LP system features the following components:
In-tank fuel pump

Fuel pressure regulator (integral to the fuel delivery module)
Fuel filter
Return pipes
Injector return pipes
Fuel coolers (engine and vehicle).
The LP system is regulated to 0.5 bar (7.25 lbf/in2).
The HP system features the following components:
HP pump
Fuel rails and diverter rail
HP fuel pipes
Injectors.
Controls - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
ENGINE STARTING
During starting, the fuel rail pressure must be at least 150 bar (2175 lbf/in2). Should the pressure be below this
figure, the injectors will not operate, resulting in the vehicle not starting.
ENGINE STOPPING
To stop the engine the ECM (engine control module) stops energizing the actuators in the fuel injectors, therefore, no
fuel is injected and the engine speed drops to zero.
Refer to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and
Operation).
HP FUEL PUMP
When the HP fuel pump is rotated, pressure is created when the volume control valve is open and the pressure
control valve is closed. Both valves are electronically controlled by the ECM to allow variable fuel delivery and
pressure control. When the ECM actuates the piezo actuators, the fuel rail pressure drop is off-set by additional fuel
being delivered to the fuel rails by the pressure control valve. The fuel pressure in the system is reduced within a
few seconds after the engine has stopped as the pressure control valve no longer has the holding current it requires,
and therefore opens. No residual pressure remains in the system and the fuel is returned to the LP fuel return line to
the fuel filter through the open pressure control valve.
LOW PRESSURE (LP) SYSTEM
LP Fuel Pump
The electric fuel pump is located inside the fuel tank. Fuel is pumped from the tank via the in-tank fuel pump, to the
HP pump via the fuel filter.
Refer to: Fuel Tank and Lines (310-01A Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation).
Fuel Filter
The fuel filter assembly is located in front of the fuel tank and is mounted on a bracket which is attached to the top
face of the transfer box chassis cross member.
Fuel returning from the HP pump passes through the fuel cooler before returning to the filter to maintain the fuel at
an optimum temperature. The returning fuel is re-circulated through the filter to help prevent waxing in cold
operating conditions. Fuel pressure and fuel delivery is maintained by the in-tank pump and regulator via the tank
fuel feed line.
The filter element has a capacity of 200cm3 (12.2in3). The filtration element has the capacity to filter particulate
matter larger than 5 microns.
The filter has an air bleed return to the fuel tank which returns excess air and fuel to the tank.
The fuel filter is also fitted with a water sensor to detect when moisture which has collected in the filter has reached
an unacceptable level.
Refer to: Fuel Tank and Lines (310-01A Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation).
Fuel Cooler
An air blast fuel cooler is located off the engine crossmember at the front of the engine oil pan. The fuel cooler has 2
connections; one is an inlet which allows heated fuel from the HP pump to be cooled, the second allows the cooled
fuel to be fed from the cooler into the supply pipe from the LP fuel pump in the fuel tank, via a 'Y' connector back to
the fuel filter.
HIGH PRESSURE (HP) SYSTEM
HP Fuel Pump
The HP pump is a 2 piston radial plunger pump. The pump has the ability to produce a maximum pressure of 2000
bar (29007 lbf/in²). The housing is cast from iron, the flange is cast from aluminum.
The HP pump is driven from the LH (left-hand) cylinder bank exhaust camshaft via a toothed belt. The drive from the
belt rotates a cam within the pump which operates a plunger within each pumping element. A procedure and special
tools are required for pump or belt replacement to time the pump.
The high-pressure pump comprises 2 high pressure pumping elements, a volume control valve, an internal transfer
pump and a fuel temperature sensor.
The fuel is delivered to the internal transfer pump via the external fuel filter and an electric fuel pump which is
located in the fuel tank.
The volume control valve is mounted on the high-pressure pump, and located in the feed port between the high
pressure pump elements and the internal transfer pump. The volume control valve is a variable position solenoid-
operated valve that is controlled by the ECM. The volume control valve determines the amount of fuel that is
delivered from the internal transfer pump to the HP pumping elements. When there is no signal to the volume
control valve, the valve is closed and there is no fuel delivery.
The fuel from the internal transfer pump is passed to the HP pumping elements at a constant pressure known as
transfer pressure. The transfer pressure is controlled by an internal pressure relief valve. Once the fuel enters each of
the HP pump elements the pressure rises rapidly, with each element providing a HP supply to one of the fuel rails.
The high pressure is controlled by the high pressure regulator valve and the fuel rail pressure sensor.
A controlled amount of fuel is allowed to leak-off from the internal transfer pump. This fuel is delivered to the pump
internal components to provide cooling and lubrication and is passed back the fuel filter via the LP feed line.
The pressure control valve is located in one of the fuel rails. The fuel pressure is monitored by a pressure sensor
located in the other fuel rail. The ECM controls the pressure control valve using the received signals from the pressure
sensor. Reducing the pressure in the fuel rails via the pressure control valve results in fuel returning from the fuel
rails to the LP fuel return to the fuel filter.
The fuel temperature sensor is located on the rear of the HP pump. It measures the fuel temperature in the low-
pressure side of the HP pump. The ECM continually monitors this signal to determine the fuel temperature to prevent
overheating of the fuel system. The ECM will also make fine adjustments to fuel injection quantity to adjust for fuel
temperature.
Fuel Rails
Item Description
1 LH fuel rail
2 Fuel pressure control valve
3 Fuel pressure sensor
4 RH (right-hand) fuel rail
5 HP fuel connection from HP pump
6 Fuel rail balance pipe
The fuel rails are steel fabrications and are similar in their construction. Two fuel rails are used with each rail
supplying high pressure fuel to 3 fuel injectors.
Each rail has 5 threaded connections which provide for the attachment of the high pressure fuel supply from the HP
pump, the balance pipe and connections for the 3 injectors supplied with fuel from that rail.
The fuel pressure in the rails is detected by a fuel pressure sensor which is located in the end of the RH rail. The LH
rail houses a pressure control valve. The ECM controls the pressure control valve using signals from the pressure
sensor.
The fuel rail pressure sensor is a piezo-resistive type sensor containing an actuating diaphragm. Deflection of the
diaphragm provides a proportional signal (output) voltage to the ECM, dependant on the fuel pressure within the fuel
rail.
Both rails are connected together with a balance pipe which ensures the pressure in both rails is equal, even though
each rail is supplied from a different pumping element in the HP pump.
Fuel Injectors

Item Description
1 Fuel return
2 O-ring seal
3 Piezo stack actuator
4 Hydraulic coupler
5 Control valve
6 Nozzle body
7 Copper sealing washer
8 Electrical connector
9 High pressure feed
10 Nozzle
Six fuel injectors are used in the fuel system. A piezo actuator in each injector is electronically controlled by the ECM
to operate the injector in response to engine speed and load conditions.
Two variants of fuel injector are installed on the 3.0 TDV6 engine, 155kW vehicles have a unique low flow fuel
injector installed. Injectors should not be swapped between 155kW and 188kW engines due to the injector nozzles
being different. Low flow fuel injector nozzles are not capable of sufficient fuel supply to the 188kW engine.
Each injector has an electrical connector which connects the injector to the engine harness. A fuel connection on the
top of the injector provides for the high pressure fuel inlet from the HP pump. A second fuel connection allows fuel
leakage within the injector to return to the HP pump.
Each injector is located in a machined hole in the cylinder head and is sealed in the cylinder head with a copper
sealing washer and an O-ring seal. The injector is retained in the cylinder head with a clamp plate and 2 bolts. If an
injector is removed or replaced, a new copper sealing washer and a clamp plate must be used when refitting the
injector.
The injector can operate up to 5 times during one combustion cycle depending on engine speed and load. The
injection sequence can occur as follows:
1. Pilot injection - occurs before the main injection and improves fuel and air mixing
2. Pre-injection - shortens the main injection's ignition delay and therefore reduces the generation of nitrous
oxides
3. Main injection - delivers the required engine torque
4. After injection - occurs after the Main injection and assists the re-burn of any remaining particulate matter
5. Post injection - helps manage the temperature of the exhaust gas for more effective exhaust-gas after-
treatment
6. Injection delay 0.4 ms.
Each injector is calibrated to the ECM and applicable the cylinder to which it is fitted. Therefore, if an injector is
removed it must be refitted to the cylinder from which it was removed. If a new injector is fitted, a calibration
routine using Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment must be performed to calibrate the injector unique code to
the ECM.
The operating voltage of the injector is between 110 and 163 volts depending on engine speed and load and care
must be taken when working in the vicinity of the injectors. The voltage increases linearly from 200 to 1200 bar.
Each injector has an electrical resistance value of between 150 - 250 kOhms.
CAUTION: Each injector operation is controlled by a charge and discharge cycle allowing energy to dissipate in,
and recover from the injector. Never disconnect the wiring connection when the engine is running. The injector can
remain open thus causing engine damage.
Controls
For a detailed description of the fuel charging and controls system and operation, refer to the relevant Description
and Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Fuel Charging and Controls (Description and Operation),

Fuel Charging and Controls (Description and Operation),
Fuel Charging and Controls (Description and Operation).
WARNING: Make sure that all suitable safety precautions are observed when carrying out any work on the fuel
system. Failure to observe this warning may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking
plugs to any open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
vehicle.

Visual Inspection
Low/contaminated fuel Fuses
Fuel supply/return line(s) Glow plug indicator
Fuel tank and filler pipe Inertia fuel shutoff switch
Fuel leak(s) Fuel pump module
Fuel filler cap Sensor(s)
Fuel filter Engine Control Module (ECM)
Push connect fittings Fuel volume control valve
Fuel rail Fuel pressure control valve
Fuel pump Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) sensor
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system Fuel temperature sensor
Fuel injector(s)
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system
Symptom Chart

Engine Inertia fuel shutoff Check that the inertia switch has not tripped
cranks, but switch - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
does not Low/contaminated the Restraints Control Module (RCM) for related DTCs and
start fuel refer to the relevant DTC index
Air leakage Check the fuel level and condition. Draw off approximately 1 ltr
Low-pressure fuel (2.11 pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to
system fault make sure there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or
Fuel pump module other liquid in the fuel
(lift pump) fault Check the intake air system for leaks
Blocked fuel filter Check the lift pump operation
Fuel volume regulator Check the low-pressure fuel system for leaks/damage
blocked/contaminated Check the fuel filter
Fuel pressure control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
valve Engine Control Module (ECM) for related DTCs and refer to the
blocked/contaminated relevant DTC index
Fuel pump fault Check the fuel pump
Crankshaft position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CKP sensor
(CKP) sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Difficult to Glow plug system Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the glow plug
start fault (very cold circuits for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
conditions) circuit, high resistance
Low/contaminated Check the fuel level/condition. Draw off approximately 1 ltr (2.11
fuel pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to make sure
Air leakage there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or other liquid in
Fuel pump module the fuel
(lift pump) fault Check the intake air system for leaks
Low-pressure fuel Check the lift pump operation
system fault Check the low-pressure fuel system for leaks/damage
Blocked fuel filter Check the fuel filter
Fuel volume control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Fuel pressure control Check the EGR system
valve
blocked/contaminated
Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR)
valve(s) fault
Rough idle Intake air system Check the fuel level/condition. Draw off approximately 1 ltr (2.11
fault pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to make sure
Low/contaminated there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or other liquid in
fuel the fuel
Low-pressure fuel Check the low-pressure fuel system for leaks/damage
system fault Check the fuel filter
Blocked fuel filter Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Fuel volume control Engine Control Module (ECM) for related DTCs and refer to the
valve relevant DTC index
blocked/contaminated Check the EGR system
valve
Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR)
valve(s) fault
Lack of Intake air system Check the intake air system for leakage or restriction
power when fault Check for a blockage/restriction in the exhaust system, install new
accelerating Restricted exhaust components as necessary
system Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Low fuel pressure Engine Control Module (ECM) for related DTCs and refer to the
Exhaust Gas relevant DTC index
Recirculation (EGR) Check the EGR system
valve(s) fault Check turbocharger actuator
Turbocharger
actuator fault
Engine Air leakage Check the intake air system for leaks
stops/stalls Low/contaminated Check the fuel level/condition. Draw off approximately 1 ltr (2.11
fuel pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to make sure
Low-pressure fuel there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or other liquid in
system fault the fuel
High pressure fuel Check the fuel system for leaks/damage
leak Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Fuel volume control Engine Control Module (ECM) for related DTCs and refer to the
blocked/contaminated Check the EGR system
valve
Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR)
valve fault
Engine Low/contaminated Check the fuel level/condition. Draw off approximately 1 ltr (2.11
judders fuel pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to make sure
Air ingress there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or other liquid in
Low-pressure fuel the fuel
system fault Check the intake air system for leaks
Fuel metering valve Check the low-pressure fuel system for leaks/damage
blocked/contaminated Check the high pressure fuel system for leaks
Fuel volume control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Fuel pressure control Check the fuel pump
valve
High pressure fuel
leak
Fuel pump fault
Excessive Low-pressure fuel Check the low-pressure fuel system for leaks/damage
fuel system fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
consumption Fuel volume control Engine Control Module (ECM) for related DTCs and refer to the
blocked/contaminated Check the fuel temperature sensor, fuel pump, etc for leaks
Fuel pressure control Check the EGR system
valve
Fuel temperature
sensor leak
High pressure fuel
leak
Injector(s) fault
Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR)
valve(s) fault
DTC Index
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Injection
Component Cleaning
General Procedures
WARNINGS:
Do not carry out any repairs to the fuel system with the engine running. The fuel pressure within the system
can be as high as 1700 bar (24,656 lb-sq-in). Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related
components. Highly flammable vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek immediate medical
attention.
Place the vehicle in a well ventilated, quarantined area and arrange ' No Smoking/Petrol Fumes' signs about the
vehicle.
Wait at least 30 seconds after the engine stops before commencing any repair to the high-pressure fuel
injection system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Wash hands thoroughly after fuel handling, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation
develop, seek medical attention.
Do not carry or operate cellular phones when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly
flammable vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
CAUTIONS:
Before using the cleaning fluid, protect all electrical components and connectors with lint-free non-flocking
material.
Make sure that all parts removed from the vehicle are placed on the lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that any protective clothing worn is clean and made from lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that clean non-plated tools are used. Clean tools using a new brush that will not lose its bristles and
fresh cleaning fluid, prior to starting work on the vehicle.
Use a steel topped workbench and cover it with clean, lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible.
Foreign matter from work on clutches, brakes or from machining or welding operations can contaminate the fuel
system and may result in later malfunction.
NOTE: Pneumatic vacuum gun
1. Using a new brush that will not lose its bristles, brush cleaning
fluid onto the components being removed and onto the
surrounding area.
2. Using a pneumatic vacuum gun, remove all traces of cleaning

fluid and foreign material.
3. Dispose of any used cleaning fluid and the brush after

completing the repair.
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Injection Pump
Special Tool(s)
303-1145/2
Remover, Camshaft Rear Pulley Bolt
310-138A
Holding Tool, Fuel Pump Pulley
310-139A
Holding Tool, Fuel Pump Pulley
JLR-303-1523
Remover/Installer, Camshaft Rear Pulley
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).
2. Refer to: Engine Cover - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (501-05 Interior

Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).

4. Refer to: Fuel Injection Component Cleaning (303-04 Fuel
Charging and Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, General Procedures).
5. Refer to: Rear End Accessory Drive (READ) (303-05 Accessory

6. Refer to: Crankcase Vent Oil Separator (303-08 Engine

Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

fuel.

fuel.
9.
10. CAUTIONS:

correct.
11.
12. CAUTIONS:
13. CAUTIONS:

fuel.
correct.

fuel.

correct.
16. CAUTIONS:
Discard the components.
17. NOTE: Fuel injection pump pulley shown

removed for clarity.

19.
20.
21. Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1523

Torque: 10 Nm
22. Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1523
23. Remove the rear camshaft pulley retaining bolt.
Special Tool(s): 303-1145/2
25.
26.
27.
28.

30. Special Tool(s): 310-139A
Installation

Torque: 50 Nm
2. Torque: 3 Nm
3.
4. Torque: 23 Nm
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6. CAUTIONS:
Apply loctite 242 (ESK-M4G247-A1) to the
new camshaft pulley bolt.
Install the bolt finger tight.
7. Torque: 10 Nm
8.
9. CAUTION: Make sure the torque wrench setting

procedure is followed correctly. Failure to follow this
Calculate the setting for the torque wrench:

Stage 1: Multiply the required torque by the
effective length of the torque wrench (1).
Stage 2: Add the effective length of the
special tool (2) to the effective length of the
torque wrench.
Stage 3: Divide the total of stage 1 by the
total of stage 2.
Stage 4: Set the torque wrench to the figure
arrived at in stage 3.
10. CAUTION: Make sure the torque wrench

setting procedure is followed correctly. Failure to
vehicle.
Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:80°
12. Torque: 10 Nm
13. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm

Torque: 23 Nm
16. CAUTIONS:
Tighten the fuel supply line unions finger

tight.
Make sure that a new component is installed.

17. CAUTIONS:

tight.

correct.
18. CAUTIONS:

tight.

correct.
19. CAUTIONS:

tight.
20. CAUTIONS:

tight.
Make sure that new components are installed.

21. Torque: 10 Nm
22. CAUTIONS:

tight.

correct.
23. Tighten the high-pressure fuel lines union to

15Nm.

correct.
Tighten the high-pressure fuel lines union to
15Nm.

correct.

15Nm.

15Nm.

15Nm.

correct.
15Nm.
29. Tighten the high-pressure fuel line union to 35Nm.

correct.
Tighten the high-pressure fuel line union to 35Nm.

correct.


correct.
35. Torque: 10 Nm
36.
37.
38. Refer to: Crankcase Vent Oil Separator (303-08 Engine

Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
39. Refer to: Rear End Accessory Drive (READ) (303-05 Accessory
41. Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).
42.
43. NOTES:
The gauge component of the special tool must
be removed before installing to the schroder valve.
Using a suitable container, place the end of

the special tool into it to collect any fluid.
Install the pipe from special tool 310-116 to the

schroder valve.
44.
1. NOTE: A minimum of 12 litres of fuel in the fuel

tank is required for the following Steps.
Make sure the fuel tank has a sufficiant amount of fuel

to carry out the following Steps.
2. NOTES:
Do not start the vehicle.
Allow 15 seconds between each ignition cycle

(between each ignition ON and ignition OFF) to allow
the fuel tank pump to pump fuel to the fuel injection
pump correctly.
Turn the ignition on and off four times.

3. Crank the engine until it starts.
4. Remove the special tool and suitable container.
5. Install the schroder valve cap.
6. Refer to: Engine Cover - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (501-05
Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
7. Road test the vehicle for at least 10 miles (16 Km).
8. Check the diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)s using the
approved diagnostic tool. Clear or repair as necessary.
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Injectors LH
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
310-213
Fuel Injector Removal Adapter
JLR-310-237
Remover, Fuel Injector
Removal
WARNING: Diesel fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is
therefore essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install new
blanking plugs to any open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to
the fuel injection system.
1. Refer to: Fuel Injection Component Cleaning (303-04, General

Procedures).
2. Disconnect the battery earth lead.
3. Refer to: Engine Cover - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (501-05, Removal

and Installation).


coolant.
6.
7.
8. CAUTIONS:

NOTE: Make sure that the fuel injector return

line has a maximum of 8 uses.
9.
10. CAUTIONS:

faces and connections are clean.
Remove and discard the high-pressure fuel

supply lines.
11.
13.
16.
18. Repeat the above procedure for the remaining injectors.
Installation

open fuel injector ports are clean and free of
foreign material and lubricant prior to installing the
fuel injector.
2. CAUTIONS:
Only tighten the unions finger-tight at this

stage.
3. Torque: 10 Nm
4. NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts evenly and

progressively.
Torque: 9 Nm
5.
Stage 1:Tighten the high-pressure fuel
supply line unions at the fuel rail to 15Nm.
Stage 2: Tighten the high-pressure fuel
supply line unions at the injector to 15Nm.
6.
7. NOTE: Make sure that the fuel injector return
8.
9.
10. Torque: 10 Nm
and Installation).
13. Connect the battery earth lead.
14. If a new unit is installed, configure using the approved

diagnostic tool.
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Injectors RH
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
310-213
Fuel Injector Removal Adapter
JLR-310-237
Remover, Fuel Injector
Removal
WARNING: Diesel fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is
therefore essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install new
blanking plugs to any open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to
the fuel injection system.

Procedures).
2. Disconnect the battery earth lead.

and Installation).


coolant.
6.
7.
8. CAUTIONS:

NOTE: Make sure that the fuel injector return

9.
10. CAUTIONS:

faces and connections are clean.
Remove and discard the high-pressure fuel

supply lines.
11.
12. CAUTION: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.




18. Repeat the above procedure for the remaining injectors.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the area around the open fuel
injector ports are clean and free of foreign material
and lubricant prior to installing the fuel injector.
2. CAUTIONS:
Only tighten the unions finger-tight at this

stage.
3. Torque: 10 Nm
4. NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts evenly and

progressively.
Torque: 9 Nm
5.
6.
7. NOTE: Make sure that the fuel injector return

8.
9.
10. Torque: 10 Nm
and Installation).
13. Connect the battery earth lead.

diagnostic tool.
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Rail LH
Removal

stands.

4. Refer to: Fuel Injection Component Cleaning (303-04A Fuel

Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, General Procedures).
5.
7.
8.
9. CAUTIONS:

10. CAUTIONS:

11. CAUTIONS:

12. CAUTIONS:

13.

fuel.

fuel.
16.

fuel.

fuel.
19.
20.
21.

fuel.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

tight.
2.
3.
4.
5.

at this stage.
7. CAUTIONS:

tight.

at this stage.
9. Torque: 10 Nm
10. Torque: 24 Nm
11. CAUTION: Tighten the fuel supply line unions

finger tight.
finger tight.
13.
14. CAUTIONS:

tight.

this stage.
16.

15Nm.

15Nm.

15Nm.
15Nm.

15Nm.
22.
23. Tighten the high-pressure fuel line union to 30 Nm.


28. Torque: 10 Nm
29. Torque: 10 Nm
30. Torque: 10 Nm
31.
33.

Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Rail RH
Removal
2.

Procedures).
5.
6.
7. CAUTIONS:

8. CAUTIONS:

9. CAUTIONS:


fuel.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15. CAUTIONS:

fuel.
fuel.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23. CAUTIONS:
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

tight.
2. CAUTION: Only tighten the unions finger-

tight at this stage.
this stage.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8. CAUTIONS:

tight.

at this stage.
at this stage.
11.
12. Torque: 24 Nm
13. CAUTIONS:

tight.

finger tight.
15. CAUTIONS:

tight.

this stage.
17.
15Nm.

15Nm.

15Nm.
15Nm.
22.

26.
27. Torque: 10 Nm
28. Torque: 10 Nm
29.
31.

Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Intake Air Shutoff
Throttle
Removal

2. Torque: 10 Nm
3.
4.
5.
6.
7. Torque: 10 Nm
8. Refer to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Outlet Tube LH

(303-08 Engine Emission Control - 3.0L V6 - TdV6, Removal
and Installation).
9. Refer to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Outlet Tube

RH (303-08 Engine Emission Control - 3.0L V6 - TdV6, Removal
and Installation).
10.
11.
12.

Installation

diagnostic tool.
Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Exhaust manifold threaded stud 13 10 -
Exhaust manifold retaining nuts 24 18 -
Turbocharger oil return tube to turbocharger retaining bolt 9 - 80
Turbocharger oil return tube to engine retaining bolt 9 - 80
Turbocharger bracket retaining bolts 23 17 -
Turbocharger to exhaust manifold retaining nuts 24 18 -
Exhaust manifold heatshield retaining bolt 11 8 -
Exhaust heatshield retaining bolt 9 - 80
Exhaust heatshield retaining nut 10 - 7
Turbocharger oil supply tube retaining bolt 9 - 80
Turbocharger oil supply tube union bolt 30 22 -
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve retaining bolts 9 - 80
EGR valve tube to exhaust manifold retaining bolts 9 - 80
Turbocharger - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item Description
1 Secondary turbocharger turbine shut-off valve
2 Turbocharger oil supply
3 Primary turbocharger (variable vane)
4 Primary turbocharger control module (variable vane actuator)
5 Charge air tube
6 Turbocharger oil drain
7 Secondary turbocharger re-circulation valve and shut-off valve
8 Secondary turbocharger (fixed vane)
Turbocharger - Overview
INTRODUCTION
The 3.0L V6 diesel engine uses 2 turbochargers; a fixed vane type (secondary) and a variable vane (primary) type.
The fixed vane turbocharger is fitted to the RH (right-hand) cylinder bank and the variable vane turbocharger is
fitted to the LH (left-hand) cylinder bank.
Both turbochargers are used in a parallel sequential turbocharging system which enables the engine to achieve quick
throttle response at low engine speeds and efficient use of exhaust gas energy at high engine speeds.
The variable vane turbocharger has an ECM (engine control module) controlled electronic rotary actuator. The rotary
actuator adjusts the turbine vanes to optimize the exhaust gas flow and velocity onto the turbine wheel to maintain
the required boost pressure.
The parallel sequential turbocharging system comprises the two turbochargers and the ECM. The primary variable
nozzle turbine operates through the entire engine speed range but is at its most efficient at engine speeds of up to
2800 rpm. At engine speeds above 2800 rpm under load, the fixed vane secondary turbine comes into operation,
with both of the turbochargers now running in a parallel bi-turbo mode.
Turbocharger - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
TURBOCHARGERS
The turbine wheel of the turbocharger uses the engine's exhaust gasses to drive the compressor wheel. The
compressor wheel draws in fresh air which is supplied to the engine cylinders in a compressed form.
The primary variable vane turbocharger allows the optimum inlet geometry (inlet area and flow angle) to be used
over a wide range of engine operating conditions. This allows a rapid speed of response and higher boost pressures
at low engine speeds. The variable vane angle determines both the inlet area as well as the flow angle, as controlled
by the ECM (engine control module). The variable vanes allow efficient use of the exhaust gas energy which in turn
improves turbocharger and engine efficiency.
Principles of Variable Vane Operation
Item Description
A Low engine speed
B Intermediate engine speed
C High engine speed
1 ECM
2 Electronic rotary actuator
3 Turbine housing
4 Variable vanes
5 Compressor wheel
The variable vanes in the primary turbocharger are controlled by the ECM. The ECM controls a rotary electronic
actuator attached to the primary turbocharger which is used to adjust the pitch angle of the vanes by rotating the
turbine housing. The electronic rotary actuator also provides the ECM with a feedback signal to determine the pitch
angle of the vanes.
The variable vanes in the primary turbocharger improve the exhaust gas power transfer to the turbine wheel which in
turn drives the compressor wheel. At low engine speeds this greatly assists the increase in turbocharger boost
pressure.
As engine speed, and therefore the exhaust gas velocity, increases, the vanes are opened. The amount of opening is
determined by the ECM to ensure that the power transfer from the turbine wheel to the compressor wheel is within
the turbocharger speed and boost pressure requirements.
At high engine speed and exhaust gas flow, the ECM increases the vane opening to avoid overspeed of the turbines
and provide a smooth high speed operation. At this point the dual mode boosting system comes into affect by
utilizing the secondary (fixed vane) turbocharger.
The fixed vane turbocharger incorporates an outlet temperature senor, which is located adjacent the oxygen sensor in
the close coupled catalytic converter and, an outlet pressure sensor which receives inputs from the APP (accelerator
pedal position) and ECM.
Refer to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation).
Dual Mode Boosting
The dual mode boosting system comprises two turbochargers and software within the ECM. The two turbochargers
can operate in two modes; mono turbocharger operation or bi-turbocharger operation.
Mono Turbocharger Schematic Diagram
Item Description
1 Fixed vane turbine
2 Turbine shut-off valve
3 DPF (diesel particulate filter)
4 Flexible center resonators
5 Catalytic converter
6 Variable vane turbocharger
7 Engine
8 Throttle
9 Air filter
10 MAF (mass air flow) meter
11 Charge air cooler
12 Compressor shut-off valve
13 Re-circulation valve
Fresh air is drawn through the air filter and the MAF meter to the primary turbocharger compressor. The compressed
air is then passed through the charge air cooler and into the engine.
The turbine shut-off valve on the secondary turbocharger is closed and therefore exhaust gasses are unable to
operate the secondary turbocharger turbine. In this condition all turbocharging boost pressure is produced by the
primary turbocharger.
Bi-Turbocharger Switching Schematic Diagram
Item Description
3 DPF
5 Catalytic Converter
7 Engine
8 Throttle
9 Air filter
10 MAF meter
When the engine operating parameters approach the limits (approximately 2800 rpm under load) of the primary
turbocharger, dual mode boosting control software within the ECM begins the switch to parallel bi-turbocharger
operation. The secondary turbocharger is brought into operation by the opening of the turbine shut-off valve which
allows exhaust gasses to flow through the turbine.
Initially, the secondary turbocharger does not produce a boost pressure to equal that of the primary turbocharger.
Therefore, the initial boost pressure from the secondary turbocharger is fed via the re-circulation valve into the clean
air inlet for the primary turbocharger. As the secondary turbocharger boost pressure output increases, the re-
circulation valve is then closed and the compressor shut-off valve opened to increase the boost pressure from the
secondary turbocharger which is directed into the charge air cooler.
Bi-Turbocharger Schematic Diagram
Item Description
3 DPF
5 Catalytic Converter
7 Engine
8 Throttle
9 Air filter
10 MAF meter
When the secondary turbocharger has reached the required operating parameters, the re-circulation valve is closed
and the compressor shut-off valve is opened. The ECM will maintain the engine operating in bi-turbocharger
operation with both primary and secondary turbochargers contributing to the air charge induction. When the dual
mode boosting software determines that the engine operating parameters no longer require the use of dual mode
boosting, the system switches back to mono turbocharger operation.
If the engine idles for more than 3 minutes, the secondary turbocharger is actuated to ensure correct lubrication. This
is achieved by pressurizing the turbine shaft bearing cavities through a pipe, which is connected to the air intake
system and periodically opening the turbine shut-off valve to operate the turbocharger.
CAUTION: Ensure both ends of the pipe are securely connected to the secondary turbo and the air intake
system to prevent damage to the turbo components.
Turbine and Compressor Shut-off Valve Control
The secondary turbocharger turbine shut-off valve and compressor shut-off valve are controlled by the ECM through
a vacuum system. The secondary turbo turbine shut-off valve also incorporates a position sensor.
Secondary Turbocharger Turbine Shut-off Valve Vacuum Control
Item Description
1 Secondary turbine shut-off solenoid valve
2 Vacuum reservoir
3 Vacuum pump
4 Secondary turbine shut-off valve
If vacuum is lost to the shut-off valve it will default to the closed position. The position sensor will inform the ECM,
which will initiate mono-turbo mode, restricted performance and record DTC (diagnostic trouble code).
Compressor Shut-off Valve Vacuum Control
Item Description
1 Compressor shut-off valve solenoid valve
2 Vacuum reservoir
3 Vacuum pump
If the system develops a fault, for example an air leak, the compressor shut-off valve will default to the closed
position. In the default position, mono-turbo operation and restricted engine torque is initiated.
NOTE: When fault finding the vacuum system, always check for trapped/split/disconnected pipework. Any
vacuum fault will cause the engine to default to limited torque mode.
Each turbocharger consists of two turbo elements, a turbine wheel and compressor wheel, enclosed separately in
cast housings and mounted on a common shaft, which rotates in two semi-floating bearings.
VARIABLE VANE TURBOCHARGER (PRIMARY)

The variable vane turbocharger is attached to the LH (left-hand) exhaust manifold and secured to 3 studs on a flange
on the manifold with nuts. On production, no gasket is used to seal the joint between turbocharger and the manifold.
In-service vehicles will require a service gasket to be fitted if the joint between the turbocharger and the manifold is
disturbed.
A second flange on the turbocharger has 3 integral studs and provides for the attachment of the LH catalytic
converter inlet pipe. Three nuts secure the inlet pipe to the flange studs and a gasket seals the joint between the
components.
The compressor end of the turbocharger has two hose connections. The central connection provides a clean air supply
from the air filter to the compressor. The second connection on the outside of the housing provides for a pipe
connection from the turbocharger to the charge air cooler
The turbocharger is a conventional design with both the turbine wheel and the compressor wheel sharing a common
shaft which is supported on bearings. The turbocharger receives an engine oil feed via a pipe from the cylinder block.
The pipe supplies both turbochargers with an oil supply for lubrication purposes. An oil drain pipe from the
turbocharger allows oil to drain from the turbocharger into the cylinder block.
An integral bracket houses the variable vane electronic rotary actuator. The rotary actuator is connected to an
eccentric lever which moves the turbine housing to adjust the position of the vanes. When the rotary actuator
operates a boss is rotated, which in turn moves the lever and changes rotary motion into linear motion. The lever is
connected to the outside of the turbine housing and the linear motion is converted back to rotary motion of the
housing. Operation of the electronic rotary actuator is controlled by the ECM.
FIXED VANE TURBOCHARGER (SECONDARY)
The fixed vane turbocharger is attached to the RH (right-hand) exhaust manifold and is secured to 3 studs on a
flange on the manifold with nuts. On production, no gasket is used to seal the joint between turbocharger and the
manifold. In-service vehicles will require a service gasket to be fitted if the joint between the turbocharger and the
manifold is disturbed.
A second flange on the turbocharger has 2 integral studs and provides for the attachment of the RH exhaust system
downpipe. Two nuts secure the downpipe to the flange studs and a gasket seals the joint between the downpipe and
the turbocharger.
The compressor end of the turbocharger has two hose connections; the central connection provides the clean air
supply from the air filter. The second connection on the outside of the turbocharger housing allows the connection
from the turbocharger to the charge air cooler.
Attached to the rear of the turbocharger is a turbine shut-off valve. The valve is vacuum operated and electronically
controlled by the ECM. The valve is closed when the system is operating in mono-turbocharger mode, diverting
exhaust gasses from the RH exhaust manifold, via the exhaust cross-over duct to the LH exhaust manifold. When bi-
turbocharger operation is required, the ECM electronically operates the valve allow vacuum to open the shut-off valve
allowing exhaust gasses from the RH exhaust manifold to drive the turbine of the fixed vane turbocharger.
Turbocharger
For a detailed description of the fuel charging and controls system and operation, refer to the relevant Description
and Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger -
TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Turbocharger (Description and Operation),

Turbocharger (Description and Operation),
Turbocharger (Description and Operation).
WARNING: The following tests may involve working in close proximity to hot components. Make sure adequate
protection is used. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
the donor vehicle.

Visual Inspection
Intake air system Circuit(s)
Hose(s) / hose connections Engine Control Module (ECM)
Turbochargers Turbocharger actuators
General engine condition Electrical connections and harnesses
Symptom Chart

Poor Low/contaminated Check the fuel level and condition. Draw off approximately 1 ltr
performance fuel (2.11 pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to make
(off-boost) Restricted intake sure there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or other
air system liquid in the fuel
General engine Check the intake air system for restriction
condition Check the engine condition, compressions, etc, if there are
Engine Control indications of a mechanical fault
Module (ECM) Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
failure Engine Control Module (ECM) for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
No boost Electrical Check the electrical connections and harnesses

connections and Check the intake air system for restriction/leakage
harnesses Check the turbocharger actuators and circuits
Restricted intake Check the turbochargers for wear. Disconnect the turbocharger
air system intake and outlet pipework and turn the turbochargers by hand.
Charge air cooler Any roughness indicates a fault. Check any up and down
restricted/leaking movement in the turbocharger shafts. Excessive movement
Turbocharger indicates a fault. If in doubt, compare the suspect unit with a new
actuator failure(s) turbocharger
Turbocharger Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
failure(s) Engine Control Module (ECM) for related DTCs and refer to the
Engine Control relevant DTC index
Module (ECM)
failure
No Turbocharger Disconnect the turbocharger intake and outlet pipework and turn
boost/excessive failure(s) the turbochargers by hand. Any roughness indicates a fault. Check
noise any up and down movement in the turbocharger shafts. Excessive
movement indicates a fault. If in doubt, compare the suspect unit
with a new turbocharger
DTC Index
Turbocharger LH
Removal
NOTES:
2. CAUTION: Only tighten the bolts finger tight

at this stage.
3. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.

Torque: 9 Nm
4. CAUTIONS:


new blanking caps.
Torque: 9 Nm
5. Refer to: Body - Diesel (502-02, Removal and Installation).
6. NOTE: The heatshield consists of 3 parts.
Torque: 9 Nm
Torque: 9 Nm
8. Torque: 9 Nm
Torque: 30 Nm
10.
11. Torque: 32 Nm
12.

installed.
CAUTIONS:

Discard the nuts.

new blanking caps.
Install a new turbocharger to exhaust

manifold gasket every time the turbocharger is
removed.
NOTES:
Remove and discard the gasket.
Torque: 24 Nm
Installation
1. To install reverse the removal procedure.

Turbocharger RH
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Exhaust System (309-00 Exhaust System - 3.0L V6 -

2. CAUTION: Only tighten the bolts finger tight

at this stage.

similar.
Torque: 9 Nm

similar.
NOTES:
Install new gaskets.
Torque: 9 Nm
5. Refer to: Body - 2.7L V6 - TdV6/3.0L V6 - TdV6 (502-02 Full

Frame and Body Mounting, Removal and Installation).

similar.
NOTE: The heatshield consists of 3 parts.
Torque: 9 Nm
7. Torque: 9 Nm
8.
9. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
10. Torque: 10 Nm
11. Torque: 10 Nm
12. Torque: 10 Nm

coolant.
Torque: 10 Nm
14. Torque: 11 Nm
15.
16.
17. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.

Make sure that new sealing washers are

installed.
Torque: 30 Nm

19.
20. Torque: 32 Nm

installed.
CAUTIONS:
Discard the nuts.

new blanking caps.

Install a new turbocharger to exhaust

manifold gasket every time the turbocharger is
removed.
NOTE: Remove and discard the gasket.
Torque: 24 Nm
Installation
2. If a new unit is installed, configure the fixed vane turbocharger

actuator using the approved diagnostic tool.
Turbocharger Bypass Valve
Removal

stands.
2.
3. Torque: 5 Nm
4.
5.
6. Torque: 5 Nm
7. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fixed
Vane Turbocharger Actuator
Removal

stands.
4.
5.
6.
8.
9.
10. CAUTIONS:
Remove the Torx screws evenly and

progressively.
Make sure component mating faces are not

damaged during removal.
Using a suitable 130mm T30 Torx socket, remove

the retaining bolts.
11. NOTES:
Make a note of the orientation of the gasket

tang.
Remove and discard the gasket using the

gasket tang.
12. NOTES:
Remove and discard the gasket.
Turbocharger shown removed for clarity.
Installation

material.
NOTES:
Make sure that the gasket tang is installed in

the correct orientation as noted in the removal
step.

material.
NOTES:
Apply a small amount of grease in the areas

indicated to allow the gasket to remain in the
position for installation.
3. CAUTIONS:

tightening.
Tighten the Torx screws evenly and

progressively.
Using a suitable 130mm T30 Torx socket, Install

the retaining bolts.
4. Torque: 9 Nm
5.
6. Torque: 9 Nm
7. Torque: 10 Nm
8.
9.

12. If a new fixed vane turbocharger actuator is installed, carry out
the reset procedure for the fixed vane turbocharger actuator
using approved diagnostic tool.
This section contains no data
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol -
WARNINGS:
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related
components. Highly flammable vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may
Before any work is carried out on the fuel system, ground the vehicle to earth and maintain the ground
connection until the work is complete.
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing components, make sure the area around the joint faces and
connections are clean. Plug open connections to prevent contamination.
NOTE: Tighten the fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line unions and fuel rail crossover pipe unions as it is
instructed in service manual.
lb-
Description Nm lb-ft in
Ignition coil-on-plugs retaining bolts 7 - 62
Spark plugs 20 15 -
Fuel rail retaining bolt Stage 1 - 20 Stage 2 - Stage 1 - 15 Stage 2 - -
30 22
Fuel rail crossover pipe unions 21 15 -
Fuel rail crossover pipe retaining bolts 8 - 71
Fuel pressure regulator 33 24 -
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line unions 21 15 -
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line M8 bolt 25 18 -
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line M6 bolt 11 8 -
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fue

L320 Range Rover Sport - 2012 WorkShop 6052pág / Manual de Taller y Servicio

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

L320 Range Rover Sport - 2012 WorkShop 6052pág / Manual de Taller y Servicio

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Workshop Service Manual for Range Rover Sport L320 2013 Sec.

Important Safety Instructions

Warnings, Cautions and Notes in This Manual

Trustmark Authoring Standards (TAS) Removal and Installation Procedures

NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

Colors used in the graphic are as follows:

Blue - Indicates the target item, item to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled

There may be multiple steps assigned to one illustration.

Special Tools and Torque Figure(s)

Notes, Cautions and Warnings

How to use This Manual

Workshop Manual Organization

Section 1 - General Information.

Important Safety Instructions

Warnings, Cautions and Notes which appear in this manual

Warnings, Cautions and Notes have the following meanings:

Note: Gives helpful information.

Fault Diagnostic Equipment

This manual is produced as a reference source to supplement T4.

Features of the equipment include:

a. Fully upgradeable support for the technician

b. Structured diagnostics to accommodate all skill levels

c. Direct print-out of screen information and test results

Testing the vehicle

Repairs and Replacement Parts

When working on a vehicle in the workshop always make sure that:

Towing the Vehicle

General Installation Instructions

Blank off openings exposed by component removal.

WARNING: Suitable eye protection must be worn.

General inspection of components

All components should be inspected for wear or damage before reassembling.

Joints and Joint Faces

Do not allow sealant to enter tapped holes or oilways.

Always install new roll pins of the correct size.

Woodruff keys may be reused provided there is no indication of wear or distortion.

Remove any burrs from edges of keyways using a fine file.

Check that threads are undamaged.

Bolt and Nut Identification

Encapsulated ('Patched') bolts and screws

Self-locking bolts and screws

Trilobular bolts should not be used as a substitute for patched bolts.

Ball and Roller Bearings

Brake Pads and Linings

WARNING: Do not intermix brake fluid of different specifications.

Pipes and Hoses

WARNING: Suitable eye protection must be worn.

Fuel system hoses

Fuel system hose clips

Cooling system hoses

Hose orientation and connection

High voltage circuits

Vehicles installed with Bi-Xenon headlamp bulbs

Safety goggles and gloves must be worn.

Connectors and harnesses

Having confirmed that a component is faulty, carry out the following:

Switch off the ignition and disconnect the battery.

Fuel Handling Precautions

Make sure that suitable warning signs are exhibited.

Fuel tank repairs

Never use a seal which has been improperly stored or handled.

Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) Precautions

Steering wheel airbag, rotary coupler.

Making the system safe